JP2020093017A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first transition mode execution means for executing a first transition mode for making a transition of first state transition means between a ball entry disable state and a ball entry enable state when it is determined that first predetermined information satisfies a first condition; second transition mode execution means for executing a second transition mode for making a transition of second state transition means between a ball entry disable state and a ball entry enable state when it is determined that second predetermined information satisfies a second condition; and third transition mode execution means for executing a third transition mode for making a transition of third state transition means between a ball entry disable state and a ball entry enable state when game balls enter fourth ball entry means. The first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting time required from start to end of the first transition mode longer than time obtained by adding time required from start to end of the second transition mode and time required from start to end of the third transition mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 714

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the structure, control, Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as the detection and suppression of illegal acts by the player and illegal modifications to the gaming machine.

JP, 2011-172988, A

In the gaming machine as described above, for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a healthier game, etc. Improvement of technology is desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes.

[Mode] (This mode is mainly based on the following thirteenth embodiment)
First ball entering means into which game balls can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
First determination means for performing a first determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition,
A second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means capable of transitioning to and from a state,
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state First transition mode executing means for executing,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means,
Second determination means for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entering means into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means capable of transitioning to and from a state,
A second transition mode for transitioning the second state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition. Second transition mode executing means for executing;
A fourth ball entering means capable of entering the game ball entered in the third ball entering means,
Fifth entering means for allowing game balls to enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means capable of transitioning to and from the state,
A third transition mode for executing a third transition mode for transitioning the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state when a game ball enters the fourth entering means. Transition mode execution means,
A payout means for paying out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode is
It is provided with a unit that can be set to a time longer than a total time of a time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and a time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in the first embodiment α. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing explaining a V winning mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for a 2nd starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table (electric winning/discarding lottery winning/disallowing table) used when performing an electric auditors product opening lottery. It is a time chart explaining a case where a big hit is won in a hit lottery triggered by the entrance of a game ball into the first starting opening as Case 1. It is a time chart explaining a case where a small hit is won in a hit lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening as Case 2. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a type determination gate. It is a flow chart which shows a ball winning process for a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for clune. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a specific process execution determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing scenario setting processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart showing a V winning process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing a standby period effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an opening period effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing period production setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first chance effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing a second chance effect setting process during non-storage. It is a flow chart which shows V winning effect setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a second chance effect setting process at the time of V non-winning. It is a flowchart showing an ending period effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in the first embodiment β. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing explaining a V winning mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for a 2nd starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table (electric winning/discarding lottery winning/disallowing table) used when performing an electric auditors product opening lottery. It is a time chart explaining a case where a big hit is won in a hit lottery triggered by the entrance of a game ball into the first starting opening as Case 1. It is a time chart explaining a case where a small hit is won in a hit lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening as Case 2. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a type determination gate. It is a flow chart which shows a ball winning process for a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for clune. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a specific process execution determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing scenario setting processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the opening/closing scenario in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart showing a V winning process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing a standby period effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an opening period effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing period production setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first chance effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing a second chance effect setting process during non-storage. It is a flow chart which shows V winning effect setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a second chance effect setting process at the time of V non-winning. It is a flowchart showing an ending period effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for a 2nd starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table (electric winning/discarding lottery winning/disallowing table) used when performing an electric auditors product opening lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in a game machine. It is a time chart explaining a special bonus process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the change start processing for the 1st starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting opening reservation information shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows the judgment processing for the 1st starting mouth. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation time for the 1st starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows the change start processing for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information shift processing for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows the judgment processing for the 2nd starting mouth. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation time for a 2nd starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows low probability time variation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows highly accurate high frequency time variation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows highly accurate low frequency time variation time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing scenario setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power combination opening/closing process. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a sound emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a state storage process. It is a flowchart which shows a display mode switching process. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for special 1 game times production. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of the special 1 production pattern for the main display territory. It is the flowchart which shows the special game play production execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time measuring process for special features. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for special 2 game time production. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of the special 2 production pattern for the main display territory. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting process of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of a special bonus. It is the flowchart which shows the special 2 game time production execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time measuring process for special 2s. It is a flowchart showing a special bonus effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing explaining the operation mode of a normal electric accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for special figure starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for special figure starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table (electric winning/discarding lottery winning/disallowing table) used when performing an electric auditors product opening lottery. It is a time chart which shows an example of the processing which a pachinko machine performs when a player performs a game. It is a time chart which shows an example of a process which a pachinko machine performs in a non-specific period. It is a time chart which shows an example of the processing which a pachinko machine performs in a specific period. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows a ball entering process for a special figure starting mouth. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the special electric power starting port. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big winning opening opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power combination opening/closing process. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for the 2nd special winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the opening and closing scenario setting processing for the second special winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special winning opening opening and closing processing. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a sound emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a state storage process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game times production. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of production pattern. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special electric starting opening entrance performance. It is the flowchart which shows the processing for the 2nd special winning a prize opening opening production. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal electric auditors product 53 and the 2nd variable winning device 55 in a modification. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 4th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is an explanatory view explaining a win/loss table stored in a win/loss table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. 8 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a fallen lottery is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. 8 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production and a result notification production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display surface of a liquid crystal display device when a battle production or a result announcement production is performed. 11 is a time chart illustrating another example of the processing when the fallen lottery is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. 9 is a time chart illustrating another example of the processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2. It is a time chart explaining an example of a process in the case where the player first wins the falling lottery after being activated in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing when the big hit is first won after starting in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart explaining another example of the process in the case where the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment first wins the falling lottery after being activated. It is a time chart explaining another example of the processing when the jackpot is first won after the start in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state determination process. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is explanatory drawing which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the time of ending open-and-close execution mode. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is the flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing at the time of high certainty and high support. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing when the big hit is first won after starting in the pachinko machine of the modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a time chart explaining another example of the processing when the jackpot is first won after the start in the pachinko machine of the modification 1 of the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing in the modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows hitting judgment processing in the modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows display control processing at the time of starting in the modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 5th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a sectional view showing a game ball distribution device with a valve body closed. It is a sectional view showing a game ball distribution device with a valve body opened. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is an explanatory view explaining a win/loss table stored in a win/loss table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is explanatory drawing which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the time of ending open-and-close execution mode. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game ball distribution device with which the pachinko machine of the modification 1 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game ball distribution device with which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game ball distribution device with which the pachinko machine of the modification 3 is equipped, and its periphery. It is a perspective view which shows the game ball storage device and the forced discharge device with which the pachinko machine of the modification 3 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game ball distribution device with which the pachinko machine of the modification 4 was equipped. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 6th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is an explanatory view explaining a win/loss table stored in a win/loss table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a perspective view showing the 1st starting opening and its circumference. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and a 1st starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows a prior art example. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 1 is equipped, and a 1st starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 is equipped, and a 1st starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 3 is equipped, and a 1st starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st starting opening with which the pachinko machine of the modification 4 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 5 is equipped, and a 1st starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st starting opening with which the pachinko machine of the modification 6 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 7 is equipped, and a 1st starting opening. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port included in the pachinko machine of the modification example 8. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing a pair of nails and a first starting port included in a pachinko machine of Modification 9. It is a perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st starting opening in the modification 9. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of Modification 10 and its surroundings. It is a perspective view which shows the electric accessory provided for the pachinko machine of the modification 11, and its periphery. 14 is a front view showing a first movable piece of an electric accessory provided in a pachinko machine of Modification 12. FIG. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing explaining the distribution mechanism 120. It is explanatory drawing explaining the normally electric accessory 53. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface 41a which are variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device 41. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for a 2nd starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table (electric winning/discarding lottery winning/disallowing table) used when performing an electric auditors product opening lottery. It is explanatory drawing explaining the kind of support mode which the pachinko machine 10 can perform. It is explanatory drawing explaining the aspect which a game ball circulates at the time of execution of a low frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing explaining the aspect which a game ball circulates at the time of execution of high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the aspect which a game ball circulates at the time of execution of high frequency support mode B. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot and reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power combination opening/closing process. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. It is a flowchart which shows a state storage process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for support mode production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game times production. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of production pattern. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 6 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 6 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 normally electric accessory 53 and each starting opening in the modified example 1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode A in Modification 1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode B in Modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 normal electric auditors'sip 53 and each starting opening in the modified example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode A according to Modification 2. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode B according to Modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 3, the normally electric accessory 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode A in Modification 3; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode B in Modification 3; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 4, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode A in Modification 4; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode B in Modification 4; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 5, the normally electric accessory 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode A in Modification Example 5. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode B in Modification 5; It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 6, the normally electric accessory 53, and each starting opening. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode A in Modification 6; FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a high frequency support mode B in Modification 6; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the normal electric auditors' prize 53. 21 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process in Modification 12; It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low frequency support modes. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for high frequency support modes B. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the production pattern in the modification 12. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for low frequency support mode. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production pattern in the 1st starting mouth game time of high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the continuous production in the 1st starting mouth game time of high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production pattern in the 2nd starting mouth game time of high frequency support mode A. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for high frequency support mode B. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows a V acquisition challenge mechanism part. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for a 2nd starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table used when performing an electric accessory opening lottery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a 1st opening/closing scenario. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the game ball in a V acquisition challenge mechanism part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the game ball in a V acquisition challenge mechanism part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the game ball in a V acquisition challenge mechanism part. It is a timing chart for explaining the 2nd opening-and-closing scenario. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a 3rd opening/closing scenario. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shutter opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart showing a V winning determination process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the delay unit with which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable winning a prize device with which the pachinko machine of the modification 19 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the modification 22. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 9th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the hit/miss table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the falling lottery win/loss table used when performing a falling lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table used when performing an electric accessory opening lottery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart explaining a process when the winning lottery is won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game times. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display surface of a symbol display device, when a battle production or a result announcement production is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production and a result notification production. In the pachinko machine of the comparative example 1, it is a timing chart for explaining the processing when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times after the guaranteed game number is reached. In the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment, in the game number after the guaranteed game number has been reached, it is a timing chart illustrating a process in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game state determination value with respect to each flag value of a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, and a fall flag. In the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment, it is a timing chart illustrating a procedure of processing in a game play after reaching the guaranteed play count. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low probability low frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low probability high frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for high probability high frequency states. It is a flow chart which shows change time setting processing for a fall low probability high frequency state. It is a flow chart which shows change time setting processing for a fall low probability low frequency state. It is a flow chart which shows change end processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game times production. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for low probability low frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for low probability high frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for high probability high frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the fall low probability high frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the falling low probability low frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the game game production execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. In the pachinko machine of the modification 1, it is a timing chart explaining the procedure of the process in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state determination process. 20 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process in modification 16. It is a flowchart showing a game state determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation time setting process for high probability low frequency states. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for high probability low frequency state. It is a flowchart which shows the game time effect setting process in the modification 18. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern setting processing for a latency probability change time high probability low frequency state. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern setting processing for a high probability low frequency state at the time of support mode simulation. It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine as a ninth embodiment. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is a front view of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol for liquid crystals, and the display surface 41a. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the hit/miss table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the falling lottery win/loss table. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the winning/disapproving table for electric accessory release lottery. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. It is a time chart explaining an outline (case 1) of processing. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a fall pullback jackpot effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the fall pullback most advantageous jackpot opening production. It is a time chart explaining an outline (case 2) of processing. It is a time chart explaining an outline (case 3) of processing. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state determination process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the detail of a game state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low probability low frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low probability high frequency states. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for high probability high frequency states. It is a flow chart which shows change time setting processing for a fall low probability high frequency state. It is a flow chart which shows change time setting processing for a fall low probability low frequency state. It is a flow chart which shows change end processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power combination opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU92. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game times production. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for low probability low frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for low probability high frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for high probability high frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the fall low probability high frequency state. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the falling low probability low frequency state. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing execution mode effect setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening production. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 6 is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. 6 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. It is explanatory drawing explaining the modified example 10. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as an 11th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for low probability modes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success/failure table for high probability modes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the reach determination success/failure table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table for electric prize release lottery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a setting information display part. It is the explanation drawing which shows the ending production which is indicated in the design indicator. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence for the time of the first miss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence for the time of the first normal reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence for the time of the first super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the ending production including setting suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time setting process. It is a flow chart which shows change end processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the reach distribution table. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for normal big hitting. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for probability variation big hits. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the time of detachment. It is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the case of the first miss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the time of the first normal reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the time of the first super reach. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern setting processing for reach in modification 1. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for normal reach. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for super reach. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for normal big hitting. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for normal reach/normal big hit time. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for super reach/normal big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for probability variation big hits. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for normal reach/probability change big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for super reach/probability change big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the time of detachment. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern table reference processing for detachment. It is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. It is a front view of the game board with which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a distribution mechanism distributes a game ball. It is a flow chart which shows update processing at the time of entering a ball. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for reach. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for normal big hitting. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for probability variation big hits. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing for the time of detachment. It is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation first symbol time. It is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion propriety table group for the first fluctuation second symbol time. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table for appearance probability lottery in Modification 4. It is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table for appearance period lottery. It is a flow chart which shows ending production setting processing in modification 6. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the setting suggestion success/failure table for the case of the first miss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the setting suggestion success/failure table at the time of the first time normal reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the setting suggestion success/failure table for the time of the first super reach. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as a 12th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a hit lottery. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the hit/miss table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the falling lottery win/loss table used when performing a falling lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning/discarding table used when performing an electric accessory opening lottery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a process in the case of winning the falling lottery in the game number before reaching the guaranteed game number. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a process when a big hit is won in a winning lottery in a game number before reaching the guaranteed game number. In the game times before reaching the guaranteed game number, without winning the falling lottery, and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, in the timing chart illustrating an example of the process when it is determined that reach is generated in the reach determination is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface of a symbol display device, when a battle production or a result announcement production is performed. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the result notification production performed after a battle production. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a process in the case of winning the falling lottery in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number. In the pachinko machine of the comparative example 1, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number of times, it is a timing chart for explaining the processing when the falling lottery is not won and the big hit is won in the winning lottery. In the pachinko machine of the comparative example 2, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number of times, it is a timing chart for explaining the processing when the falling lottery is not won and the big hit is won in the winning lottery. A timing chart that explains an example of processing when the winning number is won in the winning lottery, the winning number is won in the winning lottery, and the first-running mode is won in the mode selection lottery. is there. In a timing chart explaining an example of processing when the winning number is won in the winning lottery, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the late-falling mode is won in the mode selection lottery. is there. Timing chart explaining an example of the process when it is determined that a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number Is. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information shift processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a fall determination process. It is a flow chart which shows hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable time setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting processing before the guaranteed game frequency. It is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games. It is a flow chart which shows change end processing. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing for game times production. It is a flowchart showing a game game effect setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing before the guaranteed game frequency. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern setting processing after the guaranteed game frequency. It is the flowchart which shows the game game production execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a high probability mode win/loss table included in the pachinko machine of the first modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the mode selection table with which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 is equipped. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a 13th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device and a display surface of the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a special drawing lottery, a general drawing lottery, etc. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special drawing right or wrong determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the special figure classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the special electric switching scenario selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the universal drawing validity determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the universal figure classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the normal electric switching scenario selection table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the flow of the process performed in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for the universal figure starting gate. It is a flow chart which shows a ball entering process for a special figure starting mouth. It is a flow chart showing a ball winning process for a V winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure variable time setting process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product control process. It is a flow chart which shows normal electricity opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows special figure change time setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special electric switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the production performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the production performed in the pachinko machine of the modification of 13th Embodiment.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
<<A>> First embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic aA group to the characteristic aK group in the following <<Z>>):
<<B>> Second embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic bA group to the characteristic bN group in the following <<Z>>):
<<C>> Third embodiment (mainly corresponding to the characteristic cA group to the characteristic cG group in the following <<Z>>):
<<D>> Fourth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic dA group to the characteristic dG group in the following <<Z>>):
<<E>> Fifth embodiment (mainly corresponding to the characteristic eA group to the characteristic eG group in the following <<Z>>):
<<F>> Sixth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic fA group to the characteristic fF group in the following <<Z>>):
<<G>> Seventh embodiment (mainly corresponding to the characteristic gA group to the characteristic gP group in the following <<Z>>):
<<H>> Eighth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic hA group to the characteristic hF group in the following <<Z>>):
<<I>> 9th embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic iA group to the characteristic iH group in the following <<Z>>):
<<J>> Tenth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic jA group to the characteristic jO group in the following <<Z>>):
<<K>> Eleventh embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic kA group to the characteristic kW group in the following <<Z>>):
<<L>> Twelfth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic 1A group to the characteristic 1H group in the following <<Z>>):
<<M>> Thirteenth embodiment (mainly corresponds to the characteristic mA group to the characteristic mR group in the following <<Z>>):
<<Y>> Application to other configurations:
<<Z>> Regarding the feature groups extracted from the above embodiments and the like:

<<A>> First embodiment α:
<<A1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment α. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of a lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of a big hit, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a type determination gate 202, and a variable winning device 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a V winning mechanism 210. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game balls pass through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

The variable winning a prize device 36 is provided with a first big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and a first opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the first big winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the first big winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 of the V winning mechanism 210 described later is executed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After is satisfied, the state transits to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The type determination gate 202 is a ball entrance that is used to determine the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery. Specifically, a big win is won in a winning lottery in a predetermined game time, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time. When the open/close execution mode is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an effect (right hitting suggestion effect) that guides the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30. According to the right-handed suggestion effect, the player operates the operation handle 25 to shoot a game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the game ball hits the jackpot. The main controller 60 executes a type determination process for determining the type. Then, the type of jackpot is determined by the type determination process. The type determination process executed by the main control device 60 and the jackpot type set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display is made to display corresponding to the lottery result , The variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the winning lottery is executed when the game balls enter the first starting opening 33 are also referred to as the first starting opening game times.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment indicator to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the winning lottery is executed when the game balls enter the second starting opening 34 are also referred to as the second starting opening game times.

Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 are reserved.

The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter, also referred to as round lamps) are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or Display corresponding to it. Round game, until either one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration elapses, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied, It is a game in which the open state of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 corresponds to the determined jackpot type when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination processing executed when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. The display of the number of round games played is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In other words, even when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the type determination process is not started during the period when the game ball does not enter the type determination gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the jackpot type ( Since the number of round games is not determined), the number of round games is not displayed on the round display unit 39. After that, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is started and the jackpot type (including the number of round games) is determined. Therefore, the number of round games is displayed on the round display unit 39. Is displayed.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41, in the case where the first symbol display portion 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the variable display of the symbol or the result of the lottery Predetermined display based on notices etc. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol in accordance therewith. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and when the jackpot is won. The effect display during the opening/closing execution mode to be changed is also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display part 37b. It is a design. When the game times are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the liquid crystal design corresponding to the first design displayed on the first design display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, when the game times are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. The symbol is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 3( a ), as the liquid crystal symbols, symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols that are variably displayed, it is also possible to adopt a symbol in which symbols such as characters are attached to each symbol showing numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 3B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 3A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 3B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, the game times means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display of the variable display until the stop display ends. This is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the In either one of the two symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, in the symbol display device 41 for each game time, After the symbol sequence is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 3B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. The reserved game number is an unexecuted game number, and is for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery with respect to the special information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. It refers to the game times for which variable display has not started. The number of holding game times that can be held based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the first hold display area Ds1, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a first hold game time display) can be displayed. Further, the number of holding game times that can be held based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a second hold game time display) can be displayed in the second hold display area Ds2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37. First synchronization display unit Sync1 for displaying and second synchronization display for performing blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special drawing unit 37 And a part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a stop signal, the first symbol display portion 37a The 1-synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a light. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b is variably displayed, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 displays a blink, and when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a stop, the second synchronization display. The section Sync2 displays a light.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. However, the display surface 41a may not display a part or all of these displays.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in FIG. 4A, the V winning mechanism 210 includes a clune 220, a flow path 211 that circulates a game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to the clune 220, and a game flowing down the right side of the game board 30. A second opening/closing door 213 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 212 for the ball to flow into the flow path 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects that a game ball has flowed in from the second special winning opening 212, and a game area. 215 communicating with the back side of the, storage valve 216 that temporarily stores the game ball that has flowed in from the second special winning opening 212 in the storage portion 218 of the flow path 211, and a storage valve that drives the storage valve 216 And a drive mechanism 217. Further, the clune 220 includes one V winning opening 222 and five non-V winning openings 224. The V winning opening 222 is a winning opening where a game ball hits. The non-V winning opening 224 does not become a big hit even if a game ball enters, and discharges the game ball from the game area.

Next, the operation of the V winning mechanism 210 will be described. When a particular type of big hit or small hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time, the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 4A, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened.

When the player operates the operation handle 25 to shoot a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball flows near the second opening/closing door 213 while the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, the game ball shown in FIG. As shown in b), the game ball flows into the flow path 211 from the second special winning opening 212 by being guided by the opened second opening/closing door 213. The game ball that first flows into the flow path 211 after the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is stored in the storage section 218 by the closed storage valve 216. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 218 is one. In addition, as a modification, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage unit 218 may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 4C, when one game ball is stored in the storage unit 218, when the game ball flows in from the second special winning opening 212, the game ball is first stored in the storage unit. The game ball stored in 218 blocks the flow to the storage part 218, flows in the direction of the discharge port 215 in the flow path 211, and is discharged from the discharge port 215 to the back side of the game area.

As shown in FIG. 4D, when the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Details of the closing condition will be described later. After that, as shown in FIG. 4E, the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game balls stored in the storage section 218 flow toward the clune 220 in the flow path 211. To do. Then, the game balls discharged from the flow path 211 circulate on the upper surface of the clune 220, and then enter the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224. As described above, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, it becomes a big hit, and when a game ball enters the non-V winning opening 224, it is not a big hit and is discharged from the game area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, every time one game ball enters (inflows) into the second special winning opening 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls. The entry of the game ball into the second special winning opening 212 is detected by the detection sensor 214.

As described above, as a modified example, when a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 is adopted, the storage valve 216 is opened, so that the plurality of game balls are placed on the upper surface of the clune 220. As a result, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 222 can be improved, and the player's expectation can be improved. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V winning opening 222, it is treated as a jackpot based only on the game ball first entering the V winning opening 222, and then to the V winning opening 222. The entry of the second game ball is not treated as a big hit, and is discharged to the back of the game area in the same manner as the entry of the game ball into the non-V winning opening 224.

<<A2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various winning openings and through gates such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a first opening/closing door drive unit 36c for opening/closing the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34. The drive unit 34b, the second opening/closing door drive unit 213b for opening/closing the second opening/closing door 213, the storage valve drive mechanism 217 for driving the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives and controls the first opening/closing door driving unit 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed. The open/close door drive unit 213b is drive-controlled. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the specific big hit and small hit, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve drive mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 is opened and closed. When the electric role opening is determined as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the electric role driving unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence/absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are variably displayed are understood. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a lottery, sorts jackpot types, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b, a determination processing execution area 64c, and a type determination processing execution area 64i. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the time of entering the ball is the first hold in the hold information storage area 64b. It is stored in the area Ra in time series. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the time of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

The details of the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is used in the hit lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined as a big hit. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is the timing when the game ball enters the type determining gate 202 or the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the opening/closing execution mode. It is stored in the hold information storage area 64d.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b using the value of the hit random number counter C1. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to. If the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the big hit type stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i acquired when the game ball enters the type determining gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode is started is stored. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the counter C2. The jackpot type (the number of times the round game has been executed) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display unit 39.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 3B, the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. For example, if C4=0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=2-465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the hit random number counter C1 when the hit lottery is performed based on the hit random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. The hit/no hit table and the hit/no hit table for collating with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win/loss tables, one for the probability mode and one for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode), are stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. As shown in the drawing, in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit. Of the values of 0 to 1199, 5 values of 5 to 9 are set as a small hit (out). The small hit (out) will be described later. A value other than the 10 values of 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) is a normal deviation.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/fail table for the second starting opening. As shown in the drawing, in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are small hits (missing).

Here, the small hit (disengagement) is a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is executed, but is not a trigger for shifting in the support mode. Is. On the other hand, the normal disengagement is the result of right and wrong, which does not trigger the transition of the open/close execution mode and further does not trigger the transition of the support mode. In the following description, the small hit (out) is also simply referred to as "small hit", and the normal off is simply called "off."

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Mode of opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) A mode of support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after completion of the opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of occurrence of winning (winning) of the game balls on the door 213 becomes relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds elapses or the number of game balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. Can be set to On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds elapses or the number of balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. Can be set.

The opening limit time for one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213, and the opening limit number for one opening are the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, if the frequency of occurrence of a ball entering the V winning mechanism 210 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are arbitrary. is there. Specifically, it is sufficient that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, it is assumed that the variable winning device 36 and the V winning mechanism 210 do not actually receive a ball. Good.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode which is a big hit as a result of the winning lottery and is executed when the big hit occurs, or a game ball enters the V winning opening 222. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 9A shows a distribution table for the first starting opening (at the time of jackpot winning). The distribution table is referred to when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the first starting opening is entered.

FIG. 9B shows a distribution table at the time of V winning when a ball is entered into the first starting opening. The distribution table is a small hit in the game time executed when the ball is entered into the first starting opening, and enters the V winning opening 222 and is a big hit during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger. It is referred to when it becomes.

FIG. 9C shows a distribution table for the second starting opening (at the time of jackpot winning and at the time of winning the V prize upon the entry into the second starting opening). In the distribution table, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the ball is entered into the second starting opening, and in the game times when the ball is entered into the second starting opening It is a small hit, and is referred to when a big hit is made by entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening of FIG. 9A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a big hit in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the ball is entered into the first starting opening. As a jackpot type when winning, the 5R type 1 jackpot, the 5R type 2 jackpot, and the 10R regular jackpot are set.

The 5R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 5, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the first-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to 90 times. That is, after 90 game plays have been executed in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 5R second-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 5, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the second-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to five. That is, after the game times have been executed five times in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 44" correspond to the 5R type 1 jackpot and "45 to 60" are the 5R. It corresponds to the second kind jackpot, and "61-99" corresponds to the 10R regular jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table at the time of V winning when the ball is entered into the first starting opening in FIG. 9B, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is triggered by entering the first starting opening. 5R first-class jackpot, 10R normal as a jackpot type when a small hit occurs in the executed game times, and when the player enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a big hit during the opening/closing execution mode executed by the small hit The jackpot has been set.

The 5R first-class big jackpot and the 10R normal big jackpot have been described in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 9A, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the distribution table at the time of winning the V prize when the ball is entered into the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 5R type 1 jackpot. "65-99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 9C, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot is selected in the winning lottery in the game time that is executed when the player enters the second starting opening. In the case of winning, and in the game times executed with the entry into the second starting opening as a trigger, it becomes a small hit, and during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger, it enters the V winning opening 222 and hits the jackpot. In the case of, the 15R type 1 jackpot, the 4R type 1 jackpot, and the 4R type 2 jackpot are set.

The 15R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 15, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the first-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to 90 times. That is, after 90 game plays have been executed in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 4R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 4, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the first-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to 90 times. That is, after 90 game plays have been executed in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 4R second-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 4, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the second-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to five. That is, after the game times have been executed five times in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 49” correspond to the 15R type 1 jackpot, and “50 to 57” are the 4R number. It corresponds to the 1st jackpot, and "58-99" corresponds to the 4R 2nd jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type distribution mode in the case of a big hit is a big win in the win lottery in the game time executed at the time of entering the first starting opening. And a small win in the game time that is executed when the ball is entered into the first starting opening, and during the opening and closing execution mode that is executed with the small hit as a trigger, it enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a big hit. In the case of winning, in the winning lottery in the game times executed with the entry to the second starting opening as a trigger, and in the game times executed with the entry into the second starting opening as a trigger. It is a win, and it is different from when it is a big hit by entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger, and a clear difference in the advantage for the player is provided. ing.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE to perform the winning lottery, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. Although the jackpot type is determined by the MPU 62, the MPU 62 further determines the display mode of the segment indicator to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b using the value of the hit random number counter C1. At the same time, the display mode of the round display unit 39 is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to when determining the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the firing of the game ball continues to the game area PA in the same mode. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of being a winning combination in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is different between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time release time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer when the electric-role combination is won, than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the next operation is performed after the end of one opening state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 34 will be higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/loft lottery win/loss table) used when executing the electric auditors open lottery.

FIG. 10A shows a win/loss table (for low frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the winning/discarding table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory releasing counter C4 which is the winning of the electric accessory opening. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG.10(b) has shown the winning/missing table (for high frequency support modes) for electric auditors thing open lottery used at the time of high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 10B, in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0-461 as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<A3>> Flow of game:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

When the player starts the game, the operation handle 25 is operated to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30. Hereinafter, firing the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 is also referred to as “left hitting”, and firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 is also referred to as “right hitting”.

When the player starts left-handing and enters the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the game time for informing the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by entering the first starting opening 33 is started. To be done. When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the type of jackpot (see FIG. 9) is not determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in the opening/closing execution mode executed after the end of the game times won in the hit lottery.

When the game times won for the jackpot are over, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, an effect (right hitting suggestion effect) that suggests that the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 (right hitting) is executed. When the player recognizes the right-handed suggestion effect, shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and enters (passes) the game ball into the type determination gate 202, the type determination after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. The type determination process is executed in response to the first entry (passage) of a game ball into the gate 202. The type determination process is a process for determining the jackpot type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

When the jackpot type is determined by executing the type determination process, the round game in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform the opening/closing operation is started based on the opening/closing scenario set for each jackpot type. It The opening/closing scenario is a program in which patterns of opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are predetermined. Details of the open/close scenario will be described later.

When a game ball hit by the player to the right in the period during which the round game is executed (hereinafter, also referred to as opening/closing processing period) enters the first big winning opening 36a or the second big winning opening 212, each big winning opening The set number of game balls is given to the player as a privilege (prize ball).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is set only in a specific case, and a game ball can be inserted into the second special winning opening 212. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 4, when a game ball enters the second special winning opening 212, one of the game balls entered in the second special winning opening 212 is stored in the storage unit 218. Then, after the storage valve 216 is opened, the fluid flows from the flow path 211 to the clune 220 (see FIG. 4E). Then, when the game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222, a new jackpot is determined. When a new jackpot is determined as a result of a game ball entering the V winning opening 222, the open/close execution mode being executed is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222. The mode is started. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game times that is won the jackpot. The jackpot type is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate 202, but in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222, , The type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

As described with reference to FIG. 9, the jackpot type distribution in the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 (FIG. 4A), and the entry into the first starting opening as a trigger. Different from the jackpot classification (FIG. 4B) in the jackpot at the time of the V winning. In the present embodiment, it is more likely that the bonus given to the player will be larger if the jackpot type is distributed in the jackpot at the time of V winning when the ball is thrown into the first starting opening. Therefore, even if the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 has been confirmed, the player can open the game ball if the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the round game. It is desired to enter the two major winning openings 212 and further enter the game balls into the V winning openings 222. Therefore, the player's expectation can be improved even during the round game.

If the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball can be inserted into the second special winning opening 212, the game ball cannot be inserted into the V winning opening 222. As is, the round game based on the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is continued.

When the round game ends and then the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high frequency support mode is set for the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, it is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The support mode in the game time becomes the high frequency support mode. In this case, the player makes a right hit to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 and executes the electric accessory open lottery. When winning the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric accessory 34a is opened and the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34, and as a result, the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. The winning lottery is executed with the opportunity.

The win/no win result in the winning lottery when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 is a big hit or a small hit. When the jackpot is won, as in the case where the jackpot is selected in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, it is executed after the game times of the jackpot are completed. By entering a game ball into the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, the round game set to the determined jackpot type is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit is won in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the end of the game times won for the small hit. The open/close execution mode is executed. When the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, and then the game ball is entered into the V winning opening 222, the big hit is determined and the big hit is awarded. The opening/closing execution mode triggered by this is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, the bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set to the type of the jackpot.

Next, the player starts the game and enters the game ball into the first starting opening 33 by left-handing, and wins the small hit in the winning lottery triggered by the entering the first starting opening 33. The case will be described.

When a small hit is won in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 33, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and closed once after the end of the game time in which the small hit is won. The run mode is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode is started, a right-hand hitting suggestive effect that suggests that the player makes a right-hand hit is executed. The player executes a right-handed stroke in accordance with the right-handed suggestion effect, puts the game ball into the second special winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then puts the game ball into the V winning opening 222. When the ball hits, the big hit is determined, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the big hit. In the opening/closing execution mode, the bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set to the type of the jackpot. Heretofore, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in the present embodiment has been described.

<<A4>> Outline of processing by game machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining a case 1 in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. In addition, the outline of the processing described below is not executed in all cases in which a big hit is hit in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting opening 33, but only in a specific case. Executed.

When the player executes a left-handed stroke and the game time U1 is started by the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33, the variation of the symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a starts. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game game U1. After that, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. At this time, although the pattern of the symbol showing the big hit is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, the effect that clearly indicates that the big hit has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound is Without being executed, an effect that is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the big hit or the small hit is won is executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound, recognizes that the player has won the jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time U1. I can't.

The opening/closing execution mode is started after the game times U1 won in the winning lottery are completed. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry into the first starting opening 33, the type of the jackpot is not determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined by the game ball entering the type determination gate 202 after the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, even when the number of games won in the winning lottery is over, the round display section 39 does not display the number of times the round game is executed in the open/close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the determination of the jackpot type is also referred to as “waiting period”.

After the game times U1 won in the winning lottery are finished, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at the same time, the effect suggesting right-handedness (right-handedness suggested effect) is executed and the privilege can be given to the player. There is an effect that indicates that there is a nature, more specifically, an effect that suggests that two opportunities for winning the jackpot are prepared (hereinafter also referred to as "W chance effect") is executed. ..

When the player who recognizes that the right-hit suggestion effect and the W chance effect have been executed, performs a right-hit, and a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, a type determination process is executed and the jackpot type is determined. .. When the jackpot type is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period begins. The right-handed suggestion effect is also executed during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing process period starts. In the opening/closing processing period, the round game is executed a number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is executed in the first round game (1R) of the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. Further, when the opening/closing processing period is started, an effect that suggests that the first of the prepared opportunities for winning the jackpot for the second time has been started (hereinafter, referred to as the first opportunity effect). Call) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance production, the player is urged to hit the right side, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212, and further the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 222. A stimulating performance is executed.

The player recognizes the first chance effect to be executed, right-handedly executes, and at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, the game ball can be inserted into the second special winning opening 212, and stored. When the game ball can be stored in the portion 218 (see FIG. 4) (proceeding to [store in storage portion] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. Execute once. At this time, one gaming ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and flows into the clune 220.

The game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224. When the game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 (proceeds to [Enter the V winning opening] shown in the time chart), in processing, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery at the game time U1. The round game that is being executed as a result is continued, and the jackpot when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 is not settled, but based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222. The new open/close execution mode is not started. Furthermore, the game ball is not entered into the V winning opening 222, and no special privilege is given to the player or the game state is changed.

However, in the present embodiment, the V winning jackpot effect is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. The V winning jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 and also suggests a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the character "V" is displayed on the display surface 41a, and the character "big hit" is displayed.

By executing the V winning jackpot production when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, a new jackpot is determined for the player by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222. It is possible to give recognition as if and to give a sense of expectation. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize as if the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started.

Then, after the V winning jackpot production is executed, the first round of the round game that is executed with the fact that the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is ended, and the second round (second round) is started. To be done. In the second and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has started is executed. By doing so, the player can be recognized as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started, and the player is given an expectation. be able to. That is, it is possible to give a new sense of expectation to the player during the round game which is substantially executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game cycle U1.

On the other hand, when a game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the non-V winning opening 224 (proceeds to [non-entering the V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the prepared two jackpots are won. An effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a second chance effect) that suggests that the second time of the opportunity (chance) is started is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and when the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. The effect which shows that the jackpot is confirmed is executed at the timing. Further, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after executing the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. In this case as well, in the process, the round game that is being executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time U1 is continued, and the effect operation button 24 is operated in the second chance effect. As a result, the jackpot is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started. Furthermore, the privilege is not given to the player and the game state is not changed when the effect operation button 24 is operated in the second chance effect.

However, in the present embodiment, when the production operation button 24 is operated in the second chance presentation, the jackpot production that suggests a jackpot is executed. Alternatively, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after executing the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. By executing the jackpot effect after executing the second chance effect in this manner, the player can be made to recognize as if a new jackpot was confirmed by the second chance effect, and the expectation is given. can do.

Then, after the jackpot production is executed, the first round of the round game that is being executed in response to winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is ended, and the second round (second round) is started. .. In the second and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has started is executed. By doing so, the player can be recognized as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit by the second chance effect was started, and an expectation can be given to the player. That is, it is possible to give a new sense of expectation to the player during the round game which is substantially executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game cycle U1.

In addition, when the game ball flowing through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222, the effect executed during the second round of round game and the game ball flowing through the clune 220 enters the non-V winning opening 224. In the case of the second and subsequent rounds, the effect executed during the round game may be set to a different effect. For example, when a game ball flowing through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222, an opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is provided as an effect during the second round of the round game. When a game ball circulating through the clune 220 is entered into the non-V winning opening 224 and the jackpot effect is executed by the second chance effect, the round game after the second round is executed. As an inside effect, an effect that suggests that the opening/closing execution mode based on the new jackpot by the second chance effect is being executed is executed. In this way, in any case, in the second round or later, the game is actually being played in the same round, which is actually executed when the jackpot is won in the game lot U1. By changing the effect during the round game, different expectations can be given to the player, the range of playability can be widened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, despite the player recognizing the first chance production and performing a right-handed stroke, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. The case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage unit 218 without being able to do so (proceeding to [non-storage in storage unit] shown in the time chart) will be described. In this case, the second chance presentation is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance effect in this case is also an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed is executed. Further, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after executing the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. In this case as well, similar to the case of proceeding to [non-entering the V winning opening] shown in the time chart, the processing is executed in response to the fact that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game time U1. The round game is continued, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated in the second chance effect, the jackpot is not confirmed and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started. Furthermore, the privilege is not given to the player and the game state is not changed when the effect operation button 24 is operated in the second chance effect.

However, in the present embodiment, when the production operation button 24 is operated in the second chance presentation, the jackpot production that suggests a jackpot is executed. Alternatively, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after executing the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. By executing the jackpot effect after executing the second chance effect in this manner, the player can be made to recognize as if a new jackpot was confirmed by the second chance effect, and the expectation is given. can do.

Then, after the jackpot production is executed, the first round of the round game that is being executed in response to winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game round U1 is ended, and the second round (second round) is started. .. In the second and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has started is executed. By doing so, the player can be recognized as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit by the second chance effect was started, and an expectation can be given to the player. That is, it is possible to give a new sense of expectation to the player during the round game which is substantially executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game cycle U1. The case 1 has been described above.

FIG. 12 is a time chart for explaining a case 2 in which a small win is won in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting opening 33. In the present embodiment, the process described below is executed in all cases where the small hit is won in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33.

When the player performs a left-handed stroke and the game turn U2 is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33, the variation of the symbol on the first symbol display portion 37a starts. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game game U2. After that, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. At this time, although the pattern of the symbol indicating the small hit is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, it is clearly suggested that the small hit is won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. The effect is not executed, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the big hit or the small hit is won. Therefore, the player recognizing the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound recognizes that the player has won the small hit in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time U1. I can't.

After the game time U2 that wins the small hit ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the small hit is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the opening/closing execution mode is started. Then, during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and an effect indicating that the player may be given a privilege, more specifically, an opportunity to win the jackpot. An effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “W chance effect”) that suggests that the (chance) is prepared twice is executed.

Then, after the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period starts. In the opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once is executed. Further, when the opening/closing processing period is started, an effect that suggests that the first of the prepared opportunities for winning the jackpot for the second time has been started (hereinafter, referred to as the first opportunity effect). Call) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance production, the player is urged to hit the right side, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212, and further the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 222 to win the jackpot. The effect that prompts you to confirm is executed.

The player recognizes the first chance effect to be executed, right-handedly executes, and the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, When the game ball can be stored in the storage section 218 (see FIG. 4) (proceed to [Store in storage section] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. Is executed once. At this time, one gaming ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and flows into the clune 220.

The game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224. When a game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 (proceeds to [Enter V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the jackpot is determined. Then, when the jackpot is confirmed, the V winning jackpot effect is executed. The V winning jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 and also suggests a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the character "V" is displayed on the display surface 41a, and the character "big hit" is displayed. It should be noted that the V winning jackpot effect executed in Case 1 and the V winning jackpot effect executed in Case 2 may be the same or similar effects, or may be completely different effects. In the present embodiment, the V winning jackpot effect executed in Case 1 and the V winning jackpot effect executed in Case 2 are the same or similar contents. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the progress state of the game being executed is Case 1 or Case 2, and to make the player make various guesses. Expectation can be added.

After that, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the small hit in the winning lottery triggered by entering the first start opening 33 is terminated. Then, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started. In addition, in the case of a jackpot when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the jackpot type is determined together with the jackpot determination.

In addition, the jackpot effect executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 in Case 1 and the jackpot effect executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 in Case 2 are the same or similar. You may employ the structure used as the production of. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the jackpot has been fixed by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222, and the player can make various guesses. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, when a game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the non-V winning opening 224 (proceeds to [non-entering the V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the prepared two jackpots are won. An effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a second chance effect) that suggests that the second time of the opportunity (chance) is started is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and when the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. The effect indicating that the disengagement has been determined is executed at the specified timing. In addition, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the disconnection is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. Note that the confirmation of the deviation suggested in the second chance presentation is the content of suggesting that the winning (or was the deviation) in the winning lottery in the game time U2.

After executing the second chance production, the round game which is executed in response to winning the small hit in the winning lottery in the game time U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, an effect (left effect suggestion effect) that urges the player to make a left hit is executed. The player executes a left-handed stroke and tries to insert a game ball into the first starting opening 33 again.

Next, despite the player recognizing the first chance production and performing a right-handed stroke, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. The case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage unit 218 without being able to do so (proceeding to [non-storage in storage unit] shown in the time chart) will be described. In this case, the second chance presentation is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance effect in this case is also an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect indicating that the disconnection has been confirmed is executed. In addition, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the disconnection is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed.

After executing the second chance production, the round game which is executed in response to winning the small hit in the winning lottery in the game time U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, an effect (left effect suggestion effect) that urges the player to make a left hit is executed. The player executes a left-handed stroke and tries to insert a game ball into the first starting opening 33 again.

As described above, when the jackpot is executed in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (case 1) and when the jackpot is won (case 2) In the case of), although the pattern of the symbol showing the result of the winning lottery is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound. The production to do is not executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound cannot recognize the lottery result at the game time when the game time is over. As a result, even if the small hit is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the big hit is won.

Further, after the game time is over, in both case 1 and case 2, right hit suggestion effect and W chance suggestion effect are executed, so during the period when the effect is executed after the game time is over. Also, in the winning lottery, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the big hit is won rather than the small hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the type of the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, the game ball is determined by entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the jackpot type is determined, the round lamp of the round display unit 39 is lit with a display according to the number of times of execution of the round game corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if you have won the small hit, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of the game, regardless of whether you have won the big hit or the small hit, so after the end of the game, you will see the round lamp. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from distinguishing whether the big hit or the small win has been won in the game time.

As a result, the player does not recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player makes a right hit and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game, On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the jackpot is won rather than the jackpot for a relatively long period. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player for a relatively long period even in the period after the game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit or the small hit is started, It can be noticed. In addition, when determining the jackpot type, the player is allowed to hit the right side and the game ball is thrown into the type determination gate 202, so that the player is actively involved in determining the jackpot type, and Thus, it is possible to further focus on the game in the period of the opening/closing execution mode.

In Case 1, the jackpot was won in the winning lottery in the game time U1, and the winning ball was won in the winning lottery in the game time U1 even though the game ball was subsequently entered in the V winning opening 222. The round game that is being executed as a result is continued, and the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is not confirmed, and a new game ball is entered into the V winning opening 222. The open/close execution mode is not started. Furthermore, the game ball is not entered into the V winning opening 222, and no special privilege is given to the player or the game state is changed. On the other hand, in case 2, when a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game time U2, and then a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, a big hit is determined, and a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game time U2. After the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning is ended, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started. That is, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, it may or may not be granted to the player when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. Therefore, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player guess whether the privilege is given or not and to give the player an expectation that the privilege is given.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, whether the result of the winning lottery in the game times that triggered the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is a big hit or a small hit is a game. It is possible to make the player guess and give a greater expectation to the player.

Further, in Case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the game ball is V if the benefit is not given when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. When the player enters the winning opening 222, the V winning jackpot effect is executed. In Case 2, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, a privilege is given when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. When the player has entered the ball, the V-prize jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is not given, the bonus is given to the player who recognizes that the V winning jackpot has been executed. It is possible to add a sense of expectation.

In the case of Case 1, even if the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 222 in the first chance production even though the privilege triggered by the entry is not given. Since the effect of prompting the player to perform the ball is executed, it is possible to give the player, who has recognized that the effect has been executed, the expectation that the privilege may be given. It is possible to promote the launch of the game ball in such a manner that the game ball enters the winning opening 222.

Further, in Case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the first round of the round game executed when the big hit in the winning lottery in the game time U1 is won is ended, and 2 Despite the start of the second round (the second round), in the second and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is executed. By doing so, the player can be recognized as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started, and the player is given an expectation. be able to. That is, it is possible to give a new sense of expectation to the player during the round game which is substantially executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game cycle U1.

<<A5>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sa0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sa0102.

In step Sa0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sa0103.

In step Sa0103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sa0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 22) described later.

In step Sa0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening accompanying the entering of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step Sa0104 will be described later. After executing step Sa0104, the process proceeds to step Sa0105.

In step Sa0105, a through-ball entry process associated with the entry (passing) of a game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entering process in step Sa0105 will be described later. After executing step Sa0105, the process proceeds to step Sa0106.

In step Sa0106, a ball entry process for the type determination gate accompanying the game ball entering the type determination gate is executed. Details of the ball entering process for the type determination gate in step Sa0106 will be described later. After executing step Sa0106, the process proceeds to step Sa0107.

In step Sa0107, a winning process for the special winning opening is executed in association with the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening. Details of the ball winning process for the special winning opening in step Sa0107 will be described later. After executing step Sa0107, the process proceeds to step Sa0108.

In step Sa0108, a ball entry process for the clune accompanying the entry of the game ball into the clune is executed. Details of the clown entering process in step Sa0108 will be described later. After executing Step Sa0108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 13: Sa0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sa0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (start winning) by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sa0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sa0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0202 and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sa0203.

In step Sa0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sa0204.

In step Sa0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sa0209.

When it is determined in step Sa0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Sa0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sa0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sa0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0206, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sa0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sa0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sa0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sa0208.

In step Sa0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sa0209.

In step Sa0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Sa0204 or step Sa0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sa0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sa0209: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa0209, when the number N of starting suspensions is less than the upper limit value (Sa0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0210, where 1 is added to the number N of starting suspensions of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sa0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sa0212.

In step Sa0212, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13), and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 22) are stored in the corresponding holding area. The data is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sa0210. Specifically, when the first starting suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13) are set. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, a storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sa0210. Further, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13) are set. , The first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sa0210. After executing Step Sa0212, the process proceeds to Step Sa0213.

In step Sa0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS, and the winning lottery determination result (lottery result), the jackpot. It is a process of determining the type, presence/absence of reach, variation time of game times, and the like before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sa0213, the process proceeds to Step Sa0214.

In step Sa0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (preliminary judgment information) of the preliminary judgment processing executed based on the information (retention information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set as a suspension command. Set.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the holding information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing Step Sa0214, the main MPU 62 finishes the ball entry process for the main starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 14: Sa0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, and the hold information is mainly used for determining whether or not the winning lottery is hit, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether a reach has occurred, determining the variation time of the game times, etc. This is a process to be executed before being subject to the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sa0301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step Sa0301, the process proceeds to Step Sa0302.

In step Sa0302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. The process is a process of determining the variation time of the game times. The details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sa0302, the present destination determination processing is ended.

<Big hit/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: Sa0301) of the destination determination processing.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step Sa0401, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) due to the ball entering the starting opening in the entrance processing for the starting opening (FIG. 14) is read. Then, it progresses to step Sa0402.

In step Sa0402, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is based on the first holding area Ra. That is, the pending information for which the destination determination process is executed is information acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 as a trigger, or the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. It is determined whether the information is acquired as. When it is determined in step Sa0402 that the read reserved area is based on the first reserved area Ra (Sa0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0403 and the first start port hit/fail table is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Sa0405.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0402 that the read reserved area is not based on the first reserved area Ra, that is, when the read reserved area is based on the second reserved area Rb (Sa0402: NO). , Proceeds to step Sa0404, and refers to the hit/miss table for the first starting port. Then, it progresses to step Sa0405.

In step Sa0405, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is a big hit in the winning lottery. When it is determined in step Sa0405 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0406.

In step Sa0406, the big hit information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0405 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is not a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0407.

In step Sa0407, it is determined whether or not the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery. When it is determined in step Sa0407 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa0407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0408.

In step Sa0408, the small hit information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa0407 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is not a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa0407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0409.

In step Sa0409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa0410, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa0411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sa0411 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (Sa0411: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0412 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0411 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sa0411: NO), the jackpot/reach information acquisition process is ended as it is.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: Sa0302) of the previous determination process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step Sa0501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is obtained by the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 14). Then, it progresses to step Sa0502.

In step Sa0502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, the presence/absence of a big hit is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the big hit/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a big hit (Sa0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0503.

In step Sa0503, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step Sa0503, the process proceeds to Step Sa0509.

In step Sa0509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa0502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (step Sa0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0504, and it is determined whether or not a small hit is won in the winning lottery related to the current game time. judge. When it is determined in step Sa0504 that the small hit is won (Sa0504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0505.

In step Sa0505, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for small hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step Sa0505, the process proceeds to Step Sa0509.

In step Sa0509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa0504 that the small hit is not won in the hit lottery related to the current game (Sa0504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0506 and it is determined whether a reach occurs. When it is determined in step Sa0506 that reach is generated (Sa0506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0507.

In step Sa0507, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa0509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa0506 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (step Sa0506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0508, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is displayed. By referring to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa0509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition process ends.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13: step Sa0105).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sa0601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sa0601 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sa0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0602, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sa0601: NO), the entering process for the through is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa0602 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sa0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0603, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sa0604.

In step Sa0604, the value of the electric auditors product release counter C4 updated in step Sa0103 (FIG. 13) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the electric duty holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0602 that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sa0602: NO), that is, when the value of the accessory holding number SN is the upper limit value, the electric The through-ball entry process is terminated without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Entering process for type determination gate>
Next, a ball entry process for the type determination gate will be described. The ball entry process for the type determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 13: step Sa0106).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the type determination gate. In step Sa0701, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the type determination gate 202. When it is determined in step Sa0701 that the game ball has entered the type determination gate 202 (Sa0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0702. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0701 that the game ball has not entered the type determination gate 202 (Sa0701: NO), the ball entering process for the type determination gate ends as it is.

In step Sa0702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is set to ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process (see FIG. 29) is executed triggered by winning the big hit in the winning lottery, and the ball entry process for the type determination gate. In, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area and then turned off (Sa0705).

If it is determined in step Sa0702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa0702: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa0703. When it is determined in step Sa0702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa0702: NO), the ball entering process for the type determination gate is ended as it is.

In step Sa0703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). Then, it progresses to step Sa0704.

In step Sa0704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned on. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned on when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i, and is turned off when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process (see FIG. 29) described later. To be After executing Step Sa0704, the process proceeds to Step Sa0705.

In step Sa0705, the type determination permission flag is turned off. After that, the ball entry process for the type determination gate ends.

<Ball processing for the special winning opening>
Next, the winning process for the special winning opening will be described. The winning process for the special winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13: step Sa0107).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a winning process for a special winning opening. In step Sa0801, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sa0801 that the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 36a (Sa0801:YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0802. On the other hand, in step Sa0801, if it is not determined that the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 36a (Sa0801:NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0804.

In step Sa0802, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on having entered the first special winning opening 36a is set. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the first big winning opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. After executing Step Sa0802, the process proceeds to Step Sa0803.

In step Sa0803, a first special winning opening entry command is set. The first special winning opening winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the first special winning opening 36a. The first special winning opening entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing Step Sa0803, the process proceeds to Step Sa0804.

In step Sa0804, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212. When it is determined in step Sa0804 that the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212 (Sa0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0805. On the other hand, in step Sa0804, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second special winning opening 212 (Sa0804: NO), the big winning opening winning process is ended.

In step Sa0805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on having entered the second special winning opening 212 is set. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the second special winning opening 212, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. After executing Step Sa0805, the process proceeds to Step Sa0806.

In step Sa0806, a second special winning opening ball entering command is set. The second special winning opening winning command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212. The second special winning opening entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa0806, the winning process for the special winning opening is ended.

<Entering ball for clune>
Next, a ball entry process for clune will be described. The clown entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13: step Sa0108).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for clune. In step Sa0901, it is determined whether or not the clune entry permission flag is ON. The clune entry permission flag is turned on when the storage valve 216 is opened in the special winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 32), and the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 of the clune 220. In this case, it is turned off (FIG. 21: Sa0910). By doing so, even though the storage valve 216 is not performing the opening operation, due to damage or abnormality of the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216, the game ball unintentionally flows into the klune, and V It is possible to avoid a big hit by hitting the winning hole 222. If it is determined in step Sa0901 that the clune entry permission flag is ON (Sa0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0901 that the clune entry permission flag is not ON (Sa0901: NO), the clune entry processing is ended as it is.

In step Sa0902, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222. When it is determined in step Sa0902 that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 (Sa0902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0903.

In Step Sa0903, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. That is, in this process, it is determined whether the opportunity for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 222 is that the small win has been won in the winning lottery or that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery. ing. As described in the case 1 of FIG. 11, when the game ball enters the V winning hole 222 as a result of winning the small hit in the winning lottery, the big hit is confirmed, but the big hit in the winning lottery is won. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 as a result of this, the round game that is being executed as a result of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game cycle is continued, and the V winning opening 222 is played. The jackpot when the ball has entered is not confirmed, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is not started. Furthermore, the game ball is not entered into the V winning opening 222, and no special privilege is given to the player or the game state is changed. Therefore, in step Sa0903, it is determined whether the opportunity for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 222 is that the small win has been won in the winning lottery, or that the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery. Determines whether or not the jackpot is confirmed. When it is determined in step Sa0903 that the small hit flag is ON (Sa0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0904.

In step Sa0904, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode is set. When a game ball has entered the type determination gate 202 during execution, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination process execution area 64i) in the type-in process ball input process. However, in the case of a big hit triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 222, the value of the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination by the entry of the playing ball into the V winning opening 222). It is stored in the processing execution area 64i). After executing Step Sa0904, the process proceeds to Step Sa0905.

In Step Sa0905, the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON. The V winning jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the setting of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode by the jackpot due to the V winning is completed (FIG. 32: Sa1910). .. After executing Step Sa0905, the process proceeds to Step Sa0906.

In step Sa0906, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 triggered by the small hit in the winning lottery. The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of a normal process described later. After executing Step Sa0906, the process proceeds to Step Sa0910.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa0903 that the small hit flag is not ON (Sa0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0907.

In step Sa0907, a dummy V winning command is set. The dummy V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 triggered by a big hit in the winning lottery. The dummy V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing Step Sa0907, the process proceeds to Step Sa0910.

When it is determined in step Sa0902 that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 222 (Sa0902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa0908.

In step Sa0908, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. When it is determined in step Sa0908 that the game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224 (Sa0908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa0909. On the other hand, in step Sa0908, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the non-V winning opening 224 (Sa0908: NO), the clown entering process is ended as it is.

In step Sa0909, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. The non-V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing Step Sa0909, the process proceeds to Step Sa0910.

In step Sa0910, the clune entry permission flag is turned off. Then, the ball entry process for the clune is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sa1001, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sa1002.

In step Sa1002, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sa1003.

In step Sa1003, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sa1002 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a change type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step Sa1003, the process proceeds to step Sa1004.

In step Sa1004, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sa1005.

In step Sa1005, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sa1006. At Step Sa1006, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step Sa1006, the process proceeds to step Sa1007.

In step Sa1007, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sa1008.

In step Sa1008, an electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sa1009.

In step Sa1009, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sa1003). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sa1009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sa1009: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sa1010 and Sa1011. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sa1010, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sa1011, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Sa1009: YES), the process returns to step Sa1003, and each processing from step Sa1003 to step Sa1008 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sa1003 to step Sa1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 22: Sa1006).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step Sa1101, it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is set to ON when the variation of the symbols in the game times of winning the big hit or the small hit in the winning lottery is finished (Sa1112), and the opening/closing execution mode is set in the game state transition process (FIG. 28). It is turned off to end the process (FIG. 28: Sa1629).

When it is determined in step Sa1101 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sa1101: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special game state, and this game time control is performed without executing any of the processing after step Sa1102. The process ends. That is, in the special game state, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1101 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the special game state is not in progress (Sa1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1102.

In step Sa1102, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step Sa1102, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (Sa1102: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps Sa1103 to Sa1107. In step Sa1103, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sa1103 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (Sa1103: YES), the present game number control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1103 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (Sa1103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1104.

In step Sa1104, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sa1105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sa1105, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sa1106.

In step Sa1106, it is determined whether the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is turned on when the open/close execution mode executed by the jackpot in which the high frequency support mode is set is terminated (see FIG. 35), and is turned off when the high frequency support mode is terminated. (See Figure 34). The PNC count flag is set to confirm the timing to start counting the number of executions of the game game in the high frequency support mode. When it is determined in step Sa1106 that the PNC count flag is ON (Sa1106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1107.

In step Sa1107, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The game frequency counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step Sa1107, the present game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1106 that the PNC count flag is not ON (Sa1106: NO), the game time control processing is ended as it is.

In step Sa1102, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (Sa1102: YES), the process for advancing game times in steps Sa1108 to Sa1113 is executed.

In Step Sa1108, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sa1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 27) described later. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step Sa1108 that the variation time has not elapsed (Sa1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1109 and the variation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing step Sa1109, the game number control process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa1108 that the variation time has elapsed (Sa1108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1110, and variation end processing is executed. The variation end process is performed by changing the symbol display section so that the pattern display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 25) described later and displayed in the symbol display section is displayed in the symbol display section related to the current game time. Display control. After executing step Sa1110, the process proceeds to step Sa1111.

In step Sa1111, it is determined whether either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON. The jackpot flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot in the variation start process (FIG. 25) described later. The small hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the variation start process (FIG. 25) described later. Further, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are turned off in the flag erasing process in the transition process (FIG. 35) at the end of the ending period described later.

When it is determined in step Sa1111 that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sa1111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1112, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa1113 to set the open/close execution mode start command. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa1113, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1111 that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not ON (Sa1111: NO), the game time control processing is ended as it is.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 23: Sa1104).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Sa1201, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the data setting processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6). The information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) stored first in the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 6) in time series. (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step Sa1201, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step Sa1201 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sa1201: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area in steps Sa1202 to Sa1207 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1201 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sa1201: NO). ), the data setting process for the second holding area in steps Sa1208 to Sa1213 is executed.

In step Sa1202, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa1203, in which the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sa1204. In step Sa1204, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sa1205.

In step Sa1205, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sa1205, the process proceeds to step Sa1206.

In step Sa1206, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sa1207.

In step Sa1207, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa1207 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step Sa1201 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sa1201: NO), It proceeds to step Sa1208.

At step Sa1208, the second start pending quantity RbN in the second pending area Rb is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step Sa1209. In step Sa1209, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and in step Sa1210, the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sa1211.

In step Sa1211, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sa1211, the process proceeds to Step Sa1212.

In step Sa1212, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sa1213.

In step Sa1213, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa1213 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: Sa1105) of the game time control process.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sa1301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) by the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 14) is read. Then, it progresses to step Sa1302.

In Step Sa1302, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. That is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 to be processed is the information acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, or the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. It is determined whether the information is acquired as a trigger.

When it is determined in step Sa1302 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1303. In step Sa1303, the hit/miss table for the first starting port is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sa1305.

When it is determined in step Sa1302 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1304. In step Sa1304, the hit/miss table for the second starting opening is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sa1305.

In step Sa1305, it is determined whether or not the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is a big hit in the win lottery. When it is determined in step Sa1305 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1306.

In step Sa1306, a jackpot stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for the big hit, in the current game time when the big hit is won, the variable display is displayed in a state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end. Specifically, by referring to the jackpot stop result table stored in the halt result table storage area 63e, the address information of the jackpot result data corresponding to the jackpot is acquired, and the address information is stored as the halt result address of the RAM 64. Store in the storage area. After executing step Sa1306, the process proceeds to step Sa1307.

In step Sa1307, the jackpot flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sa1308 and performs specific process execution determination processing. The specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute the process described in FIG. 11, that is, the process including the execution of the W chance suggestive effect, in the opening/closing execution mode executed after the end of the game number of the jackpot. This is a process for doing. Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing step Sa1308, the process proceeds to step Sa1315.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1305 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is not a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1309.

In step Sa1309, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery. When it is determined in step Sa1309 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa1309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1310.

In step Sa1310, a small hit stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for small hits, in the current game time when the small hit is won, the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b fluctuates depending on which stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. After executing step Sa1310, the process proceeds to step Sa1311.

In step Sa1311, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing step Sa1311, the process proceeds to step Sa1315.

When it is determined in step Sa1309 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is not a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa1309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1312.

In step Sa1312, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game time to be executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening this time is read. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Sa1312, when it is determined that the reach occurs in the current game time to be executed (Sa1312: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1313.

In step Sa1313, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. Specifically, in the current game time that is the stop result for reach, set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b Perform the processing to do so. More specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sa1313, the process proceeds to step Sa1315.

In step Sa1312, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the executed game time (Sa1312: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1314.

In step Sa1314, a stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. With the stop result setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is the disengagement result, whether the variable display is ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b Is a process for setting. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sa1314, the process proceeds to step Sa1315.

In step Sa1315, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa1315, the process proceeds to step Sa1316.

In step Sa1316, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it determines with the 2nd symbol display part flag of RAM64 not being ON in step Sa1316 (Sa1316:NO), it progresses to step Sa1317 and sets the 1st fluctuation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, and the occurrence of the reach is generated. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sa1315 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1316 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa1316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1318 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, and the occurrence of the reach is also included. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sa1315 are included. After executing step Sa1317 or step Sa1318, the process proceeds to step Sa1319.

In step Sa1319, the fluctuation type command is set. The variation type command includes information on whether or not a big hit, whether or not a reach has occurred, and whether or not a specific process is executed.

The variation command and variation type command set in steps Sa1317 to Sa1319 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and variation type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sa1319, the process proceeds to step Sa1320.

In Step Sa1320, the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing Step Sa1320, the fluctuation start process is ended.

<Specific process execution determination process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be described. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 25: Sa1308) of the fluctuation start process. Here, the specific processing means the series of processing described in FIG. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the specific process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the specific process execution determination process. In step Sa1401, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. As described above, the process described in FIG. 11 is executed when the game time is a big hit in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. Therefore, it is determined whether the game time to be processed is executed upon the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or upon the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In order to do so, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sa1401 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1402. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1401 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa1401: YES), the specific process execution determination process is ended as it is.

In step Sa1402, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game times, which is a big win in the winning lottery, is a predetermined specific value. As described in FIG. 11, the processing shown in FIG. 11 is executed in all cases where the jackpot is selected in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. Only in specific cases. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 in the game time is a predetermined specific value, and if the value is the specific value, execution of the specific process is determined. In the present embodiment, the specific value is two values "0, 1" among the values "0-4" of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit table for the first starting port shown in FIG. Is set to. Therefore, in step Sa1402, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game time, which is a big win in the winning lottery, is "0" or "1". When it is determined in step Sa1402 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a specific value (Sa1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1403. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1402 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not the specific value (Sa1402: NO), the specific process execution determination process is ended as it is.

In step Sa1403, the specific processing flag is turned on. In the processing described with reference to FIG. 11, it is necessary to set an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific process flag is provided to identify whether or not the specific process is executed in the process for determining the open/close scenario (FIG. 30: open/close scenario setting process). After executing step Sa1403, the process proceeds to step SSa1404.

In step Sa1404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the specific processing is executed. The specific process command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa1404, the specific process execution determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 25: Sa1015).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sa1501, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sa1502.

In Step Sa1502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the current game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and when the jackpot flag is ON (Sa1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1503.

In step Sa1503, the variation time table corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1502 that the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time (Sa1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1504 and the small hit is won in the hit lottery related to the current game time Is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (Sa1504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1505.

In step Sa1505, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for small hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1504 that the small hit is not won in the hit lottery related to the current game (Sa1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1506.

In step Sa1506, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in this game time. In the step Sa1502, when the big hit in the winning lottery related to the current game time is not won and the small hit is not won, this process (Sa1506) is executed. And, it is determined whether or not the game times in which the reach occurs among the game times not won for the small hit. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Sa1506: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sa1507. When the presence/absence of reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sa1507, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa1509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1506 that the reach does not occur in the current game (Sa1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1508, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sa1509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is such that the fluctuation time increases as the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN increase. It is set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the variation time of the game time. Is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN increase. However, the variation time may be set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the variation time table for the normal big hit, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 22: Sa1007).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sa1601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the special gaming state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

When it is determined in step Sa1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sa1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa1602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sa1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

In step Sa1603, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sa1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1604, and the timing at which the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b ends. Or not. In step Sa1604, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (Sa1604: NO), the main game state transition processing ends as it is.

When it is determined in step Sa1604 that it is the timing at which the variable display ends (Sa1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1605, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 23: Sa1112), and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 28:). Sa1629).

When it is determined in step Sa1605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sa1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1606. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sa1605: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sa1606, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1606 that the game result of this game time (hit lottery result) is not a small hit (Sa1606: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1607.

In step Sa1607, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Since it is determined in step Sa1606 that the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, the result of the winning lottery in this game time is a big hit. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the support mode in execution of the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sa1607, the process proceeds to step Sa1608.

In step Sa1608, it is determined whether the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot type has been determined, and is turned ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process for determining the jackpot type (FIG. 29: Sa1709), It is turned off immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (Sa1610). When it is determined in step Sa1608 that the type determination completion flag is not ON (Sa1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1609.

In step Sa1609, type determination processing is executed. The type determination process will be described later.

When it is determined in step Sa1608 that the type determination completion flag is ON (Sa1608: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1610 and the type determination completion flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sa1611.

Further, when it is determined in step Sa1606 that the game result of this game time (hit lottery result) is a small hit (Sa1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1611.

In step Sa1611, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting the opening/closing scenario in which the opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the round game are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa1611, the process proceeds to step Sa1612.

In step Sa1612, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa1612, the process proceeds to step Sa1613.

In step Sa1613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot or the jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The information about the jackpot or the jackpot means that the jackpot is won by the hit lottery executed by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, or the jackpot is won, or by the jackpot or the jackpot. Whether a new jackpot is won by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 222 during the executed round game, or a jackpot by a hit lottery executed by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34 Information on whether the player has won the jackpot or the jackpot, or whether the player has newly won the jackpot by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 222 during the round game executed by the jackpot or the jackpot. Is. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sa1613, the process proceeds to step Sa1614 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sa1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1615.

In step Sa1615, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sa1615 that the opening period has ended (Sa1615: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa1616 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sa1617.

In step Sa1617, round display start processing for notifying the type of the opening/closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot type is determined by the type determination process, a display indicating the number of times the round game has been executed that is set for the determined jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39, and the V winning opening 222 is displayed. When the jackpot is confirmed by entering a game ball, the round display unit 39 displays a display indicating the number of times of execution of the round game set for the jackpot type determined by the confirmation of the jackpot. After executing step Sa1617, the process proceeds to step Sa1618.

In step Sa1618, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1602 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sa1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1619, and the special winning opening/closing process is executed. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sa1619, the process proceeds to step Sa1620.

In step Sa1620, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. When it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sa1620: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1621. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1620 that the special winning opening opening/closing processing has not ended (Sa1620: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing processing is ended as it is.

In step Sa1621, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sa1622.

In step Sa1622, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step Sa1622, the process proceeds to Step Sa1623.

In step Sa1623, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). After executing step Sa1623, the process proceeds to step Sa1624.

In step Sa1624, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa1003 in the normal process (FIG. 22). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sa1624, the process proceeds to Step Sa1625.

In step Sa1625, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1601 that the ending period flag is ON (Sa1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1626.

In step Sa1626, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sa1623), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sa1626 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Sa1626: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1627.

In step Sa1627, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa1628, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sa1628, the process proceeds to step Sa1629 to turn off the open/close execution mode flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, in step Sa1626, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (Sa1626: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

Note that in FIG. 28, the process of advancing to the step Sa1611 from the arrow extending from the figure with the letter “A” is displayed, but the figure with the letter “A” is displayed in FIG. 34. It corresponds to the figure with the letter "A". That is, it indicates that the process proceeds from step Sa2112 in the transition process (FIG. 34) at the end of the ending period to step Sa1611 in the game state transition process (FIG. 28). The game state transition processing has been described above.

<Type determination process>
Next, the type determination process will be described. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1609) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the type determination process. In step Sa1701, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned on when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i, and turned off when the jackpot type is determined.

When it is determined in step Sa1701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (Sa1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1702.

In step Sa1702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process is executed in response to winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, and in the ball entry process (FIG. 19) for the type determination gate, After the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area, it is turned off (FIG. 19: Sa0705).

When it is determined in step Sa1702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1703, the type determination permission flag is turned ON, and then the type determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa1702: YES), the type determination process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sa1701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON (Sa1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1704.

In step Sa1704, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sa1704 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1705, the distribution table for the first starting opening is referenced, and the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is displayed. The jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value is specified. Then, it progresses to step Sa1707.

When it is determined in step Sa1704 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sa1704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1706, the distribution table for the second starting opening is referenced, and the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is displayed. The jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value is specified. Then, it progresses to step Sa1707.

In step Sa1707, the jackpot type specified in step Sa1705 or step Sa1706 is set as the jackpot type in this jackpot. After executing step Sa1707, the process proceeds to step Sa1708.

In step Sa1708, the type determination completion flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step Sa1709. In step Sa1709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned off. After that, the type determination process ends.

<Open/close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1611) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In step Sa1801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1801 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1802.

In step Sa1802, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. When it is determined in step SSa1802 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa1802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1803.

In step Sa1803, a big hit opening/closing scenario is set according to the type of big hit in the normal case (when the specific process is not executed).

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening/closing scenario according to this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing scenarios are roughly classified into three categories and set.

The first is the jackpot opening/closing scenario in the normal case shown in FIG. The jackpot opening/closing scenario in the normal case is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in which the specific process is not performed when the big hit is set. As shown in the figure, the open/close scenario is set for each number of round game executions (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed as a round game is set in each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario in a normal case.

The second is the jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 31B when the specific process is executed. The jackpot opening/closing scenario when the specific processing is executed means opening/closing in which the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 is set in the opening/closing execution mode in which the specific processing is performed and the specific processing is performed. It is a scenario. As shown in the figure, the open/close scenario is set for each number of round game executions (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, in each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario when the specific process is executed, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and closed once in the first round (1R) as a round game. In the subsequent round games, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed is set. More specifically, the operations of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described in FIG. 4 are executed in the first round.

The third is a small hit opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 31(c). In the present embodiment, the small hit opening/closing scenario is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode when a small hit is set. In the present embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as the small hit opening/closing scenario has an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door opens/closes only once in the first round (1R) as a round game. ..

The description returns to FIG. In step Sa1803, when the normal big jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 31(a)) corresponding to the jackpot type is set, then the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1802 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1804.

In step Sa1804, a big hit opening/closing scenario (FIG. 31(b)) when a specific process corresponding to the big hit type is executed is set. Then, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa1801 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1805.

In step Sa1805, an opening/closing scenario (FIG. 31(c)) for a small hit is set. Then, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1612) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step Sa1901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1901 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1902.

In step Sa1902, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1902 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1903.

In step Sa1903, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1903 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1904.

In step Sa1904, the opening time corresponding to the specific process is set. Specifically, the time corresponding to the opening period in the specific process described in FIG. 11 is set. In the opening period, the rightward suggestion effect is executed as described in FIG. 11. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa1904, the process proceeds to step Sa1905 to turn off the specific processing flag. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1903 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1906.

In step Sa1906, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting opening is set. In the opening period, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1902 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1907.

In step Sa1907, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting opening is set. In the opening period, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1908.

In step Sa1908, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1908 that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1909.

In step Sa1909, the opening time corresponding to the V winning jackpot is set. In the opening period, an effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 and has become a jackpot (V winning notification effect), and a right-hit suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the V-winning notification effect and the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa1909, the process proceeds to step Sa1910 to turn off the V winning jackpot flag. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sa1908 that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1911.

In step Sa1911, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa1911 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa1911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa1912.

In step Sa1912, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the first starting opening is set. When a small hit is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the process described with reference to FIG. 12 is executed. As shown in FIG. 12, in the opening period, the right-handed suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa1911 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa1911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa1913.

In step Sa1913, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the second starting opening is set. In the opening period, a right-handed suggestion effect and an effect that prompts the player to enter a game ball into the V winning opening 222 are executed. Therefore, the time in which the right-handed suggestion effect and the effect that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 222 can be executed are set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1619) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening/closing process. The main winning opening/closing process is mainly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps Sa2001 to Sa2007 are opening/closing control processing for the first opening/closing door 36b, steps Sa2008 to Sa2014 are opening/closing control processing for the second opening/closing door 213, and steps Sa2015 to Sa2022 are opening/closing control processing for the storage valve 216. Is.

In step Sa2001, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. When it is determined in step Sa2001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sa2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2002.

In step Sa2002, it is determined whether the opening condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing of opening the first opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sa2002 that the opening condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2003.

In step Sa2003, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa2004.

In step Sa2004, the first opening/closing door opening command is set. The first opening/closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The first opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2004, the process proceeds to step Sa2008.

When it is determined in step Sa2002 that the opening condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa2002: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2008.

When it is determined in step Sa2001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (Sa2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2005.

In step Sa2005, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. The condition for closing the first opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of presets for the first special winning opening 36a is set. It is established when it is detected that a game ball has entered. When it is determined in step Sa2005 that the closing condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2006.

In step Sa2006, the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sa2007.

In step Sa2007, the first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2007, the process proceeds to step Sa2008.

When it is determined in step Sa2005 that the closing condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa2005: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2008.

In step Sa2008, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 213 is open. When it is determined in step Sa2008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is not open (Sa2008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2009.

In step Sa2009, it is determined whether the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing of opening the second opening/closing door 213. When it is determined in step Sa2009 that the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa2009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2010.

In step Sa2010, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa2011.

In step Sa2011, the second opening/closing door opening command is set. The second opening/closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 has been opened. The second opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2011, the process proceeds to step Sa2015.

When it is determined in step Sa2009 that the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa2009: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2015.

When it is determined in step Sa2008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is open (Sa2008: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2012.

In step Sa2012, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied. The condition for closing the second opening/closing door 213 is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number set in advance in the second special winning opening 212 is set. It is established when it is detected that the game ball of. When it is determined in step Sa2012 that the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa2012: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2013.

In step Sa2013, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sa2014.

In step Sa2014, the second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 22: Step Sa1003). After executing step Sa2014, the process proceeds to step Sa2015.

When it is determined in step Sa2012 that the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa2012: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa2015.

In step Sa2015, it is determined whether the storage valve 216 is open. When it is determined in step Sa2015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (Sa2015: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2016.

In step Sa2016, it is determined whether the opening condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied. Specifically, the open/close scenario set by the open/close scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing of opening the storage valve 216. When it is determined in step Sa2016 that the opening condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied (Sa2016: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2017.

In step Sa2017, the storage valve 216 is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa2018.

In step Sa2018, the clune entry permission flag is turned ON. The clune entry permission flag is used when a defect or abnormality occurs in the structure of the storage valve 216, and a game ball unintentionally flows from the storage part 218 to the clune 220 through the flow path 211 and enters the V winning opening 222. Even if there is, it is a flag provided so as not to be a big win due to V winning. The clune entry permission flag is turned on when the storage valve 216 is opened in the special winning opening opening/closing process, and is turned off when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 of the clune 220. To be done. After executing step Sa2018, the process proceeds to step Sa2019.

In step Sa2019, a storage valve opening command is set. The storage valve opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 is opened. The storage valve opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2019, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa2016 that the opening condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa2016: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sa2015 that the storage valve 216 is open (Sa2015: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2020.

In step Sa2020, it is determined whether the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied. The closing condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied when it is detected that the continuous opening time (for example, 2 seconds) of the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. When it is determined in step Sa2020 that the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa2020: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2021.

In step Sa2021, the storage valve 216 is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sa2022.

In step Sa2022, a storage valve closing command is set. The storage valve closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 is closed. The storage valve closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2022, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa2020 that the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa2020: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: Sa1628) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sa2101, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot flag is ON. In [Case 2] of FIG. 12, if a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the opening and closing execution mode after a small hit in the game time U2, a new big hit is determined and the opening and closing execution mode ends. Later, a new jackpot-based opening/closing execution mode is started. In this step Sa2101, in order to determine whether or not to proceed such a process, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot flag is ON in the transition process at the end of the ending period.

When it is determined in step Sa2101 that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2102.

In step Sa2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is a big hit with the high-frequency support mode. When it is determined in step Sa2102 that this big hit is the big hit with the high-frequency support mode (Sa2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2103.

In step Sa2103, the value of the game number counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. That is, the number of game times that can be executed in the high frequency support is set in the game number counter PNC. The number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support is set for each jackpot type. The number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support set for each jackpot type has been described with reference to FIG. 9, so description thereof will be omitted here.

After executing step Sa2103, the process proceeds to step Sa2104 to turn on the PNC count flag. Then, it progresses to step Sa2105.

In step Sa2105, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize information regarding the number of game times that can be executed in high frequency support. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa2105, the process proceeds to step Sa2106.

In step Sa2106, a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag and the second symbol display portion flag are turned off. After executing step Sa2106, the process proceeds to step Sa2107.

In step Sa2107, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa2102 that the big hit this time is not the big hit with the high-frequency support mode (Sa2102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2108.

In step Sa2108, a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, the V winning jackpot flag, and the second symbol display portion flag are turned off. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa2101 that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2109.

In Step Sa2109, a V winning process is executed. The V winning process will be described later. After executing step Sa2109, step Sa2110. In step Sa2110, a high frequency support mode command is set. As described above, the high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa2110, the process proceeds to Step Sa2111.

In step Sa2111, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa2111, the process proceeds to Step Sa2112.

In Step Sa2112, the V winning jackpot flag is turned off. After executing step Sa2112, the process proceeds to step Sa1611 in the game state transition process (FIG. 28). As described above, in [Case 2] of FIG. 12, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode after a small hit in the game time U2, a new big hit is determined, After the opening/closing execution mode ends, a new jackpot-based opening/closing execution mode is started. For this reason, after executing step Sa2112, the process proceeds to step Sa1611 in the game state transition process (FIG. 28). Since the game state transition processing (FIG. 28) has already been described, description thereof will be omitted. The transition processing at the end of the ending period has been described above.

<V winning process>
Next, the V winning process will be described. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 34: Sa2109) of the transition process at the end of the ending period.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the V winning process. In Step Sa2201, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa2201 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2202.

In step Sa2202, the jackpot type counter stored in the ball entering process for clune (FIG. 21) is referred to with reference to the distribution table at the time of V winning (FIG. 9B) triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening. The jackpot type in the V winning jackpot is specified based on the value of C2. After executing step Sa2202, the process proceeds to step Sa2204.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa2201 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2203.

In Step Sa2203, with reference to the distribution table for the second starting opening (FIG. 9C), based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for clune (FIG. 21), the V winning jackpot is won. Identify the jackpot type. After executing step Sa2203, the process proceeds to step Sa2204.

As can be seen from step Sa2202 and step Sa2203, even if the game ball enters the same V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot, a small hit by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. As a result, when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, a small hit occurs. As a result, the distribution table to be referred to is different from the case where the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot.

In step Sa2204, the jackpot type specified in step Sa2202 or step Sa2203 is set as the jackpot type in the V winning jackpot. After executing Step Sa2204, the V winning process is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The electric power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 22: Sa1008).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sa2301, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sa2301 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sa2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2302.

In step Sa2302, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sa2302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sa2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2303.

In step Sa2303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sa2303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sa2303: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2304.

In step Sa2304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Sa2304 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sa2304: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa2305, and after setting the off display, the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa2304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sa2304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2306.

In step Sa2306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Sa2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is "0" (Sa2306: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0” (Sa2306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2307.

In step Sa2307, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sa2307 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (Sa2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2308.

In step Sa2308, electric lottery open lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Winning (see FIG. 10(b)). Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sa2309.

In step Sa2309, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sa2308 is support win. When it is determined in step Sa2309 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sa2309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2310, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa2311.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa2309 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not the support winning (Sa2309: NO), the process of step Sa2310 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sa2311.

In step Sa2311, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The game number counter is decremented by 1 each time one game time is completed in the high frequency support mode. When it is determined in step Sa2311 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (Sa2311: NO), the main power combination support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2311 that the number-of-games counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step Sa2312, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing Step Sa2312, the process proceeds to Step Sa2313.

In step Sa2313, the PNC count flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sa2314.

In step Sa2314, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

The low frequency support mode command set in step Sa2314 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal external output process (FIG. 22: step Sa1003). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support mode command, and executes the corresponding process.

When it is determined in step Sa2307 that the high frequency support mode is not set (Sa2307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2315, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Sa2316.

In step Sa2316, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sa2315 is support win. When it is determined in step Sa2316 that the support is not won (Sa2316: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2316 that the support is won (Sa2316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2317, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa2302 that the support winning flag is ON (Sa2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2318, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Sa2318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2318: NO), since the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in the universal figure unit 38, the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa2318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa2318: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2319.

In step Sa2319, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sa2320, and the in-support flag is turned on and the support win flag is turned off. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa2301 that the in-support flag is ON (Sa2301: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa2321 to execute electric role opening/closing control processing for opening/closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. The power combination opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing Step Sa2321, the processing for main power combination support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 36: Sa2321) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step Sa2401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Sa2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2402.

In step Sa2402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sa2402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2402: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa2402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2403, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sa2403, the process proceeds to step Sa2404.

In step Sa2404, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa2405 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Sa2405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sa2405: NO), the main power combination opening/closing control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa2405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sa2405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2406 and the in-support flag is turned off. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Sa2401 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sa2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa2407 and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sa2407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa2407: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa2407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa2408, and the opening process for controlling the electric auditors' auction 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Sa2409.

In step Sa2409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sa2409: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sa2410 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step Sa2410 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sa2410: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa2411 and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa2409 that it is the open/close execution mode (Sa2409: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Sa2410 (Sa2410: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sa2412 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

<<A6>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, the effect operation buttons 24, the speaker 46, various lamps 47 are connected, and the display control device 100 is connected.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<A7>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa3101, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step Sa3101, the process proceeds to step Sa3102.

In step Sa3102, a pending command handling process is executed. In the hold command handling process, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that the hold command is received, the process corresponding to the hold command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sa3102, the process proceeds to step Sa3103.

In step Sa3103, a game game effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the variation type command are received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that these commands are received, the effect to be executed in the game time is determined. The content (type) is decided, and the decided effect is set to be executed in the game time. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3103, the process proceeds to step Sa3104.

In step Sa3104, a standby period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the standby period described above is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed in the standby period. The details of the standby period effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa3104, the process proceeds to Step Sa3105.

In step Sa3105, an opening period effect setting process is executed. In the opening period effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that the opening command is received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the opening period is determined. , Is set to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3105, the process proceeds to step Sa3106.

In step Sa3106, the opening/closing process period effect setting process is executed. In the opening/closing process period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing process period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed in the opening/closing process period. Details of the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described later. After executing step Sa3106, the process proceeds to step Sa3107.

In step Sa3107, ending period effect setting processing is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether the ending command is received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that the ending command is received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the ending period is determined. , The determined effect is set to be executed in the ending period. The details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa3107, the process proceeds to step Sa3108.

In step Sa3108, command transmission processing is executed. In the command transmission process, various effect commands for displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect set in the various effect setting processes described above are transmitted to the display control device 100. After executing step Sa3108, the process proceeds to step Sa3109.

In step Sa3109, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes of steps Sa3102 to Sa3107. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps Sa3102 to Sa3107. After executing step Sa3109, the process proceeds to step Sa3110.

In step Sa3110, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the processes of steps Sa3102 to Sa3107. That is, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the voice corresponding to the effect set in steps Sa3102 to Sa3107 is output. After executing Step Sa3110, the timer interrupt processing is ended.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3102).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. In step Sa3201, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa3201 that the hold command is received (Sa3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3201 that the hold command is not received (Sa3201: NO), the hold command handling process is ended.

In step Sa3202, update processing at the time of entering the ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the number of the holding information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are obtained. A process for allowing the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of pieces of hold information and the total number of pieces of hold information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Sa3202 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as “first holding number”, and based on the entry of the gaming balls into the second starting opening 34. The number of pieces of the acquired reservation information is also referred to as "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as "total reserved number". After executing Step Sa3202, the process proceeds to Step Sa3203.

In step Sa3203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of pieces of reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 identified in step Sa3202, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled based on the acquired number of hold information. After executing Step Sa3203, the present hold command handling process is ended.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 40: Sa3202) of the hold command handling process.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of entering a ball. In step Sa3301, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read in the current timer interrupt process is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sa3301 that the hold command which is the read target in the current timer interrupt process is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (Sa3301: YES). Then, the process proceeds to step Sa3302, and the update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The first holding number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound-light side MPU 92, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that has been read in the current timer interrupt processing. After executing step Sa3302, the process proceeds to step Sa3304 described later.

When it is determined in step Sa3301 that the hold command which is the read target in the timer interrupt process this time is not transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (Sa3301: NO), that is, When it is determined that the hold command is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the process proceeds to step Sa3303, and the counter area 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is provided. Update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area is executed. The second holding number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound-light side MPU 92, the number of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity contained in the command which is the target of reading in the current timer interrupt processing. After executing Step Sa3303, the process proceeds to Step Sa3304.

The reason why the processing in steps Sa3302 and Sa3303 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 In contrast, while the hold information is stored and held, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step Sa3304, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending quantity counter area is the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the pending information acquired based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying the sum of the number of the sound light MPU 92 and the number of the sound light MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step Sa3304, the update process at the time of main entrance is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game game effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3103) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. In step Sa3401, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the variation type command are received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sa3401 that the variation command and the variation type command have not been received (Sa3401: NO), the game game effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3401 that the variation command and the variation type command are received (Sa3401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3402.

In step Sa3402, the information contained in the received variation command and variation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game time to be started is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the game concerned. The presence/absence of a big hit, the presence/absence of a small hit, the presence/absence of a reach, and the variation time in the game time are read and stored as the result of the winning lottery in the game. Then, it progresses to step Sa3403.

In step Sa3403, it is determined whether the specific processing command is received from the main MPU 62. As described above, the specific processing command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery in the game times is a big hit and it is determined to execute the specific processing shown in the above-mentioned case 1. .. When it is determined in step Sa3403 that the specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3403: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sa3404 and corresponds to the game times for executing the specific processing (processing shown in case 1). The created effect pattern is set to be executed in the game time. Then, the game game effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3403 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3405, and the result of the winning lottery of the current game is the first start opening 33. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit based on the entry of a game ball into. In the present embodiment, the small hit that is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as "special 1 small hit", and the winning is based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The small hit is also called "special 2 small hit".

In step Sa3405, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery of the current game time is the special 1 small hit (Sa 3405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3406, and the effect pattern corresponding to the special 1 small hit is set. Set to run in. The effect pattern corresponding to the special 1 small hit is an effect pattern including an effect executed in the game game shown in the above-mentioned case 2. Then, the game game effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa3405, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery of this game time is not the special 1 small hit (Sa3405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3407, and other results of the winning lottery (specific process is executed. It is set to execute an effect pattern corresponding to a big hit that does not occur, a small hit that is not the special 1 small hit, a miss, etc. in the game time. Then, the game game effect setting process is ended.

<Standby period effect setting process>
Next, the standby period effect setting process will be described. The standby period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the standby period effect setting process. In step Sa3501, it is determined whether the specific processing command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sa3501 that the specific processing command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3502, and the sound/light specific processing flag is turned on. The sound-light specific process flag is a flag stored in the sound-light side RAM 94, and the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the specific process (case 1) described above is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. This is a flag for determination. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag being ON, the effect corresponding to the above-described specific processing (case 1) is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step Sa3502, the process proceeds to step Sa3503. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3501 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3501: NO), step Sa3502 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sa3503.

In step Sa3503, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode start command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sa3503 that the open/close execution mode start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3503: NO), the standby period effect setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3503 that the opening/closing execution mode start command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3504 and whether the sound/light specific processing flag is ON. Determine whether or not.

When it is determined in step Sa3504 that the sound/light specific processing flag is ON, that is, when case 1 described above is satisfied (Sa3504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3505, and right-handed suggestion effect and The W chance suggestion effect is set to be executed. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3504 that the sound/light specific processing flag is not ON (Sa3504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3506, and the right hit suggestion effect is set to be executed in the standby period. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening period performance setting process>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be described. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the opening period effect setting process. In step Sa3601, it is determined whether the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the opening period). ing. Therefore, the sound emission control device 90, based on the information included in the received opening command, results of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the opening period). ) Can be grasped. When it is determined in step Sa3601 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3601: NO), the present opening period effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3601 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3602.

In step Sa3602, based on the information contained in the received opening command, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit. In step Sa3602, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (Sa3602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3603 and the opening effect corresponding to the type of the big hit. Is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed suggestion effect is set to be executed in the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3602, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not a big hit (Sa3602: NO), that is, the trigger to shift to the open/close execution mode this time is set. If the result of the random hit lottery is a small hit, the process proceeds to step Sa3604.

In step Sa3604, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a special 1 small hit. In step Sa3604, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a special small hit (Sa3604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3605, and the special small hit is made. The corresponding opening effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in Case 1 described above, the right hit suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect are set to be executed in the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa3604, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the current open/close execution mode is not the special 1 small hit (Sa3604: NO), that is, the shift to the current open/close execution mode. If the result of the winning lottery that triggered the above is a special 2 small hit, the process proceeds to step Sa3606, and it is set to execute the opening effect corresponding to the special 2 small hit in the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed suggestion effect is set to be executed in the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening/closing process period effect setting process>
Next, the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described. The opening/closing process period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3106) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing. In step Sa3701, the first chance effect setting process is executed. In the first chance effect setting process, the process relating to the setting of the first chance effect in Case 1 and Case 2 described above is executed. Details of the first chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa3701, the process proceeds to Step Sa3702.

In step Sa3702, a second chance effect setting process during non-storage is executed. In the non-reserved second chance effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is stored in the storage section 218 in the above-described case 1 and case 2, and if the game ball is not stored in the storage section 218, 2 Set to execute the second chance production. Details of the second chance effect setting process during non-storage will be described later. After executing Step Sa3702, the process proceeds to Step Sa3703.

In step Sa3703, V winning effect setting processing is executed. In the V winning effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the game balls are stored in the V winning opening 222, and when the game balls enter the V winning opening 222, the V winning effect is set to be executed. The details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa3703, the process proceeds to Step Sa3704.

In step Sa3704, the second chance effect setting process for V non-winning prize is executed. In the second non-winning prize effect setting process, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 218 in the above-described case 1 and case 2, but the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 222, and the non-V winning opening 224. When a game ball is entered, the second chance effect is set to be executed. The details of the second chance effect setting process when there is no V winning will be described later. After executing Step Sa3704, the process proceeds to Step Sa3705.

In step Sa3705, it is set to execute an effect for the opening/closing processing period corresponding to another jackpot type. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the jackpot type in which the opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 does not open is selected, opening/closing of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. Set the effect to be executed during the processing period. After executing step Sa3705, the main opening/closing process period effect setting process is ended.

<First chance performance setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be described. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3701) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the first chance effect setting process. In Step Sa3801, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing door opening command is received from the main MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened in the winning lottery when the big hit for executing the specific process is won and when the small win is won. Further, the second opening/closing door opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231. Therefore, the voice emission control device 90 grasps the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231 based on the information included in the received second opening/closing door opening command. can do. When it is determined in step Sa3801 that the second opening/closing door opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3801: NO), the first chance opportunity effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3801 that the second opening/closing door opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3802.

In step Sa3802, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sa3802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit (Sa3802: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a big hit to execute the specific process, the process proceeds to step Sa3803, and it is set to execute the first chance effect in case 1 described above. After executing Step Sa3803, the first-time chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big hit (Sa3802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3804.

In step Sa3804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special small hit. In step Sa3804, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small hit (Sa3804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3805, and 1 in case 2 described above. Set to execute the second chance production. After executing Step Sa3805, the first chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not the special 1 small hit (Sa3804: NO), the first chance chance effect setting process is performed as it is. finish.

<Second chance effect setting process when not storing>
Next, the second chance effect setting process during non-storage will be described. The non-storage second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3702) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process during non-storage. In Step Sa3901, it is determined whether or not the second special winning opening entry command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa3901 that the second special winning opening entry command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3904 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3901 that the second special winning opening ball entry command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3901: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sa3902, and the second large winning opening entrance for sound light is entered. It is determined whether the flag is ON. The second big winning opening entrance ball for sound and light is a flag stored in the sound-light side RAM 94, and whether or not a game ball has entered the second big winning opening 212, that is, the game ball is a storage unit. This is a flag for the audio emission control device 90 to determine whether or not it is stored in 218.

When it is determined in step Sa3902 that the sound/light second big winning opening ball flag is not ON (Sa3902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3903, and the sound/light second big winning opening ball flag is turned ON. To do. Then, it progresses to step Sa3904. On the other hand, in step Sa3902, when it is determined that the second big winning opening for sound light entrance flag is ON (Sa3902: YES), the process directly proceeds to step Sa3904. That is, only when the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212, and the second large winning opening for sound and light entrance flag is not ON, the second large winning opening for sound and light. Turn on the ball entry flag.

In Step Sa3904, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing door closing command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa3904 that the second opening/closing door closing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3904: NO), the second non-storage-time second chance effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3904 that the second opening/closing door closing command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa3904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3905.

In Step Sa3905, it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening for sound/light entering ball flag is ON, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second big winning opening 212 and is stored in the storage unit 218. To do. When it is determined in step Sa3905 that the second large winning opening for sound and light entrance flag is ON (Sa3905: YES), the second non-storing second chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa3905 that the second large winning opening for sound light entrance flag is not ON (Sa3905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3906.

In step Sa3906, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit. In step Sa3906, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit (Sa3906: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a big hit to execute the specific process, the process proceeds to step Sa3907, and the second chance effect and the big hit notification effect in case 1 described above are set to be executed by the second R of the opening/closing process period. To do. Then, it progresses to step Sa3908 and sets the production|presentation performed in the opening/closing process period after 2R. After that, the second chance effect setting process during non-storage is ended.

In step Sa3906, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big hit (Sa3906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3909, and the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is triggered. It is determined whether or not the result of the hit lottery is a special 1 small hit. In step Sa3909, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small hit (Sa3909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa3910, and 2 in case 2 described above. It is set to execute the second chance effect and the off-point notification effect. After that, the second chance effect setting process during non-storage is ended.

<V winning performance setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be described. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3703) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. In step Sa4001, it is determined whether or not the V winning command is received from the main MPU 62. The V winning command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 triggered by a small hit in the winning lottery.

When it is determined in step Sa4001 that the V winning command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4002, and the V winning jackpot effect is set to be executed. As described above, the V winning jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 and also suggests a jackpot. After executing step Sa4002, the process proceeds to step Sa4005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa4001 that the V winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa4003.

In step Sa4003, it is determined whether or not a dummy V winning command is received from the main MPU 62. The dummy V winning command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 triggered by a big hit in the winning lottery.

When it is determined in step Sa4003 that the dummy V winning command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4004, and the V winning jackpot effect is set to be executed. As described above, the V winning jackpot effect is an effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 and also suggests a jackpot. As described above, in this embodiment, the V winning jackpot effect set to be executed in step Sa4002 and the V winning jackpot effect set to be executed in step Sa4004 have the same or similar effects. Is. After executing step Sa4004, the process proceeds to step Sa4005.

In step Sa4005, the above-mentioned second big winning opening for sound and light entrance flag is turned off. After that, this V winning performance setting processing ends.

<Second chance performance setting process when V is not winning>
Next, the second chance effect setting process when there is no V winning will be described. The second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning V is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 45: Sa3704) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when there is no V winning. In Step Sa4101, it is determined whether or not the V non-winning command is received from the main MPU 62. The V non-winning command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the game ball enters the non-V winning opening 224. When it is determined in step Sa4101 that the V non-winning command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4101: NO), the second V non-winning chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa4101 that the V non-prize command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4102.

In step Sa4102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sa4102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit (Sa4102: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a big hit to execute the specific process, the process proceeds to step Sa4103, and it is set to execute the second chance effect and the big hit notification effect in case 1 described above. After executing step Sa4103, the process proceeds to step Sa4104 to turn off the above-mentioned second special winning opening for sound/light entrance ball. After that, the second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning of the V finishes. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa4102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big hit (Sa4102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa4105.

In step Sa4105, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small hit. In step Sa4105, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small hit (Sa4105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4106, and 2 in case 2 described above. It is set to execute the second chance effect and the off-point notification effect. Then, it progresses to above-mentioned step Sa3804, and turns off the 2nd special winning opening entrance ball for sound lights. After that, the second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning of the V finishes. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa4105 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not the special 1 small hit (Sa4105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa3804 described above, and the sound light is emitted. Turn off the second big winning opening ball flag. After that, the second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning of the V finishes.

<Ending period performance setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be described. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 39: Sa3107) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ending period effect setting process. In step Sa4201, it is determined whether the ending command is received from the main MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the ending command includes the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the ending period). Therefore, the sound emission control device 90, based on the information included in the received ending command, the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the ending period). ) Can be grasped. When it is determined in step Sa4201 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4201: NO), the ending period effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa4201 that the ending command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa4201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4202.

In step Sa4202, based on the information included in the received ending command, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit. If it is determined in step Sa4202 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (Sa4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa4203 and the ending effect corresponding to the type of the big hit. Is set to be executed in the ending period. Then, the ending period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa4202 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (Sa4202: NO), that is, the trigger to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is set. If the result of the hit lottery is a small hit, the ending period effect setting process is ended as it is.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sa4301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sa4302.

In step Sa4302, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sa4401, a command storing process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image or draws a new image while the image is being drawn. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa4501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 52), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sa4501), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the manner of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode is designed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the image is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sa4502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sa4501) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sa4503.

In step Sa4503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (Sa4502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sa4504.

In step Sa4504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sa4503) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step Sa4505 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, when the jackpot is executed in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (case 1) and when the jackpot is won (case 2) In the case of), although the pattern of the symbol showing the result of the winning lottery is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound. The production to do is not executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound cannot recognize the lottery result at the game time when the game time is over. As a result, even if the small hit is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the big hit is won.

Further, after the game time is over, in both case 1 and case 2, right hit suggestion effect and W chance suggestion effect are executed, so during the period when the effect is executed after the game time is over. Also, in the winning lottery, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the big hit is won rather than the small hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the type of the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, the game ball is determined by entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the jackpot type is determined, the round lamp of the round display unit 39 is lit with a display according to the number of times of execution of the round game corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if you have won the small hit, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of the game, regardless of whether you have won the big hit or the small hit, so after the end of the game, you will see the round lamp. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from distinguishing whether the big hit or the small win has been won in the game time.

As a result, the player does not recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player makes a right hit and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game, On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the jackpot is won rather than the jackpot for a relatively long period. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player for a relatively long period even in the period after the game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit or the small hit is started, It can be noticed. In addition, when determining the jackpot type, the player is allowed to hit the right side and the game ball is thrown into the type determination gate 202, so that the player is actively involved in determining the jackpot type, and Thus, it is possible to further focus on the game in the period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. , The type of jackpot triggered by the entry into the V winning opening 222 is determined. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the big hit in the hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start opening 33, the big hit type is determined by entering the game ball in the type determination gate 202. , There is relatively no sense of speed regarding the progress of the game until the round game is started. As a result, the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 and when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222. In this case, the progress of the game can be slowed down, the expectation of the player for the game can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In Case 1, the jackpot was won in the winning lottery at the game time U1, and the jackpot was won in the winning lottery at the game time U1 even though the game ball was subsequently entered into the V winning opening 222. The round game that is being executed as an opportunity continues, and the jackpot triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222 is not settled, and new opening and closing based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 Run mode is also not started. Furthermore, the game ball is not entered into the V winning opening 222, and no special privilege is given to the player or the game state is changed. On the other hand, in case 2, when a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game time U2, and then a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, a big hit is determined, and a small win is won in the winning lottery in the game time U2. After the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning is ended, a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started. That is, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, it may or may not be granted to the player when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. Therefore, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player guess whether the privilege is given or not and to give the player an expectation that the privilege is given.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, whether the result of the winning lottery in the game times that triggered the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is a big hit or a small hit is a game. It is possible to make the player guess and give a greater expectation to the player.

Further, in Case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the game ball is V if the benefit is not given when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. When the player enters the winning opening 222, the V winning jackpot effect is executed. In Case 2, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, a privilege is given when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. When the player has entered the ball, the V-prize jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is not given, the bonus is given to the player who recognizes that the V winning jackpot has been executed. It is possible to add a sense of expectation.

In the case of Case 1, even if the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 222 in the first chance production even though the privilege triggered by the entry is not given. Since the effect of prompting the player to perform the ball is executed, it is possible to give the player, who has recognized that the effect has been executed, the expectation that the privilege may be given. It is possible to promote the launch of the game ball in such a manner that the game ball enters the winning opening 222.

Further, in Case 1, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the first round of the round game executed when the big hit in the winning lottery in the game time U1 is won is ended, and 2 Despite the start of the second round (the second round), in the second and subsequent rounds, an effect indicating that a new opening/closing execution mode has been started is executed. By doing so, the player can be recognized as if a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is started, and the player is given an expectation. be able to. That is, it is possible to give a new sense of expectation to the player during the round game which is substantially executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game cycle U1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is selected in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the specific process is executed by the specific process execution determination process. The presence/absence is determined, and then, the number of executions of the round game corresponding to the jackpot is determined. That is, whether or not to open/close the second opening/closing door 213 as a round game and the number of executions of the round game are separately determined. Therefore, the round is determined by the combination of whether the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed and the number of executions of the round game. It is possible to realize various operation modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<A8>> Modification of First Embodiment α:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<A8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described first embodiment α, in the effect performed in the game time executed in the case 1, that is, in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. An effect executed in the game time when the jackpot is won and the specific process execution determination process determines that the specific process is executed, and an effect executed in the game time executed in the case of Case 2, That is, the same effect pattern is set as the effect to be executed in the game time when the small hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. It may be configured. By setting the same effect pattern in the case 1 and the case 2, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether it is the case 1 or the case 2, and the game time is a lottery. It is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation that he or she has won.

In addition, an effect pattern table in which a plurality of special effect patterns used in the case 1 and the case 2 are set corresponding to the variation times of the game times is provided, and the effect pattern table is used to change the variation times of the game times. It may be configured to select a performance pattern. By selecting an effect pattern from the same effect pattern table in the case 1 and the case 2, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is the case 1 or the case 2, and the game time concerned is determined. It is possible to give the player an expectation that he or she has won the winning lottery.

<<A8-2>> Modification 2:
In the first embodiment α, when the jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the jackpot is triggered when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. Although the structure for determining the type is adopted, as in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, the gaming ball is the V winning opening. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type is determined by entering a game ball in the type determination gate 202 after entering the ball 222 and determining the jackpot. By doing this, when the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 The type of jackpot is determined in three cases: when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times, which is executed as a result, and when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222 and the jackpot is confirmed. The processing to be performed can be unified, and the processing can be simplified.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated ball-in portion (V-winning jackpot type determining gate) for determining the jackpot type triggered by the game ball entering the V-winning hole 222 is adopted. Then, a configuration for arranging the V winning jackpot type determination gate downstream from the V winning opening 222 with respect to the circulation direction of the game balls may be adopted. In this case, the jackpot type determination executed when the game ball enters the V winning jackpot type determination gate is performed by using the same process as the type determination process in the first embodiment α described above. Can be simplified.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determination gate is arranged at a position that is not downstream from the V winning opening 222 in the flow direction of the game ball. For example, when the jackpot is determined when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the V winning jackpot classification determination gate is arranged at a position where the player cannot enter the ball unless the mode of firing the game ball is changed. By doing so, the operation mode of the operation handle 25 is changed variously, and the game is executed by the player, so that the flow of the game can be changed frequently, and the player actively participates in the game. It is possible to promote participation and add intonation to the player's expectations.

<<A8-3>> Modification 3:
In the first embodiment α, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the game ball after the end of the game time. Although a configuration for executing the type determination process and determining the jackpot type is adopted when the player enters the type determination gate 202, another configuration can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the variation start process in the game time. That is, the jackpot type is determined before the game times are completed. Then, when the game time is a big hit, the round lamp is turned on in a display mode corresponding to the determined big hit type when the game time is finished, but the lighting timing is set to the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. It is set to the end point (immediately before the start of the opening/closing processing period) and the opening period is set longer than usual. By doing this, until the round lamp is lit, the lottery result of the winning lottery is not recognized, and the player is expected to win the jackpot for a relatively long period of time. Can be given. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player for a relatively long period even in the period after the game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit or the small hit is started, It can be noticed. In the first embodiment α, the round lamp is turned on at the end of the opening period, but it may be turned on at the start of the opening period.

<<A8-4>> Modification 4:
In the first embodiment α described above, in the opening/closing process executed in the case 1 and the case 2, the opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens/closes once is set. An open/close scenario in which 213 opens/closes multiple times may be adopted. By doing so, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 222 is improved, and the player's expectation can be improved.

<<A8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described first embodiment α, the specific process execution determination process is performed when the variation of the game number is started when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, more specifically, the variation start process ( Although it was executed in FIG. 25), it may be executed at another timing as long as the game time ends and the waiting period starts. For example, it may be executed in the game state transition processing. By doing so, for example, an effect that causes the player to operate the effect operation button 24 during the game time that is executed by the game ball entering the first start opening 33 is executed, and the effect is executed. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific process execution determination process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the specific process based on whether or not the player has operated the effect operation button 24. Further, for example, whether or not to execute the specific process based on whether or not the game ball has entered a specific ball entrance during the game time that is executed by the game ball having entered the 1 start opening 33 You may employ|adopt the structure which performs the specific process execution determination process which determines. That is, in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, depending on the mode of progress of the game during the game time, You may employ|adopt the structure which determines the aspect of the process in the opening/closing execution mode performed after the end of the said game time. By adopting such a configuration, when the jackpot is won, the player can concentrate on the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game time.

<<A8-6>> Modification 6:
In the first embodiment α, when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the suspended game times is determined by the first determination process, and as a result of the first determination process, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery of the held game times. The specific process execution determination process is executed as the process in the destination determination process, and it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process as shown in Case 1 before the reserved game time is executed as the game time. May be. Then, in the game times executed before the holding game times are executed as the game times, an effect (specific process execution suggesting effect) that suggests that the specific process is executed later may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an expectation about the pending game times to be executed later. In addition, it may be determined by the previous determination process whether or not the case 2 in the pending game time, and similarly, the specific process execution suggesting effect may be executed. By doing so, the player can broaden the range of guesses regarding the rewards when the reserved game times are executed as the game times, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<A8-7>> Modification 7:
In the first embodiment α described above, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the waiting period (see FIG. 11) is the period from the end of the game time in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery to the start of the opening period. You may employ|adopt the structure which changes the right-handed suggestion production which changes to stepwise with progress of time of a waiting period. The waiting period is continued until the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, starting from the time when the game number of the big hit in the winning lottery is finished. In other words, the opening period is not started unless the game ball enters the type determination gate 202. If the player does not recognize that he has to hit the right hand and is left-handed, the game will not proceed as intended and will reduce the player's expectation.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion of right-handing to the player is gradually strengthened as the waiting period elapses from the time when the game number of the big hit in the winning lottery is over. For example, as compared with the right hit suggestion effect that is executed by the elapsed time of the waiting period from 0 second to 5 seconds, the right hit suggestion effect that is executed by the elapsed time of the waiting period is from 5 seconds to 10 seconds is more player. It is a content that strongly urges the player to make a right-handed stroke, and compared with a right-handed suggestion effect that the elapsed time of the waiting period is executed by 5 seconds to 10 seconds, the elapsed time of the waiting period is 10 seconds to 15 seconds. Alternatively, the right-handing suggestion effect executed in step 1 may be adopted so that the player is strongly encouraged to right-hand.

As a right-handing suggestion effect to be executed in the waiting period, for example, by increasing (or decreasing) the sound suggesting right-handing stepwise as the waiting period elapses, the player is prompted to make a right-handing. The mode may be strengthened stepwise, and by gradually increasing the size of the image showing right hitting (for example, the image of the arrow pointing to the right) as the waiting period elapses, The mode of urging right-handing may be strengthened stepwise, or the brightness, brightness, color, etc. of the image showing right-handing may be changed stepwise as the waiting period elapses (for example, increase or decrease). By so doing, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of urging the player to make a right-handed stroke is gradually strengthened, or the tone of the voice guidance for guiding the right-handed player as the waiting period elapses stepwise. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of urging the player to make a right-handed stroke is strengthened in a stepwise manner.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the player is making a right hit during the waiting period, and it is possible to promote the smooth progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and improve the interest of the game.

<<A8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above-described first embodiment α, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration including one type determination gate, but may have a configuration including a plurality of type determination gates. For example, if one is left-handed, a type determination gate (hereinafter, also referred to as a left-side type determination gate) is provided at a position where the game ball is likely to enter (for example, the left side of the game board 30), and right-handed A configuration may be adopted in which one type determination gate (hereinafter, right side type determination gate) is provided at a position where a game ball easily enters (for example, on the right side of the game board 30). Then, for each value of the hit random number counter C1 that is set to win the jackpot in the winning table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 7), after winning the jackpot, the left side determination gate or the right side type is determined. It is set in advance which of the determination gates the jackpot type is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate. Then, after the number of times of winning the jackpot is over, an effect (left hitting suggestion effect) that suggests left-handing is executed according to the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, or a right-handing suggestion effect. It is determined whether to execute, and the suggestive effect is executed according to the result of the determination. By doing this, the player needs to determine the operation method of the operation handle 25 after the game number of the jackpot is over, and the player can be actively involved in the game. , It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game.

Also, for each value of the hit random number counter C1 that is set to win the jackpot in the winning/losing table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 7), the jackpot of the game ball into the left side type determination gate causes a jackpot. A value that determines the type, a value that determines the jackpot type by entering the game ball into the right side type determination gate, a jackpot type that is determined by entering the game ball into either the left side type determination gate or the right side type determination gate It may be configured such that the value to be set is set.

<<A8-9>> Modification 9:
In the first embodiment α, an effect (W chance) suggesting that two opportunities (chances) for winning the jackpot are prepared for each of the waiting period in case 1 and the opening period in case 2. Although the configuration is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which a production (single chance production) that suggests that an opportunity (chance) for winning the jackpot is prepared once is adopted. In this case, since the second chance effect can be omitted in each case, the process necessary for executing the second chance effect can be omitted and the process can be simplified.

Further, in Case 1 and Case 2, a configuration in which the W chance effect is executed and the single chance effect is executed may be combined. By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the game in the period after the game time is over.

<<A8-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described first embodiment α, entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when the big hit in the winning lottery is won is substantially invalid, and the small hit in the winning lottery. In this configuration, only the ball entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when the winning is won is effectively enabled. Therefore, a configuration provided with an operation mechanism (hereinafter, also referred to as a V winning assistance mechanism) for assisting the game ball to enter the V winning opening 222 only in the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery May be adopted.

As the V winning assistance mechanism, for example, of the V winning openings 222 and the non-V winning openings 224 provided in the clune 220, a mechanism that temporarily closes only the non-V winning opening 224 (hereinafter also referred to as a non-V winning opening closing mechanism). ) May be adopted. In this case, the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, if the entry to the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery is substantially invalid, Since it assists the game balls to enter the winning opening 222, the operation of the non-V winning opening closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is assisted, and the expectation of the player who recognizes that the game ball entered the V winning opening 222 is expected. Can be improved. That is, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation without substantially affecting the state of progress of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the control of the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism is executed by control means other than the main control device 60 (for example, the sound emission control device 90). For example, in case 1, the voice emission control device 90 decides to operate the V winning assistance mechanism by receiving the specific processing command, and controls the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism at the start of the opening/closing processing period. The configuration for closing the non-V winning opening 224 may be adopted, or when the game ball is stored in the storing portion 218, the non-V winning opening 224 is closed at the timing of opening the storage valve 216. A configuration may be adopted. If such a configuration is adopted, the control of the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism is performed by the control means other than the main controller 60, so that the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced.

The V winning assistance mechanism is not limited to the non-V winning opening closing mechanism described above, and any other mechanism may be used as long as it is a mechanism for assisting the game ball to enter the V winning opening 222. May be. For example, a mechanism for moving the flow passage 211 so that the outlet of the flow passage 211 for letting the game balls out to the clune 220 is located right above the V winning opening 222 may be adopted. Moreover, you may employ|adopt the mechanism which arrange|positions a magnet in the vicinity of the V winning opening 222 temporarily.

<<B>> First embodiment β:
Next, the first embodiment β will be described. The main difference between the first embodiment β and the first embodiment α is that in the first embodiment β, in the game times executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. When a big win is won in the winning lottery, if the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the round game that is executed with the big hit, if the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. The point is that the jackpot based on the ball is decided, the round game being executed is interrupted, and the round game based on the jackpot newly decided by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is executed. The details will be described below.

<<B1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 54 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment β. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of a lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of a big hit, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a type determination gate 202, and a variable winning device 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a V winning mechanism 210. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even if the game balls pass through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

The variable winning a prize device 36 is provided with a first big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and a first opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the first big winning opening 36a. The first opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the first big winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 and the second opening/closing door 213 of the V winning mechanism 210 described later is executed. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After is satisfied, the state transits to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The type determination gate 202 is a ball entrance that is used to determine the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery. Specifically, a big win is won in a winning lottery in a predetermined game time, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time. When the open/close execution mode is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an effect (right hitting suggestion effect) that guides the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30. According to the right-handed suggestion effect, the player operates the operation handle 25 to shoot a game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the game ball hits the jackpot. The main controller 60 executes a type determination process for determining the type. Then, the type of jackpot is determined by the type determination process. The type determination process executed by the main control device 60 and the jackpot type set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display is made to display corresponding to the lottery result , The variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the winning lottery is executed when the game balls enter the first starting opening 33 are also referred to as the first starting opening game times.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment indicator to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the winning lottery is executed when the game balls enter the second starting opening 34 are also referred to as the second starting opening game times.

Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 are reserved.

The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter, also referred to as round lamps) are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or Display corresponding to it. Round game, until either one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration elapses, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied, It is a game in which the open state of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 corresponds to the determined jackpot type when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination processing executed when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. The display of the number of round games played is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In other words, even when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the type determination process is not started during the period when the game ball does not enter the type determination gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the jackpot type ( Since the number of round games is not determined), the number of round games is not displayed on the round display unit 39. After that, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, the type determination process is started and the jackpot type (including the number of round games) is determined. Therefore, the number of round games is displayed on the round display unit 39. Is displayed.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41, in the case where the first symbol display portion 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the variable display of the symbol or the result of the lottery Predetermined display based on notices etc. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol in accordance therewith. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and when the jackpot is won. The effect display during the opening/closing execution mode to be changed is also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 56( a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display part 37b. It is a design. When the game times are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the liquid crystal design corresponding to the first design displayed on the first design display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. 41a, when the game times are triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. The symbol is displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 56(a), the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the liquid crystal symbols on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the symbols that are variably displayed, it is also possible to adopt a symbol in which symbols such as characters are attached to each symbol showing numbers 1 to 8.

FIG. 56( b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 56(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 56(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, the game times means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display of the variable display until the stop display ends. This is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the In either one of the two symbol display portions 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, in the symbol display device 41 for each game time, After the symbol sequence is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol column is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 56(b), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. The reserved game number is an unexecuted game number, and is for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery with respect to the special information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. It refers to the game times for which variable display has not started. The number of holding game times that can be held based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the first hold display area Ds1, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a first hold game time display) can be displayed. Further, the number of holding game times that can be held based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a second hold game time display) can be displayed in the second hold display area Ds2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37. First synchronization display unit Sync1 for displaying and second synchronization display for performing blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special drawing unit 37 And a part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a stop signal, the first symbol display portion 37a The 1-synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a light. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b is variably displayed, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 displays a blink, and when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a stop, the second synchronization display. The section Sync2 displays a light.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. However, the display surface 41a may not display a part or all of these displays.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the V winning mechanism 210. As shown in FIG. 57( a ), the V winning mechanism 210 has a clune 220, a flow path 211 for flowing a game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 30 to the clune 220, and a game flowing down the right side of the game board 30. A second opening/closing door 213 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 212 for the ball to flow into the flow path 211, a detection sensor 214 that detects that a game ball has flowed in from the second special winning opening 212, and a game area. 215 communicating with the back side of the, storage valve 216 that temporarily stores the game ball that has flowed in from the second special winning opening 212 in the storage portion 218 of the flow path 211, and a storage valve that drives the storage valve 216 And a drive mechanism 217. Further, the clune 220 includes one V winning opening 222 and five non-V winning openings 224. The V winning opening 222 is a winning opening where a game ball hits. The non-V winning opening 224 does not become a big hit even if a game ball enters, and discharges the game ball from the game area.

Next, the operation of the V winning mechanism 210 will be described. When a particular type of big hit or small hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time, the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied, The second opening/closing door 213 is opened as shown in 57(a).

When the player operates the operation handle 25 to shoot a game ball to the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball flows in the vicinity of the second opening/closing door 213 while the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, FIG. As shown in b), the game ball flows into the flow path 211 from the second special winning opening 212 by being guided by the opened second opening/closing door 213. The game ball that first flows into the flow path 211 after the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is stored in the storage section 218 by the closed storage valve 216. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that can be stored in the storage unit 218 is one. In addition, as a modification, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage unit 218 may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 57(c), when one game ball is stored in the storage unit 218, when the game ball flows in from the second special winning opening 212, the game ball is first stored in the storage unit. The game ball stored in 218 blocks the flow to the storage part 218, flows in the direction of the discharge port 215 in the flow path 211, and is discharged from the discharge port 215 to the back side of the game area.

As shown in FIG. 57D, when the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Details of the closing condition will be described later. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(e), the storage valve drive mechanism 217 drives the storage valve 216 in the opening direction, and the game balls stored in the storage section 218 flow toward the clune 220 in the flow path 211. To do. Then, the game balls discharged from the flow path 211 circulate on the upper surface of the clune 220, and then enter the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224. As described above, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, it becomes a big hit, and when a game ball enters the non-V winning opening 224, it is not a big hit and is discharged from the game area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, every time one game ball enters (inflows) into the second special winning opening 212 of the V winning mechanism 210, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls. The entry of the game ball into the second special winning opening 212 is detected by the detection sensor 214.

As described above, as a modified example, when a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be stored in the storage section 218 is adopted, the storage valve 216 is opened, so that the plurality of game balls are placed on the upper surface of the clune 220. As a result, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 222 can be improved, and the player's expectation can be improved. In this case, even if two game balls enter the V winning opening 222, it is treated as a jackpot based only on the game ball first entering the V winning opening 222, and then to the V winning opening 222. The entry of the second game ball is not treated as a big hit, and is discharged to the back of the game area in the same manner as the entry of the game ball into the non-V winning opening 224.

<<B2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various winning openings and through gates such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a first opening/closing door drive unit 36c for opening/closing the first opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34. The drive unit 34b, the second opening/closing door drive unit 213b for opening/closing the second opening/closing door 213, the storage valve drive mechanism 217 for driving the storage valve 216, and the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 drives and controls the first opening/closing door driving unit 36c so that the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed, and the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed. The open/close door drive unit 213b is drive-controlled. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the specific big hit and small hit, the MPU 62 drives and controls the storage valve drive mechanism 217 so that the storage valve 216 is opened and closed. When the electric role opening is determined as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the electric role driving unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence/absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are variably displayed are understood. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a lottery, sorts jackpot types, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b, a determination processing execution area 64c, and a type determination processing execution area 64i. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the time of entering the ball is the first hold in the hold information storage area 64b. It is stored in the area Ra in time series. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the time of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

The details of the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is used in the hit lottery as described above. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined as a big hit. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is the timing when the game ball enters the type determining gate 202 or the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the opening/closing execution mode. It is stored in the hold information storage area 64d.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b using the value of the hit random number counter C1. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to. If the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the big hit type stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i acquired when the game ball enters the type determining gate 202 after the opening/closing execution mode is started is stored. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the counter C2. The jackpot type (the number of times the round game has been executed) determined by the type determination process is displayed on the round display unit 39.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 56(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. For example, if C4=0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=2-465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Further, at least one of the value of the hit random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the hit random number counter C1 when the hit lottery is performed based on the hit random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. The hit/no hit table and the hit/no hit table for collating with the hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win/loss tables, one for the probability mode and one for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode), are stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. As shown in the drawing, in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit. Of the values of 0 to 1199, 5 values of 5 to 9 are set as a small hit (out). The small hit (out) will be described later. A value other than the 10 values of 0 to 9 (10 to 1199) is a normal deviation.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/fail table for the second starting opening. As shown in the drawing, in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the hit random number counter C1 that is a big hit. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are small hits (missing).

Here, the small hit (disengagement) is a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which the opening/closing of the first opening/closing door 36b or the second opening/closing door 213 is executed, but is not a trigger for shifting in the support mode. Is. On the other hand, the normal disengagement is the result of right and wrong, which does not trigger the transition of the open/close execution mode and further does not trigger the transition of the support mode. In the following description, the small hit (out) is also simply referred to as "small hit", and the normal off is simply called "off."

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Mode of opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) A mode of support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after completion of the opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of occurrence of winning (winning) of the game balls on the door 213 becomes relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds elapses or the number of game balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. Can be set to On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds elapses or the number of balls entering the first opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. Can be set.

The opening limit time for one opening of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213, and the opening limit number for one opening are the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, if the frequency of occurrence of a ball entering the V winning mechanism 210 is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are arbitrary. is there. Specifically, it is sufficient that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, it is assumed that the variable winning device 36 and the V winning mechanism 210 do not actually receive a ball. Good.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode which is a big hit as a result of the winning lottery and is executed when the big hit occurs, or a game ball enters the V winning opening 222. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 62A shows a distribution table for the first starting opening (at the time of jackpot winning). The distribution table is referred to when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the first starting opening is entered.

FIG. 62B shows a distribution table at the time of winning the V prize, which is triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening. The distribution table is a small hit in the game time executed when the ball is entered into the first starting opening, and enters the V winning opening 222 and is a big hit during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger. It is referred to when it becomes.

FIG. 62C shows a distribution table for the second starting opening (at the time of jackpot winning and at the time of V winning when the ball is entered at the second starting opening). In the distribution table, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the ball is entered into the second starting opening, and in the game times when the ball is entered into the second starting opening It is a small hit, and is referred to when a big hit is made by entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening of FIG. 62(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a big hit in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the ball is entered into the first starting opening. As a jackpot type when winning, the 5R type 1 jackpot, the 5R type 2 jackpot, and the 10R regular jackpot are set.

The 5R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 5, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the first-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to 90 times. That is, after 90 game plays have been executed in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 5R second-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 5, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the second-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to five. That is, after the game times have been executed five times in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 10R normal jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 44" correspond to the 5R type 1 jackpot and "45 to 60" are the 5R. It corresponds to the second kind jackpot, and "61-99" corresponds to the 10R regular jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in the distribution table at the time of V winning triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening in FIG. 62(b), the ball entering the first starting opening is used as a trigger. 5R first-class jackpot, 10R normal as a jackpot type when a small hit occurs in the executed game times, and when the player enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a big hit during the opening/closing execution mode executed by the small hit The jackpot has been set.

The 5R first-class jackpot and the 10R normal jackpot have been described in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 62(a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the distribution table at the time of winning the V prize when the ball is entered into the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 64" corresponds to the 5R type 1 jackpot. "65-99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 62(c), in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a big hit in the winning lottery in the game time, which is executed at the time of entering the second starting opening. In the case of winning, and in the game times executed with the entry into the second starting opening as a trigger, it becomes a small hit, and during the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger, it enters the V winning opening 222 and hits the jackpot. In the case of, the 15R type 1 jackpot, the 4R type 1 jackpot, and the 4R type 2 jackpot are set.

The 15R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 15, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the first-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to 90 times. That is, after 90 game plays have been executed in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 4R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 4, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the first-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to 90 times. That is, after 90 game plays have been executed in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

The 4R second-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 4, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in the second-class jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is limited to five. That is, after the game times have been executed five times in the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is entered.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 49” correspond to the 15R type 1 jackpot, and “50 to 57” are the 4R number. It corresponds to the 1st jackpot, and "58-99" corresponds to the 4R 2nd jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type distribution mode in the case of a big hit is a big win in the win lottery in the game time executed at the time of entering the first starting opening. And a small win in the game time that is executed when the ball is entered into the first starting opening, and during the opening and closing execution mode that is executed with the small hit as a trigger, it enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a big hit. In the case of winning, in the winning lottery in the game times executed with the entry to the second starting opening as a trigger, and in the game times executed with the entry into the second starting opening as a trigger. It is a win, and it is different from when it is a big hit by entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening and closing execution mode executed with the small hit as a trigger, and a clear difference in the advantage for the player is provided. ing.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE to perform the winning lottery, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i. Although the jackpot type is determined by the MPU 62, the MPU 62 further determines the display mode of the segment indicator to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b using the value of the hit random number counter C1. At the same time, the display mode of the round display unit 39 is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to when determining the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the firing of the game ball continues to the game area PA in the same mode. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of being a winning combination in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is different between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time release time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer when the electric-role combination is won, than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the next operation is performed after the end of one opening state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 34 will be higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (power win/loft lottery win/loss table) that is used when executing the power auditors open lottery.

FIG. 63(a) shows a win/loss table (for low frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 63(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 63(b) shows a win/loss table (for high frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 63(b), in the winning/disabling table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 0 to 461 electric accessory release counters C4 that are elected to win electric roles. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<B3>> Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

When the player starts the game, the operation handle 25 is operated to shoot the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30. Hereinafter, firing the game ball toward the left side of the game board 30 is also referred to as “left hitting”, and firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 is also referred to as “right hitting”.

When the player starts left-handing and enters the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the game time for informing the lottery result of the winning lottery triggered by entering the first starting opening 33 is started. To be done. When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the type of jackpot (see FIG. 62) is not determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined in the opening/closing execution mode executed after the end of the game times won in the hit lottery.

When the game times won for the jackpot are over, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, an effect (right hitting suggestion effect) that suggests that the player shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30 (right hitting) is executed. When the player recognizes the right-handed suggestion effect, shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game board 30, and enters (passes) the game ball into the type determination gate 202, the type determination after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. The type determination process is executed in response to the first entry (passage) of a game ball into the gate 202. The type determination process is a process for determining the jackpot type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

When the jackpot type is determined by executing the type determination process, the round game in which the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 perform the opening/closing operation is started based on the opening/closing scenario set for each jackpot type. It The opening/closing scenario is a program in which patterns of opening/closing operations of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 are predetermined. Details of the open/close scenario will be described later.

When a game ball hit by the player to the right in the period during which the round game is executed (hereinafter, also referred to as opening/closing processing period) enters the first big winning opening 36a or the second big winning opening 212, each big winning opening The set number of game balls is given to the player as a privilege (prize ball).

In this embodiment, an opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is set only in a specific case, and a game ball can be inserted into the second special winning opening 212. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 57, when a game ball enters the second special winning opening 212, one of the game balls entered in the second special winning opening 212 is stored in the storage unit 218. After that, after the storage valve 216 is opened, it flows from the flow path 211 to the clune 220 (see FIG. 57(e)). Then, when the game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222, a new jackpot is determined. When a new jackpot is determined as a result of a game ball entering the V winning opening 222, the open/close execution mode being executed is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222. The mode is started. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game times that is won the jackpot. The jackpot type is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate 202, but in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222, , The type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

As described in FIG. 62, the jackpot type distribution in the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (FIG. 57(a)) and the entry into the first starting opening as a trigger. This is different from the jackpot classification (FIG. 57(b)) in the jackpot when the V winning is made. In the present embodiment, it is more likely that the bonus given to the player will be larger if the jackpot type is distributed in the jackpot at the time of V winning when the ball is thrown into the first starting opening. Therefore, even if the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 has been confirmed, the player can open the game ball if the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the round game. It is desired to enter the two major winning openings 212 and further enter the game balls into the V winning openings 222. Therefore, the player's expectation can be improved even during the round game.

If the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball can be inserted into the second special winning opening 212, the game ball cannot be inserted into the V winning opening 222. As is, the round game based on the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is continued.

When the round game ends and then the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the high frequency support mode is set for the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, it is executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The support mode in the game time becomes the high frequency support mode. In this case, the player makes a right hit to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 and executes the electric accessory open lottery. When winning the electric accessory opening lottery, the electric accessory 34a is opened and the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34, and as a result, the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. The winning lottery is executed with the opportunity.

The win/no win result in the winning lottery when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 is a big hit or a small hit. When the jackpot is won, as in the case where the jackpot is selected in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, it is executed after the game times of the jackpot are completed. By entering a game ball into the type determination gate 202 during the opening/closing execution mode, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, the round game set to the determined jackpot type is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit is won in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened once after the end of the game times won for the small hit. The open/close execution mode is executed. When the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, and then the game ball is entered into the V winning opening 222, the big hit is determined and the big hit is awarded. The opening/closing execution mode triggered by this is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, the bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set to the type of the jackpot.

Next, the player starts the game and enters the game ball into the first starting opening 33 by left-handing, and wins the small hit in the winning lottery triggered by the entering the first starting opening 33. The case will be described.

When a small hit is won in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 33, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and closed once after the end of the game time in which the small hit is won. The run mode is executed. After the opening/closing execution mode is started, a right-hand hitting suggestive effect that suggests that the player makes a right-hand hit is executed. The player executes a right-handed stroke in accordance with the right-handed suggestion effect, puts the game ball into the second special winning opening 212 while the second opening/closing door 213 is open, and then puts the game ball into the V winning opening 222. When the ball hits, the big hit is determined, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the big hit. In the opening/closing execution mode, the bonus is given to the player by executing the round game set to the type of the jackpot. Heretofore, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in the present embodiment has been described.

<<B4>> Outline of processing by game machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 64 is a time chart for explaining a case 1 in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. In addition, the outline of the processing described below is not executed in all cases in which a big hit is hit in a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting opening 33, but only in a specific case. Executed.

When the player executes a left-handed stroke and the game time U1 is started by the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33, the variation of the symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a starts. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game game U1. After that, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. At this time, although the pattern of the symbol showing the big hit is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, the effect that clearly indicates that the big hit has been won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound is Without being executed, an effect that is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the big hit or the small hit is won is executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound, recognizes that the player has won the jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time U1. I can't.

The opening/closing execution mode is started after the game times U1 won in the winning lottery are completed. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry into the first starting opening 33, the type of the jackpot is not determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The type of jackpot is determined by the game ball entering the type determination gate 202 after executing the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, even when the number of games won in the winning lottery is over, the round display section 39 does not display the number of times the round game is executed in the open/close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the determination of the jackpot type is also referred to as “waiting period”.

After the game times U1 won in the winning lottery are finished, the opening/closing execution mode is started, and at the same time, the effect suggesting right-handedness (right-handedness suggested effect) is executed and the privilege can be given to the player. There is an effect that indicates that there is a nature, more specifically, an effect that suggests that two opportunities for winning the jackpot are prepared (hereinafter also referred to as "W chance effect") is executed. ..

When the player who recognizes that the right-hit suggestion effect and the W chance effect have been executed, performs a right-hit, and a game ball enters the type determination gate 202, a type determination process is executed and the jackpot type is determined. .. When the jackpot type is determined, the waiting period ends and the opening period begins. The right-handed suggestion effect is also executed during the opening period. After the opening period ends, the opening/closing process period starts. In the opening/closing processing period, the round game is executed a number of times corresponding to the determined jackpot type. At this time, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened is executed in the first round game (1R) of the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. Further, when the opening/closing processing period is started, an effect that suggests that the first of the prepared opportunities for winning the jackpot for the second time has been started (hereinafter, referred to as the first opportunity effect). Call) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance production, the player is urged to hit the right side, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212, and further the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 222 to win the jackpot. The effect that prompts you to confirm is executed.

The player recognizes the first chance effect to be executed, right-handedly executes, and at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, the game ball can be inserted into the second special winning opening 212, and stored. When the game ball can be stored in the portion 218 (see FIG. 57) (proceed to [store in storage portion] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. Execute once. At this time, one gaming ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and flows into the clune 220.

The game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224. When the game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 (proceeds to [Enter the V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the jackpot is newly determined. When a new jackpot is determined as a result of a game ball entering the V winning opening 222, the open/close execution mode being executed is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222. The mode is started. As described above, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game times that is won the jackpot. The jackpot type is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate 202, but in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222, , The type of jackpot is determined when the jackpot is confirmed.

On the other hand, when a game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the non-V winning opening 224 (proceeds to [non-entering the V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the prepared two jackpots are won. An effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a second chance effect) that suggests that the second time of the opportunity (chance) is started is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and when the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. The effect which shows that the jackpot is confirmed is executed at the timing. Further, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after executing the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. Note that the confirmation of the jackpot suggested in the second chance production is the content of suggesting that the jackpot was won (or was won) in the winning lottery in the game time U1.

After executing the second chance effect, the first round of the round game that is being executed by the fact that the big hit in the winning lottery in the game time U1 is won is finished, and the second round (second round) is started.

Next, despite the player recognizing the first chance production and performing a right-handed stroke, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. The case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage unit 218 without being able to do so (proceeding to [non-storage in storage unit] shown in the time chart) will be described. In this case, the second chance presentation is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance effect in this case is also an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed is executed. Further, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after executing the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the jackpot is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed.

After executing the second chance effect, the first round of the round game that is being executed by the fact that the big hit in the winning lottery in the game time U1 is won is finished, and the second round (second round) is started. The case 1 has been described above.

FIG. 65 is a time chart for explaining a case 2 in which a small hit is won in a hit lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33. In the present embodiment, the process described below is executed in all cases where the small hit is won in the hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33.

When the player performs a left-handed stroke and the game turn U2 is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33, the variation of the symbol on the first symbol display portion 37a starts. At this time, a predetermined effect is executed in the game game U2. After that, the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. At this time, although the pattern of the symbol indicating the small hit is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, it is clearly suggested that the small hit is won by displaying an image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting a sound. The effect is not executed, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the big hit or the small hit is won. Therefore, the player recognizing the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound recognizes that the player has won the small hit in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time U1. I can't.

After the game time U2 that wins the small hit ends, the opening/closing execution mode is started. When the small hit is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the opening/closing execution mode is started. Then, during the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and an effect indicating that the player may be given a privilege, more specifically, an opportunity to win the jackpot. An effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “W chance effect”) that suggests that the (chance) is prepared twice is executed.

Then, after the opening period ends, the opening/closing processing period starts. In the opening/closing processing period, a round game in which the second opening/closing door 213 is opened only once is executed. Further, when the opening/closing processing period is started, an effect that suggests that the first of the prepared opportunities for winning the jackpot for the second time has been started (hereinafter, referred to as the first opportunity effect). Call) is executed.

More specifically, in the first chance production, the player is urged to hit the right side, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212, and further the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 222 to win the jackpot. The effect that prompts you to confirm is executed.

The player recognizes the first chance effect to be executed, right-handedly executes, and the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, When the game ball can be stored in the storage unit 218 (see FIG. 57) (proceed to [Store in storage unit] shown in the time chart), the storage valve 216 opens and closes after the second opening/closing door 213 closes. Is executed once. At this time, one gaming ball stored in the storage section 218 flows through the flow path 211 and flows into the clune 220.

The game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224. When a game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the V winning opening 222 (proceeds to [Enter V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the jackpot is determined. When the jackpot is determined when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the open/close execution mode being executed is interrupted, and a new opening/closing execution mode based on the entering of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is established. Be started. In addition, in the case of a jackpot when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the jackpot type is determined together with the jackpot determination.

On the other hand, when a game ball circulating through the clune 220 enters the non-V winning opening 224 (proceeds to [non-entering the V winning opening] shown in the time chart), the prepared two jackpots are won. An effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a second chance effect) that suggests that the second time of the opportunity (chance) is started is executed. The second chance effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, and when the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. The effect indicating that the disengagement has been determined is executed at the specified timing. In addition, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the disconnection is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed. Note that the confirmation of the deviation suggested in the second chance presentation is the content of suggesting that the winning (or was the deviation) in the winning lottery in the game time U2.

After executing the second chance production, the round game which is executed in response to winning the small hit in the winning lottery in the game time U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, an effect (left effect suggestion effect) that urges the player to make a left hit is executed. The player executes a left-handed stroke and tries to insert a game ball into the first starting opening 33 again.

Next, despite the player recognizing the first chance production and performing a right-handed stroke, the game ball is inserted into the second special winning opening 212 at the timing when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. The case where the game balls cannot be stored in the storage unit 218 without being able to do so (proceeding to [non-storage in storage unit] shown in the time chart) will be described. In this case, the second chance presentation is executed after the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second chance effect in this case is also an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period, the player operates the effect operation button 24. At the timing when 24 is operated, an effect indicating that the disconnection has been confirmed is executed. In addition, if the player does not operate the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period after execution of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect operation button 24, the disconnection is confirmed after the elapse of the predetermined period. Is performed.

After executing the second chance production, the round game which is executed in response to winning the small hit in the winning lottery in the game time U2 ends, and then the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, an effect (left effect suggestion effect) that urges the player to make a left hit is executed. The player executes a left-handed stroke and tries to insert a game ball into the first starting opening 33 again.

As described above, when the jackpot is executed in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (case 1) and when the jackpot is won (case 2) In the case of), although the pattern of the symbol showing the result of the winning lottery is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound. The production to do is not executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound cannot recognize the lottery result at the game time when the game time is over. As a result, even if the small hit is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the big hit is won.

Further, after the game time is over, in both case 1 and case 2, right hit suggestion effect and W chance suggestion effect are executed, so during the period when the effect is executed after the game time is over. Also, in the winning lottery, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the big hit is won rather than the small hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the type of the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, the game ball is determined by entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the jackpot type is determined, the round lamp of the round display unit 39 is lit with a display according to the number of times of execution of the round game corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if you have won the small hit, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of the game, regardless of whether you have won the big hit or the small hit, so after the end of the game, you will see the round lamp. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from distinguishing whether the big hit or the small win has been won in the game time.

As a result, the player does not recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player makes a right hit and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game, On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the jackpot is won rather than the jackpot for a relatively long period. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player for a relatively long period even in the period after the game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit or the small hit is started, It can be noticed. In addition, when determining the jackpot type, the player is allowed to hit the right side and the game ball is thrown into the type determination gate 202, so that the player is actively involved in determining the jackpot type, and Thus, it is possible to further focus on the game in the period of the opening/closing execution mode.

<<B5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sa5101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sa5102.

In step Sa5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sa5103.

In step Sa5103, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sa5104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 75) described later.

In step Sa5104, a ball entering process for the starting opening accompanying the entering of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step Sa5104 will be described later. After executing step Sa5104, the process proceeds to step Sa5105.

In step Sa5105, a through-ball entry process accompanying the entry (passing) of a game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through ball entering process in step Sa5105 will be described later. After executing Step Sa5105, the process proceeds to Step Sa5106.

In step Sa5106, a ball entry process for the type determination gate accompanying the game ball entering the type determination gate is executed. Details of the ball entering process for the type determination gate in step Sa5106 will be described later. After executing step Sa5106, the process proceeds to step Sa5107.

At Step Sa5107, a winning process for the special winning opening is executed in association with the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening. The details of the winning process for the special winning opening in step Sa5107 will be described later. After executing step Sa5107, the process proceeds to step Sa5108.

In step Sa5108, the ball entry process for the clune accompanying the entry of the game ball into the clune is executed. Details of the clown entering process in step Sa5108 will be described later. After executing Step Sa5108, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The entrance process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 66: Sa5104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sa5201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (start winning) by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sa5201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sa5201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5202, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. After that, it proceeds to Step Sa5203.

In step Sa5203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sa5204.

In step Sa5204, the starting hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sa5209.

When it is determined in step Sa5201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (Sa5201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sa5205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sa5205: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa5206, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sa5207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa5205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sa5205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sa5207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sa5208.

In step Sa5208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sa5209.

In step Sa5209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Sa5204 or step Sa5208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sa5209, when the number N of starting pending is not less than the upper limit value (Sa5209: NO), the ball entering process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa5209, when the start pending number N is less than the upper limit value (Sa5209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5210, 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sa5211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sa5212.

In step Sa5212, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66), and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 75) are stored in the corresponding holding area. The data is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sa5210. Specifically, when the first starting suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66) are selected. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first holding area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first startup holding number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step Sa5210. Further, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66) are set. , The first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sa5210. After executing Step Sa5212, the process proceeds to Step Sa5213.

In step Sa5213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS, and the winning lottery determination result (lottery result), the jackpot. It is a process of determining the type, presence/absence of reach, variation time of game times, and the like before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sa5213, the process proceeds to Step Sa5214.

In step Sa5214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the judgment result (preliminary judgment information) of the preliminary judgment processing executed based on the information (retention information) of each value of the hit random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS is set as a suspension command. Set.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the holding information before the main control device 60 becomes the target of the winning lottery. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing Step Sa5214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry processing for the main starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 67: Sa5213) of the ball entry processing for the starting opening.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, and the hold information is mainly used for determining whether or not the winning lottery is hit, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether a reach has occurred, determining the variation time of the game times, etc. This is a process to be executed before being subject to the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sa5301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step Sa5301, the process proceeds to Step Sa5302.

In step Sa5302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. The process is a process of determining the variation time of the game times. The details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing Step Sa5302, the destination determination process ends.

<Big hit/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 68: Sa5301) of the destination determination processing.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. In step Sa5401, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) by the ball entering the starting opening in the entrance processing for the starting opening (FIG. 67) is read. Then, it progresses to step Sa5402.

In Step Sa5402, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is based on the first holding area Ra. That is, the pending information for which the destination determination process is executed is information acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 as a trigger, or the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. It is determined whether the information is acquired as. If it is determined in step Sa5402 that the read reserved area is based on the first reserved area Ra (Sa5402: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa5403 and refers to the hit table for the first starting opening. Then, it progresses to step Sa5405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5402 that the read reserved area is not based on the first reserved area Ra, that is, if the read reserved area is based on the second reserved area Rb (Sa5402: NO). , Proceeds to Step Sa5404, and refers to the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. Then, it progresses to step Sa5405.

In step Sa5405, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 that has been read is a big hit in the win lottery. When it is determined in step Sa5405 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa5405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5406.

In step Sa5406, the big hit information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa5405 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is not a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa5405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5407.

In Step Sa5407, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step Sa5407 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa5407: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa5408.

In step Sa5408, the small hit information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa5407 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is not a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa5407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5409.

In step Sa5409, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening this time is read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa5410, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa5411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sa5411 that the occurrence of reach is supported (Sa5411: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5412 to store the reach occurrence information in the previous determination process result storage area 64h. Then, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5411 that the reach is not generated (Sa5411: NO), the jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is ended as it is.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 68: Sa5302) of the previous determination process.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step Sa5501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area due to the entry into the starting opening in the entry processing for the starting opening (FIG. 67) is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sa5502.

In Step Sa5502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the big hit/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a big hit (Sa5502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5503.

In step Sa5503, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step Sa5503, the process proceeds to Step Sa5509.

In step Sa5509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa5502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (step Sa5502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5504, and it is determined whether or not a small win is won in the winning lottery related to the current game time. judge. When it is determined in step Sa5504 that the small hit is won (Sa5504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5505.

In step Sa5505, the small hitting variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired. After executing Step Sa5505, the process proceeds to Step Sa5509.

In step Sa5509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa5504 that the small hit is not won in the hit lottery related to the current game time (Sa5504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5506, and it is determined whether a reach occurs. If it is determined in step Sa5506 that reach is generated (Sa5506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5507.

In step Sa5507, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa5509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa5506 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (step Sa5506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5508 and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is set. By referring to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sa5509, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition processing is ended.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 66: Step Sa5105).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sa5601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sa5601 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sa5601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5602, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sa5601: NO), the ball entering process for this through is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa5602 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sa5602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5603, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sa5604.

In step Sa5604, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sa5103 (FIG. 66) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas 64c of the RAM 64 of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa5602 that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sa5602: NO), that is, if the value of the accessory holding number SN is the upper limit value, the electric The through-ball entry process is terminated without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Entering process for type determination gate>
Next, a ball entry process for the type determination gate will be described. The ball entry process for the type determination gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66: Step Sa5106).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the type determination gate. In step Sa5701, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the type determination gate 202. When it is determined in step Sa5701 that the game ball has entered the type determination gate 202 (Sa5701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5702. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa5701 that the game ball has not entered the type determination gate 202 (Sa5701: NO), the type determination gate entry process is terminated.

In step Sa5702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process (see FIG. 82) is executed triggered by winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, and the ball entry process for the type determination gate is performed. In, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area and then turned off (Sa5705).

If it is determined in step Sa5702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa5702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5703. When it is determined in step Sa5702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa5702: NO), the ball entering process for the type determination gate is ended as it is.

In step Sa5703, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). Then, it progresses to step Sa5704.

In step Sa5704, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned on. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned on when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i, and turned off when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process (see FIG. 82) described later. To be After executing Step Sa5704, the process proceeds to Step Sa5705.

In step Sa5705, the type determination permission flag is turned off. After that, the ball entry process for the type determination gate ends.

<Ball processing for the special winning opening>
Next, the winning process for the special winning opening will be described. The winning process for the special winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 66: Step Sa5107) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a ball winning process for a special winning opening. In step Sa5801, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sa5801 that the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 36a (Sa5801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5802. On the other hand, when it is not determined in step Sa5801 that the game ball has entered the first big winning opening 36a (Sa5801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5804.

In step Sa5802, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on having entered the first big winning opening 36a is set. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the first big winning opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. After executing Step Sa5802, the process proceeds to Step Sa5803.

In Step Sa5803, a first special winning opening winning command is set. The first special winning opening winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the first special winning opening 36a. The first special winning opening entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of a normal process described later. After executing Step Sa5803, the process proceeds to Step Sa5804.

In step Sa5804, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212. When it is determined in step Sa5804 that the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212 (Sa5804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5805. On the other hand, in step Sa5804, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second big winning opening 212 (Sa5804: NO), the big winning opening ball entering process is ended as it is.

In step Sa5805, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on having entered the second special winning opening 212 is set. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the second special winning opening 212, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball. After executing Step Sa5805, the process proceeds to Step Sa5806.

In step Sa5806, a second special winning opening entry command is set. The second special winning opening winning command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212. The second special winning opening entry command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process described later. After executing step Sa5806, the winning process for the special winning opening is ended.

<Entering ball for clune>
Next, a ball entry process for clune will be described. The clown entry processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 66: step Sa5108).

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for clune. In step Sa5901, it is determined whether or not the clune entry permission flag is ON. The clune entry permission flag is turned on when the storage valve 216 is opened in the special winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 85), and the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 of the clune 220. In this case, it is turned off (FIG. 74: Sa5908). By doing so, even though the storage valve 216 is not performing the opening operation, due to damage or abnormality of the storage valve drive mechanism 217 or the storage valve 216, the game ball unintentionally flows into the klune, and V It is possible to avoid a big hit by hitting the winning hole 222. If it is determined in step Sa5901 that the clune entry permission flag is ON (Sa5901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa5901 that the clune entry permission flag is not ON (Sa5901: NO), the clown entry processing is ended as it is.

In step Sa5902, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222. When it is determined in step Sa5902 that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 (Sa5902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5903.

In step Sa5903, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination processing execution area 64i). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode is set. When a game ball has entered the type determination gate 202 during execution, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination process execution area 64i) in the type-in process ball input process. However, in the case of a big hit triggered by the entry of a game ball into the V winning opening 222, the value of the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the corresponding storage area (type determination by the entry of the playing ball into the V winning opening 222). It is stored in the processing execution area 64i). After executing Step Sa5903, the process proceeds to Step Sa5904.

In Step Sa5904, the V winning jackpot flag is turned on. The V winning jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the setting of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode by the jackpot due to the V winning is completed (FIG. 85: Sa6910). .. After executing Step Sa5904, the process proceeds to Step Sa5905.

In step Sa5905, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222. The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of a normal process described later. After executing Step Sa5905, the process proceeds to Step Sa5908.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa5902 that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 222 (Sa5902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa5906.

In step Sa5906, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. When it is determined in step Sa5906 that the game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224 (Sa5906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa5907. On the other hand, in step Sa5906, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the non-V winning opening 224 (Sa5906: NO), the clown entry processing is ended.

In Step Sa5907, a non-V winning command is set. The non-V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the non-V winning opening 224. The non-V winning command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process described later. After executing Step Sa5907, the process proceeds to Step Sa5908.

In step Sa5908, the clune entry permission flag is turned off. Then, the ball entry process for the clune is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sa6001, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sa6002.

In step Sa6002, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sa6003.

In step Sa6003, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sa6002 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a change type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step Sa6003, the process proceeds to step Sa6004.

In step Sa6004, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sa6005.

In step Sa6005, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sa6006. At Step Sa6006, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step Sa6006, the process proceeds to step Sa6007.

In step Sa6007, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sa6008.

In step Sa6008, an electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sa6009.

In step Sa6009, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sa6003). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sa6009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sa6009: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sa6010 and Sa6011. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sa6010, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In addition, in step Sa6011, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa6009 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Sa6009: YES), the process returns to step Sa6003, and each processing from step Sa6003 to step Sa6008 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sa6003 to step Sa6008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time up to the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 75: Sa6006).

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In step Sa6101, it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the variation of the symbol in the game times of winning the big hit or the small hit in the winning lottery is finished (Sa6112), and the opening/closing execution mode is set in the game state transition process (FIG. 81). It is turned off to end the process (FIG. 81: Sa6631).

When it is determined in step Sa6101 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sa6101: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special game state, and this game time control is performed without executing any of the processing after step Sa6102. The process ends. That is, in the special game state, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6101 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the special game state is not in progress (Sa6101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6102.

In step Sa6102, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step Sa6102, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (Sa6102: NO), the process proceeds to the game number start process of steps Sa6103 to Sa6107. In step Sa6103, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sa6103 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sa6103: YES), the present game number control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa6103 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (Sa6103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6104.

In step Sa6104, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sa6105. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sa6105, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sa6106.

In step Sa6106, it is determined whether the PNC count flag is ON. The PNC count flag is turned on when the open/close execution mode executed by the jackpot in which the high frequency support mode is set is terminated (see FIG. 87), and is turned off when the high frequency support mode is terminated. (See Figure 88). The PNC count flag is set to confirm the timing to start counting the number of executions of the game game in the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sa6106 that the PNC count flag is ON (Sa6106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6107.

At step Sa6107, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game frequency counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing Step Sa6107, the present game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa6106 that the PNC count flag is not ON (Sa6106: NO), the game time control processing is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sa6102 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (Sa6102: YES), the processing for advancing game times in steps Sa6108 to Sa6113 is executed.

In Step Sa6108, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sa6108, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 80) described later. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step Sa6108 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sa6108: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sa6109 to execute fluctuation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing Step Sa6109, the game time control processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa6108 that the variation time has elapsed (Sa6108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6110, and variation end processing is executed. The fluctuation ending process is performed by changing the symbol display unit so that the symbol display mode determined in the fluctuation starting process (FIG. 78) described later and displayed in the symbol display unit is displayed in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. Display control. After executing Step Sa6110, the process proceeds to Step Sa6111.

In step Sa6111, it is determined whether either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON. The jackpot flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a jackpot in the variation start process (FIG. 78) described later. The small hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the variation start process (FIG. 78) described later. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are turned off in the flag erasing process in the transition process (FIG. 87) at the end of the ending period, which will be described later.

When it is determined in step Sa6111 that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sa6111: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6112, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the flow advances to step Sa6113 to set the open/close execution mode start command. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode is started. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process described later. After executing Step Sa6113, the game time control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa6111 that either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not ON (Sa6111: NO), the game time control processing is ended as it is.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sa6104) of the game number control process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Sa6201, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the data setting processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 59) (the hold information stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) stored first in the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 59) in time series. (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sa6201, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sa6201 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sa6201: YES), the data setting processing for the first holding area in steps Sa6202 to Sa6207 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6201 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sa6201: NO). ), and the data setting process for the second holding area in steps Sa6208 to Sa6213 is executed.

In Step Sa6202, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the flow proceeds to Step Sa6203 to decrement the total reserved number CRN by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sa6204. In Step Sa6204, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sa6205.

In Step Sa6205, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sa6205, the process proceeds to Step Sa6206.

In step Sa6206, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sa6207.

In step Sa6207, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa6207 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step Sa6201 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (step Sa6201: NO), It proceeds to step Sa6208.

In Step Sa6208, the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step Sa6209. In step Sa6209, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and in step Sa6210, the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sa6211.

In step Sa6211, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sa6211, the process proceeds to Step Sa6212.

In step Sa6212, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sa6213.

In step Sa6213, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sa6213 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 76: Sa6105) of the game time control process.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sa6301, the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the storage area (holding area) due to the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 67) is read. Then, it progresses to step Sa6302.

In Step Sa6302, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. That is, the value of the hit random number counter C1 to be processed is the information acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, or the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. It is determined whether the information is acquired as a trigger.

When it is determined in step Sa6302 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa6302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6303. In step Sa6303, the hit/miss table for the first starting port is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sa6305.

When it is determined in step Sa6302 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa6302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6304. In step Sa6304, the win/fail table for the second starting opening is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Sa6305.

In step Sa6305, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is a big hit in the winning lottery. When it is determined in step Sa6305 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa6305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6306.

In Step Sa6306, a jackpot stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for the big hit, in the current game time when the big hit is won, the variable display is displayed in a state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end. Specifically, by referring to the jackpot stop result table stored in the halt result table storage area 63e, the address information of the jackpot result data corresponding to the jackpot is acquired, and the address information is stored as the halt result address of the RAM 64. Store in the storage area. After executing Step Sa6306, the process proceeds to Step Sa6307.

In step Sa6307, the jackpot flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sa6308, and the specific process execution determination process is executed. The specific process execution determination process determines whether or not to execute the process described in FIG. 64, that is, the process including the execution of the W chance suggestive effect, in the open/close execution mode executed after the end of the game time when the jackpot is won. This is a process for doing. Details of the specific process execution determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sa6308, the process proceeds to Step Sa6315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6305 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is not a big hit in the winning lottery (Sa6305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6309.

In Step Sa6309, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step Sa6309 that the value of the read random number counter C1 is a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa6309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6310.

In step Sa6310, a small hit stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for small hits, in the current game time when the small hit is won, the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b fluctuates depending on which stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. After executing Step Sa6310, the process proceeds to Step Sa6311.

In step Sa6311, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing Step Sa6311, the process proceeds to Step Sa6315.

When it is determined in step Sa6309 that the read value of the hit random number counter C1 is not a small hit in the winning lottery (Sa6309: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6312.

In step Sa6312, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game time to be executed. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening this time is read. Then, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. After that, as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sa6312 that the reach is generated in the current game time to be executed (Sa6312: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6313.

In step Sa6313, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. Specifically, in the current game time that is the stop result for reach, set which stop result is displayed in the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b Perform the processing to do so. More specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sa6313, the process proceeds to Step Sa6315.

If it is determined in step Sa6312 that the reach will not occur in the current game time to be executed (Sa6312: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6314.

In step Sa6314, a disconnection stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is the disengagement result, whether the variable display is ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b Is a process for setting. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sa6314, the process proceeds to Step Sa6315.

In Step Sa6315, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa6315, the process proceeds to Step Sa6316.

In Step Sa6316, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sa6316 that the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Sa6316: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6317 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, and the occurrence of the reach is generated. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sa6315 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6316 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa6316: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa6318 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, and the occurrence of the reach is also included. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sa6315 are included. After executing Step Sa6317 or Step Sa6318, the process proceeds to Step Sa6319.

In step Sa6319, a variation type command is set. The variation type command includes information on whether or not a big hit, whether or not a reach has occurred, and whether or not a specific process is executed.

The variation command and variation type command set in steps Sa6317 to Sa6319 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and variation type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing Step Sa6319, the process proceeds to Step Sa6320.

In step Sa6320, the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display part corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing Step Sa6320, the fluctuation start process is ended.

<Specific process execution determination process>
Next, the specific process execution determination process will be described. The specific process execution determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 78: Sa6308) of the fluctuation start process. Here, the specific processing means the series of processing described in FIG. The specific process execution determination process is a process for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the specific process.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the specific process execution determination process. In Step Sa6401, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. As described above, the processing described with reference to FIG. 64 is executed when the jackpot is selected in the winning lottery executed when the game time is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. Therefore, it is determined whether the game time to be processed is executed upon the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or upon the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In order to do so, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sa6401 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa6401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6402. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6401 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa6401: YES), the specific process execution determination process is ended as it is.

In step Sa6402, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game times, which is a big win in the winning lottery, is a predetermined specific value. As described in FIG. 64, the processing shown in FIG. 64 is executed in all cases where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. Only in specific cases. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 in the game time is a predetermined specific value, and if the value is the specific value, execution of the specific process is determined. In the present embodiment, the specific value is two values "0, 1" among the values "0-4" of the hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the hit table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. Is set to. Therefore, in step Sa6402, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the game time, which is a big win in the winning lottery, is "0" or "1". If it is determined in step Sa6402 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a specific value (Sa6402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6403. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa6402 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is not the specific value (Sa6402: NO), the specific process execution determination process is ended as it is.

In step Sa6403, the specific processing flag is turned on. In the processing described with reference to FIG. 64, it is necessary to set an opening/closing scenario (opening pattern) in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens during the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode. The specific process flag is provided to identify whether or not the specific process is executed in the process for determining the open/close scenario (FIG. 83: open/close scenario setting process). After executing Step Sa6403, the process proceeds to Step SSa6404.

In step Sa6404, a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the specific processing is executed. The specific process command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process described later. After executing Step Sa6404, the specific process execution determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 78: Sa6015).

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sa6501, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sa6502.

In step Sa6502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the current game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and when the jackpot flag is ON (Sa6502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6503.

In step Sa6503, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6502 that the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time (Sa6502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6504, and a small hit is won in the hit lottery related to the current game time. Is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the small hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (Sa6504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6505.

In step Sa6505, the fluctuation time table for small hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6504 that the small hit is not won in the hit lottery related to the current game (Sa6504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6506.

In step Sa6506, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game time. In the step Sa6502, since the present process (Sa6506) is executed when the big hit is not won and the small hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game time, the big hit in the winning lottery is executed in the step Sa6506. And, it is determined whether or not the game times in which the reach occurs among the game times not won for the small hit. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach is generated (Sa6506: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sa6507. When the presence/absence of reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sa6507, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6506 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Sa6506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6508, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sa6509, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is such that the fluctuation time increases as the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN increase. It is set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the variation time of the game time. Is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN increase. However, the variation time may be set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the variation time table for the normal big hit, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal processing subroutine (FIG. 75: Sa6007).

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In Step Sa6601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the special gaming state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state.

When it is determined in step Sa6601 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sa6601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa6602 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sa6602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

In step Sa6603, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sa6603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6604 and the timing at which the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. Or not. In step Sa6604, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (Sa6604: NO), the main game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6604 that it is the timing at which the variable display ends (Sa6604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6605, and it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 76: Sa6112), and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends (FIG. 81: Sa6631).

If it is determined in step Sa6605 that the open/close execution mode flag is ON (Sa6605: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa6606. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa6605 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sa6605: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In Step Sa6606, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa6606 that the game result of this game time (hit lottery result) is not a small hit (Sa6606: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6607.

In step Sa6607, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step Sa6606, it is determined that the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, so the result of the winning lottery in this game time is a big hit. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the support mode in execution of the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step Sa6607, the process proceeds to Step Sa6608.

In step Sa6608, it is determined whether the type determination completion flag is ON. The type determination completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot type has been determined, and is turned ON when the jackpot type is determined in the type determination process for determining the jackpot type (FIG. 82: Sa6709), It is turned off immediately before the opening/closing scenario setting process is executed (Sa6610). If it is determined in step Sa6608 that the type determination completion flag is not ON (Sa6608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6609.

In step Sa6609, type determination processing is executed. The type determination process will be described later.

If it is determined in step Sa6608 that the type determination completion flag is ON (Sa6608: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa6610 to turn off the type determination completion flag. Then, it progresses to step Sa6611.

Also, when it is determined in step Sa6606 that the game result of this game time (hit lottery result) is a small hit (Sa6606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6611.

In step Sa6611, an opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. As described above, the opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting the opening/closing scenario in which the opening patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the round game are set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa6611, the process proceeds to Step Sa6612.

In step Sa6612, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa6612, the process proceeds to Step Sa6613.

In step Sa6613, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot or the jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The information about the jackpot or the jackpot means that the jackpot is won by the hit lottery executed by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, or the jackpot is won, or by the jackpot or the jackpot. Whether a new jackpot is won by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 222 during the executed round game, or a jackpot by a hit lottery executed by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34 Information on whether the player has won the jackpot or the jackpot, or whether the player has newly won the jackpot by entering a game ball into the V winning opening 222 during the round game executed by the jackpot or the jackpot. Is. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sa6613, the process proceeds to step Sa6614 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6603 that the opening period flag is ON (Sa6603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6615.

In step Sa6615, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sa6615 that the opening period has ended (Sa6615: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa6616 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sa6617.

In step Sa6617, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot type is determined by the type determination process, a display indicating the number of times the round game has been executed that is set for the determined jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39, and the V winning opening 222 is displayed. When the jackpot is confirmed by entering a game ball, the round display unit 39 displays a display indicating the number of times of execution of the round game set for the jackpot type determined by the confirmation of the jackpot. After executing Step Sa6617, the process proceeds to Step Sa6618.

In step Sa6618, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6602 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sa6602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6619, and the special winning opening/closing process is executed. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sa6619, the process proceeds to Step Sa6620.

In Step Sa6620, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot flag is ON. The V winning jackpot flag is turned ON when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and is turned OFF after the setting of the opening time of the opening/closing execution mode by the jackpot due to the V winning is completed (FIG. 85: Sa6910). ..

When it is determined in step Sa6620 that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa6620: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6621 and the V winning process is executed. The V winning process will be described later.

In Step Sa6621, after the V winning process is executed, the game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6620 that the V winning jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6620: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6622.

In step Sa6622, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. When it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sa6622: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6623. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6622 that the special winning opening opening/closing process is not completed (Sa6622: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

In Step Sa6623, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to Step Sa6624.

In step Sa6624, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step Sa6624, the process proceeds to Step Sa6625.

In step Sa6625, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). After executing Step Sa6625, proceed to Step Sa6626.

At step Sa6626, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sa6003 in the normal process (FIG. 75). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sa6626, the process proceeds to Step Sa6627.

In step Sa6627, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6601 that the ending period flag is ON (Sa6601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6628.

In Step Sa6628, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sa6625), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step Sa6628 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Sa6628: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6629.

In Step Sa6629, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa6630, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step Sa6630, the flow proceeds to Step Sa6631, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6628 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sa6628: NO), then the main game state transition processing is ended.

<Type determination process>
Next, the type determination process will be described. The type determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6609) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the type determination process. In Step Sa6701, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is ON. The jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned on when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the type determination processing execution area 64i, and turned off when the jackpot type is determined.

When it is determined in step Sa6701 that the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is not ON (Sa6701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6702.

In step Sa6702, it is determined whether the type determination permission flag is ON. The type determination permission flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type determination process is executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and in the ball entry process (FIG. 72) for the type determination gate, After the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is stored in the storage area, it is turned off (FIG. 72: Sa5705).

If it is determined in step Sa6702 that the type determination permission flag is not ON (Sa6702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6703, the type determination permission flag is turned ON, and then the type determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa6702 that the type determination permission flag is ON (Sa6702: YES), the type determination processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa6701 that the big hit type counter storage completion flag is ON (Sa6701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6704.

In Step Sa6704, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag is ON.

In step Sa6704, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa6704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6705, the first starting port allocation table is referred, and the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is displayed. The jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value is specified. Then, it progresses to step Sa6707.

If it is determined in step Sa6704 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa6704: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa6706, refers to the second starting port allocation table, and acquires the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type (sorting result) corresponding to the value is specified. Then, it progresses to step Sa6707.

In step Sa6707, the jackpot type specified in step Sa6705 or step Sa6706 is set as the jackpot type in the jackpot this time. After executing Step Sa6707, the process proceeds to Step Sa6708.

In Step Sa6708, the type determination completion flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to Step Sa6709. In Step Sa6709, the jackpot type counter storage completion flag is turned off. After that, the type determination process ends.

<Open/close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6611) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In Step Sa6801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa6801 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa6801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6802.

In Step Sa6802, it is determined whether or not the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step SSa6802 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa6802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6803.

In step Sa6803, a big hit opening/closing scenario in a normal case (when the specific process is not executed) corresponding to the big hit type is set.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an opening/closing scenario according to this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing scenarios are roughly classified into three categories and set.

The first is the jackpot opening/closing scenario in the normal case shown in FIG. 84(a). The jackpot opening/closing scenario in the normal case is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode in which the specific process is not performed when the big hit is set. As shown in the figure, the open/close scenario is set for each number of round game executions (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed as a round game is set in each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario in a normal case.

The second is the jackpot opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 84(b) when the specific process is executed. The jackpot opening/closing scenario when the specific processing is executed means opening/closing in which the opening/closing pattern of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 is set in the opening/closing execution mode in which the specific processing is performed and the specific processing is performed. It is a scenario. As shown in the figure, the open/close scenario is set for each number of round game executions (4R, 5R, 10R, 15R) set for the jackpot type in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, in each opening/closing scenario set as a jackpot opening/closing scenario when the specific process is executed, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and closed once in the first round (1R) as a round game. In the subsequent round games, an opening/closing pattern in which only the first opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed is set. More specifically, the operations of the second opening/closing door 213 and the storage valve 216 described in FIG. 57 are executed in the first round.

The third is the small opening/closing scenario shown in FIG. 84(c). In the present embodiment, the small hit opening/closing scenario is an opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing patterns of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the opening/closing execution mode when a small hit is set. In the present embodiment, each opening/closing scenario set as the small hit opening/closing scenario has an opening/closing pattern in which the second opening/closing door opens/closes only once in the first round (1R) as a round game. ..

The description returns to FIG. 83. In step Sa6803, when the normal big hit opening/closing scenario (FIG. 84(a)) corresponding to the kind of big hit is set, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended thereafter.

If it is determined in step Sa6802 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa6802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6804.

In step Sa6804, a jackpot opening/closing scenario (FIG. 84(b)) when the specific processing corresponding to the jackpot type is executed is set. Then, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa6801 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6805.

In step Sa6805, an opening/closing scenario for a small hit (FIG. 84(c)) is set. Then, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6612) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In Step Sa6901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa6901 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sa6901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6902.

In Step Sa6902, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa6902 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa6902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6903.

In Step Sa6903, it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sa6903 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sa6903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6904.

In Step Sa6904, the opening time corresponding to the specific process is set. Specifically, the time corresponding to the opening period in the specific process described in FIG. 64 is set. In the opening period, as shown in FIG. 64, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing Step Sa6904, the process proceeds to Step Sa6905, and the specific processing flag is turned off. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6903 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sa6903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6906.

In Step Sa6906, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the first starting opening is set. In the opening period, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6902 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa6902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6907.

In Step Sa6907, the opening time corresponding to the jackpot type for the second starting opening is set. In the opening period, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6908.

In Step Sa6908, it is determined whether or not the V winning jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sa6908 that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (Sa6908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6909.

In Step Sa6909, the opening time corresponding to the V winning jackpot is set. In the opening period, an effect that suggests that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 and has become a jackpot (V winning notification effect), and a right-hit suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the V-winning notification effect and the right-hit suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. After executing step Sa6909, the process proceeds to step Sa6910 to turn off the V winning jackpot flag. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sa6908 that the V prize jackpot flag is not ON (Sa6908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6911.

In Step Sa6911, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sa6911 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa6911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa6912.

In Step Sa6912, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the first starting opening is set. When a small hit is won in the hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the process described with reference to FIG. 65 is executed. As shown in FIG. 65, in the opening period, the right-handed suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect are executed. Therefore, the time during which the right-handed suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect can be executed is set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa6911 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa6911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa6913.

In Step Sa6913, the opening time corresponding to the small hit for the second starting opening is set. In the opening period, a right-handed suggestion effect and an effect that prompts the player to enter a game ball into the V winning opening 222 are executed. Therefore, the time in which the right-handed suggestion effect and the effect that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the V winning opening 222 can be executed are set as the opening time. Then, the opening time setting process ends.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6619) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing processing. The main winning opening/closing process is mainly composed of three control processes. Specifically, steps Sa7001 to Sa7007 are opening/closing control processing of the first opening/closing door 36b, steps Sa7008 to Sa7014 are opening/closing control processing of the second opening/closing door 213, and steps Sa7015 to Sa7022 are opening/closing control processing of the storage valve 216. Is.

In step Sa7001, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 36b is open. When it is determined in step Sa7001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sa7001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7002.

In step Sa7002, it is determined whether the opening condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing of opening the first opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sa7002 that the opening condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa7002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7003.

In step Sa7003, the first opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa7004.

In step Sa7004, a first opening/closing door opening command is set. The first opening/closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The first opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing step Sa7004, the process proceeds to step Sa7008.

When it is determined in step Sa7002 that the opening condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa7002: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7008.

When it is determined in step Sa7001 that the first opening/closing door 36b is open (Sa7001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7005.

In step Sa7005, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. The condition for closing the first opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the first opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number of presets for the first special winning opening 36a is set. It is established when it is detected that a game ball has entered. When it is determined in step Sa7005 that the closing condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sa7005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7006.

In step Sa7006, the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sa7007.

In step Sa7007, a first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first opening/closing door 36b is closed. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 75: Step Sa6003). After executing step Sa7007, the process proceeds to step Sa7008.

When it is determined in step Sa7005 that the closing condition of the first opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sa7005: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7008.

In step Sa7008, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 213 is open. If it is determined in step Sa7008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is not open (Sa7008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7009.

In step Sa7009, it is determined whether the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing of opening the second opening/closing door 213. When it is determined in step Sa7009 that the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa7009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7010.

In step Sa7010, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa7011.

In step Sa7011, the second opening/closing door opening command is set. The second opening/closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 has been opened. The second opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa7011, the process proceeds to Step Sa7015.

When it is determined in step Sa7009 that the opening condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa7009: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7015.

If it is determined in step Sa7008 that the second opening/closing door 213 is open (Sa7008: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7012.

In step Sa7012, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied. The condition for closing the second opening/closing door 213 is that the continuous opening time (for example, 15 seconds) of the second opening/closing door 213 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or the number set in advance in the second special winning opening 212 is set. It is established when it is detected that the game ball of. When it is determined in step Sa7012 that the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa7012: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7013.

In step Sa7013, the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sa7014.

In Step Sa7014, a second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second opening/closing door 213 is closed. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa7014, the process proceeds to Step Sa7015.

When it is determined in step Sa7012 that the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is not satisfied (Sa7012: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sa7015.

In step Sa7015, it is determined whether the storage valve 216 is open. When it is determined in step Sa7015 that the storage valve 216 is not open (Sa7015: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7016.

In step Sa7016, it is determined whether the opening condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied. Specifically, the open/close scenario set by the open/close scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing of opening the storage valve 216. When it is determined in step Sa7016 that the opening condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied (Sa7016: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7017.

In step Sa7017, the storage valve 216 is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa7018.

In step Sa7018, the clune entry permission flag is turned ON. The clune entry permission flag is used when a defect or abnormality occurs in the structure of the storage valve 216, and a game ball unintentionally flows from the storage part 218 to the clune 220 through the flow path 211 and enters the V winning opening 222. Even if there is, it is a flag provided so as not to be a big win due to V winning. The clune entry permission flag is turned on when the storage valve 216 is opened in the special winning opening opening/closing process, and is turned off when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 or the non-V winning opening 224 of the clune 220. To be done. After executing Step Sa7018, the process proceeds to Step Sa7019.

In step Sa7019, a storage valve opening command is set. The storage valve opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 is opened. The storage valve opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa7019, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa7016 that the opening condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa7016: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sa7015 that the storage valve 216 is open (Sa7015: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7020.

In step Sa7020, it is determined whether the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied. The closing condition of the storage valve 216 is satisfied when it is detected that the continuous opening time (for example, 2 seconds) of the storage valve 216 set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed. When it is determined in step Sa7020 that the closing condition of the second opening/closing door 213 is satisfied (Sa7020: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7021.

In step Sa7021, the storage valve 216 is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sa7022.

In step Sa7022, a storage valve closing command is set. The storage valve closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the storage valve 216 is closed. The storage valve closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa7022, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sa7020 that the closing condition of the storage valve 216 is not satisfied (Sa7020: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

<V winning process>
Next, the V winning process will be described. The V winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6621) of the game state transition process. As shown in FIG. 81, the V winning process is performed when the game ball is detected at the V winning opening 222 in the clown throwing process (FIG. 74) and the V winning jackpot flag is turned ON. (FIG. 74: Sa5904), it is determined that the V winning jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 81: Sa6620: YES), and the process is executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the V winning process. In Step Sa7101, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sa7101 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sa7101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7102.

In Step Sa7102, the jackpot type counter stored in the ball entry process for clune (FIG. 74) is referred to with reference to the V distribution table (FIG. 62(b)) triggered by the entry into the first starting opening. The jackpot type in the V winning jackpot is specified based on the value of C2. After executing Step Sa7102, the process proceeds to Step Sa7104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7101 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sa7101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7103.

In Step Sa7103, with reference to the distribution table for the second starting opening (FIG. 62(c)), based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball entry process for clune (FIG. 74), the V winning jackpot is won. Identify the jackpot type. After executing Step Sa7103, the process proceeds to Step Sa7104.

As can be seen from step Sa7102 and step Sa7103, even if the game ball enters the same V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot, a small hit by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. As a result, when the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, a small hit occurs. As a result, the distribution table to be referred to is different from the case where the second opening/closing door 213 is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and becomes a V winning jackpot.

In step Sa7104, the jackpot type specified in step Sa7102 or step Sa7103 is set as the jackpot type in the V winning jackpot. Then, it progresses to step Sa7105.

In step Sa7105, the type determination completion flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sa7106 to turn off the opening/closing processing period flag. As can be seen from step Sa6602 of FIG. 81, by turning off the opening/closing processing period flag, the opening/closing execution mode that was being executed can be ended and a new opening/closing execution mode triggered by the V winning jackpot can be started. it can. After executing Step Sa7106, the V winning process is ended.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 81: Sa6630) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In Step Sa7201, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is a big hit with a high-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sa7201 that the big hit this time is the big hit with the high-frequency support mode (Sa7201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7202.

In Step Sa7202, the value of the game number counter PNC corresponding to the jackpot type is set. That is, the number of game times that can be executed in the high frequency support is set in the game number counter PNC. The number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support is set for each jackpot type. The number of game times that can be executed in the high-frequency support set for each jackpot type has been described with reference to FIG.

After executing Step Sa7202, the process proceeds to Step Sa7203 and turns on the PNC count flag. Then, it progresses to step Sa7204.

In step Sa7204, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize information regarding the number of game times that can be executed in high frequency support. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003) of the normal process. After executing Step Sa7204, the process proceeds to Step Sa7205.

In step Sa7205, a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, the V winning jackpot flag, and the second symbol display portion flag are turned off. After executing Step Sa7205, the process proceeds to Step Sa7206.

In step Sa7206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7201 that the current big hit is not the big hit with the high frequency support mode (Sa7201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7207.

In step Sa7207, a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot flag, the V winning jackpot flag, and the second symbol display portion flag are turned off. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The electric power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 75: Sa6008).

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sa7301 it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sa7301 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sa7301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7302.

In step Sa7302, it is determined whether or not the support win flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. If it is determined in step Sa7302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sa7302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7303.

In Step Sa7303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sa7303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7303: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa7303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7304.

In Step Sa7304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. In step Sa7304, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sa7304: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa7305, and after setting the deviation display, the processing for main electric power support is terminated. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa7304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sa7304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7306.

In Step Sa7306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Sa7306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is “0” (Sa7306: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa7306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0” (Sa7306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7307.

In Step Sa7307, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON.

If it is determined in step Sa7307 that the high frequency support mode is being performed (Sa7307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7308.

In Step Sa7308, an electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. It is elected (see FIG. 63(b)). Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sa7309.

In Step Sa7309, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in Step Sa7308 is support win. If it is determined in step Sa7309 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sa7309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7310, the support winning flag is set to ON, and various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sa7311.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa7309 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not the support winning (Sa7309: NO), the process of step Sa7310 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sa7311.

In step Sa7311, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The game number counter is decremented by 1 each time one game time is completed in the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sa7311 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (Sa7311: NO), the main power combination support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7311 that the number-of-games counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step Sa7312, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing Step Sa7312, the process proceeds to Step Sa7313.

In Step Sa7313, the PNC count flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sa7314.

In step Sa7314, a low-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

The low frequency support mode command set in step Sa7314 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal external output process (FIG. 75: step Sa6003). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support mode command, and executes the corresponding process.

When it is determined in step Sa7307 that the high frequency support mode is not set (Sa7307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7315, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Sa7316.

In Step Sa7316, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in Step Sa7315 is support winning. In step Sa7316, when it is determined that the support is not won (Sa7316: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7316 that the support is won (Sa7316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7317, after which the support winning flag is turned ON and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa7302 that the support winning flag is ON (Sa7302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7318 and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. In step Sa7318, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sa7318: NO), since the symbol variation display is in progress in the universal figure unit 38, the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa7318 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa7318: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7319.

In step Sa7319, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sa7320, and the in-support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sa7301 that the in-support flag is ON (Sa7301: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa7321 to execute electric role opening/closing control processing for opening/closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. The power combination opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing Step Sa7321, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric role opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 89: Sa7321) of the process for supporting the electric role.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In Step Sa7401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Sa7401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7402.

In Step Sa7402, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sa7402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7402: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Sa7402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sa7402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7403, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a in the closed state is performed. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step Sa7403, the process proceeds to Step Sa7404.

In step Sa7404, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa7405 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step Sa7405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sa7405: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sa7405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7406 and the in-support flag is turned off. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

If it is determined in step Sa7401 that the electric accessory 34a is not being opened (Sa7401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7407 and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sa7407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sa7407: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7407 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sa7407: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa7408 and executes an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. .. Then, it progresses to step Sa7409.

In Step Sa7409, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (Sa7409: NO), the flow proceeds to Step Sa7410 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step Sa7410 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sa7410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa7411 and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa7409 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sa7409: YES), or if it is determined in step Sa7410 that it is not the high frequency support mode (Sa7410: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa7412 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

<<B6>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 91 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, the effect operation buttons 24, the speaker 46, various lamps 47 are connected, and the display control device 100 is connected.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<B7>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa8101, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Sa8101, the process proceeds to Step Sa8102.

In step Sa8102, a pending command handling process is executed. In the hold command handling process, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that the hold command is received, the process corresponding to the hold command is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Sa8102, the process proceeds to Step Sa8103.

In step Sa8103, a game game effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the variation type command are received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that these commands are received, the effect to be executed in the game time is determined. The content (type) is decided, and the decided effect is set to be executed in the game time. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8103, the process proceeds to step Sa8104.

In step Sa8104, a standby period effect setting process is executed. In the standby period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the standby period described above is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed in the standby period. The details of the standby period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8104, the process proceeds to step Sa8105.

In Step Sa8105, opening period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening period effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that the opening command is received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the opening period is determined. , Is set to be executed during the opening period. Details of the opening period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8105, the process proceeds to step Sa8106.

In step Sa8106, opening/closing processing period effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing process period effect setting process, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing process period is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed in the opening/closing process period. Details of the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described later. After executing step Sa8106, the process proceeds to step Sa8107.

In Step Sa8107, ending period effect setting processing is executed. In the ending period effect setting process, it is determined whether the ending command is received from the main MPU 62, and when it is determined that the ending command is received, the content (type) of the effect to be executed in the ending period is determined. , The determined effect is set to be executed in the ending period. The details of the ending period effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sa8107, the process proceeds to step Sa8108.

In step Sa8108, command transmission processing is executed. In the command transmission process, various effect commands for displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect set in the various effect setting processes described above are transmitted to the display control device 100. After executing step Sa8108, the process proceeds to step Sa8109.

In step Sa8109, light emission control processing for performing light emission control of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes of steps Sa8102 to Sa8107. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps Sa8102 to Sa8107. After executing Step Sa8109, the process proceeds to Step Sa8110.

In step Sa8110, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the processes of steps Sa8102 to Sa8107. That is, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the voice corresponding to the effect set in steps Sa8102 to Sa8107 is output. After executing Step Sa8110, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8102).

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. In Step Sa8201, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa8201 that the hold command is received (Sa8201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8202. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8201 that the hold command has not been received (Sa8201: NO), this hold command handling process is ended.

In step Sa8202, an update process at the time of entering a ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the number of the holding information acquired based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are obtained. A process for allowing the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of pieces of hold information and the total number of pieces of hold information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Sa8202 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the entry of game balls into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as “first holding number”, and based on the entry of the gaming balls into the second starting opening 34. The number of pieces of the acquired reservation information is also referred to as "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as "total reserved number". After executing Step Sa8202, the process proceeds to Step Sa8203.

In step Sa8203, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, based on the number of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 identified in step Sa8202, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled based on the acquired number of hold information. After executing Step Sa8203, the present hold command handling process is ended.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: Sa8202) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of entering a ball. In step Sa8301, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the read target in the timer interrupt process this time is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sa8301 that the hold command which is the read target in the current timer interrupt processing is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (Sa8301: YES). Then, the process proceeds to step Sa8302, and the updating process of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The first holding number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound-light side MPU 92, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that has been read in the current timer interrupt processing. After executing step Sa8302, the process proceeds to step Sa8304 described later.

In step Sa8301, when it is determined that the hold command that is the read target in the timer interrupt process this time is not transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (Sa8301: NO), that is, When it is determined that the hold command is transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the process proceeds to step Sa8303, and the counter area 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is provided. Update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area is executed. The second holding number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound-light side MPU 92, the number of holding information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity contained in the command which is the target of reading in the current timer interrupt processing. After executing Step Sa8303, the process proceeds to Step Sa8304.

The reason why the processing in steps Sa8302 and Sa8303 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 In contrast, while the hold information is stored and held, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In Step Sa8304, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending quantity counter area is the number of pending information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the pending information acquired based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying the sum of the number of the sound light MPU 92 and the number of the sound light MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step Sa8304, the update process at the time of main entrance is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game time effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8103) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. In Step Sa8401, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command and the fluctuation type command are received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sa8401 that the variation command and the variation type command have not been received (Sa8401: NO), the game game effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8401 that the variation command and the variation type command have been received (Sa8401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8402.

In step Sa8402, the information contained in the received variation command and variation type command is read and stored. Specifically, whether the game time to be started is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the game concerned. The presence/absence of a big hit, the presence/absence of a small hit, the presence/absence of a reach, and the variation time in the game time are read and stored as the result of the winning lottery in the game. After that, it proceeds to step Sa8403.

In Step Sa8403, it is determined whether the specific processing command is received from the main MPU 62. As described above, the specific processing command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the result of the winning lottery in the game times is a big hit and it is determined to execute the specific processing shown in the above-mentioned case 1. .. When it is determined in step Sa8403 that the specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8403: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sa8404 and corresponds to the game times for executing the specific processing (processing shown in Case 1). The created effect pattern is set to be executed in the game time. Then, the game game effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8403 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8405 and the result of the winning lottery of the current game is the first start opening 33. It is determined whether or not it is a small hit based on the entry of a game ball into. In the present embodiment, the small hit that is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as "special 1 small hit", and the winning is based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The small hit is also called "special 2 small hit".

In step Sa8405, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery of this game time is the special 1 small hit (Sa 8405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8406, and the effect pattern corresponding to the special 1 small hit is given to the game time. Set to run in. The effect pattern corresponding to the special 1 small hit is an effect pattern including an effect executed in the game game shown in the above-mentioned case 2. Then, the game game effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sa8405, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery of this game time is not the special 1 small hit (Sa8405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8407 and the other results of the winning lottery (specific process is executed. It is set to execute an effect pattern corresponding to a big hit that does not occur, a small hit that is not the special 1 small hit, a miss, etc. in the game time. Then, the game game effect setting process is ended.

<Standby period effect setting process>
Next, the standby period effect setting process will be described. The standby period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the standby period effect setting process. In Step Sa8501, it is determined whether or not the specific processing command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa8501 that the specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8501: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sa8502 to turn on the sound/light specific processing flag. The sound-light specific process flag is a flag stored in the sound-light side RAM 94, and the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the specific process (case 1) described above is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. This is a flag for determination. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the sound/light specific processing flag being ON, the effect corresponding to the above-described specific processing (case 1) is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. After executing Step Sa8502, the process proceeds to Step Sa8503. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8501 that the specific processing command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8501: NO), step Sa8502 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sa8503.

In step Sa8503, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode start command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sa8503 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8503: NO), the standby period effect setting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8503 that the opening/closing execution mode start command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8504 and whether the sound/light specific processing flag is ON. Determine whether or not.

If it is determined in step Sa8504 that the sound/light specific processing flag is ON, that is, if case 1 described above is satisfied (Sa8504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8505, and the right-handed suggestion effect and The W chance suggestion effect is set to be executed. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8504 that the sound/light specific processing flag is not ON (Sa8504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8506, and the right hit suggestion effect is set to be executed in the standby period. Then, this waiting period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening period performance setting process>
Next, the opening period effect setting process will be described. The opening period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the opening period effect setting process. In Step Sa8601, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the opening period). ing. Therefore, the sound emission control device 90, based on the information included in the received opening command, results of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the opening period). ) Can be grasped. When it is determined in step Sa8601 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8601: NO), the present opening period effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8601 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8602.

In step Sa8602, it is determined based on the information included in the received opening command whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit. In step Sa8602, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (Sa8602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8603 and the opening effect corresponding to the type of big hit. Is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed suggestion effect is set to be executed in the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8602, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (Sa8602: NO), that is, when the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is triggered. If the result of the hit lottery is a small hit, the process proceeds to step Sa8604.

In Step Sa8604, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a special 1 small hit. In step Sa8604, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the special small hit (Sa8604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8605, and the special small hit is won. The corresponding opening effect is set to be executed during the opening period. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in Case 1 described above, the right hit suggestion effect and the W chance suggestion effect are set to be executed in the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa8604, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the special small hit (Sa8604: NO), that is, the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time. If the result of the winning lottery that triggered the above is a special 2 small hit, the process proceeds to step Sa8606, and it is set to execute the opening effect corresponding to the special 2 small hit in the opening period. Specifically, in this embodiment, the right-handed suggestion effect is set to be executed in the opening period. Then, the opening period effect setting process is ended.

<Opening/closing process period effect setting process>
Next, the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing will be described. The opening/closing process period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8106) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing period effect setting processing. In step Sa8701, the first chance effect setting process is executed. In the first chance effect setting process, the process relating to the setting of the first chance effect in Case 1 and Case 2 described above is executed. Details of the first chance effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa8701, the process proceeds to Step Sa8702.

In step Sa8702, a second chance effect setting process during non-storage is executed. In the non-reserved second chance effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is stored in the storage section 218 in the above-described case 1 and case 2, and if the game ball is not stored in the storage section 218, 2 Set to execute the second chance production. Details of the second chance effect setting process during non-storage will be described later. After executing Step Sa8702, the process proceeds to Step Sa8703.

In step Sa8703, V winning effect setting processing is executed. In the V winning effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the game balls are stored in the V winning opening 222, and when the game balls enter the V winning opening 222, the V winning effect is set to be executed. The details of the V winning effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sa8703, the process proceeds to Step Sa8704.

In step Sa8704, a second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning V is executed. In the second non-winning prize effect setting process, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 218 in the above-described case 1 and case 2, but the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 222, and the non-V winning opening 224. When a game ball is entered, the second chance effect is set to be executed. The details of the second chance effect setting process when there is no V winning will be described later. After executing Step Sa8704, the process proceeds to Step Sa8705.

In step Sa8705, it is set to execute the effect for the opening/closing processing period corresponding to another jackpot type. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the jackpot type in which the opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 does not open is selected, opening/closing of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. Set the effect to be executed during the processing period. After executing step Sa8705, the main opening/closing process period effect setting process is ended.

<First chance performance setting process>
Next, the first chance effect setting process will be described. The first chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8701) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the first chance effect setting process. In Step Sa8801, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing door opening command is received from the main MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the second opening/closing door 213 is opened in the winning lottery when the big hit for executing the specific process is won and when the small win is won. Further, the second opening/closing door opening command includes the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231. Therefore, the voice emission control device 90 grasps the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 231 based on the information included in the received second opening/closing door opening command. can do. If it is determined in step Sa8801 that the second opening/closing door opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8801: NO), the first chance opportunity effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8801 that the second opening/closing door opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8802.

In step Sa8802, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit. In step Sa8802, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit (Sa8802: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a big hit to execute the specific process, the process proceeds to step Sa8803, and it is set to execute the first chance effect in case 1 described above. After executing Step Sa8803, the first chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8802 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big hit (Sa8802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8804.

In Step Sa8804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special small hit. When it is determined in step Sa8804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special small hit (Sa8804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8805 and the 1 in case 2 described above. Set to execute the second chance production. After executing Step Sa8805, the first-time chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8804 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not the special small hit (Sa8804: NO), the first chance chance effect setting process is directly performed. finish.

<Second chance effect setting process when not storing>
Next, the second chance effect setting process during non-storage will be described. The non-storage second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8702) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process during non-storage. In Step Sa8901, it is determined whether or not the second special winning opening entry command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sa8901 that the second special winning opening entry command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8904 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8901 that the second special winning opening winning command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8902, and the second large winning opening for sound is entered. It is determined whether the flag is ON. The second big winning opening entrance ball for sound and light is a flag stored in the sound-light side RAM 94, and whether or not a game ball has entered the second big winning opening 212, that is, the game ball is a storage unit. This is a flag for the audio emission control device 90 to determine whether or not it is stored in 218.

If it is determined in step Sa8902 that the sound/light second big winning opening ball flag is not ON (Sa8902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8903, and the sound/light second big winning opening ball flag is turned ON. To do. Then, it progresses to step Sa8904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8902 that the second big winning opening for sound light entrance flag is ON (Sa8902: YES), the process directly proceeds to step Sa8904. That is, only when the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 212, and the second large winning opening for sound and light entrance flag is not ON, the second large winning opening for sound and light. Turn on the ball entry flag.

In Step Sa8904, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing door closing command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sa8904 that the second opening/closing door closing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8904: NO), the second non-storage-time second chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa8904 that the second opening/closing door closing command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa8904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa8905.

In Step Sa8905, it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening for sound/light entering ball flag is ON, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second big winning opening 212 and stored in the storage section 218. To do. In step Sa8905, when it is determined that the second big winning opening for sound light entrance flag is ON (Sa8905: YES), the second non-reservation second chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa8905 that the second large winning opening for sound and light entrance flag is not ON (Sa8905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8906.

In Step Sa8906, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit. In step Sa8906, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit (Sa8906: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a big hit to execute the specific process, the process proceeds to step Sa8907, and the second chance effect and the big hit notification effect in case 1 described above are set to be executed by the second opening of the opening/closing process period. To do. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa8908 to set the effect to be executed in the opening/closing processing period of the second and subsequent times. After that, the second chance effect setting process during non-storage is ended.

In step Sa8906, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big hit (Sa8906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8909, and the trigger of opening the second opening/closing door 213. It is determined whether or not the result of the hit lottery is a special 1 small hit. In step Sa8909, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small hit (Sa8909: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sa8910, and 2 in case 2 described above. It is set to execute the second chance effect and the off-point notification effect. After that, the second chance effect setting process during non-storage is ended.

<V winning performance setting process>
Next, the V winning effect setting process will be described. The V winning effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8703) of the opening/closing process effect setting process.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process. In Step Sa9001, it is determined whether or not the V winning command is received from the main MPU 62. The V winning command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. When it is determined in step Sa9001 that the V winning command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9001: NO), the V winning effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sa9001, when it is determined that the V winning command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9002, and the effect indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 222 is shown. The V winning effect is set to be executed. Then, it progresses to step Sa9003, and turns off the above-mentioned 2nd big winning opening entrance ball for sound. After that, this V winning performance setting processing ends.

<Second chance performance setting process when V is not winning>
Next, the second chance effect setting process when there is no V winning will be described. The VCH non-winning second chance effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 98: Sa8704) of the opening/closing process period effect setting process.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the second chance effect setting process when there is no V winning. In Step Sa9101, it is determined whether or not a non-V winning command is received from the main MPU 62. The non-V winning command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when the game ball enters the non-V winning opening 224. When it is determined in step Sa9101 that the non-V winning command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9101: NO), the second V chance non-winning chance effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa9101 that the non-V winning command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9102.

In Step Sa9102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit. In step Sa9102, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a big hit (Sa9102: YES), that is, the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213. If the result is a big hit to execute the specific process, the process proceeds to step Sa9103, and the second chance effect and the big hit notification effect in case 1 described above are set to be executed. After executing step Sa9103, the process proceeds to step Sa9104, and the above-mentioned second special winning opening for sound/light entrance flag is turned off. After that, the second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning of the V finishes. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa9102 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not a big hit (Sa9102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa9105.

In Step Sa9105, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is a special 1 small hit. In step Sa9105, when it is determined that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is the special 1 small hit (Sa9105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9106, and 2 in case 2 described above. It is set to execute the second chance effect and the off-statement effect. Then, it progresses to above-mentioned step Sa8804, and turns off the 2nd special winning opening entrance ball for sound lights. After that, the second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning of the V finishes. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa9105 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the opening of the second opening/closing door 213 is not the special small hit (Sa9105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sa8804 described above, and the sound and light is emitted. Turn off the second winning hole winning flag. After that, the second chance effect setting process at the time of non-winning of the V finishes.

<Ending period performance setting process>
Next, the ending period effect setting process will be described. The ending period effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 92: Sa8107) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the ending period effect setting process. In Step Sa9201, it is determined whether the ending command is received from the main MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the ending command includes the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the ending period). Therefore, the sound emission control device 90, based on the information included in the received ending command, the result of the winning lottery (big hit, small hit, etc.) that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time (start of the ending period). ) Can be grasped. When it is determined in step Sa9201 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9201: NO), the ending period effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sa9201 that the ending command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sa9201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9202.

In step Sa9202, based on the information included in the received ending command, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sa9202 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (Sa9202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sa9203, and an ending effect corresponding to the type of the big hit. Is set to be executed in the ending period. Then, the ending period effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa9202 that the result of the winning lottery that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not a big hit (Sa9202: NO), that is, the trigger to shift to the open/close execution mode this time is set. If the result of the hit lottery is a small hit, the ending period effect setting process is ended as it is.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sa9301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sa9302.

In step Sa9302, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sa9401, a command storing process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image or draws a new image while the image is being drawn. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sa9501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 105), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sa9501), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the manner of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode is designed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the image is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sa9502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sa9501) or the like. . Then, it progresses to step Sa9503.

In step Sa9503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sa9502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sa9504.

In step Sa9504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sa9503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sa9505, and after other processes are executed, the V interrupt process is ended.

As described above, when the jackpot is executed in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (case 1) and when the jackpot is won (case 2) In the case of), although the pattern of the symbol showing the result of the winning lottery is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, the lottery result of the winning lottery is suggested by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound. The production to do is not executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes the lottery result of the winning lottery by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 or outputting the sound cannot recognize the lottery result at the game time when the game time is over. As a result, even if the small hit is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the big hit is won.

Further, after the game time is over, in both case 1 and case 2, right hit suggestion effect and W chance suggestion effect are executed, so during the period when the effect is executed after the game time is over. Also, in the winning lottery, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the big hit is won rather than the small hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the type of the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Instead, the game ball is determined by entering the type determination gate 202 during execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, when the jackpot type is determined, the round lamp of the round display unit 39 is lit with a display according to the number of times of execution of the round game corresponding to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if you have won the small hit, the round lamp will not light up. In other words, the round lamp does not light up immediately after the end of the game, regardless of whether you have won the big hit or the small hit, so after the end of the game, you will see the round lamp. Based on this, it is possible to avoid the player from distinguishing whether the big hit or the small win has been won in the game time.

As a result, the player does not recognize the lottery result of the winning lottery until the player makes a right hit and enters the game ball into the type determination gate 202 after the end of the game, On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the jackpot is won rather than the jackpot for a relatively long period. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player for a relatively long period even in the period after the game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit or the small hit is started, It can be noticed. In addition, when determining the jackpot type, the player is allowed to hit the right side and the game ball is thrown into the type determination gate 202, so that the player is actively involved in determining the jackpot type, and Thus, it is possible to further focus on the game in the period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is confirmed when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. , The type of jackpot triggered by the entry into the V winning opening 222 is determined. Therefore, the player can be given a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the big hit in the hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start opening 33, the big hit type is determined by entering the game ball in the type determination gate 202. , There is relatively no sense of speed regarding the progress of the game until the round game is started. As a result, the jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 and when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222. In this case, the progress of the game can be slowed down, the expectation of the player for the game can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, during the round game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, When a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and a new jackpot is confirmed, the jackpot is selected in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. Although the round game being executed is stopped, a new round game is started with the jackpot due to the game ball entering the V winning opening 222, so the player can expect a new round game. Can be given to.

In addition, in this case, the game ball is at the V winning opening 222 rather than the jackpot type that is distributed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the game ball is entered at the first starting opening 33. It is assumed that the player has anxiety that the jackpot type to be distributed when the new jackpot is confirmed after entering the ball is disadvantageous.

However, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the hit lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. Distribution (FIG. 62(a)) and distribution of the jackpot type when the jackpot is determined by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 222 when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (FIG. 62(a)) 62: (b)), the probability of being distributed to the 5R first-class jackpot, which is the distribution result that gives the most advantageous privilege to the player, is that the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. It is higher when the big hit is confirmed by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222 triggered by. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the anxiety of the player as described above and to give the player a greater expectation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the V winning opening 222 is arranged downstream of the type determination gate 202 with respect to the direction in which the game balls flow in the game board 30. Further, a V winning opening 222 is arranged downstream of the second special winning opening 212. Therefore, in case 1 above, when the player shoots a game ball toward the type determination gate 202, the jackpot type is determined when the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, and during the opening and closing process period. When the player rushes in and the second opening/closing door 213 is opened, the game ball that has fired the game ball toward the type determination gate 202 easily enters the V winning opening 222. Therefore, after the round game starts when the big hit is won in the winning lottery executed when the ball enters the first starting opening 33, the game ball enters the second big winning opening 212 in a natural flow. Then, after that, a game ball enters the V winning opening 222, and it is possible to shift to a round game triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening 222. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly advance the game. As a result, a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 and is newer than the jackpot type that is distributed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed when the player enters the first starting opening 33. When the big jackpot is fixed, the big jackpot type that is distributed may be disadvantaged, so that the player does not have time to have anxiety, or the anxiety of such a player can be reduced. .. Then, it is possible to give a greater expectation to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is selected in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the specific process is executed by the specific process execution determination process. The presence/absence is determined, and then, the number of executions of the round game corresponding to the jackpot is determined. That is, whether or not to open/close the second opening/closing door 213 as a round game and the number of executions of the round game are separately determined. Therefore, the round is determined by the combination of whether the second opening/closing door 213 is opened/closed and the number of executions of the round game. It is possible to realize various operation modes of the first opening/closing door 36b and the second opening/closing door 213 in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<B8>> Modification of First Embodiment β:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<B8-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described first embodiment β, in the effect executed in the game time executed in the case 1, that is, in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. An effect executed in the game time when the jackpot is won and the specific process execution determination process determines that the specific process is executed, and an effect executed in the game time executed in the case of Case 2, That is, the same effect pattern is set as the effect to be executed in the game time when the small hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. It may be configured. By setting the same effect pattern in the case 1 and the case 2, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether it is the case 1 or the case 2, and the game time is a lottery. It is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation that he or she has won.

In addition, an effect pattern table in which a plurality of special effect patterns used in the case 1 and the case 2 are set corresponding to the variation times of the game times is provided, and the effect pattern table is used to change the variation times of the game times. It may be configured to select a performance pattern. By selecting an effect pattern from the same effect pattern table in the case 1 and the case 2, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is the case 1 or the case 2, and the game time concerned is determined. It is possible to give the player an expectation that he or she has won the winning lottery.

<<B8-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described first embodiment β, when the jackpot is settled when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the jackpot is set when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. Although the structure for determining the type is adopted, as in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, the gaming ball is the V winning opening. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type is determined by entering a game ball in the type determination gate 202 after entering the ball 222 and determining the jackpot. By doing this, when the big hit in the winning lottery in the game times executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 The type of jackpot is determined in three cases: when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times, which is executed as a result, and when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 222 and the jackpot is confirmed. The processing to be performed can be unified, and the processing can be simplified.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated ball-in portion (V-winning jackpot type determining gate) for determining the jackpot type triggered by the game ball entering the V-winning hole 222 is adopted. Then, a configuration for arranging the V winning jackpot type determination gate downstream from the V winning opening 222 with respect to the circulation direction of the game balls may be adopted. In this case, the jackpot type is determined by using the same process as the type determination process in the first embodiment β, which is executed when a game ball enters the V winning jackpot type determination gate. Can be simplified.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the V winning jackpot type determination gate is arranged at a position that is not downstream from the V winning opening 222 in the flow direction of the game ball. For example, when the jackpot is determined when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222, the V winning jackpot classification determination gate is arranged at a position where the player cannot enter the ball unless the mode of firing the game ball is changed. By doing so, the operation mode of the operation handle 25 is changed variously, and the game is executed by the player, so that the flow of the game can be changed frequently, and the player actively participates in the game. It is possible to promote participation and add intonation to the player's expectations.

<<B8-3>> Modification 3:
In the first embodiment β, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the game ball after the end of the game time. Although a configuration for executing the type determination process and determining the jackpot type is adopted when the player enters the type determination gate 202, another configuration can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the jackpot type is determined in the variation start process in the game time. That is, the jackpot type is determined before the game times are completed. Then, when the game time is a big hit, the round lamp is turned on in a display mode corresponding to the determined big hit type when the game time is finished, but the lighting timing is set to the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. It is set to the end point (immediately before the start of the opening/closing processing period) and the opening period is set longer than usual. By doing this, until the round lamp is lit, the lottery result of the winning lottery is not recognized, and the player is expected to win the jackpot for a relatively long period of time. Can be given. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player for a relatively long period even in the period after the game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode based on the big hit or the small hit is started, It can be noticed. In the first embodiment β, the round lamp is turned on at the end of the opening period, but it may be turned on at the start of the opening period.

<<B8-4>> Modification 4:
In the first embodiment β described above, in the opening/closing process executed in the case 1 and the case 2, the opening/closing scenario in which the second opening/closing door 213 opens/closes once is set. An open/close scenario in which 213 opens/closes multiple times may be adopted. By doing so, the probability that the game ball will enter the V winning opening 222 is improved, and the player's expectation can be improved.

<<B8-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-described first embodiment β, the specific process execution determination process is performed when the variation of the game number is started when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, more specifically, the variation start process ( Although it was executed in FIG. 78), it may be executed at other timing as long as the game time is over and the waiting period is started. For example, it may be executed in the game state transition processing. By doing so, for example, an effect that causes the player to operate the effect operation button 24 during the game time that is executed by the game ball entering the first start opening 33 is executed, and the effect is executed. Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific process execution determination process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the specific process based on whether or not the player has operated the effect operation button 24. Further, for example, whether or not to execute the specific process based on whether or not the game ball has entered a specific ball entrance during the game time that is executed by the game ball having entered the 1 start opening 33 You may employ|adopt the structure which performs the specific process execution determination process which determines. That is, in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, depending on the mode of progress of the game during the game time, You may employ|adopt the structure which determines the aspect of the process in the opening/closing execution mode performed after the end of the said game time. By adopting such a configuration, when the jackpot is won, the player can concentrate on the game even in the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game time.

<<B8-6>> Modification 6:
In the first embodiment β, when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the suspended game times is determined by the first determination process, and as a result of the first determination process, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery of the held game times, The specific process execution determination process is executed as the process in the destination determination process, and it is determined whether or not to execute the specific process as shown in Case 1 before the reserved game time is executed as the game time. May be. Then, in the game times executed before the holding game times are executed as the game times, an effect (specific process execution suggesting effect) that suggests that the specific process is executed later may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an expectation about the pending game times to be executed later. In addition, it may be determined by the previous determination process whether or not the case 2 in the pending game time, and similarly, the specific process execution suggesting effect may be executed. By doing so, the player can broaden the range of guesses regarding the rewards when the reserved game times are executed as the game times, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<B8-7>> Modification 7:
In the first embodiment β, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the waiting period (see FIG. 64) is a period from the end of the game time in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery to the start of the opening period. You may employ|adopt the structure which changes the right-handed suggestion production which changes to stepwise with progress of time of a waiting period. The waiting period is continued until the game ball enters the type determination gate 202, starting from the time when the game number of the big hit in the winning lottery is finished. In other words, the opening period is not started unless the game ball enters the type determination gate 202. If the player does not recognize that he has to hit the right hand and is left-handed, the game will not proceed as intended and will reduce the player's expectation.

Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion of right-handing to the player is gradually strengthened as the waiting period elapses from the time when the game number of the big hit in the winning lottery is over. For example, as compared with the right hit suggestion effect that is executed by the elapsed time of the waiting period from 0 second to 5 seconds, the right hit suggestion effect that is executed by the elapsed time of the waiting period is from 5 seconds to 10 seconds is more player. It is a content that strongly urges the player to make a right-handed stroke, and compared with a right-handed suggestion effect that the elapsed time of the waiting period is executed by 5 seconds to 10 seconds, the elapsed time of the waiting period is 10 seconds to 15 seconds. Alternatively, the right-handing suggestion effect executed in step 1 may be adopted so that the player is strongly encouraged to right-hand.

As a right-handing suggestion effect to be executed in the waiting period, for example, by increasing (or decreasing) the sound suggesting right-handing stepwise as the waiting period elapses, the player is prompted to make a right-handing. The mode may be strengthened stepwise, and by gradually increasing the size of the image showing right hitting (for example, the image of the arrow pointing to the right) as the waiting period elapses, The mode of urging right-handing may be strengthened stepwise, or the brightness, brightness, color, etc. of the image showing right-handing may be changed stepwise as the waiting period elapses (for example, increase or decrease). By so doing, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of urging the player to make a right-handed stroke is gradually strengthened, or the tone of the voice guidance for guiding the right-handed player as the waiting period elapses stepwise. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of urging the player to make a right-handed stroke is strengthened in a stepwise manner.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the player is making a right hit during the waiting period, and it is possible to promote the smooth progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and improve the interest of the game.

<<B8-8>> Modification 8:
In the above-described first embodiment β, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration including one type determination gate, but may have a configuration including a plurality of type determination gates. For example, if one is left-handed, a type determination gate (hereinafter, also referred to as a left-side type determination gate) is provided at a position where the game ball is likely to enter (for example, the left side of the game board 30), and right-handed A configuration may be adopted in which one type determination gate (hereinafter, right side type determination gate) is provided at a position where a game ball easily enters (for example, on the right side of the game board 30). Then, for each value of the hit random number counter C1 that is set to win the jackpot in the winning table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 60), after winning the jackpot, the left side type determination gate or the right side type It is set in advance which of the determination gates the jackpot type is determined by entering the game ball into the type determination gate. Then, after the number of times of winning the jackpot is over, an effect (left hitting suggestion effect) that suggests left-handing is executed according to the value of the hit random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, or a right-handing suggestion effect. It is determined whether to execute, and the suggestive effect is executed according to the result of the determination. By doing this, the player needs to determine the operation method of the operation handle 25 after the game number of the jackpot is over, and the player can be actively involved in the game. , It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game.

Also, for each value of the hit random number counter C1 that is set to win the big hit in the win/loss table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 60), a big hit is made by entering a game ball into the left type determination gate. A value that determines the type, a value that determines the jackpot type by entering the game ball into the right side type determination gate, a jackpot type that is determined by entering the game ball into either the left side type determination gate or the right side type determination gate It may be configured such that the value to be set is set.

<<B8-9>> Modification 9:
In the first embodiment β described above, an effect (W chance) suggesting that two opportunities are provided for winning the jackpot each in the waiting period in case 1 and the opening period in case 2. Although the configuration is performed, a configuration may be adopted in which a production (single chance production) that suggests that an opportunity (chance) for winning the jackpot is prepared once is adopted. In this case, since the second chance effect can be omitted in each case, the process necessary for executing the second chance effect can be omitted and the process can be simplified.

Further, in Case 1 and Case 2, a configuration in which the W chance effect is executed and the single chance effect is executed may be combined. By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the game in the period after the game time is over.

<<B8-10>> Modification 10:
In the first embodiment β described above, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during a round game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the round game is interrupted. Although the configuration for executing the round game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is adopted, another configuration may be adopted.

For example, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during a round game that is executed when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, the game ball enters the V winning opening 222. The state of progress of the game does not change, and a configuration may be adopted in which the round game that is executed in response to winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is executed to the end. In this case, the round game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is not executed. That is, entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, is virtually invalid, and when the small win is won in the winning lottery. Only the ball entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode being executed is substantially effective.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the game ball enters the V winning opening 222 during the round game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the game progresses. The state can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the process of interrupting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot, and to simplify the process.

Furthermore, the entry into the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, is virtually invalid, and the small win is won in the winning lottery. In the configuration in which only the ball entering the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode being executed is substantially effective, the V winning opening is executed only in the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. You may employ|adopt the structure provided with the operation mechanism (henceforth a V winning assistance mechanism) which assists the entry of the game ball into 222.

As the V winning assistance mechanism, for example, of the V winning openings 222 and the non-V winning openings 224 provided in the clune 220, a mechanism that temporarily closes only the non-V winning opening 224 (hereinafter also referred to as a non-V winning opening closing mechanism). ) May be adopted. In this case, the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, if the entry to the V winning opening 222 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery is substantially invalid, Since it assists the game balls to enter the winning opening 222, the operation of the non-V winning opening closing mechanism does not substantially affect the progress of the game.

However, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening 222 is assisted, and the expectation of the player who recognizes that the game ball entered the V winning opening 222 is expected. Can be improved. That is, by operating the non-V winning opening closing mechanism, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation without substantially affecting the state of progress of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the control of the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism is executed by control means other than the main control device 60 (for example, the sound emission control device 90). For example, in case 1, the voice emission control device 90 decides to operate the V winning assistance mechanism by receiving the specific processing command, and controls the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism at the start of the opening/closing processing period. The configuration for closing the non-V winning opening 224 may be adopted, or when the game ball is stored in the storing portion 218, the non-V winning opening 224 is closed at the timing of opening the storage valve 216. A configuration may be adopted. If such a configuration is adopted, the control of the operation of the V winning assistance mechanism is performed by the control means other than the main controller 60, so that the processing load on the main controller 60 can be reduced.

The V winning assistance mechanism is not limited to the non-V winning opening closing mechanism described above, and any other mechanism may be used as long as it is a mechanism for assisting the game ball to enter the V winning opening 222. May be. For example, a mechanism for moving the flow passage 211 so that the outlet of the flow passage 211 for letting the game balls out to the clune 220 is located right above the V winning opening 222 may be adopted. Moreover, you may employ|adopt the mechanism which arrange|positions a magnet in the vicinity of the V winning opening 222 temporarily.

<<B>> Second embodiment:
<<B1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. It should be noted that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device for controlling the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-openable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning the winning, when a reach occurs, etc. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". Further, in the following description, when the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25 and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board in front view and flows down the left side of the game board, the player calls “left side”. It may be expressed as "hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

In the game board 30, a general winning opening 32, an upper first starting opening 33 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the first starting opening 33), a lower first starting opening 44 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the first starting opening 44), A second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44 are ball entrances into which game balls can enter. The upper first starting opening 33 is provided above the center of the game board 30, and the lower first starting opening 44 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting opening 33 or the lower first starting opening 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described later is executed. . The lower first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting opening 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the lower first starting opening 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35 is won.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. Therefore, the second starting opening 34 is provided at a position where the game ball enters when the player makes a right hit by operating the operation handle 25. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball and a winning lottery described below is executed.

The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 44a. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 44a shifts to the electric role open state in which the electric role 44a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower first starting opening 44 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing. It is possible to enter the lower first starting opening 44. In this embodiment, even if the game balls pass through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

The variable winning a prize device 36 is provided with a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As described above, when the game ball enters the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44, or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open/close execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the state transits to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting opening 33 or the lower first starting opening 44. The first symbol display portion 37a corresponds to the lottery result on the segment display when the winning lottery is carried out triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper first starting opening 33 or the lower first starting opening 44. As a display mode until the display is performed, the variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment indicator to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting opening (upper 1st starting opening 33 and lower 1st starting opening 44) by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper first starting opening 33 or the lower first starting opening 44 are reserved up to a maximum of four as a total of the two first starting openings.

The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. . When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41 is adapted to the case where the first symbol display portion 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the upper first starting opening 33 or the lower first starting opening 44. The variable display or predetermined display of symbols is performed. Further, the liquid crystal display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the variable display of the symbol or the predetermined display is performed accordingly. Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is limited to performing variable display or predetermined display of symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 34. Instead, the effect display during the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the jackpot is won, is displayed. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 109A is an explanatory diagram showing the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal design is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a design corresponding to the first design displayed on the second design display portion 37b.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), the liquid crystal display device 41 variably displays the symbols 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 109( b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are cases where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and cases where an image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, similarly to the main display area MA, there are cases where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and where there is an image of the second liquid crystal symbol. When the image of the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the second liquid crystal design image is displayed in the main display area MA. In this case, the image of the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA. Which of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 as the symbols for the first liquid crystal or the symbols for the second liquid crystal shown in FIG. 109(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll cyclically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 109(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) or second starting opening 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodic. The variable display for scrolling in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the activated line L1. In addition, the modes of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA are not limited to the above-described modes. For example, the number of symbols in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbols, the number of symbols in each symbol, etc., the display mode of the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal. Can adopt various aspects.

In the sub display area SA, three symbol columns Z4, Z5, Z6 on the left, center, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z4 to Z6, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 as the symbols for the first liquid crystal or the symbols for the second liquid crystal shown in FIG. 109(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol A variable display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 109(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6, and the symbol row Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z4 to Z6. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and is displayed in a stopped state, when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a combination of predetermined symbols determined in advance is on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the activated line L2. The manner of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the sub display area SA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the number of symbols in the sub display area SA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbols, the number of symbols in each symbol, etc., the display mode of the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal. Can adopt various aspects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the winning of the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44) is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44) and second start opening 34 is maximum. Up to four.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting in synchronization with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronization display section Sync1 for displaying and the second synchronization display for performing blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special drawing unit 37. And a part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a stop signal, the first symbol display portion 37a The 1-synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a light. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b is variably displayed, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 displays a blink, and when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a stop, the second synchronization display. The section Sync2 displays a light.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. You may employ|adopt the structure which does not display some or all of these displays.

<<B2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 110 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. On the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning a prize. Various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates of the device 36 and the like are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44) and the second starting opening 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric winning product driving unit that opens and closes the electric winning object 44a of the lower first starting opening 44. The main display unit 45 is connected to the opening/closing door drive unit 48b for opening/closing the opening/closing door 48a. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory release lottery, if the electric accessory release is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 44a is opened. Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting opening (upper side) When the entry of game balls into the first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and When the entry of the game ball into the 2 starting port 34 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence/absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are variably displayed are understood. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach determination as to whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting opening 33 or the lower first starting opening 44, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball It is chronologically stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The big hit random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is the entered ball when the game ball enters the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). When the game ball is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the second holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. It is stored in Rb.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and hits the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , It is determined whether or not a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44), the big hit stored in the first holding area Ra The value of the random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c and collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit. Processing and when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, A process of collating with a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not a big hit is executed in parallel. In the following, the process of determining whether or not a big hit is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44), and the second starting opening 34. While performing the determination process of whether or not to be a big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball to the in parallel, the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display portion 37b Pachinko machines that can be executed in parallel are also called simultaneous fluctuation machines.

In the following description, a game (also referred to as a game time) executed when a game ball enters the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44) is used as a first game. It may be referred to as a starting mouth game time, and a game (also referred to as a game time) executed when the game ball enters the second starting mouth 34 may be referred to as a second starting mouth game time.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is the reserved information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44). Is stored in the first holding area Ra and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed, and the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 109(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

As another specific example, in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 109(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z4, and then the same symbols as Z4 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z6. Thus, the reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z5. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z5.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of fluctuation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of fluctuation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release is executed in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed using the value of the counter C4 to determine whether to control the electric accessory 44a in the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 463, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=464 and 465, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in the closed state.

At least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb are also referred to as holding information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the first holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44). The win/loss table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 are collated. Are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win/loss tables, one for the probability mode and one for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode), are stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. FIG. 112(a) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 112(b) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 112(a), in the hit/failure table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 113(a) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 113(b) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 113(a), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the low probability mode). .. Further, 1192 values of 4 to 1195 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit, and four values of 1196 to 1199 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit.

Here, the "small hit" is a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is a winning/discarding result that does not trigger a shift in both the lottery mode and the support mode described later. is there. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the small hit, the variable winning a prize device 36 having the opening period of 1.6 sec occurs once as the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode). .. Further, 1176 values of 20 to 1195 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a small hit, and four values of 1196 to 1199 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a hit.

In this way, also in the win/loss table for the second starting opening, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, similarly to the win/loss table for the first starting opening. ing. Further, in the hit/damage table for the second starting opening, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a small hit is set in both the hit/miss table for the low probability mode and the hit/miss table for the high probability mode. 2 When the winning lottery is executed when the game ball enters the starting port, the winning lottery is set with a predetermined probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times of opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of winning lottery after completion of the open/close execution mode

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the frequencies are relatively high and low.

In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set a jackpot that involves the execution of a specific process when the player wins. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a jackpot type “specific probability variable jackpot” is set. The specific probability variation jackpot involves the execution of specific processing when the player wins. Details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 114(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 114(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to in a lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44), and the second The distribution table for the starting opening is referred to when the winning lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34.

As shown in FIG. 114(a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, for entering the game ball into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). As the jackpot type based on, 10R certainty variation jackpot, 10R specific certainty variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 10 (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, for the 10R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Further, in the 10R probability variation big hit, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state in the low-frequency support mode. In the case of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 10R specific probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 10 (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. is there. In addition, for the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Further, in the 10R specific probability variation jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent hit lottery.

In addition, the 10R specific probability variation jackpot involves execution of specific processing when the player wins, as described above. Details will be described later.

In the 8R regular jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. In addition, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the low frequency support mode. However, in the case of 8R regular jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of times of game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times. , The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 11" correspond to the 10R certainty variation jackpot and "12 to 19" correspond to the 10R specific certainty variation jackpot. Correspondingly, "20 to 39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 114(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, 2R certainty variation jackpots and 2R normal jackpots are available as jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34. It is set.

In the 2R probability variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 2 (2 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. In addition, for the 2R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Further, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode described later is set, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 2R probability varying jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the hit lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 2R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is two (2 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. .. In the 2R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. In addition, in the 2R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the low frequency support mode. However, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of executed game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times. , The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" correspond to the 2R probability variable jackpot and "20 to 39" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot. Is set to.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type distribution mode when the jackpot is a game to the first start opening (upper first start opening 33 and lower first start opening 44) It is different in the case of a big hit based on the entrance of a ball and the case of a big hit based on the entrance of a game ball into the second starting opening 34, and it is clear in the advantage for the player. There are differences.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric auditors object 44a of the lower first starting opening 44 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, a mode in which a game ball is shot to the game area PA is similar. When the comparison is made in the situation where the operation continues, the frequency of the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting opening 44 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low, so that the frequency of the high frequency support mode is low. Frequency support mode and can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of being a winning combination in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is different between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time release time of the electric accessory 44a is set to be longer when the electric-role opening win is selected than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric accessory 44a is in the open state a plurality of times, one of the open states ends and the next The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric auditors' item open lottery after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the game ball entering the lower first starting opening 44 is higher than in the low frequency support mode, and the game ball enters the lower first starting opening 44. It becomes easier to hit the ball. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/win lottery win/loss table) that is used when executing the power auditors open lottery.

FIG. 115(a) shows a win/loss table for electric auditors product open lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 115(a), in the winning/disabling table for the electric accessory release lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is the winning of the electric accessory release. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 115(b) shows a win/loss table for electric auditors product open lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 115(b), in the winning/disabling table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electric role opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<B3>> Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game on the gaming machine.

When the game is started, in step F101, the player makes a left-hand hit, causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the upper first start opening 33. At this time, the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. When a game ball enters the upper first starting opening 33, the first starting opening game time is executed and a winning lottery is performed.

If the winning lottery in the first starting mouth game times is out (F101: NO), the game balls are repeatedly inserted into the upper first starting mouth 33 to execute the first starting mouth game times.

When the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed in the first starting mouth game times (F102: YES), when the type of the winning jackpot is the normal jackpot (F103: NO), the first starting mouth game A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the round (F104). Specifically, a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit the right is executed. According to the suggestion effect, the player performs a right-handed stroke after the first starting opening game times are finished, and enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game is over, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (limited to 100 game times). A suggestive effect that urges the player to left-handed is executed, the player performs left-handedness, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). The first start opening game time is executed (F105).

The high-frequency support mode is continued until the game is executed 100 times (F106:NO→F107:NO), and if the jackpot is won within 100 times (F106:YES), the game proceeds from step F103. ..

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won within 100 game plays in the high frequency support mode (F106:NO→F107:YES), the game proceeds from step F101.

The description returns to step F103. In step F103, if the jackpot type of the jackpot that was won is the probability variation jackpot (F103: YES), and if it is not the specific probability variation jackpot (F108: NO), after the end of the first starting mouth game times A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player (F109). Specifically, a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit the right is executed. According to the suggestion effect, the player performs a right-handed stroke after the first starting opening game times are finished, and enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (until the next big hit). A suggestive effect that urges the player to left-handed is executed, the player performs left-handedness, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). The first start opening game time is executed (F110).

The high frequency support mode is continued until the big hit is won in the winning lottery (F110→F111: NO).

When the first starting opening game time is executed and the jackpot is won (F110→F111: YES), the game proceeds from step F103.

The description returns to step F108. In step F108, if the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won is the specific probability variation jackpot (F108: YES), the round game is executed as a privilege to be given to the player after the end of the first starting opening game times. (F112). Specifically, a suggestion effect that urges the player to hit the right is executed. According to the suggestion effect, the player performs a right-handed stroke after the first starting opening game times are finished, and enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. A suggestive effect that urges the player to left-handed is executed, the player performs left-handedness, and causes the game ball to enter the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). The first start opening game time is executed (F113).

When the first starting opening game times are executed and the jackpot in the executed first starting opening game times is a big hit (F114: YES), the first starting opening game times are started. At times, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency port mode (F115). In the case of winning a big hit in the winning lottery in the first starting opening game times that is executed in a normal gaming machine, the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode after the end of the first starting opening game times. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode at the start of the first start opening game time.

Further, at this time, at the start of the first game opening for the starting mouth, a suggestive effect for prompting the player to right-hand is executed.

During the period when the first starting mouth game times, which is a big hit in the winning lottery, is being executed, the player makes a right hit according to the suggestive effect of prompting a right hit, and inserts the game ball into the second starting mouth 34. The ball is caused to run and the second starting opening game time is executed (F116). At this time, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the second starting mouth game times executed during the period during which the first starting mouth game times that are won in the winning lottery are executed (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting mouth winning game times execution period) If the small hit is won (F117: YES), one round game is executed as a privilege for the small hit (F118). The player inserts a game ball into the special winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

On the other hand, even when the small hit is not won in the second starting opening game times to be executed (F117: NO), if the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the second starting is performed again. The mouth game times are executed.

In the first starting mouth winning game times execution period, the average value of the game times of the second starting mouth game times is compared with the average value of the game times of the second starting mouth game times in other periods. It is set to be short, and a plurality of second starting opening game times can be executed during the first starting opening winning game execution time period. Further, as can be seen from the win/loss table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) in FIG. 113(b), when the game opening for the second starting opening is executed, there is a high probability that the small hit is won. To do. Therefore, it is possible to execute the second starting mouth game times a plurality of times during the first starting mouth winning game times execution period to win a plurality of small hits, and the player is provided with a bonus for the small hits. Can be acquired multiple times. Hereinafter, the process of giving a bonus to the player by the small hit prize by the second starting mouth game time during the first starting mouth winning game time execution period is also referred to as “special bonus process”.

The special bonus process is executed until the first starting mouth winning game time execution period ends. That is, the process is executed until the first start opening game times that is won in the jackpot started in step F114 is completed (F119: NO). When the first start opening game times that has been won for the jackpot are over (F119: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. That is, the game progresses in different directions depending on whether the type of jackpot of the first starting opening game times that is won for the jackpot is a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, or a certain probability variation jackpot. Hereinafter, the special bonus process will be described using a time chart.

FIG. 117 is a time chart explaining the special bonus process.

In FIG. 117, it is shown from time T0 until the player starts the game and the special bonus process ends. The illustrated time T0 corresponds to the progress state of the game in step F101 in FIG. The player starts the game at time T0, inserts a game ball into the upper first starting opening 33, and executes the first starting opening game time. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 109(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41, an effect image corresponding to the first starting opening game time (hereinafter referred to as the first image). The effect image for starting mouth is also displayed), and the effect image corresponding to the second game opening for starting mouth (hereinafter, also referred to as second effect image for starting mouth) is displayed in the sub display area SA.

At the time T1, if the 8R specific certainty variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game round (corresponding to F108: YES in FIG. 116), after the end of the first starting mouth game round won for the 8R specific certainty variation jackpot (time T2). , A round game is executed (corresponding to F112 in FIG. 116). As the internal processing by the main control device 60, the opening/closing execution mode flag indicating that the round game is executed is turned on. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a round effect image triggered by the jackpot of the first starting game time.

At time T3, when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned off and the round game is completed, the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode is turned on as the internal processing by the main controller 60. Further, the high-probability mode flag indicating that the internal control by the main controller 60 is the high-probability mode is turned on. The state at time T3 in FIG. 117 corresponds to the game progress state in step F113 in FIG.

In the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, when the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), 1 start opening game times are executed. In the first starting mouth game times executed at this time, the average value of the game times of the game times is shorter than in other periods.

After that, at the time T4, when the first start opening game time which is a big hit is started, the special bonus process is started. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off when the first start opening game time that is a big hit is started. Further, in the first starting mouth winning game times execution period, the average value of the game time of the second starting mouth game times is compared with the average value of the game times of the second starting mouth game times in other periods. Is set to be shorter. In addition, a suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a right hit is executed. The process at time T4 in FIG. 117 corresponds to step F114 and step F115 in FIG. Further, as shown in the column of the liquid crystal display device in FIG. 117, when the special bonus process is started, the second starting mouth effect image is displayed in the main display area MA and the first starting mouth effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA. The effect image is displayed.

When the player hits the right and enters the game ball into the second starting opening 34 and executes the second starting opening game time and wins the small hit, each of the second starting opening game times won for the small hit A round game of one round is executed after the end, and as an internal process in the main control device 60, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON after the end of the second start opening game times, which are small hits, and turned OFF after the end of the round game. Becomes

At this time, as shown in FIG. 117, the first starting opening game time is being executed, but during the period when the round game is being executed due to the small hit of the second starting opening game time, main controller 60 As the internal processing of, the measurement of the game time of the first start game time is interrupted. The period in which the measurement of the game time of the first starting opening game times is suspended is shown by the diagonal lines in the chart showing the first starting opening game times in FIG. 117. As shown in the figure, during the first starting mouth winning game times execution period, the opening and closing execution mode flag is ON with the small hit of the second starting mouth game times, during the first starting mouth game times Execution time measurement is interrupted.

Then, when the game time of the first starting mouth game times measured by the internal processing has passed a predetermined time, at time T5, the first starting mouth game times ends and the special bonus processing is performed. finish.

When the game time of the first starting mouth game times has passed a predetermined time, a round game corresponding to the first starting mouth game times that was won in the jackpot is executed in a period from time T5 to time T6. The open/close execution mode flag is turned on at time T5 and turned off at time T6.

In addition, after the time T5, the game time set for the second start opening game time is set to a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Therefore, even if the player hits the right and executes the second starting mouth game time to win the small hit, the game time for one time is extremely long, which is a disadvantage to the player. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the action of the player who does not follow the legitimate game flow of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is a process of giving a privilege during the execution of the first starting opening game times that is won for the jackpot, so On the other hand, not only does it give an expectation about the round game (opening and closing execution mode) as a privilege that is given after the end of the big win, but also the execution of the big win You can add a sense of anticipation to it.

In addition, during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus is triggered by the fact that the small win is won in the second starting mouth game times while the first starting mouth game times that are winning the big hits are being executed. As a privilege (round game of 1R) is given, even if the big win is won in the first starting mouth game times, the second starting mouth game times are further executed and the small hits are made. It is possible to give an even greater sense of expectation by winning.

Furthermore, after the end of the first start opening game time in which the special bonus process is executed, a round game is executed corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first starting opening game operation, so that a greater expectation is achieved. Can be given to a person.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game time in which the special bonus processing is executed, the special bonus processing is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an excessively advantageous state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the second starting opening game times can be executed in the special bonus processing is based on the game time of the first starting opening game times corresponding to the period of the special bonus processing. In other words, after the specific probability variation jackpot is won, the upper limit of the privilege given to the player by the special bonus process can be controlled by controlling the game time of the game time in which the next jackpot is won.

If the type of jackpot at the time T1 shown in FIG. 116 is a certain probability variable jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot at time T4, a special start is made at the start of the first starting mouth game time of jackpot winning at the time T1. The bonus process is started.

<<B4>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sb0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sb0102.

In step Sb0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sb0103.

In step Sb0103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sb0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 120) described later.

In step Sb0104, a ball entry process for the starting port associated with the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) and second starting port 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step Sb0104 will be described later. After executing step Sb0104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The entrance process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 118: Sb0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sb0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) (start winning), the first starting opening (upper first starting opening). 33, the lower first starting port 44) is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor. When it is determined in step Sb0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) (Sb0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0202 and payout control. A prize ball command for paying out three game balls to the device 70 is set. Then, it progresses to step Sb0203.

In step Sb0203, an external signal for outputting a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) Perform the setting process. Then, it progresses to step Sb0204.

In step Sb0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates a hold number based on a ball entering the first start opening (upper first start opening 33, lower first start opening 44). Then, it progresses to step Sb0209.

When it is determined in step Sb0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) (Sb0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0205. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sb0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (Sb0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0206, and the payout controller 70 pays out one game ball. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sb0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sb0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sb0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sb0208.

In step Sb0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sb0209.

In step Sb0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Sb0204 or step Sb0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sb0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sb0209: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sb0209, when the number N of starting suspensions is less than the upper limit value (Sb0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0210, after adding 1 to the number N of starting suspensions of the corresponding holding area, the process proceeds to step Sb0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sb0212.

In step Sb0212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 118) are set to the first free storage area of the corresponding reserved areas, that is, the step Sb0210 stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 118). The value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step Sb0210. When the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sb0103 (FIG. 118) are set to It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step Sb0210. After executing Step Sb0212, the process proceeds to Step Sb0213.

In step Sb0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (holding information), the result of the lottery hit (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach. It is a process of determining whether or not the holding information is present before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After executing Step Sb0213, the process proceeds to Step Sb0214.

In step Sb0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (destination determination information) of the destination determination processing executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command. To do.

The hold command is used to indicate that a ball has entered the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) or second starting opening 34, and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize the determination result (first determination information) based on the first determination process based on the above, before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 120: step Sb0302) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), the liquid crystal display is displayed. A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 41 in response to the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the hold number. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 displays the hold number of the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in response to the increase in the number of hold.

After executing Step Sb0214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting opening.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sb0301, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sb0302.

In step Sb0302, the output data such as the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sb0302, the process proceeds to Step Sb0303.

In step Sb0303, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sb0304.

In step Sb0304, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow proceeds to step Sb0305. In step Sb0305, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sb0305, the process proceeds to Step Sb0306.

In step Sb0306, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sb0307.

In step Sb0307, an electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided at the right first starting opening 44 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is to be opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sb0308.

In step Sb0308, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (start of the command output process of step Sb0302 in the second and subsequent cycles). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come.

When it is determined in step Sb0308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of this normal processing (Sb0308: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sb0309 and Sb0310. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sb0309, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sb0310, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Sb0308: YES), the process returns to step Sb0302, and each processing from step Sb0302 to step Sb0307 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sb0302 to step Sb0307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 120: Sb0305).

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In step Sb0401, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode after the fluctuation of the symbols in the game times won in the jackpot is finished, and turned OFF at the timing of ending the opening/closing execution mode. By determining in step Sb0401 whether the open/close execution mode is being executed, the following two functions are realized. As a first function, by not executing step Sb0403 (and step Sb0406) during the period when the open/close execution mode is executed, so that the game time is not started during the period when the open/close execution mode is executed. can do. Further, as the second function, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed during execution of the game game, the opening/closing execution mode is executed by not executing step Sb0404 (and step Sb0407) described later. It is possible to suspend the measurement of the variation time of the game cycle being executed during the certain period. The details will be described below.

When it is determined in step Sb0401 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sb0401: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the present game time is executed without executing any of the processing from step Sb0402. The control process ends. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, is the game ball entering the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44) or the second starting opening 34? Regardless of whether or not, the game time will not be started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0401 that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (Sb0401: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb0402.

In step Sb0402, it is determined whether or not the first game execution flag is ON. The first game in-execution flag is a flag that is turned on when the first starting mouth game time is started and turned off when the first starting mouth game time is ended. When it is determined in step Sb0402 that the first game execution flag is not ON (Sb0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0403.

In step Sb0403, a variation start process for the first starting port is executed. The variation start process for the first starting opening is a process for starting the game opening for the first starting opening. The details of the variation start process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing Step Sb0403, the process proceeds to Step Sb0405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0402 that the first game execution flag is ON (Sb0402: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb0404.

In step Sb0404, the first fluctuation stop process is executed. The first variation stop process is a process for stopping the variation of the symbols of the first game opening for the starting opening. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing Step Sb0404, the process proceeds to Step Sb0405.

In step Sb0405, it is determined whether or not the second game execution flag is ON. The second game in-execution flag is a flag that is turned on when the second starting mouth game time is started and turned off when the second starting mouth game time is ended. When it is determined in step Sb0405 that the second game execution flag is not ON (Sb0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0406.

In step Sb0406, a variation start process for the second starting port is executed. The variation start process for the second starting opening is a process for starting the game opening for the second starting opening. The details of the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb0406, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0405 that the second game execution flag is ON (Sb0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0407.

In step Sb0407, the second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second variation stop process is a process for stopping the variation of the symbols of the started second game opening for starting mouth. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sb0407, the present game number control processing is ended.

<Variation start process for the first starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be described. The variation start process for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0403) of the game time control process.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the first starting port. In step Sb0501, it is determined whether or not the first startup hold number RaN=0. If it is determined in step Sb0501 that the first startup hold number RaN is not 0 (Sb0501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0501 that the first startup hold number RaN=0 (Sb0501: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first start opening ends.

In step Sb0502, the first starting opening reserved information shift processing is executed. In the first starting opening reserved information shift processing, the reserved information stored in the first reserved area Ra is shifted. Details of the first starting opening reserved information shift processing will be described later. After executing Step Sb0502, the process proceeds to Step Sb0503.

In step Sb0503, the determination process for the first starting port is executed. In the determination process for the first starting opening, the winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit/miss determination for determining whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot, and the jackpot type are distributed. The distribution determination and the reach determination for determining whether the reach has occurred are performed. Details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing Step Sb0503, the process proceeds to Step Sb0504.

In step Sb0504, a variable time setting process for the first starting port is executed. In the variable time setting process for the first starting opening, the variable time, which is the time from when the symbol starts to change to when it stops, is set. The details of the setting process of the variation time for the first starting port will be described later. After executing Step Sb0504, the process proceeds to Step Sb0505.

In step Sb0505, the first variation command is set. The first variation command relates to special information obtained this time based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44). In addition to including the information indicating that the reach is generated, the information regarding the presence/absence of the reach occurrence and the information about the variation time set in step Sb0504 are included. After executing step Sb0505, the process advances to step Sb0506.

In step Sb0506, the first type command is set. The first type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the first-type command includes 10R certainty variation jackpot information, 10R specific certainty variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or out-of-range information.

The variation command and the first type command set in steps Sb0505 and Sb0506 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing Step Sb0506, the process proceeds to Step Sb0507.

In step Sb0507, the variable display on the first symbol display portion 37a is started, the process proceeds to step Sb0508, and the first game execution flag is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sb0509, and the first changing flag is turned on.

The first game in-execution flag is turned ON when the first start opening game time is started, the variable display in the first symbol display portion 37a is a stop display, and is a period in which the display of the symbol is stopped. It is a flag that is turned off when the first symbol display stop time is over. On the other hand, the first fluctuating flag is turned on when the first starting opening game time is started, and is turned off when the fluctuating display on the first symbol display portion 37a is a stop display. .

After executing Step Sb0509, the process proceeds to Step Sb0510.

In step Sb0510, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game number counter PNC is set to a value in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game number is executed. After executing Step Sb0510, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port is ended.

<First start port reserved information shift process>
Next, the first starting opening reserved information shift processing will be described. The first starting opening reserved information shift processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 122: Sb0502) of the variation starting processing for the first starting opening.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening reserved information shift processing. In step Sb0601, the first start reserve quantity RaN in the first reserve area Ra is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step Sb0602.

In step Sb0602, the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, it progresses to step Sb0603.

In step Sb0603, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sb0603, the on-hold information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for the first starting opening>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be described. The determination process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 122: Sb0503) of the variation starting process for the first starting port.

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting opening. In step Sb0701, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variation jackpot. , Is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode for the next big hit. When it is determined in step Sb0701 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sb0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0702.

In step Sb0702, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit/miss table (for the high probability mode) for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 112(b). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step Sb0704. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0701 that the high probability mode is not set (Sb0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0703.

In step Sb0703, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit/miss table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 112(a). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step Sb0704.

In step Sb0704, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sb0702 or step Sb0703 is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sb0704 that the result of the hit/no hit determination is a big hit (Sb0704: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0705.

In step Sb0705, it is determined whether the probability variation or the normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is ON. In step Sb0705, when it is determined that the probability variation or the normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is ON (Sb0705: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sb0722, and the stop showing the lottery result of the first starting opening game time is stopped. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for disengagement. Then, the determination process for the first starting port is ended. That is, at the start of the variation of the first starting mouth game times, when the jackpot winning second starting mouth game times is being executed, the stop symbol opening/closing execution mode of the first starting mouth game times is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0705 that the probability variation or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is not ON (Sb0705: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb0706 to check whether the specific processing flag is ON. judge. The specific processing flag is set to ON when a specific probability variation jackpot is won in the game number executed before the game opening for the first starting opening which is the determination target, and for the specific probability variation jackpot. This flag is turned off when the special bonus process is executed. When it is determined in step Sb0706 that the specific processing flag is ON (Sb0706: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0707.

In step Sb0707, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, the process corresponding to the special bonus process is executed. After executing Step Sb0707, the process proceeds to Step Sb0708.

In step Sb0708, a special bonus start command is set. The special bonus start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the special bonus process is started. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (Sb0302) of the normal process (FIG. 120). After executing Step Sb0708, the process proceeds to Step Sb0709.

In step Sb0709, the specific processing flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sb0710.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0706 that the specific processing flag is not ON (Sb0706: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb0710.

In step Sb0710, in step Sb0710, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 114(a)). Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot types the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing Step Sb0710, the process proceeds to Step Sb0711.

In step Sb0711, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step Sb0710 is a probability variation big hit. When it is determined in step Sb0711 that the sorted jackpot type is the probability varying jackpot (Sb0711: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0712.

In step Sb0712, the probability variation jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step Sb0711 is turned on. After executing Step Sb0712, the process proceeds to Step Sb0713.

In step Sb0713, it is determined whether or not the certainty variation jackpot is the particular certainty variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sb0713 that the certainty variation jackpot is the specific certainty variation jackpot (step Sb0713: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0714.

In step Sb0714, the specific probability variation jackpot flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sb0715 and sets a specific probability variation jackpot command. The specific probability variation jackpot command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the specific probability variation jackpot has been won in the first start mouth game times to be determined. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (Sb0302) of the normal process (FIG. 120). After executing Step Sb0715, the process proceeds to Step Sb0716.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb0713 that the certainty variation jackpot is not the particular certainty variation jackpot (step Sb0713: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb0716.

In step Sb0716, a stop symbol setting process for probability variation jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, at the current game time when the probability variation jackpot is set, the first symbol display portion 37a sets which stop result is displayed (variation display) in which the variation display is terminated (stop display). Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb0711 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb0716, the determination process for the first starting port is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb0711 that the sorted jackpot type is not the probability-change jackpot (Sb0711: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb0717.

In step Sb0717, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step Sb0711 is turned on. After executing Step Sb0717, the process proceeds to Step Sb0718.

In step Sb0718, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal jackpot, at the current game time when the jackpot is normally hit, the first symbol display section 37a sets which stop result is displayed (stop display). Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb0711 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sb0718, the determination process for the first starting port is ended.

If it is determined in step Sb0704 that the result of the hit determination in step Sb0702 or step Sb0703 is not a big hit (Sb0704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0719 and the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is stored. The reach determination is made as to whether or not the reach occurs by referring to the determination table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the referred reach determination table. The process of step Sb0719 is executed when the result of the hit determination (winning lottery) in step Sb0704 is not a big hit. That is, in step Sb0719, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination is a game number at which a reach is generated among the game numbers that are not the big hit. After executing Step Sb0719, the process proceeds to Step Sb0720.

In step Sb0720, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step Sb0719 is reach generation. If it is determined in step Sb0720 that reach has been generated (Sb0720: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb0721 to turn on the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sb0721, the process proceeds to Step Sb0722.

In step Sb0722, a stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is disengaged, to set which stop result is displayed (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is displayed. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sb0722, the determination process for the first starting port is ended.

<Variation time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be described. The setting process of the variation time for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 122: Sb0504) of the variation starting process for the first starting port.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port. In step Sb0801, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sb0802.

In step Sb0802, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/no hit determination related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sb0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0803.

In step Sb0803, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for big hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step Sb0803, the process proceeds to step Sb0807, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first starting port is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb0802 that the result of the hit/no hit determination for the current game round is not a big hit (Sb0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0804, and the result of the reach determination for the current game round is reach occurrence. Or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag is ON, and when it is determined that the reach generation flag is ON (Sb0804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0805.

In step Sb0805, the fluctuation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. After executing step Sb0805, the process proceeds to step Sb0807, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first starting port is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb0804 that the reach determination result related to the current game times is not the reach occurrence (Sb0804: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb0806 and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d The fluctuation time table corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for use. After executing step Sb0806, the process proceeds to step Sb0807, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first starting port is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN, and the variation time is set to be shorter as the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN is smaller. May be.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit and the variation time table for the normal big hit may be individually set.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first variation stop processing is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0404) of the game time control processing.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step Sb0901, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb0901 that the first changing flag is ON (Sb0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0902.

In step Sb0902, the first fluctuation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, it counts down the first variation time counter PTC1 for measuring the variation time of the first start game time (variation time of the first symbol display portion). In this process, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is down-counted every time the thread of step Sb0902 is passed. That is, the value of the first fluctuation time counter PTC1 is down-counted only when the thread of step Sb0902 has passed. After executing Step Sb0902, the process proceeds to Step Sb0903.

In step Sb0903, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display portion has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the first fluctuation time counter PTC1 down-counted by the process of step Sb0902 has reached 0. In step Sb0903, when it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display portion has ended (Sb0903: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb0904, and the variation of the first symbol display portion is stopped. Then, it progresses to step Sb0905.

In step Sb0905, the first changing flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sb0906.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0903 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion has not ended (Sb0903: NO), the first variation stop processing is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sb0901 that the first changing flag is not ON (Sb0901: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb0906.

In step Sb0906, a first symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The first symbol stop display time is the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed. In step Sb0906, the first symbol stop display time is set. However, if the first symbol stop display time is already set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol stop display time of all first starting game times is set to the same length of time. After executing step Sb0906, step Sb0907 is executed.

In step Sb0907, a first symbol stop display time measuring process is executed. Specifically, the counter for counting the first symbol stop display time is down-counted. This process down-counts the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time each time the thread of step Sb0907 is passed. After executing Step Sb0907, the process proceeds to Step Sb0908.

In step Sb0908, it is determined whether or not the first symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time has become zero. In step Sb0908. When it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has ended (Sb0908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0909. On the other hand, in step Sb0908. When it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has not ended (Sb0908: NO), the first variation stop processing is ended as it is.

In step Sb0909, the first game execution flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sb0910.

In step Sb0910, it is determined whether the big hit flag (big hit flag according to each big hit type) or the small hit flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb0910 that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sb0910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb0911. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb0910 that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (Sb0910: NO), the first variation stop process is ended as it is.

In step Sb0911, the open/close execution mode flag is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sb0912, and after the opening/closing execution mode start command is set, the first fluctuation stop process is ended.

<Variation start process for the second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be described. The variation start process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 121: Sb0406) of the game time control process.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the second starting port. In step Sb1001, it is determined whether or not the second start pending number RbN=0. When it is determined in step Sb1001 that the second number RbN of second starting suspensions is not 0 (Sb1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1002. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1001 that the second startup hold number RbN=0 (Sb1001: YES), the variation start process for the second start opening ends.

In step Sb1002, the second starting opening reservation information shift process is executed. In the second starting opening reserved information shift processing, the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb is shifted. The details of the second starting opening reserved information shift processing will be described later. After executing step Sb1002, the process proceeds to step Sb1003.

In step Sb1003, the determination process for the second starting opening is executed. In the determination process for the second starting opening, the winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit/miss determination for determining whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot, and the jackpot type are distributed. The distribution determination and the reach determination for determining whether the reach has occurred are performed. The details of the determination process for the second starting opening will be described later. After executing step Sb1003, the process proceeds to step Sb1004.

In step Sb1004, the setting process of the variation time for the second starting port is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the second starting opening, the variation time, which is the time from when the symbol starts varying to when it stops, is set. Details of the setting process of the variation time for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step Sb1004, the process proceeds to step Sb1005.

In step Sb1005, the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, and the reach The information on the presence/absence of occurrence and the information on the variation time set in step Sb1004 are included. After executing step Sb1005, the process proceeds to step Sb1006.

In step Sb1006, the second type command is set. The second type command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot and information on the jackpot type. Specifically, the second type command includes 2R probability variation big hit information, 2R normal big hit information, small hit information, or miss information.

The variation command and the second type command set in steps Sb1005 and Sb1006 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and the second type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sb1006, the process proceeds to step Sb1007.

In step Sb1007, the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b is started, the process proceeds to step Sb1008, and the second game execution flag is set to ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sb1009, and the second changing flag is turned on.

The second game in-execution flag is turned on when the second starting opening game time is started, and the variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b becomes a stop display, which is a period during which the display of the symbol is stopped. It is a flag that is turned off when the second symbol display stop time is over. On the other hand, the second changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the second starting opening game time is started and turned off when the changing display in the second symbol display portion 37b is a stop display. ..

After executing step Sb1009, the process proceeds to step Sb1010.

In step Sb1010, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game number counter PNC is set to a value in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game number is executed. After executing step Sb1010, the variation start process for the second start opening is terminated.

<Second starting opening reserved information shift processing>
Next, the second starting opening reserved information shift process will be described. The second starting opening reserved information shift processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 127: Sb1002) of the variation starting processing for the second starting opening.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the second starting opening reserved information shift processing. In step Sb1101, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Sb1102.

In step Sb1102, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, it progresses to step Sb1103.

In step Sb1103, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sb1103, the on-hold information shift process ends.

<Determination process for the second starting opening>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be described. The determination process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 127: Sb1003) of the variation starting process for the second starting port.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second starting opening. In step Sb1201, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variation jackpot. Normally, it is turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the jackpot. When it is determined in step Sb1201 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sb1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1202.

In step Sb1202, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode) shown in FIG. 113(b). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step Sb1204. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1201 that the high probability mode is not set (Sb1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1203.

In step Sb1203, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the low probability mode) shown in FIG. 113(a). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step Sb1204.

In step Sb1204, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in step Sb1202 or step Sb1203 is a big hit. If it is determined in step Sb1204 that the result of the hit determination is a big hit (Sb1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1205.

In step Sb1205, it is determined whether the probability variation or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is ON. In step Sb1205, when it is determined that the probability variation or the normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is ON (Sb1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1218, and the stop indicating the lottery result of the second starting opening game time is stopped. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for disengagement. Then, the determination process for the second starting opening is finished. That is, at the start of the variation of the second starting mouth game times, when the jackpot winning first starting mouth game times are being executed, the stop symbol of the second starting mouth game times is not opened/closed execution mode is executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1205 that the probability variation or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is not ON (Sb1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1206.

In step Sb1206, in step Sb1206, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 114(b)). Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot types the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step Sb1206, the process proceeds to step Sb1207.

In step Sb1207, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step Sb1206 is a probability variation big hit. When it is determined in step Sb1207 that the sorted jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (Sb1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1208.

In step Sb1208, the probability variation jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is turned on. After executing step Sb1208, the process proceeds to step Sb1209.

In step Sb1209, a stop symbol setting process for probability variation jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game times to be the probability variation jackpot, the second symbol display portion 37b is set to which variable display is to be ended (stop display) in the state in which any stop result is displayed. Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1209, the determination process for the second start port is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sb1207 that the sorted jackpot type is not the probability-change jackpot (Sb1207: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb1210.

In step Sb1210, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step Sb1206 is turned on. After executing Step Sb1210, the process proceeds to Step Sb1211.

In step Sb1211, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for normal jackpot, in the current game time when it is a normal jackpot, it is set in the second symbol display portion 37b which stop result is displayed (stop display) in which variable display is displayed. Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sb1206 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1211, the determination process for the second starting opening is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sb1204 that the result of the hit determination in step Sb1202 or step Sb1203 is not a big hit (Sb1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1212.

In step Sb1212, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in step Sb1202 or step Sb1203 is a small hit. When it is determined in step Sb1212 that the result of the hit/no hit determination is a small hit (Sb1212: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1213.

In step Sb1213, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing step Sb1213, the process proceeds to step Sb1214.

In step Sb1214, a stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, at the current game time when the small hits are set, the second symbol display section 37b sets which stop result is displayed (stop display) in a state in which any stop result is displayed. Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small hits is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. Store in the stop result address storage area. After executing Step Sb1214, the determination process of the second starting opening is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb1212 that the result of the hit/no hit determination is not a small hit (Sb1212: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1215.

In step Sb1215, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the reach determination is made as to whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the referred reach determination table. The process of step Sb1215 is executed when the result of the win/no determination (winning lottery) in step Sb1204 is not a big hit. That is, in step Sb1215, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination is a game number at which a reach is generated among the game numbers that are not a big hit. After executing step Sb1215, the process proceeds to step Sb1216.

In step Sb1216, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step Sb1215 is reach generation. If it is determined in step Sb1216 that the reach has occurred (Sb1216: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1217 to turn on the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1217, the process proceeds to step Sb1218.

In step Sb1218, a stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is disengaged, for setting which stop result is displayed (stop display) in the state in which the second symbol display portion 37b displays the stop result. Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is displayed. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sb1218, the determination process for the second starting opening is terminated.

<Variation time setting process for the second starting opening>
Next, the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port will be described. The setting process of the variation time for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 127: Sb1004) of the variation starting process for the second starting port.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the variation time for the second starting opening. In step Sb1301, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sb1302.

In step Sb1302, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb1302 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sb1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1303.

In step Sb1303, a low-probability time variation time information acquisition process is executed. The low-probability time variable time information acquisition process is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the second starting mouth game time when the second starting mouth game time is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. .. Specifically, when the game is in the progressing state of step F101 in FIG. 116, and when the game is in the progressing state of step F105, when the second starting mouth game times are executed, the second starting mouth. It is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times. Details of the low-probability time variation time information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing step Sb1303, the process proceeds to step Sb1307.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1302 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sb1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1304.

In step Sb1304, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb1304 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sb1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1305.

In step Sb1305, a highly accurate and high frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is executed. The high-probability high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is for the second starting mouth when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, when the second starting mouth game time is executed. This is the process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times. Specifically, when the game is in the progressing state of step F110 in FIG. 116, and when the game is in the progressing state of step F113, when the second starting opening game time is executed, the second starting opening It is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times. Details of the highly accurate and high frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step Sb1305, the process proceeds to step Sb1307.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1304 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sb1304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1306.

In step Sb1306, a highly accurate low frequency time variation time information acquisition process is executed. The high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is for the second starting mouth when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode when the second starting mouth game time is executed. This is the process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times. Specifically, in the process of the game progressing state of step F116 in FIG. 116, when the second starting mouth game times are executed, it is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the second starting mouth game times. is there. Details of the highly accurate low frequency time variation time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step Sb1306, the process proceeds to Step Sb1307.

In step Sb1307, the variation time information acquired in each processing of step Sb1303, step Sb1305, and step Sb1306 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the second starting port is ended.

<Low accuracy time variation information acquisition process>
Next, the low-probability time variation time information acquisition process will be described. The low-probability time variation time information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sb1303) of the variation time setting processing for the second starting opening.

As described above, the low-probability time variation information acquisition process is executed by the second start mouth game time when the game is in the progressing state of step F101 in FIG. 116 and when the game is in the progressing state of step F105. When it is done, it is the processing which acquires the fluctuation time information of the aforementioned game opening for the 2nd starting mouth. That is, a period in which the player should normally hit the left and insert the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) to execute the first starting opening game time. In the process that is executed when the game ball for the second starting opening is entered by hitting the right with the second starting opening 34, the player plays the second starting opening for the game opening. Since there is a possibility that an action to try to obtain a privilege is performed during a period that should not be obtained by the small hit winning, it is acquired in the low accuracy time variation time information acquisition process to prevent the action. The variation time information (variation time) is set to a relatively long time. Hereinafter, this low-probability time variable time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the low-probability time variation time information acquisition processing. In step Sb1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/no hit determination related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Sb1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1402.

In step Sb1402, the fluctuation time information for the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for low accuracy time jackpot stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the low-probability-time jackpot fluctuation time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value acquired as the fluctuation time is 7 minutes. After executing step Sb1402, the present low-probability-time variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1401 that the result of the hit/non-win determination regarding the current game time is not a big hit (step Sb1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1403.

In step Sb1403, it is determined whether or not reach is generated in the current game. When it is determined in step Sb1403 that the reach is generated in the current game time (step Sb1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1404.

In step Sb1404, the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the low accuracy time reach generation variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the low-probability-time reach generation fluctuation time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value acquired as the fluctuation time is 7 minutes. After executing step Sb1404, the present low-probability-time variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1403 that the reach does not occur in the current game (step Sb1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1405.

In step Sb1405, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the low accuracy time reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the low accuracy time reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the fluctuation time is 7 minutes. .. After executing step Sb1405, the present low-probability-time variable time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the fluctuation time information acquired in the low-probability time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time.

<High-accuracy and high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing>
Next, the highly accurate and high frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described. The highly accurate high frequency time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sb1305) of the variation time setting process for the second starting opening.

As described above, the high-accuracy high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is performed in the second starting opening game time in the progress state of the game in step F110 in FIG. 116 and in the progress state of the game in step F113. When is executed, it is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game opening for the second starting opening. That is, a period in which the player should normally hit the left and insert the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) to execute the first starting opening game time. In the process that is executed when the game ball for the second starting opening is entered by hitting the right with the second starting opening 34, the player plays the second starting opening for the game opening. Since there is a possibility that an action is attempted to get a bonus during a period that should not be obtained by the small win, it is acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process to prevent the action. The variation time information (variation time) to be set is set to a relatively long time. The average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the high-accuracy/high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the low-probability time fluctuation time information acquisition process. This is because the period during which the high-accuracy/high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is executed is more advantageous to the player when compared with the period during which the low-probability time-varying time information acquisition process is executed. The reason is that the unreasonableness of the act of the player performing the second starting opening game times and making a profit by the small hit is not so great as in the case of the accurate time varying time information acquisition process. Hereinafter, the highly accurate and highly frequent time-varying time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the highly accurate and high frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. In step Sb1501, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/non-judgment related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (Sb1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1502.

In step Sb1502, the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variable time table for high-accuracy high-frequency big hits stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-accuracy high-frequency big hit fluctuation time table is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the fluctuation time is 3 minutes. .. After executing Step Sb1502, the high-accuracy high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1501 that the result of the hit/non-win determination relating to the current game number is not a big hit (step Sb1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1503.

In step Sb1503, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game. When it is determined in step Sb1503 that the reach is generated in the current game (step Sb1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1504.

In step Sb1504, the variation time table for high-accuracy and high-frequency reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. .. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the highly accurate and high frequency reach generation variation time table is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average of the values acquired as the variation time is 3 minutes. is there. After executing step Sb1504, the actual high accuracy high frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1503 that the reach does not occur in the current game (step Sb1503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1505.

In step Sb1505, the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the highly accurate and high frequency reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. To do. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the highly accurate and high frequency reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values acquired as the fluctuation time is 3 minutes. Is. After the step Sb1505 is executed, the actual high accuracy high frequency time variation time information acquisition processing is ended.

In this way, the fluctuation time information acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time, but The average value is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing.

<High-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process>
Next, the high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described. The highly accurate low frequency variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 130: Sb1306) of the variable time setting process for the second starting opening.

As described above, the high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when the second starting-port game time is executed when the game is in the progress state of step F116 in FIG. It is a process of acquiring the variation time information of the game times. That is, while the special bonus process is being executed, it is a process that is executed when the player makes a right hit to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 34 and the second starting opening game time is executed. , Is a process that follows the original flow of the game. The fluctuation time information (fluctuation time) acquired in the highly accurate low frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Hereinafter, the present highly accurate low frequency time variation time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the highly accurate low frequency time variation time information acquisition process. In step Sb1601, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/non-win determination relating to the current game time is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and when the small hit flag is ON (Sb1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1602. In addition, during the period of the special bonus process in which the high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is executed, at the start of the fluctuation of the second starting mouth game times, the jackpot-winning first starting mouth game times are being executed. Therefore, the symbols of the second starting mouth game times are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols in which the opening/closing execution mode is not executed (see FIG. 129/Sb1205: NO). Therefore, during the period of the special bonus process in which the high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is executed, the second starting opening game time does not win the jackpot, which is different from the processes of FIGS. 130 and 131. , There is no processing for determining whether or not a jackpot is won.

In step Sb1602, the variation time table for the highly accurate low frequency small hitting time stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. .. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-precision low-frequency small hitting fluctuation time table is a value between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, and the average value of the values acquired as the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. is there. After executing Step Sb1502, the high accurate low frequency time variation time information acquisition process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb1601 that the result of the hit/non-win determination for the current game is not a small hit (step Sb1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1603.

In step Sb1603, the variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the highly accurate low frequency non-small hitting variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. To do. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the highly accurate low frequency non-small hit variation time table is a value between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the average value of the values acquired as the variation time is 2 seconds. Is. After executing step Sb1603, the high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

As described above, the variation time information (variation time) acquired in the highly accurate low frequency variation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Therefore, during the execution period of the special bonus process, that is, during the period when the first start opening game time which is a big hit is being executed, a plurality of second starting opening game times can be executed. As a result, the player can acquire the privilege during the execution of the first starting opening game times by winning the small hits a plurality of times.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be described. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 121: Sb0407).

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step Sb1701, it is determined whether the second changing flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb1701 that the second changing flag is ON (Sb1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1702.

In step Sb1702, a second variable time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the second variation time counter PTC2 for measuring the variation time of the game opening for the second starting opening (variation time of the second symbol display portion) is counted down. In this processing, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is down-counted every time the thread of step Sb1702 is passed. That is, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is down-counted only when the thread is passed, instead of continuously down-counting after the thread of step Sb1702 is passed. After executing step Sb1702, the process proceeds to step Sb1703.

In step Sb1703, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display portion has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second variable time counter PTC2 down-counted by the process of step Sb1702 has reached 0. In step Sb1703, when it is determined that the variation time of the second symbol display portion has ended (Sb1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1704 and the variation of the second symbol display portion is stopped. Then, it progresses to step Sb1705.

In step Sb1705, the second changing flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sb1706.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1703 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion has not ended (Sb1703: NO), the second variation stop processing is ended as it is.

If it is determined in step Sb1701 that the second changing flag is not ON (Sb1701: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb1706.

In step Sb1706, a second symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The second symbol stop display time is the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In step Sb1706, the second symbol stop display time is set. However, when the second symbol stop display time is already set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the second symbol stop display time for all the second starting game times is set to the same length of time. After executing step Sb1706, step Sb1707 is executed.

In step Sb1707, a second symbol stop display time measuring process is executed. Specifically, the down count of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is performed. The process counts down the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time each time the thread of step Sb1707 is passed. After executing step Sb1707, the process advances to step Sb1708.

In step Sb1708, it is determined whether or not the second symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is 0. In step Sb1708. When it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has ended (Sb1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1709. On the other hand, in step Sb1708. When it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has not ended (Sb1708: NO), the second variation stop processing is ended as it is.

In step Sb1709, the second game execution flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sb1710.

In step Sb1710, it is determined whether the big hit flag (big hit flag according to each big hit type) or the small hit flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb1710 that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (Sb1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1711. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1710 that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (Sb1710: NO), the second variation stop process is ended as it is.

In step Sb1711, the open/close execution mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sb1712, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set, and then the second variation stop process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 120: Sb0306).

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sb1801, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sb1801 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sb1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1802, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb1802 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sb1802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1803, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step Sb1803 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sb1803: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb1804, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1804 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sb1804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1805. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1804 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sb1804: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sb1805, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, by determining whether or not the small hit flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is the winning of the small hit. When it is determined in step Sb1805 that it is not a small hit (Sb1805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1806.

In step Sb1806, the high probability mode flag is turned off. In step Sb1805, since it is determined that the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, the result of the winning lottery in this game time is a big hit. The high-probability mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the lottery mode in execution of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-probability mode. After executing step Sb1806, the process advances to step Sb1807.

In step Sb1807, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step Sb1805, since it is determined that the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, the result of the winning lottery in this game time is a big hit. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the support mode in execution of the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step Sb1807, the process proceeds to Step Sb1808.

In step Sb1808, a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode is started upon the jackpot winning. The big hit opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: step Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1808, the process proceeds to step Sb1809.

In step Sb1809, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode is started when the big hit is won or when the small hit is taken as a trigger. That is, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: step Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb1809, the process proceeds to step Sb1810.

In step Sb1810, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting the opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game is set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sb1810, the process proceeds to Step Sb1811.

In step Sb1811, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sb1811, the process proceeds to Step Sb1812.

In step Sb1812, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot or the jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sb1812, the process advances to step Sb1813 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1803 that the opening period flag is ON (Sb1803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1814.

In step Sb1814, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sb1814 that the opening period has ended (Sb1814: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb1815 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sb1816.

In step Sb1816, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step Sb1816, the process proceeds to step Sb1817.

In step Sb1817, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1802 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sb1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1818 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sb1818, the process proceeds to step Sb1819.

In step Sb1819, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. When it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sb1819: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1820. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb1819 that the special winning opening/closing processing has not ended (Sb1819: NO), the main game state transition processing ends.

In step Sb1820, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sb1821.

In step Sb1821, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step Sb1821, the process proceeds to Step Sb1822.

In step Sb1822, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing Step Sb1822, the process proceeds to Step Sb1823.

In step Sb1823, the ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sb1823, the process proceeds to Step Sb1824.

In step Sb1824, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1801 that the ending period flag is ON (Sb1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1825.

In step Sb1825, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sb1822), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sb1825 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Sb1825: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1826.

In step Sb1826, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sb1827, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sb1827, the flow advances to step Sb1828 to turn off the open/close execution mode flag. After that, the process advances to step Sb1829, and the open/close execution mode end command is set. The open/close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the open/close execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb1825 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sb1825: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Open/close scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: Sb1810) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process. In step Sb1901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb1901 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sb1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb1902.

In step Sb1902, a jackpot opening/closing scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening/closing scenario is a program in which the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game is set. After executing Step Sb1902, the opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sb1901 that the jackpot flag is not ON (Sb1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb1903.

In step Sb1903, a small hit opening/closing scenario is set. In this embodiment, the opening/closing pattern for opening/closing the door 36b once in the round game is set in the small hit opening/closing scenario. After executing step Sb1903, the opening/closing scenario setting process is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: Sb1811) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step Sb2001, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sb2001 that the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (Sb2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2002.

In step Sb2002, 3000 (about 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Then, this opening time setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2001 that the opening/closing execution mode of this time is not a big hit, that is, if the opening/closing execution mode of this time is a small hit (Sb2001: NO), Proceed to Sb2003.

In step Sb2003, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Then, this opening time setting process is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: Sb1818) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening/closing processing. In step Sb2101, it is determined whether the open/close door 36b is open. When it is determined in step Sb2101 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sb2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2102.

In step Sb2102, it is determined whether the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sb2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sb2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2103.

In step Sb2103, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sb2104.

In step Sb2104, an opening/closing door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb2104, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sb2102: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sb2101 that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Sb2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2105.

In step Sb2105, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Regarding the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b, it is detected that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a. Applies in some cases. When it is determined in step Sb2105 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sb2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2106.

In step Sb2106, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sb2107.

In step Sb2107, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 120: Sb0302) of the normal process. After executing step Sb2107, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb2105 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sb2105: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: Sb1827) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sb2201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

When it is determined in step Sb2201 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a jackpot (Sb2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2202, and the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a definite jackpot. Or not. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variation jackpot.

When it is determined in step Sb2202 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variation jackpot (Sb2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2203. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2202 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the probability variation jackpot (Sb2202: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb2212.

In step Sb2203, the corresponding probability variation jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, the process of turning off the flag that is ON among the 10R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 2R certainty variation flag is executed. After executing step Sb2203, the process proceeds to step Sb2204.

In step Sb2204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. After executing step Sb2204, the process proceeds to step Sb2205.

In step Sb2205, it is determined whether the specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb2205 that the specific probability variation jackpot flag is ON (Sb2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2209.

In step Sb2209, the specific probability variation jackpot flag is turned off. Then, in step Sb2210, the specific processing flag is turned on. After executing step Sb2210, the process proceeds to step Sb2211, and a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the specific processing (special bonus processing) will be executed. The specific processing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal processing (FIG. 120). After executing Step Sb2211, the process proceeds to Step Sb2206.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2205 that the specific probability variation jackpot flag is not ON (Sb2205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb2206.

In step Sb2206, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. The high-probability mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step 06, the process proceeds to step 07.

In step Sb2207, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sb2208 to set a high frequency support mode command. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). After that, the transition process at the end of the present ending period ends.

When it is determined in step Sb2202 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability variation jackpot (Sb2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2212, and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned off. After executing Step Sb2212, the process proceeds to Step Sb2213.

In step Sb2213, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step Sb2213, the process advances to step Sb2214.

In step Sb2214, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sb2215, and 100 is set as a counter value in the game number counter PNC. After executing step Sb2215, the process proceeds to step Sb2216.

In step Sb2216, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sb0302 in the normal process (FIG. 120). After that, the transition process at the end of the present ending period ends.

When it is determined in step Sb2201 that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (Sb2201: NO), that is, when the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small hit, Proceeding to Sb2217, the small hit flag is turned off. After executing step Sb2217, the transition process at the end of the present ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 120: Sb0307).

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is brought into an open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sb2301 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sb2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2302.

In step Sb2302, it is determined whether the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the open state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric role 44a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sb2302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sb2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2303.

In step Sb2303, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sb2303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sb2303: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sb2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2304.

In step Sb2304, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sb2304 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sb2304: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb2305 to set the off display, and then the processing for main electric power support is terminated. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sb2304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2306.

In step Sb2306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Sb2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is "0" (Sb2306: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (Sb2306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2307.

In step Sb2307, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sb2308 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sb2307 (Sb2307: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Sb2308 (Sb2308: YES), the flow advances to step Sb2309 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sb2310.

In step Sb2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sb2309 is support win. When it is determined in step Sb2310 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sb2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2311, the support winning flag is turned on, and the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sb2312. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2310 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (Sb2310: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2312 without executing the process of step Sb2311.

In step Sb2312, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step Sb2312 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sb2312: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2312 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (Sb2312: NO), the electric power combination supporting process is ended as it is.

In step Sb2313, it is determined whether the number-of-games counter area is "0". The game number counter is decremented by 1 each time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step Sb2313 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (Sb2313: NO), the electric power combination supporting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2313 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step Sb2314, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sb2315.

In step Sb2315, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

The low frequency support command set in step Sb2315 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal command output process (FIG. 120: Sb0302). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the process corresponding thereto.

If it is determined in step Sb2307 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Sb2307: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step Sb2308 (Sb2308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2316, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Sb2317.

In step Sb2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sb2316 is support win. If it is determined in step Sb2317 that the support is not won (Sb2317: NO), the main power combination support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in step Sb2317, when it is determined that the support is won (Sb2317: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2318, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sb2302 that the support winning flag is ON (Sb2302: YES), the flow advances to step Sb2319 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Sb2319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2319: NO), the pattern change display is in progress in the universal figure unit 38, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sb2319: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2320.

In step Sb2320, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sb2321 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sb2301 that the in-support flag is ON (Sb2301: YES), the flow advances to step Sb2322 to execute an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 44a. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Opening/closing electric power>
Next, the power combination opening/closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: Sb2322) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process. In step Sb2401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 44b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is opened (Sb2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2402.

In step Sb2402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. When it is determined in step Sb2402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2402: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the main electric opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step Sb2402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sb2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2403, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 44a in the closed state is performed. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sb2403, the process advances to step Sb2404.

In step Sb2404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sb2405, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Sb2405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sb2405: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sb2405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2406 and the in-support flag is turned off. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb2401 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (Sb2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb2407, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 44a. When it is determined in step Sb2407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sb2407: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb2407 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sb2407: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb2408, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Sb2409.

In step Sb2409, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (Sb2409: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb2410 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is set. To do.

If it is determined in step Sb2410 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sb2410: YES), the flow advances to step Sb2411 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb2409 that it is the open/close execution mode (Sb2409: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sb2410 (Sb2410: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb2412, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

<<B5>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 142 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<B6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sb3101, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step Sb3101, the process proceeds to step Sb3102.

In step Sb3102, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed by using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The game state stored as a flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step Sb3102, the process proceeds to step Sb3103.

In step Sb3103, a display mode switching process is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area in which the first start-port effect image and the second start-port effect image are displayed. Specifically, a case where the first starting mouth effect image is displayed in the main display area MA and the second starting mouth effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA, and a case where the second starting mouth effect image is displayed in the main display area MA. A process of switching between displaying an image and displaying the first starting mouth effect image in the sub display area SA is executed. It should be noted that the first starting port effect image includes the first liquid crystal design, and the second starting port effect image includes the second liquid crystal pattern. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step Sb3103, the process advances to step Sb3104.

In step Sb3104, processing for special game play effect is executed. The special 1 game time effect process is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start opening game time. Details of the special game play effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sb3104, the process proceeds to step Sb3105.

In step Sb3105, a special game play effect process is executed. The special 2 game time effect process is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the second start opening game time. Details of the special 2 game time effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sb3105, the process proceeds to step Sb3106.

In step Sb3106, special bonus effect setting processing is executed. The special bonus effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. The details of the special bonus effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sb3106, the process proceeds to step Sb3107.

In step Sb3107, other display processing is executed. The other display process is a process of executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing for updating the number of holds displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is performed. After executing step Sb3107, the process proceeds to step Sb3108.

In step Sb3108, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes of steps Sb3103 to Sb3107. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps Sb3103 to Sb3107. After executing step Sb3108, the process proceeds to step Sb3109.

In step Sb3109, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the processes of steps Sb3103 to Sb3107. That is, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the voice corresponding to the effect set in steps Sb3103 to Sb3107 is output. After executing step Sb3109, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<State storage process>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 143: Sb3102).

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the state storing process. In step Sb3201, it is determined whether a specific probability variation jackpot command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific probability variation jackpot command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of the game game that has won the specific probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sb3201 that the specific probability variation jackpot command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3201: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb3202, and the sound-light side specific probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON. After executing Step Sb3202, the process proceeds to Step Sb3203.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3201 that the specific probability variation jackpot command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3201: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3203.

In step Sb3203, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific processing command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the end of the game time when the specific probability variation jackpot is won, and when the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the specific probability variation jackpot is completed. If it is determined in step Sb3203 that the specific processing command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3203: YES), the flow advances to step Sb3204 to turn on the sound-light side specific processing flag. After executing Step Sb3204, the process proceeds to Step Sb3205.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3203 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3203: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3205.

In step Sb3205, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62. The special bonus start command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game number when the specific probability variation jackpot is won and the jackpot is won in the subsequent game number. If it is determined in step Sb3205 that the special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3205: YES), the flow advances to step Sb3206 to turn off the sound-light side specific processing flag. After that, the process advances to step Sb3207, and the special bonus start flag is turned on. After executing step Sb3207, the process proceeds to step Sb3208.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3205 that the special bonus start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3208.

In step Sb3208, it is determined whether or not a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot winning. When it is determined in step Sb3208 that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3208: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3209.

In step Sb3209, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3209 that the special bonus start flag is ON (Sb3209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3210. In step Sb3210, the special bonus start flag is turned off. Then, this state storage process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3208 that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sb3208: NO), and if it is determined in step Sb3209 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (Sb3209). : NO), and this state storage process is ended as it is.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 143: Sb3103).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. In step Sb3301, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. When it is determined in step Sb3301 that the special bonus start command has been received (Sb3301: YES), the process proceeds to Sb3302. In step Sb3302, the special 2 main display flag is turned on. The special 2 main display flag displays the first starting mouth effect image including the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and the second starting mouth effect image including the second liquid crystal design. When displaying in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41, it is turned off, and the second starting port effect image including the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and This is a flag that is turned ON when the first starting port effect image including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. In step Sb3302, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON when the special bonus process is started. As shown in FIG. 117, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the second starting opening game times are executed a plurality of times, and the lottery result in the second starting opening game times is also a small hit for the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON when the special bonus process is started. After executing Step Sb3302, the process proceeds to Step Sb3303.

In step Sb3303, the special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the special 2 main display command, the display control device 100 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the second starting port effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and at the same time. The first starting port effect image including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing Step Sb3303, the process proceeds to Step Sb3304.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3301 that the special bonus start command has not been received (Sb3301: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3304.

In step Sb3304, it is determined whether a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received. When it is determined in step Sb3304 that the big hit opening/closing execution mode command has been received (Sb3304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3305.

In step Sb3305, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3305 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (Sb3305: YES), the process proceeds to Sb3306 and the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sb3307 and transmits the special 1 main display command to the display control apparatus 100. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started with the jackpot winning as a trigger, the first starting port effect image including the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the second liquid crystal display is used. The second starting mouth effect image including the design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In the present embodiment, when the game is executed along the legitimate game flow, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the second starting opening game times is low, and the opening/closing execution mode executed when the jackpot winning is triggered. Has a high probability of winning the jackpot in the first starting mouth game times. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed due to the big hit, the first starting port effect image including the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In step Sb3307, as described above, the special 1 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the special 1 main display command, the display control device 100 controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the first starting port effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and at the same time, to display the second start port effect image. The second starting port effect image including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step Sb3307, the display mode switching process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3304 that the big hit opening/closing execution mode command has not been received (Sb3304: NO), and if it is determined in step Sb3305 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (Sb3305: NO). The display mode switching process is ended as it is.

<Processing for special 1 game times>
Next, the special 1 game time performance processing will be described. The special game play effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 143: Sb3104).

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the special game play effect processing. In step Sb3401, it is determined whether the special 1 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sb3401 that the special 1 variation command is received (Sb3401: YES), the process advances to step Sb3402.

In step Sb3402, the special 1 variation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence/absence of a reach, and the change time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sb3403.

In step Sb3403, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sb3403 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (Sb3403: NO), the flow advances to step Sb3404 to execute a special 1 effect pattern setting process for the main display area. The setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the main display area MA based on the information read in step Sb3402. The details of the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing Step Sb3404, the process proceeds to Step Sb3406.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3403 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (Sb3403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3405, and special 1 effect pattern setting processing for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the sub display area SA are set based on the information read in step Sb3402.

Here, the process of step Sb3405, that is, the process of setting the special 1 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed. That is, the special bonus process is executed, and the first starting port effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA during the period. As described with reference to FIG. 117, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the second starting mouth game times are executed during the execution of the first starting mouth game times that is a big hit, and the probability is high and small. A winning round is won and a round game of one round is executed. Then, while the round game is being executed in association with the small hit of the second starting mouth game times, the measurement of the game time of the first starting mouth game times is interrupted as an internal process of the main control device 60. Therefore, the display time of the first starting mouth effect image displayed in the sub display area SA during this period is variable, and cannot be specified at the time when the display of the first starting mouth effect image in the sub display area SA is started. .. Therefore, as the first starting port effect image displayed in the sub display area SA, an image that does not make the player feel uncomfortable at any timing is set. For example, an image in which the design for the first liquid crystal is monotonously changing without a story, or an image in which a predetermined character repeats a monotonous operation is set. By doing so, it is possible to display the first starting port effect image in the sub display area SA in which the display time is variable so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

After executing step Sb3405, the process advances to step Sb3406.

In step Sb3406, a process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the hit lottery of the current game is a big hit, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L (L1 or L2). Is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. If the result of the winning lottery of the current game is out of alignment, the presence or absence of the reach is determined from the contents of the special 1 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is the stop result that the same combination of symbols does not hold on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2), and the activated line L (L1 or L2) is set. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established is set as the liquid crystal symbol information of this time. After executing Step Sb3406, the process proceeds to Step Sb3407.

In step Sb3407, processing for determining the variable display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the special 1 variation command received this time, the information of the variation time, and the liquid crystal symbol information identified in step Sb3406. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step Sb3407, the process proceeds to Step Sb3408.

In step Sb3408, the pending information update process is executed. In the update processing of the reservation information, the information of the first reservation number counter area is updated so that the first reservation number stored in the first reservation number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing Step Sb3408, the process proceeds to Step Sb3409.

In step Sb3409, the special 1 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 1 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal design, the variable display pattern, etc. in the first starting mouth game time have been set. After executing Step Sb3409, the process proceeds to Step Sb3410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3401 that the special 1 variation command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to step Sb3410.

In step Sb3410, special 1 game time effect execution processing is executed. The special 1 game time effect execution process is a process for controlling the start and end of the fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first start opening game time. Details of the special 1 game time effect execution processing will be described later. After executing Step Sb3410, the process proceeds to Step Sb3411.

In step Sb3411, a special 1 variation time measurement process is executed. The special 1 variation time measurement process is a process of measuring the time for which the liquid crystal design of the first starting game game times is variably displayed. Details of the special 1 time measurement process for fluctuation will be described later. After executing step Sb3411, the game time effect processing for this special 1 is ended.

<Setting process of special effect pattern for main display area>
Next, the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area will be described. The setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 146: Sb3404) of the special 1 game time effect process.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the special effect pattern for the main display area. In step Sb3501, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game number to be processed is the game number that was won in the jackpot. When it is determined in step Sb3501 that the game number to be processed is the jackpot-winning game number (Sb3501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3502.

In step Sb3502, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the game time that was won for the probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sb3502 that the game time to be processed is the game time that has been won in the probability variation jackpot (Sb3502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3503.

In step Sb3503, it is determined whether the sound-light-side specific certainty variation jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3503 that the sound-light-side specific certainty variation jackpot flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is the 10R certainty variation jackpot (step Sb3503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3504.

In step Sb3504, a positive variation jackpot effect pattern is set as the special first effect pattern (first starting mouth effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

If it is determined in step Sb3503 that the sound-light side specific certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (Sb3503: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb3505. In step Sb3505, a specific probability variation jackpot effect pattern is set as the special first effect pattern (first starting mouth effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. After executing step Sb3505, the process advances to step Sb3506.

In step Sb3506, the sound-light-side specific certainty variation jackpot flag is turned off. After that, the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

In addition, you may employ|adopt the structure which makes the production pattern for probability variation big hits set at step Sb3504, and the production pattern for specific probability variation big hits set at step Sb3506 the same or similar production pattern. By doing this, it is difficult to distinguish whether the big hit this time is a probability big hit or a certain probability big hit, and to give the player an expectation as to which kind of big hit it is. You can

When it is determined in step Sb3502 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that was won for the probability variation jackpot (Sb3502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3507.

In step Sb3507, as a special first effect pattern (first starting mouth effect image) to be displayed in the main display area MA, a normal big hit effect pattern is set. After that, the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3501 that the game number to be processed is not the game number that was won in the jackpot (Sb3501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3508.

In step Sb3508, it is determined whether the sound-light side specific processing flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3508 that the sound-light side specific processing flag is not ON (Sb3508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3509.

In step Sb3509, the effect pattern for detachment is set as the special first effect pattern (first starting port effect image) displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3508 that the sound-light side specific processing flag is ON (Sb3508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3510.

In step Sb3510, a process for setting the effect pattern for the specific process, which is for removal, is executed. The processing is executed when the first starting mouth game time is executed after the specific probability variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the winning is finished. is there. That is, the process is a process of setting an effect pattern for disengagement in the first starting opening game time executed in the period from time T3 to time T4 in FIG. 117. In the present embodiment, a production pattern that suggests that the special bonus process will be started when the jackpot is won next time is used as the production pattern for the disengagement in the first starting opening game times executed in the period. adopt. By doing so, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. After that, the setting process of the special first effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

<Special game play effect execution process>
Next, the special 1 game time effect execution process will be described. The special 1 game time effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a special 1 game time effect process subroutine (FIG. 146: Sb3410).

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing a special 1 game time effect execution process. In step Sb3601, it is determined whether the special 1 effect setting flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3601 that the special 1 effect setting flag is ON (step Sb3601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3601 that the special 1 effect setting flag is not ON (step Sb 3601: NO), the special special 1 game time effect execution processing is ended as it is.

In step Sb3602, it is determined whether the special 1 variable display start flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3602 that the special 1 variable display start flag is not ON (Sb3602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3603.

In step Sb3603, a process of starting the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display based on the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern of the current game time set in steps Sb3404 to Sb3408 of the special 1 game time effect process. The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing Step Sb3603, the process proceeds to Step Sb3604.

In step Sb3604, the first liquid crystal design variation start command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, information of the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is set in the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command uses the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern based on the content of the first liquid crystal design variation start command as the first starting port effect image of the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing Step Sb3604, the process proceeds to Step Sb3605.

In step Sb3605, the special 1 variable display start flag is turned on. Then, the game time effect execution process for this special 1 is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3602 that the special 1 variable display start flag is ON (Sb3602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3606.

In step Sb3606, it is determined whether the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the first starting opening game time. The sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted in the special-purpose fluctuation time counter processing described later, and the sound-light side MPU 92 recognizes the timing when the sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 becomes 0. The timing at which the variable time in the mouth game times ends is specified. When it is determined in step Sb3606 that the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0 (Sb3606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3607. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3606 that the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC1 is not 0 (Sb3606: NO), the special special 1 game time effect execution process is ended.

In step Sb3607, a process of ending the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, the display control device 100, etc. for ending the fluctuation of the first liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stopped symbol) are set. After executing step Sb3603, the process advances to step Sb3608.

In step Sb3608, the first liquid crystal design variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command stops the first liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing Step Sb3608, the process proceeds to Step Sb3609.

In step Sb3609, the special 1 effect setting flag and the special 1 variable display start flag are turned off. Then, the game time effect execution process for this special 1 is ended.

<Special 1 variable time measurement processing>
Next, the special 1 variable time measuring process will be described. The special 1 variable time measuring process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a special 1 game time effect process subroutine (FIG. 146: Sb3411).

The variation time measurement process for the present special 1 is a process for measuring the variation time of the first start opening game time. In addition, this processing has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period when the open/close execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the special-purpose variable time measurement process. In step Sb3701, it is determined whether or not the special 1 variable display start flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3701 that the special 1 variable display start flag is ON (Sb3701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3702. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3701 that the feature 1 variation display start flag is not ON (Sb3701: NO), the feature 1 variation time measurement process is directly terminated.

In step Sb3702, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step Sb3702 that the open/close execution mode start command has been received (Sb3702: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sb3703.

In step Sb3703, the special 1 count stop flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sb3706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3702 that the open/close execution mode start command has not been received (Sb3702: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb3704.

In step Sb3704, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step Sb3704 that the open/close execution mode end command has been received (Sb3704: YES), the flow advances to step Sb3705 to turn off the special 1 count stop flag. After executing step Sb3705, the process advances to step Sb3706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3704 that the open/close execution mode end command has not been received (Sb3704: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb3706.

In step Sb3706, it is determined whether or not the special 1 count stop flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3706 that the special 1 count stop flag is not ON (Sb3706: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3707.

In step Sb3707, the sound light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted. In this process, the value of the sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted every time the thread of step Sb3707 is passed. That is, the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC1 is down-counted only when the thread of step Sb3707 is passed. After executing Step Sb3707, the variable time measuring process for special feature 1 ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3706 that the special 1 count stop flag is ON (Sb3706: YES), the special special 1 variable time measuring process is ended as it is.

By performing such a process, the variation time measurement process for the first special feature is the variation of the first starting opening game time provided with the function of interrupting the measurement of the variation time during the period when the open/close execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

Thus, by receiving the opening/closing execution mode start command indicating the start of the opening/closing execution mode from the main MPU 62 during the execution of the game times, the measurement of the variation time of the game times in the sound/light side MPU 92 is interrupted, and the game times are By receiving the open/close execution mode end command indicating the end of the open/close execution mode from the main MPU 62 during execution of, the interrupted measurement of the variation time of the game time in the sound/light side MPU 92 is restarted. When such a process is executed, for example, when the stop and restart of the variable time measurement is repeated frequently, for example, during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the variable time measured by the main MPU 62 and the sound There is a possibility that a deviation may occur between the fluctuation time measured by the optical MPU 92. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the open/close execution mode start command and the open/close execution mode end command transmitted by the main MPU 62 include information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main MPU 62. The sound-light side MPU 92 measures the sound-light side MPU 92 based on the information about the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main-side MPU 62 included in the received opening/closing execution mode start command and opening/closing execution mode end command. You may employ the structure which corrects the value of the fluctuation time which exists. In addition, when it is known that an error occurs in the fluctuation time measured by the sound-light side MPU 92 as compared with the fluctuation time measured by the main MPU 62, the value of the error or the value of the error in advance. A configuration may be adopted in which the average value of the error is specified and the error value is corrected when the variation time is measured in the sound-light side MPU 92. By doing so, the measurement of the fluctuation time can be accurately synchronized between the main MPU 62 and the sound-light MPU 92.

<Special 2 game time performance processing>
Next, the special 2 game time effect processing will be described. The special 2 game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 143: Sb3105).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game time effect processing. In step Sb3801, it is determined whether or not the special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sb3801 that the special 2 variation command is received (Sb3801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3802.

In step Sb3802, the special 2 variation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot, the type of a jackpot, the presence/absence of a jackpot, and the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sb3803.

In step Sb3803, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3803 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (Sb3803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3804, and the special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is executed. The special second effect pattern setting process for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the main display area MA based on the information read in step Sb3802. Details of the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step Sb3804, the process advances to step Sb3806.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb3803 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (Sb3803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3805, and the special 2 effect pattern setting process for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the sub display area SA are set based on the information read in step Sb3802.

After executing step Sb3805, the process advances to step Sb3806.

In step Sb3806, a liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the hit lottery of the current game is a big hit, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L (L1 or L2). Is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. Further, if the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is out, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the special 2 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is the stop result that the same combination of symbols does not hold on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2), and the activated line L (L1 or L2) is set. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established is set as the liquid crystal symbol information of this time. After executing step Sb3806, the process advances to step Sb3807.

In step Sb3807, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the special 2 variation command received this time, the information of the variation time, and the information of the liquid crystal symbol specified in step Sb3806. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step Sb3807, the process advances to step Sb3808.

In step Sb3808, the pending information update process is executed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information of the second hold number counter area is updated so that the second hold number stored in the second hold number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing Step Sb3808, the process proceeds to Step Sb3809.

In step Sb3809, the special 2 effect setting flag is turned on. The special 2 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal pattern, the variable display pattern, etc. in the second starting mouth game time are set. After executing Step Sb3809, the process proceeds to Step Sb3810.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3801 that the special 2 variation command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to step Sb3810.

In step Sb3810, special 2 game time effect execution processing is executed. It is a process of controlling the start and end of the fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game times. Details of the special 2 game time effect execution process will be described later. After executing Step Sb3810, the process proceeds to Step Sb3811.

In step Sb3811, the special 2 variation time measurement process is executed. The special 2 variation time measurement process is a process of measuring the time for which the liquid crystal design of the second starting opening game time is variably displayed. Details of the special 2 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step Sb3811, the processing for game time effect for special 2 is ended.

<Setting process of special 2 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area will be described. The special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: Sb3804) of the special 2 game time effect process.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area. In step Sb3901, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the game time that was won in the jackpot. When it is determined in step Sb3901 that the game number to be processed is the game number that was won in the jackpot (Sb3901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3902.

In step Sb3902, an effect pattern for big hits including probability variation big hits and normal big hits is set. Then, the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3901 that the game number to be processed is not the game number that was won in the jackpot (Sb3901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3903.

In step Sb3903, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb3903 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (Sb3903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3904.

In step Sb3904, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the game time that was won for the small hit. When it is determined in step Sb3904 that the game number to be processed is the game number that was won for the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (Sb3904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3905.

In step Sb3905, an effect pattern for a small hit in a normal time (when not a special bonus time) is set. Then, the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3904 that the game number to be processed is not the game number that was won in the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (Sb3904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3906.

In step Sb3906, an effect pattern for a normal time (when not a special bonus time) is set. Then, the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3903 that the special bonus start flag is ON (Sb3903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3907.

In step Sb3907, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the game time that was won for the small hit. When it is determined in step Sb3907 that the game time to be processed is the game time that was won for the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (Sb3907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb3908.

In step Sb3908, an effect pattern for a small hit at the time of a special bonus is set. The setting method of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus differs depending on the state of the game at the time of executing the processing. Details of the setting process of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus will be described later. After executing step Sb3908, the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb3907 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that was won for the small hit based on the received special 2 variation command (Sb3907: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb3909.

In step Sb3909, an effect pattern for removal during a special bonus is set. Then, the setting process of the special second effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting process of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus in step Sb3908.

In the setting process of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus, the effect pattern is set with reference to the effect pattern table data (TB1 to TB9) in which the variation time of the game times that is the processing target and the effect pattern are associated with each other. To do. FIG. 152 is a correspondence table in which the effect pattern table data to be referred to is associated with each state of the game at the time of executing the effect pattern setting process for the small hit at the time of the special bonus.

As shown in the figure, the type of jackpot of the first starting mouth game times (type of jackpot of the first starting mouth game times at time T4 in FIG. 117) that triggered the start of the special bonus process, and the jackpot. It is used to set the effect of the second starting mouth game times executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed, for each remaining time RT after the fluctuation of the first starting mouth game times has started. The effect pattern table data is set in association with each other.

For example, if the type of jackpot of the first starting mouth game times (the type of jackpots of the first starting mouth game times at time T4 in FIG. 117) that triggered the start of the special bonus process is the 10R specific probability variation jackpot. In the case where the remaining time RT of the variation time of the first starting mouth game times at the timing of setting the effect of the second starting mouth game times is 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, the effect pattern table By referring to the data TB2, the effect pattern of the second start opening game time which is a small hit is determined.

As shown in the figure, in each effect pattern table data, an effect pattern is set in association with each variation time UT of the second starting mouth game times, and an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is selected and set. ..

In this way, by setting the method of setting the effect pattern of the second starting mouth game times at the time of the special bonus depending on the state of the game when setting the effect pattern, various suggestion effects can be given to the player. Can be executed.

For example, when the remaining time RT of the first starting mouth game times during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed is short, an effect is suggested to indicate that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short, and the player is informed. A feeling of irritation can be imparted. In addition, when the remaining time RT of the first starting opening game times is sufficient, an effect is suggested to indicate that the remaining time of the special bonus processing is short, and thereafter, the remaining time of the special bonus processing is sufficiently left. By executing the effect suggesting that, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, by changing the method of setting the effect pattern for each type of jackpot of the first starting mouth game times that triggered the start of the special bonus process, the type of jackpot of the first starting mouth game times is suggested. It is possible to execute the effect.

<Special 2 game time performance execution processing>
Next, the special 2 game time effect execution process will be described. The special 2 game time effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 2 game time effect process (FIG. 150: Sb3810).

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing a special 2 game time effect execution process. In step Sb4001, it is determined whether the special 2 effect setting flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb4001 that the special 2 effect setting flag is ON (step Sb4001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4001 that the special 2 effect setting flag is not ON (step Sb4001: NO), the main special 2 game time effect execution processing is ended.

In step Sb4002, it is determined whether or not the special 2 variable display start flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb4002 that the special 2 variable display start flag is not ON (Sb4002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb4003.

In step Sb4003, a process of starting the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display based on the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern of the current game time set in steps Sb3404 to Sb3408 of the special 2 game time effect processing. The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing step Sb4003, the process proceeds to step Sb4004.

In step Sb4004, the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern information set in the current game time are set in the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command uses the effect pattern based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variation display pattern as the second start port effect image of the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step Sb4004, the process proceeds to step Sb4005.

In step Sb4005, the special 2 variable display start flag is turned on. Then, the game time effect execution process for this special 1 is ended.

When it is determined in step Sb4002 that the special 2 variable display start flag is ON (Sb4002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4006.

In step Sb4006, it is determined whether the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0. The sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the second starting opening game time. The sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted in the special 2 fluctuation time measuring process described later, and when the sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 becomes 0, the sound-light side MPU 92 starts the second start. The timing at which the variable time in the mouth game times ends is specified. When it is determined in step Sb4006 that the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0 (Sb4006: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4006 that the value of the sound/light side variation time counter SPTC2 is not 0 (Sb4006: NO), the special 2 game play effect execution process is ended as it is.

In step Sb4007, a process of ending the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, the display control device 100, etc. for ending the fluctuation of the second liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stopped symbol) are set. After executing Step Sb4003, the process proceeds to Step Sb4008.

In step Sb4008, the second liquid crystal design variation end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 stops the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing Step Sb4008, the process proceeds to Step Sb4009.

In step Sb4009, the special 2 effect setting flag and the special 2 variable display start flag are turned off. Then, the game time effect execution process for this special 2 is ended.

<Special 2 variable time measurement processing>
Next, the special 2 variable time measuring process will be described. The special 2 variable time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: Sb3811) of the special 2 game time effect process.

The variation time measuring process for this special 2 is a process of measuring the variation time of the game times for the second starting opening. In addition, this processing has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period when the open/close execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the special 2 variable time measuring process. In step Sb4101, it is determined whether the special 2 variable display start flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb4101 that the special 2 variable display start flag is ON (Sb4101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4102. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb4101 that the special 2 variation display start flag is not ON (Sb4101: NO), the special 2 variation time measuring process is ended as it is.

In step Sb4102, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode start command has been received. When it is determined in step Sb4102 that the open/close execution mode start command has been received (Sb4102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4103.

In step Sb4103, the special 2 count stop flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sb4106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4102 that the open/close execution mode start command has not been received (Sb4102: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sb4104.

In step Sb4104, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step Sb4104 that the open/close execution mode end command has been received (Sb4104: YES), the flow advances to step Sb4105 to turn off the special 2 count stop flag. After executing step Sb4105, the process advances to step Sb4106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4104 that the open/close execution mode end command has not been received (Sb4104: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sb4106.

In step Sb4106, it is determined whether the special 2 count stop flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sb4106 that the special 2 count stop flag is not ON (Sb4106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sb4107.

In step Sb4107, the sound light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted. In this processing, the value of the sound-light side variation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted every time the thread of step Sb4107 is passed. That is, the value of the sound-light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is down-counted only when the thread of step Sb4107 is passed. After executing step Sb4107, the variable time measuring process for special feature 2 ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sb4106 that the special 2 count stop flag is ON (Sb4106: YES), the main special 2 variable time measuring process is ended as it is.

By performing such a process, the variable time measuring process for the present special 2 has a function of interrupting the measurement of the variable time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

<Special bonus effect setting process>
Next, the special bonus effect setting process will be described. The special bonus effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 143: Sb3106).

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the special bonus effect setting process. In step Sb4201, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. When it is determined in step Sb4201 that the special bonus start command is received (Sb4201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sb4202.

In step Sb4202, a special bonus effect is set. The special bonus effect is displayed in a region other than the main display area MA and the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a during the execution of the special bonus processing, displaying an image for the special bonus processing period, outputting a sound, and a lamp. This is a setting process for executing lighting of. After executing Step Sb4202, the special bonus effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb4201 that the special bonus start command has not been received (Sb4201: NO), the special bonus effect setting process is ended as it is.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sb4301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sb4302.

In step Sb4302, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sb4401, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image or draws a new image while the image is being drawn. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sb4501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 157), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sb4501), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the manner of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode is designed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the image is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sb4502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sb4501) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sb4503.

In step Sb4503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sb4502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sb4504.

In step Sb4504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sb4503) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step Sb4505 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is a process of giving a privilege during the execution of the first starting opening game times that is won for the jackpot, so On the other hand, not only does it give an expectation about the round game (opening and closing execution mode) as a privilege that is given after the end of the big win, but also the execution of the big win You can add a sense of anticipation to it.

Further, even when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times, there are cases where the special bonus process is executed during the execution of the game times and cases where it is not executed, so the jackpot is won. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency such as whether or not the special bonus process is executed when the first starting opening game time is started.

In addition, during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus is triggered by the fact that the small win is won in the second starting mouth game times while the first starting mouth game times that are winning the big hits are being executed. As a privilege (round game of 1R) is given, even if the big win is won in the first starting mouth game times, the second starting mouth game times are further executed and the small hits are made. It is possible to give an even greater sense of expectation by winning.

Furthermore, after the end of the first start opening game time in which the special bonus process is executed, a round game is executed corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first starting opening game operation, so that a greater expectation is achieved. Can be given to a person.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times of execution of the second starting mouth game times that can be executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed is the time when the first starting mouth game times that are being executed during the period are being executed. Depends on. That is, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the special bonus is determined by the time during which the first starting opening game time being executed during the period is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the player wants the first starting opening game times being executed to continue for a longer period during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. In addition, as the end of the first starting mouth game times is approaching, it is hoped that more bonuses as special bonuses will be acquired, that is, the second starting mouth game times will be executed and the small hits will be won as much as possible. It is possible to give a feeling and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the first starting mouth game times, and it is possible to give intonation to the player's emotion.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game time in which the special bonus processing is executed, the special bonus processing is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an excessively advantageous state.

In addition, in the first starting mouth game times which is won in the winning lottery, whether or not to execute the special bonus process is executed before the first starting mouth game times in which the special bonus process is executed and the jackpot is a big hit. It is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the winning first start game time. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the first starting mouth game time that is executed before the first starting mouth game time in which the special bonus process is executed and wins the jackpot is specified. If it is a probability variation jackpot, then a special bonus process is executed in the first start opening game times that was won for the jackpot. That is, before the special bonus process is executed, it is possible to specify in advance that the special bonus process will be executed when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times. As a result, for example, during the execution of the first starting mouth game times that was won for the certain probability variation jackpot, the advance warning that the special bonus process will be executed if the jackpot is won next at the first starting mouth game times (indication) The special bonus process is performed between the time when the first start opening game time when the special bonus processing is executed and the start of the first starting opening game time when the special bonus processing is executed is executed. It is possible to execute an effect that gives advance notice (suggestion) of being executed. In addition, the condition to switch the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode when the specific probability variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game round, and the jackpot is won next in the first starting mouth game round Can be one of In this way, in the first starting opening game times that wins the winning lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute the special bonus processing before the first starting opening game times in which the special bonus processing is executed. By determining based on the jackpot type corresponding to the first start opening game times that is executed and won the jackpot, it is possible to execute various corresponding processes for the special bonus process being executed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment switches the setting method of the variation time of the second start opening game time between the period for executing the special bonus process and the period other than that. More specifically, the average value of the fluctuation times of the second starting mouth game times set during the period of executing the special bonus process is the fluctuation time of the second starting mouth game times set during the other period. Shorter than average value. Therefore, the period during which the special bonus process is executed can be made advantageous for the player. In addition, when performing such a process, there is a possibility that it will be excessively advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency during the period of executing the special bonus process. Since the mode is switched to the support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessively advantageous state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the jackpot type of the first start opening game times executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the second starting opening game times executed during that period. Determine the effect pattern. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly infer the player about the lottery result (big hit type) of the first starting mouth game times through the effect of the second starting mouth game times. That is, it is possible to give an expectation to the first starting port game time by using the effect executed in the second starting port game time. Also, based on the lottery mode (high-probability mode or low-probability mode) after the end of the first starting mouth game times, which is executed in the period in which the special bonus process is executed, it is executed in the period in which the special bonus process is executed. The effect pattern of the second starting opening game times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the lottery mode after the end of the first starting opening game times by using the effect executed in the second starting opening game times.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, regarding the setting of the effect of the second starting opening game times executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the first starting opening game at the timing of setting the effect. Based on the elapsed time of the number of times, the effect pattern of the second starting mouth game times is set. Therefore, for the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second starting mouth game times, the elapsed time from the execution of the first first starting mouth game times and the first starting mouth game times It is possible to estimate the remaining time until the end, and indirectly give a sense of expectation for the first start-up special information game times through the effect corresponding to the second start-up special information game times. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second starting opening game times based on the elapsed time of the first starting opening game times, the first The condition is that you have won the jackpot for the starting mouth game times. Therefore, if the second starting mouth game times are executed while the first starting mouth game times are being executed, whether or not the effect of the second starting mouth game times is based on the elapsed time of the first starting mouth game times By letting the player guess whether or not, it is possible to guess whether or not the first starting opening game time is a big hit. That is, it is possible to give an expectation about the success or failure of the winning lottery for the first starting opening game times through the effect of the second starting opening game times. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, the process of setting the effect pattern of the second starting opening game times based on the elapsed time of the first starting opening game times, the first It is a condition that the specific probability variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times executed before the starting mouth game times. Therefore, if the second starting mouth game times are executed while the first starting mouth game times are being executed, whether or not the effect of the second starting mouth game times is based on the elapsed time of the first starting mouth game times By making the player guess whether or not the player has won the specific probability variation jackpot in the first starting mouth game time executed before the first starting mouth game time, that is, in the execution. It is possible to infer whether or not the special bonus process is executed in the one starting mouth game time, and it is possible to give the player a great expectation.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times, depending on the state in which the first starting mouth game times are executed, the first liquid crystal design There is a case where the processing for exchanging the display area to be displayed and a display area for displaying the second liquid crystal design is executed and the case where the processing is not executed. Specifically, in the state where the specific probability variation jackpot has been won before the first starting mouth game times which is won the jackpot is executed, the first starting mouth game times which is won the jackpot is started. With this as a trigger, the processing for switching the display areas for displaying the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design is performed. On the other hand, in the case of being in the state of winning the jackpot other than the specific probability variation jackpot before the first starting mouth game time of the jackpot is executed, the first starting mouth game time of the jackpot is started. The process of switching the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is not performed when this happens. Therefore, by making the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display area has been executed, is the state in which the first starting mouth game time is executed after the game time selected as the specific probability variation jackpot? Alternatively, it is possible to infer whether or not it is after the game times in which a big hit other than the specific probability variation big hit is won. As a result, by letting the player recognize whether or not the display areas have been swapped, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the special bonus process is to be performed, and to give a great sense of expectation. In addition, by executing the effect using whether or not the display areas can be replaced, it is possible to further give the player an expectation as to whether or not the special bonus process is executed.

<<B7>> Modification of Second Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<B7-1>> Modification 1:
In the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first starting mouth game time that is won in the jackpot, at the start of the first starting mouth game time when the special bonus process is executed. Therefore, it may be performed, or may be performed based on the jackpot type in the first starting mouth game times. That is, in the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first starting mouth game times that is won for the big hit, by determining the first starting mouth game times (after-run first It was decided based on whether or not the specific probability variation jackpot was won in the first starting mouth game times (previously executed first starting mouth game times) that was won in the jackpot executed before the starting mouth game times). However, in the present modification, the jackpot type in the pre-execution first starting mouth game times is not referred to, the determination is made based on the jackpot type in the post-execution first starting mouth game times, and the post-execution first starting mouth game times At the start of, a determination is made by lottery. By doing so, it is not necessary to execute a process of storing the jackpot type of the first starting opening game times that was previously executed and won the jackpot (for example, storage by a flag), and the processing load can be reduced. Can be planned.

In addition, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot can be set as the types of jackpot types, and if the probability variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time, the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is next in the first starting mouth game time. A configuration may be adopted in which the special bonus process is executed at the timing when the player wins. By doing so, it is not necessary to set a jackpot type such as a specific probability variable jackpot and a specific probability variable jackpot flag, and the process can be simplified.

In addition, as a jackpot type, if there is a type in the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode set in the game times executed after winning the jackpot and ending the opening and closing execution mode is a specific high frequency support mode. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time during the execution of the specific high frequency support mode, the special bonus process may be executed. Specifically, as the jackpot type, the 10R probability variation jackpot A in which the high frequency support mode A in which the opening pattern of the electric auditors product 44a is the pattern A is executed and the high frequency in which the opening pattern of the electric auditors product 44a is the pattern B are high frequency. A configuration in which the 10R certainty variation jackpot B in which the support mode B is executed can be set is adopted. Then, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times while the high frequency support mode B is being executed, a special bonus process is executed.

More specifically, a high frequency support mode flag corresponding to the type of high frequency support mode is prepared. Then, when winning the 10R probability variable jackpot B, in the transition process at the end of the ending period executed at the end of the round game (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot: in the high frequency support mode B The high-frequency support mode flag (hereinafter, high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B) is turned on. After that, while the high frequency support mode B in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is the pattern B is being executed, the first starting opening game time is executed to determine whether or not the jackpot is successful, and it is determined that the jackpot is won. In this case, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag for pattern B is ON, and when it is determined that the flag is ON, it is determined to execute the special bonus process. That is, the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B is turned off at the start of the first start opening game times that is a big hit. In addition, you may employ|adopt the structure which determines whether the high frequency support mode flag for pattern B is ON after performing the determination of the big hit in the game time for the 1st starting opening, and the height for pattern B. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the frequency support mode flag is ON, and then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot in the first starting mouth game time is hit, and while the high frequency support mode B is being executed, Various processing modes can be adopted as long as it is recognizable that a big hit is won in one starting mouth game time.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the specific probability variation jackpot in the previous game time without using the specific processing flag in the game number after winning the specific probability variation jackpot. .. That is, by providing a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes and determining whether the high-frequency support mode is a specific high-frequency support mode (in the above example, it is the high-frequency support mode B), It is possible to recognize that the specific probability variation jackpot has been won in the previous game.

Further, when such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the high frequency support mode executed. Then, when a specific high frequency support mode (in the above example, the high frequency support mode B) is being executed, when the player starts the first starting opening game time, the It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation about the result of winning or losing the jackpot. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode, a special bonus process is executed, so when the specific high-frequency support mode is not executed. It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation to the player, as compared with the success or failure of the jackpot of the first starting opening game times executed.

Furthermore, in the case where the special bonus process is executed when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times while the specific high frequency support mode (in the above example, the high frequency support mode B) is being executed, the high frequency support is performed. The mode flag (high frequency support mode flag for pattern B) is turned off, and the support mode is switched. Specifically, it switches to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not the support mode is switched during the execution of the specific high frequency support mode. In addition, when a special jackpot process is executed and a special bonus process is executed in the first starting mouth game time during execution of a specific high frequency support mode (in the above example, high frequency support mode B), a second start is performed. The method of setting the variation time of the game times for the mouth is switched (see FIGS. 117 and 130). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the method of setting the variation time of the second start opening game times is switched during the execution of the specific high frequency support mode.

It should be noted that only one type can be executed as the high frequency support mode, and when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times while the high frequency support mode is being executed, a special bonus process is executed. Good. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the first start mouth game times while the high frequency support mode is being executed, the high frequency support mode is set to the low frequency at the start of the first start mouth game times which is the big hit. Switch to support mode. Further, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times during execution of the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation of the second starting mouth game times at the start of the first starting mouth game times, which has become the jackpot. Switch the time setting method. Such a configuration may be adopted.

<<B7-2>> Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting mouth game round, but the support mode is set low at the start of the first starting mouth game round. A configuration may be adopted in which the process of switching from the frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged excessively during the execution of the first starting mouth game times.

<<B7-3>> Modification 3:
In the above embodiment, the special bonus process is started at the start of the variation of the first symbol of the first starting mouth game times that was won for the jackpot, but as a modified example, the first starting mouth game times that is won for the jackpot. A configuration may be adopted in which the variable display of the first symbol ends and the first symbol starts when the first symbol stops. That is, in the period from the time when the fluctuation of the first symbol of the first starting mouth game times won for the jackpot to the end of the display of the stopped first symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop display period) Alternatively, a configuration for executing the special bonus process may be adopted. Specifically, at the start of the stop display period, the setting method of the variation time of the second start opening game time is changed, and a relatively long time (5 minutes to 10 minutes) is set as the variation time. Switch to a setting method in which a relatively short time (2 to 5 seconds) is set. Then, at the start of the stop display period, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Further, the stop display period when executing the special bonus process is set to a relatively long time such as 30 seconds to 1 minute. By doing so, the configuration of the modified example can be realized.

B6-4. Modification 4:
In the above embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is won, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode from the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed after the winning game times, and the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and as a modified example, when the probability variation jackpot is won, the lottery mode is a high-probability mode from the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed after the winning game times. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the game mode is shifted to the low probability mode after a predetermined number of game times have been executed. That is, this is a configuration in which the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode is limited. By doing this, for example, when a specific probability variation jackpot is won, if the jackpot is subsequently won, a special bonus process is executed. However, the configuration of this modification is a game game that can be executed in a high probability mode. Since the number of times is limited, the special bonus process is not executed unless the jackpot is won before the limited number of game times are executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tenseness and frustration during the period in which the specific probability variation jackpot is won and then the game times are executed in the high-probability mode.

<<B7-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-mentioned embodiment, even if the jackpot of any jackpot type is won in the first starting mouth game time, the high-frequency support mode is executed thereafter. Therefore, while the high-frequency support mode is being executed, the player is suggested during the high-frequency support mode by executing an effect that suggests the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode. Expectation can be added. For example, in the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, when an effect that suggests that the jackpot type of the selected jackpot is the 10R specific certainty variation jackpot or the 10R certainty variation jackpot is given to the player who has recognized the attraction. On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the special bonus process may be started when the next jackpot is won.

Also, while the high frequency support mode is being executed, the player is inferred whether the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high frequency support mode is the 10R specific probability variation jackpot or the 8R regular jackpot. When performing the effect, the player who recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has transitioned to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting mouth game times, the transition to the support mode, the special bonus process is started. It is difficult to determine whether it is caused by the fact that it is caused by the end of the number of games (100 times) executed as the high frequency support mode, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. it can.

<<B7-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot type in the first starting mouth game times that was won first in the jackpot was the specific probability variation jackpot, the jackpot was won in the first starting mouth game times that was executed later. As a trigger, the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting mouth game time, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and another configuration may be adopted. For example, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting mouth game times that was previously won the jackpot, the jackpot was won in the executed first starting mouth game times, or the jackpot of a particular jackpot type was won With this as an opportunity, a configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start opening game time. By doing so, the player who recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has been switched to the low-frequency support mode can be given a sense of expectation for the subsequent progress of the game.

B6-7. Modification 7:
In the above-described embodiment, the process at the start of the first start mouth game times that is won for the big hit depends on whether or not the jackpot type in the first start mouth game times that was won for the big hit is the certain probability variable jackpot. It was determined whether or not the special bonus process is started at the start of the first starting mouth game times that was won for the jackpot, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and the jackpot type in the game times that was previously won for the jackpot is determined. Based on the configuration, another configuration may be adopted as long as it is a configuration that determines the process at the time of starting the game number that is subsequently won as a jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type in the game times that was won first in the jackpot is a probable variation jackpot, a configuration that starts a specific performance at the start of the game times that was later won in the jackpot, and a high frequency support mode with low frequency support Various configurations such as a configuration for switching to a mode, a configuration for switching a low-frequency support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and a configuration for changing the setting method of the variation time of the game times may be adopted.

<<B7-8>> Modification 8:
In the present embodiment, when the special bonus process is started, the variation time of the second starting opening game times is high even though the average value of the variation times set as compared with other periods is short. The frequency support mode was switched to low frequency support, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and the high frequency support mode is set in spite of the fact that the average value of the variation time of the game times set based on a specific trigger becomes short. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration switches to low frequency support. For example, with the transition from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode as a trigger, the method of setting the fluctuation time is switched so that the average value of the fluctuation times of the set game times becomes short, and the high-frequency support mode is set to low frequency. A configuration for switching to support may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous state for the player.

<<B7-9>> Modification 9:
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times, particularly when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times and the special bonus process is executed, the first starting mouth The second starting mouth game times executed during the period for which the game times are executed are executed in the second starting mouth game times relative to the second starting mouth game times executed during other periods. Although the determination method is different, the invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the second start-port game executed in the period from the start to the end of one first start-port game time. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the effect to be executed in the game is determined based on the symbol (lottery result) corresponding to the one game opening for the first starting opening. For example, depending on whether the lottery result corresponding to the one first starting mouth game time is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit, the first starting mouth game time is started and then ended. You may employ|adopt the structure which the effect (or the setting method of an effect) performed in the 2nd starting mouth game time performed in the period until it does differs. Even in this way, it is possible to give an expectation to the first starting mouth game time by using the effect executed in the second starting mouth game time.

<<B7-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the bonus is given to the player in the form of a special bonus process during the period in which the first start opening game times, which is a big hit, is executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the bonus is given to the player during the period in which the game times are performed. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the player is provided with a privilege by switching from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode during the execution of the first starting mouth game times that is won as a jackpot. In addition, the pachinko machine in the present embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variation pachinko machine in which the first start opening game times and the second starting opening game times are executed in parallel, but for the first starting opening A pachinko machine in which the game times and the second start opening game times are exclusively executed may be adopted. In this case, during the execution of the first start mouth game times that is a big hit, it switches from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start mouth. You may employ|adopt the structure which pays out a prize ball by the game ball entering the said 2nd starting opening.

<<B7-11>> Modification 11:
In the above-described embodiment, elapsed time information that is information about the elapsed time from the start of the first starting opening game times to a predetermined timing, or information about the remaining time of the first starting opening game times (remaining time RT ) Is acquired, and based on the elapsed time information, the effect corresponding to the second starting mouth game time executed during the period in which the first starting mouth game time, which is the acquisition target of the elapsed time information, is being executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are set. For example, based on the remaining time of the first starting mouth game times, the information corresponding to the remaining time is displayed in the second starting mouth game times executed during the period in which the first starting mouth game times are executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that suggests that more time than the actual remaining time of the first starting mouth game times remains as the remaining time is executed based on the actual remaining time. Even in this way, for the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second starting mouth game times, the elapsed time from the execution of the first starting mouth game times and the first starting mouth use times It is possible to estimate the remaining time until the game time is over, and indirectly give an expectation to the first game opening game time through the effect corresponding to the second game opening game time.

<<B7-12>> Modification 12:
In the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the variation of the symbol of the first starting mouth game times, which is a big hit, is won to a specific small hit in the second starting mouth game times. You may employ|adopt the structure stopped on the basis of what was done. For example, a configuration in which two types of small hits, that is, a first small hit and a second small hit are set in the second starting port hit/miss table (see FIG. 113) is adopted. Then, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, that is, while the symbols of the first starting mouth game times that are won for the jackpot are changing, the second starting mouth game times are executed and the lottery result is If it is two small hits, as in the above embodiment, the fluctuation of the first starting opening game time is not stopped, but the fluctuation is continued. On the other hand, while the symbols of the first starting mouth game times that have been won for the jackpot are changing, the second starting mouth game times are executed, and when the lottery result is the first small hit, the second At the timing when the variation of the symbol of the starting mouth game times is stopped, the variation of the symbol of the first starting mouth game times is also stopped. At this time, the design of the first starting opening game time is stopped by the design indicating the detachment. That is, the first start opening game time ends, and the special bonus process ends. Further, at this time, since the symbol of the first starting mouth game times is stopped by the symbol indicating the deviation, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed after the end of the first starting mouth game times, and the special bonus process is performed. The support mode after the game start for 1 start opening is also the low frequency support mode.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, during the period during which the special bonus process is being executed, that is, the second starting opening game in which the symbols of the first starting opening game times that have been won for the jackpot are changing. When the result of the lottery is the first small hit, the privilege given to the player is reduced as compared with the case where the result of the lottery is not the first small hit. Therefore, even during the period when the special bonus process is executed, that is, even when the symbol of the first starting opening game times that is won in the jackpot is changing, the player feels a sense of tension and expectation. It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this modified example as well, as in the above embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, that is, the second start in which the symbols of the first starting opening game times that have been won for the jackpot are changing. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the lottery result of the mouth game times is not a big hit.

<<B7-13>> Modification 13:
In the above-described embodiment, when the second starting opening game times are executed while the first starting opening game times that are winning the big hits are changing, the second starting opening game times are winning the jackpot. If it is set to stop with a symbol that indicates that you have not won the big jackpot, if you have won the small jackpot, it is a symbol that shows that you have won the small jackpot Although it was a configuration to stop, it will stop with a design showing that you have won the particular small hit only if you have won a specific small hit, even if you have won other small hits You may employ|adopt the structure set to stop with the symbol which shows that it is not winning.

<<B7-14>> Modification 14:
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time, that is, the special bonus process is executed in the state where the specific probability variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time that was previously won. In such a case, the configuration in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and other configurations may be adopted. For example, in the high probability mode, when the game times of winning the jackpot are executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are displayed is switched, A configuration may be adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched when the game time of winning the jackpot in the state of the frequency support mode is executed. In addition, the display for displaying the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design when the game time of winning the big hit is executed in the state where the specific small hit has been won in the previously executed game time. A configuration in which the areas are switched may be adopted. Further, the target of the symbols whose display areas are switched is not limited to the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, and the first liquid crystal symbol and the symbol for the electric-role opening lottery or the second liquid crystal symbol and the electrical symbol. It may be a design for open lottery. Even in this case, by making the player recognize whether or not the display areas have been exchanged, the player can make various guesses and give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting mouth game times that was won for the jackpot, when the jackpot is won in each of the first starting mouth game times, the main jackpot is based on the jackpot type in the game times. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the display area MA and the sub display area SA are exchanged, or even if the jackpot is not won, for example, in a game time when a reach occurs, A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA are exchanged at the start of the game game. Also, these configurations may be combined. By combining them, it is possible to prompt the player who recognizes the replacement of the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA to various guesses in the started game times, and to give a sense of expectation.

<<B7-15>> Modification 15:
In the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as a privilege, that is, the number of executable times of the second starting opening game times that can be won in the small hit Has been configured to be determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting opening game times corresponding to the special bonus process, but the upper limit value of the amount of privilege is variation of the game times satisfying a specific condition. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are determined based on the length of time. For example, the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the second starting opening during the execution of the first starting opening game time is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting opening game time. The configuration may be adopted. Even in this way, it is possible to give the player the expectation that he or she will want to obtain as many privileges as possible as the game time ends, and the frustration regarding the end time of the game time. Inflection can be added to emotions.

<<B7-16>> Modification 16:
In the above-described embodiment, at the start of the first start opening game times which is a big hit, the high frequency support mode flag is changed from ON to OFF. A configuration may be adopted in which the falling lottery is executed before the winning lottery is executed. Here, the falling lottery is a lottery for deciding whether or not to set the low probability mode when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this modification, the falling lottery is executed before the winning lottery in the game. If the game times have already been executed 100 times or more in the high frequency support mode, if the falling lottery is won in the first starting mouth game times, the lottery mode is changed from the high probability mode at the start of the game times. While shifting to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF.

If such a configuration is adopted, the specific probability variation jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time executed earlier, and the special bonus process is executed if the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time. In a state where the game times are already executed in the high frequency support mode 100 times or more, the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency at the same time when the first starting mouth game time is started. When the player shifts to the support mode, whether the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode due to the fact that the player has won the jackpot and the special bonus process has started It is possible to make a guess as to whether the support mode has transitioned from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode due to the transition from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode by winning the lottery, which gives the player a great sense of urgency. Can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<B7-17>> Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game times, an effect that suggests information about the type of the jackpot in the first starting mouth game times that was previously won for the jackpot in the game times is produced. You may execute. That is, the effect to be executed in the first starting mouth game times won for the jackpot is determined based on the type of jackpot in the first starting mouth game times that was won for the jackpot prior to the first starting mouth game times. To do.

For example, when the jackpot is won in the first starting mouth game time, a performance is suggested which suggests that the type of the jackpot in the first starting mouth game time that was won the previous jackpot was a certain probability variation jackpot. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first starting mouth game time currently being executed is the game time at which the special bonus process is executed, and give the player an expectation. be able to. In addition, when the type of the jackpot in the first starting mouth game times that was previously won the jackpot was a certain probability variation jackpot, the jackpot was won first in the first starting mouth game times that was later won the jackpot You may perform the effect|action which makes a player guess whether the classification of the said big hit in the 1st starting mouth game time was a specific probability change big hit, or was a normal big hit. By executing such an effect, the player is made to infer whether or not the first starting opening game time currently being executed is the game time for which the special bonus process is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

<<B7-18>> Modification 18:
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the method of setting the variation time of the second start opening game times is switched at the start of the special bonus process. Specifically, the process shifts from the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process (FIG. 130: Sb1305) to the high-accuracy low-frequency time fluctuation time acquisition process (FIG. 130: Sb1306), which is executed as a special bonus process. The average value of the fluctuation times set for the second starting mouth game times during the period in which the first starting mouth game times are executed is the second starting mouth game times before the special bonus process is executed. It was configured to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time set for, but further, the second starting mouth game times in the period in which the first starting mouth game times executed as special bonus processing is being executed. You may employ|adopt the structure which has two or more types of the setting methods of the fluctuation time.

Specifically, in the high-accuracy low-frequency time variation time acquisition process (see FIG. 133), a plurality of types of high-accuracy low-frequency time small hit variation time tables that are selected when a small hit is provided. The high-probability low-frequency time small hitting variation time tables are different from each other in the average value of the variation times set in the second starting opening game times. For example, it includes a first high-accuracy low-frequency hour small hit variation time table, a second high-accuracy low-frequency hour small hit variation time table, and a third high-accuracy low-frequency hour small hit variation time table. The first high-accuracy low-frequency small hitting variation time table is shorter than the second high-accuracy low-frequency small hitting variation time table, and the average value of the variation times set in the second starting opening game times is shorter, The second high-accuracy low-frequency small hitting variation time table has a shorter average value of the fluctuation times set in the second starting opening game times than the third high-accuracy low-frequency small hitting variation time table. Then, when the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the second starting mouth game times during the period in which the first starting mouth game times executed as the special bonus process are executed, the small hits are made. 2 The variation time table for setting the variation time in the starting mouth game times, the jackpot type of the first starting mouth game times corresponding to the special bonus process, the variation time, etc., the first starting mouth game times It is determined based on the predetermined parameters (big hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS) acquired in.

For example, when the jackpot type of the first starting mouth game times executed as the special bonus processing is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first starting mouth game times executed as the special bonus processing is executed. The variation time of the second starting opening game times when the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the second starting opening game times in the period, based on the first high-accuracy low-frequency time small hitting variation time table. decide. Further, when the jackpot type of the first starting opening game times executed as the special bonus processing is the 10R specific probability variation big hit, the first starting opening game times executed as the special bonus processing is executed. The variation time of the second starting opening game times when the result of the winning lottery is a small hit in the second starting opening game times in the period, based on the second high-precision low-frequency time small hitting variation time table. decide. Further, when the jackpot type of the first starting opening game times executed as the special bonus processing is the 8R normal big hit, the period during which the first starting opening game times executed as the special bonus processing is executed. In the second starting mouth game times in, the variation time of the second starting mouth game times when the result of the winning lottery is a small hit is determined based on the third highly accurate low frequency time small hit variation time table. To do.

If such a configuration is adopted, the upper limit value of the number of times of execution of the second starting opening game times during the period in which the special bonus process is executed depends on the type of the variable time table for high-accuracy low-frequency time small hits selected. Will be different. Therefore, apart from the expectation that the special bonus process has started, it is possible to give the player an expectation about the method for setting the variation time of the second start opening game times during the special bonus process period. it can.

<<B7-19>> Modification 19:
In the above embodiment, at the start of the special bonus process, the high frequency support mode flag is changed from ON to OFF, and the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The electric accessory in the period from the time when the high-frequency support mode flag is changed from ON to the time when the operation of the electric accessory 44a operates in the operation mode of the low-frequency support mode (hereinafter, also referred to as support mode transition period) Various modes can be adopted as the mode of operation of 44a. For example, in the case of the above-described embodiment, the electric auditors product 44a performs the opening/closing operation three times in one electric role opening win in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened/closed for one electric role opening win is determined by the value of the second round counter area RC2 (see FIG. 141: electric part opening/closing process). That is, in the above embodiment, the value “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2 when the power combination opening lottery is won during the high frequency support mode.

In the case of the electric opening/closing process (FIG. 141) of the above-described embodiment, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF while the opening operation of the electric auditors product 44a is performed three times in the high frequency support mode. In this case, the opening/closing process is executed for the remaining number of times of opening/closing with the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low-frequency support mode is set. For example, if the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF at the time when the electric role opening lottery is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 44a is opened and closed once, the remaining number of releases (hereinafter, The opening operation of the electric accessory 44a for two times is executed in the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period is also referred to as a first operation mode. That is, when the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off and the remaining opening number is not “0”, the opening operation of the electric accessory 44a for the remaining opening number is set to the low-frequency support mode. It is executed in the opening time of the electric accessory 44a in the case of being performed. In this case, the operation of the electric accessory 44a is suddenly changed at the same time as or immediately after the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the electric accessory 44a has been suddenly changed recognizes that the special bonus process has started, and immediately starts right-handing.

However, not limited to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, for example, when the high frequency support mode flag is changed from ON to OFF, the remaining open count, that is, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the remaining open count is set. A configuration may be employed in which the operation of the minute electric accessory 44a is executed in the open time when the high-frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period is also referred to as a second operation mode. By doing so, even if the high-frequency support mode flag is changed from ON to OFF, the operation of the electric accessory 44a is not suddenly changed, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned on from OFF to the player. It is possible to delay the time until the player recognizes that the special bonus process is started, and as a result, the time until the player recognizes that the special bonus process is started can be delayed. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from the start of the special bonus process until the player starts the right hit. As a result, it is possible to suppress (decrease) the amount of privilege that the player can obtain by the special bonus process. Note that the amount of privilege that the player can obtain by the special bonus process is reduced, but even after the start of the special bonus process, the opening/closing process is performed for the remaining number of times of the electric accessory 44a in the open time in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the player can obtain the privilege by inserting the game ball into the first starting opening 44.

Furthermore, the configuration of the above embodiment and the configuration shown in this modification may be combined. That is, the electric accessory 44a may operate in the first operation mode or the second operation mode in the support mode transition period. For example, in the support mode transition period, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode based on the jackpot type of the first starting opening game times corresponding to the special bonus process. You may decide whether to operate. More specifically, when the jackpot type of the first start opening game times corresponding to the special bonus process is the 10R certainty variation jackpot or the 10R specific certainty variation jackpot, the electric accessory 44a in the support mode transition period, When the jackpot type of the first starting opening game time corresponding to the special bonus process is the 8R normal jackpot, the electric auditor product 44a is operated in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You may employ the structure of making it operate. In this way, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of privilege that the player can obtain during the special bonus processing period.

In addition, as the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, a different operation mode may be executed in addition to the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Then, for example, based on the jackpot type of the first starting opening game times corresponding to the special bonus process, in the support mode transition period, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode. A configuration for deciding whether to operate or to operate in another operation mode may be adopted. In this way, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of privilege that the player can obtain during the special bonus processing period. Further, it is possible to make the player who has recognized the electric accessory 44a in the support mode transition period make various inferences and give the player a sense of expectation.

<<C>> Third embodiment:
<<C1>> Structure of game machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. It should be noted that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device for controlling the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-openable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning the winning, when a reach occurs, etc. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". Further, in the following description, when the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25 and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board in front view and flows down the left side of the game board, the player calls “left side”. It may be expressed as "hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a through gate 35, a special drawing starting opening 51, a special electric starting opening 52, an ordinary electric auditors object 53, a first variable winning device 54, and a second variable winning device 55. .. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The special figure starting port 51 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The special figure starting port 51 is provided in the lower part of the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The first variable winning device 54 is provided with a first big winning opening 54a which communicates with the back side of the game board 30 and a first opening/closing door 54b which opens and closes the first big winning opening 54a. The first opening/closing door 54b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the first big winning opening 54a. When a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening/closing process of the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54. Specifically, when the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 shifts to the open/close execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined value. After the condition of is satisfied, the state transits to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first big winning opening 54a of the first variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for operating the ordinary electric accessory 53. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 carries out an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the electric role open state in which it operates in a predetermined manner. The game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 are reserved up to a maximum of four.

The ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a, a convex portion 53b arranged on the movable piece 53a, and a movable piece drive portion 53c. Hereinafter, an operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory 53. FIG. 161(a) shows the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the closed state. When the electric role opening is selected in the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the movable piece 53a is located on the front side of the game board 30 as shown in FIG. 161(b). Project toward (hereinafter also referred to as open). As shown in FIG. 161(c), the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball in entering the special electric starting port 52. Further, a convex portion 53b is arranged on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, and adjusts the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a.

The special electric starting opening 52 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The special electric starting opening 52 is provided below the special drawing starting opening 51 in the center of the game board 30. When the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the second variable winning device 55 operates in a predetermined operation pattern. The operation pattern of the second variable winning device 55 when a game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball.

The second variable winning a prize device 55 is provided with a second special winning opening 55a which communicates with the back side of the game board 30 and a second opening/closing door 55b which opens and closes the second special winning opening 55a. The second opening/closing door 55b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second special winning opening 55a. When the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the main control device 60 executes the opening/closing process of the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55. Specifically, the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55 transits from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter to an open state in which the game ball can enter and after a predetermined condition is satisfied. , And again transits to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the second special winning opening 55a of the second variable winning device 55, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a special symbol display portion 37a. The special symbol display portion 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The special symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying a special symbol. The special symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51. As the display mode until the special symbol display portion 37a causes the segment display to perform a display corresponding to the lottery result, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51 is performed, Change display or predetermined display of special symbols is performed. When the lottery is finished, the special symbol display portion 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time from the start of variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is referred to as variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is referred to as variable time.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a hold display section 37c composed of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the special symbol display section 37a.

The hold display section 37c displays the number of hold of the special figure starting port 51 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, the maximum of four game balls that have entered the special figure starting port 51 are reserved.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. . When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. Round game, until a predetermined upper limit duration elapses, or until a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the first special winning opening 54a, either one of the conditions is satisfied. , A game in which the open state of the first opening/closing door 54b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41, when the special symbol display portion 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure starting port 51, displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. To do. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51, and is in the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. The performance display of is also performed. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 162( a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), the liquid crystal display device 41 variably displays the symbols 1 to 8 as the liquid crystal symbols. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 162( b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. An image of a liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA.

In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged as the liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 162(a), in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom. Fluctuating display is performed by scrolling up or down. As shown in FIG. 162(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of the liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA is not limited to the above mode. For example, various modes of displaying liquid crystal symbols, such as the number of symbol columns in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol columns, and the number of symbols in each symbol column, can be adopted. is there.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162( b ), the hold display area Ds is displayed on the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the hold display area Ds, the number of hold based on the ball entering the special figure starting port 51 is displayed. In this embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the special figure starting port 51 is up to four.

Also, as shown in FIG. 162(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37 are performed. The synchronization display unit Sync is provided. Specifically, when the special symbol display part 37a is displaying variable, the synchronous display part Sync blinks, and when the special symbol display part 37a displays stop, the synchronous display part Sync is It lights up.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA and the synchronous display portion Sync, but the display surface 41a does not display a part or all of these displays. Good.

<<C2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various winning prizes such as a general winning a prize mouth 32, a through gate 35, a special figure starting mouth 51, a special electric starting mouth 52, a first variable winning device 54, a second variable winning device 55, etc. Various detection sensors provided at the ball opening and the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball has passed through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a first variable prize driving unit 54c for opening and closing the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 and a second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55 are opened/closed. The second variable winning a prize drive section 55c and the main display section 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the first variable winning a prize drive unit 54c so that the first opening/closing door 54b is opened/closed. In addition, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the special electric starting port 52, the drive control of the second variable winning a prize drive unit 55c is executed so that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened and closed. Furthermore, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role is opened, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the normal electric auditors product driving unit 53c so that the normal electric auditors product 53 operates (opens). Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the special symbol display section 37a in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, executes display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. ..

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the special figure starting opening 51. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 52 is specified. Is 15 when the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60 and the entry of the game ball into the first special winning opening 54a and the second special winning opening 55a is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of individual game balls is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount, A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence/absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the liquid crystal design is variably displayed are grasped. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach determination as to whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the special symbol display portion 37a of the main display portion 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A reservation area Ra is provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are reserved areas Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b. Are stored in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the updated value is stored in the hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing of the entrance. It

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is a big hit? It is determined whether or not.

In the following description, a game executed when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51 is called a game time. The game number is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the jackpot random number counter C1 as the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51. is there. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for one special information (big hit random number counter C1) for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains the special information (big hit random number counter C1) based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51, the segment is displayed in the special symbol display section 37a for each game. After the display unit is variably displayed, the segment display unit is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information (big hit random number counter C1). Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information (big hit random number counter C1) is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51, in the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game time, After the predetermined symbol sequence is variably displayed, the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is. The special information includes not only the jackpot random number counter C1 but also the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the updated value is stored in the holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. ..

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment indicator to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a by using the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 51. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to generate the reach. It is determined whether to do. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed, and the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 162(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the special symbol display portion 37a and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display is started on the special symbol display portion 37a and when the variation pattern of the symbol is started by the liquid crystal display device 41 is determined. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the special symbol display portion 37a.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release is executed in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed using the value of the counter C4 to determine whether to control the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 461, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is controlled to the open state, and if C4=462 to 465, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is maintained in the closed state.

As described above, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric auditors opening counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. To do. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the holding area Ra are also called holding information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two win/loss tables, a win/loss table for the special figure starting port (for low probability mode) and a win/loss table for the special figure starting port (for high probability mode), in the ROM 63. It is stored in the storage area 63a.

FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the special figure starting port. FIG. 165(a) shows a win/loss table (for low probability mode) for the special figure starting port, and FIG. 165(b) shows a win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the special figure starting port.

As shown in FIG. 165(a), in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the low probability mode), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165(b), 16 values 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 is opened/closed (number of rounds) in the opening/closing execution mode
(2) Mode of opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of winning lottery after completion of the opening/closing execution mode

As a mode of the opening and closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, the entry of the game ball into the first variable winning device 54 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode ( It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the frequency of occurrence of (winning) is relatively high.

In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set a jackpot that involves the execution of a specific process when the player wins. Also in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot which gives the player a bonus in addition to the bonus as the round game is set. In the present embodiment, in addition to the bonus as the round game, the bonus given to the player is also referred to as “special bonus”. Details of the special bonus will be described later.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table for the special figure starting port. The distribution table for the special figure starting port is referred to in the hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 51.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the sorting table for the special figure starting port, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the special figure starting port 51. Has been done.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot, the number of times the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is performed. It is a high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 16R probability variation jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Further, in the 16R probability variation jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode, which will be described later, is set, and the normal electric auditors product 53 is more easily opened than in the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the hit lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the number of times the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is performed. It is a high frequency winning mode. Further, in the case of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Further, in the 8R probability variation jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode described later is set, and the normal electric auditors product 53 is more easily opened than in the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 8R certainty variation jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the hit lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of times the first opening/closing door 54b of the first variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the opening/closing control mode of the first variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is It is a high frequency winning mode. Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. In addition, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set, and the normal electric accessory 53 is more easily opened than in the low-frequency support mode. However, in the case of 8R normal jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 50 times, and when the total number of times of game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 50 times. , The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the special figure starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 7" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot and "7 to 19" correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. However, “20 to 39” is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the game balls are continuously emitted to the game area PA in the same mode. In comparison, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency of the normal electric accessory 53 being opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of being a winning combination in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is different between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the normal electric auditors object 53 when the electric power combination opening win is set is set longer than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric power release is won and the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 53 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state ends after the open state ends. The closing time until the opening state of 1 is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric auditors' item open lottery after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the special electric starting port 52 is higher than in the low frequency support mode, and the game ball will easily enter the special electric starting port 52. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as a means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52.

FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/loft lottery win/loss table) that is used when executing the electric Auditor open lottery.

FIG. 167(a) shows a win/loss table (for low frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 167(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0-461 as the value of the electric accessory releasing counter C4 that is to win the electric accessory. The value is set. Four values 462 to 456 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of the range. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role is 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the low frequency support mode, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened once, and the opening time is 0.5 seconds.

FIG. 167(b) shows a win/loss table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 167(b), in the winning/disabling table for electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode), the values of the electric role releasing counter C4 for opening the electric role are 0 to 463, that is, 464 pieces. The value is set. Two values 464 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric auditors opening lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the winning combination is won with a probability of 232/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric-role opening is won in the high-frequency support mode, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened once, and the opening time is 1.0 second.

As described above, the high-frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability that the game ball will enter the special electric starting port 52 than the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory release lottery hit/miss table.

<<C3>> Flow of game:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168.

FIG. 168 is a time chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when a player executes a game. This time chart shows each state of the game times, the opening/closing execution mode flag, the opening/closing processing period flag, the high frequency support mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the first opening/closing door. The game time is executed by entering a game ball into the special figure starting port 51. The open/close execution mode flag is a flag for specifying the execution of the open/close execution mode, and is turned on when the open/close execution mode is executed and turned off when the open/close execution mode is ended. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned on when the opening/closing execution mode is started and the opening/closing processing is actually performed on the first opening/closing door 54b in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and is turned off when the opening/closing processing is completed. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, and turned off when the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode flag is turned on when the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode, and turned off when the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. The first opening/closing door 54b is subjected to opening/closing processing during the round game.

When the player starts the game, he/she operates the operation handle 25 to shoot a game ball on the game board 30 and insert the game ball into the special figure starting port 51. When a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the pachinko machine 10 executes a game time. The illustrated game times U1 and U2 indicate the game times that are “missed” in the winning lottery. The game number U3 started from the time T1 indicates the game number that was won in the winning lottery. In the game time U3, after the reach effect is executed, the player is informed that the jackpot is won as the lottery result of the winning lottery. In the example shown in FIG. 168, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is won in the game game U3.

At the time T2, when the game time U3 that wins the 8R probability variation jackpot ends, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned from OFF to ON. That is, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time U3 that is won in the winning lottery.

The opening/closing execution mode is started at time T2, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned on from time T3, and the opening/closing processing of the first opening/closing door 54b is executed. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the opening/closing processing period, that is, the period until the opening/closing door of the first variable winning device 54 actually opens/closes is referred to as the opening period. Call. That is, the opening period is from time T2 to time T3. During the opening period, an effect (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening effect) is executed. In the present embodiment, as the opening effect, an effect that indicates that a round game in which the first opening/closing door 54b is opened/closed is started is executed. After the end of the opening period, from time T3, a round game for opening and closing the first opening/closing door 54b is started, the first opening/closing door 54b opens and closes, and the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 54a. It becomes a state. When the round game is executed, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first opening/closing door 54b to obtain the prize ball. That is, the round game is positioned as a privilege due to winning the jackpot.

After that, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and the round game ends. After the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned off at time T4. In the present embodiment, a period from when the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off to when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned off is called an ending period. During the ending period, effects (hereinafter, also referred to as ending effects) are executed. In the present embodiment, an effect that suggests that the opening/closing execution mode ends is executed as the ending effect.

In the winning lottery in the game game U3, since the 8R probability variation big hit is won, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON and the high probability mode flag is turned ON from the time T4. That is, the lottery mode for the game times executed from time T4 is the high-probability mode. In the present example, as shown in the figure, after the time T4, a plurality of game times that are “out” in the winning lottery are executed (game times U4 to U7), and then from time T5, the winning winning game is won. U8 is executed. In this example, in the winning lottery in the game game U8, the 8R probability variation big hit is won.

At the time T6, when the game cycle U8 that wins the 8R probability variation jackpot ends, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned from OFF to ON. That is, the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game time U8 that is won in the winning lottery. Further, at time T6, the high frequency support mode flag is changed from ON to OFF. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag does not switch from ON to OFF at time T6. That is, from time T6, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. The state of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode is also referred to as a latent probability variation state because it is difficult for the high-probability mode to be recognized from the outside. Then, the high probability mode flag is changed from ON to OFF at time T7 when the opening/closing processing period flag is changed from OFF to ON. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, there is a case where the latent state changes to the latent probability change state during the opening period, more specifically, during the period from the end of the game time when the jackpot is reached to the start of the round game. is there. In the present embodiment, the latent probability variation state is shifted to a jackpot in a state where there is a high probability mode, and the opening period is started after the game time (game time U8 in this example) that wins the jackpot ends. This is the case. As shown at the bottom of FIG. 168, in the present embodiment, the opening period that is the latent latent change state is also referred to as “specific period”. Moreover, a period other than the specific period is also referred to as a “non-specific period”. In this embodiment, a specific process (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific process) is executed in a specific period. Details of the specific processing executed in the specific period will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "non-specific period" is used to include both the opening period that is not in the latent latency change state and the period other than the opening period, but the "non-specific period" is the latent period of the opening period. It may be used as meaning only the opening period that is not in the probable state.

From time T7, the high-probability mode flag changes from ON to OFF, so the latent probability variation state ends. Then, from time T7, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned from OFF to ON, and the round game in which the first opening/closing door 54b performs the opening/closing operation is started.

After the end of the round game, the high frequency support mode is changed from OFF to ON from time T8, the high probability mode flag is also changed from OFF to ON, and a new game time (game time U9 or game time U10) is started.

Next, the specific processing executed in the specific period will be described. First, the process in the non-specific period will be described as a comparative example, and then the process in the specific period will be described.

FIG. 169 is a time chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the non-specific period. In this time chart, the high frequency support mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the presence or absence of passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53, the presence or absence of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52, The opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b has been described.

In the present description, as shown in the figure, the process in the case where the high-probability mode flag is ON and the high-frequency support mode flag is ON, that is, the process in the non-specific period in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is described. To do.

When a game ball enters the through gate 35 at time T11, the main controller 60 executes an electric role releasing lottery. When the player wins in the electric role open lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 operates (opens) at time T12 2.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, and the open state is maintained for 1.0 second. It maintains and assists the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52. In the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment opens the normal electric auditors object 53 for 1.0 second 2.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35. In the case of the low frequency support mode, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened for 0.5 seconds after 3.0 seconds from the game ball entering the through gate 35.

At time T12, the normal electric auditors object 53 is opened, and the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 easily at the special electric starting opening 52. When the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 at time T13, the special electric starting opening 52 gaming ball. The second opening/closing door 55b is opened at time T17, which is 10 seconds after the entry. The second opening/closing door 55b is closed on condition that 5 seconds have elapsed or one game ball has entered the second special winning opening 55a. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the second big winning opening 55a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the entry of game balls is not reserved in the special electric starting port 52. That is, a game ball newly enters the special electric starting port 52 after the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 until the opening operation of the second opening/closing door 55b is completed by the entrance of the game ball. However, the opening operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of the game ball is not executed. It should be noted that one game ball is paid out as a prize ball due to the game ball entering the special electric starting opening 52.

Next, the specific processing executed in the specific period will be described.

FIG. 170 is a time chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the specific period. As described above, the latent probability change state is in the specific period. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the high frequency support mode flag is OFF and the high probability mode flag is ON. The specific period described in this example corresponds to the period from time T6 to time T7 in FIG. 168. In other words, the opening/closing processing period (the period during which the round game is executed) starts when the opening/closing execution mode is started after the winning lottery is won in the high-probability mode and the game times of the jackpot are completed. It is a period until it is done.

When the game ball enters the through gate 35 at the time T21 of the specific period, the main controller 60 executes the electric winning combination lottery. When the player wins in the electric role open lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 operates (opens) at time T22 3.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, and the open state is maintained for 0.5 seconds. It maintains and assists the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52. Since the latent period is a certainty change state and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode for the specific period, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is 0.5 after 3.0 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35 as described above. Open for seconds.

At time T22, the normal electric auditors object 53 is opened, and the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 easily, and when the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 at time T23, the game to the special electric starting port 52 is started. The second opening/closing door 55b is opened at time T24, which is 0.5 seconds after the ball enters. In a non-specific period which is a comparative example of FIG. 169, the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 10 seconds after the game ball enters the special electric power starting port 52, whereas in the specific period, the special electric power starting port 52 is opened. The second opening/closing door 55b is opened 0.5 seconds after entering the game ball. In the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the major difference between the processing of the non-specific period and the processing of the specific period is the time from the game ball of the special electric starting port 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b is opened.

In the specific period, the second opening/closing door 55b is opened at time T24 which is 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, so the special electric starting port 52 suspends the entering of the game ball. Even if it does not, the opening and closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the previous special electric starting opening 52 is completed when the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 next time. There is a high possibility that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened by the entry of the game ball into the next special electric starting opening 52. That is, in the specific period, the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b is performed more frequently per unit time than in the non-specific period, and the player has a game ball as a prize ball more than in the non-specific period. Many are paid out. The payout of the game balls to the player by the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b in this specific period is positioned as a privilege due to winning the jackpot.

In the specific period, the process in which the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 is the specific process, and the special bonus given to the player in the specific period is a special bonus. Also called. As the time length of the specific period is longer, it is more likely that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened when the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 as a trigger, and as a result, it is given to the player. The amount of special bonuses given will also increase. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the length of the specific period is set for each jackpot type in the game times in which the jackpot just before the start of the specific period is started, and the length of each set specific period is different. different. In the present embodiment, the specific period is 20 seconds when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won in the game times when the jackpot is won immediately before the start of the specific period, and the specific period is 30 seconds when the 8R probability variation jackpot is won. When the 8R normal jackpot is won, the specific period is 40 seconds. That is, the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player has a shorter specific period. In other words, the jackpot type that is not advantageous to the player has a longer specific period, and the amount of the special bonus that the player can obtain during the specific period is likely to increase. By setting the length of the specific period in this way, when the winning lottery is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of which jackpot type.

As a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the length of the specific period is set to be constant regardless of the type of jackpot, or the length of the specific period is set depending on whether the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a regular jackpot. May be adopted.

The main control device 60 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment controls the time from the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 52 to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b, that is, whether it is a specific period, that is, , The latent probability change state is determined. More specifically, based on the state of the high-probability mode flag and the state of the high-frequency support mode flag, control of the time from entering the game ball into the special electric starting port 52 until opening the second opening/closing door 55b It is carried out.

In this way, when the jackpot is won, in addition to executing the round game as a privilege, by giving a special bonus as a privilege in the opening period before the round game, the player is in the high probability mode state. It is possible to give more expectation to the jackpot winning in time.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the opening period, during the specific period in which the latent probability changes, a special-purpose effect (also referred to as a special bonus effect) is executed. Therefore, a feeling of superiority can be given to the player during the period when the special bonus is given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<C4>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sc0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sc0102.

In step Sc0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sc0103.

In step Sc0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sc0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 178) described later.

In step Sc0104, a ball entering process for the special figure starting port associated with entering the special figure starting port 51 is executed. Details of the ball entering process for the special figure starting port in step Sc0104 will be described later. After executing Step Sc0104, the process proceeds to Step Sc0105.

In step Sc0105, a through-ball entry process accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through ball entering process in step Sc0105 will be described later. After executing Step Sc0105, the process proceeds to Step Sc0106.

In step Sc0106, a ball entry process for the special electric starting port is executed. Details of the ball entry process for the special electric power starting port in step Sc0106 will be described later. After executing Step Sc0106, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, a ball entry process for the special figure starting port will be described. The entrance process for the special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 171: Sc0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a ball entering process for the special figure starting port. In step Sc0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the special figure starting port 51 (start winning) by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special figure starting port 51. When it is determined in step Sc0201 that the game ball has entered the special map starting port 51 (Sc0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0202, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sc0203. On the other hand, in step Sc0201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the special figure starting port 51 (Sc0201: NO), the ball entering process for the special figure starting port is ended as it is.

In step Sc0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the special figure starting port 51. Then, it progresses to step Sc0204.

In step Sc0204, it is determined whether or not the startup hold number RaN, which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Sc0204, when the start pending number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (Sc0204: NO), the ball entering process for the special figure starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sc0204, when the start pending number RaN is less than the upper limit value (Sc0204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0205, 1 is added to the start pending number RaN, and then the process proceeds to step Sc0206.

In step Sc0206, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 178) updated in step Sc0103 (FIG. 171) are set as follows. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings obtained by adding 1 in step Sc0205. After executing Step Sc0206, the process proceeds to Step Sc0207.

In step Sc0207, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS (held information), the jackpot selection result (lottery result), and the jackpot. It is a process of determining the type, presence/absence of reach, variation time of game times, and the like before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sc0207, the process proceeds to Step Sc0208.

In step Sc0208, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. ) As a hold command.

The on-hold command is a main control for the on-hold information indicating that a ball has entered the special figure starting port 51 and the result of the on-going determination process based on the on-hold information acquired based on the on-ball. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm before being subject to the winning lottery by the device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of a normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the special figure starting port 51, the display in the hold display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 is increased to the hold number. A command for making it correspond and changing is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the hold display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold.

After executing Step Sc0208, the main MPU 62 finishes the ball entry process for the special figure starting port.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 172: Sc0207) of the ball entry process for the special figure starting port.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, and the hold information is mainly used for determining whether or not the winning lottery is hit, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether a reach has occurred, determining the variation time of the game times, etc. This is a process to be executed before being subject to the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sc0301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step Sc0301, the process proceeds to Step Sc0302.

In step Sc0302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. The process is a process of determining the variation time of the game times. The details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sc0302, the present destination determination processing ends.

<Big hit/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 173: Sc0301) of the destination determination processing.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. In step Sc0401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the special figure starting port 51 in the special figure starting port entering process (FIG. 172) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0402, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and the winning lottery is executed before the winning lottery by the current ball. By determining the lottery result, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by entering this time is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sc0402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sc0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0403, and the win/loss table storage The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sc0405, and as a result of referring to the winning/discarding table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sc0402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time (Sc0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0404, and the high-probability mode. As a result of referring to the hit/miss table for use, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, proceeding to step Sc0405, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode.

When it is determined in step Sc0405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sc0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0406, and is stored by entering the special figure starting port 51 this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the area is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc0407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, the jackpot type counter stored in the storage area by the ball entering the special figure starting port 51 this time by referring to the special figure starting port sorting table and collating with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type corresponding to C2 is specified. After executing Step Sc0407, the process proceeds to Step Sc0408.

In step Sc0408, the jackpot type specified as a result of referring to the distribution table is stored as jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sc0405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sc0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0409, and the special figure starting port 51 is entered. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the sphere is read. After that, the process advances to step Sc0410 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step Sc0411, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sc0411 that the occurrence of reach is supported (Sc0411: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0412 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0411 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sc0411: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 173: Sc0302) of the previous determination process.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step Sc0501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the special figure starting opening in the special figure starting opening entering process (FIG. 172) is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sc0502.

In Step Sc0502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, the presence/absence of a big hit is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the big hit/reach information acquisition processing, and if the big hit (Sc0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0503.

In step Sc0503, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step Sc0503, the process proceeds to Step Sc0507.

In step Sc0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc0502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (step Sc0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0504 and it is determined whether a reach occurs. When it is determined in step Sc0504 that a reach occurs (Sc0504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0505.

In step Sc0505, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. Then, the process proceeds to step Sc0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc0504 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (step Sc0504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0506, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is displayed. By referring to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step Sc0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition processing is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the value of the start pending number RaN increases. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to differs depending on the value of the start pending number RaN when determining the fluctuation time of the game time.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the value of the start pending number RaN increases. The configuration is not limited, and for example, the configuration may be independent of the number of starting suspension numbers RaN, and the variation time may be set to be shorter as the number of starting suspension numbers RaN is smaller.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 171: step Sc0105).

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sc0601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sc0601 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sc0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0602 and whether the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sc0601: NO), the entry process for this through is ended.

In step Sc0602, when it is determined that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sc0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0603, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sc0604.

In step Sc0604, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sc0103 (FIG. 171) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc0602 that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sc0602: NO), that is, if the value of the accessory holding number SN is the upper limit value, the electric The through-ball entry process is terminated without storing the value of the accessory release counter C4.

<Entering ball for special electric starting port>
Next, a ball entry process for the special electric starting port will be described. The incoming ball process for the special electric starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 171: step Sc0106).

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a ball entering process for the special electric power starting port. In step Sc0701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the special electric power starting port 52 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special electric power starting port 52.

When it is determined in step Sc0701 that the game ball has entered the special electric starting opening 52 (Sc0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0702, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set. Then, it progresses to step Sc0703. On the other hand, in step Sc0701, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the special electric starting port 52 (Sc0701: NO), the special ball starting process for the special electric starting port is ended.

In Step Sc0703, it is determined whether the special power operation flag is ON. The special electric operation flag is turned on when a game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52, and the second opening/closing door 55b of the second variable winning device 55 triggered by the game ball entering the special electric starting opening 52. This flag is turned off when the opening/closing operation of is finished. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game to the next special electric power starting opening 52 is performed in a state where the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 52 is not completed. A special electric operation flag is provided in order to prevent the opening/closing operation of the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the entry of a ball.

When it is determined in step Sc0703 that the special electric operation flag is not ON (Sc0703: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0704. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0703 that the special electric operation flag is ON (Sc0703: YES), the special electric starting opening ball entering process is ended as it is.

In step Sc0704, the special power operation flag is turned ON. After executing Step Sc0704, the process proceeds to Step Sc0705.

In step Sc0705, the special electric starting entrance command is set. The special electric starting opening entrance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of a normal process described later. When the sound emission control device 90 receives the special electric starting opening ball entering command, the sound emitting control device 90 executes an effect of notifying the player that the game ball has entered the special electric starting opening 52.

After executing Step Sc0705, the ball entry process for the special electric starting port is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sc0801, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sc0802.

In step Sc0802, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sc0803.

In step Sc0803, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sc0802 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sc0803, the process proceeds to Step Sc0804.

In step Sc0804, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sc0805.

In step Sc0805, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sc0806. In Step Sc0806, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the special symbol display portion 37a and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sc0806, the process proceeds to Step Sc0807.

In step Sc0807, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sc0808.

In step Sc0808, electric power supporting process for driving and controlling the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. In the power combination support process, it is determined whether or not the movable piece 53a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sc0809.

In Step Sc0809, the second special winning opening process is executed. The second special winning opening process is a process for opening and closing the second opening/closing door 55b triggered by the game ball entering the special electric starting opening 52. The details of the second special winning opening process will be described later. After executing Step Sc0809, the process proceeds to Step Sc0810.

In step Sc0810, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sc0803). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sc0810 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sc0810: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sc0811 and Sc08812. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sc0811, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In addition, in step Sc0812, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0810 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sc0810: YES), the process returns to step Sc0803, and each processing from step Sc0803 to step Sc0809 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of steps Sc0803 to Sc0809 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0806).

FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In step Sc0901, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open/close execution mode and turned off at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sc0901 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sc0901: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, and this game time control is performed without executing any of the processing of step Sc0902 and thereafter. The process ends. That is, in the open/close execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the special figure starting port 51. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc0901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sc0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0902.

In step Sc0902, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol display portion 37a is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variation display flag of the variation display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the special symbol display portion 37a, and turned off when the variable display ends.

In step Sc0902, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (Sc0902: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps Sc0903 to Sc0905. In Step Sc0903, it is determined whether or not the number RaN of starting suspensions is “0”. The case where the start pending number RaN is “0” means that the reserved number for the special figure starting port 51 is “0”. Therefore, in step Sc0903, when it is determined that the start pending number RaN is “0” (Sc0903: YES), this game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sc0903, when it is determined that the startup hold number RaN is not “0” (Sc0903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0904.

In step Sc0904, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area Ra to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sc0905. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sc0905, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing Step Sc0905, the present game time control processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc0902 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (Sc0902: YES), the process for advancing game times in steps Sc0906 to Sc0915 is executed.

In Step Sc0906, it is determined whether or not the variation time of this game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sc0906, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 182) described later. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step Sc0906 that the variation time has not elapsed (Sc0906: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0907 and the variation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing Step Sc0907, the game number control process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc0906 that the variation time has elapsed (Sc0906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0908 and variation end processing is executed. The variation end process is performed by changing the symbol display part so that the symbol display part determined in the variation start process (FIG. 181) described later and displayed in the symbol display part is displayed in the symbol display part related to the current game time. Display control. After executing Step Sc0908, the process proceeds to Step Sc0909.

In Step Sc0909, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag) is ON. In step Sc0909, when any of the big hit flags is ON (Sc0909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0910.

In step Sc0910, the opening/closing execution flag is turned on. Then, this game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sc0909, when none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sc0909: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc0911.

In step Sc0911, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing Step Sc0911, the process proceeds to Step Sc0912.

In Step Sc0912, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc0912 that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (Sc0912: NO), the game number control process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sc0912 that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode (Sc0912: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0913, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter PNC is zero.

When it is determined in step Sc0913 that the value of the game number counter PNC is not 0 (Sc0913: NO), the game number control process is ended as it is. When it is determined in step Sc0913 that the value of the game number counter PNC is 0 (Sc0913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc0914, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sc0915 and sets a low frequency support mode command. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low frequency support mode command, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the support mode has transitioned from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low frequency support mode. After executing Step Sc0915, the game number control process is ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 179: Sc0904).

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Sc1001, the start reserve quantity RaN of the first reserve area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sc1002.

In step Sc1002, the data stored in the first area of the holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sc1003.

In step Sc1003, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sc1003, the process proceeds to Step Sc1004.

In step Sc1004, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted.

The shift command set in step Sc1004 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the hold display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received shift command. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the hold display area Ds of the symbol display device 41 so as to correspond to the decrease in the hold number. After executing step Sc1004, the data setting process ends.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control processing (FIG. 179: Sc0905).

FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sc1101, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag of the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When it is determined in step Sc1101 that the high probability mode is set (Sc1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1102.

In step Sc1102, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table (for high probability mode) for the special figure starting port shown in FIG. 165(b). Then, it progresses to step Sc1104. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1101 that the high probability mode is not set (Sc1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1103.

In step Sc1103, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table (for the low probability mode) for the special figure starting port shown in FIG. 165(a). It is determined whether or not the value matches. Then, it progresses to step Sc1104.

In step Sc1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is a big win. In step Sc1104, if the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sc1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1105.

In step Sc1105, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the special figure starting port (FIG. 166). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. To do. After executing step Sc1105, the process proceeds to step Sc1106.

In step Sc1106, the corresponding jackpot stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, this is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where any stop result is displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a in the current game time when the jackpot is won. Specifically, by referring to the jackpot stop result table stored in the jackpot result table storage area 63e, the address information of the jackpot result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sc1105 is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sc1106, the process proceeds to step Sc1107.

In step Sc1107, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Sc1105 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, turn on the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, turn on the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag if it is 8R certainty variation jackpot, and turn on the 8R regular jackpot flag if it is 8R regular jackpot. Turn it on. Then, it progresses to step Sc1110.

On the other hand, in step Sc1104, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sc1102 or step Sc1103 is not a big hit (Sc1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1108, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the game time. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether you are doing.

When it is determined in step Sc1108 that the reach occurs in the game time (Sc1108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1109.

In step Sc1109, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. This is a process for setting whether to end the variable display in the state where any of the stop results is displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a in the current game time which is the stop result for the reach. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sc1109, the process proceeds to Step Sc1111.

When it is determined in step Sc1108 that the reach does not occur in the game time (Sc1108: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1110.

In step Sc1110, a stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. The stop result setting process for disengagement is a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the state where any stop result is displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a in the current game time that is the disengagement result. .. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-range in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sc1110, the process proceeds to Step Sc1111.

In step Sc1111, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is a process for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the special symbol display portion 37a, based on the presence or absence of a big hit and the presence or absence of a reach. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sc1110, the process proceeds to step Sc1112.

In step Sc1112, the variation command is set. The variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the special figure starting port 51, and whether or not the reach has occurred. The information and the information on the variation time set in step Sc1111 are included. After executing step Sc1112, the process proceeds to step Sc1113.

In step Sc1113, the type command is set. The type command includes the presence/absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence/absence of a reach occurrence. That is, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, and information on the result of loss. ..

The variation command and the type command set in steps Sc1112 and Sc1113 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Sc1113, the process proceeds to Step Sc1114.

In step Sc1114, the special symbol display portion 37a is caused to start variable display of symbols. After executing Step Sc1114, the present fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 181: Sc1111).

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step Sc1201, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sc1202.

In Step Sc1202, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag) of the RAM 64 is ON, and when any of the flags is ON. (Sc1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1203.

In step Sc1203, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1207, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc1202 that the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Sc1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1204, and it is determined whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. In step Sc1202, since the present process (Sc1204) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit, in step Sc1204, the reach among the game times which are not a big hit in the winning lottery is reached. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Sc1204: YES), and the process proceeds to Step Sc1205. When the presence/absence of reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sc1205, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc1207, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc1204 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Sc1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1206, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sc1207, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the value of the start pending number RaN increases. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to differs depending on the value of the start pending number RaN when determining the fluctuation time of the game time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the value of the start pending number RaN increases. The configuration is not limited, and for example, the configuration may be independent of the number of starting suspension numbers RaN, and the variation time may be set to be shorter as the number of starting suspension numbers RaN is smaller.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0807).

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sc1301, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sc1301 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sc1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1302, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc1302 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sc1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1303, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step Sc1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sc1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1304, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When it is determined in step Sc1304 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sc1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1305. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1304 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sc1304: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sc1305, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the support mode in execution of the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step Sc1305, the process proceeds to Step Sc1306.

In step Sc1306, a low frequency support mode command is set. The low-frequency support mode command is a command that notifies the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode has transitioned to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step Sc1306, the process proceeds to Step Sc1307.

In step Sc1307, the open/close execution mode command is set. The opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode is started when the jackpot is won. The open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803). After executing Step Sc1307, the process proceeds to Step Sc1308.

In step Sc1308, a first special winning opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the first opening/closing door 54b in the round game is set. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the opening/closing pattern in which the first opening/closing door 54b performs the opening/closing operation 16 times is set. When the 8R probability variation jackpot is won and when the 8R regular jackpot is won, an opening/closing pattern is set in which the first opening/closing door 54b opens/closes eight times. After executing Step Sc1308, the process proceeds to Step Sc1309.

In step Sc1309, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the set opening time is determined based on the type of jackpot. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sc1309, the process proceeds to Step Sc1310.

In step Sc1310, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). This opening command includes information about the jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time, such as information on the set opening time and jackpot type information. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sc1310, the process proceeds to step Sc1311 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1303 that the opening period flag is ON (Sc1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1312.

In step Sc1312, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sc1312 that the opening period has ended (Sc1312: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sc1313 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sc1314. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1312 that the opening period has not ended, then the game state transition processing ends.

In step Sc1314, round display start processing for notifying the type of the opening/closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing Step Sc1314, the process proceeds to Step Sc1315.

In step Sc1315, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sc1316.

In step Sc1316, the high probability mode flag is turned off. As described with reference to FIG. 168, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag are ON in the jackpot winning game times that triggers execution of the opening/closing execution mode. To turn off the high-frequency support mode flag, the high-probability mode flag is turned off after the timing of turning the high-frequency support mode flag off. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF in step Sc1305 at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, but the high-probability mode flag is turned ON in step Sc1316 after it is determined that the opening period has ended in step Sc1312. To OFF. In the present embodiment, by performing such processing, the opening period is changed to the latent probability variation state and is set as the specific period. After executing step Sc1316, the present game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sc1302 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sc1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1317 to execute the first special winning opening/closing process. The first big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sc1317, the process proceeds to Step Sc1318.

In Step Sc1318, it is determined whether or not the first special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. When it is determined that the first special winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sc1318: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sc1319. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1318 that the first special winning opening opening/closing process is not completed (Sc1318: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sc1319, the opening/closing process period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sc1320.

In step Sc1320, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step Sc1320, the process proceeds to Step Sc1321.

In step Sc1321, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). Specifically, a timer counter for counting the ending time is set to a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment). After executing Step Sc1321, the process proceeds to Step Sc1322.

In step Sc1322, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 184). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sc1322, the process proceeds to Step Sc1323.

In step Sc1323, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sc1301 that the ending period flag is ON (Sc1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1324.

In step Sc1324, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sc1321), it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sc1324 that the value of the timer counter set as the ending time is “0” (Sc1324: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1325.

In step Sc1325, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sc1326, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step Sc1326, the process proceeds to Step Sc1327, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sc1328 to set the open/close execution mode end command. The open/close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the open/close execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, in step Sc1324, when it is determined that the value of the timer counter set as the ending time is not “0” (Sc1324: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: Sc1309) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step Sc1401, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. At the timing of executing this process, the high frequency support mode flag is already turned off in step Sc1305, and the low frequency support mode is set. Therefore, step Sc1401 determines whether the opening period of the open/close execution mode to be executed is the low frequency support mode and high probability mode or the low frequency support mode and low probability mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not the latent probability change state is present.

When it is determined in step Sc1401 that the high-probability mode flag is ON, that is, the latent probability variation state is set (Sc1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1402.

In step Sc1402, the opening time for the special bonus is set according to the jackpot type. As described above, in this embodiment, the opening period in which the latent latency is changed is a specific period, and the process of giving the player a special bonus is executed. Therefore, the opening time for the special bonus is set. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is won in the game times when the jackpot is won just before the start of the certain period, the opening time (the specific period) is 20 seconds, and the 8R certainty variation jackpot is won. In the case of doing, the opening time is 30 seconds, and in the case of winning the 8R normal jackpot, the opening time is 40 seconds. That is, the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player has a shorter specific period. In other words, the jackpot type that is not advantageous to the player has a longer specific period, and the amount of the special bonus that the player can obtain during the specific period is likely to increase. By setting the length of the specific period in this way, when the winning lottery is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of which jackpot type.

After executing Step Sc1402, the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1401 that the high-probability mode flag is not ON, that is, the latent probability variation state is not set (Sc1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1403.

In step Sc1403, the opening time for the non-special bonus is set. In the present embodiment, the opening time set in the opening period in which no special bonus is given is constant regardless of the type of jackpot and is 20 seconds. That is, the opening time is 20 seconds in the case of winning the 16R certainty variation jackpot, winning the 8R certainty variation jackpot, and winning the 8R regular jackpot in the game times immediately before the start of the opening period. After executing Step Sc1403, the opening time setting process ends.

<First prize opening/closing processing>
Next, the first special winning opening/closing process will be described. The first special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: Sc1317) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sc1501, it is determined whether the first opening/closing door 54b is open. When it is determined in step Sc1501 that the first opening/closing door 54b is not open (Sc1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1502.

In step Sc1502, it is determined whether or not the set opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, by counting the number of rounds to be executed, by counting with a timer counter whether or not the time for maintaining the closed state of the first opening/closing door 54b has elapsed and the timing for opening has been reached in the running round, , It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the first opening/closing door 54b to the open state is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sc1502 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sc1502: NO), the first big winning opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1502 that the opening condition of the open/close scenario is satisfied (Sc1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1503.

In step Sc1503, the first opening/closing door 54b is opened. After executing Step Sc1503, the process proceeds to Step Sc1504.

In step Sc1504, the first opening/closing door opening command is set. The first opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803). The voice light emitting device that has received the first opening/closing door opening command executes the setting for executing the effect for opening the first opening/closing door. After that, the first big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1501 that the first opening/closing door 54b is not open (Sc1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1505.

In step Sc1505, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the first opening/closing door 54b is satisfied. As for the closing condition of the first opening/closing door 54b, either one of "7 gaming balls entered the first big winning opening 54a in the opened state" or "10 seconds elapsed in the opened state" is established. It is to be. When it is determined in step Sc1505 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sc1505: NO), the first special winning opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1505 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sc1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1506.

In step Sc1506, the first opening/closing door 54b is closed. After executing step Sc1506, the process proceeds to step Sc1507.

In step Sc1507, the first opening/closing door closing command is set. The first opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803). The voice light emitting device that has received the first opening/closing door closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the first opening/closing door. After that, the first big winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 183: Sc1326) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In Step Sc1601, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the probability variation jackpot. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot flag (16R probability variation jackpot flag or 8R probability variation jackpot flag in this embodiment) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is given. Judgment is a certainty jackpot.

When it is determined in step Sc1601 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the probability variation jackpot (Sc1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1602. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1601 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the probability variation jackpot (Sc1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1607.

In step Sc1602, the corresponding probability variation jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, of the 16R probability variable jackpot flags and the 8R probability variable jackpot flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing Step Sc1602, the process proceeds to Step Sc1603.

In step Sc1603, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. After executing Step Sc1603, the process proceeds to Step Sc1604.

In step Sc1604, the high-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The high-probability mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-probability mode. After executing Step Sc1604, the process proceeds to Step Sc1605.

In step Sc1605, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sc1606 and sets a high frequency support mode command. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). After that, the transition process at the end of the present ending period ends.

When it is determined in step Sc1601 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability variation jackpot (Sc1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1607, and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned off. After executing step Sc1607, the process proceeds to step Sc1608.

In step Sc1608, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing Step Sc1608, the process proceeds to Step Sc1609.

In step Sc1609, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sc1610 and sets 50 as a counter value to the game number counter PNC. After executing Step Sc1610, the process proceeds to Step Sc1611.

In step Sc1611, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sc0803 in the normal process (FIG. 178). After that, the transition process at the end of the present ending period ends.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0808).

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sc1701, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened, and turned off when it is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sc1701 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sc1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1702.

In step Sc1702, it is determined whether or not the support win flag of each jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sc1702 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sc1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1703.

In step Sc1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sc1703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc1703: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sc1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1704.

In step Sc1704, it is determined whether it is the end timing of variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sc1704 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sc1704: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sc1705 to set the off display, and then the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sc1704: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1706.

In step Sc1706, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0”. When it is determined in step Sc1706 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is “0” (Sc1706: NO), the processing for supporting the electric power combination is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1706 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (Sc1706: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1707.

In step Sc1707, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then, in step Sc1708, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sc1707 (Sc1707: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Sc1708 (Sc1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1709 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 463, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Winning (see FIG. 167(b)). Also, "1000" (that is, 2.0 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sc1710.

In step Sc1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sc1709 is support win. If it is determined in step Sc1710 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sc1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1711 to turn on the support winning flag. After executing Step Sc1711, the process proceeds to Step Sc1712.

In step Sc1712, a high-frequency support mode power combination opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric auditors product 53 when the electric auditors product opening lottery is won in the high frequency support mode is set. Specifically, if the player wins the electric accessory open lottery during the high-frequency support mode, the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is set to be performed once, and the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is set. It is set as an opening/closing pattern that the normal electric auditors object 53 is closed on the condition that one second elapses in the open state of 53 or one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52. Note that after executing Step Sc1712, the power combination support process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sc1707 that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (Sc1707: YES), or if it is determined in step Sc1708 that the high-frequency support mode is not in effect (Sc1708: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sc1713.

In step Sc1713, an electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Winning (see FIG. 167(a)). Also, "1500" (that is, 3.0 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sc1714.

In step Sc1714, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sc1713 is support win. If it is determined in step Sc1714 that the support is not won (Sc1714: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1714 that the support is won (Sc1714: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1715, and the support winning flag is turned on. After executing Step Sc1715, the process proceeds to Step Sc1716.

In step Sc1716, a low-frequency support mode electric power combination opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric auditors product 53 is set when the electric auditors product opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, when the player wins the electric accessory release lottery during the low frequency support mode, if the winning is selected, the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be performed once, and the normal electric accessory is also set. It is set as an opening/closing pattern that the normal electric auditors object 53 is closed on the condition that 0.5 seconds elapses in the open state of 53 or that one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52. Note that after executing Step Sc1716, the power combination support process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc1702 that the support winning flag is ON (Sc1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1717, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Sc1717 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sc1717: NO), the pattern is being displayed in the universal figure unit 38 in a variable display, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1717 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sc1717: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1718.

In step Sc1718, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sc1719 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc1701 that the in-support flag is ON (Sc1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1720, and an electric-role combination opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the ordinary electric auditors product 53 is executed. Details of the power combination opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sc1720, the process proceeds to Step Sc1721.

In Step Sc1721, it is determined whether or not the power combination opening/closing process has been completed. If it is determined in step Sc1721 that the electric power combination opening/closing process has not been completed (Sc1721: NO), the electric power combination support process is directly terminated. If it is determined in step Sc1721 that the power combination opening/closing process has been completed (Sc1721: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1722 and the in-support flag is turned off. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

<Opening/closing electric power>
Next, the power combination opening/closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 187: Sc1720) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process. In step Sc1801, it is determined whether or not the normal electric auditors product 53 is open. When it is determined in step Sc1801 that the ordinary electric auditors' prize 53 is not open (Sc1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1802.

In step Sc1802, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening/closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened in the case of winning one electric role releasing lottery is counted, and the time for maintaining the closed state of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 elapses to reach the timing of opening. It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the ordinary electric accessory 53 to the open state is satisfied by counting whether or not it is done by the timer counter. When it is determined in step Sc1802 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sc1802: NO), the electric-role combination opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1802 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sc1802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1803.

In step Sc1803, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. After executing Step Sc1803, the process proceeds to Step Sc1804.

In step Sc1804, a power combination release command is set. The power combination release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803). The voice light emitting device that has received the electric role releasing command executes the setting for executing the effect for releasing the electric role. After that, the electric part opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc1801 that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is not open (Sc1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1805.

In step Sc1805, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the ordinary electric auditors' prize 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the normal electric auditors product 53 in the high-frequency support mode is that "one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 while the normal electric auditors product 53 is open" or "open." Either one of "1 second has elapsed in the state" is established. In the low frequency support mode, the closing condition of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is "one gaming ball entered the special electric starting opening 52 while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened" or "0.5 in the opened state". Either of the two seconds has elapsed" is established. When it is determined in step Sc1805 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sc1805: NO), the electric-role combination opening/closing process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc1805 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sc1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1806.

In step Sc1806, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed. After executing Step Sc1806, the process proceeds to Step Sc1807.

In step Sc1807, a power combination closing command is set. The electric-role close command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The voice light-emitting device that has received the electric role closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the electric role. After that, the electric part opening/closing process is ended.

<Processing for the 2nd prize winning opening>
Next, the process for the second special winning opening will be described. The second special winning opening process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 178: Sc0809).

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing processing for the second special winning opening. In Step Sc1901, it is determined whether or not the special power operation flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc1901 that the special power operation flag is ON (Sc1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1902. When it is determined in step Sc1901 that the special power operation flag is not ON (Sc1901: NO), the second special winning opening process is ended as it is.

In step Sc1902, it is determined whether the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is ON. The opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is turned ON when the opening/closing scenario for the second special winning opening is set, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing operation of the second special winning opening 55a according to the set opening/closing scenario is completed. It is a flag. When it is determined in step Sc1902 that the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is not ON (Sc1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc1903.

In step Sc1903, the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second winning opening is executed. The details of the second prize opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sc1903, the process proceeds to Step Sc1904.

If it is determined in step Sc1902 that the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is ON (Sc1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1904 without executing step Sc1903.

In Step Sc1904, a second special winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The details of the second special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sc1904, the process proceeds to Step Sc1905.

In Step Sc1905, it is determined whether or not the second special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. When it is determined in step Sc1905 that the second special winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sc1905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc1906, and the special power operation flag is turned off. After executing step Sc1906, the process proceeds to step Sc1907, and the open/close scenario setting completion flag is turned off. After that, the second special winning opening process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sc1905 that the second special winning opening opening/closing process is not completed (Sc1905: NO), the second special winning opening process is ended.

<Opening and closing scenario setting process for the 2nd prize winning opening>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second special winning opening will be described. The opening/closing scenario setting processing for the second special winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 189: Sc1903) of the processing for the second special winning opening.

FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second special winning opening. In step Sc2001, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc2001 that the high probability mode flag is ON (Sc2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2002.

In step Sc2002, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc2002 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sc2002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2003. Specifically, in the case of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, that is, in the latent probability change state, the process proceeds to step Sc2003.

In step Sc2003, a special bonus opening/closing scenario is set as an opening/closing scenario for the second special winning opening. In the special bonus opening/closing scenario, the opening condition is set such that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 0.5 seconds after the second special winning opening/closing process described below is started. In addition, as a closing condition, a condition is set in which one gaming ball enters the second special winning opening 55a in the open state or closes when 5 seconds elapse in the open state. Further, in the special bonus opening/closing scenario, the condition that the second special winning opening 55a is not opened/closed when the opening/closing processing for the first special winning opening is executed is set. After executing step Sc2003, the process proceeds to step Sc2005.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the high probability mode flag is not ON in step Sc2001 (Sc2001: NO), or when it is determined that the high frequency support mode flag is ON in step Sc2002 (Sc2002: YES), step Proceed to Sc2004. That is, when the latent probability variation state is not set (also referred to as a normal state), the process proceeds to step Sc2004.

In step Sc2004, a normal opening/closing scenario is set as the opening/closing scenario for the second special winning opening. In the normal opening/closing scenario, the opening condition is set such that the second opening/closing door 55b is opened 10 seconds after the second special winning opening/closing process described below is started. In addition, as a closing condition, a condition is set in which one gaming ball enters the second special winning opening 55a in the open state or closes when 5 seconds elapse in the open state. Further, in the normal opening/closing scenario, the condition that the second special winning opening 55a is not opened/closed when the opening/closing processing for the first special winning opening is executed is set. After executing step Sc2004, the process proceeds to step Sc2005.

In step Sc2005, the opening/closing scenario setting completion flag is turned on. Then, the opening/closing scenario setting process for the second special winning opening is ended.

<2nd prize winning opening/closing processing>
Next, the second special winning opening/closing process will be described. The second special winning opening opening/closing processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 189: Sc1904) of the second special winning opening processing.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the second special winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sc2101, it is determined whether the second opening/closing door 55b is open. When it is determined in step Sc2101 that the second opening/closing door 55b is not open (Sc2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2102.

In Step Sc2102, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening/closing scenario is satisfied. The content of the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario for the second special winning opening has been described above with reference to FIG. When it is determined in step Sc2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sc2102: NO), the second big winning opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sc2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2103.

In step Sc2103, the second opening/closing door 55b is opened. After executing step Sc2103, the process proceeds to step Sc2104.

In step Sc2104, a second opening/closing door opening command is set. The second opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the second opening/closing door opening command executes the setting for executing the effect for opening the second opening/closing door. Then, the second special winning opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sc2101, when it is determined that the second opening/closing door 55b is not open (Sc2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2105.

In step Sc2105, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the second opening/closing door 55b is satisfied. The content of the closing condition of the opening/closing scenario for the second special winning opening has been described above with reference to FIG. When it is determined in step Sc2105 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sc2105: NO), the second special winning opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc2105 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sc2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2106.

In step Sc2106, the second opening/closing door 55b is closed. After executing Step Sc2106, the process proceeds to Step Sc2107.

In step Sc2107, the second opening/closing door closing command is set. The second opening/closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 178: Step Sc0803) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the second opening/closing door closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the second opening/closing door. Then, the second special winning opening/closing process is ended.

<<C5>> Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 192 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<C6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sc2201, a command storing process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Sc2201, the process proceeds to Step Sc2202.

In step Sc2202, a state storage process is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed by using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The game state stored as a flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step Sc2202, the process proceeds to step Sc2203.

In step Sc2203, game time effect processing is executed. The game time effect process is a process for setting an effect in the game time. Details of the game game effect processing will be described later. After executing Step Sc2203, the process proceeds to Step Sc2204.

In step Sc2204, an opening effect process is executed. The opening effect process is a process for setting an effect in the opening period. Details of the opening effect process will be described later. After executing Step Sc2204, the process proceeds to Step Sc2205.

In step Sc2205, a special electric starting entrance entrance effect process is executed. The special electric starting opening ball entry process is a process for setting an effect to be executed when a game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 (hereinafter, also referred to as special electric starting opening entrance effect). The details of the special electric starting opening entrance process will be described later. After executing Step Sc2205, the process proceeds to Step Sc2206.

In Step Sc2206, the second opening/closing door opening effect process is executed. The second opening/closing door opening effect process is a process for setting an effect to be executed when the second opening/closing door 55b is opened (hereinafter, also referred to as a second opening/closing door opening effect). The details of the second opening/closing door opening effect processing will be described later. After executing Step Sc2206, the process proceeds to Step Sc2207.

In step Sc2207, other display processing is executed. The other display process is a process of executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds is performed. After executing Step Sc2207, the process proceeds to Step Sc2208.

In step Sc2208, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes of steps Sc2203 to Sc2207. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps Sc2203 to Sc2207. After executing Step Sc2208, the process proceeds to Step Sc2209.

In step Sc2209, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the processes of steps Sc2203 to Sc2207. That is, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the voice corresponding to the effect set in steps Sc2203 to Sc2207 is output. After executing Step Sc2209, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<State storage process>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state storage processing is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 193: Sc2202).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the state storing process. In step Sc2301, it is determined whether a high probability mode command has been received. If it is determined in step Sc2301 that the high-probability mode command has been received (Sc2301: YES), the flow advances to step Sc2302 to turn on the sound-light side high-probability mode flag. Then, it progresses to step Sc2303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2301 that the high-probability mode command is not received (Sc2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2303 without executing step Sc2302.

In step Sc2303, it is determined whether the low probability mode command has been received. If it is determined in step Sc2303 that the low-probability mode command has been received (Sc2303: YES), the flow advances to step Sc2304 to turn off the sound-light side high-probability mode flag. Then, it progresses to step Sc2305. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2303 that the low-probability mode command has not been received (Sc2303: NO), step Sc2304 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sc2305.

In step Sc2305, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode command has been received. When it is determined in step Sc2305 that the high frequency support command is received (Sc2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2306, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sc2307. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2305 that the high frequency support mode command has not been received (Sc2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2307 without executing step Sc2306.

In step Sc2307, it is determined whether the low frequency support mode command has been received. When it is determined in step Sc2307 that the low frequency support mode command has been received (Sc2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2308 and the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sc2309. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2307 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (Sc2307: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2309 without executing step Sc2308.

In Step Sc2309, it is determined whether or not the sound-light-side high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc2309 that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON (Sc2309: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2310.

In Step Sc2310, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is OFF. When it is determined in step Sc1310 that the sound-light side high frequency support mode flag is OFF (Sc2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2311.

In step Sc2311, the latent probability variation state flag is turned on. The latency probability variation state flag is a flag for specifying that the game state is the latency probability variation state. Then, the state storage process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sound light side high probability mode flag is not ON in step Sc2309 (Sc2309: NO), or when it is determined that the sound light side high frequency support mode flag is not OFF in step Sc1310 (Sc2310: NO). ), the process proceeds to step Sc2312. In step Sc2312, the latent probability variation state flag is turned off. Then, the state storage process is ended.

In this process, as can be seen from steps Sc2311 and Sc2312, the voice emission control device 90 always specifies whether or not the state of the game controlled by the main control device 60 is the latent latent change state.

<Processing for game times production>
Next, the game time effect processing will be described. The game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 193: Sc2203).

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the game game effect processing. In Step Sc2401, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sc2401 that the variation command has been received (Sc2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2402.

In step Sc2402, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence/absence of a reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sc2403.

In step Sc2403, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The process is a process of setting a pattern of effect in the game game which is the processing target. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sc2403, the process proceeds to Step Sc2404.

In step Sc2404, the process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of this game time is a big hit, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L1 is displayed in the liquid crystal of this time. Set as the information of the design. If the result of the winning lottery of the current game is out of alignment, the presence or absence of the reach is determined from the content of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L1 and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L1. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L1, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. After executing Step Sc2404, the process proceeds to Step Sc2405.

In step Sc2405, a game-time production command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The game time effect command is information including the effect pattern set in step Sc2403 and the content of the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped set in step Sc2404. The display control device 100 that has received the game time effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image for effect and an image of a liquid crystal symbol based on the information included in the game time effect command. After executing Step Sc2405, the process proceeds to Step Sc2406.

In step Sc2406, the pending information update process is executed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information in the hold number counter area is updated so that the hold number stored in the hold number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing Step Sc2408, the game-time effect process is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 195: Sc2403) of the game time effect process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting processing. In Step Sc2501, it is determined whether or not the game times for which the effect is set are a big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information on the presence/absence of a big hit included in the received variation command. When it is determined in step Sc2501 that the game number to be processed is a big hit in the winning lottery (Sc2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2502.

In step Sc2502, it is determined whether the sound-light-side high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc2502 that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON (Sc2502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2503.

In Step Sc2503, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times that is won for the jackpot that is the processing target is the probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sc2503 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (Sc2503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2504.

In Step Sc2504, the setting process of the effect pattern for the special bonus probability variation jackpot is executed. As described above, this processing is executed when the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON and the probability variation jackpot is won in the processing object game time. The fact that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is ON indicates that the game time of the processing target is executed in the high probability mode. That is, since the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, after the game cycle is finished, the opening period becomes a specific period in which the latent latency is changed, and a special bonus is given to the player. Therefore, in step Sc2504, as the effect pattern of the effect executed in the game time, the content suggesting that the special bonus may be given and the content suggesting that the probability variation jackpot may be won are included. Set the production pattern. After executing Step Sc2504, the effect pattern setting process ends.

In step Sc2503, when it is determined that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is not the probability variation jackpot, that is, the regular jackpot (Sc2503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2505.

In step Sc2505, the setting process of the effect pattern for the special bonus normal jackpot is executed. As described above, this processing is executed when the sound and light side high probability mode flag is ON and the normal jackpot is won in the processing object game time. As described above, the fact that the sound light side high probability mode flag is ON indicates that the game time of the processing target is executed in the high probability mode. That is, since the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, after the game cycle is finished, the opening period becomes a specific period in which the latent latency is changed, and a special bonus is given to the player. Therefore, in step Sc2505, as the effect pattern of the effect executed in the game time, the content suggesting that the special bonus may be given and the content suggesting that the normal jackpot may be won may be included. Set the production pattern. After executing Step Sc2505, the effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc2502 that the sound-light-side high probability mode flag is not ON (Sc2502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2506. In step Sc2506, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times that is won for the jackpot that is the processing target is the probability variation jackpot. In step Sc2506, when it is determined that the jackpot type of the game times that is won for the processing target jackpot is the probability variation jackpot (Sc2506: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2507.

In Step Sc2507, effect pattern setting processing for probability variation big hit is executed. This processing is executed when the sound and light side high probability mode flag is OFF and the probability variation jackpot is won in the processing object game time. The fact that the sound-light side high probability mode flag is OFF indicates that the game time of the processing target is executed in the low probability mode. That is, since the jackpot is won in the low probability mode, after the game times have ended, the opening period is a non-specific period in which the latent latency variation state is not (non-latent latency variation state), which is special for the player. No bonus is given. Therefore, in step Sc2507, as the effect pattern of the effect executed in the game time, the effect pattern including the content suggesting that the probability variation jackpot may be won is set. After executing Step Sc2507, the effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc2506 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is the normal jackpot (Sc2506: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2508.

In step Sc2508, a normal jackpot effect pattern setting process is executed. This processing is executed when the sound and light side high probability mode flag is OFF, and the normal jackpot is won in the processing target game time. Therefore, in step Sc2508, as the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game time, the effect pattern including the content suggesting that there is a possibility of winning the normal jackpot is set. After executing Step Sc2508, the effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc2501 that the game number to be processed is not a big hit (miss) in the winning lottery (Sc2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2509. In step Sc2509, effect pattern setting processing for detachment is executed. The process also includes a process of setting an effect pattern when the winning lottery of the game game to be processed is reach. After executing Step Sc2501, the effect pattern setting process ends.

<Opening production process>
Next, the opening effect process will be described. The opening effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 193: Sc2204).

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the opening effect process. In step Sc2601, it is determined whether the opening command is received. When it is determined in step Sc2601 that the opening command is received (Sc2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2602.

In step Sc2602, the opening time is read out. Specifically, the information about the opening time included in the received opening command is read. After executing Step Sc2602, the process proceeds to Step Sc2603.

In step Sc2603, it is determined whether or not the latent probability variation state flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sc2603 that the latent probability variation state flag is ON (Sc2603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2604.

In step Sc2604, an opening effect pattern for a special bonus is set according to the opening time. Specifically, since a special bonus is given during the opening period in which the latent latency is changed, the contents suggesting that the special bonus is given as the opening effect pattern, and the game ball is inserted into the special electric starting opening 52. The second opening/closing door 55b is opened to set the effect pattern including the content that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second special winning opening 55a. Further, in the present embodiment, an opening effect pattern is prepared for each jackpot type in the game times in which the jackpot that has triggered the opening effect is executed, and the opening effect pattern is set according to the jackpot type. In addition, as the opening effect for the special bonus, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect for counting down the remaining time of the opening period is executed. In addition, an opening effect for a special bonus that prompts a suggestion that the opening time has been added may be executed. Specifically, a countdown of the remaining time in the opening period is started with the remaining time shorter than the actually set opening time, and the effect of increasing the remaining time is executed at the timing when the remaining time reaches a predetermined time or less. In addition, an opening effect may be executed in which the number of game balls paid out to the player as a privilege during the opening period is displayed in real time. By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After setting the effect pattern of the opening effect for such a special bonus, the opening effect process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sc2603 that the latent probability variation state flag is not ON (Sc2603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2605.

In step Sc2605, a normal opening effect pattern is set according to the opening time. Specifically, no special bonus is given to the opening period, which is a normal state that is not a latent probability change state, so as an opening effect pattern, an effect pattern that includes content that suggests that a round game will start after the opening period ends Set. Further, in the present embodiment, an opening effect pattern is prepared for each jackpot type in the game times in which the jackpot that has triggered the opening effect is executed, and the opening effect pattern is set according to the jackpot type. After that, the opening effect process is ended.

<Processing for special electric starting entrance entrance>
Next, the special electric starting opening entrance process will be described. The special electric starting mouth entrance effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 193: Sc2205) of the timer interrupt process.

The special electric starting opening entrance ball production process is a process of setting a production pattern of an effect executed when a game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52. In the present embodiment, the effect executed when the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52 is different between the specific period and the non-specific period.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a special electric starting opening entrance performance process. In Step Sc2701, it is determined whether or not a special electric starting entrance command has been received. When it is determined in step Sc2701 that the special electric starting opening ball entry command is received (Sc2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2702. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc2701 that the special electric starting opening entrance ball command has not been received (S2701: NO), the special electric starting entrance entrance effect process is ended as it is.

In Step Sc2702, it is determined whether or not the latent probability variation state flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc2702 that the latent latent change state flag is ON (Sc2702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2703.

In step Sc2703, a special electric power starting opening entrance effect pattern for a special bonus is set. Specifically, as a pattern of the effect executed when the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52, contents suggesting that the second special winning opening 55a will be opened immediately (after 0.5 seconds), and a privilege An effect pattern having a content suggesting the addition of is set. After executing Step Sc2703, the process proceeds to Step Sc2705.

On the other hand, if it is determined at 32702 that the latent probability variation state flag is not ON (Sc2702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2704. In step Sc2704, the normal special electric starting entrance entrance effect pattern is set. Specifically, as a pattern of the effect executed when the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52, an effect pattern having a content suggesting that the second special winning opening 55a is opened after 10 seconds is set. After executing Step Sc2704, the process proceeds to Step Sc2705.

In step Sc2705, the special electric starting entrance ball entry command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The special electric starting opening entrance effect is included in the special electric starting entrance entrance effect information set in step Sc2703 or Sc2704. The display control device 100, which has received the special electric starting opening entrance effect command, causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image according to the effect pattern that has been set. After executing Step Sc2705, the special electric starting mouth entrance effect processing is ended.

<Process for opening the second big winning opening>
Next, the process for the second special winning opening opening effect will be described. The second special winning opening opening effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 193: Sc2206) of the timer interrupt process.

The second special winning opening opening effect processing is processing for setting an effect pattern of an effect executed when the second special winning opening 55a is opened. In the present embodiment, the effect executed when the second special winning opening 55a is opened is different between the specific period and the non-specific period.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the second special winning opening opening effect processing. In Step Sc2801, it is determined whether or not the second opening/closing door opening command has been received. When it is determined in step Sc2801 that the second opening/closing door opening command is received (Sc2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2802. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc2801 that the second opening/closing door opening command is not received (Sc2801: NO), the second special winning opening opening effect process is ended as it is.

In Step Sc2802, it is determined whether or not the latent probability variation state flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sc2802 that the latent probability variation state flag is ON (Sc2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sc2803.

In Step Sc2803, the second special winning opening opening effect pattern is set. Specifically, as an effect pattern to be executed when the second special winning opening 55a is opened, a content indicating that the second special winning opening 55a is opened, or an effect pattern indicating content of award is set. To be done. After executing Step Sc2803, the process proceeds to Step Sc2805.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc2802 that the latent latent change state flag is not ON (Sc2802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sc2804. In Step Sc2804, the normal second special winning opening opening effect pattern is set. Specifically, as the effect pattern to be executed when the second special winning opening 55a is opened, an effect pattern having the content suggesting that the second special winning opening 55a is opened is set. After executing Step Sc2804, the process proceeds to Step Sc2805.

In Step Sc2805, the second special winning opening opening effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The second special winning opening opening effect command includes information on the effect pattern of the second special winning opening opening effect set in step Sc2803 or step Sc2804. The display control device 100 that has received the second special winning opening opening effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image according to the effect pattern that has been set. After executing Step Sc2805, the second special winning opening opening effect processing is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sc2901, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sc2902.

In step Sc2902, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sc3001, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image or draws a new image while the image is being drawn. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sc3101, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 157), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sc3101), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the manner of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode is designed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the image is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sc3102, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sc3101) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sc3103.

In step Sc3103, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sc3102), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sc3104.

In step Sc3104, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sc3103), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sc3105, the other processes are executed, and then the V interrupt process is ended.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since it shifts to the latent latency probable state during the opening period after the end of the game times when the jackpot is won, it is possible to use the transition to the latent latency probable state. Various processes can be executed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the non-specific state that is not the latent probability variation state and the specific period that is the latent latency variation state, after the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the second variable winning device 55. The time until the second opening/closing door 55b is opened is set to a different time. That is, the processing mode can be changed based on whether or not the latent probability has changed.

By controlling the high-frequency support mode flag and the high-probability mode flag, it is possible to shift to a latent latent change state or to shift from a latent latent change state to another state. Therefore, by controlling the timing of switching the high-frequency support mode flag and the timing of switching the high-probability mode flag during the opening period, it is possible to control the duration of the latent probability variation state (specific state). In other words, the execution time of the process executed in the specific period can be controlled by the timing of switching the high frequency support mode flag and the timing of switching the high probability mode flag. Therefore, the execution control of various processes can be performed by a simple process.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment gives a bonus to the player by two kinds of methods when the jackpot is won in the game times executed in the high probability mode. Specifically, in the specific period of the opening period, the time from the game ball entering the special electric starting opening 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b is opened is shorter than the non-specific period (0.5 seconds). The privilege is given by doing. Then, further benefits are given in the round game after the end of the specific period. Therefore, when the lottery mode is a high-probability mode, compared to when it is a low-probability mode, in addition to the expectation for winning the jackpot, there is also an expectation for giving bonuses after winning the jackpot. Can be given to the player.

In addition, by providing two types of privilege giving methods, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who recognizes that the mode of the process of granting a privilege has been switched.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the length of the specific period varies depending on the type of jackpot in the game times that is won for the jackpot that triggered the start of the specific period. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the player can be made to pay more attention to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, the specific period is 20 seconds when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won in the game times when the jackpot is won immediately before the start of the specific period, and the specific period is 30 seconds when the 8R probability variation jackpot is won. When the 8R normal jackpot is won, the specific period is 40 seconds. That is, the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player has a shorter specific period. In other words, the jackpot type that is not advantageous to the player has a longer specific period, and the amount of the special bonus that the player can obtain during the specific period is likely to increase. By setting the length of the specific period in this way, when the winning lottery is won, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regardless of which jackpot type. In addition, by providing multiple types of specific period lengths, it is possible for the player to infer the specific period length, and to give the player a greater sense of expectation and tenseness, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. be able to. In other words, in addition to the expectation of winning the jackpot, the player can be given an expectation of the length of the specific period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball enters the special electric starting port 52 based on the game state, specifically whether the latent probability variation state (specific state or non-specific state). The time from when the second opening/closing door 55b is opened is determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expecting the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b to pay attention to the game state. On the contrary, for the player who wants to grasp the state of the game (whether the latent probability is changed or not), until the second opening/closing door 55b is opened after the game ball enters the special electric starting opening 52. You can make your time pay attention.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball enters the through gate 35, the ordinary electric accessory 53 opens, the game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, and the second opening/closing door 55b opens. Since various game elements such as the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening 55a are related, it is possible to make the player pay attention to various game elements and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the method of giving a privilege is different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode or when the jackpot is won in the low-probability mode. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, a special bonus as a bonus is given after the game times of winning the jackpot are finished, and then a round game as a bonus is given. When the jackpot is won in the low-probability mode, only the round game as a privilege is awarded after the end of the game times where the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the lottery mode when the game times are being executed. In addition, when the player wins the jackpot without knowing the lottery mode and the award is started when the game times that the jackpot is won are completed, by grasping the manner in which the award is awarded, It is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of guessing the lottery mode. In this way, the interest of the game can be improved by associating the lottery mode in the game times in which the jackpot is won with the method of processing for granting a privilege after the game times in which the jackpot is won.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different in the method of awarding the bonus depending on whether the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode or the jackpot is won in the low-probability mode. In other words, whether the jackpot type in the game times that was won in the jackpot that was executed before the jackpot that was won in the jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as the pre-winning game times) was a probability variation jackpot or was it a regular jackpot. Based on, the method of granting the privilege to be granted after the end of the game times (hereinafter, also referred to as the post-winning game times) which is subsequently executed and wins the jackpot is determined. Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot, in addition to giving the player an expectation about how to give the privilege after the end of the game times that won the jackpot, after seeing from the game times Expectation can also be added to the method of granting the privilege.

In addition, when you win the jackpot, how to give the bonus after the game times that won the jackpot, to the player, from the game times that won the jackpot You can make a guess based on this. Therefore, when the game times won for the jackpot are executed, based on the jackpot type in the first-winning game times as seen from the game times won for the jackpot, the benefits after the game times won for the jackpot are finished. It is possible to infer the method of granting, and it is possible to guess the method of granting the privilege in the post-winning game times in view of the number of times of winning the jackpot, and to execute one of the game times of winning the jackpot. Thus, it is possible to prompt the player to make various guesses and to give a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the case where a probability variation jackpot is won in the pre-winning game times, it is possible to give an expectation to the player about the benefits given after the end of the pre-winning game times, and also after the post-winning game times. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to the privilege to be granted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the opening time, which is the time of the opening period after the end of the game number that is won the jackpot, is the lottery mode of the game number that is won the jackpot (whether it is the high probability mode, Low probability mode). That is, the opening time, which is the time of the opening period after the end of the game number that was won as a jackpot, is determined based on the jackpot type in the first-winning game number as viewed from the game number that was won as a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to guess the length of the opening time of the opening period after the end of the game number that was won for the jackpot, based on the jackpot type in the pre-winning game number, and to provide a new game property. Further, when the opening period is a specific period, it is possible to further encourage the player to guess the opening time based on the jackpot type in the pre-winning game times, and to give further expectation about the special bonus. ..

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the opening effect to be executed in the opening period after the end of the game number that was won the jackpot, the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode of the game number that was won the jackpot. Mode). That is, the opening effect in the opening period after the end of the game number that was won as a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type in the first-winning game number as viewed from the game number that was won as a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player guess the opening effect in the opening period after the end of the game times won for the jackpot, based on the jackpot type in the pre-winning game times, and to provide a new game property. On the contrary, based on the opening effect in the opening period after the end of the game times won the jackpot, the player is made to guess various information in the winning game times, such as the jackpot type in the winning game times. Amusement can be provided.

<<C7>> Modification of Third Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<C7-1>> Modification 1:
In the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the 16R certainty variation jackpot and the 8R certainty variation jackpot are the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won after the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. However, other configurations may be adopted. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot such as the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is won, after the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, there is a limit to the number of times the game times can be executed in the high probability mode. A configuration may be adopted.

For example, if the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 8R probability variation jackpot is won, after the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, the lottery mode becomes high after the number of game executions in the high probability mode reaches 100 times. Transition from the probability mode to the low probability mode. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of this example, if the jackpot is won before the number of times the game times are executed in the high-probability mode reaches 100 times, the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, and thus the jackpot. After the end of the game times that became, the latent change state is entered and a special bonus is given as a privilege. However, since the lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode after the number of times of the game times executed in the high-probability mode reaches 100 times, even if the jackpot is won, after the end of the game times that has become the jackpot. It will not be in latent change state and no special bonus will be given.

By adopting such a configuration, if the probability variation jackpot is won and the game times are executed in the high probability mode, the jackpot is won to the player before 100 game times are executed. It is possible to strongly desire to do so, and it is possible to give a strong attention to the winning lottery result in each game play in the high probability mode, and to give the player a sense of tension and expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<<C7-2>> Modification 2:
In the third embodiment, in the specific period, the time from the game ball entering the special electric starting opening 52 until the second opening/closing door 55b is opened during the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Although the configuration is set to 0.5 seconds, other configurations may be adopted.

FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the second modification. When the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened from the state of FIG. 143(a) to the state of FIG. 203(b), the second opening/closing door 55b is opened at the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed, As shown in FIG. 203(c), a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of game balls circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a enter the second special winning opening 55a. Specifically, by adjusting the speed at which the game balls flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a by the number of the convex portions 53b and the like, a plurality of game balls can flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a at the same time. Then, when one game ball enters the special electric starting port 52, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed and the second opening/closing door 55b is opened, but when the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed, By adjusting the opening timing of the second opening/closing door 55b, as shown in FIG. 203(c), a plurality of game balls that have been circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a enter the second special winning opening 55a. And When a plurality of game balls enter the second big winning opening 55a, the number of game balls corresponding to the number of game balls entered is paid out as prize balls.

By adopting such a configuration, a lot of benefits can be given to the player by entering the game ball into the special electric power starting opening 52 once during a specific period, and the special electric power can be given to the player. A great sense of expectation can be given by paying attention to the ball entering the starting opening 52.

<<C7-3>> Modification 3:
In the third embodiment described above, the opening effect for the special bonus is executed in the opening period (the opening period in which the special bonus is given) which is the specific period, but the normal opening effect is performed in the opening period which is the specific period. You may employ|adopt the structure which performs (the opening production which a special bonus is not provided).

When such a configuration is adopted, the player who recognizes that the normal opening effect has been executed in the opening period which is the specific period also temporarily recognizes that the special bonus is not given. In spite of this, since the special bonus is actually given, the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<C7-4>> Modification 4:
In the above-described third embodiment, the opening time in the opening period may be the same in the case of the latent probability changing state (in the specific period) and in the case of the latent probability changing state (in the case other than the specific period). .. By doing so, the process of setting the opening time according to the state (opening time setting process: see FIG. 184) can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.
C7-5. Modification 5:
In the third embodiment, when the big hit is won in the high-probability mode, the longer the opening period in which the special bonus is given is shortened as the big hit type of the big hit is more advantageous. As the jackpot type of the jackpot is more advantageous, a configuration may be adopted in which the time length of the opening period to which the special bonus is given is lengthened. By adopting such a configuration, when the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode, the player is requested to strongly request that the jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot type, and the player has great expectations for the jackpot type. A feeling can be imparted.

<<C7-6>> Modification 6:
In the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery for determining the opening time is separately executed. By doing this, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the time length of the specific period from the jackpot type, and when a special bonus is given, the player can be newly informed about the time length of the specific period. It is possible to add a sense of expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<<C7-7>> Modification 7:
In the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the electric role opening lottery is executed, and when the opening is won in the electric role opening lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is electrically opened. However, instead of the ordinary electric accessory 53, a configuration including a non-electric accessory may be adopted. In this case, the through gate 35 and the non-electrical accessory are connected by a mechanical structure that does not use electricity, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the non-electrical accessory operates through the mechanical structure. To do. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to omit the processing related to the electric power combination opening lottery, and to simplify the processing.

<<C7-8>> Modification 8:
In the third embodiment, the special bonus is given when the opening period is in the latent probability changing state, and the special bonus is not given when the opening period is not in the latent probability changing state, but the reverse process is executed. The configuration may be adopted. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the special bonus is not given when the opening period is in the latent probability changing state, and the special bonus is given when the opening period is not in the latent probability changing state. If such a configuration is adopted and the jackpot is won when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the time from entering the game ball into the special electric starting opening 52 to opening the second opening/closing door 55b is 0 in the opening period. It will be 5 seconds, and a special bonus will be given. Usually, the probability of winning the jackpot is high in the high-probability mode, so a high expectation can be given to the player. In the low-probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot is low, so the high-probability mode is high. It is difficult to give the player a sense of expectation compared to the case of, but if the configuration of this modification is adopted, if there is a low probability mode, a special bonus is awarded if you win the jackpot, so a low probability Even in the mode, a great expectation can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. When this configuration is adopted, this configuration is realized by granting a special bonus on condition that the opening period flag is ON, the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, and the high probability mode flag is OFF. be able to.

<<C7-9>> Modification 9:
In the third embodiment, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the position where the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is arranged is not the upper part of the second variable winning device 55. For example, a configuration in which a so-called electric tulip type structure is arranged above the special electric power starting port 52 may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the special electric starting port 52 during the low frequency support mode, and it is possible to suppress excessively giving a prize ball.

Moreover, you may employ|adopt the structure which is not equipped with the normal electric accessory 53. When this configuration is adopted, the structure can be simplified. In addition, since the processing of the electric-role opening lottery can be omitted, the processing can be simplified.

<<C7-10>> Modification 10:
In the third embodiment, the time from the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting opening 52 to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b is different between the specific period and the non-specific period. A configuration in which the time from the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 52 to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b is the same in the specific period and the non-specific period may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to omit the process of changing the time from the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52 to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b depending on the state of the game. Can be simplified.

<<C7-11>> Modification 11:
In the third embodiment, in the latent latent variation state (specific period) and in the non-latent latency variation state (also referred to as non-specific period or non-latent probability variation state), the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52 is triggered. Although the control processing of the second opening/closing door 55b is changed, a configuration may be adopted in which other processing is changed depending on the latent probability changing state and the non-latent probability changing state. For example, a configuration for changing the operation mode of the driving accessory, a configuration for changing the type of sound to be output, a configuration for changing the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors component 53 depending on the latent probability varying state and the non-latent probability varying state. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the processing mode is changed between the latent probability variation state and the non-latent latency variation state.

<<C7-12>> Modification 12:
In the third embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability variation jackpot that is in the latency probability variation state (hereinafter also referred to as the latency probability variation jackpot) is a jackpot type. That is, when the latent probability variation jackpot is won, in the subsequent game times, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Therefore, the next time you win the jackpot, the special bonus will be awarded, but the player does not expect the special bonus to be awarded, so when the special bonus is started, the player will be surprised. It is possible to impart a sense of expectation to the player as well as imparting a character to the player's expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<<C7-13>> Modification 13:
In the third embodiment described above, the opening time, which is the time length in the opening period, is determined based on the jackpot type in the game times executed immediately before the opening period, but another configuration is adopted. May be adopted. Specifically, the round game means that the game ball enters a specific ball entrance part or a through gate (collectively, also referred to as a specific ball entrance part) in the period after the end of the game times when the jackpot is won. Adopt a gaming machine that is the condition to be started. In other words, even after the game number of the jackpot is over, the round game is not started until the game ball enters the specific ball after that. Therefore, it is possible to set the opening period as a period after the game time of winning the jackpot is over and before the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion.

In addition, the specific winning portion is arranged near the special figure starting opening 51, the special electric starting opening 52, the first variable winning device 54, and the second variable winning device 55. Further, by arranging the nail 42 and the accessory around the entrance of the specific ball entrance portion, the game ball is relatively difficult to enter the specific ball entrance portion. By doing so, a relatively long opening time can be secured. Further, since the player desires that the game ball does not enter the specific ball-in portion, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension during the opening period.

Further, a prize ball may be paid out when a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion. In this case, if the game ball can easily enter the specific ball entering section, a prize ball can be obtained by entering the game ball into the specific ball entering section, but the opening period is likely to be short, Prize balls as a special bonus can be hard to obtain. On the other hand, if the game ball is difficult to enter the specific ball entrance portion, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the specific ball entrance portion, but the opening period may be long. Therefore, it is possible to easily obtain a prize ball as a special bonus. As described above, with the configuration including the specific ball entering portion, various game characteristics can be created.

<<C7-14>> Modification 14:
The operation mode of the first variable winning device 54 in the round game executed after the game times won in the big hit lottery depending on whether the winning lottery is won in the low probability mode or the winning lottery in the high probability mode ( Game machines having different configurations of opening the first opening/closing door 54b may be adopted. Specifically, in the first opening/closing scenario setting process, the determination mode at the time of winning the winning lottery is specified, and the opening scenario of the first opening/closing door 54b in the round game is determined based on the determination mode. That is, the method of the process of granting the privilege after the execution of the game times won in the winning lottery is determined on the basis of the lottery mode at the time of executing the jackpot winning game times that triggered the grant of the privilege.

<<C7-15>> Modification 15:
In the third embodiment, the time length of the period for executing the opening/closing execution mode is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 of the game times that are the jackpot winnings that trigger the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. It may be determined based on the reach random number counter C3.

<<D>> Fourth embodiment:
<<D1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 204 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor for detecting a dynamic operation amount by a change in electric resistance is provided. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the turning operation amount, A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 205 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design and an image for effect.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 206 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, a round display unit 39, and a startup display unit 39a.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

Both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are opened upward, and the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so as to be above the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the game balls win the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won any of the various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the prize. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning and the second. It is possible to win a prize in the starting opening 34. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The open/close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode shifts to a case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode that allows the winning of the variable winning device 36 to the special winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, even when the big hit is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode in which the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won. In the present embodiment, when the game balls are won in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the winning symbol lottery triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variable display or the variable display as the display mode until the segment display device displays the corresponding lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b, when the winning lottery triggered by the winning in the second starting opening 34 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display displays the corresponding lottery result, a variable display or Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the winning of the winning through the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round game is an open/close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

The start-up display unit 39a is composed of one LED lamp, and when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (when the power is on), the high probability mode described later is taken over. ,Light. When the power switch 88 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state in the high probability mode in the previous operation of the pachinko machine 10, the stored content of the high probability mode flag is held and the high probability mode is set at the next power-on. Taken over. It should be noted that even when the power is turned on and the power failure is restored, the high-probability mode is similarly turned on when the high probability mode is succeeded.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols when the first symbol display portion 37a displays the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the first starting opening 33. Further, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second symbol display portion 37b based on the winning of the second start opening 34. .. The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 207 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 207( a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 207(a), the liquid crystal display device 41 variably displays symbols indicating numbers 1-8. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 207( b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 207(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 207(b), after variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The mode of variable display of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. In other words, this is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol for each game time. On either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the pachinko machine 10 determines a predetermined value in the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 207(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

<<D2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The MPU 62 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86 and a backup power supply circuit 87. The power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. The “time of power failure” is not limited to the time of power failure of the commercial power source, but also includes the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is off).

The backup power supply circuit 87 includes a capacitor, and continues to supply power to each device when receiving a power failure information signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 86. Specifically, power is supplied to the RAM 64 provided in the main control device 60, and at least a part of the stored information in the RAM 64 continues to be retained even after the power is turned off. In the present embodiment, the information to be held includes at least a high-probability mode flag, a high-frequency support mode flag, and a game number counter PNC, which will be described later, and corresponds to the game state information.

In the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit 87 supplies power to the RAM 64 even when a power failure occurs (for example, when the power switch 88 is in the off state), and continues to hold the above-mentioned gaming state information. Instead, when a power failure occurs, the backup power supply circuit 87 continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and during the predetermined period, the game state information is stored in a flash memory or a flash memory. A configuration may be adopted in which the saved information is saved in a non-volatile memory such as a hard disk drive, and then the saved information is restored in the RAM 64 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state. In short, the information on the game state stored immediately before the supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the non-supply state can be continuously stored when the state is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state. Any structure may be used as long as it has a structure.

In addition, the MPU 62 is provided as a plurality of detection sensors 67a to 67e, which are provided at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to a detection sensor and determines whether or not a game ball flowing down in the game area PA during the game has won each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes an electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34, and a main display. The part 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. Display control is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the prize to the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning to the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of doing, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case where the winning of the second starting opening 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls. A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery to determine whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol string displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displaced and changed. The falling random number counter C4 is used for the falling lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability mode (also called the high-probability game state). The high-probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation big hit, and refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the big jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C5 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

A holding information storage area 64b is provided in the RAM 64. The reserved information storage area 64b is composed of a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 at the timing of winning are held information storage areas. It is stored in 64b in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the game ball in the second starting opening 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table in the win/loss table storage area 63a (FIG. 208) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 210 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the winning lottery. FIG. 210(a) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 210(b) shows a win/fail table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 210(a), in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number for the big win is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210(b), in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number for the big win is 20. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 33, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64), and when the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 34, the holding information is stored. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until it becomes individual. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, the probability variation lottery mode in which the winning lottery table is used as the win/loss table, and the win/loss table is used as the win/loss table. It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a win/loss table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 210, when the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for high probability, compared to the case where the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for low probability, the jackpot is won. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open counter C5, but in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric auditors' item open lottery after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second start opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start opening 33 is higher than in the second start opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start opening 34 is more likely to be won than the first start opening 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is paid to the second starting opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls he holds. You can

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is more frequently in the electric role open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed, a low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying the condition of any one or any combination of shortening the average time of securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots on the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of types of jackpots. The sorting destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a sorting table.

FIG. 211 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 211(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 211(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 211(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33 is 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R normal jackpot. Big hit, 8R Normal big hit is set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 13” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “14 to 27” are the 8R normal jackpots. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 211(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are determined. Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “28 to 39” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all of the jackpots based on the winning of the second start opening 34 are probability variation jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and This is different from when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34.

As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that a win will be generated in the second starting opening 34 of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It should be noted that if the result of the win/win lottery is a failure, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value for the reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. The table is collated to determine whether or not to reach. However, as a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit is won and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed, and the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 207(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, whereby the reach line is formed. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, the details of the falling random number counter C4 will be described. The falling random number counter C4 is used when executing a falling lottery, which is a determination as to whether or not to end the high-probability mode in a gaming state where the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game times is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 119, for example, and after reaching the maximum, returns to 0. The falling random number counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter C4 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the falling random number counter C4 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter C4 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the falling hit determination table stored in the falling hit determination table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is determined. The table is checked to determine whether to end the high probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, two values of random numbers that are won in the falling lottery are stored in the falling winning/discarding determination table. That is, in the high probability mode game times, the probability of winning the falling lottery, ending the high probability mode, and changing to the low probability mode is 1/60. In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the game time of the low probability mode.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of fluctuation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of fluctuation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C5 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C5 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electricity reserve area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether to control the electric accessory 34a to be in the open state by using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

A combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, A combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 stored in the second holding area Rb corresponds to the holding information related to the second starting opening 34, and these The hold information corresponds to the special information in the present invention.

<<D3>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 212 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that a part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 208) and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a hold confirmation table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<D4>> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present description, in order to facilitate understanding of the characteristics of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an outline of the process executed by the pachinko machine as a comparative example will be described first, and then, An outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described.

<<D4-1>> Comparative example:
FIG. 213 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when the fallen lottery is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. As the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, a pachinko machine configured to shift to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed game number after shifting to the high frequency support mode was used. The "guaranteed game count" is the number of games guaranteed to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode, and is 100 in this embodiment. However, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, even when the game times in the high frequency support mode are continuously executed 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, , The high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 is a reference example for comparison with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

FIG. 213(a) shows the state of the lottery mode and the state of the support mode in the pachinko machine as Comparative Example 1. In FIG. 213, the numbers in [] (for example, [1] and [60]) indicate the number of times the game has been executed since the high frequency support mode was started.

FIG. 213(a) shows that the probability variation jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high-probability mode after the jackpot is over, and then the high-frequency support mode is started at the 60th time. Shows a case where the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Further, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the lottery result in the falling lottery is reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in the game time. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, in the game time executed 60th time after the high-frequency support mode is started, the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode is shifted to the low-probability mode. Then, the winning lottery is executed in the low-probability mode from the game game executed 60th time after the high-frequency support mode is started.

On the other hand, regarding the support mode, even if the high probability mode ends and the high probability mode ends and shifts to the low probability mode at the 60th game time after the high frequency support mode is started, The high-frequency support mode is continued until the high-frequency support mode after the transition to the support mode is started and the 100th game time is reached.

FIG. 213(b) shows each state of the production, the lottery mode, and the support mode, which the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 executes in the 60th game round that wins the falling lottery. In this example, neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery has been won until the 60th game round (1 to 59 times). Therefore, up to the 59th game round, the result of the winning lottery in each game round is announced in advance. A normal effect (also called a normal effect) for notifying the lottery result is executed. Then, in the 60th game round that wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a battle effect) in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character confront each other is executed. The battle effect is an effect before notifying the player of the result which is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the battle effect is the case of winning the falling lottery, the winning of the winning lottery (big hit), or the case where neither of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is won. It is a production that suggests that any of the above is applicable.

Then, after the battle effect has been executed, a result notification effect that notifies the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification production, the production corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the winning character is lost in the falling lottery, the player character is defeated, and if the winning character is successful (the big jackpot in this embodiment), the player character wins. If not, a draw effect is executed in which the player character and the enemy character are drawn. In the case of Comparative Example 1, since the falling lottery is won in the 60th game round, the defeat production is executed as the result notification production.

As a result of winning the falling lottery in the 60th game time, the timing of transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode coincides with the timing of starting the 60th game time winning the falling lottery. There is. That is, when the falling lottery is won in the 60th game run, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Regarding the support mode, as described above, the high frequency support mode is continued.

FIG. 214 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when the jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the probability variation jackpot is won by winning lottery, the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode, and then the game executed 60th time after the high frequency support mode is started. FIG. 214 shows the case where the big hit is won in the winning lottery by the times and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 213(b), FIG. 214 shows a case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery instead of the falling lottery.

In the 60th game time in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the battle effect is executed, and then the victory effect in which the player character wins is executed as the result notification effect. Then, the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the 60th game cycle in which the big hit is won is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started (that is, the timing immediately after the presentation of the result of the victory is finished). With the shift, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the low side at the timing when the game number of the big hit is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the battle effect and the result notification effect. 215(a) shows a battle effect, FIG. 215(b) shows a defeat effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 215(c) shows a victory effect as a result notification effect. In the battle effect shown in FIG. 215(a), an image in which a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side are confronted is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are output to the speaker 46. And various lamps 47. However, the battle effect may be in other forms.

In addition, in the defeat production shown in FIG. 215(b), an image in which the female character on the player's side is sad due to the defeat is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the sound or light accompanying the image is output to the speaker 46 or various lamps 47. It is a mode to output to. However, the defeat effect as the result notification effect may be in another form.

In the victory effect shown in FIG. 215(c), an image in which the female character on the player side is pleased with the victory is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is a mode to make. However, the winning effect as a result effect may be in another form.

Further, although not shown, a draw effect in which the player character and the enemy character are drawn may be used as the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 213(b), by winning the falling lottery in the 60th game round, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode with the start of the game round, but on the other hand, Since the support mode continues to be the high-frequency support mode, the player of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 cannot recognize that he/she has won the fall due to the state of the support mode while the battle effect is being executed. .. Therefore, the player can have an expectation and a sense of urgency with respect to the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery by the battle effect and the result notification effect executed thereafter.

FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 when the battle effect or the result notification effect described above is being executed. As shown in the figure, when the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. Then, in the first display area 41aS, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the variable display of the symbol is executed in the variable time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed.

FIG. 217 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the fallen lottery is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. The difference between the example shown in FIG. 213 and the example shown in FIG. 217 is the number of times the game times are executed before the falling lottery is won after the high-frequency support mode is started. In the example shown in FIG. 213, the case of winning the falling lottery in the 60th game time before reaching the guaranteed game number has been described, but in the example shown in FIG. 217, after the guaranteed game number has been reached. The case where the fall lottery is won in the 120th game time is shown.

FIG. 217(a) shows that the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high-probability mode after the jackpot is over, and then the falling lottery is won at the 120th game time, and the lottery mode is low. It shows the case of transition to the probability mode. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, even if the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game round, the lottery result in the falling lottery is the same as that in the 60th game round. It is reflected in the lottery mode of winning lottery. That is, in the example of FIG. 217(a), in the 120th game round, the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game time, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (specifically, 100 times) after shifting to the high frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. However, even when the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. It Therefore, in the example of FIG. 217(a), when the fall lottery is won in the 120th game round, the high-probability mode is continued until the 120th game round is reached, so the high-frequency support mode is continued. Has been done. Then, in the 120th game round, the falling lottery is won, and the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in association with the shift of the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

FIG. 217( b) shows each state of the production, the lottery mode, and the support mode executed by the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in the 120th game time in which the falling lottery is won. In this example, until the 120th game time (1 to 119 times), neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery has been won, so the normal effect is executed until the 120th game time. Then, in the 120th game time in the falling lottery, for example, the same battle effect as the battle effect (FIG. 215(a)) described above is executed. After the execution of the battle production, the result announcement production for announcing the lottery result of the falling lottery is executed. Specifically, since the player has won the falling lottery at the 120th game time, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game round, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the timing when the game round starts. In addition, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode as the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. The timing when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode is the same as the timing when the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, at the same time when the 120th game time is started, the low frequency support mode is entered.

FIG. 218 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the probability variation jackpot is won by a winning lottery, the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode, and then the 120th game executed after the high frequency support mode is started. FIG. 218 shows a case in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery by the times, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 217( b ), FIG. 218 shows a case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery instead of the falling lottery.

In the 120th game time in which the big hit is obtained in the winning lottery, the battle effect is executed, and then the victory effect in which the player character wins is executed as the result announcement effect. Then, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the 120th game cycle in which the big hit is won is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started (that is, the timing at which the presentation effect of the victory result is finished). At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the low side at the timing when the game number of the big hit is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Comparing FIG. 217(b) and FIG. 218, it can be seen that the change mode of the support mode is different in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game time. During this period, when the jackpot is won, the high-frequency support mode is shown as shown in FIG. 218, whereas when the falling is won, the low-frequency support mode is shown as shown in FIG. 217(b). There is. Therefore, the player determines whether or not the high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode shifts from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 206) before the result notification effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game time without the result notification effect. That is, the player can predict the type of the result notification effect (winning effect or defeating effect) to be subsequently executed during the execution of the battle effect. Therefore, the player may not be able to be provided with an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game round by the battle production and the result announcement production.

The summary is as follows. In the case of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, as described using FIG. 213(b) and FIG. 214, in the case where the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode as the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, If the winning lottery is won in the game times before reaching the guaranteed number of games (100 times in the present embodiment), the high frequency support mode is continued, and therefore the expectation and the sense of urgency regarding the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency by the effect of imparting (the battle effect in the present embodiment) and the result notification effect.

However, in the case of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, as explained using FIGS. 217(b) and 218, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode as the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. When the winning lottery is won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game round. , If the player recognizes that the high-frequency support mode has ended before the result notification effect is executed, the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery of the game time is passed through the result notification effect. In addition, it is possible to recognize from the operating state of the electric accessory 34a. In this case, it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation or a sense of urgency by the battle effect and the result notification effect. Specifically, when the game production in the high-probability mode has continued 100 times or more and in the high-frequency support mode, when the battle production is started, the player character and the enemy side Although it is not known until the result announcement which of the characters will win (that is, it is not known until the result announcement whether the winning lottery is a big hit or the falling lottery), but the player is By recognizing that the high-frequency support has ended during the period during which the battle production is being executed, the player character will lose the battle this time (win the fall lottery). I can predict. This is the subject of Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 219 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when a jackpot is won in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the probability variation jackpot is won by winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high-probability mode, and then the 120th game executed after the high-frequency support mode is started. FIG. 219 shows a case where the big hit is won in the winning lottery by the times and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode. The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is a reference example for comparison with the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

In the 120th game time in which the big hit is obtained in the winning lottery, the battle effect is executed, and then the victory effect in which the player character wins is executed as the result announcement effect. At the timing when the 120th game time when the big hit is started, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, when the 120th game time when the big hit is ended, and when the opening/closing execution mode is started ( That is, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing (immediately after the notification effect is finished as a result of victory). In other words, when the number of games played in the high-probability mode is continuously executed more than the guaranteed number of games (100 times), and when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing of transition to the mode is the timing when the jackpot winning game times are finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started (see FIG. 218). The difference is that it is the timing to start the game times when the jackpot is won.

The pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is the same as the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in terms of the rest. In other words, when the falling lottery is won before the number of game times in the high-probability mode reaches 100, the same operation as that shown in FIG. 213 is performed, and before the number of game times in the high-probability mode reaches 100. When the jackpot is won in the lottery, the same operation as that shown in FIG. 214 is performed, and when the falling lottery is won when the game times in the high-probability mode continue 100 times or more, it is shown in FIG. 217. Performs the same operation as the operation.

Comparing FIG. 217(b) and FIG. 219, it can be seen that the change mode of the support mode is the same in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game time. For this reason, the player cannot recognize the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery of the 120th game time from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 206) before the result notification effect is executed. Can not. That is, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of the result notification effect (whether the winning effect or the defeat effect) to be executed thereafter during the execution of the battle effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 can solve the above-described problems of Comparative Example 1.

<<D4-2>> Outline of processing by the pachinko machine 10:
Next, an outline of processing in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 in that the main display section 45 has a startup display section 39a and performs processing for turning on/off the startup display section 39a. , The rest are the same. The outline of the process of turning on/off the display unit 39a at the time of startup will be described.

FIG. 220 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process in the case where the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first wins the falling lottery after being activated. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the previous operation, when the lottery mode remains the high-probability mode and the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (power is turned off) (timing t11), When the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (power is turned on) (timing t12), the high probability mode is taken over as the lottery mode. Similarly, in the support mode, the state when the power is turned off is inherited when the power is turned on. In addition, the remaining number of guaranteed games is carried over. Hereinafter, the fact that the lottery mode, the support mode, and the remaining number of guaranteed games are inherited is also simply referred to as “the game state is inherited”. Then, when the high-probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display unit 39a is turned on at the power-on timing t12.

FIG. 220 shows a case where after the power is turned on, the high-frequency support mode is started and the falling lottery is won in the 60th game cycle executed, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. The “60th time” mentioned here is the number of times the game has been executed since the high-frequency support mode was started, and is based on a game number counter PNC, which will be described later and continues counting from the previous operation. At the timing t13 when the 60th game time that wins the falling lottery is started, the startup display unit 39a is turned off.

Further, at the timing t13, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode continues to the high-frequency support mode. Although not shown, the battle effect is started to be executed at timing t13, and after the battle effect is finished, the result notification effect (defeat effect) is performed. That is, the manners of changes in the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode at the timing t13 when the fall lottery is won in the 60th game executed are the fall prizes of Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 213(b). Same as time.

FIG. 221 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing when the jackpot is first won after the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is activated. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the example of FIG. 220, a case where the game state is taken over when the power is turned on is shown in FIG. 221. Then, as in the example of FIG. 220, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is turned on at the timing t22 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 220, the falling lottery was won in the 60th game round, but in the example shown in FIG. 221, the jackpot lottery was won in the 60th game round. There is. At the timing t23 when the 60th game time of the big hit is started, the startup display unit 39a is turned off. The jackpot winning referred to here may be either a case where the probability variation jackpot is won or a case where the ordinary jackpot is won.

Although not shown, at this timing t23, the battle effect is started to be executed, and after the battle effect is finished, the victory effect is executed as the result notification effect. The lottery mode is switched from the high-probability mode at a timing t24 when the opening and closing execution mode is started after the 60th game time in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery is finished (that is, the timing immediately after the presentation of the result of the victory is finished). Along with the transition to the low probability mode, the support mode transitions from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. That is, the manner of change in the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode when the jackpot is won in the 60th game time is the same as that in the jackpot winning of Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG.

FIG. 222 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process in the case where the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first wins the falling lottery after starting. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, similarly to the examples of FIGS. 220 and 221, a case where the game state is taken over when the power is turned on is shown in FIG. 222. Then, as in the example of FIGS. 220 and 221, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display unit 39a is turned on at the timing t32 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 220, the falling lottery was won in the 60th game executed before reaching the guaranteed game count, but in the example shown in FIG. 222, after the guaranteed game count is reached. He has won the falling lottery at the 120th game run. At the timing t33 when the 120th game time that wins this falling lottery is started, the startup display section 39a is turned off.

Although not shown, at this timing t33, the battle effect is started to be executed, and after the battle effect is finished, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect. Also, at this timing t33, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. That is, the mode of change of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode when the fall lottery is won in the 120th game time executed is the same as that in the fall prize shown in FIG. 217.

FIG. 223 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process when the jackpot is first won after the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is activated. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the example of FIG. 222, a case where the game state is taken over when the power is turned on is shown in FIG. 223. Then, similarly to the example of FIG. 222, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display section 39a is turned on at the timing t42 when the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 222, the falling lottery was won at the 120th game time, but in the example shown in FIG. 223, the jackpot lottery is won at the 120th game time. .. At the timing t43 when the 120th game time when the big hit is started, the startup display section 39a is turned off.

Although not shown, at this timing t43, the execution of the battle effect is started, and after the end of the battle effect, the victory effect is executed as the result notification effect. Further, at this timing t43, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the 120th game cycle in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery is finished, and the opening/closing execution mode is started (that is, the winning cycle). At time t44 immediately after the result notification presentation is finished) t44, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the manner of change in the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the 120th game cycle is the same as that of the big hit in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG. 219.

In summary, according to the pachinko machine 10 that executes the processing described above, when the game state of the previous operation is inherited when the power is turned on, and the winning lottery or winning lottery is won after the startup display unit 39a is turned on. In addition, at the timing when the selected game time is started, the startup display section 39a is immediately turned off. This is the same in the case of winning the winning lottery or winning lottery in the game times before reaching the guaranteed playing times, and winning the falling lottery or winning lottery in the gaming times after reaching the guaranteed playing times. The start-up display unit 39a is turned off immediately at the timing when the selected game time is started. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the startup display unit 39a is turned on when the power is turned on, when the player wins the falling lottery or the winning lottery in the 60th game time or the 120th game time, the player Thus, it is possible to prevent the type of the result notification effect (whether victory effect or defeat effect) to be executed after that from being predicted during the execution of the battle effect from the timing when the display unit 39a at the time of startup is turned off. ..

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above, as can be seen from the comparison between FIG. 213(b) and FIG. 214, in the period from the start to the end of the 60th game time, it is possible to win the fall lottery. The mode of change of the lottery mode is different from that when the jackpot is won in the lottery. In addition, as can be seen from a comparison between FIG. 217(b) and FIG. 219, even during the period from the start to the end of the 120th game cycle, which is the winning game cycle, the jackpot in the case where the falling lottery is won and the winning lottery The mode of change in the lottery mode is different from that in the case of winning. In other words, in the period from the start to the end of the winning game times, the win is in the high-probability mode when the jackpot is won, whereas it is in the low-probability mode when the fall is won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, when a general so-called morning lamp is adopted, the timing of transition of the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (timing t13 of FIG. 220, timing t24 of FIG. 221, FIG. It is conceivable that the morning lamp is turned off at the timing t33 of 222 and the timing t44 of FIG. 223). According to this configuration, in the case of falling prize, the morning lamp is extinguished at the timing when the falling winning game times are started, and in the case of jackpot winning, the morning lamp is turned off at the timing when the jackpot winning game times are ended. It will be turned off. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode from the lighting/extinguishing state of the first lamp in the morning before the result notification effect is executed. That is, according to this configuration, the player can predict the type of the result notification effect (whether the winning effect or the defeat effect) to be executed thereafter during the execution of the battle effect. Therefore, according to the configuration of the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 in which the first lamp is simply provided in the morning, an expectation and a tense feeling about the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 60th game time and the 120th game time, the battle production. In some cases, it may not be given to the player depending on the result notification effect.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the 60th game time before the guaranteed game number is reached, and the 120th game time after the guaranteed game number is reached. In either case of winning the falling lottery or winning the big hit in the winning lottery, the starting time display section 39a is turned off at the timing when the winning game time is started. A production that suppresses the player from predicting whether the winning of the falling lottery or the big hit in the winning lottery is predicted from the lighting/lighting-out state of the part 39a, and gives an expectation and a sense of tension to the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. With the (battle effect in the present embodiment) and the result announcement effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tenseness.

Furthermore, as compared with the case where the player recognizes whether he or she has won the falling lottery or the big hit in the winning lottery through the lighting/unlit state of the start-up display unit 39a, the winning of the falling lottery through the production In order to make the player recognize whether or not the big hit is won in the winning lottery, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tense over a relatively long period of time by giving the effect a time width. It is possible. In addition, in the production, as a series of productions, the production elements that suggest that the jackpot is highly likely to be won and the production elements that suggest that the chances of winning the falling lottery are high are appropriately combined. By executing, it is possible to add intonation to the expectation of the player. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

<<D5>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sd0101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sd0102.

In step Sd0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sd0103.

In step Sd0103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter C4, and the electric accessory release counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter C4, and the electric accessory opening counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and the respective counter values have reached the maximum values. In each case, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sd0104.

In step Sd0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step Sd0104 will be described later. After executing step Sd0104, the process proceeds to step Sd0105.

In step Sd0105, a through-ball entry process accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entering process in step Sd0105 will be described later. After executing step Sd0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 224: Sd0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sd0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entering ball) is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sd0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sd0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0202 and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sd0203.

In step Sd0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sd0204.

In step Sd0204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sd0209.

When it is determined in step Sd0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Sd0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0205 and whether the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 or not. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sd0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sd0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0206 and the payout controller 70 pays out four game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sd0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sd0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sd0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sd0208.

In step Sd0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sd0209.

In step Sd0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Sd0204 or step Sd0208 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sd0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sd0209: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0209 that the startup pending number N is less than the upper limit value (Sd0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0210, where 1 is added to the startup pending number N of the corresponding pending area, and then the process proceeds to step Sd0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sd0212.

In step Sd0212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 updated in step Sd0103 (FIG. 224) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reserved area. The data is stored in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sd0210. Specifically, when the first startup pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 updated in step Sd0103 are set. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sd0210. When the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 updated in step Sd0103 are set to the respective values. , The first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sd0210. After executing Step Sd0212, the process proceeds to Step Sd0213.

In step Sd0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 (holding information), and the winning lottery determination result (lottery result) This is a process of performing a determination such as the type, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the result of determination of whether or not the lottery has fallen (lottery result), before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sd0213, the process proceeds to Step Sd0214.

In step Sd0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter C4 is set as a hold command. To do.

The hold command is based on the hold information mainly indicating the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the determination result based on the hold information acquired based on the entering ball. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm before being targeted for the winning lottery by the control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 228: step Sd0505) of the normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 indicates the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the hold number. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 displays the hold number of the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in response to the increase in the number of hold.

After executing step Sd0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 225: Sd0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process, based on the hold information, the determination result of the winning lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach, the falling lottery determination This is a process to be executed before the main control device 60 is targeted for the winning lottery.

In step Sd0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the entrance processing for the starting opening (FIG. 225) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball Alternatively, by grasping whether or not the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sd0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sd0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0303, and the win/loss table is stored. The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sd0308, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sd0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time (Sd0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0304, and the current entry is performed. The value of the falling random number counter C4 stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery by referring to the falling hit determination table stored in the falling hit determination table storage area 63d.

When it is determined in step Sd0305 that the player has won the falling lottery (Sd0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0306, the falling winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f, and the process proceeds to step Sd0303. In step Sd0303, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to as described above. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0308, and as a result of referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

When it is determined in step Sd0305 that the falling lottery has not been won (Sd0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0307. In step Sd0307, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot, as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd0308, and as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sd0308, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sd0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0309, and the value is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sd0310 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sd0310, the process proceeds to step Sd0311.

In step Sd0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sd0311 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sd0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0312 to store the probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination process result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sd0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the destination determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sd0308, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sd0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0314, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sd0315 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step Sd0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sd0316 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (Sd0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0316 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sd0316: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 224: Sd0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sd0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sd0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sd0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sd0401: NO), the entry process for this through is ended.

When it is determined in step Sd0402 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sd0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0403, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sd0404.

In step Sd0404, the value of the electric auditors product release counter C5 updated in step Sd0103 (FIG. 224) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sd0402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sd0402: NO), that is, when the value of the accessory holding number SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C5.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sd0501, a start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sd0502.

In step Sd0502, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64e set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high probability mode flag is ON, the lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the high probability mode flag is OFF, the lottery mode is not the high probability mode, that is, the low probability mode. In this embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON when the opening/closing execution mode related to the probability variation jackpot winning is ended, and is turned OFF when the regular jackpot is subsequently won or the falling lottery is won.

If it is determined in step Sd0502 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sd0502: YES), the process advances to step Sd0503 and the startup display section 39a provided in the main display section 45 is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sd0504, and the startup display unit flag is turned on. The startup display unit flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the startup display unit 39a is lit, and is stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. In response to the start-up display unit 39a being turned on in step Sd0503, the start-up display unit flag is turned on in step Sd0504. After executing Step Sd0504, the process proceeds to Step Sd0505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0502 that the high probability mode is not set (Sd0502: NO), the process immediately proceeds to step Sd0505.

In step Sd0505, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step Sd0505, the process proceeds to step Sd0506.

In step Sd0506, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sd0507.

In step Sd0507, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sd0508. In step Sd0508, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sd0508, the process proceeds to Step Sd0509.

In step Sd0509, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sd0510.

In step Sd0510, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sd0511.

In step Sd0511, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step Sd0505). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sd0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of this normal processing (Sd0511: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sd0512 and Sd0513. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sd0512, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sd0513, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sd0511: YES), the process returns to step Sd0505, and the processes from step Sd0505 to step Sd0510 are performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Sd0505 to step Sd0510 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 228: Sd0508).

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the game number control processing. In step Sd0601, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Sd0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Sd0601: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any of the processing from step Sd0602. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sd0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0602.

In step Sd0602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is displaying a variation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag of the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step Sd0602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (Sd0602: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps Sd0603 to Sd0606. In step Sd0603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sd0603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Sd0603: YES), the present game number control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0603 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Sd0603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0604.

In step Sd0604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sd0605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sd0605, a game state determination process for determining the game state is executed. Specifically, the game state determination processing determines whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The gaming state, which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, is hereinafter also referred to as "high-probability/high-support state". As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to execute a specific effect in the game times in the high-accuracy/high-support state, it is determined whether the high-precision/high-support state is in effect. Details of the game state determination processing will be described later. After executing step Sd0605, the process proceeds to step Sd0606.

In step Sd0606, fluctuation start processing for starting variable display on the main display unit 45 and variable display on the liquid crystal display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sd0606, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sd0602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (Sd0602: YES), the process proceeds to the game times progress process of steps Sd0607 to Sd0611.

In step Sd0607, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sd0607, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 232: Sd0903) described later. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step Sd0607 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sd0607: NO), the flow advances to step Sd0608 to execute fluctuation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing step Sd0608, the game number control process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sd0607 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sd0607: YES), the flow advances to step Sd0609 to execute fluctuation end processing. The variation end process is performed by changing the symbol display unit so that the symbol display mode determined in the variation start process (FIG. 232) described later to be displayed on the symbol display unit is displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game time. Display control. Then, it progresses to step Sd0610.

In step Sd0610, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-frequency support mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64e set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is the high frequency support mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, that is, the low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned on after completion of the opening/closing execution mode described later (see step Sd1504 in FIG. 238).

When it is determined in step Sd0610 that the high-frequency support mode is set (Sd0610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0611, and the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the remaining guaranteed game number guaranteed in the high frequency support mode. The game number counter PNC has a value of 100 set in advance in step Sd1505 of FIG. 238 described later. After executing Step Sd0611, the process proceeds to Step Sd0612. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd0610 that the high frequency support mode is not set (Sd0610: NO), the game number control process is ended.

In step Sd0612, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd0612 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sd0612: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0613, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). Is reached (= within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. As described above, since the game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed game numbers, it is continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of game times is before reaching the guaranteed game number.

When it is determined in step Sd0613 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sd0613: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Sd0614 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing Step Sd0614, the process proceeds to Step Sd0615.

In step Sd0615, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After executing step Sd0615, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0613 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Sd0613: YES), the game count control process is immediately ended without executing steps Sd0614 and Sd0615. Also, when it is determined in step Sd0612 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sd0612: YES), the game time control process is immediately ended.

According to the processing from step Sd0612 to step Sd0615 described above, when the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, but the number of games is 100. Even after reaching the number of times, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, it is realized that the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 229: Sd0604).

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Sd0701, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold quantity RbN held and stored in the second hold area Rb is “0”. When it is determined in step Sd0701 that the second start pending number RbN is “0” (Sd0701: YES), the data setting process for the first symbol display portion in steps Sd0702 to Sd0707 is executed, while When it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not "0" (Sd0701: NO), the data setting process for the second symbol display unit of steps Sd0708 to Sd0713 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total reserved number CRN is 1 or more as described with reference to FIG. 229 (see FIG. 229: Sd0603). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, hold information for variable display is stored for the second symbol display portion 37b. If so, the data stored in the second hold area Rb is the target of this data setting process regardless of whether the first startup hold number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the holding information is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting opening 34 has priority. To be done.

In step Sd0702, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sd0703, where the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sd0704. In step Sd0704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sd0705.

In step Sd0705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sd0705, the process proceeds to step Sd0706.

In step Sd0706, if the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the current variable display is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sd0707.

In step Sd0707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sd0707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of hold, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

When it is determined in step Sd0701 that the second startup hold number RbN is not "0" (Sd0701: NO), as described above, the data setting process for the second symbol display portion in steps Sd0708 to Sd0713 is executed. To do.

In step Sd0708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Sd0709. In step Sd0709, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and in step Sd0710, the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sd0711.

In step Sd0711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sd0711, the process proceeds to step Sd0712.

In step Sd0712, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sd0713.

In step Sd0713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sd0713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90 instructs the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the received shift time command in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Game state determination processing>
Next, the game state determination processing will be described. The game state determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 229: Sd0605) of the game time control processing.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the game state determination processing. In step Sd0801, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd0801 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sd0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0802, and it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd0802 that the high frequency support mode is set (Sd0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd0803, and the high accuracy/high support flag is turned on. The high-probability/high-support flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the gaming state (high-probability/high-support state). And is stored in various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy/high support flag is ON, the high accuracy/high support state is set. When the high-precision/high-support flag is OFF, it is not in the high-precision/high-support state. According to step Sd0803, it is possible for the MPU 62 to specify the determination result as to whether or not the game state determination process is in the high-accuracy/high-support state. After executing step Sd0803, the process advances to step Sd0804.

In step Sd0804, a high-accuracy/high-support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that it is in the high-precision/high-support state, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sd0804, the game state determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0801 that the high probability mode is not set (Sd0801:NO) or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not set in step Sd0802 (Sd0802:NO), steps Sd0803 and Sd0804 are not executed. , The game state determination process ends.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 229: Sd0606) of the game time control processing.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sd0901, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sd0902.

In step Sd0902, a winning determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sd0902, the process proceeds to Step Sd0903.

In step Sd0903, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sd0903, the process advances to Step Sd0904.

In step Sd0904, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sd0904 that the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Sd0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd0905 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, and the occurrence of the reach is generated. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sd0903 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd0904 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sd0904: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sd0906 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, and the occurrence of the reach is also included. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sd0903 are included. After executing step Sd0905 or step Sd0906, the process proceeds to step Sd0907.

In step Sd0907, the type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in steps Sd0905 to Sd0907 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Sd0907, the process proceeds to Step Sd0908.

In step Sd0908, the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing step Sd0908, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Fall determination processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 232: Sd0901).

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step Sd1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd1001 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sd1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1002 to determine whether the lottery is falling. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling random number counter C4 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the falling win in the falling hit judgment table of the falling hit judgment table storage area 63d. judge. When it is determined in step Sd1002 that the player has won the falling lottery (Sd1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1003 to turn off the high probability mode flag. Then, it progresses to step Sd1004.

In step Sd1004, it is determined whether or not the startup display unit 39a is lit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the startup display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is turned on.

When it is determined in step Sd1004 that the startup display unit flag is ON (Sd1004: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1005, and the startup display unit 39a provided in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1006, and the startup display unit flag is turned off. After executing step Sd1006, the process proceeds to step Sd1007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1004 that the startup display flag is OFF (Sd1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1007 without executing steps Sd1005 and Sd1006.

In step Sd1007, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is before (=within the guaranteed game number) the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sd1007 that the value of the guaranteed game count counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sd1007: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game count, the process proceeds to step Sd1008, and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step Sd1009, and the low frequency support command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After executing step Sd1009, the fall determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sd1007, if it is determined that the number of guaranteed games is not reached (Sd1007: YES), the fall determination process is immediately ended. If it is determined in step Sd1001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sd1001: NO), or if it is determined in step Sd1002 that the falling lottery is not won (Sd1002: NO), the game time control process is immediately ended. ..

By the fall determination process configured as described above, the lottery mode at timing t13 in FIG. 220, the support mode, and fluctuations in turning on/off of the startup display unit, and the lottery mode at time t33 in FIG. 222, the support mode. , And fluctuations in turning on/off of the display unit at startup are realized. In particular, at the timing t13 of FIG. 220, the high frequency support mode is continued even though the player has won the fall, and when it is determined in step Sd1007 that the guaranteed game count is not reached, steps Sd1008 and Sd1009 are not executed. It is realized by

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 232: Sd0902).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sd1101, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd1101 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sd1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1102, and the win/fail determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning probability table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 210(b). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Sd1104.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1101 that the high probability mode is not set (Sd1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1103, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the low probability mode win/loss table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 210(a). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Sd1104.

In step Sd1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Sd1102 or step Sd1103 is a big win. In step Sd1104, if the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sd1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1105.

In step Sd1105, it is determined whether or not the startup display unit 39a is lit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the startup display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is turned on.

When it is determined in step Sd1105 that the startup display unit flag is ON (Sd1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1106, and the startup display unit 39a provided in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1107, and the startup display unit flag is turned off. After executing step Sd1107, the process proceeds to step Sd1108. If it is determined in step Sd1105 that the startup display unit flag is OFF (Sd1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1108 without executing steps Sd1106 and Sd1107.

In step Sd1108, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd1108 that the high frequency support mode is set (Sd1108: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1109, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). ) Is reached (= within the guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Sd1109 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sd1109: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Sd1110 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step Sd1111, and the low frequency support command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After executing step Sd1111, the process proceeds to step Sd1112.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1108 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sd1108: NO), or if it is determined in step Sd1109 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Sd1109: YES), the process immediately proceeds to step Sd1112.

By the processes from step Sd1104 to step Sd1111 described above, the lottery mode at timing t23 in FIG. 221, the support mode, and fluctuations in turning on/off of the display unit 39a at startup, and the lottery mode at timing t43 in FIG. 223, support. Variations in mode and lighting/extinguishing of the display at startup are realized. That is, at the timing t23 of FIG. 221 and the timing t43 of FIG. 223, it is realized by step Sd1104 to step Sd1107 that the startup display unit 39a is turned off although the big hit is won. At timing t43 in FIG. 223, the low-frequency support mode is shifted to in spite of winning the big hit by executing steps Sd1110 and Sd1111 when it is determined in step Sd1109 that it is not within the guaranteed game count. To be done.

In subsequent steps Sd1112 to Sd1119, processing for setting a game result and processing for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step Sd1112, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sd1112 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sd1112: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1113, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 211(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, in step Sd1112, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sd1112: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1114, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 211(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot or the 8R certainty jackpot. After executing the processing of step Sd1113 or step Sd1114, the process proceeds to step Sd1115.

In step Sd1115, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is a probability varying jackpot. When it is determined in step Sd1115 that the game result is a probability variation big hit (Sd1115: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1116.

In step Sd1116, a stop result setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game times that will be won for the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sd1116, the process proceeds to step Sd1117.

In step Sd1117, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is set, and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is set. After executing step Sd1117, the hit determination process ends.

If it is determined in step Sd1115 that the type of jackpot distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is not a probability variation jackpot (Sd1115: NO), that is, if the type of distributed jackpot is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sd1118.

In step Sd1118, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot, in the current game time to win the normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b fluctuates in the state of displaying any stop result This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 can be obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sd1118, the process proceeds to step Sd1119.

In step Sd1119, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Sd1113 or step Sd1114 is turned on. Specifically, the 16R normal big hit flag is turned ON when the 16R normal big hit is made, and the 8R normal big hit flag is turned ON when the 8R normal big hit is made. After executing step Sd1119, the hit determination process ends.

In step Sd1104, when the result of the winning lottery in step Sd1102 or step Sd1103 is not a big hit (Sd1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1120, and a stop result setting process for out-of-range is executed. With the stop result setting process for the time of disengagement, in the current game time that is the disengagement result, the variable display is ended in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for out-of-range in the stop result table storage area 63f. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sd1120, the hit determination process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 232: Sd0903).

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step Sd1201, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sd1202.

In step Sd1202, it is determined whether the high-accuracy/high-support state is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy/high-support flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the high accuracy/high support flag is a flag that is turned on in step Sd0803 of FIG. 231. When it is determined in step Sd1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is not ON (Sd1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1203.

In step Sd1203, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in this game time. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON, it is determined that a reach occurs (Sd1203: YES). , And proceeds to step Sd1204. Further, even when none of the above flags is ON, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, the reach occurs. After making a determination (Sd1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1204. When the presence/absence of reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sd1204, the fluctuation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sd1203 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Sd1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1205 and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63e is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the total pending number CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN may be used, and the smaller the number of total reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good.

Next, when it is determined in step Sd1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is ON (Sd1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1206.

In step Sd1206, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won (big hit), the falling lottery is won, and a reach occurs in this game time. Specifically, i) the probability variation jackpot flag of each flag storage area 64e is ON, ii) the normal jackpot flag of each flag storage area 64e is ON, and iii) the fall stored in the execution area AE The value of the random number counter C4 agrees with the value set as the falling prize in the falling hit judgment table of the falling hit judgment table storage area 63d, iV) of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE. If at least one of the value corresponding to the occurrence of reach is satisfied, an affirmative decision is made in step Sd1206. In the description of the present embodiment and its modified example, “winning the winning lottery” means winning the jackpot in the winning lottery.

When it is determined in step Sd1206 that at least one of the jackpot win, the fall win, and the reach occurrence (Sd1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1207, and the battle stored in the variable time table storage area 63e. The variation time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for the result notification presentation. The fluctuation time stored in the battle result notification effect fluctuation time table is the time required to perform both the battle effect and the result notification effect. The battle effect is the effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a). The result notification effect is the defeat effect illustrated in FIG. 215(b), the victory effect illustrated in FIG. 215(c), or the draw effect. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation time table for the battle result announcement effect is set to a fixed length.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, the variation time stored in the battle result announcement production variation time table is used in the case of performing the victory effect as the result announcement effect, the case of performing the defeat effect, and the case of performing the draw effect. It may be different. In this case, the time occupied by the result notification effect in the variable time is configured differently depending on whether the win effect is performed, the defeat effect is performed, or the draw effect is performed. Specifically, in the case of winning production, the excitement of winning can be enhanced by lengthening the variation time so that the time of the result notification occupies becomes longer than in the case of losing production or draw production.

After executing step Sd1207, the process proceeds to step Sd1209, and the high-accuracy/high-support flag in the various flag storage areas 64e is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the variation time information acquired in step Sd1207 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1206 that none of the jackpot win, the fall win, and the reach occurrence (Sd1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1208, and the deviation stored in the variable time table storage area 63e is lost. The variation time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for time performance. In the present embodiment, the variation time stored in the out-of-direction production variation time table is a high-precision/high-support state, but does not correspond to any of jackpot winning, falling winning, and reach occurrence. It is the time required to perform, and is set to a fixed time. In the present embodiment, the variation time stored in the off-time production variation time table is set to be shorter than the variation time stored in the battle result notification production variation time table.

After executing step Sd1208, the process advances to step Sd1209 to turn off the high accuracy/high support flag of the various flag storage areas 64e. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step Sd1210, and the variation time information acquired in step Sd1208 is set in the variation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal processing subroutine (FIG. 228: Sd0509).

FIG. 236 is an explanatory diagram showing a game state transition process. In step Sd1301, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. In step Sd1301, when it is determined that it is not in the open/close execution mode (Sd1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1302, and the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b of one game time is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. In step Sd1302, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is ended (Sd1302; NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sd1302, when it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display ends (Sd1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1303, and the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (Sd1303: NO), this game state transition processing is ended.

If it is determined in step Sd1303 that any of the above flags is ON (Sd1303: YES), the flow advances to step Sd1304 to execute round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode. To do. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sd1304, the process proceeds to step Sd1305.

In step Sd1305, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. When it is determined in step Sd1305 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag (Sd1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1306, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 are provided. "16" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1305 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag (Sd1305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1307 and various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the. After executing step Sd1306 or step Sd1307, the process proceeds to step Sd1308.

In step Sd1308, the high-probability mode flags in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd1309, and the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is turned off.

After executing step Sd1309, the flow advances to step Sd1310 to set an opening command. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step Sd1310, the present game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Sd1301 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Sd1301: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sd1311, and the special winning opening/closing processing is executed. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or more than "1", and the big winning is achieved. The mouth 36a is opened. Further, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning award drive is performed on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has entered. The driving state of the portion 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sd1311, the process proceeds to Step Sd1312.

In step Sd1312, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sd1312: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Sd1312: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1313 and the ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sd0505 in the normal process (FIG. 228). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step Sd1313, the process proceeds to step Sd1314.

In step Sd1314, a transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed. The transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes of game times after the current opening/closing execution mode is ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described later. After executing Step Sd1314, the process proceeds to Step Sd1315.

In step Sd1315, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sd1316, and the ending process of the open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, if the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 16 normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag are ON, these flags are turned OFF, and if these flags are not ON, that state To maintain. After executing step Sd1316, the present game state transition processing ends.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 236: Sd1311) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing process. In step Sd1401, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Sd1401 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (Sd1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1402, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step Sd1402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (Sd1402: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (Sd1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1403.

In step Sd1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sd1403 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Sd1403: NO), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1403 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (Sd1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1404, and the variable winning drive unit is opened to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step Sd1405.

In step Sd1405, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all the winning modes that have been set are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the ball entering counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Note that if the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency entrance mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and the entrance counter area PC is set. You may set "6". After executing step Sd1405, the process advances to step Sd1406.

In step Sd1406, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. The command output process (FIG. 228: Step Sd0505) is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of the release. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round is started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the display content on the liquid crystal display device 41 indicates that the special winning opening 36a is opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

When it is determined in step Sd1401 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step Sd1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1407, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sd1407 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (Sd1407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1408.

In step Sd1408, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step Sd1408 that no ball has entered (Sd1408: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1408 that a ball has entered (Sd1408: YES), the flow advances to step Sd1409 to subtract 1 from the value of the ball entry counter area PC. Then, it progresses to step Sd1410.

In step Sd1410, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step Sd1410 that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is not "0" (Sd1410: NO), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sd1407 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (Sd1407: YES), or when it is determined in step Sd1410 that the value of the entrance counter area PC is “0”. (Sd1410: YES), proceeds to step Sd1411, and executes a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step Sd1412.

In step Sd1412, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sd1413, and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step Sd1413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Sd1413: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sd1413: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step Sd1414, the process advances to step Sd1415 to set a close command. After that, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed, and the normal process In the command output process (FIG. 228: Step Sd0505) of FIG. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect content on the liquid crystal display device 41 indicates that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has ended. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.

<Transition process when the open/close execution mode ends>
Next, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 236: Sd1314) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the transition processing when the open/close execution mode ends. In step Sd1501, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit is turned on in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd1501 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Sd1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1502, and a flag erasing process is executed. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for identifying the game state. Specifically, if the open/close execution mode flag, the high-probability mode flag, and the high-frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if these flags are not ON, the states are maintained. To do. After executing step Sd1502, the process proceeds to step Sd1503.

In step Sd1503, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then in step Sd1504, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Then, it progresses to step Sd1505.

In step Sd1505, 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step Sd1506.

In step Sd1506, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Sd1510.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1501 that the 16R normal jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON in the RAM 64 (Sd1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1507, and the flag erasing process is executed. Then, it progresses to step Sd1508.

In step Sd1508, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sd1509, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sd1510.

In step Sd1510, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode ends.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The electric power support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 228: Sd0510).

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sd1601, it is determined whether or not it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sd1601 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sd1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1602.

In step Sd1602, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sd1602 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sd1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1603.

In step Sd1603, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sd1603 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1603: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sd1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1604.

In step Sd1604, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sd1604 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sd1604: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sd1605, and after the deviation display is set, the main electric power support processing is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1604 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sd1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1606.

In step Sd1606, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Sd1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is “0” (Sd1606: NO), the processing for main electric power support is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0” (Sd1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1607.

In step Sd1607, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sd1608 and it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sd1607 (Sd1607: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Sd1608 (Sd1608: YES), the flow advances to step Sd1609 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sd1610.

In step Sd1610, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sd1609 is support win. When it is determined in step Sd1610 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sd1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1611, the support winning flag is turned on, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1610 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (Sd1610: NO), the process for supporting electric power is ended without executing the process of step Sd1611.

When it is determined in step Sd1607 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Sd1607: YES), or when it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Sd1608 (Sd1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1612 and the electric auditors item release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Sd1613.

In step Sd1613, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sd1612 is support win. When it is determined in step Sd1613 that the support is not won (Sd1613: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1613 that the support is won (Sd1613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1614, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sd1602 that the support winning flag is ON (Sd1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1615, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sd1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1615: NO), the pattern change display in the universal figure unit 38 is being performed, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sd1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1616.

In step Sd1616, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sd1617 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sd1601 that the in-support flag is ON (Sd1601: YES), the flow advances to step Sd1618 to execute electric role opening/closing control processing for opening/closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric-role combination opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 239: Sd1618) of the electric-role combination support process.

FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step Sd1701, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Sd1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1702.

In step Sd1702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sd1702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sd1702: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Sd1702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sd1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1703, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step Sd1703, the process advances to step Sd1704.

In step Sd1704, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step Sd1705, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Sd1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (Sd1705: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sd1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1706 to turn off the support flag. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Sd1701 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sd1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1707, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sd1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sd1707: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sd1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1708, and an opening process for controlling the electric auditors' product 34a to the open state is executed. . Then, it progresses to step Sd1709.

In step Sd1709, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sd1709: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sd1710 to determine whether the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step Sd1710 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sd1710: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sd1711 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1709 that it is the open/close execution mode (Sd1709: YES), or when it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sd1710 (Sd1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1712 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

<<D6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the battle effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sd1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step Sd1801, the process proceeds to step Sd1802.

In step Sd1802, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sd1802, the process proceeds to step Sd1803.

In step Sd1803, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step Sd1802. After executing step Sd1803, the process proceeds to step Sd1804.

In step Sd1804, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step Sd1802. After executing step Sd1804, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 241: Sd1802).

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step Sd1901, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sd1901 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1902 and the hold command handling process is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step Sd1902, the process proceeds to step Sd1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1901 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1903 without executing step Sd1902.

In step Sd1903, it is determined whether the high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sd1903 that the high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1904, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is turned on. The sound light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag for specifying by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (see FIG. 212) whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. It is stored in the set various flag storage area 94e. Then, it progresses to step Sd1907.

If it is determined in step Sd1903 that the high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1903: NO), the flow advances to step Sd1905 to check whether the low-frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62. judge. If it is determined in step Sd1905 that the low-frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1905: YES), the flow advances to step Sd1906 to turn off the sound-light side high-frequency support mode flag. Then, it progresses to step Sd1907. If it is determined in step Sd1905 that the low-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1905: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sd1907.

In step Sd1907, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sd1907 that the variation command and the type command are received (Sd1907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1907 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sd1907: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sd1909.

In step Sd1908, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, a battle effect executed in the current game, a result notification effect, a stop design, a variable display pattern, etc. are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step Sd1908, the process proceeds to step Sd1909.

In step Sd1909, it is determined whether the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sd1909 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd1910 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the jackpot type included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Sd1911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1909 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1909: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1911 without executing step Sd1910.

In step Sd1911, it is determined whether the ending command is received. If it is determined in step Sd1911 that the ending command is received (Sd1911: YES), the process advances to step Sd1912 to execute the ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Sd1913. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd1911 that the ending command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sd1911: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd1913 without executing step Sd1912.

In step Sd1913, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the opening command and the effect contents corresponding to the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 242: Sd 1902 ).

FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step Sd2001, update processing at the time of entering a ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the first starting opening 33, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the second starting opening 34, A process for enabling the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of hold information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Sd2001 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as a “first hold number”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on entering a ball into the second starting opening 34 The number is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing step Sd2001, the process proceeds to step Sd2002.

In step Sd2002, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of pieces of the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 identified in step Sd2001 and the hold information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled based on the number. After executing step Sd2002, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 243: Sd2001) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the time of entering a ball. In step Sd2101, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. In step Sd2101, if it is determined that the hold command that is the current read target is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 (Sd2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2102. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing step Sd2102, the process proceeds to step Sd2104.

In step Sd2101, when it is determined that the hold command that is the current read target is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (Sd2101: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. When it is determined that the data is transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sd2103, and the update processing of the second holding number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is performed. Execute. The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command which is the current read target. After executing step Sd2103, the process advances to step Sd2104.

The reason why the processing in steps Sd2102 and Sd2103 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 holds the hold information. Is stored and held, the voice light emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step Sd2104, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved quantity counter area shows the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step Sd2104, the update process at the time of main entrance is ended.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 242: Sd1908) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. .. Hereinafter, a specific process of the effect setting process will be described.

In step Sd2201, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, and information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, the presence/absence of a falling win, the presence/absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time are grasped from the command. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sd2202.

In step Sd2202, it is determined whether a high-accuracy/high-support command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step Sd2202 that the high-accuracy/high-support command has been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd2202: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sd2203 to execute the high-accuracy/high-support time effect setting process. Details of the high-precision/high-support-time production setting process will be described later. After executing step Sd2203, the process proceeds to step Sd2205.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd2202 that the high-accuracy/high-support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sd2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2204.

In step Sd2204, a normal effect setting process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot effect, the reach effect, and the off effect in the game times in states other than the high-accuracy/high-support state are set according to the variation time of the game times. After executing step Sd2204, the process proceeds to step Sd2205.

In step Sd2205, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the process of setting the stop symbol, if the result of the winning lottery of the current game is 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, on the effective line L (see FIG. 207) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. If the result of the winning lottery of the current game is 16R normal big hit or 8R normal big hit, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing step Sd2205, the process proceeds to step Sd2206.

In step Sd2206, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, while identifying the information of the variation time of the current game time from the content of the variation command received this time, the combination of the information of the variation time and the information of the stop symbol identified in step Sd2205 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Sd2207.

In step Sd2207, the type information of the effect set in step Sd2203 or Sd2204 in the current game, the type information of the stop symbol set in step Sd2205, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in step Sd2206 are produced. Set in command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sd2208, and the effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step Sd2208, the process proceeds to step Sd2209, after performing the update process at the start of fluctuation, the effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<High-definition/high-support production effect setting processing>
Next, the high-accuracy/high-support-time production setting process will be described. The high-probability/high-support-time production setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 245: Sd2203) of the production setting process.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the high precision/high support effect production setting process. In step Sd2301, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Sd2201 in FIG. 245. In step Sd2301, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are won. When it is determined in step Sd2301 that the probability variation big hit is won in the winning lottery by the current game (Sd2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2302.

In step Sd2302, battle effect/result notification effect setting processing is executed. Specifically, in this game time, the battle effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) and the victory effect illustrated in FIG. 215(c) are set to be executed together. After the battle production, the victory production is continuously executed. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined according to the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the battle result notification variation time table in FIG. 235. After executing step Sd2302, the high accuracy/high support time effect setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sd2301 that the probability variation jackpot due to the current game is not won (Sd2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2303.

In step Sd2303, it is determined whether or not a regular jackpot or a falling lottery has been won in the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of a big jackpot, the information on the jackpot type, and the information on the presence/absence of a falling win, which are grasped in step Sd2201 of FIG. 245. In step Sd2304, an affirmative determination is made when one of the 16R regular jackpot, the 8R regular jackpot, and the falling lottery is won. When it is determined in step Sd2303 that the normal jackpot or the falling lottery is won in the current game (Sd2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2304.

In step Sd2304, battle effect/result notification effect setting processing is executed. Specifically, in the current game, the battle effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) and the defeat effect illustrated in FIG. 215(b) are set to be executed together. After the battle production, the defeat production is executed continuously. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined according to the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the battle result notification variation time table in FIG. 235. The process of step Sd2304 is the same process as step Sd2302, and differs from the process of step Sd2302 in that it is a winning effect, but is a defeat effect. After executing step Sd2304, the high-accuracy/high-support-time production setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sd2303 that the normal jackpot or the falling lottery has not been won in the current game time (Sd2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2305.

In step Sd2305, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred in the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, which is grasped in step Sd2201 of FIG. 245. When it is determined in step Sd2305 that the reach has occurred in the current game time (Sd2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2306.

In step Sd2306, battle effect/result notification setting processing is executed. Specifically, in the current game, the battle effect and the draw effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) are set to be executed. After the battle production, the draw production is continuously executed. The draw effect is set to execute a draw effect in which the player character and the enemy character are drawn. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined according to the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the battle result notification variation time table in FIG. 235. After executing Step Sd2306, the high-accuracy/high-support-time production setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sd2305, when it is determined that the reach has not occurred in the current game time (Sd2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2307, and the off-time production setting process is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute an effect when none of the jackpot win, the fall win, and the reach occurrence. At the time of this setting, the effect time is determined according to the change time acquired on the main control device 60 side using the off time effect change time table in FIG. 235. After executing step Sd2307, the high-accuracy/high-support-time production setting process is ended.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The updating process at the start of the change is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 245: Sd2215) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sd2401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. When it is determined in step Sd2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (Sd2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd2402 and is stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the total reserved quantity is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sd2401 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (Sd2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd2403 and is stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the total reserved quantity is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sd2501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sd2502.

In step Sd2502, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sd2601, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and displayed on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sd2701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 249), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sd2701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop design set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode on the liquid crystal display. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Sd2702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sd2701) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sd2703.

In step Sd2703, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sd2702), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sd2704.

In step Sd2704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sd2703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information and, together with the drive signal, causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. After that, proceeding to step Sd2705, after performing other processing, the V interrupt processing is ended. Heretofore, an example of the specific control for executing the battle effect and the result notification effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the previous operation, when the lottery mode remains the high-probability mode and the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state, the power switch is then turned on. When 88 is switched from the off state to the on state, the high-probability mode is succeeded as the lottery mode. When the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state in the state where the high probability mode is succeeded, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, when the start-up display unit 39a is turned off, the player can be inferred that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10, the start-up display unit 39a is turned off at the start of the game time when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, so the guess of the player can be overturned. Specifically, by turning off the light, the player will be disappointed to guess that it has shifted to the low-probability mode, but in the winning lottery, the game times that won the jackpot will not actually shift to the low-probability mode. From there, it is possible to overturn the disappointing player's guess. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in both cases of winning the winning lottery (big hit) and playing the falling lottery, the game is started at the start of the winning game. Since the time display portion 39a is switched from the lit state to the unlit state, the player can infer from the lit/unlit state of the startup display portion 39a whether the game number is a winning lottery or the falling lottery. It can be suppressed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game times won in the falling lottery, the specific effect illustrated in FIG. 215(a) before the result notification effect (defeat effect) illustrated in FIG. 215(b). 215 of the same game as the case where the falling lottery is won before the result announcement effect (winning effect) illustrated in FIG. 215(c) in the game times in which the winning effect is won (big hit). Since the battle effect illustrated in (a) is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases is caused by the battle effect. In addition, as described above, at the start of the game round, the player can guess whether the game round has been won by the winning lottery or the game lot won by the falling lottery from the lighting/extinguishing state of the start-up display unit 39a. It can also be suppressed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency with a time width by the battle effect.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the player recognizes whether the winning lottery is won or the winning lottery is won (big hit) through the lighting/lighting-out state of the startup display section 39a, the player falls through the effect. When letting the player recognize whether the lottery has been won or the winning lottery has been won, the player is given a sense of expectation and tense over a relatively long period of time by giving the production a time range. It is possible. In addition, in the production, as a series of productions, the production elements that suggest that the jackpot is highly likely to be won and the production elements that suggest that the chances of winning the falling lottery are high are appropriately combined. By executing, it is possible to add intonation to the expectation of the player. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state and the high-probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is on, the startup display unit 39a. Lights up. Therefore, it is possible to make the player infer that the lighting/extinguishing state of the startup display section 39a is related to the lottery mode that specifies whether or not the high probability mode. Further, when the battle effect, which is a specific effect, is started, the startup display unit 39a is turned off, so that the execution of the battle effect is related to the lighting/unlit state of the startup display unit 39a. Can make someone guess. From both guesses, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the player guess that the execution of the specific effect and the lottery mode are related. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player, who has recognized the execution of the battle effect, an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding whether or not the lottery mode will shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state and the high-probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is on, the startup display unit 39a. Lights up. Therefore, when the start-up display unit 39a is turned off, the player can be inferred that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10, despite the start-up display unit 39a being turned off at the start of the game time corresponding to the hold information to be won (big hit) in the winning lottery, the winning lottery corresponding to the game time is selected. Since the game is executed in the high probability mode, the guess of the player can be overturned. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221 for FIG. 220 and FIG. 223 for FIG. 222, the timing at which the lottery mode switches from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is the number of games won in the falling lottery. And the number of times the winning lottery is won (big hit) is different, whereas the timing at which the display unit 39a at startup is switched from the lighting state to the unlit state is the number of games won in the falling lottery and the winning lottery. Matches with the game times. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the game number that was won in the falling lottery or the game number that was won in the winning lottery, based on the lit/unlit state of the display section 39a at startup. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state, the startup display unit 39a is lit when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Therefore, when the start-up display unit 39a is turned off, the player can be inferred that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times), the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. Upon the transition, the electric accessory 34a transitions to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, when the electric accessory 34a shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the player can infer that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the player is inferred that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, from both the fact that the display unit 39a at the time of startup is turned off and the electric accessory 34a is shifted to the low-frequency support mode. You can However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery after the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed game number. At the start of a turn, the player's guess can be overridden. Specifically, since the startup display unit 39a is turned off and the electric accessory 34a is switched to the low-frequency support mode, the player is discouraged by guessing that the low-probability mode has been entered, In the game times in which the big hit is won, since the low probability mode is not actually entered, it is possible to reverse the guess of the discouraged player. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the start-up display unit 39a is lit, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed game number (=guaranteed game number). In), the startup display unit 39a is the same at the start of the game times when the big hit or the fall is won, regardless of whether it is determined that the big hit is won in the winning lottery or if the fall lottery is won. It behaves (operation of turning on/off). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether the jackpot win or the fall win has occurred from the display mode of the startup display unit 39a. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is maintained as the support mode from the start of the game time to at least the end of the game time, regardless of whether it is a big hit or a fall win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether the jackpot win or the fall win has occurred from the behavior of the electric accessory 34a during the game. Therefore, during the period from the start of the game times within the guaranteed game times to the end of the game times, which of the jackpot win and the fall win was determined based on the display mode of the startup display unit 39a and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension for a relatively long time when the jackpot or the falling is won within the guaranteed game count, and as a result, the game is played. The interest in can be improved. Further, when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state and the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the startup display section 39a lights up. Therefore, when the start-up display unit 39a is turned off, the player can be inferred that the lottery mode has shifted from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the start-up display unit 39a switches from the lighting state to the extinguishing state at the start of the game time when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, so that the player's guess can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<<D7>> Modification of Fourth Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<D7-1>> Modification 1:
<Outline of Processing in Modification 1>
The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine in the first modification will be described first while showing the differences from the fourth embodiment. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the modified example 1 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same parts and components as those in the fourth embodiment are designated by the same names and reference numerals, and the outline of the processing is described. Will be explained.

FIG. 251 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when the jackpot is first won after activation in the pachinko machine of the first modification. FIG. 251 is a time chart corresponding to FIG. 221 of the fourth embodiment, and similarly to FIG. 221, shows a case where the game state is taken over when the power is turned on. Then, as in FIG. 221, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display unit 39a is turned on at the power-on timing t22.

In the example of FIG. 251, the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the 60th game time. At the timing t23 when the 60th game time of the big hit is started, the startup display unit 39a is turned off. This is the same as FIG. 221 in the fourth embodiment.

Although not shown, at this timing t23, the battle effect is started to be executed, and after the battle effect is finished, the victory effect is executed as the result notification effect. Further, at this timing t23, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, when the 60th game time in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery is started (timing t23), the start-up display unit 39a is turned off and the lottery mode is switched from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. The difference from the fourth embodiment is that the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at this timing t23.

FIG. 252 is a time chart illustrating another example of the processing when the jackpot is first won after the pachinko machine of the first modification is activated. FIG. 252 is a time chart corresponding to FIG. 223 in the fourth embodiment, and like FIG. 223, shows a case where the game state is taken over when the power is turned on. Then, as in FIG. 223, when the high probability mode is taken over when the power is turned on, the startup display unit 39a is turned on at the timing t42 when the power is turned on.

In the example of FIG. 252, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the 120th game time. At the timing t43 when the 120th game time when the big hit is started, the startup display section 39a is turned off. This is the same as FIG. 223 in the fourth embodiment.

Although not shown, at this timing t43, the execution of the battle effect is started, and after the end of the battle effect, the victory effect is executed as the result notification effect. Further, at this timing t43, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. That is, even when a big hit is won in the winning lottery at the 120th game time, the start-up display unit 39a is turned off and the lottery mode is started when the game time when the big hit is started (timing t43). Shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. It is different from the fourth embodiment in that the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at this timing t43.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the processing when the first falling lottery is won after starting is the same as that of the fourth embodiment. That is, when the falling lottery is won in the 60th game time after the high frequency support mode is started after the power is turned on, the same process as the time chart of FIG. 220 of the fourth embodiment is executed. After the power is turned on, when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game cycle executed after the high-frequency support mode is started, the same process as the time chart of FIG. 222 of the fourth embodiment is executed.

As can be seen from the outline of the above processing, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, when the high-probability mode is inherited when the power is turned on, the number of games won in the falling lottery and the number of games won in the lottery Also in the game times, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of the game times. This point is different from the fourth embodiment. Then, in the pachinko machine of the first modification, the startup display unit 39a is turned off at the timing of the transition to the low probability mode. By performing the processing as described above, the control of the display section 39a at the time of activation can be controlled in conjunction with the lottery mode.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine of the first modification will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the fourth embodiment only in the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 253 to 256, and the main control device is different. The remaining processing executed by the MPU 62 of 60, the various processing executed by the audio emission control device 90, and the various processing executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Variation start processing>
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the variation start process in the first modification. In this fluctuation start processing, steps Sd2801 to Sd2802 are the same as steps Sd0901 to Sd0902 of the fluctuation start processing of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 232), and steps Sd2804 to Sd2809 are fluctuation start processing of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 232). The same as steps Sd0903 to Sd0908. The variation start process of the first modification differs from the variation start process of the fourth embodiment only in that a startup display control process (step Sd2803) is added between steps Sd2802 and Sd2804. Is. Details of the startup display unit control processing will be described later.

<Fall determination processing>
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a fall determination process in the first modification. In this fall determination processing, steps Sd2901 to Sd2903 are the same as steps Sd1001 to Sd1003 of the fall determination processing (FIG. 233) of the fourth embodiment, and steps Sd2904 to Sd2906 are variation start processing of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 233). The same as steps Sd1007 to Sy1009. This fall determination process differs from the fall determination process (FIG. 233) of the fourth embodiment in that steps Sd1004 to Sd1006 of the fall determination process of the fourth embodiment are deleted, and the remaining The points are the same. That is, in the fall determination process of the first modification, the activation display unit 39a is not turned off.

<Hit determination process>
FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process in the first modification. In this hit determination processing, steps Sd3001 to Sd3005 are the same as steps Sd1101 to Sd1105 of the hit determination processing (FIG. 234) of the fourth embodiment, and steps Sd3007 to Sd3019 are hit determination processing of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 234). The same as steps Sd1108 to Sd1120. This hit determination process differs from the hit determination process (FIG. 234) of the fourth embodiment in that step Sd1106 of the hit determination process of the fourth embodiment is deleted and that of the hit determination process of the fourth embodiment is deleted. The point is that the process of step Sd3006 is executed instead of step Sd1107. That is, when it is determined that the big hit has been won in the winning lottery (Sd3004: YES) and the startup display unit flag is ON (Sd3005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3006, and various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64e. The high probability mode flag of is turned off. After the execution of step Sd3006, the process proceeds to step Sd3007.

<Startup display control processing>
FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the startup display unit control processing in the first modification. The startup display unit control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start processing subroutine (FIG. 253: Sd2803). In step Sd3101, it is determined whether or not the startup display section 39a is lit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the startup display unit flag of the various flag storage areas 64e is turned on.

When it is determined in step Sd3101 that the startup display unit flag is ON (Sd3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sd3102, and it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sd3102 that the mode is not the high-probability mode, that is, the low-probability mode (Sd3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sd3103, and the startup display unit 39a provided in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sd3104 to turn off the startup display flag. After executing step Sd3104, the startup display unit control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3101 that the startup display unit flag is not turned on (Sd3101: NO), or if it is determined in step Sd3102 that the high probability mode is set (Sd3102: YES), step Sd3103 and step The display control process at startup is terminated without executing Sd3104.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, the startup display unit 39a is triggered by the switching of the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode while the startup display unit 39a is lit. Is switched from on to off. Moreover, the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 switches the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the start of the game times in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery. Therefore, the start-up display unit 39a switches the display mode from lighting to extinguishing at the start of the game time when the winning lottery is a big hit in the winning lottery. At this time, at the start of the game time, it is possible to make a player who recognizes that the start-up display unit 39a has been switched from lit up to extinguished that the determination in the game time is executed in the low probability mode. However, the game number is started after it is determined to be a big hit by the winning lottery, and the lottery mode is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode at the start of the game number, so the winning lottery of the game time is the high probability mode. Run on. Therefore, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player that the winning lottery in the game times has been executed in the low probability mode, and give the player unexpectedness. Furthermore, since the game times are game times in which a big hit is won in the winning lottery, it is possible to give a greater surprise and expectation to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 1, the lottery mode is switched from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the start of the game time, but the winning lottery is performed in the high-probability mode and after the jackpot is won, the lottery mode is selected. Is switched from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in the game time. Further, since the control for switching the startup display section 39a from lighting to extinction is linked to the control for switching the winning lottery from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, control for switching the lighting/extinguishing state of the startup display section 39a. It is possible to avoid the peculiar control, and to achieve the effect of overturning the estimation of the player as described above and imparting a surprisingness to the player while making the control simple.

<<D7-2>> Modification 2:
In the fourth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the startup display section 39a which constitutes at least a part of the display means is constituted by the LED (light emitting diode), but instead of this, an incandescent lamp, a fluorescent lamp, It may be configured by another light emitting unit such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL.

<<D7-3>> Modification 3:
In the fourth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the combination of the first display mode and the second display mode that the display means can take is the combination of the extinguished state and the lit state, but instead of this, blinking A combination of the state and the lit state, and a combination of the extinguished state and the blinking state may be used. Also, a combination of two types of blinking states with different blinking intervals may be used. Furthermore, a combination of two types of patterns displayed on a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or the like may be used. The “first display mode” or the “second display mode” may include the extinguished state, as described above. Also with these configurations, the same effects as the effects described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

<<D7-4>> Modification 4:
Although the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include the power switch 88 in the fourth embodiment and Modification 1 thereof, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include no power switch 88 instead. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the power supply to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is performed or interrupted wirelessly from the outside of the hall provided with the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In this configuration, the power switch 88 is provided. Whether the pachinko machine is supplied with power or not, the power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply detects whether the pachinko machine is supplied with power or not. become. The same effect as the effect described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained by the configuration without the power switch.

<<D7-5>> Modification 5:
In the fourth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode, but instead, the special information has a probability of satisfying a predetermined condition. May have three types of probability modes (for example, low-probability mode, medium-probability mode, and high-probability mode). Furthermore, the configuration may be such that there are n kinds of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is divided into n levels (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

<<D7-6>> Modification 6:
In the fourth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, as the result notification effect, the victory effect, the defeat effect, and the draw effect are performed, but instead of this, only the victory effect and the defeat effect are performed as the result notification effect. Also good. According to this configuration, it is possible to clarify the win or loss of the player.

<<D7-7>> Modification 7:
In the fourth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the battle effect is executed as the specific effect executed before the result notification effect, but the specific effect is not limited to the battle effect. The specific effect may be any configuration as long as it is an effect that suggests that the result notification effect may be executed. As an effect that suggests that the result notification effect may be executed, for example, an effect that suggests that the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode can be adopted. With such a configuration, the same effect as the effect described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

<<D7-8>> Modification 8:
In the fourth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, the effect executed in one game time is composed of two types of effects, that is, the battle effect and the result notification effect, but instead of this, the battle effect and the third effect. You may comprise by three types of productions, production and result announcement production. The third effect may be, for example, a PR moving image of the model of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used. Further, it is also possible to perform only the result notification presentation without executing the battle presentation.

<<D7-9>> Modification 9:
In the fourth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, the battle effect executed when the falling lottery is won and the battle effect executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not done. For example, a part of the images forming the battle effect may be different between the battle effect when the falling lottery is won and the big hit when the winning lottery is won. For example, although the images are similar as a whole, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the images so that only some players can notice that they are different.

<<D7-10>> Modification 10:
In the fourth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example of the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited to. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case may be adopted in which the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied. In this way, even if another condition is set as the predetermined condition, the same effect as the effect described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

<<D7-11>> Modification 11:
In the fourth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, at the timing t43 (see FIG. 223) at which the game number is started when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game number executed after the guaranteed game number is reached. The low-frequency support mode is shifted to, but instead of this, at the timing t44 (see FIG. 223) when the game number of the big hit in the winning lottery is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started, the low-frequency support mode is shifted. Also good. With this configuration, the same effect as the effect described in the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

<<D7-12>> Modification 12:
In the fourth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the low probability mode is adopted as the first state identified by the state information in the state storage means, and the high probability mode is adopted as the second state. The first state and the second state are not limited to these. For example, the low frequency support mode may be adopted as the first state, and the high frequency support mode may be adopted as the second state. Further, as the specific process for starting the execution in the specific process execution means, the process of lighting the startup display unit 39a is adopted, but the specific process is not limited to the process of lighting the startup display unit 39a. For example, the specific process may be a process of executing the high frequency support mode.

<<D7-13>> Modification 13:
In the fourth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, when the falling lottery is performed and the winning is performed, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is set to the low probability mode, but instead, the falling lottery itself is not performed. Also good. With this configuration as well, similar to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player by the game number that is a big hit in the winning lottery, give the player unexpectedness, and improve the interest of the game. The effect that it can be obtained can be obtained.

<<D7-14>> Modification 14:
In the first modification, when the high-probability mode is inherited when the power is turned on, if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery with the game number of times less than the guaranteed game number, the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode at the start of the game number. The low-probability mode is entered, and the support mode retains the high-frequency support mode (see timing t43 in FIG. 252). Instead, however, the lottery mode is entered into the low-probability mode at the start of the game time. In conjunction with this, the support mode may be configured to shift from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect of simplifying the control routine.

<<D7-15>> Modification 15:
Although the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 in the fourth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, instead of this, It may be configured to include two control devices such as a control device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the fourth embodiment. Further, in the fourth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not limited to the division described in the fourth embodiment, and the three control processes are performed. It suffices that all of the devices 60, 90, 100 can execute all the processes in the fourth embodiment.

<<E>> Fifth Embodiment:
<<E1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 257 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 258 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design and an image for effect.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 259 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a game ball distribution device 200.

As shown in the figure, the general winning openings 32 are the entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 258).

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described below is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The open/close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode shifts to a case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode that allows the winning of the variable winning device 36 to the special winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, even when the big hit is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode in which the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won. In the present embodiment, when the game balls are won in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

When the winning symbol lottery triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variable display or the variable display as the display mode until the segment display device displays the corresponding lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b, when the winning lottery triggered by the winning in the second starting opening 34 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display displays the corresponding lottery result, a variable display or Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the winning of the winning through the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round game is an open/close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols when the first symbol display portion 37a displays the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the first starting opening 33. Further, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second symbol display portion 37b based on the winning of the second start opening 34. .. The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the entrance into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 260 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 260( a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 260(a), the liquid crystal display device 41 variably displays symbols indicating the numbers 1-8. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

260B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 260(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 260(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The mode of variable display of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. In other words, this is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol for each game time. On either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the pachinko machine 10 determines a predetermined value in the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 260(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

In FIG. 259, a game ball distribution device 200 (see FIG. 259) is a device for distributing the game ball entered from the first entrance 201 into which the game ball can enter into the normal route NR and the special route SP. It is provided above the first starting opening 33 in the game area PA. The detailed configuration of the game ball distribution device 200 will be described next.

<<E2>> Structure of game ball distribution device:
261 and 262 are cross-sectional views showing the game ball distribution device 200. FIG. 261 shows a state in which valve bodies 241 and 251 described later are closed, and FIG. 262 shows a state in which the valve bodies 241 and 251 are open. In FIGS. 261 and 262, a cross section when cut along a plane parallel to the game board 30 is shown as a cross section. The +X direction in the figure indicates the right side in front view, and the −X direction indicates the left side in front view.

As shown in both figures, the game ball distribution device 200 has a first passage 210, a second passage 220 adjacent to the −X direction side of the first passage 210, and a +X direction of the first passage 210. And a third passage 230 adjacent to the side. In the present embodiment, the first to third passages 210 to 230 are made of transparent resin members.

The 1st passage 210 has the 1st ball entrance 201 at the upper end, and flows the game ball which entered from the 1st ball entrance 201 downward. The first passage 210 includes one main line passage 211 and two branch line passages 212 and 213 separated from the main line passage 211 (hereinafter, referred to as “first branch line passage 212” and “second branch line passage 213”). , With. The cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the flow direction of each of the passages 211 to 213 is a substantially U shape, and the passages 211 to 213 are attached so that the opening side of the U shape faces the game area PA.

The main line passage 211 is divided into a main line upstream side portion 211a, a main line intermediate portion 211b, and a main line downstream side portion 211c. The main line upstream side portion 211a is a most upstream side portion in the main line passage 211, and has a linear shape extending right below from the first entrance 201. The main line middle portion 211b is a part following the lower end of the main line upstream side portion 211a, extends from the lower end of the main line upstream side portion 211a to the lower right direction, and has a shape bent right below. The main line downstream side portion 211c is a portion following the main line intermediate portion 211b and has a linear shape extending from the lower end of the main line intermediate portion 211b to the lower right direction.

The first branch passage 212 is directly below the first branch point 211x, with a connecting portion between the main line upstream portion 211a and the main line middle portion 211b in the main line passage 211 as a branch point (hereinafter, referred to as “first branch point”) 211x. It has a linear shape extending in the direction. Therefore, the main-line upstream portion 211a of the main-line passage 211 and the first branch line passage 212 constitute one straight passage extending downward from the first entrance 201. The first branch point 211x is provided with a first game ball distribution mechanism 240 that distributes the game balls to either the main line middle portion 211b of the main line passage 211 or the first branch line passage 212.

The second branch passage 213 is located directly below the second branch point 211y, with the connecting portion between the main line middle portion 211b and the main line downstream side portion 211c in the main line passage 211 as a branch point (hereinafter, referred to as “second branch point”) 211y. It has a linear shape extending in the direction. The second branch point 211y is provided with a second game ball distribution mechanism 250 for distributing the game balls to either the main line downstream side portion 211c of the main line passage 211 or the second branch line passage 213.

The second passage 220 has a second ball entrance 221 into which a game ball can enter and the game ball entered from the second ball entrance 221 flows downward. In the present embodiment, the vertical position (that is, the height) of the second entrance 221 and the height of the first entrance 201 formed in the first passage 210 are the same, and the second entrance The mouth 221 and the first entrance 201 are adjacent to each other. The second passage 220 is a single continuous passage that does not branch in the middle, and is divided into an upstream side portion 220a that extends directly downward from the second entrance 221 and a downstream side portion 220b that extends downward leftward. It

The upstream portion 220a is arranged along the main line upstream portion 211a of the first passage 210 and a part of the first branch passage 212. In the present embodiment, the side wall of the upstream side portion 220a on the side of the first passage 210 and the side wall of the first side passage 210 on the side of the upstream side 220a are configured by one wall body 210a. The cross-sectional shape of the second passage 220 perpendicular to the flow direction is substantially U-shaped like the first passage 210, and the second passage 220 is attached so that the opening side of the U-shape faces the game area PA. ..

The third passage 230 has a third ball entrance 231 into which a game ball can enter, and allows the game ball entered from the third ball entrance 231 to flow downward. In the present embodiment, the height of the third entrance 231 and the height of the first entrance 201 formed in the first passage 210 are the same, and the third entrance 231 and the first entrance 201 are the same. Is adjacent to. The third passage 210 is a single continuous passage that does not branch in the middle, and extends straight downward without swaying to the left or right when viewed from the front. However, the third passage 230 is curved in a U-shape toward the rear side (back side in the figure) so as to straddle the main line intermediate portion 211b of the main line passage 211 in the depth direction (front and back direction in the figure). .. The U-shape is such that the game ball can flow down.

The third passage 230 is arranged along the main line upstream side portion 211a of the first passage 210 and the first branch passage 212, except for the above-mentioned U-shaped curved portion. In the present embodiment, the side wall on the first passage 210 side of the portion of the third passage 230 excluding the U-shaped curved portion and the side wall of the first passage 210 on the third passage 230 side are common. It is constituted by one wall 210b. The cross-sectional shape of the third passage 230 perpendicular to the flow direction is substantially U-shaped like the first passage 210, and the third passage 230 is attached so that the opening side of the U-shape faces the game area PA. ..

The first game ball distribution mechanism 240 mainly has a valve body 241 and an action piece 242 connected to the valve body 241. The valve body 241 is a plate-shaped member arranged in the first branch point 211x. A rotary shaft 243 is embedded in the wall 210a beside the first branch point 211x in a direction perpendicular to the game area PA, and the valve body 241 is rotatably supported around the rotary shaft 243. ing. The valve body 241 has a weight 244, and the moment of force around the rotary shaft 243 is generated by the weight of the valve body 241 including the weight 244.

The valve body 241 has a first position (the position of the valve body 241 shown in FIG. 261) that closes the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212, and the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212. And a second position (the position of the valve body 241 shown in FIG. 262) that opens the. The valve body 241 is restricted from rotating clockwise (clockwise) by the right corner CN of the first branch point 211x, and the valve body 241 can be positioned at the first position. The first position is the position in the initial posture in which the force other than gravity does not act on the valve body 241.

The second position is a position where the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212 is opened as much as a game ball can pass, and in the present embodiment, the position is counterclockwise from the first position. It is a position where it rotates and is stored in the storage recess DE formed in the wall 210a (see FIG. 262). The second position does not necessarily have to be the position where the valve body 241 is housed inside the wall body 210a, and may be any position as long as it is a position where the opening of the game ball can be passed at least. You can also

The action piece 242 is a plate-shaped member, and is provided at a position that is point-symmetric with respect to the valve body 241 with the rotation axis 243 as the center of symmetry. Therefore, when the valve body 241 is in the first position, the operating piece 242 projects inside the second passage 220. From the state when it is in the first position shown in FIG. 261, the game ball enters from the second ball inlet 221 and passes through the second passage 220 and reaches the action piece 242. By depressing the action piece 242, a moment of counterclockwise force acts on the action piece 242. Thereby, the valve body 241 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 261, and with the passage of the game ball, the valve body 241 moves to the second position as shown in FIG. 262.

When the valve body 241 is in the second position, the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212 opens, so that the game ball flows down the first branch line passage 212 from the opening. Therefore, the game ball P1 (FIG. 262) that has passed the main line upstream side portion 211a of the main line passage 211 and reached the first branch point 211x is distributed to the first branch line passage 212.

After that, when the game ball separates from the action piece 242 in the second passage 220, a moment of a clockwise force acts on the valve body 241 by its own weight, and returns from the second position to the first position (FIG. 261). ..

According to the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 configured as described above, the game ball P1 (FIG. 261) reaching the first branch point 211x is moved to the first branch line passage 212 by the distribution of the game ball in the second passage 220. You can sort. More specifically, since the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212 opens when the game ball passes within the range in which the action piece 242 in the second passage 220 operates, at that time, When the game ball P1 reaches the first branch point 211x of the one passage 210, the game ball P1 can be distributed to the first branch line passage 212. In other words, the game ball enters the second entrance 221 of the second passage 220, and the game ball enters the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210 at the same timing as or slightly later than the entry. When is entered, the game ball entered in the first entrance 201 can be distributed to the first branch passage 212. That is, a specific case where the time interval between the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 201 and the entry into the second entrance 221 is within a specific time (the period during which the action piece 242 acts). In addition, the game ball that has entered the first entrance 201 can be distributed to the first branch passage 212.

The second game ball distribution mechanism 250 has the same configuration as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240. That is, the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 mainly has a valve body 251 and an action piece 252 connected to the valve body 251. A weight 254 is attached to the valve body 251. The operation of the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 is also the same as that of the first game ball distribution mechanism 240, and the valve body 251 closes the opening from the main line passage 211 to the second branch line passage 213 at the first position ( Rotation between a position of the valve body 251 shown in FIG. 261) and a second position (position of the valve body 251 shown in FIG. 262) that opens an opening from the main passage 211 to the second branch passage 213. To do. When the game ball enters from the third inlet 231 and passes through the third passage 230 and reaches the action piece 252, the game ball presses the action piece 252 and rotates counterclockwise with respect to the action piece 252. Act on the moment of force. As a result, the valve body 251 moves from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the opening from the main line passage 211 to the first branch line passage 212 is opened, and the game ball P2 (FIG. 262) reaching the second branch point 211y is distributed to the second branch line passage 213.

The downstream end of the main passage 211 of the first passage 210 communicates with the normal route NR (FIG. 258). The downstream end of the first branch line 212 in the first passage 210 and the downstream end of the second branch line 213 in the first passage 210 are combined to communicate with the special route SP (FIG. 259). There is. The downstream end of the second passage 220 and the downstream end of the third passage 230 are joined together and communicate with the outroute OT (FIG. 259).

As shown in FIG. 259, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the normal route NR, the special route SP, and the normal route NR There are three ways when none of the route SPs are passed. When neither the normal route NR nor the special route SP is passed, it is a case of entering from the left lateral side or the right lateral side of the first starting opening 33, and the probability of entering the first starting opening 33 is not zero. Is extremely low. Since the normal route NR is opened at a position deviating from the position right above the first starting port 33 to the right side, when passing through the normal route NR, the probability of entering the first starting port 33 is the normal route NR. Although it is higher than the case where neither the special route SP nor the special route SP is passed, the probability is not so high as 10%, for example. This probability is adjusted by the position of the nail 42 arranged in the range from the opening of the normal route NR to the first starting port 33. Since the special route SP opens at a position directly above and close to the first starting port 33, the probability of entering the first starting port 33 is extremely high, for example, 50 to 100%. The fact that the probability of entering the first starting opening 33 is high means that the player has a high degree of advantage, and thus can be called a special route SP.

The game ball entering from the first ball entrance 201 of the game ball distribution device 200 is distributed by the game ball distribution device 200 to either the normal route NR or the special route SP described above. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the second ball inlet 221 or the third ball inlet 231 of the game ball sorter 200 is simply out of action by operating the action pieces 242 and 252 of the game ball sorter 200. It is discharged from the outlet 43 through the OT.

As shown in FIGS. 261 and 262, the nails 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first entrance 201, the second entrance 221, and the third entrance 231 of the game ball distribution device 200. , 42c, 42d) are provided. Specifically, the first nail 42a is provided above the wall body between the first entrance 201 and the second entrance 221 and the first entrance 201 and the third entrance 231 are provided. The second nail 42b is provided above the wall between the two, the third nail 42c is provided above the wall on the left side of the second entrance 221 and the wall on the right side of the third entrance 231. A fourth nail 42d is provided above the body. Depending on the driving positions of the first to fourth nails 42a to 42d, the probability of the game ball entering the ball entrances 201, 221, 231 changes.

<<E3>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 263 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC power supply of 24V from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. The “time of power failure” is not limited to the time of power failure of the commercial power source, but also includes the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is off).

The main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Connected to multiple detection sensors. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering the through gate 35. To do.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying a prize for the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out. The corresponding prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 264 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery to determine whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol string displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C5 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

A holding information storage area 64b is provided in the RAM 64. The reserved information storage area 64b is composed of a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning are chronologically arranged in the reserved information storage area 64b. Stored in.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the game ball in the second starting opening 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table in the win/loss table storage area 63a (FIG. 263) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the winning lottery. The high-probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. FIG. 265( a) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 265( b) shows a win/loss table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 265(a), in the gaming state in which the winning/discarding table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number to be the jackpot winning is 15. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265(b), in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number for the big win is 30. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Returning to FIG. 264, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described below. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 33, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64), and when the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 34, the holding information is stored. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until it becomes individual. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the lottery mode of the above-mentioned (2) winning lottery after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed by using a win/loss table for a high-probability mode as a win/loss table, and a win/loss table. As a result, it is possible to set the low-probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed by using the win/loss table for the low-probability mode. As described with reference to FIG. 265, when the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for high probability, the winning jackpot is won as compared with the case where the winning/missing table for low probability is used. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open counter C5, but in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric auditors' item open lottery after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second start opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start opening 33 is higher than in the second start opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start opening 34 is more likely to be won than the first start opening 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is paid to the second starting opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls he holds. You can

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is more frequently in the electric role open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed, a low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying the condition of any one or any combination of shortening the average time of securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots on the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of types of jackpots. The sorting destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a sorting table.

FIG. 266 is an explanatory diagram illustrating contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. 266(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 266(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 266(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot, 16R normal Big hit, 8R Normal big hit is set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot and "6 to 23" correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "24 to 27" correspond to the 16R normal jackpot and "28 to 39" correspond to the 8R regular jackpot. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the probability of a probability variation jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, and the probability of a regular jackpot is the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”. Is 40% of the value of. Note that the number and value of the random numbers that are won in the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 266(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are determined. , 16R regular jackpot and 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 12” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “13 to 23” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "24-30" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "31-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and This is different from when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won based on the winning in the second starting opening 34, the probability of the probability variation jackpot is 60%, the probability of being the regular jackpot is 40%, and the first starting opening 33. It is the same as the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning a prize, but the probability that the distribution of 16R and 8R is 16R is higher than the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. Has become. Note that the number and value of the random numbers that are won in the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that a win will be generated in the second starting opening 34 of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It should be noted that if the result of the win/win lottery is a failure, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Returning to FIG. 264, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described below. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value for the reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. The table is collated to determine whether or not to reach. However, as a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit is won and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed, and the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 260(b), first the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of fluctuation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of fluctuation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C5 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C5 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electricity reserve area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether to control the electric accessory 34a to be in the open state by using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and the second holding area. The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb corresponds to the hold information related to the second starting port 34, and these hold information are special in the present invention. Corresponds to information.

<<E4>> Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 267 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. In addition, a part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 263) and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<E5>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Se0101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Se0102.

In step Se0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Se0103.

In step Se0103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C5 are updated. Specifically, when 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C5, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Se0104.

In step Se0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the entrance process for the starting opening in step Se0104 will be described later. After executing Step Se0104, the process proceeds to Step Se0105.

In step Se0105, a through-ball entry process associated with the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through-ball entering process in step Se0105 will be described later. After executing Step Se0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 268: Se0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In Step Se0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entering ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Se0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Se0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0202, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Se0203.

In step Se0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Se0204.

In step Se0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Se0209.

When it is determined in step Se0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Se0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0205 and whether the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 or not. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Se0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Se0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0206, and the payout control device 70 pays out four game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Se0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Se0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Se0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Se0208.

In step Se0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Se0209.

In step Se0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start-up suspensions set in step Se0204 or step Se0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Se0209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit value (Se0209: NO), the ball entering process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Se0209, when the number N of startup reservations is less than the upper limit value (Se0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0210, where 1 is added to the number N of start up reservations of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Se0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Se0212.

In step Se0212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Se0103 (FIG. 268) are set to the first storage area of the corresponding free storage areas, that is, In step Se0210, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Se0103 are set as follows. It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Se0210. When the second starting suspension number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Se0103 are set to the second suspension. The data is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start pending number RbN to which 1 is added in step Se0210. After executing Step Se0212, the process proceeds to Step Se0213.

In step Se0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), the result of the hit lottery determination (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach. This is a process of performing the determination of the occurrence or non-occurrence of the falling lottery, the determination result of the falling lottery (lottery result), etc. before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Se0213, the process proceeds to Step Se0214.

In step Se0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command is based on the hold information mainly indicating the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the determination result based on the hold information acquired based on the entering ball. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm before being targeted for the winning lottery by the control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 272: Step Se0502) of a normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 indicates the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the hold number. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 displays the hold number of the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in response to the increase in the number of hold.

After executing Step Se0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 269: Se0213) of the entrance process for the starting opening.

FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process, based on the hold information, the determination result of the winning lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach, the falling lottery determination This is a process to be executed before the main control device 60 is targeted for the winning lottery.

In step Se0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 269) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Se0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball Alternatively, by grasping whether or not the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Se0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time, (Se0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0303, and the win/loss table storage The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Se0305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Se0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time (Se0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0304, and the win/loss table is stored. The win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Se0305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Se0305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Se0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0306, and the value is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Se0307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing Step Se0307, the process proceeds to Step Se0308.

In step Se0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Se0308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Se0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0309 to store the probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Se0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0310 to store the normal jackpot information in the destination determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends.

When it is determined in step Se0305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Se0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0311, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Se0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Se0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step Se0313, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is supported (Se0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0313 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Se0313: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 268: Se0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In Step Se0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Se0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Se0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Se0401: NO), the entering process for the through is ended.

When it determines with it being less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the accessory holding quantity SN in step Se0402 (Se0402:YES), it progresses to step Se0403 and adds 1 to the accessory holding quantity SN. Then, it progresses to step Se0404.

In step Se0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C5 updated in step Se0103 (FIG. 268) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, in step Se0402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Se0402: NO), that is, when the value of the accessory holding number SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C5.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Se0501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Se0502.

In step Se0502, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Se0502, the process proceeds to Step Se0503.

In step Se0503, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Se0504.

In step Se0504, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Se0505. In step Se0505, game time control processing for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Se0505, the process proceeds to Step Se0506.

In step Se0506, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Se0507.

In step Se0507, processing for electric power support for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 34a provided in the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Se0508.

In Step Se0508, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in Step Se0502). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Se0508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of this normal processing (Se0508: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in step Se0509 and step Se0510. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Se0509, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Se0510, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Se0508: YES), the processing returns to step Se0502, and each processing from step Se0502 to step Se0507 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step Se0502 to step Se0507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 272: Se0508).

FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the game number control processing. In step Se0601, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Se0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Se0601: YES), the game game control processing is ended without executing any of the processing from step Se0602. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Se0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0602.

In step Se0602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag of the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step Se0602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not displaying fluctuations (Se0602: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps Se0603 to Se0606. In step Se0603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Se0603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (Se0603: YES), the present game number control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0603 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (Se0603: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0604.

In step Se0604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Se0605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Se0605, the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the liquid crystal display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing Step Se0605, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Se0602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (Se0602: YES), the process proceeds to the game times progress process of steps Se0606 to Se0610.

In Step Se0606, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Se0606, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 275: Se0802) described later. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step Se0606 that the variation time has not elapsed (Se0606: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0607 and the variation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing Step Se0607, the game number control process is ended.

When it is determined in step Se0606 that the variation time has elapsed (Se0606: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0608, and variation end processing is executed. The variation end process is performed on the symbol display unit so that the aspect of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 275) described later is displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game time. Display control. Then, it progresses to step Se0609.

In step Se0609, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-frequency support mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64e set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is the high frequency support mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, that is, the low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned on after completion of the opening/closing execution mode described later (see step Se1304 in FIG. 280).

When it is determined in step Se0609 that the mode is the high frequency support mode (Se0609: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0610, and the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the remaining guaranteed game number guaranteed in the high frequency support mode. The game number counter PNC has a value 100 set in advance in step Se1305 of FIG. 280 described later. After executing Step Se0610, the process proceeds to Step Se0611. On the other hand, in step Se0609, when it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not set (Se0609: NO), the game number control process is ended.

In step Se0611, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Se0611 that the high probability mode is not set (Se0611: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0612, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). Is reached (= within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter PNC exceeds 0. As described above, since the game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed game numbers, it is continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of game times is before reaching the guaranteed game number.

In step Se0612, when it is determined that the value of the game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Se0612: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Se0613 and the high frequency support mode. Turn off the flag. After executing Step Se0613, the process proceeds to Step Se0614.

In step Se0614, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. To do. After executing Step Se0614, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0612 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Se0612: YES), the game count control process is immediately ended without executing step Se0613 and step Se0614. Also, when it is determined in step Se0611 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Se0611: YES), the game time control process is immediately ended.

According to the processing from step Se0611 to step Se0614 described above, when the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, but the number of games is 100. Even after reaching the number of times, if the high-probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, it is realized that the high-frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 273: Se0604).

FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Se0701, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold number RbN held and stored in the second hold area Rb is “0”. When it is determined in step Se0701 that the second startup hold number RbN is “0” (Se0701: YES), the data setting process for the first symbol display portion in steps Se0702 to Se0707 is executed, while When it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not "0" (Se0701: NO), the data setting process for the second symbol display unit of steps Se0708 to Se0713 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total reserved number CRN is 1 or more as described in FIG. 273 (see FIG. 273: Se0603). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, hold information for variable display is stored for the second symbol display portion 37b. If so, the data stored in the second hold area Rb is the target of this data setting process regardless of whether the first startup hold number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the holding information is stored in both the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb, the holding information stored in the second holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting opening 34 has priority. To be done.

In step Se0702, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Se0703 to decrement the total hold number CRN by 1. Then, it progresses to step Se0704. In step Se0704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Se0705.

In step Se0705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Se0705, the process proceeds to Step Se0706.

In step Se0706, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Se0707.

In step Se0707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Se0707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Se0502 in the normal process (FIG. 272). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of hold, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

When it is determined in step Se0701 that the second startup hold number RbN is not “0” (Se0701: NO), as described above, the data setting process for the second symbol display portion of steps Se0708 to Se0713 is executed. To do.

In step Se0708, the second start reserve quantity RbN in the second reserve area Rb is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step Se0709. In step Se0709, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step Se0710, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Se0711.

In step Se0711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Se0711, the process proceeds to Step Se0712.

In step Se0712, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Se0713.

In step Se0713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Se0713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Se0505 in the normal process (FIG. 272). The sound emission control device 90 instructs the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the received shift time command in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 273: Se0605) of the game time control processing.

FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step Se0801, a winning determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing Step Se0801, the process proceeds to Step Se0802.

In step Se0802, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Se0802, the process proceeds to Step Se0803.

In step Se0803, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Se0803 that the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Se0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0804 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, and the occurrence of the reach is generated. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the fluctuation time set in step Se0802 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se0803 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Se08303: YES), the flow proceeds to step Se0805 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, and the occurrence of the reach is also included. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the fluctuation time set in step Se0802 are included. After executing Step Se0804 or Step Se0805, the process proceeds to Step Se0806.

In step Se0806, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in steps Se0804 to Se0806 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Se0502 in the normal process (FIG. 272). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Se0806, the process proceeds to Step Se0807.

In step Se0807, the variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display part corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing Step Se0807, the fluctuation start process is ended.

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 275: Se0801).

FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Se0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Se0901 that the high probability mode is set (Se0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0902, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the high probability mode win/fail table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 265(b). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Se0904.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se0901 that the high probability mode is not set (Se0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0903, and a success/failure determination is performed by referring to the low probability mode win/loss table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 265(a). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Se0904.

In step Se0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Se0902 or step Se0903 is a big win. In step Se0904, when the result of the win/no judgment is a big hit (Se0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0905.

In subsequent steps Se0905 to Se0912, processing for setting a game result and processing for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In Step Se0905, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Se0905 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Se0905: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0906, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 266(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, in step Se0905, when it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Se0905: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0907, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 266(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in. After performing the processing of step Se0906 or step Se0907, the process proceeds to step Se0908.

In step Se0908, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is a probability varying jackpot. When it is determined in step Se0908 that the game result is a probability variation big hit (Se0908: YES), the process proceeds to step Se0909.

In step Se0909, a stop result setting process for the probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game times that will be won for the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Se0909, the process proceeds to Step Se0910.

In step Se0910, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is turned on. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is set, and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is set. After executing Step Se0910, the hit determination process is ended.

In step Se0908, when it is determined that the type of the jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is not the probability variation jackpot (Se0908: NO), that is, when the classified type of the jackpot is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step Se0911.

In step Se0911, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot, in the current game time to win the normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b fluctuates in the state of displaying any stop result This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is displayed. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Se0911, the process proceeds to Step Se0912.

In step Se0912, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Se0906 or step Se0907 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal big hit flag is turned ON when the 16R normal big hit is made, and the 8R normal big hit flag is turned ON when the 8R normal big hit is made. After executing Step Se0912, the hit determination process is ended.

In step Se0904, when the result of the winning lottery in step Se0902 or step Se0903 is not a big hit (Se0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Se0913, and a stop result setting process for out-of-coupling is executed. With the stop result setting process for the time of disengagement, in the current game time that is the disengagement result, the variable display is ended in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Se0913, the hit determination process is ended.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The change time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a change start process subroutine (FIG. 275: Se0802).

FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step Se1001, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Se1002.

In step Se1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is (Se1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1003.

In step Se1003, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times that is won in the jackpot in the winning lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Se1002 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Se1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1005, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. To do. In step Se1002, since this process (Se1005) is executed when the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time, in step Se1005, the reach among the game times not hit by the big hit in the winning lottery is reached. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach is generated (Se1005: YES), and the process proceeds to step Se1006. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to when the presence or absence of the reach is specified using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step Se1006, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Se1005 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Se1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1007, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the total pending number CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN may be used, and the smaller the number of total reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the variation time table for the normal big hit, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal processing subroutine (FIG. 272: Se0506).

FIG. 278 is an explanatory view showing the game state transition processing. In step Se1101, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. In step Se1101, when it is determined that it is not in the open/close execution mode (Se1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1102, and the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b of one game time is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. In step Se1102, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (Se1102; NO), the main game state transition processing ends.

In step Se1102, when it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display is ended (Se1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1103, and the game result of this game time (the result of the winning lottery) is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (Se1103: NO), this game state transition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Se1103 that any of the above flags is ON (Se1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1104, and a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. To do. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step Se1104, the process proceeds to Step Se1105.

In step Se1105, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R normal jackpot flag, 8R probability variation jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. When it is determined in step Se1105 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 16R normal jackpot flag (Se1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1106, and various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 are provided. "16" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1105 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag (Se1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1107, and various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the. After executing Step Se1106 or Step Se1107, the process proceeds to Step Se1108.

In step Se1108, the high-probability mode flags in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 are turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Se1109, and the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is turned off.

After executing step Se1109, the process proceeds to step Se1110 to set the opening command. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Se0505 in the normal process (FIG. 272). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing Step Se1110, the present game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Se1101 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Se1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1111 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or more than "1", and the big winning is achieved. The mouth 36a is opened. Further, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning award drive is performed on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has entered. The driving state of the portion 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Se1111, the process proceeds to Step Se1112.

In step Se1112, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Se1112: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Se1112: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1113 and the ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Se0505 in the normal process (FIG. 272). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Se1113, the process proceeds to Step Se1114.

In step Se1114, a transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed. The transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes of game times after the current opening/closing execution mode is ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described later. After executing Step Se1114, the process proceeds to Step Se1115.

In step Se1115, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Se1116 and performs the end process of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 16 normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag are ON, these flags are turned OFF, and if these flags are not ON, that state To maintain. After executing Step Se1116, the present game state transition processing ends.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 278: Se1111) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing process. In step Se1201, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Se1201 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (Se1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1202, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step Se1202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Se1202: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (Se1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1203.

In step Se1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Se1203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (Se1203: NO), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (Se1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1204, and the variable winning drive unit is opened to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step Se1205.

In step Se1205, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all the winning modes that have been set are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the ball entering counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Note that if the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency entrance mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and the entrance counter area PC is set. You may set "6". After executing Step Se1205, the process proceeds to Step Se1206.

In step Se1206, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. It is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 272: Step Se0505). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of the release. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round is started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the display content on the liquid crystal display device 41 indicates that the special winning opening 36a is opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

When it is determined in step Se1201 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step Se1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1207, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Se1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (Se1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1208.

In step Se1208, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step Se1208 that no ball has entered (Se1208: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1208 that a ball has entered (Se1208: YES), the flow advances to step Se1209 to subtract 1 from the value of the ball entry counter area PC. Then, it progresses to step Se1210.

In step Se1210, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step Se1210 that the value of the ball entry counter area PC is not “0” (Se1210: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Se1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (Se1207: YES), or when it is determined in step Se1210 that the value of the entrance counter area PC is “0”. (Se1210: YES), proceeds to Step Se1211, and executes a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step Se1212.

In step Se1212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Then, it progresses to step Se1213 and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step Se1213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Se1213: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Se1213: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step Se1214, the process proceeds to step Se1215 to set a close command. After that, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed, and the normal process In the command output process (FIG. 272: Step Se0502) of FIG. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect content on the liquid crystal display device 41 indicates that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has ended. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.

<Transition process when the open/close execution mode ends>
Next, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 278: Se1114) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the shift processing when the open/close execution mode ends. In step Se1301, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit is turned on in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Se1301 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON (Se1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1302, and the corresponding certainty variation jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, of the 16R probability variable jackpot flags and the 8R probability variable jackpot flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing Step Se1302, the process proceeds to Step Se1303.

In step Se1303, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Se1304 to turn on the high-frequency support mode flag. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Then, it progresses to step Se1305.

In step Se1305, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step Se1306.

In step Se1306, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Se1310.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1301 that the 16R normal jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag is ON in the RAM 64 (Se1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1307 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, of the 16R regular jackpot flags and the 8R regular jackpot flags, the flag that is on is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Se1308.

In step Se1308, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Se1309, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Se1310.

In step Se1310, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode ends.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 272: Se0507).

FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Se1401, it is determined whether or not it is in support. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Se1401 that the in-support flag is not ON (Se1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1402.

In step Se1402, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Se1402 that the support winning flag is not ON (Se1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1403.

In step Se1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Se1403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Se1403: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Se1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1404.

In Step Se1404, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Se1404 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Se1404: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1405, and after the off-display is set, the main electric power support processing is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Se1404: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1406.

In step Se1406, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Se1406 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is “0” (Se1406: NO), the processing for supporting the electric power combination is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1406 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (Se1406: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1407.

In step Se1407, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Se1408 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Se1407 (Se1407: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Se1408 (Se1408: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1409 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Se1410.

In step Se1410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Se1409 is support win. When it is determined in step Se1410 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Se1410: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1411, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

On the other hand, in step Se1410, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not the support winning (Se1410: NO), the processing for the electric role support is ended without executing the processing of step Se1411.

When it is determined in step Se1407 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Se1407: YES), or when it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Se1408 (Se1408: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1412, and the electric auditors opening lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Se1413.

In step Se1413, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Se1412 is support win. When it is determined in step Se1413 that the support is not won (Se1413: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Se1413, when it is determined that the support win is selected (Se1413: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1414, and after the support win flag is turned ON and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Se1402 that the support winning flag is ON (Se1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1415, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Se1415 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Se1415: NO), since the pattern display in the universal figure unit 38 is being changed, the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1415 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Se1415: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1416.

In step Se1416, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. Then, it progresses to step Se1417 and turns on a support flag and turns off a support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Se1401 that the in-support flag is ON (Se1401: YES), the processing proceeds to step Se1418, and electric power accessory opening/closing control processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric role opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 281: Se1418) of the process for supporting the electric role.

FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step Se1501, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Se1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1502.

In step Se1502, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Se1502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Se1502: NO), the main power combination opening/closing control process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Se1502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Se1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1503, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a in the closed state is performed. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step Se1503, the process proceeds to Step Se1504.

In step Se1504, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Se1505 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Se1505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Se1505: NO), the main power combination opening/closing control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Se1505: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1506 to turn off the in-support flag. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Se1501 that the electric accessory 34a is not opened (Se1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1507, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Se1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Se1507: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Se1507: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1508, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Se1509.

In step Se1509, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Se1509: NO), the flow proceeds to step Se1510 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is set. To do.

If it is determined in step Se1510 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (Se1510: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1511 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1509 that it is the open/close execution mode (Se1509: YES) or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Se1510 (Se1510: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1512 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

A5. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the battle effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Se1601, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Se1601, the process proceeds to Step Se1602.

In step Se1602, command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Se1602, the process proceeds to Step Se1603.

In step Se1603, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step Se1602. After executing Step Se1603, the process proceeds to Step Se1604.

In step Se1604, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step Se1602. After executing Step Se1604, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 283: Se1602).

FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step Se1701, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Se1701 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (Se1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1702, and the hold command handling process is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Se1702, the process proceeds to Step Se1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1701 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Se1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1703 without executing step Se1702.

In step Se1703, it is determined whether a high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Se1703 that the high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Se1703: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1704, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is turned on. The sound-light-side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (see FIG. 267), and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. It is stored in the set various flag storage area 94e. Then, it progresses to step Se1707.

When it is determined in step Se1703 that the high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1703: NO), the flow advances to step Se1705 to check whether the low-frequency support command is received from the main MPU62. judge. If it is determined in step Se1705 that the low-frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Se1705: YES), the flow advances to step Se1706 to turn off the sound-light side high-frequency support mode flag. Then, it progresses to step Se1707. When it is determined in step Se1705 that the low-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1705: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Se1707.

In Step Se1707, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Se1707 that the variation command and the type command have been received (Se1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1708. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1707 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Se1707: NO), the flow proceeds to step SStep Se1709.

In step Se1708, a game game effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, a big hit time effect executed in the current game time, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like are set. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Se1708, the process proceeds to Step Se1709.

In Step Se1709, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Se1709 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Se1709: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1710 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the jackpot type included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Se1711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1709 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Se1709: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1711 without executing step Se1710.

In step Se1711, it is determined whether the ending command is received. If it is determined in step Se1711 that the ending command has been received (Se1711: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1712 to execute the ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Se1713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1711 that the ending command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Se1711: NO), the process proceeds to step Se1713 without executing step Se1712.

In step Se1713, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the opening command and the effect contents corresponding to the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 284: Se1702).

FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step Se1801, update processing at the time of entering a ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the first starting opening 33, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the second starting opening 34, A process for enabling the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of hold information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Se1801 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as a “first hold number”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on entering a ball into the second starting opening 34 The number is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing Step Se1801, the process proceeds to Step Se1802.

In step Se1802, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of pieces of the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 identified in step Se1801 and the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled based on the number. After executing step Se1802, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 285: Se1801) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the time of entering a ball. In step Se1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Se1901 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 (Se1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Se1902, and a sound is output. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing Step Se1902, the process proceeds to Step Se1904.

In step Se1901, when it is determined that the hold command that is the current read target is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (Se1901: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. When it is determined that the data is transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Se1903, and the update processing of the second holding number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is performed. Execute. The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command which is the current read target. After executing Step Se1903, the process proceeds to Step Se1904.

The reason why the processes of step Se1902 and step Se1903 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 holds the hold information. Is stored and held, the voice light emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step Se1904, update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved quantity counter area shows the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing Step Se1904, the update process at the time of main entrance is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game time effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 284: Se1708) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. As described above, the game time effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. Is. Hereinafter, a specific process of the game game effect setting process will be described.

In step Se2001, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, and information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the kind of big hit, the presence/absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time are grasped from the command. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Se2002.

In step Se2002, effect pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit or a reach is executed. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Se2002, the process proceeds to Step Se2003.

In step Se2003, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of this game time is 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, on the effective line L (see FIG. 260) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as the current stop symbol information. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. If the result of the winning lottery of the current game is 16R normal big hit or 8R normal big hit, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing Step Se2003, the process proceeds to Step Se2004.

In step Se2004, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the variation time and the stop symbol information identified in step Se2005 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Se2005.

In step Se2005, the type information of the effect set in step Se2002 in the current game, the type information of the stop symbol set in step Se2003, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in step Se2004 are used as effect commands. Set. Then, it progresses to step Se2006 and transmits the said production|generation command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing Step Se2006, the process proceeds to Step Se2007, executes the update process at the start of fluctuation, and then ends the game game effect setting process. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 287: Se2002) of the game time effect setting process.

FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In Step Se2101, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Se2001 of FIG. In step Se2101, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 8R certainty variation jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Se2101 that the probability variation big hit has been won in the winning lottery by the current game (Se2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2102.

In Step Se2102, a production pattern setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute the effect pattern for the effect indicating that the probability variation is a big hit in the current game. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the jackpot variation time table in FIG. 277. After executing Step Se2102, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

In step Se2101, when the probability variation jackpot due to the current game time is not won (Se2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2103.

In Step Se2103, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot in the current game has been won. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Se2001 of FIG. In step Se2103, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R regular jackpot or the 8R regular jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Se2103 that the normal jackpot has been won in the current game round (Se2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2104.

In step Se2104, a normal big hit production effect pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute an effect pattern for an effect indicating that a normal big hit has occurred in the current game. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the jackpot variation time table in FIG. 277. After executing Step Se2104, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Se2103 that the normal big hit has not been reached in the current game (Se2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2105.

In step Se2105, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of reach, which is grasped in step Se2001 in FIG. 287. When it is determined in step Se2105 that the reach has occurred in the current game (Se2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2106.

In step Se2106, reach time effect pattern setting processing is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute the effect pattern for the effect indicating that the game has been reached this time. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the reach generation variation time table in FIG. 277. After executing Step Se2106, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Se2105, when it is determined that the reach has not occurred in the current game time (Se2105: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2107, and the off-time effect pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute an effect when none of the probability variation jackpot winning, the normal jackpot winning, and the reach occurrence. At the time of this setting, the effect time is determined according to the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the reach non-occurrence variation time table in FIG. 277. After executing Step Se2107, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 287: Se2007) of the game time effect setting process.

FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Se2201, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. When it is determined in step Se2201 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (Se2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Se2202 and is stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the total reserved quantity is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Se2201 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (Se2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Se2203 and is stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the total reserved quantity is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Se2301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Se2302.

In step Se2302, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Se2401, a command storing process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and displayed on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Se2501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 291), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Se2501), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop design set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode on the liquid crystal display. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Se2502, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Se2501) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Se2503.

In step Se2503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 that is specified by the display setting process (Se2502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Se2504.

In step Se2504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Se2503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information and, together with the drive signal, causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. After that, the process advances to step Se2505 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends. Heretofore, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball sorting device 200 causes the game ball entering the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 to pass from the main passage 211 to the first branch line. It is distributed to the passage 212 or the second branch passage 213. Specifically, the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 causes the game balls to reach the first branch point 211x of the first passage 210 in the first branch line passage 212 when the game balls are distributed in the second passage 220. The game balls that have been distributed and have reached the second branch point 211y of the first passage 210 are distributed to the second branch line passage 213 by the distribution of the game balls in the third passage 230 by the second game ball distribution mechanism 250. ..

Therefore, the player adjusts the firing intensity of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25 to change the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball inlet 221 of the second passage 220. In one passage 210, it is possible to change the probability that the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage 212, and by changing the probability that the game balls enter the third ball inlet 231 of the third passage 230, In one passage 210, it is possible to change the probability that the game balls are distributed to the second branch passage 213. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch strength of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25, and the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage 210, and the game ball in the first passage 210 will be the first branch passage 212. It is possible to individually change the probability that the game balls are distributed to the second branch line passage 213 in the first passage 210. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls passing through the first passage 210 are triggered by the circulation of the game balls in the second passage 220 or the circulation of the game balls in the third passage 230. It is distributed to a special route SP that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player increases the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball inlet 221 of the second passage 220 by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball by operating the operation handle 25, and By increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the third entrance 231 of the three passages 230, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the special route SP in the first passage 210 will be increased, and a game that is advantageous for the player. The result can be obtained. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that reaches the first branch point 211x of the first passage 210 by the circulation of the game ball in the second passage 220 is the first branch passage that reaches the special route SP. The game balls that have been distributed to 212 and have reached the second branch point 211y of the first passage 210 due to the distribution of the game balls in the third passage 230 are distributed to the second branch passage 213 that leads to the special route SP. .. That is, the former and the latter have a logical sum (OR) relationship, and in the case of the former and in the case of the latter, it is possible to distribute the game ball to the special route SP. Therefore, even if the game ball is not distributed to the first branch line passage 212 at the first branch point 211x of the first passage 210, the player can play the game ball at the second branch line passage 213 at the subsequent second branch point 211y. You can have a sense of expectation that you will be assigned to. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210, the second entrance 221 of the second passage 220, and the third entrance 231 of the third passage 230. Nail 42 (42a, 42b, 42c, 42d) is provided on the upper side, and there is a probability that the nail 42 (42a, 42b, 42c, 42d) is distributed to the above-described first branch passage 212 or second branch passage 213 depending on the driving position of these nails 42a to 42d. change. The change in this probability will be described in detail below.

Consider the driving position of the first nail 42a provided above the wall between the adjacent first entrance 201 and second entrance 221. Depending on the driving position of the first nail 42a, the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball inlet 201 of the first passage 210 changes. Specifically, by providing the first nail 42a on the side of the first ball entrance 201 in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 201. In this case, since the probability that a game ball will enter the second ball inlet 221 of the second passage 220 is high, the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 causes the game ball to move into the first branch line passage 212 in the first passage 210. The probability of being distributed to is high. In summary, when the first nail 42a is provided on the side of the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210, the probability that the game ball enters the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210 decreases. On the contrary, in the first passage 210, the probability that the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage 212 becomes high.

On the other hand, when the first nail 42a is provided on the second entrance 220 side of the second passage 220 in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball enters the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210 increases. Contrary to this, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance 221 of the second passage is low, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the first branch line passage 212 in the first passage 210 is low. .. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there is a probability of entering the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210 and a probability of the game ball being distributed to the first branch passage 212 in the first passage 210. There is a trade-off relationship.

In the pachinko machine 10, the game balls distributed to the first branch line passage 212 in the first passage 210 are configured to proceed to the special route SP. Therefore, even if the first nail 42a is provided on the side of the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210 to reduce the probability of entering the first entrance 201, the player in the first passage 210 Since the probability that the game ball advances to the advantageous special route SP increases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased toward the hole side between the hole side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the first nail 42a is provided on the side of the second entrance 221 of the second passage 220 to increase the probability of entering the first entrance 201 of the first passage 210, the first passage 210 Since the probability that the game ball advances to the special route SP advantageous to the player is reduced, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to the player between the hall side and the player side. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the driving position of the first nail 42a.

Similarly, consider the driving position of the second nail 42b provided above the wall between the first entrance hole 201 and the third entrance hole 231 which are adjacent to each other. In this case as well, similar to the relationship between the first ball entrance 201 and the second ball entrance 221 described above, the ball enters the first ball entrance 201 of the first passage 210 depending on the driving position of the second nail 42b. There is a trade-off relationship between changing the probability that the game ball is distributed to the second branch line passage 213 in the first passage 210. Also from this, it is possible to suppress the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the driving position of the second nail 42b.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first nail 42a is provided on the second entrance port 221 side in the left-right direction, and the second nail 42b is provided on the third entrance port 231 side in the left-right direction. Consider the configuration in which the entrance to the first entrance 201 is widened. In this configuration, since the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball inlet 221 and the third ball inlet 231 and the game ball is easy to enter the first ball inlet 211, the player operates the operation handle 25. It is preferable to shoot a game ball aiming at the first entrance 201 by the operation. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of game balls sent from the first entrance 201 to the normal route NR per unit time. As described above, the probability of a game ball passing through the normal route NR entering the first starting opening 33 is not so high as, for example, 10%, but the number of game balls sent to the normal route NR is increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the total probability of entering the first starting opening 33 per unit time.

On the other hand, the first nail 42a is provided on the first entrance 201 side in the left-right direction, and the second nail 42b is provided on the first entrance 201 side in the left-right direction, so that the first entrance 201 Consider a configuration with a narrower path to. In this configuration, since the paths to the second entrance 221 and the third entrance 231 are wide, the game balls can easily enter the second entrance 221 and the third entrance 231. Therefore, in this configuration, it is preferable that the player shoots a game ball by aiming at the second entrance 221 or the third entrance 231 by operating the operation handle 25. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that enter the second entrance 221 or the third entrance 231 per unit time. If the number of game balls entering the second entrance 221 or the third entrance 231 increases, when the game ball enters the first entrance 201, the entered game ball is a special route. The probability of being assigned to SP increases. As described above, since the probability that the game ball that has passed through the special route SP enters the first starting opening 33 is extremely high, for example, 50 to 100%, the ball enters the first starting opening 33 per unit time. The probability of doing can be increased. In this way, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the game ball distribution device 200 is provided, the distance between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b (hereinafter referred to as the first inter-nail distance). ) And the distance between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c (hereinafter referred to as the second inter-nail distance), there is a difference to the first starting opening 33 for the difference. It is possible to suppress changes in the ease of entering the game ball (expected value of entering the ball). Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

For example, consider a configuration in which the sum of the first inter-nail distance and the second inter-nail distance, that is, the distance between the second nail 42b and the third nail 42c is regulated to be constant. A configuration in which the first nail 42a is provided on the left side of the center between the second nail 42b and the third nail 42c, and the first inter-nails distance is wider than the second inter-nails distance (hereinafter, referred to as "the 1)), the second ball entrance 221 located between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c is lower than the first ball entrance 201 by the game ball. Since it is difficult to do so, the valve body 241 is difficult to open in the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 (it is difficult to shift from the first position to the second position). However, in the first configuration, the first ball entrance 201 located between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b is easily inserted by the game ball, and the first ball is inserted per unit time. By increasing the number of game balls that enter the ball opening 201, it is possible to increase the probability that the game balls will enter the first starting opening 33.

On the other hand, a configuration in which the first nail 42a is provided on the right side of the center between the second nail 42b and the third nail 42c, and the first inter-nail distance is smaller than the second inter-nail distance (hereinafter, In the "second configuration"), the first ball entrance 201 is less likely to enter the game ball than the second ball entrance 221. Therefore, the first ball entrance 201 is compared to the first configuration. It is difficult for game balls to enter. However, in the second configuration, the second ball inlet 221 is easier to enter the game ball than the first configuration, so when the game ball enters the first ball inlet 201, the valve body 241 is easy to open, and it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the first starting opening 33.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 33 with respect to the difference between the first inter-nail distance and the second inter-nail distance. The expected value of the ball) can be suppressed from changing, and the expected value of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 can be easily maintained constant (or within a predetermined difference). Similarly, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 with respect to the difference between the first nail distance and the third nail distance (distance between the second nail 42b and the fourth nail 42d). It is possible to suppress a change in playability (expected value of entering a ball), and to easily maintain an expected value of a game ball entering the first starting opening 33 at a constant value (or within a predetermined difference). it can.

In addition, the distance between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b (the distance between the first nails) and the distance between the first nail 42a and the third nail 42c (the distance between the second nails). When the distance is replaced by the width (width) of the first entrance 201 and the width (width) of the second entrance 221, the width (width) of the first entrance 201 is considered. ) And the width (width) of the second entrance 221 is different, the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33 with respect to the difference (expected value of entrance) Can be suppressed, it is possible to easily maintain the expected value of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 constant (or within a predetermined difference). In addition, the distance between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b (the distance between the first nails) and the distance between the second nail 42b and the fourth nail 42d (the distance between the third nails). When the distance is replaced by the width (width) of the first entrance 201 and the width (width) of the third entrance 231, the width (width) of the first entrance 201 is considered. ) And the width (width) of the third entrance 231 are different, the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33 with respect to the difference (expected value of entrance) Can be suppressed, it is possible to easily maintain the expected value of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 constant (or within a predetermined difference).

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the valve bodies 241 and 251 in each of the game ball distribution mechanisms 240 and 250 are configured to be able to move from the second position to the first position due to their own weight. It is not necessary to use a driving means such as a motor to open and close the bodies 241 and 251. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the gaming machine.

<<E6>> Modification Example of Fifth Embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<E6-1>> Modification 1:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 1 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment only in the configuration of the game ball distribution device, and the rest of the configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the same configurations and the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 293 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball distribution device 300 provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification. FIG. 293 shows a state in which the valve bodies 341 and 351 are closed. In FIG. 293, the +X direction indicates the front view right side, and the −X direction indicates the front view left side.

As shown in the figure, the game ball distribution device 300 has a first passage 310, a second passage 320 adjacent to the −X direction side of the first passage 310, and a +X direction side of the first passage 310. And a third passage 330 disposed adjacent to each other. The first to third passages 310 to 330 are made of transparent resin members.

The 1st passage 310 has the 1st ball entrance 301 in the upper end, and flows the game ball which entered from the 1st ball entrance 301 downward. The first passage 310 has one main line passage 311, a child branch line passage 312 divided from the main line passage 311, and a grandchild branch line passage 313 divided from the child branch line passage 312.

The main line passage 311 is divided into a main line upstream side portion 311a and a main line downstream side portion 311b. The main line upstream side portion 311a is the most upstream side portion in the main line passage 311 and has a linear shape extending directly downward from the first entrance 301. The main line downstream side portion 311b is a part following the main line upstream side portion 311a and has a linear shape extending from the lower end of the main line upstream side portion 311a to the lower right direction.

The sub-branch passage 312 is located directly below the first branch point 311x, with the connecting portion between the main line upstream side portion 311a and the main line downstream side portion 311b in the main line passage 311 as a branch point (hereinafter, referred to as “first branch point”) 311x. Stretch in the direction. The first branch point 311x is provided with a first game ball distribution mechanism 340 for distributing the game balls to either the main line downstream side portion 311b of the main line passage 311 or the child branch line passage 312.

The child branch line passage 312 is divided into a child branch line upstream side portion 312a and a child branch line downstream side portion 312b. The child branch line upstream side portion 312a is a portion on the upstream side in the child branch line passage 312, and has a linear shape extending right below from the first branch point 311x. The child branch line downstream side portion 312b is a portion following the child branch line upstream side portion 312a and has a linear shape extending from the lower end of the child branch line upstream side portion 312a to the lower left direction.

In the grandchild branch passage 313, a connecting portion of the child branch upstream side portion 312a and the child branch line downstream portion 312b serves as a branch point (hereinafter, referred to as a "second branch point") 312x, and extends downward from the second branch point 312x. It has a linear shape that extends. The second branch point 312x is provided with a second game ball distribution mechanism 350 that distributes the game ball to one of the child branch line downstream side portion 312b and the grandchild branch line passage 313.

The second passage 320 has a second entrance 321 into which a game ball can enter, and has the same shape as the second passage 220 of the fifth embodiment. In the first modification, the vertical position (that is, the height) of the second entrance 321 and the height of the first entrance 301 formed in the first passage 310 are the same, and the second entrance The ball inlet 321 and the first ball inlet 301 are adjacent to each other.

The third passage 330 has a third entrance 331 into which a game ball can enter, and allows the game ball entered from the third entrance 331 to flow downward. In the present modification 1, the height of the third ball entrance 331 and the height of the first ball entrance 301 formed in the first passage 310 are the same, and the third ball entrance 331 and the first ball entrance 331 are the same. It is adjacent to 301. The third passage 310 is a single continuous passage that does not branch in the middle, and is divided into an upstream portion 330a extending downward from the third entrance 331 and a downstream portion 330b extending downward to the right. To be done.

The upstream portion 330a extends right below without swaying left and right when viewed from the front. However, in the depth direction (front and back direction in the figure), the upstream side portion 330a is curved in a U-shape toward the rear side (back side in the figure) so as to straddle the main line downstream side portion 311b of the main line passage 311. There is. The U-shape is such that the game ball can flow down.

The first game ball distribution mechanism 340 has the same configuration as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and has a valve element 341, an action piece 342, a rotary shaft 343, and a weight 344. Have. The operation of the first game ball distribution mechanism 340 is also the same as that of the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and in this modified example 1, when the game ball does not flow through the second passage 320. The game ball reaching the first branch point 311x of the main path 311 is distributed to the main stream downstream side portion 311b of the main path 311 and the first branch point of the main path 311 is triggered by the circulation of the game ball in the second path 320. The game ball reaching 311x is distributed to the child branch passage 312.

The second game ball distribution mechanism 350 has the same configuration as the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 of the fifth embodiment, and has a valve body 351, an action piece 352, a rotating shaft 353, and a weight 354. Have. The operation of the second game ball distribution mechanism 350 is also the same as that of the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 of the fifth embodiment, and in this modified example 1, when the game ball does not flow through the third passage 330. , The game ball that reaches the second branch point 312x of the child branch line passage 312 is distributed to the child branch line downstream side portion 312b of the child branch line passage 312, and the distribution of the game ball in the third passage 330 triggers the movement of the child branch line passage 312. The game balls that have reached the second branch point 312x are distributed to the grandchild branch passage 313.

The downstream end of the main passage 311 in the first passage 310 and the downstream end of the child branch passage 312 in the first passage 310 are combined (the combined portion is not shown) to communicate with the normal route NR. doing. The grandchild branch passage 313 in the first passage 210 communicates with the special route SP. The downstream end of the second passage 320 and the downstream end of the third passage 330 are combined (the combined portion is not shown) to communicate with the outroute OT (FIG. 259).

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as described above, when the game ball flows through the second passage 320 and the game ball flows through the third passage 330, the first passage 310 of the first passage 310 is triggered. The game ball entered from the first entrance 301 is distributed to the final stage grandchild branch passage 313. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball so that the game ball enters both the second entrance 321 of the second passage 320 and the third entrance 331 of the third passage 330. By changing the probability, it is possible to change the probability that the game ball is distributed to the child branch line passage 312 in the first passage 310, and the probability that the game ball will enter the third entrance 331 of the third passage 330. By changing, it is possible to change the probability that the game ball is distributed to the grandchild branch line passage 313 (and thus the special route) in the first passage 310. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to determine the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage 310 and the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the grandson branch passage 313 in the first passage 310. It can be changed individually. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, as a condition that the game ball entering the first ball inlet 301 reaches the special route SP, the game ball is distributed to the child branch line passage 312 by the first game ball distribution mechanism 340. And that the game balls are distributed to the grandchild branch passage 313 by the second game ball distribution mechanism 350 (so-called logical product (AND) relationship). Therefore, after the game balls are distributed to the child branch line passages 312 by the first game ball distribution mechanism 340, the game balls are again distributed to the grandchild branch line passages 313 by the second game ball distribution mechanism 350. , The player will be watching with a sense of tension. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the profit is biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the driving positions of the first and second nails 42a and 42b. Can be suppressed, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to use a driving means such as a motor to open and close the valve bodies 341 and 351, the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

<<E6-2>> Modification 2:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 2 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment only in the configuration of the game ball distribution device, and the rest of the configuration is the same. The game ball distribution device in the modified example 2 is different from the game ball distribution device 200 in the fifth embodiment mainly in that the third passage 230 and the second game ball distribution mechanism 250 are not provided. ..

FIG. 294 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball distribution device 400 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification Example 2. FIG. 294 shows a state in which the valve body 441 is closed. In FIG. 294, the +X direction indicates the front view right side, and the −X direction indicates the front view left side. The game ball distribution device 400 includes a first passage 410 and a second passage 420 arranged adjacent to the −X direction side of the first passage 410. The first and second passages 410 and 420 are made of transparent resin members.

The 1st passage 410 has the 1st ball entrance 401 in the upper end, and flows the game ball which entered from the 1st ball entrance 401 downward. The first passage 410 has one main passage 411 and a branch passage 412 separated from the main passage 411.

The main line passage 411 is divided into a main line upstream side portion 411a and a main line downstream side portion 411b. The main line upstream side portion 411a has a linear shape that extends right below from the first ball inlet 401. The main line downstream side portion 411b is a part following the main line upstream side portion 411a and has a linear shape extending from the lower end of the main line upstream side portion 411a to the lower right direction.

The branch passage 412 extends directly downward from the branch point 411x, with the connecting portion between the main line upstream side portion 411a and the main line downstream side portion 411b in the main line passage 411 as a branch point 411x. At the branch point 411x, a game ball distribution mechanism 440 for distributing the game balls to either the main line downstream side portion 411b of the main line passage 411 or the branch line passage 412 is provided. The branch passage 412 has a linear shape extending right below.

The second passage 420 has a second ball entrance 421 into which a game ball can enter. In the second modified example, the vertical position (that is, the height) of the second entrance 421 and the height of the first entrance 401 formed in the first passage 410 are the same, and the second entrance The ball inlet 421 and the first ball inlet 401 are adjacent to each other.

The game ball distribution mechanism 440 has the same configuration as the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment, and has a valve body 441, an action piece 442, a rotating shaft 443, and a weight 444. .. The operation of the game ball distribution mechanism 440 is also the same as that of the first game ball distribution mechanism 240 of the fifth embodiment. In this modified example 2, when the game ball does not flow through the second passage 420, the main line. The game ball reaching the branch point 411x of the passage 411 is distributed to the main line downstream side portion 411b, and the distribution of the game ball in the second passage 420 triggers the game ball reaching the branch point 411x of the main line passage 411 into the branch passage 412. Be assigned to.

The downstream end of the main passage 411 in the first passage 410 communicates with the normal route NR. The branch passage 412 in the first passage 410 communicates with the special route SP. The downstream end of the second passage 420 communicates with the outroute OT.

The nails 442a, 442b, 442c are provided above the first ball entrance 401 and the second ball entrance 421 of the game ball distribution device 400. Specifically, the first nail 442a is provided above the wall between the first entrance 401 and the second entrance 421, and above the wall on the left side of the second entrance 421. The second nail 442b is provided, and the third nail 442c is provided above the wall on the right side of the first entrance port 401. Depending on the driving positions of the first to third nails 442a to 442c, the probability of the game ball entering the ball inlets 401 and 421 changes.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 configured as described above, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball, and thereby the probability that the game ball enters the first path 410 and the first path 410. In, the probability that the game ball is distributed to the branch passage 413 can be individually changed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, it is possible to suppress the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the driving position of the first nail 442a. , It is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to use a driving means such as a motor to open and close the valve body 451, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

<<E6-3>> Modification 3:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 3 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment in that it is provided with a game ball storage device and a forced ejection device above the game ball distribution device 200, and the remaining The configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 295 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball distribution device 200 provided in the pachinko machine of the modification example 3 and its periphery. In FIG. 295, the +X direction indicates the front view right side, and the −X direction indicates the front view left side. The game ball distribution device 200 is the same as the game ball distribution device 200 in the fifth embodiment.

Above the game ball distribution device 200, specifically, the first ball inlet 201 of the first passage 210, the second ball inlet 221 of the second passage 220, and the third ball inlet 231 of the third passage 230. A game ball storage device 500 is provided above. On the right side of the game ball storage device 500, a forced release device 600 is provided.

FIG. 296 is a perspective view showing the game ball storage device 500 and the forced ejection device 600. As shown in FIGS. 295 and 296, the game ball storage device 500 includes a game ball receiving container 510, a rotation shaft (axis for rotation) 520, and a restorer 530 (FIG. 295).

The game ball receiving container 510 is a box-shaped container having an opening 510a, and can store up to three game balls flowing down in the game area PA. The number of game balls that can be stored in the game ball receiving container 510 is the same as the number of ball entrances (first to third ball entrances 201, 311 and 321) provided in the game ball sorting device 200. A rotating shaft 520 is provided on the bottom of the game ball receiving container 510 on the game board 30 side. The game ball receiving container 510 is configured to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 520. Specifically, it is configured to be rotatable between a normal posture and a tilted posture.

The normal attitude is the attitude of the game ball receiving container 510 shown in FIGS. 295 and 296, and the orientation of the opening 510a is upward. The direction of the opening 510a is the direction from the inside of the game ball receiving container 510 to the outside in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface. In the normal position, the game ball flowing down the game area PA can be taken in from the upward opening 510a.

The tilted posture is a posture in which the game ball receiving container 510 is tilted and the direction of the opening 510a is the front side (front side in the drawing) of the game board 30 in front view. In the tilted posture, the game balls stored in the game ball receiving container 510 can be dropped from the opening 510a facing the front side in front view.

In the initial state, the game ball receiving container 510 takes a normal posture, and when three game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container 510, an arrow R (FIG. 296) is generated depending on the weight of the three stored game balls. As shown in (), the normal posture is changed to the tilted posture. As a result, the three stored game balls fall from the game ball receiving container 510 at once. That is, the game ball receiving container 510 discharges three game balls downward at once when the game ball is moved to the tilted posture.

A restorer 530 is provided at the bottom of the game ball receiving container 510. The restorer 530 is provided with an elastic body such as a spring therein, and returns the game ball receiving container 510 that has changed to the tilted posture to the normal posture.

The forced ejection device 600 has a rotating shaft 610 provided perpendicularly to the game board 30, and an elongated plate 620 attached to the rotating shaft 610. The long plate 620 is a thin plate having a thin thickness, and is attached to the rotary shaft 610 such that the longitudinal direction of the long plate 620 is orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotary shaft 610. The long plate 620 rotates about the rotation shaft 610 in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 610. A part of the game ball receiving container 510 is located in the area where the long plate 620 rotates.

In the present embodiment, the rotating shaft 610 always rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) at a constant rotation speed, and makes one rotation for a predetermined time, for example, one minute. When the rotary shaft 610 rotates counterclockwise and the long plate 620 rotates counterclockwise, the long plate 620 hits the right side portion of the game ball receiving container 510, and the long plate 620 was in the normal posture. The game ball receiving container 510 is moved to the tilted posture. As a result, the game ball receiving container 510 is forcibly moved to the tilted posture every predetermined time, and the game balls stored in the game ball receiving container 510 are discharged downward. Even if the number of game balls stored in the game ball receiving container 510 is two or one, the stored game balls are discharged downward.

In addition, in the forced ejection device 600, the rotating shaft 610 may be configured to intermittently rotate at predetermined intervals instead of being configured to constantly rotate at a constant rotation speed. Further, in the forced ejection device 600, the long plate 620 may be replaced with a rod-shaped one.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 configured as described above, the three game balls stored and discharged from the game ball receiving container 510 are collected at one time, and the first to the first of the game ball sorting devices 200 are collected. It goes toward the 3 entrance port 201,221,231. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the first to third ball entrances 201, 221, 231. Therefore, in the game ball distribution device 200, the paths 212, 213 leading to the special route SP are provided. The probability of distributing game balls can be increased. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, it is possible to increase the interest rate of the game by increasing the probability of being advantageous to the player.

By operating the operation handle 25, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the game ball receiving container 510. That is, the game ball is shot aiming at the game ball receiving container 510 so that three game balls can be stored in the game ball receiving container 510. By doing this, three game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container 510, the game balls are tilted, and the first to third ball inlets 201, 221, 231 of the game ball sorting device 200 are put together. You can enter the game ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In Modification 3, since the game ball is forcibly discharged from the game ball receiving container 510 every time the long plate 620 of the forced-discharging device 600 makes one rotation, the player can see that the long plate 620 is It is necessary to store three game balls in the game ball receiving container 510 during one rotation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension as to whether or not three game balls can be stored before the game balls are forcibly released.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, since the weight of the game ball can be received and the game ball can be automatically discharged from the game ball receiving container 510, the configuration of the game machine can be simplified. .. Furthermore, since the game ball can be forcibly discharged from the game ball storage device 500 repeatedly every predetermined time by the forced discharge device 600, when the player tries to finish the game, the game ball receiving container 510 is stored in the game ball receiving container 510. Game balls will no longer remain stored. Therefore, since the next player does not start the game from an advantageous state, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

<<E6-4>> Modification 4:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 4 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the fifth embodiment only in the configuration of the game ball distribution device, and the rest of the configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are designated by the same names and reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 297 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball distribution device 700 provided in the pachinko machine of the modification example 4. FIG. 297 shows a state in which the valve bodies 741 and 751 are closed. In FIG. 297, the +X direction indicates the front view right side, and the −X direction indicates the front view left side. The game ball distribution device 700 in the modification 4 has the same passage configuration as the game ball distribution device 200 in the fifth embodiment, and the first game ball distribution mechanism 740 and the second game ball distribution device 740. The structure of the mechanism 750 is different.

The 1st game ball distribution mechanism 240 and the 2nd game ball distribution mechanism 250 in 5th Embodiment are the valve bodies 241,251, the action pieces 242,252, the rotating shafts 243,243, and the weights 244,245. And a configuration that operates without using a drive unit such as a motor. On the other hand, the 1st game ball distribution mechanism 740 and the 2nd game ball distribution mechanism 750 in the modification 4 are provided with the valve bodies 741 and 751 and the rotating shafts 743 and 743. The valve bodies 741 and 751 are driven to open by actuators (not shown). The actuator is electrically controlled by main controller 60.

Inside the second passage 220, a first game ball detection sensor 725 that detects passage of a game ball is attached. Inside the third passage 230, a second game ball detection sensor 735 for detecting passage of the game ball is attached. The main controller 60, when detecting the passage of the game ball by the first game ball detection sensor 725, for the predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) from the time of the detection, the first game ball distribution mechanism. The valve element 741 of 740 is opened (moved to the second position), and after the lapse of the period, the valve element 741 is closed (moved to the first position). Further, the main control device 60, when detecting the passage of the game ball by the second game ball detection sensor 735, the second game ball swing for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) from the time of the detection. The valve body 751 of the minute mechanism 750 is opened (moved to the second position), and after the lapse of the period, the valve body 751 is closed (moved to the first position).

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, depending on the driving position of the first and second nails 42a, 42b, the hole side and the player side. It is possible to prevent profit from being biased to one of them. Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage 210, and The probability that the game ball is distributed to the first branch line passage 212 in the one passage 210 and the probability that the game ball is distributed to the second branch line passage 213 in the first passage 210 can be individually changed, and the player can be changed. The result of the game can be given according to the skill. In this way, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 4, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first game ball distribution mechanism 740 and the second game ball distribution mechanism 750 of the fifth embodiment, the first game ball distribution mechanism 740 and the second game ball distribution mechanism are provided during the period when the valve bodies 741 and 751 are opened. It was a fixed period determined from the shape of 750. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, the period during which the valve bodies 741 and 751 are opened can be predetermined to any time. The period for opening the valve bodies 741, 751 is a period starting from the timing at which passage of the game ball is detected by the first and second game ball detection sensors 725, 735, but instead of this, The period may start after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing at which passage was detected.

<<E6-5>> Modification 5:
In the fifth embodiment and Modifications 1 to 3 thereof, the action piece included in the game ball distribution mechanism is a plate-like member, and is located at a point symmetry with the rotation axis as the center of symmetry with respect to the valve body. It was provided. On the other hand, as a modified example, it may be configured to have another shape or other position. In short, any structure can be adopted as long as it can be acted upon by the game balls circulating in the second passage. Further, the second passage and the third passage for circulating the game ball may not be provided, and the game ball flowing down the game area PA may directly act on the action piece.

<<E6-6>> Modification 6:
The shapes of the first to third passages in the fifth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4 may be various shapes instead of the shape described above.

<<E6-7>> Modification 7:
Although the game ball distribution mechanism in the fifth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4 has a configuration in which the game balls are distributed to one of the two passages, instead of this, the game ball distribution mechanism has three structures. The game balls may be distributed to any of the above passages.

<<E6-8>> Modification 8:
In the fifth embodiment and Modifications 1 to 4 thereof, the positional relationship between the first entrance and the second entrance (or the third entrance) is adjacent to each other. On the other hand, as a modified example, the positional relationship between the first entrance and the second entrance (or the third entrance) may be different in height and may be adjacent in the left-right direction. good. Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first entrance and the second entrance (or the third entrance) may be separated.

<<E6-9>> Modification 9:
In the fifth embodiment and the modifications 1 to 4 thereof, the game ball distribution mechanism has a weight and can move from the second position to the first position by its own weight. On the other hand, as a modified example, the weight may not be provided, and the weight of the valve body itself may be biased to one side so that the valve body can move from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

<<E6-10>> Modification 10:
The modified example 3 of the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which a game ball storage device is provided above the game ball distribution device 200 in the fifth embodiment. On the other hand, as a modified example, the game ball storage device may be provided above the game ball sorting device 400 (FIG. 294) in the modified example 2 of the fifth embodiment. In this case, the game ball storage device is configured to discharge the stored game balls downward when two game balls are stored in the game ball receiving container. Further, in the modified example 3 of the fifth embodiment described above, the game balls received in the game ball receiving container are tilted by the weights of the plurality of game balls, so that the game balls placed in the game ball receiving container are dropped. Alternatively, the weight of the plurality of game balls may open the bottom of the game ball receiving container to drop the game balls on the game ball receiving container. Further, in the game ball storage device, even if more than three game balls are loaded in the game ball receiving container, the game ball receiving container does not tilt, and the game ball receiving container tilts only by the forced discharge device 600. Also good. In addition, in the third modification of the fifth embodiment, the forced release device 600 may be removed.

<<E6-11>> Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment and the modifications 1 to 4 thereof, the game ball distribution device is provided in the game area PA in which the game balls flow down, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. A game ball distribution device may be provided in a region in which is distributed.

<<F>> Sixth Embodiment:
<<F1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 298 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as a sixth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 299 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design and an image for effect.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted on the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided in the individual openings described above formed on the game board 30. Be induced. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of game balls are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 (FIG. 299) as prize balls.

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described below is executed.

The second starting opening 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The open/close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode shifts to a case where a big hit is won as a result of a winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in an open state. This is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode that allows the winning of the variable winning device 36 to the special winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, even when the big hit is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode in which the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won. In the present embodiment, when the game balls are won in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

When the winning symbol lottery triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variable display or the variable display as the display mode until the segment display device displays the corresponding lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b, when the winning lottery triggered by the winning in the second starting opening 34 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display displays the corresponding lottery result, a variable display or Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the winning of the winning through the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round game is an open/close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols when the first symbol display portion 37a displays the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning in the first starting opening 33. Further, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second symbol display portion 37b based on the winning of the second start opening 34. .. The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the entrance into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 301 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 301( a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 301(a), the liquid crystal display device 41 variably displays symbols indicating numbers 1-8. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 301( b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 301(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 301(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The mode of variable display of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. In other words, this is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol for each game time. On either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the pachinko machine 10 determines a predetermined value in the liquid crystal display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 301(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 300, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<F2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 302 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC power supply of 24V from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. The “time of power failure” is not limited to the time of power failure of the commercial power source, but also includes the time when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is off).

Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is also connected to multiple detection sensors. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering the through gate 35. To do.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying a prize for the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out. The corresponding prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 303 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery to determine whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol string displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C5 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

A holding information storage area 64b is provided in the RAM 64. The reserved information storage area 64b is composed of a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning are chronologically arranged in the reserved information storage area 64b. Stored in.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the game ball in the second starting opening 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table in the win/loss table storage area 63a (FIG. 302) of the ROM 63.

FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the winning lottery. The high-probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode. FIG. 304(a) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 304(b) shows a win/loss table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 304(a), in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number for the big hit is 15 pieces. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 304(b), in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number for the big win is 30. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Returning to FIG. 303, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described below. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 33, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64), and when the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 34, the holding information is stored. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until it becomes individual. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the lottery mode of the above-mentioned (2) winning lottery after completion of the opening/closing execution mode, a high-probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed by using a win/loss table for a high-probability mode as a win/loss table, and a win/loss table. As a result, it is possible to set the low-probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed by using the win/loss table for the low-probability mode. As described with reference to FIG. 304, the case of performing the winning lottery using the winning/discarding table for high probability is more successful than the case of performing the winning lottery using the winning/discarding table for low probability. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open counter C5, but in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric auditors' item open lottery after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second start opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start opening 33 is higher than in the second start opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start opening 34 is more likely to be won than the first start opening 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is paid to the second starting opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls he holds. You can

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is more frequently in the electric role open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed, a low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode is increased by applying the condition of any one or any combination of shortening the average time of securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots on the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of types of jackpots. The sorting destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a sorting table.

FIG. 305 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 305(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 305(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 305(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33 is 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R normal jackpot. Big hit, 8R Normal big hit is set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 5" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot and "6 to 23" correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "24 to 27" correspond to the 16R normal jackpot and "28 to 39" correspond to the 8R regular jackpot. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the probability of a probability variation jackpot is 60% of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, and the probability of a regular jackpot is the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”. Is 40% of the value of. Note that the number and value of the random numbers that are won in the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 305(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are determined. , 16R regular jackpot and 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 12” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “13 to 23” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "24-30" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and "31-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and This is different from when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won based on the winning in the second starting opening 34, the probability of the probability variation jackpot is 60%, the probability of being the regular jackpot is 40%, and the first starting opening 33. It is the same as the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning a prize, but the probability that the distribution of 16R and 8R is 16R is higher than the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. Has become. Note that the number and value of the random numbers that are won in the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that a win will be generated in the second starting opening 34 of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It should be noted that if the result of the win/win lottery is a failure, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Returning to FIG. 303, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described below. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value for the reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. The table is collated to determine whether or not to reach. However, as a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit is won and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed, and the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 301(b), first the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3, whereby the reach line is formed. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of fluctuation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of fluctuation of the symbol by the liquid crystal display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C5 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C5 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electricity reserve area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether to control the electric accessory 34a to be in the open state by using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C5. For example, if C5=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C5=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and the second holding area. The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb corresponds to the hold information related to the second starting port 34, and these hold information are special in the present invention. Corresponds to information.

<<F3>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 306 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 302) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<F4>> Composition of the first starting port and life nail:
FIG. 307 is a perspective view showing the first starting port 33 and its surroundings. In the figure, the X-axis positive direction indicates the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right-left direction when viewed from the front of the game board 30, the Y-axis direction indicates the vertical direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-back direction of the game board 30. The X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis are three axes that are orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the X-axis positive direction is referred to as “+X direction”, the X-axis negative direction is referred to as “−X direction”, the Y-axis positive direction is referred to as “+Y direction”, and the Y-axis negative direction is referred to as “−Y direction”. The Z-axis positive direction is called "+Z direction", and the Z-axis negative direction is called "-Z direction".

The 1st starting opening 33 is comprised by the ball entrance member which forms the ball entrance 33a into which a game ball can enter. Specifically, the first starting port 33 has a hollow box shape, the ball entrance 33a is formed on the +Y direction side surface, and the game board 30 is penetrated in the front-back direction on the -Z direction side surface. A ball discharge port 33b communicating with an opening (not shown) is formed. The game ball entered from the ball inlet 33a is discharged from the ball outlet 33b through the first starting port 33 and is sent to the opening penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The first starting port 33 is made of a translucent resin member.

As described above, the pair of nails 42 is planted above the first starting port 33. Hereinafter, the nail on the +X direction side of the pair of nails 42 will be referred to as “first nail 42a”, and the nail on the −X direction side of the pair of nails 42 will be referred to as “second nail 42b”.

Each nail 42 included in the pachinko machine 10 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b has a substantially hemispherical head portion 421 and a substantially columnar body portion 422, For example, it is integrally formed of a brass material. The body portion 422 extends straight, the tip is sharp, and a spiral thread groove 422s (see FIG. 308) is formed in a part of the outer peripheral surface. The nail 42 is hard to come off from the game board 30 due to an impact even when the game ball collides with the nail 42 by being driven up to the screw groove 422s in the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. Each nail 42 is driven by an automatic nailing machine. At least a part of each of the nails 42 may be configured so that the inclination thereof is adjusted as needed after being driven by the automatic nailing machine.

At least at the shipping stage of the manufacturer, each nail 42 is substantially vertical to the plywood 30a. Specifically, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 have a minute angle θ1 with respect to the direction intersecting the surface of the plywood 30a at a right angle, that is, the +Z-axis direction. , Θ2. The inclination angle of at least a part of the nails 42 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b is determined in order to match the ball-out rate and the winning rate with the design value. The inclination angles of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b will be described in detail below.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing the pair of nails 42 a and 42 b and the first starting port 33. 308(a) is a sectional view taken along the line 1-1 in FIG. 307, and FIG. 308(b) is a sectional view taken along the line 2-2 in FIG. 307. That is, in FIG. 308(a), the first and second nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the +Y direction side (upper side) toward the −Y direction side (lower side) ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to simply as “when viewed from above”. FIG. 308(b) shows a case where the pair of nails 42a, 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the +X direction side (right side) toward the −X direction side (left side) (hereinafter, simply “viewed from the right side”). It is also referred to as “case”). In FIG. 308(b), the second nail 42b located on the left side is hidden by the first nail 42a located on the right side and cannot be seen.

As shown in FIG. 308(a), when viewed from the upper side, in the first nail 42a located on the right side, the center axis direction of the body portion 422 based on the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the right side (+X direction) by the first angle θ1. In general terms, the first nail 42a is provided so as to be inclined by +θ1 (counterclockwise θ1) with respect to the +Z direction.

Generally, the pachinko machine 10 has been subjected to a device performance test, and devices manufactured in the same model generally have the same performance, and thus installation permission is given to each pachinko machine. The first angle θ1 is a predetermined angle that is set in advance, and in the present embodiment, the first angle θ1 is an angle when the model certification test is passed. The first angle θ1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees in the present embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the first nail 42a is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the first nail 42a is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As shown in FIG. 308(a), in the second nail 42b located on the left side when viewed from the upper side, the center axis direction of the body portion 422 relative to the tip 423 is from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the left side (−X direction) by the second angle θ2. In general terms, the second nail 42b is provided so as to be inclined by -θ2 (θ2 clockwise) with respect to the +Z direction. The second angle θ2 is a predetermined angle that is set in advance, and in the present embodiment, the second angle θ2 is an angle when the model certification test is passed. The second angle θ2 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is 5 degrees in the present embodiment. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are equal in the present embodiment, but may be different instead. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are also the angles intended by the manufacturer at the shipping stage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the second nail 42b is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the second nail 42b is provided along the Z-axis direction.

As a result of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b being inclined as described above, as shown in FIG. 308(a), between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. The distance (width) gradually increases from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side).

The ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 is an opening along the XZ plane and has a trapezoidal shape as shown in FIG. 308(a). Specifically, a first edge (edge) 331 corresponding to one of a pair of parallel opposite sides forming a trapezoid and a second edge 332 corresponding to the other of the pair of opposite sides. , The third edge 333 corresponding to one of the opposite sides of the other set forming the trapezoid, and the fourth edge 334 corresponding to the other of the opposite sides of the other set make the ball entrance 33a Composed. The first edge 331 and the second edge 332 are parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30 (that is, along the X-axis direction), and the first edge 331 is the entrance 33a. Is located on the +Z direction side, and the second edge 332 is located on the -Z direction side of the entrance 33a. The third edge 333 is located on the +X direction side of the ball entrance 33a, and the fourth edge 334 is located on the -X direction side of the ball entrance 33a. It should be noted that the first to fourth edges 331 to 334 can also be said to be inner slopes of the entrance 33a when measuring the inner slope.

In the present embodiment, the length of the first edge 331 is longer than the length of the second edge 332. When the +X direction side angle of the two interior angles at both ends of the second edge 332 is δ1 and the −X direction side angle of the two interior angles is δ2, δ1 and δ2 are as follows: Expressions (1) and (2) are satisfied.

δ1=θ1+90 degrees (1)
δ2=θ2+90 degrees (2)
However, θ1 is the inclination angle of the first nail 42a described above, and θ2 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b described above.

According to the formula (1), it is understood that the third edge 333 has a configuration in which the direction with the end portion on the −Z direction side as a reference is inclined from the +Z direction to the right (+X direction) by the first angle θ1. .. According to the equation (2), the fourth edge 334 has a configuration in which the direction based on the end portion on the −Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the left side (−X direction) by the second angle θ2. I understand. The distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a gradually increases from the rear side (-Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). There is.

Therefore, when viewed from above, the first and second nails 42a and 42b, and the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 have the third edge 333 with the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a. And the fourth lip 334 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b. In other words, the third lip 333 has an inclination angle of the first nail 42a, that is, an angle formed by the first nail 42a and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the normal direction of the surface of the plywood 30a. The angle formed by the fourth lip 334 is defined by the fourth lip 334, that is, the angle between the second nail 42b and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the surface of the plywood 30a). Angle with the vertical direction of the).

<<F5>> Operation and Effect of Embodiment The first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first starting port 33 are caused by unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation. , The inclination may be different from the size intended by the manufacturer.

FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional example. In the conventional example, the same first nail 42a as in the sixth embodiment is used. As described above, the first nail 42a is inclined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+X direction) by the first angle θ1 as described above. A first starting port P33 is provided below the first nail 42a (-Y direction) as in the sixth embodiment. The first starting port P33 differs from the first starting port 33 of the sixth embodiment in that the entrance port P33a has a rectangular shape. That is, in the conventional example, the third edge P93 of the ball entrance P33a is parallel to the direction (Z-axis direction) perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30.

In the conventional pachinko machine, the inclination of the first nail 42a changes from the time of shipment due to accidental impact during transportation, aging, or the like, as shown by a broken line (42a') in the drawing. There were times when it happened. In that case, the repair person needs to return to the first angle θ which is the angle at the time of shipment. However, it is difficult for the repairer to grasp how much the first angle θ is tilted from the pachinko machine whose tilt of the nail has changed. He had a lot of experience with adjustments and the use of special adjustment equipment.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the ball entry port 33a of the first starting port 33 is provided so as to match the inclination of the nails 42a, 42b intended by the manufacturer, which is the angle at the time of shipping. The orientations of the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in are defined in advance. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the first nail 42a and the third edge 333 are seen from the upper side, depending on the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in the ball entrance 33a. By checking and correcting the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b so that the second nail 42b is parallel and the second nail 42b is parallel to the fourth lip 334, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be adjusted by the manufacturer. You can easily return to the intended tilt. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail 42 or a dedicated adjusting tool.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first and second first opening openings 33a of the first starting opening 33 are utilized without separately providing a dedicated member for checking the inclination of the nail. Since the inclinations of the nails 42a and 42b can be restored, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from having a complicated configuration.

As a modified example of the sixth embodiment, the third edge 333 that defines the inclination angle of the first nail 42a and the fourth edge 334 that defines the inclination angle of the second nail 42b are surrounded by the surroundings. May be colored with different colors. According to this configuration, the repair person easily recognizes that the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 serve as a reference when restoring the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. You can

<<F6>> Modification of the sixth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<F6-1>> Modification 1:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 1 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the ball entrance formed in the first starting opening. , The rest of the configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the same configuration and the same names as the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 310 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 542a and 542b as life nails and a first starting port 533 provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification. FIG. 310(a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 310(b) is a view corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a view seen from the right side.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308, the distance (width) between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b is from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). It was a composition that gradually widened toward. On the other hand, in the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 310, the distance (width) between the first nail 542a and the second nail 542b is changed from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (−Z direction side). It gradually narrows toward the +Z direction side). Specifically, in the first nail 542a located on the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the first angle φ1 from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction). It is provided so as to be inclined. The second nail 542b located on the left side is such that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+X direction) by the second angle φ2. It is provided in. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are predetermined angles that are determined in advance, and in the present embodiment, the angles when the model verification test is passed. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, and are, for example, 5 degrees. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are equal, but may be different instead.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308, the distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in the entrance 33a formed in the first starting opening 33 is rearward. The configuration gradually widens from the side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+Z direction side). On the other hand, in the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 310, the distance (width) between the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 in the ball entrance 533a formed in the first starting opening 533 is large. ) Is gradually narrowed from the rear side (−Z direction side) toward the front side (+Z direction side). Specifically, the third rim 593 located on the right side has a configuration in which the direction based on the end on the −Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the left side (−X direction) by the first angle φ1. There is. The fourth edge 594 located on the left side has a configuration in which the direction based on the end portion on the −Z direction side is inclined from the +Z direction to the right side (+X direction) by the second angle φ2.

Therefore, also in the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the first and second nails 542a and 542b and the ball entry port 533a of the first starting port 533 are the first and second balls of the ball entry port 533a when viewed from above. The third lip 593 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 542a, and the fourth lip 594 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 542b.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, by relying on the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 of the ball entrance 533a, The inclinations of the nails 542a and 542b are set so that the first nail 542a is parallel to the third lip 593 and the second nail 542b is parallel to the fourth lip 594 when viewed from above. You can check and correct it. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 542a and 542b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails or a special adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the original first starting opening 33 of the first starting opening 33 is provided without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using the ball entrance 33a, it is possible to prevent the structure of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

<<F6-2>> Modification 2:
The pachinko machine as the second modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the tilt direction of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configurations are the same. Is. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the same names and reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 311 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b as life nails and a first starting port 633 provided in the pachinko machine of the second modification. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the upper side. FIG. 311(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In the sixth embodiment and the first modification, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b have a positive X-axis from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) when the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with the tip 423 as a reference. Alternatively, it is configured to incline in the negative direction (left side on the right). On the other hand, in the modified example 2, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b have the center axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 as the positive Z axis from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). The structure is inclined in the direction (upper side). Specifically, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are along the Z-axis as shown in FIG. 311(a) when viewed from the upper side, and when viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. ), the center axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is provided so as to be inclined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) toward the upper side (+Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined angle μ1 is the angle when the model verification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined angle μ1 is the angle when the model verification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees.

In the sixth embodiment and the first modification, the ball entrance 33a formed in the first starting port 33 has a trapezoidal shape. On the other hand, in the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 311(a), the ball entrance 633a formed in the first starting port 633 has a rectangular shape. Therefore, the third edge 693 and the fourth edge 694 on the +X direction side and the −X direction side that configure the ball entrance 633a have a configuration along the +Z direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 311(b), the surface 633S on the upper side (+Y direction side) of the first starting port 633 is upward from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) with reference to the end portion 633b in contact with the plywood 30a. It is configured to be inclined in the (+Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, when viewed from the right side, the center axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b is the entrance port of the first starting port 633. It is parallel to the upper surface 633S of 633a.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 configured as described above, the inclination angle of the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633 coincides with the upward inclination of each nail 642a, 642b intended by the manufacturer. It is predetermined. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, each nail 642a, 642b is parallel to the flat surface 633S when viewed from the right side by relying on the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633. The inclination of the nails 642a and 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 642a and 642b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a specialized adjusting tool.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the second modification, the inclination of the nail is restored by using the plane 633S of the first starting port 33 which is originally provided, without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the structure of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

<<F6-3>> Modification 3:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 3 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 2 only in the inclination direction of the life nail, and the rest of the configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 are given the same names and reference numerals and will be described below.

FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 742a and 742b as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 and the first starting port 733. FIG. 312(a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 312(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 311(b), the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b have a +Z direction (two-dot chain line) in the center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423. Was tilted upward (+Y direction) by a predetermined angle μ1. On the other hand, in the modified example 3, as shown in FIG. 312(b), the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b have the center axis direction of the body portion 422 based on the tip 423 in the +Z direction. It is configured to be inclined from the (two-dot chain line) downward (−Y direction) by a predetermined angle ν1. The predetermined angle ν1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined angle ν1 is an angle when the model verification test is passed. The predetermined angle ν1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

In the modified example 3, the ball entrance 733a formed in the first starting port 733 has a rectangular shape as in the modified example 2. However, unlike the second modification, the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733 is different from the second modification in that the end portion 733b contacting the plywood 30a is used as a reference from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the lower side (-Y direction) by a predetermined angle. The structure is inclined by ν1.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, when viewed from the right side, the center axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b is the entrance port of the first starting port 733. It is parallel to the upper surface 733S of 733a.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, each nail 742a when viewed from the right side by relying on the upper surface 733S of the first starting port 733. , 742b are parallel to the plane 733S, the inclination of each nail 742a, 742b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 742a and 742b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the inclination of the nail is restored by using the plane 733S of the first starting port 733 which is originally provided, without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the structure of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

<<F6-4>> Modification 4:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 4 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the sixth embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Is. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, the same names and reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 313 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 842a and 842b as life nails and a first starting port 833 provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 4. FIG. 313(a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a view seen from above. FIG. 313(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

In the pachinko machines of the sixth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 3, the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, have the center axis direction of the body 422 based on the tip 423 as +Z direction (two points). The structure is inclined from the chain line to the right side (+X direction), the left side (-X direction), the upper side (+Y direction), or the lower side (-Y direction). On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b, which are life nails, have a center axis direction of the body portion 422 based on the tip 423 from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line). The structure is inclined in the following directions. The direction of this inclination is an angle intersecting with both the X axis and the Y axis at an angle other than a right angle. Specifically, it has the following configuration.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the first nail 42a located on the right side has the central axis direction of the body portion 422 relative to the tip end 423 in the +Z direction when viewed from the upper side. Inclining from the (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+X direction) by the first angle θ1, and as shown in FIG. 308(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 is along the Z axis direction. Was configured as. On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the first nail 842a located on the right side is similar to the first nail 42a of the sixth embodiment when viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 313(a). As shown in FIG. 313(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is predetermined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction). It is configured to be inclined by an angle ξ1.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the second nail 42b located on the left side has the center axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip end 423 as viewed from above, as shown in FIG. 308(a). When tilted from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (-X direction) by the second angle θ2, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 is Z. It was configured to be along the axial direction. On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the second nail 842b located on the left side is similar to the first nail 42a of the sixth embodiment when viewed from the upper side, as shown in FIG. 313(a). As shown in FIG. 313(b), when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is predetermined from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction). It is configured to be inclined by an angle ξ1.

In Modification 4, the ball entrance 833a formed in the first starting port 833 has the same trapezoidal shape as that of the sixth embodiment. However, the surface 833S on the upper side of the first starting port 833 is different from that of the sixth embodiment and the second modification, and from the +Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+Y direction) with reference to the end portion 833b in contact with the plywood 30a. Is inclined by a predetermined angle ξ1. The predetermined angle ξ1 is a predetermined predetermined angle, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined angle ξ1 is an angle at which the model verification test is passed. The predetermined angle ξ1 is any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, the first and second nails 842a and 842b and the ball entry opening 833a of the first starting opening 833 have the third edge 893 when viewed from above. The first nail 842a is parallel to the center axis direction of the body portion 422, and the fourth lip 894 is parallel to the center axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 842b. Also, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b is parallel to the upper surface 833S of the ball entry port 833a of the first starting port 833. Is becoming

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4 configured as above, the first nail 842a when viewed from the upper side depends on the third edge 893 and the fourth edge 894 of the ball entrance 833a. The tilt of each nail 842a, 842b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 842b is parallel to the third edge 893 and the second nail 842b is parallel to the fourth edge 894. Also, relying on the upper surface 833S of the first starting port 833, the inclinations of the nails 842a and 842b are confirmed and corrected so that the nails 842a and 842b are parallel to the plane 833S when viewed from the right side. can do. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 842a and 842b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the original first starting port 833 is provided without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired by utilizing it, it is possible to prevent the structure of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

<<F6-5>> Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 4, the reference portion serving as a reference for confirming whether or not the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, are parallel when repaired. , A predetermined portion of the first starting opening, for example, the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 of the entrance 33a shown in FIG. 308, or the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633 shown in FIG. 311. Met. On the other hand, in the modification 5, the above-mentioned reference part is constituted by the exclusive mark provided in the 1st starting opening. The details will be described below.

The pachinko machine according to the modified example 5 is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining parts including the first and second nails 42a and 42b. The configurations are the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42 a and 42 b as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 and the first starting port 933. FIG. 314(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. In FIG. 314(a), a part of the first and second nails 42a and 42b is broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 314(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), the ball entrance 933a formed in the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. The upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Long rectangular marks 951 and 952 are printed on the surface 933S. The marks 951 and 952 are colored by printing.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 951 is printed on the right side of the edge 993 on the right side of the entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 951 and the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a located on the right side are parallel to each other. On the surface 933S, the second mark 952 is printed on the left side of the lip 994 on the left side of the entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 and the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b located on the left side are parallel. Moreover, when viewed from above, the right outline of the first mark 952 is located slightly to the right of the right outline of the body 422 of the first nail 42a, and the left outline of the second mark 952 is located. Is located slightly to the left of the left outline of the body 422 of the second nail 42b. That is, when viewed from above, at least a part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 configured as described above, the first nail 42a has the first mark 951 of the first mark 951 depending on the first mark 951 and the second mark 952. The inclination of each of the nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the longitudinal direction and the second nail 952 is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool. Further, when viewed from above, at least a part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b. , The first and second marks 951 and 952 have high visibility. Therefore, it is easy to recognize the inclinations of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b.

<<F6-6>> Modification 6:
Another example in which the above-described reference portion is configured by a dedicated mark provided on the first starting port will be described below as a modified example 6.

The pachinko machine as the modified example 6 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 2 only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails 642a and 642b. Are the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b as life nails and a first starting port 1033 provided in the pachinko machine of the sixth modification. FIG. 315(a) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from above. FIG. 315(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), the ball entrance 1033a formed in the first starting port 1033 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. The upper surface 1033S of the first starting port 1033 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 1051 is printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033.

When viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 642a located on the right side. The mark 1051 is colored by printing.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6 configured as described above, the nails 642a are so arranged that the nails 642a and 642b are parallel to the longitudinal direction of the marks 1051 when viewed from the right side by relying on the marks 1051. , 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 642a and 642b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Note that the first mark 951, the second mark 952 in the modified example 5, and the mark 1051 in the modified example 6 are replaced with those colored by printing, and the surface of the first starting port 1033 is provided with irregularities to mark the marks. You can use what you did. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a depression, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark is not limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the direction can be defined. For example, an arrow symbol or two points indicating a base point and an end point may be used.

<<F6-7>> Modification 7:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 7 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 5 only in the orientations of the first mark and the second mark, and the first and second nails 42a, 42b. The rest of the configuration including the shape of the first starting port 933 is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 7, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42 a and 42 b as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 7 and the first starting port 933. FIG. 316(a) is a view corresponding to FIG. 308(a) in the sixth embodiment, and is a view seen from above. In FIG. 316(a), a part of the first and second nails 42a and 42b is broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 316(b) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 308(b) in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), the first starting port 933 is the same as that of the modified example 5. The ball entry port 933a of the first starting port 933 has a rectangular shape, and the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Long rectangular marks 1151 and 1152 are printed on the surface 933S.

On the surface 933S, the first mark 1151 is printed on the right side with respect to the edge 993 on the right side of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. That is, the first mark 1151 is printed on the plywood 30a with its longitudinal direction being guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30. In the present embodiment, by printing the first right-angled mark 1153 indicating a right angle, at a glance, the first mark 1151 may be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. I try to know that it is guaranteed.

On the surface 933S, the second mark 1152 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the ball entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30. That is, the second mark 1152 is printed on the plywood 30a by its longitudinal direction, being guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. In the present embodiment, by printing the second right-angled mark 1154 that indicates a right angle, at a glance, the second mark 1152 may be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. I try to know that it is guaranteed. Further, as shown in FIG. 316(b), by printing a third right-angled mark 1155 on the right side surface of the first starting port 933, the upper surface 933S of the first starting port 933 moves the game board 30. It may be understood that it is guaranteed to be perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes it. The first to third right angle marks 1153 to 1155 are not always necessary and may be omitted.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 7 configured as described above, it is possible to confirm the inclination state of the first nail 42a by relying on the first mark 1151, and the second state by relying on the second mark 1152. The degree of inclination of the nail 42a can be confirmed. Specifically, by comparing the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 with the orientation of the first nail 42a and comparing the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 with the orientation of the second nail 42b, the first and It is possible to confirm the degree of inclination of the second nails 42a and 42b. Therefore, each nail 42a, 42b can be easily adjusted.

As another modified example, in the modified example 6 shown in FIG. 315, the mark 1051 may be changed in direction. Specifically, in another modification, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30 when viewed from the right side. That is, in the modified example 6 shown in FIG. 315, the mark 1051 printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first starting port 1033 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 due to its longitudinal direction. It is ensured that the structure is printed on the plywood 30a. Also with this configuration, it is possible to confirm the vertical inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b.

The first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in the modification 7 are colored by printing, but instead, they may be marked by providing irregularities on the surface of the first starting port. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a depression, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark is not limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the direction can be defined.

In the modified example 7, the first mark 1151 and the second mark described in the first starting opening 933 are the reference portions that guarantee that the reference portion is provided perpendicularly to the surface of the plywood 30a that constitutes the game board 30. 1152. On the other hand, as a modified example, instead of the mark, a configuration may be employed in which a protrusion made of resin, for example, provided on the game board 30 separately from the first starting opening 933 is provided. In short, any structure can be adopted as long as it guarantees that it is provided perpendicularly to the surface of the plywood 30a forming the game board 30.

Furthermore, as another modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in modification 7 may be added to the sixth embodiment and modifications 1 and 4 thereof. According to this configuration, in addition to the third rim on the right side and the fourth rim 334 on the left side that form the entrance, the inclination of the nail is also caused by the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152. Since the condition can be confirmed, the nail can be adjusted more accurately.

<<F6-8>> Modification 8:
The pachinko machine according to the modified example 8 is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails is different. Are the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, the same names and reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 317 is a perspective view showing the first starting opening 1233 provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 and its surroundings. In the sixth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 7, the first starting port, for example, the first starting port 33 shown in FIG. 307 has a hollow box shape and is formed on the upper (+Y direction side) surface. The ball opening 33a includes a first edge 331 on the front side (+Z direction side), a second edge 332 on the rear side (−Z direction side), a third edge 333 on the right side (+X direction side), and the left side. And the fourth edge 334 (on the −X direction side). On the other hand, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 317, the first starting port 1233 has a hollow box shape in which the rear (−Z direction side) wall surface is removed. That is, the upper end surface of the first starting port 1233 has a substantially U-shape.

The ball entrance 1233a formed on the upper surface (+Y direction side) of the first starting opening 1233 has a first edge 1291 on the front side (+Z direction side) and a second edge 1293 on the right side (+X direction side). And a third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side) and a part of the surface of the plywood 30a. The game ball entered from the ball entry port 1233a passes through the first starting port 1233 and is sent to the opening 30c penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.

The second edge 1293 on the right side (+X direction side) is, similarly to the third edge 333 in the sixth embodiment, a direction based on the end on the −Z direction side from the +Z direction to the right side (+X direction). It is inclined by the first angle θ1. The third rim 1294 on the left side (-X direction side) has a direction based on the end on the -Z direction side from the +Z direction to the left side (-X direction), similarly to the fourth rim 334 in the sixth embodiment. ) Is inclined by the second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are inclination angles of the first and second nails 42a and 42b at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, as in the sixth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, by relying on the second edge 1293 and the third edge 1294 at the entrance 1233a, Similar to the sixth embodiment, the inclinations of the nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool.

The above-described shape of the first starting port, that is, the shape of the first starting port whose upper end surface has a substantially U-shape, is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and the modified examples 1 to 7 described so far. In the above, the configuration may be adopted.

<<F6-9>> Modification 9:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 9 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the modified example 8 only in the shape of the first starting port, and regarding the rest of the configuration including the first and second nails. It is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 are given the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

FIG. 318 is a perspective view showing a first starting port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of the modification example 9 and its surroundings. Similar to the first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8, the first starting port 1333 has a configuration in which the upper end surface has a substantially U-shape. In addition, the first starting port 1333 differs from the first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8 in the following points (i) to (iii).

(I) In the first starting opening 1233 in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 317, the second edge 1293 on the right side (+X direction side) and the left side (−X direction side) that configure the ball entrance 1233a. The third edge 1294 and the +Z direction are inclined by the first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2. On the other hand, in the first starting port 1333 in the modified example 9, as shown in FIG. 318, the second edge 1393 on the right side (+X direction side) and the third edge 1394 on the left side (−X direction side). And are parallel to the +Z direction.

(Ii) In the first starting opening 1333 in the modified example 9, as shown in FIG. 318, the inclination angle of the first nail 42a at the time of shipment of the gaming machine on the outer surface 1333b of the right side wall of the first starting opening 1333. That is, the first numerical information Na indicating the first angle θ1 is described, and the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting port 1333 is the inclination angle of the second nail 42b at the time of shipment of the gaming machine. The second numerical value information Nb indicating the second angle θ2 is described. On the other hand, the first starting port 1233 in Modification 8 does not have such a configuration. The first numerical value information Na and the second numerical value information Nb are numerical values indicating an angle and are, for example, “5 degrees”.

(Iii) The first starting port 1233 in the modified example 8 has an integral structure. On the other hand, the 1st starting opening 1333 in the modification 9 is constituted by the 1st part Pa and the 2nd part Pb. The second part Pb is mainly a left side wall portion of the first starting port 1333. The first part Pa is a part other than the second part Pb. At first, as shown in FIG. 319, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are separate bodies, and the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined at the manufacturing stage, and the first starting port 1333 is formed. Is configured. The first numerical information Na is printed on the first part Pa, and the numerical information Nb is printed on the second part Pb. The printing of the first numerical value information Na and the second numerical value information Nb is performed before the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9 configured as described above, the first nail located on the right side depends on the first numerical information Na printed on the outer surface 1333b of the right side wall of the first starting opening 1333. The inclination of 42a can be confirmed and corrected. Further, the inclination of the second nail 42b located on the left side can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the second numerical information Nb printed on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first starting opening 1333. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a and 42b can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 9, the first starting port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb. Therefore, at the time of manufacturing, the first numerical information Na is added to the first part Pa. And the second numerical value information Nb can be easily printed on the second part Pb. In particular, when the first numerical value information Na and the second numerical value information Nb are provided in the same direction so that both the first numerical value information Na and the second numerical value information Nb can be viewed from the right side (+X direction side). , The second numerical value information Nb located on the left side (-X direction side) is inside the first starting port 1233, it is difficult to print the second numerical value information Nb at the time of manufacturing, but the modification 9 According to the pachinko machine of No. 1, since the first starting port 1333 is configured by being divided into the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the second numerical value information Nb can be easily printed, and the first starting The mouth 1333 is easy to manufacture.

Although the first numerical value information Na and the second numerical value information Nb are described, the structure may be changed to indicate information indicating an angle in the display mode of the plurality of segment light emitting units. In short, any structure can be used as long as it shows information about the angle.

The 1st starting opening 1333 with which the pachinko machine of the modification 9 was equipped was a type whose upper end face has a substantially U shape, but instead of this, the wall surface on the rear side (-Z direction side) It may be a hollow box-shaped type having a. The first starting port 1333 is composed of the first part Pa and the second part Pb, but instead of this, it may be composed of three or more parts. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb indicating the inclination angle of the nail may be described in the sixth embodiment and the modified examples 1, 4, 5, 7, and 8.

<<F6-10>> Modification 10:
FIG. 320 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1410 provided in a pachinko machine as the tenth modified example and its surroundings. The electric accessory 1410 is provided, for example, in the lower center of the game board of the pachinko machine. As described above, the game board is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction, and one of the openings 1400 is provided with the electric accessory 1410.

The electric accessory 1410 is an ordinary electric accessory and is configured as a so-called electric tulip. The electric accessory 1410 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1411a and 1411b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). The closed state is the state shown in FIG. In the closed state, since the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is small, it is difficult for the game ball to enter. On the other hand, in the open state (see FIG. 321 of Modified Example 11), the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b becomes large, and the game ball easily enters. The game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 is sent to the opening 1400. For example, a winning lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the electric accessory 1410. Hereinafter, the movable piece on the +X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a", and the movable piece on the -X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is referred to as the "first movable piece 1411a". Second movable piece 1411b”. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the +X direction indicates the front view right side, and the −X direction indicates the front view left side.

Above the electric accessory 1410, a pair of right and left nails 1442a and 1442b are provided. The probability of the game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b. Hereinafter, the nail on the +X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b will be referred to as “first nail 1442a”, and the nail on the −X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b will be referred to as “second nail 1442b”. Call. The shapes of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b are the same as the nails of the sixth embodiment.

The first nail 1442a is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, +X direction) from the +Z direction with respect to the center axis direction of the body with respect to the tip. Are provided. The second nail 1442b is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 7 degrees) in the predetermined tilt direction (for example, -X direction) from the +Z direction with respect to the center axis direction of the body with respect to the tip. Is provided. The tilting direction and tilting angle of the first nail 1442a and the tilting direction and tilting angle of the second nail 1442b are individual and are at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

In the electric accessory 1410, the tip end portion of the first movable piece 1411a is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as "first flat surface") Sa. The tip portion of the second movable piece 1411b is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as "second flat surface") Sb. In the present modification 10, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the tilt angle and tilt direction of the first flat surface Sa coincide with the tilt direction and tilt angle of the first nail 1442a, and the second flat surface Sa It is designed in advance so that the inclination angle and the inclination direction of Sb match the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1442b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a by the inclination direction and the inclination angle, and the second flat surface Sa The surface Sb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1442b according to the inclination direction and the inclination angle.

According to the pachinko machine of the modification 10 configured as described above, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, by relying on the first flat surface Sa of the first movable piece 1411a of the electric accessory 1410, The inclination of the first nail 1442a can be confirmed and corrected to the state at the time of shipping. Further, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination of the second nail 1442b is confirmed by relying on the second flat surface Sb of the second movable piece 1411b of the electric accessory 1410 to confirm the state at the time of shipment. Can be modified to Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b above the electric accessory 1410 can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool. be able to.

<<F6-11>> Modification 11:
The pachinko machine according to the modified example 11 is different from the pachinko machine according to the modified example 10 in the tilt direction and the tilt angle of the flat portion in the electric accessory, and further, in the first nail and the second nail. The position is different. The configuration other than these is the same as that of the pachinko machine as the modification 11 and the pachinko machine as the modification 10.

FIG. 321 is a perspective view showing an electric accessory 1510 provided in a pachinko machine according to a modified example 11 and its surroundings. The electric accessory 1510 is provided, for example, below the center of the game board of the pachinko machine. The electric accessory 1510 is provided in the opening 1400 similarly to the electric accessory 1410 in the tenth modification. Since the opening 1400 is the same as that of the modification 10, the same reference numerals are given. The electric accessory 1510 is provided with a pair of right and left movable pieces 1511a and 1511b, similarly to the electric accessory 1410 in the tenth modification, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). Has been done. The open state is the state shown in FIG.

A first nail 1542a is provided in the upper right direction of the electric accessory 1510, and a second nail 1542b is provided in the upper left direction of the electric accessory 1510. The first nail 1542a is tilted from the +Z direction with respect to the center axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip end by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, +X direction). Are provided. The second nail 1542b is tilted by a predetermined tilt angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined tilt direction (for example, -X direction) from the +Z direction with respect to the center axis direction of the body with respect to the tip. Is provided. The tilting direction and tilting angle of the first nail 1542a and the tilting direction and tilting angle of the second nail 1542b are individual and are the values when the gaming machine is shipped.

In the electric accessory 1510, the tip end portion of the first movable piece 1511a is cut off to form a first flat surface Ha, and the tip end portion of the second movable piece 1511b is cut off to form a second flat surface Hb. .. In the present modification 11, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the tilt angle and tilt direction of the first flat surface Ha coincide with the tilt direction and tilt angle of the first nail 1542a, and the second flat surface It is designed in advance so that the inclination angle and the inclination direction of Hb coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a by the inclination direction and the inclination angle, and the second flat surface Ha The surface Hb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b by the inclination direction and the inclination angle.

According to the pachinko machine of the modification 11 configured as described above, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, by relying on the first flat surface Ha of the first movable piece 1511a of the electric accessory 1510, The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory 1510 can be confirmed and corrected. Further, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory 1510 relies on the second flat surface Hb of the second movable piece 1511b of the electric accessory 1510. The inclination of can be checked and corrected. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclinations of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b can be easily repaired without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool. In particular, the electric accessory 1510 is to be repaired with the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b on the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory 1510, which are close to the tip positions of the movable pieces 1511a and 1511b in the open state. The nail can be easily repaired.

In Modification 10, the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. Further, in Modification 11, the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb may be colored with a color different from that of the surroundings. According to these configurations, the repairer easily recognizes that the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb and the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb serve as a reference when restoring the inclination of the nail. You can

<<F6-12>> Modification 12:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 12 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 11 in the shape of the first movable piece included in the electric accessory, and is the same in the rest. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 12, the same configurations and the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 11 are designated by the same names and will be described below.

FIG. 322 is a front view showing a first movable piece 1611a of an electric accessory provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 12. The electric accessory in Modification 12 is configured as a so-called electric tulip as in Modification 11, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state) as shown by an arrow in the figure. It is configured. The first movable piece 1611a included in this electric accessory is equivalent to the first movable piece 1511a in Modification 11, and is a movable piece located on the X direction side (right side in front view).

The first movable piece 1611a includes a movable piece body portion 1620 and a protruding piece 1630 that protrudes from the tip portion of the movable piece body portion 1620. An end portion of the protruding piece 1630 on the opposite side of the movable piece body portion 1620 is a flat surface (hereinafter, referred to as “first flat surface”) Ta.

A pair of nails is provided around the electric accessory of the present modification 12, similarly to the electric accessory of the modification 11. One of the pair of nails is the first nail 1542a in the figure. The first nail 1542a is provided on the upper right of the electric accessory. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface Ta of the protruding piece 1630 provided on the first movable piece 1611a comes closest to the first nail 1542a. When the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the tilt angle and tilt direction of the first flat surface Ta match the tilt direction and tilt angle of the first nail 1542a.

Although not shown, the second movable piece of the electric accessory according to Modification 12 has a line-symmetric shape with respect to the first movable piece 1611a about the Y-axis. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the second flat surface of the protruding piece included in the second movable piece comes closest to the second nail 1542b (see FIG. 321 of Modification 11). When the electric accessory is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the second flat surface match the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification 12 configured as described above, similarly to Modification 11, when the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface of the first movable piece 1611a in the electric accessory is opened. By relying on Ta, the inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected. Similarly, the inclination of the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the second flat surface of the first movable piece. Therefore, it is possible to easily restore the inclination deviation of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b at the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory without requiring much experience in adjusting the nails or a dedicated adjusting tool. can do.

Note that, also in the modified example 12, the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. According to this configuration, the repair person can easily recognize that the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface serve as a reference when restoring the inclination of the nail.

<<F6-13>> Modification 13:
In the sixth embodiment and Modifications 1, 4, and 8 thereof, the defining means that defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board is the edge portion of the entrance of the first starting opening. On the other hand, as a modified example, the defining means may be a part of the outer periphery of the first starting port, or any part as long as it is a part of the first starting port. In addition, it is not necessary to limit to the part which the 1st starting mouth has, it is good also as the part where the 2nd starting mouth and other entrance mouth members relate. Further, it may be a portion of a member other than the entrance port member.

<<F6-14>> Modification 14:
In the sixth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 12 thereof, the nail is adopted as a device for changing the flow of the game ball, but it is not limited to the nail, and the rod-like shape which can change the flow of the game ball is used. Any member may be used as long as it is a member such as a resin protrusion.

<<F6-15>> Modification 15:
In the modified examples 10 to 12, the electric tulip, which is an ordinary electric accessory, is adopted as the movable means that can be switched between the closed state and the open state. However, instead of this, a mini attacker that is an ordinary electric accessory. May be adopted. Specifically, the predetermined part of the mini attacker is configured to define the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, a special electric auditors product such as an attacker (large winning hole) may be adopted instead of the ordinary electric auditors product. Specifically, the predetermined part of the attacker is configured to define the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, a non-electrical accessory such as a mechanical type may be adopted instead of the electric accessory.

<<G>> Seventh Embodiment:
<<G1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. It should be noted that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 323 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device for controlling the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-openable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning the winning, when a reach occurs, etc. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". Further, in the following description, when the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25 and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board in front view and flows down the left side of the game board, the player calls “left side”. It may be expressed as "hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch a game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

FIG. 324 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

On the game board 30, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33a, a first starting opening 33b, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, an ordinary electric auditors object 53, a variable winning device 54, and a swing. A minute mechanism 120 is provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The distribution mechanism 120 is arranged in the lower part of the center of the game board 30. The distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 to the two flow paths. Of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, one flow path guides the game ball to the first starting opening 33a, and the other flow path guides the game ball to the first starting opening 33b. Details of the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described later.

The first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b are entrance openings into which game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 324, the first starting opening 33a is arranged at a position where the game balls, which are distributed to the left side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, can enter by the distribution mechanism 120. Further, the first starting opening 33b is arranged at a position where the game balls, which are distributed to the right side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, can enter by the distribution mechanism 120. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start opening 33a or the first start opening 33b, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball and a winning lottery described later is executed. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

The 2nd starting opening 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. As shown in FIG. 324, the second starting port 34 is arranged between the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the second starting opening 34 is not limited to three, and may be two or less or four or more.

The variable winning a prize device 54 is provided with a big winning opening 54a which leads to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 54b which opens and closes the big winning opening 54a. The opening/closing door 54b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 54a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b, or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 is executed. Specifically, when the open/close door 54b of the variable winning device 54 shifts to the open/close execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the state transits to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 54a of the variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are through gates that serve as a trigger for executing a lottery for operating the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in FIG. 324, the through gate 35 a is arranged in the distribution mechanism 120. The details of the through gate 35a will be described later. The through gate 35b is disposed outside the distribution mechanism 120, and is arranged on the right side of the distribution mechanism 120 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the electric role open state in which it operates in a predetermined manner. In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b are not reserved.

The ordinary electric accessory 53 is an electric accessory located below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting opening 33b. As described above, the normal electric auditors product 53 operates in a predetermined mode when the player wins the electric auditors product opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. Details of the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described later.

Here, the distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 325 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 325(a), the distribution mechanism 120 includes a resin distribution mechanism casing 121. In FIG. 325, in order to show the inside of the distribution mechanism housing 121, the outer shape of the distribution mechanism housing 121 is shown by a broken line. The distribution mechanism casing 121 is formed with an opening 122 into which a game ball can flow in, and an opening 123 and an opening 124 into which a game ball can flow out. In addition, a left side flow passage R1 and a right side flow passage R2 are formed in the distribution mechanism casing 121. Further, inside the distribution mechanism casing 121, a distribution rotation unit 125 and a through gate 35a are arranged. The through gate 35a is arranged in the right channel R2.

The sorting turning unit 125 includes a turning shaft 126, and can turn about the turning shaft 126. When the distribution rotating unit 125 rotates clockwise and when it rotates counterclockwise, the bottom of the distribution rotating unit 125 comes into contact with the distribution mechanism casing 121. Therefore, the rotation range of the distribution rotation unit 125 is limited. In addition, the distribution turning unit 125 includes a left holding unit 127 that temporarily holds the game ball that has flowed in from the opening 122, and a right holding unit 128.

An example of the operation of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 325(a) to 325(d). As shown in FIG. 325(a), when the distribution turning unit 125 is tilted to the left, when the game ball flows in from the opening 122, the right holding unit 128 temporarily holds the game ball. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 325(b), the turning unit 125 for sorting is rotated clockwise by the weight of the game ball held by the right holding unit 128, and the game held by the right holding unit 128 is played. The sphere is discharged toward the right channel R2. The game ball released from the right side holding part 128 passes through the through gate 35a, flows through the right side flow path R2, and then flows out from the opening part 124. The game ball flowing out of the opening 124 enters the first starting port 33b, or enters the second starting port 34 when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is operating. It should be noted that the sorting rotation unit 125 after rotating clockwise is maintained in a state of being tilted to the right.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325(c), when the game ball next flows in from the opening 122, the distribution turning unit 125 maintains the state of being tilted to the right, so that the left holding unit 127 temporarily holds it. To hold the game ball. After that, as shown in FIG. 325(d), the turning unit 125 for sorting is turned counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball held by the left holding unit 127, and the game held in the left holding unit 127. The sphere is discharged toward the left channel R1. The game ball released from the left side holding portion 127 flows through the left side flow path R1 and then flows out from the opening portion 123. The game ball that has flowed out of the opening 123 enters the first starting opening 33a. It should be noted that the sorting turning portion 125 after turning counterclockwise maintains the state of being tilted to the left. In this way, the distribution mechanism 120 has a function of alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the opening 122 to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

FIG. 326 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the ordinary electric accessory 53. FIG. 326(a) shows the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the closed state. As described above, the normal electric accessory 53 is arranged below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first starting port 33b. When an electric role opening is won in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the ordinary electric role object 53 is provided as shown in FIG. 326(b). The movable piece 53a projects toward the front side of the game board 30 (hereinafter, also referred to as opening).

As shown, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a and a convex portion 53b arranged on the movable piece 53a. Although not shown in FIG. 326(b), the ordinary electric auditors product 53 includes a general electric auditors product driving unit 53c that drives the movable piece 53a.

As shown in FIG. 326(b), the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball in entering the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, there are roughly two patterns in which the projecting movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34. The first pattern is a pattern that assists the game balls that flow in from the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 and that the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the second starting opening 34. Specifically, when the movable piece 53a is projected when the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 flows out from the opening 124, the movable piece 53a causes the game ball to be the second start opening. It guides to 34 and assists in entering the second starting opening 34. The second pattern is a pattern that assists the game ball flowing down through the through gate 35b into the second starting opening 34. Specifically, when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down and reaches the ordinary electric auditors object 53, if the movable piece 53a is protruding, the movable piece 53a moves the game ball to the first position. It guides to the second starting port 34 and assists in entering the second starting port 34. In the case of the second pattern, when the movable piece 53a is projected when the game ball that has not passed through the through gate 35b reaches the ordinary electric auditors object 53, the movable piece 53a is the game concerned. It assists the ball in entering the second starting opening 34.

In the case of any of the patterns described above, it is premised that the normal electric auditors object 53 is maintained in the open state until the gaming ball flows over the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34, If the normal electric accessory 53 is in the closed state before the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting port 34, the above pattern does not apply, and in that case The game ball that has flowed on the movable piece 53a will flow further downstream without entering the second starting port 34.

After a lapse of a predetermined time from the state of FIG. 326(b), the ordinary electric auditors object 53, which was in the open state, becomes the closed state, as shown in FIG. 326(c). That is, the protruding movable piece 53a is stored in the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 53, and the ordinary electric accessory 53 assists the game ball into the second starting opening 34 for each type of support mode. Different to. The support mode provided in the pachinko machine 10 is the time from the start of the electric auditors open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b to the output of the lottery result (electrical (Variation time of character opening lottery), winning probability of electric character opening lottery, and opening time of normal electric character parts 53 are different. Details of the support mode included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described later. The distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 have been described above.

The description returns to FIG. 324. An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b. When the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b is performed, the first symbol display portion 37a performs a display corresponding to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the display, the variable display or predetermined display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment indicator to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting opening (1st starting opening 33a and 1st starting opening 33b) by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b are reserved as a total of the two first starting openings.

The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b is carried out, the universal figure unit 38 performs a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light emitting display. Is displayed. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 54, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 54b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

The liquid crystal display device 41, when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33a or the first starting opening 33b, the design is adjusted accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. Further, the liquid crystal display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the variable display of the symbol or the predetermined display is performed accordingly. Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b or the second starting opening 34, and is a big hit. The effect display during the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the player wins, is also displayed. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 327 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41 a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 327(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal design is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a design corresponding to the first design displayed on the second design display portion 37b.

As shown in FIG. 327( a ), on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 327( b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 327(a) are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 327(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined periodicity. The variable display that scrolls in the direction starts. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, the game number is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol for each game time. On either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, a predetermined value is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 327(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

FIG. 327( b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a.

In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged as the liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 327(a), in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom. Fluctuating display is performed by scrolling up or down. As shown in FIG. 327(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of the liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA is not limited to the above mode. For example, various modes of displaying liquid crystal symbols, such as the number of symbol columns in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol columns, and the number of symbols in each symbol column, can be adopted. is there.

Here, the game times means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display of the variable display until the stop display ends. The player is provided with the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of either the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34. This is one unit of the process of notifying. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains 1 when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34. For each game time, on either the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, it becomes a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop the segment display. Moreover, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34. Every time one game, in the symbol display device 41, after the variable display of the symbol row as the symbol for the first liquid crystal or the symbol for the second liquid crystal, it is displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop the display of the symbol row. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 327(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on a ball entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. The reserved game time is an unexecuted game time, and is a special one acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34. Regarding information, it refers to the game times for which the variation display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery has not been started. The number of holding game times that can be held based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the first hold display area Ds1, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a first hold game time display) can be displayed. Further, the number of holding game times that can be held based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a second hold game time display) can be displayed in the second hold display area Ds2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 327(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variable display and stop display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37. First synchronization display unit Sync1 for displaying and second synchronization display for performing blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with variable display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b of the special drawing unit 37 And a part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a stop signal, the first symbol display portion 37a The 1-synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a light. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b is variably displayed, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 displays a blink, and when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a stop, the second synchronization display. The section Sync2 displays a light.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. However, the display surface 41a may not display a part or all of these displays.

<<G2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, Various detection sensors provided at various entrances such as the variable winning device 54 and through gates are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) and the second starting opening 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a normal electric auditors product driving unit 53c that opens and closes the ordinary electric auditors product 53, a variable winning a prize driving unit 54c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54, and a main display unit. 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 54c so that the opening/closing door 54b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role is opened, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the general electric Auditor product drive unit 53c so that the ordinary electric auditors product 53 is opened. Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting opening 33 ( When the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33a, the first starting opening 33b) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one gaming ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the second starting is performed. When the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence/absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are variably displayed are understood. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 329 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the normal electric accessory 53.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b), a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball. Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in time series in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 The storage areas are stored in the holding area Rb in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and the updated value is the timing of the ball entry when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). Is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. Remembered.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is recognized. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). ) Or moving to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is the timing of the entry when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. It

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). It is stored in the first holding area Ra and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 327(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e. After that, a lottery is performed in the execution area 64e for electric accessory to determine whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is controlled to the open state by using the value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0,1, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is controlled in the open state, and if C4=2-465, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot random number counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the first holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). A win/loss table for matching with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in Ra, and a match for the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. The win/fail table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win/loss tables, one for the probability mode and one for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode), are stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 330 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. FIG. 330(a) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 330(b) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 330(a), in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 330(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

FIG. 331 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table for the second starting opening. FIG. 331(a) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 331(b) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 331(a), in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the low probability mode), four values 0 to 3 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 331(b), 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in the present embodiment, a “small win” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The “small hit” is a result of the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the variable winning device 54 is opened/closed, but is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following four modes or modes.
(1) Number of times of opening and closing the open/close door of the variable winning device in the open/close execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)
(4) Aspect of the support mode after completion of the open/close execution mode

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, a plurality of types of opening/closing patterns (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “opening/closing pattern”) of the opening/closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54 are provided, and each type of jackpot. One type of opening/closing pattern may be set correspondingly. In the present embodiment, one type of opening/closing pattern is set for each type of jackpot, and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing door 54b is different for each opening/closing pattern. The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 54b in this embodiment will be described later.

In addition, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of the game balls entering the variable winning device 54 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively relative. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the high-low winning mode is set. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 54b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 54b reaches 7. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 54b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds elapses or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 54b reaches 7. You can

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 54b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable winning device from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 54b is arbitrary. Specifically, it is sufficient that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 54 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated. In this embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 332 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 332(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 332(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b), and the second starting port The distribution table for is referred to in the lottery when the game balls enter the second starting opening 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 332(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b). As the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into, 16R certainty variation jackpot B, 8R certainty variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot A are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 4" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot B, "5 to 19" correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot A, and " 20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot A.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 (16 rounds), and the open/close control mode of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, for the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-probability mode, the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B, and the high-frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot is won. .. The details of the support mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot A, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, for the 8R probability variable jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode A continues until the next jackpot is won. ..

In the 8R normal jackpot A, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, 8R normal jackpot A, lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is high probability mode, support mode is high-frequency support mode A, 100 times after the high-frequency support mode A is started game times Until then, the high frequency support mode A is executed, and when the game times are completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode A to the low frequency support mode.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 332(b), the distribution table for the second starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. 16R probability variation big hit B, 8R probability variation big hit B, 8R normal jackpot B is set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 9” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot B, “10 to 19” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot B, and “ 20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot B.

The 16R probability variation big hit B has been described in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 332, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the open/close control mode of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R probability variable jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot is won. ..

In the 8R regular jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the open/close control mode of the variable winning device 54 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, 8R normal jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode has ended is the low probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, and since the high frequency support mode B has started 100 game times have ended Until then, the high frequency support mode B is executed, and when the number of game times ends, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode B to the low frequency support mode.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when it is a jackpot, the game ball to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) There is a difference between the case where a big hit is generated based on a ball entered and the case where a big hit is formed based on a ball entered into the second starting opening 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. It is provided.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, the power combination opening lottery and the support mode will be described.

FIG. 333 is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/loft lottery win/loss table) that is used when executing the electric auditors product open lottery.

FIG. 333(a) shows the winning/disapproving table for electric auditors product open lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 333(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, the winning combination of the electric role is won with a probability of 1/233. .. When the power combination opening lottery is won, the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. A mode of opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when the low frequency support mode is executed will be described later.

FIG. 333(b) shows the winning/disapproving table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode A, high-frequency support mode B). As shown in FIG. 333(b), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role release. .. When the power combination opening lottery is won, the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. A mode of opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric auditors product 53 at the time of executing the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B will be described later.

As described above, the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B) is easier to win the electric role open lottery than the low frequency support mode by the win/loss table for electric role opening lottery. Is set to be.

Next, details of the support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute will be described.

FIG. 334 is an explanatory diagram illustrating types of support modes that the pachinko machine 10 can execute. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 can execute three types of support modes: a low frequency support mode, a high frequency support mode A, and a high frequency support mode B.

[Low frequency support mode]
As shown in FIG. 334, in the low frequency support mode, the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery is 1/233, and the variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electric-role releasing lottery is 10 seconds. That is, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate as the electric role opening lottery is started, and the time until the normal symbol is stopped to notify the result of the lottery is 10 seconds. In addition, the time from the end of the variable time when winning the electric role open lottery to the state where the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. The opening time (the time during which the movable piece 53a is kept protruding from the game board 30) of the ordinary electric auditors product 53 when winning the electric role opening lottery is 3 seconds. However, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is open, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed.

In the low frequency support mode, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120.

FIG. 335 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a manner in which the game balls are distributed when the low frequency support mode is executed. In FIG. 335, the normal electric accessory 53 is shown in a closed state when represented by a broken line, and is shown in an open state when represented by a solid line.

When the player circulates the game ball by hitting left and entering the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120, the game ball entering the opening 122 is left-sided by the sorting turning unit 125. The road R1 and the right flow path R2 are alternately distributed. As shown in FIG. 335(a), the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 flow out from the opening 123 and enter the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out from the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is in the open state. Is unlikely. Therefore, the probability that the normal electric auditors object 53 is closed at the time when the game ball flows out from the opening 124 is high, and the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting opening 33b. That is, in the low frequency support mode, in most cases, the game balls that have entered the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b, and the first starting opening 33 (first Game times are triggered by the entry of game balls into the starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b). Further, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the electric-role opening lottery is 10 seconds even when the electric-role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is won. And, since the time it takes for the game ball to pass through the through gate 35b and reach the ordinary electric accessory 53 is about 0.3 seconds, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a that triggered the winning. However, there is no possibility of entering the second starting opening 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that has been opened due to the winning. Note that the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric auditors product 53 at the timing when the ordinary electric auditors product 53 is in the open state may enter the second starting opening 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric auditors product 53.

Further, in the low frequency support mode, if the game ball is passed to the right so that the through-gate 35b passes through the game ball, the game ball is executed by passing through the through-gate 35b. The probability of winning in the electric role open lottery is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the probability that the ordinary electric auditors object 53 will be in the open state is low. Therefore, it is unlikely that the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b will enter the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b, and the second start port 34, and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b will flow down as it is. Enter the ball into the outlet 43. Temporarily, in the low frequency support mode, the electric ball opening lottery executed when the game ball is passed to the right through the through gate 35b and the game ball is passed through the through gate 35b. Even if the player wins, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 in the low frequency support mode is 3 seconds, and the gaming ball that has reached the ordinary electric auditors object 53 through the through gate 35b is the second. Since the time required to reach the starting port 34 is about 5.0 seconds, the normal electric auditors object 53 is before the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a reaches the second starting port 34. The game ball that has been closed and has been the opportunity to win the electric role opening lottery will not enter the second starting opening 34.

[High frequency support mode A]
As shown in FIG. 334, in the high frequency support mode A, the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery is 231/233, and the variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electric-role releasing lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, the time period until the normal symbol starts to change with the electric power combination opening lottery and the normal symbol is stopped to notify the result of the lottery is 0.05 seconds. Further, as described above, the time from the end of the variable time when winning the electric role opening lottery to the time when the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0. 1 second. The opening time of the ordinary electric auditors product 53 in the case of winning the electric role opening lottery is 3 seconds. However, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is open, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed.

In the high frequency support mode A, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so that the player hits it left and enters the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120.

FIG. 336 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a manner in which gaming balls are distributed when the high frequency support mode A is executed. In FIG. 336, the normal electric accessory 53 is shown in a closed state when represented by a broken line, and is shown in an open state when represented by a solid line.

When the player circulates the game ball by hitting left and entering the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122), the game ball entering the opening 122 is left by the distribution rotating unit 125. The channels R1 and the right channel R2 are alternately distributed. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 flow out from the opening 123 and enter the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 336(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 pass through the through gate 35a and then flow out from the opening 124. In the high frequency support mode A, there is a high probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened. The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and wins the electric role opening lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened when the game ball flows out from the opening 124. In order to achieve the above, the variation time of the electric role releasing lottery in the high frequency support mode A is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, the time from the end of the variable time when winning the electric role open lottery to the state where the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the normal electric auditors object 53, the electric role executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a. Opening lottery variation time (0.05 seconds) and from the time when the variation time ends when winning the electric role opening lottery until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can flow on the upper surface Since the sum of the times (0.1 seconds) (0.15 seconds) is shorter, when winning the electric role open lottery, when the gaming ball flows out from the opening 124, the ordinary electric accessory 53 Is open, and the game balls flowing out from the opening 124 normally flow on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the electric accessory 53.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 to reach the second starting port 34 by flowing through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, a normal electric role in the high frequency support mode A The opening time of the object 53 is set to 3.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time until the game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 and reached the movable piece 53a flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second starting opening 34 is It is 2.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening portion 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting opening 34. Thus, in the high frequency support mode A, as compared with the low frequency support mode, when the game ball is distributed to the right flow path R2, the game ball is secondly started with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. The probability of entering the mouth 34 is high. Incidentally, in the high frequency support mode A, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds, but since one game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is closed, so that it is distributed to the right channel R2. When the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 immediately after the normal electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first starting opening 33b. Further, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 and another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball normally closed by the electric accessory 53. Therefore, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34, and further flows down in the downstream direction. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode A, not all of the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second starting opening 34. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment passes through the through gate 35b when the player circulates the game ball so that the player hits the right side and passes through the through gate 35b in the high frequency support mode A. Thus, the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 does not enter the second starting port 34. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start opening 34. The average value of the time required to do so is 5.0 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode A is set to 3.0 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the open ordinary electric auditors object 53, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes while flowing through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, so the game concerned. Before the ball reaches the second starting port 34, the ball is normally discharged from the electric accessory 53 and flows downward, so that the ball does not enter the second starting port 34. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the distribution mode of the game balls to be inserted into the openings 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the player's profit.

[High frequency support mode B]
As shown in FIG. 334, in the high frequency support mode B, the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery is 231/233, and the variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electric-role releasing lottery is 0.05 seconds. That is, the time period until the normal symbol starts to change with the electric power combination opening lottery and the normal symbol is stopped to notify the result of the lottery is 0.05 seconds. Further, as described above, the time from the end of the variable time when winning the electric role open lottery to the time when the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0. 1 second. The opening time of the ordinary electric auditors' prize 53 when winning the electric officer opening lottery is 6 seconds. However, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is open, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed.

In the high frequency support mode B, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so that it is right-handed and passes through the through gate 35b.

FIG. 337 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a manner in which gaming balls are distributed when the high frequency support mode B is executed. Note that, in FIG. 337, the normal electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and an open state when represented by a solid line.

When the player circulates the game ball so as to make a right hit and pass through the through gate 35b, the electric ball releasing lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In the high-frequency support mode B, there is a high probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 35b (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened. The probability of becoming a state is high. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and wins the electric role open lottery, when the game ball passing through the through gate 35b reaches the ordinary electric auditors object 53, the ordinary electric motor In order for the accessory 53 to be in the open state, the variation time of the electric role open lottery in the high frequency support mode B is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, the time from the end of the variable time when winning the electric role open lottery to the state where the movable piece 53a starts to project and the gaming ball can flow on the upper surface is 0.1 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric auditors object 53, the electric role executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. Opening lottery variation time (0.05 seconds) and from the time when the variation time ends when winning the electric role opening lottery until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can flow on the upper surface Since the sum of the times (0.1 seconds) (0.15 seconds) is shorter, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the ordinary electric auditors object 53 when winning the electric role opening lottery. At that time, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is open, and the game ball reaching the ordinary electric auditors object 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the ordinary electric auditors object 53.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric auditors object 53 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting opening 34, The opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B is set to 6.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric auditors object 53 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start opening 34. The average value is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, the game ball flowing out from the opening portion 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and enters the second starting opening 34. In the high-frequency support mode B, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 6.0 seconds, but since one game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the opening is closed, so that the through gate 35b is passed. When the game ball reaches the normal electric accessory 53 immediately after the normal electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flows down as it is. That is, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34. Further, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 and another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a, the game ball normally closed by the electric accessory 53. Therefore, the ball does not enter the second starting port 34, and further flows down in the downstream direction. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode B, not all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b enter the second starting opening 34.

As described above, in the high-frequency support B, when the player makes a right hit, it is possible to enter the game ball only into the second starting opening 34 with a high probability. As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening and the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 332, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. The expected value of the privilege granted when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is higher than the expected value of the privilege granted in the case of. If, in the high frequency support mode B, the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 are provided. Since the game balls enter alternately and, the expectation of the privilege given when the jackpot is won, rather than when the player hits the right ball with a high probability of entering the game ball only in the second starting opening 34. The value will be low. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the distribution mode of the game balls that is right-handed and passes through the through gate 35b is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the profit of the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33) when the gaming balls are distributed so that the player's profit is maximized. 33b) a state in which the game ball enters (state of low frequency support mode), a state in which the game ball enters the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 alternately (state of high frequency support mode A) ), three states of the game ball entering the second starting port 34 only (state of high frequency support mode B) can be created.

<<G3>> Game Flow Next, a game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 338 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in step F101, when the player starts the game, the lottery mode in the pachinko machine 10 is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. At this time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to make a left hit and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the low frequency support mode, in most cases, the game ball that has entered the distribution mechanism 120 enters the first start opening 33a and the first start opening 33b, and the first start. A game time is executed which is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). The state of step F101 is executed until the jackpot is won in the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) (F102: NO). ).

In the state of step F101, if the jackpot is won in the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) (F102: YES), A round game corresponding to the type is executed (F103). For example, if the jackpot type is 16R certainty variation jackpot B, the variable winning device 54 performs the opening/closing operation to execute the round game for 16 rounds, and if 8R certainty variation jackpot A and 8R regular jackpot A, The variable winning a prize device 54 executes the opening and closing operation and the round game for 8 rounds is executed.

After the round game is over, the state of the game is changed to each jackpot type of the jackpot that was won earlier. When the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. That is, in the case of the big hit type that shifts to the state of the high frequency support mode B after the end of the round game, the process proceeds to step F111.

When the big hit type is not the big hit B in step F104 (F104: NO), the process proceeds to step F105. That is, in the case of the big hit type that shifts to the state of the high frequency support mode A after the end of the round game, specifically, the game to the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). When the 8R certainty variation jackpot A and the 8R regular jackpot A are won in the game times executed upon the entry of a ball, the process proceeds to step F105.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109. If it is not the probability variation jackpot, that is, if it is the normal jackpot (eg, 8R normal jackpot A) (F105: NO). ), and proceeds to step F106.

In step F106, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to make a left-handed hit to enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball that has entered the distribution mechanism 120 is alternated between the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a) and the second starting opening 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, the game times are executed in the order in which the game balls enter the respective starting openings, with the entry of the game balls as a trigger. Therefore, in the state where the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34 alternately, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is triggered. The game times to be performed and the game times triggered by the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 34 are alternately executed.

The high frequency support mode A in the state of step F106 is a game time triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34. It continues until it is executed 100 times (F107:N0→F108:NO), and when the jackpot is not won before the game times are executed 100 times (F107:NO→F108:YES), the process goes to step F101. Return to the state shown. That is, the state returns to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F106, the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34 are executed 100 times. If the jackpot is won by the time (F107: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game is executed according to the type of jackpot.

In step F105, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109.

In step F109, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to make a left-handed hit to enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

The state of step F109 is the high frequency support mode A. As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball that has entered the distribution mechanism 120 is alternated between the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a) and the second starting opening 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, the game times are executed in the order in which the game balls enter the respective starting openings, with the entry of the game balls as a trigger. Therefore, in the state where the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a) and the second starting port 34 alternately, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is triggered. The game times to be performed and the game times triggered by the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 34 are alternately executed.

Since the state of step F109 is the high-probability mode, the state of the high-frequency support mode A continues until the jackpot is won in the executed game times (F110: NO).

In the state of step F109, when the jackpot is won in the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34, (F110: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

When the big hit type is the big hit B in step F104 (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. Specifically, when the player wins the 16R probability variation jackpot B in the game time executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b), or 2 When the 16R certainty variation jackpot B, the 8R certainty variation jackpot B, and the 8R regular jackpot B are won in the game times executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, the process proceeds to step F111.

In step F111, if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B (F111: YES), the process proceeds to step F112.

In step F112, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that urges the player to make a right hit and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

In the state of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b enters the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Therefore, the game time is executed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger.

Since step F112 is the high-probability mode, the state of the high-frequency support mode B continues until the jackpot is won in the executed game (F113: NO).

In the state of step F112, when the jackpot is won in the game time triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 (F113: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and the round corresponding to the type of jackpot. The game is executed.

In step F111, if the jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot B (F111: NO), the process proceeds to step F114.

In step F114, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that prompts the player to make a left-handed hit to enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122).

As described above, in the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b enters the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Therefore, the game time is executed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger.

The high frequency support mode B in the state of step F114 continues until the game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are executed 100 times (F115:N0→F116:NO), and the game is played. When the jackpot is not won by the time the number of times is 100 times (F115:NO→F116:YES), the process returns to the state shown in step F101. That is, the state returns to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the state of step F114, when the jackpot is won by 100 times of game times triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 (F115: YES), the process proceeds to step F103. Proceed and the round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

The flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above. As described in the flow of the game, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball is distributed so that the player's profit is maximized, the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33a, The state where the game ball enters only the 1 start port 33b (the state of the low frequency support mode), the state where the game ball enters the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 alternately (the high frequency support mode) The state of A), the game progresses while transitioning between the three states of the game ball entering only the second starting port 34 (state of high frequency support mode B).

Here, the features of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects achieved by the features will be described by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. In the case where the winning lottery that was executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening was a win (the big win is included, and the small win is also included when the small win is set) The expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) is set as the first privilege expected value, and the winning lottery is executed in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening (big hit, Further, the expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) provided when the small hit prize is set is also set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of the privilege given when the player wins in normal times is the normal expected value, and the expected value of the privilege granted when the player wins in the high frequency support mode is the expected value for high support. And

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there are pachinko machines (hereinafter also referred to as “conventional pachinko machines”) that include a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to a first start opening and a second start opening. In a conventional pachinko machine, in a normal state at the beginning of a game (for example, a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode), a game ball is circulated so as to reach a distribution mechanism, and a first start opening and a second start are provided. A game ball is inserted alternately into the mouth. When the mode is changed to the high frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates at high frequency, so that there is a high probability that the game ball enters the second starting opening without using the distribution means. Let

In conventional pachinko machines, if the high-support special benefit expectation value is higher than the normal special benefit expectation value, and if the difference is to be increased, it is inevitable that the second value is increased in order to increase the high-support special benefit expectation value. It is necessary to increase the benefit expectation value, but if the second benefit expectation value is increased, the benefit expectation value at the normal time also becomes higher (in the normal state, the game ball enters the first start opening and the second start opening). Because the lottery is done after hitting the ball). Even if the first privilege expected value is reduced, the normal privilege expected value is the average of the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value, and therefore the effect of reducing the first privilege expected value is It gets smaller.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, if the normal time expectation value is relatively large, in order to adjust it within the range of the regulation, the high support time expectation value Needs to be small. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the normal privilege expected value and the high support privilege expected value. In other words, among the game states excluding the open/close execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing range to the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. As a result, the player's expectation in the transition from the normal state (normal game state, state with the smallest privilege expected value) to the high-frequency support mode (state with the best game state, highest privilege expected value) is increased. I can't provoke it.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, in a normal state, circulates the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, but since the game balls enter only the first starting opening 33a with a high probability, By setting the first privilege expected value low, the normal privilege expected value can be lowered. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 only with a high probability when the player makes a right hit, so the second privilege expected value should be set high. As a result, it is possible to increase the privilege expected value at the time of high support in the high frequency support B. That is, among the game states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to provide a large swing width to the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately inserted into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34, The high benefit support expected value (at high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the normal benefit expected value and the high support benefit expected value (at high frequency support mode B), and is in a normal state→high frequency support. When the game progresses in the flow of the game from mode A to high frequency support mode B, the value of the expected benefit value to be granted gradually increases, and in the game state excluding the opening/closing execution mode, the normal Between the playing state and the best playing state, it is possible to provide a large swing width to the profit obtained by the player.

Further, when there is a regulation on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, the first privilege expected value is set to be low, so that the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time as a whole. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first benefit expected value and the second benefit expected value is increased. That is, among the game states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to give it per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of the special privilege within the regulation range.

The characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects obtained by the characteristics are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) having a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening. As described above, the effect is not exerted only on the conventional pachinko machine illustrated above, but on a pachinko machine having two or more ball entrances that triggers different types of lottery. Play its effect.

<<G4>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sg0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sg0102.

In step Sg0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sg0103.

In step Sg0103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sg0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 345) described later.

In step Sg0104, a ball entry process for a starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) and second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step Sg0104 will be described later. After executing step Sg0104, the process proceeds to step Sg0105.

In step Sg0105, a through-ball entry process associated with the entry into the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. Details of the through ball entering process in step Sg0105 will be described later. After executing step Sg0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 339: Sg0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sg0201, whether or not the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) (start winning) is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. Judge according to the state. When it is determined in step Sg0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sg0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0202 and the payout controller 70 pays out one game ball. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sg0203.

In step Sg0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). I do. Then, it progresses to step Sg0204.

In step Sg0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on a ball entering the first start opening 33 (first start opening 33a, first start opening 33b). Then, it progresses to step Sg0209.

When it is determined in step Sg0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) (Sg0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0205 and the gaming ball. Whether or not the ball has entered the second starting opening 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting opening 34.

When it is determined in step Sg0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sg0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0206, and the payout controller 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sg0207. On the other hand, in step Sg0205, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sg0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sg0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sg0208.

In step Sg0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold quantity RbN indicates the hold quantity based on winning in the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sg0209.

In step Sg0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Sg0204 or step Sg0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sg0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sg0209: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sg0209, when the number N of startup pending is less than the upper limit value (Sg0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0210, and after adding 1 to the number N of startup pending in the corresponding holding area, the process proceeds to step Sg0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sg0212.

In step Sg0212, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 345) updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339) are set to It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the corresponding holding area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings obtained by adding 1 in step Sg0210. Specifically, when the first startup pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339), and Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, a storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sg0210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339). Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sg0210. After executing Step Sg0212, the process proceeds to Step Sg0213.

In step Sg0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS (held information), the jackpot selection result (lottery result), and the jackpot. It is a process of determining the type, presence/absence of reach, variation time of game times, and the like before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sg0213, the process proceeds to Step Sg0214.

In step Sg0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. ) As a hold command.

The hold command is based on the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b), the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 according to the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing step Sg0214, the main MPU 62 finishes the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 340: Sg0213) of the ball entry processing for the starting opening.

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, and the hold information is mainly used for determining whether or not the winning lottery is hit, determining the type of jackpot, determining whether a reach has occurred, determining the variation time of the game times, etc. This is a process to be executed before being subject to the winning lottery by the control device 60.

In step Sg0301, a jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing Step Sg0301, the process proceeds to Step Sg0302.

In step Sg0302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. The process is a process of determining the variation time of the game times. The details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step Sg0302, the present destination determination process ends.

<Big hit/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 341: Sg0301) of the destination determination process.

FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. In step Sg0401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the entry into the starting opening in the entry processing for the starting opening (FIG. 340) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg0402, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball By determining, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sg0402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sg0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0403, and the win/loss table storage The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg0405, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sg0402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as the game time (Sg0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0404, and the high-probability mode. As a result of referring to the hit/miss table for use, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg0405, and as a result of referring to the hit table for high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

When it is determined in step Sg0405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sg0405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0406 and is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is read. After that, the process advances to step Sg0407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). Refers to the first starting port distribution table, and if it is acquired based on a ball entering the second starting port 34, refers to the second starting port allocation table. After executing Step Sg0407, the process proceeds to Step Sg0408.

In step Sg0408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step Sg0408 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sg0408: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0409 to store the probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg0408 that the probability variation big hit is not supported (Sg0408: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0410 to store the normal big hit information in the previous determination process result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sg0405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sg0405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0411, and the storage area is entered by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is read. After that, the process advances to step Sg0412 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step Sg0413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sg0413 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (Sg0413: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0414 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg0413 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sg0413: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Variable time information acquisition process>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 341: Sg0302) of the previous determination process.

FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition processing. In step Sg0501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 340) is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sg0502.

In step Sg0502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, the presence/absence of a big hit is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the big hit/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a big hit (Sg0502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0503.

In step Sg0503, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for big hits stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step Sg0503, the process proceeds to Step Sg0507.

In step Sg0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg0502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (step Sg0502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0504 and it is determined whether a reach occurs. When it is determined in step Sg0504 that reach is generated (Sg0504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0505.

In step Sg0505, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg0504 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (step Sg0504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0506, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is displayed. By referring to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg0507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the values of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN increase. There is. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the variation time of the game time. Is different.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN increase. However, the variation time may be set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the variation time table for the normal big hit, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 339: step Sg0105).

FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sg0601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). When it is determined in step Sg0601 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (Sg0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0602. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg0601 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (Sg0601: NO), the entering process for this through is ended.

In step Sg0602, it is determined whether or not the power combination process execution flag is ON. The electric power combination process execution flag is turned ON when the electric ball opening lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), and the electric wire releasing lottery If the lottery result is out of position, it is turned off after setting the out-of-range display, and if the lottery result in the electric lottery open lottery is a win, the hit display is set and the ordinary electric auditors product 53 is opened. It is turned off after the processing is completed. Hereinafter, the electric-role opening lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through-gate 35 (through-gate 35a, through-gate 35b), the display of the lottery result (win or miss) executed in association with the lottery, and The opening process of the normal electric auditors object 53 that is executed in the case of a hit is also referred to as a process for the electric task. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) does not suspend the passage of the game ball. That is, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is newly added during the period in which the processing for electric power is executed by the game ball passing through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). ), even if the game ball enters, the processing for the electric role triggered by the entry is not executed.

When it is determined in step Sg0602 that the power-combination-processing executing flag is not ON (Sg0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0603, and the power-combination-processing executing flag is turned ON. After executing Step Sg0603, the process proceeds to Step Sg0604. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg0602 that the power-combination-processing executing flag is ON (Sg0602: YES), this through-ball entering process is ended.

In step Sg0604, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sg0103 (FIG. 339) is moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sg0701, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sg0702.

In step Sg0702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sg0703.

In step Sg0703, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sg0702 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sg0703, the process proceeds to Step Sg0704.

In step Sg0704, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sg0705.

In step Sg0705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow proceeds to step Sg0706. In step Sg0706, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sg0706, the process proceeds to Step Sg0707.

In step Sg0707, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sg0708.

In step Sg0708, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the ordinary electric auditors product 53 is executed. In the processing for supporting electric power, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sg0709.

In step Sg0709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sg0703). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sg0709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of this normal processing (Sg0709: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sg0710 and Sg0711. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sg0710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In addition, in step Sg0711, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg0709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Sg0709: YES), the process returns to step Sg0703, and each process from step Sg0703 to step Sg0708 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of steps Sg0703 to Sg0708 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 345: Sg0706).

FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing a game number control process. In step Sg0801, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open/close execution mode and turned off at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sg0801 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sg0801: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and this game time control is performed without executing any of the processing of step Sg0802 and thereafter. The process ends. That is, in the open/close execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the special figure starting port 51. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg0801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sg0801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0802.

In step Sg0802, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variation display flag of the variation display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step Sg0802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (Sg0802: NO), the process proceeds to the process for starting game times in steps Sg0803 to Sg0805. In step Sg0803, it is determined whether or not the reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the reserved number CRN is “0” means that the reserved number is “0” for any of the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and the second starting port 34. means. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sg0803 that the number CRN of reservations is “0” (Sg0803: YES), the present game number control processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg0803 that the number CRN of reservations is not “0” (Sg0803: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sg0804.

In step Sg0804, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the flow proceeds to step Sg0805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sg0805, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sg0805, the present game time control processing is ended.

In step Sg0802, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (Sg0802: YES), the process for advancing game times of step Sg0806 to step Sg0815 is executed.

In step Sg0806, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sg0806, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 349) described below. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step Sg0806 that the variation time has not elapsed (Sg0806: NO), the flow advances to step Sg0807 to execute variation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing step Sg0807, the game number control process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sg0806 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (Sg0806: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sg0808 to execute fluctuation end processing. The variation end process is performed by changing the symbol display unit so that the symbol display mode determined in the variation start process (FIG. 348) described later and displayed in the symbol display unit is displayed in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. Display control. After executing Step Sg0808, the process proceeds to Step Sg0809.

In step Sg0809, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags (in the present embodiment, the 16R certainty variation jackpot B flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot B flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag A, the 8R regular jackpot flag A) is ON. .. In step Sg0809, if any of the jackpot flags is ON (Sg0809: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0810.

In step Sg0810, the open/close execution mode flag is turned on. Then, this game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sg0809, if none of the big hit flags is ON (Sg0809: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg0811.

In step Sg0811, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After executing step Sg0811, the process proceeds to step Sg0812.

In step Sg0812, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg0812 that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (Sg0812: NO), the game-time control process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sg0812 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sg0812: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0813, and it is determined whether the value of the game number counter PNC is 0 or not.

When it is determined in step Sg0813 that the value of the game number counter PNC is not 0 (Sg0813: NO), the game number control process is ended as it is. When it is determined in step Sg0813 that the value of the game number counter PNC is 0 (Sg0813: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg0814, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sg0815 and sets a low frequency support mode command. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low frequency support mode command, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the support mode has transitioned from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low frequency support mode. After executing step Sg0815, the game number control process is ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 346: Sg0804) of the game time control process.

FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step Sg0901, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the data setting processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 329) in time series (the hold information stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). The information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) that is stored first among the reserved information stored in time series in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 329). (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step Sg0901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step Sg0901 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sg0901: YES), the data setting process for the first holding area in steps Sg0902 to Sg0907 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg0901 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sg0901: NO). ), the data setting process for the second holding area in steps Sg0908 to Sg0913 is executed.

In step Sg0902, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sg0903, in which the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sg0904. In step Sg0904, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sg0905.

In step Sg0905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sg0905, the process proceeds to Step Sg0906.

In step Sg0906, if the second symbol display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sg0907.

In step Sg0907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sg0907 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step Sg0901 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sg0901: NO), It proceeds to step Sg0908.

In step Sg0908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Sg0909. In step Sg0909, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and in step Sg0910, the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sg0911.

In step Sg0911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sg0911, the process proceeds to step Sg0912.

In step Sg0912, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sg0913.

In step Sg0913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sg0913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game time control process (FIG. 346: Sg0805).

FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sg1001, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is normally turned off when the jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Sg1001 that the high probability mode is set (Sg1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1002.

In step Sg1002, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning/losing table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 330(b). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Sg1004. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1001 that the high probability mode is not set (Sg1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1003.

In step Sg1003, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 330(a). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Sg1004.

In step Sg1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Sg1002 or step Sg1003 is a jackpot win. In step Sg1004, if the result of the win/no determination is a big hit (Sg1004: YES), in steps Sg1005 to Sg1012, to set a process for setting a game result in the case of a big hit and a stop result The process of is executed.

In step Sg1005, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sg1005 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sg1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1006, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 332(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of the 16R sure-variable jackpot B, the numerical range of the 8R sure-variable jackpot A, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot A. Determine if

On the other hand, in step Sg1005, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sg1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1007, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 332(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R certainty variation jackpot B, the 8R certainty variation jackpot B value range, or the 8R normal jackpot B. To do. After executing the processing of step Sg1006 or step Sg1007. It proceeds to step Sg1008.

In step Sg1008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is a probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sg1008 that the game result is a probability variation big hit (Sg1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1009.

In step Sg1009, a stop result setting process for the probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game times that will be won for the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is displayed. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1009, the process proceeds to step Sg1010.

In step Sg1010, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is turned on. Specifically, in the case of 16R certainty variation jackpot B, the 16R certainty variation jackpot B flag is turned ON, in the case of 8R certainty variation jackpot B, the 8R certainty variation jackpot B flag is turned ON, and in the case of 8R certainty variation jackpot A 8R Probably variable jackpot A flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Sg1016.

On the other hand, in step Sg1008, when it is determined that the jackpot type distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is not the probability variation jackpot (Sg1008: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the step is Proceed to Sg1011.

In step Sg1011, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot, in the current game time to win the normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b fluctuates in the state of displaying any stop result This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 can be obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1011, the process proceeds to step Sg1012.

In step Sg1012, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step Sg1006 or step Sg1007 is turned on. Specifically, the 8R normal jackpot B flag is turned on when the 8R normal jackpot B is set, and the 8R normal jackpot A flag is turned on when the 8R normal jackpot A is set. Then, it progresses to step Sg1016.

In step Sg1004, if the result of the winning lottery in step Sg1002 or step Sg1003 is not a big hit (Sg1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1013, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the game time. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether you are doing.

When it is determined in step Sg1013 that the reach occurs in the game time (Sg1013: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1014.

In step Sg1014, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. In the current game times that is the stop result for reach, in the process for setting the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b, which variable result is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed. is there. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1014, the process proceeds to step Sg1016.

When it is determined in step Sg1013 that the reach does not occur in the game game (Sg1013: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1015.

In step Sg1015, a stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. With the stop result setting process for the time of disengagement, in the current game time that is the disengagement result, the variable display is ended in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-range in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sg1015, the process proceeds to step Sg1016.

In step Sg1016, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg1016, the process proceeds to step Sg1017.

In step Sg1017, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sg1017 that the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Sg1017: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1018 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command indicates that this game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b). In addition to including the information shown, the information about the presence or absence of reach and the information on the variation time set in step Sg1016 are included.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1017 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sg1017: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1019 and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and the information on the fluctuation time set in step Sg1016 are included. After executing step Sg1018 or step Sg1019, the process proceeds to step Sg1020.

In step Sg1020, a type command is set. The type command includes the presence/absence of a big hit, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence/absence of a reach occurrence. That is, in the type command, as information of the type of jackpot, information of 16R probability variation jackpot B, information of 8R probability variation jackpot B, information of 8R probability variation jackpot A, information of 8R regular jackpot B, information of 8R regular jackpot A, or , Information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the result of disconnection are included.

The variation command and the type command set in steps Sg1018 to Sg1020 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sg1020, the process proceeds to step Sg1021.

In step Sg1021, the variable display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display portion corresponding to the current game time is specified to be the first symbol display portion 37a and the variable display is started, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing step Sg1021, the present fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 348: Sg1016).

FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step Sg1101, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sg1102.

In step Sg1102, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (Sg1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1103.

In step Sg1103, the variation time table corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value is acquired by referring to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg1107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg1102 that the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a win (Sg1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1104, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. Since the present process (Sg1104) is executed when the winning lottery related to the current game number has not been won in step Sg1102, in step Sg1104, the reach occurs among the game numbers not won in the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not the game is played. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Sg1104: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sg1105. When the presence/absence of reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Sg1105, the fluctuation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg1107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg1104 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Sg1104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1106, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg1107, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is such that the fluctuation time increases as the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN increase. It is set to be short. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to by the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN when determining the variation time of the game time. Is different.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN increase. However, the variation time may be set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the variation time table for the normal big hit, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 345: Sg0707).

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sg1201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sg1201 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sg1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1202, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sg1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step Sg1203 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sg1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1204, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When it is determined in step Sg1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sg1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1205. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1204 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (Sg1204: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sg1205, the high probability mode flag is turned off. The high-probability mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the lottery mode in execution of the opening/closing execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-probability mode. After executing step Sg1205, the process proceeds to step Sg1206.

In step Sg1206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to change the support mode in execution of the open/close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step Sg1206, the process proceeds to step Sg1207.

In step Sg1207, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the voice light emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode is started when the jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703). After executing step Sg1207, the process proceeds to step Sg1208.

In step Sg1208, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting the opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b in the round game is set. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing door 54b in one round game is 30 seconds. However, even before 30 seconds have passed since the opening/closing door 54b was opened, the opening/closing door 54b is closed when nine game balls enter the special winning opening 54a. In the present embodiment, such an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b is set as the opening/closing scenario. In the opening/closing scenario setting process, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. For example, in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot B, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b for 16 rounds is set in the opening/closing scenario, and in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot A, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 54b for 8 rounds is the opening/closing scenario. Is set to. After executing step Sg1208, the process proceeds to step Sg1209.

In step Sg1209, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the opening timer counter area as the opening time. After executing step Sg1209, the process proceeds to step Sg1210.

In step Sg1210, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sg1210, the process proceeds to step Sg1211, and the opening period flag is set to ON. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sg1203 that the opening period flag is ON (Sg1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1212.

In step Sg1212, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter area T set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step Sg1212 that the opening period has ended (Sg1212: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sg1213 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sg1214.

In step Sg1214, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step Sg1214, the process proceeds to step Sg1215.

In step Sg1215, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sg1202 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sg1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1216 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sg1216, the process proceeds to step Sg1217.

In step Sg1217, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. When it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed (Sg1217: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1218. On the other hand, in step Sg1217, when it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing process is not finished (Sg1217: NO), the main game state transition process is finished as it is.

In step Sg1218, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sg1219.

In step Sg1219, round display termination processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sg1219, the process proceeds to step Sg1220.

In step Sg1220, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the ending timer counter as the ending time. After executing step Sg1220, the process proceeds to step Sg1221.

In step Sg1221, the ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step 40703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sg1221, the process proceeds to Step Sg1222.

In step Sg1222, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sg1201 that the ending period flag is ON (Sg1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1223.

In step Sg1223, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sg1220), it is determined whether or not the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sg1223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is “0” (Sg1223: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1224.

In step Sg1224, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sg1225, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sg1225, the process proceeds to step Sg1226, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sg1227 to set the open/close execution mode end command. The open/close execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the open/close execution mode has ended. The open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sg0703 in the normal process (FIG. 345). After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, in step Sg1223, when it is determined that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is not “0” (Sg1223: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Sg1216) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sg1301, it is determined whether the open/close door 54b is open. When it is determined in step Sg1301 that the opening/closing door 54b is not open (Sg1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1302.

In step Sg1302, it is determined whether the opening condition of the opening/closing door 54b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process (FIG. 350: Sg1208) is read, and it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the opening/closing door 54b. When it is determined in step Sg1302 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 54b is satisfied (Sg1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1303.

In step Sg1303, the opening/closing door 54b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sg1304.

In step Sg1304, an opening/closing door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 54b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Sg0703) of the normal process. After executing step Sg1304, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg1302 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 54b is not satisfied (Sg1302: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sg1301 that the opening/closing door 54b is open (Sg1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1305.

In step Sg1305, it is determined whether the closing condition of the opening/closing door 54b is satisfied. The condition for closing the opening/closing door 54b is that the continuous opening time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) of the opening/closing door 54b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or a number set in advance at the special winning opening 54a (this execution This is established when it is detected that 9 game balls have entered. When it is determined in step Sg1305 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 54b is satisfied (Sg1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1306.

In step Sg1306, the opening/closing door 54b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sg1307.

In step Sg1307, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The open/close door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 54b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Sg0303) of the normal process. After executing Step Sg1307, the main winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg1305 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 54b is not satisfied (Sg1305: NO), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 350: Sg1225) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sg1401, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit is turned on in the RAM 64 as the big hit flag.

When it is determined in step Sg1401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is ON (Sg1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1402, and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1402, the process proceeds to step Sg1403.

In step Sg1403, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing step Sg1403, the process proceeds to step Sg1404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is not ON (Sg1401: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1404.

In step Sg1404, the high-frequency support mode flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot flag, and when the determined jackpot types are 16R certainty variation jackpot B and 8R certainty variation jackpot B, the high frequency support mode B flag is turned on and the determined jackpot type is 8R. In the case of the probability variation big hit A, the high-frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1404, the process proceeds to step Sg1405.

In step Sg1405, a high frequency support mode command is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the high frequency support mode A command or the high frequency support mode B command is set. The set command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process.

In step Sg1406, a process of deleting the jackpot flag (turning it off) is executed. Then, it progresses to step Sg1407.

In step Sg1407, 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 345: Sg0708).

FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing a power combination support process. In step Sg1501, it is determined whether or not it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened, and turned off when it is returned to the closed state. When it is determined in step Sg1501 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sg1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1502.

In step Sg1502, it is determined whether or not the support win flag of each jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is turned on when the open state winning is selected in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not the normal electric role object 53 is opened, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. It is a flag. When it is determined in step Sg1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sg1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1503.

In step Sg1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the power combination timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric-power-use timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the electric utility timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

If it is determined in step Sg1503 that the value of the electric power combination timer counter Td is not "0" (Sg1503: NO), the main electric power combination support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the electric power combination timer counter Td is “0” (Sg1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1504.

In step Sg1504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sg1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sg1504: YES), the flow advances to step Sg1505 to set the off display. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sg1506 to turn off the electric power combination process execution flag. After executing step Sg1506, the processing for supporting the electric power combination is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sg1504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1507.

In step Sg1507, it is determined whether or not the electric power combination process execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sg1507 that the power-combination-processing-in-execution flag is not ON (Sg1507: NO), the main-power-combination-supporting processing is directly terminated. When it is determined in step Sg1507 that the power combination process execution flag is ON (Sg1507: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1508.

In step Sg1508, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Sg1509 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether either the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sg1508 (Sg1508: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Sg1509 (Sg1509: YES), the flow advances to step Sg1510 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e in the through ball entering process (FIG. 344: Sg0604) is 0 to 461, the electric accessory is released. The lottery is won (see FIG. 333(b)). At the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter Td for electric roles. As described with reference to FIG. 334, in the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B, since the variation time in the power combination open lottery is 0.05 seconds, the power combination timer counter Td is set to “25” (that is, 0. 05 sec) is set. The power-use timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sg1511.

In step Sg1511, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sg1510 is support win. When it is determined in step Sg1511 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sg1511: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1512 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After executing step Sg1512, the process proceeds to step Sg1513.

In step Sg1513, the setting process of the high-frequency support mode electric power combination opening/closing scenario according to the type of high-frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product 53 is set when the electric auditors product opening lottery is won in the frequent support mode (the frequent support mode A or the frequent support mode B). Is. Specifically, when the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON, the high-frequency support mode A electric power combination opening/closing scenario is set. In the high-frequency support mode A electric role opening/closing scenario, when the electric role opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode A, it is set that the normal electric role object 53 is opened once, and It is set to close the normal electric auditors object 53 on condition that 3 seconds elapse in the opened state of the auditors object 53 or one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 (see FIG. 334). ). On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON, the high-frequency support mode B power combination opening/closing scenario is set. In the high frequency support mode B electric power opening/closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high frequency support mode B, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric accessory is opened. It is set to close the normal electric auditors object 53 on condition that 6 seconds elapse in the opened state of the auditors object 53 or one game ball enters the second starting opening 34 (see FIG. 334). ). After executing step Sg1513, the power combination support process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sg1508 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (Sg1508: YES), or if it is determined in step Sg1509 that it is not in the high frequency support mode (Sg1509: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sg1514.

In step Sg1514, the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e is 0 or 1 in the through ball entering process (FIG. 344: Sg0604), the electric accessory is released. The lottery is won (see FIG. 333(a)). At the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec) is set in the timer counter Td for electric roles. As described with reference to FIG. 334, in the low frequency support mode, "5000" (that is, 10.0 sec) is set in the electric power combination timer counter Td because the variation time in the electric power combination opening lottery is 10 seconds. The power-use timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sg1515.

In step Sg1515, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sg1514 is support win. When it is determined in step Sg1515 that the support is not won (Sg1515: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1515 that the support is won (Sg1515: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1516, and the support winning flag is turned on. After executing step Sg1516, the process proceeds to step Sg1517.

In step Sg1517, a setting process of a low-frequency support mode power combination opening/closing scenario is executed. This process is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the normal electric auditors product 53 is set when the electric auditors product opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. In the low-frequency support mode electric role opening/closing scenario, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the low-frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric accessory is set. It is set that the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed on condition that 3 seconds have passed in the open state of 53 or that one game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (see FIG. 334). After executing step Sg1517, the power combination support process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg1502 that the support winning flag is ON (Sg1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1518, and it is determined whether the value of the power combination timer counter Td is "0". In this case, the electric-power-use timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Sg1518 that the value of the electric power combination timer counter Td is not "0" (Sg1518: NO), since the pattern display in the universal figure unit 38 is being changed, the main electric power combination support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1518 that the value of the power combination timer counter Td is “0” (Sg1518: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1519.

In step Sg1519, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sg1520 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sg1501 that the in-support flag is ON (Sg1501: YES), the flow advances to step Sg1521 to execute a power combination opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the ordinary electric auditors product 53. Details of the power combination opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sg1521, the process proceeds to Step Sg1522.

In step Sg1522, it is determined whether the power combination opening/closing process has been completed. When it is determined in step Sg1522 that the electric power combination opening/closing process has not been completed (Sg1522: NO), the electric power combination support process is directly terminated. If it is determined in step Sg1522 that the power combination opening/closing process is completed (Sg1522: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1523 and the in-support flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step Sg1524, and the electric power combination process executing flag is turned off. After executing step Sg1524, the power combination support process is ended.

<Opening/closing electric power>
Next, the power combination opening/closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 353: Sg1521) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process. In step Sg1601, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 53 is open. When it is determined in step Sg1601 that the ordinary electric auditors' prize 53 is not open (Sg1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1602.

In step Sg1602, it is determined whether or not the set opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened (one in the present embodiment) when winning one electric officer opening lottery is counted, and the closed state of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is maintained. It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the ordinary electric accessory 53 to the open state is satisfied by counting with the timer counter whether or not the time has elapsed and the timing for opening is reached. If it is determined in step Sg1602 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sg1602: NO), the electric-role combination opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1602 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sg1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1603.

In step Sg1603, the normal electric accessory 53 is opened. After executing step Sg1603, the process proceeds to step Sg1604.

In step Sg1604, a power combination release command is set. The power combination release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the electric role releasing command executes the setting for executing the effect for releasing the electric role. After that, the electric part opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1601 that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is not open (Sg1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1605.

In step Sg1605, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the ordinary electric auditors' prize 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 in the high frequency support mode A is that "three seconds have passed in the open state" or "one gaming ball while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened. Either of the fact that the player has entered the second starting opening 34" is established. In the high-frequency support mode B, the closing condition of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is “that 6 seconds have elapsed in the open state” or “one gaming ball has the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened. It means that either one of the above has been established. The closing condition of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 in the low frequency support mode is that "3 seconds have elapsed in the open state" or "one gaming ball is in the second starting opening 34 while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened. It means that either one of the "entering the ball" is established. When it is determined in step Sg1605 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sg1605: NO), the electric-role combination opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1605 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sg1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1606.

In step Sg1606, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed. After executing step Sg1606, the process proceeds to step Sg1607.

In step Sg1607, a power combination closing command is set. The electric role closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 345: Step Sg0703) of the normal process. The voice light-emitting device that has received the electric role closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the electric role. After that, the electric part opening/closing process is ended.

<<G5>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 355 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<G6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sg1701, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step Sg1701, the process proceeds to step Sg1702.

In step Sg1702, a state storage process is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed by using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The game state stored as a flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step Sg1702, the process proceeds to step Sg1703.

In step Sg1703, support mode effect processing is executed. The support mode effect process is a process for setting the background moving image and the output sound separately from the effect for each game depending on the type of the support mode. Details of the support mode effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sg1703, the process proceeds to step Sg1704.

In step Sg1704, game time effect processing is executed. The game time effect process is a process for setting an effect to be executed for each game time. Details of the game game effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sg1704, the process proceeds to step Sg1705.

In step Sg1705, other display processing is executed. The other display process is a process of executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds is performed. After executing step Sg1705, the process proceeds to step Sg1706.

In step Sg1706, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes of steps Sg1703 to Sg1705. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps Sg1703 to Sg1705. After executing step Sg1706, the process proceeds to step Sg1707.

In step Sg1707, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the processes of steps Sg1703 to Sg1705. That is, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the voice corresponding to the effect set in steps Sg1703 to Sg1705 is output. After executing step Sg1707, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<State storage process>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state storage processing is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 356: Sg1702).

FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the state storing process. The state storage process is a process for storing the state of the game being executed in the sound emission control device 90. The state storage process is roughly composed of three processes. Specifically, steps Sg1801 to Sg1804 are processes for storing whether the open/close execution mode is being executed. Steps Sg1805 to Sg1808 are processes for storing whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Steps Sg1809 to Sg1818 are processes for storing whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, the high frequency support mode B, or the low frequency support mode.

In step Sg1801, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode end command has been received. The open/close execution mode end command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the open/close execution mode ends. If it is determined in step Sg1801 that the open/close execution mode end command has been received (Sg1801: YES), the flow advances to step Sg1802 to turn off the open/close execution mode executing flag. The open/close execution mode in-execution flag is a flag for storing whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed, and is turned on when execution of the open/close execution mode is started, and is turned off when the open/close execution mode is ended. It is a flag that is set. After executing step Sg1802, the process proceeds to step Sg1803.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1801 that the open/close execution mode end command has not been received (Sg1801: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1803.

In step Sg1803, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode start command has been received. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening/closing execution mode is started. If it is determined in step Sg1803 that the open/close execution mode start command has been received (Sg1803: YES), the flow advances to step Sg1804 to turn on the open/close execution mode executing flag. After executing step Sg1804, the process proceeds to step Sg1805.

If it is determined in step Sg1803 that the open/close execution mode start command has not been received (Sg1803: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1805.

In step Sg1805, it is determined whether a high probability mode command has been received. The high probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the open/close execution mode ends and the high probability mode starts. If it is determined in step Sg1805 that the high probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step Sg1806 to turn on the sound-light side high probability mode flag. The sound light side high probability mode flag is a flag for storing whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing step Sg1806, the process proceeds to step Sg1807.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg1805 that the high probability mode command has not been received (Sg1805: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1807.

In step Sg1807, it is determined whether a low probability mode command has been received. The low probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the lottery mode is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. If it is determined in step Sg1807 that the low probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step Sg1808 to turn off the sound-light side high probability mode flag. After executing step Sg1808, the process proceeds to step Sg1809.

If it is determined in step Sg1807 that the low probability mode command has not been received (Sg1807: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1809.

In step Sg1809, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A command has been received. The high frequency support mode A command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A. When it is determined in step Sg1809 that the high frequency support mode A command has been received (Sg1809: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1810.

In step Sg1810, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. The sound/light side high frequency support mode B flag is a flag that is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B, and turned off when shifting from the high frequency support mode B to another support mode. .. When it is determined in step Sg1810 that the sound/light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg1810: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1811, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sg1812.

If it is determined in step Sg1810 that the sound/light side high frequency support mode B flag is not ON (Sg1810: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1812.

In step Sg1812, the sound-light side high frequency support mode A flag is turned on. The sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is a flag that is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A, and turned off when the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode A to another support mode. .. After executing Step Sg1812, the process proceeds to Step Sg1813.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1809 that the high frequency support mode A command has not been received (Sg1809: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1813.

In step Sg1813, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode B command has been received. The high frequency support mode B command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B. When it is determined in step Sg1813 that the high frequency support mode B command has been received (Sg1813: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1814.

In step Sg1814, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg1814 that the sound/light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg1814: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1815, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode A flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sg1816.

If it is determined in step Sg1814 that the sound/light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg1814: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1816.

In step Sg1816, the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned on. After executing step Sg1816, the process proceeds to step Sg1817.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1813 that the high frequency support mode B command has not been received (Sg1813: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sg1817.

In step Sg1817, it is determined whether the low frequency support mode command is received. The low frequency support mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. When it is determined in step Sg1817 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (Sg1817: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1818.

In step Sg1818, of the sound-light side high frequency support mode A flag and the sound-light side high frequency support mode B flag, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, the state storage process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1817 that the low-frequency support mode command has not been received (Sg1817: NO), the state storage processing is ended as it is.

<Support mode performance processing>
Next, the support mode performance process will be described. The support mode effect process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 356: Sg1703).

FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing the support mode effect process. In step Sg1901, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode in-execution flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg1901 that the open/close execution mode in-execution flag is not ON (Sg1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg1901 that the open/close execution mode in-execution flag is ON (Sg1901: YES), the support mode effect process ends.

In step Sg1902, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg1902 that neither the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1903.

In step Sg1903, effect pattern setting processing for the low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, in the state of the low frequency support mode, a video and a sound that prompts the player to hit the left side and enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 are provided separately from the effect for each game time (game time effect). In order to output the background image and the background music, the content to be output as the background image and the background music is set as a presentation pattern. After executing step Sg1903, the support mode effect processing is ended.

When it is determined that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON in step Sg1902 (Sg1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1904.

In step Sg1904, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg1904 that the sound-light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg1905.

In step Sg1905, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, an image or a sound that prompts the player to hit the left side to enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 120 is produced for each game time (game time effect). In addition to the above), in order to output as background video and background music, the content to be output as the background video and background music is set as an effect pattern. Compared with the state of the low frequency support mode, the state of the high frequency support mode A has a higher proportion of game balls entering the second starting opening 34, and a more advantageous privilege can be given when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the effect for the high frequency support mode A is an effect that further gives the player a sense of expectation as compared with the effect for the low frequency support mode. After executing step Sg1905, the support mode effect process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg1904 that the sound/light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg1906.

In step Sg1906, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, an image or a sound that prompts the player to make a right hit and pass the game ball through the through gate 35b is referred to as an effect for each game time (game time effect). Separately, in order to output the background image and the background music, it is a process for setting the content output as the background image and the background music as an effect pattern. The state of the high frequency support mode B has a higher proportion of game balls entering the second starting opening 34 than the state of the high frequency support mode A, and a more advantageous privilege is given when a big hit is won. Since there is a possibility, the effect for the high-frequency support mode B is an effect that further gives the player a sense of expectation as compared with the effect for the high-frequency support mode A. After executing step Sg1906, the support mode effect process is ended.

<Processing for game times production>
Next, the game time effect processing will be described. The game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 356: Sg1704).

FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the game game effect processing. In step Sg2001, it is determined whether or not the variation command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sg2001 that the variation command is received (Sg2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2002.

In step Sg2002, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence/absence of a reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sg2003.

In step Sg2003, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The process is a process of setting a pattern of effect in the game game which is the processing target. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg2003, the process proceeds to step Sg2004.

In step Sg2004, a process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of this game time is a big hit, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L1 is displayed in the liquid crystal of this time. Set as the information of the design. If the result of the winning lottery of the current game is out of alignment, the presence or absence of the reach is determined from the content of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L1 and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L1. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L1, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L1. The corresponding information is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. After executing step Sg2004, the process proceeds to step Sg2005.

In step Sg2005, a game game effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The game time effect command is information including the effect pattern set in step Sg2003 and the content of the liquid crystal pattern to be stopped set in step Sg2004. The display control device 100 that has received the game time effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image for effect and an image of a liquid crystal symbol based on the information included in the game time effect command. After executing step Sg2005, the process proceeds to step Sg2006.

In step Sg2006, the pending information update process is executed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information in the hold number counter area is updated so that the hold number stored in the hold number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing step Sg2008, the game-time effect process is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 359: Sg2003) of game time effect processing.

FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sg2101, it is determined whether or not the game time for which the effect is set is a big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information on the presence/absence of a big hit included in the received variation command. In step Sg2101, when it is determined that the game number to be processed is a big hit in the winning lottery (Sg2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2102.

In step Sg2102, it is determined whether or not the game time for which the effect is to be set has been won in the probability variation jackpot in the winning lottery. When it is determined in step Sg2102 that the probability variation jackpot is won (Sg2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2103.

In step Sg2103, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times won for the jackpot that is the processing target is jackpot B. When it is determined in step Sg2103 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is jackpot B (Sg2103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2104.

In step Sg2104, the effect variation setting process for the probability variation jackpot B is executed. When the probability variation jackpot B is won, the game time to be executed from the next time is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Therefore, the probability variation jackpot B is a jackpot that is very advantageous for the player, and thus the effect pattern for the probability variation jackpot B is set to give the player a great sense of expectation. After executing step Sg2104, the effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2103 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is not the jackpot B (Sg2103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2105.

In step Sg2105, setting processing of the effect pattern for the probability variation big hit A is executed. After executing step Sg2105, the effect pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sg2102 that the probability variation jackpot has not been won (Sg2102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2106. In step Sg2106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times won for the jackpot that is the processing target is jackpot B. When it is determined in step Sg2106 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is the jackpot B (Sg2106: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2107.

In step Sg2107, the effect pattern setting process for the normal jackpot B is executed. After executing step Sg2107, the effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2106 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is not the jackpot B (Sg2106: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2108.

In step Sg2108, the effect pattern setting process for the normal jackpot A is executed. After executing step Sg2108, the effect pattern setting process ends.

In step Sg2101, when it is determined that the game number to be processed is not a big hit in the winning lottery (Sg2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2109.

In step Sg2109, a process for setting an effect pattern for detachment is executed. After executing step Sg2109, the effect pattern setting process ends.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sg2201, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sg2202.

In step Sg2202, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sg2301, a command storing process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image or draws a new image while the image is being drawn. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sg2401, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 362), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command correspondence process (Sg2401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the manner of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode is designed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the image is displayed on the display device 41.

In step Sg2402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sg2401) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sg2403.

In step Sg2403, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sg2402), the type of the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sg2404.

In step Sg2404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Sg2403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Sg2405, the other processes are executed, and then the V interrupt process is ended.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, despite the game balls entered from the opening 122 by the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, The game balls that have been distributed, whether the ball enters the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, since the same symbol (first symbol) fluctuates, it is distributed. Unexpectedness can be imparted to the player who was supposed to have a different symbol for each ball entry portion (starting opening). In addition, the player can make various guesses about the role (installation purpose) of the distribution mechanism 120 that guides the same ball to the ball entry part (starting opening) that fluctuates the same symbol despite being distributed to two routes. it can.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with the ordinary electric accessory 53 on the path through which the game ball flows from the right flow path R2 to the first start opening 33b, the distribution mechanism 120 allows the left flow path R1 and the right flow path to be provided. Regardless of which one of the R2s is assigned, the game balls assigned to any of them serve as an opportunity to change the same symbol (first symbol), and the gaming balls assigned to the right flow passage R2 are normally electric accessory. There may be a chance to change the second symbol by 53, even in the same distribution mode to reach the distribution mechanism 120 the game ball, the first symbol and the second symbol are changed depending on the type of support mode. It is possible to make the ratio to be different. That is, by controlling the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery that determines whether or not the normal electric auditors product 53 is opened, the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed at different rates. ..

More specifically, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be considered as a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls flowing out from the opening 124 to the first starting opening 33b and the second starting opening 34, and is a pachinko machine in this embodiment. The machine 10 can be considered to include two distribution mechanisms, a distribution mechanism 120 and a normal electric accessory 53. Since the probability that the ordinary electric auditors object 53 functioning as the distribution mechanism operates is the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery, it can be changed by changing the support mode. Therefore, even when the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 to the left flow passage R1 and the right flow passage R2 alternately, the normal electric accessory 53 that functions as the distribution mechanism. By changing the probability of distributing the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 (that is, the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery), the first symbol and the second symbol change. The ratio can be changed. For example, when the probability that the normal electric auditors object 53 distributes the game balls to the second starting opening 34 (probability of winning the electric prize opening lottery) is set low (in the case of the low frequency support mode), the distribution mechanism 120 causes the left side. The game ball distributed to the flow path R1 is inserted into the first starting opening 33a, and the first symbol is changed. Since the gaming balls distributed to the right flow path R2 have a low winning probability of the electric role opening lottery, it is possible to enter the first starting opening 33b with a high probability to change the first symbol. That is, with a high probability that the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120 is put into the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b), and the first symbol is changed with a high probability (frequency). Can be made

On the other hand, when the probability that the ordinary electric auditors object 53 distributes the game ball to the second starting opening 34 (the probability of winning the electric officer opening lottery) is set high (in the case of the high frequency support mode A), the distribution mechanism 120 is used. The game ball distributed to the left channel R1 is inserted into the first starting opening 33a, and the first symbol is changed. Since the gaming balls distributed to the right flow path R2 have a high probability of winning the electric role opening lottery, it is possible to enter the second starting opening 34 with a high probability and change the second symbol. In this way, by changing the winning probability of the electric part open lottery, even if the distribution mode of the game balls is the same, it is possible to change the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with the through gate 35b as a through gate that triggers the execution of the electric-role opening lottery, in addition to the through gate 35a arranged inside the distribution mechanism 120, the distribution mechanism. Even in a distribution mode of game balls that does not pass through 120, the normal electric accessory 53 can be opened. As a result, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, by circulating the game ball in a circulation mode that passes through the through gate 35b, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 with a high probability.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can realize the following. In the low frequency support mode, when the player circulates the game ball so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b, and the second starting opening. Since it is unlikely that the game ball will enter 34, it is possible to change only the first symbol with a high probability. When the player circulates the game ball in the high-frequency support mode A so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, it is highly possible that the game ball will enter the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 34. Therefore, it is possible to change the first symbol and the second symbol. When the player circulates the game ball in the high-frequency support mode B so as to pass through the through gate 35b, it is highly possible that the game ball will enter only the second starting opening 34. Only the two symbols can be changed. As a result, at least three of a gaming state in which only the first symbol changes with a high probability, a gaming state in which the first symbol and the second symbol change, and a gaming state in which only the second symbol changes with a high probability. You can create a state.

In other words, when the game balls are circulated in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the game balls to the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) per unit time The relative ratio of the number of entered balls and the number of entered game balls into the second starting opening 34 can be controlled to be changeable in at least three stages. Therefore, by combining the three relative entry ratios (game states), it is possible to create a new flow of various games and improve the interest of the game.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 determines the probability that the game balls will continuously enter the first start opening when the game balls are distributed in the distribution mode that is most advantageous for the player. The probability of a ball is defined as a ball probability, the probability of a game ball entering the first starting opening and the second starting opening alternately is defined as an alternate entering probability, and the probability of a game ball entering the second starting opening in succession is a second starting. In the case of the mouth continuous entry probability, the first starting opening continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second starting entry continuous entry probability, and the first game state (low frequency support mode) and alternate entry A second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) in which the ball probability is higher than the first starting-port continuous entry probability and the second starting-port continuous entry probability, and the second starting-port continuous entry probability is the first It is possible to control the third gaming state (high-frequency support mode B), which is higher than the starting entrance continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability, to be switchable. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 switches between the three game states of the first game state (low frequency support mode), the second game state (high frequency support mode A), and the third game state (high frequency support mode B). Since the control is possible, it is possible to create a new flow of various games by combining the three game states, and to improve the interest of the game.

Then, the second game state (high frequency support mode A) is a more advantageous game state for the player than the first game state (low frequency support mode), and the second game state (high frequency support mode A). The third game state (high-frequency support mode B) is more advantageous than the game state). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 controls so as to be able to switch between the three game states having different degrees of advantage for the player, so that the player's expectation can be imparted by switching the game states. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the game flow has been described above, the effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described here by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. In the case where the winning lottery that was executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening was a win (the big win is included, and the small win is also included when the small win is set) The expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) is set as the first privilege expected value, and the winning lottery is executed in the winning lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening (big hit, Further, the expected value of the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) provided when the small hit prize is set is also set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of the privilege given when the player wins in normal times is the normal expected value, and the expected value of the privilege granted when the player wins in the high frequency support mode is the expected value for high support. And

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there are pachinko machines (hereinafter also referred to as “conventional pachinko machines”) that include a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to a first start opening and a second start opening. In a conventional pachinko machine, in a normal state at the beginning of a game (for example, a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode), a game ball is circulated so as to reach a distribution mechanism, and a first start opening and a second start are provided. A game ball is inserted alternately into the mouth. When the mode is changed to the high frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates at high frequency, so that there is a high probability that the game ball enters the second starting opening without using the distribution means. Let

In conventional pachinko machines, if the high-support special benefit expectation value is higher than the normal special benefit expectation value, and if the difference is to be increased, it is inevitable that the second value is increased in order to increase the high-support special benefit expectation value. It is necessary to increase the benefit expectation value, but if the second benefit expectation value is increased, the benefit expectation value at the normal time also becomes higher (in the normal state, the game ball enters the first start opening and the second start opening). Because the lottery is done after hitting the ball). Even if the first privilege expected value is reduced, the normal privilege expected value is the average of the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value, and therefore the effect of reducing the first privilege expected value is It gets smaller.

Furthermore, if there is a regulation on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, if the normal time expectation value is relatively large, in order to adjust it within the range of the regulation, the high support time expectation value Needs to be small. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the normal privilege expected value and the high support privilege expected value. In other words, among the game states excluding the open/close execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing range to the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. As a result, the player's expectation in the transition from the normal state (normal game state, state with the smallest privilege expected value) to the high-frequency support mode (state with the best game state, highest privilege expected value) is increased. I can't provoke it.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, in a normal state, circulates the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, but since the game balls enter only the first starting opening 33a with a high probability, By setting the first privilege expected value low, the normal privilege expected value can be lowered. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 only with a high probability when the player makes a right hit, so the second privilege expected value should be set high. As a result, it is possible to increase the privilege expected value at the time of high support in the high frequency support B. That is, among the game states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to provide a large swing width to the profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately inserted into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 34, The high benefit support expected value (at high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the normal benefit expected value and the high support benefit expected value (at high frequency support mode B), and is in a normal state→high frequency support. When the game progresses in the flow of the game from mode A to high frequency support mode B, the value of the expected benefit value to be granted gradually increases, and in the game state excluding the opening/closing execution mode, the normal Between the playing state and the best playing state, it is possible to provide a large swing width to the profit obtained by the player.

Further, when there is a regulation on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, the first privilege expected value is set to be low, so that the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time as a whole. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first benefit expected value and the second benefit expected value is increased. That is, among the game states excluding the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to give it per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profit obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. It becomes easy to adjust the size of the special privilege within the regulation range.

The characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects obtained by the characteristics are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) having a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the first start opening and the second start opening. As described above, the effect is not exerted only on the conventional pachinko machine illustrated above, but on a pachinko machine having two or more ball entrances that triggers different types of lottery. Play its effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the through gate 35a, which is a trigger for the passage of the game ball to execute the electric role opening lottery, is arranged in one route (the right channel R2) sorted by the sorting mechanism 120. Since the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls (the order in which the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2), it is possible to give the player attention and expectation. In addition, when it is distributed to the right flow path R2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not to win the electric-role opening lottery. Therefore, at least two levels of expectation should be given to the distribution mode of the game balls in the distribution mechanism 120 and the lottery result in the electric-role opening lottery (that is, whether or not the normal electric auditors object 53 is opened). You can

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a low frequency support mode as a support mode, and a winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode, but the variation time in the electrical-role opening lottery (variation time of the normal symbol) and the ordinary High-frequency support mode A in which the opening time of the electric accessory 53 is the same as the low-frequency support mode, and the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery is higher than that in the low-frequency support mode, and the fluctuation time in the electric-role opening lottery (ordinary symbol) It is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode B in which the variation time of) is short and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is long, and the switching of these three support modes is used, as described in the game flow above. In addition, various new game flows can be created.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the following effects.
First, it is defined as follows.
-In the high-frequency support mode A, the lottery time (variation time of the regular symbol) of the electric role open lottery is Tp, and when the variation time ends when winning the electric role open lottery, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 plays the game ball. Normal time when the time until reaching the state in which it can be assisted (time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can flow on the upper surface) is Tm The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts1, the time from the time the game ball passes through the through gate 35a to the ordinary electric accessory 53 is Tr1, the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, and the ordinary electric object 53 Tf1 is the time from when the ball reaches the second starting opening 34 to the second starting opening 34 by the opened ordinary electric accessory 53.
-In the high-frequency support mode B, the lottery time (normal symbol variation time) of the electric role open lottery is Tp, and when the variation time ends when the electric role open lottery is won, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 plays the game ball. Normal time when the time until reaching the state in which it can be assisted (time until the movable piece 53a starts projecting and the game ball can flow on the upper surface) is Tm The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts2, the time from the time when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr2, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and the normal electric accessory 53 Tf2 is the time from when the ball reaches the second starting opening 34 to the second starting opening 34 by the opened ordinary electric accessory 53.
When defined in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to satisfy the following formulas (1) to (3).
Tp+Tm≦Tr1... Formula (1)
Tp+Tm≦Tr2... Formula (2)
Tr1+Tf1≦Tp+Tm+Ts1<Tr2+Tf2≦Tp+Tm+Ts2... Formula (3)
In the present embodiment, specific values of the above parameters are Tp=0.05 seconds, Tm=0.1 seconds, Tr1=0.3 seconds, Tr2=0.3 seconds, and Tf1=2. 0.0 seconds, Tf2=5.0 seconds, Ts1=3.0 seconds, and Ts2=6.0 seconds, which satisfy the above formulas (1) to (3).

In such a configuration, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is circulated (left-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35a, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 guides ( Although the game ball can be put into the second starting port 34 by (assistance), when the game ball is circulated (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the game ball is moved to the second starting port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed before entering the game ball, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34.
Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game balls that is advantageous to the player, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, the game is made to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120). The distribution mode in which the balls are distributed (left-handed) is more advantageous for the player than the distribution mode in which the balls are distributed so that the game balls pass through the through gate 35b (right-mounted).

On the other hand, in the case where the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, when the through gate 35a is circulated so that the game ball passes, and when the through gate 35b is circulated so that the game ball passes. In any case, the game ball can be inserted into the second starting opening 34 by the guidance (auxiliary) by the ordinary electric accessory 53. However, when the through-ball 35a is circulated so that the game ball passes, the game ball passes through the distribution mechanism 120. Therefore, among the game balls reaching the distribution mechanism 120, the game distributed to the right flow path R2. Only a sphere can pass through the through gate 35a. Therefore, when the game balls are circulated (left-handed) so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, they pass through the through gate 35a corresponding to the number of game balls reaching the distribution mechanism 120 and enter the second starting opening 34. The ratio of the number of game balls to be played is the second after passing through the through gate 35b with respect to the number of game balls reaching the through gate 35b when the game ball is circulated (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b. It becomes lower than the ratio of the number of game balls entering the starting port 34. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game balls that is advantageous to the player, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B, the distribution mode (right-handed) of distributing the through-gate 35b so that the game balls pass through This is a distribution mode of the game balls that is more advantageous to the player than a distribution mode (left hitting) in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a (to reach the distribution mechanism 120).

Here, the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B differ only in the opening time of the normal electric auditors product 53 when winning one electric-role opening lottery as the control during the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment simply switches between the two high-frequency support modes in which the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is different when the player wins one electric-role opening lottery, and the game is advantageous to the player. The distribution mode of the balls can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property and further allow the player to actively participate in the operation of changing the distribution mode of the game balls, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<<G7>> Modification of the seventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<G7-1>> Modification 1:
In the seventh embodiment, the normal electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is arranged above the first starting opening 33b, so in the high frequency support mode B, the normal electric auditors object 53. While guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down into the first starting port 33b. There is a problem such as hitting the ball. The modification 1 shown below solves the above problems.

FIG. 364 is an explanatory diagram of the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting opening according to the first modification. Also, FIG. 364 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the first modification. Note that, in FIG. 364, the normal electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and an open state when represented by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 364(a), the second starting port 34 in the present example is arranged on the right side of the game board 30 in front view than the first starting port 33b. In addition, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a left movable piece 53d and a right movable piece 53e, which are two movable pieces. The left movable piece 53d is arranged on the flow path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the first starting opening 33b. The left movable piece 53d is inclined so that the right side portion is located below the left side portion. The right movable piece 53e is arranged on the distribution route of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b. The right movable piece 53e is inclined so that the left side portion is located below the right side portion.

Other configurations and control contents such as the winning probability of the electric-role opening lottery in each support mode, the variation time in the electric-role opening lottery, the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors object 53, and the like are the same as those in the above embodiment. Each support mode when such a configuration is adopted will be described below.

In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120. During execution of the low frequency support mode, as in the above-described embodiment, the game balls that enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left flow passage R1 and the right flow passage R2, and the left flow The game ball swung to the road R1 enters the first starting port 33a (Fig. 364(a)), and the game ball sorted to the right channel R2 enters the first starting port 33b (Fig. 364). (B)).

FIG. 365 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A according to the first modification. In the high frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. While the high frequency support mode A is being executed, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, as in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 365(a), the game ball swung to the left channel R1 enters the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 365(b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are highly likely to be guided (assisted) by the left movable piece 53d of the normal electric auditors object 53 being opened, and the second starting opening. Enter the ball 34. In this modification, even if the player hits the right side while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second starting opening 34 is provided. Since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34.

FIG. 366 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the first modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so that the player hits it right and passes through the through gate 35b. During execution of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (auxiliary) to the right movable piece 53e of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability as in the above embodiment. And enters the second starting port 34.

At this time, unlike the seventh embodiment, the portion of the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right-side movable piece 53e) that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33b. Since it is not arranged above, the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right-side movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B does not pass through the upper part of the first starting port 33b and the second starting port. Up to 34 can be reached. As a result, even if the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is guiding the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the gaming ball that is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modification example 1, it is possible to further increase the rate of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34, as compared with the above embodiment.

<<G7-2>> Modification 2:
In the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is arranged above the first starting opening 33b, in the high frequency support mode A, the normal electric auditors object 53. While the game ball is being guided to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down to the first starting port. There is a problem of entering the ball in 33b.

Similarly, in the high-frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is There is a problem that the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 2 shown below solves the above problems.

FIG. 367 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting opening in the second modification. Further, FIG. 367 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

The difference between the present modification 2 and the above modification 1 is that the modification 2 does not include the first starting opening 33b included in the modification 1. Other configurations are the same as those in the first modification.

FIG. 367 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in the second modification, FIG. 368 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the second modification, and FIG. 369 is a diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode in the second modification. It is explanatory drawing explaining the frequency support mode B.

In the case of the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 368(b), in the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 by the distribution mechanism 120 are guided by the left movable piece 53d to be secondly started. Enter the mouth 34. At this time, since the modified example 2 does not include the first starting port 33b unlike the configuration of the modified example 1, the normal electric auditors object 53 is closed at an unintended timing while guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, Even when the game ball is discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 33b. In this modification, even if the player hits the right side while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second starting opening 34 is provided. Since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34.

Also, unlike the seventh embodiment, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the portion of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B (movable to the right). The piece 53e) is not located above the first starting opening 33b, and the gaming ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B is the first starting opening 33b. The second starting port 34 can be reached without passing through the upper part. As a result, even if the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is guiding the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the gaming ball that is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modification example 2, compared with the seventh embodiment, it is possible to further increase the ratio of game balls entering the second starting opening 34.

<<G7-3>> Modification 3:
In the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is arranged above the first starting opening 33b, in the high frequency support mode A, the normal electric auditors object 53. While the game ball is being guided to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down to the first starting port. There is a problem of entering the ball in 33b.

Similarly, in the high-frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is There is a problem that the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 2 shown below solves the above problems.

Further, in the modified example 1 and the modified example 2, since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 has two parts, that is, the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, the ordinary electric auditors' part to the game area PA of the game board 30. There is a problem that a space for arranging the object 53 must be wide (large). The modification 3 shown below solves the above problems.

FIG. 370 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the third modification. Further, FIG. 370 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 370, the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 3 does not include the first start port 33b as in Modification 2. Further, the second starting port 34 is arranged on the flow path along which the game balls discharged from the opening 124 flow. Further, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is arranged on the distribution path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the second starting opening 34. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this modified example is different from that in the above embodiment. The ordinary electric auditors object 53 in the modified example 3 is opened and closed by moving the movable piece 53a projecting from the game board 30 on the plane of the game board 30. FIG. 370 shows the state of the low frequency support mode, and the ordinary electric accessory 53 shown in FIGS. 370(a) and 370(b) is in the closed state.

In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120. As shown in FIGS. 370(a) and 370(b), during execution of the low-frequency support mode, the game spheres that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are left channel R1 and right channel R2. Alternately distributed to and, the game ball distributed to the left channel R1 enters the first starting port 33a, and the game ball distributed to the right channel R2 flows out from the opening 124 and then closes. It flows down on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the state, and further flows downward from the ordinary electric accessory 53 without entering the second starting port 34.

FIG. 371 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A according to the third modification. In the high frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. While the high frequency support mode A is being executed, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. FIG. 371(a) shows how the game ball swung to the left channel R1 enters the first starting opening 33a. FIG. 371(b) shows that the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second starting port 34. As shown in FIG. 371(b), the normal electric accessory 53 in this example moves from the closed state to the open state by moving in the upper right direction when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the normal electric accessory 53 moves to the upper right, the game ball can flow from the opening 124 to the second starting port 34, and the game ball enters the second starting port 34. In addition, since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 in the above-described embodiment and modification guides the game ball reaching the upper surface of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 to the second starting port 34, the gaming ball enters the second starting port 34. Although it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the ball, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the present example also makes it easy for the game ball discharged from the opening 124 to enter the second starting opening 34 by shifting to the open state. Therefore, it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34.

Further, in the present modification, even if the player makes a right hit during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the open electric motor accessory 53, and the second starting opening 34 is provided. Since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34.

FIG. 372 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the third modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so that the player hits it right and passes through the through gate 35b. As shown in the figure, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the upper surface of the wall portion W of the game board 30, flows through the upper surface of the wall portion W, and then the upper surface of the normal electric auditors object 53 that is open. And enters the second starting port 34.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 3 does not include the first starting port 33b as in the modified example 2, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is opened at an unintended timing in the high frequency support mode A state. Even when the game ball moves from the closed state to the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first starting opening 33b.

Further, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B may be located above the first starting port 33b. Without, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B can reach the second starting port 34 without passing through the upper portion of the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is guiding the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the gaming ball that is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modification example 3, compared to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to further increase the ratio of game balls entering the second starting opening 34.

Furthermore, unlike the above-described Modifications 1 and 2, the ordinary electric auditors product 53 in Modification 3 does not include two parts such as the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, and is configured by one movable piece. .. Therefore, the space for arranging the ordinary electric accessory 53 with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller), and the space for the arrangement area of the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be reduced.

Further, in the closed state, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in Modification 3 blocks the flow path from the right flow passage R2 to the second start port 34, and flows from the wall W to the second start port 34. Divide the route. Then, in the open state, the blocking of the flow path from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34 is released, and the flow path from the wall W to the second start port 34 is formed. Therefore, the normal electric accessory 53 can change the two distribution paths by shifting from the closed state to the open state. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can simultaneously change the states of the two types of distribution channels with one state change. As a result, whether the game ball is distributed in the distribution path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34 or the distribution ball from the wall W to the second starting port 34 is distributed. Even in this case, a game using the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be executed.

<<G7-4>> Modification 4:
In the seventh embodiment, since the normal electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is arranged above the first starting opening 33b, in the high frequency support mode A, the normal electric auditors object 53. While the game ball is being guided to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down to the first starting port. There is a problem of entering the ball in 33b.

Similarly, in the high-frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the gaming ball is There is a problem that the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 2 shown below solves the above problems.

Further, in the configurations of the modified example 2 and the modified example 3, the gaming balls distributed to the right channel R2 in the low frequency support mode and discharged from the opening 124 enter the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It was a composition that flowed down without a ball. As a result, there is a problem that the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out, which does not depend on the action of the accessory, in the total number of prize balls to be paid out in a series of games becomes low. The modification 4 shown below solves the above problems.

FIG. 373 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting opening in the fourth modification. Further, FIG. 373 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 4, the general winning opening 32 is arranged on the distribution path along which the game balls discharged from the opening 124 flow down. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of Modification 4 does not include the first starting port 33b.

As shown in FIG. 373(a), in the low frequency support mode, the game balls that enter the opening 122 and are distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting opening 33a. Then, as shown in FIG. 373(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the general winning opening 32. In the configurations of the modified example 2 and the modified example 3, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 in the low frequency support mode and discharged from the opening 124 enter the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Although it flowed as it is, in the present modification, the game ball distributed to the right channel R2 in the low frequency support mode and discharged from the opening 124 enters the general winning opening 32. Therefore, as compared with the modified example 2 and the modified example 3, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out, which does not depend on the action of the accessory, in the total number of prize balls to be paid out in the series of games.

FIG. 374 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A according to the fourth modification. As shown in FIGS. 374(a) and 374(b), in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first starting opening 33a. Then, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second starting port 34. In the configuration of the modified example 4, even if the normal electric auditors object 53 is closed while the left movable piece 53d is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball is transferred to the general winning port 32. It is possible to avoid entering the ball and unintentionally entering the first starting opening 33b. In this modification, even if the player hits the right side while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second starting opening 34 is provided. Since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34.

FIG. 375 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 375, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b has a high probability of being moved to the right side of the opening of the ordinary electric auditors product 53, as in the first modification. It is guided (assisted) by the piece 53e and enters the second starting port 34. In the configuration of the modified example 4, unlike the seventh embodiment, since the first starting port 33b is not provided, an ordinary electric accessory that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B. The 53 (the right movable piece 53e) is not located above the first starting port 33b, and the game ball guided by the ordinary electric auditors object 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is: The second starting port 34 can be reached without passing through the upper part of the first starting port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is guiding the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the gaming ball that is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting opening 33b. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modification example 2, compared with the seventh embodiment, it is possible to further increase the ratio of game balls entering the second starting opening 34.

<<G7-5>> Modification 5:
In the seventh embodiment, since the first starting opening 33 includes the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b, it is possible to detect the entry of the game ball with respect to the first starting opening 33. It is necessary to perform it at the two ball entry portions of the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b, and it is necessary to provide more sensors for detecting the entry of the game ball than before, and the game area PA of the game board 30. On the other hand, there is a problem in that the space for arranging the starting port must be secured (wider) than before. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the normal electric auditors object 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting opening 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B is arranged above the first starting opening 33b. In the high frequency support mode B, the game ball guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 passes through the upper part of the first starting port 33b and reaches the second starting port 34. At this time, if the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is being guided to the second starting port 34 and the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is closed, the gaming balls discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flowing down, There is a problem that the player accidentally enters the first starting opening 33b. The modification 5 shown below solves the above problems.

FIG. 376 is an explanatory view showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting opening in the fifth modification. Further, FIG. 376 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the fifth modification.

As shown in FIG. 376, in the distribution mechanism 120 according to Modification 5, the left channel R1 has a semicircular shape. In addition, a game ball distributed to the left channel R1 and discharged from the opening 123, a game ball distributed to the right channel R2 and discharged from the opening 124, and a first position where any game ball can enter The starting port 33a is arranged. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 5 does not include the first starting port 33b.

In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120.

As shown in FIG. 376(a) and FIG. 376(b), during execution of the low frequency support mode, the game spheres that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are left channel R1 and right channel R2. The game balls distributed alternately to the left flow path R1 enter the first starting opening 33a, and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 also flow out from the opening 124, 1 Enter the starting port 33a.

FIG. 377 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode A according to the fifth modification. In the high frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. While the high frequency support mode A is being executed, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 377(a), the game ball swung to the left channel R1 enters the first starting opening 33a. As shown in FIG. 377(b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 are highly likely to be guided (assisted) by the left movable piece 53d of the normal electric auditors object 53 being opened, and the second starting opening. Enter the ball 34. In this modification, even if the player hits the right side while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second starting opening 34 is provided. Since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34.

FIG. 378 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B in the fifth modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so that the player hits it right and passes through the through gate 35b. During execution of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (auxiliary) to the right movable piece 53e of the normal electric auditors object 53 being opened with a high probability to the second starting opening 34. Enter the ball.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example 5 is provided with only one of the first starting ports 33a as the first starting port, as compared with the seventh embodiment, the sensor for detecting the entering of the game ball must be provided. Can be reduced. In addition, the processing required for detecting the entrance can be reduced accordingly. Further, the space that must be secured for disposing the starting port with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller) than the seventh embodiment.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modified example, the portion of the ordinary electric auditors object 53 (the right movable piece 53e) that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33. Since it is not arranged above the (first starting port 33a), the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B is located above the first starting port 33. The second starting port 34 can be reached without passing. As a result, even if the ordinary electric auditors object 53 closes while the ordinary electric auditors object 53 is guiding the gaming ball to the second starting port 34, the gaming ball that is discharged from the ordinary electric auditors object 53 and flows down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting opening 33. Therefore, when considering the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B, a modification example 5, compared with the above embodiment, it is possible to further increase the ratio of game balls entering the second starting opening 34.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, although the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 are Since all of them enter the same starting portion, that is, the first starting opening 33a, it is possible to make the player make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the distribution mechanism 120 and to impart a surprise.

<<G7-6>> Modification 6:
The distribution mechanism 120 in the seventh embodiment and the modified example alternately distributes the reached game balls to the left flow path R1 and the right flow path R2, so that the game ball that has reached the distribution mechanism 120 is There is a problem in that it is possible to estimate how it will be distributed, and there is a possibility that the player's concentration on the game and the degree of attention may decrease. The modification 6 shown below solves the above problems.

379: is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 6, the normally electric accessory 53, and each starting opening. Further, FIG. 379 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low-frequency support mode in Modification 6. Note that, in FIG. 379, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and an open state when represented by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 379, the distribution mechanism 120 according to the modified example 6 includes a clune 129 that temporarily retains the game balls that have entered through the openings 122. An opening 123 and an opening 124 are formed in the clune 129. A through gate 35a is provided in the opening 124.

The game ball entered through the opening 122 temporarily stays while moving within the region of the clune 129, and then is discharged from the opening 123 or the opening 124. That is, the distribution mechanism 120 in the present modification randomly distributes the arrived game balls to the opening 123 and the opening 124.

In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 379(a), the game ball distributed to the opening 123 in the clune 129 enters the first starting opening 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 379(b), the game balls distributed to the openings 124 in the clune 129 pass through the through gates 35a. Although the electric-role opening lottery is executed with the passage as a trigger, the probability of winning the lottery is low because it is a low-frequency support mode, and the game ball distributed to the opening 124 has a high probability of being transferred to the first starting opening 33b. Enter the ball.

FIG. 380 is an explanatory diagram of the high frequency support mode A according to the sixth modification. In the high frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to hit the left side and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 380(a), the game balls distributed to the opening 123 in the clune 129 enter the first starting opening 33a. Further, as shown in FIG. 380(b), the game balls distributed to the openings 124 in the clune 129 pass through the through gates 35a, and the passing of electric power causes a lottery opening lottery. Since the high frequency support mode A is used, the probability of winning the lottery is high, and in that case, the normal electric auditors product 53 shifts to the open state. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the opening 124 by the clune 129 is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 and enters the second starting opening 34 with a high probability. In this modification, even if the player hits the right side while the high-frequency support mode A is being executed, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second starting opening 34 is provided. Since the ordinary electric auditors object 53 shifts to the closed state before reaching, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34.

FIG. 381 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the high frequency support mode B according to the sixth modification. As shown in FIG. 381, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the normal electric auditors object 53 being opened with a high probability. And enters the second starting port 34.

As described above, the modified example 6 is different from the above-described embodiment and modified example in the configuration of the distribution mechanism 120, and includes the clune 129. That is, the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are not distributed to the two routes alternately, but are distributed randomly. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 will be distributed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120 and to concentrate the player on the game. In particular, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball distributed to the opening 123 enters the first starting opening 33a, and the game ball distributed to the opening 124 has a high probability of becoming the second starting opening 34a. To enter. Therefore, unlike the case where the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the two balls alternately, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first starting opening 33a and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 34 is determined. Bias may occur. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of the modified example 6, in the high frequency support A, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency.

Further, in this modification, the configuration in which the clune 129 is formed with the two openings 123 and 124 is adopted. However, the clune 129 is formed with three or more openings. May be adopted. For example, the clune 129 may include a third opening in addition to the openings 123 and 124. A general winning opening 32 may be provided on the distribution path of the game balls released from the third opening, or a structure without a ball entering portion may be adopted. By doing so, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 will be distributed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the distribution mode of the distribution mechanism 120.

<<G7-7>> Modification 7:
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is won, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won. A configuration in which the number of executions of the game is limited may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B become the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is won, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode Since there is a limit to the number of game times that can be executed in the state of B (150 times, for example), if the jackpot is not won before reaching the limit number of times, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 7 is disadvantageous in the case of not winning the jackpot within the limited number of times, in addition to giving the player an expectation of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode state. It is possible to add a sense of crisis such as a transition to a different state, and add an intonation to the player's expectation.

<<G7-8>> Modification 8:
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type (probable variation jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that is the high-frequency support mode A among the jackpot types set in the distribution table for the first starting opening is won, A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has won the prize. For example, it is set in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot is won in the production of the game times when the jackpot is won in the high frequency support mode A. Then, the period of the opening/closing execution mode after the end of the game times that was won as a jackpot is set to an extremely short period of time so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has been executed. Specifically, the number of round games (the number of rounds) set in the jackpot type (probable variation jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that becomes the high-frequency support mode A is reduced (for example, 2 rounds), and the round game Set the time very short. Furthermore, the effect during the opening/closing execution mode is set in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the state has changed from the state of the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support A after the big hit. As a result, while the player is not aware, the game ball reaching the distribution mechanism 120 is shaken from the state where the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33a and the first starting opening 33b alternately (low frequency support mode). It is possible to shift to a state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the game balls that have reached the minute mechanism 120 enter the first starting opening 33a and the second starting opening 34 alternately, and to give the player unexpectedness. In addition to being able to play, the interest in the game can be improved.

<<G7-9>> Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is not retained, but a configuration that retains the game ball that has passed may be employed (( The maximum number of reservations is 4.) By doing so, in the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, the game ball reaches the ordinary electric auditors object 53 through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). A phenomenon in which the timing of doing and the timing of opening the ordinary electric auditors object 53 are likely to deviate from each other, and whether the gaming ball reaches the second starting opening 34 by being guided by the ordinary electric auditors object 53 at the same timing It is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not it is possible, and to give a sense of expectation and tension.

<<G7-10>> Modification 10:
The ordinary electric accessory 53 is not limited to the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modified example, and other configurations can be adopted. FIG. 382 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in the figure, when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the closed state, the flow surface 53s of the game ball in the plate-shaped movable piece 53a is in a state of falling so as to be parallel to the plane of the game board 30. When the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the open state, the circulation surface 53s is rotated so as to be substantially perpendicular to the plane of the game board 30, and the distribution surface 53s is in a state in which the game balls can be distributed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment and modification can be obtained.

<<G7-11>> Modification 11:
In the seventh embodiment, a non-electrical accessory may be provided instead of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the non-electric auditors mechanically interlocked with the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are opened for a predetermined time, and the It will be closed after a certain period. By doing so, the processing can be simplified and the same effect as that of the seventh embodiment can be obtained.

<<G7-12>> Modification 12:
In the seventh embodiment, the effect executed in the game times in each of the game states of the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode B is determined based on the lottery result corresponding to each game time. However, it is not set by reflecting the information about the game state at the time when the game cycle is executed. Although each game state has its own characteristics, the effect reflecting each characteristic is not set, and there is room for improving the interest of the game through the effect.

For example, in the high-frequency support mode A, the probability that a game ball will enter the first starting opening (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) and the second starting opening 34 alternately (hereinafter, alternate entering ball Probability) is the probability that a game ball will enter the first starting opening (first starting opening 33a, first starting opening 33b) continuously (also called the first starting opening continuous entry probability), or the second It is higher than the probability that game balls will enter the starting opening 34 continuously.

Further, as shown in FIG. 332, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the game times (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start mouth game times) due to the game balls entering the first start mouth. It is more advantageous for the player to execute a game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a second start mouth game time) due to the game ball entering the second start opening than to Is configured. In other words, the one who wins the jackpot in the game time that is executed when the player enters the second starting mouth, rather than the jackpot when the game time is executed when the player enters the first starting mouth However, there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous to the player. Specifically, when a big hit is won, the probability of winning the big hit type (big hit B) that shifts (or maintains) to the high-frequency support mode B as the big hit type is a big win at the first starting mouth game time. It is higher to win the jackpot in the 2nd starting mouth game times, on the contrary, in most cases even if you win the jackpot in the 1st starting mouth game times, the jackpot type shifts to the high frequency support mode A (or is maintained) ) Is a jackpot type (jackpot A). In other words, winning the jackpot in the second starting mouth game time is more likely to win the jackpot in the first starting mouth game time than the winning the jackpot in the first starting mouth game time. ..

Therefore, among the three game states of the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode B, there is a high probability that especially the first start mouth game times and the second start mouth game times are alternately executed. In the frequency support mode A, the first starting mouth game time is relatively less expected by the player as compared to the second starting mouth game time. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode A, the player may not want to win the jackpot in the first starting mouth game time, and in such a case, a relatively long period in the first starting mouth game time. Therefore, if the player performs an effect that aspires the player's expectation, such as winning the jackpot or losing the jackpot, the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode A, the first starting mouth game time with a small player's expectation is executed in a short time, and the second starting mouth game time with a large player's expectation takes a relatively long time. It is preferable to execute the above-mentioned process to give the player a sense of expectation and to reduce or suppress the player's discomfort.

Therefore, in this modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation times of the first starting mouth game times is set shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times of the second starting mouth game times. By doing so, in the high-frequency support mode A, the first starting mouth game time, which has a small player's expectation, is executed in a short time to suppress the decrease in the expectation, and the second starting mouth game times are compared. It is possible to improve the expectation of the player by executing it for a relatively long time.

In addition, in the case of a normal gaming machine, if the lottery result of the winning lottery is missed (reach has occurred) or if the jackpot is a big hit, considering the time to execute the reach production etc., it is more variable time than missed (no reach is generated) Is set to be long. In the seventh embodiment, three fluctuation time tables corresponding to each lottery result of miss (reach non-occurrence), deviation (reach occurrence), and jackpot are prepared, and a fluctuation time table corresponding to the lottery result of the winning lottery is prepared. It is realized by reference.

However, in the high frequency support mode A in the seventh embodiment, even if the winning lottery is won in the first starting mouth game times, the probability of winning the jackpot type (big hit B) that shifts to the high frequency support mode B is high. Since it is low, the player's expectation for the game time is small even when he/she recognizes that the big hit is won by the effect in the first starting mouth game time. That is, for the first starting opening game times executed in the high frequency support mode A, the player's expectation is small regardless of the result of the winning lottery.

Therefore, in this modified example, when the first start mouth game time is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, there is no difference in the variation time between the case where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the case where the lottery result is a win. To do. Specifically, when the first starting mouth game time is executed in the high frequency support mode A, the same variable time table is referenced regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Hereinafter, the variable time table to be referred to when the first start mouth game time is executed in the high frequency support mode A is also referred to as a high support A time first start mouth change time table. Then, as described above, the average value of the fluctuation time set by referring to the high start time variation table for the first start opening at the time of the high support A is the second start opening game time executed in the high frequency support mode A. The information (value) corresponding to the fluctuation time is set in the high start-up fluctuation time table for the first start port at the time of high support A so as to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time.

Hereinafter, an example of a specific configuration that realizes this modification will be described. In the present description, differences between the present modification and the seventh embodiment will be described, and description of the same configurations in the present modification and the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

<Variation time setting process>
FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process in the twelfth modification. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 348: Sg1016) of the fluctuation start process in the seventh embodiment. That is, in the present modification, the variable time setting process shown in FIG. 383 described below is adopted instead of the variable time setting process described in FIG. 349 of the seventh embodiment.

In step Sg2501, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sg2502.

In step Sg2502, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg2502 that neither the high frequency support mode A flag nor the high frequency support mode B is ON (Sg2502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2503.

In step Sg2503, a low-frequency support mode variable time setting process is executed. That is, since neither the high-frequency support mode A flag nor the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON is the low-frequency support mode, the variable time setting process corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed. The low frequency support mode variable time setting process is a process of setting the variable time of the game times executed in the low frequency support mode state. Details of the low-frequency support mode variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sg2503, the process proceeds to Step Sg2507.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg2502 that the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg2502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2504.

In step Sg2504, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg2504 that the high frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg2504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2505.

In step Sg2505, a variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A is executed. The high-frequency support mode A variable time setting process is a process of setting the variable time of the game times executed in the high-frequency support mode A state. The details of the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A will be described later. After executing step Sg2505, the process proceeds to step Sg2507.

When it is determined in step Sg2504 that the high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg2504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2506. In step Sg2506, a variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B is executed. The high-frequency support mode B variable time setting process is a process of setting the variable time of the game times executed in the high-frequency support mode B state. The details of the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B will be described later. After executing step Sg2506, the process proceeds to step Sg2507.

In step Sg2507, the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

<Variable time setting process for low frequency support mode>
Next, the variable time setting process for the low frequency support mode will be described. The low-frequency support mode variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 383: Sg2503) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing a low-frequency support mode variable time setting process. In step Sg2601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sg2601 that the lottery result of the game target winning lottery is a big hit (Sg2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2602.

In step Sg2602, the variation time counter for this time is referred to with reference to the low-frequency support mode big hit variation time table (denoted as low support time big hit variation time table) stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of CS is acquired. After that, the low-frequency support mode variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2601 that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target is not a big hit (Sg2601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2603.

In step Sg2603, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is out (reach occurrence). In step Sg2603, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target is out of reach (reach has occurred) (Sg2603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2604.

In step Sg2604, the present variation is referred to with reference to the low-frequency support mode reach generation variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d (in the drawing, referred to as low support reach generation variation time table). The variable time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is acquired. After that, the low-frequency support mode variable time setting process ends.

In step Sg2603, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target is not out of order (reach has occurred) (Sg2603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2605. In step Sg2605, the low frequency support mode variable time table for reach non-occurrence in the low frequency support mode stored in the variable time table storage area 63d (referred to as a variable time table for low non-reach reach non-occurrence time in the figure) is referred to this time. The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of is acquired. After that, the low-frequency support mode variable time setting process ends.

In this modified example, in the low-frequency support mode state, the variation time according to the lottery result of the winning lottery is set without distinguishing between the first starting mouth game time and the second starting mouth game time. To do. By doing so, it is not necessary to store the variable time table for the first starting mouth game round and the variable time table for the second starting mouth game round, and the storage capacity can be reduced. Also, in the low frequency support mode, when setting the variation time, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether it is the first start mouth game time or the second start mouth game time, and the change time setting process Can be simplified. Further, in the low frequency support mode, since the probability that the game ball enters the second starting port 34 is extremely low, the data is stored assuming that the second starting port game time is executed in the low frequency support mode. Securing capacity and complicating the variable time setting process lead to inefficiency in manufacturing, so in the state of the low frequency support mode, the first starting mouth game time and the second starting mouth game time are It is preferable to set the variation time according to the lottery result of the winning lottery without distinguishing between the two.

Further, in the present modification, when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit, out of reach (reach occurrence), or out (reach non-occurrence), the average value of the variation time in the case of a big hit Is the longest, and next, the average value of the fluctuation time when it is out (reach occurrence) is long, and the average value of the fluctuation time when it is out (reach non-occurrence) is shortest. Is configured.

<Variable time setting process for high-frequency support mode A>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A will be described. The variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 384: Sg2505) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A. In step Sg2701, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time (first start mouth game time) resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag is ON, and when the second symbol display unit flag is OFF, it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first start mouth game time. Then, if the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is determined that the game time of the processing target is the second starting mouth game time.

When it is determined in step Sg2701 that the game time to be processed is the first starting mouth game time (Sg2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2702. In step Sg2702, the variable time table for high frequency support mode A at the first start opening stored in the variable time table storage area 63d (in the figure, referred to as the high start time at high support A for the start opening) is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2701 that the game time to be processed is not the first start mouth game time (Sg2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2703. That is, when the game time to be processed is the second starting mouth game time, the process proceeds to step Sg2703.

In step Sg2703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sg2703 that the lottery result of the game target winning lottery is a big hit (Sg2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2704. In step Sg2704, the variation type counter CS of this time is referred to with reference to the high-frequency support mode A second start-port jackpot variation time table (indicated as high-A support second start-port jackpot variation time table). Gets the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2703 that the lottery result of the game target winning lottery is not a big hit (Sg2703: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2705. In step Sg2705, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is out (reach occurrence). When it is determined in step Sg2705 that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target is out of play (reach has occurred) (Sg2705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2706.

In step Sg2706, the variation type of this time is referred to with reference to the high-frequency support mode A second start-port reach generation fluctuation time table (in the figure, referred to as high-support A second start-port reach generation fluctuation time table). The variable time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A ends.

In step Sg2705, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target is out (reach non-occurrence) (Sg2705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2707.

In step Sg2707, the high-frequency support mode A second start-port reach non-occurrence variable time table (in the figure, referred to as the high-support A second start-port reach non-occurrence variable time table) is referred to for this time. The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A ends.

As shown in the flow chart of FIG. 385, in the present modification, in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time when the first starting mouth game time is executed is the same variation regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Set the variable time by referring to the time table. As described at the beginning of this modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, even if the winning lottery is won in the first starting mouth game times, the jackpot type (big hit B) that shifts to the high-frequency support mode B is won. Since the probability of doing so is low, even if the player recognizes that he will win the jackpot by the effect in the first starting mouth game time, the player's expectation for the game time is small. That is, the player's expectation for the first starting opening game time is small regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Therefore, in the present modification, when the first start mouth game times are executed in the high-frequency support mode A, there is no difference in the variation time between the case where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the case where the lottery result is a win. Therefore, when the first start mouth game time is executed in the high frequency support mode A, the same variable time table is referred to regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Further, in the present modification, when the first starting mouth game time is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the variation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit, and when it is out of alignment The same or substantially the same variable time as that set for. In other words, when the first starting mouth game time is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit, and when it is out of alignment The average value of the set fluctuation times is the same or substantially the same. Further, in the present modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, the average of the fluctuation times set by the high-support A-time first starting mouth fluctuation time table to be referred to when the first starting mouth game time is executed. When the value is high when the second start mouth game time is executed, when the high support A is the second start opening jackpot variation time table, when the high support A is the second start opening reach variation time table, when the high support A is Each variation time table is configured so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation times set by the second starting opening reach non-occurrence variation time table. That is, in this modified example, in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation times of the first starting mouth game times, where the player's expectation is small, is the fluctuations of the second starting mouth game time, where the player's expectation is large. It is configured to be shorter than the average value of time. By adopting such a configuration, in the state of the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to reduce the variation time of the first starting mouth game times and suppress the decrease in the player's expectation. 2 It is possible to increase the expectation of the player by making the variation time of the starting mouth game times relatively long. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode A, the player may not want to win the jackpot in the first starting mouth game time, and in such a case, a relatively long period in the first starting mouth game time. Therefore, if the player performs an effect that aspires the player's expectation, such as winning the jackpot or losing the jackpot, the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode A as in the present modification, the average value of the variation time of the first starting mouth game times is relatively shortened to reduce or suppress the player's discomfort to the game. be able to.

<Variable time setting process for high frequency support mode B>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B will be described. The variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 384: Sg2506) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B. In step Sg2801, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time (first start mouth game time) resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag is ON, and when the second symbol display unit flag is OFF, it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first start mouth game time. Then, if the second symbol display unit flag is ON, it is determined that the game time of the processing target is the second starting mouth game time.

When it is determined in step Sg2801 that the game time to be processed is the first start mouth game time (Sg2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2802. In step Sg2802, the high-frequency support mode B first start-up variation time table (indicated as high-support B B first start-up variation time table) stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2801 that the game time to be processed is not the first start mouth game time (Sg2801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2803. That is, if the game time to be processed is the second starting mouth game time, the process proceeds to step Sg2803.

In step Sg2803, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is a big hit. When it is determined in step Sg2803 that the lottery result of the game target winning lottery is a big hit (Sg2803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2804. In step Sg2804, the variation type counter CS of this time is referred to with reference to the high-frequency support mode B second start-port jackpot variation time table (in the figure, referred to as high-support B second start-port jackpot variation time table). Gets the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A ends.

When it is determined in step Sg2803 that the lottery result of the game target winning lottery is not a big hit (Sg2803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2805. In step Sg2805, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is out (reach occurrence). In step Sg2805, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target is out (reach occurrence) (Sg2805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2806.

In step Sg2806, the variation type of this time is referred to with reference to the high-frequency support mode B second starting opening reach generation variation time table (in the figure, referred to as high-support B second startup opening reach generation variation time table). The variable time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B ends.

In step Sg2805, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target is out (reach non-occurrence) (Sg2805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2807.

In step Sg2807, the second starting opening reach non-occurrence variable time table for high frequency support mode B (in the figure, referred to as the second starting opening reach non-occurrence variable time table for high support B) is referred to for this time. The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B ends.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 386, even in the high frequency support mode B, as in the high frequency support mode A, the player's expectation in the case where the first starting mouth game time is executed is small. Therefore, even when setting the variation time of the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode B, as in the case of setting the variation time of the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode A, the lottery for the winning lottery Regardless of the result, the same variable time table is referenced. Further, when the first starting mouth game time is executed, the average value of the fluctuation time set by the high support B time starting time fluctuation table for the first starting mouth is the time when the second starting mouth game time is executed. Set by the variable time table for the second start opening jackpot at high support B, the variable time table for generating the second start opening reach at high support B, and the variable time table for the second starting opening not reaching at high support B Each fluctuation time table is configured so as to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time. That is, even in the high frequency support mode B, the average value of the variation time of the first starting mouth game times is configured to be shorter than the average value of the variation time of the second starting mouth game times. By adopting such a configuration, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, it is possible to shorten the variation time of the first starting mouth game times and suppress the decrease in the player's expectation. 2 It is possible to increase the expectation of the player by making the variation time of the starting mouth game times relatively long.

<Production pattern setting processing>
FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing effect pattern setting processing in the twelfth modification. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 359: Sg2003) of the game time effect process in the seventh embodiment. That is, in the present modification, instead of the effect pattern setting processing described in FIG. 360 of the seventh embodiment, effect pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 387 described below is adopted.

In step Sg2901, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sg2901 that neither the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg2901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg2902.

In step Sg2902, low frequency support mode effect pattern setting processing is executed. The low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is a process of setting the effect pattern to be executed in the game game executed in the low-frequency support mode state. Details of the low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting processing will be described later. After executing Step Sg2902, the effect pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg2901 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (Sg2901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg2903.

In step Sg2903, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sg2903 that the sound-light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (Sg2903: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sg2904.

In step Sg2904, effect pattern setting processing for high frequency support mode A is executed. The high-frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is a process of setting the effect pattern to be executed in the game game executed in the high-frequency support mode A state. Details of the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg2904, the effect pattern setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sg2903 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (Sg2903: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sg2905.

In step Sg2905, effect pattern setting processing for high frequency support mode B is executed. The high-frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is a process of setting the effect pattern to be executed in the game game executed in the high-frequency support mode B state. Details of the high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg2905, the effect pattern setting process ends.

<Production pattern setting process for low frequency support mode>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode will be described. The low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Sg2902) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode. In step Sg3001, it is determined whether the game time to be processed is the first start mouth game time or the second start mouth game time. When it is determined in step Sg3001 that the game time to be processed is the first starting mouth game time (Sg3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3002.

In step Sg3002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is a big hit. In step Sg3002, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target game is a big hit (Sg3002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3003.

In step Sg3003, a low-frequency support mode first start mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a low support first start mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the big hit is won by the 1st starting mouth game time in a low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, since the probability that the first starting mouth game round is continuously executed is high, an effect that enhances the player's expectation in the effect executed in the first starting mouth game round is executed. More specifically, an effect having contents that improve the player's expectation is executed, as compared with the effect executed in the first starting mouth game time in the high-frequency support mode A described later. That is, even with the same first starting mouth game times, the expectation of the player will be different if the state of the game to be executed is different. In the high frequency support mode A, in addition to the execution of the first starting mouth game times, the second starting mouth game times, which is more advantageous to the player, are also frequently executed (the first starting mouth game times and the second starting mouth games). Alternate times). Therefore, in the high frequency support mode A, the player does not have much expectation for the first starting opening game time. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, only the first starting opening game time is executed with high probability. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player has a feeling of expectation for the first starting opening game times. Therefore, in the first start mouth game times in the low frequency support mode, the effect of improving the expectation of the player is executed as compared with the effect executed in the first start mouth game times in the high frequency support mode A. For example, in the first starting mouth game times in the low frequency support mode, the length of time for executing the effect (length of fluctuation time) is changed for each lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, out of three (outreach non-occurrence), out-of-range (reach occurrence), and jackpot, the time length (variation time) for performing the effect in the out-of-range (reach non-occurrence) is the shortest. It is configured such that the length of time (variation time) for performing the effect in the case of deviation (reach occurrence) is short and the length of time for performing the effect in the jackpot (variation time) is the longest. In addition, the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the winning lottery is stopped or the time taken for the corresponding effect is made longer than the first starting opening game time in the high frequency support mode A. By doing so, the first starting mouth game times in the low frequency support mode can be made to have a higher expectation than the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode A.

After executing step Sg3003, the effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode ends.

When it is determined in step Sg3002 that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target is not a big hit (Sg3002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3004.

In step Sg3004, a low-frequency support mode first start-off mouth effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a low-support first start-off effect effect pattern setting process) is executed. The process is a process of setting a production pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of the first starting mouth game times in the low frequency support mode. As described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability that the first starting mouth game time is continuously executed is high, so a game is executed more than the effect executed in the first starting mouth game time in the high-frequency support mode A. Performing content that enhances the expectation of others.

After executing step Sg3004, the effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode ends.

When it is determined in step Sg3001 that the game time to be processed is not the first start mouth game time (Sg3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3005.

In step Sg3005, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target game is a big hit. In step Sg3005, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the processing target game is a big hit (Sg3005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3006.

In step Sg3006, a low frequency support mode second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a low support second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the big hit is won by the 2nd starting mouth game time in a low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, it is extremely unlikely that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 34. Despite such a state, the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening game time is executed, and this processing is executed when the jackpot is won. Therefore, in the present process, an effect having contents that greatly improve the player's expectation is set. After executing step Sg3006, the low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3005 that the lottery result of the winning lottery of the process target is out (Sg3005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3007.

In step Sg3007, a low frequency support mode second start-out mouth effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a low-support second start-out effect effect pattern setting process) is executed. The process is a process of setting a production pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out in the second starting mouth game times in the low frequency support mode. Also in this processing, similarly to step Sg3006, an effect having contents that greatly improve the player's expectation is set. After executing step Sg3007, the low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high-frequency support mode A>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (Fig. 387: Sg2904) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A. In step Sg3101, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the first starting mouth game time. When it is determined in step Sg3101 that the game time to be processed is the first starting mouth game time (Sg3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3102.

In step Sg3102, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is ON. In this modification, when the first starting mouth game times are executed twice in the high frequency support mode A, the hit in the first game time of the two first starting mouth game times is performed. When the lottery result of the lottery is out of alignment, as a specific effect, a continuous effect is executed to execute a series of effects across the two game times. The continuous effect flag is turned on when setting a pattern of effects to be executed in the continuous effect, and is turned off at the start of the second game time in which the continuous effect is set.

When it is determined in step Sg3102 that the continuous effect flag is not ON (Sg3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3103. In step Sg3103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time which is the processing target is a big hit.

When it is determined in step Sg3103 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game cycle to be processed is not a big hit (Sg3103: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3104. In step Sg3104, it is determined whether or not the next game time held is the first starting mouth game time. In step Sg3104, when it is determined that the next game time is the first starting mouth game time (Sg3104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3105 and the continuous effect flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step Sg3106.

In step Sg3106, a process for setting the effect pattern for continuous effect is executed. In this process, the effect pattern for two game times is determined in this process for the two first starting mouth game times for executing the continuous effect. Details of the contents of the effect set in the setting process of the effect pattern for continuous effect will be described later. After executing step Sg3106, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3102 that the continuous effect flag is ON (Sg3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3107. In step Sg3107, the continuous effect flag is turned off. That is, when setting the effect of the first starting mouth game times to be processed, if the continuous effect flag is already ON, the effect pattern of the continuous effect is already about the first starting mouth game times to be processed. This is the case when it is set. Therefore, in that case, the continuous effect flag is turned off, and the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sg3104 that the next game time is not the first start mouth game time (Sg3104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3108. In step Sg3108, a high-frequency support mode A first start-out mouth effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a high-support A first start-out effect effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect|action performed when the lottery result of a winning lottery is a mistake in the 1st starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode A. The details of the effect set in the high-frequency support mode A first start-out opening effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sg3108, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3103 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game number to be processed is a big hit (Sg3103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3109. In step Sg3109, high frequency support mode A first starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting processing (in the figure, referred to as high support A first starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting processing) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the lottery result of a winning lottery is a big hit in the 1st starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode A. The details of the effect set in the setting process of the high-frequency support mode A first start-up jack jackpot effect pattern will be described later. After executing Step Sg3109, the high-frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3101 that the game time to be processed is not the first starting mouth game time (Sg3101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3110. In step Sg3110, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time which is the processing target is a big hit.

When it is determined in step Sg3110 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time to be processed is a big hit (Sg3110: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3111.

In step Sg3111, setting processing of the high-frequency support mode A second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern (in the figure, described as setting processing of high-support A second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the lottery result of a winning lottery is a big hit in the 2nd starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode A. Details of the contents of the effect set in the setting process of the high-frequency support mode A second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern will be described later. After executing Step Sg3111, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3110 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game game to be processed is out (Sg3110: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3112.

In step Sg3112, a high-frequency support mode A second start-out mouth effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a high-support A second start-out effect effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the lottery result of a hit lottery is a miss in the 2nd starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode A. Details of the contents of the effect set in the setting process of the high-frequency support mode A second start-off mouth effect pattern will be described later. After executing Step Sg3112, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is ended.

Next, a pattern of effects in the high-frequency support mode A game times will be described.

FIG. 390 is an explanatory view for explaining an effect pattern in the first starting port game time of the high frequency support mode A. First, the effect patterns other than the above-described continuous effect will be described, and then, in FIG. 391, the effect pattern of the continuous effect will be described.

In FIG. 390(a) and FIG. 390(b), the state of the effect pattern immediately after the first starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode A is started is shown. As shown in the figure, in the first starting mouth game times of the high-frequency support mode A, the battle effect is executed, and the turtle character indicating the player side and the octopus character indicating the enemy side are in battle. Is displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in the figure, at this time, the main display area MA is displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol is changing. As described above, the first starting mouth game time in the high-frequency support mode A is a more disadvantageous game time for the player than the second starting mouth game time in the high-frequency support mode A. Immediately after the start mouth game time is started, the octopus indicating the enemy side attacks the turtle indicating the player side, suggesting that the player side is in a disadvantageous situation.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start mouth game times of the high-frequency support mode A is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 390(c), the turtle showing the player is defeated on the display surface 41a. Displayed in. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the detachment is stopped and displayed. The high support A first start-out slip effect pattern suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous state and that the player is defeated. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 390(a).fwdarw.FIG. 390(b).fwdarw.FIG. 390(c) is an example of the high support A first start-out opening effect effect pattern shown in step Sg3108 of FIG. 389.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is a big hit A, as shown in FIGS. 390(d) and 390(e), a turtle showing the player side is displayed. A state in which the octopus showing the enemy side is endured and the current state is maintained is displayed on the display surface 41a. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the big hit A is stopped and displayed. The lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start mouth game times of the high-frequency support mode A is a big hit A means that the current game state (high-frequency support mode A) is a game after the next game after the end of the game times. It means that it is maintained even at times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390(d) and FIG. 390(e), when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is the jackpot A, the current gaming state. Perform an effect that suggests that was maintained.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit B, as shown in FIGS. 390(f) and 390(g), the turtle showing the player side is The display surface 41a displays a state in which the octopus indicating the enemy side is endured and the turtle indicating the player attacks the enemy and wins. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the big hit B is stopped and displayed. The lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is a big hit B, which means that the game state is more advantageous than the current game state (the high frequency support mode A) in the next and subsequent game times. Means to move to. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 390(f) and 390(g), when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is the jackpot B, the current gaming state. An effect that suggests a transition to a more advantageous game state is executed.

FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(d)→FIG. 390(e), and FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(f)→FIG. 390(g). The effect pattern shown is an example of an effect pattern for high support A first start opening jackpot shown in step Sg3109 of FIG. 389.

As described above, the first starting mouth game times executed in the high-frequency support mode A set the variation time using the same variation time table regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Therefore, the execution time of the effect described in FIG. 390 is also set regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Further, in the present modification, the variation time set in the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode A is the same or substantially the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, the variation time set when the lottery result is a big hit and the variation time set when the lottery result is out of reach (reach occurrence and non-reach occurrence) are the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 391 is an explanatory view for explaining the continuous effect in the first starting opening game time of the high frequency support mode A.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode A, when the first starting opening game times are executed twice in succession, the continuous effect is executed. That is, among the game times (the first start mouth game times and the second start mouth game times) executed in the high frequency support mode A, the first start mouth game times, which are the game times that are disadvantageous to the player, are two consecutive times. Since it is executed in, compared with the case where the first start mouth game times and the second start mouth game times are executed alternately, there is a large degree of disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in the continuous effect, an effect is suggested that the degree of being disadvantageous to the player is large across two first starting opening game times. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 391(a) and 391(b), the octopus indicating the enemy side is displayed in a larger size, which suggests that the player is disadvantaged to a large extent. In the continuous effect, the effect pattern of FIG. 391(a)→FIG. 391(b) is executed in the first of the two first starting mouth game times, and corresponds to the deviation in the main display area MA on the upper right side. The liquid crystal design is stopped and displayed.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first start mouth game time is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 391(c), the state where the turtle showing the player side is defeated is displayed on the display surface 41a. It After that, although illustration is omitted, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first starting mouth game time is out is displayed in a stopped state. To do.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first opening mouth game time is a big hit A, as shown in FIGS. 391(d) and 391(e), the turtle indicating the player side is the enemy side. A state in which the present state is maintained while withstanding the octopus attack shown is displayed on the display surface 41a. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first opening mouth game time is the jackpot A is stopped. indicate.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery at the second first start mouth game time is the big hit B, the turtle indicating the player side is on the enemy side as shown in FIGS. 391(f) and 391(g). The display surface 41a displays a state in which the turtle indicating the player withstands the attack of the indicated octopus and then the turtle indicating the player attacks the enemy and wins. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first opening mouth game time is the jackpot B is stopped. indicate.

In this way, when the first start mouth game times are executed twice in succession in the high-frequency support mode A, as a specific effect, a continuous effect that suggests a large degree of disadvantage to the player is executed. To be done. By giving the player a feeling of tension and a sense of crisis by executing the continuous production in this manner, if the jackpot B is won in the second first starting mouth game time, the player will be greatly affected. A sense of accomplishment can be imparted.

In addition, in the case where the continuous effect is executed, the variation time of the first first start mouth game time and the second first start mouth game time of the first start mouth game times that are continuously executed twice. Is the same as the setting method of the variable time in the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode A. That is, the variation time of the first starting mouth game times in which the continuous effect is executed is the variation time using the same variation time table (variation time table for the first starting opening at high support A) regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. To set. Further, in the present modification, the variation time set in the first starting mouth game times executed twice in the high frequency support mode A is the same or substantially the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Is. Specifically, the variation time set when the lottery result of the first start mouth game times is a big hit and the variation time set when out of sync (reach occurrence and non-reach occurrence) are the same or substantially the same. is there.

FIG. 392 is an explanatory view for explaining an effect pattern in the second starting opening game time of the high frequency support mode A.

392(a) and 392(b) show the state of the effect pattern immediately after the second starting opening game time in the high frequency support mode A is started. As shown in the figure, in the second starting mouth game times of the high-frequency support mode A, the battle effect is executed, and the turtle character indicating the player side and the octopus character indicating the enemy side are in battle. Is displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in the figure, at this time, the main display area MA is displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol is changing. As described above, the second start mouth game time in the high-frequency support A is a game time that is more advantageous to the player than the first start mouth game time in the high-frequency support mode A, so in the effect, the second start is performed. Immediately after the mouth game times are started, the turtle indicating the player side attacks the octopus indicating the enemy side, suggesting that the player side is in an advantageous situation.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second start mouth game times of the high-frequency support mode A is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 392(c), the turtle indicating the player side attacks the octopus indicating the enemy side. The state of being defeated and displayed is displayed on the display surface 41a. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the detachment is stopped and displayed. In the high support A second start-out slip effect pattern, after suggesting that the player is in an advantageous situation, it is suggested that the player is defeated. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 392(a)→FIG. 392(b)→FIG. 392(c) is an example of the high support A second start-out opening effect effect pattern shown in step Sg3112 of FIG. 389.

When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit B, as shown in FIGS. 392(d) and 392(e), a turtle showing the player side is displayed. A state in which the octopus indicating the enemy side is attacked and then the turtle indicating the player has won the octopus indicating the enemy side is displayed on the display surface 41a. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the big hit B is stopped and displayed. The lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is a big hit B, which means that the game state is more advantageous than the current game state (the high frequency support mode A) in the next and subsequent game times. Means to move to. Therefore, when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit B, an effect is suggested which suggests a transition to a more advantageous gaming state than the current gaming state. .. In the seventh embodiment and this modification, the jackpot A is not set for the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second starting mouth game time, so the jackpot A is won in the second starting mouth game time. The effect pattern in some cases is not provided as a configuration.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 392(a)→FIG. 392(b)→FIG. 392(d)→FIG. 392(e) is the effect pattern for high support A second starting opening jackpot shown in step Sg3111 of FIG. 389. This is an example.

As described above, the variation time set for the second start mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A differs depending on the lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, the variation time table referred to in the variation time setting process depending on whether the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit, whether it is out (reach has occurred), or out (reach has not occurred). Are different (see FIG. 385). In this modified example, the variation time (or the average value of the variation time) set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit is the longest, and the variation time set when the deviation (reach occurrence) is next. (Or the average value of the variation time) is long, and the variation time (or the average value of the variation time) set when it is out of alignment (no reach is generated) is the shortest.

Heretofore, the pattern of effects in the game frequency of the high frequency support mode A has been described.

<Production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 387: Sg2905) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B. In step Sg3201, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the first starting mouth game time. When it is determined in step Sg3201 that the game time to be processed is the first starting mouth game time (Sg3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3202. In step Sg3202, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time which is the processing target is a big hit.

In step Sg3202, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game game to be processed is a big hit (Sg3202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3203. In step Sg3203, a high-frequency support mode B first starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a high-support B first starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit in the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode B. In the high-frequency support mode B as well, as in the high-frequency support mode A, the first starting mouth game time is more disadvantageous to the player than the second starting mouth game time. Therefore, when the type of the jackpot is jackpot A, similar to the effect pattern of the high frequency support mode A first starting mouth game times, for example, FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(d) )→The effect pattern of FIG. 390(e) is set. When the type of the jackpot is the jackpot B, for example, the effect patterns of FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(f)→FIG. 390(g) are set. After executing Step Sg3203, the high-frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3202 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game game to be processed is not a big hit (Sg3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3204. In step Sg3204, a setting process of the high-frequency support mode B first start-off mouth effect pattern (indicated as high-support B first start-off position effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect|action performed when the lottery result of a winning lottery is a mistake in the 1st starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode B. The effect pattern set in the processing is similar to the effect pattern of the high-frequency support mode A first start mouth game times, for example, the effect of FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(c). The pattern is set. After executing step Sg3204, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3201 that the game time to be processed is not the first start mouth game time (Sg3201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3205. In step Sg3205, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time which is the processing target is a big hit.

In step Sg3205, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game cycle to be processed is a big hit (Sg3205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sg3206.

In step Sg3206, a high-frequency support mode B second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a high-support B second starting mouth jackpot effect pattern setting process) is executed. The said process is a process which sets the pattern of the effect performed when the lottery result of a winning lottery is a big hit in the 2nd starting mouth game time in the high frequency support mode B.

In the high-frequency support mode B as well, as in the high-frequency support mode A, the second starting mouth game times are more advantageous to the player than the first starting mouth game times. Therefore, when the type of the jackpot is jackpot B, similar to the effect pattern of the high frequency support mode A second starting mouth game times, for example, FIG. 392(a)→FIG. 392(b)→FIG. 392(d) )→The effect pattern of FIG. 392(e) is set. After executing step Sg3206, the high-frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sg3205 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game game to be processed is out (Sg3205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sg3207.

In step Sg3207, the setting process of the high-frequency support mode B second start-off mouth effect pattern (indicated as high-support B second start-off effect setting pattern in the figure) is executed. The process is a process of setting a production pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of the second starting opening game times in the high frequency support mode B. The effect pattern set in the process is similar to the effect pattern of the high-frequency support mode A second starting opening game times, for example, the effect of FIG. 392(a)→FIG. 392(b)→FIG. 392(c). The pattern is set. After executing Step Sg3207, the effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is ended.

As described above, in the present modification, the variable time table used when determining the variable time of the first starting mouth game times executed in the high frequency support mode A is the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game times. Since the same variable time table (variable time table for the first start opening at high support A) is used regardless of the lottery result, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, it is relatively compared with the second start opening game time. It is possible to avoid paying attention to the lottery result of the first starting mouth game time, which is disadvantageous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation due to the execution of the first starting mouth game time.

More specifically, in the low frequency support mode, when determining the variation time in the first starting mouth game times, a different variation time table is used for each lottery result of the winning lottery, and in the high frequency support mode A, When determining the variable time in the first starting mouth game times, the same variable time table is used regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time is changed for each lottery result of the first starting mouth game time, whereas in the high frequency support mode A, it relates to the lottery result of the first starting mouth game time. There is no change in the fluctuation time. By doing in this way, between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to make a difference in the degree to which the lottery result of the first starting mouth game times is focused. In the low frequency support mode, the variation time is set for each result of the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the result of the lottery. In the high-frequency support mode A, since the variation time is not changed regardless of the result of the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game time, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the result of the lottery. Therefore, between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to change the degree of attention of the player regarding the first starting mouth game times, which reduces the degree of attention of the player to the game and the expectation. Can be suppressed. Further, in the high frequency support mode A, the attention degree of the result of the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game time, which is not advantageous to the player, is lowered, and the attention degree of the result of the winning lottery of the second starting mouth game time, which is advantageous to the player, Can be raised. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's expectation.

Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode A, when determining the variation time in the first starting mouth game times, the same variation time table is used regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery, and therefore it differs depending on the lottery result of the winning lottery. As compared with the case where the fluctuation time table is used to determine the fluctuation time table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the fluctuation time table and to simplify the processing when the fluctuation time table is determined.

In the high-frequency support mode A, the player often recalls that the first starting mouth game time is more disadvantageous than the second starting mouth game time, and the player is performing during the first starting mouth game time. There is a possibility that it will reduce the expectations of. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation that the first starting mouth game time is executed in the high frequency support mode A. Therefore, if the structure is such that the period during which the first starting mouth game round is being executed (that is, the varying time) is relatively shorter than the period during which the second starting mouth game round is being executed (the varying time). In the high-frequency support mode A, the player's consciousness goes to the execution of the second starting mouth game times rather than the execution of the first starting mouth game times. That is, in the high frequency support mode A, the player can feel that the fluctuation time of the first starting mouth game times is short and the fluctuation time of the second starting mouth game times is long, thereby making it possible to increase the frequency. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation during the entire period of the support mode A.

In the present modification, as one form thereof, in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting mouth game times is changed to be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the second starting mouth game times. Determine the time. That is, the average value of the fluctuation times of the first starting mouth game times actually executed in the high frequency support mode A is the average value of the fluctuation times of the second starting mouth game times actually executed in the high frequency support mode A. Make it shorter than the above. For example, four variable time tables used in the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A (a variable time table for the first starting port at high support A, a variable time table for the second starting port jackpot at high support A, and high support A). 2nd starting mouth reach generation variation time table, high support A 2nd starting mouth reach non-occurrence variation time table: See FIG. 385), and record/set corresponding to the value of the random number (variation type counter CS). The average value of the fluctuation time (or the information corresponding to the fluctuation time) varies from the longest to the highest time table for the high start A high second start opening jackpot and the high time support A high second start opening reach generation variable time table. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the second start opening reach non-occurrence variation time table at high support A and the first start opening variation time table at high support A are arranged in this order.

In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, the average value of the variation time of the first starting mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit is the variation time of the second starting mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit. It is possible to adopt a configuration that is shorter than the average value of, and in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting mouth game times when the result of the winning lottery is out (reach occurrence) is the winning lottery. The result may be shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times of the second starting mouth game times, which is out (reach occurrence), or in the high frequency support mode A, the result of the winning lottery is out (reach non-reach). The average value of the fluctuation time of the 1st starting mouth game times which is (occurrence) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the 2nd starting mouth game times that the result of the winning lottery is out (reach does not occur) Alternatively, a configuration having all of these features may be adopted.

For example, in the present modification, the variable time table used when setting the variable time of the first starting mouth game times in the high frequency support mode A is one, but the lottery result of the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game times The variable time table used for each may be divided. That is, a configuration is provided that includes a variable time table for the first start opening jackpot at high support A, a variable time table for generating the first start opening reach at high support A, and a variable time table for the first starting opening not reaching at high support A. To do. Then, the average value of the fluctuation times (or the information corresponding to the fluctuation times) recorded in the high starting time jackpot fluctuation time table at the time of high support A is the second starting time jackpot fluctuation time table at the time of high support A. It is also possible to employ a configuration that is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the above. Further, the average value of the fluctuation time (or the information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the high start time reach start variation time table for high support A is the change for high start time second start mouth reach generation. You may employ|adopt the structure shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time (or the information corresponding to fluctuation time) recorded on the time table. Further, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the variable time table for the first start mouth reach non-occurrence at high support A is the second start mouth reach non-occurrence at high support A. A configuration may be adopted in which the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the usage fluctuation time table is shorter than the average value.

By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation during the period in which the first starting mouth game time is being executed. Then, the attention degree of the result of the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game time, which is not advantageous to the player, is lowered relative to the attention degree of the result of the winning lottery of the second starting mouth game time, which is advantageous to the player, On the contrary, the degree of attention of the result of the winning lottery of the second starting mouth game times, which is advantageous to the player, is increased relative to the degree of attention of the result of the winning lottery of the first starting mouth game times, which is not advantageous to the player. be able to.

Further, in this modification, in the high-frequency support mode A, the effect that the octopus attacks the turtle in the first starting mouth game time is executed, and the effect that the turtle attacks the octopus in the second starting mouth game time is executed. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which of the first starting mouth game time and the second starting mouth game time is being executed, and to help the player understand the flow of the game. You can

Further, in the high-frequency support mode A, it is suggested that the player side is in a disadvantageous situation by performing an effect in which the octopus indicating the enemy side attacks the turtle indicating the player side in the first starting mouth game time, It suggests that the player side is in an advantageous situation by performing an effect in which the turtle indicating the player side attacks the octopus indicating the enemy side in the second starting opening game time. By executing such an effect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize whether the game time being executed is a game time that is advantageous to the player or a game time that is disadvantageous to the player, It is possible to further assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode B, when the first starting mouth game time is executed, a performance suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to a game state that is more disadvantageous than the current game state (FIG. 390(a) )→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(d)→FIG. 390(e) effect pattern/FIG. 390(a)→FIG. 390(b)→FIG. 390(f)→FIG. 390(g) effect pattern) Since it is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game times to be executed are advantageous or disadvantageous in a game state that changes in a complicated manner, and further assist the player in understanding the flow of the game. can do.

Further, in the high-frequency support mode A, when the first starting mouth game times are executed twice in succession, the continuous effect is executed as the specific effect, so to the player who recognizes the execution of the specific effect, It is possible to recognize that an event with a low probability such as a game ball entering the first starting opening twice consecutively has occurred, and arouse the player's curiosity about the occurrence of an event with a low probability. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that the specific effect is not limited to the continuous effect, and may be configured to execute the effect in which the effect pattern is set for each of the two first starting opening game times. Further, the specific effect may be executed in at least one of the two first starting opening game times.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, a special symbol as the first symbol (a symbol that changes when the player enters the starting opening), a normal symbol as the second symbol (electrical accessory open lottery, electric role open lottery) In (1), a normal symbol may be adopted as the first symbol, and a special symbol may be adopted as the second symbol. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the first type ball entrance means is the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b) and the second type ball entering device is the second starting port 34. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first type ball entering means is the second starting port 34 and the second type ball entering means is the first starting port 33 (first starting port 33a, first starting port 33b).

In this modified example, when the first start mouth game times are executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the variation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit, and when it is out of alignment In the high-frequency support mode A, the variable time when the first starting mouth game time is executed is related to the lottery result of the winning lottery, as the configuration in which the variable time that is set is the same or substantially the same. Without adopting the configuration of setting the variable time by referring to the same variable time table, when the first start mouth game times are executed in the high frequency support mode A, when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit Any configuration may be adopted as long as the set variation time is the same or substantially the same as the variation time set when there is a deviation.

For example, when the first starting mouth game time is executed in the high frequency support mode A, a variable time table to be referred to according to the lottery result of the winning lottery is prepared. Specifically, a fluctuation time table for big hits, a fluctuation time table for deviation (reach occurrence), and a fluctuation time for deviation (reach non-occurrence) are prepared, and fluctuation time values recorded in these tables ( Alternatively, the information corresponding to the fluctuation time) may be the same or substantially the same between the fluctuation time tables. In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time when the first starting mouth game time is executed is always set to the same variation time (regular time, variation time of a constant value) regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. The configuration may be adopted. Specifically, only one value (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) of the fluctuation time of the first starting mouth game times in the high-frequency support mode A is stored, and which one of the first starting mouth game times is stored. A configuration may be adopted in which one stored variation time is set for the variation time, or one variation time table is prepared and the variation time (or variation) stored in the variation time table is set. Information corresponding to time) may all be the same or substantially the same.

In this modified example, in the high-frequency support mode A, when the first starting mouth game time is continuously executed two or more times, the configuration for executing the continuous production as the specific production is adopted, but other configurations are adopted. May be adopted. For example, in the high-frequency support mode A, when the second starting mouth game time is continuously executed twice or more, a configuration may be adopted in which the continuous effect is executed as the specific effect. In this case, it is advantageous for the player that the second starting mouth game times are continuously executed in the high-frequency support A, so for example, as a continuous effect, a turtle indicating the player side is an octopus indicating the enemy side. You may employ|adopt the structure which performs an offensive production. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

<<H>> Eighth Embodiment:
<<H1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 394 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 395 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that a trace of opening and closing remains. For example, a seal sticker is attached to an openable/closable portion, and when the board box is opened, a character such as "open" appears.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 396 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. Specifically, the variable display unit 40 is provided substantially at the center of the game board 30, and the main display portion 45 is provided near the upper right of the game board 30 when viewed from the front. A decorative frame member DF whose surface is decorated is attached to the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 40.

A first right-handing rail R1 and a second right-handing rail R2 are provided in a space sandwiched by the portion from the upper side to the right side of the decorative frame member DF, the outer rail portion 31b and the main display portion 45. It is provided. On the right side of the lower part of the second right-handing rail R2, a right-handing outer rail R3 is provided. The first right-handing rail R1 and the second right-handing rail R2 form a first passage P1 for right-handing. The second right-handing rail R2, the outer rail portion 31b, the main display portion 45, and the right-handing outer rail R3 form a right-handing second passage P2. Both the right-handing first passage P1 and the right-handing second passage P2 are formed in a substantially arc shape, and the right-handing first passage P1 is located inside the right-handing second passage P2. The opening end P1a on one side of the first passage P1 and the opening end P2a on one side of the second passage P2 are both located near the top of the game area PA, and a game ball can enter. The opening end P1b on the other side of the first passage P1 and the opening end P2b on the other side of the second passage P2 are both located near the right side of the game area PA, and a game ball can be sent toward the variable winning device 36. ..

As described above, by maximizing the turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 394) or operating the game ball firing button 26 (FIG. 394), the game ball is moved to the right side of the game area PA. A so-called "right hit" can be made by hitting the ball. In these operations, the game ball can be guided to the second passage P2 at the time of right hit. On the other hand, by adjusting the turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 394) from the maximum direction, the game ball can be guided to the first passage P1 at the time of right hitting. Hereinafter, the right-handed second passage P2 is called a "strong right-handed passage P2", and the right-handed first passage P1 is called a "weak right-handed passage P1". The operation of guiding the game ball to the strong right hitting path P2, that is, maximizing the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 (Fig. 394) or operating the game ball launch button 26 (Fig. 394) is performed. The operation of guiding the game ball to the weak right-handing passage P1 is called the "strong right-handing operation".

The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 (FIG. 395) as prize balls.

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the first starting port 33. That is, the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are arranged side by side so that the first starting port 33 is above the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 is provided below the opening end P1b on the lower side of the weak right striking passage P1 and the opening end P2b on the lower side of the strong right striking passage P2, and the big winning opening 36a and the big winning opening 36a. An opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes and a V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v are provided. Specifically, the special winning opening 36a is located vertically below the lower opening end P1b of the weak right-handing passage P1 and the lower opening end P2b of the strong right-handing passage P2. Therefore, the game balls flowing out from the respective opening ends P1b and P2b drop toward the special winning opening 36a.

The special winning opening 36a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is formed in a rectangular shape in the present embodiment.

The opening/closing door 36b is a lid having a rectangular parallelepiped shape in front view, which is slightly larger than the special winning opening 36a, and is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main control device 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can enter. Specifically, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state by rotating the upper side toward the front side about the lower edge. The opening/closing execution mode refers to a case where the main controller 60 hits the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 as a result of a winning lottery, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 can enter the large winning opening 36a. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. ..

The V-acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v is a device that sorts the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 36a into the V-winning zone FV and the non-V-winning zone FNV. The V winning zone FV is an area where the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode can be shifted to the high-probability mode when a game ball enters. The non-V winning zone FNV is an outlying region in which the transition to the high probability mode cannot be performed. The game ball that has passed through the V winning zone FV or the non-V winning zone FNV is then sent to the back side of the game board 30. The distribution is made according to the skill of the player, and if the skill is high, it is possible to send the game ball to the V winning zone FV.

In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71 (FIG. 395). That is, the same 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball entered regardless of whether the game is distributed to the V winning zone FV or the non-V winning zone FNV. The number of game balls paid out by the payout device 71 may be different between when the player enters the V winning zone FV and when the player enters the non-V winning zone FNV. Below the V winning zone FV, the letter "V" indicating that the V winning zone FV is at this position is engraved. The detailed configuration of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v will be described later.

An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

The game balls that enter the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, and the out opening 43 are discharge passages provided on the back surface of the game board 30. Is finally merged into the discharge passage, and a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting a game ball is provided in the discharge passage. By detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor, it is possible to know the number of the game balls that have been launched to the game board 30.

The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display is made to display corresponding to the lottery result , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round game is an open/close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first symbol display portion 37a based on the winning in the first starting opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second symbol display portion 37b based on the winning in the second starting opening 34. .. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 397 is an explanatory view showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 397 (a) is an explanatory view showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 397(a), the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 397 (b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 397(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 397(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. In other words, this is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol for each game time. On either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, a predetermined value is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 397(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

<<H2>> Configuration of V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v:
FIG. 398 is an explanatory diagram showing the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v. In the figure, the X-axis positive direction indicates the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right-left direction when viewed from the front of the game board 30, the Y-axis direction indicates the vertical direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front-back direction of the game board 30. The X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis are three axes that are orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the X-axis positive direction is referred to as “+X direction”, the X-axis negative direction is referred to as “−X direction”, the Y-axis positive direction is referred to as “+Y direction”, and the Y-axis negative direction is referred to as “−Y direction”. The Z-axis positive direction is called "+Z direction", and the Z-axis negative direction is called "-Z direction".

The V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v includes a first passage 210, a clune 220, a second passage 300, and a non-V winning opening shutter 350. The first passage 210 and the second passage 300 are made of a transparent or semitransparent resin member.

The first passage 210 has a ball entrance 210a at the end on the +Y direction side and a ball discharge port 210b at the end opposite to the ball entrance 210a. From the ball entrance 210a to the ball discharge port 210b. It is a passage through which game balls can be distributed. The first passage 210 has a bent shape on the way.

The first passage upstream side portion 211, which is upstream of the bent portion in the first passage 210, extends along the Y-axis direction in a front view of the game board 30. The ball entrance 210a located at the upper end of the first passage upstream portion 211 communicates with the special winning opening 36a, and the first passage upstream portion 211 communicates with the special winning opening 36a. In FIG. 398, the first passage upstream side portion 211 is shown by a broken line, but this is on the back side (−Z direction side) of the surface on which the special winning opening 36a is formed in the Z axis direction. This is because the portion indicated by the broken line is formed. The ball entrance 210a is located in the -Y direction, that is, vertically downward with respect to the opening end P1b on the lower side of the slightly right hitting passage P1.

The first passage downstream side portion 212, which is the downstream side of the bent portion in the first passage 210, extends from the bent portion in the front left direction toward the lower left direction (that is, the -X direction and the -Y direction), In a right side view, it extends from the bent portion toward the lower front (that is, +Z direction and −Y direction). The game ball that has entered the ball entry port 210a from the special winning opening 36a passes through the first passage upstream side portion 211, then the first passage downstream side portion 212, and the downstream side of the first passage downstream side portion 212. It is discharged from the discharge port 210b which is the end.

The clune 220 is disposed on the −Y direction side of the first passage 210. The clune 220 is made of a metal member. The clune 220 has a dish shape having an inner wall 220a that is inclined downward while decreasing its diameter toward the bottom side, and has one hole 220b formed in the bottom. The game ball dropped from the ball discharge port 210b is received by the clune 220, flows down while circling the inner wall 220a, and flows into the hole 220b. In this way, the clune 220 can hold the received game ball for a certain period of time. It should be noted that the player can measure the timing at which the game ball flows into the hole 220b by observing the flow of the game ball in the clune 220.

The second passage 300 includes a main passage portion 310, a communication passage portion 320 for communicating between the hole 220b of the clune 220 and the main passage portion 310, and a branch passage portion 330 branched from the main passage portion 310. Prepare

The main line passage portion 310 has a ball entrance 310a at the end on the +Y direction side and a ball discharge opening 310b at the end on the -Y direction side, and game balls can flow from the ball entrance 310a to the ball discharge port 310b. It is a corridor. The main line passage portion 310 is divided into a main line passage upstream side portion 311 located on the upstream side, a main line passage middle stream side portion 312 located on the middle stream side, and a main line passage downstream side portion 313 located on the downstream side.

The main line passage upstream side portion 311 extends along the Y-axis direction in a front view of the game board 30. The entrance 310a located at the upper end of the main passage upstream side portion 311 communicates with the special winning opening 36a, and the main passage upstream portion 311 communicates with the special winning opening 36a. In FIG. 398, a part of the main line passage upstream side portion 311 is shown by a broken line, but this is on the back side (−Z direction side) of the surface on which the special winning opening 36a is formed in the Z axis direction. This is because some of them are formed. The ball entrance 310a is located in the -Y direction, that is, vertically below the opening end P2b on the lower side of the strong right hitting passage P2.

The main line passage middle-stream side portion 312 is a portion following the main line passage upstream side portion 311, and extends in the lower left direction (that is, the -X direction and the -Y direction) from the upstream side to the downstream side.

The main line passage downstream side portion 313 is a part following the main line passage midstream side portion 312, extends along the Y-axis direction, and has a ball discharge port 310b at the end on the −Y direction side. The position of the main passage downstream side portion 313 is determined such that the central axis direction of the main passage downstream portion 313 coincides with the center axis direction of the hole 220b of the clune 220.

The communication passage portion 320 extends along the Y-axis direction, an end portion on the +Y direction side is connected to the hole 220b of the clin 220, and an end portion on the −Y direction side is connected to the main line passage portion 310. As a result, a flow path for the game ball is formed along the Y-axis direction from the hole 220b of the clune 220 to the discharge port 310b of the main line passage downstream side portion 313.

The branch passage portion 330 is connected to a boundary portion between the middle-stream side portion 312 of the main passage and the downstream portion 313 of the main passage, and has a bent shape in the middle. The bent passage portion 330 divides the branch passage portion 330 into a branch passage upstream portion 331 located on the upstream side and a branch passage downstream portion 332 located on the downstream side.

The branch passage upstream side portion 331 extends in the same direction as the main passage middle stream side portion 312. The branch passage downstream side portion 332 extends along the Y-axis direction and has a ball discharge port 330b at the end on the −Y direction side.

In the present embodiment, the vicinity of the ball discharge port 310b of the main line passage portion 310 is set as the non-V winning zone FNV described above, and the vicinity of the ball discharge port 330b of the branch passage portion 330 is described above. Stipulated in. The game ball that has passed through the non-V prize zone FNV and entered the ball discharge port 310b, and the game ball that has passed through the V prize zone FV and entered the ball discharge port 330b are sent to the back side of the game board 30.

The non-V winning opening shutter 350 is provided at the upper end (the end in the +Y-axis direction) of the main passage passage downstream side portion 313, and allows the game ball to enter the main passage passage downstream side portion 313 when in the open state. However, in the closed state, the game ball is prohibited from entering the main passage downstream side portion 313. Therefore, when the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in the open state, the game balls that have flown to the upper end of the main passage downstream side portion 313 are distributed to the main passage downstream portion 313, and are placed in the non-V winning zone FNV. Sent. When the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in the closed state, the game balls that have flowed to the upper end of the main passage downstream side portion 313 are distributed to the branch passage portion 330 and sent to the V winning zone FV.

In the present embodiment, the first passage 210 and the second passage 300 are the only passages connected to the special winning opening 36a. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the special winning opening 36a is sent to either the first passage 210 or the second passage 300. Specifically, when the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the ball entrance 210a of the first passage 210 is located vertically below the opening end P1b of the weak right-handing passage P1. The game ball that has entered the mouth 36a is sent to the first passage 210 with a high probability. In the front view of the game board 30, the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300 is located vertically below the opening end P2b on the lower side of the strong right striking passage P2, and therefore is sent from the strong right striking passage P2. The game ball entered in is sent to the second passage 300 with high probability.

A detection sensor (hereinafter referred to as a first passage detection sensor) SP1 for detecting a game ball is provided near the ball entrance 210a of the first passage 210, and the first passage 210 is detected by the first passage 210. It is possible to detect the entry of the game ball into the game. A detection sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a second passage detection sensor) SP2 for detecting a game ball is provided near the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300, and the second passage 300 is detected by the second passage detection sensor SP2. It is possible to detect the entry of the game ball into the game. A detection sensor (hereinafter, referred to as V prize zone detection sensor) SP3 for detecting a game ball is provided near the ball discharge port 330b of the branch passage portion 330 in the second passage 300, and by the V prize zone detection sensor SP3, It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the V winning zone FV.

The detection signals of the detection sensors SP1 to SP3 are sent to the main controller 60 (FIG. 395). The main controller 60 (FIG. 395) determines the opening/closing timing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 based on the detection signal of the first passage detecting sensor SP1 and the detection signal of the second passage detecting sensor SP2 to determine the non-V winning combination. The opening/closing of the mouth shutter 350 is instructed. Further, when the main control device 60 (FIG. 395) determines from the detection signal of the V winning zone detection sensor SP3 that the game ball has entered the V winning zone FV, the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is performed. The process of shifting the lottery mode to the high-probability mode is performed. These processes performed by main controller 60 will be described later in detail.

<<H3>> Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 399 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 has a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data and the like temporarily when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, which is a memory for storing, is provided. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 is provided with a capacitor (not shown), and when power failure occurs or the power switch 88 (FIG. 395) is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. To do.

Further, a game ball detection sensor provided at each entrance is connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, a first start opening detection sensor 67b that detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 33, and a second start opening detection sensor 67c that detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 34. The through-gate detection sensor 67d that detects the game ball that has passed through the through-gate 35 and the detection sensors SP1 to SP3 provided in the above-described V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v are connected. The first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 of the detection sensors SP1 to SP3 provided in the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v also function as sensors for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 36a. .. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the starting opening or the winning opening, and the game ball has a through gate. It is determined whether or not it has passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also carries out the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering of the through gate 35. To do. In addition, the opening and closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is controlled based on the ball entering the first passage 210 and the second passage 300 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v.

At the output port of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. The non-V winning opening shutter driving unit 36d that opens and closes the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed. In addition, in the first round of the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the non-V winning opening shutter driving unit 36d is executed so that the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is opened and closed. The drive control of the non-V winning opening shutter drive unit 36d will be described later in detail.

The payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying the entry into the second starting opening 34, the payout of one game ball. The award ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry into the special winning opening 36a is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. It The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. As described above, when the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximum regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 of the player. With the same launch strength, a game ball is launched in front of the game board.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 400 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball is the reserved information storage area. It is chronologically stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 The storage areas are stored in the holding area Rb in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is recognized. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 397(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. For example, if C4=0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=2-465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot random number counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. The hit/no hit table and the hit/no hit table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win/loss tables, one for the probability mode and one for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode), are stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 401 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. FIG. 401(a) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 401(b) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 401(a), in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 401(b), 16 values 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

FIG. 402 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 402(a) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 402(b) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 402(a), in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the low probability mode), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. There is. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 402(b), 16 values 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in the present embodiment, a “small win” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The “small hit” is a result of the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened (number of rounds)
(2) Aspect of open/close control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 in the open/close execution mode (3) Support mode after the open/close execution mode (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode)

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, opening/closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 included in the variable winning device 36. A plurality of types of patterns (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “opening/closing patterns”) may be provided, and one type or a plurality of types of opening/closing patterns may be set corresponding to each type of jackpot. By the opening/closing pattern of the non-V winning opening shutter 350, it is possible to adjust the difficulty of entering the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v. In this embodiment, the following three open/close patterns are prepared.

A closed/open pattern in which it is virtually impossible to put a game ball in the V winning zone FV.
-A game ball can be inserted into the V winning zone FV, but it is difficult to enter the V winning high difficulty closed/open pattern.
A V-winning low difficulty closed/open pattern in which it is possible to insert a game ball into the V-winning zone FV and which is easier to enter than the V winning high difficulty closed/open pattern.

Specific aspects of each closing pattern and allocation of the first to third closing patterns to the jackpot type will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 403 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 403(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 403(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to when the lottery is performed based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is provided for the second starting opening 34. It is referred to at the time of lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening of FIG. 403(a), the distribution table for the first starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. 8R type 1 jackpot and 8R type 2 jackpot are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” correspond to the 8R first type jackpot and “28 to 39” correspond to the 8R second type jackpot. Is set.

In the 8R first-class jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is eight (8 rounds), and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 in the opening/closing execution mode. The mode of the opening/closing control is the V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern or the V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. Which of the V winning high difficulty closed/open pattern and the V winning low difficulty closed/open pattern is adopted is determined by parameters other than the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the 8R first-class jackpot is won in the low-frequency support mode, the V winning high difficulty closed/open pattern is adopted. On the other hand, when the 8R first-class jackpot is won in the high-frequency support mode, the V winning low difficulty closed/open pattern is adopted. When the game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

In the 8R second-class jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is eight (8 rounds), and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36 in the opening/closing execution mode. The mode of the opening/closing control is the V-winning non-closing pattern. In the open/closed V winning pattern, as described above, it is practically impossible to put the game ball in the V winning zone FV. Therefore, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode has a high probability. However, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode. If a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, an error message is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to notify that an error has occurred without changing to the high-probability mode. It may be configured. Since it cannot be denied that the game ball has entered the V winning zone FV due to the player's cheating, an error message is displayed. Further, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode, and an error message may be displayed. The display of the above-mentioned error message may be replaced with the generation of a warning sound, and any means may be used as long as it can notify that an error has occurred. Further, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the operation of the pachinko machine may be stopped.

As described above, when the first-class jackpot is won, it is possible to insert the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36. Therefore, when the first-class jackpot is won, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player tries to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36 while right-handed. Is preferred. How to try to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV will be described later. On the other hand, when the second-class jackpot is won, there is substantially no game ball entering the V winning zone FV, so normal right-handing, that is, the turning operation of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 394). A game is performed by maximizing the amount or operating the game ball firing button 26 (FIG. 394).

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 403(b), the distribution table for the second starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. 16R first-class jackpot and 8R second-class jackpot are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” correspond to the 16R type 1 jackpot and “28 to 39” correspond to the 8R type 2 jackpot. Is set.

In the 16R first-class jackpot, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened 16 times (16 rounds), and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 in the opening/closing execution mode. The mode of the opening/closing control is the V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern or the V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. Which of the V winning high difficulty closed/open pattern and the V winning low difficulty closed/open pattern is adopted is determined by parameters other than the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the 16R first-class jackpot is won during the low-frequency support mode, the V winning high difficulty closed/open pattern is adopted. On the other hand, when the 16R first-class jackpot is won in the high-frequency support mode, the V winning low difficulty closed/open pattern is adopted. When the game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode.

As described above, in the 8R second-class jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode is eight (8 rounds), and the non-V of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is performed. A mode of opening/closing control of the winning opening shutter 350 is a V-winning non-opening/closing pattern. In the open/closed V winning pattern, as described above, it is practically impossible to put the game ball in the V winning zone FV. Therefore, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode has a high probability. However, if a game ball enters the V winning zone FV, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is the jackpot, the distribution mode of the jackpot type is the jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and It is different from the case of a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the 2 starting port 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened once, that is, from the opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b to one round. On the other hand, as another mode, a mode in which the opening/closing door 36b is opened multiple times during one round may be adopted.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the jackpot type, three types of 8R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 2 jackpot, and 16R type 1 jackpot are prepared. Differences are provided in the modes or modes of (1) and (2) described above, and the support mode (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode after completion of the open/close execution mode) described above in (3). ), there was no difference. Instead of this, a configuration may be provided in which the difference (3) is also provided. For example, in the 8R first-class jackpot and the 16R first-class jackpot, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, and in the 8R second-class jackpot, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. The configuration may be the support mode.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, in the situation where the game balls are continuously emitted to the game area PA in the same mode. In comparison, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set such that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. it can.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of being a winning combination in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is different between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time release time of the electric accessory 34a is set longer when the electric-role combination is won, than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the next operation is performed after the end of one opening state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 34 will be higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 404 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/win lottery win/loss table) used when executing the electric auditors open lottery.

FIG. 404(a) shows a win/loss table (for low frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 404(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 404(b) shows the winning/disapproving table for the electric accessory release lottery (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 404(b), the winning/disabling table for electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric role releasing counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<H4>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 405 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that a part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 399) and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<H5>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the main control device 60 includes processing for controlling the opening/closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 included in the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v. First, an outline of this opening/closing control will be described. The configuration of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 36v is as described above with reference to FIG. 398.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is a condition for shifting the non-V winning opening shutter 350 from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as “closing condition”) and the non-V winning opening shutter 350. The control is performed according to an opening/closing scenario that is a program in which the condition (hereinafter, also referred to as “open condition”) for shifting from the closed state to the open state is recorded. There are three types of open/close scenarios. The three types of opening/closing scenarios will be described in order.

<First opening and closing scenario>
FIG. 406 is a timing chart for explaining the first opening/closing scenario. FIG. 406(a) shows temporal changes in the open/closed state of the opening/closing door 36b for opening/closing the special winning opening 36a. FIG. 406(b) shows a temporal change in the ON state/OFF state of the first passage detection sensor SP1. FIG. 406(c) shows a temporal change in the ON state/OFF state of the second passage detection sensor SP2. FIG. 406(d) shows a temporal change of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state and the open state.

In the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) where the jackpot is not won, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in the open state. In the low-frequency support mode, when the first-class jackpot is won, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, but in this opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state and the first round game ( Hereinafter, it will be simply referred to as “the first round”) (time t1). In such an opening/closing execution mode, when the closing condition of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing conditions are as follows (i) and (ii).

(I) The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the first round in the open/close execution mode is being executed.
(Ii) One game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a since the start of the first round, or two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a since the start of the first round What I did.
When both of the above two items are satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In the present embodiment, the fact that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a is detected using both the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2. That is, when either the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2 detects the entry of the game ball, it is determined that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a. Therefore, in the item (ii), "one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a" is "the game ball is 1 in either the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2". "The game is detected by both the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2" means that "two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a". The total number of spheres is now 2."

In the example of FIG. 406, at time t1, the first round is started in the opening/closing execution mode, and starting from this time (time t1), at time t2, the first passage detection sensor SP1 moves to the special winning opening 36a. The first passage is detected, and at time t4, the second passage detection sensor SP2 detects the second passage into the special winning opening 36a. Both of the items (i) and (ii) are established at the time t2 and the time t4 respectively, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The opening conditions of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are as follows.
When the condition established in (ii) is that one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a, 0.06 seconds have elapsed with the non-V winning opening shutter 350 closed.
If the condition established in (ii) is that two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a, 0.2 seconds have elapsed with the non-V winning opening shutter 350 closed.
When either of the above two is established, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the closed state to the open state (time t3, t5).

According to the above opening conditions, when the condition established in (ii) is that one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is extremely short at 0.06 seconds. It will be closed for only time. With a closing time of 0.06 seconds, it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the downstream side portion 313 (FIG. 398) of the main path, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 substantially branches the game ball. It is not possible to guide to the part 330 (FIG. 398) side. That is, in the present embodiment, even when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing time is extremely short, and the game ball cannot be substantially guided to the branch passage portion 330 side. In addition to this configuration, as another form, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the configuration may not be performed at all to the closed state. ..

According to the above-described opening conditions, when two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 will be closed for 0.2 seconds. During this 0.2 seconds, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 can guide the game ball to the branch passage portion 330 side. It should be noted that the closing time may be changed to 0.2 seconds and may be another time less than 0.4 seconds (for example, 0.3 seconds). The reason why the time is less than 0.4 seconds will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the first opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 included in the main control board 61. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 reads the first opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the first-class jackpot is won in the low-frequency support mode, and reads the first opening/closing scenario. The opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is performed according to the opening/closing scenario.

When the player wins the first-class jackpot while hitting the left in the normal state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode) where the jackpot is not won, in the first round of the opening/closing execution mode, the following ( By performing the operations of a) and (b), it becomes possible to put the game ball in the V winning zone FV in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v.

(A) Adjust the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 394) (that is, perform a weak right hitting operation), and put one game ball in the weak right hitting passage P1 (FIG. 396).
The game ball that has entered the slightly right-handed path P1 is discharged from the ball discharge port 210b from the special winning opening 36a (FIG. 398) through the first path 210. After that, as shown in FIG. 407, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 210b is received by the clune 220 and flows down while circulating around the inner wall 220a. Then, as shown in FIG. 408, the game ball B1 flows into the hole 220b. The time for which the game ball is held in the clune 220 is extremely long, for example, several seconds to several tens of seconds, compared to 0.6 seconds which is the interval between the game balls of the game ball firing mechanism 81.

(B) By maximizing the turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 (FIG. 394) or operating the game ball firing button 26 (FIG. 394) (that is, performing a strong right hit operation), Put one game ball in the right-handed path P2.

According to the first opening/closing scenario, since the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts to the closed state in synchronization with two gaming balls entering the big winning opening 36a after the first round is started, As for the player, when the game ball B2 put in the strong right-handed passage P2 enters the second passage 300, the game ball B1 put in the weak right-handed passage P1 due to (a) flows into the hole 220b of the clune 220. The timing for inserting the game ball B2 into the strong right hitting path P2 is adjusted so as to coincide with the timing (see FIG. 408). Explaining with reference to FIG. 406, a strong right strike is performed so that the period until the game ball entering the first passage 210 detected at time t2 reaches the clune 220 is the same as the period from time t2 to time t4. The timing of putting the game ball B2 into the passage P2 is adjusted. In this way, by measuring the timing when the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 409, the game ball B1 put into the slightly right-handed passage P1 by the operation of (a) is closed. By the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the state, the entry to the downstream side portion 313 of the main passage is blocked, and the main passage is guided to the branch passage portion 330. As a result, it becomes possible to put the game ball B1 put into the slightly right-handed passage P1 into the V winning zone FV. The first opening/closing scenario configured as described above is for realizing the V winning high difficulty close/open pattern described above.

In the first opening/closing scenario, as described above, in the first round, by inserting one game ball into the weak right-handing passage P1 and then inserting one game ball into the strong right-handing passage P2, It is possible to aim for a ball (V winning) into the V winning zone FV, but it is also possible to aim for a V winning by another operation. Specifically, in the first round, by inserting one game ball into the slightly right-handed path P1 and then again entering one game ball into the slightly right-handed path P1 again, the V prize is obtained. You can aim.

In this embodiment, if the first game ball to the special winning opening 36a in the first round is the strong right hitting path P2, it is impossible to put the game ball in the V winning zone FV. It is composed. The reason why a game ball cannot be placed in the V winning zone FV is as follows.

The second passage 300 of the V-acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v has an internal structure in which it takes 0.4 seconds from when the ball enters the ball entrance 310a until it reaches the upper portion of the non-V winning opening shutter 350. In addition, the game ball launching mechanism 81 launches game balls at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, for the game ball that first enters the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300, the game ball that is fired next enters the large winning opening 36a and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed. Before that, the position of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 will be reached. Therefore, when the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in the closed state, the first game ball does not fall into the V winning zone FV because it falls to the downstream portion 313 of the main passage.

In addition, the second passage 300 has an internal structure in which it takes 0.4 seconds from entering the ball entrance 310a to reaching the non-V winning opening shutter 350. Since it is set to a time shorter than 0.4 seconds, such as 0.2 seconds, the second game ball that entered the special winning opening 36a is a non-V prize due to the entry of the game ball. The mouth shutter 350 is not moved to the closed state to enter the V winning zone FV. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is not possible to aim for the V prize only by continuously entering the game balls into the strong right-handing passage P2.

<Second opening and closing scenario>
FIG. 410 is a timing chart for explaining the second opening/closing scenario. FIG. 410(a) shows temporal changes in the open/closed state of the opening/closing door 36b for opening/closing the special winning opening 36a. FIG. 410(b) shows temporal changes in the ON state/OFF state of the first passage detection sensor SP1. FIG. 410(c) shows a temporal change in the ON state/OFF state of the second passage detection sensor SP2. FIG. 410(d) shows a temporal change of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state and the open state.

When the second-class jackpot is won, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode. In this open/close execution mode, the open/close door 36b is changed from the closed state to the open state and the first round is started (time t11). In such an opening/closing execution mode, when the closing condition of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing conditions of the second opening/closing scenario are as follows (iii) and (iv).

(Iii) The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is being executed in the first round in the opening/closing execution mode.
(Iv) One game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a since the first round was started.
When both of the above two items are satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

In the example of FIG. 410, the first round is started in the opening/closing execution mode at time t11, and starting from this time (time t1), at time t12, the first passage detection sensor SP1 moves to the special winning opening 36a. The first ball is detected. At time t12, both of the items (iii) and (iv) are established, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The opening conditions of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are as follows.
-The non-V winning opening shutter 350 has closed for 0.06 seconds.
When the above conditions are satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the closed state to the open state (time t13).

According to the above-mentioned opening conditions, when one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed for a very short time of 0.06 seconds. Therefore, according to the second opening/closing scenario, as in the case of the first opening/closing scenario, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the game ball is substantially played. Cannot be guided to the side of the branch passage portion 330. It should be noted that, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed for a very short time, and the first round is started. After that, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a, it may be configured such that the transition to the closed state is not performed at all.

In the second opening/closing scenario configured as described above, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the game ball is substantially guided to the branch passage portion 330 side. Since the non-V winning opening shutter 350 will not be closed when the second or more gaming balls enter the big winning opening 36a after the first round is started, 1 In the round, the game ball cannot be inserted into the V winning zone FV. The second opening/closing scenario is for realizing the previously described V winning non-closing open/close pattern.

In the present embodiment, the second opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 included in the main control board 61. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 reads the second opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the second type jackpot is won, and according to the read second opening/closing scenario, the non-V The opening/closing control of the winning opening shutter 350 is performed.

<Third opening/closing scenario>
FIG. 411 is a timing chart for explaining the third opening/closing scenario. FIG. 411(a) shows temporal changes in the open/closed state of the opening/closing door 36b for opening/closing the special winning opening 36a. FIG. 411(b) shows a temporal change in the ON state/OFF state of the first passage detection sensor SP1. FIG. 411(c) shows a temporal change in the ON state/OFF state of the second passage detection sensor SP2. FIG. 411(d) shows a temporal change of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state and the open state.

In the high-frequency support mode, when the first type jackpot is won, the opening/closing execution mode is entered. In this opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 36b is moved from the closed state to the open state and the first round is started. (Time t21). In such an opening/closing execution mode, when the closing condition of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is shifted from the open state to the closed state. The closing condition of the third opening/closing scenario is the same as the closing condition of the first opening/closing scenario. That is, the closing condition of the third opening/closing scenario is to satisfy both (i) and (ii) described above.

In the example of FIG. 411, at time t21, the first round is started in the opening/closing execution mode, and starting from this time (time t21), at time t22, the first passage detection sensor SP1 moves to the special winning opening 36a. The first ball is detected, and at time t24, the second passage detection sensor SP2 detects the second ball into the special winning opening 36a. Both of the items (i) and (ii) are established at the time t22 and the time t24, respectively, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

The opening conditions of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are as follows.
When the condition established in (ii) is that one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a, 0.06 seconds have elapsed with the non-V winning opening shutter 350 closed.
If the condition established in (ii) is that two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a, the first round of the opening/closing execution mode has ended.
When either of the above two is established, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the closed state to the open state (time t23, t25).

According to the opening conditions of the third opening/closing scenario described above, when one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed for a very short time of 0.06 seconds. Will be done. Therefore, according to the third opening/closing scenario, similarly to the case of the first opening/closing scenario, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the game ball is substantially played. Cannot be guided to the side of the branch passage portion 330. It should be noted that, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed for a very short time, and the first round is started. After that, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a, it may be configured such that the transition to the closed state is not performed at all.

In addition, the second item of the opening condition is, in place of the above-mentioned contents, “two if the condition established in (ii) is that two game balls enter the special winning opening 36a. It is also possible that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute or 2 minutes) sufficient for ending the first round of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed since the game ball of the eye entered.”

The third opening/closing scenario configured as described above is for realizing the V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern described above. The non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts to the closed state only by the strong right hitting operation (the first ball is a weak right hitting operation, and the second ball can be a strong right hitting operation, but can also be a strong right hitting operation only) After that, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 remains closed until the first round is completed. Therefore, when the first-class jackpot is won in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to put the game ball into the V winning zone FV only by performing a strong right hitting operation.

In the present embodiment, the third opening/closing scenario is stored in the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 included in the main control board 61. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 reads the third opening/closing scenario from the opening/closing scenario storage area 63g of the ROM 63 in the opening/closing execution mode executed when the first-class jackpot is won in the high-frequency support mode, and reads the read third The opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is performed according to the opening/closing scenario.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sh0101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67b to 67d and SP1 to SP3 is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67b to 67d and SP1 to SP3 connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sh0102.

In step Sh0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sh0103.

In step Sh0103, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, when 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sh0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 416) described later.

In step Sh0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the entrance process for the starting opening in step Sh0104 will be described later. After executing Step Sh0104, the process proceeds to Step Sh0105.

In step Sh0105, a through-ball entry process accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through-ball entering process in step Sh0105 will be described later. After executing Step Sh0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 412: Sh0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 413 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In Step Sh0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (start entering ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sh0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sh0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0202, and the payout controller 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sh0203.

In step Sh0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sh0204.

In step Sh0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sh0209.

When it is determined in step Sh0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Sh0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sh0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sh0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0206, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sh0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sh0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sh0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sh0208.

In step Sh0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sh0209.

In Step Sh0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in Step Sh0204 or Step Sh0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sh0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sh0209: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sh0209, when the number N of start-up suspensions is less than the upper limit value (Sh0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0210, where 1 is added to the number N of start-up suspensions of the corresponding reservation area, and then the process proceeds to step Sh0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sh0212.

In step Sh0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 416) updated in step Sh0103 (FIG. 412) are associated with each other. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the reserved areas to be stored, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sh0210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step Sh0103. Is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step Sh0210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter updated in step Sh0103 (FIG. 412). Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sh0210. After executing Step Sh0212, the process proceeds to Step Sh0213.

In step Sh0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS (held information), the jackpot selection result (lottery result), and the jackpot. It is a process of determining the type, presence/absence of reach, variation time of game times, and the like before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sh0213, the process proceeds to Step Sh0214.

In step Sh0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is used as a hold command. Set.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before the suspension information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502) of the normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing Step Sh0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 413: Sh0213) of the entrance process for the starting opening.

FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, the determination result such as the hit lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, such as the hold information, the main controller 60 hit This is a process to be executed before the target of the lottery.

In step Sh0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 413) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step Sh0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and the winning lottery is executed before the winning lottery by the current ball. By determining the lottery result, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by entering this time is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sh0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sh0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0303, and the win/loss table is stored. The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sh0305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sh0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time (Sh0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0304, and the winning/losing table is stored. The win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sh0305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sh0305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sh0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0306, and the value is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the processing advances to step Sh0307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing Step Sh0307, the process proceeds to Step Sh0308.

In step Sh0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the type 1 jackpot. When it is determined in step Sh0308 that it corresponds to the first-class jackpot (Sh0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0309, and the first-class jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0308 that the first-class jackpot is not supported (Sh0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0310, and the second-class jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

When it is determined in step Sh0305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sh0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0311, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is read. Then, the process proceeds to step Sh0312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sh0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sh0313 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (Sh0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0314 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0313 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sh0313: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 412: Sh0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In Step Sh0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sh0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sh0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sh0401: NO), the entry process for this through is ended.

When it is determined in step Sh0402 that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sh0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0403, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sh0404.

In step Sh0404, the value of the electric auditors product release counter C4 updated in step Sh0103 (FIG. 412) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sh0402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sh0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sh0501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sh0502.

In step Sh0502, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sh0502, the process proceeds to Step Sh0503.

In step Sh0503, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sh0504.

In step Sh0504, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sh0505. In Step Sh0505, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sh0505, the process proceeds to Step Sh0506.

In Step Sh0506, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sh0507.

In step Sh0507, an electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sh0508.

In step Sh0508, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sh0502). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sh0508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sh0508: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sh0509 and Sh0510. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sh0509, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sh0510, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, in step Sh0508, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Sh0508: YES), the process returns to step Sh0502, and each process from step Sh0502 to step Sh0507 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of steps Sh0502 to Sh0507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 416: Sh0505).

FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In step Sh0601, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Sh0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Sh0601: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any processing after step Sh0602. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sh0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0602.

In step Sh0602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step Sh0602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (Sh0602: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps Sh0603 to Sh0606. In Step Sh0603, it is determined whether or not the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, in step Sh0603, when it is determined that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (Sh0603: YES), this game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0603 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (Sh0603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0604.

In step Sh0604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sh0605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step Sh0605, the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing Step Sh0605, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sh0602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (Sh0602: YES), the process proceeds to the game time progression process of steps Sh0606 to Sh0610.

In Step Sh0606, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sh0606, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 419: Sh0802) described later. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step Sh0606 that the variation time has not elapsed (Sh0606: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sh0607 to execute variation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing Step Sh0607, the game number control process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sh0606 that the variation time has elapsed (Sh0606: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sh0608 and variation end processing is executed. The variation end process is performed by changing the symbol display unit so that the symbol display mode determined in the variation start process (FIG. 419) described later and displayed in the symbol display unit is displayed in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. Display control. Then, it progresses to step Sh0609.

In step Sh0609, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high frequency support mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and is stored in various flag storage areas 64g set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the support mode is the high frequency support mode. When the high frequency support mode flag is OFF, the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, that is, the low frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode flag is turned on after the end of the open/close execution mode described later.

When it is determined in step Sh0609 that the mode is the high frequency support mode (Sh0609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0610, and the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the remaining guaranteed game number guaranteed in the high frequency support mode. The game number counter PNC has a value of 100 set in advance in step Sh1309 of FIG. 426 described later. After executing Step Sh0610, the process proceeds to Step Sh0611. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0609 that the high frequency support mode is not set (Sh0609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0615 described later.

In Step Sh0611, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sh0611 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sh0611: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0612, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). Is reached (= within the guaranteed number of games). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter PNC exceeds 0. As described above, since the game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed game numbers, it is continuously executed in the high frequency support mode by determining whether or not PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not the number of game times is before reaching the guaranteed game number.

When it is determined in step Sh0612 that the value of the game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sh0612: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Sh0613 and the high frequency support mode. Turn off the flag. After executing Step Sh0613, the process proceeds to Step Sh0614.

In step Sh0614, a low frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After executing Step Sh0614, proceed to Step Sh0615.

In Step Sh0615, it is determined whether or not any of the big hit flags (16R first kind big hit flag, 8R first kind big hit flag, 8R second kind big hit flag) is ON. In step Sh0615, if any of the jackpot flags is ON (Sh0615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0616.

In step Sh0616, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on. Then, this game time control processing is ended. On the other hand, in step Sh0615, if none of the jackpot flags is ON (Sh0615: NO), this game time control processing is ended without executing step Sh0616.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0612 that the number of guaranteed games is not reached (step Sh0612: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0615 without executing steps Sh0613 and Sh0614. Also, when it is determined in step Sh0611 that the high probability mode is set (Sh0611: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sh0615.

According to the processing from step Sh0611 to step Sh0614 described above, when the number of games continuously executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, but the number of games is 100. Even after reaching the number of times (that is, the game number counter PNC is a value of 0 or less), if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. What is done is realized.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 417: Sh0604).

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In Step Sh0701, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the data setting processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 400) (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) that is stored first among the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 400) in time series. (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sh0701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step Sh0701 that the holding area to be processed is the first holding area Ra (step Sh0701: YES), the data setting process for the first holding area in steps Sh0702 to Sh0707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0701 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sh0701: NO). ), and the data setting process for the second holding area in steps Sh0708 to Sh0713 is executed.

In step Sh0702, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sh0703, in which the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sh0704. In step Sh0704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sh0705.

In step Sh0705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sh0705, the process proceeds to Step Sh0706.

In step Sh0706, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is the target of the start of the variable display this time. Then, it progresses to step Sh0707.

In step Sh0707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sh0707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 in the normal process (FIG. 416). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

If it is determined in step Sh0701 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (Sh0701: NO), step Proceed to Sh0708.

In Step Sh0708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Sh0709. In step Sh0709, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sh0710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sh0711.

In step Sh0711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sh0711, the process proceeds to Step Sh0712.

In step Sh0712, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sh0713.

In step Sh0713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step Sh0713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0505 in the normal process (FIG. 416). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 417: Sh0605).

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In Step Sh0801, a winning determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sh0801, the process proceeds to Step Sh0802.

In Step Sh0802, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a hit or the occurrence of a reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sh0802, the process proceeds to Step Sh0803.

In Step Sh0803, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sh0803 that the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (Sh0803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0804 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, and the occurrence of the reach is generated. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sh0802 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh0803 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sh0803: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sh0805 and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, and the occurrence of the reach is also included. The information on the presence/absence and the information on the variation time set in step Sh0802 are included. After executing Step Sh0804 or Step Sh0805, the process proceeds to Step Sh0806.

In step Sh0806, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, in the type command, as information of the type of jackpot, 16R type 1 jackpot information, 8R type 1 jackpot information, 8R type 2 jackpot information, or information about whether or not reach has occurred Contains information.

The variation command and the type command set in steps Sh0804 to Sh0806 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sh0502 in the normal process (FIG. 416). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Sh0806, the process proceeds to Step Sh0807.

In Step Sh0807, the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing Step Sh0807, the fluctuation start process is ended.

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 419: Sh0801) of the variation start process.

FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In Step Sh0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and in the present embodiment, opening/closing when a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV. It is turned on at the end of the execution mode, and turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when the jackpot is won.

When it is determined in step Sh0901 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sh0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0902, in which the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, when the variation start process is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode) shown in 401(b). If the variation start process is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is as shown in FIG. ), it is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode). Then, it progresses to step Sh0904.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sh0901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0903, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for low probability mode. Specifically, when the variation start process is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in 401(a). If the variation start process is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. Then, it progresses to step Sh0904.

In Step Sh0904, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in Step Sh0902 or Step Sh0903 is a big win. In step Sh0904, when the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sh0904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0905.

In subsequent steps Sh0905 to Sh0912, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big hit are executed.

In Step Sh0905, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sh0905 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sh0905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0906, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 402(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 8R type 1 jackpot or the 8R type 2 jackpot.

On the other hand, in Step Sh0905, when it is determined that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (Sh0905: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sh0907, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 402(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R first type jackpot or the 8R second type jackpot. After executing the processing of step Sh0906 or step Sh0907, the process proceeds to step Sh0908.

In step Sh0908, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is the first type jackpot. When it is determined in step Sh0908 that the game result is the first-class jackpot (Sh0908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0909.

In Step Sh0909, a type 1 jackpot stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for the first-class jackpot, in the current game time when the first-class jackpot is won, which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether or not the variable display is ended in the state of being. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first-class jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907. Information is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sh0909, the process proceeds to Step Sh0910.

In step Sh0910, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is turned on. Specifically, the 16R first-class jackpot flag is turned on when the 16R first-class jackpot is set, and the 8R first-class jackpot flag is turned on when the 8R first-class jackpot is hit. After executing Step Sh0910, the hit determination process is ended.

In step Sh0908, when it is determined that the jackpot type distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is not the first-class jackpot (Sh0908: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot classification is the second-class jackpot, the step is Proceed to Sh0911.

In Step Sh0911, a second-class jackpot stop result setting process is executed. With the stop result setting process for the second type jackpot, in the current game time when the second type jackpot is won, which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether or not the variable display is ended in the state of being. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907. Information is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sh0911, the process proceeds to Step Sh0912.

In step Sh0912, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step Sh0906 or step Sh0907 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the type of the second type jackpot is only the 8R second type jackpot, so the 8R second type jackpot flag is set to ON. It should be noted that when a plurality of types of second-class jackpots are set, the corresponding second-class jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing Step Sh0912, the hit determination process is ended.

In step Sh0904, when the result of the winning lottery in step Sh0902 or step Sh0903 is not a big hit (Sh0904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0913, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the game time. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 399). It is determined whether or not it matches the existing value.

When it is determined in step Sh0913 that a reach occurs in the game time (Sh0913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh0914.

In step Sh0914, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. In the current game times that is the stop result for reach, in the process for setting the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b, which variable result is to be ended in the state in which the stop result is displayed. is there. Specifically, the address of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is referred to by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e (FIG. 399). Information is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sh0914, the hit determination process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sh0913 that the reach does not occur in the game time (Sh0913: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh0915.

In step Sh0915, a stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. With the stop result setting process for the time of disengagement, in the current game time that is the disengagement result, the variable display is ended in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. This is a process for setting Specifically, by referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e (FIG. 399), the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is stored. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sh0913, the hit determination process is ended.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 419: Sh0802).

FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step Sh1001, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sh1002.

In Step Sh1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R first-class jackpot flag, the 8R first-class jackpot flag, and the 8R second-class jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and either flag is turned ON. If (Sh1002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1003.

In step Sh1003, the fluctuation time table for the jackpot is stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, and the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times that is won in the jackpot in the winning lottery is constant. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sh1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sh1002 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Sh1002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1005, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. To do. In step Sh1002, since the present process (Sh1005) is executed when the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time, in step Sh1005, the reach among the game times not hit by the big hit in the winning lottery is reached. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach is generated (Sh1005: YES), and the process proceeds to Step Sh1006. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to when the presence or absence of the reach is specified using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step Sh1006, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sh1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sh1005 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Sh1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1007, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the processing proceeds to step Sh1004, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the total pending number CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN may be used, and the smaller the number of total reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second startup pending numbers RbN increases. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence occurs so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of pending information is the same. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the first type jackpot, the variation time table for the second type jackpot, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete outage may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 416: Sh0506).

FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sh1101, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the special winning opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sh1101 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sh1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1102, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening/closing processing period, which is a period in which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 57 is executed. Is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b is completed.

When it is determined in step Sh1102 that the opening/closing process period flag is not ON (Sh1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1103, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

In Step Sh1103, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (Sh1103: NO), the process proceeds to Step Sh1104, and the timing at which the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b ends. Or not. In step Sh1104, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is ended (Sh1104: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sh1104 that it is the timing when the variable display ends (Sh1104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1105, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sh1105 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sh1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1106. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1105 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sh1105: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sh1106, an opening/closing scenario corresponding to the jackpot type and the support mode (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode) is set. Specifically, in the case of the first type jackpot and the low frequency support mode, the first opening/closing scenario described above with reference to FIG. 406 is set. When the jackpot is of the second kind, the second opening/closing scenario described above with reference to FIG. 410 is set. In the case of the first-class jackpot and the high-frequency support mode, the third opening/closing scenario described above with reference to FIG. 411 is set. Then, it progresses to step Sh1107.

In step Sh1107, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sh1108.

In step Sh1108, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sh1109.

In step Sh1109, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sh1109, the process proceeds to Step Sh1110.

In step Sh1110, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 in the normal process (FIG. 416). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the special winning opening/closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing Step Sh1110, the process proceeds to Step Sh1111 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sh1103 that the opening period flag is ON (Sh1103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1112.

In step Sh1112, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sh1112 that the opening period has ended (Sh1112: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sh1113 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sh1114.

In step Sh1114, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step Sh1114, the process proceeds to Step Sh1115.

In step Sh1115, the number of rounds confirmed in step Sh1114 is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. As a result, "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1 in the case of the 8R first-class jackpot or the 8R second-class jackpot, and the first round counter in the 16R first-class jackpot. "16" is set in the area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened, and in step Sh1115, “8” or “16” is set as an initial value. After executing Step Sh1115, the process proceeds to Step Sh1116.

In step Sh1116, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sh1102 that the opening/closing processing period flag is ON (Sh1102: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sh1117, and the special winning opening/closing processing is executed. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sh1117, the process proceeds to Step Sh1118.

In step Sh1118, shutter opening/closing processing is executed. The shutter opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sh1118, the process proceeds to Step Sh1119.

In Step Sh1119, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". To do. When it is determined in step Sh1119 that the special winning opening opening/closing process has ended (Sh1119: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1120. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1119 that the special winning opening opening/closing process is not completed (Sh1119: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sh1120, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sh1121.

In step Sh1121, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step Sh1121, the process proceeds to Step Sh1122.

In step Sh1122, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length ending time is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sh1122, the process proceeds to Step Sh1123.

In step Sh1123, the ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sh0502 of the normal process (FIG. 416). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sh1123, the process proceeds to Step Sh1124.

In step Sh1124, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sh1101 that the ending period flag is ON (Sh1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1125.

In Step Sh1125, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sh1122), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. When it is determined in step Sh1125 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Sh1125: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1126.

In step Sh1126, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sh1127, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step Sh1127, the process proceeds to Step Sh1128, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, in step Sh1125, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (Sh1125: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 422: Sh1117) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing process. In Step Sh1201, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Sh1201 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (Sh1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1202, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step Sh1202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Sh1202: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1202 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (Sh1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1203.

In step Sh1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sh1203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (Sh1203: NO), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1203 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (Sh1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1204, and the variable winning drive unit is opened to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step Sh1205.

In step Sh1205, a setting process for each round is executed. In this embodiment, "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the ball entering counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Note that if the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency entrance mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and the entrance counter area PC is set. You may set "6". After executing Step Sh1205, the process proceeds to Step Sh1206.

In step Sh1206, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of the release. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is Update to the content corresponding to the start.

When it is determined in step Sh1201 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step Sh1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1207, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step Sh1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (Sh1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1208.

In Step Sh1208, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36, specifically, a first passage detection sensor provided in the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v. The determination is made based on the detection states of SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2. When it is determined in step Sh1208 that no ball has entered (Sh1208: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1208 that a ball has entered (Sh1208: YES), the flow advances to step Sh1209 to subtract 1 from the value of the ball entry counter area PC. Then, it progresses to step Sh1210.

In step Sh1210, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step Sh1210 that the value of the entry counter area PC is not "0" (Sh1210: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sh1207 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (Sh1207: YES), or when it is determined in step Sh1210 that the value of the entry counter area PC is “0”. (Sh1210: YES), proceeds to Step Sh1211, and executes a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step Sh1212.

In Step Sh1212, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Then, it progresses to step Sh1213 and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step Sh1213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (Sh1213: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1213 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (Sh1213: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing Step Sh1214, the process proceeds to Step Sh1215 to set a close command. After that, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed, and the normal process In the command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502) of FIG. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the opening of the special winning opening 36a ends. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.

<Shutter open/close processing>
Next, the shutter opening/closing process will be described. The shutter opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 422: Sh1118) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing shutter opening/closing processing. In step Sh1301, it is determined whether or not the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is open. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is open depending on the operating state of the non-V winning opening shutter drive unit 36d (FIG. 399). When it is determined in step Sh1301 that the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is open (Sh1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1302.

In step Sh1302, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening/closing scenario set in step Sh1106 of the game state transition processing (FIG. 422) is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is compared with the value of the number of rounds confirmed in step Sh1114 in the game state transition processing (FIG. 422) to identify the number of running rounds and identify the identified round. Based on counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a from the detection signal of the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the detection signal of the second passage detection sensor SP2 when the number is the first round It is determined whether or not the closing condition of the open/close scenario set among the first to third open/close scenarios is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sh1302 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sh1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1303.

In step Sh1303, the non-V winning opening shutter drive unit 36d closes the non-V winning opening shutter 350. After executing Step Sh1303, the process proceeds to Step Sh1306, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1302 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sh1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1306 without executing step Sh1303.

When it is determined in step Sh1301 that the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is not open (Sh1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1304.

In Step Sh1304, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario set in Step Sh1106 of the game state transition processing (FIG. 422) is satisfied. Specifically, when the set opening/closing scenario is the first opening/closing scenario or the second opening/closing scenario, it is determined whether the time to hold the closed state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 has elapsed and the timing to open has been reached. It is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first opening/closing scenario or the second opening/closing scenario is satisfied by counting. When the set opening/closing scenario is the third opening/closing scenario, the timer counter counts whether the time for holding the closed state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 has elapsed and the timing for opening has been reached, or opening/closing is executed. By determining whether or not the first round in the mode is completed, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the third opening/closing scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sh1304 that the opening condition is satisfied (Sh1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1305.

In step Sh1305, the non-V winning opening shutter drive unit 36d opens the non-V winning opening shutter 350. After executing Step Sh1305, the process proceeds to Step Sh1306.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1304 that the opening condition is not satisfied (Sh1304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1306 without executing step Sh1305.

In Step Sh1306, V winning determination processing is executed. The V winning determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sh1306, the shutter opening/closing process is ended.

<V winning determination process>
Next, the V winning determination process will be described. The V winning determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a shutter opening/closing process subroutine (FIG. 424: Sh1306).

FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the V winning determination process. In Step Sh1401, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the V winning zone FV of the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 36v is detected. This determination is made from the detection signal of the V winning zone detection sensor SP3. In step Sh1401, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV (Sh1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1402.

In Step Sh1402, the V winning flag is turned ON. The V winning flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV, and the lottery mode in the normal game times executed after the end of the round game is either the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It is used to determine whether to set to. After executing Step Sh1402, the process proceeds to Step Sh1403.

In Step Sh1403, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 416: Step Sh0502) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the V winning command executes the setting for executing the V winning effect. The V winning effect is an effect for informing the player that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV. After executing Step Sh1403, the present V winning determination process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sh1401, when the game ball is not detected to enter the V winning zone FV (Sh1401: NO), the steps V1402 and Sh1403 are not executed and the present V winning determination process is ended.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 422: Sh1127) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In Step Sh1501, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON.

When it is determined in step Sh1501 that the V winning flag is ON (Sh1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1502, and a flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, when the 16R first type big hit flag, the 8R first type big hit flag, and the 8R second type big hit flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the states are maintained. Further, the V winning flag is turned off. After executing Step Sh1502, the process proceeds to Step Sh1503.

In step Sh1503, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sh1504 to turn on the high-frequency support mode flag. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Then, it progresses to step Sh1505.

In step Sh1505, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Sh1509 mentioned later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1501 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sh1501: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sh1506 to execute the flag erasing process. Specifically, when the 16R first type big hit flag, the 8R first type big hit flag, and the 8R second type big hit flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the states are maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sh1507.

In step Sh1507, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sh1508, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step Sh1509.

In step Sh1509, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 416: Sh0507).

FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sh1601, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. When it is determined in step Sh1601 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sh1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1602.

In step Sh1602, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sh1602 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sh1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1603.

In step Sh1603, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sh1603 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sh1603: NO), the main electric power support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sh1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1604.

In Step Sh1604, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step Sh1604 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sh1604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1605, and after the deviation display is set, the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1604 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sh1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1606.

In Step Sh1606, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Sh1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is “0” (Sh1606: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (Sh1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1607.

In step Sh1607, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sh1608 and it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. When it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step Sh1607 (Sh1607: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step Sh1608 (Sh1608: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1609 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sh1610.

In step Sh1610, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sh1609 is support win. When it is determined in step Sh1610 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support win (Sh1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1611, the support win flag is set to ON, and various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1610 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (Sh1610: NO), the processing for electric role support is ended without executing the processing of step Sh1611.

If it is determined in step Sh1607 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (Sh1607: YES), or if it is determined in step Sh1608 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sh1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1612 to open the electric auditors item open lottery. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Sh1613.

In Step Sh1613, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in Step Sh1612 is support win. When it is determined in step Sh1613 that the support is not won (Sh1613: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1613 that the support is won (Sh1613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1614, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sh1602 that the support winning flag is ON (Sh1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1615, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sh1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sh1615: NO), the pattern change display is in progress in the universal figure unit 38, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sh1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1616.

In step Sh1616, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sh1617, and the in-support flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sh1601 that the in-support flag is ON (Sh1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1618, and an electric-role opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 427: Sh1618) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step Sh1701, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Sh1701: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sh1702.

In step Sh1702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sh1702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sh1702: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Sh1702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sh1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1703, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a in the closed state is performed. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step Sh1703, the process proceeds to Step Sh1704.

In step Sh1704, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sh1705 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Sh1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (Sh1705: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sh1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1706 to turn off the in-support flag. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Sh1701 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sh1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1707, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sh1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sh1707: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sh1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1708, and an opening process for controlling the electric auditors' product 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Sh1709.

In step Sh1709, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sh1709: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sh1710 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

When it is determined in step Sh1710 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sh1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1711, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1709 that it is the open/close execution mode (Sh1709: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Sh1710 (Sh1710: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sh1712 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

A5. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device in order to execute the battle effect and the result notification effect will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sh1801, a command storing process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Sh1801, the process proceeds to Step Sh1802.

In step Sh1802, command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Sh1802, the process proceeds to Step Sh1803.

In step Sh1803, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step Sh1802. After executing Step Sh1803, the process proceeds to Step Sh1804.

In step Sh1804, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step Sh1802. After executing Step Sh1804, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 429: Sh1802).

FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In Step Sh1901, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sh1901 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1902, and the hold command handling process is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Sh1902, the process proceeds to Step Sh1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh1901 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1903 without executing step Sh1902.

In Step Sh1903, it is determined whether or not a high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sh1903 that the high-frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1904, and the sound-light side high-frequency support mode stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Turn on the flag. The sound light side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag for specifying by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (see FIG. 405) whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. It is stored in the set various flag storage area 94a. Then, it progresses to step Sh1907.

When it is determined in step Sh1903 that the high-frequency support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1905 and whether or not the low-frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62. To judge. When it is determined in step Sh1905 that the low frequency support mode command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1906, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sh1907. When it is determined in step Sh1905 that the low frequency support mode command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1905: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sh1907.

In Step Sh1907, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sh1907 that the variation command and the type command have been received (Sh1907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1908. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1907 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sh1907: NO), the process proceeds to step SStep Sh1909.

In Step Sh1908, a game game effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, a big hit time effect executed in the current game time, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like are set. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sh1908, the process proceeds to Step Sh1909.

In Step Sh1909, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sh1909 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1910, and setting is made to execute the opening effect and the right-handing notification effect. Specifically, specify the jackpot type included in the opening command received this time, and set to start the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the content of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type, After the control corresponding to the opening effect is finished, the audio output control and the light emission control corresponding to the right-handed notification effect are set to start, and then the opening effect and the right-handed notification effect are set to be executed. To the display side MPU 102. In the right-handed notification production, in the first round, the first game ball is put into the slightly right-handed passage P1 (FIG. 396), and the second ball is put into the strong right-handed passage P2 to win the V prize. Perform a performance that encourages you to aim. Then, it progresses to step Sh1911. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1909 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1909: NO), step Sh1910 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sh1911.

In Step Sh1911, it is determined whether or not the V winning command is received from the main CPU 62. The V winning command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 62 to the sound/light side MPU 92 when the game ball enters the V winning zone FV during execution of the special winning opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. When it is determined in step Sh1911 that the V winning command is received from the main CPU 62 (Sh1911: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sh1912.

In Step Sh1912, it is set to execute the V winning effect. Specifically, the light emission data of various lamps for V winning effect and the audio output data are set. The V winning effect is an effect for informing the player that a game ball has entered the V winning zone FV. After executing Step Sh1912, the process proceeds to Step Sh1913.

In Step Sh1913, the V winning effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the V winning effect command, it sets the image data for the V winning effect and causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image based on the image data. After executing Step Sh1913, the process proceeds to Step Sh1914. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1911 that the opening command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1911: NO), the processing proceeds to step Sh1914 without executing steps Sh1912 and Sh1913.

In Step Sh1914, it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sh1914 that the ending command has been received (Sh1914: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh1915, and the ending effect and the left-handing notification effect are set to be executed. Specifically, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state are specified. Is set to start, and after the control corresponding to the ending effect is finished, it is set to start the output control and the light emission control of the sound corresponding to the left-handing notification effect, and then the ending effect and the left-handing effect are set. An ending effect command for setting to execute the notification effect is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Sh1916. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh1914 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sh1914: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh1916 without executing step Sh1915.

In Step Sh1916, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the opening command and the effect contents corresponding to the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 430: Sh1902).

FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step Sh2001, update processing at the time of entering a ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the first starting opening 33, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the second starting opening 34, A process for enabling the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of hold information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Sh2001 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as a “first hold number”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on entering a ball into the second starting opening 34 The number is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing Step Sh2001, the process proceeds to Step Sh2002.

In step Sh2002, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 identified in step Sh2001 and the hold information acquired based on entering the second starting opening 34 The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled based on the number. After executing Step Sh2002, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 431: Sh2001) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the time of entering a ball. In step Sh2101, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. In step Sh2101, when it is determined that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (Sh2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2102 and the sound is output. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing Step Sh2102, the process proceeds to Step Sh2104.

In step Sh2101, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (Sh2101: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. When it is determined that the data is transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to Step Sh2103, and the update processing of the second holding number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is performed. Execute. The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command which is the current read target. After executing Step Sh2103, the process proceeds to Step Sh2104.

The reason why the processing in steps Sh2102 and Sh2103 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 holds the hold information. Is stored and held, the voice light emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step Sh2104, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved quantity counter area shows the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing Step Sh2104, the update process at the time of main entrance is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game time effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 430: Sh2108) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. As described above, the game time effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. Is. Hereinafter, a specific process of the game game effect setting process will be described.

In step Sh2201, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, and information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the kind of big hit, the presence/absence of a reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is grasped from the command. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sh2202.

In Step Sh2202, effect pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit or a reach is executed. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sh2202, the process proceeds to Step Sh2203.

In step Sh2203, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery of the current game is 16R 1st type jackpot, 8R 1st type jackpot, or 8R 2nd type jackpot, the effective line L (see FIG. 397) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established above is set as the current stop symbol information. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is 16R type 1 jackpot or 8R type 1 jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination. Together, the same even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the “7” symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R first-class jackpot. Further, when the result of the winning lottery of the current game time is the 8R type 2 big hit, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing Step Sh2203, the process proceeds to Step Sh2204.

In Step Sh2204, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the variation time and the stop symbol information identified in step Sh2205 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Sh2205.

In step Sh2205, the type information of the effect set in step Sh2202 in the current game, the type information of the stop symbol set in step Sh2203, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in step Sh2204 are used as effect commands. Set. Then, it progresses to step Sh2206 and transmits the said production|generation command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step Sh2206, the process proceeds to Step Sh2207, executes the update process at the start of fluctuation, and then ends the game game effect setting process. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 433: Sh2202).

FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In Step Sh2301, it is determined whether or not the first-class jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Sh2201 of FIG. 433. In Step Sh2301, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R first-class jackpot or the 8R first-class jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Sh2301 that the first-class jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the current game (Sh2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2302.

In Step Sh2302, a type 1 jackpot time effect pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute an effect pattern for an effect indicating that the first kind of big hit has occurred in this game time. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the jackpot variation time table in FIG. After executing Step Sh2302, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

In step Sh2301, if the first-class jackpot by the current game times has not been won (Sh2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2303.

In Step Sh2303, it is determined whether or not the second-class jackpot in the current game round has been won. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Sh2201 of FIG. 433. In Step Sh2303, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R second type jackpot or the 8R second type jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Sh2303 that the second type jackpot has been won in this game time (Sh2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2304.

In Step Sh2304, a second-class jackpot time effect pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute the effect pattern for the effect indicating that the second kind of big hit has occurred in this game time. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the jackpot variation time table in FIG. After executing Step Sh2304, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sh2303 that the second kind of big hit has not been made in this game time (Sh2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2305.

In Step Sh2305, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, which is grasped in step Sh2001 of FIG. 433. When it is determined in step Sh2305 that the reach has occurred in the current game (Sh2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sh2306.

In Step Sh2306, reach time effect pattern setting processing is executed. Specifically, it is set to execute the effect pattern for the effect indicating that the game has been reached this time. At the time of this setting, the effect is determined in consideration of the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the reach generation variation time table in FIG. 421. After executing Step Sh2306, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sh2305 that the reach has not occurred in the current game time (Sh2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sh2307 to execute the off-direction effect pattern setting process. Specifically, it is set to execute an effect when none of the first-class jackpot win, the second-class jackpot win, and the reach occurrence. At the time of this setting, the effect time is determined according to the variation time acquired on the main controller 60 side using the reach non-occurrence variation time table in FIG. After executing Step Sh2307, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 433: Sh2207) of the game game effect setting process.

FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step Sh2401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. When it is determined in step Sh2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (Sh2401: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sh2402 and is stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the total reserved quantity is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sh2401 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (Sh2401: NO), the processing proceeds to step Sh2203, and is stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. The information in the total reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the total reserved quantity is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sh2501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sh2502.

In step Sh2502, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sh2601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sh2701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 437), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sh2701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Sh2702, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sh2701) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sh2703.

In step Sh2703, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (Sh2702), the type of the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sh2704.

In step Sh2704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sh2703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sh2705, the other processes are executed, and then the V interrupt process is ended. Heretofore, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the second passage detection sensor SP2, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state. The game ball that has flowed out of the clune 220 is switched to a closed state by allowing the player to pass the game ball through the second passage detection sensor SP2 in consideration of the timing at which the game ball flows out from (hereinafter, also referred to as a retention area). It can be made to flow down along the upper surface of the later non-V winning opening shutter 350, and the game ball can be made to flow into the V winning zone FV. That is, the player can control the switching of the state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 by allowing the second passage detection sensor SP2 to pass the game ball in consideration of the timing when the game ball flows out from the clune 220. .. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to technically intervene in switching the state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a dwell time that is a length of time from when the game ball flows into the clune 220 until it flows out (the length of time that the game ball stays in the clune 220). Is configured to be longer than the second passage arrival time, which is the length of time from when the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to when it passes through the second passage detection sensor SP2. Therefore, after visually recognizing that the game ball has flowed into the clune 220 and started to stay, the player passes the game ball through the second passage detection sensor SP2 in consideration of the timing at which the game ball flows out from the clune 220. Therefore, even if the game ball is shot toward the second passage detection sensor SP2, when the game ball flowing out from the clune 220 passes through the non-V winning opening shutter 350, the state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is changed. It is possible to put it in a closed state, and the game balls flowing out from the clune 220 can be made to flow into the V winning zone FV. That is, after visually recognizing that the game ball has flowed into the clune 220 and started to stay, the player once stops the firing of the game ball and confirms the movement of the game ball retained in the clune 220 while confirming the second passage detection sensor. The timing of firing the game ball toward SP2 can be measured, and the player can be given a feeling of expectation and tenseness for a relatively long time regarding the timing of firing the game ball. As a comparative example, when the residence time is shorter than the arrival time of the second passage, the timing of firing the game ball toward the second passage detection sensor SP2 should be estimated after the firing of the game ball is stopped once. It is not possible to do this, and it is necessary to fire game balls continuously. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can measure the timing of launching the game ball toward the second passage detection sensor SP2 while confirming the movement of the game ball staying in the clune 220. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and to improve the interest of the game.

In order to pass the game ball over the non-V winning opening shutter 350 at the timing when the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed, the timing when the game ball flows out from the clune 220 and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 are set. Since it is necessary to pass the game ball through the second passage detection sensor SP2 in consideration of the period (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the closed state is maintained, the player is actively involved in the game. Can participate.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 during the period in which the non-V winning opening shutter 350 maintains the closed state (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment). It is configured to be shorter than the length of time until it flows out of the klune 220 via the klune 220 (hereinafter, also referred to as retention area outflow time). Therefore, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball that has passed through the first passage detection sensor SP1 to pass through the clune 220 and further to flow the game ball into the V winning zone FV by the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the closed state. Can be That is, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to flow the game ball into the V winning zone FV using only one game ball. In other words, the game ball that flows into the V winning zone FV via the non-V winning opening shutter 350 after staying in the clune 220 and the game ball that passes through the second passage detection sensor SP2 are different game balls. Can be encouraged. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the technical intervention of the player with regard to the launch of a plurality of game balls, and further to let the player pay attention to the return of the plurality of game balls, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. You can

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in the closed state, the area where the game balls that have passed through the non-V winning opening shutter 350 flows in is when the game balls flow into the area after the next time. Since it is the region (V winning zone FV) set as a condition for shifting the lottery mode of the game times to the high probability mode, it is possible to make the player desire to let the game ball flow into the V winning zone FV. It is possible to concentrate on the player regarding the technical intervention for opening and closing the non-V winning opening shutter 350, and to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment cannot enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV unless the game ball is distributed to the first passage detection sensor SP1 as the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350, or It is provided with a difficult first opening/closing scenario and a third opening/closing scenario in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV without circulating the game ball to the first passage detection sensor SP1. When the first opening/closing scenario is set as the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350, it is necessary to distribute the game ball to the first passage detection sensor SP1 in order to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV. Yes, the player needs technical intervention in the game ball launching operation, such as adjusting the launch strength of the game ball. On the other hand, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, the player does not have to distribute the game ball to the first passage detection sensor SP1 in order to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV. No technical intervention is required for the game ball launching operation as compared to the case where the first opening/closing scenario is set. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the open/close scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to change the difficulty level (technical intervention) of the player's technical intervention for entering the game ball into the V winning zone FV. The degree) can be changed, and intonation can be added to the player's sense of urgency and expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state when the game ball passes through the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2. Regardless of whether it is the first opening/closing scenario or the second opening/closing scenario, it is necessary to operate the operation handle 25 so that the game ball passes through the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2. It is possible to encourage the technical intervention of the player to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV, and as a result, the player can be actively participated in the game.

In addition, it is possible to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV simply by passing the game ball through the second passage detection sensor SP2 (that is, without passing the game ball through the first passage detection sensor SP1). The game ball is distributed to the second passage detection sensor SP2 to the player who has experienced the game in the game state set in the third opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing operation of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is executed. In this case, although the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in which the game ball flowing through the second passage detection sensor SP2 cannot flow into the V winning zone FV. Unexpectedness can be given to the player by experiencing the game in the game state set in the first opening/closing scenario in which the opening/closing operation is executed, and in the case where the first opening/closing scenario is set. It is possible to urge the first passage detection sensor SP1 to distribute the game ball.

In addition, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is in the closed state regardless of whether the game ball flows through the first passage detection sensor SP1 or the second passage detection sensor SP2. Since the game ball can reach the non-V winning opening shutter 350, the player can easily enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV when the third opening/closing scenario is set. it can. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, at least the first opening/closing scenario is set in the gaming state. That is, the player who is experiencing the game in the first opening/closing scenario once experiences the technical intervention necessary for causing the game ball to flow into the V winning zone FV when the first opening/closing scenario is set. Therefore, in the round game in which the first opening/closing scenario is set, the player successfully enters the game ball into the V winning zone FV, and the high probability mode is set. During the high probability mode (high frequency support mode), In the case of winning the 1st type jackpot, if the technical intervention necessary for causing the game balls to flow into the V winning zone FV in the round game in which the first opening/closing scenario is set is performed again, the player may be exhausted. There is. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the third opening/closing scenario is set when the first-class jackpot is won in the game play in the high-frequency support mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first opening/closing scenario is set, the game balls have passed through the special winning opening 36a even if the pattern of the timing when the game ball enters the special winning opening 36a is the same. If the passing pattern of the game ball to the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 of the subsequent game ball is different, the degree of advantage of the player is different. Specifically, the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor of the game ball after passing through the special winning opening 36a even if the pattern of the timing when the game ball enters the special winning opening 36a is the same. As a passage pattern of the game ball to SP2, a passage pattern that allows the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV, and a passage pattern that does not allow the game ball to enter the V winning zone FV. There is. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the opening/closing execution mode is the first opening/closing scenario, the game ball to the first passage detecting sensor SP1 and the second passage detecting sensor SP2 is changed. It is possible to recognize what kind of passing pattern is advantageous, and to give an expectation and a sense of urgency to the degree of advantage.

In the present embodiment, when the second opening/closing scenario is set, the game ball is highly likely to be played in the V winning zone FV regardless of the pattern of the timing at which the game ball enters the special winning opening 36a. Since the ball cannot be entered, the degree of advantage is the same.

In the present embodiment, when the third opening/closing scenario is set, the game ball is highly likely to be played in the V winning zone FV regardless of the pattern of the timing at which the game ball enters the special winning opening 36a. Since the ball can be entered, the degree of advantage is the same.

Further, the first opening/closing scenario is different in the degree of advantage of the player depending on the pattern of the game balls entering the special winning opening 36a, and is more advantageous than the second opening/closing scenario. The second opening/closing scenario is directed to the special winning opening 36a. The advantage degree of the player is the same regardless of the entry pattern of the game ball, and the third opening/closing scenario has the same advantage degree of the player regardless of the entry pattern of the game ball into the special winning opening 36a, And, it is more advantageous than the first opening/closing scenario and the second opening/closing scenario. Therefore, by using three different specific open/close scenarios, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the round game, based on the state of the game (support mode) at the time of executing the game times won for the first-class jackpot. When the jackpot is won, the player can be made aware of the state of the game at the time of executing the game times, and as a result, the game can be paid attention to. Furthermore, the player who recognizes the state of the game at the time of executing the game times that has been won as a jackpot is urged to guess about the type of the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to be set, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is set. It is possible to add an expectation and a sense of urgency to the opening/closing pattern (opening/closing scenario).

Further, when the jackpot is won, if the type of jackpot is the first-class jackpot, if the support mode in the game times won for the jackpot is the low frequency support mode, When the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the round game is set to the first opening/closing scenario, and the support mode in the game times that wins the jackpot is the high frequency support mode, the non-V winning during the round game is performed. The opening/closing scenario of the mouth shutter 350 is set to the third opening/closing scenario. That is, when the first-class jackpot is won, the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the round game is different depending on the game state (support mode) of the game times where the jackpot is won.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is a round when the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot is the second type jackpot, and the support mode in the game times where the jackpot is won is the low frequency support mode. When the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the game is set to the second opening/closing scenario, and the support mode in the game times that wins the jackpot is the high-frequency support mode, the non-V winning opening in the round game is performed. The opening/closing scenario of the shutter 350 is set to the second opening/closing scenario. That is, when the second-class jackpot is won, the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 during the round game is the same regardless of the game state (support mode) of the game times where the jackpot is won.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to give an expectation about what kind of jackpot is. Further, when the type of jackpot is the first type jackpot, depending on whether the support mode of the game times won for the jackpot is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, the non-V winning opening during the round game. Since the opening/closing scenario of the shutter 350 (deciding method for deciding the lottery mode of the game time to be executed next time) is different, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, what is the type of jackpot, what is the state of the game (support mode), open/close scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 (open/close) It is possible to give a player a stepwise guess and a sense of expectation, such as, for example, what is the mode), and to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is triggered by the fact that the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a has become two since the round game was started. , Switch from the open state to the closed state. In this case, the player who desires to enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV is prompted to shoot the game ball while counting the number of game balls to enter the special winning opening 36a. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively intervene, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the closed state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is maintained from the time when the second (Nth) gaming ball enters the big winning opening 36a from the time when the round game is started. When the first (N-1) game ball reaches the non-V winning opening shutter 350 from the time when the round game is started during the period, the first (N-1) Since the game ball is switched between the open state and the closed state so that it can be or easily entered the V winning zone FV, the player is allowed to enter the special winning opening 36a. In addition to encouraging the player to shoot a game ball while counting the number of game balls, at least the first (N-1) game ball from the time the round game was started and the round game was started. Regarding the second (Nth) game ball from the time, further technical intervention of the player can be prompted. Specifically, a period in which the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is kept closed from the time when the second (Nth) gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a from the time when the round game is started. Adjusting the timing and intensity of the game ball firing so that the first (N-1) game ball reaches the non-V winning opening shutter 350 since the round game was started. Can be urged to the player. In addition, it is possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding whether or not the first (N−1)th game ball can be entered in the V winning zone FV.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 has the second passage 300 after one (J) game balls have entered the first passage 210 since the round game was started. In response to the entry of one (K) game ball into the, the open state is switched to the closed state. In this case, for a player who desires to enter a game ball into the V winning zone FV, one (J) game ball in the first passage 210 and one (K) game ball in the second passage 300. In order to pass the game, it is possible to encourage active technical intervention and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the non-V winning opening shutter 350, when the first (Jth) gaming ball entering the first passage 210 from the time when the round game is started reaches the non-V winning opening shutter 350, It is within the period in which the closed state of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is maintained from the time when the number of game balls entering the second passage 300 reaches one (K) from the time when the round game is started. In this case, the first (J)th game ball that has entered the first passage 210 from the time when the round game is started is sent to the V winning zone FV, so that the game ball enters the V winning zone FV. For the player who desires that, when the first (J)th game ball that has entered the first passage 210 from the time when the round game is started reaches the non-V winning opening shutter 350, It is within the period in which the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is kept closed from the time when the number of game balls entering the second passage 300 reaches one (K) from the time when the round game is started. As described above, it is possible to prompt the player to adjust the timing or the launch intensity of the game ball, and to encourage further technical intervention of the player.

<<H6>> Modification of the eighth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<H6-1>> Modification 1:
In the eighth embodiment, the delay means included in the first passage is constituted by the clune 220. In the configuration in which the clune 220 is used as the delay means, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball is discharged, the probability of failing the V winning is relatively high, and the player may be uncomfortable. As a solution to this problem, the delay means may be configured by a meandering path in which the path is meandering. According to the meandering path, it is possible to delay the time required for a game ball entering the entrance of the meandering path to reach the exit of the meandering path as compared with a straight path in which the entrance and the exit are directly connected. The meandering path makes it easier to predict the timing at which the game balls are discharged, as compared to the clune 220. For this reason, according to the first modification, it becomes easier to measure the timing of inserting the game ball into the second passage 300, and thus the timing of inserting the game ball into the strong right-handing passage P2, than in the eighth embodiment. As a result, it is possible to increase the success rate of V winnings while allowing the player to perform technical intervention.

<<H6-2>> Modification 2:
The following configuration may be adopted as a solution to the problem regarding the clues shown in the first modification.

FIG. 439 is an explanatory diagram showing the delay unit 420 provided in the pachinko machine of the second modification. The pachinko machine of the modified example 2 is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment in that a delay unit 420 is provided in place of the clune 220 (FIG. 398), and other configurations are the eighth embodiment. It is the same as the form. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the same names and reference numerals are given to the same configurations as the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, and the following description will be given. The delay unit 420 includes a rotating body 422 and a cover member 424 that covers the rotating body 422.

The rotating body 422 is connected to a drive motor provided on the back side of the game board, and rotates at a constant speed (for example, one rotation in 60 seconds) about a rotation shaft 422a substantially vertical to the game board. ing. The circumference of the rotating body 422 is provided with a recess 422b into which one game ball can enter.

The cover member 424 is a member that covers the periphery of the rotating body 422, an upper opening 424a into which a game ball can enter is provided on the upper side of the rotating body 422, and on the lower side of the rotating body 422, A lower opening 424b through which a game ball can pass is provided. The upper opening 424a is located directly below the ball discharge port 210b (FIG. 398) of the first passage 210. The lower opening 424b is connected to the communication passage 320 (FIG. 398). In the delay unit 420, after the game ball enters the upper opening 424a of the cover member 424, the rotating body 422 rotates and the position of the recess 422b coincides with the position of the upper opening 424a of the cover member 424. Then, the ball enters the concave portion 422b of the rotating body 422. In addition, the game sphere that has entered the recess 422b of the rotating body 422, when the rotating body 422 rotates and the position of the recess 422b and the position of the lower opening 424b of the cover member 424 match, the rotation body 422 of the rotating body 422. It falls from the recess 422b and is discharged downward from the lower opening 424b of the cover member 424.

According to the delay unit 420, the time from when the game ball enters the upper opening 424a of the cover member 424 until it is discharged from the lower opening 424b is a straight path in which the inlet and the outlet are directly connected. Can be delayed compared to. According to the pachinko machine of this modification, it is easier to predict the timing at which the game ball is discharged from the delay unit 420, as compared with the clune 220. Furthermore, since the rotating body 422 rotates at a constant speed, the time from the entry of the game ball to the discharge can be made constant at all times. It is easier to predict the timing of discharge. For these reasons, according to the second modification, it is easy to measure the timing of inserting the game ball into the second passage 300, and thus the timing of inserting the game ball into the strong right-handed passage P2. The delay means does not have to be limited to the clune 220 of the eighth embodiment, the meandering path of the first modification, and the delay unit 420 of the second modification, and the delay means can be passed as compared with a straight path in which the entrance and the exit are directly connected. Any configuration may be used as long as it is a device that can delay the operating time.

<<H6-3>> Modification 3:
In the eighth embodiment and the first and second modifications thereof, the delay means is provided. On the other hand, as a modified example, the delay unit may not be provided. In this case, in the period from when the game ball is detected by the first passage detection sensor SP1 into the first passage 210 until the game ball reaches the position before the non-V winning opening shutter 350, The length of the first passage 210 is determined so that the game ball that has been shot can reach the second passage 300. This modification 3 also makes it easy to measure the timing of inserting the game ball in the second passage 300, and thus the timing of inserting the game ball in the strong right-handed passage P2.

<<H6-4>> Modification 4:
In the eighth embodiment and the first to third modifications thereof, one item of the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario is “(ii) One game at the special winning opening 36a after the first round is started. A ball has entered, or two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a since the first round was started." On the other hand, as a modified example, “(ii) one game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a since the first round has started, or the big winning opening has started after the first round has started. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which three game balls have entered 36a." That is, the condition after “or” in (ii) may be changed from two to three. In the case of this modification, in the example of FIG. 406, it is determined that (ii) is satisfied at time t6. Further, instead of three, other plural values such as four and five may be used. According to these modifications, since it is necessary to count the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a, the player needs further technical intervention. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game more actively, and the interest of the game can be improved. The same modification can be applied to the closing condition of the third opening/closing scenario.

<<H6-5>> Modification 5:
In the eighth embodiment and Modifications 1 to 4 thereof, the closing condition of the first opening/closing scenario is that (i) the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is executing the first round in the opening/closing execution mode, ii) One game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a since the first round has started, or two game balls have entered the large winning opening 36a since the first round had started. It was decided that both With the configuration of this closing condition, even when the game ball first enters the strong right-handed passage P2 after the first round is started, the non-V is caused by the subsequent entry of the game ball into the special winning opening 36a. The winning opening shutter 350 ends up in a closed state. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the first game ball to the special winning opening 36a in the first round is the strong right hitting path P2, the game ball is put into the V winning zone FV. Since the flow path configuration is impossible, the player practically loses the opportunity to aim for V winning. As a solution to this problem, as a modified example, the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario may be as shown in (v) to (vii) below.

(V) The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is executing the first round in the opening/closing execution mode.
(Vi) One game ball has entered the first passage 210 since the start of the first round.
(Vii) One game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a since the above (iv) was established.
When all of the above items (v) to (vii) are satisfied, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

According to the closing condition of this modified example, even when the first entry of the game ball into the special winning opening 36a in the first round is the strong right hitting path P2, the weak right hitting path P1 is set in the second and subsequent balls. If the game ball is inserted into the first passage 210, the non-V prize opening shutter 350 is closed by the game ball entering the next big winning opening 36a following the entry into the first passage 210. It is possible to shift, and it becomes possible to put the game ball previously entered in the first passage 210 into the V winning zone FV. That is, even when the first game ball to the big winning opening 36a in the first round is the strong right hitting path P2, the opportunity to aim for the V prize is not lost. Therefore, according to the fifth modification, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in the player's feeling of loss and discomfort caused by the loss of the opportunity to aim for the V winning, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the condition (vi) in the modified example 5 may be changed to "two game balls have entered the first passage 210 since the first round was started." Also, instead of two, other numbers such as three, four, and five may be used.

Further, the condition (vi) in the modified example 5 may be replaced with "two game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a since the above (iv) was established." Also, instead of two, other numbers such as three, four, and five may be used.

<<H6-6>> Modification 6:
In the eighth embodiment and the modified examples 1 to 5, one item of the closing conditions of the first opening/closing scenario is (i) the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the execution of the first round in the opening/closing execution mode. Decided to be inside. On the other hand, as a modified example, “the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the execution of the second round in the open/close execution mode” may be the content of (i). Further, instead of the second round, the other rounds such as the third round and the fourth round may be under execution. Further, the number of rounds is not limited to one, and any one of a plurality of rounds may be in execution, such as the execution of the first round or the second round. Furthermore, any one of all rounds in the open/close execution mode may be in execution. If any one of the plurality of rounds is being executed, the number of games aiming at the V winning zone FV can be increased, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

<<H6-7>> Modification 7:
In the eighth embodiment and Modifications 1 to 6 thereof, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is closed immediately after the closing conditions of the first to third opening/closing scenarios are satisfied. On the other hand, as a modified example, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 may be closed at a timing when a predetermined delay time (hereinafter, referred to as a closing delay time) elapses after the closing condition is satisfied. .. According to this configuration, in addition to the technical intervention in the eighth embodiment and the modifications 1 to 6 thereof, the player needs to intuitively measure the closing delay time, and thus further technical intervention is required. .. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate more actively, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<<H6-8>> Modification 8:
In the above eighth embodiment and its modification, the variable winning device 36 is provided on the right side of the game area PA. On the other hand, as a modified example, the variable winning device 36 may be provided on the left side or the center side of the game area PA. In these cases, it is preferable to exclude the weak right-handing passage P1 and the strong right-handing passage P2. According to this modified example 8, it is possible to aim for a V prize with a hitting method different from right hitting.

<<H6-9>> Modification 9:
In the above eighth embodiment and its modification, the second passage detection sensor SP2 is provided near the entrance 310a of the second passage 300. On the other hand, as a modification, the second passage detection sensor SP2 may be provided in the second passage 300 at a position distant from the entrance 310a. In the case of this configuration, since the non-V winning opening shutter 350 cannot be closed at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300, the second passage detection sensor SP2 is provided in the second passage 300. It is preferable to mark the positions where they are arranged. According to this modified example 9, by adjusting the timing of inserting the game ball into the strong right-handed passage P2, the game ball passes through the second passage 300 with respect to the timing when the game ball flows into the hole 220b of the clune 220. Match the timing at which the game ball moves to the position of the mark. As a result, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 can be shifted to the closed state at the timing when the game ball flows into the hole 220b of the clearn 220, and the game ball can be passed through the V winning zone FV. According to this modification 9, the player needs a technical intervention of aiming at the mark. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate more actively, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<<H6-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-described eighth embodiment and its modified example, the clune 220 is configured to include one hole 220b. On the other hand, as a modification, the clune may have a plurality of holes. One of the plurality of holes is connected to the second passage 300, and the remaining holes are connected to a passage different from the second passage 300. The game balls that have entered the remaining holes are sent to the back side of the game board 30 from this passage. According to this modification 10, even if it succeeds in entering the game ball into the slightly right-handed path P1 and entering the game ball into the first path 210, the game ball is sent to other than the second path 300. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the game ball can be discharged into the hole leading to the second passage 300. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

<<H6-11>> Modification 11:
In the eighth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the downstream end of the main passage middle-stream side portion 312 of the main passage portion 310 of the second passage 300 is located at the position where the non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the second passage 300 is arranged. It is connected to a more upstream side, that is, a portion branching from the main line passage portion 310 to the branch passage portion 330. On the other hand, as a modified example, the downstream end of the mainstream passage middle-stream side portion 312 is connected to the downstream side of the position where the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is arranged in the second passage 300 without communicating with the branch passage portion 330. The configuration may be changed. In the eighth embodiment, as described above, the second passage 300 has an internal structure in which it takes 0.4 seconds from reaching the non-V winning opening shutter 350 after entering the entrance 310a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second passage 300 is not sent to the branch passage portion 330. On the other hand, in this modified example 11, even if the above-mentioned internal structure is not adopted, the game ball entering the second passage 300 is not sent to the branch passage portion 330 by a simple structure. You can

<<H6-12>> Modification 12:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the first passage 210 and the second passage 300 are connected to the special winning opening 36a. On the other hand, as a modified example, one passage, for example, only the first passage 210 may be connected to the special winning opening 36a. In this case, the strong right-handed passage P2 and the second passage 300 are not provided. According to this modified example 12, the player inserts one game ball into the first passage 210, and then adjusts the timing of entering the game ball into the first passage 210, thereby playing the game. It becomes possible to put the ball in the V winning zone FV. Therefore, according to the modified example 12, as in the eighth embodiment, the interest in the game can be improved.

<<H6-13>> Modification 13:
In the above eighth embodiment and its modification, the fact that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a is detected by two game ball detection sensors, that is, a first passage detection sensor SP1 and a second passage detection sensor SP2. It was composed. On the other hand, as a modified example, it may be configured to detect that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a by one game ball detection sensor. Specifically, one game ball detection sensor can detect both the entry of the game ball into the first passage 210 and the entry of the game ball into the second passage 300. That is, it is configured to include one gaming ball detection sensor that is turned on when a gaming ball enters the first passage 210 or the second passage 300. With this configuration, the same control as that of the eighth embodiment can be performed. As the game ball detection sensor, various types of sensors such as magnetic type and optical type can be adopted.

<<H6-14>> Modification 14:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the mechanism/configuration shown in FIG. 398 is used for the game state of the game times to be executed the next time or later (in the eighth embodiment, lottery mode: high probability mode or low probability mode). ) Is used as a mechanism for determining the above), but the mechanism may be used for other purposes. For example, it may be used as a mechanism for determining the number of rounds of the round game when the big hit is won in the winning lottery. For example, by assigning a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) to the entry area corresponding to the non-V winning zone FNV (hereinafter, referred to as the “second round decision entering area”), it corresponds to the V winning zone FV. The number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) that is more advantageous to the player than the number of rounds allocated to the second-round decision entering ball area is allocated to the entering ball area. Then, after the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is started, the round game of the number of rounds allocated to the entry area of the one in which the game ball first entered is executed in the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode. To do. When this configuration is adopted, between the ball entrance 210a of the first passage 210 and the opening end P1b of the weak right hitting passage P1, and the ball entrance 310a of the second passage 300 and the strong right hitting passage. The special winning opening 36a and the opening/closing door 36b are not provided between the opening end P2b of P2.

By adopting such a configuration, when determining the number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can be technically intervened, and the player is actively engaged in the period of the opening/closing execution mode. You can actively participate in the game and concentrate on the game. Furthermore, the player can be given an expectation regarding the number of rounds to be determined.

<<H6-15>> Modification 15:
In the eighth embodiment, the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 may be configured to separately count the passage of the game balls. After the round game is started, the first passage detection sensor SP1 detects J passages (J is an integer/for example, J=2) of the game balls, and then the second passage detection sensor SP2 produces K pieces ( K may be an integer/for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is switched from the open state to the closed state upon detection of passage of a game ball of K=3). By adopting such a configuration, for a player who desires to send the game balls to the V winning zone FV, J game balls are passed through the first passage 210 and K game balls are passed through the second passage 300. Therefore, active technical intervention can be promoted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<H6-16>> Modification 16:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, the opening/closing scenario for controlling the opening/closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is the jackpot type and the support mode (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode) at the time of winning the jackpot. The configuration was set based on this. On the other hand, as a modification, the opening/closing scenario may be set based on the jackpot type and the value of the second symbol display unit flag. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is the target of the start of the variable display this time. Specifically, in Step Sh1106 of FIG. 422, if the first-class jackpot and the second symbol display unit flag are OFF, the first opening/closing scenario (FIG. 406) is set, and the first-class jackpot. If there is and the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the third opening and closing scenario (Fig. 411) is set, and if it is the second type jackpot, the second symbol display unit flag is either ON or OFF. Even in the case, the second opening/closing scenario (FIG. 410) is set.

By adopting the above configuration, when the first kind big hit is achieved by the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, the first opening and closing scenario that realizes the V winning high difficulty closed open pattern Is set. When the first type big hit is achieved by the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the third opening/closing scenario that realizes the V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern is set. When the second-class jackpot is hit, regardless of whether the trigger for the winning lottery is the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, the second opening/closing scenario that realizes the V winning/non-closing opening/closing pattern is set. To be done.

According to the pachinko machine having such a configuration, it is possible to change the opening/closing scenario in response to the switching of the display between the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Therefore, the player recognizing the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is urged to guess the type of the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to be set, and the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is set. It is possible to add an expectation and a sense of urgency to the opening/closing pattern (opening/closing scenario). Further, considering that the game balls entering the second starting opening 34 are likely to occur in the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine of the modification 16 is based on the jackpot type and the support mode. It is possible to realize a configuration that performs almost the same operation as that of the eighth embodiment in which the open/close scenario is set by using the open/close scenario.

<<H6-17>> Modification 17:
In the said 8th Embodiment, when it becomes a 1st-class jackpot by winning lottery, based on the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode) at the time of winning the jackpot, the 1st opening-closing scenario is set. And the third opening/closing scenario. In Modification Example 16, when the first lot jackpot is achieved by the winning lottery, the opening/closing scenario is determined based on whether the trigger for the winning lottery is the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. It was decided whether to use the 1st opening/closing scenario or the 3rd opening/closing scenario. On the other hand, as a modified example, when the jackpot lottery results in the first type jackpot, the opening and closing scenarios are set to the first opening and closing scenarios based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 when the first type jackpot is won. It may be configured to determine which of the three open/close scenarios is used. For example, if it is determined that the 8R first-class jackpot is won by the sorting table for the first starting opening in FIG. 403(a) and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time of winning is, for example, 0 to 13, If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time of winning is determined to be, for example, 14 to 27, the third opening/closing scenario is determined. In addition, for example, when the 16R first-class jackpot is won by the distribution table for the second starting opening of FIG. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the time of winning is determined to be, for example, 14 to 27, the third opening/closing scenario is determined.

Also with the pachinko machine of the modification 17, similarly to the eighth embodiment and the modification 16, the estimation of the type of the opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 to be set is prompted to open/close the non-V winning opening shutter 350. Expectation and tenseness can be added to the pattern (opening/closing scenario).

<<H6-18>> Modification 18:
In the eighth embodiment and its modified example, three opening/closing scenarios are prepared as opening/closing scenarios for controlling the opening/closing of the non-V winning opening shutter 350. On the other hand, as a modified example, two open/close scenarios out of the three open/close scenarios may be prepared. Specifically, the first opening/closing scenario and the second opening/closing scenario may be prepared, the first opening/closing scenario and the third opening/closing scenario may be prepared, or the second opening/closing scenario and the third opening/closing scenario may be prepared. May be prepared. Further, as a modified example, one of the three opening/closing scenarios, specifically, only the first opening/closing scenario may be prepared, or only the third opening/closing scenario may be prepared.

<<H6-19>> Modification 19:
In the eighth embodiment and its modification, the non-V winning opening shutter driving unit 36d for opening and closing the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is provided, and the main controller 60 drives and controls the non-V winning opening shutter driving unit 36d. As a result, the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is opened and closed. On the other hand, as a modified example 19, the non-V winning opening shutter may be automatically operated by receiving the flowing force of the game ball without using a driving unit such as a motor.

FIG. 440 is an explanatory view showing a variable winning device 536 provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 19. The variable winning device 536 includes a special winning opening 36a, an opening/closing door 36b, and a V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v. Since the special winning opening 36a and the opening/closing door 36b have the same configurations as those of the eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

The V-acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v includes a first passage 210, a clune 220, a second passage 600, and a non-V winning opening shutter 650. The first passage 210 and the clune 220 have the same configurations as those of the eighth embodiment, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

The second passage 600 includes a main passage portion 610, a communication passage portion 620 for communicating between the hole 220b of the clune 220 and the main passage portion 610, and a branch passage portion 330 branched from the communication passage portion 620. Prepare Since the branch passage portion 330 has the same configuration as that of the eighth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted. Comparing the second passage 300 (FIG. 398) of the eighth embodiment with the second passage 600 of the present modification 19, in the second passage 300 of the eighth embodiment, the main passage middle-stream side portion 312 and the main passage downstream. The communication passage 320 is connected to the intermediate portion of the side portion 313, but in the second passage 600 of the present modification 19, the communication passage 620 extends from the hole 220b of the clin 220 to the main passage. It is configured such that the communication passage portion 620 extends to the vicinity of the ball discharge outlet 610b of 610, and is communicated with the main passage portion 610 at a portion on the downstream side of the non-V winning opening shutter 650.

The non-V winning opening shutter 650 is provided between the main line passage portion 610 and the communication passage portion 620, and is close to the first flat plate 651 and one end of the first flat plate 651 at an acute angle (for example, 80). Second flat plate 652 connected to each other. The non-V winning opening shutter 650 is configured to be rotatable in the direction of the arrow (clockwise) in the figure with the portion where the first flat plate 651 and the second flat plate 652 are connected as the rotation axis OA. The game ball dropped from the hole 220b of the clune 220 can be distributed to the downstream side of the main line passage portion 610 and the branch passage portion 330 side.

Specifically, in the non-V winning opening shutter 650, the first state shown by the solid line in the drawing is the default, and the first flat plate 651 is pushed down by the game ball that has flowed down the middle-stream side portion 612 of the main line passage. As a result, the state shifts to the second state indicated by the broken line in the figure. After the game ball has passed the portion of the non-V winning opening shutter 650, the non-V winning opening shutter 650 returns to the first state by its own weight. In the first state, the second flat plate 651 is oriented vertically and opens the communication passage portion 620. In the second state, the second flat plate 651 faces sideways, and more specifically, the upper surface of the second flat plate 651 is oriented so as to be continuous with the lower inner surface of the branch passage portion 330, and the communication passage portion 620 is closed. To do. Therefore, in the first state, the game ball dropped from the hole 220b of the clune 220 can be sent to the downstream side of the main line passage portion 610 through the communication passage portion 620, and in the second state, the hole 220b of the clune 220. The game ball dropped from can be sent to the branch passage portion 330 side.

The player passes the game ball through the non-V winning opening shutter 650 portion of the main passageway 610 in consideration of the timing at which the game ball falls from the hole 220b of the clune 220, and thus the state of the non-V winning opening shutter 650 is reached. Can be switched to the second state in which the communication passage portion 620 is closed. As a result, the player can sort the game ball dropped from the hole 220b of the clune 220 to the side of the branch passage portion 330, and can enter the game ball into the V winning zone FV.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode), in the round game in which the first opening and closing scenario is set by winning the first-class jackpot, the V winning zone FV is played. The third opening/closing scenario is set when the ball is successfully entered and the high probability mode is achieved, and when the first type jackpot is won during the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode). On the other hand, in the present modification 19, since the opening/closing pattern of the non-V winning opening shutter 650 is one type determined by the mechanical configuration described above, the first-class jackpot is hit during the high-frequency support mode. It is not possible to switch the opening/closing pattern when winning. For this reason, in the present modification 19, the jackpot in the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (in the present modification 19, there is no distinction between the jackpot of the first kind and the jackpot of the second kind). ), in the round game that was won, it succeeds in entering the game ball into the V winning zone FV and becomes a high probability mode, and when the big hit is won during the high probability mode (during high frequency support mode), Even if the game ball is successfully entered into the V winning zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v, the V winning is invalidated. That is, in the present modification 19, only the first round game in which the jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) is entered, and the V winning challenge mechanism unit 536v enters the game ball into the V winning zone FV. By adopting a configuration in which the privilege is not given due to this, it is possible to easily adopt the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit 536v whose opening/closing pattern is mechanically determined to be one type.

Further, as described above, only in the first round game in which the jackpot is won in the normal state, it is configured to give the privilege due to the game ball being entered into the V prize zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a skilled player from continuously and repeatedly giving a privilege due to the game ball being inserted into the V winning zone FV. In addition, in the present modification 19, the configuration is such that only the first round game in which the jackpot is won in the normal state gives the privilege by having the game ball in the V winning zone FV, but instead of this, In the first round game that was won in the normal state, when the game ball is entered into the V winning zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism section 536v, a privilege is given, and in the second round game that follows, the V acquisition challenge mechanism is given. When a game ball is entered into the V prize zone FV by the part 536v, a privilege is given when the game ball is entered into the V prize zone FV by the V acquisition challenge mechanism part 536v in the third round game. The configuration may be such that no privilege is given. Further, it may be configured such that a bonus is given when a game ball is entered in the winning zone FV in the third round game, the fourth round, or other round games.

It should be noted that the embodiment in which the non-V winning opening shutter is realized by a mechanical structure is not limited to the structure of the modified example 19 described above, and other structures may be used. For example, assuming that the passage structure of the V acquisition challenge mechanism unit is the same as that of the modified example 19, a button to be turned on by a game ball is provided in the middle of the main passage middle-stream side portion 612 of the main passage unit 610, and the button is turned on by the game ball. In addition, the non-V winning opening shutter may be mechanically closed.

<<H6-20>> Modification 20:
In the eighth embodiment and its modifications (including Modification 19), when the non-V winning opening shutter is open, the game balls are distributed to the non-V winning zone FNV, and the non-V winning opening shutter is closed. The game balls were distributed to the V winning zone FV. On the other hand, as a modification, when the shutter (V winning opening shutter) is open, the game balls are distributed to the V winning zone FV, and when the shutter is closed, the game balls are non-V winning. It may be configured to be distributed to the zone FNV. With this configuration, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<H6-21>> Modification 21:
In the above eighth embodiment and its modification, the distribution destination of the game balls is switched by opening and closing the shutter. On the other hand, a configuration other than opening and closing the shutter may be used to switch the distribution destination of the game balls. For example, by changing the shape of the passage, the allocation destination of the game balls may be switched. With this configuration, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<H6-22>> Modification 22:
In the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing scenario is set based on the jackpot type and the support mode, and in the modification 16, the opening/closing scenario is set based on the jackpot type and the value of the second symbol display portion flag. On the other hand, as a modification, the system of the big hit type may be changed and the opening/closing scenario may be set only by the big hit type.

FIG. 441 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in Modification Example 22. 441(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 441(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. As shown in FIG. 441(a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, 8R type 1 jackpot and 8R second as jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33. The species jackpot has been set. In the present embodiment, "0 to 27" are set to correspond to the 8R first-class jackpot and "28-39" are set to correspond to the 8R second-class jackpot. As shown in FIG. 441(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, as the jackpot type based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the 16R type 3 jackpot, and the 8R second The species jackpot has been set. In the present embodiment, "0 to 27" are set to correspond to the 16R type 3 jackpot and "28 to 39" are set to correspond to the 8R type 2 jackpot.

In the modified example 22, in the first-class jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is the V winning high difficulty closing/opening pattern. Similar to the eighth embodiment, in the second-class jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is a V winning non-closing open/close pattern. In the third-class jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the non-V winning opening shutter 350 is a V winning low difficulty closing/opening pattern. In step Sh1106 of FIG. 422, the first opening/closing scenario (FIG. 406) is set if the jackpot is the first type, and the second opening/closing scenario (FIG. 410) is set if the jackpot is the second type. In the case of a jackpot of three types, the third opening/closing scenario (FIG. 411) is set. With such a configuration as well, a configuration that performs the same operation as that of the modification 16 can be realized.

<<I>> Ninth Embodiment:
<<I1>> Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 442 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the ninth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 443 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that a trace of opening and closing remains. For example, a seal sticker is attached to an openable/closable portion, and when the board box is opened, a character such as "open" appears.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 444 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided in the individual openings described above formed on the game board 30. Be induced. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of game balls are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71 (FIG. 443).

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting opening 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode refers to a case where the main controller 60 hits the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 as a result of a winning lottery, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. .. In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display is made to display corresponding to the lottery result , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is also referred to as variation time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first symbol display unit 37a based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. To do. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also performs the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 445 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 445(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 445(a), the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 445( b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 445(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 445(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. That is, in a unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. is there. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit for each game time. In either 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device for each game time. In 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 445(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 444, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<I2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 446 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 has a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data and the like temporarily when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, which is a memory for storing, is provided. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 is provided with a capacitor (not shown), and when power failure occurs or the power switch 88 (FIG. 443) is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. To do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering of the through gate 35. To do.

At the output port of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying the entry into the second starting opening 34, the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 447 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot type such as the probability-varied jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed. The falling random number counter CF is used for the falling lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability mode (also called the high-probability game state). The “high-probability mode” is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball is the reserved information storage area. It is chronologically stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 The storage areas are stored in the holding area Rb in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is recognized. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 445(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, the details of the falling random number counter CF will be described. The falling random number counter CF is used when executing the falling lottery, which is a determination as to whether or not to end the high-probability mode in the gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game times is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to be incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum, returns to zero. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. At the timing, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/absence table (which is stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63) ( It is determined whether or not to end the high-probability mode by collating with the falling lottery win/loss table).

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (electrical role unlocking lottery winning/loss table) and the value of the electrical role unlocking counter C4 stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 are stored. It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, if C4=0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=2-465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the falling random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Also, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 448 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 448(a) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 448(b) shows a win/loss table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 448(a), in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 448(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in the present embodiment, a “small win” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The “small hit” is a result of the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It can be set to continue until the number of entered balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or a ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

As a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode of performing a winning lottery by using a winning/loss table for high probability as a winning/losing table and a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a low-probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability hit table. As described with reference to FIG. 448, in the case of performing the winning lottery using the winning/discarding table for high probability, as compared with the case of performing the winning lottery using the winning/discarding table for low probability, the jackpot is won. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a when the electric-role combination opening wins may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not used in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode. Good. Further, it may be configured such that one opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be long. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 449 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 449(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 449(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to when the lottery is performed based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is provided for the second starting opening 34. It is referred to at the time of lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening in FIG. 449(a), the distribution table for the first starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R probability jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability jackpot is 8 It is 8 times.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R regular jackpot and the 8R regular jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R regular jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R regular jackpot is 8. It is 8 times.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 39” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “40 to 64” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 449(b), the distribution table for the second starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 64” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “65 to 99” is the 8R regular jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is the jackpot winning based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the jackpot winning second. This is different from the case where a big hit is won based on a ball entering the starting opening 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

If the winning result in the winning lottery is out, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the classification of jackpot types, if the 16-probability variation jackpot or the 8R-probability variation jackpot is obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode as described above. The state will continue until the next time you win the big hit in the winning lottery or the falling lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 450 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the falling lottery win/loss table used when executing the falling lottery. As shown in FIG. 450, in the falling lottery win/loss table, three values 0, 1, 2 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF that is won in the falling lottery. 97 values of 3 to 99 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF which are out of alignment. In other words, in the high-probability mode game times, the probability of falling when the high-probability mode ends when the player wins the high-probability mode and ends in the low-probability mode is 3/100. It is 97/100. In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the game time of the low probability mode.

FIG. 451 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/lost lottery win/loss table) used when executing the electric auditors open lottery.

FIG. 451(a) shows the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 451(a), in the winning/disabling table for the electric accessory opening lottery (for the low frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is the winning of the electric accessory opening. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 451(b) shows the winning/disapproving table for electric accessory release lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 451(b), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory releasing counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<I3>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 452 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 446) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<I4>> Outline of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed game number after the shift to the high frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. The "guaranteed game count" is the number of games guaranteed to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode, and is 100 in this embodiment. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed game count, after the high-frequency support mode. After 100 times, which is the guaranteed game count, when the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode. When the number of games has not reached the guaranteed number of games since the start of the game (for example, 60 times) and the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game time, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. On the other hand, for the support mode, even if the high probability mode ends and the low probability mode shifts after winning the falling lottery at the 60th game time, 100 times after the high frequency support mode is started. The high frequency support mode is continued until the game time to be executed for the second time is reached.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. When the number of games does not reach the guaranteed number of games (for example, 60 times) and when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the 60th game time ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts (that is, win). As a result, the lottery mode is switched from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode immediately after the notification production is finished. On the other hand, as for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game cycle ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. That is, when the guaranteed game number has not been reached, the lottery mode and the support mode are both reset to the low side at the timing when the game number of the jackpot is over and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Next, a description will be given of a case where the falling lottery is won and a case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number.

FIG. 453 is a timing chart for explaining the processing in the case where the falling lottery is won in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached. FIG. 453(a) shows that the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high-probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and then the high-frequency support mode is started. When the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the game was played (for example, 120 times), if the winning lottery is won and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Is shown. Even if you win the falling lottery at the 120th game time, the lottery result in the falling lottery is reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in that game time, as when you win the falling lottery at the 60th game time. .. That is, in the example of FIG. 453(a), in the 120th game time, the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game time, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (100 times) after shifting to the high frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. However, even when the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. It Therefore, in the example of FIG. 453(a), when the fall lottery is won in the 120th game round, the high-probability mode continues until the 120th game round is reached, so the high-frequency support mode continues. Has been done. Then, in the 120th game round, the falling lottery is won, and the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in association with the shift of the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

FIG. 453(b) shows each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode, which the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes in the 120th game round that wins the falling lottery. In this example, until the 120th game time (1 to 119 times), neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery has been won. Therefore, until the 120th game time, the result of the winning lottery in each game time is announced. Or a normal effect (also called a normal effect) for notifying the lottery result is executed. Then, in the 120th game round that wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a battle effect) in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character confront each other is executed. The battle effect is an effect before notifying the player of the result which is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the battle effect is a case where a falling lottery is won, a case where a winning lottery is won (a big hit is won), and a case where neither of them is won (when neither a falling lottery nor a winning lottery is won). It is a production that suggests that it corresponds to any of the above.

Then, after the battle effect has been executed, a result notification effect that notifies the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification production, the production corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, if the winning character in the falling lottery is defeated, the player character is defeated, and if the winning character is won (winning the jackpot in the present embodiment), the player character wins. If not, a draw effect in which the player character and the enemy character are drawn is executed. In the case of FIG. 453(b), since the fall lottery has been won in the 120th game time, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect. Hereinafter, a series of effects from the start of the battle effect to the end of the defeat effect is also referred to as "battle/defeat effect".

As a result of winning the falling lottery at the 120th game time, the timing of shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode coincides with the timing at which the 120th game time of winning the falling lottery is started. There is. That is, when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In addition, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode as the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. The timing when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode is almost the same as the timing when the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, the low frequency support mode is entered almost at the same time as the 120th game time is started.

FIG. 454 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the battle effect or the result notification effect described above is being executed. As shown in the figure, when the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. Then, in the first display area 41aS, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the variable display of the symbol is executed in the variable time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed.

FIG. 455 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the battle effect and the result notification effect. 455(a) shows a battle effect, FIG. 455(b) shows a defeat effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 455(c) shows a victory effect as a result notification effect. In the battle effect shown in FIG. 455(a), an image in which the female character on the player side and the male character on the enemy side are confronted is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are displayed by the speaker 46. And various lamps 47. However, the battle effect may be in other forms.

In addition, in the defeat production shown in FIG. 455(b), an image in which the female character on the player side is sad due to the defeat is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is a mode to output to. However, the defeat effect as the result notification effect may be in another form.

In the victory effect shown in FIG. 455(c), an image in which the female character on the player side is pleased with the victory is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is a mode to make. However, the winning effect as a result effect may be in another form.

Further, although not shown, a draw effect in which the player character and the enemy character are drawn may be used as the result notification effect.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game times. In the following, prior to the description of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process executed by the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 will be described.

FIG. 456 is a timing chart illustrating a process in the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1. Specifically, in FIG. 456, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the probability random jackpot is won by winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. After the transition, and after the high-frequency support mode has been started, the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games after the number of games has been reached (for example, 120 times), the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing execution mode is started. The case where the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode and the support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode is shown.

In the 120th game time in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the battle effect is executed, and then the victory effect in which the player character wins is executed as the result announcement effect. Then, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the opening and closing execution mode is started (that is, the timing at which the presentation effect of the victory is finished) after the 120th game times of winning the jackpot is over. At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In other words, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game time of winning the jackpot is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Here, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 performs the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment when winning the falling lottery in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number, that is, shown in FIG. 453. The action shall be taken. Comparing FIG. 453(b) and FIG. 456, it can be seen that the mode of change in the support mode is different between the two during the period from the start to the end of the 120th game time. During this period, when the jackpot is won, the high-frequency support mode is shown as shown in FIG. 456, whereas when the fall is won, the low-frequency support mode is shown as shown in FIG. 453(b). There is. Therefore, assuming the gaming machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the processing shown in FIG. 453(b) and the processing shown in FIG. 456, the player does not execute the result notification effect. In addition, by determining whether the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is transitioned from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 444), the result of the falling lottery and winning lottery of the 120th game time Can be recognized. That is, the player can predict the type of the result notification effect (winning effect or defeating effect) to be subsequently executed during the execution of the battle effect. In other words, when the game production in the high probability mode has continued 100 times or more and in the high frequency support mode, when the battle production is started, the player character and the enemy character Which player wins is not known until the result notification (that is, it is not known to the result notification whether to win the jackpot or the falling lottery in the winning lottery), but the player is By recognizing that the high-frequency support has ended from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a during the period in which the battle effect is being executed, the player side character loses this battle (wins the falling lottery). That can be predicted during the battle production. Therefore, the player may not be able to be provided with an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game round by the battle production and the result announcement production. This is a problem of Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 457 is a timing chart for explaining the process when the jackpot machine 10 of the present embodiment wins the jackpot in the winning lottery in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. FIG. 457 shows a case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery at the 120th game time executed after being played, and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 120th game time in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the battle effect is executed, and then the victory effect in which the player character wins is executed as the result announcement effect. The support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game cycle that wins the jackpot starts, the 120th game cycle that wins the jackpot ends, and the opening/closing execution mode starts The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing (that is, at the timing immediately after the presentation of the announcement as a result of victory). That is, when the number of games in the high-probability mode is continuously executed for the guaranteed number of games (100 times) or more, and when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing of transitioning to the support mode is the timing at which the game times won for the jackpot are finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started (see FIG. 456), while the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is used. The machine 10 is different in that it is the timing (that is, the start of the game time) at which the game time when the big hit is started.

Comparing FIG. 453(b) and FIG. 457, it can be seen that the change mode of the support mode is the same in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game time. For this reason, the player may not recognize the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery of the 120th game time from the opened/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 444) before the result notification effect is executed. Can not. That is, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of the result notification effect (whether the winning effect or the defeat effect) to be executed thereafter during the execution of the battle effect. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned problems of the comparative example 1 can be solved.

In addition, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number, when the big hit in the winning lottery is won, the timing at which the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode starts The process of matching the mode of the support mode during the battle/winning effect period with that at the time of falling win is hereinafter referred to as “support mode simulation process”.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various flags are prepared for the MPU 62 to specify various game states. Specifically, the high probability mode flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the MPU 62 for specifying whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. A high-frequency support mode flag, a fall flag for identifying whether or not the fall lottery is won by the MPU 62, and the like are prepared. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state determination value for collectively specifying the respective values (each flag value) of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag by the MPU 62 is set. It is prepared. That is, the game state determination value is a numerical value that can identify which of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall value. These flags and game state determination values are stored in various flag storage areas 64g (see FIG. 446) of the RAM 64.

FIG. 458 is an explanatory diagram showing a gaming state determination value for each flag value of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. As illustrated, the flag value of the high-probability mode flag is set to "02H (meaning 02 in hexadecimal notation, the same applies hereinafter)" when the high-probability mode is set, and is not the high-probability mode (that is, the low-probability mode). In this case, "00H" is set. As the flag value of the high frequency support mode flag, "01H" is set when the high frequency support mode is set, and "00H" is set when the high frequency support mode is not set (that is, the low frequency support mode). There is. As the flag value of the falling flag, “10H” is set when the falling lottery is won, and “00H” is set when the falling lottery is not won.

In the present embodiment, the game state determination value is a total value obtained by adding the flag values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. Therefore, it becomes as follows.
When the high-probability mode flag is "00H", the high-frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the falling flag is "00H", the game state determination value as the sum of these values is "00H". Becomes
When the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the falling flag is "00H", the game state determination value is "01H".
When the high probability mode flag is "02H", the high frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the falling flag is "00H", the game state determination value is "02H".
When the high-probability mode flag is "02H", the high-frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the falling flag is "00H", the gaming state determination value is "03H".
When the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the falling flag is "10H", the game state determination value is "11H".
When the high probability mode flag is "00H", the high frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the falling flag is "10H", the gaming state determination value is "10H".

As can be seen from FIG. 458, the gaming state determination value is uniquely derived in accordance with the combination of each flag value of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. Therefore, based on the game state determination value, uniquely, whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode, whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and whether the winning lottery is won It is possible to specify.

In the present embodiment, the addition process of adding the flag values of the high-probability mode flag, the high-frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag is performed, and the added value (summed value) is set as the game state determination value. On the other hand, as a modified example, as a configuration that uniquely specifies the game state determination value based on a subtraction process, a multiplication process, a division process, or an arithmetic process in which two or more of these processes and an addition process are combined. Good. In short, any arithmetic processing can be used as long as the gaming state determination value is uniquely derived according to the combination of each flag value of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. It may be.

In the rightmost column of the table shown in FIG. 458, the term “game state when the game state determination value is calculated” is added. The contents of this section briefly show what kind of gaming state the gaming state determination value indicates, and are as follows.

When the gaming state determination value is "00H", it is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state. Hereinafter, this state is also referred to as a "low probability low frequency state".

When the gaming state determination value is "01H", it is in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called time saving state. Hereinafter, this state is also referred to as a "low probability high frequency state". When the lottery mode is switched to the low-probability mode and the support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the "low-probability high-frequency state" is set. This low probability high frequency state is maintained until the number of game times after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed game number.

When the gaming state determination value is "02H", it is in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the pachinko machine is in the so-called latent latency change state. The latent latent change state is a state that cannot be taken by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, and this point will be described in detail later. Hereinafter, this state is also referred to as a “high-probability low-frequency state”. You win the probability variation jackpot by winning lottery, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and after that, the number of games since the high frequency support mode started In the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number, when the jackpot is won, the "high-probability low-frequency state" is reached when the above-described support mode simulation process is performed.

When the gaming state determination value is “03H”, it is in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called probability change state. Hereinafter, this state is also referred to as “high-probability high-frequency state”. When the probability variation jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and the lottery mode is switched to the high-probability mode and the support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the “high-probability high-frequency state” is set.

When the gaming state determination value is "11H", it is in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode due to the falling within the guaranteed number of games, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called short falling time state. Hereinafter, this state is also referred to as a “fall low probability high frequency state”. You win the probability variation jackpot by winning lottery, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and after that, the number of games since the high frequency support mode started In the game times that have not reached the guaranteed game number, when the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. At this time, the “fall low probability high frequency state” is set. This falling low probability high frequency state is maintained until the number of game times after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed game number.

When the gaming state determination value is "10H", it is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode due to the fall after the guaranteed game number, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called normal fall state. The fall normal state is a state in the 120th game cycle shown in FIG. 453 described above, and is also referred to as a “fall low probability low frequency state” below. You win the probability variation jackpot by winning lottery, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and after that, the number of games since the high frequency support mode started In the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number, when the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. At this time, the “fall low probability low frequency state” is set.

The case where the gaming state determination value is "02H" will be further described. When the gaming state determination value is “02H”, it can be said that the pachinko machine of the model equipped with the latent latency variation state as the gaming state is in the latency latency variation state. The “incubation probability variation state” is a state in which there is no support by the electric accessory 34a even though the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is the high probability mode, and the player is in the high probability mode. It is impossible or difficult to know if there is any. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as can be seen from the outline of the processing described so far, the latent latency change state does not occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won after the guaranteed game count, the support mode simulation process described above is performed, so the game state determination value is calculated as "02H". There are things.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of variable display and stop display of symbols is different depending on the above-mentioned game state determination value and the lottery result in the winning lottery. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a large number of variable time tables that specify the manner of variable display and stop display of symbols are stored in advance in the variable time table storage area 63h. The large number of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage area 63h are classified by the game state determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a variable time table group corresponding to each gaming state determination value. The fluctuation time table group is a set of fluctuation time tables in which a plurality of fluctuation time tables specified by the value of the jackpot flag and the value of the reach occurrence flag are collected. The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying the type of jackpot (16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R jackpot). The reach occurrence flag is a flag for specifying the presence or absence of the reach occurrence.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the low probability low frequency state variable time table group used when the gaming state determination value is "00H" and the gaming state determination value used when the gaming state determination value is "01H". Low-probability high-frequency state variation time table group, high-probability high-frequency state variation time table group used when the game state determination value is "03H", and falling low used when the game state determination value is "11H" The variable time table group for probability high frequency state and the variable time table group for falling low probability low frequency state used when the game state determination value is “10H” are stored in the variable time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63. Has been done. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the latent latency variation state does not occur, the latency latency variation state variation time table group used when the gaming state determination value is "02H" is the variation time of the ROM 63. It is not prepared in the table storage area 63h (FIG. 446).

Therefore, in the case of a big hit after the guaranteed game count, in a pachinko machine that only performs the support mode simulation process, when the game state determination value is shifted from "03H" to "02H" by the support mode simulation process. In addition, the process is interrupted or stopped while trying to read out the latency time variation state variation time table group used when the game state determination value is “02H” from the variation time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63. was there.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the game state determination value is calculated, if the calculation result is "02H", the game state determination value is rewritten to "03H" The above-mentioned problem is solved.

FIG. 459 is a timing chart illustrating a procedure of processing in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the odds change jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode starts. In the 120th game time executed after that, when the big hit in the winning lottery is won at the time t1, the support mode simulation process is performed at the time t2 immediately after the time t1, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. To low frequency support mode.

At time t3 following time t2, the game state determination value is calculated, and when the calculation result is "02H", the game state determination value is rewritten to "03H". At time t3, the high-probability mode flag is ON (="02H"), the high-frequency support mode flag is OFF (="00H"), and the falling flag is OFF (="00H"). The calculation result of the game state determination value is “02H”. Therefore, the game state determination value is rewritten from "02H" to "03H" by the rewriting process.

At time t4, which follows time t3, a process of setting the variable time is performed. This variation time is set based on the game state determination value rewritten as "03H". Specifically, the MPU 62 reads the high-probability high-frequency state variation time table group corresponding to the case where the gaming state determination value is “03H” from the variation time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63, and The change time is set using the high-probability high-frequency state change time table group. This variable time table group is read normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped.

At time t5 following time t4, variable display of symbols is started based on the variable time set at time t4.

It should be noted that FIG. 459 is merely for explaining the processing procedure, and actually progresses instantaneously from time t2 when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode to time t5 when the fluctuation starts. .. Therefore, as described using FIG. 457, it can be said that the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game time.

<<I5>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Si0101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Si0102.

In step Si0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Si0103.

In step Si0103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the respective counter values have reached the maximum values. In each case, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Si0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 464) described later.

In step Si0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the entrance process for the starting opening in step Si0104 will be described later. After executing Step Si0104, the process proceeds to Step Si0105.

In step Si0105, a through-ball entry process associated with the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through ball entering process in step Si0105 will be described later. After executing Step Si0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 460: Si0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Si0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entering ball) is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Si0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Si0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0202, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Si0203.

In step Si0203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Si0204.

In step Si0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Si0209.

When it is determined in step Si0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Si0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Si0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Si0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0206 and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Si0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Si0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Si0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Si0208.

In step Si0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Si0209.

In step Si0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Si0204 or step Si0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step Si0209, when the number N of startup pending is not less than the upper limit value (Si0209: NO), the ball entering process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si0209, when the start pending number N is less than the upper limit value (Si0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Si0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Si0212.

In step Si0212, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF, which are updated in step Si0103 (FIG. 460), are respectively stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reserved area. The data is stored in an area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Si0210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Si0103 are displayed. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step Si0210. Further, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Si0103 are set. , The first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Si0210. After executing Step Si0212, the process proceeds to Step Si0213.

In step Si0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF (holding information). This is a process of performing a determination such as the type, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the result of determination of whether or not the lottery has fallen (lottery result), before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Si0213, the process proceeds to Step Si0214.

In step Si0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF is set as a hold command. To do.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before the suspension information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 464: step Si0503) of a normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing Step Si0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 461: Si0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process, based on the hold information, the determination result of the winning lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach, the falling lottery determination This is a process to be executed before the main control device 60 is targeted for the winning lottery.

In step Si0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 461) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Si0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball Alternatively, by grasping whether or not the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Si0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as the game time, (Si0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0303, and the win/loss table is stored. The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Si0308, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Si0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time (Si0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0304 and the current entry is performed. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Si0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery by referring to the falling hit determination table stored in the falling hit determination table storage area 63d.

When it is determined in step Si0305 that the player has won the falling lottery (Si0305: YES), the processing proceeds to step Si0306, the falling winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the processing proceeds to step Si0303. In step Si0303, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to as described above. After that, the process proceeds to step Si0308, and as a result of referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

When it is determined in step Si0305 that the falling lottery has not been won (Si0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0307. In step Si0307, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot, as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step Si0308, and as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Si0308, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Si0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0309 and is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Si0310 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After performing Step Si0310, the process proceeds to Step Si0311.

In step Si0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Si0311 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Si0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0312 to store the probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Si0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0313 to store the normal jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

When it is determined in step Si0308 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Si0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0314, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Si0315 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step Si0316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

If it is determined in step Si0316 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (Si0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0317 to store the reach occurrence information in the previous determination process result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si0316 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Si0316: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 460: Si0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Si0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Si0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Si0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Si0401: NO), the entering process for this through is ended.

If it is determined in step Si0402 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Si0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0403, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Si0404.

In step Si0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Si0103 (FIG. 460) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area 64d of the RAM 64 in the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, in step Si0402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Si0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Si0501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Si0502.

In step Si0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Si0503.

In step Si0503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step Si0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Si0503, the process proceeds to Step Si0504.

In step Si0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Si0505.

In step Si0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Si0506. At step Si0506, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Si0506, the process proceeds to Step Si0507.

At step Si0507, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Si0508.

In step Si0508, electric power support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Si0509.

In step Si0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Si0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Si0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Si0509: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Si0510 and Si0511. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Si0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Si0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Si0509: YES), the process returns to step Si0503, and each processing from step Si0503 to step Si0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of step Si0503 to step Si0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 464: Si0506).

FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the game number control processing. In step Si0601, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Si0601 that it is in the open/close execution mode (Si0601: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any processing after step Si0602. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Si0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0602.

In step Si0602, it is determined whether or not the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the special figure variation display flag of the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variation display flag is turned on when the variation display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned off when the variation display is ended.

When it is determined in step Si0602 that the special drawing unit 37 is not in the variable display (Si0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Si0603.

In step Si0603, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Si0603, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0602 that the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display (Si0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0604.

In step Si0604, a fluctuation ending process for ending the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation ending process will be described later. After executing step Si0604, the present game time control processing is ended.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 465: Si0603) of the game time control processing.

FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Si0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is equal to or less than “0”, it means that the reserved quantity to be started is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Si0701 that the total reserved number CRN is equal to or less than “0” (Si0701: NO), this variation start processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds “0” (Si0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0702.

In step Si0702, a reservation information shift process for setting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Si0703. Details of the pending information shift processing will be described later.

In step Si0703, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Si0704.

In step Si0704, a winning determination process including a process when a big hit is won in the winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing Step Si0704, the process proceeds to Step Si0705.

In step Si0705, a game state determination process for determining the game state is executed. Specifically, the game state is determined by calculating the game state determination value described above. Details of the game state determination processing will be described later. After executing Step Si0705, the process proceeds to Step Si0706.

In step Si0706, a variable time setting process is executed. The variation time setting process is a time required for the current game time on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the game state determination value and the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. This is a process for setting the variable time. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Si0706, the process proceeds to Step Si0707.

In step Si0707, a variation command is set. The variation command is related to the hold information obtained based on the entry of the current game time into the first starting opening 33, or is obtained based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In addition to including information indicating whether the information is related to the hold information, information regarding whether or not a reach has occurred and information regarding the variation time set in step Si0706 are included. After executing Step Si0707, the process proceeds to Step Si0708.

In step Si0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in step Si0707 and step Si0708 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Si0708, the process proceeds to Step Si0709.

In step Si0709, the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing Step Si0709, the process proceeds to Step Si0710.

In step Si0710, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing Step Si0710, the fluctuation start process is ended.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The suspension information shift processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start processing subroutine (FIG. 466: Si0702).

FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift processing. In step Si0801, it is determined whether or not the reservation area that is the processing target for executing the reservation information shift processing is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the holding information stored first (the holding stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra (FIG. 447). Information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) stored first among the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 447) in time series. (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Si0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step Si0801 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Si0801: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Si0802 to Si0807 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si0801 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Si0801: NO). ), the holding information shift processing for the second holding area in steps Si0808 to Si0813 is executed.

In step Si0802, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the flow proceeds to step Si0803 to decrement the total hold number CRN by 1. Then, it progresses to step Si0804. In step Si0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Si0805.

In step Si0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Si0805, the process proceeds to Step Si0806.

At step Si0806, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Si0807.

In step Si0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Si0807 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

If it is determined in step Si0801 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (Si0801: NO), step Proceed to Si0808.

At step Si0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Si0809. In step Si0809, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step Si0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Si0811.

In step Si0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Si0811, the process proceeds to Step Si0812.

At step Si0812, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Si0813.

In step Si0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Si0813 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Fall determination processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 466: Si0703) of the fluctuation start process.

FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step Si0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Si0901 that the mode is the high probability mode (Si0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0902.

In step Si0902, the success/failure determination of the falling lottery is executed by referring to the success/failure table for falling lottery. Specifically, the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the winning in the falling lottery win/loss table (see FIG. 450) of the falling lottery table storage area 63d. Is determined. In the subsequent step Si0903, if the result of the win/no determination in step Si0902 is a win in the falling lottery (Si0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Si0904.

In step Si0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Si0905, and the falling flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned on. The falling flag is a flag for storing the result of the judgment of success or failure of the falling lottery. After executing Step Si0905, the process proceeds to Step Si0906.

In step Si0906, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times) (=within the guaranteed game number). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Si0906 that the value of the guaranteed game frequency counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Si0906: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game frequency, the process proceeds to step Si0907 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Si0907, the main fall determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si0906, if it is determined that the number of guaranteed games is not reached (Si0906: YES), the fall determination process is immediately ended. If it is determined in step Si0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Si0901: NO), or if the result of the determination in step Si0903 is that the fall lottery has not been won (Si0903: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

By the fall determination processing configured as described above, the variation in the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing when the fall is won in FIG. 453 is realized.

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 466: Si0704).

FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the hit determination processing. In step Si1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Si1001 that the mode is the high probability mode (Si1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1002 to determine whether or not the probability table is for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high-probability mode shown in FIG. 448(b). Determine whether. Then, it progresses to step Si1004.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Si1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1003 to determine whether or not the probability table is for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 448(a). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Si1004.

In step Si1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Si1002 or step Si1003 is a big win. In step Si1004, when the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si1004: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1005. The time when this jackpot is won corresponds to time t1 in the timing chart of FIG.

In step Si1005, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Si1005 that the high frequency support mode is set (Si1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1006, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). ) Is reached (= within the guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. In step Si1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Si1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Si1007, and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. The process of turning off the high-frequency support mode flag corresponds to the support mode simulation process. The time when the high frequency support mode flag is turned off corresponds to time t2 in the timing chart of FIG. After executing Step Si1007, the process proceeds to Step Si1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si1005 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Si1005: NO), or if it is determined in step Si1006 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Si1006: YES), the process immediately proceeds to step Si1008.

By the processing from step Si1004 to step Si1007 described above, the fluctuations in the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing when the jackpot is won in FIG. 457 are realized.

In subsequent steps Si1008 to Si1012, processing for setting a game result and processing for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot winning are executed.

In step Si1008, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Si1008 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Si1008: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1009, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 449(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, in step Si1008, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Si1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1010, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 449(b)). Refer to to determine the sorting. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. After executing the processing of step Si1009 or step Si1010, the process proceeds to step Si1011.

In step Si1011, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step Si1008 or step Si1009 is turned on. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on in the case of 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on in the case of 8R certainty variation jackpot, and the 16R normal jackpot flag is set in the case of 16R regular jackpot. It is turned on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned on. After executing step Si1011, the process proceeds to step Si1012.

In step Si1012, a process of setting a stop result for jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game time when the jackpot is won, it is set which of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is a process for doing. Specifically, by referring to the big hit stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step Si1009 or step Si1010 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Si1012, the hitting determination process is ended.

In step Si1004, when the result of the winning lottery in step Si1002 or Si1003 is not a big hit (Si1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1013, and the reach determination table is referred to to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the game time. Whether or not it is determined. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step Si1014.

In step Si1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Si1013 is that a reach occurs in the game time (Si1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1015 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After performing Step Si1015, the process proceeds to Step Si1016.

On the other hand, in step Si1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Si1013 is that the reach does not occur in the game times (Si1014: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1016 without executing step Si1015.

In step Si1016, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in the current game time that results in a disengagement result, for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display is set. Processing. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Si1016, the hitting determination process is ended.

<Game state determination processing>
Next, the game state determination processing will be described. The game state determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 466: Si0705).

FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing the game state determination processing. The game state determination process is a process of calculating the game state determination value described above. Hereinafter, a specific process of the game state determination process will be described.

In step Si1101, the value of the high-probability mode flag, the value of the high-frequency support mode flag, and the value of the falling flag are added to perform a process of obtaining the gaming state determination value PN. As described above with reference to FIG. 458, the game state determination value PN can be obtained by adding the respective values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. After executing Step Si1101, the process proceeds to Step Si1102.

In step Si1102, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained in step Si1101 is "02H". When it is determined in step Si1102 that the game state determination value PN is "02H" (Si1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1103, and processing for rewriting the game state determination value PN from "02H" to "03H" is performed. .. The time when this gaming state determination value PN is rewritten from "02H" to "03H" corresponds to time t3 in the timing chart of FIG. 459. After executing step Si1103, this game state determination processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Si1102 that the game state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si1102: NO), the present game state determination processing is ended without executing step Si1103.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 466: Si0706).

FIG. 471 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Si1201, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 470) is “00H”. When it is determined in step Si1201 that the game state determination value PN is "00H" (Si1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1202, and variable time setting processing for the low probability low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is the low-probability low-frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1202, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Si1201 that the game state determination value PN is not "00H" (Si1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1203.

In step Si1203, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 470) is “01H”. When it is determined in step Si1203 that the game state determination value PN is “01H” (Si1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1204, and variable time setting processing for the low probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state is the variable time setting process when the gaming state is the low-probability high-frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1204, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Si1203 that the game state determination value PN is not "01H" (Si1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1205.

In step Si1205, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 470) is "03H". When it is determined in step Si1205 that the game state determination value PN is "03H" (Si1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1206, and the variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is the high-probability high-frequency state. The variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si1206, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Si1205 that the game state determination value PN is not "03H" (Si1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1207.

In step Si1207, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 470) is “11H”. When it is determined in step Si1207 that the game state determination value PN is “11H” (Si1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1208, and variable time setting processing for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is a variation time setting process when the gaming state is the falling low probability high frequency state. The variable time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si1208, the variable time setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Si1207 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1209.

In step Si1209, a variation time setting process for a low fall probability low frequency state is executed. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is a variation time setting process when the gaming state is the falling low probability low frequency state. The variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si1209, the variable time setting process is ended.

<Variable time setting process for low probability low frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 471: Si1202) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state. In step Si1301, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Si1302.

In step Si1302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. In some cases, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si1302: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1303.

In step Si1303, a big hit variation time table is specified from the low-probability low-frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The low-probability low-frequency state variation time table group includes (i) a low-probability low-frequency state, a jackpot variation time table used when the jackpot is won in the lottery, (ii) a low-probability low-frequency state, Reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the lottery, (iii) low probability low frequency condition, a reach non-reach used when a reach does not occur without a big hit in the winning lottery A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Si1303, (i) is specified from (i) to (iii). (I) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a large-scale jackpot normal effect. After executing Step Si1303, the process proceeds to Step Si1304.

In step Si1304, the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1303 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Si1301 is acquired. Subsequently, in step Si1305, the variation time information acquired in step Si1304 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1302 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Si1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1306 and whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. To judge. Since the present process (Si1306) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game time in the above step Si1302, in step Si1306, the reach among the game times not hit by the big hit in the winning lottery is reached. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Si1306: YES), and the step Go to Si1307. When the presence/absence of the reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Si1307, the reach generation flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After performing Step Si1307, the process proceeds to Step Si1308.

In step Si1308, the fluctuation time table for reach generation is specified from the fluctuation time table group for low probability low frequency states stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (ii) low probability and low frequency state, the reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (Ii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing Step Si1308, the process proceeds to Step Si1304 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in Step Si1308 is referenced to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

When it is determined in step Si1306 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Si1306: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1309.

In step Si1309, the variable time table for reach non-occurrence is specified from the variable time table group for low probability low frequency state stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (iii) low-probability low-frequency state, the reach non-occurrence variable time table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery, is specified. (Iii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing the normal production for detachment. After executing step Si1309, the flow proceeds to step Si1304 described above, and the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1309 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

<Variable time setting process for low probability high frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 471: Si1204) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 473 is a flowchart of a variable time setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state. In step Si1401, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Si1402.

In step Si1402, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a big hit (Si1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1403.

In step Si1403, a big hit variation time table is specified from the low probability high frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The low-probability high-frequency state variation time table group includes (iv) the low-probability high-frequency state, the jackpot variation time table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, (v) the low-probability high-frequency state, Reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in a lottery, (vi) Low probability high frequency state, reach reach without a big hit in a lottery A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Si1403, (iv) is specified from (iv) to (vi). (Iv) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a big hit normal effect. After performing step Si1403, the process proceeds to step Si1404.

In step Si1404, the variation time table identified in step Si1403 is referred to, and variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Si1401 is acquired. Subsequently, in step Si1405, the variation time information acquired in step Si1404 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1402 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Si1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1406 and whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. To judge. Since the present process (Si1406) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game time in the above step Si1402, the reach among the game times not hit in the big win in the win lottery is reached in step Si1406. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Si1406: YES), and the step Go to Si1407. When the presence/absence of the reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Si1407, the reach generation flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Si1407, the process proceeds to step Si1408.

In step Si1408, the reach time variation time table is specified from the low probability high frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-described (v) low-probability high-frequency state, a reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (V) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing step Si1408, the process advances to step Si1404 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Si1408 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

When it is determined in step Si1406 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Si1406: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1409.

In step Si1409, the variation time table for the non-reach occurrence is specified from the variation time table group for low probability high frequency state stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (vi) low probability high frequency state, the reach non-occurrence variable time table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery, is specified. For example, (vi) is a variable time table for performing the normal effect for detachment. After executing step Si1409, the process proceeds to step Si1404 described above, and the fluctuation time information identified in step Si1409 is referenced to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

<Variable time setting process for high-probability high-frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 471: Si1206) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state. In step Si1501, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Si1502.

In step Si1502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. In some cases, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si1502: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1503.

In step Si1503, the variation time table for the big hit is specified from the variation time table group for the high probability high frequency state stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The high-probability high-frequency state variation time table group includes (vii) high-probability high-frequency state, jackpot variation time table used when the jackpot is won in the lottery, (viii) high-probability high-frequency state, Reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the lottery, (ix) High probability high frequency state, reach reach without a big hit in the lottery A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Si1503, (vii) is specified from (vii) to (ix). (Vii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a battle/winning effect including a battle effect and a winning effect executed after the battle effect. The battle/winning effect is, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 455(a) and 455(c). In step Si1503 of FIG. 474, it is described as "a variable time table for battle/winning effect". After performing step Si1503, the process proceeds to step Si1504.

In step Si1504, the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1503 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Si1501 is acquired. Then, in step Si1505, the variation time information acquired in step Si1504 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The time when this fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area corresponds to time t4 in the timing chart of FIG. After that, the variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1502 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Si1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1506 and whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. To judge. In step Si1502, since this process (Si1506) is executed when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game time, in step Si1506, the reach among the game times not hit by the big win in the win lottery is reached. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Si1506: YES), and the step Proceed to Si1507. When the presence/absence of the reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Si1507, the reach generation flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After performing step Si1507, the process proceeds to step Si1508.

In step Si1508, the variation time table for reach generation is specified from the variation time table group for high probability high frequency state stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from among (vii) to (ix), (viii) in a high-probability and high-frequency state, specify a reach generation variable time table that is used when a reach occurs without a big hit in a winning lottery. To do. (Viii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a battle/drawing effect including a battle effect and a draw effect executed after the battle effect. In step Si1508 of FIG. 474, it is described as "a variable time table for battle/drawing effect". After step Si1508 is executed, the process proceeds to step Si1504 described above, and the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1508 is referred to to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

When it is determined in step Si1506 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Si1506: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1509.

In step Si1509, the reach time non-occurrence change time table is specified from the high probability high frequency state change time table group stored in the change time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from among (vii) to (ix), (ix) High probability high frequency state, variable time table for reach non-occurrence used when the reach does not occur without jackpot winning in the winning lottery , Is specified. (Ix) is, for example, a variable time table for performing the normal effect for detachment. In step Si1509 of FIG. 474, it is described as “variation time table for deviation effect”. After executing step Si1509, the flow proceeds to step Si1504 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Si1509 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

<Variation time setting process for falling low probability high frequency state>
Next, the variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 471: Si1208) of the variation time setting process.

FIG. 475 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state. In step Si1601, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Si1602.

In step Si1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. In some cases, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si1602: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1603.

In step Si1603, the fluctuation time table for the big hit is specified from the fluctuation time table group for falling low probability high frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the low-probability-fall-probability high-frequency state fluctuation time table group, (x) in the low-probability-fall high frequency state, the jackpot fluctuation time table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, (xi) low-fall probability high-frequency state In addition, there is provided a variable time table which is used when the winning result is missed. In step Si1603, (x) is specified from (x) and (xi). (X) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a battle/winning effect including a battle effect and a winning effect executed after the battle effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, the above-described battle/winning effect includes an effect that suggests that the player has won the fall. Note that, instead of this configuration, a battle/winning effect that does not include an effect that suggests that the player has won the fall. Specifically, the same battle/winning effect as the battle/winning effect (battle/winning effect in the high-probability high-frequency state) described in step Si1503 of FIG. 474 may be used. In step Si1603 of FIG. 475, it is described as "a variable time table for a battle/win (fall suggestion) effect". After performing Step Si1603, the process proceeds to Step Si1604.

In step Si1604, the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1603 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Si1601 is acquired. Subsequently, in step Si1605, the variation time information acquired in step Si1604 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1602 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Si1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1606.

In step Si1606, a falling result is obtained in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (xi) fall low probability high frequency state from the fall time low probability high frequency state change time table group stored in the change time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variable time table used when (Xi) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a battle/defeat production, which includes a battle production and a defeat production executed after the battle production. The battle/defeat production is, for example, the production shown in FIGS. 455(a) and 455(b). In step Si1606 of FIG. 475, it is described as “a variable time table for battle/defeat production”. After executing step Si1606, the process proceeds to step Si1604 described above, and the fluctuation time table specified in step Si1606 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

<Variation time setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency>
Next, the variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 471: Si1209) of the variation time setting process.

FIG. 476 is a flow chart showing a variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state. In step Si1701, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Si1702.

In step Si1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. In some cases, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si1702: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1703.

In step Si1703, the fluctuation time table for the big hit is specified from the fluctuation time table group for falling low probability low frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the low-probability low-probability low-frequency state fluctuation time table group, (xii) in the low-probability low-frequency low-fall state, the jackpot fluctuation time table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, (xiii) low-probability low-frequency state In addition, there is provided a variable time table which is used when the winning result is missed. In step Si1703, (xii) is specified from (xii) and (xiii). (Xii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a battle/winning effect including a battle effect and a winning effect executed after the battle effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, the battle/winning effect described above includes an effect that suggests that the player has won the fall. Note that, instead of this configuration, a battle/winning effect that does not include an effect that suggests that a fall has been won may be used. Specifically, the same battle/winning effect as the battle/winning effect (battle/winning effect in the high-probability high-frequency state) described in step Si1503 of FIG. 474 may be used. In step Si1703 of FIG. 475, it is described as "a variable time table for a battle/win (fall suggestion) effect". After executing step Si1703, the process proceeds to step Si1704.

In step Si1704, the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1703 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Si1701 is acquired. Subsequently, in step Si1705, the variation time information acquired in step Si1704 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1702 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Si1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1706.

In step Si1706, from the falling time low probability low frequency state fluctuation time table group stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63, in the above-mentioned (xiii) falling low probability low frequency state, a winning result is obtained in the winning lottery. The variable time table used when (Xiii) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a battle/defeat production, which includes a battle production and a defeat production executed after the battle production. The battle/defeat production is, for example, the production shown in FIGS. 455(a) and 455(b). In step Si1706 of FIG. 475, it is described as "a variable time table for battle/defeat production". After executing step Si1706, the process proceeds to step Si1704 described above, and the fluctuation time table identified in step Si1706 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation ending process will be described. The variation ending process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 465: Si0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation ending process. In step Si1801, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Si1801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 471) described above. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step Si1801 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Si1801: NO), the fluctuation ending process ends.

In step Si1801, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Si1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1802, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game time. The process of ending the variation of the symbol in the symbol display portion is performed. Subsequently, in step Si1803, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing Step Si1803, the process proceeds to Step Si1804.

In step Si1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si1804: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si1805.

In step Si1805, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Si1805 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Si1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1806, and it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Si1806 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0 (Si1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1807, and the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing Step Si1807, the process proceeds to Step Si1808. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1806 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is 0 or less (Si1806: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1808 without executing step Si1807.

In step Si1808, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Si1808 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Si1808: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1809, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (eg, 100). It is determined whether it is before (= within the guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. Since the guaranteed game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is determined by determining whether or not PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not is before reaching the guaranteed game count.

In step Si1809, when it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Si1809: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Si1810, and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After performing Step Si1810, the process proceeds to Step Si1811.

In step Si1811, it is determined whether the falling flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Si1811 that the fall flag is ON (Si1811: YES), the flow advances to step Si1812 to turn off the fall flag. After performing Step Si1812, the process proceeds to Step Si1813.

If it is determined in step Si1808 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (Si1808: YES), or if it is determined in step Si1809 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Si1809: YES), steps Si1810 to step Si1812. Without executing, the process proceeds to step Si1813. If it is determined in step Si1811 that the falling flag is not ON (Si1811: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1813 without executing step Si1812.

In step Si1813, the value of the high-probability mode flag, the value of the high-frequency support mode flag, and the value of the falling flag are added to perform a process of obtaining the gaming state determination value PN. This process is the same as step Si1101 in FIG. 470, and updates the game state determination value PN. After performing Step Si1813, the process proceeds to Step Si1814.

In step Si1814, a game state command is set. The game state command includes information on the game state determination value PN obtained in step Si1813. The set game state command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). The voice light emission control device 90 can grasp the game state after the end of the game by the game state command. After executing step Si1814, the present variation time end processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si1805 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Si1805: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1815.

In step Si1815, it is determined whether the falling flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Si1815 that the fall flag is ON (Si1815: YES), the flow advances to step Si1816 to turn off the fall flag. If it is determined in step Si1815 that the falling flag is ON, if the state falls into the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (falling normal state) due to the falling after the number of guaranteed games, which is shown at the bottom of FIG. 458. However, in the present embodiment, the falling normal state is ended only once in the game times that is won in the falling lottery, and in order to shift to the normal state shown in the uppermost stage of FIG. 458, the falling flag is turned off in step Si1816. To do. After executing step Si1816, the process proceeds to step Si1813 described above.

When it is determined in step Si1815 that the falling flag is not ON (Si1815: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1813 described above without executing step Si1816.

When it is determined in step Si1804 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is not a big hit (Si1804: NO), the process proceeds to step Si117, and the opening/closing execution mode flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. To do. After executing step Si1817, the present variation time end processing is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 464: Si0507).

FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Si1901, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the special winning opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Si1901 that the ending period flag is not ON (Si1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1902, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening/closing processing period, which is a period in which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b is completed.

When it is determined in step Si1902 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Si1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1903, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step Si1903 that the opening period flag is not ON (Si1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1904, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Si1904 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Si1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1905. On the other hand, in step Si1904, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Si1904: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended.

In step Si1905, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Si1906. In step Si1906, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Si1907.

In step Si1907, an opening/closing scenario setting process for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines a pattern of opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in the present embodiment, a condition for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as "opening condition"), The program that records the condition for shifting the open/close door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as "closed condition"). The open/close scenario is stored in the open/close scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration time (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a since the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Si1907, the operation proceeds to step Si1908 described above.

In step Si1908, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step Si1908, the process proceeds to Step Si1909.

In step Si1909, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the special winning opening/closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Si1909, the process advances to step Si1910 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Si1903 that the opening period flag is ON (Si1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1911.

In step Si1911, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". When it is determined in step Si1911 that the opening period has ended (Si1911: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1912 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Si1913.

In step Si1913, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After performing Step Si1913, the process proceeds to Step Si1914.

In step Si1914, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. In the following Step Si1915, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 464: step Si0503) of the normal process. After executing step Si1915, the present game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Si1902 that the opening/closing processing period flag is ON (Si1902: YES), the flow proceeds to step Si1916 to execute the special winning opening/closing processing. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After performing step Si1916, the process proceeds to step Si1917.

In step Si1917, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". To do. When it is determined in step Si1917 that the special winning opening/closing process has been completed (Si1917: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1918. On the other hand, in step Si1917, when it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing processing is not completed (Si1917: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Si1918, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Si1919.

In step Si1919, round display termination processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After performing step Si1919, the process proceeds to step Si1920.

In step Si1920, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length ending time is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After performing step Si1920, the process proceeds to step Si1921.

At step Si1921, an ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Si0503 in the normal process (FIG. 464). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Si1921, the process proceeds to Step Si1922.

In step Si1922, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Si1901 that the ending period flag is ON (Si1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1923.

In step Si1923, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Si 1920), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Si1920 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Si1923: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1924.

In step Si1924, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Si1925, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Si1925, the process advances to step Si1926 to turn off the open/close execution mode flag. After executing Step Si1926, the process proceeds to Step Si1927.

In step Si1927, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. When it is determined in step Si1927 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (Si1927: YES), the process proceeds to step Si1928.

In step Si1928, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command causes the voice light emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the variation of the symbol (game time) ends. Is a command including the information of. The customer waiting command thus set is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Si1928 in the normal process (FIG. 464). After executing step Si1928, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si1927, when it is determined that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (Si1927: NO), the present game number control processing is ended as it is. If it is determined in step Si1923 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Si1923: NO), this game state transition processing is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Si1916) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening/closing processing. In step Si2001, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Si2001 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Si2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2002.

In step Si2002, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Si2002 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Si2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2003.

In step Si2003, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Si2004.

In step Si2004, an opening/closing door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 464: Step Si0503). After executing step Si2004, the special winning opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Si2002 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Si2002: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Si2003 and step Si2004.

When it is determined in step Si2001 that the open/close door 36b is open (Si2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2005.

In step Si2005, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Si2005 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Si2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2006.

In step Si2006, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Si2007.

In step Si2007, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 464: step Si0503) of the normal process. After executing step Si2007, the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Si2005 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Si2005: NO), the special winning opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Si2006 and step Si2007.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 478: Si1925) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In Step Si2101, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit in the big hit flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Si2101 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (Si2101: YES), the processing proceeds to step Si2102, and the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM64 are selected. The flag that is on is turned off. After performing Step Si2102, the process proceeds to Step Si2103.

In step Si2103, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then in step Si2104, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Then, it progresses to step Si2105.

In step Si2105, 100 is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step Si2106.

In step Si2106, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Si2111.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2101 that the 16R certainty jackpot flag and the 8R certainty jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (Si2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2107 and the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM64 are selected. The flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Si2108.

In step Si2108, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Si2109, and 100 is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Si2110.

In step Si2110, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Si2111.

In step Si2111, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The electric power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 464: Si0508).

481. FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Si2201, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. When it is determined in step Si2201 that the in-support flag is not ON (Si2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2202.

In step Si2202, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Si2202 that the support winning flag is not ON (Si2202: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2203.

In step Si2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Si2203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Si2203: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Si2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2204.

In step Si2204, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Si2204 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Si2204: YES), the flow advances to step Si2205 to set the off display, and then the main electric power support processing is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2204 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Si2204: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2206.

In step Si2206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Si2206 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is “0” (Si2206: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2206 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (Si2206: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2207.

In step Si2207, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step Si2208 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Si2207 (Si2207: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Si2208 (Si2208: YES), the flow advances to step Si2209 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Si2210.

In step Si2210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Si2209 is support win. When it is determined in step Si2210 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support win (Si2210: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2211, the support win flag is turned ON, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2210 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (Si2210: NO), the processing for electric role support is ended without executing the processing of step Si2211.

When it is determined in step Si2207 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Si2207: YES), or when it is determined that it is not in the high-frequency support mode in step Si2208 (Si2208: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2212, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Si2213.

In step Si2213, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Si2212 is support win. If it is determined in step Si2213 that the support is not won (Si2213: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2213 that the support is won (Si2213: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2214, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Si2202 that the support winning flag is ON (Si2202: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2215, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Si2215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2215: NO), the pattern of the universal figure unit 38 is being changed and displayed, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2215 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Si2215: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2216.

In step Si2216, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process proceeds to step Si2217, and the support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Si2201 that the in-support flag is ON (Si2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2218, and electric power accessory opening/closing control processing for opening/closing controlling the electric accessory 34a is executed. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric role opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 481: Si2218) of the process for supporting the electric role.

FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the electric opening/closing control process. In step Si2301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Si2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2302.

In step Si2302, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Si2302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2302: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Si2302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Si2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2303, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After performing Step Si2303, the process proceeds to Step Si2304.

In step Si2304, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Si2305 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Si2305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (Si2305: NO), the main power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Si2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2306 and the in-support flag is turned off. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Si2301 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Si2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2307, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Si2307 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Si2307: NO), the main power combination opening/closing control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Si2307: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2308, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Si2309.

In step Si2309, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (Si2309: NO), the flow proceeds to step Si2310 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step Si2310 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Si2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2311 and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2309 that it is the open/close execution mode (Si2309: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Si2310 (Si2310: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2312, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

<<I6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

483 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Si2401, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After performing step Si2401, the process proceeds to step Si2402.

In step Si2402, a game game effect process is executed. In the game time effect process, a process relating to an effect executed in the game time from the start of the variation of the symbol to the stop thereof is performed. Details of the game game effect processing will be described later. After executing step Si2402, the process proceeds to step Si2403.

In step Si2403, opening/closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect process, effects related to the effect during the opening period, the effect during the special winning opening/closing process period, and the effect during the ending period are performed. After executing step Si2403, the process advances to step Si2404.

In step Si2404, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing the game state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demo moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as the moving image showing the game state, a background moving image determined according to the game state determination value PN included in the game state command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background moving image showing that the high frequency support mode is continuing, a background moving image showing that the high frequency support mode is finished, and a background moving image showing that the high probability mode is continuing are displayed. After performing Step Si2404, the process proceeds to Step Si2405.

In step Si2405, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-described production processes. After performing step Si2405, the process proceeds to step Si2406.

In step Si2406, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Si2406, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for game times production>
Next, the game time effect processing will be described. The game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 483: Si2402).

FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing the game game effect processing. In step Si2501, a game game effect setting process is executed. The game time effect setting process is a process executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process of setting an effect executed in the game time when the game time is started. is there. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After performing step Si2501, the process proceeds to step Si2502.

In step Si2502, a game game effect execution process is executed. The game time effect execution process is a process that is executed when the game time effect setting (preliminary effect and reach effect) is set in the game time effect setting process. The details of the game game effect execution process will be described later. After executing step Si2502, the processing for this game time effect is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game time effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect process (FIG. 484: Si2501).

FIG. 485 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. In step Si2601, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command have been received. When it is determined in step Si2601 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Si2601: NO), the game game effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2601 that the variation command and the type command are received (Si2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2602.

In step Si2602, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence/absence of a reach, the change time, and the game state determination value PN are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Si2603.

In step Si2603, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (contents of notice effect, reach effect and timing of execution) to be executed in the current game time based on the effect pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Si2603, the process proceeds to Step Si2604.

In step Si2604, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing Step Si2604, the process proceeds to Step Si2605.

In step Si2605, a process for setting the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the variation time information and the stop symbol information set in step Si2604 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Si2606.

In step Si2606, information on the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is set in the effect command. Then, it progresses to step Si2607 and transmits the said production|generation command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Si2607, the process advances to step Si2608 to execute the update process at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Si2608, the present game time effect setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 485: Si 2603) of the game time effect setting process.

FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Si2701, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 is “00H” in step Si2602 of the game play effect setting process (FIG. 485). When it is determined in step Si2701 that the game state determination value PN is "00H" (Si2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2702, and the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the game state is the low-probability low-frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si2702, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Si2701 that the game state determination value PN is not "00H" (Si2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2703.

In step Si2703, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 is “01H” in step Si2602 of the game play effect setting process (FIG. 485). When it is determined in step Si2703 that the game state determination value PN is "01H" (Si2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2704 and the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low-probability high-frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si2704, the main effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Si2703 that the game state determination value PN is not "01H" (Si2703: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2705.

In step Si2705, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 is “03H” in step Si2602 of the game play effect setting process (FIG. 485). When it is determined in step Si2705 that the game state determination value PN is “03H” (Si2705: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2706 to execute the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the gaming state is the high-probability high-frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2706, the present effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Si2705 that the game state determination value PN is not "03H" (Si2705: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2707.

In step Si2707, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 is “11H” in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). When it is determined in step Si2707 that the game state determination value PN is “11H” (Si2707: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2708 to execute the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the game state is the falling low probability high frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2708, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Si2707 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si2707: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2709.

In step Si2709, an effect pattern setting process for the low fall probability low frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is an effect pattern setting process when the game state is the falling low probability low frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Si2709, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability low frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 486: Si2702) of the effect pattern setting process. The production pattern setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state corresponds to the case where the jackpot is won, the case where the reach occurs, and the case where the case does not apply in any case when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state. The effect pattern is set. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state. In Step Si2801, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si2802.

In step Si2802, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. When it is determined in step Si2802 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2803.

At step Si2803, the effect pattern table for big hit is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The low-probability low-frequency state effect pattern table group includes (I) a low-probability low-frequency state, a big-hit effect pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and (II) a low-probability low-frequency state, Reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the lottery, (III) low probability low frequency state, a reach non-reach used when a reach does not occur without a big hit in the win lottery A production effect pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si2803, (I) is specified from (I) to (III). (I) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a big effect normal effect. After executing Step Si2803, the process proceeds to Step Si2804.

In Step Si2804, referring to the effect pattern table specified in Step Si2803, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in Step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained in Step Si2801. Get the pattern. In the following step Si2805, the effect pattern acquired in step Si2804 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game time. After executing step Si2805, the effect pattern setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si2802 that the result of the win/no win determination in the current game round is not a big hit (Si2802: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2806 and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information of the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 485). If it is determined in step Si2806 that the reach determination has been made in the present game times (reach occurrence) (Si2806: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2807.

At step Si2807, the effect pattern table for reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (II) low-probability low-frequency state, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (II) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing step Si2807, the process proceeds to step Si2804 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Si2807 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN this time.

If it is determined in step Si2806 that the reach determination in the current game is not reach (Si2806: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2808.

At step Si2808, the effect pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (III) low probability low frequency state, the reach non-generation effect pattern table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (III) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing the normal effect for detachment. After executing step Si2808, the process proceeds to step Si2804 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Si2808, the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability high frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 486: Si2704) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state is performed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called time saving state, when the jackpot is won, when the reach occurs, or when neither case applies. It is for setting a production pattern. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state. In step Si2901, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si2902.

In step Si2902, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. When it is determined in step Si2902 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si2902: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2903.

In step Si2903, the effect pattern table for big hit is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The low-probability high-frequency state effect pattern table group includes (IV) a low-probability high-frequency state, a big-hit effect pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and (V) a low-probability high-frequency state, Reach generation effect pattern table used when the reach occurs without winning the jackpot in the lottery, (VI) In the low probability high frequency state, the reach non-reach used when the reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery A production effect pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si2903, (IV) is specified from (IV) to (VI). (IV) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a big effect normal effect. After executing Step Si2903, the process proceeds to Step Si2904.

In step Si2904, referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Si2903, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si2901. Get the pattern. In the following step Si2905, the effect pattern acquired in step Si2904 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in this game time. After executing Step Si2905, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si2902 that the result of the win/no win determination in this game round is not a big hit (Si2902: NO), the flow proceeds to step Si2906 to determine whether or not a reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information of the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 485). If it is determined in step Si2906 that the reach determination has been made in the present game times (reach occurrence) (Si2906: YES), the process proceeds to step Si2907.

In step Si2907, the effect pattern table for reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (V) low-probability high-frequency state, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (V) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing Step Si2907, the process proceeds to the above-described Step Si2904, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in Step Si2907, an effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired.

When it is determined in step Si2906 that the result of the hit/non-win determination in the current game is not the reach occurrence (Si2906: NO), the process proceeds to step Si2908.

At step Si2908, the effect pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the effect pattern table group for low probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (VI) low-probability high-frequency state, the reach non-generation effect pattern table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery, is specified. (VI) is, for example, a production pattern table for performing a normal production for detachment. After step Si2908 is executed, the process proceeds to step Si2904 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Si2908 is referred to to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN this time.

<Production pattern setting process for high-probability high-frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 486: Si2706) of the effect pattern setting process. The production pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is performed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called probability change state, when the jackpot is won, when the reach occurs, or when neither case applies. It is for setting a production pattern. In addition, after winning the probability variation jackpot by winning lottery, after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the game ball state determination value PN becomes "03H" indicating a high probability high frequency state, and then in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game count. , When the jackpot is won, the game ball state determination value PN becomes "02H" indicating a high probability low frequency state by performing the support mode simulation process, and then the game ball state determination value PN is "02H". Even when the process of rewriting from "03H" to "03H" is executed, this effect pattern setting process is executed. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state. In step Si3001, an effect pattern random number acquisition process is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si3002.

In step Si3002, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. When it is determined in step Si3002 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si3002: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3003.

In step Si3003, the effect pattern table for the big hit is specified from the effect pattern table group for the high probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The high-probability high-frequency state production pattern table group includes (VII) high-probability high-frequency state, the jackpot production pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, (VIII) high-probability high-frequency state, Reach generation effect pattern table used when the reach occurs without winning the jackpot in the lottery, (IX) In the high probability high frequency state, the reach non-use used when the reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery A production effect pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si3003, (VII) is specified from (VII) to (IX). (VII) is an effect pattern for performing a battle/win effect, which includes, for example, a battle effect and a victory effect executed after the battle effect. In step Si3003 of FIG. 489, it is described as "effect pattern table for battle/win effect". After performing step Si3003, the process proceeds to step Si3004.

In step Si3004, referring to the effect pattern table identified in step Si3003, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si3001. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si3005, the effect pattern acquired in step Si3004 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the current game time. After executing step Si3005, the effect pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si3002 that the result of the win/no win determination in this game round is not a big hit (Si3002: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3006 to determine whether or not a reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information of the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 485). When it is determined in step Si3006 that the reach determination has been made in the current game time (reach occurrence) (Si3006: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3007.

At step Si3007, the effect pattern table for reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (VIII) high-probability high-frequency state, the reach generation effect pattern table used when the reach occurs without the big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (VIII) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a battle/drawing effect including a battle effect and a draw effect executed after the battle effect. In step Si3007 of FIG. 489, it is written as "effect pattern table for battle/draw effect". After executing Step Si3007, the process proceeds to the above-described Step Si3004, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in Step Si3007, the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired.

When it is determined in step Si3006 that the result of the hit/non-win determination in the current game is not the reach occurrence (Si3006: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3008.

In step Si3008, the effect pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the effect pattern table group for the high probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (IX) high-probability high-frequency state, the reach non-generation effect pattern table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (IX) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal removal effect. In step Si3008 of FIG. 489, it is described as "effect pattern table for effect effect". After executing step Si3008, the process proceeds to step Si3004 described above, and the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN of this time is acquired by referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Si3008.

<Production pattern setting process for falling low probability high frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 486: Si2708) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is to set the effect pattern according to whether the jackpot is won or not when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called short fall time state. is there. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state. In step Si3101, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si3102.

In step Si3102, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. When it is determined in step Si3102 that the result of the win/no win is a big hit (Si3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3103.

In step Si3103, the effect pattern table for jackpot is specified from the effect pattern table group for falling low probability high frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The falling low-probability high-frequency state effect pattern table group includes (X) the falling low-probability high-frequency state, the jackpot effect pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and (XI) the falling low-probability high-frequency state. In addition, an effect pattern table used when a winning result is missed is provided. In step Si3103, (X) is specified from (X) and (XI). (X) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a battle/win effect, which includes a battle effect and a victory effect executed after the battle effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, the above-described battle/winning effect includes an effect that suggests that the player has won the fall. Note that, instead of this configuration, a battle/winning effect that does not include an effect that suggests that the player has won the fall. In step Si3103 of FIG. 490, it is described as "effect pattern for effect of battle/win (implied fall)". After performing Step Si3103, the process proceeds to Step Si3104.

In step Si3104, referring to the effect pattern table identified in step Si3103, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si3101. Get the pattern. In the following step Si3105, the effect pattern acquired in step Si3104 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in this game time. After executing step Si3105, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, in step Si3102, when it is determined that the result of the winning/non-winning determination in the current game is not the big hit (Si3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3106.

In Step Si3106, in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (XI) fall low probability high frequency state from the fall low probability high frequency state effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The effect pattern table used when the result of the deviation is obtained is specified. (XI) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a battle/defeat effect, which includes a battle effect and a defeat effect executed after the battle effect. In step Si3106 of FIG. 490, it is described as “a production pattern table for battle/defeat production”. After executing step Si3106, the process proceeds to step Si3104 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Si3106 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN this time.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 486: Si2709) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is to set the effect pattern according to whether the jackpot is won or not when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called normal fall state. is there. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting processing for the low fall probability low frequency state. In step Si3201, effect pattern random number acquisition processing is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si3202.

In step Si3202, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/non-winning determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. When it is determined in step Si3202 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si3202: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3203.

At step Si3203, the effect pattern table for big hit is specified from the effect pattern table group for falling low probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The falling low probability low frequency state effect pattern table group includes (XII) the falling low probability low frequency state, the jackpot effect pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, (XIII) the falling low probability low frequency state In addition, an effect pattern table used when a winning result is missed is provided. In step Si3203, (XII) is specified from (XII) and (XIII). (XII) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a battle/win effect, which includes a battle effect and a victory effect executed after the battle effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, the battle/winning effect described above includes an effect that suggests that the player has won the fall. Note that, instead of this configuration, a battle/winning effect that does not include an effect that suggests that a fall has been won may be used. In step Si3203 of FIG. 490, it is described as "a production pattern for a battle/win (indication of fall) production." After executing Step Si3203, the process proceeds to Step Si3204.

In step Si3204, referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Si3203, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si3201. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si3205, the effect pattern acquired in step Si3204 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the current game time. After executing Step Si3205, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si3202 that the result of the hit/non-win determination in the current game is not a big hit (Si3202: NO), the process proceeds to step Si3206.

In Step Si3206, in the winning lottery in the above-mentioned (XIII) fall low probability low frequency state from the fall low probability low frequency state effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The effect pattern table used when the result of the deviation is obtained is specified. (XIII) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a battle/defeat effect, which includes a battle effect and a defeat effect executed after the battle effect. In step Si3206 of FIG. 490, it is described as "effect pattern table for battle/defeat effect". After executing Step Si3206, the process proceeds to the above-described Step Si3204, and the effect pattern table specified in Step Si3206 is referred to to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN this time.

<Processing for game time performance execution>
Next, the game game effect execution process will be described. The game time effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect process (FIG. 484: Si2502).

FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the process for game effect production execution. In step Si3301, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern set in the above-mentioned game time effect setting process (FIG. 485) exists. When it is determined in step Si3301 that the set effect pattern does not exist (Si3301: NO), the present game-time effect execution processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si3301 that the set effect pattern exists (Si3301: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3302.

In step Si3302, the set effect pattern is referred to, and then the process proceeds to step Si3303 to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the game game effect. The game game effect referred to here is an effect based on various effect patterns set in the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486). In these effect patterns, the content and timing of the effect executed in the game time are stored.

When it is determined in step Si3303 that it is not the start timing of the game time effect (Si3303: NO), the process for executing the game time effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si3303 that it is the start timing of the game game effect (Si3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3304. The time when it is determined to be the start timing of this game time effect corresponds to time t5 in the timing chart of FIG. 459.

In step Si3304, a moving image display start command corresponding to the content of the game play effect set in the effect pattern is transmitted to the display control device 100. After that, the process proceeds to step Si3305, and the light emission control process of the various lamps 47 corresponding to the contents of the game time effect set in the effect pattern is started. After that, the process proceeds to step Si3306, and the sound output LSI (not shown) is caused to start the reproduction of the audio data corresponding to the contents of the notice effect set in the effect pattern. After executing step Si3306, the present game time effect execution processing is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Si3401, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Si3402.

In step Si3402, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Si3501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Si3601, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 494), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Si3601), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Si3602, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Si3601) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Si3603.

In step Si3603, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Si3602), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Si3604.

At step Si3604, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (Si3603) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to step Si3605, the other processes are executed, and then the V interrupt process is ended. Heretofore, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability random jackpot is won by the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Then, after that, when the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the high frequency support mode was started, if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the support mode simulation process starts that game number. At times, the support mode is transitioned from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, even if the falling lottery is won in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game time. For this reason, the player may infer from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a capable of operating in the high frequency support mode whether the game time is a big win in the winning lottery or the game time is a win in the falling lottery. Can be suppressed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the support mode simulation process. In this case, even though the high probability mode is set, the low frequency support mode is set. This state corresponds to the latent probability variation state (game state determination value PN=“02H”) in the pachinko machine of the model equipped with the latent latency variation state as the game state. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, since the latent probability variation state is not mounted as the game state, the variation time table group for the latent probability variation state used when the gaming state determination value PN is “02H” is the variation of the ROM 63. It is not prepared in the time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) (because it is useless to prepare a variable time table for when the game state determination value PN is “02H”). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 has a specification in which the variable time cannot be set in the high-probability low-frequency state. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, after calculating the game state determination value PN, if the calculation result is "02H", by executing a process of rewriting the game state determination value PN to "03H", high probability When it is a low frequency state, it is considered that the state is a probable variation state (game state determination value PN=“03H”), and variable time can be set. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, the variable time is normally set, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state determination value PN that can specify each value of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag is calculated, and based on the game state determination value PN. Since the variable time is set, the variable time can be set by referring to the gaming state determination value PN without referring to the values of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. You can Therefore, the control for setting the fluctuation time can be simplified.

<<I7>> Modification of the ninth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<I7-1>> Modification 1:
<Outline of Processing in Modification 1>
The procedure of processing by the pachinko machine in the first modification will be described first while showing the differences from the ninth embodiment. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the modification 1 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same name and reference numeral are used for the same parts as those of the ninth embodiment, and the procedure of the process is performed. Will be explained.

In the ninth embodiment, after the game state determination value is calculated, the process of rewriting the game state determination value to "03H" is executed when the calculation result is "02H". On the other hand, as a modified example 1, the game state determination value is calculated before the support mode simulation process without performing the process of rewriting the game state determination value.

FIG. 496 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of processing in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached in the pachinko machine of the first modification. As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. In the 120th game time to be executed after that, if the big hit is won in the winning lottery at time t11, the game state determination value is calculated at time t12 immediately after time t11. At time t12, the high probability mode flag is ON (="02H"), the high frequency support mode flag is ON (="01H"), and the falling flag is OFF (="00H"). The calculation result of the game state determination value is "03H".

At time t13 following time t12, a process of setting the variable time is performed. The change time is set based on the game state determination value "03H" calculated at time t12. Specifically, the MPU 62 reads the high-probability high-frequency state variation time table group corresponding to the case where the gaming state determination value is “03H” from the variation time table storage area 63h (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63, and The variable time is set using the variable time table for high-probability high-frequency states. This variable time table group is read normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped.

At time t14 following time t13, the support mode simulation process is executed, and the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

At time t15 following time t14, variable display of symbols is started based on the variable time set at time t13. That is, the support mode simulation process is executed after the variable time is set and before the variable display is started.

Note that FIG. 496 is merely for the purpose of explaining the procedure of the processing, and in actuality, it proceeds instantaneously from time t12 when the game state determination value is calculated to time t15 when the variable display is started. Therefore, as described using FIG. 457, it can be said that the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game time.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine of the first modification will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the ninth embodiment only in that the processes executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 497 to 499, are different. Other processes executed by the MPU 62 of 60, various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Variation start processing>
FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the variation start process in the first modification. In this variation start processing, steps Si3701 to Si3708 are the same as steps Si0701 to Si0708 of the variation start processing (FIG. 466) of the ninth embodiment, and steps Si3713 to Si3714 are variation start processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 466). Steps Si0709 to Si0710 are the same. The variation start process of the first modification differs from the variation start process of the ninth embodiment only in that steps Si3709 to Si3712 are added between steps Si3708 and Si3713.

In step Si3709, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si3709: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si3710.

In step Si3710, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Si3710 that the high frequency support mode is set (Si3710: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3711, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). ) Is reached (= within the guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Si3711 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Si3711: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Si3712 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. The process of turning off the high-frequency support mode flag corresponds to the support mode simulation process. The time when the high frequency support mode flag is turned off corresponds to time t14 in the timing chart of FIG. 496. After executing Step Si3712, the process proceeds to Step Si3713.

If it is determined in step Si3709 that the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit (none of the flags is ON) (Si3709: NO), if it is determined in step Si3710 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Si3710: NO), Alternatively, if it is determined in step Si3711 that the number of guaranteed games is not reached (step Si3711: YES), the process proceeds to step Si3713 without executing step Si3712. According to the added steps Si3709 to Si3712, the support simulation processing is performed.

<Hit determination process>
FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process in the first modification. In this hit determination process, steps Si3801 to Si3804 are the same as steps Si1001 to Si1004 of the hit determination process (FIG. 469) of the ninth embodiment, and steps Si3805 to Si3813 are hit determination processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 469). Steps Si1008 to Si1016 are the same. The hit determination process of the first modification differs from the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment only in that steps Si1005 to Si1007 of the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment are deleted. The deleted steps Si1005 to Si1007 correspond to the support simulation processing.

<Game state determination processing>
FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing a gaming state determination process in the first modification. In this game state determination process, step Si3901 is the same as step Si1101 of the game state determination process (FIG. 470) of the ninth embodiment. The game state determination process in the modified example 1 is different from the game state determination process in the ninth embodiment only in that steps Si1102 to Si11103 in the game state determination process in the ninth embodiment are deleted. The time when the game state determination value PN is calculated in step Si3901 corresponds to time t12 in the timing chart of FIG. 496.

According to the game state determination process having the above configuration, the process of rewriting the game state determination value from “02H” to “03H” is not executed. Then, according to the variation start process and the hit determination process having the above-described configuration, the support simulation process is executed after the game state determination process for calculating the game state determination value.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, by the support mode simulation process, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The game state determination value PN is calculated at a timing before being made, and the variation time is set based on the calculated game state determination value PN. Therefore, like the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the variable time is set normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, high reliability of the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured. can do.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game times after the number of guaranteed games is reached, the falling lottery is won. In either case, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a whether the game time is a big win in the winning lottery or the game time is a win in the falling lottery. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, like the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. it can. Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, since the variation time is set based on the game state determination value PN, the high probability mode flag, high frequency The variable time can be set by referring to the game state determination value PN without referring to the values of the support mode flag and the falling flag. Therefore, the control for setting the fluctuation time can be simplified.

<<I7-2>> Modification 2:
In the ninth embodiment and the modification 1 thereof, there are a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode as states in which the high frequency support mode flag that is the state information can be specified. 34a may be configured to have three types of support modes (for example, a low frequency support mode, a medium frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode) in which the frequency of the open state per unit time is divided into three stages. Further, the frequency may be divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more), and n types of support modes may be provided.

<<I7-3>> Modification 3:
In the ninth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the determination mode (the lottery mode) of the determination unit has the low probability mode and the high probability mode, but instead, the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition May have three types of probability modes (for example, low-probability mode, medium-probability mode, and high-probability mode). Furthermore, the configuration may be such that there are n kinds of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is divided into n levels (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

<<I7-4>> Modification 4:
In the ninth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited to. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case may be adopted in which the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

<<I7-5>> Modification 5:
In the ninth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, when the lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is determined to be the low probability mode. However, instead of this, the fall lottery itself is not performed. Also good. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the process from being interrupted and stopped when it becomes impossible to set the fluctuation time when the latent probability change state is caused by the influence of noise or the like. It is possible to obtain the effect that high reliability can be ensured for the operation.

<<I7-6>> Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, the game state determination value PN is rewritten to determine the state of the support mode before the transition by the support mode simulation process, but instead, the support mode simulation is performed. The state of the support mode before the transition by the process may be separately stored, and the game state determination value PN may be calculated again using the stored state of the support mode. Also with this configuration, similarly to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the setting of the variable time from becoming impossible, and it is possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped, and to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine. The effect that can be obtained can be obtained.

<<I7-7>> Modification 7:
In the ninth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the game state determination value PN is calculated based on the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. However, instead of this, the falling flag is set. Instead of using it, the game state determination value PN may be calculated based on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag. Further, the gaming state determination value PN may be calculated based on the high frequency support mode flag and the falling flag without using the high probability mode flag.

<<I7-8>> Modification 8:
In the ninth embodiment and the modification 1 thereof, the variation time table group is selected based on the game state determination value PN, and within the range of the selected variation time table group, the winning/winning determination result (lottery result) of the winning lottery is selected. Although the variation time table is specified based on this, instead of this, the variation time table group is selected based on the win/no determination result (lottery result) of the winning lottery, and within the range of the selected variation time table group, The variable time table may be specified based on the game state determination value PN. Also with this configuration, similarly to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the setting of the variable time from becoming impossible, and it is possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped, and to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine. The effect that can be obtained can be obtained.

<<I7-9>> Modification 9:
In the ninth embodiment and the modified example 1 thereof, on the main control device 60 side, the variation time is set based on the game state determination value PN, and in the sound emission control device 90, the effect pattern based on the game state determination value PN. Is set. On the other hand, as a modified example, based on the game state determination value, a mode such as a specific operation or display in a gaming machine other than the above, for example, a background moving image displayed on the symbol display device 41 may be set.

<<I7-10>> Modification 10
In the ninth embodiment and the modification 1 thereof, the variable time is set based on the game state determination value PN, but the configuration may not be such that the game state determination value PN is calculated. Specifically, the variation time may be set based on the values of the high-probability mode flag, the high-frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. Also with this configuration, similarly to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the setting of the variable time from becoming impossible, and it is possible to prevent the processing from being interrupted and stopped, and to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine. The effect that can be obtained can be obtained.

<<I7-11>> Modification 11:
In the ninth embodiment and the modification 1 thereof, the winning presentation, the defeating production, and the drawing production are performed as the result notification production, but instead of this, only the winning production and the defeat production are performed as the result notification production. Also good. According to this configuration, it is possible to clarify the win or loss of the player.

<<I7-12>> Modification 12:
In the ninth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the battle effect is executed as the specific effect executed before the result notification effect, but the specific effect is not limited to the battle effect. The specific effect may be any configuration as long as it is an effect that suggests that the result notification effect may be executed. As an effect that suggests that the result notification effect may be executed, for example, an effect that suggests that the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode can be adopted. With such a configuration, the same effect as the effect described in the ninth embodiment can be obtained.

<<I7-13>> Modification 13:
In the ninth embodiment and its variation 1 described above, the effect executed in one game time is composed of two types of effects, a battle effect and a result notification effect, but instead of this, a notice effect and a battle effect. It may be configured by three types of effects including the result notification effect. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used. Further, it is also possible to perform only the result notification presentation without executing the battle presentation.

<<I7-14>> Modification 14:
In the ninth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the battle effect executed when the falling lottery is won and the battle effect executed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery are the same, but are not limited to this. Not done. For example, a part of the images forming the battle effect may be different between the battle effect when the falling lottery is won and the big hit when the winning lottery is won. For example, although the images are similar as a whole, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the images so that only some players can notice that they are different.

<<I7-15>> Modification 15:
In the ninth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. It may be configured to include two control devices such as a control device and a sub control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the ninth embodiment. Further, in the ninth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 are not limited to the division described in the ninth embodiment, and the three control processes may be performed. It suffices that all of the devices 60, 90, 100 can execute all the processes in the ninth embodiment.

<<I7-16>> Modification 16:
In the ninth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration that does not include a latent latency variation state as a game state, but instead of this, a configuration that includes a latency latency variation state as a game state may be used. The pachinko machine of the modification 16 will be described in detail below. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine of the modification 16 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the following description will be given using the same names and reference numerals for the same parts as the ninth embodiment. To do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit were prepared as the big hit types (see FIG. 449). Instead, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, as the jackpot type, in addition to the probability varying jackpot and the normal jackpot, the latent probability varying jackpot is prepared. In the latent probability variation jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode ends. The latter support mode is a big hit when it becomes a low frequency support mode. Moreover, the pachinko machine of the modification 16 is configured not to notify that the game is in the high-probability mode, that is, the game time when the jackpot is won or the game time after the game time. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, it is impossible or difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is in the high-probability mode when winning the latent probability variation jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine of the modification 16 mounts the latent probability variation state as the game state. In addition, the latent probability variation state need not be limited to the configuration that shifts when the latent probability variation jackpot is won, and as a modified example, in other specific cases, for example, when the jackpot is won and a high probability high frequency state is reached. When the number of game times of exceeds a predetermined number, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, whereby the high probability mode is maintained, but the player is in the high probability mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the latent probability change state in which it is not possible to grasp whether it is the low probability mode or the low probability mode.

The pachinko machine of the modification 16 is different from the specific control of the ninth embodiment in that the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes the processes shown in FIGS. 500 to 503, which will be described later, and the sound emission controller 90. Differences from the processing shown in FIGS. 504 and 505 described later executed by the MPU 92, other processing executed by the main control device 60, other processing executed by the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. The various processes executed are the same.

<Hit determination process>
FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing a hit determination process in Modification 16. In this hit determination processing, steps Si4001 to Si4007 are the same as steps Si1001 to Si1007 of the hit determination processing (FIG. 469) of the ninth embodiment, and steps Si4009 to Si4017 are hit determination processing of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 469). Steps Si1008 to Si1016 are the same. The hit determination process in the modified example 16 differs from the hit determination process of the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4008 is added between step Si4007 and step Si4009.

In step Si4008, the support mode simulation flag is turned on. The support mode simulation flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the support mode simulation process has been executed in this game time, and when it is ON, it indicates that the support mode simulation process has been executed. If it is, it is specified that the support mode emulation process is not executed. In step Si4007, in response to the execution of the support mode simulating process of turning off the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Si4008, and the process of turning on the support mode simulating flag is performed. The value of the support mode simulation flag is cleared to OFF immediately before the processing of Si0709 which starts the variable display of the symbols in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 466). After performing Step Si4008, the process proceeds to Step Si4009.

<Game state determination processing>
FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the game state determination processing in Modification Example 16. In this game state determination process, steps Si4101, Si4102 are the same as steps Si1101, Si1102 of the game state determination process (FIG. 470) of the ninth embodiment, and step Si4104 is step Si1103 of the game state determination process (FIG. 470). It is the same. The game state determination process in Modification 16 differs from the game state determination process of the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4103 is added between step Si4102 and step Si4104.

In step Si4103, it is determined whether or not the support mode simulation process has been executed in the game game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support mode simulation flag is ON. When it is determined in step Si4103 that the support mode emulation flag is ON (Si4103: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4104. When it is determined in step Si4103 that the support mode simulation flag is not ON (Si4103: NO), this game state determination processing is ended.

According to this game state determination process, the game state determination value PN is changed from "02H" to "03H" only when the game state determination value PN is "02H" because the support mode simulation process is executed. When the gaming state is changed to the latent probability variation state by winning the latent probability variation jackpot, the gaming state determination value PN is maintained at "02H" and rewritten to "03H". There is no.

<Variable time setting process>
FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process in the modification 16. In this variation time setting process, steps Si4201 to Si4208 are the same as steps Si1201 to Si1208 of the variation time setting process (FIG. 471) of the ninth embodiment, and step Si4210 is the variation time setting process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 471). ) Step Si1209. The variation time setting process in the modification 16 differs from the variation time setting process of the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4209 and step Si4211 are added.

When it is determined in step Si4207 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si4207: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4209. In step Si4209, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN is "02H". When it is determined in step Si4209 that the game state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si4209: NO), that is, when the game state determination value PN is "10H", the process proceeds to step Si4210. In step Si4210, the variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state, which is the same process as step Si1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 471) of the ninth embodiment, is executed.

When it is determined in step Si4209 that the game state determination value PN is “02H” (Si4209: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4211, and the variation time setting process for the high probability low frequency state is executed. The variation time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state is a variation time setting process when the gaming state is the latent probability variation state. The variable time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si4211, the present variation time setting process ends.

<Variable time setting process for high probability low frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the high probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 502: Si4211) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state. In step Si4301, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a (FIG. 446) of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Si4302.

In step Si4302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON. If it is ON, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Si4302: YES), and the process proceeds to step Si4303.

In step Si4303, a big hit variation time table is specified from the high-probability low-frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the high-probability low-frequency state variable time table group, the (xiv) high-probability low-frequency state, jackpot variation time table used when the jackpot is won in the lottery, (xv) high-probability low-frequency state, Reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the lottery, (xvi) High probability low frequency state, reach reach without a big hit in the lottery A variable time table for generation is provided. In step Si4303, (xiv) is specified from (xiv) to (xvi). After performing Step Si4303, the process proceeds to Step Si4304.

In step Si4304, the fluctuation time table identified in step Si4303 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Si4301 is acquired. Then, in step Si4305, the variation time information acquired in step Si4304 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si4302 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Si4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4306 and whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. To judge. In step Si4302, since this process (Si4306) is executed when the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time, in step Si4306, the reach among the game times not hit by the big hit in the winning lottery is reached. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE (FIG. 447) is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (Si4306: YES), and the step Proceed to Si4307. When the presence/absence of the reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 446) of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step Si4307, the reach generation flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After performing Step Si4307, the process proceeds to Step Si4308.

In step Si4308, the reach time variation time table is specified from the high probability low frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the (xv) high-probability low-frequency state described above, a reach generation variable time table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (Xv) is, for example, a variable time table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing Step Si4308, the process advances to Step Si4304 described above, and the fluctuation time table identified in Step Si4308 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

When it is determined in step Si4306 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Si4306: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4309.

In step Si4309, the reach time non-occurrence change time table is specified from the high probability low frequency state change time table group stored in the change time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, in the (xvi) high-probability low-frequency state, the reach non-occurrence variable time table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (Xvi) is, for example, a variable time table for performing the normal effect for disengagement. After executing step Si4309, the flow advances to step Si4304 described above, and the fluctuation time information identified in step Si4309 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time.

<Production pattern setting processing>
FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process in Modification 16. In this effect pattern setting process, steps Si4401 to Si4408 are the same as steps Si2701 to Si2708 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486) of the ninth embodiment, and step Si4410 is the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 486). ) Step Si2709. The effect pattern setting process in the modification 16 differs from the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment only in that step Si4409 and step Si4411 are added.

When it is determined in step Si4407 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si4407: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4409. In step Si4409, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN is "02H". When it is determined in step Si4409 that the game state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si4409: NO), that is, when the game state determination value PN is "10H", the process proceeds to step Si4410. In step Si4410, the same effect as step Si2709 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486) of the ninth embodiment, that is, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed.

When it is determined in step Si4409 that the game state determination value PN is “02H” (Si4409: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4411, and the effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state is an effect pattern setting process when the game state is the latent probability change state. The effect pattern setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si4411, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high-probability low-frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 504: Si4411) of the effect pattern setting process. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability low-frequency state, the production pattern setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state is performed when the jackpot is won, when the reach occurs, and when neither case applies. The effect pattern according to is set. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state. In step Si4501, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si4502.

In step Si4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/non-winning determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. When it is determined in step Si4502 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si4502: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4503.

At step Si4503, the effect pattern table for the big hit is specified from the effect pattern table group for the high-probability low-frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. In the high-probability low-frequency state production pattern table group, in the (XIV) high-probability low-frequency state, the jackpot production pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the lottery, (XV) high-probability low-frequency state, Reach generation effect pattern table used when the reach occurs without winning the jackpot in the lottery, (XVI) High probability low frequency state, the reach non-reach used when the reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery A production effect pattern table for generation is provided. In step Si4503, (XIV) is specified from (XIV) to (XVI). After performing step Si4503, the process proceeds to step Si4504.

In step Si4504, referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Si4503, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si2602 (FIG. 485) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si4501. Get the pattern. Subsequently, in step Si4505, the effect pattern acquired in step Si4504 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in this game time. After executing step Si4505, the effect pattern setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Si4502 that the result of the win/no win determination in this game round is not a big hit (Si4502: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4506 to determine whether or not a reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information of the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 485). If it is determined in step Si4506 that the reach determination has been made in the present game times (reach occurrence) (Si4506: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4507.

In step Si4507, an effect pattern table for reach generation is specified from the effect pattern table group for high probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the (XV) high-probability low-frequency state, the reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (XV) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing step Si4507, the process proceeds to step Si4504 described above, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in step Si4507, an effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired.

When it is determined in step Si4506 that the result of the hit/miss determination in the current game is not the reach occurrence (Si4506: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4508.

At step Si4508, the production pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the high-probability low-frequency state effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the (XVI) high-probability low-frequency state, the reach non-occurrence effect pattern table used when the reach does not occur without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (XVI) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal removal effect. After executing step Si4508, the process proceeds to step Si4504 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Si4508 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN this time.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, when the latent probability variation big hit is won in the winning lottery, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is the high probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode is It becomes a latent probability change state which is a low frequency support mode. In addition, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 16, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and then the When the number of games played after the frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games and the jackpot is won, when the support mode simulation process is performed, a high probability low frequency state is set. That is, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, the high probability low frequency state may be a latent latent change state or a case where the support mode simulation process is performed as described above.

In the latent probability variation state, in the variation time setting process of FIG. 502 executed by the main controller 60, the variation time for the high probability low frequency state is set by step Si4211, and the variation is set in the voice emission control device 90. In the effect pattern setting process of FIG. 504, the effect pattern for the high-probability low-frequency state is set in step Si4411. On the other hand, when the support mode simulation process is performed, the process of rewriting the game state determination value PN from “02H” to “03H” is performed (see FIG. 501), so that the game state is a probable state ( Assuming that the gaming state determination value PN=“03H”), the above-described variation time setting and effect pattern setting are performed.

In a pachinko machine equipped with a latent probability variation state as a game state, when the support mode simulation process is performed as described above, it becomes the same high probability low frequency state as the latency probability variation state, but in this case, in the conventional technology, No particular consideration was given to how the mode of the game operation is performed. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, as described above, the setting of the variation time and the setting of the effect pattern can be performed in the case of the latent probability variation state and the case of performing the support mode simulation process. It will be different. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, it is possible to execute the effect suitable for the game time in the latent latent change state and the effect suitable for the game time in which the support mode simulation process is executed, and the player can appropriately adjust the game state. Can be notified.

<<I7-17>> Modification 17:
The pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 16 is a pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in which a certain latency variation state is mounted as a game state. Alternatively, as a modified example 17, a latent latent change state may be mounted as a game state on the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 of the ninth embodiment. The pachinko machine of the modification 17 will be described in detail below. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine of the modification 17 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same parts and components as those of the ninth embodiment are designated by the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given. To do.

The pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 17 is equipped with a latent probability changing state as a game state, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 16 of the ninth embodiment.

The pachinko machine of the modification 17 is different from the specific control of the modification 1 of the ninth embodiment in that the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 executes the above-described processing shown in FIGS. Different from the processing shown in FIGS. 504 and 505 executed by the MPU 92 of the control device 90, other processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and other processing executed by the sound emission control device 90. The various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same. That is, in the pachinko machine of the modification 17, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modification 16, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the variable time setting process shown in FIGS. 502 and 503, and the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The effect pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 504 and 505 is executed, and in this respect, the modification is different from the modification 16 of the ninth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 17 configured as described above, the procedure of the processing in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached is the same as the processing procedure of the modified example 1 shown in FIG. After the state determination value PN is calculated and the variable time is set, the support mode simulation process is performed. Therefore, even in the game game in which the support mode simulation process is performed, the game state determination value PN at the time when the variable time is set is "03H" which is the value before the support mode simulation process is performed. Become. Therefore, in the case where the support mode simulation process is performed, the setting of the variation time corresponding to “03H (=high probability high frequency state)” that is an appropriate value before the support mode simulation process is performed, and the effect The pattern is set. On the other hand, in the latent probability variation state caused by winning the latent probability variation jackpot, the game state determination value PN is "02H (=high probability low frequency state)", and the variation time setting corresponding to 02H and the effect pattern Is set. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 17, as in the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, the setting of the variation time and the effect pattern are performed depending on whether the latent latency is changed or the support mode simulation process is performed. The settings of will be different. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 17, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 16, the effect suitable for the game time in the latent latent change state and the effect suitable for the game time in which the support mode simulation process is executed are executed. Therefore, the player can be appropriately notified of the game state.

<<I7-18>> Modification 18:
The pachinko machine of the modification 18 has the same hardware configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The software configuration of the pachinko machine of the modification 18, that is, the specific control is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in the following points (a) to (e), and regarding other processing. Are the same. In the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the same parts as those of the ninth embodiment will be described below by using the same names and reference numerals.

(A) While the pachinko machine of the modified example 18 is equipped with a latent latency change state as a game state, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is not equipped with a latency latency change state as a game state. The method of mounting the latent probability variation state is the same as in Modifications 16 and 17 of the ninth embodiment.

(B) In the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the hit determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has the same content as the hit determination process (FIG. 500) of the modification 16 of the ninth embodiment. .. That is, in the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the process of turning on the support mode emulation flag is executed when the support mode emulation process of turning off the high frequency support mode flag is performed, while the ninth mode is executed. The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment does not include the support mode simulation flag itself.

(C) In the pachinko machine of the modified example 18, the game state determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has the same contents as the game state determination process (FIG. 499) of the modified example 1 of the ninth embodiment. ing. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the process of rewriting the game state determination value from "02H" to "03H" is performed, while in the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the game state determination value is "02H". The process of rewriting from "03H" to "03H" is not performed.

(D) In the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the variation time setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has the same contents as the variation time setting process (FIG. 502) of the modification 16 of the ninth embodiment. ing. The variable time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state (FIG. 503), which is one of the subroutines of the variable time setting process, is also the same. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the variation time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state is not prepared, whereas in the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the gaming state determination value PN is “02H”. The variable time setting process for the high-probability low-frequency state that is executed when

(E) The pachinko machine of the modification 18 differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 506 to 509.

<Game time performance setting process>
FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the game-play production setting process in the modification 18. In this game time effect setting process, steps Si4601 and Si4603 to Si4608 are the same as steps Si2601 and Si2603 to Si2608 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485) of the ninth embodiment. The game time effect setting process in the modification 18 differs from the game time effect setting process in the ninth embodiment only in the process of step Si4602.

In step Si2602 of the game play effect setting process (FIG. 485) of the ninth embodiment, the variation command received this time is read, and from this command, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, the variation time, and the game. The process of reading the information of the state determination value PN was performed. On the other hand, in step Si4602 of the game play effect setting process in the modification 18, in addition to the above information, the information on the support mode simulation flag is also read. The support mode simulation flag is turned ON by the hit determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as described above. However, on the main control device 60 side, the information of the support mode simulation flag is used as a variation command. And transmits it to the sound emission control device 90. In step Si2602, this fluctuation command is received and the information of the support mode simulation flag is also read from the command.

<Production pattern setting processing>
FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process in the modification 18. In this effect pattern setting process, steps Si4701 to Si4708 are the same as steps Si2701 to Si2708 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486) of the ninth embodiment, and step Si4710 is the effect pattern setting process of the ninth embodiment (FIG. 486). ) Step Si2709. The effect pattern setting process in the modified example 18 is different from the effect pattern setting process in the ninth embodiment only in that steps Si4709 and Si4711 to Si4713 are added.

When it is determined in step Si4707 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Si4707: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4709. In Step Si4709, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN is "02H". When it is determined in step Si4709 that the game state determination value PN is not "02H" (Si4709: NO), that is, when the game state determination value PN is "10H", the process proceeds to step Si4710. In Step Si4710, the same effect as Step Si2709 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 486) of the ninth embodiment, that is, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed.

When it is determined in step Si4709 that the game state determination value PN is “02H” (Si4709: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4711.

In step Si4711, it is determined whether or not the support mode simulation process has been executed in this game time. Specifically, it is determined whether the support mode simulation flag in main controller 60 is ON.

If it is determined in step Si4711 that the support mode simulation flag is not ON (Si4711: NO), the flow advances to step Si4712 to execute effect pattern setting processing for the latent probability variation high probability low frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the probability of high latency low probability state of latency variation is the effect pattern setting process when the game state is the probability variation state of latency. The effect pattern setting process for the latency probability change high probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Si4711, the present production pattern setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Si4711 that the support mode simulation flag is ON (Si4711: YES), the flow advances to step Si4713 to execute the effect pattern setting process for the support mode simulation high probability low frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state at the time of support mode simulation is the effect pattern setting process when the support mode simulation process is performed in this game time. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the support mode is simulated will be described later. After executing Step Si4713, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high probability low frequency state when probability of latency changes>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the latent probability variation high probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the latency probability change high probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 507: Si4712) of the effect pattern setting process. The production pattern setting process for the latency probability variation high probability low frequency state is applicable to both cases where the jackpot is won and the reach occurs when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability low frequency state. The effect pattern is set according to whether or not to do so. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the latent probability variation high probability low frequency state. In step Si4801, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si4802.

In step Si4802, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound/light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 485). .. If it is determined in step Si4802 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Si4802: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4803.

At step Si4803, the effect pattern table for big hit is specified from the effect pattern table group for latent probability change time high probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. The latency probability change time high probability low frequency state production pattern table group is (XVII) high probability low frequency state, the big hit production pattern table used when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, (XVIII) high probability low frequency state And, in the winning lottery, when the reach is generated without winning the jackpot, it is used when the reach does not occur without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. The production pattern table for reach non-occurrence is provided. In step Si4803, (XVII) is specified from (XVII) to (XIX). After executing Step Si4803, the process proceeds to Step Si4804.

In step Si4804, referring to the effect pattern table identified in step Si4803, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si4602 (FIG. 506) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si4801. Get the pattern. In the following step Si4805, the effect pattern acquired in step Si4804 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in this game time. After executing Step Si4805, the effect pattern setting process for the latent probability change high probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si4802 that the result of the win/no win determination in this game round is not a big hit (Si4802: NO), the flow proceeds to step Si4806 to determine whether or not a reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information of the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Si2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 485). When it is determined in step Si4806 that the reach determination has been made in the current game times (reach occurrence) (Si4806: YES), the process proceeds to step Si4807.

In step Si4807, the production pattern table for reach generation is specified from the production pattern table group for latent probability change time high probability low frequency state stored in the production pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (XVIII) high-probability low-frequency state, a reach generation effect pattern table used when a reach occurs without a big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (XVIII) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal reach effect. After executing Step Si4807, the process proceeds to the above-described Step Si4804, and with reference to the effect pattern table specified in Step Si4807, an effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN of this time is acquired.

If it is determined in step Si4806 that the reach determination in the current game is not reach (Si4806: NO), the process proceeds to step Si4808.

At step Si4808, the effect pattern table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the effect pattern table group for latent probability change time high probability low frequency state stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93. Specifically, in the above-mentioned (XIX) high-probability low-frequency state, the reach non-production effect pattern table used when the reach does not occur without the big hit in the winning lottery is specified. (XIX) is, for example, an effect pattern table for performing a normal removal effect. After step Si4808 is executed, the process proceeds to step Si4804 described above, and the effect pattern table specified in step Si4808 is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN this time.

<Production pattern setting process for high probability low frequency state when simulating support mode>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the support mode simulation high probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 507: Si4713) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state at the time of support mode simulation sets the effect pattern according to the jackpot win when the support mode simulation process is executed and the gaming state is in the high probability low frequency state. It is a thing. Since the game times in which the support mode simulation process is performed can only occur when the jackpot is won, in the effect pattern setting process, only the effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning is set. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state when the support mode is simulated. In step Si4901, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Si4902.

In step Si4902, a big hit effect pattern table is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 452) of the ROM 93, which is stored in the support mode simulated high probability low frequency state effect pattern table group. After executing Step Si4902, the process proceeds to Step Si4903.

In step Si4903, referring to the effect pattern table specified in step Si4902, the effect corresponding to the variation time read in step Si4602 (FIG. 506) and the value of the effect pattern random number RN obtained this time in step Si4901. Get the pattern. In the following step Si4904, the effect pattern acquired in step Si4903 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game. After executing step Si4904, the effect pattern setting process for the support mode simulation high probability low frequency state is ended.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 18, when the latent probability variation big hit in the winning lottery is won, the lottery mode of the winning lottery is the high probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the support mode is It becomes a latent probability change state which is a low frequency support mode. In addition, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and then the When the number of games played after the frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games and the jackpot is won, when the support mode simulation process is performed, a high probability low frequency state is set. That is, in the pachinko machine of the modification 18, the high probability low frequency state may be a latent latent change state or a case where the support mode simulation process is performed as described above.

In the variation time setting process executed in the main controller 60, the same variation time setting process for the high probability low frequency state is performed in the case of the latent probability variation state and the case of performing the support mode simulation process ( See FIG. 502 of Modification Example 16). On the other hand, in the effect pattern setting process executed by the sound emission control device 90, when the latent probability variation state is set, the effect pattern setting process for the latent probability variation high probability low frequency state is performed, and the support mode simulation process is performed. In the case where the support mode is simulated, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability low frequency state during support mode simulation is performed (FIG. 507). Therefore, in the variation time setting process executed in main controller 60, the control routine can be made common in the case of the latent probability variation state and the case of performing the support mode simulation process. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 18, it is possible to simplify the control. Further, in the effect pattern setting process executed by the sound emission control device 90, it is possible to set the effect pattern as being different between the case where the latent latency is changed and the case where the support mode simulation process is performed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 18, it is possible to execute an effect suitable for the game time in the latent latent change state and an effect suitable for the game time in which the support mode simulation process is executed, and the player can appropriately adjust the game state. Can be notified.

<<J>> Tenth Embodiment:
<<J1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 510 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 511 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that a trace of opening and closing remains. For example, a seal sticker is attached to an openable/closable portion, and when the board box is opened, a character such as "open" appears.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 512 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided in the individual openings described above formed on the game board 30. Be induced. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of game balls are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 (FIG. 511) as prize balls.

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting opening 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode refers to a case where the main controller 60 hits the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 as a result of a winning lottery, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. .. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display is made to display corresponding to the lottery result , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is also referred to as variation time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first symbol display unit 37a based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. To do. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also performs the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 513 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal symbols and the display surface 41 a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 513(a) is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 513(a), the symbol display device 41 variably displays liquid crystal symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8. In addition, as the liquid crystal designs to be displayed variably, liquid crystal designs in which a design such as a character is attached to each of the liquid crystal designs showing the numbers 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 513( b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the liquid crystal symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 513(a) are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or The variable display is scrolled from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 513(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one liquid crystal symbol for each symbol string is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the liquid crystal symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Becomes When the variable display of the liquid crystal symbols is finished and stopped, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined liquid crystal symbols is effective. It is formed on the line L. For example, the same combination of liquid crystal symbols is formed on the effective line L. The mode of variable display of the liquid crystal symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of the liquid crystal symbols in the symbol rows, Various modes of variable display of symbols such as the number of symbols in the symbol sequence can be adopted.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. That is, in a unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. is there. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit for each game time. In either 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device for each game time. In 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 513(b), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

<<J2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 514 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 has a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data and the like temporarily when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, which is a memory for storing, is provided. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when power failure occurs or the power switch 88 (FIG. 511) is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. To do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering of the through gate 35. To do.

At the output port of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying the entry into the second starting opening 34, the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 515 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot type such as the probability-varied jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed. The falling random number counter CF is used for the falling lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability mode (also called the high-probability game state). The “high-probability mode” is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball is the reserved information storage area. It is chronologically stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 The storage areas are stored in the holding area Rb in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is recognized. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 513(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, the details of the falling random number counter CF will be described. The falling random number counter CF is used when executing the falling lottery, which is a determination as to whether or not to end the high-probability mode in the gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game times is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and after reaching the maximum, returns to 0. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. At the timing, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/absence table (which is stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63) ( It is determined whether or not to end the high-probability mode by collating with the falling lottery win/loss table).

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (electrical role unlocking lottery winning/loss table) and the value of the electrical role unlocking counter C4 stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 are stored. It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, if C4=0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=2-465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the falling random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Also, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 516 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 516(a) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 516(b) shows a win/loss table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 516(a), in the low probability mode win/loss table, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 516(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in the present embodiment, a “small win” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The “small hit” is a result of the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It can be set to continue until the number of entered balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or a ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

As a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode of performing a winning lottery by using a winning/loss table for high probability as a winning/losing table and a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a low-probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability hit table. As described with reference to FIG. 516, when the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for high probability, compared to the case where the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for low probability, the jackpot is won. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a when the electric-role combination opening wins may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not used in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode. Good. Further, it may be configured such that one opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be long. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 517 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. 517(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 517(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to when the lottery is performed based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is provided for the second starting opening 34. It is referred to at the time of lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening of FIG. 517(a), the distribution table for the first starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R probability jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability jackpot is 8 It is 8 times.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R regular jackpot and the 8R regular jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R regular jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R regular jackpot is 8. It is 8 times.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 9” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “10 to 64” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-74" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot and "75-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 517(b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 64” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “65 to 99” is the 8R regular jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is the jackpot winning based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the jackpot winning second. This is different from the case where a big hit is won based on a ball entering the starting opening 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

If the winning result in the winning lottery is out, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the classification of jackpot types, if the 16-probability variation jackpot or the 8R-probability variation jackpot is obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode as described above. The state will continue until the next time you win the big hit in the winning lottery or the falling lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 518 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the falling lottery win/loss table used when executing the falling lottery. As shown in FIG. 518, in the falling lottery win/loss table, two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF that is won in the falling lottery. 198 values of 2 to 199 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF which are out of alignment. That is, in the high-probability mode game times, the probability of a fall that wins the fall probability lottery, ends the high-probability mode and becomes the low-probability mode is 1/100, and the probability that the high-probability mode is continued outside the fall lottery is It is 99/100. In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the game time of the low probability mode.

FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/loft lottery win/loss table) that is used when executing the electric role unlocking lottery.

FIG. 519(a) shows the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 519(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 519(b) shows the winning/disapproving table for electric accessory release lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 519 (b), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory releasing counter C4 that is to win the electric role is selected. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 5.0 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<J3>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 520 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that a part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 514) and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<J4>> Outline of processing by game machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed game number after the shift to the high frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. The "guaranteed game count" is the number of games guaranteed to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode, and is 100 in this embodiment. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed game count, after the high-frequency support mode. After 100 times, which is the guaranteed game count, when the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. After that, when the number of games has not reached the guaranteed number of games since the high-frequency support mode was started (for example, 60 times), if the player has won the falling lottery, the number of games executed from the 60th game is low. A winning lottery is executed in the probability mode. On the other hand, for the support mode, even if the high probability mode ends and the low probability mode shifts after winning the falling lottery at the 60th game time, 100 times after the high frequency support mode is started. The high frequency support mode is continued until the game time to be executed for the second time is reached.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. When the number of games is equal to the guaranteed number of games (120 times, for example), if the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode from the 60th game. After the shift, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. And from the 60th game time, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning lottery is won, the jackpot type is not suggested in the effect executed in the game time when the jackpot is won and the effect executed in the opening/closing execution mode executed thereafter. Therefore, the player cannot identify, through the effect, whether the odds variation jackpot is won or the regular jackpot is won. However, since the stop symbols displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b have different aspects of the symbol for each jackpot type, the player displays the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display. If the stop symbol of the portion 37b is consciously identified, the jackpot type can be identified.

Further, even in the game times executed after winning the jackpot, it is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state during the execution of the game times so that the player cannot identify the jackpot type. An effect that cannot be identified (hereinafter also referred to as a state-implicit effect) is executed. Furthermore, even if the player wins the falling lottery during the high-probability mode and within the guaranteed game count, the player is not suggested in the performance that he/she has won the falling lottery. Further, when the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, but the transition of the lottery mode also does not suggest to the player. The state-implicit effect is also executed in the effect executed in the game time executed after the lottery mode is changed to the low-probability mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after winning the falling lottery at the game times within the high probability mode and within the guaranteed game number and shifting to the low probability mode, within the guaranteed game number (that is, while the high frequency support mode continues). If you win the jackpot, you must win the jackpot within the guaranteed number of games after winning the falling lottery during the high-probability mode in the production of the game times that won the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the falling pullback jackpot). The effect (hereinafter referred to as the falling back jackpot effect) is executed. Further, the jackpot type in the falling back jackpot is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as the most advantageous jackpot type. ), in the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode that is executed immediately after the game number of winning the fall pullback jackpot, the fall pullback jackpot, and the jackpot type is a jackpot type that can be set by the pachinko machine 10. The effect that suggests that it is the most advantageous jackpot type (hereinafter, also referred to as the fall pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect) is executed. In the case of falling back jackpot, if the jackpot type is not the most advantageous jackpot type, the falling pullback jackpot performance will be executed in the game times that won the jackpot, but during the opening period, the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening No performance is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the winning lottery is won in the high-probability mode, and if the winning lottery is a big hit in the game times of winning the falling lottery, the falling lottery is won. In the game times, a production is executed that suggests that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as the falling jackpot).

Specifically, if you win the jackpot jackpot within the guaranteed game count (falling jackpot within the guaranteed game count), it is an effect that suggests that you have won the fall jackpot within the guaranteed game count (hereinafter referred to as the guaranteed game count fall. (Also referred to as a jackpot effect) is executed in the game times, and a falling jackpot opening effect within the guaranteed game number is suggested as an opening effect to be executed in the opening period, which suggests that the falling jackpot is won within the guaranteed game number.

If the winning jackpot (outside the guaranteed playing number) is won outside the guaranteed playing number (after the guaranteed playing number), a performance suggesting that the falling jackpot was won outside the guaranteed playing number (hereinafter, guaranteed playing) The number of times of out-of-times jackpot jackpot effect) is performed, and a guaranteed game out-of-number-of-falls jackpot opening effect is suggested as an opening effect to be executed in the opening period, which suggests that the player has won the falling jackpot outside the guaranteed game number.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after the normal jackpot is won, the jackpot (also referred to as a pullback jackpot) is won within the guaranteed game number of times that the game number is executed 100 times in the high frequency support mode. Suggests that the jackpot was won in the production in the game times where the jackpot was won, but does not indicate that the jackpot was a pullback jackpot.

The outline of the above-described processing will be described using a time chart. In this description, three cases will be described. As Case 1, the process in the case where the falling lottery is won within the guaranteed game number and the jackpot is won in the subsequent game number (within the guaranteed game number) will be described. As Case 2, a process will be described in the case where the falling lottery is won within the guaranteed game count and the jackpot is won in the game round that is won in the falling lottery. As Case 3, a process will be described in the case where the falling lottery is won out of the guaranteed game count and the jackpot is won in the game round which is won in the falling lottery.

FIG. 521 is a time chart showing an example of processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 in order to explain the outline (case 1) of the processing in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, in this time chart, from the top, execution/non-execution of the first starting mouth game times, execution/non-execution of the second starting mouth game times, ON/OFF of the high probability mode flag, high frequency support The ON/OFF of the mode flag, the ON/OFF of the open/close execution mode flag, the ON/OFF of the open/close processing period flag, and the effect to be executed are shown.

The high-probability mode flag is a flag that is ON when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and OFF when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. The high frequency support mode flag is a flag that is ON when the support mode is the high frequency support mode and OFF when the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

The open/close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open/close execution mode and turned off at the end of the open/close execution mode. The open/close processing period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the open/close processing period (round game) and turned off at the end of the open/close processing period. The open/close execution mode includes an opening period, an open/close processing period, and an ending period. That is, the open/close processing period is a part of the period in which the open/close execution mode is executed.

As shown in the time chart, a game time U1, a game time U2, and a game time U3 are executed as the first start opening game time in the period from time T0 to time T1. During the period from time T0 to time T1, the high-probability mode flag is OFF and the high-frequency support mode flag is also OFF, so the gaming state is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. At this time, the effect executes a normal game time effect. The normal game times performance is executed in the game times in a specific state, such as the above-mentioned state-implicit performance, the guaranteed game number inside falling jackpot effect, or the guaranteed game number outside falling jackpot effect among the effects to be executed during the game times. Refers to productions other than productions that are performed. The normal game times effect also includes effects that are executed in the game times when the jackpot is won in the game times that are not in a specific state (also referred to as normal game times). The normal game turn effect is executed in the game state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

In this example, in the game game U3, it is assumed that the 8R probability variation jackpot is won. When the 8R probability variation jackpot is won in the game game U3, the player is informed that the jackpot was won in the game time performance executed in the game game U3, but the jackpot type (especially whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot). Is not notified. That is, the fact that the 8R probability variation is a big hit is not reported. When the player consciously identifies the display of the special drawing unit 37, the player can identify the jackpot type. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is not notified in the effect to be executed.

As shown in the figure, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the end of the game turn U3, and the opening/closing execution mode is started after the end of the game turn U3. The opening period is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the opening effect is executed as an effect. After that, the opening/closing process period flag is turned on, the opening period is ended, the opening/closing process period is started, and a round effect is executed as an effect. After that, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off to end the opening/closing processing period, and the ending period is started. In the ending period, an ending effect is executed as an effect. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned off, the opening/closing execution mode ends and the ending period ends.

After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag are turned on from time T2. Then, the game time U4 is started. At this time, the game cycle in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode is started from time T2, but in the effect executed in the game cycle, the player is identified as to whether it is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode. Perform an effect that is impossible or difficult to identify (state-implicit effect). Further, as described above, in the effect in the game time U3 in which the big hit is won, the fact that the big hit is won is notified, but the big hit type is not notified. Therefore, the player executes the game times without knowing whether the lottery mode of the game times executed after time T2 is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode from the effect to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment and expectation to infer the jackpot type in the game game U3. Even if the jackpot type of the jackpot win in the game round U3 is a normal jackpot and the lottery mode in the game round from the game round U4 is the low-probability mode, the state-implicit cast is performed as the stage game. It is possible to give the person the expectation that the lottery mode may be the high-probability mode.

As shown in the time chart, after executing the game times a plurality of times from the time T2, if the falling lottery executed at the start of the game time U5 executed at the time T3 is won, there is a high probability from the start of the game time U5. The mode flag is turned off, and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. Since the game number U5 is within the guaranteed game number, the high frequency support mode flag continues to be in the ON state, and the support mode continues the high frequency support mode until the guaranteed game number ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, despite winning in the falling lottery of the game time U5, in the effect executed in the game time, winning the falling lottery, the lottery mode from the high probability mode to the low probability mode Do not notify the player of the transition. The effect executed in the game times U5 and the game times executed after the game times U5 is a state-implicit effect in which it is difficult or difficult for the player to distinguish between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode. By doing this, within the guaranteed number of games, even if the lottery mode is won and the lottery mode shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode), It is not possible (or difficult to identify) from the effect to be executed whether it is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to always give the player an expectation as to whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode.

Then, when the jackpot lottery is won in the game number U6 which is within the guaranteed game number, as a performance to be executed during the execution of the game number U6, a production suggesting that the jackpot is a falling back jackpot (falling back jackpot production). Execute. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the 16R probability variation jackpot is won in the game game U6. As shown in FIG. 517, the 16R probability variation jackpot is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types set in the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the fall pullback jackpot effect. As shown in FIG. 522(a), on the display surface 41a, after displaying the liquid crystal design in which the liquid crystal design that has fluctuated corresponds to the big hit, as shown in FIG. 522(b), the big hit falls and pulls back. Perform a performance that suggests that it was a big hit.

The description returns to FIG. 521. After the execution of the fall pullback jackpot effect is finished and the game turn U6 is finished, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on from time T5 and the opening/closing execution mode is started. In the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode, in addition to suggesting that the jackpot withdrawal jackpot was a jackpot, the jackpot withdrawal most advantageous jackpot opening effect that suggests that the jackpot type was the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect. As shown in the figure, as the opening effect, it is suggested on the display surface 41a that a predetermined character was a fall back pulling jackpot, and that another character was a jackpot type 16R probability variation jackpot.

The description returns to FIG. 521. After ending the opening effect in the opening period from time T5, after the opening/closing processing period (round game) and the ending period are ended, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned off and the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

After that, from time T6, the high-probability mode flag and the high-frequency support mode flag are turned on, and the game game is started. At this time, the effect executed in each game is a state-implicit effect. The player can recognize that the game time started from time T6 is the high-probability mode because it has been suggested that the falling pullback most advantageous big hit in the opening effect started from time T5 is a probability variation big hit in the opening effect. Despite this, the reason why the state-implicit effect is executed in the game times after the time T6 will be described below.

When the falling lottery executed in each game time after time T6 is won in the predetermined game time, the high probability mode is shifted to the low probability mode. If the production for the high-probability mode is executed at the game time starting from time T6, the production for the high-probability mode is executed when the fall lottery is won and the transition is made from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. The player will be aware that the player has won the falling lottery and has switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order not to suggest that the lottery has been won and the lottery mode has changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the state-implicit effect is produced at the game time starting from time T6. To execute. Then, even when the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the state-implicit effect is executed in the game times within the guaranteed game times. Although the player recognizes that the game time starting from time T6 is the high probability mode, the reason why the state implicit presentation is executed in the game time after time T6 has been described. The outline of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 (case 1) has been described above.

FIG. 524 is a time chart illustrating a process (case 2) in the case of winning a falling jackpot within the guaranteed game count. As described above, the falling jackpot within the guaranteed game number is to win the jackpot in the falling game number within the guaranteed game number. As shown in the figure, the game time started from time T12 is executed in the game state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Then, a falling lottery and a winning lottery are executed at each game time.

As shown in the figure, when the winning lottery is won in the game time U15 and the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the falling big hit game time effect within the guaranteed game number is executed in the game time U15. The within-guaranteed game number falling jackpot game times effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the falling lottery is won and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the guaranteed game number. After that, the opening/closing execution mode is started from time T14, but during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the falling jackpot big hit opening effect within the guaranteed game number is executed. The falling jackpot winning performance within the guaranteed game number is an opening effect that suggests to the player that the falling lottery has been won and the winning lottery has been won in the game times within the guaranteed game number.

By winning the winning game number within the guaranteed game number and executing the falling jackpot game number effect within the guaranteed game number and winning the winning number in the guaranteed game number, even if the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode, the jackpot is won in the same game number. It is possible to make the player recognize that such a very rare event has occurred and give the player a sense of superiority and a sense of accomplishment. In addition, in the present embodiment, the guaranteed winning game number falling jackpot game times effect and the guaranteed playing times falling bonus jackpot opening effect, regardless of the jackpot type of jackpot winning, win the falling lottery in the game times within the guaranteed playing number. And, it is executed in all cases of winning the jackpot. The outline of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 (case 2) has been described above.

FIG. 525 is a time chart for explaining the process in the case where the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot is won (case 3). As described above, the out-of-guaranteed game count tumble jackpot is to win the jackpot in the game times when the player falls outside the guaranteed game count. As shown in the figure, the game time started from time T22 is executed in the game state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Then, a falling lottery and a winning lottery are executed at each game time.

As shown in the figure, when the winning lottery is won and the winning lottery is won in the game cycle U25, the guaranteed large number of games outside the guaranteed game times in the game cycle U25 is executed. The out-of-guaranteed game count big hit game times effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the falling lottery has been won and the winning lottery has been won in the game times outside the guaranteed game count. After that, the opening and closing execution mode is started from time T24, but during the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode, the guaranteed game out-of-game outfall jackpot opening effect is executed. The out-of-guaranteed-game-number-fall-out jackpot opening effect is an opening effect that suggests to the player that the winning lottery has been won and the winning lottery has been won in the game times outside the guaranteed game number.

By executing the guaranteed game times outfall jackpot game times effect and the guaranteed game times outfall jackpot opening effect, even though the winning lottery is won and the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode, the jackpot is won in the same game times. It is possible to make the player recognize that such a very rare event has occurred and give the player a sense of superiority and a sense of accomplishment. In this embodiment, the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot game times effect and the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot opening effect are won in the fall lottery in the game times outside the guaranteed game count, regardless of the jackpot type of jackpot win. And, it is executed in all cases of winning the jackpot. The outline of the processing in the pachinko machine 10 (case 3) has been described above.

As described above, as explained in the outline, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific effect when the jackpot is won in the gaming state of the low-probability mode, which is more disadvantageous than the gaming state of the high-probability mode. Specifically, in the case 1, the falling pullback big hit effect and the falling pullback most advantageous big hit opening effect are executed as the specific effects. In Case 2, as a specific effect, a guaranteed big hit within the number of guaranteed games and a big hit opening presentation within the guaranteed number of games are executed. In Case 3, the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot effect and the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot opening effect are executed as specific effects. By executing such a process, it is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot is won in the game times executed in the game state that is disadvantageous to the player, through a specific effect, and the disadvantageous game state. Nevertheless, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction with winning the jackpot.

In addition, any of the specific effects is an effect that suggests to the player that the jackpot is won from the game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player further recognize that the jackpot is won despite the disadvantageous game state, and to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction.

Further, when the jackpot is won, in the game times executed thereafter, the player executes an indistinguishable or difficult effect (state-implicit effect) in the game state in the executed game time. It is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing whether the game is being executed in this state. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. ..

Furthermore, in the case where such a process is executed, the condition for executing a specific effect is satisfied, and when the specific effect is executed, the game that has been executed so far for the first time by the specific effect. A game in which the player can recognize that the game state in the game was an unfavorable game state, and the player later recalls the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create a game of interest and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware of the fact that the jackpot has been won, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

Furthermore, after falling, if the jackpot is won within the guaranteed number of games (fall and withdrawal jackpot), and if the category of the jackpot is the most advantageous type for the player, the falling pullback is most advantageous during the opening period. Since the jackpot opening production is performed, the player will know that after winning the jackpot, he has won the jackpot of the most advantageous type from the unfavorable gaming state, and a greater sense of superiority and happiness to the player. Can be given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect in case 1, the guaranteed winning game number within falling guarantee jackpot opening effect in case 2, and the guaranteed playing number outside falling guarantee jackpot opening effect in case 3 are the winning game times. Since it is executed after the game time is over, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after the game time is over, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game after the game time is over.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the gaming states, the gaming state of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous state), and the low-probability mode and the low-probability mode are low. The gaming state of the frequency support mode is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most unfavorable state), and the gaming state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is more unfavorable than the most advantageous state. It is a more advantageous game state (hereinafter, also referred to as medium advantage state). In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the game times after the transition from the most advantageous game state to the medium advantageous game state, the above specific effect is executed. Therefore, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the jackpot has been won before shifting to the most unfavorable state, which is the most unfavorable state. It is possible to give a feeling (actually a sense of crisis by knowing that it was a dangerous situation later), and a sense of accomplishment and superiority due to winning the jackpot, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the falling back jackpot effect as a specific effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot is won after falling. In other words, the fall pullback jackpot production is a jackpot of a game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a preceding winning game time) that is a jackpot just before the game time that is the fall withdrawing jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game time). It is possible to let the player recognize that the type was the probability variation jackpot, that the winning lottery was subsequently won, and that the jackpot was won in the low probability mode within the guaranteed game times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the jackpot type in the game times that has become a big hit one after another, and to create a game feature that reminds the player of the previous winning game times until now. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the fall pullback jackpot production, the jackpot type of the game times (preceding winning game times) that has become a jackpot just before the game times that have become the fall pullback jackpots (the winning game times) have changed. The player is made to recognize that it was a big hit, that he/she was subsequently won in the falling lottery, and that he/she was won in the low probability mode within the guaranteed game times. Further, when the type of the jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the falling pullback most advantageous effect is executed. That is, based on the jackpot type in the game times determined as the fall pullback jackpot and the jackpot type in the preceding winning game times, the effect to be executed after the game times determined as the fall pullback jackpot is determined, Based on the specific effect, the player who recognizes the specific effect executed after the game time determined as the fall pullback jackpot is the jackpot type in the game time determined as the fall pullback jackpot and the preceding winning game. The player can be recollected and guessed about the jackpot type in the game, and the player can be given an interest of recollecting the game game executed in the past in addition to the expectation of the game game being executed.

Furthermore, as described above, a specific effect, for example, a fall pullback jackpot effect, is a jackpot of a game number that has been a jackpot just before the game number of the fall pullback jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as a pre-winning game number). The player is made to recognize that the type was a probability variation jackpot, that he/she was subsequently elected to the falling lottery, and that the jackpot was won in the low probability mode within the guaranteed game times. That is, regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect, and regarding the content of the specific effect, a mode of change in the game state from the game time when the jackpot is won first to the game time after which the jackpot is won. It is decided based on. Therefore, the player who recognizes the specific effect can recognize (confirm) the mode of the change of the game state in the game times executed in the past based on the specific effect. Therefore, in the case where the player cannot recognize the mode of the change of the game state in the game times executed between the game time that was won the jackpot first and the game time that was won after the jackpot. Also, by making the player recognize the particular effect, it is possible to make the player recognize the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed so far, which has been executed so far. It is possible to create amusement such as recollecting the game state and the contents of the game at the game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the specific effect to be executed during the opening period is also determined based on the aspect of the change in the game state from the game time when the jackpot is won first to the game time after which the jackpot is won. That is, until the opening period after the jackpot game time is over, the player can be made to pay attention to the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed so far, the content of the game, and the effect. ..

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a specific effect when the jackpot is won after the high-probability high-frequency state, which is an advantageous gaming state, shifts to the low-probability high-frequency state, which is an unfavorable gaming state. To do. Therefore, even if the player is aware that the advantageous game state has transitioned to the disadvantageous game state, even if the state-implicit effect is being executed, the high-probability high-frequency state is changed to the low-probability high state. After the player's sense of expectation temporarily declines due to the shift to the frequency state, a specific performance is executed by winning the jackpot, so the player's joy for winning the jackpot with the expectation lowered can be specified. By executing the effect of (1), it is possible to further promote the game and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the opening time based on the aspect of the change in the gaming state in the game times executed from after the end of the preceding winning game times to after the end of the winning game times. .. Therefore, for example, when performing an effect (opening effect) in an opening period that is a period corresponding to the opening time, the content of the effect is changed from after the end of the preceding winning game times to after the end of the winning game times. It can be determined according to the mode of change of the game state in the executed game times. As a result, the player who has recognized the opening effect, based on the effect, a mode of change of the game state in the game time executed between after the end of the preceding winning game time and after the end of the winning game time. Can be recognized (confirmed). Therefore, afterwards, it is possible to let the player recognize the mode of change of the game state in the game times executed so far, and remind the player of the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create amusement and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game time started immediately after the game time (preceding winning game time) won for the big hit is a game time in a game state (high probability high frequency state) advantageous for the player. Yes, after that, the player shifts to a gaming state (low probability high frequency state) that is disadvantageous to the player (wins the falling lottery), and then performs a specific effect when winning the jackpot (falling jackpot jackpot). Therefore, if the expectation of the player is once lowered by shifting to a gaming state that is unfavorable to the player, a specific effect is executed when the jackpot is won, so the jackpot is won when the expectation is lowered. It is possible to further promote the joy of the player with respect to that by executing a specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<J5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sj0101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sj0102.

In step Sj0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sj0103.

In step Sj0103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the respective counter values have reached the maximum values. In each case, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sj0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 530) described later.

In step Sj0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the entrance process for the starting opening in step Sj0104 will be described later. After executing step Sj0104, the process proceeds to step Sj0105.

In step Sj0105, a through-ball entry process accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through-ball entering process in step Sj0105 will be described later. After executing step Sj0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 526: Sj0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sj0201, whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entering ball) is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sj0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sj0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0202 and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sj0203.

In step Sj0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sj0204.

In step Sj0204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra, is read out, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sj0209.

When it is determined in step Sj0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Sj0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sj0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sj0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0206, and the payout controller 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sj0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sj0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sj0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sj0208.

In step Sj0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sj0209.

In step Sj0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step Sj0204 or step Sj0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sj0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sj0209: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sj0209, when the number N of startup reservations is less than the upper limit value (Sj0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0210, 1 is added to the number N of start up reservations of the corresponding holding area, and then the process proceeds to step Sj0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sj0212.

In step Sj0212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sj0103 (FIG. 526) are stored in the first free storage area of the corresponding reserved area. The data is stored in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sj0210. Specifically, when the first starting suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sj0103 are set. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sj0210. Further, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sj0103 are set. , The first reserved storage area of the second reserved areas Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting reserved number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sj0210. After executing Step Sj0212, the process proceeds to Step Sj0213.

In step Sj0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF (holding information). This is a process of performing a determination such as the type, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the result of determination of whether or not the lottery has fallen (lottery result), before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sj0213, the process proceeds to Step Sj0214.

In step Sj0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF is set as a hold command. To do.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before the suspension information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of a normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing step Sj0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 527: Sj0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process, based on the hold information, the determination result of the winning lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach, the falling lottery determination This is a process to be executed before the main control device 60 is targeted for the winning lottery.

In step Sj0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the entrance processing for the starting opening (FIG. 527) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball Alternatively, by grasping whether or not the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sj0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sj0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0303, and the win/loss table is stored. The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj0308, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sj0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time (Sj0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0304, and the current entry is performed. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj0305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery by referring to the falling hit determination table stored in the falling hit determination table storage area 63d.

When it is determined in step Sj0305 that the player has won the falling lottery (Sj0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0306, the falling winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sj0303. In step Sj0303, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to as described above. After that, proceeding to step Sj0308, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot, as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

When it is determined in step Sj0305 that the falling lottery has not been won (Sj0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0307. In step Sj0307, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the high probability mode. After that, proceeding to step Sj0308, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot, as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode.

In step Sj0308, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sj0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0309, and the value is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sj0310 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sj0310, the process proceeds to step Sj0311.

In step Sj0311, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sj0311 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sj0311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0312, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sj0311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0313 to store the normal jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

In step Sj0308, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sj0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0314, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sj0315 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. After that, proceeding to step Sj0316, as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sj0316 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (Sj0316: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0317 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0316 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sj0316: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 526: Sj0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sj0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sj0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sj0401: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sj0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sj0401: NO), the entry process for this through is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj0402 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sj0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0403, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sj0404.

In step Sj0404, the value of the electric auditors product release counter C4 updated in step Sj0103 (FIG. 526) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0402 that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sj0402: NO), that is, when the value of the accessory holding number SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sj0501, a start-up process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sj0502.

In step Sj0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sj0503.

In step Sj0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sj0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sj0503, the process proceeds to Step Sj0504.

In step Sj0504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sj0505.

In step Sj0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow proceeds to step Sj0506. In step Sj0506, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sj0506, the process proceeds to Step Sj0507.

In step Sj0507, game state transition processing for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sj0508.

In step Sj0508, electric power support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sj0509.

In step Sj0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sj0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sj0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of this normal processing (Sj0509: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in step Sj0510 and step Sj0511. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sj0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sj0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (Sj0509: YES), the process returns to step Sj0503, and each process from step Sj0503 to step Sj0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of step Sj0503 to step Sj0508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 530: Sj0506).

FIG. 531 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In step Sj0601, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Sj0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Sj0601: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any processing from step Sj0602. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sj0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0602.

In step Sj0602, it is determined whether or not the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the special figure variation display flag of the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variation display flag is turned on when the variation display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned off when the variation display is ended.

If it is determined in step Sj0602 that the special drawing unit 37 is not in the variable display (Sj0602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0603.

In step Sj0603, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sj0603, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0602 that the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display (Sj0602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0604.

In step Sj0604, a fluctuation ending process for ending the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation ending process will be described later. After executing step Sj0604, the present game time control processing is ended.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game time control process (FIG. 531: Sj0603).

FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sj0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is equal to or less than “0”, it means that the reserved quantity to be started is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sj0701 that the total reserved number CRN is equal to or less than “0” (Sj0701: NO), this variation start process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds “0” (Sj0701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0702.

In step Sj0702, a reservation information shift process for setting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sj0703. Details of the pending information shift processing will be described later.

In step Sj0703, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sj0704.

In step Sj0704, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in the winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sj0704, the process proceeds to Step Sj0705.

In step Sj0705, a game state determination process for determining the game state is executed. Specifically, the game state is determined by calculating a game state determination value described later. Details of the game state determination processing will be described later. After executing Step Sj0705, the process proceeds to Step Sj0706.

In step Sj0706, a variable time setting process is executed. The variation time setting process is a time required for the current game time on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the game state determination value and the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. This is a process for setting the variable time. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sj0706, the process proceeds to step Sj0707.

In step Sj0707, a variation command is set. The variation command is related to the hold information obtained based on the entry of the current game time into the first starting opening 33, or is obtained based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In addition to including information indicating whether or not the information is on hold information, information regarding whether or not a reach has occurred and information regarding the variation time set in step Sj0706 are included. Further, in the variation command, information on whether or not the guaranteed game time flag is ON, information on whether or not the game rotation drop flag is ON, and whether or not the falling lottery has been won in the game time. Information and information regarding the game state determination value are included. After executing Step Sj0707, the process proceeds to Step Sj0708.

In step Sj0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in step Sj0707 and step Sj0708 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Sj0708, the process proceeds to Step Sj0709.

The processing from step Sj0709 to step Sj0712 described below is performed when the high-probability mode is continued in the game times out of the guaranteed game times, when the jackpot is won in the target game times, and in the falling lottery. In either case, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support at the start of the processing target game time, and the player is discriminated whether the winning lottery or the jackpot is won. This is a process for making it difficult or difficult to identify. In a normal gaming machine, if the high probability mode continues outside the guaranteed number of games and you win the fall lottery, in the fall determination process that will be described later in detail, there is a high probability at the start of the game times. To turn off the mode flag (FIG. 534: Sj0904) and turn off the high-frequency support mode flag (FIG. 534: Sj0908), change from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game cycle that is won in the falling lottery. Move to. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won, the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode at the end of the game. Therefore, in the production in the game times, even if it is difficult to identify whether the winning lottery is won or the jackpot is won, it is necessary to identify the timing when the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode in the game times. As a result, the player can determine whether or not he/she has won the falling lottery at the start of the game game.

In the present embodiment, by the processing from step Sj0709 to step Sj0712, when the high probability mode is continued in the game times outside the guaranteed game times, even when the jackpot is won in the processing object game times, the game times are Since the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode at the start of, the fall lottery is performed when the player recognizes that the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game time. It is not possible to discriminate whether the player has won the game or the jackpot, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension until the notification of the result of the hit determination at the end of the game time is recognized. Hereinafter, the processing of steps Sj0709 to Sj0712 will be specifically described.

In step Sj0709, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to any of the jackpot types is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the processing target game time. When it is determined in step Sj0709 that the jackpot flag is ON (Sj0709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0710.

In step Sj0710, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj0710 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sj0710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0711.

In step Sj0711, it is determined whether or not the processing target game number is within the guaranteed game number. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed game number counter PNC>0. The guaranteed game number counter PNC is a counter that counts down the guaranteed game number. The value "100" is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC when the guaranteed game number, that is, the high frequency support mode is started, and the value "1" is subtracted each time the game number is completed. When it is determined in step Sj0711 that the processing target game number is not within the guaranteed game number (out of the guaranteed game number) (S3711: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj0712.

In step Sj0712, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sj0713. Further, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON in step Sj0709 (Sj0709: NO), it is determined that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sj0710: NO), the process target game times are guaranteed games in step Sj0711. If it is determined that it is a pronation (Sj0711: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0713.

In step Sj0713, the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing step Sj0713, the process proceeds to step Sj0714.

In step Sj0714, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sj0714, the present fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 532: Sj0702) of the fluctuation start process.

FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift processing. In step Sj0801, it is determined whether the reservation area that is the processing target for executing the reservation information shift processing is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the holding information stored first (the holding stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra) among the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra (FIG. 515). The information) is stored in the first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb (the first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) among the reserved information stored in time series in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 515). (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step Sj0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

If it is determined in step Sj0801 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sj0801: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sj0802 to Sj0807 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj0801 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sj0801: NO). ), the holding information shift process for the second holding area in steps Sj0808 to Sj0813 is executed.

In step Sj0802, the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sj0803, in which the total reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sj0804. In step Sj0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sj0805.

In step Sj0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sj0805, the process proceeds to step Sj0806.

In step Sj0806, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sj0807.

In step Sj0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Sj0807 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step Sj0801 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (Sj0801: NO), step Proceeds to Sj0808.

In step Sj0808, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Sj0809. In step Sj0809, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step Sj0810 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sj0811.

In step Sj0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sj0811, the process proceeds to step Sj0812.

In step Sj0812, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sj0813.

In step Sj0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Sj0813 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Fall determination processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 532: Sj0703).

FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step Sj0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sj0901 that the high probability mode is set (Sj0901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0902.

In step Sj0902, the success/failure determination of the falling lottery is executed with reference to the success/failure table for falling lottery. Specifically, the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a win in the falling lottery win/loss table (see FIG. 518) of the falling lottery table storage area 63d. Is determined. In the subsequent step Sj0903, if the result of the win/no determination in step Sj0902 is a win in the falling lottery (Sj0903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj0904.

In step Sj0904, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj0905, and the falling flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The falling flag is a flag for storing the result of the judgment of success or failure of the falling lottery. After executing Step Sj0905, the process proceeds to Step Sj0906.

In step Sj0906, the game rotation drop flag is turned ON. The game spin-down flag is a flag for identifying that the player has won the fall lottery in the game game to be processed. Therefore, the game spin-down flag is turned on when the drop lottery is won, and is turned off at the end of the game times which is won in the drop lottery. The difference between the game rotation drop flag and the fall flag is that the game rotation drop flag is turned on only in the game times that wins the drop lottery, whereas the fall flag is turned on when the drop lottery is won. Is a flag that is turned OFF at the time when the number of games won in the winning lottery is over. Both the game rotation drop flag and the fall flag are used in the game state determination processing (FIG. 536) described later. After executing Step Sj0906, the process proceeds to Step Sj0907.

In step Sj0907, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high-frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times) (=within the guaranteed game number). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Sj0907 that the value of the guaranteed game frequency counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sj0907: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game frequency, the process proceeds to step Sj0908 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing Step Sj0908, the main fall determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj0907 that the number of guaranteed games is not reached (Sj0907: YES), this fall determination process is ended. Further, when it is determined in step Sj0901 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sj0901: NO), and when the result of the success/failure determination in step Sj0903 is not win in the fall lottery (Sj0903: NO), the main fall determination process is performed. finish.

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 532: Sj0704).

FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step Sj1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sj1001 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sj1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1002 to determine whether or not the high-probability mode is true or false. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning probability table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 516(b). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Sj1004.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1001 that the high probability mode is not set (Sj1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1003, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the low probability mode win/loss table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 516(a). To determine. Then, it progresses to step Sj1004.

In step Sj1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Sj1002 or step Sj1003 is a big hit. In step Sj1004, when the result of the win/no determination is a big hit (Sj1004: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1005.

In step Sj1005, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sj1005 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sj1005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1006, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 517(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, in step Sj1005, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sj1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1007, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 517(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. After executing the processing of step Sj1006 or step Sj1007, the process proceeds to step Sj1008.

In step Sj1008, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step Sj1006 or step Sj1007 is turned on. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on in the case of 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on in the case of 8R certainty variation jackpot, and the 16R normal jackpot flag is set in the case of 16R regular jackpot. It is turned on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned on. After executing step Sj1008, the process proceeds to step Sj1009.

In step Sj1009, a process of setting a stop result for jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game time when the jackpot is won, it is set which of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is a process for doing. Specifically, by referring to the big hit stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step Sj1006 or step Sj1007 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sj1009, the hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sj1004, when the result of the winning lottery in step Sj1002 or Sj1003 is not a big hit (Sj1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1010, the reach determination table is referred, and the reach occurs in the game time. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 514). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step Sj1011.

In step Sj1011, if the result of the reach determination in step Sj1010 is that a reach occurs in the game time (Sj1011: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1012 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sj1012, the process proceeds to step Sj1013.

On the other hand, in step Sj1011, if the result of the reach determination in step Sj1010 is that the reach does not occur in the game times (Sj1011: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1013 without executing step Sj1012.

In step Sj1013, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in the current game time that results in a disengagement result, for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display is set. Processing. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sj1013, the regular hit determination process ends.

<Game state determination processing>
Next, the game state determination processing will be described. The game state determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 532: Sj0705) of the fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing the game state determination processing. The game state determination process is a process of calculating a game state determination value. Details of the game state determination value will be described later. Hereinafter, a specific process of the game state determination process will be described.

In step Sj1101, the value of the high-probability mode flag, the value of the high-frequency support mode flag, and the value of the falling flag are added to perform the processing of obtaining the gaming state determination value PN.

Here, the details of the game state determination value will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various flags are prepared for the MPU 62 to specify various game states. Specifically, the high probability mode flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the MPU 62 for specifying whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. A high-frequency support mode flag and a fall flag for identifying whether or not the fall lottery is won by the MPU 62 are prepared. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game state determination value for collectively specifying the respective values (each flag value) of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag by the MPU 62. Is prepared. That is, the game state determination value is a numerical value that can identify which of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the fall value. These flags and game state determination values are stored in various flag storage areas 64g (see FIG. 514) of the RAM 64.

FIG. 537 is an explanatory diagram illustrating details of the game state determination value. FIG. 537(a) is a correspondence table showing the correspondence between OFF/ON of each flag and the flag value. As shown in the figure, the flag value when the high probability mode flag is OFF is set to "00H (meaning 00 in hexadecimal notation, the same applies hereinafter)", and the flag value when the high probability mode flag is ON is "02H (meaning 02 in hexadecimal notation, the same applies hereinafter)" is set. The flag value when the high frequency support mode flag is OFF is set to "00H", and the flag value when the high frequency support mode flag is ON is set to "01H". When the falling flag is OFF, the flag value is set to "00H", and when the falling flag is ON, the flag value is set to "10H".

Then, in the present embodiment, the game state determination value is a total value obtained by adding the flag values of the high-probability mode flag, the high-frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag.

FIG. 537(b) is a correspondence table showing a correspondence relationship between the game states that the pachinko machine 10 can take and the game state determination values corresponding to the respective game states. The game state determination value corresponding to each game state is as follows.
In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal state) that is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a low-probability low-frequency state), the high-probability mode flag is "00H", and the high frequency The support mode flag is "00H" and the falling flag is "00H". In this case, the game state determination value as the sum of these values is "00H".
In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a time saving state) that is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a low probability high frequency state), the high probability mode flag is "00H", and the high frequency The support mode flag is “01H” and the falling flag is “00H”, and in this case, the game state determination value as the sum of these values is “01H”.
In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as a probability variation state) that is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a high-probability high-frequency state), the high-probability mode flag is "02H", and the high frequency The support mode flag is "01H" and the falling flag is "00H". In this case, the game state determination value as the sum of these values is "03H".
In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a fall short time state) that is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a fall low probability high frequency state) due to a fall within the guaranteed number of games, a high probability mode flag Is "00H", the high-frequency support mode flag is "01H", and the falling flag is "10H". In this case, the game state determination value as the sum of these values is "11H".
・In the case of a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal fall state) in which a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as a low probability of fall low frequency state) due to a fall outside the guaranteed game count (after the guaranteed game count ends) , The high-probability mode flag is "00H", the high-frequency support mode flag is "00H", and the falling flag is "10H". In this case, the game state determination value as the sum of these values is "10H". Will be

As can be seen from FIG. 537(b), the gaming state determination value is uniquely derived in accordance with the combination of each flag value of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. Therefore, based on the game state determination value, uniquely, whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode, whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and whether the winning lottery is won It becomes possible to specify.

In the present embodiment, the addition process of adding the flag values of the high-probability mode flag, the high-frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag is performed, and the added value (summed value) is set as the game state determination value. On the other hand, as a modified example, as a configuration that uniquely specifies the game state determination value based on a subtraction process, a multiplication process, a division process, or an arithmetic process in which two or more of these processes and an addition process are combined. Good. In short, any arithmetic processing can be used as long as the gaming state determination value is uniquely derived according to the combination of each flag value of the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, and the falling flag. It may be. The game state determination value has been described above.

The description returns to FIG. 536. After calculating the game state determination value PN in step Sj1101, the process proceeds to step Sj1102. In step Sj1102, the calculated game state determination value PN is stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 64. After that, the game state determination value process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 532: Sj0706).

FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step Sj1201, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 536) is “00H”. When it is determined in step Sj1201 that the game state determination value PN is "00H" (Sj1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1202, and variable time setting processing for the low probability low frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is the low-probability low-frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1202, the variable time setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj1201 that the game state determination value PN is not "00H" (Sj1201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1203.

In step Sj1203, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 536) is “01H”. When it is determined in step Sj1203 that the game state determination value PN is "01H" (Sj1203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1204, and variable time setting processing for the low probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state is the variable time setting process when the gaming state is the low-probability high-frequency state. The variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj1204, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sj1203 that the game state determination value PN is not "01H" (Sj1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1205.

In step Sj1205, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination processing (FIG. 536) is "03H". When it is determined in step Sj1205 that the game state determination value PN is "03H" (Sj1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1206, and the variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state is executed. The variable time setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is a variable time setting process when the gaming state is the high-probability high-frequency state. The variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Sj1206, the variable time setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj1205 that the game state determination value PN is not "03H" (Sj1205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1207.

In step Sj1207, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN obtained by the game state determination process (FIG. 536) is “11H”. When it is determined in step Sj1207 that the game state determination value PN is "11H" (Sj1207: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1208, and the variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is a variation time setting process when the gaming state is the falling low probability high frequency state. The variable time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Sj1208, the variable time setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj1207 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Sj1207: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1209.

In step Sj1209, a variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is a variation time setting process when the gaming state is the falling low probability low frequency state. The variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Sj1209, the variable time setting process is ended.

<Variable time setting process for low probability low frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 538: Sj1202) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state. In step Sj1301, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sj1302.

In step Sj1302, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sj1302: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1303.

In step Sj1303, a big hit variation time table is specified from the low probability low frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 521, in the low-probability low-frequency game state, a normal game time effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal effect) is executed. Therefore, the variation time table of the variation time table group for the low probability low frequency state is a variation time table for normal performance. After executing step Sj1303, the process proceeds to step Sj1304.

In step Sj1304, the fluctuation time table specified in step Sj1303 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1301 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj1305, and the variable time information acquired in step Sj1304 is set in the variable time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the low probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1302 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is not a big hit (Sj1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1306, and it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON. To do. When it is determined in step Sj1306 that the reach generation flag is ON (Sj1306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1307 and the reach generation flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sj1308.

In step Sj1308, the variation time table for reach generation is specified from the variation time table group for low probability low frequency state stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1308, the process proceeds to step Sj1304. Since step Sj1304 and step Sj1305 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in step Sj1306 that the reach occurrence flag is not ON (Sj1306: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1309.

In step Sj1309, the reach time non-occurrence change time table is specified from the low probability low frequency state change time table group stored in the change time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1309, the process advances to step Sj1304 described above. Since step Sj1304 and step Sj1305 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

<Variable time setting process for low probability high frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 538: Sj1204) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the low probability high frequency state. In step Sj1401, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sj1402.

In step Sj1402, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a jackpot, the jackpot is won (Sj1402: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1403.

In step Sj1403, a big hit variation time table is specified from the low probability high frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the low-probability high-frequency game state is a game state in the game times after the normal jackpot is won, that is, a so-called time saving state. In this case, as described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the regular jackpot is won or the probability variation jackpot is won, the state-implicit effect is executed. Therefore, the variation time table of the low-probability high-frequency state variation time table group is a variation time table for the state-implicit effect. After executing step Sj1403, the process proceeds to step Sj1404.

In step Sj1404, the fluctuation time table specified in step Sj1403 is referred to, and the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1401 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj1405, and the variable time information acquired in step Sj1404 is set in the variable time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1402 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Sj1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1406. In step Sj1406, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj1406 that the reach occurrence flag is ON (Sj1406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1407.

In step Sj1407, the reach occurrence flag is turned off. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing Step Sj1407, the process proceeds to Step Sj1408.

In step Sj1408, the variation time table for reach generation is specified from the variation time table group for low probability high frequency state stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1408, the process advances to step Sj1404 described above. Since step Sj1404 and step Sj1405 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in step Sj1406 that the reach does not occur in the current game (Sj1406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1409.

In step Sj1409, the reach time non-occurrence change time table is specified from the low probability high frequency state change time table group stored in the change time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1409, the process advances to step Sj1404 described above. Since step Sj1404 and step Sj1405 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

<Variable time setting process for high-probability high-frequency state>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 538: Sj1206) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state. In step Sj1501, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sj1502.

In step Sj1502, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sj1502: YES), and the process proceeds to step Sj1503.

In step Sj1503, it is determined whether the guaranteed game time flag is ON. The guaranteed game time flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the current game state is within the guaranteed game number. The guaranteed game number flag is a flag that is turned on when it is within the guaranteed game number and turned off when it is outside the guaranteed game number. In the present embodiment, the high-probability high-frequency effect is set when the big hit in the high-probability high-frequency state is set to different effects depending on whether it is within the guaranteed game count or outside the guaranteed game count. In the state, when the jackpot flag is ON, a process of identifying whether it is within the guaranteed game number or outside the guaranteed game number is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the processing in the main control device 60, there is a case of being a big hit in the high-probability high-frequency state, both within the guaranteed game count and outside the guaranteed game count. The variation times of game times are set to different values. The process will be described later. In addition, when the number of guaranteed games is within the guaranteed number of games and when the guaranteed number of games is out of the guaranteed number of times, the probability of reach occurrence in the relevant game times is set to have different probabilities when a big hit occurs in the high probability high frequency state. May be

When the big hit is won within the guaranteed game count of the high probability high frequency state, the state non-explicit effect is executed. Specifically, from the start of the game time, execute the effect to change the LCD design without suggesting whether the game time is in the high probability state or the low probability state, and then the reach effect and the jackpot effect. To execute.

On the other hand, if you win the jackpot outside the guaranteed number of games in the high probability high frequency state, we will direct the player to guess whether you have won the jackpot or the falling lottery, and then you will win the jackpot. Perform the announcement to announce. In this embodiment, outside the guaranteed number of games in the high probability high frequency state, whether the jackpot is won or the falling lottery is won, the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game number. Let Therefore, the player who recognizes that the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game game, guesses whether the jackpot is won or the falling lottery is won. Therefore, in accordance with the psychology of the player, in the effect, the player is inferred whether the jackpot is won or the falling lottery is won. In the present embodiment, a battle effect in which a character showing the player side and a character showing the enemy side battle each other is executed as an effect to make the player guess whether the jackpot is won or the falling lottery is won. Then, in the case of a big hit, an effect in which the character showing the player side wins (winning effect) is executed. Hereinafter, a series of productions including a battle presentation and a victory presentation is also referred to as a battle victory presentation. In addition, when the falling lottery is won, an effect of defeating the character indicating the player side (defeat effect) is executed. Hereinafter, a series of productions including the battle production and the defeat production is also referred to as a battle defeat production.

The description returns to FIG. 541. When it is determined in step Sj1503 that the guaranteed game time flag is not ON (Sj:1504:NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1504. In step Sj1504, the fluctuation time table for the large-number-of-guaranteed-games big hit is specified from the fluctuation time table group for high probability high frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. As described above, step Sj1504 is a big hit in the case of a high probability and high frequency state outside the guaranteed game count, and thus the specified fluctuation time table is a fluctuation time table for a battle winning effect. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the high probability high frequency state outside the guaranteed game count, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the start of the game count to shift to the high probability low frequency state. Regardless, the game state when setting the variable time is a high probability high frequency state, in the process of the present embodiment, the process of calculating the game state determination value (FIG. 532: Sj0705) is executed first, This is because after that, the variable time setting process (FIG. 532: Sj0706) is executed and then the process (FIG. 532: Sj0712) for turning off the high frequency support mode flag is executed. After executing step Sj1504, the process proceeds to step Sj1505.

In step Sj1505, the fluctuation time table identified in step Sj1504 is referenced to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1501. In a succeeding step Sj1506, the variable time information acquired in the step Sj1505 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj1503 that the guaranteed game time flag is ON (Sj1503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1507. In step Sj1507, the variable time table for the big hit within the guaranteed game count is specified from the variable time table group for the high probability high frequency state stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. As described above, step Sj1507 is processing in the case of a big hit in the case of a high-probability high-frequency state within the guaranteed game count, so the specified variation time table is a variation time table for state-implicit production. .. Then, it progresses to step Sj1505. Since step Sj1505 and step Sj1506 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1502 that the result of the hit lottery related to the current game is not a big hit (Sj1502: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1508, and it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON. To do. When it is determined in step Sj1508 that the reach generation flag is ON (Sj1508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1509, and the reach generation flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sj1510.

In step Sj1510, a reach time variation time table is specified from the high probability high frequency state variation time table group stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. As described above, step Sj1510 is a process in the case of reach occurrence in the case of a high probability high frequency state within the guaranteed game number and outside the guaranteed game number, so the specified fluctuation time table is for the state non-explicit effect Is a variable time table of. After executing step Sj1510, the process proceeds to step Sj1505. Since step Sj1505 and step Sj1506 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in step Sj1508 that the reach occurrence flag is not ON (Sj1508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1511.

In step Sj1511, the reach time non-occurrence change time table is specified from the low probability low frequency state change time table group stored in the change time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1511, the process proceeds to step Sj1505 described above. Since step Sj1505 and step Sj1506 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

<Variation time setting process for falling low probability high frequency state>
Next, the variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described. The variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 538: Sj1208) of the variation time setting process.

FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state. In step Sj1601, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sj1602.

In step Sj1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a big hit (Sj1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1603.

In step Sj1603, it is determined whether the game rotation drop flag is ON. As described above, the game spin-down flag is a flag for identifying that the player has won the drop lottery in the game cycle to be processed. The game spin-off flag is turned ON when the drop lottery is won, and is turned OFF at the end of the game time when the fall lottery is won. That is, in step Sj1603, the game state of the current falling low probability high frequency state is caused by winning the falling lottery in the game time that is the processing target, or the game time executed before the game time. It is determined whether it is caused by winning the falling lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the falling lottery is won in the game times and the jackpot is also won, a specific effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the process of step Sj1603, whether the current game state of the falling low probability high frequency state is caused by winning the falling lottery in the game time to be processed, or before the game time. It is determined whether or not it is due to winning the falling lottery in the game times executed in.

When it is determined in step Sj1603 that the game rotation drop flag is ON (Sj1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1604. In step Sj1604, the fluctuation time table for the falling big hit is specified from the fluctuation time table group for the falling low probability high frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Since the case where step Sj1604 is executed is a case where the player has won the falling lottery and has transitioned to the low-probability high-frequency state, the state before falling is the high-probability high-frequency state within the guaranteed game count (FIG. 524). reference). Therefore, the fluctuation time table for the falling big hit specified by this process is a fluctuation time table for the falling big hit game times effect within the guaranteed game count. After executing step Sj1604, the process proceeds to step Sj1605.

In step Sj1605, a falling jackpot flag within the guaranteed game count is set to ON. The guaranteed game number of falls jackpot flag is a flag that is turned on when it is specified that the guaranteed game number of falls is a jackpot, and is turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed due to the jackpot. The guaranteed game number of falls jackpot flag is used when determining an opening effect executed in the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the guaranteed game count, a falling big hit in the guaranteed game count opening effect (see FIG. 524) is executed as the opening effect. In other words, the guaranteed game number-of-falls jackpot flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the guaranteed game number-of-falls jackpot is a hit when determining the opening effect.

After executing step Sj1605, the process proceeds to step Sj1606. In step Sj1606, the variation time table identified in step Sj1605 is referenced to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1601. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj1607, and the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sj1606 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variation time setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj1603 that the game rotation drop flag is not ON (Sj1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1608. In step Sj1608, the fluctuation time table for jackpot is specified from the fluctuation time table group for falling low probability high frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. When the step Sj1608 is executed, the relevant game time to be processed is within the guaranteed game time, and the falling lottery is won in the game time executed prior to the game time, resulting in a low probability high frequency state. This is the case of a falling pullback jackpot that was won in that state (see FIG. 521). Therefore, the variation time table for the jackpot specified by this process is a variation time table for the fall back big hit effect. After executing step Sj1608, the process proceeds to step Sj1609.

In step Sj1609, the fall pullback jackpot flag is turned ON. The fall pullback big hit flag is a flag that is turned on when it is specified that it is a fall pullback big hit, and is turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed due to the big hit. The fall pullback jackpot flag is used when determining the opening effect executed in the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. As described above, in the case of the falling back jackpot, the jackpot type in the falling back jackpot is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine 10 (the most advantageous jackpot: the present implementation. If it is 16R probability variation jackpot in the form), in the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode executed immediately after the game times that was won for the fall pullback jackpot, the fall pullback jackpot, and the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot. The effect that suggests the details of the current state of being a big hit by suggesting that (falling pullback most advantageous big hit opening effect) is executed (see FIG. 521). That is, the fall pullback jackpot flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the fall pullback jackpot is hit when determining the opening effect. After executing step Sj1609, the process proceeds to step Sj1606. Since step Sj1606 and step Sj1607 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1602 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Sj1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1610. In step Sj1610, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj1610 that the reach generation flag is ON (Sj1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1611 and the reach generation flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sj1612.

In step Sj1612, the fluctuation time table for reaching is specified from the fluctuation time table group for fall low probability high frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The variation time table is a variation time table for state-implicit presentation. After executing step Sj1612, the process proceeds to step Sj1606. Since step Sj1606 and step Sj1607 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in step Sj1610 that the reach occurrence flag is not ON (Sj1610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1613. In step Sj1613, a fluctuation time table for non-reach occurrence is specified from the fluctuation time table group for falling low probability high frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After executing step Sj1613, the process proceeds to step Sj1606 described above. Since step Sj1606 and step Sj1607 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

<Variation time setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency>
Next, the variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described. The variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 538: Sj1209) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the low fall probability low frequency state. In step Sj1701, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sj1702.

In step Sj1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a big hit (Sj1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1703.

In step Sj1703, the fluctuation time table for the big hit of the fall is specified from the fluctuation time table group for the falling low probability low frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the case where step Sj1703 is executed, the game cycle to be processed is a winning lottery in the game cycle in which the high probability and high frequency state is continuously executed outside the guaranteed game cycle and the relevant game cycle has fallen. This is the case when the jackpot is won in the game time (see FIG. 525). Therefore, the fluctuation time table for the falling jackpot specified by this processing is a fluctuation time table for the falling jackpot performance outside the guaranteed game count. After executing step Sj1703, the process proceeds to step Sj1704.

In step Sj1704, the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is set to ON. The guaranteed game count outfall big hit flag is a flag that is turned on when it is specified that it is a guaranteed game count outfall big hit, and is turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed due to the big hit. The guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is used when determining the opening effect executed in the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode. As described above, in the case of the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot, the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot opening effect (see FIG. 525) is executed as the opening effect. That is, the guaranteed game count outfall big hit flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the guaranteed game count outfall big hit when determining the opening effect.

After executing step Sj1704, the process proceeds to step Sj1705. In step Sj1705, the variable time table identified in step Sj1703 is referred to, and the variable time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sj1701 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sj1706, and the variation time information acquired in step Sj1705 is set in the variation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1702 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Sj1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1707. In step Sj1707, the fluctuation time table for falling off is specified from the fluctuation time table group for falling low probability low frequency state stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. The case where step Sj1707 is executed is a process executed only for the game times which are won in the falling lottery outside the guaranteed number of games in the high-probability and high-frequency state and out of the winning lottery. In this case, an effect that makes the player guess whether the jackpot is won or the lottery is won is performed, and then an effect is announced to notify that the player has won the lottery. In the present embodiment, the battle defeat effect described above is executed. Therefore, the variation time table identified in step Sj1707 is a variation time table for battle defeat production. After executing step Sj1707, the process proceeds to step Sj1705. Since step Sj1705 and step Sj1706 have already been described, description thereof will be omitted.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation ending process will be described. The fluctuation ending process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game time control process (FIG. 531: Sj0604).

FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation ending process. In step Sj1801, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sj1801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 538) described above. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step Sj1801 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sj1801: NO), the fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Sj1801, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sj1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1802, and the first game symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b correspond to the current game time. The process of ending the variation of the symbol in the symbol display portion is performed. In a succeeding step Sj1803, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sj1803, the process proceeds to step Sj1804.

In step Sj1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 16R regular jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If none of the jackpot flags is ON in step Sj1804 (Sj1804: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1805.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1804 that any of the jackpot flags is ON (Sj1804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1816. In step S1816, the open/close execution mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sj1817, and when it is determined that the falling flag is ON (Sj1817: YES), the process proceeds to step S1818 and the falling flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S1814. If it is determined in step Sj1817 that the falling flag is not ON (Sj1817: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1814 without executing step Sj1818.

In step Sj1805, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sj1805 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sj1805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1806. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1805 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sj1805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1817. The processing of step Sj1817 and step Sj1818 has already been described, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Then, it progresses to step Sj1814.

In step Sj1806, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Sj1806 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sj1806: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1807, and the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. After executing step Sj1807, the process proceeds to step Sj1808. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1806 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is 0 or less (Sj1806: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1808 without executing step Sj1807.

In step Sj1808, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sj1808 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sj1808: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1809, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is within the guaranteed game number. Or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0.

When it is determined in step Sj1809 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sj1809: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Sj1810. In step Sj1810, the guaranteed game time flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sj1811. In step Sj1811, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing Step Sj1811, the process proceeds to Step Sj1812.

In step Sj1812, it is determined whether the falling flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sj1812 that the fall flag is ON (Sj1812: YES), the flow advances to step Sj1813 to turn off the fall flag. After executing step Sj1813, the process proceeds to step Sj1814.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1808 that the high-probability mode flag is ON (Sj1808: YES), or if it is determined in step Sj1809 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Sj1809: YES), the fall flag is determined in step Sj1812. When it is determined that is not ON (Sj1812: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sj1814.

In step Sj1814, it is determined whether or not the game rotation drop flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj1814 that the game rotation drop flag is ON (Sj1814: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1815, and the game rotation drop flag is turned OFF. Then, the fluctuation ending process is ended. When it is determined in step Sj1814 that the game rotation drop flag is not ON (Sj1814: NO), the fluctuation ending process is ended as it is.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 530: Sj0507).

FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sj1901, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the special winning opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sj1901 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sj1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1902, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening/closing processing period, which is a period in which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b is completed.

When it is determined in step Sj1902 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sj1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1903, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step Sj1903 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sj1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj1904, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj1904 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sj1904: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1905. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1904 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sj1904: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended.

In step Sj1905, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sj1906. In step Sj1906, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sj1907.

In step Sj1907, opening/closing scenario setting processing for setting the opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines a pattern of opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in the present embodiment, a condition for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as "opening condition"), It is a program in which a condition for shifting the open/close door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as "closed condition") is recorded. The open/close scenario is stored in the open/close scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

In this embodiment, the open condition and the closed condition are set as follows.
(Opening condition)
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open/close execution mode.
(Closed condition)
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration time (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a since the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.

When the items in the opening conditions are satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state. Further, when either one of the two items in the closing condition is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sj1907, the operation proceeds to step Sj1908 described above.

In step Sj1908, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). The details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sj1908, the process proceeds to Step Sj1909.

In step Sj1909, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (Sj0503) in the normal process (FIG. 530). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the special winning opening/closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sj1909, the process advances to step Sj1910 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sj1903 that the opening period flag is ON (Sj1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1911.

In step Sj1911, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". When it is determined in step Sj1911 that the opening period has ended (Sj1911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1912 and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sj1913.

In step Sj1913, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step Sj1913, the process proceeds to Step Sj1914.

In step Sj1914, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. In a succeeding step Sj1915, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sj1915, the present game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sj1902 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sj1902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1916 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sj1916, the process proceeds to Step Sj1917.

In step Sj1917, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". To do. When it is determined in step Sj1917 that the special winning opening opening/closing process has been completed (Sj1917: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1918. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj1917 that the special winning opening opening/closing process is not completed (Sj1917: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sj1918, the open/close processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sj1919.

In step Sj1919, round display termination processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sj1919, the process proceeds to step Sj1920.

In step Sj1920, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length ending time is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sj1920, the process proceeds to step Sj1921.

In step Sj1921, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The ending command includes information on the ending time set in the ending time setting process (Sj1919). The sound emission control device 90 executes the ending effect based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sj1921, the process proceeds to Step Sj1922.

In step Sj1922, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step Sj1901 that the ending period flag is ON (Sj1901: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sj1923.

In step Sj1923, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sj1920), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sj1920 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Sj1923: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj1924.

In step Sj1924, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sj1925, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sj1925, the process proceeds to step Sj1926, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing Step Sj1926, the process proceeds to Step Sj1927.

In step Sj1927, an open/close execution mode end command is set. The set open/close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sj0503 in the normal process (FIG. 530). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect in the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening/closing execution mode end command. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj1923 that the ending period has not ended (Sj1923: NO), the present game state transition processing is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 545: Sj1908) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step Sj2001, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed winning game falling tumble jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj2001 that the falling number of hits within guaranteed game jackpot flag is ON (Sj2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2002.

In step Sj2002, an opening time setting process for falling big hits within the guaranteed game count is executed. Specifically, in the opening period, a time preset as a time required to execute the falling within the guaranteed game count jackpot jackpot effect is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). In addition, as described above, the falling jackpot big hit opening effect within the guaranteed game number is an opening effect that suggests that the falling jackpot is won within the guaranteed game number. After executing step Sj2002, the present opening time setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sj2001 that the falling number of guaranteed games jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2003.

In step Sj2003, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj2003 that the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is ON (Sj2003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2004. In step Sj2004, an opening time setting process for the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot is executed. Specifically, the time preset as the time required to execute the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot opening effect in the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). Note that, as described above, the guaranteed winning game outside falling jackpot opening effect is an opening effect that suggests that the falling jackpot is won outside the guaranteed playing number. After executing step Sj2004, the present opening time setting process ends.

If it is determined in step Sj2003 that the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2005.

In step Sj2005, it is determined whether or not the fall-back withdrawal jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj2005 that the fall pullback jackpot flag is ON (Sj2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2006. In step Sj2006, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the 16R probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sj2006 that the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot (Sj2006: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2007.

In step Sj2007, the opening time setting process for the falling pullback most advantageous big hit is executed. Specifically, the time preset as the time required to execute the falling pullback most advantageous big hit opening effect in the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). As described above, the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect is an effect that suggests that the winning jackpot is won within the guaranteed game number after winning the falling lottery during the high probability mode. After executing step Sj2004, the present opening time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sj2005 that the falling back jackpot jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2005: NO), and when it is determined in step Sj2006 that the jackpot type is not the 16R probability variation jackpot (Sj2006: NO), step Sj2008. Proceed to.

In step Sj2008, normal opening time setting processing is executed. Specifically, the time preset as the time required to execute the normal opening effect in the opening period is set as the time of the opening period (opening time). Ordinary opening performance is an opening performance other than a specific opening performance, such as the above-mentioned guaranteed play times falling within the guaranteed game jackpot opening effect, guaranteed playing times outside the winning jackpot opening effect, and falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect. I mean. In the normal opening effect, an effect that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been won is executed. After executing step Sj2008, the present opening time setting process is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 545: Sj1916) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening/closing process. In step Sj2101, it is determined whether the open/close door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Sj2101 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sj2101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2102.

In step Sj2102, it is determined whether the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sj2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sj2102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2103.

In step Sj2103, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sj2104.

In step Sj2104, an opening/closing door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sj2104, the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2102 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sj2102: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sj2103 and Sj2104.

When it is determined in step Sj2101 that the opening/closing door 36b is open (Sj2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2105.

In step Sj2105, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sj2105 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sj2105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2106.

In step Sj2106, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sj2107.

In step Sj2107, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sj2107, the special winning opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2105 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sj2105: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sj2106 and Sj2107.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 545: Sj1925) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 548 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sj2201, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit in the big hit flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sj2201 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (Sj2201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2202 and the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag in the RAM64 are selected. The flag that is on is turned off. After executing step Sj2202, the process proceeds to step Sj2203.

In step Sj2203, it is determined whether or not the falling within the guaranteed game count jackpot flag is ON. In step Sj2203, when it is determined that the guaranteed game number of falls jackpot flag is ON (Sj2203: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2204, and the guaranteed game number of falls jackpot flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sj2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2203 that the falling number of guaranteed games jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2205 without executing step Sj2204.

In step Sj2205, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is ON. In step Sj2205, when it is determined that the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is ON (Sj2205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2206, and the guarantee game count outfall fall jackpot flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sj2207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2205 that the guaranteed game count outfall fall jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2207 without executing step Sj2206.

In step Sj2207, it is determined whether or not the fall-back withdrawal jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sj2207 that the fall pullback jackpot flag is ON (Sj2207: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sj2208 and the fall pullback jackpot flag is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sj2209. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2207 that the fall-back withdrawal jackpot flag is not ON (Sj2207: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2209 without executing step Sj2208.

In step Sj2209, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then in step Sj2210, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Then, it progresses to step Sj2211.

In step Sj2211, 100 is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC is a value preset as the guaranteed game number, and is 100 in this embodiment. Then, it progresses to step Sj2212.

In step Sj2212, the guaranteed game time flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step Sj2213, and a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set as. Then, it progresses to step Sj2214.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2201 that the 16R certainty jackpot flag and the 8R certainty jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (Sj2201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2215 and the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are selected. The flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sj2216.

In step Sj2216, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, it advances to step Sj2217, 100 is set to the guarantee game frequency counter PNC which is provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64. Then, in step Sj2218, the guaranteed game time flag is turned ON. After executing step Sj2218, the process proceeds to step Sj2219, and a low probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, is sent to the sound emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. Then, it progresses to step Sj2214.

In step Sj2214, a high frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 530: Sj0508).

FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step Sj2301, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sj2301 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sj2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2302.

In step Sj2302, it is determined whether or not the support win flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sj2302 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sj2302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2303.

In step Sj2303, it is determined whether or not the value of the power combination timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the electric-power-use timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the electric utility timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sj2303 that the value of the electric power combination timer counter Td is not "0" (Sj2303: NO), the main electric power combination support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sj2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2304.

In step Sj2304, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sj2304 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sj2304: YES), the flow advances to step Sj2305 to set the off display, and then the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj2304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sj2304: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2306.

In step Sj2306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0". If it is determined in step Sj2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is "0" (Sj2306: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj2306 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (Sj2306: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2307.

In step Sj2307, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, and then the process proceeds to step Sj2308 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sj2307 (Sj2307: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Sj2308 (Sj2308: YES), the flow advances to step Sj2309 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the timer counter Td for electric roles. The power-use timer counter Td is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sj2310.

In step Sj2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sj2309 is support win. If it is determined in step Sj2310 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sj2310: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2311 and the support winning flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sj2312, and a high-frequency support mode power combination opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, it is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high frequency support mode is set. In the opening/closing scenario, an opening condition for the electric accessory 34a (a condition for opening the electric part) and a closing condition for the electric part 34a (a condition for closing the electric part) are set. In step Sj2312, the high-frequency support mode electric power opening/closing scenario setting process is executed, and then the main electric power supporting support process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2310 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (Sj2310: NO), the processing for supporting electric roles is ended without executing the processing of steps Sj2311 and Sj2312. ..

If it is determined in step Sj2307 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Sj2307: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Sj2308 (Sj2308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2313 and the electric auditors item open lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric part holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 or 1, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the timer counter Td for electric roles. Then, it progresses to step Sj2314.

In step Sj2314, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sj2313 is support win. If it is determined in step Sj2314 that the support is not won (Sj2314: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2314 that the support is won (Sj2314: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2315 and the support winning flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sj2316, and the low-frequency support mode power combination opening/closing scenario setting process is executed. Specifically, it is a process of setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the electric accessory 34a when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the low frequency support mode is set. In the opening/closing scenario, an opening condition for the electric accessory 34a (a condition for opening the electric part) and a closing condition for the electric part 34a (a condition for closing the electric part) are set. In step Sj2316, the low-frequency support mode electric power combination opening/closing scenario setting process is executed, and then the main electric power support supporting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2302 that the support winning flag is ON (Sj2302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2317, and it is determined whether the value of the power combination timer counter Td is “0”. If it is determined in step Sj2317 that the value of the electric power combination timer counter Td is not "0" (Sj2317: NO), since the pattern display in the universal figure unit 38 is being changed, the main electric power combination support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj2317 that the value of the electric power combination timer counter Td is “0” (Sj2317: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2318.

In step Sj2318, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step Sj2319, and the support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2301 that the in-support flag is ON (Sj2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2320, and an electric role opening/closing control process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Details of the electric part opening/closing control process will be described later. After executing Step Sj2320, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Opening/closing electric power>
Next, the power combination opening/closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 549: Sj2320) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 550 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process. In step Sj2401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. When it is determined in step Sj2401 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sj2401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2402.

In step Sj2402, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the set opening/closing scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened (one time in the present embodiment) when winning one electric role opening lottery is counted, and the time for maintaining the closed state of the electric accessory 34a is counted. It is determined whether or not the condition for shifting the electric accessory 34a to the open state is satisfied by counting with a timer counter whether or not the time has elapsed and the timing for opening has been reached. When it is determined in step Sj2402 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is not satisfied (Sj2402: NO), the electric-role combination opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj2402 that the opening condition of the opening/closing scenario is satisfied (Sj2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2403.

In step Sj2403, the electric accessory 34a is opened. After executing step Sj2403, the process advances to step Sj2404.

In step Sj2404, a power combination release command is set. The electric power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the electric role releasing command executes the setting for executing the effect for releasing the electric role. After that, the electric part opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj2401 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sj2401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2405.

In step Sj2405, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the electric accessory 34a is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sj2405 that the closing condition is not satisfied (Sj2405: NO), the electric power combination opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj2405 that the closing condition is satisfied (Sj2405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2406.

In step Sj2406, the electric accessory 34a is closed. After executing step Sj2406, the process proceeds to step Sj2407.

In step Sj2407, a power combination closing command is set. The electric role close command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 530: step Sj0503) of the normal process. The voice light-emitting device that has received the electric role closing command executes the setting for executing the effect for closing the electric role. After that, the electric part opening/closing process is ended.

<<J6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sj2501, a command storing process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Sj2501, the process proceeds to Step Sj2502.

In step Sj2502, a game game effect process is executed. In the game time effect process, a process relating to an effect executed in the game time from the start of the variation of the symbol to the stop thereof is performed. Details of the game game effect processing will be described later. After executing Step Sj2502, the process proceeds to Step Sj2503.

In step Sj2503, opening/closing execution mode effect processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect process, effects related to effects in the opening period, the opening/closing process period, and the ending period are performed. Details of the opening/closing execution mode effect process will be described later. After executing Step Sj2503, the process proceeds to Step Sj2504.

In step Sj2504, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing the game state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demo moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as the moving image showing the game state, a background moving image determined according to the game state determination value PN included in the game state command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background moving image showing that the high frequency support mode is continuing, a background moving image showing that the high frequency support mode is finished, and a background moving image showing that the high probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sj2504, the process proceeds to step Sj2505.

In step Sj2505, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step Sj2505, the process advances to step Sj2506.

In step Sj2506, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sj2506, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for game times production>
Next, the game time effect processing will be described. The game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 551: Sj2502).

FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing processing for game times effect. In step Sj2601, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command have been received. When it is determined in step Sj2601 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sj2601: NO), this game time effect processing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2601 that the variation command and the type command have been received (Sj2601: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sj2602.

In step Sj2602, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence/absence of a reach, the change time, and the game state determination value PN are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sj2603.

In step Sj2603, a game game effect pattern setting process is executed. The game time effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (contents of notice effect, reach effect and execution timing) to be executed in the current game time based on the effect pattern table. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sj2603, the process proceeds to Step Sj2604.

In step Sj2604, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing Step Sj2604, the process proceeds to Step Sj2605.

In step Sj2605, a process for setting a variation display pattern for the current game is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the variation time information and the stop symbol information set in step Sj2604 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Sj2606.

In step Sj2606, the effect command, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information set in the current game time are set in the effect command. Then, the process proceeds to step Sj2607, and the effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sj2607, the process proceeds to step Sj2608, and the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sj2608, the present game time effect processing is ended.

<Game time production pattern setting process>
Next, the game time effect pattern setting process will be described. The game time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect process (FIG. 552: Sj2603).

FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sj2701, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552) is “00H”. When it is determined in step Sj2701 that the game state determination value PN is "00H" (Sj2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2702, and effect pattern setting processing for the low probability low frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the game state is the low-probability low-frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing Step Sj2702, the variable time setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2701 that the gaming state determination value PN is not "00H" (Sj2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2703.

In step Sj2703, it is determined whether the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552) is “01H”. When it is determined in step Sj2703 that the game state determination value PN is “01H” (Sj2703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2704 and the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the gaming state is the low-probability high-frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2704, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2703 that the game state determination value PN is not "01H" (Sj2703: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2705.

In step Sj2705, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552) is “03H”. When it is determined in step Sj2705 that the game state determination value PN is "03H" (Sj2705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2706, and effect pattern setting processing for high-probability high-frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the gaming state is the high-probability high-frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2706, the present effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sj2705 that the game state determination value PN is not "03H" (Sj2705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2707.

In step Sj2707, it is determined whether or not the game state determination value PN stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552) is “11H”. When it is determined in step Sj2707 that the game state determination value PN is “11H” (Sj2707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2708, and the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is the effect pattern setting process when the game state is the falling low probability high frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2708, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2707 that the game state determination value PN is not "11H" (Sj2707: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2709.

In step Sj2709, an effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is an effect pattern setting process when the game state is the falling low probability low frequency state. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described later. After executing step Sj2709, the present effect pattern setting process ends.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability low frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 553: Sj2702) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability low-frequency state is a process of setting the effect pattern in the game game when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state. In step Sj2801, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning from the jackpot presence/absence information stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552). .. When it is determined in step Sj2801 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sj2801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2802.

In step Sj2802, the effect pattern setting process for the big hit in the low probability and low frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game cycle to be processed, an effect pattern for executing an effect that notifies the jackpot winning in the normal game time effect (see FIG. 521) is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2801 that the result of the hit determination in this game time is not a big hit (Sj2801: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sj2803 to determine whether a reach occurs in this game time. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 552). If it is determined in step Sj2803 that the reach determination in the current game count is reach occurrence (Sj2803: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sj2804.

In step Sj2804, the effect pattern setting process for reach generation in the low-probability low-frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game cycle to be processed, an effect pattern for executing an effect for notifying the reach occurrence in the normal game time effect (see FIG. 521) is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is ended.

If it is determined in step Sj2803 that the result of the hit/no hit determination in this game game is not the reach occurrence (Sj2803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2805.

In step Sj2805, an effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence in the low-probability low-frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game time to be processed, an effect pattern for executing an effect that does not reach (disengage) in the normal game time effect (see FIG. 521) is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability low frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability high frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 553: Sj2704) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the low-probability high-frequency state is a process of setting the effect pattern in the game game when the pachinko machine 10 is in a so-called time saving state. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state. In step Sj2901, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in this game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning from the jackpot presence/absence information stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552). .. When it is determined in step Sj2901 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sj2901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2902.

In step Sj2902, the effect pattern setting process for the big hit in the low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game game to be processed, an effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect (for big hit) is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj2901 that the result of the win/no win determination in this game round is not a big hit (Sj2901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2903 to determine whether or not a reach occurs in this game round. judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 552). When it is determined in step Sj2903 that the reach determination in the current game count is reach occurrence (Sj2903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj2904.

In step Sj2904, the effect pattern setting process for reach generation in the low-probability high-frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game game to be processed, an effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect (for reach generation) is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj2903 that the result of the hit/non-win determination in the current game is not the reach occurrence (Sj2903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj2905.

In step Sj2905, an effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence in a low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, in the game game to be processed, an effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect (for reach non-occurrence) is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the low probability high frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for high-probability high-frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 553: Sj2706) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state is a process of setting the effect pattern in the game game when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called probability change state. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the high-probability high-frequency state. In step Sj3001, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2601 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552). .. When it is determined in step Sj3001 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sj3001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3002.

In step Sj3002, it is determined whether or not the guaranteed game is being played based on the information about the guaranteed game time flag included in the variation command stored in the command storage process (FIG. 551: Sj2501). When it is determined in step Sj3002 that the guaranteed game is not in progress (Sj3002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3003.

In step Sj3003, the setting process of the effect pattern for the large number of guaranteed games outside the high probability and high frequency state is executed. Specifically, the effect pattern for executing the battle victory effect in the game cycle to be processed is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sj3002 that the guaranteed game is in progress (Sj3002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3004. In step Sj3004, an effect pattern setting process for a big hit within the guaranteed game count in the high probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect is set in the game time of the processing target. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj3001 that the result of the win/no win determination in this game round is not a big hit (Sj3001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3005, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in this game round. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 552). When it is determined in step Sj3005 that the reach determination has been made in the present game times (reach occurrence) (Sj3005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3006.

In step Sj3006, an effect pattern setting process for reach generation in a high-probability high-frequency state is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect is set in the game time of the processing target. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

If it is determined in step Sj3005 that the reach determination in the current game has not occurred (Sj3005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3007. In step Sj3007, an effect pattern setting process for reach non-occurrence in a high probability high frequency state is executed. That is, the effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect in the game time of the processing target is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the high probability high frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for falling low probability high frequency state>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 553: Sj2708) of the effect pattern setting process. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state is to set the effect pattern in the game time when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called short falling time state. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability high frequency state. In step Sj3101, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning from the jackpot presence/absence information stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552). .. When it is determined in step Sj3101 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sj3101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3102.

In step Sj3102, based on the information about the falling lottery in the game time included in the variation command stored in the command storing process (FIG. 551: Sj2501), whether or not the falling lottery is won in the game time being the processing target. To judge. When it is determined in step Sj3102 that the falling lottery has been won in the game time to be processed (Sj3102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3103.

In step Sj3103, the setting process of the effect pattern for the falling big hit in the falling low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern for executing a falling jackpot effect within the guaranteed game number is set in the game object to be processed. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the main fall low probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj3102 that the falling lottery has not been won in the game cycle to be processed (Sj3102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3104. In step Sj3104, the effect pattern setting process for the big hit in the falling low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern for executing a fall pullback jackpot effect at the game time to be processed is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the main fall low probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj3101 that the result of the hit determination in the current game time is not a big hit (Sj3101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3105, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the game time this time. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2602 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 552). In step Sj3105, when it is determined that the reach determination is the reach occurrence in the current game time (Sj3105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3106.

In step Sj3106, an effect pattern setting process for reach generation in the fall low probability high frequency state is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect is set in the game time of the processing target. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the main fall low probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj3105 that the result of the hit/no hit determination in this game game is not the occurrence of reach (Sj3105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3107. In step Sj3107, the setting process of the effect pattern for the non-reach occurrence of the falling low probability high frequency state is executed. That is, the effect pattern for executing the state-implicit effect in the game time of the processing target is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the non-reach occurrence in the falling low probability high frequency state is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for low probability of falling and low frequency>
Next, the effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state will be described. The effect pattern setting processing for the falling low probability low frequency state is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 553: Sj2709) of the effect pattern setting processing. The effect pattern setting process for the falling low probability low frequency state is to set the effect pattern in the game time when the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called falling normal state. Hereinafter, the effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern setting process for the low fall probability low frequency state. In step Sj3201, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in the current game is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/judging determination is a jackpot winning, from the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step Sj2601 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 552). .. When it is determined in step Sj3201 that the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (Sj3201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3202.

In step Sj3202, an effect pattern setting process for a falling big jackpot in a low falling probability low frequency state is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern for executing the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot effect at the game object to be processed is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for the main fall low probability high frequency state is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj3201 that the result of the win/no win determination is not the jackpot win (Sj3201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3203. In step Sj3203, a process for setting an effect pattern for falling off is executed. Specifically, the effect pattern for executing the battle defeat effect in the game cycle to be processed is set. After that, the effect pattern setting process for this falling low probability low frequency state is ended.

<Open/close execution mode effect setting process>
Next, the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process will be described. The open/close execution mode effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 551: Sj2503) of the timer interrupt process. The opening/closing execution mode effect setting process is a process for setting the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the opening period, the opening/closing process period, and the ending period.

FIG. 559 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process. In step Sj3301, it is determined whether an opening command has been received. When it is determined in step Sj3301 that the opening command is received (Sj3301:YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3302.

In step Sj3302, an opening effect process is executed. The opening effect process is a process of setting the effect pattern of the opening effect executed in the opening period. Details of the opening effect process will be described later. After performing the process in step Sj3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3301 that the opening command has not been received (Sj3301: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sj3303.

In step Sj3303, it is determined whether the opening/closing process start command has been received. When it is determined in step Sj3303 that the opening/closing process start command has been received (Sj3303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3304. In step Sj3304, the opening/closing processing period effect processing is executed. The opening/closing process period effect process is a process of setting an effect pattern of the opening/closing process period effect executed in the opening/closing process period. Specifically, an effect pattern is set to notify the progress of the round game or to notify the player that the jackpot has been won. After executing Step Sj3304, the process proceeds to Step S3305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3303 that the opening/closing process start command has not been received (Sj3303: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sj3305.

In step Sj3305, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. When it is determined in step Sj3305 that the ending command has been received (Sj3305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3306.

In step Sj3306, ending effect processing is executed. The ending effect process is a process of setting the effect pattern of the ending effect executed in the ending period. Specifically, it suggests information about the game times to be started after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, or sets an effect pattern for notifying the player that the jackpot has been won. After executing step S3306, the main opening/closing execution mode effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3305 that the ending command has not been received (Sj3305: NO), the main opening/closing execution mode effect setting process is directly terminated.

<Opening production process>
Next, the opening effect process will be described. As described above, the opening effect process is a process of setting the effect pattern of the opening effect executed in the opening period. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the opening effect is determined based on the game state of the jackpot winning game times that has caused the opening/closing execution mode including the opening period to be executed. Which kind of opening effect is set is determined by the opening time setting process (FIG. 546) by the main control device 60, and the audio emission control device 90 transmits the opening command transmitted from the main control device 60. Recognize the type of opening effect set by.

FIG. 560 is a flowchart showing the opening effect process. In step Sj3401, the opening effect set in the opening command received from main controller 60 is specified. After executing Step Sj3401, the process proceeds to Step Sj3402. In step Sj3402, it is determined whether or not the set effect is the guaranteed winning game falling big hit opening effect. If it is determined in step S3402 that the set effect is the guaranteed winning game falling hit jackpot opening effect (Sj3402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3403. In step Sj3403, an effect pattern for executing a falling big hit opening effect within the guaranteed game count is set as the opening effect. After that, the processing for this opening effect is ended.

In step Sj3402, when it is determined that the set effect is not the guaranteed game number falling fall big hit opening effect (Sj3402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3404. In step Sj3404, it is determined whether or not the set effect is the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot opening effect. When it is determined in step Sj3404 that the set effect is the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot opening effect (Sj3404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3405. In step Sj3405, an effect pattern for executing the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot opening effect is set as the opening effect. After that, the processing for this opening effect is ended.

When it is determined in step Sj3404 that the set effect is not the guaranteed game times outfall jackpot opening effect (Sj3404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3406. In step Sj3406, it is determined whether or not the set effect is the fall pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect. When it is determined in step Sj3406 that the set effect is the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect (Sj3406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sj3407.

In step Sj3407, an effect pattern for executing the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect is set as the opening effect. After that, the processing for this opening effect is ended.

When it is determined in step S3406 that the set effect is not the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect (Sj3406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sj3408. In step Sj3408, an effect pattern for executing the normal opening effect is set as the opening effect. After that, the processing for this opening effect is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sj3501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. After that, the process advances to step Sj3502.

In step Sj3502, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sj3601, a command storing process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sj3701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 562), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sj3701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Sj3702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sj3701) or the like. .. After that, it advances to step Sj3703.

In step Sj3703, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sj3702), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sj3704.

In step Sj3704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sj3703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step Sj3705, the other processes are executed, and then the V interrupt process is ended. Heretofore, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the gaming state of the low-probability mode, which is more disadvantageous than the gaming state of the high-probability mode, a specific effect is executed. Specifically, in the case 1, the falling pullback big hit effect and the falling pullback most advantageous big hit opening effect are executed as the specific effects. In Case 2, as a specific effect, a guaranteed big hit within the number of guaranteed games and a big hit opening presentation within the guaranteed number of games are executed. In Case 3, the guaranteed game number outfall fall jackpot effect and the guaranteed game count outfall jackpot opening effect are executed as specific effects. By executing such a process, it is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot is won in the game times executed in the game state that is disadvantageous to the player, through a specific effect, and the disadvantageous game state. Nevertheless, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction with winning the jackpot.

In addition, any of the specific effects is an effect that suggests to the player that the jackpot is won from the game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player further recognize that the jackpot is won despite the disadvantageous game state, and to give the player a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction.

Further, when the jackpot is won, in the game times executed thereafter, the player executes an indistinguishable or difficult effect (state-implicit effect) in the game state in the executed game time. It is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing whether the game is being executed in this state. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. ..

Furthermore, in the case where such a process is executed, the condition for executing a specific effect is satisfied, and when the specific effect is executed, the game that has been executed so far for the first time by the specific effect. A game in which the player can recognize that the game state in the game was an unfavorable game state, and the player later recalls the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create a game of interest and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware of the fact that the jackpot has been won, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

Furthermore, after falling, if the jackpot is won within the guaranteed number of games (fall and withdrawal jackpot), and if the category of the jackpot is the most advantageous type for the player, the falling pullback is most advantageous during the opening period. Since the jackpot opening production is performed, the player will know that after winning the jackpot, he has won the jackpot of the most advantageous type from the unfavorable gaming state, and a greater sense of superiority and happiness to the player. Can be given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling pullback most advantageous jackpot opening effect in case 1, the guaranteed winning game number within falling guarantee jackpot opening effect in case 2, and the guaranteed playing number outside falling guarantee jackpot opening effect in case 3 are the winning game times. Since it is executed after the game time is over, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after the game time is over, and it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game after the game time is over.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the gaming states, the gaming state of the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most advantageous state), and the low-probability mode and the low-probability mode are low. The gaming state of the frequency support mode is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player (hereinafter also referred to as the most unfavorable state), and the gaming state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode is more unfavorable than the most advantageous state. It is a more advantageous game state (hereinafter, also referred to as medium advantage state). In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the game times after the transition from the most advantageous game state to the medium advantageous game state, the above specific effect is executed. Therefore, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the jackpot has been won before shifting to the most unfavorable state, which is the most unfavorable state. It is possible to give a feeling (actually a sense of crisis by knowing that it was a dangerous situation later), and a sense of accomplishment and superiority due to winning the jackpot, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the falling back jackpot effect as a specific effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot is won after falling. In other words, the fall pullback jackpot production is a jackpot of a game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a preceding winning game time) that is a jackpot just before the game time that is the fall withdrawing jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game time). It is possible to let the player recognize that the type was the probability variation jackpot, that the winning lottery was subsequently won, and that the jackpot was won in the low probability mode within the guaranteed game times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the jackpot type in the game times that has become a big hit one after another, and to create a game feature that reminds the player of the previous winning game times until now. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the fall pullback jackpot production, the jackpot type of the game times (preceding winning game times) that has become a jackpot just before the game times that have become the fall pullback jackpots (the winning game times) have changed. The player is made to recognize that it was a big hit, that he/she was subsequently won in the falling lottery, and that he/she was won in the low probability mode within the guaranteed game times. Further, when the type of the jackpot is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the falling pullback most advantageous effect is executed. That is, based on the jackpot type in the game times determined as the fall pullback jackpot and the jackpot type in the preceding winning game times, the effect to be executed after the game times determined as the fall pullback jackpot is determined, Based on the specific effect, the player who recognizes the specific effect executed after the game time determined as the fall pullback jackpot is the jackpot type in the game time determined as the fall pullback jackpot and the preceding winning game. The player can be recollected and guessed about the jackpot type in the game, and the player can be given an interest of recollecting the game game executed in the past in addition to the expectation of the game game being executed.

Furthermore, as described above, a specific effect, for example, a fall pullback jackpot effect, is a jackpot of a game number that has been a jackpot just before the game number of the fall pullback jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as a pre-winning game number). The player is made to recognize that the type was a probability variation jackpot, that he/she was subsequently elected to the falling lottery, and that the jackpot was won in the low probability mode within the guaranteed game times. That is, regarding whether or not to execute a specific effect, and regarding the content of the specific effect, a mode of change in the game state from the game time when the jackpot is won first to the game time after which the jackpot is won. It is decided based on. Therefore, the player who recognizes the specific effect can recognize (confirm) the mode of the change of the game state in the game times executed in the past based on the specific effect. Therefore, in the case where the player cannot recognize the mode of the change of the game state in the game times executed between the game time that was won the jackpot first and the game time that was won after the jackpot. Also, by making the player recognize the particular effect, it is possible to make the player recognize the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed so far, which has been executed so far. It is possible to create amusement such as recollecting the game state and the contents of the game at the game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the specific effect to be executed during the opening period is also determined based on the aspect of the change in the game state from the game time when the jackpot is won first to the game time after which the jackpot is won. That is, until the opening period after the jackpot game time is over, the player can be made to pay attention to the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed so far, the content of the game, and the effect. ..

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a specific effect when the jackpot is won after the high-probability high-frequency state, which is an advantageous gaming state, shifts to the low-probability high-frequency state, which is an unfavorable gaming state. To do. Therefore, even if the player is aware that the advantageous game state has transitioned to the disadvantageous game state, even if the state-implicit effect is being executed, the high-probability high-frequency state is changed to the low-probability high state. After the player's sense of expectation temporarily declines due to the shift to the frequency state, a specific performance is executed by winning the jackpot, so the player's joy for winning the jackpot with the expectation lowered can be specified. By executing the effect of (1), it is possible to further promote the game and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the opening time based on the aspect of the change in the gaming state in the game times executed from after the end of the preceding winning game times to after the end of the winning game times. .. Therefore, for example, when performing an effect (opening effect) in an opening period that is a period corresponding to the opening time, the content of the effect is changed from after the end of the preceding winning game times to after the end of the winning game times. It can be determined according to the mode of change of the game state in the executed game times. As a result, the player who has recognized the opening effect, based on the effect, a mode of change of the game state in the game time executed between after the end of the preceding winning game time and after the end of the winning game time. Can be recognized (confirmed). Therefore, afterwards, it is possible to let the player recognize the mode of change of the game state in the game times executed so far, and remind the player of the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create amusement and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game time started immediately after the game time (preceding winning game time) won for the big hit is a game time in a game state (high probability high frequency state) advantageous for the player. Yes, after that, the player shifts to a gaming state (low probability high frequency state) that is disadvantageous to the player (wins the falling lottery), and then performs a specific effect when winning the jackpot (falling jackpot jackpot). Therefore, if the expectation of the player is once lowered by shifting to a gaming state that is unfavorable to the player, a specific effect is executed when the jackpot is won, so the jackpot is won when the expectation is lowered. It is possible to further promote the joy of the player with respect to that by executing a specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<J7>> Modification of the tenth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<J7-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine in which the high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won, except when the odds jackpot is won and the winning lottery is won. The features of the above embodiment may be applied to other types of pachinko machines. For example, a pachinko machine (so-called ST machine) equipped with a function of limiting the number of game times executed in the high-probability mode to a predetermined number in the case of winning a probability variation jackpot (so-called ST variation function) May be applied to.

In this modification, as an example of a pachinko machine of ST machine, the number of times of execution of the game times that can be executed in the high-probability mode when winning the probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of times of limited execution) is 100 times. The game state is a high-probability high-frequency state in the game times within the limited-execution times, and when the number of times of the limited execution times is exceeded, the low-probability low-frequency state is entered. In addition, when a normal jackpot is won, 100 low-probability high-frequency state (hereinafter, also referred to as time-saving state) game times can be executed, and when the number of game-plays exceeds 100, low-probability low frequency Transition to the state. In this modification, the features of the above-described embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine having such specifications.

In this case, for example, when a jackpot is won, in the production in the game times in which the jackpot is won, and in the production in the open/close execution mode, whether the player has won the probability variation jackpot or the regular jackpot Indistinguishable or difficult. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the player performs a state-implicit effect that is difficult or difficult for the player to identify whether the game state is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode even in the newly executed game time. Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player executes the game without recognizing whether the game state of the game times executed thereafter is the high-probability high-frequency state or the low-probability high-frequency state (time saving state). ..

Then, in this modified example, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state (hereinafter, also referred to as pullback jackpot), and when the type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the game variation and opening/closing execution that is the probability variation jackpot are performed. During the mode (opening period, opening and closing process period, ending period), as a specific effect, the game state of the game times that was being executed was a time saving state (low probability high frequency state), and a big hit during the time saving state An effect that suggests that the winning jackpot and the type of the selected jackpot are the probability varying jackpots (hereinafter referred to as a probability shortening medium pullback probability varying jackpot suggesting effect) is executed.

Furthermore, in this modification, the jackpot that is won during the time saving state and the jackpot type is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine (hereinafter, the most advantageous jackpot). If it is a jackpot type), the game state of the game times that has been executed as a specific effect during the game times and the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing process period, ending period) that resulted in the jackpot A performance that suggests that it was in a short-time state (low probability high frequency state), that the jackpot was won during the time-saving state, and that the type of the jackpot that was won was the most advantageous jackpot type Perform jackpot suggestion).

In addition, at the time of a big hit other than the above-described case, a normal big hit effect is executed in the game times in which the big hit is won, and a normal opening effect, round effect, and ending effect are also executed in the opening/closing execution mode.

As explained above, by executing the pullback probability change jackpot suggestion during the time saving, the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state, is executed. It is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot was won in the given game times, and further that the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, through a specific effect (time reduction during pullback probability variation jackpot suggestion effect). It is possible to further give the player a feeling of superiority and satisfaction of winning the jackpot regardless of the game state.

In addition, by executing the pullback most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect during the time saving, the game executed in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state. It is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot was won in the second round, and that the jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type, through a specific effect (reducing the most advantageous jackpot suggestion) It is possible to further give the player a feeling of superiority and satisfaction of winning the jackpot regardless of the game state.

Further, similar to the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot is won, in the game times to be executed thereafter, the player is unable to identify the game state in the game time being executed or difficult (state non-obvious effect). Since it is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game time is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. ..

Furthermore, in the case where such a process is executed, the condition for executing a specific effect is satisfied, and when the specific effect is executed, the game that has been executed so far for the first time by the specific effect. A game in which the player can recognize that the game state in the game was an unfavorable game state, and the player later recalls the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create a game of interest and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware of the fact that the jackpot has been won, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

In addition to this, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state, a specific effect may be executed regardless of the jackpot type. That is, in the case of a pullback jackpot, it is suggested that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot as a specific effect during the game turn and the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period) that have been the jackpot. Perform the performance. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, as a condition for executing a specific effect, even if the jackpot type when winning the jackpot during the time saving state is not limited to the probability variation jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, it can be set to another jackpot type. Good. For example, a specific effect may be executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot type having the largest number of rounds (for example, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 16R regular jackpot) during the time saving state.

<<J7-2>> Modification 2:
The features of the above embodiment may be applied to, for example, a pachinko machine (so-called probability variation limit machine) of a type in which a limit (probability variation limit) is set on the number of times that the probability variation jackpot can be successively won.

In this modified example, as an example of the probability variation limit machine, the number of times that the probability variation jackpot can be won in succession (hereinafter, also referred to as the limit number) is 5, and if the probability variation jackpot is won 5 times in a row, For the 6th time, always use a game machine that usually gives a big hit. It should be noted that the number of times that can be successively won for the probability variation jackpot is 5, but there may be a case where the jackpot less than 5 times is won for the regular jackpot and the subsequent game times are in the low probability mode. Further, when the probability variation jackpot is won, until the next jackpot winning, the game times executed are in the high frequency support mode. That is, a high probability and high frequency state is achieved. On the other hand, when the normal jackpot is won, 100 low-probability high-frequency state (time saving state) game times can be executed, and when the number of game times executed exceeds 100, the low-probability low-frequency state is entered. .. In this modification, the features of the above-described embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine having such specifications.

In this case, for example, when a jackpot is won, in the production in the game times in which the jackpot is won, and in the production in the open/close execution mode, whether the player has won the probability variation jackpot or the regular jackpot Indistinguishable or difficult. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the player performs a state-implicit effect that is difficult or difficult for the player to identify whether the game state is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode even in the newly executed game time. Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player executes the game without recognizing whether the game state of the game times executed thereafter is the high-probability high-frequency state or the low-probability high-frequency state (time saving state). ..

In this modification, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state (pullback jackpot) and the type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot becomes the probability variation jackpot during the game time and the opening/closing execution mode (opening). Period, opening/closing process period, ending period), as a specific effect, the game state of the game times that was being executed was a short-time state (low probability high-frequency state), that the jackpot was won during the time-shortening state, and Performs an effect that suggests that the type of the selected jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (reducing probability reduction jackpot probability during short-time, medium-time pullback).

Further, in the present modification, the jackpot is won during the time saving state, and the jackpot type is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine (the most advantageous jackpot type). ), the game state of the game times being executed is a time saving state as a specific effect during the game time and the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing process period, ending period) that have been the jackpot. (Low probability high frequency state), that the jackpot was won during the time saving state, and that the type of the jackpot that was won is the most advantageous jackpot type To execute.

In addition, at the time of a big hit other than the above-described case, a normal big hit effect is executed in the game times in which the big hit is won, and a normal opening effect, round effect, and ending effect are also executed in the opening/closing execution mode.

By executing such processing, the same effect as that of the tenth embodiment and the first modification can be obtained. In other words, by executing the pullback probability change jackpot suggestion during medium-time saving, the low-probability high-frequency state (time-saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player compared to the high-probability high-frequency state, is performed. It is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot was won in the jackpot, and that the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, through a specific effect (reducing probability variation jackpot suggestion during time saving and shortening), and even in an unfavorable gaming state. Regardless, it is possible to further give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction with winning the jackpot.

In addition, by executing the pullback most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect during the time saving, the game executed in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state. It is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot was won in the second round, and that the jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type, through a specific effect (reducing the most advantageous jackpot suggestion) It is possible to further give the player a feeling of superiority and satisfaction of winning the jackpot regardless of the game state.

Further, similar to the above-described embodiment and modified example, when a jackpot is won, in a game cycle executed thereafter, the player cannot identify the game state in the game cycle being executed or the difficulty (state non-explicit) Since the effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating in which game state the game time is being performed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. ..

Furthermore, in the case where such a process is executed, the condition for executing a specific effect is satisfied, and when the specific effect is executed, the game that has been executed so far for the first time by the specific effect. A game in which the player can recognize that the game state in the game was an unfavorable game state, and the player later recalls the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create a game of interest and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware of the fact that the jackpot has been won, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

In addition to this, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state, a specific effect may be executed regardless of the jackpot type. That is, in the case of a pullback jackpot, it is suggested that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot as a specific effect during the game turn and the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period) that have been the jackpot. Perform the performance. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, as a condition for executing a specific effect, even if the jackpot type when winning the jackpot during the time saving state is not limited to the probability variation jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, it can be set to another jackpot type. Good. For example, a specific effect may be executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot type having the largest number of rounds (for example, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 16R regular jackpot) during the time saving state.

<<J7-3>> Modification 3:
The features of the above-described embodiment may be applied to, for example, a pachinko machine of a type in which the number of times of consecutively winning the probability variation big hits is fixed (so-called one-set type probability variation machine).

In this modification, as an example of the one set type probability variation machine, when the probability variation jackpot is won from the game state of the low probability mode, the probability variation jackpot is continuously won twice (so-called, two times, one set). After jackpot winning in two probability variation jackpots, jackpot type is usually jackpot when jackpot is won.

Further, when the probability variation jackpot is won, until the next jackpot winning, the game times executed are in the high frequency support mode. That is, a high probability and high frequency state is achieved. On the other hand, when the regular jackpot is won, 100 low-probability high-frequency states (also called short-time states) can be executed, and when the number of game times exceeds 100, the low-probability low-frequency state is set. Transition. In this modification, the features of the above-described embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine having such specifications.

In this case, for example, when a jackpot is won, in the production in the game times in which the jackpot is won, and in the production in the open/close execution mode, whether the player has won the probability variation jackpot or the regular jackpot Indistinguishable or difficult. Then, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the player performs a state-implicit effect that is difficult or difficult for the player to identify whether the game state is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode even in the newly executed game time. Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player executes the game without recognizing whether the game state of the game times executed thereafter is the high-probability high-frequency state or the low-probability high-frequency state (time saving state). ..

Then, in the present modified example, when the jackpot is won (also referred to as a pullback jackpot) during the time saving state, and when the type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot is in the game time and the opening/closing execution mode. (Opening period, opening/closing process period, ending period) As a specific effect, the game state of the game times being executed was a time saving state (low probability high frequency state), and a big hit during the time saving state And an effect that suggests that the type of the selected jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot effect during pullback during short-time reduction).

Further, in the present modification, the jackpot is won during the time saving state, and the jackpot type is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types that can be set by the pachinko machine (the most advantageous jackpot type). ), the game state of the game times being executed is a time saving state as a specific effect during the game time and the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing process period, ending period) that have been the jackpot. (Low probability high frequency state), that the jackpot was won during the time saving state, and that the type of the jackpot that was won is the most advantageous jackpot type To execute.

In addition, at the time of a big hit other than the above-described case, a normal big hit effect is executed in the game times in which the big hit is won, and a normal opening effect, round effect, and ending effect are also executed in the opening/closing execution mode.

By executing such processing, the same effects as those of the tenth embodiment and the modified example can be obtained. In other words, by executing the pullback probability change jackpot suggestion during medium-time saving, the low-probability high-frequency state (time-saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player compared to the high-probability high-frequency state, is performed. It is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot was won in the jackpot, and that the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, through a specific effect (reducing probability variation jackpot suggestion during time saving and shortening), and even in an unfavorable gaming state. Regardless, it is possible to further give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction with winning the jackpot.

In addition, by executing the pullback most advantageous jackpot suggestion effect during the time saving, the game executed in the low probability high frequency state (time saving state), which is a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player compared to the high probability high frequency state. It is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot was won in the second round, and that the jackpot type is the most advantageous jackpot type, through a specific effect (reducing the most advantageous jackpot suggestion) It is possible to further give the player a feeling of superiority and satisfaction of winning the jackpot regardless of the game state.

Further, similar to the above-described embodiment and modified example, when a jackpot is won, in a game cycle executed thereafter, the player cannot identify the game state in the game cycle being executed or the difficulty (state non-explicit) Since the (production) is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game times are executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. ..

Furthermore, in the case where such a process is executed, the condition for executing a specific effect is satisfied, and when the specific effect is executed, the game that has been executed so far for the first time by the specific effect. A game in which the player can recognize that the game state in the game was an unfavorable game state, and the player later recalls the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create a game of interest and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware of the fact that the jackpot has been won, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

In addition to this, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state, a specific effect may be executed regardless of the jackpot type. That is, in the case of a pullback jackpot, it is suggested that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot as a specific effect during the game turn and the opening/closing execution mode (opening period, opening/closing processing period, ending period) that have been the jackpot. Perform the performance. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, as a condition for executing a specific effect, even if the jackpot type when winning the jackpot during the time saving state is not limited to the probability variation jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, it can be set to another jackpot type. Good. For example, a specific effect may be executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot type having the largest number of rounds (for example, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 16R regular jackpot) during the time saving state.

<<J7-4>> Modification 4:
A feature of the above embodiment is, for example, a pachinko machine of a type in which a lottery mode in a game time to be executed from the next time becomes a high-probability mode, provided that a game ball is distributed in a specific area (so-called V zone). V confirmation machine).

In this modification, as an example of the V-probability machine, the falling lottery is executed in the game game in the high probability mode. When the winning lottery is won in the case where the high-probability mode game times are executed, the lottery mode is shifted to the low-probability mode from the game times winning the falling lottery. In this modification, the features of the above-described embodiment are applied to a pachinko machine having such specifications.

In this modified example, the game is executed without recognizing whether the game state of the executed game is the high-probability high-frequency state or the low-probability high-frequency state (time saving state). That is, in the game game, the state-implicit effect is executed.

In the present modification, the winning lottery is won, and the lottery mode is changed from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Then, the jackpot is won in the game times. During the round game (during the opening/closing process period). In the case where the game ball circulates in the V zone during the specific period, the specific effect is executed when the game ball circulates in the V zone. Specifically, as a specific effect, the lottery mode has transitioned from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode by winning the falling lottery in the already-executed game times, and winning the jackpot in the low-probability mode. Execute the suggested effect (falling back jackpot effect). That is, in this modified example, the falling back jackpot effect is executed as a specific effect triggered by the circulation of the game balls in the V zone. Also, in this case, if the jackpot is won in the high-probability mode game state without winning the falling lottery, and then the game ball is distributed to the V zone, or the game state is in the low-probability mode from the first game time after the jackpot. It is a gaming state, and after the jackpot is won in the gaming state, and then the gaming ball is distributed to the V zone, after the jackpot winning game times (hereinafter also referred to as the preceding winning game times) are finished. Based on the aspect of the change in the game state of the game times executed by the end of the game times that the jackpot is won (hereinafter, also referred to as the winning game times), the identification is triggered by the distribution of the game balls to the V zone. It may be configured to set (change) the content of the effect.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is executed as the opening effect during the opening period or the ending effect during the ending period. For example, the content of a particular effect to be executed as the ending effect is determined based on the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed after the end of the preceding winning game times and after the end of the winning game times. The ending time, which is the time length of the ending period, is determined based on the configuration and the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed from the end of the preceding winning game times to the end of the winning game times. You may employ the structure determined. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easy to set the ending effect according to the mode of change of the game state from the preceding winning game time to the winning game time, and the content according to the mode of change of each game state It is possible to relax the time limit when designing the ending production.

Furthermore, the period for executing the specific effect is not limited to the ending period, and may be executed in the game times when the big hit is won. When the type of the jackpot is the most advantageous type for the player (hereinafter, also referred to as the most advantageous jackpot type), it is a fall pullback jackpot as the game time effect executed in the game time that is won for the jackpot. The type of jackpot is the most advantageous jackpot type as the effect that suggests that the opening effect during the opening period, the effect executed when the game balls are distributed to the V zone, or the ending effect during the ending period. An effect that suggests that there is may be executed.

As described above, in the present modification, the game ball is circulated in the V zone for a specific period, and the specific effect that suggests the game state in the already executed game is executed. Circulates in the V zone to promote the player's joy that the game state of the game time started after a specific period becomes the high probability mode, and the game state in the game time executed so far. It is possible to create a playability such as to remind the player of the contents of the game or to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even though the game times were executed in the high probability mode, a big hit was won in a state in which the player had won the falling lottery and moved to the low probability mode, and the game ball circulated in the V zone in a specific period. If a configuration that executes a specific effect is adopted as a trigger, the player's expectation is reduced due to the fact that the player has won the falling lottery and the game state has shifted to the low probability mode. Circulates in the V zone, and when it is determined that the player will be in an advantageous state from the game time to be executed next time, a specific effect is executed. In the case of such a configuration, the expectation of the player rises by winning the jackpot, while the expectation of the player once dropped greatly by winning the falling lottery and shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. And, in a state in which the game ball has passed through the V zone and the expectation further rises in a particular period after the end of the game times in which the jackpot is won, a particular effect is executed, so that the expectation of the player is increased. While facilitating the rise, it is possible to cause the player to recognize the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed so far after the fact by a specific effect, and the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability such as recollecting the state and the content of the game.

In the case where the V zone is arranged inside the variable winning device 36 (big winning opening 36a), the V zone is located downstream of the opening/closing door 36b with respect to the flow direction of the game balls, and further than the V zone. A configuration in which an opening/closing valve for the V zone (hereinafter, also referred to as a V opening/closing valve 36v) is installed on the upstream side may be adopted. In this case, the opening/closing door 36b opens at the timing when the game ball flows through the variable winning device 36, the game ball enters the special winning opening 36a, and at the timing when the game ball flows through the V opening/closing valve 36v. When the V open/close valve 36v is open, the game ball can flow in the V zone. Therefore, by adjusting the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening timing of the V opening/closing valve 36v, a jackpot type (hereinafter, also referred to as a type 1 jackpot) in which the game ball easily enters the V zone, and a game It is possible to set a jackpot type (type II jackpot) in which a ball is hard to enter the V zone.

In the present modification, the time from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the opening of the V on-off valve 36v is the same for both the first-class jackpot and the second-class jackpot. The timing of opening the opening/closing door 36b is different between the first-class jackpot and the second-class jackpot. Therefore, when the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the opening of the opening/closing door 36b is set as the opening period, the first type jackpot and the second type jackpot are the time length of the opening period (opening time). ) Is different. By adjusting the opening time, it is possible to set the first-class jackpot in which the game balls are easily distributed in the V zone and the second-class jackpot in which the game balls are difficult to distribute in the V zone during the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, in the present modification, in the low probability high frequency state in which the falling lottery is won, the jackpot is won, and the type of the jackpot is that the V game balls in the V zone are easy to distribute, that is, the high probability from the next game time. In the case where the type 1 jackpot is highly likely to be switched to the mode, a specific effect may be executed during the opening period. Further, in this case, since the game ball has not circulated in the V zone during the opening period, the content of the specific effect may be content that suggests that the jackpot was a fall back pulling jackpot. That is, it is an effect that does not suggest the distribution of the game balls to the V zone. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the content of the specific effect includes content that suggests that the game ball is likely to enter the V zone.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the opening period of the V certainty variation machine.

In addition, despite the fact that the player wins the first-class jackpot, the player does not operate the game ball toward the variable winning device 36, and misses the timing at which the game ball circulates in the V zone. In such a case (so-called puncture), in order to reduce the player's feeling of frustration, an effect that reduces the player's feeling of frustration may be executed during the round game or during the ending period. As an effect for reducing the player's feeling of frustration, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect having a content that suggests that the jackpot was a fall pullback jackpot. Further, in order to reduce the feeling of frustration, a configuration may be adopted in which the ending period is set to be short so that the next game time can be executed quickly.

<<J7-5>> Modification 5:
In the tenth embodiment and the modified examples described above, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the state-implicit effect is not executed. In this case, the player can recognize the game state of the game times being executed, but even if the game state is recognized, if a specific effect is executed when the jackpot is won, It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and superiority.

For example, in the tenth embodiment, when the game times are executed within the guaranteed game times in the high-probability high-frequency state, the player can recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. .. After that, the winning lottery is won within the guaranteed number of games, and the low probability low frequency state is entered. At this time, as an effect to be executed in the game time, an effect that allows the player to recognize that the lottery mode is the low probability mode is executed. After that, when the big hit is won in the low-probability high-frequency state, the big hit is a falling pullback big hit, and a specific effect is executed during the game time when the falling pullback big hit is achieved. Specifically, the fall pullback jackpot effect is executed during the game time in which the fall pullback jackpot was hit.

By doing this, after the player's sense of expectation temporarily decreases due to the transition from the high-probability high-frequency state to the low-probability high-frequency state by winning the falling lottery, a specific effect is executed by winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to further promote the player's joy for winning the jackpot in a state where the feeling of expectation is lowered, by executing a specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<<J7-6>> Modification 6:
In the tenth embodiment, the specific effect is executed during the game times and the opening period when the jackpot is won, but the specific effect may be executed at another timing. For example, a specific effect may be executed as a round effect in the opening/closing processing period. In addition, a specific effect may be executed as the ending effect in the ending period. Even when the specific effect is executed as the round effect or the ending effect, the same effect as that of the tenth embodiment and the modification can be obtained.

When a specific effect is executed as a round effect, a different time may be set as the round time for each game state in the game times where the jackpot is won. Originally, the number of round games is different for each jackpot type, so the round game time is different, but in addition to the difference in the round time depending on the number of round games, the interval between each round for each gaming state in the game times won for the jackpot. Alternatively, the time between the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b and the next opening/closing operation may be changed.

For example, even with the same 16R probability variation jackpot, the round time when a 16R probability variation jackpot is won from a high-probability high-frequency state and the 16R probability variation jackpot after winning a fall chance lottery It is configured so that it is different from the round time when it is done. In this case, the round time is changed by changing the interval between each round and the time between the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b and the next opening/closing operation. Then, a specific effect is executed during the round game in the case where the 16R certainty variation jackpot is won after the low probability high frequency state is achieved by winning the falling lottery. By executing a specific effect during the round game in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the game even during the round game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<J7-7>> Modification 7:
If you win the jackpot after falling down and transitioning to a low probability high frequency state, even if you adopt a configuration where the number of guaranteed games in the high frequency support mode increases compared to when you win the jackpot from other gaming states Good. In this modification, when the big hit is won from the low-probability high-frequency state, the guaranteed game frequency is set to be larger than when the big hit is won from the gaming state other than the low-probability high-frequency state. For example, if a jackpot is won from a gaming state other than the case where the jackpot is won after the player has fallen to a low-probability high-frequency state, the number of guaranteed games in the high-frequency support mode is 100 times in the subsequent game times. On the other hand, the number of guaranteed games in the high-frequency support mode is 120 if the jackpot is won only after the player has fallen and moved to the low-probability high-frequency state. Is set. Also, in this configuration, if you win the jackpot after falling and transitioning to a low-probability high-frequency state, during the opening period and ending period, as a specific effect, you won the jackpot after winning the fall lottery. In addition to executing the suggested effect, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that suggests that the guaranteed game number is larger (or the guaranteed game number is increased) than the jackpot winning from other game states is adopted. .. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further promote the player's expectation that the jackpot is won and then the jackpot is returned and the jackpot is won.

<<J7-8>> Modification 8:
In the above embodiment, when comparing the period for executing the specific effect when executing the specific effect, and the period corresponding to the period for executing the specific effect when not executing the specific effect, A configuration may be adopted in which the period for executing the specific effect is shorter when the specific effect is executed. For example, in the case of a configuration in which a specific effect is executed using an opening period, the opening time in the case of executing the specific effect is configured to be shorter than the opening time in the case of not executing the specific effect. .. The player may desire to execute the next game time early even during the opening period. Since the specific effect is executed for the purpose of further encouraging the player's expectation, if the opening time becomes long to execute the specific effect, the effect of executing the specific effect is reduced. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, the opening time in the case of executing the specific effect is configured to be shorter than the opening time in the case of not executing the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed using the short opening time. By doing so, it is possible to further promote the player's expectation.

<<J7-9>> Modification 9:
Various conditions may be adopted as the conditions for executing the specific effect. For example, in the tenth embodiment described above, a specific effect is executed when the falling lottery is won in the game times executed after the probability variation jackpot is won and the jackpot is won in the low probability high frequency state. Not limited to the case, for example, after winning a big jackpot normally, 100 game times are executed in a low-probability high-frequency state (time saving state), and when the jackpot is won in the game time in the time saving state, a specific effect is given. It may be executed, or a specific effect may be executed when the jackpot is won within a predetermined number of times after the game times of 100 times in the time saving state are completed.

In addition, when the probability variation jackpot is won, in the game times executed after that, the high-probability mode continues until the next jackpot winning, but there is a limit to the number of times the game times can be executed in the high-frequency support mode. For example, when adopting a specific performance in a type of gaming machine that may transition from a high-probability high-frequency state to a high-probability low-frequency state, transition from a high-probability high-frequency state to a high-probability low-frequency state A specific effect may be executed when a jackpot is won in a low-frequency game game or when the category of the jackpot is a particular jackpot type.

As described above, various configurations can be adopted as long as the specific performance is executed when the jackpot is won after the advantageous game state is changed to the disadvantageous game state. By doing so, even if the player has recognized that the advantageous game state has been changed to the unfavorable game state, the player's expectation is increased by shifting from the high-probability high-frequency state to the low-probability high-frequency state. After the feeling drops once, a special effect is executed by winning the big jackpot, so the player's joy for winning the jackpot when the feeling of expectation is lowered is further promoted by executing the particular effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the state-implicit effect is executed in the game time, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game time is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. .. Then, when the condition for executing the specific effect is satisfied and the specific effect is executed, the game state in the game times that has been executed so far is a disadvantageous game state for the first time by the specific effect. It is possible to make the player aware of that, and afterwards, create a gaming property that reminds the player of the game state and the contents of the game in the game times that have been executed so far, and improve the interest of the game. You can Furthermore, since the player is also made aware of the fact that the jackpot has been won, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

<<J7-10>> Modification 10:
In this modified example, within the guaranteed number of games in the high probability and high frequency state, the battle effect is executed in the game times won in the falling lottery and in the game times won in the winning lottery. In addition, the battle effect is executed even in the game times in which the falling lottery is not won and the winning lottery is not won. The content of the battle effect to be executed is that various characters indicating the enemy side and the character on the player side battle each other. If you win the falling lottery, or if you do not win the falling lottery and you do not win the winning lottery, the battle production (the battle defeat production) that the character on the player side is defeated and the character on the player side A battle effect (battle draw effect) that causes a draw with the enemy character is executed. When the jackpot is won, a battle effect (battle victory effect) with which the player character wins is executed. In addition, in the opening effect that is executed after the game number that was won for the jackpot, the production that suggests whether or not you have won the falling lottery in the game number where the battle defeat effect or the battle draw effect was previously executed. Execute. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

FIG. 564 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the tenth modification. As shown in the figure, in the game time U3, the 8R probability variation jackpot is won, and the game state becomes the high probability high frequency state from the game time U4. In the game times executed in the high-probability high-frequency state, the state-implicit effect is executed as in the tenth embodiment. Therefore, the player executes the game without distinguishing whether the lottery mode of the game times to be executed is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode.

After that, the battle effect is executed in the game number U5, which is the game number within the guaranteed game number. The game number U5 is a game number that neither wins the falling lottery nor wins the winning lottery. In the game time U5, a battle defeat effect in which the character on the player side is defeated at the end of the battle effect is executed. Specifically, a character indicating the player side and an octopus, which is one of the characters indicating the enemy side, execute a battle, and the character on the player side is defeated at the end of the effect. In the game time U5, the battle defeat effect is executed, but whether or not the falling lottery is won is not shown in the game time. Therefore, the player executes the game without being able to identify whether the game state has changed due to the executed battle defeat effect.

After that, in the game times within the guaranteed game times, and in the game times U6 won in the falling lottery, the battle defeat effect is executed. Specifically, a character indicating the player side and a turtle, which is one of the characters indicating the enemy side, execute a battle, and at the end of the effect, the character on the player side is defeated. In the game time U6 as well, the battle defeat effect is executed, but whether or not the falling lottery is won in the game time is not shown. Therefore, the player will continue playing the game without being able to identify whether the game state has changed due to the executed battle defeat effect. In addition, after the time when the falling lottery is won in the game cycle U6, the gaming state shifts from the high-probability high-frequency state to the low-probability high-frequency state.

After that, in the game times within the guaranteed game times and in the game times U7 that is won in the winning lottery, the battle win effect is executed. Specifically, the character indicating the player side and the crab, which is one of the characters indicating the enemy side, execute a battle, and the character on the player side wins at the end of the effect. After the battle win effect is executed, the jackpot notification effect that notifies that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery is executed.

Then, in the opening effect that is started after the end of the game time U7, as a specific effect, an effect that suggests that the player has won the falling lottery in the game time when the battle effect with the turtle was executed is executed. After that, a normal round effect is executed during the opening/closing processing period, and a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. The specific effect may be executed as a round effect or an ending effect. Further, in the game times U5 and U6 in which the battle defeat effect is executed/not executed, the battle draw effect may be executed instead of the battle defeat effect. In addition, the enemy character in the battle production has a high probability of being selected a specific character A (for example, a turtle) when winning the falling lottery, and has not won the falling lottery, and When the winning lottery is not won, the control may be performed such that the probability that a specific character B (for example, octopus) is selected is high, or that the selected character is randomly selected. You may.

If the winning lottery is not won in the game times within the guaranteed game times and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the battle win effect is executed in the game times. In this case, the battle defeat production may be executed in a game time that is executed before the game time in which the jackpot is won is executed and is not won in the winning lottery. By doing so, even when the player has not won the falling lottery, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency by inferring whether or not he or she has won the falling lottery.

As described above in Modification 10, by executing the battle effect in the game times within the guaranteed game times, the period until the result of the battle effect (whether victory or defeat) is shown as the effect is a big hit. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency by prompting the player to guess whether or not he/she has won the falling lottery. In addition, when the executed battle production is a battle defeat production, it does not indicate whether the falling lottery is successful or not in the game time in which the battle defeat production is executed, and the state-implicit production is also executed in the subsequent game production. Therefore, in the game times after the battle defeat effect or the battle draw effect is executed, the player is made to guess what the gaming state is, and the player is given a sense of expectation and tenseness. be able to.

Further, when the executed battle effect is a battle victory effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot is highly likely to be won and give the player a sense of satisfaction and superiority.

Furthermore, during the opening period, as a specific effect, the effect that suggests that the player has won the falling lottery at the game time when the battle effect with the turtle was executed is executed, so the battle defeat effect with the turtle was executed. Recognizing that the game state was transitioning from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode in the game times, and was superior to the player for winning the jackpot despite the transition of the game state to the disadvantageous state. Feeling and satisfaction can be imparted. In addition, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to create a game property in which the player recalls the content of the effect in the game cycle U7, the game state and the content of the game in the subsequent game cycle.

In addition, in the battle production, each character on the enemy side is selected in each case of winning the falling lottery, not winning the winning lottery, and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. If the probability of being set is preset, the result of the falling lottery or the result of the winning lottery in the game time is estimated for the player who recognizes the character selected in each battle production during the execution of the battle production. Therefore, it is possible to further give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency.

In addition, in the case where the falling lottery is won, and in each case when the winning lottery is not won, the probability of selection of the battle defeat effect and each effect of the battle draw effect is set in advance. The player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the battle production (whether it is win, draw, or defeat), and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<J7-11>> Modification 11:
In the tenth embodiment, as the specific effect, the content that suggests to the player what kind of gaming state the jackpot was won was included, but a specific effect that does not include such content is included. May be adopted. For example, in the case of an effect that is executed only when the jackpot is won after shifting from the advantageous game state to the disadvantaged game state, or when the type of the jackpot is a specific type, what kind of aspect The effect may be adopted, and the content of the specific effect may be any content. By adopting such a configuration, the player can enjoy the extrapolation of the regularity for the execution of a particular effect, and can improve the enjoyment of the game.

<<J7-12>> Modification 12:
In the tenth embodiment and the modified example, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case may be adopted in which the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

<<K>> Eleventh Embodiment:
<<K1>> Structure of game machine:
FIG. 565 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 566 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that a trace of opening and closing remains. For example, a seal sticker is attached to an openable/closable portion, and when the board box is opened, a character such as "open" appears.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 567 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided in the individual openings described above formed on the game board 30. Be induced. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of game balls are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71 (FIG. 566).

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball inlet member that forms a ball inlet into which a game ball can enter, and is provided below the first starting port 33. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode refers to a case where the main controller 60 hits the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 as a result of a winning lottery, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. .. In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed. , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is used as a display mode until the segment display is caused to perform a display corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is also referred to as variation time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first symbol display unit 37a based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. To do. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also performs the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 568 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 568(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 568(a), the symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 568(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 568(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 568(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. That is, in a unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. is there. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit for each game time. In either 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device for each game time. In 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 568(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

<<K2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 569 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 has a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data and the like temporarily when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, which is a memory for storing, is provided. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 includes a capacitor (not shown), and when power failure occurs or the power switch 88 (FIG. 566) is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. To do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering of the through gate 35. To do.

At the output port of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. When the electric role opening is selected as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role driving unit 34b so that the electric role 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

The setting information display unit 34d is connected to the output port of the main control board 61. The setting information display section 34d will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying the entry into the second starting opening 34, the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 570 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a winning lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot type such as the probability-varied jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed. The “high-probability mode” is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of entering the ball is the first value in the pending information storage area 64b. It is stored in the reservation area Ra in time series. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. Are stored in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is recognized. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, It is determined whether a reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination process execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, It is determined whether a reach occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 568(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. A reach line is formed, and under the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a type of reach, a normal reach (also referred to as a normal reach), a super-reach that suggests that the possibility of winning a jackpot in a winning lottery (expectation) is higher than a normal reach, and a hit There is a special reach that suggests that the chances of winning the jackpot in the lottery (the degree of expectation) are higher than that of Super Reach, and different characters are displayed as videos for normal reach, super reach, and special reach. By recognizing the characters that appear in the reach, the player can judge whether it is normal reach, super reach or special reach, and guess the possibility of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time. And you can have a sense of expectation. It should be noted that the difference in production between normal reach, super reach, and special reach does not have to be limited to the above-mentioned difference in characters, and may be due to changing the background color or changing the shape or color of the design.

The frequencies of normal reach, super reach, and special reach appear to be relatively high and low. Specifically, the frequency of appearance of super reach is lower than that of normal reach, and the frequency of appearance of special reach is lower than that of super reach.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (electrical role unlocking lottery winning/loss table) and the value of the electrical role unlocking counter C4 stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 are stored. It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, if C4=0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=2-465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also referred to as holding information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode as lottery modes for winning lottery. Further, even in the same low-probability mode, there are six stages of lottery settings (“lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”) with different probabilities of winning the big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is as follows.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, one selected from among the six stages of lottery settings from “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6” is set. Then, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the winning lottery by referring to the winning/losing table corresponding to the lottery setting set when the power is turned on. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the main controller 60 refers to the win/loss table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 1. Win the lottery.

FIG. 571 is an explanatory diagram showing winning/decreasing tables for six types of low probability modes. 571(a) shows the win/loss table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 1, FIG. 571(b) shows the win/loss table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 2, and FIG. 571(c) shows the win/loss table of the lottery setting 3. 571(d) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 4, FIG. 571(e) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 5, FIG. 571(f) shows the win/loss table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 6.

As shown in FIG. 571(a), in the win/loss table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 1, out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, there are 5 pieces of 0 to 4 as the values to win the jackpot. The value of is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out.

As shown in FIG. 571(b), in the win/loss table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 2, out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, there are 6 pieces of 0 to 5 as the values to win the jackpot. The value of is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values other than the six values of 0 to 5 (6-1119) are out of range.

As shown in FIG. 571(c), in the win/loss table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 3, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, there are 7 pieces of 0 to 6 as the values to win the jackpot. The value of is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (7-11199) other than the seven values of 0 to 6 are out.

As shown in FIG. 571(d), in the win/loss table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 4, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, there are 8 pieces of 0 to 7 as the values to win the jackpot. The value of is set. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (8 to 1199) other than the eight values of 0 to 7 are out.

As shown in FIG. 571(e), in the win/loss table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 5, out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, there are 9 pieces of 0 to 8 as the values to win the jackpot. The value of is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (9 to 1199) other than the nine values of 0 to 8 are out.

As shown in FIG. 571(f), in the win/loss table for the low-probability mode of the lottery setting 6, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, there are 10 pieces of 0 to 9 as the values to win the jackpot. The value of is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (10 to 1199) other than the 10 values of 0 to 9 are out. That is, in the present embodiment, the larger the number following the “lottery setting”, the higher the winning probability of the winning lottery in the low probability mode.

In the present embodiment, regardless of which of the six-stage lottery settings is set, in the high-probability mode, it is configured to execute the winning lottery with reference to the same win/loss table. That is, in the high-probability mode, regardless of the set lottery setting, the probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery is the same.

FIG. 572 is an explanatory diagram of a win/loss table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 572, in the high/probability mode win/loss table, 32 values of 0 to 31 are set among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199 as the jackpot. .. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (32 to 1199) other than the 32 values of 0 to 31 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery than any of the low-probability modes of the lottery setting 1 to the lottery setting 6.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the win/loss table for the low probability mode of the lottery settings 1 to 6 is set as the jackpot in the hit/loss table for the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

In the present embodiment, depending on which of the lottery setting 1 to lottery setting 6 the pachinko machine 10 is set to, the probability of winning the jackpot of the winning lottery in the case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode is It was configured to change. On the other hand, as another aspect, even in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is changed depending on which one of the lottery setting 1 to the lottery setting 6 is set. It may be configured.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in the present embodiment, a “small win” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The “small hit” is a result of the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It can be set to continue until the number of entered balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or a ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

As a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode of performing a winning lottery by using a winning/loss table for high probability as a winning/losing table and a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a low-probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability hit table. As described with reference to FIGS. 571 and 572, when the winning lottery is performed using the high probability win/loss table, compared to when the winning lottery is performed using the low probability win/loss table, The chances of winning the jackpot are high.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a when the electric-role combination opening wins may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not used in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode. Good. Further, it may be configured such that one opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be long. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 573 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. 573(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 573(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to when the lottery is performed based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is provided for the second starting opening 34. It is referred to at the time of lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening of FIG. 573(a), the distribution table for the first starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R probability jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability jackpot is 8 It is 8 times.

In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R regular jackpot and the 8R regular jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R regular jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R regular jackpot is 8. It is 8 times.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 39” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “40 to 64” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "65-89" corresponds to the 16R regular jackpot, and "90-99" corresponds to the 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 573(b), the distribution table for the second starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 64” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “65 to 99” is the 8R regular jackpot. It corresponds to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is the jackpot winning based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the jackpot winning second. This is different from the case where a big hit is won based on a ball entering the starting opening 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

If the winning result in the winning lottery is out, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the classification of jackpot types, if the 16-probability variation jackpot or the 8R-probability variation jackpot is obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode as described above. The state will continue until the big hit in the winning lottery next time.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, a reach determination table (hereinafter, referred to as a reach determination pass/fail table) will be described. The reach determination validity/invalidity table is table data for collating with the value of the reach random number counter C3 when determining whether or not the reach occurs based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

FIG. 574 is an explanatory diagram of a reach determination win/loss table. As shown in FIG. 574, in the reach determination win/loss table, among the values of the reach random number counter C3 of 0 to 399, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as the values to win the reach. Then, among the values of 0 to 399, values other than 20 values of 0 to 19 (20 to 399) are set as deviations, that is, values that are not won in the reach. That is, the probability of winning the reach is 1/20 in the situation where the big hit is not won in the winning lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is based on the total reserved number which is the total value of the reserved number of gaming balls entered in the first starting port 33 and the reserved number of gaming balls entered in the second starting port 34. It has five reach determination win/loss tables with different probabilities of winning the reach. The win/loss table shown in FIG. 574 is for the case where the total pending number is four or more, and the five reach determination win/loss tables including the win/loss table have a higher probability of winning the reach as the total pending number is smaller. It's getting higher. For example, the reach winning probability is about 1/11 when the total pending number is three, the reach winning probability is about 1/10 when the total pending number is two, and the reach winning probability is about 1/10 when the total pending number is one. The reach winning probability is about 1/9, and the reach winning probability is about 1/6 when the total reserved number is 0. Note that the number of reach determination hit/miss tables is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. The point is that there are a plurality of reach determination win/loss tables, and any configuration may be used as long as the probability of winning the reach is higher as the total pending number is smaller.

FIG. 575 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/loft lottery win/loss table) used when executing the electric win open lottery.

FIG. 575(a) shows the winning/discarding table for the electric accessory release lottery (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 575(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory releasing counter C4 that is the winning of the electric accessory release. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 575(b) shows the winning/discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 575(b), in the electric prize opening lottery win/loss table (for the high-frequency support mode), 462 values of 0 to 461 are set as the values of the electric Auditor open counter C4 to be the electric hand open win. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<K3>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 576 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. In addition, a part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 (FIG. 569) and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, a reach distribution table storage area 93c, a setting suggestion/non-approval table storage area 93d, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<K4>> lottery settings:
As described above with reference to FIG. 569, the setting information display unit 34d is connected to the output port of the main control board 61.

FIG. 577 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the setting information display unit 34d. The setting information display unit 34d is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 and is configured by four 7-segment displays 34d1 to 34d4 that are adjacently arranged in a horizontal row. Each of the 7-segment displays 34d1 to 34d4 includes seven segment light-emitting units and a DP light-emitting unit that indicates a decimal point. Depending on the combination of the presence or absence of light emission of these light-emitting units, "1" and "2" are displayed. , “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9”, “0”, “b”, “L.”, “6.”, etc. It is possible to display numerical values, characters, symbols and the like. In the present embodiment, the seven segment light emitting portions and the DP light emitting portion are configured by red LEDs (light emitting diodes).

One of the four 7-segment displays 34d1 to 34d4, for example, the fourth 7-segment display from the left (hereinafter, referred to as the fourth 7-segment display) 34d4, is set to the lottery setting (" Information indicating "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6") is displayed. Specifically, the number following the “lottery setting” for the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is “lottery setting 6”, as shown in FIG. 577, the number “6” is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4.

In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, one selected from six stages of lottery settings can be set. The details will be described below.

The main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings, a button for changing settings, and a RAM clear button. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a frame opening switch and a door opening switch. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open to the outer frame 11. The door opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power supply switch 88 of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, and the key for changing the setting is inserted. Then, with the inserted key turned to the setting change side (for example, turned clockwise), and the RAM clear button, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all on, the power switch 88 is off. When the state is switched to the ON state (power is turned on), the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the setting change mode, the fourth seventh segment display 34d4 of the setting information display section 34d displays information indicating the lottery setting when the power was turned off last time. For example, if the lottery setting when the power was turned off last time is "lottery setting 1", "1" is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4. Then, every time the administrator presses the setting change button, the information displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 is "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → " It switches in the order of "6" → "1" → "2"...

When the administrator turns the setting change key to the original position while the information displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 is a number corresponding to the lottery setting desired by the administrator , And the lottery setting corresponding to the information displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4 is changed. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change button and "6" is displayed on the fourth 7-segment display 34d4, the setting change key is moved from the setting change side to the original position. When turned to, the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to “lottery setting 6”.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 in this manner, it is possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode.

<<K5>> Setting suggestion production:
For the pachinko machine 10 that is playing a game, whether the probability of winning a jackpot is set high or low is useful information for the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player performs the effect that suggests the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, referred to as “setting suggestion effect”). From the effect, it is possible to infer which of the current lottery settings for the pachinko machine 10 is. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as a setting suggestion effect, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 is operated. A production is performed in which a specific pattern such as a person, an animal, a thing, or a character (hereinafter, also referred to as a “setting suggestion pattern”) appears so that the appearance probability is based on the current lottery setting. As the setting suggestion effect, it is preferable that the player is required to play the game for a certain period or longer and the current lottery setting cannot be confirmed 100%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the current lottery setting can be estimated from the appearance probability of the specific pattern.

FIG. 578 is an explanatory diagram showing an ending effect displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 578(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a normal ending effect. FIG. 578(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an ending effect when the setting suggestion effect is performed. As can be seen from the comparison between the two, when performing the setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 578(b), the design of the treasure box appears as the setting suggestion pattern PX in the middle of the ending effect. In the present embodiment, the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 has six levels depending on the probability that the setting suggesting pattern (the pattern of the treasure box) PX appears in the ending effect, that is, the probability that the setting suggesting effect is executed in the ending effect. It is possible for the player to guess which of the lottery settings (“lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”) is applicable.

FIG. 579 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10, when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 1”, the probability that the setting suggesting pattern will appear in the ending effect when the jackpot is won is 1/10. If the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 2", the probability is 1/8, and if the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 3", the probability is 1/5. When the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 4”, the probability is 1/4, and when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 5”, the probability is 1/3. If the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 6”, the above probability is halved.

According to the appearance probabilities of the setting suggestion patterns for each of the “lottery setting 1” to the “lottery setting 6”, the larger the number following the “lottery setting” is, that is, the lottery mode in the low probability mode The higher the lottery setting, the higher the winning probability is, the higher the probability that the setting suggesting pattern will appear in the ending effect.

The appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern for each of the “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6” is predetermined in the pachinko machine 10 and depends on the model of the pachinko machine 10. However, in a configuration that depends only on the model of the pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that it is relatively easy for the player to guess which is the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the correspondence relationship between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern shown in FIG. 579 is used as a standard, and the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the first game time after being activated. The correspondence relationship between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern is changed from the standard based on the display mode of the symbol variation. The symbol variation is a symbol variation executed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. As described above, the display mode of the symbol variation is roughly classified into four types, that is, the detachment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. The term “out” means that the reach has not occurred without winning the big hit in the winning lottery. In the case of deviation, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern in the ending effect is determined by the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579.

FIG. 580 is each lottery setting and setting in the case where the display mode of the symbol fluctuation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “display mode of initial fluctuation”) is normal reach It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence with the appearance probability of a suggestion design. This correspondence is different from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579 in that the value of the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern is subtracted by one. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach and the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 1”, the setting suggesting pattern appears in the ending effect when the jackpot is won. The probability is 1/9, and when the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 2", the probability is 1/7 and when the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 3". The probability is 1/4, and when the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 4", the probability is 1/3 and the current lottery setting is "lottery setting 5". In this case, the probability is 1/2, and when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 6”, the probability is 1/1.

According to the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 580, the probability of appearance of the setting suggesting pattern is higher in each of “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6” than in the standard correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 579. There is. Since the probability that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach is lower than the probability that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of consideration, in consideration of the low amount, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern for each lottery setting is increased. There is.

The value of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern shown in FIG. 580 is an example, and can be any value as long as it has a higher probability than the appearance probability of the standard setting suggestion pattern shown in FIG. 579.

FIG. 581 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern in the case where the display form of the initial fluctuation is super reach. This correspondence is different from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579 in that the value of the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern is subtracted by 2. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, and the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 1”, the probability that the setting suggesting pattern appears in the ending effect is 1/8. If the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 2”, the probability is 1/6, and if the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 3”, the probability is 1 If the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 4", the probability is 1/2, and if the current lottery setting is "Lottery setting 5", the probability is Is 1/1, and the probability is 1/1 when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 6”.

According to the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 581, setting suggestion is made in each of “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6” in comparison with the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 580 when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. The appearance probability of the design pattern is high. Since the probability that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the super reach is lower than the probability that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the normal reach, in view of the low rate, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern for each lottery setting is increased. ing. In particular, when the winning probability of the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode is “lottery setting 5” or more, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern in the ending production is 1/1 (100% in terms of percentage). Is becoming

The value of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern shown in FIG. 581 is an example, and any value may be used as long as it has a higher probability than the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern in the case of the normal reach shown in FIG. 580. You can also

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach, regardless of which of “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6” is set, the setting suggesting pattern in the ending effect when the jackpot is won is selected. The appearance probability is constant with a high probability (for example, 1/2 or 1/1). After that, the setting suggesting pattern is set to a different pattern for each of "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6".

FIG. 582 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an ending effect including a setting suggestion effect when the display form of the initial fluctuation is special reach. When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach production, and when a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the subsequent game times, the design PY of the treasure box with a number written in the ending production appears as the setting suggestion production as the setting suggestion production. The effect is performed. The number written on the treasure box matches the number following the “lottery setting” for the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is “lottery setting 6”, as shown in FIG. 582, the treasure box pattern PY marked with the number “6” is displayed as the setting suggestion pattern PY. To be done.

The design suggestion pattern PY may be replaced with a female character having a placard on which a number is written. The number corresponding to the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 may be replaced with a letter, a symbol, or a pattern as long as the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be clearly shown. In short, the setting suggesting pattern PY may be any image as long as it is an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability. For example, in the case of “lottery setting 1”, a turtle pattern, and in the case of “lottery setting 2” Can be a pattern of an octopus, a pattern of a female character in the case of “lottery setting 3”, and so on.

From the picture PY of the treasure box with the numbers appearing in the middle of the ending production, the player clearly identifies which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". I can guess. Since the probability that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the special reach is much lower than the probability that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the super reach, in the present embodiment, the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 becomes clear. , The number corresponding to the lottery setting is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 having such a configuration, the player remembers whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, super reach, special reach, or out, and advances the game, and then the jackpot in the subsequent game times. When the player wins the game, the appearance ratio of the setting suggestion effect in the ending effect is estimated, and the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is based on the obtained appearance ratio and the display mode of the stored first fluctuation. It is possible to guess that. In this case, as compared to the configuration in which the appearance ratio of the setting suggestive effect depends only on the model of the pachinko machine 10, the player strongly feels randomness as to which lottery setting is, depending on the skill of the player. , You can guess the lottery settings correctly.

On the other hand, a player who does not know the display mode of the initial fluctuation cannot accurately guess which lottery setting is. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make the player want to know the display mode of the initial fluctuation. As a result, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated in the morning, the player can be actively urged to start playing the game from the morning.

Furthermore, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is other than the deviation, the setting suggestion effect in the ending effect when the jackpot is won in the game times after the first time appears compared to the case where the display mode of the initial fluctuation is incorrect. The higher probability provides a great opportunity for the player to accurately guess the lottery settings. Therefore, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is other than the deviation, the player wants to continue playing the game on the pachinko machine 10 of the gaming table even after the first game. Therefore, it is possible to give the player strong motivation to continue playing the game after the first game.

<<K6>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sk0101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sk0102.

In step Sk0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sk0103.

In step Sk0103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, when 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sk0104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in a normal process (FIG. 587) described later.

In step Sk0104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the entrance process for the starting opening in step Sk0104 will be described later. After executing Step Sk0104, the process proceeds to Step Sk0105.

In step Sk0105, a through-ball entry process accompanying the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through-ball entering process in step Sk0105 will be described later. After executing Step Sk0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 583: Sk0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 584 is a flow chart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sk0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (start entering ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sk0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (Sk0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0202 and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sk0203.

In step Sk0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sk0204.

In step Sk0204, the starting hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sk0209.

When it is determined in step Sk0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (Sk0201: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0205 and whether the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 or not. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sk0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (Sk0205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0206, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sk0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (Sk0205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sk0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sk0208.

In step Sk0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sk0209.

In Step Sk0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in Step Sk0204 or Step Sk0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sk0209, when the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (Sk0209: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk0209, when the number N of starting suspensions is less than the upper limit value (Sk0209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0210 and after adding 1 to the number N of starting suspensions of the corresponding suspension area, the process proceeds to step Sk0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sk0212.

In Step Sk0212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in Step Sk0103 (FIG. 583) are first stored in the corresponding free storage areas. The data is stored in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sk0210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step Sk0103 are set to It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sk0210. When the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sk0103 are set to the respective values. , The first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sk0210. After executing Step Sk0212, the process proceeds to Step Sk0213.

In step Sk0213, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, referred to as “setting information”) is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the lottery settings set in the pachinko machine 10 are six stages of “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”. Therefore, in the normal case, the setting information is in the range of “1” to “6”. It becomes the number inside. Therefore, in step Sk0213, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and when the setting information is a numerical value within the range of “1” to “6”, the setting information is predetermined. If it is determined that the value is within the range, and if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the setting information is set to the predetermined value. It is determined that the value is not within the range.

The setting information is changed as necessary when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on by the setting change process (FIG. 588) described later. The changed setting information is stored in a predetermined area (setting information storage area) of the main RAM 64, and in step Sk0213, setting of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. The information is read, and the judgment about this setting information is performed. If the setting information is not changed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the setting information when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned off last time is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Since it is held, in step Sk0213, a determination is made as to the setting information when the power switch is turned off. When the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a power failure occurs, at least a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 is supplied with power by a backup power source such as a capacitor, so that the setting information storage area is set to a predetermined area. By setting or saving the setting information stored in the setting information storage area to a predetermined area, the setting information when the power switch is turned off can be retained. When it is determined in step Sk0213 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0213: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0214.

In step Sk0214, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), the result of the hit lottery determination (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach. This is a process of executing the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence, etc., before the holding information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0214, the process proceeds to Step Sk0215.

In step Sk0215, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before the suspension information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 587: step Sk0505) of a normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing Step Sk0215, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 ends the entrance process for the main starting opening.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0213 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range (step Sk0213: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0216 and the game stop command is issued to the payout control device 70 which is the sub-side control device. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The game stop command is a command for causing the payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the progress of the game is stopped. After executing Step Sk0216, the process proceeds to Step Sk0217 to turn on the game stop flag. As a result, when the normal process (FIG. 587) is executed, the execution of the process group for advancing the game (the process group of steps Sk0505 to Sk0510 of FIG. 587) is avoided, and the progress of the game is stopped. .. After executing Step Sk0217, the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 584: Sk0214) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, the determination result such as the hit lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, such as the hold information, the main controller 60 hit This is a process to be executed before the target of the lottery.

In step Sk0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the entrance processing for the starting opening (FIG. 584) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk0302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball By grasping, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sk0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (Sk0302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0303 and the setting information is set. Refer to the hit/miss table for the corresponding low probability mode. Specifically, from the hit/miss table for six types of low probability modes (see FIG. 571) stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. The corresponding win/loss table is identified, and the identified win/loss table is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk0305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table in step Sk0303, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sk0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time (Sk0302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0304, and the win/loss table is stored. The hit/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the ROM 63 stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk0305, and as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sk0305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (Sk0305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0306, and the value is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step Sk0307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing Step Sk0307, the process proceeds to Step Sk0308.

In step Sk0308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step Sk0308 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (Sk0308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0309 to store the probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (Sk0308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0310 to store the normal jackpot information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

When it is determined in step Sk0305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (Sk0305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0311, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk0312 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk0313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step Sk0313 that the occurrence of reach is supported (Sk0313: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0314 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0313 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (Sk0313: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 583: Sk0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 586 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entering process. In step Sk0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sk0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (Sk0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0401 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (Sk0401: NO), the entry process for this through is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk0402 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (Sk0402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0403 and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sk0404.

In step Sk0404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step Sk0103 (FIG. 583) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sk0402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sk0402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 587 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sk0501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sk0502.

In step Sk0502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sk0503.

In Step Sk0503, the operation of the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 is accepted, and the setting change process for changing the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0503, the process proceeds to Step Sk0504.

In step Sk0504, it is determined whether the game stop flag is ON. As described above, the game stop flag is a flag that is turned on to stop the progress of the game when it is determined that the setting information of the lottery setting is not normal. When it is determined in step Sk0504 that the game stop flag is not ON (step Sk0504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0505.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0504 that the game stop flag is ON (step Sk0504: YES), the processing in steps Sk0505 to Sk0510 is skipped. That is, when the game stop flag is ON, the processing for enabling the progress of the game in steps Sk0505 to Sk0510 is not executed, and the progress of the game becomes impossible. Hereinafter, the processing after step Sk0505, which is processing for enabling the progress of the game, will be described.

In step Sk0505, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sk0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sk0505, the process proceeds to Step Sk0506.

In step Sk0506, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sk0507.

In step Sk0507, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step Sk0508. In step Sk0508, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0508, the process proceeds to Step Sk0509.

In step Sk0509, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sk0510.

In step Sk0510, electric power support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sk0511.

In step Sk0511, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (strictly, the start of the command output processing in step Sk0505). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sk0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Sk0511: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0512.

In step Sk0512, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sk0512, the process proceeds to Step Sk0513.

In step Sk0513, 1 is updated in the variation type counter CS. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sk0513, the process proceeds to Step Sk0514.

In step Sk0514, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sk0514 that the game stop flag is ON (step Sk0514: YES), the process returns to step Sk0511. That is, when the game stop flag is ON, only the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0514 that the game stop flag is not ON (step Sk0514: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0515.

In step Sk0515, it is determined whether or not the setting information indicating the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. The process of step Sk0515 is the same as the process of step Sk0213 of the starting entrance ball entering process (FIG. 584). When it is determined in step Sk0515 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0515: YES), the process returns to step Sk0511. That is, when the setting information is normal, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are updated and the lottery setting setting information is normal within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. The determination as to whether there is any is repeatedly executed.

When it is determined in step Sk0515 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range (step Sk0515: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0516 and the game stop command is issued to the payout control device 70 which is the sub-side control device and the sound emission. It is transmitted to the control device 90. After executing Step Sk0516, the process proceeds to Step Sk0517 to turn on the game stop flag. The processing of steps Sk0516 and Sk0517 is the same as the processing of steps Sk0216 and Sk0217 of the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 584). After executing Step Sk0517, the process returns to Step Sk0511.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (Sk0511: YES), the process returns to step Sk0504, and each processing from step Sk0504 to step Sk0510 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of steps Sk0504 to Sk0510 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random. Further, the remaining time can be effectively used by using the remaining time to determine whether or not the setting information of the lottery setting is normal.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process will be described. The setting change process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 587: Sk0503).

FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the setting change process. In step Sk0601, it is determined whether or not all the setting change key, the RAM clear button, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch described above are ON. In addition, "the key for changing the setting is ON" means that the key for changing the setting is inserted in the key hole for changing the setting and is located on the setting changing side. When it is determined in step Sk0601 that the setting change key, the RAM clear button, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON (step Sk0601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0602.

In step Sk0602, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is stored in other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. Copy to the update setting information storage area, which is an area. After executing Step Sk0602, the process proceeds to Step Sk0603.

In step Sk0603, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control for displaying the read update setting information on the setting information display unit 34d is started. Specifically, the update setting information is lit and displayed on the fourth seventh segment display 34d4 of the setting information display unit 34d. After executing Step Sk0603, the process proceeds to Step Sk0604.

In step Sk0604, it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. Since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range of "1" to "6". To do. When it is determined in step Sk0604 that the update setting information has a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0604: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0606. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0604 that the update setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0604: NO), for example, when “0” or “7” is stored as the update setting information. If information other than the numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step Sk0605, and the update setting information is changed to the initial value. In this embodiment, “1” is stored as the initial value in the update setting information. Then, it progresses to step Sk0606.

In step Sk0606, it is determined whether or not the setting change key (keyhole) has moved from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating a high level is provided during the period when the setting change key (keyhole) is on, and the setting change key (keyhole) is off. During that period, the signal indicating Low level is monitored, and when the falling edge of the signal falling from High level to Low level is detected, the setting change key (keyhole) is turned off. judge. If it is determined in step Sk0606 that the setting change key (keyhole) has not moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sk0606: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0607 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. To determine.

If it is determined in step Sk0607 that the setting change button has been pressed (step Sk0607: YES), the flow advances to step Sk0608 to update the update setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value information stored as the update setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical value information stored as the update setting information is "6", the numerical value information is updated to "1". After that, the process returns to step Sk0604 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0607 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step Sk0607: NO), the process returns to step Sk0604 described above without executing the process of step Sk0608, and the update setting information is returned. It is determined whether the value is within a predetermined range.

When it is determined in step Sk0606 described above that the key (keyhole) for changing the setting has moved from the ON side to the OFF side (step Sk0606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0609.

In step Sk0609, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as the setting information. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. make a copy. After executing Step Sk0609, the process proceeds to Step Sk0610, and the control for displaying the update setting information on the setting information display unit 34d is ended. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk0611, and the setting information command, which is the command indicating the setting information read in step Sk0609, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0601 that at least one of the setting change key, the RAM clear button, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch is not ON (step Sk0601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0612. The setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read. After executing step Sk0612, the process proceeds to step Sk0611, and the setting information command which is the command indicating the setting information read in step Sk0612 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. As a result, when it is determined that at least one of the setting change key, the RAM clear button, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON, a processing group for changing the setting information (step Sk0602-step) Execution of the Sk0610 processing group) is prohibited, and the setting information when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off last time, which is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, is used as the setting information command as the sound emission control device 90. Sent to.

After executing step Sk0611, the present setting change processing is ended. After finishing the setting change process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information displays the pachinko machine on the management screen. The configuration information of the lottery setting after the change of 10 may be displayed.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 587: Sk0508) of normal processing.

FIG. 589 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In Step Sk0701, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Sk0701 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (Sk0701: YES), the game game control processing is ended without executing any of the processing from step Sk0702. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0701 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sk0701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0702.

In step Sk0702, it is determined whether or not the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the special figure variation display flag of the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variation display flag is turned on when the variation display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned off when the variation display is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk0702 that the special drawing unit 37 is not in the variable display (Sk0702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0703.

In step Sk0703, the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0703, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk0702 that the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display (Sk0702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0704.

In step Sk0704, a fluctuation ending process for ending the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation ending process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0704, the present game time control processing is ended.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 589: Sk0704) of the game time control process.

FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sk0801, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds "0". When the total reserved quantity CRN is equal to or less than “0”, it means that the reserved quantity to be started is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sk0801 that the total reserved number CRN is equal to or less than “0” (Sk0801: NO), this variation start process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0801 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds “0” (Sk0801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0802.

In step Sk0802, it is determined whether or not the setting information indicating the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is a numerical value within a predetermined range. The process of step Sk0802 is the same as the process of step Sk0213 of the starting entrance ball entering process (FIG. 584). When it is determined in step Sk0802 that the setting information is not within the predetermined range (step Sk0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk0803, and the game stop command is issued to the payout control device 70 which is a sub-side control device and the voice emission. It is transmitted to the control device 90.

After executing Step Sk0803, the process proceeds to Step Sk0804, and turns on the game stop flag. The processing of steps Sk0803 and Sk0804 is the same as the processing of steps Sk0216 and Sk0217 of the starting entrance ball processing (FIG. 584). After executing Step Sk0804, this fluctuation start process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0802 that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step Sk0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk0805.

In step Sk0805, a reservation information shift process for setting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sk0806. Details of the pending information shift processing will be described later.

In step Sk0806, a hit determination process including a process when the big hit is won in the win lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0806, the process proceeds to Step Sk0807.

In step Sk0807, a variable time setting process is executed. The variation time setting process is a time required for the current game time on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the game state determination value and the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. This is a process for setting the variable time. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk0807, the process proceeds to Step Sk0808.

In step Sk0808, a variation command is set. The variation command is related to the hold information obtained based on the entry of the current game time into the first starting opening 33, or is obtained based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In addition to including information indicating whether or not the information is on hold information, information about whether or not a reach has occurred and information about the variation time set in step Sk0807 are included. After executing Step Sk0808, the process proceeds to Step Sk0809.

In step Sk0809, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of a winning lottery. Has been.

The variation command and the type command set in steps Sk0808 and Sk0809 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing Step Sk0809, the process proceeds to Step Sk0810.

In step Sk0810, the variable display of the symbols is started on the symbol display part corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing Step Sk0810, the process proceeds to Step Sk0811.

In step Sk0811, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing Step Sk0811, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The suspension information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 590: Sk0802) of the fluctuation start process.

FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift processing. In step Sk0901, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the holding information shift processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 570) (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). The information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) stored first in the reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 570) in time series. (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sk0901, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step Sk0901 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sk0901: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sk0902 to Sk0907 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk0901 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sk0901: NO). ), the hold information shift processing for the second hold area in steps Sk0908 to Sk0913 is executed.

In step Sk0902, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sk0903 to decrement the total hold number CRN by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sk0904. In step Sk0904, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sk0905.

In step Sk0905, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sk0905, the process proceeds to Step Sk0906.

In step Sk0906, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sk0907.

In step Sk0907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Sk0907 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step Sk0901 that the holding area to be processed is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the holding area to be processed is the second holding area Rb (Sk0901: NO), step Proceed to Sk0908.

In Step Sk0908, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step Sk0909. In step Sk0909, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and in step Sk0910, the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sk0911.

In step Sk0911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing Step Sk0911, the process proceeds to Step Sk0912.

In step Sk0912, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sk0913.

In step Sk0913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Sk0913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 590: Sk0803).

FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the hit determination processing. In step Sk1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sk1001 that the mode is the high probability mode (Sk1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1002, and the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the high probability mode win/loss table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 572. To do. Then, it progresses to step Sk1004.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sk1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1003, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. Specifically, from the hit/miss table for six types of low probability modes (see FIG. 571) stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. The corresponding win/loss table is specified, and the win/no judgment is performed by referring to the specified win/loss table. For example, when the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is “1”, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the lottery setting 1. .. In the win/no win determination, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode corresponding to the setting information. To do. Then, it progresses to step Sk1004.

In step Sk1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step Sk1002 or step Sk1003 is a big hit. In step Sk1004, if the result of the win/fail judgment is a big hit (Sk1004: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1005.

In step Sk1005, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sk1005 that the high frequency support mode is set (Sk1005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1006, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). ) Is reached (= within the guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. In step Sk1006, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sk1006: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step Sk1007 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing Step Sk1007, the process proceeds to Step Sk1008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1005 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (Sk1005: NO), or if it is determined in step Sk1006 that it is within the guaranteed game count (step Sk1006: YES), the process immediately proceeds to step Sk1008.

By the processing from step Sk1004 to step Sk1007 described above, the fluctuations in the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing when the jackpot is won are realized.

In subsequent steps Sk1008 to Sk1012, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot winning are executed.

In step Sk1008, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display portion flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sk1008 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sk1008: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1009, and the first starting port distribution table (see FIG. 573(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, in step Sk1008, when it is determined that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (Sk1008: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1010, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 573(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. After performing the processing of step Sk1009 or step Sk1010, the process proceeds to step Sk1011.

In step Sk1011, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step Sk1008 or step Sk1009 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on in the case of 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is turned on in the case of 8R certainty variation jackpot, and the 16R normal jackpot flag is set in the case of 16R regular jackpot. It is turned on, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal jackpot flag is turned on. After executing step Sk1011, the process proceeds to step Sk1012.

In step Sk1012, a process of setting a stop result for jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game time when the jackpot is won, it is set which of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is a process for doing. Specifically, by referring to the jackpot stop result table stored in the jackpot result table storage area 63f, the address information of the jackpot result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step Sk1009 or step Sk1010 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sk1012, the hitting determination process is ended.

In step Sk1004, when the result of the winning lottery in step Sk1002 or Sk1003 is not a big hit (Sk1004: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1013, and the game balls entered in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 are held. By referring to the reach determination win/loss table corresponding to the number, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game time. Specifically, the total reserved number CRN obtained in step Sk0211 of the entrance process for the starting opening (FIG. 584) is read from the total reserved number storage area and stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 569). The reach determination hit/loss table corresponding to the total reserved number CRN is specified from among the plurality of reach judgment hit/miss tables that are stored, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the specified reach judgment. In the application/non-availability table, it is determined whether or not the reach value matches the value set as occurrence. Then, it progresses to step Sk1014.

In step Sk1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Sk1013 is that a reach occurs in the game time (Sk1014: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1015 and the reach generation flag is turned ON. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing Step Sk1015, the process proceeds to Step Sk1016.

On the other hand, in step Sk1014, if the result of the reach determination in step Sk1013 is that the reach does not occur in the game times (Sk1014: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1016 without executing step Sk1015.

In step Sk1016, a process of setting a stop result for disconnection is executed. Specifically, in the current game time that results in a disengagement result, for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display is set. Processing. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sk1016, the hitting determination process is ended.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 590: Sk0804).

FIG. 593 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process. In step Sk1101, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sk1102.

In step Sk1102, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. When there is a jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is won (Sk1102: YES), and the process proceeds to Step Sk1103.

In step Sk1103, the variation time table corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk1104, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sk1102 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (Sk1102: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1105, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. To do. Since the present process (Sk1105) is executed when the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time in the step Sk1102, the reach among the game times not hit by the big hit in the winning lottery is executed in the step Sk1105. It is determined whether or not it is a game time that occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, and if it is ON, the reach is generated (Sk1105: YES), and the step Sk1106 is performed. Proceed to.

In step Sk1106, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk1104, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sk1105 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (Sk1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1107 to refer to the out-of-range variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d. , The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk1104, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach generation variation time table is set to be different based on the type of reach. Specifically, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are set in order from the shortest variation time to the longest variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach may be set in order from the longest variation time to the shortest variation time.

Similarly, the variation time information stored in the jackpot variation time table is set to be different based on the type of reach. Specifically, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are set in order from the shortest variation time to the longest variation time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach may be set in order from the longest variation time to the shortest variation time.

The fluctuation time information stored in the deviation time table for deviation is compared with each fluctuation time stored in the reach generation fluctuation time table and each fluctuation time set in the jackpot occurrence fluctuation time table. The change time is set to be short. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and conversely, the variation time may be set to be long.

Further, when comparing the variation time information stored in the jackpot variation time table with the variation time information stored in the reach generation variation time table, the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected are different. It has been configured. Specifically, the variation time information stored in the jackpot variation time table is the variation time that is difficult to select in the order of variation time corresponding to normal reach, variation time corresponding to super reach, variation time corresponding to special reach. The variable time information stored in the reach generation variable time table is the variable time corresponding to the normal reach, the variable time corresponding to the super reach, The variation times corresponding to the special reach are arranged so that the variation times that are easy to be selected are the variation times that are difficult to be selected. In this embodiment, with such a configuration, it is realized that the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are in descending order of probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery (expectation level) to high probability.

In addition, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit time, the variation time table for the normal big hit time, the variation time table for the out-reach time, and the out-of-time (when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach does not occur) The variable time tables may be set individually.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation ending process will be described. The fluctuation ending process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 589: Sk0707) of the game time control process.

FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation ending process. In Step Sk1201, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sk1201, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 593) described above. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step Sk1201 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Sk1201: NO), the fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Sk1201, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sk1201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1202, and the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b correspond to the current game time. The process of ending the variation of the symbol in the symbol display portion is performed. Subsequently, in step Sk1203, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing Step Sk1203, the process proceeds to Step Sk1204.

In step Sk1204, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R normal jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON. If there is a jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot is won, and if neither flag is ON, it is determined that the jackpot is not hit. When it is determined in step Sk1204 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game number is not the big hit (Sk1204: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1205.

In step Sk1205, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sk1205 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (Sk1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1206, and it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game frequency counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Sk1206 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0 (Sk1206: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1207, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC. After executing Step Sk1207, the process proceeds to Step Sk1208. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1206 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is 0 or less (Sk1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1208 without executing step Sk1207.

In step Sk1208, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sk1208 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (Sk1208: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1209, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100). It is determined whether it is before (= within the guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. Since the guaranteed game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is determined by determining whether or not PNC>0. It is possible to determine whether or not is before reaching the guaranteed game count.

When it is determined in step Sk1209 that the value of the guaranteed game frequency counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sk1209: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value is not within the guaranteed game frequency, the process proceeds to step Sk1210 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing Step Sk1210, the process proceeds to Step Sk1211.

In step Sk1211, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After executing Step Sk1211, this fluctuation ending process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1205 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (Sk1205: NO), the fluctuation ending process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk1204 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is the big hit (Sk1204: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1212, and the opening/closing execution mode flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. To do. After executing Step Sk1212, the present fluctuation ending process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 587: Sk0509).

FIG. 595 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step Sk1301, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the special winning opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sk1301 that the ending period flag is not ON (Sk1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1302, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening/closing processing period, which is a period in which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b is completed.

When it is determined in step Sk1302 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (Sk1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1303, and it is determined whether or not the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step Sk1303 that the opening period flag is not ON (Sk1303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1304, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sk1304 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (Sk1304: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1305. On the other hand, in step Sk1304, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF (Sk1304: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended.

In step Sk1305, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sk1306. In step Sk1306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sk1307.

In step Sk1307, opening/closing scenario setting processing for setting an opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines a pattern of opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in the present embodiment, a condition for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as "opening condition"), The program that records the condition for shifting the open/close door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as "closed condition"). The open/close scenario is stored in the open/close scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration time (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a since the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sk1307, the process proceeds to step Sk1308 described above.

In step Sk1308, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sk1308, the process proceeds to Step Sk1309.

In step Sk1309, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the special winning opening/closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sk1309, the process proceeds to step Sk1310 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sk1303 that the opening period flag is ON (Sk1303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1311.

In step Sk1311, it is determined whether or not the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". When it is determined in step Sk1311 that the opening period has ended (Sk1311: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1312, and the opening period flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sk1313.

In step Sk1313, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step Sk1313, the process proceeds to Step Sk1314.

In step Sk1314, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. In a succeeding step Sk1315, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 587: step Sk0505) of the normal process. After executing step Sk1315, the present game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sk1302 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (Sk1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1316 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing Step Sk1316, the process proceeds to Step Sk1317.

In step Sk1317, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening/closing process is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". To do. When it is determined in step Sk1317 that the special winning opening opening/closing process has been completed (Sk1317: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1318. On the other hand, in step Sk1317, when it is determined that the special winning opening opening/closing process is not completed (Sk1317: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step Sk1318, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sk1319.

In step Sk1319, a round display ending process is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step Sk1319, the process proceeds to Step Sk1320.

In step Sk1320, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length ending time is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step Sk1320, the process proceeds to Step Sk1321.

In step Sk1321, an ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sk0505 in the normal process (FIG. 587). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sk1321, the process proceeds to Step Sk1322.

In step Sk1322, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sk1301 that the ending period flag is ON (Sk1301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1323.

In Step Sk1323, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (Sk 1320), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". When it is determined in step Sk1320 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (Sk1323: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1324.

In step Sk1324, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sk1325, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sk1325, the process proceeds to step Sk1326, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing Step Sk1326, the process proceeds to Step Sk1327.

In step Sk1327, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. When it is determined in step Sk1327 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (Sk1327: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1328.

In step Sk1328, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command causes the voice light emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the variation of the symbol (game time) ends. Is a command including the information of. The customer waiting command thus set is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step Sk1328 in the normal process (FIG. 587). After executing Step Sk1328, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1327 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (Sk1327: NO), the present game number control processing is ended as it is. If it is determined in step Sk1323 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (Sk1323: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 595: Sk1316) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing processing. In step Sk1401, it is determined whether the open/close door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Sk1401 that the opening/closing door 36b is not open (Sk1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1402.

In step Sk1402, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sk1402 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sk1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1403.

In step Sk1403, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sk1404.

In step Sk1404, an opening/closing door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 587: Step Sk0505). After executing Step Sk1404, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk1402 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sk1402: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sk1403 and Sk1404.

When it is determined in step Sk1401 that the open/close door 36b is open (Sk1401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1405.

In step Sk1405, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sk1405 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (Sk1405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1406.

In step Sk1406, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sk1407.

In step Sk1407, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The open/close door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 587: Step Sk0505). After executing Step Sk1407, the special winning opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk1405 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (Sk1405: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sk1406 and Sk1407.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 595: Sk1325) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sk1501, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit in the big hit flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sk1501 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (Sk1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1502, and the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM64 are selected. The flag that is on is turned off. After executing Step Sk1502, the process proceeds to Step Sk1503.

In step Sk1503, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step Sk1504 to turn on the high-frequency support mode flag. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Then, it progresses to step Sk1505.

In step Sk1505, 100 is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step Sk1506.

In step Sk1506, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Sk1511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1501 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag are not ON (Sk1501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1507, and the 16R regular jackpot flag and the 8R regular jackpot flag of RAM64 are selected. The flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sk1508.

In step Sk1508, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step Sk1509, and 100 is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sk1510.

In step Sk1510, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step Sk1511.

In step Sk1511, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 587: Sk0510).

FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing a power combination support process. In step Sk1601, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sk1601 that the in-support flag is not ON (Sk1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1602.

In step Sk1602, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sk1602 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sk1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1603.

In step Sk1603, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sk1603 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sk1603: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sk1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1604.

In step Sk1604, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sk1604 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sk1604: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sk1605 to set the off display, and then the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1604 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (Sk1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1606.

In step Sk1606, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step Sk1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is “0” (Sk1606: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1606 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0” (Sk1606: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1607.

In step Sk1607, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the flow proceeds to step Sk1608 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sk1607 (Sk1607: NO) and the high frequency support mode is set in step Sk1608 (Sk1608: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1609 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sk1610.

In step Sk1610, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sk1609 is a support win. When it is determined in step Sk1610 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (Sk1610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1611, the support winning flag is turned ON, and various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1610 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not the support winning (Sk1610: NO), the processing for supporting the electric role is ended without executing the processing of step Sk1611.

When it is determined in step Sk1607 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (Sk1607: YES), or when it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sk1608 (Sk1608: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1612, and the electric auditors open lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step Sk1613.

In step Sk1613, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sk1612 is support win. When it is determined in step Sk1613 that the support is not won (Sk1613: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, in step Sk1613, when it is determined that the support is won (Sk1613: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1614, the support winning flag is turned ON, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk1602 that the support winning flag is ON (Sk1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1615, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sk1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sk1615: NO), the pattern of the universal figure unit 38 is being changed and displayed, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1615 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sk1615: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1616.

In step Sk1616, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sk1617, and the support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk1601 that the in-support flag is ON (Sk1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1618, and an electric-role opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 598: Sk1618) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step Sk1701, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Sk1701: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sk1702.

In step Sk1702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sk1702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sk1702: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Sk1702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sk1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1703, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a in the closed state is performed. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step Sk1703, the process proceeds to Step Sk1704.

In step Sk1704, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sk1705 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Sk1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (Sk1705: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sk1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1706 to turn off the support flag. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Sk1701 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (Sk1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1707, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sk1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (Sk1707: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1707 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sk1707: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1708, and an opening process for controlling the electric auditors' product 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Sk1709.

In step Sk1709, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (Sk1709: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sk1710 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is set. To do.

When it is determined in step Sk1710 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (Sk1710: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1711 and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1709 that the opening/closing execution mode is set (Sk1709: YES), or when it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not set in step Sk1710 (Sk1710: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1712, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

<<K7>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sk1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Sk1801, the process proceeds to Step Sk1802.

In step Sk1802, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Sk1802, the process proceeds to Step Sk1803.

In step Sk1803, the value of the setting suggesting random number counter CY is updated. The setting suggestion random number counter CY is a counter that generates a random number used when determining whether or not to perform the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, in step Sk1803, 1 is added to the setting suggestion random number counter CY, and when the setting suggestion random number counter CY reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the setting suggesting random number counter CY is stored in various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Sk1804.

In step Sk1804, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step Sk1802. After executing Step Sk1804, the process proceeds to Step Sk1805.

In step Sk1805, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step Sk1802. After executing Step Sk1805, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 600: Sk1802).

FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In Step Sk1901, it is determined whether or not the setting information command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sk1901 that the setting information command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1901: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1902, and the setting information of the lottery setting included in the setting information command received this time is set. It is read and stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. After executing Step Sk1902, the process proceeds to Step Sk1903. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1901 that the setting information command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1901: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1903 without executing step Sk1902.

In step Sk1903, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sk1903 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1904 and the hold command handling process is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing Step Sk1904, the process proceeds to Step Sk1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1903 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1903: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1905 without executing step Sk1904.

In step Sk1905, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sk1905 that the high frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1906, and the sound/light side high frequency support mode flag is turned on. The sound-light-side high-frequency support mode flag is a flag for identifying by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (see FIG. 576) whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. It is stored in the set various flag storage area 94e. Then, it progresses to step Sk1909.

When it is determined in step Sk1905 that the high-frequency support command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1907, and it is determined whether the low-frequency support command is received from the main MPU62. judge. When it is determined in step Sk1907 that the low-frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1907: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1908 to turn off the sound-light side high-frequency support mode flag. Then, it progresses to step Sk1909. When it is determined in step Sk1907 that the low-frequency support command is not received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1907: NO), the process directly proceeds to step Sk1909.

In step Sk1909, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sk1909 that the variation command and the type command are received (Sk1909: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1910. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk1909 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (Sk1909: NO), the process proceeds to step Sstep Sk1911.

In step Sk1910, a game game effect setting process is executed. In the game time effect setting process, a big hit time effect executed in the current game time, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like are set. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk1910, the process proceeds to Step Sk1911.

In Step Sk1911, it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sk1911 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1911: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1912 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the jackpot type included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Sk1913. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1911 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1911: NO), step Sk1912 is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sk1913.

In step Sk1913, it is determined whether the ending command is received. When it is determined in step Sk1913 that the ending command is received (Sk1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk1914, and the ending effect setting process is executed. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step Sk1915. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk1913 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sk1913: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk1915 without executing step Sk1914.

In Step Sk1915, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the opening command and the effect contents corresponding to the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1904).

FIG. 602 is a flow chart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step Sk2001, update processing at the time of entering a ball is executed. In the update process at the time of entering the ball, the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the first starting opening 33, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on entering the second starting opening 34, A process for enabling the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of these pieces of hold information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of entering the ball in step Sk2001 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on a ball entering the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as a “first hold number”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on entering a ball into the second starting opening 34 The number is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing step Sk2001, the process proceeds to step Sk2002.

In step Sk2002, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 identified in step Sk2001 and the hold information acquired based on entering the ball into the second starting opening 34 The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled based on the number. After executing step Sk2002, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
Next, the update process at the time of entering the ball will be described. The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 602: Sk2001) of the hold command handling process.

FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the time of entering a ball. In step Sk2101, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step Sk2101 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (Sk2101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2102 and the sound is output. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the optical RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing Step Sk2102, the process proceeds to Step Sk2104.

In step Sk2101, when it is determined that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33 (Sk2101: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start. When it is determined that the data is transmitted based on the ball entering the mouth 34, the process proceeds to step Sk2103, and the update processing of the second holding number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is performed. Execute. The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command which is the current read target. After executing Step Sk2103, the process proceeds to Step Sk2104.

The reason why the processes of steps Sk2102 and Sk2103 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 holds the hold information. Is stored and held, the voice light emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step Sk2104, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved quantity counter area shows the sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step Sk2104, the update process at the time of main entrance is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game time effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1910) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. As described above, the game time effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. Is. Hereinafter, a specific process of the game game effect setting process will be described.

In step Sk2201, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the kind of big hit, the presence/absence of a reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is grasped from the command. Then, the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sk2202.

In step Sk2202, effect pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit or a reach is executed. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk2202, the process proceeds to Step Sk2203.

In step Sk2203, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the process of setting the stop symbol, if the result of the winning lottery of the current game is 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, on the effective line L (see FIG. 568) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established is set as the current stop symbol information. Specifically, when the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. If the result of the winning lottery of the current game is 16R normal big hit or 8R normal big hit, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the winning lottery of the game time this time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing Step Sk2203, the process proceeds to Step Sk2204.

In step Sk2204, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the variation time and the stop symbol information identified in step Sk2205 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step Sk2205.

In step Sk2205, the effect pattern set in step Sk2202, the stop symbol set in step Sk2203, and the variable display pattern information set in step Sk2204 are set in the effect command in the current game time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2206, and the effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sk2206, the process proceeds to step Sk2207, and the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing Step Sk2207, the game game effect setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 604: Sk2202) of the game time effect setting process.

FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sk2301, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit is won in the winning lottery of the current game time. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Sk2201 in FIG. 604. In Step Sk2301, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 8R probability variation jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Sk2301 that the probability variation big hit is won in the winning lottery of the current game (Sk2301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2302.

In Step Sk2302, a probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process is executed. The probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process is a process of setting to execute a demonstration pattern for an effect indicating that the probability variation jackpot has been hit in this game time. The probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk2302, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk2301 that the probability variation big hit has not been won in the winning lottery of this game time (Sk2301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2303.

In step Sk2303, it is determined whether or not the regular jackpot is won in the winning lottery of this game time. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot and the information on the jackpot type, which is grasped in step Sk2201 in FIG. 604. In step Sk2303, an affirmative determination is made when the 16R regular jackpot or the 8R regular jackpot is won. When it is determined in step Sk2303 that the normal jackpot has been won in the winning lottery of the current game (Sk2303: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2304.

In Step Sk2304, a normal big hit production effect pattern setting process is executed. The normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process is a process of setting an effect pattern for an effect indicating that the normal jackpot is won in the hit lottery of the current game. The normal big hit time production pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk2304, the effect pattern setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk2303 that the normal jackpot is not won in the winning lottery of the current game (Sk2303: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2305.

In step Sk2305, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred in the current game. This determination is performed using the information on the presence/absence of reach occurrence which is grasped in step Sk2201 in FIG. 604. When it is determined in step Sk2305 that the reach has occurred in the current game time (Sk2305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2306.

In step Sk2306, a reach-time effect pattern setting process is executed. The reach time effect pattern is a process of setting to execute effect patterns for effects indicating that various types of reach have been achieved in the current game time. The reach effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk2306, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk2305, when it is determined that the reach has not occurred in the current game time (Sk2305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2307, and the off-direction effect pattern setting process is executed. The off-time effect pattern setting process is a process of setting an effect when none of the probability variation jackpot winning, the normal jackpot winning, and the reach occurrence. The detachment effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sk2307, the present effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting process for reach>
Next, the reach effect effect pattern setting process will be described. The reach time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2306) of the effect pattern setting process. The reach time effect pattern setting process is for determining the type of reach and setting the effect pattern according to the reach type. Hereinafter, this reach time effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 606 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for reach. In step Sk2401, the reach distribution table for out-of-range reach is referred to. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reach distribution table storage area 93c (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores a reach distribution table for out-of-reach reach and a reach reach distribution table for jackpot. ing.

FIG. 607 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of reach distribution tables. FIG. 607(a) shows the reach distribution table for the out-reach, and FIG. 607(b) shows the reach distribution table for the big hit. Normal reach, super reach, and special reach are set as the distribution results in each reach distribution table.

As shown in FIG. 607(a), the reach distribution table for out-of-reach reach shows the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As described above, the variable time at the time of the out-reach (when the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the reach occurs) set by the variable time setting process (FIG. 593) executed by the main MPU 62 is: It depends on the type of reach. The correspondence relationship between the variation time and the type of reach is stored in the reach distribution table for out-of-range reach. Specifically, a variation time of 30 seconds corresponds to normal reach, a variation time of 60 seconds corresponds to super reach, and a variation time of 120 seconds corresponds to special reach. It corresponds.

As shown in FIG. 607(b), the reach allocation table for big hits shows the correspondence relationship between the variation time and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, special reach). As described above, the variation time at the time of jackpot (when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery) set by the variation time setting process (FIG. 593) executed by the main MPU 62 depends on the type of reach. Is becoming The correspondence relationship between the variation time and the type of reach is stored in the reach allocation table for big hits. Specifically, a variation time of 35 seconds corresponds to normal reach, a variation time of 65 seconds corresponds to super reach, and a variation time of 125 seconds corresponds to special reach. It corresponds.

In step Sk2401 of FIG. 606, the reach distribution table for out-of-reach reach shown in FIG. 607(a) is read from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2403, and as a result of referring to the out-reach reach reach distribution table in step Sk2401, it is determined whether or not the information of the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) corresponds to the normal reach. ..

When it is determined in step Sk2403 that the normal reach is supported (Sk2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2404.

In step Sk2404, it is determined whether the determination flag is OFF after the second time. The determination flag after the second time is a flag that is turned on to indicate that the variation of the symbol of the symbol display device 41 after the pachinko machine 10 is activated is after the second time, and is turned off when the pachinko machine 10 is activated. It has been initialized. The determination flags after the second time are stored in the determination flag storage area after the second time in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. In step Sk2404, the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2404: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2405 and the first variation. The information that the display mode of is normal reach is stored. Specifically, the initial fluctuation normal reach flag stored in the initial fluctuation normal reach flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on.

After executing step Sk2405, the process proceeds to step Sk2406, and the determination flag is turned ON for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2406, the process proceeds to Step Sk2407.

On the other hand, in step Sk2404, when it is determined that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2404: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2407 without executing steps Sk2405 and Sk2406.

In step Sk2407, the effect pattern table for normal reach stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time determined in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is dealt with. Get the production pattern. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2408, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2407 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game time. After the execution of step Sk2408, the effect pattern setting process for main reach time is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2403 that normal reach is not supported (Sk2403: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sk2409, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for out-of-reach at step Sk2401, step Sk2201 (see FIG. It is determined whether or not the information on the fluctuation time grasped by 604) corresponds to the super reach.

When it is determined in step Sk2409 that super-reach is supported (Sk2409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2410.

In Step Sk2410, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2410, if the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, if it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2410: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2411, and the first variation. The information that the display mode of is the super reach is stored. Specifically, the initial variation super reach flag stored in the initial variation super reach flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk2411, the process proceeds to step Sk2412, and the determination flag is turned on for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2412, the process proceeds to Step Sk2413.

On the other hand, in step Sk2410, when it is determined that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2410: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2413 without executing steps Sk2411 and Sk2412.

In Step Sk2413, referring to the effect pattern table for super-reach time stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light-side ROM 93, the variation time grasped in Step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to. Acquire the corresponding effect pattern. After that, the process advances to step Sk2408 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2413 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game time.

When it is determined in step Sk2409 that super-reach is not supported (Sk2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2414. If it is determined in step Sk2409 that super-reach is not supported, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for out-of-reach at step Sk2401 is the special reach. In this case, step Proceed to Sk 2414.

In step Sk2414, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2414, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that it is the first symbol variation after the pachinko machine 10 is activated (step Sk2414: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2415 and the first variation. The information that the display mode of is a special reach is stored. Specifically, the initial variation special reach flag stored in the initial variation special reach flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk2415, the process proceeds to step Sk2416, and the determination flag is turned on for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2416, the process proceeds to Step Sk2417.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2414 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2414: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2417 without executing steps Sk2415 and Sk2416.

In step Sk2417, the effect pattern table for special reach stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to, and the fluctuation time determined in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is dealt with. Acquire the effect pattern. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2408 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2417 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game time.

In addition, the first variation normal reach flag, the first variation super reach flag, and the first variation special that can be turned on in the main reach reach effect pattern setting process, and the normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process described later. Each value of the reach flag disappears and is reset to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

<Normal big hit production pattern setting process>
Next, the normal big hit production pattern setting process will be described. The normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 605: Sk2304) of the effect pattern setting process. The normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process determines the reach type similarly to the reach time effect pattern setting process, and sets the normal jackpot time effect pattern according to the reach type. Hereinafter, the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 608 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for normal jackpot. In step Sk2501, the reach distribution table for jackpot (FIG. 607(b)) is read out from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk2503, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for big hit in step Sk2501, it is determined whether or not the information of the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) corresponds to the normal reach.

When it is determined in step Sk2503 that the normal reach is supported (Sk2503: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2504.

In step Sk2504, it is determined whether the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2504, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2504: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2505 and the first variation. Turn on the normal reach flag. After executing step Sk2505, the process proceeds to step Sk2506 to turn on the determination flag for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2506, the process proceeds to Step Sk2507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2504 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2507 without executing steps Sk2505 and Sk2506.

In step Sk2507, the variation time obtained in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to with reference to the effect pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Acquire the effect pattern corresponding to. The production pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot is a table of production patterns that suggests that a normal reach has occurred and that a normal jackpot has been won. After executing Step Sk2507, the process proceeds to Step Sk2508.

In step Sk2508, the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2507 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the current game. After execution of step Sk2508, the normal regular jackpot time effect pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk2503 that the normal reach is not supported (Sk2503: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2509, and as a result of referring to the jackpot reach table in step Sk2501, step Sk2201 (FIG. 604). ), it is determined whether or not the information on the fluctuation time grasped by (1) corresponds to the super reach.

When it is determined in step Sk2509 that the super reach is supported (Sk2509: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2510.

In step Sk2510, it is determined whether the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2510, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2510: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2511 and the first variation. Turn on the super reach flag. After executing step Sk2511, the process proceeds to step Sk2512, and the determination flag is turned on for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2512, the process proceeds to Step Sk2513.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2510 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2510: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2513 without executing steps Sk2511 and Sk2512.

In step Sk2513, referring to the effect pattern table for super-leach/normal jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light-side ROM 93, it is grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604). An effect pattern corresponding to the variable time is acquired. The super-leach/normal jackpot effect pattern table is a table of effect patterns that suggests that a super-reach has occurred and that a normal jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2513, the process proceeds to step Sk2508 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2513 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game time.

When it is determined in step Sk2509 that super-reach is not supported (Sk2509: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2514. If it is determined in step Sk2509 that it does not support super reach, it means that the result of referring to the reach distribution table for jackpots in step Sk2501 is special reach. In this case, step Sk2514 Proceed to.

In Step Sk2514, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2514, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2514: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2515, and the first variation. Turn on the special reach flag. After executing step Sk2515, the process proceeds to step Sk2516, and the determination flag is turned ON for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2516, the process proceeds to Step Sk2517.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2514 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2514: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2517 without executing steps Sk2515 and Sk2516.

In step Sk2517, the variation grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to with reference to the effect pattern table for special reach/normal jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Get the production pattern corresponding to the time. The special reach/normal big hit time production pattern table is a table of production patterns that suggests that a special reach has occurred and that a normal big hit has been won. After executing step Sk2517, the process proceeds to step Sk2508 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2517 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game time.

<Production pattern setting process for probability variation jackpot>
Next, the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process will be described. The probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2302) of the production pattern setting process. The probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process is to determine the reach type similarly to the reach time effect pattern setting process, and set the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern according to the reach type. Hereinafter, the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 609 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for probability variation big hit. In step Sk2601, the reach distribution table for jackpot (FIG. 607(b)) is read out from the reach distribution table storage area 93c and referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2603, and as a result of referring to the jackpot reach table in step Sk2601, it is determined whether or not the information on the variation time obtained in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) corresponds to the normal reach.

When it is determined in step Sk2603 that the normal reach is supported (Sk2603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2604.

In step Sk2604, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In Step Sk2604, if the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, if it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (Step Sk2604: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sk2605 and the first variation. Turn on the normal reach flag. After executing step Sk2605, the process proceeds to step Sk2606, and the determination flag is turned ON for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2606, the process proceeds to Step Sk2607.

On the other hand, in step Sk2604, when it is determined that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2607 without executing steps Sk2605 and Sk2606.

In step Sk2607, the variation time obtained in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to with reference to the effect pattern table for normal reach/probable variation jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Acquire the effect pattern corresponding to. The normal reach/probability variation jackpot production pattern table is a table of production patterns that suggests that normal reach has occurred and that the probability variation jackpot has been won. After executing Step Sk2607, the process proceeds to Step Sk2608.

In step Sk2608, the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2607 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the current game. After the execution of step Sk2608, the actual variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sk2603, when it is determined that the normal reach is not supported (Sk2603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2609, and as a result of referring to the reach distribution table for big hit time in step Sk2601, step Sk2201 (FIG. 604). ), it is determined whether or not the information on the fluctuation time grasped by (1) corresponds to the super reach.

When it is determined in step Sk2609 that super-reach is supported (Sk2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2610.

In Step Sk2610, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2610, if the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, if it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2610: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2611, and the first variation. Turn on the super reach flag. After executing step Sk2611, the process proceeds to step Sk2612, and the determination flag is turned on for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2612, the process proceeds to Step Sk2613.

On the other hand, in step Sk2610, when it is determined that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2610: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2613 without executing steps Sk2611 and Sk2612.

In Step Sk2613, the variation grasped in Step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to with reference to the effect pattern table for super reach/probable variation jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Get the production pattern corresponding to the time. The production pattern table for super reach/probable variation jackpot is a table of production patterns that suggests that super reach has occurred and that the player has won the probability variation jackpot. After executing step Sk2613, the process proceeds to step Sk2608 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2613 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in this game time.

When it is determined in step Sk2609 that the device does not support super reach (Sk2609: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2614. If it is determined in step Sk2609 that super-reach is not supported, this means that the result of referring to the jackpot reach table for special jackpots in step Sk2601 is special reach. In this case, step Sk2614 Proceed to.

In step Sk2614, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2614, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that the variation of the first symbol has occurred after the pachinko machine 10 is activated (step Sk2614: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2615 and the first variation. Turn on the special reach flag. After executing step Sk2615, the process proceeds to step Sk2616, and the determination flag is turned ON for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2616, the process proceeds to Step Sk2617.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2614 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk2614: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2617 without executing steps Sk2615 and Sk2616.

In step Sk2617, the variation grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is referred to with reference to the effect pattern table for special reach/probable variation jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Get the production pattern corresponding to the time. The production pattern table for special reach/probability variation jackpot is a table of production patterns that suggests that a special reach has occurred and that the probability variation jackpot has been won. After executing step Sk2617, the process proceeds to step Sk2608 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sk2617 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game time.

<Deviation production pattern setting process>
Next, the detachment effect pattern setting process will be described. The detachment effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2307) of the effect pattern setting process. The detachment effect pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 610 is a flowchart showing a detachment effect pattern setting process. In step Sk2701, it is determined whether the determination flag is OFF after the second time. In step Sk2701, the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that it is the first variation of the symbol after starting the pachinko machine 10 (step Sk2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2702, and the first variation. The information that the display mode of is off is stored. Specifically, the initial fluctuation deviation flag stored in the initial fluctuation deviation storage area in various flag storage areas 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk2702, the process proceeds to step Sk2703, and the determination flag is turned on for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk2703, the process proceeds to Step Sk2704.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2701 that the determination flag is not OFF for the second time and thereafter (step Sk2701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2704 without executing steps Sk2702 and step Sk2703.

In step Sk2704, the production time pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light-side ROM 93 is referred to, and the off time effect pattern table is referred to so as to correspond to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604). Get the production pattern. The production for the time of disengagement is a production that suggests that the jackpot was not won and the reach did not occur, and specifically, the symbols in the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 41, It is a different production on the effective line L. After executing Step Sk2704, the process proceeds to Step Sk2705, and the effect pattern acquired in Step Sk2704 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the current game time. After the execution of step Sk2705, the off-time production effect pattern setting process is ended.

It should be noted that the value of the initial fluctuation deviation flag that can be turned on in the deviation effect production pattern setting process disappears and is reset to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1914) of the command corresponding process. The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step Sk2801, the value of the setting suggesting random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk2802.

In Step Sk2802, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach. Specifically, the first variation special that can be turned ON in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 608), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609). By determining whether or not the reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the special reach. When it is determined in step Sk2802 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the special reach (step Sk2802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2803.

In Step Sk2803, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. Specifically, the first variation super that can be turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 608), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609). By determining whether or not the reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. When it is determined in step Sk2803 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the super reach (step Sk2803: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2804.

In step Sk2804, it is determined whether or not the display form of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. Specifically, the initial variation normal reach that can be turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606), the normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 608), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609). By determining whether or not the flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. When it is determined in step Sk2804 that the display form of the initial fluctuation is not the normal reach (step Sk2804: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2805.

In step Sk2805, a set suggestion success/failure table group for the first out-of-position is specified from a plurality of types of setting suggestion success/failure table groups stored in the setting suggestion success/failure table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d, a set suggestion hit/miss table group for the first out-of-go, a set suggestion hit/miss table group for the first normal reach, and a set suggestion hit/miss table group for the first super reach are stored in advance. ing. In step Sk2805, a group of setting suggestion/prohibition tables for the first deviation is specified from these three types of setting suggestion/prohibition table groups.

FIG. 612 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first miss. As shown in FIG. 612, the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first miss is configured by six setting suggestion hit/miss tables associated with each type of lottery setting. The lottery setting type is a category of the lottery setting, and in the present embodiment, “lottery setting 1”, “lottery setting 2”, “lottery setting 3”, “lottery setting 4”, and “lottery setting 5”. , "Lottery setting 6". That is, the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first miss is the setting suggestion success/failure table for “lottery setting 1”, the setting suggestion success/failure table for “lottery setting 2”, and the setting suggestion success/failure for “lottery setting 3”. A table, a setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 4", a setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 5", and a setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 6" are provided.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 1", among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, 6048 values of 0 to 6047 are selected as values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. Is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (6048 to 60479) other than the 6048 values of 0 to 6047 are out. In this case, the winning probability is 1/10.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 2”, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, 7560 values of 0 to 7559 are selected as values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. Is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, values other than the 7560 values of 0 to 7559 (7560 to 60479) are out of alignment. In this case, the winning probability is 1/8.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 3”, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, there are 12096 values of 0 to 12095 as values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. Is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (12096 to 60479) other than the 12096 values of 0 to 12095 are out of alignment. The winning probability in this case is 1/5.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 4”, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, there are 15120 values of 0 to 15119 as values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. Is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (15120 to 60479) other than the 15120 values of 0 to 15119 are out. In this case, the winning probability is 1/4.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 5”, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, there are 20160 values of 0 to 20159 as values to be won when executing the setting suggestion effect. Is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (20160 to 60479) other than the 20160 values of 0 to 20159 are out of alignment. The winning probability in this case is 1/3.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 6”, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, 30240 values of 0 to 30239 as values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. Is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (30240 to 60479) other than the 30240 values of 0 to 30239 are out of alignment. The winning probability in this case is 1/2.

The setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first out-of-range configured as described above is for realizing the correspondence relationship between the standard lottery settings described above with reference to FIG. 579 and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern. It is a group of tables.

Returning to FIG. 611, in step Sk2805, after the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first deviation is specified, the process proceeds to step Sk2806.

In Step Sk2806, the setting suggestion/prohibition table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion/prohibition table group specified in Step Sk2805, that is, the setting suggestion/prohibition table group for the first miss. The setting information of the lottery setting is the information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 in step Sk1902 of the command handling process (FIG. 601). For example, when the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is “6”, the setting suggestion win/loss table for the “lottery setting 6” in which the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY to be won is “0 to 30239” Is specified. After executing Step Sk2806, the process proceeds to Step Sk2807.

In step Sk2807, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk2806 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk2808, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk2807, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk2801 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. ..

When it is determined in step Sk2808 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk2808: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2809, and the ending effect pattern to which the setting suggestion pattern PX is added is set in the ending period of this time. Set as a performance pattern to be executed. The ending effect pattern to which the setting suggesting pattern PX is added is stored in advance in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and is read from the effect pattern table storage area 93a and used.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk2808 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk2808: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk2810 and the normal ending effect pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not performed is Set as an effect pattern to be executed during the period. The normal ending effect pattern is stored in advance in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and is read from the effect pattern table storage area 93a and used. After executing step Sk2809 or step Sk2810, the ending effect setting process is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sk2801 to Sk2809, when the big hit is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the first deviation shown in FIG. 579. It is possible to execute an effect in which the setting suggesting pattern appears with the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern corresponding to the lottery setting, which is determined from the time correspondence.

When it is determined in step Sk2804 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk2804: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2811.

In step Sk2811, the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first normal reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion success/failure table groups stored in the setting suggestion success/failure table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 613 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first normal reach. The setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first normal reach is composed of six setting suggestion success/failure tables associated with each type of lottery setting, similarly to the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first outlier in FIG. 612. ..

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for each lottery setting, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, the value that is won to execute the setting suggestion effect and the value that is out of the range are recorded. In the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 1”, the winning probability is 1/9, and in the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 2”, the winning probability is 1/7, and “lottery setting 3”. In the setting suggestion win/loss table for ", the winning probability is 1/4, and in the setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 4", the winning probability is 1/3, and the setting for "lottery setting 5" In the suggestion win/loss table, the winning probability is 1/2, and in the setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 6", the winning probability is 1/1.

The set suggestion success/failure table group for the first normal reach at the time of the first-time normal reach configured as described above corresponds to each standard lottery setting and the probability of appearance of the setting suggestive pattern for the first-time normal reach described above with reference to FIG. 580. It is a table group for realizing the relationship.

Returning to FIG. 611, after the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first normal reach is specified in step Sk2811, the process proceeds to step Sk2806 described above.

In Step Sk2806 after the execution of Step Sk2811, the setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group specified in Step Sk2811, that is, the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first normal reach. .. After executing Step Sk2806, the process advances to Step Sk2807 to refer to the specified setting suggestion success/failure table.

By executing the processes of steps Sk2801 to Sk2804, Sk2811, and Sk2806 to Sk2810, if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is illustrated. It is possible to execute an effect in which the setting suggestion pattern appears with the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern corresponding to the lottery setting, which is determined from the correspondence relationship for the first normal reach shown in 580. As a result, in each of the lottery setting 1 to the lottery setting 6, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, the appearance probability is higher than the appearance probability of the design suggestion pattern when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of order. As a result, it is possible to make the setting suggesting pattern appear.

When it is determined in step Sk2803 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk2803: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2812.

In step Sk2812, a set suggestion success/failure table group for the first super reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion success/failure table groups stored in the setting suggestion success/failure table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 614 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first super reach. The setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first super reach is made up of six setting suggestion success/failure tables associated with each type of lottery setting, similarly to the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first miss at FIG. There is.

In the setting suggestion win/loss table for each lottery setting, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, the value that is won to execute the setting suggestion effect and the value that is out of the range are recorded. In the setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 1", the winning probability is 1/8, and in the setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 2", the winning probability is 1/6, and "lottery setting 3". In the setting suggestion win/loss table for ", the winning probability is 1/3, and in the setting suggestion win/loss table for "lottery setting 4", the winning probability is 1/2, and the setting for "lottery setting 5" is set. In the suggestion win/loss table, the winning probability is 1/1, and in the setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 6”, the winning probability is 1/1.

The setting suggestion success/failure table group for the initial super reach configured as described above includes the standard lottery settings and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern for the initial super reach described above with reference to FIG. 581. It is a table group for realizing the correspondence relationship of.

Returning to FIG. 611, in step Sk2812, after the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first super reach is specified, the process proceeds to step Sk2806 described above.

In step Sk2806 after the execution of step Sk2812, a setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is identified from the setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table group identified in step Sk2812, that is, the setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table group for the first super reach. To do. After executing Step Sk2806, the process advances to Step Sk2807 to refer to the specified setting suggestion success/failure table.

By executing the processes of steps Sk2801 to Sk2803, Sk2812, Sk2806 to Sk2810, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is illustrated. It is possible to execute the effect that the setting suggesting pattern appears with the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the correspondence relationship for the first super reach shown in 581. As a result, in each of the lottery settings 1 to 5, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the super reach, the appearance probability is higher than the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the normal reach. , It is possible to make a pattern for setting suggestion appear. Regarding the lottery setting 6, the setting suggesting pattern can be made to appear with the same probability of 1/1 (100% in terms of percentage) as in the case where the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach.

When it is determined in step Sk2802 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the special reach (step Sk2802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk2813.

In Step Sk2813, the ending effect pattern to which the setting suggestion picture PY with a number is added is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the ending period of this time. In the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light-side ROM 93, six types of ending effect patterns to which the setting suggesting pattern PY in which the numbers “1” to “6” are individually added are added are stored in advance. Has been done. In Step Sk2813, an ending effect pattern to which a setting suggesting pattern PY having a number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is added is specified from these 6 kinds of ending effect patterns, and the specified ending effect pattern is set to this time. Set as an effect pattern to be executed in the ending period. The setting information of the lottery setting is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 in step Sk1902 of the command handling process (FIG. 601). For example, when the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is “6”, the ending effect pattern (see FIG. 582) to which the setting suggesting pattern PY with “6” is added is the ending period of this time. Is set as an effect pattern to be executed in. After executing Step Sk2813, the ending effect setting process is ended.

By executing the processes of steps Sk2801, Sk2802, and Sk2813, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending information executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the setting information. It is possible to make the setting suggestion pattern PY with a number appear.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 615 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sk2901, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sk2902.

In step Sk2902, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 616 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sk3001, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 617 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sk3101, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 616), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sk3101), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Sk3102, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sk3101) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sk3103.

In step Sk3103, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sk3102), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sk3104.

In step Sk3104, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sk3103), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sk3105, the other processes are executed, and then the V interrupt process is ended. Heretofore, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated (when the power is turned on), the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, so that the lottery mode becomes low. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed. Then, in the winning lottery, when the jackpot is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting is set. The effect in which the suggestion design (treasure chest design) PX appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX for each type of lottery setting is configured to change based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine 10 is activated. In summary, in the ending effect, the setting suggestion is made so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting and the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10. The effect of the design PX is executed. Therefore, the player observes the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10, and first stores the display mode of the symbol variation. After that, when the player wins the big hit in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggestion pattern PX which is the design of the treasure box appears in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Whether or not the current lottery setting is determined by observing whether or not the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX is estimated, and the obtained appearance probability and the display mode of the symbol variation in the first game time stored previously. Can be guessed.

When considering a pachinko machine of a comparative example in which the probability of appearance of the design suggestion pattern PX is determined based only on the current lottery setting, the pachinko machine of the comparative example suggests that the setting suggests depending on only the model of the pachinko machine. The appearance probability of the design pattern PX is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX does not depend on only the model of the pachinko machine, so the player needs to estimate the lottery setting. Depending on the skill of the player, the randomness of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX is strongly felt, and the display mode of the pattern variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine 10 is started is taken into consideration. It is possible to accurately guess what the current lottery setting is. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player needs to play the game in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on in the morning. In this case, the player can be actively urged to play the game from the morning.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player wins the jackpot in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the setting is performed during the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Since it is necessary to observe whether or not the suggesting pattern PX appears to estimate the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX, it is necessary to repeatedly generate a period for performing the ending effect, and to the player. It is possible to actively encourage repeated games to be played.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the symbol variation has a deviation, a normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach. The display mode of these symbol variations is, in this order, from low to high in expectation of a big hit in the winning lottery. In addition, the probability of appearance of the setting suggesting pattern PX is higher in the display mode of the symbol variation that is more likely to be a big win in the winning lottery in the first game time. When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX is higher than that when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX is low, the setting suggestion pattern PX is more likely to appear. When a display mode with a high symbol variation occurs, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. Therefore, in terms of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX, it is desired that the player generate a display mode of the symbol variation with a high expectation that it is a big hit in the winning lottery in the first game time. Expectation can be added.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game in the morning in each machine, and after the power is turned on. In the first game time, by generating a reach that is expected to be a big hit in the winning lottery, it is possible to create a stand on which the setting suggesting pattern PX is likely to appear with one's own hands.

In a general pachinko machine, even if a super reach or a special reach occurs in a game time, if the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time, the expectation is provided to the player. You can, but then you can't provide substantial value. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is limited to the first game time after the pachinko machine 10 is started, but when a super reach or a special reach occurs, the setting in the ending production after that. The value of improving the appearance probability of the suggestion pattern PX can be provided to the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of reserves, which is the total value of the number of reserves of game balls entering the starting opening 33 and the number of reserves of game balls entering the second starting opening 34, is 0 (zero). In this case, since the probability of winning the reach in the game time is relatively high, the probability that the reach effect is executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10 is relatively high. On the other hand, when the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10 is normal reach, super reach, special reach, it is for setting suggestion compared with the case of being out of reach. Since the appearance probability of the pattern PX is high, the setting suggestion pattern PX can be generated with a relatively high probability.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine 10 is the special reach, the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written. Since the ending effect in which the selected setting suggesting pattern PY is added is executed, the setting information of the lottery setting can be known with high accuracy (actually, 100% accuracy). On the other hand, in the case of super reach, normal reach, or out-of-range, it is necessary to estimate the setting information of the lottery setting with the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern (treasure box pattern) PX. Therefore, also from this point, the player strongly feels randomness in guessing the setting of the winning probability, and the setting suggesting pattern PY with the number corresponding to the setting of the winning probability appears. It is possible to enjoy both the expectation of wanting and the game nature of estimating the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX in a predetermined period. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the game.

<<K8>> Modification of the eleventh embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<K8-1>> Modification 1:
<Outline of Processing in Modification 1>
The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine in the first modification will be described first while showing the differences from the eleventh embodiment. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the first modification is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same names and reference numerals are used for the same parts as those of the eleventh embodiment, and the outline of the processing is performed. Will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. The setting suggestion effect for causing the setting suggesting pattern to appear is executed with the appearance probability according to the type, but in particular, the appearance probability for the above setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is after the pachinko machine 10 is activated. It is configured to change based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time. On the other hand, in the modified example 1, even in an effect period other than the ending period for executing the ending effect, the setting suggesting pattern appears with the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. A configuration in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed, and a period during which the setting suggestion effect is executed is a display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated (hereinafter, simply "display mode of the first variation. (Also referred to as “”). Specifically, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is off, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, and when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, a super reach in the game time has occurred. It is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect indicating that, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, it is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect indicating that the normal reach in the game time has occurred, When the display mode is the special reach, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the effect indicating that it is out of the game times (so-called complete outage in which the jackpot is not won and the reach does not occur).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first out-of-position and the setting suggestion propriety for the first normal reach are set in the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. The table group and the setting suggestion success/failure table group for the first super reach are stored. On the other hand, in the modified example 1, only the setting suggestion hit/miss table group that is the same as the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first deviation (see FIG. 612) is stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. It has been configured. That is, in the modified example 1, the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for realizing the correspondence relationship between each standard lottery setting described with reference to FIG. 579 and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern is set in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d. Remembered During the period in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect table group is used to execute the setting suggestion effect so that the appearance probability is based on the type of lottery setting.

With the above configuration, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of order, the appearance probability based on the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is set in the ending period after the execution of the game times that was won in the lottery. Then, the effect of the setting suggesting design (design of the treasure box) PX is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 579, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is “lottery setting 1,” the effect of the setting suggesting pattern PX is executed so that the appearance probability is 1/10, and When the lottery setting is “lottery setting 2”, the effect of the setting suggesting pattern PX is executed so that the appearance probability is 1/8, and when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 3”, 1 The effect of the setting suggesting pattern PX is executed so that the appearance probability is /5, and when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 4”, the setting suggesting pattern PX is set to have an appearance probability of 1/4. Is performed, and when the current lottery setting is “lottery setting 5”, the effect of the setting suggestion pattern PX is executed so that the appearance probability is 1/3, and the current lottery setting is “lottery setting”. 6”, the effect of the setting suggesting pattern PX is executed so that the appearance probability is 1/2.

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, the setting suggestion is set so that the appearance probability is based on the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine during the production period that indicates that the super reach in the subsequent game times has occurred. The effect of the design PX is executed. The appearance probability based on the lottery setting is the same as the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the ending period described above.

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is Super Reach, the setting suggestion is set so that the appearance probability based on the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is set in the production period indicating that the normal reach has occurred in the subsequent game times. The effect of the design PX is executed. The appearance probability based on the lottery setting is the same as the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the ending period described above.

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is Special Reach, the setting probability is set so that the appearance probability is based on the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine during the production period indicating that it is out of the subsequent game times. The effect of the design PX is executed. The appearance probability based on the lottery setting is the same as the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the ending period described above.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine of the first modification will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the eleventh embodiment in the processing executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 618 to 629, and the main control device 60 will be described. Various processes executed by the MPU 62, other processes executed by the sound emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Production pattern setting process for reach>
The reach time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2306) of the effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, this reach time effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the reach-time effect pattern setting process in the first modification. In this reach time effect pattern setting process, Steps Sk3201 to Sk3206, Steps Sk3208 to Sk3212, and Steps Sk3214 to Sk3217 are steps Sk2401 to Sk2406 and Steps of the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment. This is the same as Sk2408 to Sk2412 and steps Sk2414 to Sk2417. In the reach time effect pattern setting process in the first modification, only step Sk3207 and step Sk3213 are different from the reach time effect pattern setting process in the eleventh embodiment.

In step Sk2407 of the reach-time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is acquired by referring to the effect pattern table for the normal reach time. On the other hand, in step Sk3207 of the reach-time effect pattern setting process in the first modification, a subroutine-type normal reach-time effect pattern table reference process is executed. The production pattern table reference processing for normal reach will be described later.

In step Sk2413 of the reach-time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment, the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time is acquired by referring to the effect pattern table for super-reach time. On the other hand, in step Sk3213 of the reach-time effect pattern setting process in the modified example 1, the sub-reach effect-time effect pattern table reference process is executed as a subroutine. The effect pattern table reference processing for super reach will be described later.

After executing Step Sk3207, Step Sk3213, or Step Sk3217, the process proceeds to Step S3208. After the execution of step Sk3208, the production pattern setting process for reach time is ended.

<Normal reach reach production pattern table reference processing>
Next, the normal reach time effect pattern table reference processing will be described. The normal reach time effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 618: Sk3207) of the reach time effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach will be described in detail.

FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern table reference processing for normal reach. In step Sk3301, the value of the setting suggesting random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk3302.

In step Sk3302, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. Specifically, it is turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621 described later), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether or not the obtained initial variation super reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial variation is super reach.

When it is determined in step Sk3302 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk3302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3303.

In step Sk3303, a setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. The setting information of the lottery setting is the information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 in step Sk1902 of the command handling process (FIG. 601). For example, when the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is “6”, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY to be won from the setting suggestion win/loss table group shown in FIG. 612 is “0-30239”. The setting suggestion win/loss table for “lottery setting 6” is specified. After executing Step Sk3302, the process proceeds to Step Sk3304.

In step Sk3304, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk3303 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3305, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk3304, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3301 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. ..

When it is determined in step Sk3305 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk3305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3306, and is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the effect pattern table for normal reach in which the setting suggesting pattern PX is added, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After the execution of step Sk3306, the production pattern setting process for reach time is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk3305 that the winning of the setting suggestive effect is not supported (Sk3305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3307 and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the normal production pattern table for normal reach, the production pattern corresponding to the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After executing step Sk3307, the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach time is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk3302 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk3302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3307.

By executing the above-described reach time effect pattern setting process and normal reach time effect pattern table reference process, if the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, without winning the jackpot in the game times after the first time When a normal reach occurs, in the effect that suggests that the normal reach has occurred, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 579.

<Production pattern table reference processing for super reach>
Next, a description will be given of the production pattern table reference processing for super reach. The super reach time effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 618: Sk3213) of the reach time effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the effect pattern table reference processing for super reach will be described in detail.

FIG. 620 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern table reference processing for super reach. In step Sk3401, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk3402.

In step Sk3402, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. Specifically, it is turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621 described later), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether or not the obtained initial variation normal reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach.

When it is determined in step Sk3402 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk3402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3403.

In step Sk3403, the setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3404, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk3403 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3405, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk3404, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3401 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk3403 to Sk3405 are the same as the steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach (FIG. 619).

When it is determined in step Sk3405 that the winning of the setting suggestive effect is supported (Sk3405: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3406, and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the effect pattern table for super-reach when the setting suggestion pattern PX is added, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After execution of step Sk3406, the effect pattern setting process for main reach time is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk3405 that the winning of the setting suggestive effect is not supported (Sk3405: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3407, and is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the normal production pattern table for super reach, the production pattern corresponding to the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After the execution of step Sk3407, the effect pattern table reference process for main super reach is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk3402 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the normal reach (step Sk3402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3407.

By executing the above-described reach time effect pattern setting process and super reach time effect pattern table reference process, if the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, without winning the jackpot in the game times after the first time When the super-reach occurs, in the effect that suggests that the super-reach has occurred, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 579. ..

<Normal big hit production pattern setting process>
The normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 605: Sk2304) of the effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 621 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for normal jackpot in the first modification. In this normal big hitting time production pattern setting process, steps Sk3501 to Sk3506, steps Sk3508 to Sk3512, and steps Sk3514 to Sk3517 are steps Sk2501 to Sk2506 in the normal big hitting time production pattern setting process (FIG. 608) of the eleventh embodiment. It is the same as steps Sk2508 to Sk2512 and steps Sk2514 to Sk2517. In the normal big hitting effect pattern setting process in the modified example 1, only step Sk3507 and step Sk3513 are different from the normal big hitting effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment.

In step Sk2507 of the effect pattern setting process for normal jackpots in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 608), the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is acquired by referring to the effect pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpots. On the other hand, in step Sk3507 of the effect pattern setting process for the normal big hit time in the modified example 1, the normal reach/normal big hit time effect pattern table reference process that is a subroutine is executed. The normal reach/normal big hit time production pattern table reference processing will be described later.

In step Sk2513 of the effect pattern setting process for normal jackpots in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 608), the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is acquired by referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/normal jackpots. .. On the other hand, in step Sk3513 of the effect pattern setting process for normal jackpot time in the modified example 1, the sub-reach super-reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table reference process is executed. The super reach/normal big hit production pattern table reference processing will be described later.

Then, after executing Step Sk3507, Step Sk3513, or Step Sk3517, the process proceeds to Step S3508. After the execution of step Sk3508, the normal regular jackpot time effect pattern setting process is ended.

<Normal reach/normal jackpot production pattern table reference processing>
Next, the normal reach/normal big hit production pattern table reference process will be described. The normal reach/normal big hit time effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 621: Sk3507) of the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process. The normal reach/normal big hit time production pattern table reference processing will be described in detail below.

FIG. 622 is a flowchart showing the normal reach/normal jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing. In step Sk3601, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk3602.

In step Sk3602, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. Specifically, the first time that can be turned ON in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether or not the variable super reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial variation is super reach.

When it is determined in step Sk3602 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk3602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3603.

In step Sk3603, a setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3604, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk3603 is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk3605, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk3604, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3601 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk3603 to Sk3605 are the same as steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach (FIG. 619).

If it is determined in step Sk3605 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk3605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3606 and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the normal reach/normal jackpot effect pattern table to which the setting suggesting pattern PX is added, the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. In the production pattern table for normal reach/normal jackpot when the setting suggestion pattern PX is added, the setting suggestion pattern PX appears in the part that indicates that normal reach has occurred in the production pattern for normal reach/normal jackpot. Is configured to. After execution of step Sk3606, the effect pattern setting process for main reach time is ended.

If it is determined in step Sk3605 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk3605: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3607 and the result is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the normal normal reach/normal big hit time effect pattern table, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After the execution of step Sk3607, the normal reach/normal jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk3602 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk3602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3607.

By executing the above-mentioned normal jackpot time production pattern setting processing and normal reach/normal jackpot time production pattern table reference processing, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, the normal jackpot is played in the game times after the first time. When the normal reach occurs and the effect that suggests that the normal reach has occurred, the setting suggesting effect is executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. be able to.

<Super reach/normal jackpot production pattern table reference processing>
Next, a description will be given of the super reach/normal big hit production pattern table reference processing. The super-reach/normal big hit time effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 621: Sk3513) of the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the super reach/normal big hit time production pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 623 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern table reference processing for super reach/normal jackpot. In step Sk3701, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk3702.

In step Sk3702, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. Specifically, the first time that can be turned ON in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624 described later). By determining whether or not the variable normal reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial variation is normal reach.

When it is determined in step Sk3702 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk3702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3703.

In step Sk3703, a setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3704, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk3703 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3705, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk3704, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3701 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk3703 to Sk3705 are the same as the steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the effect pattern table reference processing for normal reach (FIG. 619).

When it is determined in step Sk3705 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk3705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3706 and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the effect pattern table for super reach/normal big hit when the design suggestion pattern PX is added, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. In the production pattern table for super reach/normal jackpot when the setting suggestion pattern PX is added, the part for suggesting that super reach has occurred in the production pattern for super reach/normal jackpot is the design suggestion pattern. PX is configured to appear. After execution of step Sk3706, the effect pattern setting process for main reach time is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk3705 that the winning of the setting suggesting effect is not supported (Sk3705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3707, and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the normal super reach/normal big hit time effect pattern table, the effect pattern corresponding to the variable time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After execution of step Sk3707, the present super reach/normal big hit time effect pattern table reference processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk3702 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the normal reach (step Sk3702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3707.

By executing the above-mentioned normal jackpot production effect pattern setting processing and super reach/normal jackpot time production pattern table reference processing, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, it is a normal jackpot in the game times after the first time. When the player wins the game and the super-reach has occurred, in the effect that suggests that the super-reach has occurred, the setting suggestion effect is determined by the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. Can be executed.

<Production pattern setting process for probability variation jackpot>
The probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2302) of the production pattern setting process. Hereinafter, the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process will be described in detail.

FIG. 624 is a flow chart showing the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process in the first modification. In this probability variation big hit production effect pattern setting process, steps Sk3801 to Sk3806, steps Sk3808 to Sk3812, and steps Sk3814 to Sk3817 are steps Sk2601 to Sk2606 of the probability variation big hit production effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609) of the eleventh embodiment. This is the same as steps Sk2608 to Sk2612 and steps Sk2614 to Sk2617. In the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process in the first modification, only steps Sk3807 and Sk3813 differ from the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment.

In step Sk2607 of the probability variation jackpot production effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609) of the eleventh embodiment, the production pattern corresponding to the variation time is acquired by referring to the production pattern table for normal reach/probability variation jackpot time. On the other hand, in step Sk3807 of the probability variation jackpot production effect pattern setting processing in the first modification, the subroutine reach normal reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing is executed. The normal reach/probability variation big hit time production pattern table reference processing will be described later.

In step Sk2613 of the probability variation jackpot production effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609) of the eleventh embodiment, the production pattern corresponding to the variation time is acquired by referring to the production pattern table for super reach/probability variation jackpot time. .. On the other hand, in step Sk3813 of the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process in the first modification, the sub-reachable super reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table reference process is executed. The production pattern table reference process for super reach/probable variation jackpot will be described later.

After that, after executing Step Sk3807, Step Sk3813, or Step Sk3817, the process proceeds to Step S3508. After execution of Step Sk3808, the effect pattern setting process for the probability variation jackpot time is ended.

<Normal reach/probable variation jackpot production pattern table reference processing>
Next, the normal reach/probably variable jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing will be described. The normal reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624: Sk3807). Hereinafter, the normal reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing the normal reach/probability variation big hit time effect pattern table reference processing. In step Sk3901, the value of the setting suggesting random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk3902.

In step Sk3902, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach. Specifically, the first variation super that can be turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624). By determining whether or not the reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach.

When it is determined in step Sk3902 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk3902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3903.

In step Sk3903, the setting suggestion success/failure table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion success/failure table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion success/failure table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk3904, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk3903 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk3905, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk3904, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk3901 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk3903 to Sk3905 are the same as the steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach (FIG. 619).

When it is determined in step Sk3905 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk3905: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk3906, and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the effect pattern table for normal reach/probably variable big hit when the setting suggesting pattern PX is added, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. In the production pattern table for normal reach/probable variation jackpot when the setting suggestion pattern PX is added, the setting suggestion pattern PX appears in the portion that indicates that normal reach has occurred in the production pattern for normal reach/probability variation jackpot. Is configured to. After the execution of step Sk3906, the effect pattern setting process for main reach time is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk3905 that the winning of the setting suggesting effect is not supported (Sk3905: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3907, and the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 stores. By referring to the normal normal reach/probability variation big hit time effect pattern table, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After execution of step Sk3907, this normal reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk3902 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not super reach (step Sk3902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk3907.

By performing the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot time production pattern setting processing and normal reach/probability variation jackpot time production pattern table reference processing, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, the probability variation jackpot in the game times after the first time When the normal reach occurs and the effect that suggests that the normal reach has occurred, the setting suggesting effect is executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. be able to.

<Production pattern table reference processing for super reach/certain variation jackpot>
Next, a description will be given of the super reach/probability variation big hit time production pattern table reference processing. The super reach/probability variation big hit time effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 624: Sk3813) of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process. In the following, the super reach/probably variable jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing will be described in detail.

FIG. 626 is a flow chart showing a super reach/probability variation big hit time effect pattern table reference process. In step Sk4001, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk4002.

In step Sk4002, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach. Specifically, the first variation normal reach that can be turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624). By determining whether or not the flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach.

When it is determined in step Sk4002 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk4002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4003.

In step Sk4003, a setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk4004, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk4003 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk4005, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk4004, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk4001 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk4003 to Sk4005 are the same as the steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach (FIG. 619).

When it is determined in step Sk4005 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk4005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4006 and is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the effect pattern table for the time when the super reach/probable variation big hit is added with the setting suggestion pattern PX, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. In the production pattern table for super reach/probable variation jackpot when the setting suggestion pattern PX is added, the setting suggestion pattern is a part that suggests that super reach has occurred in the production pattern for super reach/probable variation jackpot. PX is configured to appear. After the execution of step Sk4006, the production pattern setting process for reach is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk4005 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk4005: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4007 and is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the normal production pattern table for super reach/probable variation jackpot, the production pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After execution of step Sk4007, the present super-reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table reference processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk4002 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the normal reach (step Sk4002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4007.

By performing the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot time production pattern setting processing and super reach/probability variation jackpot time production pattern table reference processing, if the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach, the probability variation jackpot in the game times after the first time When the player wins the game and the super-reach has occurred, in the effect that suggests that the super-reach has occurred, the setting suggestion effect is determined by the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579. Can be executed.

<Deviation production pattern setting process>
The detachment effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2307) of the effect pattern setting process. The detachment effect pattern setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 627 is a flow chart showing a detachment effect pattern setting process in the first modification. In this detachment effect pattern setting process, steps Sk4101 to Sk4103 and step Sk4105 are the same as steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 and step Sk2705 of the detachment effect pattern setting process (FIG. 610) of the eleventh embodiment. In the detachment effect pattern setting process in the first modification, only step Sk4104 is different from the detachment effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment.

In step Sk2704 of the detachment effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment, the detachment effect pattern table is referenced to obtain the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time. On the other hand, in step Sk4104 of the detachment effect pattern setting process in the first modification, a subroutine detachment effect pattern table reference process is executed. The detachment effect pattern table reference processing will be described later.

<Disconnection production pattern table reference processing>
Next, the detachment effect pattern table reference processing will be described. The detachment effect pattern table reference process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 627: Sk4104) of the detachment effect pattern setting process. The detachment effect pattern table reference process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 628 is a flowchart showing the off-direction effect pattern table reference processing. In step Sk4201, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk4202.

In step Sk4202, it is determined whether the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach. Specifically, the first variation that can be turned on in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 618), the normal big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 621), and the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 624). By determining whether or not the special reach flag is ON, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the special reach.

When it is determined in step Sk4202 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach (step Sk4202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4203.

In step Sk4203, a setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk4204, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk4203 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to Step Sk4205, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in Step Sk4204, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in Step Sk4201 corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk4203 to Sk4205 are the same as steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the effect pattern table reference process for normal reach (FIG. 619).

When it is determined in step Sk4205 that the winning of the setting suggestive effect is supported (Sk4205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4206 and is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the effect pattern table for out-of-positions to which the setting suggesting pattern PX is added, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After the execution of Step Sk4206, the production pattern setting process for reach time is ended.

When it is determined in step Sk4205 that the winning of the setting suggestive effect is not supported (Sk4205: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4207, and is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the normal production pattern table for out-of-range, the production pattern corresponding to the variation time period grasped in step Sk2201 (FIG. 604) is acquired. After the execution of step Sk4207, the production pattern table reference processing for out-of-genuine processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk4202 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the special reach (step Sk4202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4207.

If the display mode of the initial fluctuation is special reach by executing the above-mentioned off time effect pattern setting process and off time effect pattern table reference process, the jackpot is not won in the game times after the first time. When the reach does not occur, the setting suggesting effect can be executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1914) of the command corresponding process. The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 629 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step Sk4301, the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY stored in the various counter areas 94b (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step Sk4302.

In Step Sk4302, it is determined whether or not the display form of the initial fluctuation is out of order. Specifically, whether or not the display mode of the initial fluctuation is off is determined by determining whether or not the initial fluctuation off flag that can be turned on in the off time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 627) is on. Make a decision.

When it is determined in step Sk4302 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of order (step Sk4302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4303.

In step Sk4303, the setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 612) stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the following step Sk4304, the setting suggestion success/failure table specified in step Sk4303 is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk4305, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk4304, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk4301 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. .. Steps Sk4303 to Sk4305 are the same as steps Sk3303 to Sk3305 of the production pattern table reference process for normal reach (FIG. 619).

When it is determined in step Sk4305 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk4305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4306, and the ending effect pattern with the setting suggestion pattern PX is added in the ending period of this time. Set as a performance pattern to be executed. The ending effect pattern to which the setting suggesting pattern PX is added is stored in advance in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and is read from the effect pattern table storage area 93a and used.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk4305 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk4305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4307, and the normal ending effect pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not performed is set to the ending Set as an effect pattern to be executed during the period. The normal ending effect pattern is stored in advance in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and is read from the effect pattern table storage area 93a and used. After executing step Sk4306 or step Sk4307, the ending effect setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk4302 that the display form of the initial fluctuation is not out of order (step Sk4302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4307.

By executing the ending effect setting process described above, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of order, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode changes to the opening/closing execution mode, it is executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with the appearance probability according to the lottery setting, which is determined from the standard correspondence shown in FIG. 579.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, when the pachinko machine is activated (when the power is turned on), the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed so that the lottery mode is in the low probability mode. In the winning lottery in, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed. Then, in a predetermined period, an effect in which the setting suggesting pattern (the pattern of the treasure box) PX appears so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting. Further, the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears is configured to change based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. Therefore, the player observes the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, and first stores the display mode of the symbol variation. After that, the player estimates a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears from the display mode of the symbol variation in the first game time stored in advance, and sets the treasure box pattern in the predetermined period. By observing whether or not the suggestion pattern PX appears and estimating the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX, it is possible to infer which the current lottery setting is.

When considering a pachinko machine of a comparative example in which a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears is fixed, the pachinko machine of the comparative example shows that the setting suggesting pattern PX depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. The predetermined period of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears does not depend on only the model of the pachinko machine, so the player can guess the lottery setting. Depending on the skill of the player, he feels a lot of randomness about the appearance period of the setting suggestion pattern PX required for the game, and takes into consideration the display mode of the pattern variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine. By accurately grasping a predetermined period in which the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears is executed, it is possible to accurately estimate which is the current lottery setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the player needs to play the game in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine. When the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, the player can be actively urged to play the game from the morning.

In the pachinko machine of the modification 1, as a display mode of the symbol variation, there is a deviation, a normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach. The display mode of these symbol variations is, in this order, from low to high in expectation of a big hit in the winning lottery. Then, in the first game time, as the display mode of the symbol fluctuation with a higher expectation that becomes a big hit in the winning lottery, the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears, the probability that the probability is executed in the game time is high The display period of the fluctuation is set to be an effect period. Since the frequency of occurrence is higher in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game times is higher than in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game times is low, there is a high expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit in the winning lottery. When a display mode of high symbol variation occurs, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. For this reason, in terms of the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX may appear to the player, a symbol variation that is highly expected to be a big hit in the winning lottery in the first game time. It is possible to add a sense of expectation that the user wants the display mode of.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine. By performing, in the first game time after the power is turned on, by generating a reach that is expected to be a big hit in the winning lottery, it is possible to generate a stand on which the setting suggesting pattern PX is likely to appear with one's own hands.

In a general pachinko machine, even if a super reach or a special reach occurs in a game time, if the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time, the expectation is provided to the player. You can, but then you can't provide substantial value. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, it is limited to the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated, but when a super reach or a special reach occurs, after that, the setting suggesting pattern PX It is possible to provide the player with the value that a predetermined period in which the occurrence of “” may occur can be set to a period with a high occurrence frequency.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, the total holding number, which is the total value of the holding number of game balls entering the starting opening 33 and the holding number of game balls entering the second starting opening 34, is 0 (zero). In some cases, since the probability of winning the reach in the game time is relatively high, the probability that the reach effect is executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated is relatively high. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pattern change executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine is normal reach, super reach, special reach, compared with the case of being out of position, the setting suggesting pattern Since the occurrence frequency of the predetermined period in which the PX appears is high, the setting suggesting pattern PX can be generated relatively frequently.

<<K8-2. 》Modification 2:
<Structure of gaming machine in modification 2>
The pachinko machine in the modified example 2 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in the configuration of the game board. The structure of the game board will be described first while showing the differences from the eleventh embodiment. In the hardware configuration of the second modification, the same parts and components as those of the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same names and reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 630 is a front view of the game board 230 included in the pachinko machine of the second modification. The first start port 33 was provided in the lower center of the game board 30 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 567). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the distribution mechanism 250 for distributing the game balls, the first starting port 233, and the second starting port 234 are provided below the center of the game board 230. Other parts of the game board 230 are the same as those of the game board 30 in the eleventh embodiment. The distribution mechanism 250 distributes the entered game balls to the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 alternately. The second starting port 234 has the same function as the second starting port 34 provided below the distribution mechanism 250.

FIG. 631 is an explanatory diagram showing how the distribution mechanism 250 distributes game balls. As shown in FIG. 631(a), when one game ball PB1 enters the distribution mechanism 250 from the ball entering part 251, the game ball PB1 contacts the blade part 252. By contacting the game ball PB1, the blade portion 252 rotates clockwise around the shaft portion 252a by a predetermined angle, and distributes the game ball PB1 to the ball exit portion 254. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 631(b), the game ball PB1 distributed to the ball-out portion 254 is discharged from the ball-out portion 254 and enters the second starting opening 234. Further, as shown in FIG. 631(b), the blade portion 252 is in a state of being rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, unlike the state of FIG. 631(a).

As shown in FIG. 631(c), when another game ball PB2 enters the distribution mechanism 250 from the ball entering part 251 in this state, the game ball PB2 contacts the blade part 252. By contacting the game ball PB2, the blade portion 252 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft portion 252a by a predetermined angle, and distributes the game ball PB2 to the ball exit portion 253. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 631(d), the game ball PB2 distributed to the ball-out portion 253 is discharged from the ball-out portion 253 and enters the first starting opening 233. Further, as shown in FIG. 631(d), the blade portion 252 returns to the state of FIG. 631(a). In this way, the distribution mechanism 250 repeats the operation of FIG. 631(a) to FIG. 631(d), so that the game ball entered from the ball entering portion 251 is moved to the first starting opening 233 and the second starting opening 234. Alternate to.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the player inserts the game ball into the distribution mechanism 250 so that the game ball is alternately inserted into the first starting opening 233 and the second starting opening 234. As a result, as a result, the special information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233 and the special information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234 are alternately arranged. Can be stored as pending information. The distribution mechanism 250 is made of a transparent resin member, and the player looks at the distribution mechanism 250 to distribute the game ball to either the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234. As a result, the storage of the hold information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233 and the storage of the hold information based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234 are performed. You can see that they are taking place alternately. The player can also hold the game ball by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 233 by looking at the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b in the special drawing unit 37 (FIG. 567). It can be confirmed that the storage of the information and the storage of the holding information based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234 are alternately performed.

<Outline of Processing in Modification 2>
The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine in the modified example 2 will be described below while showing the differences from the eleventh embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggesting pattern (the pattern of the treasure box). The setting suggestion effect that causes the PX to appear is executed so as to have an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. In particular, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX for each type of lottery setting is After the pachinko machine 10 is activated, the configuration is changed based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time. On the other hand, in the modified example 2, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the setting suggestion effect for causing the setting suggesting pattern PX to appear, the setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is set so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. The appearance probability of the pattern PX is the special information and the second starting opening which are obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233 as the variation of the pattern executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. The configuration is changed depending on whether it is due to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into 234. In other words, depending on whether the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 to the first starting port 233 or the second starting port 234, the above-mentioned lottery setting The appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX is changed for each type.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the eleventh embodiment in the processing shown in FIGS. 632 to 637, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the main control device 60. Various processes executed by the MPU 62, other processes executed by the sound emission control device 90, and various processes executed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Update processing when entering the ball>
The update process at the time of entering the ball is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 602: Sk2001) of the hold command handling process.

FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the time of entering a ball. In the update processing at the time of entering the ball, steps Sk4401, Step Sk4402, Step Sk4406, and Sk4410 correspond to steps Sk2101, Step Sk2102, Step Sk2103, and Sk2104 of the update processing at the time of entering the ball (FIG. 603) of the eleventh embodiment. It is the same. In the update process at the time of entering a ball in the modified example 2, the differences from the update process at the time of entering a ball in the eleventh embodiment are steps Sk4403 to Sk4405 and steps Sk4407 to Sk4409.

In Step Sk4403 executed after executing Step Sk4402, it is determined whether or not the determination flag is OFF for the second time and thereafter. The determination flag after the second time is a flag that is turned on to indicate that the variation of the symbol of the symbol display device 41 after the pachinko machine is activated is after the second time, and is initialized to OFF when the pachinko machine is activated. Has been done. In Step Sk2404, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that there is a change in the first symbol after the pachinko machine is activated (Step Sk4403: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sk4404 and the pachinko machine is operated. Information indicating that the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting is due to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233 is stored. Specifically, the first variation first symbol flag stored in the first variation first symbol flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sk4404, the process proceeds to step Sk4405, and the determination flag is turned ON for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk4405, the process proceeds to Step Sk4410.

On the other hand, in step Sk4403, when it is determined that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk4403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4410 without executing steps Sk4404 and Sk4405.

In Step Sk4407, which is executed after Step Sk4406 is executed, it is judged whether or not the judgment flag is OFF after the second time. In Step Sk4407, when the determination flag is OFF after the second time, that is, when it is determined that the variation of the first symbol after starting the pachinko machine (Step Sk4407: YES), the process proceeds to Step Sk4408, and the pachinko machine is operated. Information indicating that the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting is due to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234 is stored. Specifically, the first fluctuation second symbol flag stored in the first fluctuation second symbol flag memory area in the various flag memory areas 64g (FIG. 569) of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing Step Sk4408, the process proceeds to Step Sk4409, and the determination flag is turned ON for the second time and thereafter. After executing Step Sk4409, the process proceeds to Step Sk4410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sk4407 that the determination flag is not OFF after the second time (step Sk4407: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4410 without executing steps Sk4408 and Sk4409.

Each value of the first fluctuation first symbol flag and the first fluctuation second symbol flag that can be turned on in the update process at the time of main entrance is lost and reset to OFF when the pachinko machine is powered off.

According to the update processing at the time of main entrance, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is either the first starting opening 233 or the second starting opening 234 by the distribution mechanism 250. Whether or not it is distributed is stored depending on which of the first fluctuation first symbol flag and the first fluctuation second symbol flag is turned on.

<Production pattern setting process for reach>
Next, the reach effect effect pattern setting process will be described. The reach time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2306) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing a reach-time effect pattern setting process. In this reach time effect pattern setting process, step Sk4501 to step Sk4503, step Sk4504 to step Sk4506, step Sk4507, step Sk4508 are steps Sk2401 to step of the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment. It is the same as Sk2403, step Sk2407 to step Sk2409, step Sk2413, and step Sk2417. The reach time effect pattern setting process in the modified example 2 is different from the reach time effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment in that step Sk2404 in the reach time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 606) of the eleventh embodiment. It is only that the processes of steps Sk2406, Sk2410 to Sk2412, and steps Sk2414 to Sk2416 are deleted.

According to the production pattern setting process for reach time, when it is determined that the normal reach has occurred in this game time (Sk4503: YES), the production pattern table for normal reach time is referred to (Sk4504), and the production is performed. When a pattern is set (Sk 4505) and it is determined that super-reach has occurred in this game time (Sk 4506: YES), the production pattern table for super-reach time is referred to (Sk 4507) and the production pattern is set. Set (Sk4505), if it is determined that the super reach has not occurred in this game, that is, the special reach has occurred (Sk4506: NO), the effect pattern table for special reach is referred to (Sk4508). ), the effect pattern is set (Sk 4505). In the reach-time effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment, together with the effect pattern set corresponding to the above-mentioned reach type, the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine ( However, in the reach effect production pattern setting process of the second modification, the process of storing the initial change display mode is not performed.

<Normal big hit production pattern setting process>
Next, the normal big hit production pattern setting process will be described. The normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 605: Sk2304) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for normal jackpot. In this normal big hit production effect pattern setting process, step Sk4601 to step Sk4603, step Sk4604 to step Sk4606, step Sk4607, step Sk4608 are step Sk2501 of the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process (FIG. 608) of the eleventh embodiment. Up to Step Sk2503, Step Sk2507 to Step Sk2509, Step Sk2513, and Step Sk2517 are the same. In the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process in the modified example 2, the difference from the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment is that the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 608). It is only that the processing of steps Sk2504 to Sk2506, step Sk2510 to step Sk2512, and steps Sk2514 to step Sk2516 in FIG.

According to this normal jackpot time effect pattern setting process, when it is determined that the normal reach has occurred in the current game (Sk4603: YES), the normal reach/normal jackpot time effect pattern table is referenced (Sk4604). ), the effect pattern is set (Sk4605), and when it is determined that the super-reach has occurred in this game time (Sk4606: YES), the effect pattern table for super-reach/normal jackpot is referred to ( (Sk4607), the effect pattern is set (Sk4605), and if it is determined that super reach has not occurred in this game time, that is, special reach has occurred (Sk4606: NO), special reach/normal jackpot The production pattern table for use is referred to (Sk4608), and the production pattern is set (Sk4605). In the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment, with the set of the effect pattern corresponding to the type of reach described above, the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. Although the display mode of the initial fluctuation is stored, in contrast to this, in the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of the modified example 2, the process of storing the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not performed.

<Production pattern setting process for probability variation jackpot>
Next, the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process will be described. The probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2302) of the production pattern setting process.

FIG. 635 is a flow chart showing the effect pattern setting process for probability variation jackpot. In this probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process, step Sk4701 to step Sk4703, step Sk4704 to step Sk4706, step Sk4707, step Sk4708 are step Sk2601 of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609) of the eleventh embodiment. -Step Sk2603, Step Sk2607-Step Sk2609, Step Sk2613, and Step Sk2617 are the same. The probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process in the modified example 2 is different from the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment in that the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process (FIG. 609) of the eleventh embodiment is performed. The only difference is that the processes of steps Sk2604 to Sk2606, steps Sk2610 to Sk2612, and steps Sk2614 to Sk2616 in step S2604 to Step Sk2616 are deleted.

According to the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process, when it is determined that the normal reach has occurred in the current game (Sk4703: YES), the normal reach/probability variation jackpot time effect pattern table is referenced (Sk4704). ), the effect pattern is set (Sk4705), and when it is determined that the super-reach has occurred in this game time (Sk4706: YES), the effect pattern table for super reach/probable variation jackpot is referred to ( (Sk4707), the effect pattern is set (Sk4705), and if it is determined that the super reach has not occurred in this game time, that is, the special reach has occurred (Sk4706: NO), the special reach/probable variation jackpot The production pattern table for use is referred to (Sk4708), and the production pattern is set (Sk4705). In the probability variation jackpot production effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment, together with the effect pattern set corresponding to the type of reach described above, a display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. Although the display mode of the initial fluctuation is stored, the processing for storing the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not performed in the probability variation jackpot time effect pattern setting process of the second modification.

<Deviation production pattern setting process>
Next, the detachment effect pattern setting process will be described. The detachment effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 605: Sk2307) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process for detachment. In this detachment effect pattern setting process, steps Sk4801 to Sk4802 are the same as steps Sk2704 to Sk2705 of the detachment effect pattern setting process (FIG. 610) of the eleventh embodiment. In the detachment effect pattern setting process in the modified example 2, the difference from the detachment effect pattern setting process of the eleventh embodiment is in step Sk2701 in the detachment effect pattern setting process (FIG. 610) of the eleventh embodiment. The only difference is that the process of step Sk2703 is deleted.

That is, according to the effect pattern setting process for detachment, the effect pattern table for detachment is referenced (Sk4801), and the effect pattern is set (Sk4802). In the production pattern setting process for disengagement of the eleventh embodiment, together with the above-described production pattern set, the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine (display mode of the first variation) In contrast to this, in the out-of-main-effect production pattern setting process of the second modification, the process of storing the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not performed.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1914) of the command corresponding process. The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In this ending effect setting process, step Sk4901 and steps Sk4905-Sk4909 are the same as step Sk2801 and step Sk2806-step Sk2810 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the eleventh embodiment. In the ending effect setting process in the modified example 2, the difference from the ending effect setting process of the eleventh embodiment is steps Sk4902 to Sk4904.

In Step Sk4902 which is executed after executing Step Sk4901, the symbol variation (first variation) executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233. It is determined whether or not it is due to the special information that has been given. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the initial fluctuation first symbol flag that can be turned on in the update process (FIG. 632) at the time of entry is ON.

In step Sk4902, when the first fluctuation first symbol flag is ON, that is, when the first fluctuation is determined to be due to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233, (Step Sk4902: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk4903, and from the two types of setting suggestion hit/miss table groups stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93, the first variation for the first symbol time A set suggestion success/failure table group is specified. In the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d, a set suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol and a set suggestion propriety table group for the first variation second symbol are pre-stored, and in Step Sk4903, these From the two types of setting suggestion hit/miss table groups, the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first variation first symbol is specified.

FIG. 638 is an explanatory view showing a setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation first symbol time. The setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation first symbol time has the same contents as the setting suggestion hit/miss table (FIG. 612) for the first deviation at the eleventh embodiment. The setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first variation first symbol time shows the correspondence relationship between each standard lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern.

FIG. 639 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation second symbol time. The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation second symbol time has the same contents as the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 613) for the initial normal reach in the eleventh embodiment. The setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation second symbol time is compared with the correspondence relationship of the setting suggestion propriety table group for the first variation first symbol time (FIG. 638), and is the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggestive pattern. The value is subtracted by 1.

The setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation second symbol time is changed to the same configuration as the setting suggestion hit/miss table (FIG. 613) for the first normal reach time in the eleventh embodiment, and the eleventh embodiment. The content may be the same as the setting suggestion success/failure table for the first super reach in FIG. In short, the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation second symbol time is set so that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion symbol becomes higher than the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for the first fluctuation first symbol time. Any content may be used as long as it is a content.

Returning to FIG. 637, in step Sk4903, after identifying the setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 638) for the first variation first symbol time, the process proceeds to step Sk4905. In step Sk4905, similarly to step Sk2806 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the eleventh embodiment, the setting suggestion hit/miss table specified immediately before, here, the setting for the first variation first symbol time specified in step Sk4903. A setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the suggestion hit/miss table group.

On the other hand, in step Sk4902, the first fluctuation first symbol flag is not ON, that is, the first fluctuation second symbol flag is ON, and the first fluctuation is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234. When it is determined that the information is based on the special information (step Sk4902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk4904, and two types of setting suggestions stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93 are suggested. The setting suggestion hit/miss table group (FIG. 639) for the first fluctuation second symbol is specified from the hit/miss table group. After executing Step Sk4904, the process proceeds to Step Sk4905. In Step Sk4905, the setting suggestion propriety table identified immediately before, here, the setting suggestion propriety table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the set suggestion propriety table group for the first fluctuation second symbol specified in Step Sk4904. To do.

The player who first plays the game on the pachinko machine in one day sees the first reserved display area Ds1 and the second reserved display area Ds2 on the display surface 41a (FIG. 568) of the symbol display device 41. After starting the pachinko machine, it is possible to confirm which of the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 is distributed to by the distribution mechanism 250. Alternatively, by directly looking at the distribution mechanism 250, it is possible to confirm to which of the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 the distribution has been made.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, when the pachinko machine is activated (when the power is turned on), the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the lottery mode is in the low probability mode. In the winning lottery in, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed. Then, in the winning lottery, when the jackpot is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting is set. The effect in which the suggestion design (treasure chest design) PX appears is executed. Furthermore, by the first fluctuation first design flag and the first fluctuation second design flag, the game ball which first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, the first starting port 233 and the second start by the distribution mechanism 250. Which of the mouths 234 has been sorted is stored, and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX for each type of lottery setting in the ending effect is stored by the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag. It is configured to change depending on the distribution destination. To summarize, in the ending effect, the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting and the distribution destination of the game balls for the first time by the distribution mechanism 250 stored by the first fluctuation first symbol flag and the first fluctuation second symbol flag. Thus, the effect of the setting suggesting pattern PX is executed. Therefore, the player observes which of the game balls first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated and is distributed to the distribution mechanism 250, and first stores the result. After that, when the player wins the big hit in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggestion pattern PX which is the design of the treasure box appears in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. By observing whether or not the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX is estimated, and the obtained appearance probability and the distribution destination of the first game ball by the distribution mechanism 250 stored previously, the current lottery setting is made. You can guess which one.

When considering a pachinko machine of a comparative example in which the probability of appearance of the design suggestion pattern PX is determined based only on the current lottery setting, the pachinko machine of the comparative example suggests that the setting suggests depending on only the model of the pachinko machine. The appearance probability of the design pattern PX is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the second modification, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX does not depend on only the model of the pachinko machine, so the player needs to guess the lottery setting. The randomness is strongly felt about the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX, and the current lottery setting is accurate depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration the distribution destination of the first game ball by the distribution mechanism 250. Can be guessed at. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 2, the player needs to play the game when the game ball first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, so that, for example, in the morning. When the pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, when the player wins the big hit in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the player suggests the setting during the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is necessary to observe whether or not the design pattern PX appears, and to estimate the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX. Therefore, it is necessary to repeatedly generate the period for performing the ending effect, and repeatedly to the player. It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, it is more advantageous for the player when the distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 than when it is the first starting opening 233 (FIG. 573). Then, the probability of appearance of the setting suggesting pattern PX is higher in the case where the distribution destination of the game balls for the first time by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 than in the case where the first starting opening 233. .. Since the setting suggesting pattern PX is more likely to appear when the setting suggesting pattern PX has a higher appearance probability than when the setting suggesting pattern PX has a low appearance probability, the first game ball by the distribution mechanism 250 When the allocation destination is the second start port 234, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period. Therefore, in view of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX, the player is expected to expect that the distribution mechanism 250 allocates the game balls for the first time to the second starting opening 234. be able to.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine, and the first distribution of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is performed. By selecting the gaming table with the second starting opening 234 ahead, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the manager of the game hall moves the blade when the position of the blade portion 252 (see FIG. 631) of the distribution mechanism 250 is at the position of FIG. 631(c) before the opening of the game hall. By switching the portion 252 to the position shown in FIG. 631(a), the distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 in the game in the morning can be set to the second starting opening 234. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can adjust the pachinko machine so that the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear, if necessary.

<<K8-3>> Modification 3:
The processing performed by the pachinko machine in Modification 3 will be described below, showing the differences from Modification 2 described above. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the modified example 3 is the same as that of the pachinko machine in the modified example 2, the same parts as those in the modified example 2 will be described using the same names and reference numerals.

In the pachinko machine of Modification Example 2, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the type of the current pachinko machine lottery setting is selected. A game that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated after the pachinko machine is activated so that the setting suggestion design (the design of the treasure chest) PX appears so that the appearance probability is based on the appearance probability. The appearance probability of the setting suggestive effect for each type of the lottery setting changes depending on whether the ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250 to the first starting opening 233 or the second starting opening 234. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, in addition to the ending effect period, the setting suggesting effect is performed in which the setting suggesting pattern appears with the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. With a possible configuration, during the period of executing this setting suggestion effect, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is the first start opening 233 and the second start opening 234 by the distribution mechanism 250. It is configured to switch depending on which of the two is assigned. Specifically, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is started is distributed to the first start opening 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the ending effect is based on the lottery setting. When the distribution mechanism 250 distributes the setting suggestion effect with the appearance probability, the distribution mechanism 250 distributes the setting suggestion effect with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting in the normal reach effect in the game time. It is configured to execute. In addition, instead of the normal reach, the above setting suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach or the special reach. Other processes executed by the pachinko machine of the modification 3 are the same as the processes executed by the pachinko machine of the modification 2.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3 configured as described above, the player determines which of the game balls first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. Observe and remember first. Then, the player estimates a predetermined period (ending period or normal reach period) in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears from the previously stored distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250, and the predetermined period. In, it is possible to infer which the current lottery setting is by observing whether or not the setting suggesting pattern PX, which is the pattern of the treasure box, appears and estimating the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX. it can. When considering a pachinko machine of a comparative example in which a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears is fixed, the pachinko machine of the comparative example shows that the setting suggesting pattern PX depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. The predetermined period of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, since the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears does not depend on only the model of the pachinko machine, the player can guess the lottery setting. The setting suggesting pattern PX appears depending on the skill of the player, who strongly feels the randomness in the appearance period of the setting suggesting pattern PX necessary for taking into consideration the destination of the first game ball distribution by the distribution mechanism 250. It is possible to accurately grasp a predetermined period in which the effect is to be executed, and it is possible to accurately infer which the current lottery setting is. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 3, the player needs to play the game when the game ball first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, so that, for example, in the morning. When the pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the case where the distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 rather than the first starting opening 233, It is highly advantageous for the player (see FIG. 573). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the case where the distribution destination of the game balls for the first time by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 is executed in the game time more than the case where the first starting opening 233 is allocated. The setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the effect period for the effect with a high probability of occurrence, that is, in the normal reach. Since the frequency of occurrence of the period is higher in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game time is higher than in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game time is low, When the allocation destination is the second start port 234, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. Therefore, in terms of the frequency of occurrence of the period in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, the player expects that the distribution mechanism 250 allocates the game balls for the first time to the second starting opening 234. Can be given.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine, and the distribution mechanism 250 first distributes the game balls. By selecting the gaming table with the second starting opening 234 ahead, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the manager of the game hall sets the position of the blade portion 252 (see FIG. 631) of the distribution mechanism 250 before the opening of the game hall as shown in FIG. In the case of the position c), by switching the blade portion 252 to the position shown in FIG. 631(a), the distribution mechanism 250 in the game in the morning can allocate the game balls to the second starting opening 234. it can. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can adjust the pachinko machine so that the setting suggestion pattern PX is likely to appear, if necessary.

As a modified example of this modified example 3, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is distributed to the first start opening 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, In the super reach in the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting, and when the distribution mechanism 250 distributes the setting to the second starting opening 234, the normal reach reaches the appearance probability based on the lottery setting. It may be configured to execute the setting suggestion effect. The point is that the gaming ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is distributed to the second start opening 234 by the distribution mechanism 250 rather than when the game ball is distributed to the first start opening 233 by the distribution mechanism 250. Any combination of reach may be used as long as it is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect in a reach effect of a type having a high probability of being executed in the game time.

<<K8-4>> Modification 4:
The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine according to the modified example 4 will be described first while showing the differences from the eleventh embodiment. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the modification 4 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same names and reference numerals are used for the same parts as those of the eleventh embodiment, and the outline of the processing is described. Will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggesting pattern (the pattern of the treasure box). The setting suggestion effect that causes the PX to appear is executed so as to have an appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. In particular, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX for each type of lottery setting is After the pachinko machine 10 is activated, the configuration is changed based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time. On the other hand, in Modification 4, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the setting suggestion effect for causing the setting suggesting pattern PX to appear, the setting suggestion effect for each type of lottery setting is set so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. The appearance probability of the pattern PX is changed based on the result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated. That is, in the ending effect, the effect of the setting suggesting pattern PX is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the current lottery setting and the result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated.

The appearance probability lottery is a lottery process for deriving the degree of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect that causes the setting suggesting pattern PX to appear, and is executed when the pachinko machine is activated. The appearance probability lottery is executed by checking the random number counter CZ for lottery against the distribution table for appearance probability lottery. The value of the lottery random number counter CZ is randomly updated when the pachinko machine is activated.

FIG. 640 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the appearance probability lottery distribution table used when executing the appearance probability lottery. As shown in FIG. 640, in the distribution table for the appearance probability lottery, “0 to 29” of the values of the random number counter CZ for lottery of “0 to 99” correspond to the high appearance probability and “30”. ~99" corresponds to the standard appearance probability. The “standard appearance probability” is a parameter indicating that the degree of appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect is standard. The “high appearance probability” is a parameter indicating that the degree of appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the standard. According to the distribution table for the appearance probability lottery, the appearance probability is distributed with a probability of 3/10.

The lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed at the time of starting the pachinko machine is temporarily stored in the main side RAM 64 of the main control device 60 as the appearance probability lottery result information, and then the appearance probability lottery result information from the main control device 60 side. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 side. The appearance probability lottery result information is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 until the power switch 88 of the pachinko machine is turned off.

In the pachinko machine of the present modification 4, in the game time (hereinafter referred to as the initial game time) within the period from the start of the pachinko machine until the number of times the game time is executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), a symbol The contents of the variable display of the symbols on the display device 41 are different from the game times after the predetermined number of times has passed (hereinafter referred to as the normal game times). In the initial game game, the content of the variable display is more colorful and intense than in the normal game game to improve the player's motivation for shooting from the morning.

In the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times is changed according to the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery. Specifically, when the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery has a high appearance probability, a special character (for example, a goddess character) appears during the variation display of the symbols in the initial game times, and the appearance probability lottery is performed. When the lottery result is the standard appearance probability, the above-described effect of the special character appearing during the variable display of the symbols in the initial game time is configured not to be performed. The player who plays the game in the morning can know the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery by observing whether or not a special character appears in the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times.

Next, the ending effect setting process executed in the pachinko machine of Modification 4 will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

641 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In this ending effect setting process, step Sk5001 and step Sk5005 to step Sk5009 are the same as step Sk4901 and step Sk4906 to step Sk4910 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 637) of the second modification. The ending effect setting process in the modified example 4 is different from the ending effect setting process in the modified example 2 in steps Sk5002 to Sk5004.

In Step Sk5002 executed after executing Step Sk5001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated has a high appearance probability. This determination is performed using the appearance probability lottery result information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94.

When it is determined in step Sk5002 that the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is not the high appearance probability (step Sk5002: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk5003, and the setting suggestion success/failure table group for standard appearance probability is specified. In the pachinko machine of the modification 4, the setting suggestion success/failure table group for standard appearance probability and the setting suggestion success/failure table group for high appearance probability are provided in the setting suggestion success/failure table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. Remembered

The setting suggestion propriety table group for standard appearance probability has the same contents as the setting suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 638) for the first fluctuation first symbol provided in the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, that is, the first time in the eleventh embodiment. It has the same contents as the setting suggestion success/failure table (FIG. 612) for disengagement. The standard suggestion probability setting suggestion hit/miss table shows the correspondence relationship between each standard lottery setting and the probability of appearance of the setting suggestive pattern.

The setting suggestion propriety table group for high appearance probability has the same contents as the set suggestion propriety table group (FIG. 639) for the first variation second symbol provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 3, that is, the first time in the eleventh embodiment. It has the same contents as the setting suggestion success/failure table for normal reach (FIG. 613). The setting suggestion success/failure table group for high appearance probabilities is obtained by subtracting 1 from the denominator of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern as compared with the correspondence relationship of the setting suggestion success/failure table group for standard appearance probabilities. ing.

The set suggestion hit/fail table for the high appearance probability has the same content as the set suggest hit/fail table for the initial normal reach in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 613), and is replaced by the first supermarket The content may be the same as the setting suggestion success/failure table for reach (FIG. 614). In short, the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for high appearance probability is set so that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern is higher than the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for standard appearance probability. Any content may be used.

In step Sk5003, a set suggestion success/failure table group for standard appearance probability is specified from these two types of setting suggestion success/failure table groups.

In step Sk5003, after the setting suggestion hit/miss table group for standard appearance probability is specified, the process proceeds to step Sk5005. In step Sk5005, similarly to step Sk4905 in the ending effect setting process (FIG. 637) of the second modification, the setting suggestion valid/invalid table identified immediately before, here, the set suggestion valid/invalid table group for the standard appearance probability identified in step Sk5003. From the above, the setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk5002 that the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery has a high appearance probability (step Sk5002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk5004 and is stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93. The setting suggestion success/failure table group for high appearance probability is specified from the two types of setting suggestion success/failure table groups that are set. After executing step Sk5004, the process proceeds to step Sk5005. In step Sk5005, a setting suggestion hit/miss table corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is specified from the setting suggestion hit/miss table specified immediately before, here, the set suggestion hit/miss table group for high appearance probability specified in step Sk5004.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the present modified example 4, when the pachinko machine is activated, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the lottery mode is a winning lottery in the low probability mode, The probability of winning the jackpot is changed. Then, the appearance probability lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is started, and the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery (whether it corresponds to the high appearance probability or the standard appearance probability) is the initial game number after the pachinko machine is started. It is indicated by whether or not the special character appears during the variable display of the symbols. Then, in the winning lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode is switched to the opening/closing execution mode, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is based on the type of the current lottery setting and the result of the appearance probability lottery. The effect of the setting suggestion pattern PX, which is the pattern of the treasure box, is executed so as to have the appearance probability. Therefore, the player observes whether or not the special character appears during the change of the symbol executed in the initial game time, and stores the observation result. After that, when the player wins the big hit in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggestion pattern PX which is the design of the treasure box appears in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Which of the current lottery settings is the present lottery setting is determined by observing whether or not to do so, estimating the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX, and the obtained appearance probability and the presence or absence of the appearance of the previously stored special character. Can be guessed.

When considering a pachinko machine of a comparative example in which the probability of appearance of the design suggestion pattern PX is determined based only on the current lottery setting, the pachinko machine of the comparative example suggests that the setting suggests depending on only the model of the pachinko machine. The appearance probability of the design pattern PX is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, since the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX does not depend on only the model of the pachinko machine, it is necessary for the player to guess the lottery setting. Which strongly suggests the randomness of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX, and takes into consideration whether or not a special character has appeared in the initial game times, depending on the skill of the player, the current lottery setting is You can guess exactly. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, since the player needs to play the game from the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game from the first morning.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, when the player wins the big hit in the winning lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggestion is made during the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is necessary to observe whether or not the design pattern PX appears, and to estimate the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX. Therefore, it is necessary to repeatedly generate the period for performing the ending effect, and repeatedly to the player. It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, when a plurality of pachinko machines of the modified example 4 are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine, and the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery. By selecting a gaming table with a high appearance probability, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears.

The pachinko machine of the modification 4 can be modified as follows, for example. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, as a method of informing the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery, a special character such as a goddess character is made to appear during the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times. Thus, the background color of the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times may be changed, or the shape and color of the symbols may be changed.

In addition, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery, instead of the above configuration, in the standby screen by the symbol display device 41 during the period from the start of the pachinko machine to the start of the game by the player In addition, it may be configured to perform a specific effect (for example, an effect of causing a special character to appear).

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, the appearance probability lottery is divided into two types, that is, the standard appearance probability and the high appearance probability, but instead, it may be divided into three or more numbers. In this case, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX changes in accordance with the degree of the distributed appearance probability.

<<K8-5>> Modification 5:
The processing performed by the pachinko machine in Modification 5 will be described below, showing the differences from Modification 4 described above. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the modified example 5 is the same as that of the pachinko machine in the modified example 4, the same parts as those in the modified example 4 will be described using the same names and reference numerals.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the type of the current pachinko machine lottery setting is selected. The setting suggestion effect that makes the setting suggestion pattern (the pattern of the treasure box) PX appear so that the appearance probability is based on the appearance probability. Further, the appearance probability lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is activated, and the appearance probability lottery is performed. The appearance probability of the setting suggestive effect is changed for each type of the lottery setting depending on the lottery result (whether the high appearance probability or the standard appearance probability is applicable). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, besides the period of the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect for causing the setting suggestion pattern to appear is executed with the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. With a possible configuration, the appearance period lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is activated, and the period for executing this setting suggestion effect is switched depending on the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated.

FIG. 642 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the appearance period lottery distribution table used when executing the appearance period lottery. As shown in FIG. 642, in the distribution table for the appearance period lottery, “0 to 29” of the values of the random number counter CZ for lottery of “0 to 99” correspond to the high probability period and “30”. ~99" corresponds to the standard probability period. The “standard probability period” is a parameter indicating that the probability of being executed is a standard period. The “high probability period” is a parameter indicating that the probability of execution is higher than the standard. According to the distribution table for the appearance period lottery, it is distributed to the high probability period with a probability of 3/10.

In the pachinko machine of the present modified example 5, the symbol in the game times (hereinafter referred to as the initial game times) within the period from the start of the pachinko machine until the number of times the game times are executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) The variable display is changed according to the lottery result of the appearance period lottery. Specifically, when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high-probability period, a special character (for example, a goddess character) appears during the variation display of the symbols in the initial game times, and the appearance period lottery is performed. When the result of the lottery is the standard probability period, the above-described effect in which the special character appears during the variable display of the symbols in the initial game time is configured not to be performed. The player who plays the game in the morning can know the lottery result of the appearance period lottery by observing whether or not a special character appears in the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times.

When the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is the standard probability period, in the ending production, the setting suggestion production is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting, and the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is the high probability period. In this case, in the normal reach in the game game, the setting suggestion effect is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting. In addition, instead of the normal reach, the above setting suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach or the special reach. The other processes executed by the pachinko machine of Modification 5 are the same as the processes executed by the pachinko machine of Modification 4.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 configured as described above, the player observes whether or not the special character appears during the fluctuation of the symbol executed in the initial game time, and the observation result is displayed. Remember. Then, the player estimates a predetermined period (ending period or normal reach period) in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears from the previously stored observation result, and in the predetermined period, the setting suggestion of the treasure box pattern is set. By observing whether or not the design picture PX appears, and estimating the appearance probability of the setting suggestion picture PX, it is possible to infer which the current lottery setting is. When considering a pachinko machine of a comparative example in which a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears is fixed, the pachinko machine of the comparative example shows that the setting suggesting pattern PX depends only on the model of the pachinko machine. The predetermined period of appearance is determined. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears does not depend on only the model of the pachinko machine, so the player can guess the lottery setting. The setting suggestion pattern PX appears depending on the skill of the player, who strongly feels the randomness of the appearance period of the setting suggestion pattern PX necessary for, and takes into consideration whether or not a special character appears in the initial game times. It is possible to accurately grasp the predetermined period in which the effect to be performed is performed, and to accurately guess which is the current lottery setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, since the player needs to play the game from the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game from the first morning.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, when a plurality of pachinko machines of the modified example 5 are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine, and the lottery result of the appearance period lottery By selecting a gaming table with a high probability period, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears.

The pachinko machine of the modified example 5 can be modified as follows, for example. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance period lottery, a special character such as a goddess character is made to appear during the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times. Thus, the background color of the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times may be changed, or the shape and color of the symbols may be changed.

In addition, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance period lottery, instead of the above configuration, in the standby screen by the symbol display device 41 during the period from the start of the pachinko machine to the start of the game by the player In addition, it may be configured to perform a specific effect (for example, an effect of causing a special character to appear).

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 5, the appearance period lottery is divided into two types, that is, the standard probability period and the high probability period, but instead, it may be divided into three or more numbers. In this case, the period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears changes depending on the degree of probability of the assigned period.

As a modified example of this modified example 5, when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is the standard probability period, in the super reach in the game times, the setting suggestion effect is executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting. When the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period, in the normal reach, the setting suggestion effect may be executed with the appearance probability based on the lottery setting. In short, set when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period, when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a high probability period, rather than when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is a standard probability period Any reach combination may be used as long as it is a configuration for executing the suggestive effect.

<<K8-6>> Modification 6:
<Outline of Processing in Modification 6>
The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine in the modification 6 will be described first while showing the differences from the eleventh embodiment. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 6 is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same names and reference numerals are used for the same parts as those of the eleventh embodiment, and the outline of the processing is performed. Will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing is performed. In the ending effect executed at the end of the execution mode, the setting suggesting pattern PX is made to appear at the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the player can infer the lottery setting based on the difference in the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX. On the other hand, in the modified example 6, as a setting suggesting effect that suggests the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing execution mode is set. In the ending effect executed at the end of, the setting suggesting pattern PY having a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine appears. In other words, the player can guess (substantially, can specify) the lottery setting based on the difference in the numbers written on the setting suggesting pattern PY. Then, in the modified example 6, as in the eleventh embodiment, the probability of performing the setting suggestion effect in the ending effect is based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. It was changed.

Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine of the modification 6 will be described. The specific control is different from the specific control in the eleventh embodiment in the processing shown in FIG. 643 to be described later executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The various processes performed, the other processes performed by the sound emission control device 90, and the various processes performed by the display control device 100 are the same.

<Ending effect setting process>
The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 601: Sk1914) of the command corresponding process. The ending effect setting process will be described in detail below.

643 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In this ending effect setting process, steps Sk5101 to Sk5104, step Sk5106, step Sk5107, step Sk5109, and step Sk5112 correspond to steps Sk2801 to step Sk2804 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the eleventh embodiment. It is the same as Sk2807, Step Sk2808, Step Sk2810, and Step Sk2813. In the ending effect setting process in the modified example 6, what is different from the ending effect setting process in the eleventh embodiment is step Sk5105, step Sk5108, step Sk5110, and step Sk5111.

In Step Sk5102, when it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the special reach (Step Sk5102: YES), in Step Sk5112, the setting suggesting pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information is written is added. The ending effect pattern is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the ending period of this time. The process of step Sk5112 is the same as the process of step Sk2813 of the ending effect setting process (FIG. 611) of the eleventh embodiment. For example, when the setting information stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is “lottery setting 6”, the ending effect pattern (see FIG. 582) to which the setting suggesting pattern PY with “6” is added is the current setting. It is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the ending period. According to this ending effect pattern, the setting suggestion picture PY in which a number is written always appears in the middle of the ending effect. In other words, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern in the ending effect is 1/1 (100% in terms of percentage). After executing Step Sk5112, the ending effect setting process is ended.

In step Sk5102, it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the special reach (step Sk5102: NO), in the subsequent step Sk5103 it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the super reach (step Sk5103: NO), and the following step Sk5104. In, when it is determined that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is not the normal reach (step Sk5104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk5105.

In step Sk5105, the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first out-of-position is specified from the three types of setting suggestion hit/miss tables stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d (FIG. 576) of the sound-light side ROM 93. In the setting suggestion propriety table storage area 93d in Modification 6, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first out-of-range, a setting suggestion propriety table for the first normal reach, and a setting suggestion propriety table for the first super reach are stored in advance. Has been done. In step Sk5105, a setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first out-of-range is specified from these three types of setting suggestion hit/miss tables.

FIG. 644 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion hit/miss table for the case of the first deviation. Among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, 6048 values of 0 to 6047 are set in the setting suggestion success/failure table for the first out-of-range as a value to win execution of the setting suggestion effect. Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (6048 to 60479) other than the 6048 values of 0 to 6047 are out. In this case, the winning probability is 1/10.

The above winning value is an example, and the winning value can be any value if the winning probability is not 1/1.

Returning to FIG. 643, in step Sk5105, after the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first deviation is specified, the flow proceeds to step Sk5106, and the specified setting suggestion hit/miss table, here, the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first deviation is referred to. .. After that, the process proceeds to step Sk5107, and as a result of referring to the setting suggestion win/loss table in step Sk5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting suggestion random number counter CY grasped in step Sk5101 corresponds to winning of the setting suggestion effect. ..

When it is determined in step Sk5107 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is supported (Sk5107: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk5108, and the setting suggestion pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the setting information is written is added. The ending effect pattern is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the ending period of this time. The process of step Sk5108 is the same as the process of step Sk5112.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sk5107 that the winning of the setting suggestion effect is not supported (Sk5107: NO), the process proceeds to step Sk5109, and the normal ending effect pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not performed is changed to the ending this time. Set as an effect pattern to be executed during the period. After executing step Sk5108 or step Sk5109, the ending effect setting process is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sk5101-Sk5109, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of the way and the big hit is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In, the effect that the setting suggestion pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information is written appears with the probability of 1/10 defined by the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first deviation shown in FIG. 644 is executed. be able to.

When it is determined in step Sk5104 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach (step Sk5104: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk5110.

In step Sk5110, the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first normal reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion hit/miss tables stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 645 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first normal reach. In the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first normal reach, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, 7560 values of 0 to 7559 are set as the values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. ing. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, values other than the 7560 values of 0 to 7559 (7560 to 60479) are out of alignment. In this case, the winning probability is 1/8. The winning probability is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the first out-of-match.

The winning value in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the first normal reach is an example, and any value may be used as long as the probability is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the first out-of-range. You can also

Returning to FIG. 643, after the setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table for the first normal reach is specified in step Sk5110, the process proceeds to step Sk5106, and the identified setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table, here, the setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table for the first normal reach is referred to. To do.

By executing the processes of steps Sk5101 to Sk5104, Sk5110, and Sk5106 to Sk5109, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is normal reach and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening and closing execution mode is entered, the opening and closing execution mode ends. In the ending effect that is sometimes executed, the setting suggestion pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information is written has a probability of 1/8 defined by the setting suggestion success/failure table for the first normal reach shown in FIG. 645. It is possible to execute the production that appears.

When it is determined in step Sk5103 that the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach (step Sk5103: YES), the process proceeds to step Sk5111.

In Step Sk5111, the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first super reach is specified from the three types of setting suggestion hit/miss tables stored in the setting suggestion hit/miss table storage area 93d of the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 646 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first super reach. In the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first super reach, among the values of the setting suggestion random number counter CY of 0 to 60479, 12096 values of 0 to 12095 are set as the values to be won for executing the setting suggestion effect. Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 60479, the values (12096 to 60479) other than the 12096 values of 0 to 12095 are out of alignment. The winning probability in this case is 1/5. The winning probability is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the first normal reach.

The above winning value in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the initial super reach is an example, and if the probability is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the initial normal reach, any value You can also do it.

Returning to FIG. 643, after the setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table for the first super reach is specified in step Sk5111, the process proceeds to step Sk5106, and the identified setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table, here, the setting suggestion acceptance/rejection table for the first super reach is displayed. Make a reference.

By executing the processing of steps Sk5101 to Sk5103, Sk5111, and Sk5106 to Sk5109, when the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening and closing execution mode is entered, the opening and closing execution mode is changed. In the ending effect executed at the end, the setting suggestion pattern in which the number corresponding to the setting information is written with a probability of 1/5 defined by the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the initial super reach shown in FIG. 646. An effect in which PY appears can be executed.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6 configured as described above, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the lottery mode is a winning lottery in the low probability mode, The probability of winning the jackpot is changed. Then, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is indicated. The effect in which the design PY appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY in the ending period is configured to change based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. Therefore, the player observes the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, and first stores the display mode of the symbol variation. After that, the player estimates the probability that the setting suggesting pattern PY will appear during the ending period from the previously stored display mode of the symbol variation in the first game, and the setting suggesting pattern PY will appear. After waiting, it is possible to infer (substantially, specify) which setting of the winning probability is based on the appearing design suggestion pattern PY.

As a pachinko machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which the effect that the setting suggesting picture PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written is executed with a predetermined appearance probability, the comparative example In the pachinko machine, since the appearance probability of the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears depends only on the model of the pachinko machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time. Therefore, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the setting suggesting pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written appears, and as a result, the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, since the player needs to play the game in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game from the morning.

The pachinko machine of the modified example 6 has the deviation, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach as the display modes of the symbol variation. The display mode of these symbol variations is, in this order, from low to high in expectation of a big hit in the winning lottery. In addition, the probability of appearance of the setting suggesting pattern PY is higher in the display mode of the symbol fluctuation in which the expectation is high in the winning lottery in the first game time. When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is higher than that when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is low, the setting suggestion pattern PY is more likely to appear, and thus the degree of expectation of a big hit in the winning lottery. When a display mode with a high symbol variation occurs, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting in a short period. Therefore, in terms of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY, it is desired that the player generate a display mode of the symbol variation with a high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit in the winning lottery in the first game time. Expectation can be added.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game in the morning in each machine, and in the first game time after the power is turned on, By generating a reach that is highly expected to be a big hit in the winning lottery, it is possible to create a stand on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears by one's own hands.

<<K8-7>> Modification 7:
In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 of the eleventh embodiment, the ending period for executing the ending effect, the period for executing the effect indicating the deviation, and the period for executing the effect indicating that the normal reach has occurred. In the period for executing the effect indicating that the super reach has occurred, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect that causes the setting suggestion pattern to appear with the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. In the configuration, the period for executing the setting suggesting effect is determined from the plurality of periods based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. On the other hand, in the modified example 7, as a setting suggestive effect that suggests the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, a setting suggestion pattern in which a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is written The PY is configured to appear with a predetermined appearance probability (for example, a probability of 1/40), and an ending period for executing the ending effect, as in the pachinko machine of the first modification. , A period for executing the effect indicating the outlier, a period for executing the effect indicating that the normal reach has occurred, and a period for executing the effect indicating that the super reach has been set. The period in which the effect in which the suggestion pattern PY appears is executed is determined based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 7 of the above configuration, when the pachinko machine is activated, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low probability mode. The probability is changed. Then, in the period determined as described above, an effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written appears with a predetermined appearance probability is executed. Therefore, the player observes the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, and first stores the display mode of the symbol variation. After that, the player estimates a predetermined period in which the design suggestive pattern PY appears from the previously stored display mode of the pattern fluctuation in the first game time, and appears with a predetermined appearance probability in the predetermined period. It is possible to infer (substantially, specify) the setting information of the lottery setting from the setting suggesting pattern PY.

As a pachinko machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written appears is executed at a predetermined fixed time, In the pachinko machine, the period for performing the effect in which the setting suggestion pattern PY appears is determined depending on only the model of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 7, since the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, the player can guess the setting information of the lottery setting. Depending on the skill of the player, feeling the randomness strongly regarding the appearance period of the necessary setting suggestion pattern PY, and taking into consideration the display mode of the pattern variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears is executed. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 7, since the player needs to play the game in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

The pachinko machine of the modified example 7 has the deviation, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach as the display modes of the symbol variation. The display mode of these symbol variations is, in this order, from low to high in expectation of a big hit in the winning lottery. Then, in the first game time, the higher the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit in the winning lottery, the more the pattern variation display mode, the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears, the higher the probability of being executed in the game time. The display period of the fluctuation is set to be an effect period. Since the frequency of occurrence is higher in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game times is higher than in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game times is low, there is a high expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit in the winning lottery. When a display mode of high symbol variation occurs, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. For this reason, in terms of the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PY may appear to the player, a symbol variation that is highly expected to be a big hit in the winning lottery in the first game time. It is possible to add a sense of expectation that the user wants the display mode to occur.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 7, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine, In the first game cycle after the power is turned on, by generating a reach with a high expectation that a big hit in the winning lottery, a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PY is likely to appear can be created by oneself.

<<K8-8>> Modification 8:
The processing by the pachinko machine in the modified example 8 will be described first while showing the differences from the modified example 2 of the eleventh embodiment. The hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in Modification 8 is the same as that of the pachinko machine in Modification 2. That is, the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 is configured such that, like the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the distribution mechanism 250 that distributes the entered game balls to the first starting opening 233 and the second starting opening 234 alternately. (See Figure 630). In the modified example 8, the same parts as those in the modified example 2 will be described below by using the same names and reference numerals.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, as a setting suggestive effect that suggests the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is switched to, In the ending effect executed at the end, the setting suggesting pattern PX is made to appear with the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. In other words, the player can infer the lottery setting based on the difference in the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX. On the other hand, in the modified example 8, as a setting suggestive effect that suggests the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode, the open/close execution mode is set. In the ending effect executed at the end of, the setting suggesting pattern PY having a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine appears. In other words, the player can guess (substantially, can specify) the lottery setting based on the difference in the numbers written on the setting suggesting pattern PY.

Then, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, as in the modified example 2, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY in the ending effect is the variation of the pattern executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. A configuration that changes depending on which of the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 233 and the special information obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234. And In other words, depending on which of the first starting port 233 and the second starting port 234 the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is started is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. The configuration is such that the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is changed.

Detailed explanation using the flowchart in the ending effect is omitted in this modified example 8, but in the ending effect setting process in modified example 8, the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine is the first. If it is due to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 233, the setting suggestion/non-approval table for the first fluctuation first symbol time is specified and executed in the first game time. If the symbol variation is due to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 234, the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first variation second symbol is specified. The setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation first symbol time has the same content as, for example, the setting suggestion propriety table (FIG. 644) for the first deviation provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 6. The setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation second symbol time has the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table for the initial normal reach provided in the pachinko machine of the modification 6, for example (FIG. 645). In the present embodiment, the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the first fluctuation second symbol time is higher than the winning probability defined in the setting suggestion win/loss table for the first fluctuation first symbol time. . After that, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect has been won by referring to the specified setting suggestion win/loss table, and in the case of winning, an ending in which a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the setting information is added Performs the process of setting the effect pattern. On the other hand, if the player does not win, a process for setting a normal ending effect pattern that does not perform setting suggestion effect is performed.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the probability of winning the jackpot is changed in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. To be done. Then, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is indicated. The effect in which the design PY appears is executed. Furthermore, by the first fluctuation first design flag and the first fluctuation second design flag, the game ball which first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, the first starting port 233 and the second start by the distribution mechanism 250. Which of the mouths 234 has been sorted is stored, and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY in the ending effect is changed depending on the sorting destination stored by the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag. Has been done. Therefore, the player observes which of the game balls first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated and is distributed to the distribution mechanism 250, and first stores the result. After that, the player estimates the probability that the setting suggesting pattern PY will appear during the ending period from the previously stored distribution destination by the game ball distributing mechanism 250, and waits for the setting suggesting pattern PY to appear. It is possible to infer (substantially, specify) which setting of the winning probability is based on the appearing setting suggesting pattern PY.

As a gaming machine of a comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an effect in which a picture PY for setting suggestion in which a number corresponding to setting information of lottery setting is written is executed with a predetermined appearance probability, a comparative example In this gaming machine, since the appearance probability that the setting suggesting pattern PY appears depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, in the ending period, to which path the game ball that first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine was activated was distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. Since the effect that the setting suggesting pattern PY appears is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the distribution destination shown, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY. .. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the setting suggesting pattern PY will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, since the player needs to play the game when the game ball first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, for example, in the morning. When the pachinko machine is powered on, the player can be actively urged to play the game from the morning.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, it is more advantageous for the player when the distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 than when it is the first starting opening 233 (FIG. 573). In addition, the probability of appearance of the setting suggesting pattern PY is higher in the case where the distribution destination of the game balls for the first time by the distribution mechanism 250 is in the second starting opening 234 than in the case where the first starting opening 233. . When the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is higher than that when the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is low, the setting suggestion pattern PY is likely to appear. When the allocation destination of is the second starting opening 234, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. Therefore, in view of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY, the player is given an expectation that the distribution mechanism 250 should allocate the game ball to the second starting opening 234 for the first time. be able to.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game first in each machine, and the distribution mechanism 250 first distributes the game balls. By selecting the gaming table whose destination is the second starting port 234, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears.

<<K8-9>> Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine of the modified example 8, the distribution mechanism 250 for alternately distributing the entered game balls to the first start opening 233 and the second start opening 234 is provided in the game board 30, and then in the winning lottery. When the jackpot is won and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the current lottery setting type of the pachinko machine is written. The game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect that causes the distribution mechanism 250 to generate the first start opening 233 and the second start opening 234. The appearance probability of the setting suggesting effect including the setting suggesting pattern PY is changed depending on which of the above is assigned. On the other hand, in the modification 9, the setting suggesting effect including the setting suggesting pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is written can be executed in addition to the ending effect period. With the configuration, during the period in which this setting suggestion effect is executed, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is divided by the distribution mechanism 250 into the first start port 233 and the second start port 234. The configuration is changed depending on which one is assigned. Specifically, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is distributed to the first start opening 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the setting suggesting pattern in the ending effect. When the configuration suggestive effect including PY is executed and the distribution mechanism 250 distributes the setting to the second start port 234, it indicates that a reach (any of normal reach, super reach, and special reach) is generated. In the reach effect, the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion pattern PY is executed. In the ninth modification, the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggesting pattern PY is executed with a predetermined appearance probability (for example, a probability of 1/40) set in advance in each period.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9 of the above configuration, when the pachinko machine is started, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the low probability mode. Probability is changed. Then, in the period determined by the distribution mechanism 250, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is distributed is distributed to the first start opening 233 or the second start opening 234. The effect of causing the setting suggesting pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting appears is executed with a predetermined appearance probability. Therefore, the player observes which of the game balls first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated and is distributed to the distribution mechanism 250, and first stores the result. After that, the player estimates a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears from the destination stored by the game ball distribution mechanism 250 stored in advance, and sets it to appear with a predetermined appearance probability in the predetermined period. It is possible to infer (substantially, specify) which setting information of the lottery setting is based on the suggestion pattern PY.

As the gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which the effect in which the setting suggesting picture PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written appears is executed at a predetermined time, the comparative example In the gaming machine, the period in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears is determined depending only on the model of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player can guess the setting information of the lottery setting. The randomness is strongly felt for the appearance period of the necessary setting suggestion picture PY, and it is taken into consideration which route the game ball that first entered the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine was started was distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. Depending on the skill of the player such as putting in, it is possible to accurately grasp the period in which the effect including the setting suggesting pattern PY is executed. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, the player needs to play the game when the game ball first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine. When the pachinko machine is powered on, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 3, the case where the distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 rather than the first starting opening 233, It is highly advantageous for the player (see FIG. 573). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, the case where the distribution destination of the game balls for the first time by the distribution mechanism 250 is the second starting opening 234 is executed in the game times more than the case where the first starting opening 233 is allocated. The setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed in the effect period for the effect having a high probability of occurrence, that is, in the normal reach. Since the frequency of occurrence of the period is higher in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game time is higher than in the production period in which the probability of being executed in the game time is low, When the allocation destination is the second start port 234, it is possible to estimate the lottery setting with high accuracy in a short period of time. Therefore, in terms of the frequency of occurrence of the period in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, the player expects that the distribution mechanism 250 allocates the game balls for the first time to the second starting opening 234. Can be given.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 9, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game in the morning in each machine, and the distribution mechanism 250 first distributes the game balls. By selecting the gaming table with the second starting opening 234 ahead, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PX easily appears.

As a modified example of the modified example 9, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is distributed to the first start opening 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, reach (normal reach, supermarket) is performed. When the reach suggestion that the reach or the special reach is possible) is performed, the setting suggestion effect is executed, and when the allocation mechanism 250 distributes the setting suggestion effect to the second starting opening 234, The configuration suggesting effect may be executed.

In addition, as another modification of Modification 9, when the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 after the pachinko machine is activated is distributed to the first starting opening 233 by the distribution mechanism 250, the normal reach is reached. The setting suggestion effect may be executed in the effect of No. 3, and when the distribution mechanism 250 distributes the setting suggestion effect to the second starting port 234, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach effect. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined period for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined from among a plurality of reach effects.

<<K8-10>> Modification 10:
The processing by the pachinko machine in the modification 10 will be described while showing the differences from the modification 4 of the eleventh embodiment. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine in the modified example 10 is the same as that of the pachinko machine in the modified example 4, the same parts and components as those in the modified example 4 will be described below using the same names and reference numerals.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 4, as a setting suggestive effect that suggests the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is changed, In the ending effect executed at the end, the setting suggesting pattern PX is made to appear with the appearance probability based on the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine. In other words, the player can infer the lottery setting based on the difference in the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX. On the other hand, in Modification 10, as a setting suggesting effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine is, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing execution mode is set. In the ending effect executed at the end of, the setting suggesting pattern PY having a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine appears. In other words, the player can guess (substantially, can specify) the lottery setting based on the difference in the numbers written on the setting suggesting pattern PY. Then, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 10, as in the modified example 4, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY in the ending effect is changed based on the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated. It was configured. That is, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is changed in the ending effect depending on whether the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated is the standard appearance probability or the high appearance probability.

Although detailed description using the flowchart in the ending effect is omitted in this modified example 10, in the ending effect setting process in modified example 10, the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated is the standard appearance probability. In this case, if the setting suggestion hit/miss table having the same contents as the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the first variation first symbol is specified, and the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated has a high appearance probability. In, to specify the setting suggestion propriety table of the same content as the setting suggestion propriety table for the first variation second symbol. After that, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect has been won by referring to the specified setting suggestion win/loss table, and in the case of winning, an ending in which a setting suggestion pattern PY with a number corresponding to the setting information is added Performs the process of setting the effect pattern. On the other hand, if the player does not win, a process for setting a normal ending effect pattern that does not perform setting suggestion effect is performed.

According to the pachinko machine of the modification 10, when the pachinko machine is activated, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery when the lottery mode is the low probability mode is changed. To be done. Then, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is indicated. The effect in which the design PY appears is executed. Further, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY in the ending effect is configured to change depending on the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated. The lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is configured to notify the player by causing a special character such as a goddess character to appear during variable display of symbols in the initial game times, as in the modified example 4. Therefore, the player observes whether or not the special character appears during the change of the symbol executed in the initial game time, and stores the observation result. Thereafter, the player estimates the degree of probability that the setting suggesting pattern PY will appear in the ending period from the previously stored observation result, waits for the setting suggesting pattern PY to appear, and waits for the setting suggesting pattern PY to appear. It is possible to infer (substantially, specify) which of the winning probabilities is set from the working pattern PY.

As a gaming machine of a comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an effect in which a picture PY for setting suggestion in which a number corresponding to setting information of lottery setting is written is executed with a predetermined appearance probability, a comparative example In this gaming machine, since the appearance probability that the setting suggesting pattern PY appears depends only on the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 10, the setting suggesting pattern PY appears in the ending period so that the appearance probability is based on the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated. Since the effect to be performed is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the setting suggesting pattern PY will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 10, since the player needs to play the game first after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, Against this, it is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game from the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of Modification Example 10, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game in the morning in each machine, and the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery has a high appearance probability. By selecting the game table which is, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PY is likely to appear.

The pachinko machine of the modification 10 can be modified as follows, for example. In the modified example 10, the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery is configured to be notified to the player by causing a special character to appear during the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times. On the other hand, as a modified example of the modified example 10, a configuration in which the player is notified of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery may be eliminated. According to this configuration, although the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is determined by the appearance probability lottery, the lottery result cannot be known. Therefore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is more strongly randomized. You will feel sex. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 10, it is further expected that the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion picture PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written is likely to appear. A feeling can be given to the player.

In the tenth modification, the appearance probability lottery is executed as the degree parameter deriving means for deriving the degree parameter for determining the degree of the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations can be adopted as long as the degree parameter for determining the degree of the appearance probability can be derived, such as a configuration in which the standard appearance probability and the high appearance probability are switched depending on the day of the week or the date. .

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 10, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery, a special character such as a goddess character is made to appear during the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times. Thus, the background color of the variable display of the symbols in the initial game times may be changed, or the shape and color of the symbols may be changed.

In addition, as a method of notifying the player of the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery, instead of the above configuration, in the standby screen by the symbol display device 41 during the period from the start of the pachinko machine to the start of the game by the player In addition, it may be configured to perform a specific effect (for example, an effect of causing a special character to appear).

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 10, the appearance probability lottery is divided into two types, the standard appearance probability and the high appearance probability, but instead, it may be divided into three or more numbers. In this case, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY changes according to the degree of the distributed appearance probability.

<<K8-11>> Modification 11:
In the pachinko machine of Modification Example 10, when the appearance period lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is activated, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In the ending effect to be executed, the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine is written is executed, and based on the lottery result of the appearance period lottery. The appearance probability of the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion pattern PY is changed. On the other hand, in this modification 11, a setting suggesting effect including a setting suggesting pattern PY with a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine can be executed in addition to the ending effect period. The appearance period lottery is executed when the pachinko machine is activated, and the period for executing the setting suggestion effect is switched based on the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated. When the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed at the time of starting the pachinko machine is the standard probability period, the ending suggestion is configured to execute the setting suggestion effect including the setting suggestion pattern PY and is executed at the time of starting the pachinko machine. If the lottery result of the selected appearance period lottery is a high probability period, the setting including the setting suggesting pattern PY in the reach production that suggests that reach (any of normal reach, super reach, and special reach is possible) has occurred. It is configured to execute suggestive performance. In addition, in the present modification 11, the setting suggesting effect including the setting suggesting pattern PY is configured to be executed at a predetermined appearance probability (for example, a probability of 1/40) set in advance in each period. The lottery result of the appearance period lottery is configured to notify the player by causing a special character such as a goddess character to appear during the variable display of symbols in the initial game times, as in the tenth modification.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 11 of the above configuration, when the pachinko machine is activated, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the lottery mode wins the big hit in the winning lottery in the low probability mode. The probability is changed. Then, in the period determined by whether the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine was started was distributed to the standard probability period or the high probability period, a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting. The effect that the setting suggesting pattern PY marked with appears appears with a predetermined appearance probability. Therefore, the player observes whether or not the special character appears during the variation of the symbol executed in the initial game time, and stores the observation result. After that, the player estimates a predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears from the previously stored observation result, and selects from the setting suggesting pattern PY that appears with a predetermined appearance probability in the predetermined period. It is possible to infer (substantially, specify) which the setting information of the setting is.

As the gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which the effect in which the setting suggesting picture PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written appears is executed at a predetermined time, the comparative example In the gaming machine, the period in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears is determined depending only on the model of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 11, since the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, the player can guess the setting information of the lottery setting. Depending on the skill of the player, which strongly feels randomness in the appearance period of the required setting suggestion pattern PY and takes into consideration the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated, the setting suggestion pattern PY is It is possible to accurately grasp the period in which the included effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modification 11, the player needs to play the game first after starting the pachinko machine. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, Against this, it is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game from the morning.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 11, when a plurality of pachinko machines are installed in the game hall, the player plays the game in the morning in each machine, and the lottery result of the appearance period lottery is high probability period. By selecting the game table which is, it is possible to select a table on which the setting suggesting pattern PY is likely to appear.

As a modified example of the modified example 11, when the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated is the standard probability period, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the normal reach effect, and When the lottery result of the appearance period lottery executed at startup is a high probability period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the super reach effect. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined period for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined from among a plurality of reach effects.

Furthermore, various modifications to the modification 10 can be applied to the modification 11 as they are.

<<K8-12>> Modification 12:
In the eleventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine is started, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX for each type of lottery setting is displayed as a starting point, and the variation of the symbols executed in the first game time from the time of starting point is displayed. It was configured to vary based on the aspect. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be set as the starting point. In addition, when the pachinko machine is activated, various times other than a predetermined time can be used as the starting point. Further, in place of the first game time, the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the game time when the number of times of execution of the game time becomes a predetermined number from the time of starting the second time, the third time, the fifth time, etc. The above-mentioned change may be performed based on the above.

<<K8-13>> Modification 13:
In Modification Example 1, the appearance period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears, starting from the time when the pachinko machine is activated, changes based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time from the time of becoming the starting point. Was configured as. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be set as the starting point. In addition, when the pachinko machine is activated, various times other than a predetermined time can be used as the starting point. Further, in place of the first game time, the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the game time when the number of times of execution of the game time becomes a predetermined number from the time of starting the second time, the third time, the fifth time, etc. The above-mentioned change may be performed based on the above.

<<K8-14>> Modification 14:
In the second modification, starting from the time when the pachinko machine is activated, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX for each type of lottery setting is the starting point, and the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 is distributed. It was configured to change based on which was distributed by the mechanism 250. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be set as the starting point. In addition, when the pachinko machine is activated, various times other than a predetermined time can be used as the starting point. Furthermore, it is not necessary to limit to the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250, and the number of game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 250 since the starting point, such as the second ball, the third ball, the fifth ball, is predetermined. The above-mentioned change may be performed based on the distribution destination of the game ball when the number becomes the number.

<<K8-15>> Modification 15:
In Modification 3, the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250 from the time when the pachinko machine is started up, and the appearance period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX for each type of lottery setting appears is the start point. It is configured to change based on which is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be set as the starting point. In addition, when the pachinko machine is activated, various times other than a predetermined time can be used as the starting point. Furthermore, it is not necessary to limit to the game ball that first enters the distribution mechanism 250, and the number of game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 250 since the starting point, such as the second ball, the third ball, the fifth ball, is predetermined. The above-mentioned change may be performed based on the distribution destination of the game ball when the number becomes the number.

<<K8-16>> Modification 16:
In the modified example 4, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX for each type of lottery setting is changed based on the result of the appearance probability lottery executed at the starting point, starting from the time when the pachinko machine is activated. It had been. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be set as the starting point. In addition, when the pachinko machine is activated, various times other than a predetermined time can be used as the starting point.

<<K8-17>> Modification 17:
In the fifth modification, the appearance period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX appears is changed from the time when the pachinko machine is activated, based on the result of the appearance probability lottery executed at the starting point. On the other hand, as a modification, in the above configuration, a predetermined time (for example, noon) may be set as the starting point. In addition, when the pachinko machine is activated, various times other than a predetermined time can be used as the starting point.

<<K8-18>> Modification 18:
In Modifications 12 to 17 described above, in each of the configurations of the eleventh embodiment to Modification 5, the starting point is changed except when the pachinko machine is activated, while Modifications 6 to 6 are changed. Similarly, in 11, the starting point may be changed to a time other than when the pachinko machine is activated, that is, a predetermined time (for example, noon). Further, also in each of the modified examples described later, in the configuration where the starting point is when the pachinko machine is activated, similarly, the starting point is other than when the pachinko machine is activated, that is, a predetermined time (for example, noon). The configuration may be changed to the above.

<<K8-19>> Modification 19:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modification, one of the periods in which the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY appears is a big hit in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing operation is performed when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. The ending period was executed at the end of the execution mode. On the other hand, as a modified example, the opening period executed until the big hit in the winning lottery is selected and then the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is performed may be set as the period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY appears. good. In addition, when the big hit in the winning lottery is won and the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode, the open/close processing period in the open/close execution mode may be the period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY appears. Furthermore, the predetermined period in which the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY appears may be one period in the game time, for example, a period in which reach production is performed.

<<K8-20>> Modification 20:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modified example, the time when the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY may appear is a predetermined period such as an ending period, and this predetermined period is always maintained as long as the pachinko machine is operating. It is set to be the period of. On the other hand, as a modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the preset suggestion pattern PX or the preset suggestion pattern PY may appear for a predetermined period only within a predetermined effective period. The valid period may be from noon to 14:00, for example. According to this configuration, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from noon to 14:00. Further, the valid period may be a period after the duration of the game of the player exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour). The duration of the game played by the player is obtained, for example, by the time during which the touch sensor 25a (see FIG. 565) is turned on for 5 minutes or more without interruption. According to this configuration, the player can be actively encouraged to continue playing the game for a predetermined time or more.

<<K8-21>> Modification 21:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modified example, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY is determined by various methods, but it is limited to the description of the eleventh embodiment and each modification example. is not. For example, if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery, next time (only once), if you win the jackpot in the winning lottery, the probability of setting suggestion pattern PY is 1/1 in the ending period after the winning. It may be configured to appear in. According to this configuration, it is possible to actively encourage the player who has won the big hit in the winning lottery to continue the game until the next big hit.

<<K8-22>> Modification 22:
In each modified example of the eleventh embodiment, the distribution mechanism 250 that distributes the arrived game balls to two routes is adopted as the distribution means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes. The game ball may be divided into three or more routes. In this case, the appearance probability or the appearance period of the setting suggestion picture PX (or the setting suggestion picture PY) is changed based on each of the allocation destinations. Further, the distribution mechanism 250 as the distribution means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes was to regularly switch the distribution destination, but instead of this, the arrived game balls are randomly distributed to a plurality of routes. It may be configured to be distributed to.

<<K8-23>> Modification 23:
In the eleventh embodiment and each modified example, as a method of executing the setting suggesting pattern PX (or the setting suggesting pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability, a random number for setting suggestion is generated and the random number is generated. The configuration is adopted to determine whether or not the random number corresponds to the winning of the setting suggestion effect by collating with the setting suggestion table. According to this configuration, if the game is played for a long time, the setting suggesting pattern PX (or the setting suggesting pattern PY) can be executed so as to have the appearance probability defined in the win/loss table, but the game is performed. When the period is short, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX (or the setting suggestion pattern PY) does not necessarily converge to the appearance probability defined in the win/fail table. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment and each modification, the player is disappointed that the setting suggestion pattern PX (or the setting suggestion pattern PY) does not appear easily and the setting information of the lottery setting cannot be known. There was a risk of feeling the feeling. On the other hand, as a modified example, the setting suggestion pattern PX (or the setting suggestion pattern PY) may always appear with a specified appearance probability at each predetermined specific period. For example, in the case of appearing with a probability of 1/10, for example, it may be configured such that 5 times out of 50 times always wins the setting suggestive effect. Furthermore, for example, in the case of appearing with a probability of 1/10, the number of times may be counted and the configuration suggestive effect may be won at the tenth time. According to these configurations, if the game is played for a certain period, the setting suggesting picture PX (or the setting suggesting picture PY) always appears, so that the player is not given the disappointment.

<<K8-24>> Modification 24:
In each of the modified examples such as the eleventh embodiment, the modified example 2, the modified example 4 and the like, in order for the player to accurately guess the setting information of the lottery setting, the player executes the first game time after starting the pachinko machine. For each display mode of the symbol fluctuation (or, the distribution destination of the first game ball by the distribution mechanism 250 after starting the pachinko machine, or the lottery result of the appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is started) It is necessary to empirically understand the correspondence relationship between the lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern by playing the game on the pachinko machine for a long time. On the other hand, information indicating the above-mentioned correspondence relationship (hereinafter referred to as correspondence relationship information) may be disclosed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine. There are the following methods of disclosure.

For example, the pachinko machine may be configured to include means for displaying the correspondence information at the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. Further, in the pachinko machine, during the period from when the pachinko machine is activated until the game is started by the player, or when the game is not started for a long time after the game is finished, the standby screen by the symbol display device 41 In addition, it may be configured to include means for displaying the correspondence information.

In addition, instead of the configuration disclosed in the pachinko machine, the model description POP prepared on the side of the pachinko machine base, pachinko machine pamphlet, gaming hall bulletin board, Internet home page, pachinko related magazines, etc. It may be configured to disclose related information.

<<K8-25>> Modification 25:
In each of the modified examples such as the modified example 1, the modified example 3, the modified example 5 and the like, in order for the player to accurately estimate the setting information of the lottery setting, the correspondence between each lottery setting and the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern Relationship and display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine (or, after starting the pachinko machine, the distribution destination of the first game ball by the distribution mechanism 250, or of the pachinko machine) It is necessary to empirically understand the correspondence relationship between the appearance probability lottery executed at startup and the appearance period of the setting suggestion pattern by playing the game for a long time on the pachinko machine. On the other hand, information indicating the above-mentioned two correspondences may be disclosed from the manufacturer of the pachinko machine. As the disclosure method, the disclosure method described in the modification 24 can be applied to the modification 25 as it is.

<<K8-26>> Modification 26:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modification, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX for each type of lottery setting or the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY in which a number corresponding to the type of lottery setting is written is ( i) Information indicating the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the game times when the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the time of starting points, (ii) First to the distribution mechanism 250 from the time of starting points It is configured to change on the basis of information indicating a distribution destination indicating to which one the game balls entered in is distributed by the distribution mechanism 250, or (iii) information indicating the result of the appearance probability lottery executed at the starting point. Was there. On the other hand, as a modified example, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX or the setting suggestion pattern PY is changed to (i) to (iii) above, and the number of times the game is executed is a predetermined number from the start point. When it becomes, it may be configured to change based on the information indicating whether or not the jackpot is won in the winning lottery corresponding to the game time (the information indicating the winning/absence determination result of the winning lottery). Further, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY is changed based on the information indicating the type of the jackpot when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the information on whether the reach is generated, or the like. You may comprise. In the eleventh embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, 16R certainty variation jackpots, 8R certainty variation jackpots, 16R regular jackpots, and 8R regular jackpots, but instead of this, the number of rounds is simply probability variation jackpots and regular jackpots. There may be two ways. Furthermore, there may be no restriction of "a game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the time of starting point", and simply information indicating a display mode of the symbol variation executed in the game time or , It may be configured to change based on information indicating whether or not a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, information indicating a type of jackpot when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, information on whether or not a reach has occurred, etc. Good. Alternatively, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX or the setting suggesting pattern PY is changed to the above (i) to (iii), and a predetermined entrance area or a predetermined entrance means (for example, a general winning opening 32, a throughput). It may be configured to change based on that a predetermined number of game balls (any number is possible as long as it is an integer of 1 or more) enters the gate 35 or the like. In short, the above (i) to (iii) can be replaced with any game information as long as they are predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. The predetermined game condition is preferably a predetermined game condition that allows the player to recognize that the game has been established. The player can recognize that the predetermined game condition is established, and then, based on the recognized memory, can estimate the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern. Further, the predetermined game condition does not have to be limited to one item, and may be a combination of a plurality of items.

<<K8-27>> Modification 27:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified example, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PX and the number written on the setting suggesting pattern PY are configured to be determined based on the current lottery setting in the winning lottery. It was On the other hand, as a modification, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PX and the number written on the setting suggestion pattern PY may be determined based on the numerical information irrelevant to the type of lottery setting. As the numerical information irrelevant to the type of the lottery setting, for example, information indicating the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, information on whether or not a reach has occurred, and information indicating the number of rounds at the time of jackpot. Various numerical information such as information indicating the number of jackpots on the current day or the previous day, information indicating the number of holdings, etc. can be adopted. In the eleventh embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, 16R certainty variation jackpots, 8R certainty variation jackpots, 16R regular jackpots, and 8R regular jackpots, but instead of this, the number of rounds is simply probability variation jackpots and regular jackpots. There may be two ways. The setting suggesting design is not limited to the above-mentioned treasure box design PX or the treasure box design PY in which a number is written, and can be replaced with another effect information image showing effect information. As the effect information image, for example, a stop design which is a combination of designs can be used. Specifically, the combination of the same odd symbol that is displayed when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, the combination of the same even symbol that is displayed when the jackpot type is usually a jackpot, and a reach symbol combination It may be configured such that (a combination of symbols in which one is not the same but the others are the same) corresponds to the effect information image. If the type of jackpot is probability variation jackpot, for example, the same odd symbol combination is displayed, but as a method of displaying it, the same as the direct probability variation symbol display mode that immediately displays the same odd symbol combination as a stop symbol. There is a pachinko machine having a promotion certainty variation symbol display mode in which a combination of even symbols is once displayed as a stop symbol and then switched to the same odd symbol combination. On this kind of pachinko machine, when the present invention is applied, based on the information indicating that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the direct probability variation symbol display corresponding to the numerical information indicating that the type of jackpot is the probability variation jackpot The mode stop pattern may be displayed with a predetermined probability. According to this configuration, with a probability equal to or lower than the probability obtained by subtracting the above predetermined probability from 100%, the first stopped symbol (combination of even symbols) in the promotion probability variation symbol display mode will be displayed, and the direct probability variation display Appropriate control of the mode and promotion probability variation pattern display mode becomes possible. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine having a direct probability variation symbol display mode and a promotion probability variation symbol display mode, it is specified by information indicating that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and numerical information indicating that the type of jackpot is the probability variation jackpot. The appearance probability may be configured to display the stop symbol in the direct probability variation symbol display mode as the effect information image. Even with this configuration, with a probability equal to or lower than the probability obtained by subtracting the appearance probability from 100%, the first stop symbol (combination of even symbols) in the promotion probability variation symbol display mode will be displayed, and the probability variation symbol display mode directly. Appropriate control of the promotion certainty variable symbol display mode becomes possible.

Further, the effect information image may be an image showing that the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, which corresponds to numerical information indicating the number of rounds on the larger side (16 rounds in the eleventh embodiment). Specifically, in the modified example 8 or the modified example 9 of the eleventh embodiment including the distribution mechanism 250 for alternately distributing the entered game balls to the first starting opening 233 and the second starting opening 234, the type of lottery setting Instead of the setting suggesting pattern PY in which the number corresponding to is indicated, an image showing that the 16R probability variation jackpot is won is displayed with the appearance probability based on the distribution destination of the game balls by the distribution mechanism 250. Good. The image indicating that the 16R probability variation jackpot has been won (hereinafter referred to as the 16R probability variation jackpot image) may be, for example, an image showing numerical information as it is, or an image showing a design corresponding to the numerical information. .. Furthermore, it may be an image or the like having a unique color in which numerical information is associated with a combination of the same odd symbols indicating a probability variation big hit. With the above configuration as well, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the 16R certainty variation big hit image, and therefore positively gives the player the expectation that the 16R certainty variation big hit image will appear. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

<<K8-28>> Modification 28:
From the sixth modified example of the eleventh embodiment or the tenth modified example of the eleventh embodiment, "the first lottery means for executing the first lottery process and the second lottery in a predetermined period after the first lottery process is executed. In a gaming machine provided with a second lottery means for executing a process, a numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information, and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, a first lottery in the first lottery process. When the result is obtained, the second lottery process is provided with a lottery probability setting means for setting the probability of being the second lottery result to a predetermined probability, and the specific effect execution means is the second lottery process in the second lottery process. When a lottery result is obtained, a feature such as "a gaming machine characterized by including means for displaying an effect information image corresponding to the numerical value information" is extracted. Here, as the first lottery process, in the modified example 6, a lottery process for allocating the type of the reach executed in the game time (strictly, a variation time capable of specifying the type of the reach is determined. Lottery process for) and the appearance probability lottery is applicable in the modified example 10, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first lottery process can be a winning lottery for determining whether or not a big hit is won, a sorting lottery for determining a type of a big hit when a big hit is won in the winning lottery, and the like. There are four types of jackpots in the 11th embodiment and its modifications: 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, but instead of this, the number of rounds simply varies. There are two types: a regular jackpot and a regular jackpot. The second lottery process corresponds to the lottery process (Sk5106 and Sk5107 of the ending effect setting process of FIG. 641) that refers to the setting suggestion win/loss table to determine whether or not the setting suggestive effect has been won, but is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done. For example, in a pachinko machine having a direct probability variation symbol display mode and a promotion probability variation symbol display mode, the second lottery process is a lottery or the like for determining which of the direct probability variation symbol display mode and the promotion probability variation symbol display mode is executed. be able to. In Modification 6 and Modification 10, the setting suggestion pattern PY corresponds as the effect information image corresponding to the numerical information, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the effect information image, a combination of the same odd number symbols as the first stop symbol can be used.

<<K8-29>> Modification 29:
The pachinko machine of Modification 29 of the eleventh embodiment has the same hardware configuration as the pachinko machine of Modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment, and only a part of the software configuration is different. In the pachinko machine of the modification 29, the same parts as those of the modification 6 will be described below by using the same names and reference numerals.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 29, similarly to the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine is, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is set. In the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the setting suggesting pattern PY having a number corresponding to the type of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine appears when the transition is made.

Then, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 29, as in the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, the probability that the setting suggesting pattern PY appears in the ending effect is executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. The configuration is changed based on the display mode of the symbol fluctuation (hereinafter, also referred to as the display mode of the initial fluctuation) (see FIG. 643). However, in the pachinko machine of the modified example 29, depending on the display mode of the initial fluctuation, the special information when it is determined that it is a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time (game time leading to the ending effect) is the first start. The appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY also depends on whether it is acquired by the game ball entering the mouth 33 or by the game ball entering the second starting mouth 34. It was changed. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of the modification example 29, the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY in the ending effect is as follows.

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is out of alignment, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is 1/stipulated by the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the initial outlier shown in FIG. It has a probability of 10.

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is the normal reach, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is 1/stipulated by the setting suggestion hit/miss table for the initial normal reach shown in FIG. 645, as in the modified example 6. It is a probability of 8. However, the probability of 1/8 is that the special information when the winning lottery of this game time (game time leading to the ending effect) is determined to be a big hit is the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. It shall be limited to those obtained by. If the special information when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time is obtained by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the probability is 1/1. .. Note that the probabilities of 1/8 and 1/1 are not limited to these values, and special information when it is determined that a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time is given to the first start opening 33 The special information when it is determined that it is a big hit in the hit lottery of this game time is acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 rather than the case where it is obtained by the entry of the ball If it is higher, it can be changed to any value.

When the display mode of the initial fluctuation is super reach, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY is defined by the setting suggestion success/failure table for the initial super reach shown in FIG. 646, as in Modification 6. It has a probability of 1/5. However, the probability of ⅕ is that the special information when the winning lottery of this game time (the game time that led to the ending production) is determined to be a big hit is the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. It shall be limited to those obtained by. If the special information when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time is obtained by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the probability is 1/1. .. Note that the probabilities of 1/5 and 1/1 are not limited to these values, and special information when the winning lottery of the current game time is determined to be a big hit is a game to the first starting opening 33. The special information when it is determined that it is a big hit in the hit lottery of this game time is acquired by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 rather than the case where it is obtained by the entry of the ball If it is higher, it can be changed to any value.

When the display form of the initial fluctuation is the special reach, the probability is 1/1 as shown in step Sk5112 of FIG. 643, as in the modified example 6.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 29 configured as described above, when the pachinko machine is activated, the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine is changed, so that the lottery mode is a winning lottery in the low probability mode, The probability of winning the jackpot is changed. Then, when a big hit is won in the winning lottery and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, in the ending effect executed at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, a setting suggestion with a number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is indicated. The effect in which the design PY appears is executed. Furthermore, the appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY in the ending period is configured to change based on the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time after the pachinko machine is activated. In addition, in the case where the display mode of the symbol fluctuation executed in the first game time is normal reach and super reach, in the winning lottery of the current game time (game time leading to the ending effect) The special information when it is determined to be a jackpot is obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33, or is obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY is also changed depending on whether or not.

Therefore, the player observes the symbol variation executed in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, and first stores the display mode of the symbol variation. After that, the player considers the display mode of the symbol variation in the first game time stored in advance, and the special information when it is determined that it is a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time is the first starting opening 33. By designating whether the game ball was acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34 or the game ball was acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the design suggesting pattern in the ending period It is possible to estimate the probability that the PY will appear, wait for the setting suggesting pattern PY to appear, and infer (setting, specify) which of the winning probabilities is set from the appearing setting suggesting pattern PY. ..

As a pachinko machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which the effect that the setting suggesting picture PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the lottery setting is written is executed with a predetermined appearance probability, the comparative example In the pachinko machine, since the appearance probability of the effect in which the setting suggesting pattern PY appears depends only on the model of the pachinko machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 29, the display mode of the symbol fluctuation executed in the first game time and the special information when it is determined that the jackpot in the current game time is a big hit are the first. 1 The setting is made so that the appearance probability is determined based on whether the game ball is obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34. Since the effect in which the suggesting picture PY appears is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect in which the setting suggesting picture PY appears. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the setting suggesting pattern PY in which the number corresponding to the setting information of the current lottery setting is written appears, and as a result, the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

In the pachinko machine of the modification example 29, when the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time is the normal reach and the super reach, it is determined that it is a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time. The special information when it is determined that it is a big hit in the winning lottery of this game time is more than the special information when the special information when it is played is obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33. It is configured such that the probability of appearance of the setting suggesting pattern PY is higher when the game ball is obtained by entering the game ball into the 2 starting port 34. For this reason, the player is provided with an expectation that the game ball will enter the second starting opening 34 rather than the first starting opening 33 in terms of the appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY. be able to.

According to the pachinko machine of the modification example 29, since the player needs to play the game in the first game time after starting the pachinko machine, for example, when the pachinko machine is powered on in the morning, the game is played. It is possible to actively encourage the player to start playing the game from the morning.

In the modified example 29, whether the special information obtained when the winning lottery of the current game time is determined to be a big hit is obtained by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, or the second The appearance probability of the setting suggesting pattern PY changes depending on whether it is acquired by entering the game ball into the starting opening 34. The display mode of the pattern variation executed in the first game time is the normal reach. There are some cases and some cases are super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be set only in the case of normal reach, only in the case of super reach, or may be included in the case of disconnection. Furthermore, without taking into consideration the display mode of the symbol variation executed in the first game time, special information when it is determined that it is a big hit in the winning lottery of this game time is a game to the first starting opening 33. The appearance probability of the setting suggestion pattern PY may be changed depending on whether it is acquired by entering a ball or by entering a game ball into the second starting opening 34. it can.

In Modification 29, the setting suggesting pattern PY is adopted as the effect information image corresponding to the numerical value information, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be changed to another effect information image. As another effect information image, for example, a stop symbol, which is a combination of symbols corresponding to numerical information, can be cited. Specifically, the combination of the same odd symbol that is displayed when the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, the combination of the same even symbol that is displayed when the type of jackpot is usually a jackpot, a combination of reach symbols It may be configured such that (a combination of symbols in which one is not the same but the others are the same) corresponds to the effect information image. That is, instead of the configuration of the modification 29, for example, the special information when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning lottery of the current game time is obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33. Depending on whether it is the one obtained by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the appearance probability of the combination of the same odd number symbols indicating that the type of jackpot is the probability variation jackpot is changed. You can also do it.

<<K8-30>> Modification 30:
In the eleventh embodiment and its modified example, the pachinko machine is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100, but instead of this, the main control device. It may be configured to include two control devices such as a sub-control device. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, in the above eleventh embodiment and its modification, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 need not be limited to the division described in the eleventh embodiment, and the three control devices may be used. As a whole of 60, 90, 100, it is only necessary to be able to execute all the processes in the eleventh embodiment.

<<L>> Twelfth Embodiment:
<<L1>> Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 647 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

An operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the front view right side of the front door frame 14 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “right side”). When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 648 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that a trace of opening and closing remains. For example, a seal sticker is attached to an openable/closable portion, and when the board box is opened, a character such as "open" appears.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies electric power required to operate the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON/OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 649 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided in the individual openings described above formed on the game board 30. Be induced. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of game balls are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 (FIG. 648) as prize balls.

The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

The second starting opening 34 is a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described below is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. When the electric lottery is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game ball can win. The opening/closing execution mode refers to a case where the main controller 60 hits the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 as a result of a winning lottery, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the entry into the winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. .. In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. It is discharged from the game area PA through the mouth 43.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a, when the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, as a display mode until the segment display is displayed corresponding to the lottery result , The variable display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the winning lottery is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator is displayed corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display is also referred to as variation time. Call. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the universal graphic unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first symbol display unit 37a based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry into the second starting opening 34, displays a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display. To do. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the ball entering the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also performs the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. .. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 650 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 650(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 650(a), symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 650(b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 650(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. After variable display by scrolling, as shown in FIG. 650(b), one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted for the variable display of symbols.

Here, "game times" means that from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display ends and the stop display ends, until the stop display ends. That is, in a unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery about the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. is there. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the first symbol display unit for each game time. In either 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device for each game time. In 41, after the predetermined symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 650(b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 649, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42a, 42b) are provided above the first starting port 33. The probability of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 changes depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

<<L2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 651 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 has a CPU (not shown) that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data and the like temporarily when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, which is a memory for storing, is provided. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown), respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the power supply device 85 is provided with a capacitor (not shown), and when a power failure occurs or the power switch 88 (FIG. 648) is turned off, the power supply to each device is continued for a predetermined period. To do.

Further, various detection sensors 67a to 67e are connected to the input port of the main control board 61. Specifically, it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors provided at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines, based on the signals from the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball is a through gate. It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric auditors opening lottery based on the entering of the through gate 35. To do.

At the output port of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of electric lottery opening lottery, when the electric role open is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 34b so that the electric auditors product 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the open/close execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the open/close execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output port of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry to the first starting opening 33 is made. In the case of specifying, the award ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case of specifying the entry into the second starting opening 34, the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command corresponding to is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 and a game ball firing button 26 are connected to the firing control device 80.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 652 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot type such as the probability-varied jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed. The falling random number counter CF is used for the falling lottery to determine whether or not to end the high-probability mode (also called the high-probability game state). The “high-probability mode” is a gaming state that is started by winning the probability variation jackpot, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery is relatively higher than that in the low-probability mode.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41, the variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CF, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb are provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball is the reserved information storage area. It is chronologically stored in the first holding area Ra of 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b. 2 The storage areas are stored in the holding area Rb in time series.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is recognized. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is collated with the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. By doing so, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is collated with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is the jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 650(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. May be.

Next, the details of the falling random number counter CF will be described. The falling random number counter CF is used when executing the falling lottery, which is a determination as to whether or not to end the high-probability mode in the gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. When the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode in the game times is changed from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

The falling random number counter CF is configured to be incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum, returns to zero. The falling random number counter CF is periodically updated and stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. At the timing, the updated value of the falling random number counter CF is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/absence table (which is stored in the falling lottery table storage area 63d of the ROM 63) ( It is determined whether or not to end the high-probability mode by collating with the falling lottery win/loss table).

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and when the symbol display device 41 starts varying the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power reserve area 64d moves to the electric role execution area 64e, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area 64e. Is used to perform a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state (hereinafter referred to as an electric accessory open lottery). Specifically, in the electric role execution area 64e, the winning/losing table (electrical role unlocking lottery winning/loss table) and the value of the electrical role unlocking counter C4 stored in the accessory lottery table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 are stored. It is collated and it is determined whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state.

Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the falling random number counter CF is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to. Also, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The hit/miss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes of the win lottery, and the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the win lottery in the low probability mode. At the time of winning lottery in the probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to.

FIG. 653 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/loss table. FIG. 653(a) shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and FIG. 653(b) shows a win/loss table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 653(a), in the low probability mode win/loss table, five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 653(b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (16 to 1199) other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big hit in the winning lottery than the low-probability mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

Although not adopted in the win/loss table in the present embodiment, a “small win” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

The “small hit” is a result of the transition to the open/close execution mode in which the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode. .. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of open/close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open/close execution mode (2) Lottery mode of winning lottery after the end of the open/close execution mode (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the open/close execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the opening/closing door 36b is opened. It can be set to continue until the number of entered balls reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or a ball enters the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until the number reaches 6.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

The number of times of opening and closing the open/close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

As a mode of the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a high-probability mode of performing a winning lottery by using a winning/loss table for high probability as a winning/losing table and a winning/losing table. It is possible to set a low-probability mode in which the winning lottery is performed using the low-probability hit table. As described using FIG. 653, when the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for high probability, the winning jackpot is compared to when the winning lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for low probability. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4. In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time opening time of the electric accessory 34a when the electric-role combination opening wins may be set longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

Although not used in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode. Good. Further, it may be configured such that one opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be long. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released, and the electric auditors' product 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric auditors item open lottery to the next electric auditors item open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 654 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 654(a) shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 654(b) shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to when the lottery is performed based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is provided for the second starting opening 34. It is referred to at the time of lottery based on the entry of the game ball. Both distribution tables function as a reference table when allocating the jackpot type, but in the present embodiment, they also function as a reference table for allocating the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode in the mode selection lottery. Details of the mode selection lottery will be described later.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 654(a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot are set.

In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, simply “lottery mode”). (Also called) is a high-probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode is a jackpot that becomes a high-frequency support mode. The difference between the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot is that the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the 16R probability jackpot is 16 times (16 rounds), and the 8R probability jackpot is 8 It is 8 times.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the support after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. This is a big hit when the mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened is eight (8 rounds).

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 64” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “65 to 89” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these three types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R probability jackpot is the highest, the 8R probability jackpot is the next highest, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening of FIG. 654(b), the distribution table for the second starting opening is a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 74” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “75 to 89” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. "90-99" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is the jackpot winning based on the entry into the first starting opening 33 and the jackpot winning second. This is different from the case where a big hit is won based on a ball entering the starting opening 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the first starting port and the type of jackpot set in the distribution table for the second starting port are the same. However, instead of this, a different configuration may be used. Furthermore, the types of jackpots defined by each distribution table are not limited to three types, and may be four types including 16R normal jackpots, two types, or five or more types, for example. Further, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to 8R and 16R, and may be another number such as 4R and 5R.

If the winning result in the winning lottery is out, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed. In the classification of jackpot types, if the 16-probability variation jackpot or the 8R-probability variation jackpot is obtained, the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode as described above. The state will continue until the next time you win the big hit in the winning lottery or the falling lottery.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display stopped on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to.

FIG. 655 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the falling lottery win/loss table used when executing the falling lottery. As shown in FIG. 655, in the falling lottery win/loss table, three values 0, 1, 2 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF that is won in the falling lottery. 97 values of 3 to 99 are set as the values of the falling random number counter CF which are out of alignment. In other words, in the high-probability mode game times, the probability of falling when the high-probability mode ends when the player wins the high-probability mode and ends in the low-probability mode is 3/100. It is 97/100. In addition, in the present embodiment, the falling lottery is not executed in the game time of the low probability mode.

FIG. 656 is an explanatory view showing the contents of a win/loss table (electric win/loft lottery win/loss table) used when executing the electric win open lottery.

FIG. 656(a) shows a win/loss table (for low frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 656(a), in the winning/discarding table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode), two values 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory releasing counter C4 that is to win the electric accessory. The value is set. As the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 1/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening win is selected in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 656(b) shows the winning/disapproving table for electric accessory release lottery (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 656(b), in the winning/disabling table for electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 462 0 to 461 values of the electric role releasing counter C4 to be the electric role opening win. The value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, in the high frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric power release is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the high frequency support mode is set by the electric accessory release lottery win/loss table so that the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode. ..

<<L3>> Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 657 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 651) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a CPU, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47, and is also connected to the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<L4>> Outline of processing by game machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after shifting to the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is continued as a support mode until the number of games reaches a predetermined guaranteed game number. The "guaranteed game count" is the number of games guaranteed to be continuously executed in the high frequency support mode, and is, for example, 100. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed up to 100 times, which is the guaranteed game count, after the high-frequency support mode. After 100 times, which is the guaranteed game count, when the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode at that time, the support mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Even after the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode.

FIG. 658 is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing in the case where the falling lottery is won in the game times before reaching the guaranteed game times. FIG. 658(a) shows the state of the lottery mode and the state of the support mode. In FIG. 658, the numbers in [] (for example, [1] and [60]) indicate the number of times the game times have been executed since the high frequency support mode was started.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode. When the falling lottery is won in the game times (60 times in the illustrated example) before the number of games from the start of the game reaches the guaranteed number of games, the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Then, from the 60th game time, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode. On the other hand, for the support mode, even if the high probability mode ends and the low probability mode shifts after winning the falling lottery at the 60th game time, 100 times after the high frequency support mode is started. The high frequency support mode is continued until the game time to be executed for the second time is reached.

FIG. 658(b) shows each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the 60th game round that wins the falling lottery. In this example, up to the 60th game round (1 to 59 times), neither the falling lottery nor the win lottery nor the reach lottery has been won. Therefore, up to the 59th game round, the winning lottery in each game round A normal effect (also called a normal effect) for notifying the result notice or the lottery result is executed. Then, in the 60th game round that wins the falling lottery, for example, a battle effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a battle effect) in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character confront each other is executed.

The battle effect is an effect executed before the result notification effect of notifying the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of battle effects are prepared: a normal battle effect, a life-and-death battle effect, and a superior battle effect. It is suggested that the normal battle production corresponds to one of a result that is advantageous to the player (win), a result that is disadvantageous to the player (defeat), and a result that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (draw). It is a production. The life-and-death battle effect is an effect that suggests that the result is advantageous to the player (win) or the result is unfavorable to the player (defeat). The superior battle effect is an effect that suggests that it corresponds to one of a result advantageous to the player (win) and a result neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player (draw). In the game times before reaching the guaranteed game number, the normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect. That is, in the example of FIG. 658(b), a normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect.

Then, after the battle effect has been executed, a result notification effect that notifies the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification production, the production corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, when the winning lottery is won and the jackpot lottery is not won, the player-side character is defeated to lose. Regardless of the lottery result of the falling lottery, when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the winning effect that the player character wins is executed. When a reach occurs without winning the falling lottery and without winning the big hit in the winning lottery, a draw effect in which the player character and the enemy character are drawn is executed. In the case of the example in FIG. 658(b), since the falling lottery is won in the 60th game time, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

As a result of winning the falling lottery in the 60th game time, the timing of transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode coincides with the timing of starting the 60th game time winning the falling lottery. There is. That is, when the falling lottery is won in the 60th game run, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. Regarding the support mode, as described above, the high frequency support mode is continued.

FIG. 659 is a timing chart for explaining an example of a process in the case where a big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times before reaching the guaranteed game times.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. When the number of games since the number of games played before reaching the guaranteed number of games (60 in the illustrated example) is a big win in the winning lottery, the 60th game is ended and the opening/closing execution mode is changed. The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing of starting (that is, the timing immediately after the presentation of the result of winning is finished). On the other hand, as for the support mode, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 60th game cycle ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts. That is, when the guaranteed game number has not been reached, the lottery mode and the support mode are both reset to the lower side at the timing when the game number of the jackpot is over and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Regarding the effect, in the example of FIG. 659, up to the 60th game time (1 to 59 times), since neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery nor the reach lottery is won, the game effect is normally produced up to 59 times. To execute. Then, in the 60th game time in which the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, a battle effect and a result notifying effect informing that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery are executed. As described above, in the game times before reaching the guaranteed number of games, the normal battle effect, which is an effect that suggests that the battle effect corresponds to any one of victory, defeat, and draw, is executed. To be done. That is, in the case of the example in FIG. 659, the normal battle effect is executed as the battle effect.

FIG. 660 is a game number before reaching the guaranteed game number in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, which does not win the falling lottery and does not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and reaches the reach determination (so-called out-reach). 4) is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process performed when it is determined that (1) occurs. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probability random jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. , In the number of games before the number of games played from the start of the high-frequency support mode reaches the guaranteed number of games (60 in the illustrated example), the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery. Further, FIG. 660 shows the processing in the case where it is determined in the reach determination that a reach (disengagement reach) is generated.

Either win, defeat, or draw in the 60th game time when it is determined that a reach (outside reach) is generated in the reach judgment without winning the falling lottery and winning the big hit in the winning lottery The normal battle effect that may be suggested to be applicable is executed, and then the draw effect in which the player character does not win or lose is executed as the result notification effect. In the game times that did not win the falling lottery and did not win the big hit in the winning lottery, the lottery mode keeps the high probability mode and the support mode keeps the high frequency support mode regardless of whether the reach occurs To do.

FIG. 661 is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when the above-described battle effect or result notification effect is being executed. When the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a first display area 41aS and a second display area 41aL. Then, in the first display area 41aS, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the variable display of the symbol is executed in the variable time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the second display area 41aL, the battle effect or the result notification effect is executed.

FIG. 662 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a battle effect. 662(a) shows an example of a normal battle effect, FIG. 662(b) shows an example of a life-and-death battle effect, and FIG. 662(c) shows an example of a superior battle effect. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a battle effect, an image (moving image) in which a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side are confronted is displayed. This image is displayed for each type of battle effect. Is different. In the life-and-death battle shown in FIG. 662(b), compared to the case of the normal battle shown in FIG. 662(a), the swords possessed by both characters are large, and the image suggests that the battle result is only victory or defeat. ing. In the superiority battle shown in FIG. 662(c), the sword possessed by the female character on the player side is larger than the sword possessed by the male character on the enemy side, the player side is superior, and the result of the battle is either victory or draw. It is an image that suggests (that is, there is no loss). In each battle effect, the images shown in FIGS. 662(a) to 662(c) are displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and the sound and light accompanying the images are output to the speaker 46 and various types. Output to the lamp 47.

The images of the normal battle effect, the life-and-death battle effect, and the superior battle effect described above are merely examples, and the images are not limited to these. In the present embodiment, in each battle production, the overall composition in which the female character on the player side and the male character on the enemy side face off is almost the same, and only the swords possessed by the character are different. Alternatively, the overall composition may be completely different depending on the type of battle effect. In short, the normal battle production is a production that can suggest that the result of the battle corresponds to one of victory, defeat, and a draw. If it is an effect that can suggest that the result of the battle corresponds to either win or draw, what kind of effect is it? It can also be an aspect. Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned suggestions cannot be obtained, if the productions are different from each other, the normal battle production, the life-and-death battle production, and the superior battle production should be in any form of production. You can also The reason why the normal battle effect, the life-and-death battle effect, and the superior battle effect are different from each other is to change the tension and expectation given to the player depending on the type of battle effect. If not desired, the normal battle effect, the life-and-death battle effect, and the superior battle effect can be the same effect contents.

FIG. 663 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a result notification effect executed after the battle effect. FIG. 663(a) shows a winning effect as a result notification effect, FIG. 663(b) shows a defeat effect as a result notification effect, and FIG. 663(c) shows a draw effect as a result notification effect. In the winning effect, as shown in FIG. 663(a), an image (moving image) in which the female character on the player side is pleased to win is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 661) of the display surface 41a, and the image is displayed. The sound and light associated with is output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 659 in which the big hit is won in the winning lottery, a winning effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the defeat production, as shown in FIG. 663(b), an image (moving image) in which the female character on the player's side is sad due to the defeat is displayed in the second display area 41aL of the display surface 41a, and the sound accompanying the image is displayed. The light is output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the example of FIG. 658 that is won in the falling lottery, the defeat effect is executed as the result notification effect.

In the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 663(c), an image (moving image) informing that the female character on the player side has not lost is displayed in the second display area 41aL (FIG. 661) of the display surface 41a. The audio and light associated with the image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. In the game number before the number of games since the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games, and the reach occurs without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, A draw effect is executed as the result notification effect. Note that each of the winning effect, the defeat effect, and the drawing effect can be replaced with the image (moving image) shown in FIGS. 663(a) to 663(c) and replaced with another image (moving image). In short, the winning effect can be any image as long as it can notify the player of an advantageous result, and the defeat effect can notify the player of an unfavorable result. Any image can be used, and any image can be used as long as it is possible to notify the player that the result is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player.

Next, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number, a case of winning the falling lottery and a case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery will be described.

FIG. 664 is a timing chart for explaining an example of processing in the case where the falling lottery is won in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached. FIG. 664(a) shows that the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. In the game times (120 times in the example shown) after the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games, the winning lottery is won, the lottery mode is low probability mode, and the support mode is low frequency support mode. It shows the case of migration. Even if you win the falling lottery at the 120th game time, the lottery result in the falling lottery is reflected in the lottery mode of the winning lottery in that game time, as when you win the falling lottery at the 60th game time. .. That is, in the example of FIG. 664(a), in the 120th game time, the falling lottery is won and the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode. Then, from the 120th game time, the winning lottery is executed in the low probability mode.

Regarding the support mode, as described above, when the number of games reaches the guaranteed number of games (100 times) after shifting to the high frequency support mode, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. However, even when the number of games in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, if the high probability mode is continued as the lottery mode at that time, the high frequency support mode is continued as the support mode. It Therefore, in the example of FIG. 664(a), when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game round, the high-probability mode is continued until the 120th game round is reached, so the high-frequency support mode is continued. Has been done. Then, in the 120th game round, the falling lottery is won, and the support mode also shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in association with the shift of the lottery mode from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

FIG. 664(b) shows each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode, which the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes in the 120th game round that wins the falling lottery. In this example, until the 120th game time (1 to 119 times), neither the falling lottery nor the winning lottery has been won. Therefore, until the 120th game time, the result of the winning lottery in each game time is announced. Or a normal effect (also called a normal effect) for notifying the lottery result is executed. Then, in the 120th game time that is won in the falling lottery, the battle effect is executed. Here, the life and death battle effect described above (see FIG. 662(b)) is executed as the battle effect.

Then, after executing the life and death battle effect, a result notification effect that notifies the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. In the result notification production, the production corresponding to the lottery results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery is executed. Specifically, when the falling lottery is won and the big hit is not won in the winning lottery, the player-side character loses the defeat effect shown in FIG. 663(b). When the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the win effect shown in FIG. 663(a) in which the player character wins is executed regardless of the result of the falling lottery. In the case of FIG. 664(b), since the winning lottery is won in the 120th game time and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, the defeat production is executed as the result notification production.

As a result of winning the falling lottery at the 120th game time, the timing of shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode coincides with the timing at which the 120th game time of winning the falling lottery is started. There is. That is, when the falling lottery is won in the 120th game, the lottery mode immediately shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. In addition, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode as the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. The timing when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode is almost the same as the timing when the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. Therefore, the low frequency support mode is entered almost at the same time as the 120th game time is started.

Next, a description will be given of the processing in the case where the big hit is won in the winning lottery in the game times after the guaranteed game times are reached. In the following, prior to the description of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing executed by the pachinko machines of Comparative Example 1 and Comparative Example 2 will be described.

FIG. 665 is a timing chart for explaining a process in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 in which the falling lottery is not won but the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached. Specifically, in FIG. 665, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the probability random jackpot is won by winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. After the shift, after the high frequency support mode is started, the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the opening/closing is executed. The case where the lottery mode is changed to the low probability mode and the support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode at the start of the mode is shown.

In the 120th game time in which the big hit in the winning lottery is won without winning the falling lottery, a battle effect is executed, and then a victory effect in which the player-side character wins is executed as a result announcement effect. Then, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing when the opening and closing execution mode is started (that is, the timing at which the presentation effect of the victory is finished) after the 120th game times of winning the jackpot is over. At the same time, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In other words, both the lottery mode and the support mode are reset to the lower side at the timing when the game times won for the jackpot are finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Here, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, when the winning number is won in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery, the lottery mode and the support mode are carried out. It is assumed that the same operation as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, that is, the operation shown in FIG. 664 is performed. Comparing FIG. 664(b) with FIG. 665, it can be seen that the change mode of the support mode is different between the two during the period from the start to the end of the 120th game time. During this period, when the jackpot lottery is not won and the jackpot lottery is won, the high frequency support mode is shown in FIG. 665, whereas the fall lottery is won and the jackpot lottery is won. If not, the low frequency support mode is set as shown in FIG. 664(b). Therefore, assuming the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1 that executes both the processing shown in FIG. 664(b) and the processing shown in FIG. 665, the player is required to execute the result notification effect before execution. In the opening and closing state of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649), whether or not the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is transitioned to confirm whether the winning lottery has been won in the 120th game time. You can recognize whether or not.

Specifically, in the 120th game round, the player confirms that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) stops the opening/closing operation before the result notification effect is executed, It can be predicted that the high-frequency support mode ends at the timing when the 120th game cycle is started and the low-frequency support mode is entered, and that the 120th game cycle wins the falling lottery. As a result, the player can predict the type of the result notification effect that will be executed thereafter, while the battle effect is being executed. In other words, when the game production in the high probability mode has continued 100 times or more and in the high frequency support mode, when the battle production is started, the player character and the enemy character Which player wins is not known until the result announcement (that is, it is not known to the result announcement whether to win the falling lottery or to win the jackpot in the winning lottery), but the player is , By confirming that the high frequency support has ended from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a during the period in which the battle effect is being executed, the player side character loses this battle (wins the falling lottery) That can be predicted during the battle production. As a result, the player may not be able to be given a sense of urgency or expectation regarding the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery in the 120th game round by the battle production and the result announcement production. This is the subject of Comparative Example 1.

FIG. 666 is a timing chart illustrating a process in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 in which the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached. Specifically, in the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the probability variation jackpot is won by winning lottery, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started. When the lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode without winning the falling lottery and winning the big hit in the winning lottery at the 120th game time executed after the start of the winning lottery, FIG. 666. Is shown in.

In the 120th game time in which the big hit in the winning lottery is won without winning the falling lottery, a battle effect is executed, and then a victory effect in which the player-side character wins is executed as a result announcement effect. The support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the timing when the 120th game cycle that wins the jackpot starts, the 120th game cycle that wins the jackpot ends, and the opening/closing execution mode starts The lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode at the timing (that is, at the timing immediately after the presentation of the announcement as a result of victory). In other words, when the number of games in the high-probability mode has been continuously executed more than the guaranteed number of games (100 times) and the winning lottery is not won, and the jackpot is won, the support mode is selected. In the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 1, the timing at which the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode is the timing at which the game times of the jackpot are finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started (see FIG. 665). On the other hand, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 is different in that it is the timing (that is, the start of the game time) at which the game time when the jackpot is won is started.

Comparing FIG. 664(b), which is an example when winning the falling lottery, and FIG. 666, which is an example when winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, in the period from the start to the end of the 120th game time, It can be seen that the manner of changing the support mode is the same. Therefore, whether the player wins the falling lottery in the 120th game round from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649) before the result notification effect is executed, and a big hit in the winning lottery I can't tell if I won. That is, it is impossible for the player to predict the type of the result notification effect (whether the winning effect or the defeat effect) to be executed thereafter during the execution of the battle effect. Therefore, when the falling lottery is won in the game times after the guaranteed game number is reached, the processing shown in FIG. 664(b) is performed, and when the jackpot is won in the game times after the guaranteed game number is reached, the figure is shown. According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 which executes the processing shown in 666, the above-mentioned problem of Comparative Example 1 can be solved.

However, even the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 has the following problems.

According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game times, both when winning the falling lottery and when winning the big hit in the winning lottery, the support mode is started at the timing when the game times are started. Shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649) stops the opening/closing operation. In the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number, when the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot lottery is not won, the support mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 34a( In FIG. 649), the opening/closing operation is continued. Therefore, the player confirms that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) continues the opening/closing operation even after the start of the game round, so that the player can win the falling lottery in the game round after the guaranteed game count is reached. It is possible to predict that the winner has not been won and the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, the battle effect executed in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached does not fall in the falling lottery and does not correspond to the jackpot in the winning lottery. Even if it is assumed that it is an effect that can suggest, specifically, a superior battle effect, it is a draw by confirming that the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) continues the opening/closing operation, that is, the winning of the falling lottery. Without it, and because you can predict that you have not won the jackpot in the winning lottery, the superior battle production will be meaningless. In other words, the battle effect executed in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game number is only meaningful for the life and death battle effects in which the result of the battle is only victory or defeat. As a result, the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 has a problem in that it is not possible to widen the range of effects regarding the battle effect executed in the game number after the guaranteed game number has been reached.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment solves both the problems of Comparative Example 1 and the problems of Comparative Example 2 by adopting the following configuration.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a probability variation jackpot by winning lottery, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode, and then the high frequency support mode is started and then the guaranteed game. In the game times after reaching the number of times (for example, the 120th game time), there are two modes as a mode of changing the support mode when a big hit is won in the winning lottery. Hereinafter, the two modes will be referred to as a "first fall mode" and a "last fall mode". In the present embodiment, which of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode is used is determined by a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a mode selection lottery), and the distribution result by the mode selection lottery is It does not notify the player.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, the big hit type counter C2 is used to sort the big hit types. However, with regard to the mode selection lottery as well, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort out the pre-falling mode or the post-falling mode. When a big hit is hit in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, whether the pre-fall mode is set by using the distribution table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 654(a). When the rear drop mode is sorted and a big hit occurs in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 33, the distribution for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 654(b). The table is used to determine whether the mode is the first fall mode or the second fall mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 39”, “65 to 89”, and “90 to 99” correspond to the first fall mode. "40-64" corresponds to the trailing edge mode. That is, in the distribution table for the first starting opening, “0 to 39” is among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 64” associated with the 16R probability variation jackpot as the sorting result of the jackpot type. It is associated with the first falling mode, and “40 to 64” is associated with the second falling mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "65 to 89" to which the 8R certainty variation jackpot is associated as a result of the jackpot type is associated with the pre-falling mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99" to which the 8R normal jackpot is associated as a result of the jackpot type is associated with the pre-falling mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 49”, “75 to 89”, and “90 to 99” correspond to the first fall mode. "50-74" corresponds to the trailing edge mode. That is, in the distribution table for the second starting opening, "0-49" is among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0-74" associated with the 16R probability variation jackpot as the sorting result of the jackpot type. It is associated with the first falling mode, and “50 to 74” is associated with the second falling mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "75 to 89", which is associated with the 8R certainty variation jackpot as the sorting result of the types of jackpots, is associated with the pre-falling mode. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 of "90 to 99" to which the 8R normal jackpot is associated as a result of the jackpot type is associated with the pre-falling mode.

In the present embodiment, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery with respect to the value of the type counter C2 defined in the distribution table for the first starting opening, and the type defined in the distribution table for the second starting opening. Although the configuration is different from the distribution result of the mode selection lottery with respect to the value of the counter C2, the configuration may be the same.

FIG. 667 is a game number after reaching the guaranteed game number in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning lottery is not won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the first-run mode is set in the mode selection lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a process when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probability random jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. , The number of games after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), and the winning lottery is not won but the jackpot lottery is won. At the same time, FIG. 667 shows a case where the first-run mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

We won't win the falling lottery, but won the big hit in the winning lottery, and suggested that in the 120th game time that we won the first-run mode in the mode selection lottery, it corresponds to either victory or defeat. A life-death battle effect (see FIG. 662(b)) to be obtained is executed, and then a victory effect (see FIG. 663(a)) in which the player character wins is executed as a result notification effect. When you win the first-run mode in the mode selection lottery, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support at the timing when the 120th game time that wins the jackpot starts (that is, when the game time starts). The lottery mode is switched from the high-probability mode at the timing when the 120th game time of winning the jackpot is completed and the opening/closing execution mode is started (that is, the timing immediately after the presentation of the notification of the result of the victory is completed). Move to low probability mode. The changes in each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode match the changes of each state of the effect, the lottery mode, and the support mode in Comparative Example 2 shown in FIG. 666.

FIG. 668 is a game number after the guaranteed game number is reached in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the winning lottery is not won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the late-fall mode is set in the mode selection lottery. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a process when winning. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probability random jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. , The number of games after the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (120 times in the illustrated example), and the winning lottery is not won but the jackpot lottery is won. FIG. 668 shows a case in which a lottery mode is won in the mode selection lottery and the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode.

We won't win the falling lottery, but won the big hit in the winning lottery, and suggested that in the 120th game time that we won the late-fall mode in the mode selection lottery, it corresponds to either victory or draw. The obtained superior battle effect (see FIG. 662(c)) is executed, and then the victory effect (see FIG. 663(a)) in which the player character wins is executed as the result notification effect. When the late-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery, at the timing when the 120th game time, when the jackpot is won, is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is started (that is, the timing immediately after the presentation of the winning result is finished). Therefore, the lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. The changes in the states of the lottery mode and the support mode match the changes of the states of the lottery mode and the support mode in Comparative Example 1 shown in FIG. 665.

Comparing the case of winning the first-fall mode in the mode selection lottery (FIG. 667) with the case of winning the second-run mode in the mode selection lottery (FIG. 668), the game times in the high probability mode are guaranteed games. When it is continuously executed more than the number of times (100 times), when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the battle effect executed in the game time is a win when the first-run mode is won. , It is a life-and-death battle production that can suggest that it falls under any of the defeats, whereas it can suggest that it falls under either the victory or the draw when winning in the late fall mode. The difference is that it is a superior battle production. Regarding the timing at which the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, in the case of winning the first-fall mode, it is the timing at which the game time that was won for the jackpot starts (that is, at the start of the game time). On the other hand, in the case of winning the late-fall mode, it is different in that the game time of winning the jackpot ends and the opening/closing execution mode starts.

FIG. 669 is a game number after reaching the guaranteed game number in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, without winning the falling lottery, and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, the reach (so-called miss) 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example of processing performed when it is determined that a reach is generated. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a probability random jackpot is won by a winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. , Do not win the falling lottery and win the big hit in the winning lottery at the game number (120 times in the example shown) after the number of games played since the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games Instead, FIG. 669 shows a process in the case where it is determined in the reach determination that a reach (disengagement reach) is generated.

In the 120th game time when it was determined that a reach (outside reach) was generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and winning the big hit in the winning lottery, it corresponds to either victory or draw A superior battle effect (see FIG. 662(c)) that can be suggested to be performed is executed, and then a draw effect (see FIG. 663(c)) in which the player character does not win or lose is executed as a result notification effect. .. In the game times that did not win the falling lottery and did not win the big hit in the winning lottery, the lottery mode keeps the high probability mode and the support mode keeps the high frequency support mode regardless of whether the reach occurs To do.

The summary is as follows. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number,
(A) If you win the falling lottery (regardless of the result of the lottery), or
(B) If you win the big hit in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery and win the first-run mode in the mode selection lottery,
The life/death battle effect is executed as the battle effect executed in the game time, and the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game time is started (that is, when the game time is started).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number,
(C) When it is determined that a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, or
(D) If you win the big hit in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery and win the late fall mode in the mode selection lottery,
The superior battle effect is executed as the battle effect executed in the game time, and the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game time of winning the jackpot ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode at the same timing in the case of (A) and the case of (B), and thus the guaranteed game count. In the game time after reaching, the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from predicting that the winning of the falling lottery has been won from the open/closed state of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) during the battle production Play. Furthermore, since it is possible to perform a life-and-death battle effect or a superior battle effect in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game times, the battle effect to be executed in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game times can be performed. This has the effect of widening the range of production.

<<L5>> Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described processing in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes the timer interrupt process and the normal process. These processes will be described below. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 670 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step Sl0101, the reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sl0102.

In step Sl0102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S10103.

In step S10103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the falling random number counter CF, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the respective counter values have reached the maximum values. In each case, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CF are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S10104. The fluctuation type counter CS updates its value in the normal process (FIG. 674) described later.

In step S10104, a ball entering process for the starting opening associated with entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step S10104 will be described later. After executing step Sl0104, the process proceeds to step Sl0105.

In step S10105, a through-ball entry process associated with the entry into the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through ball entering process in step S10105 will be described later. After executing step Sl0105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 670: Sl0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step Sl0201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (starting entering ball) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step Sl0201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (S0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0202, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sl0203.

In step Sl0203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sl0204.

In step Sl0204, the starting hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read out, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step Sl0209.

If it is determined in step Sl0201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (S0201: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sl0205 and whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step Sl0205 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (S1205: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0206, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sl0207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl0205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (S1205: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

In step Sl0207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sl0208.

In step Sl0208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on the ball entering the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step Sl0209.

In step Sl0209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of start-up suspensions set in step Sl0204 or step Sl0208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step Sl0209, if the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit value (S1209: NO), the ball entering process for the starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step S10209, when the number N of startup pending is less than the upper limit value (S10209: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0210, after adding 1 to the number N of startup pending in the corresponding holding area, the process proceeds to step Sl0211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step Sl0212.

In step Sl0212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 670) are first stored in the corresponding free storage areas. The data is stored in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. Specifically, when the first starting suspension number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 are selected. Each value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF updated in step Sl0103 are set. , The first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 is added in step Sl0210. After executing step Sl0212, the process proceeds to step Sl0213.

In step Sl0213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF (holding information). This is a process of performing a determination such as the type, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the result of determination of whether or not the lottery has fallen (lottery result), before the holding information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0213, the process proceeds to step Sl0214.

In step Sl0214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the falling random number counter CF is set as a hold command. To do.

The hold command indicates the determination result (first determination information) by the first determination process based on the occurrence of the ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before the suspension information is targeted for the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 674: step Sl0503) of the normal process described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice light emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 to the hold number. A command for changing the number according to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

After executing step Sl0214, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 terminates the ball entry process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 671: Sl0213) of the ball entry process for the starting opening.

FIG. 672 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process, based on the hold information, the determination result of the winning lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence or absence of the reach, the falling lottery determination This is a process to be executed before the main control device 60 is targeted for the winning lottery.

In step S0301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the ball entering the starting opening in the entrance processing for the starting opening (FIG. 671) is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current ball entry is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the ball before the current ball is read from the corresponding storage area, and whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the winning lottery by the current ball Alternatively, by grasping whether or not the falling lottery is won, the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time is determined.

In step Sl0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery due to the current ball entry is executed as the game time, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0303, and the winning/losing table storage The win/fail table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S1030, and as a result of referring to the winning/discarding table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step Sl0302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0304, and the current entry is performed. The value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the storage area by the sphere is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S10305, and it is determined whether or not the player has won the falling lottery by referring to the falling hit determination table stored in the falling hit determination table storage area 63d.

When it is determined in step Sl0305 that the player has won the falling lottery (S1305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0306, the falling winning information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h, and the process proceeds to step Sl0303. In step Sl0303, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to as described above. After that, the process proceeds to step S1030, and as a result of referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

If it is determined in step Sl0305 that the falling lottery has not been won (Sl305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0307. In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the high probability mode. After that, the process proceeds to step S10308, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode hit/miss table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step Sl0308, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S10308: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0309, and the value is stored in the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S10310 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the entry into the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to. If it is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step Sl0310, the process proceeds to step Sl0311.

In step S1031, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S1031 that the probability variation big hit is supported (S1031: YES), the process proceeds to step S1032, and the probability variation big hit information is stored in the preceding determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0311 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S10311: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0313, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl0308 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S10308: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0314, and the player enters the storage area by entering the starting opening this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S10315 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step S10316, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

When it is determined in step S10316 that the occurrence of the reach is supported (S10316: YES), the process proceeds to step S10317, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10316 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (S10316: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through ball entry processing>
Next, the through ball entering process will be described. The through-ball entering process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 670: Sl0105).

FIG. 673 is a flowchart showing a through-ball entry process. In step Sl0401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the through gate 35. When it is determined in step Sl0401 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0402, and the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not. Note that the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entered into the through gate 35 that are held for the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is 4. On the other hand, in step Sl0401, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S10401: NO), the entering process for the through is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl0402 that the number is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (S1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0403, and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sl0404.

In step Sl0404, the value of the electric auditors product release counter C4 updated in step Sl0103 (FIG. 670) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the electric duty holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the through-ball entry process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sl0402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (S1402: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value, The through ball entering process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power switch 88 is switched from the off state to the on state (hereinafter, also referred to as “power on”). In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 674 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sl0501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sl0502.

In step Sl0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sl0503.

In step Sl0503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step Sl0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step Sl0503, the process proceeds to step Sl0504.

In step S10504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sl0505.

In step S10505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow proceeds to step Sl0506. In step Sl0506, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game time control process, winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step Sl0506, the process advances to step Sl0507.

In step Sl0507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sl0508.

In step Sl0508, an electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step Sl0509.

In step Sl0509, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sl0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sl0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (S10509: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps Sl0510 and Sl0511. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step Sl0510, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In addition, in step Sl0511, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl0509 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing this time (S10509: YES), the process returns to step Sl0503, and each processing from step Sl0503 to step Sl0508 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process from step S10503 to step S10508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 674: Sl0506).

FIG. 675 is a flowchart showing the game number control processing. In step Sl0601, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly terminated in the game state transition processing.

When it is determined in step Sl0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (S10601: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any of the processing of step Sl0602 and thereafter. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a ball has entered the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl0601 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl0602.

In step Sl0602, it is determined whether or not the special drawing unit 37 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b provided in the special symbol unit 37 is being variably displayed. This determination is performed by determining whether the special figure variation display flag of the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The special figure variation display flag is turned on when the variation display is started for one of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and is turned off when the variation display is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl0602 that the special drawing unit 37 is not displaying fluctuations (S1602: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sl0603.

In step Sl0603, fluctuation start processing for starting fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After executing step Sl0603, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl0602 that the special drawing unit 37 is in the variable display (S10602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0604.

In step Sl0604, a fluctuation ending process for ending the fluctuation display in the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation ending process will be described later. After executing step Sl0604, the present game time control processing is ended.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 675: Sl0603) of the game time control process.

FIG. 676 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step Sl0701, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN exceeds “0”. When the total reserved quantity CRN is equal to or less than “0”, it means that the reserved quantity to be started is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total reserved number CRN is equal to or smaller than “0” (S10701: NO), the present variation start processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl0701 that the total reserved number CRN exceeds “0” (S07071: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl0702.

In step Sl0702, a reservation information shift process for setting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the flow proceeds to step Sl0703. Details of the pending information shift processing will be described later.

In step Sl0703, a game state determination process for determining the game state is performed. Details of the game state determination processing will be described later. After executing step Sl0703, the process proceeds to step Sl0704.

In step Sl0704, a fall determination process including a process when the fall lottery is won is performed. Details of the fall determination process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step Sl0705.

In step Sl0705, a winning determination process including a process when a big win is won in the winning lottery is performed. The details of the hit determination process will be described later. After executing step Sl0705, the process proceeds to step Sl0706.

In step Sl0706, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of reach. Processing. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl0706, the process proceeds to step Sl0707.

In step Sl0707, a variation command is set. The variation command is related to the hold information obtained based on the entry of the current game time into the first starting opening 33, or is obtained based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. In addition to including information indicating whether the information is related to the hold information, information regarding whether or not a reach has occurred and information regarding the variation time set in step Sl0706 are included. After executing Step Sl0707, the process proceeds to Step Sl0708.

In step Sl0708, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in step Sl0707 and step Sl0708 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step Sl0708, the process proceeds to step Sl0709.

In step S1709, the variable display of symbols is started on the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first symbol display unit 37a, When the second symbol display unit flag is ON, the variable display is started by specifying that the symbol display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second symbol display unit 37b. After executing step Sl0709, the process proceeds to step Sl0710.

In step Sl0710, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl0710, the present fluctuation start processing is ended.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 676: Sl0702) of the fluctuation start process.

FIG. 677 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift processing. In step Sl0801, it is determined whether the reservation area that is the processing target for executing the reservation information shift processing is the first reservation area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 652) in time series (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). The information) is stored in the first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb (the first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 652), which is the earliest reserved information stored in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 652). (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, the holding information stored first in the holding information stored in time series in the first holding area Ra is the earliest holding information stored in time in the second holding area Rb. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step Sl0801, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step Sl0801 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step Sl0801: YES), the reservation information shift processing for the first reservation area in steps Sl0802 to Sl0807 is executed. On the other hand, in step Sl0801, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step Sl0801: NO). ), and the holding information shift processing for the second holding area in steps Sl0808 to Sl0813 is executed.

In step Sl0802, the first startup hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the flow proceeds to step Sl0803, where the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step Sl0804. In step Sl0804, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sl0805.

In step Sl0805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sl0805, the process proceeds to step Sl0806.

In step Sl0806, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second symbol display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the variable display this time is the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step Sl0807.

In step Sl0807, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Sl0807 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step Sl0801 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (Sl0801: NO), step Proceed to Sl0808.

In step Sl0808, the second start reserve quantity RbN in the second reserve area Rb is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step Sl0809. In step Sl0809, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and in step Sl0810, the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step Sl0811.

In step Sl0811, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step Sl0811, the process proceeds to step Sl0812.

In step Sl0812, if the second symbol display portion flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step Sl0813.

In step Sl0813, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63g of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this hold information shift processing is ended.

The shift command set in step Sl0813 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step Sl0503 in the normal process (Fig. 674). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Game state determination processing>
Next, the game state determination processing will be described. The game state determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 676: Sl0703) of fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing the game state determination processing. In step Sl0901, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sl0901 that the mode is the high-probability mode (Sl0901: YES), the processing proceeds to step Sl0902, and it is determined whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sl0902 that the high frequency support mode is set (S1902: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl0903, and the high accuracy/high support flag is turned on. The high-probability/high-support flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode in the gaming state (high-probability/high-support state). And is stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. When the high accuracy/high support flag is ON, the high accuracy/high support state is set. When the high-precision/high-support flag is OFF, it is not in the high-precision/high-support state. According to step Sl0903, it is possible for the MPU 62 to specify the determination result as to whether or not the game state determination process is in the high-accuracy/high-support state. After executing Step Sl0903, the process proceeds to Step Sl0904.

In step S1904, a high-accuracy/high-support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the high-precision/high-support state, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set. After executing step Sl0904, the game state determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl0901 that the mode is not the high probability mode (Sl0901: NO), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high frequency support mode in step Sl0902 (Sl9022: NO), step Sl0903 and step Sl0904 are not executed. , The game state determination process ends.

<Fall determination processing>
Next, the fall determination process will be described. The fall determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 676: Sl0704).

FIG. 679 is a flowchart showing the fall determination process. In step Sl1001, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1001 that the high probability mode is set (Sl1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1002.

In step S1002, the success/failure determination of the falling lottery is executed by referring to the success/failure table for falling lottery. Specifically, the value of the falling random number counter CF stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the winning in the falling lottery win/loss table (see FIG. 655) of the falling lottery table storage area 63d. Is determined. In the subsequent step Sl1003, if the result of the win/no judgment in step Sl1002 is a win in the falling lottery (Sl1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1004.

In step Sl1004, the high probability mode flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S1005 to turn on the falling flags stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. The falling flag is a flag for storing the result of the judgment of success or failure of the falling lottery. After executing step Sl1005, the process proceeds to step Sl1006.

In step Sl1006, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode has reached the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times) (hereinafter, simply referred to as "guaranteed game number or less"). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. Since the guaranteed game number counter PNC indicates the remaining number of guaranteed games, the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is determined by determining whether or not PNC>0. Can be determined before reaching the guaranteed game count. When it is determined in step Sl1006 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sl1006: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not before the guaranteed game number (=after the guaranteed game number), step The process proceeds to Sl1007, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1007, the main fall determination processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1006 that the game is not before the guaranteed game time (S1006: YES), the fall determination process is immediately ended. If it is determined in step Sl1001 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (Sl1001: NO), or if the result of the success/failure determination in step Sl1003 is not winning the fall lottery (Sl1003: NO), the main fall determination process is immediately performed. finish.

By the fall determination processing configured as described above, the fluctuations in the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing of the fall winning of FIG. 664 (after the guaranteed game count, the fall winning) are realized.

<Hit determination process>
Next, the hit determination process will be described. The hit determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 676: Sl0705).

FIG. 680 is a flowchart showing the hit determination process. In step S1101, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the high probability mode is set (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102, and a success/failure determination is performed by referring to the high probability mode success/failure table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 653(b). To determine. Then, it progresses to step S1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1101 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (S11101: NO), the process advances to step Sl1103 to refer to the win-loss table for the low-probability mode to determine whether or not it is true. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 653(a). To determine. Then, it progresses to step S1104.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (winning lottery) in step S1102 or step S1103 is a big win. In step S1104, if the result of the win/no determination is a big hit (Sl1104: YES), the process proceeds to step S1105.

In steps S1105 to S1109, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a jackpot win are executed.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1105 that the second symbol display portion flag is not ON (Sl1105: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1106, and the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 654(a)) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. To do.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1105 that the second symbol display portion flag is ON (S1105: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107 and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 654(b)). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. To do. After executing the processing of step Sl1106 or step Sl1107, the process proceeds to step Sl1108.

In step Sl1108, the flag (big hit flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 is turned on. Specifically, if it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, turn on the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, turn on the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag if it is 8R certainty variation jackpot, and turn on the 8R regular jackpot flag if it is 8R regular jackpot. Turn it on. After executing step Sl1108, the process proceeds to step Sl1109.

In step Sl1109, processing for setting a stop result for jackpot is executed. Specifically, in the current game time when the jackpot is won, it is set which of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display. This is a process for doing. Specifically, by referring to the jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63f (FIG. 651), the stop result data corresponding to the types of jackpots distributed in step Sl1106 or step Sl1107 can be obtained. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1109, the process proceeds to step Sl1110.

In step S1110, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step S1110 that the high frequency support mode is set (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111 and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times). ) Is reached (= guaranteed game count). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. In step Sl1111, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sl1111: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not before the guaranteed game number (=after the guaranteed game number), step Proceed to S1112.

In steps S1112 to S11116, after the guaranteed games have been played, the winning lottery is not won, and various processes are performed when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery.

In step S1112, a command after the guaranteed game number is set. The command after the guaranteed game number that has been set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by step S10503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). When the voice emission control device 90 receives the command after the guaranteed game number, it becomes possible to recognize that the current game time is the game time after the guaranteed game number. After executing step Sl1112, the process proceeds to step Sl1113.

In step S11113, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (mode selection lottery) in step S1106 or step S11107 is the first-fall mode. In step S1106 or step S1107, the distribution determination that distributes the jackpot type is performed as the distribution determination, as described above. However, in the game number after the guaranteed number of games is reached after the high-frequency support mode is started, a fall occurs. Instead of winning the lottery, a mode selection lottery is also performed in which the mode in which the support mode is changed when the big hit is won in the winning lottery is distributed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is the distribution table for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 654(a) or for the second starting opening shown in FIG. 654(b). It is determined whether or not the distribution result of the mode selection lottery matches the value set as the pre-emption mode in the distribution table of No. Then, in step S11113, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery in step S1106 or step S11107 is the first-fall mode (=second-fall mode).

In step Sl111, if the result of the mode selection lottery is the pre-emption mode (Sll113: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl114 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sl115.

In step S11115, the pre-drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The first falling mode flag is a flag for storing that the result of the mode selection lottery is the first falling mode. After executing Step Sl115, the process proceeds to Step Sl116.

In step S11116, the pre-fall mode command is set. The set preemptive mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). The voice emission control device 90 can recognize that the result of the mode selection lottery is the preemptive mode when the preemptive mode command is received. After executing step Sl116, the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S1111, if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not set (S1110: NO), if it is determined in step Sl1111 that it is before the guaranteed game number of times (step Sl1111: YES), or in step S1113 it is not the first-run mode. That is, when it is determined that the rear fall mode is set (step Sl11113: NO), the hit determination process is immediately ended. In addition, when the falling lottery is won and the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the determination in step S1111 is NO, so that the processes of steps S1111-111 are not executed.

Regarding the lottery mode and the support mode at the timing when the jackpot is won in FIG. 667 (after the guaranteed game count, the jackpot is won, the first-run mode is won) by the above-described processing from step Sl1101 to step Sl1107 and from step Sl1110 to step Sl1116 Variation is realized.

When the result of the winning lottery in step Sl1102 or step Sl1103 is not a big hit in step Sl1104 (S11104: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1117, and the reach is generated in the game time with reference to the reach determination table. Determine whether or not. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c (FIG. 651). It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step S1118.

In step Sl111, if the result of the reach determination in step Sl117 is that a reach occurs in the game time (S11118: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl119 and the reach generation flag is turned on. Specifically, the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl119, the process proceeds to step Sl1120.

On the other hand, in step S11118, if the result of the reach determination in step S1117 is that the reach does not occur in the game times (S11118: NO), the process proceeds to step S1120 without executing step S1119.

In step S1120, a process of setting a disengagement stop result is executed. Specifically, in the current game time that results in a disengagement result, for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, the variable display is set. Processing. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63f, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1120, the hit determination process is ended.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 676: Sl0706).

FIG. 681 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step S1201, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy/high-support state is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high accuracy/high support flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability/high support flag is a flag that is turned on in step Sl0903 in FIG. 678. When it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is not ON (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1203.

In steps S1203 to S1209, the process of setting the variation time is executed in the gaming state which is not the high-accuracy/high-support state (the gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode). To do.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON, If it is a big hit (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. After that, the process advances to step S1205, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl1203 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not a big hit (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1206 and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. To do. In step S1203, since this processing (S1206) is executed when the big hit has not been won in the winning lottery related to the current game time, in Sx1206, the reach among the game times not hit by the big hit in the winning lottery (so-called) It is determined whether or not the game is a game in which a "reach reach" occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If the reach occurrence flag is ON, it is assumed that the reach is generated (S1206: YES), and step Sl1207. Proceed to.

In step Sl1207, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is switched from ON to OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sl1208.

In step S1208, the fluctuation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S1205 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl1206 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (S1206: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1209, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63h is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. The reach non-occurrence variation time table is a so-called deviation variation time table. After that, the process proceeds to step S1205 described above, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl1202 that the high accuracy/high support flag is ON (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1210.

In steps S111210 to S1213, the process of setting the variation time is executed in the high probability/high support state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

In step Sl1210, the high accuracy/high support flag is shifted from ON to OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sl1211.

In step S1211, it is determined whether or not the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is before reaching the guaranteed game number (for example, 100 times) (=before guaranteed game number). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0. When it is determined in step Sl1211 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is greater than 0 (step Sl1211: YES), that is, when it is determined that the number of guaranteed games has not been reached, the process proceeds to step Sl1212.

In step S1212, a variable time setting process before the guaranteed game count is executed. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed game count will be described later. After executing Step S1212, the variable time setting process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl1211 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is not greater than 0 (step Sl1211: NO), that is, when it is determined that the guaranteed game number has been reached, the process proceeds to step Sl1213 and the guaranteed game. The variable time setting process after the number of times is executed. The variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games will be described later. After executing Step Sl1213, the variable time setting process is ended.

<Variable time setting process before guaranteed game count>
Next, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed game count will be described. The variable time setting process before the guaranteed game number is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 681: Sl1212) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 682 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process before the guaranteed game count. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If any flag is ON, the jackpot is determined. If it is determined that the winning has occurred (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, the variable time table for the big hit is specified from the variable time table group for the guaranteed game count or earlier stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group for guaranteed game count and before,
(I) A variation time table for jackpots used when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the number of games before the number of games played since the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games (hereinafter referred to as the guaranteed game number・It is called a variable time table for jackpots),
(Ii) A variation time for falling that is used when the number of games played since the high-frequency support mode was started is less than the guaranteed number of games and the winning lottery is won and the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery. Table (hereinafter referred to as guaranteed game count before/fall time variation table),
(Iii) Reach (so-called out-reach) without winning the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery in the number of games before the number of times the high frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games. Fluctuating time table for out-reach occurrence used when occurs (hereinafter referred to as “variable time table before guaranteed game times/out-reach occurrence”),
Is provided. In step S1302, the variable time table for the guaranteed game number before and big hit which is (i) is specified from (i) to (iii). The variable time table for before guaranteed game number/big hit is a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a winning effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 659), for example. After executing step Sl1302, the process proceeds to step Sl1303.

In step Sl1303, the fluctuation time table identified in step Sl1302 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time obtained in step Sl1201 of the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 681) is acquired. In a succeeding step S11304, the variable time information acquired in the step S1303 is set in a variable time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1301 that the result of the winning lottery relating to the current game round is not a big hit (S1301:NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1305 to win in the falling lottery relating to the current game round. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the falling flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1305 that the falling flag is ON (S11305: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1306.

In step S1306, the falling time variation table is specified from the variation time table group for the guaranteed game count or earlier stored in the variation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from among the above-mentioned (i) to (iii), the variable time table for guaranteed game count/falling which is (ii) is specified. The variable time table before the guaranteed game count/falling is, for example, a variable time table for executing the normal battle effect as the battle effect and executing the defeat effect as the result notification effect (see FIG. 658). After executing step Sl113, the process proceeds to step Sl1303 described above, and by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1306, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the flow proceeds to step S1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl1305 that the falling lottery related to the current game time is not won (S11305: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1307, and it is determined whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. Perform this processing (step Sl1307) when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game time in step Sl1301 and when the winning lottery is not selected in the falling lottery related to the current game time in step Sl1305. Therefore, in step S1307, it is determined whether or not the game times that reach (so-called out-reach) occurs among the game times that are not won in the falling lottery and are not big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If the reach generation flag is ON, the reach is generated (Sl1307: YES), and step Sl1308. Proceed to.

In step Sl1308, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is switched from ON to OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sl1309.

In step Sl1309, the variable time table for out-reach occurrence is specified from the variable time table group for the guaranteed game count and before stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, the variable time table for occurrence of pre-guaranteed game count/off-reach, which is (iii), is specified from among (i) to (iii) described above. The variable time table for occurrence of pre-guaranteed games and out-of-reach occurrence is, for example, a variable time table for executing a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 660). After executing step Sl113, the process proceeds to step Sl1303, and by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1309, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the flow proceeds to step S1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1307 that the reach does not occur in the current game (Sl1307: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sl1310 and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63h. With reference to, the variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired. The process of step Sl1310 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 681). After that, the flow proceeds to step S1304, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

<Variable time setting process after guaranteed game count>
Next, the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games will be described. The variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 681: Sl1213) of the variable time setting process.

FIG. 683 is a flowchart showing a variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If any flag is ON, the jackpot is determined. If it is determined that the prize has been won (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the player has won in the falling lottery related to the current game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the falling flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1402 that the falling flag is not ON (S1402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1403.

In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode selection lottery related to the current game time is the first-fall mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the leading edge mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1403 that the pre-fall mode flag is ON (S1403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1404.

In step Sl1404, the pre-drop mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is switched from ON to OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sl1405.

In step S1405, the fluctuation time table for the big hit first-fall mode is specified from the fluctuation time table group for after the guaranteed game number stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. In the variable time table group after the guaranteed game count,
(Iv) A jackpot used when the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode has been started has reached the guaranteed number of games and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the first-run mode is won in the mode selection lottery. And the variation time table for the first-fall mode (hereinafter, referred to as the guaranteed time after the number of guaranteed games/big hit first-fall mode variation time table),
(V) A jackpot used when the number of games played after the high-frequency support mode is started reaches the guaranteed number of games and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the late-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery. And the fluctuation time table for the post-fall mode (hereinafter referred to as the variable time table for the guaranteed game count/big hit after-fall mode),
(Vi) Variations for the fall used when the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games since the high-frequency support mode was started and the player has won the falling lottery and has not won the jackpot in the winning lottery. Time table (hereinafter referred to as the guaranteed play count/fall time table)
(Vii) The number of games that has been played since the high frequency support mode was started has reached the guaranteed number of games, and without reaching the falling lottery and without winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, the reach (so-called out-reach ) Variable time table for out-reach occurrence (hereinafter referred to as a variable time table for out-of-guaranteed game/out-reach occurrence), which is used when
Is provided. In step S1405, the variable time table for after-guaranteed game number/big hit first-fall mode, which is (iv), is specified from (iv) to (vii). The variable time table for after-guaranteed game number/big hit first drop mode is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life-and-death battle effect as a battle effect and a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 667). After executing step Sl1405, the process proceeds to step Sl1406.

In step Sl1406, the fluctuation time table identified in step Sl1405 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sl1201 of the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 681) is acquired. In the following step Sl1407, the fluctuation time information acquired in step Sl1406 is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1403 that the result of the mode selection lottery related to the current game time is not the first-fall mode, that is, the second-fall mode (Sl1403: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1408.

In step S11408, the fluctuation time table for the big hit post-fall mode is specified from the fluctuation time table group for after the guaranteed game number stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, the variable time table for after-guaranteed game count/big hit afterfall mode, which is (v), is specified from among (iv) to (vii) described above. The variable time table for after-guaranteed game count/after-big hit drop mode is, for example, a variable time table for executing a superior battle effect as a battle effect and executing a victory effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 668). After executing step Sl1408, the flow advances to step Sl1406 described above to obtain the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1408. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games is finished.

If it is determined in step Sl1402 that the falling lottery related to the current game is won (Sl1402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1405 without executing steps Sl1403 and Sl1404, and the guaranteed game count is reached. Specify the variable time table for the after/big hit first drop mode. If the winning lottery related to the game number after the guaranteed number of games is won and the big hit in the winning lottery related to the current game number, the high frequency support mode flag is set in step Sl1007 of the falling determination process (FIG. 679). Is turned off and NO is determined in step S1110 of the hit determination process (FIG. 680), so the pre-fall mode flag is not turned ON in step S11115 of the hit determination process (FIG. 680). Therefore, in the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games, in order to avoid the process of step Sl1403, the process of step Sl1402 for determining the falling flag is provided between step Sl1401 and step Sl1403. Then, when YES is determined in the step S1402, the process is advanced to a step S11405, and the variable time table for after the guaranteed game count/big hit first drop mode is specified.

When it is determined in step Sl1401 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game number is not the big hit (Sl1401: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1409 and whether or not the falling lottery related to the current game number is won. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the falling flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1409 that the falling flag is ON (S11409: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1410.

In step S1410, the falling fluctuation time table is specified from the fluctuation time table group for after the guaranteed game number stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above (iv) to (vii), the variable time table for after-guaranteed game count/falling which is (vi) is specified. The variable time table for after-guaranteed game count/falling is, for example, a variable time table for executing a life/dead battle effect as a battle effect and a defeat effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 664). After executing step Sl1410, the process proceeds to step Sl1406, and by referring to the fluctuation time table specified in step Sl1410, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games is finished.

When it is determined in step Sl1409 that the falling lottery related to the current game round has not been won (Sl1409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1411, and it is determined whether or not reach is generated in the current game round. Perform this process (step Sl1411) when the big hit is not won in the winning lottery related to the current game time in step Sl1401 and when the falling lottery related to the current game time is not won in step sl1409. Therefore, in step S1411, it is determined whether or not the game times that reach (so-called out-reach) occurs among the game times that are not won in the falling lottery and are not big hit in the winning lottery. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If the reach generation flag is ON, it is determined that the reach is generated (S11411: YES), and step Sl1412. Proceed to.

In step S1412, the reach generation flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is switched from ON to OFF. Then, it progresses to step S1413.

In step S1413, the variable time table for generating the out-reach is specified from the variable time table group for after the guaranteed game number stored in the variable time table storage area 63h of the ROM 63. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (iv) to (vii), the after-guaranteed game count/off-reach generation variable time table which is (vii) is specified. The after-guaranteed game count/off-reach occurrence variation time table is, for example, a variation time table for executing a superior battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (see FIG. 669). After executing step S1413, the process advances to step S11406 to refer to the fluctuation time table specified in step S1413 to acquire the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games is finished.

On the other hand, in step Sl1411, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game time (S11411: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1414 and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63h. With reference to, the variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired. The process of step Sl1414 is the same as the process of step Sl1209 of the variable time setting process (FIG. 681). After that, the process proceeds to step Sl1407, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process after the number of guaranteed games is finished.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the fluctuation ending process will be described. The variation ending process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 675: Sl0604) of the game time control process.

FIG. 684 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation ending process. In step Sl1501, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. The variation time is, as described above, the time from the start of variation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step Sl1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 681) described above. The set value of the variable time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step Sl1501 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1501:NO), the fluctuation ending process is ended.

In step Sl1501, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (Sl1501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1502 and corresponds to the current game time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. The process of ending the variation of the symbol in the symbol display portion is performed. In a succeeding step S1503, the special figure variation display flag stored in the special figure variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step Sl1503, the process proceeds to step Sl1504.

In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sl1504 that none of the above flags is ON, that is, the result of the winning lottery related to the current game number is not a big hit (S11504: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1505.

In step Sl1505, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sl1505 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (S11505: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl1506, and it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game frequency counter PNC exceeds 0. If it is determined in step Sl1156 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0 (S11506: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl1507 to subtract 1 from the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC. After executing step Sl1507, the process proceeds to step Sl1508. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC is 0 or less (S11506: NO), the process proceeds to step S11508 without executing step S11507.

In step S11508, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON.

If it is determined in step Sl1508 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S11508: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sl1509, and the number of game times continuously executed in the high frequency support mode is the guaranteed game number (eg, 100). It is determined whether or not it is before (= before the guaranteed game number). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC exceeds 0.

When it is determined in step S11509 that the value of the guaranteed game number counter PNC does not exceed 0 (step Sl1509: NO), that is, when it is determined that it is not before the guaranteed game number, the process proceeds to step S1510 and high frequency support is performed. Turn off the mode flag. After executing step Sl11510, the process proceeds to step Sl1151.

In step Sl1511, it is determined whether or not the falling flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1151 that the fall flag is ON (S11511: YES), the flow advances to step Sl1512 to turn off the fall flag. After executing step Sl1512, the present variation time end processing is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl1508 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S11508: YES), or if it is determined in step Sl1509 that the number of guaranteed games has not been reached (step Sl1509: YES), steps Sl11510 to step Sl1512. This variable time end processing is ended without executing. Also, when it is determined in step Sl1151 that the falling flag is not ON (S11511: NO), the present variation time end process is terminated without executing step Sl1512.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl1155 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S11505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1513.

In step S11513, it is determined whether the falling flag stored in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1153 that the fall flag is ON (S11513: YES), the flow advances to step Sl1514 to turn off the fall flag. After executing step Sl1514, the present variation time end processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sl1153 that the falling flag is not ON (S11513: NO), the present variation time end process is terminated without executing step Sl1514.

In step Sl1504, it is determined that any one of the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, and the 8R regular jackpot flag is ON, that is, the result of the hit lottery related to the current game is a jackpot winning. In that case (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1515, and the open/close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step Sl1515, the present variation time end processing ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 674: Sl0507).

FIG. 685 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing. In step Sl1601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the special winning opening/closing process period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the beginning of the ending period) and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1601:NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON at the timing when the opening period ends in the opening/closing execution mode and the big winning opening/closing processing period, which is a period in which the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Is turned off at the timing when the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b is completed.

If it is determined in step Sl1602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S1602: NO), the flow advances to step Sl1603 to determine whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

If it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1603: NO), the flow advances to step Sl1604 to determine whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sl1604 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S11604: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl1605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is OFF in step Sl1604 (S11604: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is.

In step Sl1605, the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sl1606. In step S11606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sl1607.

In step Sl1607, the opening/closing scenario setting process for setting the opening/closing scenario is executed. The opening/closing scenario defines a pattern of opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 36b in the round game, and in the present embodiment, a condition for shifting the opening/closing door 36b from the closed state to the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as "opening condition"), The program that records the condition for shifting the open/close door 36b from the open state to the closed state (hereinafter, also referred to as "closed condition"). The open/close scenario is stored in the open/close scenario storage area 63i of the ROM 63.

The opening conditions are as follows, for example.
-The current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the timing to start each round game in the open/close execution mode.
When the above-mentioned one item is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

The closing conditions are as follows, for example.
-The elapsed time from the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit duration time (for example, 15 seconds).
-The number of game balls entering the special winning opening 36a since the start of each round game exceeds a predetermined upper limit number.
When either one of the above two items is satisfied, the opening/closing door 36b shifts from the open state to the closed state.

After executing step Sl1607, the operation proceeds to step Sl1608 described above.

In step Sl1608, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl1608, the process proceeds to step Sl1609.

In step Sl1609, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the special winning opening/closing processing period based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step Sl1609, the process advances to step Sl1610 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sl1603 that the opening period flag is ON (S1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1611.

In step Sl1611, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step Sl1611 that the opening period has ended (S1611: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl1612 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step S1613.

In step S1613, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step Sl1613, the process proceeds to step Sl1614.

In step Sl1614, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. In a succeeding step S1615, an opening/closing process start command is set. The opening/closing process start command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing process period has started. The opening/closing process start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 674: step S10503) of the normal process. After executing step Sl1615, the present game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step S1602 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1616 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. The special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step Sl1616, the process proceeds to step Sl1617.

In step Sl1617, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing process is completed depending on whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened is "0". To do. When it is determined in step S1617 that the special winning opening/closing process has been completed (S1617: YES), the process proceeds to step S1618. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1617 that the special winning opening opening/closing process has not ended (S1617: NO), the main game state transition process ends.

In step Sl1618, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step Sl1619.

In step S1619, round display termination processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step Sl1619, the process proceeds to step Sl1620.

In step Sl1620, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length ending time is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step Sl162, the process proceeds to step Sl1621.

In step Sl1621, an ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10503 in the normal process (FIG. 674). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing Step Sl1621, the process proceeds to Step Sl1622.

In step Sl1622, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step Sl1601 that the ending period flag is ON (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1623.

In step Sl1623, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S11620), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. When it is determined in step Sl1620 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1624.

In step Sl1624, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S1625, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step Sl1625, the flow proceeds to step Sl1626, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step Sl1626, the process proceeds to step Sl1627.

In step Sl1627, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is "0". When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. When it is determined in step Sl1627 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S11627: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1628.

In step Sl1628, a customer waiting command is set. The customer waiting command causes the voice light emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the time when the variation of the symbol (game time) ends. Is a command including the information of. The customer waiting command thus set is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S11628 in the normal process (FIG. 674). After executing step Sl1628, the present game time control processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1162 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S11627: NO), the present game number control processing is ended as it is. If it is determined in step Sl1623 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1623: NO), this game state transition processing is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 685: S1616) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 686 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing processing. In step Sl1701, it is determined whether the open/close door 36b is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step Sl1701 that the open/close door 36b is not open (S1701:NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1702.

In step Sl1702, it is determined whether the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sl1702 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (S1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1703.

In step Sl1703, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sl1704.

In step Sl1704, an opening/closing door opening command is set. The open/close door open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open/close door 36b has been opened. The open/close door open command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 674: step Sl0503). After executing step Sl1704, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl1702 that the opening condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (S1702: NO), the special winning opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sl1703 and step Sl1704.

When it is determined in step Sl1701 that the open/close door 36b is open (S1701:YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1705.

In step Sl1705, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening/closing door 36b. When it is determined in step Sl1705 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (S11705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1706.

In step Sl1706, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sl1707.

In step S11707, an opening/closing door closing command is set. The opening/closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The open/close door close command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 674: Step S10503). After executing step Sl1707, the special winning opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl1705 that the closing condition of the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (S11705: NO), the special winning opening opening/closing process is ended without executing steps Sl1706 and step Sl1707.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 685: Sl1625) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 687 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step Sl1801, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit in the big hit flag is turned on. That is, it is determined whether the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step Sl1801 that the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag is ON (S1801: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1802, and the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag of the RAM64 are selected. The flag that is on is turned off. After executing step Sl1802, the process proceeds to step Sl1803.

In step Sl1803, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and then in step Sl1804, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Then, it progresses to step Sl1805.

In step Sl1805, 100 is set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The value set in the guaranteed game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step Sl1806.

In step S11806, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step S18111.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl1801 that the 16R probability variation big hit flag and the 8R probability variation jackpot flag of the RAM 64 are not ON (S1801: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1807, and the 8R normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step Sl1808.

After turning on the high-frequency support mode flag in step Sl1808, the process advances to step Sl1809 to set 100 in the guaranteed game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S1810.

In step S1810, a low-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. .. Then, it progresses to step S18111.

In step S1811, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The electric power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 674: Sl0508).

FIG. 688 is a flowchart showing a power combination support process. In step Sl1901, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the in-support flag is not ON (S1901:NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1902.

In step Sl1902, it is determined whether or not the support win flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step Sl1902 that the support winning flag is not ON (Sl1902: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1903.

In step Sl1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step Sl1903 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl1903: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1904.

In step Sl1904, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is the end timing of the variable display (Sl1904: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl1905, and after the deviation display is set, the main electric power support processing is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1904 that it is not the end timing of variable display (Sl1904: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1906.

In step S11906, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0”. When it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is "0" (S1906: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl1906 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0" (Sl1906: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1907.

In step S11907, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S11908 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step Sl1907 (Sl1907: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1909 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step Sl1910.

In step Sl1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step Sl1909 is support win. When it is determined in step Sl1910 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support win (S11910: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl1911, the support win flag is set to ON, and various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl 1910 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S 1910: NO), the processing for electric role support is ended without executing the processing of step Sl 1911.

If it is determined in step Sl1907 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sl1907: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step Sl1908 (Sl1908: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl1912 and the electric auditors release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C5 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step S11913.

In step S11913, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S11912 is support winning. When it is determined in step S11913 that the support is not won (S11913: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl 1913 that the support is won (S 1913: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl 1914, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl1902 that the support winning flag is ON (S1902: YES), the flow advances to step Sl1915 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step Sl1915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11915: NO), the variable display of the picture in the universal figure unit 38 is in progress, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11915 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11915: YES), the process proceeds to step S11916.

In step Sl1916, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step S11917 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step Sl1901 that the in-support flag is ON (S1901: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl1918 to execute electric role opening/closing control processing for opening/closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Power combination opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 688: Sl1918) of a process for supporting an electric power role.

FIG. 689 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step Sl2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (Sl2001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2002.

In step Sl2002, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sl2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2002: NO), the main power combination opening/closing control process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl2002 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (Sl2002: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2003, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a in the closed state is performed. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step Sl2003, the process proceeds to Step Sl2004.

In step Sl2004, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sl2005 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (Sl2005: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl2005 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (Sl2005: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2006 and the in-support flag is turned off. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

When it is determined in step Sl2001 that the electric accessory 34a is not being opened (Sl2001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2007, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (Sl2007: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl2007 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (Sl2007: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2008, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step Sl2009.

In step Sl2009, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (Sl2009: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sl2010 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

When it is determined in step Sl2010 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (Sl2010: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2011, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2009 that the mode is the open/close execution mode (Sl2009: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step Sl2010 (Sl2010: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2012 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, this electric power combination opening/closing control process is complete|finished.

<<L6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 690 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl2101, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step Sl2101, the process proceeds to Step Sl2102.

In step S1102, a game game effect process is executed. In the game time effect process, a process relating to an effect executed in the game time from the start to the stop of the variation of the symbol is performed. Details of the game game effect processing will be described later. After executing step Sl2102, the process proceeds to step Sl2103.

In step Sl2103, the opening/closing execution mode effect process is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect process, effects related to the effect during the opening period, effects during the special winning opening/closing process period, and effects during the ending period are performed. After executing step Sl2103, the process proceeds to step Sl2104.

In step Sl2104, other processing is executed. Other processes include a process of displaying a moving image showing the game state on the symbol display device 41, a process of displaying a demo moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, as the moving image showing the game state, a background moving image determined according to the game state determination value PN included in the game state command received from the main MPU 62 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. For example, a background moving image showing that the high frequency support mode is continuing, a background moving image showing that the high frequency support mode is finished, and a background moving image showing that the high probability mode is continuing are displayed. After executing step Sl2104, the process proceeds to step Sl2105.

In step Sl2105, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step Sl2105, the process proceeds to step Sl2106.

In step S1210, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read out in the BGM process and each effect process. After executing step Sl2106, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for game times production>
Next, the game time effect processing will be described. The game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 690: Sl2102).

FIG. 691 is a flowchart showing the game game effect processing. In step Sl2201, a game game effect setting process is executed. The game time effect setting process is a process executed when a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62, and is a process of setting an effect executed in the game time when the game time is started. is there. The details of the game game effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step Sl2201, the process proceeds to Step Sl2202.

In step S1202, game time effect execution processing is executed. The game time effect execution process is a process that is executed when the game time effect setting (preliminary effect and reach effect) is set in the game time effect setting process. The details of the game game effect execution process will be described later. After executing step Sl2202, the present game time effect processing is ended.

<Game time performance setting process>
Next, the game time effect setting process will be described. The game time effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect process (FIG. 691: Sl2201).

FIG. 692 is a flowchart showing the game game effect setting process. In step Sl2301, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command have been received. When it is determined in step Sl2301 that the variation command and the classification command have not been received (Sl2301: NO), the game game effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl2301 that the variation command and the type command are received (S2301:YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2302.

In step S1302, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, the presence/absence of a falling win, the presence/absence of a reach, and the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step Sl2303.

In step Sl2303, effect pattern setting processing is executed. The effect pattern setting process is a process of determining and setting an effect pattern (battle effect, result notification effect, notice effect, reach effect content and execution timing) to be executed in this game time based on the effect pattern table. is there. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step Sl2303, the process proceeds to step Sl2304.

In step Sl2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the setting process of the stop symbol, the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, if the same symbol on the effective line L of the symbol display device 41 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is the 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the stop design this time. After executing step Sl2304, the process proceeds to step Sl2305.

In step S12305, a process for setting the variation display pattern of the current game is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the variation time and the information of the stop symbol set in step Sl2304 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step S12306.

In step S12306, information on the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S12307, and the effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2307, the flow advances to step Sl2308 to execute the update process at the start of fluctuation. The update process at the start of fluctuation is a process for updating the hold display in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step Sl2308, the present game time effect setting process is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing>
Next, the effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 692: Sl2303) of the game time effect setting process.

FIG. 693 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern setting process. In step Sl2401, a random number acquisition process for effect patterns is executed. In the effect pattern random number acquisition processing, the effect pattern random number RN is acquired from the lottery counter area 94c (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step Sl2402.

In step Sl2402, it is determined whether a high-accuracy/high-support command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sl2402 that the high accuracy/high support command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2403.

The processing from step S12403 to step S12408 is to execute the jackpot effect, reach effect, and out-of-effect effect in the game times other than the high-accuracy/high-support state.

In step Sl2403, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, from the information on the presence or absence of the big hit stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 692). .. When it is determined in step Sl2302 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit (Sl2403: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2404.

In step Sl2404, by referring to the effect pattern table for jackpot stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and the current time An effect pattern for jackpot corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2404 is the jackpot obtained by executing steps Sl1204 and Sl1205 in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 681) executed by the main MPU 62. It is a variable time for. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S1 2404 corresponds to the jackpot variation time obtained by the main MPU 62. After executing step Sl2404, the process proceeds to step Sl2405.

In step Sl2405, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2404 is set as an effect pattern to be executed in the current game. Then, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2403 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a big hit (Sl2403: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sl2406 and whether or not a reach occurs in this game round. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 692). When it is determined in step Sl2406 that the reach occurs in the current game time (S12406: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2407.

In step S12407, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and this time are referred to with reference to the reach pattern table for reach generation stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93. The reach effect producing pattern corresponding to the value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2407 is the reach obtained by executing step Sl1208 and step Sl1205 in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 681) executed by the main MPU 62. It is a variable time for generation. Therefore, the effect pattern obtained in step S12407 corresponds to the variation time for reach generation obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2407, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in the current game time. Then, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl2406 that the reach does not occur in the current game (Sl2406: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2408.

In step Sl2408, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence effect pattern table stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and An effect pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for effect pattern this time is acquired. The fluctuation time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2408 is the reach obtained by executing step Sl1209 and step Sl1205 in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 681) executed by the main MPU 62. It is a variable time for non-occurrence. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2407 corresponds to the variation time for reach non-occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2408, the process proceeds to step Sl2405 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2408 is set as the effect pattern to be executed in this game time. Then, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl2402 that the high-accuracy/high-support command is received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2402: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2409.

In steps S12409 to S2411, the process of setting the effect pattern is executed in the highly accurate/high support state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

In step S12409, it is determined whether or not a command after the number of guaranteed games has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sl2409 that the command after the number of guaranteed games has not been received from the main MPU 62 (Sl2409: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2410.

In step S12410, effect pattern setting processing before the guaranteed game count is executed. The effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed game count will be described later. Then, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

When it is determined in step Sl2409 that the command after the number of games has been received from the main MPU 62 (step Sl2409: YES), that is, when it is determined that it is after the guaranteed number of games, the process proceeds to step Sl2411.

In step S12411, effect pattern setting processing after the number of guaranteed games is executed. The effect pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games will be described later. Then, the main effect pattern setting process ends.

<Production pattern setting process before guaranteed game count>
Next, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed game number will be described. The effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed game number is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 693: Sl2410) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 694 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed game count. In step Sl2501, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, from the information on the presence or absence of the big hit stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 692). .. When it is determined in step Sl2501 that the result of the winning lottery is a big hit (Sl2501: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2502.

In step Sl2502, the effect pattern table corresponding to the big hit is specified from the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93, which is stored in the effect pattern table before the guaranteed game count. In the production pattern table group for the number of guaranteed games before,
(I) An effect pattern table that executes a normal battle effect as a battle effect and executes a victory effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter, referred to as an effect pattern table for normal battle effect and victory effect),
(II) A production pattern table that executes a normal battle production as a battle production and a defeat production as a result notification production (hereinafter, referred to as a production pattern table for normal battle production/defeat production),
(III) An effect pattern table that executes a normal battle effect as a battle effect and a draw effect as a result notification effect (hereinafter referred to as an effect pattern table for normal battle effect/draw effect),
Is provided. In step Sl2502, an effect pattern table for normal battle effect/winning effect, which is (I), is specified from (I) to (III). After executing Step Sl2502, the process proceeds to Step Sl2503.

In step Sl2503, with reference to the effect pattern table for normal battle effect/winning effect specified in step Sl2502, by the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693). An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2503 is the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 682) before the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62, and executes step Sl1302 to step Sl1304. It is the variation time before the guaranteed game count and the big hit obtained by. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2503 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed game count and the big hit obtained by the main MPU 62. After execution of step Sl2503, the process proceeds to step Sl2504, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2503 is set.

By performing the processing from step Sl2501 to step Sl2504 described above, the effect in FIG. 659 (before the guaranteed game count, the jackpot is won), that is, the normal battle effect as the battle effect and the victory effect as the result notification effect. It can be carried out. After the execution of step Sl2504, the effect pattern setting process before the guaranteed game count is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl2501 that the result of the winning lottery relating to the current game number is not the big hit (Sl2501: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2505, and the result of the falling lottery relating to the current game number is winning. Or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of the fall win stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 692). .. If it is determined in step Sl2505 that the result of the falling lottery is winning (Sl2505: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sl2506.

In step S12506, the effect pattern table corresponding to the falling win is specified from the effect pattern table group for the guaranteed game count before stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the production pattern table for the normal battle production/defeat production, which is (II), is specified from the above (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2506, the process proceeds to step Sl2507.

In step S12507, by referring to the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect/defeat effect specified in step Sl2506, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are used. An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2507 is the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 682) before the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62, in which step Sl113, step Sl1303, and step It is the variable time before the guaranteed game count and for the fall obtained by executing S1304. Therefore, the effect pattern obtained in step S12507 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed game count and the fall time obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2507, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2507 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2506, Sx2507, and Sx2504 described above, the effect in FIG. 658 (before the guaranteed game count, falling win), that is, the normal battle effect as the battle effect and the result notification effect, Defeat production can be performed.

When it is determined in step Sl2505 that the result of the falling lottery related to the current game time is not a win (S12505: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2508, and it is determined whether or not reach is generated in the current game time. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 692). When it is determined in step Sl2508 that a reach occurs in the current game (Sl2508: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2509.

In step S12509, the effect pattern table corresponding to the out-reach is specified from the effect pattern table group for the guaranteed game count stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect/draw effect, which is (III), is specified from the above (I) to (III). After executing step Sl2509, the process proceeds to step Sl2510.

In step S12510, by referring to the effect pattern table for the normal battle effect/drawing effect identified in step Sl2509, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are used. An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2510 is the variable time setting process (FIG. 682) before the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62, in which step Sl1309, step Sl1303, and step It is the variable time before the guaranteed game number and the outreach occurrence obtained by executing S1304. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2510 corresponds to the variable time before the guaranteed game count and the out-reach occurrence which are obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2510, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2510 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

By performing the processing of steps Sl2501, Sx2505, Sx2508 to Sx2510, and Sx2504 described above, the effect in FIG. 660 (before the guaranteed game number, outreach occurrence), that is, the normal battle effect as the battle effect and the result notification effect It is possible to draw and draw.

When it is determined in step Sl2508 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (S12508: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2511.

In step Sl2511, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) with reference to the effect pattern table for non-reach occurrence stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and An effect pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for effect pattern this time is acquired. The variable time read out by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2511, executes step Sl1310 and step Sl1304 in the variable time setting process (FIG. 682) before the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62. This is the variation time for non-reach occurrence obtained by the above. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12511 corresponds to the variation time for reach non-occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2511, the process proceeds to step Sl2504 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2511 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process before the guaranteed game number is ended.

<Production pattern setting processing after the number of guaranteed games>
Next, the effect pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games is described. The effect pattern setting process after the guaranteed game number is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 693: Sl2411) of the effect pattern setting process.

FIG. 695 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games. In step Sl2601, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, from the information on the presence or absence of the big hit stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 692). .. When it is determined in step Sl2601 that the result of the winning lottery is the big hit (Sl2601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2602.

In step Sl2602, it is determined whether or not the result of the falling lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of the fall win stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 692). .. When it is determined in step Sl2602 that the result of the falling lottery is not winning (S12602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2603.

In step Sl2603, it is determined whether or not a preemptive mode command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step Sl2603 that the pre-emption mode command is received from the main MPU 62 (S12603: YES), the mode selection lottery is determined to be the pre-skipping mode, and the process proceeds to step Sl2604.

In step Sl2604, an effect pattern table corresponding to the jackpot win and the premature win mode win is specified from the guaranteed game number after effect effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93. To do. In the production pattern table group for after the guaranteed game number,
(IV) A production pattern table that executes a life/death battle production as a battle production and a victory production as a result announcement production (hereinafter, referred to as a production pattern table for life/death battle production/winning production),
(V) A production pattern table that executes a life-and-death battle production as a battle production and a defeat production as a result notification production (hereinafter referred to as a production pattern table for live-death battle production/defeat production),
(VI) A production pattern table that executes a superior battle production as a battle production and executes a victory production as a result notification production (hereinafter, referred to as a superior battle production/production pattern table for victory production),
(VII) A production pattern table that executes a superior battle production as a battle production and a draw production as a result announcement production (hereinafter, referred to as a production pattern table for a superior battle production/draw production),
Is provided. In step S12604, the production pattern table for the live/dead battle production/winning production which is (IV) is specified from (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2604, the process proceeds to step Sl2605.

In step S12605, by referring to the effect pattern table for life/death battle effect/winning effect specified in step Sl2604, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are used. An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2605 is the same as the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 683) after the number of guaranteed games executed by the main MPU 62, and executes steps Sl1405 to Sl1407. It is the variation time for the guaranteed winning game count/big hit pre-emption mode obtained by the above. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step S12605 corresponds to the variation time for the guaranteed game count/big hit first drop mode obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step S12605, the process proceeds to step S12606 to set the effect pattern acquired in step S2605.

By executing the processing from step Sl2601 to step Sl2606 described above, the effect in FIG. 667 (after the guaranteed game count, the big hit, the first-fall mode win), that is, the life and death battle effect as the battle effect and the result notification effect You can perform with the victory production. After the execution of step Sl2606, the effect pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2603 that the pre-fall mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S12603: NO), the result of the mode selection lottery is determined to be the post-fall mode, and the flow proceeds to step Sl2607.

In step Sl2607, an effect pattern table corresponding to the jackpot win and the post-fall mode win is specified from the guaranteed game number after effect effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93. To do. Specifically, from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII), the production pattern table for the superior battle production/winning production which is (VI) is specified. After executing step Sl2607, the process proceeds to step Sl2608.

In step Sl2608, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and the step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are referred to by referring to the effect pattern table for superior battle effect/winning effect specified in step Sl2605. An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2608 is the same as the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 683) after the number of guaranteed games executed by the main MPU 62, which includes step Sl1408, step Sl1406, and step It is a variation time for the guaranteed game count/big hit afterfall mode obtained by executing S1407. For this reason, the effect pattern acquired in step S12608 corresponds to the variation time for the guaranteed game number after/big hit afterfall mode obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2608, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2608 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games is ended.

When it is determined in step Sl2602 that the result of the falling lottery is a win (Sl2602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2604 without executing step Sl2603, and the effect pattern table for live/dead battle effect/winning effect. Specify.

By performing the processing of steps S2601 to Sx2603, Sx2607, Sx2608, and Sx2606 described above, the effect in FIG. 668 (after the guaranteed game count, the jackpot win, the late drop mode win), that is, the superior battle effect as the battle effect, A winning presentation as a result announcement presentation can be performed.

When it is determined in step Sl2601 that the result of the winning lottery related to the current game time is not the big hit (Sl2601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2609, and the result of the falling lottery related to the current game time is win. Or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the fall lottery is a win from the information on the presence or absence of the fall win stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game time effect setting process (FIG. 692). .. When it is determined in step Sl2609 that the falling lottery result is a win (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2610.

In step S12610, the effect pattern table corresponding to the falling win is specified from the guaranteed game number after effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the production pattern table for the life-and-death battle production/defeat production which is (V) is specified from the above (IV) to (VII). After executing Step Sl2610, the process proceeds to Step Sl2611.

In step Sl2611, by referring to the effect pattern table for live/dead battle effect/defeat effect specified in step Sl2610, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are used. An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2611 is the same as the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 683) after the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62. It is a variable time for after-guaranteed game count/fall for which is obtained by executing S1407. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl26011 corresponds to the variable time for the guaranteed game count/fall for the master MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2611, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2611 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games is ended.

By performing the processing of steps Sl2601, Sx2609 to steps Sl2611, Sx2606 described above, the effect in FIG. 664 (after the guaranteed game count, the falling win), that is, the life and death battle effect as the battle effect and the defeat as the result notification effect. You can perform and direct.

When it is determined in step Sl2609 that the result of the falling lottery related to the current game time is not a win (Sl2609: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2612 and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game time. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated from the information on the presence or absence of the reach stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92 in step S1302 of the game game effect setting process (FIG. 692). When it is determined in step Sl2612 that the reach occurs in the current game time (S12612: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2613.

In step S12613, the effect pattern table corresponding to the out-reach occurrence is specified from the guaranteed game number after effect pattern table group stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, the production pattern table for the superior battle production/drawing production, which is (VII), is specified from the above-mentioned (IV) to (VII). After executing step Sl2613, the process proceeds to step Sl2614.

In step Sl2614, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) and the step Sl2401 of the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693) are referred to with reference to the effect pattern table for superior battle effect/draw effect specified in step Sl2613. An effect pattern corresponding to the obtained value of the effect pattern random number RN is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2614 is the same as the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 683) after the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62. It is a variable time for occurrence of out-of-warranty after-guaranteed game number obtained by executing Sl1407. For this reason, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2614 corresponds to the variation time for occurrence of the after-guaranteed game count/off-reach occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2614, the process proceeds to step Sl2606, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2614 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games is ended.

By executing the processing of steps Sl2601, Sx2609, Sx2612 to Sx2614, and Sx2606 described above, the effect in FIG. 669 (after the guaranteed game count and the outreach occurrence), that is, the dominant battle effect as the battle effect and the result notification effect It is possible to draw and draw.

When it is determined in step Sl2612 that the reach does not occur in the current game round (S12612: NO), the process proceeds to step Sl2615.

In step Sl2615, the variation time read in step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence effect pattern table stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a (FIG. 657) of the sound-light side ROM 93, and An effect pattern for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the value of the random number RN for effect pattern this time is acquired. The fluctuation time read by step Sl2302 (FIG. 692) when executing step Sl2615 is the same as the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 683) after the guaranteed game number executed by the main MPU 62. It is the variation time for non-reach occurrence obtained by the above. Therefore, the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2615 corresponds to the variation time for reach non-occurrence obtained by the main MPU 62. After the execution of step Sl2615, the process proceeds to step Sl2606 described above, and the effect pattern acquired in step Sl2615 is set. After that, the production pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games is ended.

<Processing for game time performance execution>
Next, the game game effect execution process will be described. The game time effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect process (FIG. 691: Sl2202).

FIG. 696 is a flowchart showing processing for game effect production execution. In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern set in the above-described game time effect setting process (FIG. 692) exists. If it is determined in step S2701 that the set effect pattern does not exist (S12701: NO), the present game-time effect execution processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sl2701 that the set effect pattern exists (Sl2701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2702.

In step S12702, the set effect pattern is referred to, and then in step S2703, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game game effect. The game time effect referred to here is an effect based on various effect patterns set in the effect pattern setting process (FIG. 693). In these effect patterns, the content and timing of the effect executed in the game time are stored.

When it is determined at step S2703 that it is not the start timing of the game time effect (S1273: NO), the process for executing the game time effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sl2703 that it is the start timing of the game game effect (S1273: YES), the process proceeds to step Sl2704.

In step Sl2704, a moving image display start command corresponding to the content of the game game effect set in the effect pattern is transmitted to the display control device 100. Then, it progresses to step S12705 and starts the light emission control processing of various lamps 47 corresponding to the content of the game time effect set to the effect pattern. After that, the process advances to step Sl2706 to cause a sound output LSI (not shown) to start reproduction of audio data corresponding to the contents of the notice effect set in the effect pattern. After executing step Sl2706, the present game time effect execution processing is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 697 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S2801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step S12802.

In step Sl2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 698 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sl2901, a command storing process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sl3001, a command corresponding process is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 698), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24 being pressed. When it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (Sl3001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step Sl3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sl3001) or the like. . Then, it progresses to step Sl3003.

In step Sl3003, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting processing (Sl3002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step Sl3004.

In step Sl3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sl3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to execute other processes, and then ends the V interrupt process. Heretofore, an example of specific control for executing various processes including the jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 has been described.

<<L7>> Action/effect:
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is won by the winning lottery, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. After the transition, and after the high frequency support mode has been started, the number of games has reached the guaranteed number of games (= after the guaranteed number of games), the support mode is high when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. The frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, and the timing of this shift is switched by a lottery (=mode selection lottery) between the start of the game time and the end of the game time. When the timing of shifting to the low frequency support mode is at the start of the game time, a life-and-death battle effect is executed in the game time, and the timing of shifting to the low frequency support mode is at the end of the game time. In, the superior battle effect is executed in the game time. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game number after the guaranteed game number, the production can be performed in two ways, that is, the life and death battle effect and the superior battle effect. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to widen the range of the aspect of the production when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached, and the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the winning lottery is won in the game number after the guaranteed number of games is reached, and when the winning lottery is not won, the big lottery is won in the winning lottery, and the mode selection lottery is performed. In both cases of winning the first drop mode, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the game time starts, and the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) stops the opening/closing operation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a whether the player has won the falling lottery or the big hit in the winning lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can give the player a sense of urgency and anticipation regarding the result of the falling lottery and the winning lottery related to the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached, by the battle production, as a result, the game. The interest in can be further improved.

Here, let's assume a pachinko machine having only the leading edge mode and not the trailing edge mode (=the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2 described above). According to the pachinko machine of Comparative Example 2, a life-and-death battle staging is performed that suggests that either the jackpot is won in the winning lottery (winning) or the falling lottery is won (defeat). Therefore, if the battle effect is started in the game number after the guaranteed number of games is reached, the player can select either the result of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery or the result of winning the falling lottery. Although it can be predicted that it will be possible, and it is possible to give a sense of tension and expectation to the results of the falling lottery and the winning lottery, it is not possible to give the player a sense of security including a draw in the battle production. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game number after the guaranteed number of games is reached, there are two types of life and death battle production and superior battle production. Since the production can be performed, it is possible to perform the battle production including the draw by the superior battle production, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security including the draw in the battle production.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the guaranteed game count, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery without being won in the falling lottery, and the number of games that has been won in the first-run mode in the mode selection lottery and the falling lottery are selected. The opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same in the winning game times. Therefore, even if the player confirms that the electric accessory 34a is stopped at the start of the game time, the game time when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the first-run mode is won in the mode selection lottery. Then, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing one of the game times won in the falling lottery. However, by confirming that the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is stopped at the start of the game after the number of guaranteed games is reached, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery without winning the falling lottery, and the first in the mode selecting lottery. The player can recognize that the number of times of winning the drop mode or the number of times of winning the falling lottery has been narrowed down. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning lottery is won without hitting the falling lottery, and the winning game is won in the first-run mode in the mode selecting lottery, and the winning game is won in the falling lottery. By executing a life-and-death battle production that suggests that it is possible to improve the player's sense of urgency and expectation whether it is a big hit in the winning lottery or a falling lottery As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after reaching the guaranteed number of games, the falling lottery is not won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the late-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery. The opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 34a is the same for the number of times and the game number in which the reach (so-called out-reach) is determined in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Is. For this reason, even if the player observes that the electric accessory 34a continues to open and close in the game time, he/she does not win the falling lottery but wins the big hit in the winning lottery and also selects the mode selection lottery. In the game, you can play either one of the game times that was won in the late-fall mode, or the game times that was determined not to win the falling lottery and to win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and to reach in the reach judgment. You can prevent others from guessing. However, by confirming that the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a continues in the game time after reaching the guaranteed game number, the falling lottery is not won, and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the mode is selected. One of the number of game times that was won in the late-fall mode in the selection lottery, and the number of game times that was determined not to win the falling lottery and to win the jackpot in the winning lottery, and to reach in the reach determination The player can understand that it has been narrowed down to. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning lottery is not won, the winning lottery is a big hit, and the game number that is won in the late-fall mode in the mode selection lottery, and the falling lottery is not a win, and the winning lottery is a big hit. By winning the jackpot in the winning lottery by executing the superior battle production that suggests that you have been narrowed to one of the game times determined to generate a reach in the reach determination without winning. It is possible to improve the player's expectation as to whether the out-reach has occurred, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the present pachinko machine 10, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number, the winning lottery is not won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the first-run mode is won in the mode selection lottery. If you win the falling lottery without winning the big hit in the winning lottery, you win the big hit in the winning lottery (win) and you win the falling lottery (defeat) Because the suggested life-and-death battle production is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and expectation regarding the result of the falling lottery and winning lottery related to the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number by the life-and-death battle production. As a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Also, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the winning number of times is reached after the guaranteed number of games has been reached, the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot lottery is won and the late selection mode is won in the mode selection lottery. And, in the case where it is determined that a reach (so-called out-reach) is generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (winning) And, the superior battle production is suggested, which corresponds to one of the fact that the jackpot is not won in the winning lottery and the falling lottery is not won (draw). Since the superior battle effect occurs only as a result of winning or drawing, the advantage when the superior battle effect is executed is higher for the player than when the live or dead battle effect is executed. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player by the superior battle effect, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game number after reaching the guaranteed game number, when the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, the life and death battle effect and the superior battle effect Is executed. Although the life-and-death battle production may result in defeat, the superior battle production only occurs as a result of winning or drawing, so when the superior battle production is executed, it is more than when the live-death battle production is executed. It is highly advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player by causing the superior battle effect to appear. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, when winning the post-fall mode in which the superior battle effect can be executed, the jackpot type is limited to the 16R certainty variation jackpot, which is the most advantageous to the player (see FIG. 654). It is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the rear fall mode with a high degree of advantage is associated with the 16R probability variation jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player, in the distribution table. The 8R normal jackpot, which has the lowest advantage degree for the player, may be associated with the rear falling mode having a high advantage degree. Further, the post-fall mode with a high degree of advantage may be configured to be associated with two jackpot types, for example, a 16R certainty variation jackpot and an 8R certainty variation jackpot. According to this configuration, when winning in the post-fall mode in which the superior battle effect can be executed, the jackpot type is limited to the probability variation jackpot that is highly advantageous to the player, so that the player has a high expectation. can do.

<<L8>> Modification of the twelfth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<L8-1>> Modification 1:
In the twelfth embodiment, as a mode in which the support mode is changed when the jackpot is won in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached after the high-frequency support mode is started (= after the guaranteed game number), Although which of the drop mode and the post-fall mode is to be adopted is determined by a lottery (=mode selection lottery) based on the jackpot type counter C2, as a modified example, a win lottery is adopted. It may be configured to be determined by lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 used. Specifically, it is as follows. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first modification is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the same parts and components as those of the twelfth embodiment are designated by the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given. I do.

FIG. 700 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a high probability mode win/loss table provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification. In the high-probability mode win/loss table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at which the win/loss result is a big hit is the same as that in the high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 653(b)) in the twelfth embodiment. Furthermore, in the high/probability mode win/loss table, among the values of 0 to 1199, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery is associated with the value of 0 to 15 at which the win/loss result is a big hit. Specifically, among the values of 0 to 15 that are jackpots, 10 values of 0 to 9 are set in the pre-falling mode, and 6 values of 10 to 15 are set in the post-falling mode.

In the pachinko machine of the modified example 1, in the hit determination process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, when it is determined that the high probability mode is set, the hit lottery table for the high probability mode is referred to perform the hit lottery. At the same time, a mode selection lottery is performed in which it is determined whether the mode is the first drop mode or the second drop mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 700. However, if they match, depending on whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value set in the pre-falling mode or the post-falling mode as the distribution result of the mode selection lottery, It is determined whether the mode is the drop mode or the post-fall mode.

As a result, as a mode of changing the support mode when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game number after the guaranteed game number has been reached (= after the guaranteed game number) since the high frequency support mode was started, It is possible to determine which one of the drop mode and the post-fall mode is adopted. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 other than the part that determines which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode is adopted is the same as in the twelfth embodiment. The various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the various processes executed by the display control device 100 are also the same as those in the twelfth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 1 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, an effect when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed game times are reached. In addition to being able to widen the range of the mode, it is predicted by the player from the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) whether the winning lottery has been won or the jackpot lottery has been won. Can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game, like the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment.

In addition, in the present modification 1, by adding the item of the distribution result of the mode selection lottery to the win/loss table and referring to the win/loss table, the distribution result of the mode selection lottery corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is obtained. Was there. On the other hand, as another modification, the win/loss table is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 used for referring to the win/loss table is compared with a threshold value for distinguishing the pre-fall mode and the post-fall mode. By doing so, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the mode is the first fall mode or the second fall mode. Specifically, in the case of the win/loss table for the high-probability mode illustrated in FIG. 700, the threshold value for distinguishing between the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode is a value of 10. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, By determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is 10 or more, it is determined whether the late falling mode or the first falling mode. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode to be adopted when the jackpot is won. In particular, according to this modification, the processing time required for the determination can be shortened when the value that the jackpot random number counter C1 can take is as large as 65536 (2 to the 16th power).

<<L8-2>> Modification 2:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification 1, the support mode is changed when the jackpot is won in the game number after the guaranteed game number is reached after the high-frequency support mode is started (=after the guaranteed game number). As a mode of making it happen, which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode is to be adopted is determined by a lottery. On the other hand, as a modified example, in the game times after reaching the guaranteed game times, based on the number of game times after the high frequency support mode is started, one of the first drop mode and the second drop mode is selected. It may be configured to determine which is adopted. Specifically, it is as follows. Since the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second modification is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the same parts and components as those of the twelfth embodiment will be denoted by the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given. I do.

In the pachinko machine of the second modification, the ROM 63 of the main control device 60 stores a mode selection table for determining whether the leading-edge mode or the trailing-edge mode is set.

FIG. 701 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the mode selection table. As shown in the figure, the mode selection table indicates whether the pre-fall mode or the post-fall mode is set with respect to the number of games from the 101st game which is after the guaranteed number of games among the number of games after the high frequency support mode is started. It has a data structure that associates the selection results. In the example of FIG. 701, the 101st to 105th periods and the 109th and subsequent periods are set as the number of games in the first-run mode. The period from the 106th game to the 108th game is set as the number of games that will be in the backward drop mode.

As described above, in the mode selection table, for each game number after the guaranteed game number, as a mode of changing the support mode when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, one of the pre-falling mode and the post-falling mode is selected. It is regulated whether or not to adopt the mode. The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the mode selection table when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game number after the guaranteed game number, and refers to the mode selection table to support the game number when the jackpot is won after the guaranteed game number. It is determined whether to change the mode change mode in the first fall mode or the second fall mode. Note that the processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 other than the part that determines which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode is adopted is the same as in the twelfth embodiment. The various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the various processes executed by the display control device 100 are also the same as those in the twelfth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 configured as described above, similarly to the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, the effect when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed game times are reached. In addition to being able to widen the range of the form, it is predicted by the player from the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (Fig. 649) whether the winning lottery has been won or the jackpot lottery has been won. Can be prevented. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, as in the pachinko machine of the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 2, the period after reaching the guaranteed game number is divided into a plurality of periods, and for each of the divided periods, either one of the first drop mode and the second drop mode is selected. Since it can be set in advance whether to be adopted, it is possible to prevent the processing from being biased to one of the first drop mode and the second drop mode, which is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. A production with a rich storyline can be performed.

The mode selection result stored in the mode selection table shown in FIG. 701 is merely an example, and various modes such as a configuration in which the number of times of switching between the pre-falling mode and the post-falling mode is increased can be adopted. Further, a plurality of mode selection tables having different mode selection results may be prepared in advance, and the mode selection table to be used may be switched. For example, in the win/loss table, the mode selection table is switched when a small win is won in a configuration in which “big hit” and “small win” are provided as a result of the winning lottery. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform various switching between the leading edge mode and the trailing edge mode. In particular, when the mode selection table is switched when a small hit is won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the small win is won in the winning lottery, so that the player does not notice it. , It becomes possible to switch the mode selection table.

Further, the mode selection table shows the selection result of the pre-falling mode or the post-falling mode with respect to the number of games from the 101st game which is after the guaranteed number of games among the number of games after the high-frequency support mode is started. Although it was a data structure associated with it, on the other hand, the selection result of the first falling mode or the second falling mode with respect to the number of games from the first number of games since the high frequency support mode was started May be associated with each other. In this configuration, the number of games is set to the backward drop mode from the first game to the 100th game (see FIG. 659).

In Modification 2, the mode selection table is obtained by referring to the mode selection table. On the other hand, as another modified example, without using the mode selection table, the number of games is compared with a threshold for distinguishing between the pre-falling mode and the post-falling mode. It may be configured to determine whether or not. Specifically, in the mode selection table illustrated in FIG. 701, since the thresholds for distinguishing between the pre-falling mode and the post-falling mode are 101, 106, and 109, the number of games is 101 or more by the arithmetic processing, If the number of games is 106 or more and less than 106, it is determined to be in the first-fall mode, if the number of games is 106 or more and less than 109, it is determined to be the second-fall mode, and if the number of games is 109 or more, the first-run mode is determined. The mode is determined. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode to be used according to the number of games.

<<L8-3>> Modification 3:
In the twelfth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the support mode is changed when the jackpot is won in the game times after the guaranteed game number is reached after the high-frequency support mode is started (=after the guaranteed game number). As a mode of making it, which of the first-fall mode and the second-fall mode is adopted is determined by a lottery. On the other hand, as a modified example, the configuration may be such that the leading drop mode or the trailing drop mode is determined according to the fluctuation time set by the fluctuation time setting process. With this configuration, as in the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the interest in the game can be improved.

<<L8-4>> Modification 4:
In the twelfth embodiment and the first to third modifications, the player is not informed which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode is to be adopted. On the other hand, as a modification, the player may be informed of which of the first drop mode and the second drop mode should be adopted. For example, the result of mode adoption is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the start of the game game. According to this modified example 4, when the player knows from the display of the symbol display device 41 that the mode is the backward drop mode, the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 34a (FIG. 649) is stopped at the start of the game time. If this is confirmed, it can be predicted that the fall lottery was won in the middle of the superior battle performance. Therefore, according to the modified example 4, the player can leave room for predicting that he or she has won the falling lottery during the battle production.

In the twelfth embodiment, the selection result of the mode according to the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained by referring to the distribution table used when sorting the jackpot type. On the other hand, as another modification, it is possible to determine whether the pre-emption mode is set by performing a calculation that compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 with a threshold for distinguishing the pre-falling mode from the post-falling mode without using the distribution table. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether the mode is the trailing edge mode. Specifically, in the distribution table for the first starting opening illustrated in FIG. 654(a), the threshold values for distinguishing the pre-falling mode and the post-falling mode are 40 and 65. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 or more and less than 40, it is determined to be the pre-falling mode, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 40 or more and less than 65, it is the post-falling mode. If the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is equal to or greater than 65, it is determined that the pre-fall mode is set. With this configuration as well, it is possible to determine which of the pre-falling mode and the post-falling mode to be used according to the jackpot type counter C2. In the case of the twelfth embodiment, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the value of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. Although the distribution result of the mode selection lottery according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is different from that obtained based on the incoming ball, according to the modification 4, the same distribution result is obtained. ..

<<L8-5>> Modification 5:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the low frequency support mode is adopted as the first state identified by the state information in the state storage means, and the high frequency support mode is adopted as the states other than the first state. However, the first state and the states other than the first state are not limited to these. For example, the high frequency support mode may be adopted as the first state, and the low frequency support mode may be adopted as the second state. Further, in the twelfth embodiment and its modification, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are provided as the states in which the high frequency support mode flag, which is the state information, can be specified. 34a may be configured to have three types of support modes (for example, a low frequency support mode, a medium frequency support mode, and a high frequency support mode) in which the frequency of the open state per unit time is divided into three stages. Further, the frequency may be divided into n stages (n is a positive integer of 4 or more), and n types of support modes may be provided.

<<L8-6>> Modification 6:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the determination mode (lottery mode) of the determination means has a low probability mode and a high probability mode. A configuration having three types of probability modes (for example, a low probability mode, a medium probability mode, and a high probability mode) divided into three stages may be adopted. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that there are n kinds of probability modes in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is divided into n levels (n is a positive integer of 4 or more).

<<L8-7>> Modification 7:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example of the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot is won in the winning lottery. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case may be adopted in which the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied.

<<L8-8>> Modification 8:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the main control device 60 side sets the variable time based on various information including the high frequency support mode, and the voice emission control device 90 various types including the high frequency support mode. The effect pattern is set on the basis of the information. On the other hand, as a modified example, based on various kinds of information including the high-frequency support mode, a specific operation or display mode other than the above in the gaming machine, for example, a background moving image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is set. It may be configured.

<<L8-9>> Modification 9:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the battle effect (battle effect) is executed as the specific effect executed before the result notification effect, but the specific effect is limited to the battle effect. There is no. The specific effect may be any configuration as long as it is an effect that suggests that the result notification effect may be executed. With such a configuration, the same effect as the effect described in the twelfth embodiment can be obtained.

<<L8-10>> Modification 10:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the effect executed in one game time is configured by two kinds of effects, the battle effect and the result notification effect, but instead, the notice effect, the battle effect, and the result. You may comprise by three types of productions of notification production. Furthermore, four or more types of effects may be used.

<<L8-11>> Modification 11:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, the life and death battle effect that is executed when winning the falling lottery, and the big hit in the winning lottery, and the life and death that is executed when the first-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery The battle production was the same, but is not limited to this. For example, a part of the image constituting the life-and-death battle effect is different between the life-and-death battle effect when the winning lottery is won and the life-and-death battle effect when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the first-fall mode is won. Also good. For example, although the images are similar as a whole, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by making the images so that only some players can notice that they are different. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the winning lottery is performed when the falling lottery is not won, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery, and the late-fall mode is won in the mode selection lottery. , The winning battle production executed when it is determined that a reach (so-called out-reach) is generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery, the same, It is not limited to this. For example, the former superior battle effect and the latter superior battle effect may be configured such that a part of the images forming the superior battle effect are different. For example, although the images are similar as a whole, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by making the images so that only some players can notice that they are different.

<<L8-12>> Modification 12:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery related to the game times after the guaranteed game times, the life and death battle effect and the superior battle effect are selectively executed in the game times. Although it was a configuration, as a modification, in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery relating to the game times after the guaranteed game times, in the game times, among the life and death battle effect and the superior battle effect, Only one may be executed, and in the game times before the guaranteed game number, the other of the life and death battle effect and the superior battle effect may be executed. For example, if you win a big hit in the winning lottery related to the game number after the guaranteed game number, or if you win in the falling lottery related to the game number, perform a life-and-death battle effect in the game number and If you win the jackpot in the winning lottery related to the game times, or if you do not win in the falling lottery related to the game times and you do not win the jackpot in the winning lottery, perform the dominant battle effect in the game times It may be configured. In this configuration, the superior battle effect may be a battle effect having other contents as long as it is an effect different from the life-and-death battle effect, or may be an effect other than the battle effect having other contents.

<<L8-13>> Modification 13:
In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, after reaching the guaranteed game count, the reach (so-called out-reach) occurs in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and not winning the jackpot in the winning lottery. Although it was configured to perform a superior battle effect for the determined game times, as a modification, a reach is generated in the reach determination without winning the falling lottery and winning the jackpot in the winning lottery Then, even in the game times that are not determined, a superior battle effect may be performed. That is, regardless of whether or not a reach is generated in the reach determination, the superior battle effect may be performed in the game times in which the falling lottery is not won and the jackpot lottery is not won. According to this modification, the same effect as the effect described in the twelfth embodiment can be obtained.

<<L8-14>> Modification 14:
In the twelfth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to include three control devices such as the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100. However, instead of this, the main control device is provided. A configuration including two control devices such as a device and a sub control device may be provided. The sub control device may be configured to execute various processes executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in the twelfth embodiment. Further, in the twelfth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the various processes executed by each of the three control devices 60, 90, 100 need not be limited to the division described in the twelfth embodiment, and the three control processes may be performed. It suffices that the various processes in the twelfth embodiment can be executed by the devices 60, 90, 100 as a whole.

<<M>> Thirteenth Embodiment:
<<M1>> Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 702 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of special drawing lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning, at the time of reaching, etc. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game balls are moved from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board at predetermined intervals (in this embodiment, 0.6 seconds) in synchronization with the operation. Is fired. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. When the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is less than a predetermined value, that is, when the launch strength of the game ball is less than the predetermined value, the launched game ball flows down in the area on the left side of the game board when viewed from the front. The mode of launching the game ball in this case is also referred to as "left hitting". On the other hand, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is equal to or more than a predetermined value, that is, when the launch strength of the game ball is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the launched game ball flows down in the area on the right side of the game board when viewed from the front. The launching mode of the game ball in this case is also referred to as "right hitting".

On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. .. That is, the player turns on the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

FIG. 703 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a universal figure starting gate 35, a special electric winning device 34, a first special electric winning device 57, a second special electric winning device 58, and an outlet 43. In particular, in the present embodiment, one resin flow passage 301 through which the game ball can flow is provided in the right-side game area where the game ball can reach by “right hitting”, and the flow path 301 In the order from the upstream side, the normal electric prize winning device 34, the first special electric prize winning device 57, the second special electric prize winning device 58 and the outlet 43 are provided. In this embodiment, since no nail is provided on the path from the launch of the game ball to the flow passage 301, the "right-handed" game ball is moved to the flow passage 301 in a fixed trajectory. To reach. Further, in the present embodiment, since no nail is provided inside the flow passage 301, the respective game balls flowing inside the flow passage 301 have no variation in behavior and flow in the same manner. Hereinafter, each configuration provided in the game board 30 will be described.

The general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71. In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30.

The universal figure starting gate 35 is a gate provided with a through hole through which the game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes, the universal figure lottery, which is an internal lottery by the main controller 60, is executed. As a result of the universal figure lottery, if a universal figure is won, a universal electric open/close execution mode in which an ordinary electric accessory 34b, which will be described later, executes an open/close operation is started. The normal power switch opening/closing execution mode includes a normal power switch opening period, a normal power switch opening/closing processing period, and a normal power switch ending period. The Hoden opening period is a waiting period until the opening/closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is started, and the Hoden opening/closing process period is a period in which the opening/closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is actually executed. The ordinary electric ending period is a waiting period after the opening/closing process of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is completed and before the next universal figure lottery can be executed. Even if the game balls pass through the universal figure starting gate 35, the prize balls are not paid out. In the present embodiment, the universal figure starting gate 35 is provided in the lower center part of the game board 30. Further, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 32 is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 35 can enter. More specifically, the general winning opening 32 is provided just below the universal figure starting gate 35. In the following description, passing the game ball through the universal figure starting gate 35 is also referred to as "the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35".

The ordinary prize winning device 34 includes a special figure starting port 34a into which a game ball can enter and an ordinary electric auditors object 34b that functions as a shutter that opens and closes the entrance of the special figure starting port 34a.

The normal electric accessory 34b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the special figure starting port 34a, and when the normal electric opening/closing execution mode described above is started, In the open state, the ball can enter the starting port 34a.

In the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is configured by a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state, it protrudes forward of the game board 30 and its upper surface constitutes the bottom surface of the flow passage 301, The game ball is in a state in which it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member. On the other hand, in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is in a state of being stored behind the game board 30, and the game ball flowing through the flow passage 301 is provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. The ball can enter the starting opening 34a. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, and the protrusions reduce the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 34b of this embodiment is 0.7 seconds or more.

The special figure starting port 34a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and when the game ball enters, three game balls are paid out as a prize ball from the payout device 71, and the inside by the main controller 60. A special drawing lottery, which is a lottery, is executed. As a result of the special drawing lottery, if the special drawing big hit or the special drawing small hit is won, the special electric accessory (the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b) to be described later executes the special electric opening/closing operation. The mode is started. The special electric switching execution mode includes a special electric opening period, a special electric opening/closing processing period, and a special electric ending period. The special electric opening period is the waiting period until the opening/closing process of the special electric auditors is started, the special electric opening/closing process period is the period in which the opening/closing process of the special electric auditors is actually executed, and the special electric ending period is The waiting period until the next special figure lottery can be executed after the opening/closing process of the special electric accessory is completed. In the present embodiment, as a result of the special drawing lottery, the special drawing big hit and the miss are not set, but only the special drawing small hit is set. Then, in the present embodiment, as a result of the special drawing lottery, if the special drawing small hit is won, the special electric opening/closing execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b performs the opening/closing operation is started.

The first special electric winning device 57 includes a first special winning opening 57a into which a game ball can enter, a first special electric auditors object 57b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the first special winning opening 57a, and It is provided with a V winning opening 57av provided inside the big winning opening 57a.

The first special electric auditors product 57b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the first special winning opening 57a, and when the special electric opening/closing execution mode described above is started, the game ball Is in an open state in which the player can enter the first big winning opening 57a.

In the present embodiment, the first special electric accessory 57b is formed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state, it projects to the front of the game board 30, and its upper surface constitutes the bottom surface of the flow passage 301. And, the game ball is in a state in which it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member. On the other hand, in the open state, the first special electric accessory 57b is in a state of being stored behind the game board 30, and the game ball flowing through the flow passage 301 is provided below the first special electric accessory 57b. It is in a state in which it is possible to enter the first winning opening 57a. In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b, and the speed of the game ball flowing on the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b is reduced by the protrusions. .. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the first special electric accessory 57b of this embodiment is 1.0 second or more.

The first special winning opening 57a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter when the first special electric auditors object 57b is in an open state. When the game ball enters, 15 game balls are entered. It is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first special winning opening 57a.

The V winning opening 57av is a ball opening into which a game ball can enter. When the game ball enters, the V winning jackpot is won and the above-described special electric opening/closing execution mode is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 57av is provided inside the first big winning opening 57a, and the game ball that has entered the first big winning opening 57a is surely thereafter the V winning opening 57av. Is configured to enter. Then, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, a special electric open/close execution mode in which the second special electric accessory 58b described later executes the open/close operation is started. In the following description, entering a game ball into the V winning opening 57av is also referred to as “winning a V winning jackpot”.

The second special electric prize winning device 58 is provided with a second special winning opening 58a into which a game ball can enter, and a second special electric accessory 58b functioning as a shutter for opening and closing the entrance of the second special winning opening 58a. There is.

The second special electric auditors product 58b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second special winning opening 58a, and when the special electric opening/closing execution mode described above is started, the game ball Is in an open state in which the player can enter the second special winning opening 58a.

In the present embodiment, the second special electric accessory 58b is formed of a plate-shaped member, and in the closed state, it projects to the front of the game board 30 and its upper surface constitutes the bottom surface of the flow passage 301. And, the game ball is in a state in which it can flow on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member. On the other hand, in the open state, the second special electric accessory 58b is stored in the rear of the game board 30, and the game ball flowing through the flow passage 301 is provided below the second special electric accessory 58b. The state where the player can enter the second big winning opening 58a thus obtained can be entered.

The second special winning opening 58a is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter when the second special electric accessory 58b is in an open state. When the game ball enters, 15 game balls are entered. It is paid out from the payout device 71 as a prize ball. The above-mentioned V winning opening is not provided inside the second big winning opening 58a.

The outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30 and at the end of the flow passage 301, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43. .

The term "entered ball" means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening or a predetermined region, and the game ball is discharged from the game region PA after passing through the predetermined opening or the predetermined region. Not only this, but also a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the predetermined opening portion or the predetermined area. In addition, the entry of the game balls into the general winning opening 32, the special figure starting opening 34a, the first big winning opening 57a, the V winning opening 57av, and the second big winning opening 58a is also referred to as a winning.

Next, various display units provided on the game board 30 will be described.

The game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a special symbol display portion 37a.

The special symbol display unit 37a is a display unit that displays the special symbol in a variable display and a stop display. The special symbol means a symbol which is displayed in a variable manner and stopped when the special symbol lottery is executed triggered by the game ball entering the special symbol starting opening 34a. When the special figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting port 34a, the special symbol display unit 37a, as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery , Execute variable display of special symbols. After that, the special symbol display portion 37a stops and displays the special symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Below, the time from the start of variable display of the special symbols to the stop display on the special symbol display portion 37a is also referred to as special symbol variation time.

In the present embodiment, the special symbol display portion 37a is configured by a 7-segment display device in which seven segment light emitting portions are arranged in a figure eight shape. When the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the 7-segment display constituting the special symbol display portion 37a blinks in a predetermined mode, and then lights in a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special figure lottery. However, the special symbol display portion 37a is not limited to the 7-segment display device and may have another configuration.

In addition, from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a, the variable display ends and the stop display is made, and the period until the stop display ends is also called a special figure game time. That is, the special figure game times are one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the special figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game balls into the special figure starting port 34a. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 informs the player of the lottery result of one special figure lottery every one special figure game time. In addition, the time required for one special figure game time is also called a unit special figure game time. The unit special figure game time is the special figure variation time which is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a until the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery. It is composed of a special figure stop time, which is the time that is stopped and displayed.

In addition, a general pachinko machine is a special drawing lottery based on the entrance of the game ball when the game ball enters the special drawing starting opening 34a during execution of the special electric open/close execution mode or during the change display of the special symbol. It has a function to hold the execution of the special figure (also called special figure holding function), and is equipped with a special figure hold display section that displays information corresponding to the number of held special figure lottery held. The pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment does not have the special figure holding function described above and does not have the special figure holding display section.

The universal figure unit 38 includes a normal symbol display section 38a and a universal figure hold display section 38b.

The normal symbol display portion 38a is a display portion that displays the normal symbol in a variable display and a stop display. The ordinary symbol refers to a symbol which is displayed in a variable and stopped state when the universal figure lottery is executed triggered by the game ball entering the universal figure starting gate 35. When the universal figure lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the universal figure starting gate 35, the normal symbol display unit 38a displays as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result of the general figure lottery is performed. , Ordinary symbol variable display is executed. After that, the normal symbol display portion 38a stops and displays the normal symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the general symbol lottery. In the following, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the stop display on the normal symbol display portion 38a is also referred to as the normal symbol variation time.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display portion 38a is composed of a 7-segment display device in which seven segment light emitting portions are arranged in a figure eight shape. When the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, the 7-segment display constituting the normal symbol display portion 38a blinks in a predetermined manner and then lights in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result of the universal figure lottery. However, the normal symbol display portion 38a is not limited to the 7-segment display device and may have another configuration.

In addition, from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a, the variable display ends and the stop display is displayed, and the period until the stop display ends is also referred to as a normal game time. That is, the universal figure game time is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the universal figure lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the universal figure starting gate 35. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 informs the player of the lottery result of one public figure lottery every one general figure game time. In addition, the time required for one universal figure game time is also called a unit universal figure game time. The unit figure playing time is the figure variation time which is the time from the start of the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display section 38a until the result of the figure drawing is stopped and the result of the figure drawing lottery. It is constituted by the time of the normal display, which is the time when the display is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35 during the execution of the ordinary electric open/close execution mode or during the variation display of the ordinary symbol, the universal figure lottery based on the entry of the relevant game ball is performed. It has a function of suspending execution (also called a universal figure holding function), and is provided with a general figure holding display section 38b for displaying information corresponding to the number of held general figure lottery held.

The universal figure hold display unit 38b is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of pending hold of the universal figure lottery. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four (4 times) universal figure lottery based on the entry of game balls into the universal figure starting gate 35 is suspended. In addition, in the present embodiment, the universal figure holding display section 38b is composed of four LED lamps, and the number of LED lamps corresponding to the number of holdings of the general figure lottery is turned on.

The round display unit 39 is a display unit that displays information corresponding to the number of round games executed in the special electric open/close execution mode. Round game means either that a predetermined time (maximum opening time) that has been set in advance has elapsed, or that a predetermined upper limit number (maximum number of entered balls) of game balls has entered the special winning opening. It is a game that keeps the special electric accessory open until one of the conditions is satisfied. The number of round games differs depending on the type of each special map that triggered the transition to the special electric switching execution mode. The round display unit 39 starts display corresponding to the number of round games at the start of the special electric open/close processing period in the special electric open/close execution mode, and ends the display at the end of the special electric open/close processing period. In the present embodiment, the round display unit 39 is configured by arranging two 7-segment displays in which seven segment light emitting units are arranged in a figure eight shape. However, the round display unit 39 is not limited to the two 7-segment displays and may have another configuration.

The special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 described above are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result such as a device, a CRT or a dot matrix display.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100 described later. The configuration of the symbol display device 41 included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41, when the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a or the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a is displayed in a variable manner, performs variable display of the decorative symbol accordingly. Further, the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol, but also performs the effect display in the special electric open/close execution mode or the normal electric open/close execution mode. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 704 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 704(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 704(A), the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 7 are variably displayed as decorative symbols on the symbol display device 41. As the decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner, it is also possible to adopt a pattern in which a symbol such as a character is added to each of the symbols 1 to 7.

FIG. 704(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the present embodiment, the main display area MA is a large area in the center of the display surface 41a, and the sub display area SA is an area smaller than the main display area MA on the upper right side of the display surface 41a.

In the main display area MA, three decorative symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the decorative symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the decorative symbols of the numbers 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 704(A) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Is scrolled from top to bottom or from bottom to top with periodicity. Then, as shown in FIG. 704(B), after the variable display by scrolling, one decorative design for each decorative design row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

In the present embodiment, a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, and when the regular symbol display section 38a starts the variable display of the regular symbols, the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol columns Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined periodicity. The variable display that scrolls in the direction of starts. Then, each scrolling decorative design is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the decorative design string Z1, the decorative design string Z3, and the decorative design string Z2. Then, in synchronization with the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 38a, one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for each of the decorative symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the result of the universal figure lottery by the main control device 60 is a universal figure, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol sequence is finished and the display is stopped, a predetermined predetermined value is set. A combination of decorative symbols is formed on the activated line L1. For example, the same combination of decorative patterns is formed on the activated line L1. The mode of variable display of the decorative pattern of each decorative pattern row is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, and the number of decorative pattern rows, the number of effective lines, the scrolling direction of the decorative pattern in each decorative pattern row, each Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns, such as the number of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern row.

Next, the reach in the decorative pattern will be described. Reach is a possibility that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a hit is formed on the activated line L1 in a part of the plurality of decorative symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. There is a display state in which a combination of certain decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in that state, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the remaining decorative symbol columns. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns corresponding to the hit means a combination of the same decorative patterns. Specifically, for example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 704(B), the decorative symbol "7" is first stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol column Z1, and then the decorative symbol column in the decorative symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the same decorative pattern "7" as Z1. In the state where the reach line is formed, the decorative pattern is scrolled in the decorative pattern row Z2 (variably displayed. ) The state is called reach. Then, when the hit occurs, the same decorative design as the decorative design forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the decorative design row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, the decorative design is variably displayed in the remaining decorative design row, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to perform the reach effect. Alternatively, a combination of decorative patterns in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to provide a reach effect. ..

In the sub display area SA, as in the main display area MA, three decorative symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the variable display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display portion 37a, the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA is started along with the start of the variable display. The variable display of is started. Then, in synchronization with the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display portion 37a, one decorative symbol for each decorative symbol row Z4 to Z6 is stopped and displayed on the activated line L2. That is, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA is synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a.

As shown in FIG. 704(B), the universal figure hold display area Dn is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the public figure reservation display area Dn, the number of public figure lottery (the number of reserved public figure lottery) held based on the entry of the game ball into the public figure start gate 35 is displayed. The reserved universal drawing lottery is an unexecuted universal drawing lottery and refers to a general drawing lottery in which the variable display of the ordinary symbols for notifying the result of the general drawing lottery has not been started. In the present embodiment, the number of pending universal figure lottery that can be reserved based on the entry of game balls into the universal figure starting gate 35 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the universal figure pending display area Dn, the pending display corresponding to the four pending universal figure lottery is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 704(B), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the normal symbol displayed in the normal symbol display portion 38a are performed. The normal figure synchronization display unit Sync1 and the special symbol synchronization display unit Sync2 that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit 37a are provided. Specifically, when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display portion 38a, the universal symbol synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a blinking display, and the normal symbol display portion 38a displays the normal symbol in a stopped state. In this case, the universal figure synchronization display unit Sync1 is lit up. Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol display portion 37a, the special symbol synchronization display portion Sync2 displays a blink, and when the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol display portion 37a, The special figure synchronization display section Sync2 is lit up.

In the present embodiment, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the general figure reservation display area Dn, the general figure synchronization display section Sync1, and the special figure synchronization display section. Although the Sync2 is displayed, the display surface 41a may be configured such that some or all of these displays are not displayed.

<<M2>> Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

FIG. 705 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively.

The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various types such as a general winning opening 32, a special drawing starting opening 34a, a universal drawing starting gate 35, a first big winning opening 57a, a V winning opening 57av, and a second big winning opening 58a. Various detection sensors provided at the entrance of the are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down in the game area PA has entered each ball entrance. Further, the MPU 62 executes the special drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing starting opening 34a, and the general drawing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the universal drawing starting gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, a first special electric auditors product driving unit 57c that opens and closes the first special electric auditors product 57b and a second special electric auditors product drive that opens and closes the second special electric auditors product 58b. The main display unit 45 is connected to the unit 58c, the normal electric accessory driving unit 34c for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 34b. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, the MPU 62, in the special electric open/close execution mode, opens or closes the first special electric auditors product 57b or the second special electric auditors product 58b. The drive control of the accessory drive unit 58c is executed. Further, in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the normal electric auditors product driving unit 34c so that the normal electric auditors product 34b is opened/closed. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the special symbol display portion 37a in the main display portion 45 when executing the special drawing lottery, and the round in the main display portion 45 when executing the special electric opening/closing execution mode. The display control of the display unit 39 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 executes display control of the normal symbol display section 38a in the main display section 45 when the ordinary figure lottery is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one gaming ball is transmitted from the main control device 60, and then to the special figure starting opening 34a. When the entry of the game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the game to the first big winning opening 57a or the second big winning opening 58a. When the entry of a ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is configured to be fired on the game board, provided that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63b of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the decorative symbol on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped and displayed, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. At the same time, the presence/absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined by determining the variable time of the decorative symbol. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 706 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for special figure lottery, general figure lottery, and the like. The various counters are used when the MPU 62 carries out special drawing lottery and general drawing lottery. Specifically, the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are used in the special figure lottery. Further, the special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a. Further, the universal figure valid/invalid determination counter Cn1 and the universal figure type determination counter Cn2 are used in the universal figure lottery. In addition, the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is used for the universal figure reach determination as to whether or not to reach when the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41 is fluctuated. Further, the general symbol fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a. The random number initial value counter Cini is used when setting the initial values of the special figure appropriateness determination counter Cs1 and the universal figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1.

Each of the counters Cs1 to Cs4, Cn1 to Cn4, and Cini is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a special figure determination area 64c, a general figure reservation area 64d, and a general figure determination area 64e. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special figure starting opening 34a, the respective values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 at the timing of the entry are stored in the special figure determination area 64c. . Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, the respective values of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1, the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, and the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 at the timing of the entry. It is chronologically stored in the universal figure holding area 64d.

The details of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 will be described. The special figure win/no-judgment counter Cs1 is used when it is determined whether or not to win per special figure (large special figure win or small special figure win). The special figure winning/non-winning determination, which is a determination as to whether or not to win the special figure, is a part of the above-described special drawing lottery. The special figure validity determination counter Cs1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. The random number initial value counter Cini is a loop counter similar to the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 (value=0 to 1199).

The special figure hit/disapproval determination counter Cs1 is periodically updated, and the game ball is in the special figure starting opening 34a in a situation where the special electric open/close execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol of the special symbol display portion 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner. When a ball is entered, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c at the timing of the ball.

The value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64c is collated with a special figure validity determination table stored in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 to win the special figure big hit or the special figure small hit. It is determined whether to do. As will be described later, since the special figure big hit and the special figure miss are not set in the special figure hit determination table of the present embodiment, the special figure small hit is won with a probability of 100%.

Next, details of the special figure classification determination counter Cs2 will be described. The special symbol type determination counter Cs2 is used when determining the type of the special symbol. The special symbol type determination, which is the determination of the special symbol type, is part of the special symbol lottery described above. The special figure type determination counter Cs2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure classification determination counter Cs2 is regularly updated, and the game ball is in the special figure starting port 34a in a situation where the special electric open/close execution mode is not being executed and the special symbol of the special symbol display portion 37a is not being displayed in a variable manner. When a ball is entered, the updated value is stored in the special figure determination area 64c together with the value of the special figure validity determination counter described above at the timing of the relevant ball.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 stored in the special figure determination area 64c to perform the special figure validity determination. Then, from the plurality of special figure classification determination tables stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, one special figure classification determination table corresponding to the result of the special figure validity determination is selected, and the special figure determination area 64c is selected. The value of the special figure type determination counter Cs2 stored in is compared with the selected special figure type determination table to determine the type of the special symbol. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the determined type of the special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the results of the special drawing hit determination are all the special drawing small hits, only one kind of the special drawing type determination table for the special drawing small hits is prepared.

Next, details of the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 will be described. The special symbol variation type determination counter Cs4 is used when determining the variation time of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a and the variation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is configured to be incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process, and the updated value is in the special symbol display portion 37a. It is acquired immediately before the start of variable display of special symbols. Then, the value of the acquired special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 is collated with the special figure variation time table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the special figure variation time.

Next, the details of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 will be described. The universal figure winning/disapproving determination counter Cn1 is used when it is determined whether or not a winning is won per universal figure. The universal figure winning/non-winning determination, which is a determination as to whether or not to win the regular figure, is a part of the above-mentioned universal drawing lottery. The universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 makes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini at that time is read as the initial value of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1.

The universal figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 35, the updated value is stored in the universal figure holding area 64d at the timing of the passage.

The value of the universal figure valid/invalid judgment counter Cn1 is stored in the universal figure holding area 64d up to four every time a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, and moves to the universal figure determination area 64e in the stored order. Then, the value of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 that has moved to the universal figure determination area 64e is collated with the universal figure validity determination table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not to win the universal figure. Is determined.

Next, details of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2 will be described. The universal symbol type determination counter Cn2 is used when determining the type of a normal symbol. The ordinary figure type determination, which is the determination of the type of the ordinary symbol, is a part of the above-mentioned ordinary figure lottery. The universal figure type determination counter Cn2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The universal figure classification determination counter Cn2 is regularly updated, and when a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, the updated value of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 is set at the timing of the entry. It is stored in the universal figure holding area 64d together with the value.

The value of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 is stored in the universal figure holding area 64d up to four whenever a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, and in the stored order, the above-described universal figure validity determination counter Cn1. It moves to the universal figure determination area 64e together with the value.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 stored in the universal figure determination area 64e to perform the universal figure validity determination. Then, from the plurality of universal figure type determination tables stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, one universal figure type determination table corresponding to the result of the universal figure validity determination is selected, and the universal figure determination area 64e is selected. The value of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in is compared with the selected universal figure type determination table to determine the type of the ordinary symbol. Then, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display device to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display portion 38a based on the determined type of the normal symbol.

Next, details of the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 will be described. The universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is used when it is determined whether or not reach is generated when the result of the universal figure hit/miss determination is not a universal figure hit. The universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0.

The universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is regularly updated, and when a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, the updated value is the above-described universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 at the timing of the relevant ball. It is stored in the universal figure holding area 64d together with the value of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2.

The value of the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 is stored in the universal figure holding area 64d up to four times each time a game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, and in the stored order, the above described universal figure validity determination counter Cn1 and It moves to the universal figure determination area 64e together with the value of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2.

When the MPU 62 determines in the general/universal figure appropriateness judgment that the general-purpose figure is not hit, the MPU 62 stores the value of the general-purpose figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the special figure determination area 64c in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not reach is generated by collating with the universal figure reach determination table. In addition, when the result of the universal figure acceptance/rejection determination in the universal figure lottery is a universal figure, the MPU 62 determines that the reach has occurred regardless of the value of the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3.

Next, details of the universal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 will be described. The general symbol fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is used when determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 41. The universal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is configured to be incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The ordinary figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process, and the updated value is in the normal symbol display portion 38a. Usually obtained just before the start of variable display of symbols. Then, the obtained value of the universal figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is collated with the universal figure fluctuation time table stored in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 to determine the universal figure fluctuation time.

Next, the special figure validity determination table will be described.

FIG. 707 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special drawing validity determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the special figure validity determination counter Cs1. Then, based on the acquired value of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 and the special figure validity determination table, the special figure validity determination, which is a determination as to whether or not to win per special figure (special figure big hit or special figure small hit). Done.

As shown in FIG. 707, in the special figure validity determination table of the present embodiment, all the values 0 to 1199 out of the 1200 values of 0 to 1199 of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 are the special figure small hits. It is set as the value to be won, and the value to be won and the value to be missed from the special map are not set. That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the special drawing success/failure determination is 100% probability that the special drawing small hit is won.

The “special map small hit” is a determination result that triggers the start of the special electric switching execution mode.

Next, the special figure classification determination table will be described.

FIG. 708 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special figure classification determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the special figure type determination counter Cs2. Then, the special figure classification determination table is selected in accordance with the result of the above-mentioned special figure appropriateness determination, and by the selected special figure classification determination table and the value of the acquired special figure classification determination counter Cs2, the special symbol The special figure type determination for determining the type is performed. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, only the special figure small hit is set as the result of the special figure hit determination, so the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the special figure small determination for the special figure small hit. It has only a table.

As shown in FIG. 708, in the special figure classification determination table of the present embodiment, among the 100 values of 0 to 99 of the special figure classification determination counter Cs2, 40 values of 0 to 39 are special symbols A( The special figure small hit A) is set, and the remaining 60 values of 40 to 99 are set to the special symbol B (special figure small hit B). The types of special symbols set in the special symbol type determination table are both triggers for execution of the special electric switching execution mode, but are selected when the special electric switching execution mode is executed for each special symbol type. The types of special electric switching scenarios are different.

The special electric switching scenario is a control program that stores the control mode of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the special electric switching execution mode. The opening/closing mode of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b in the execution mode is different.

Next, the special electric switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 709 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the special electric switching scenario selection table.

FIG. 709(A) is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special electric small switch special electricity switching scenario selection table. The special-drawing small-battery special-power opening/closing scenario selection table is a table for selecting a special-power opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of the special symbol when the special-drawing small hit is won.

As shown in FIG. 709(A), in the special figure small hit special electricity switching scenario selection table of the present embodiment, the special figure small hit special electricity opening/closing scenario A is set in correspondence with the special symbol A. In correspondence with the design B, the special electric small contact special electric switching scenario B is set. That is, when the special figure small hit is won in the special figure hit determination, and the result of the special figure type judgment is the special symbol A, the special figure small hit special electricity opening/closing scenario A is executed when the special electricity opening/closing execution mode is executed. Is selected, on the other hand, if the special figure small hit in the special figure hit determination, the result of the special figure type judgment is the special symbol B, for special figure small hit when the special electric switching execution mode is executed The special electric switching scenario B will be selected.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric figure small hit special electric opening/closing scenario A is started, first, the special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then the special electric opening/closing processing period is started. In the special electric open/close processing period, the round game in which the first special electric auditors product 57b is opened is executed once (one round). And, the number of times of opening the first special electric auditors object 57b in one round game is one, and in one round game, the first special electric auditors object 57b is opened for 1.0 seconds which is the maximum opening time. That is, either the condition that the 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of entered balls, enter the first special winning opening 57a, the process ends. When the special electric switching process period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts. It should be noted that it is virtually impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first special winning opening 57a while the first special electric auditors object 57b is opened for 1.0 second, so a special map small hit special electric opening/closing The total time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on the scenario A is fixed to 2.0 seconds.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric figure small hit special electric opening/closing scenario B is started, first, the special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then the special electric opening/closing processing period is started. In the special electric open/close processing period, the round game in which the first special electric auditors product 57b is opened is executed once (one round). And, the number of times of opening the first special electric auditors object 57b in one round game is once, and in one round game, the first special electric auditors object 57b is opened for 1.1 seconds which is the maximum opening time. That is, either the condition that the 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of entered balls, enter the first special winning opening 57a, the process ends. When the special electric switching process period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts. In addition, since it is virtually impossible for 10 game balls to enter the first special winning opening 57a during the opening of the first special electric auditors object 57b for 1.1 seconds, the special electric opening/closing for special figure small hit The total time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on scenario B will be fixed at 2.1 seconds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started even when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av in addition to the case where the special drawing small hit is won in the special drawing hit determination.

FIG. 709(B) is an explanatory view showing the contents of the special prize opening/closing scenario selection table for V winning jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special winning opening 57a and enters the V winning opening 57av as it is while the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit special electric opening/closing scenario A is being executed. In the case of, the special prize opening/closing execution mode based on the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V prize winning jackpot is started after the special prize opening/closing execution mode for the V winning prize is won. To be done. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first special winning opening 57a and enters the V winning opening 57av as it is while the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit special electric opening/closing scenario B is being executed, After winning the V winning jackpot B, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is finished, the special winning opening/closing scenario B for V winning big jackpot is selected, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V special winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B is started.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot is started, the special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started first, and then the special electric opening/closing processing period is started. In the special electric opening/closing processing period, the round game in which the second special electric auditors product 58b is opened is executed 16 times (16 rounds). Then, the number of times the second special electric auditors product 58b is opened in one round game is one, and one round game opens the second special electric auditors product 58b for 5.0 seconds which is the maximum opening time. That is, either, or 10 gaming balls, which is the maximum number of entered balls, enter the second special winning opening 58a. Then, the closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 3.0 seconds. When the special electric switching process period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special prize opening/closing scenario B for V winning jackpot is started, first, the special electric opening period of 0.5 seconds is started, and then the special electric opening/closing process period is started. In the special electric open/close processing period, the round game in which the second special electric auditors product 58b is opened is executed 12 times (12 rounds). Then, the number of times the second special electric auditors product 58b is opened in one round game is one, and one round game opens the second special electric auditors product 58b for 5.0 seconds which is the maximum opening time. That is, either, or 10 gaming balls, which is the maximum number of entered balls, enter the second special winning opening 58a. Then, the closing period (special electric interval period) of the second special electric accessory 58b during the round game is set to 5.9 seconds. When the special electric switching process period ends, the special electric ending period of 0.5 seconds starts.

As described above, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, the maximum opening time for opening one round in the special electric opening/closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of entered balls is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, during the opening period of the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds, only about 8 game balls are allowed to enter the second special winning opening 58a. I can't. In other words, in the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is 5.0 seconds or longer by ten game balls entering the second special electric accessory 58b during one opening. Is configured so that it will not close in a short time. As a result, in the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds regardless of the manner in which the player shoots the game ball. The time length (total required time) of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special electric open/close scenario A for V prize jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period)+5.0 seconds (1 round)×16 (number of rounds) +3.0 seconds (special electric power interval period)×15 (interval number)+0.5 seconds (special electric power ending period), which is fixed to 126.0 seconds.

Similarly, in the special prize opening and closing scenario B for V prize jackpot, the maximum opening time for opening one round in the special electric opening and closing process period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of entered balls is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval is 0.6 seconds, only eight game balls can be entered into the second special winning opening 58a at the maximum during the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds. That is, even in the special prize opening/closing scenario B for V winning jackpot, 10 second game balls enter the second special electric accessory 58b during one opening of the second special electric accessory 58b, so that the second special electric accessory 58b is 5.0 seconds. It is configured so that it will not close in less than a shorter time. As a result, in the special prize opening/closing scenario B for V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric accessory 58b is fixed to 5.0 seconds regardless of the manner in which the player shoots the game ball. , V winning jackpot special electricity switching scenario B based on the time length (total required time) of the special electricity switching execution mode is 0.5 seconds (special electricity opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 round) x 12 (number of rounds) )+5.9 seconds (special electricity interval period)×11 (interval number)+0.5 seconds (special electricity ending period), which is fixed at 125.9 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time length of the special electric switching execution mode is irrespective of whether the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot or the special electric opening/closing scenario for V winning jackpot is selected. The total (total required time) is 126.0 seconds or less. Then, the time length (total required time) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario A for V prize jackpot and the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric switching scenario B for V prize jackpot (total required time) The difference with time) is as small as about 0.1 second.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric switch execution mode based on the special electric small switch special electric open/close scenario A and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit special electric open/close execution mode A The total time (126.0 seconds) and the total time (128.0 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as “total time A”) is the total time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on the special figure small hit special electric switching scenario B. The time (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the time (2.1 seconds) and the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for V prize jackpot, hereinafter "total time B" (Also called)). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

Next, the universal figure valid/invalid judgment table will be described.

FIG. 710 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the universal figure validity determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, one value is obtained from the values within the range of 0 to 1199 in the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1. Then, based on the acquired value of the universal figure valid/invalid determination counter Cn1 and the universal figure valid/invalid determination table, a universal figure valid/invalid determination is performed to determine whether or not to win per universal figure.

As shown in FIG. 710, in the universal figure validity determination table of the present embodiment, among the 1200 values of 0 to 1199 of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1, four values of 0 to 3 are per universal figure. It is set as a winning value, and the other values are set as outliers. In other words, in the present embodiment, the result of the general/universal figure winning/judging determination is a winning per a general figure with a probability of 1/300.

The “universal figure hit” is a determination result that triggers the start of the universal electric switching execution mode. On the other hand, "outside the universal figure" is a determination result that does not trigger the start of the universal switching operation mode.

Next, the universal figure type determination table will be described.

FIG. 711 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the universal figure type determination table. As described above, when the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, one value is acquired from the values within the range of 0 to 99 in the universal figure type determination counter Cn2. Then, the universal figure type determination table is selected according to the result of the universal figure appropriateness determination described above, and by the selected universal figure type determination table and the value of the acquired universal figure appropriateness determination counter Cn1, the normal symbol The universal figure type determination for determining the type is performed.

As a result of the above-mentioned general/universal figure appropriateness judgment, if it is judged to be a general figure, the general pattern type determination table 1 is selected, while if the result of the general/universal figure validity judgment is judged to be a general figure, it is a general figure. The type determination table 2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 711(A), in the universal figure type determination table 1 of the present embodiment, among the 100 values of 0 to 99 of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, 40 values of 0 to 39 are stored. Normal symbol A (A per ordinary figure) is set, 20 values of 40 to 59 are set to ordinary symbol B (B per ordinary figure), and 15 values of 60 to 74 are ordinary symbols It is set to C (C per ordinary figure), 15 values of 75 to 89 are set to the normal pattern D (D per ordinary figure), and 5 values of 90 to 94 are normally the symbol E ( Per figure is set to E), three values of 95-97 are set to the normal pattern F (F per figure), and two values of 98 to 99 are normal pattern G (the general figure) Hit G) is set. The types of ordinary symbols set in the universal symbol type determination table 1 are both triggers for execution of the universal electrical switch execution mode, but for each type of regular symbol, the regular electrical switch execution mode is executed. The type of POD switching scenario selected is different. The normal electric opening/closing scenario is a control program in which the control mode of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the general electric opening/closing execution mode is stored, and the ordinary electric role in the general electric opening/closing execution mode is selected depending on the type of the general electric opening/closing scenario selected. The mode of opening and closing the object 34b is different.

As shown in FIG. 711(B), in the universal figure type determination table 2 of the present embodiment, among the 100 values of 0 to 99 of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, all 100 values are normal symbols. It is set to Z (unusual). That is, when it is determined that the regular symbol is out of the normal state in the regular symbol determination, the type of the regular symbol is determined to be the regular symbol Z.

Next, the normal electric switching scenario selection table will be described.

FIG. 712 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the normal electric switching scenario selection table. The normal electric opening/closing scenario selection table is a table for selecting a normal electric opening/closing scenario corresponding to the type of a normal pattern when a winning per ordinary drawing is won.

As shown in FIG. 712, in the normal electricity switching scenario selection table of the present embodiment, normal electricity switching scenarios A to G are set corresponding to the normal symbols A to G, respectively. That is, when the universal figure is won per universal figure in the universal figure valid/invalid determination, and the result of the universal figure type determination is the normal symbols A to G, respectively, the universal battery opening/closing scenario A to G is executed when the universal battery opening/closing execution mode is executed. G will be selected respectively. Hereinafter, the details of the normal power switching scenarios A to G will be described.

When the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal power switching scenario A is started, first, the normal power switching opening period of 5.0 seconds is started, and then the normal power switching processing period is started. During the normal electrical switching processing period, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened once, and the opening time for each is set to 0.8 seconds. When the POD opening and closing process period ends, the POD ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. In addition, during the normal electric opening and closing process period, when 10 game balls, which are the maximum number of entered balls, enter the special figure starting port 34a, the ordinary electric auditors object 34b is one opening time 0. Although it will be in a closed state even before 8 seconds have passed and the normal electric opening and closing process period will end, in the present embodiment, the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so The maximum number of game balls, 10 game balls, is configured not to enter the special figure starting port 34a during the opening/closing process.

When the normal power switching operation mode based on the normal power switching scenario B is started, first, the normal power switching opening period of 5.0 seconds is started, and then the normal power switching processing period is started. In the normal electric opening and closing process period, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened twice, the opening time of one time is 0.8 seconds, the total opening time is 1.6 seconds, and the normal electric accessory between the opening The closing period (normal power transmission interval period) of 34b is set to 135.0 seconds. When the POD opening and closing process period ends, the POD ending period of 140.0 seconds starts. In addition, during the normal electric opening and closing process period, when 10 game balls, which is the maximum number of entered balls, enter the special figure starting port 34a, the ordinary electric auditors object 34b has a total opening time of 1.6. Even before seconds have elapsed, it will be in a closed state, and the normal electric opening and closing processing period will end, but in the present embodiment, the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the normal electric opening and closing processing The maximum number of game balls, 10 game balls, is configured not to enter the special figure starting port 34a during the period. The same applies to the normal switching scenarios C to G described below.

Compared with the normal electric switching scenario B, the normal electric switching scenarios C to G differ only in the number of times the general electric accessory 34b is opened and the total opening time during the general electric opening and closing processing period. Same as scenario B. Specifically, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened during the normal electric opening and closing process period of the normal electric opening and closing scenario C is 3, and the normal electric auditors product 34b is opened during the normal electric opening and closing process period of the normal electric opening and closing scenario D. The number of times is 4, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric Auditor product 34b during the ordinary electric opening/closing processing period of the ordinary electric opening/closing scenario E is 5, and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b during the ordinary electric opening/closing processing period of the ordinary electric opening/closing scenario F is Is 6 times, and the normal electric accessory 34b is opened 7 times during the normal power switching process period of the normal power switching scenario G.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the time length (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (normal power interval period) and the normal length of the normal power ending period (140. 0 seconds) is the total required time (126.0 seconds) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario B for V prize jackpot. It is set to a time longer than the total required time (125.9 seconds). Furthermore, the time length (135.0 seconds) of the closing period (Uden interval time) and the time length (140.0 seconds) of the Hoden ending period set in the Hoden switching scenario are both , And is set to a time longer than the summed time A (128.0 seconds) and the summed time B (128.0 seconds). The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described later.

In the following description, the special figure small hit in the special figure hit determination, and the special symbol A is determined in the special figure type determination, "to win the special figure small hit A in the special drawing lottery" Express. The same applies to the special symbol B. In addition, the fact that a general figure is won in the universal figure acceptance judgment and the ordinary symbol A is determined in the general figure type determination is also expressed as “winning per ordinary figure A in the general figure lottery”. The same applies to the normal symbols B to G.

<<M3>> Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 713 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

The sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90 includes an MPU 92, which is an arithmetic unit that controls the entire sound emission control device 90, and a speaker 46 that generates a sound signal and based on the generated sound signal. A sound output LSI 97 for driving a sound and outputting a sound, and a voice data ROM 98 which is a memory storing various voice data are mounted. The voice data ROM 98 is connected to the sound output LSI 97, and the sound output LSI 97 is connected to the MPU 92 via a signal line.

The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The sound output LSI 97 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 92 and outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Specifically, when the sound output LSI 97 receives a reproduction start command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound to start the reproduction instructed by the reproduction start command, and outputs the audio data corresponding to the specified sound for the audio data. It reads from the ROM 98 and generates a sound to be reproduced. Then, the sound output LSI 97 outputs the generated sound from the speaker 46. Further, when the sound output LSI 97 receives the reproduction end command from the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 97 specifies the sound to be ended in the reproduction instructed by the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

The sound output LSI 97 has 16 channels of audio channels, and simultaneously generates up to 16 sounds, synthesizes (mixes) them, and then outputs them from the speaker 46. In addition, the sound output LSI 97 can set the output of the sound being reproduced for each audio channel to mute, or cancel the mute setting, according to an instruction from the MPU 92. The sound channel set to mute reads the corresponding sound data in the sound output LSI 97 and generates a sound to be reproduced. However, when mixing with sound of another sound channel, the sound channel of the sound channel of the mute setting is selected. The sound level is set to 0 or the sound of the sound channel of the mute setting target is not input to the mixing circuit so that the sound of the sound channel of the mute setting target is not mixed. As a result, the sound of the audio channel for which the mute is set is not output from the speaker 46.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and also receives a signal indicating the operation mode of the effect operation button 24. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected to the output side.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

<<M4>> Outline of processing by game machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 714 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. 715 and 716 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment.

A player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment first operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35 provided in the lower center of the game board 30. Adjust the launch strength of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 714, when the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the universal symbol lottery described above, and the ordinary symbol display portion 38a displays the variation of the ordinary symbol. Is started (time t1). Further, the voice emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 with the start of the variable display of the ordinary symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a.

After that, when the set universal figure variation time has elapsed, the main control device 60 causes the ordinary symbol display section 38a to stop and display the changing ordinary symbol in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, and emits a voice. The control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative design in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the design display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the general drawing lottery (time t2). The player confirms the display mode of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 38a or the display mode of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, thereby performing the lottery in the general drawing lottery. You can recognize the result. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the result of the universal drawing lottery is a universal drawing, the decorative symbols that are changing in the main display area MA have the same numbers in the three decorative symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The display is stopped in a certain display mode (for example, "555"). On the other hand, in the case where the result of the universal figure lottery is out of common area, the display pattern of the changing decorative symbols in the main display area MA in which the numbers of the three decorative symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are not the same (are not aligned) ( For example, "135") is displayed to stop.

The player repeatedly inserts the game ball into the universal figure starting gate 35 until a regular figure is won in the universal figure lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the general winning opening 32 is provided downstream of the universal starting gate 35, the game ball entering the universal starting gate 35 enters the general winning opening 32 as it is, Individual game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

As a result of the drawing, if the winning is made per drawing, the main control device 60 displays the changing ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display portion 38a in correspondence with the type per ordinary symbol (type of ordinary symbol). It is stopped and displayed in a mode, then, the normal electric switching scenario corresponding to the type per ordinary drawing (type of ordinary symbol) is selected, and the normal electric switching execution mode based on the selected normal electric switching scenario is started (time t2). On the other hand, the sound emission control device 90, the decorative pattern that is changing in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode executed after the winning per ordinary drawing. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the number of times of opening.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the case of winning the per-universal figure A in which the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the ordinary-electric opening/closing execution mode is one, the changing decorative pattern is changed to "1↓1". The display is displayed in a display mode such as "(a display mode in which only the decorative patterns in the central decorative pattern row Z2 are scrolled) to generate reach, and then the display is stopped in the display mode such as "111". Further, for example, in the case where the ordinary electric auditors object 34b is opened twice in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode and the winning figure B is won, the decorative pattern being changed is changed as shown in FIG. 715(A). After the reach is generated by displaying in a display mode such as “2↓2”, as shown in FIG. 715(B), the stop mode is displayed in a display mode such as “222”. Therefore, when the reach occurs in the decorative pattern which is changing in the main display area MA, the player opens the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode which is executed when the player wins the general figure. Since it is possible to recognize, it is possible to give the player not only an expectation as to whether or not to win the prize per universal figure, but also an expectation as to the number of times the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b has been opened after winning. .. The reason why the player has an expectation for the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened will be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 714, a case will be described below in which, as a result of the universal figure lottery, B is won per universal figure.

As a result of the universal figure lottery, if B is won per universal figure, the main control device 60 starts the universal battery opening/closing execution mode based on the universal battery opening/closing scenario B described above, and the universal battery opening period of the universal battery opening/closing execution mode. Is started (time t2). As described above, in the normal-electrical opening/closing execution mode based on the normal-electrical opening/closing scenario B, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened twice. When the Hoden opening period is started, the voice emission control device 90 starts the Hoden opening effect and the right-handed notification process. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 716(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as a normal electric opening effect, and a special electric opening/closing execution mode (to be described later) based on a V winning jackpot is described. Perform an effect that suggests that a so-called jackpot) will occur twice. In the right-handing notification processing according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 716(A), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is an image in which a character string such as "right-handed" and an arrow pointing to the right are combined. The hitting instruction image GD1 is displayed, and the speaker 46 outputs a voice such as “right hit!”.

The player who recognizes that the player should "right hit" by the right hit notification process operates the operation handle 25 to perform "right hit". When the player performs “right hit”, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 reaches the flow passage 301 provided on the right side of the game area PA of the game board 30. Here, in the present embodiment, it is configured that it takes 0.7 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the closed-state ordinary electric accessory 34b. Then, in the present embodiment, the game balls are shot from the game ball firing mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, after the start of the right-handed notification process, if the player continues to "right-handed", a state in which at least one game ball is passing over the closed electric electric accessory 34b (the game ball is It will be listed).

Then, when the normal electric opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts the normal electric opening/closing processing period and starts the first opening of the normal electric accessory 34b (time t3). Then, the game ball passing over the ordinary electric accessory 34b falls below the opened ordinary electric accessory 34b, and into the special figure starting port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Enter the ball (time t4).

When the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the main control device 60 executes the special figure lottery described above to start the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display portion 37a, and the sound emission control device 90 is The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 (time t4). In the present embodiment, the special figure variation time is set to 0.5 seconds each time regardless of the result of the special figure lottery.

After that, when the set special symbol fluctuation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, the main control device 60 responds the special symbol which is changing in the special symbol display section 37a to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The audio emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative symbol in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special drawing lottery. (Time t5). As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure lottery is configured to always win the special figure small hit (special figure small hit A or special figure small hit B). Is a special figure small hit A, the sound emission control device 90 stops and displays the changing decorative pattern in the sub-display area SA in a display mode such as "777", and the special figure lottery result shows that the special figure is small. In the case of the hit B, the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode such as “333” in the sub display area SA.

In the example shown in FIG. 714, a case where the special figure lottery A is won as a result of the special figure lottery will be described.

When the special figure small hit A is won as a result of the special figure lottery, the main control device 60 starts the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit special electric open/close scenario A described above, and the special electric of the special electric open/close execution mode The opening period starts (time t5).

Then, when the special electric opening period ends, the main control device 60 starts the special electric opening/closing processing period and starts opening the first special electric accessory 57b (time t6). As described above, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened once in the special electric switching processing period in the special electric switching execution mode based on the special map small hit special electric switching scenario A. Here, in the present embodiment, it takes 1.0 seconds or more for the game ball to pass over the closed first special electric accessory 57b. Then, in the present embodiment, the game balls are shot from the game ball firing mechanism 81 at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, if the player continues the "right hit" after the start of the right hit notification processing, a state in which at least one game ball is passing over the closed first special electric accessory 57b (game) The state that the ball is on). Therefore, when the first special electric auditors product 57b is opened, the game ball passing over the first special electric auditors product 57b falls below the opened first special electric auditors product 57b, and the first special electric auditors product 57b is opened. The player enters the first special winning opening 57a provided below the electric accessory 57b (time t7).

When the game ball enters the first big winning opening 57a, the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av as it is (time t7). That is, in the present embodiment, if the player continues the "right hit", the player can easily play the game ball at the first special winning opening 57a and the V winning opening 57av while the first special electric accessory 57b is opened ( It is configured so that it can be entered reliably.

When a game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, the sound emission control device 90 suggests that the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. The main controller 60 executes the effect suggesting that the round special electric switching execution mode is started, and the main control device 60 ends the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit special electric opening/closing scenario A being executed. The 16-round special electric switching operation mode based on the above-mentioned special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot is started (time t8).

When the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special electric open/close scenario A for V winning jackpot is started, the special electric open/close processing period is started after 0.5 second of the special electric opening period, and the special electric open/close process of 16th in the second special electric accessory 58b is started. The first opening (round game of the first round) of the opening is started (time t9). Then, the second special electric auditors product 58b, when the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds has elapsed, or when the maximum number of game balls 10 game balls have entered, satisfies the condition , Closed. After the closed state, the second opening (second round game) of the second special electric accessory 58b is started after 3.0 seconds of the closing period (special electric interval period) has elapsed. Then, after the 16th opening (round game of the 16th round) of the second special electric accessory 58b is finished and closed, the special electric ending period is started, and 0.5 seconds of the special electric ending period elapses. , The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot is finished (time t10). The player enters the game ball into the second special winning opening 58a during the opening of the second special electric auditors object 58b during the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for the V winning jackpot. By doing so, a large number of game balls can be won as prize balls.

As described above, in the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, the maximum opening time for opening one round in the special electric opening/closing processing period is set to 5.0 seconds, and the maximum number of entered balls is set to 10. Since the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, during the opening period of the maximum opening time of 5.0 seconds, only about 8 game balls are allowed to enter the second special winning opening 58a. I can't. In other words, in the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, the second special electric accessory 58b is 5.0 seconds or longer by ten game balls entering the second special electric accessory 58b during one opening. Is configured so that it will not close in a short time. As a result, in the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot, the length of the opening period of one round of the second special electric auditors product 58b is irrespective of the manner in which the game ball is launched by the player and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Fixed to 5.0 seconds, the time length (total required time) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot is 0.5 seconds (special electric opening period) + 5.0 seconds (1 Round)×16 (number of rounds)+3.0 seconds (special electricity interval period)×15 (interval number)+0.5 seconds (special electricity ending period), which is fixed at 126.0 seconds. That is, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot in the present embodiment is started 126.0 from the start regardless of the manner in which the player shoots the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after the start. It will end in seconds.

In addition, in the present embodiment, from the time point (time t3) when the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode starts, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot described above. The time required to start (time t8) is configured to be about 4 seconds at maximum when the player is performing “right hit” as instructed by the right hit notification process. There is.

Then, in the present embodiment, the closing period (universal power interval period) in the regular power switching process period in the regular power switching execution mode based on the regular power switching scenario B is set to 135.0 seconds, and thus the regular electric accessory After 135.0 seconds have passed since the first closing of 34b, the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b starts (time t11).

As a result, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 714, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special electric open/close scenario A for V winning jackpot jackpot is finished before the second opening of the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is started. become.

Then, when the game ball enters the special drawing starting port 34a by the second opening of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode based on the normal electric opening/closing scenario B, the main control device 60 causes the main controller 60 to perform the special operation described above. The lottery is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display portion 37a, and the sound emission control device 90 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 ( Time t12).

The subsequent process flow is different only in that the normal call interval period (closed period) in the normal call opening/closing execution mode is replaced with the normal call ending period, and the process flow from time t13 to time t18 shown in FIG. This is the same as the flow of processing from time t5 to time t10 described above. Then, since the time length of the normal electric ending period in the normal electric switching execution mode based on the normal electric switching scenario B is set to 140.0 seconds, even if there is a pending general drawing lottery, it is normal. The next universal figure lottery will not be executed until 140.0 seconds of the universal electric ending period started after the second closing of the electric accessory 34b. In other words, it is configured so that the next ordinary figure lottery will not be executed before the special electric open/close execution mode based on the second V winning jackpot. Then, 140.0 seconds of the normal electric ending period elapses, and the normal electric power switching execution mode ends (time t19).

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal electric ending production which suggests that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode ends within 5 seconds before the end of the normal electric ending period is executed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 716(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 as the ordinary electric ending effect, and a character string such as "Has fun? See you again!" indicate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the processes from the time t3 to the time t10 are repeated by the number of times corresponding to the number of times the ordinary electric auditors product 34b is opened in the normal electric switching execution mode. In other words, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot of 16 rounds or 12 rounds is executed by the number of times corresponding to the number of times the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is opened in the normal electric open/close execution mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 714, when the special figure small hit A is won in the first and second special drawing lottery, and then the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot. In the case where the special figure small hit B was won in the first or second special drawing lottery, the game ball then entered the V winning opening 57av and won the V winning jackpot. In this case, main controller 60 starts the special electric switching execution mode based on the above-mentioned special winning/special opening/closing scenario for V winning jackpot jackpot B in the normal electric interval period in the normal electric switching execution mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special figure starting port 34a is not provided with a special figure holding function, so if the normal electric auditors object 34b is opened for the second time, the special figure starting port 34a has a game ball. If the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special electric open/close scenario for V prize jackpot is not finished even at the time of entering the ball, the special drawing lottery based on entering the game ball into the special drawing starting opening 34a is not executed. .. As a result, in the special drawing lottery, it is impossible to win the special drawing small hit and it is also impossible to win the V winning big prize.

Further, unlike the example shown in FIG. 714, when the player does not perform “right hit” even though the right hit notification processing is being executed, the normal electric auditors object 34b is opened during the opening. The game ball cannot be inserted into the special figure starting port 34a, or the game ball can be inserted into the first big winning port 57a and the V winning port 57av while the first special electric accessory 57b is open. Can not. In this case, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special electric small open special electric open/close scenario or the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit special electric open/close scenario is not started, and the player does not operate the normal electric open/close It waits until the closing period (normal power interval period) until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the execution mode or the normal power ending period ends.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of consecutive wins for the V winning jackpot is determined based on the type of the normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of executions of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is set. Since it is determined, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the general figure lottery is won per universal figure and the general electric open/close execution mode is executed, the player is interested in the number of times the ordinary electric auditors 34b is opened in the general electric open/close execution mode. Can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machine to which the special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture a pachinko machine having various game characteristics (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special probability lottery does not include a high-probability mode (so-called probability variation state) in which the probability of winning a special prize jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control and provide these modes. The various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machines that are in use are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture a pachinko machine having various game characteristics (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning per universal figure in the universal figure lottery is high, and the high frequency support mode (so-called electric support) in which the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened when the general figure is won is increased. Since the state is not provided, the control can be simplified and various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machine provided with these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various game characteristics.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure lottery is not provided with a function for holding the special figure lottery, the special figure holding area for holding the special figure lottery can be omitted from the main RAM 64, and the storage area of the main RAM 64 can be saved. It can be effectively used for other purposes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed a plurality of times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots are connected). Therefore, when a big jackpot is played on a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is a high-probability mode (so-called probability change state), the next special electric switching execution mode does not start easily without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. It is possible to avoid such a situation (so-called “hamari”).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, and the universal ball opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the universal figure in the universal figure lottery, the game ball is in the flow passage. In the firing mode that reaches 301 (so-called "right-handed" firing mode), if the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game ball is the special figure starting port during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. The special ball opening and closing execution mode based on the special map small hit is executed in 34a, and the game ball enters the first special winning opening 57a during execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit, The game ball that has entered the 1 special winning opening 57a enters the V winning opening 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed.

Then, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electric switching execution mode, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special map small hit, and the special electric power based on the V winning jackpot. The time period from the start to the end of the open/close execution mode can be set to a time longer than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in the situation where the game balls reach the flow passage 301 in a firing mode (so-called "right-handed" firing mode) and are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the normal electric switching execution mode is started If the time required from completion of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 714) is defined as the specific required time, the normal electric switching execution mode starts from the start. The time required for completion is set to be longer than the specific time required. Therefore, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are ended, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode continues, and the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may transit to the open state and the game ball may enter the special figure starting port 34a.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the universal figure lottery at least twice in the universal figure lottery, the special electricity based on the V winning jackpot is executed while the ordinary electric open/close execution mode is being executed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transits from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball enters the special map starting opening 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is finished. Is possible. Then, if the game ball enters the special map start port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is finished, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is executed again, and then the V winning jackpot is hit again. The special electric switching execution mode based on is executed. That is, when the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b is won per universal figure which is opened twice or more in the universal figure lottery to execute the universal electric open/close execution mode, the special electrical open/close execution mode based on the special area small hit and the V winning jackpot are won. The special electric switch open/close execution mode based on this is executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to obtain a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while the special symbol is changing, the special ball opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is being executed or the special ball opening/closing opening 34a is being executed while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on the V prize jackpot. If you enter the ball, because it avoids the acquisition of various counter values for special figure lottery (in other words, because it does not have a special figure lottery hold function), during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the special figure small Even if the game ball enters the special map starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the win or during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, then the special electric opening/closing based on the special drawing small hit is executed. The mode is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is also not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is desired that the player finishes the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot before the timing at which the game ball can enter the special drawing starting opening 34a comes. It can make you feel nervous.

Further, unlike the present embodiment, the special ball is started during the special symbols are changing, while the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit or the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is being executed. In the case of adopting a configuration in which acquisition of various counter values for special figure lottery is not avoided even when the ball enters the mouth 34a (that is, a configuration having a special figure lottery holding function), the ordinary electric accessory 34b When a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of, the special figure lottery is suspended, regardless of the number of times the normal electric auditors object 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. Instead, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit may be executed a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, one of the ordinary electric accessory 34b It is possible to realize the game performance in which the number of executions of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit is once for each opening.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is determined in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Since it is configured to have the predetermined length, the length of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even when the normal electric accessory 34b is changed to the open state due to the length of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot being longer than the predetermined length, the special electric power based on the V prize jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open/close execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not finished, and the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is determined in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. The special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is ended early during the normal electric open/close execution mode in the normal electric open/close execution mode, and the special electric open/close execution mode is ended. It is possible to prevent the game from being delayed because the period until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes long.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode, in the normal electricity interval period, which is the period from the transition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b from the open state to the closed state to the transition from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a time (135.0 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric switching operation mode based on the V winning jackpot. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, the length of the normal electric power switching period in the normal electric power switching execution mode is the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0). A case where the configuration of the comparative example in which the time is set to be shorter than the second (for example, 80.0 seconds) is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is started. After that, the first ordinary electricity interval period in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. .. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power open/close execution mode ends, and the special power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended in the third open state of the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b. When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit are in the first and third opened states of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the second open state. ..

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is not started. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power open/close execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b, the special electric power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed, so the game ball When the player enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is started. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power switching execution mode ends, and the special power switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing in the third open state of the normal electric auditors' product 34b. .. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the third normal power interval period in the normal power open/close execution mode ends, and in the fourth open state of the normal electric auditors' product 34b, the special power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit are in the second and fourth opened states of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the third open state. ..

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the normal power switching period in the normal power switching execution mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the special power switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the start timings of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special map small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot during the execution of the normal electric open/close execution mode are not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, the length of the normal power switching period in the normal power switching execution mode is longer than the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (135. The case of adopting the configuration of the present embodiment, which is set to 0.0 seconds) will be described.

First, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is executed. After that, the first ordinary electricity interval period in the ordinary electricity open/close execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b, the special electricity open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is also not executed. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power open/close execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b, the special electric power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed, so the game ball When the player enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the normal power switching period in the normal power switching execution mode, which is required from the start to the end of the special power switching performance mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) Is set for a longer time (135.0 seconds), the normal electric accessory 34b is opened at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric switching execution mode. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed or has already been completed. Therefore, in the normal electric open/close execution mode, the special electric open/close execution mode and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special drawing small hit even if the game ball enters the special drawing starting opening 34a when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened. It does not mean that the special electric switching execution mode based on the winning jackpot is not started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during execution of the normal electric open/close execution mode, It is possible to prevent the game flow from becoming complicated, and to set the number of times that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, thereby executing the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode, the ordinary electric auditors product 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state, and is the period from when the ordinary figure lottery can be executed until the ordinary electric ending. The length of the period can be set to a time (140.0 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the length of the ordinary electric ending period is set to be shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Will be described. In this configuration, for example, the universal drawing lottery is executed after the end of the universal electric ending period, and if the universal character is won, the ordinary electric open/close execution mode is executed, and the game is executed while the ordinary electric open/close execution mode is being executed. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the ordinary electric ending period, the special electric opening/closing based on the V prize jackpot is performed even after the end of the ordinary electric ending period. There is a case where the execution mode is continued and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is continued even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and there is a problem that the player is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the ordinary electric ending period can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is continued even after the end of the normal electric ending period, and to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player. You can

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the length of the normal call ending period is set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the normal call interval period, a series of realizations performed during the normal call interval period in the normal call opening/closing execution mode is performed. It is possible to realize the flow of the game in the same manner even in the normal electric ending period of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. As a result, a new special opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit and a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed in both the normal electric interval period and the normal electric ending period in the normal electric switching execution mode. It becomes possible to realize the game.

According to the present embodiment, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed during the normal electric open/close execution mode in the normal electric open/close execution mode. Therefore, the number of times of the normal electric open/close interval included in the normal electric open/close execution mode is a game. It becomes a very important factor for the person. Therefore, when the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the general-purpose drawing in the general-purpose drawing lottery, how many times the normal-electricity interval period is included in the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode for the player. It is possible to raise interest and interest in the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed a plurality of times between the start and the end of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is started. Whether or not it is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have an interest or interest in whether or not the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode is started by winning the general-purpose drawing in the general-purpose drawing lottery, and the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode is started. In this case, the player can be made interested in how many times the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the production (FIG. 715, FIG. 716(A), etc.) that suggests the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the universal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, the universal drawing lottery is performed. When the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the game, the player can be made interested in the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The interest can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed and stopped in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 are the number of times the normal electric auditors product 34b is opened when the general figure lottery is won ( In other words, since the number of consecutive wins per V winning jackpot) is suggested, it is possible to make the player feel that the decorative pattern with the largest possible number should be stopped on the effective line L1. Can be planned. In addition, when a reach is generated due to a large number of decorative patterns, it is possible to make the player have a great sense of expectation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the universal figure lottery, at least the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is performed a plurality of times per one universal figure. When one cycle is defined as one special game time, from the opening of the normal electric auditors object 34b (time t3 in FIG. 714) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time t10), when one special game time is defined. One special game time is executed based on the object 34b opening at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 714), and the electric motor is normally driven at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 714) after the end of the one special game time. The accessory 34b is controlled to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of one special game times per one drawing in the drawing drawing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period for restricting the variable display of the normal symbols not to start is generated. More specifically, a predetermined limit period is generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game time that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the normal symbol from starting before the end of the 1 special game time, so the general drawing lottery is executed even though the 1 special game time has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user is confused. As a result, for example, the result of the universal drawing lottery is that the universal drawing is advantageous to the player, but since the one special game time that has already been executed has not ended, the game ball has a special figure. It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the player enters the start opening 34a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types (V prize jackpot A and B) are set for the V prize jackpot, so not only the number of V prize jackpots to be won in one normal electric opening/closing execution mode, but which It is also possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not to win the type V winning jackpot.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric small opening special electric opening/closing scenario A and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit special electric opening/closing scenario A The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total required time (2.1 seconds) in the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric small switch special electric switching scenario B. It is the same as the total time B that is the sum of the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special prize opening/closing scenario B for V prize jackpot, so the special electric power based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for special map small hits. The opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electricity opening and closing execution mode based on the special winning opening special electricity switching scenario A for V prize and the special electricity opening and closing execution mode based on the special electricity small opening special electricity opening and closing scenario B are executed. The timing at which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot jackpot ends is the same as when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V special winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B is executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric auditors' product 34b becomes the same, so that, for example, the contents of the effect executed in the waiting time are made common. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the universal figure starting gate 35 is provided at a lower center position of the game board 30, and the general winning opening 32 is provided at a position where the game ball entered in the universal figure starting gate 35 can enter. Is provided, as in a general pachinko machine in which the special figure starting port 34a is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, the player is awarded with a prize ball, and a normal figure is drawn in the general figure lottery. It is possible to realize a game in which the player is expected to win the prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, many game balls enter the universal figure starting gate 35. It will be a ball. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the universal start gate 35 enter the general winning openings 32, so that the ratio of the number of prize balls by the general winning openings 32 to all the prize balls can be increased. it can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the character ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the operation of the character to the total number of prize balls.

<<M5>> Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to proceed with the game described above, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The main MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 717 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (2 msec cycle in this embodiment).

In step Sm0101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step Sm0102.

In step Sm0102, the value of the random number initial value counter Cini is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and it is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sm0103.

In step Sm0103, the values of the universal figure valid/invalid determination counter Cn1, the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3, the special figure valid/invalid determination counter Cs1, and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the values of the universal figure valid/invalid judgment counter Cn1, the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3, the special figure valid/invalid determination counter Cs1, and the special figure type determination counter Cs2, and they are also added. When each counter value of 1 has reached the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update values of the determination counters Cn1 to Cn3, Cs1, and Cs2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sm0104.

In step Sm0104, the ball entry process for the universal figure starting gate based on the entry of the game ball into the universal figure starting gate 35 is executed. Details of the ball entry process for the universal figure starting gate will be described later. After executing step Sm0104, the process proceeds to step Sm0105.

In step Sm0105, a ball entering process for the special figure starting port based on the game ball entering the special figure starting port 34a is executed. The details of the ball entry process for the special figure starting port will be described later. After executing step Sm0105, the process proceeds to step Sm0106.

In step Sm0106, a ball winning process for the V winning opening based on the game ball entering the V winning opening 57av is executed. Details of the ball winning process for the V winning opening will be described later. After executing step Sm0106, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Entering ball for the universal start gate>
Next, the ball entering process for the universal figure starting gate will be described. The ball entering process for the universal figure starting gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 717: Sm0104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 718 is a flowchart showing a ball entering process for the universal figure starting gate. In step Sm0201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the universal figure starting gate 35. When it is determined in step Sm0201 that the game ball has entered the universal figure starting gate 35 (Sm0201: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0202, and the universal figure lottery suspension number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Or not. The public figure lottery holding number SN is a value indicating the number of public figure lottery held (waiting for execution) based on the entry of the game ball into the public figure starting gate 35. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the universal figure lottery reservation number SN is 4. On the other hand, in step Sm0201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the universal figure starting gate 35 (Sm0201: NO), the entering process for the universal figure starting gate is ended.

When it is determined in step Sm0202 that the general figure lottery pending number SN is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (Sm0202: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm0203, and 1 is added to the general figure lottery pending number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sm0204.

In step Sm0204, the values of the universal figure valid/invalid determination counter Cn1, the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, and the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 are set to the first storage area in the empty storage area of the universal figure holding area 64d of the RAM 64, that is, step Sm0203. The number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number SN of the universal figure lottery suspension numbers added with 1. Then, it progresses to step Sm0205.

In step Sm0205, a universal figure destination determination process is executed. The universal figure destination determination process is based on information (universal figure retention information) of the values of the universal figure validity determination counter Cn1, the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, and the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the universal figure reservation area 64d. , The drawing result of the drawing, such as the judgment result of the drawing validity judgment, the judgment result of the drawing type classification and the judgment result of whether the drawing reach has occurred, etc. This is a process of making a determination before being subject to a drawing lottery. After executing step Sm0205, the process proceeds to step Sm0206.

In step Sm0206, a universal figure holding command is set. Specifically, it is executed based on the information (public figure hold information) of the values of the general figure valid/invalid judgment counter Cn1, the general figure type determination counter Cn2, and the general figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the general figure holding area 64d. The determination result of the universal figure destination determination process is set as a universal figure hold command.

The universal figure hold command causes the control device on the sub side to display the determination result of the universal figure destination determination process for the universal figure hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the universal figure starting gate 35. It is a command for recognizing the figure hold information before it becomes the target of the general figure lottery involving the variation of the ordinary symbols. The universal figure holding command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 721: step Sm0503) of a normal process described later. When the sound emission control device 90 receives the universal figure hold command, the display control device issues a command for changing the display in the universal figure hold display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in response to the increase in the universal figure lottery hold number SN. Send to 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the universal figure pending display area Dn of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the universal figure lottery pending number SN.

After executing step Sm0206, the ball entering process for the universal figure starting gate is ended.

On the other hand, in step Sm0202, when it is determined that the value of the universal figure lottery suspension number SN is not less than the upper limit value (Sm0202: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the universal figure lottery suspension number SN is the upper limit value. , The universal figure acceptance/rejection determination counter Cn1, the universal figure type determination counter Cn2, and the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 are not stored in the universal figure holding area 64d, and the ball entering process for the regular figure start gate is ended.

<Entering ball for special figure starting port>
Next, a ball entry process for the special figure starting port will be described. The entrance process for the special figure starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 717: Sm0105) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 719 is a flowchart showing a ball entering process for the special figure starting port. In step Sm0301, whether or not a game ball has entered the special figure starting port 34a is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the special figure starting port 34a. When it is determined in step Sm0301 that the game ball has entered the special figure starting opening 34a (Sm0301: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0302 and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step Sm0303. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm0301 that the game ball has not entered the special figure starting port 34a (Sm0301: NO), the ball entering process for the special figure starting port is ended.

In step Sm0303, it is determined whether the special electric switching execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the special electric switching execution mode described above is started and turned off when the special electric switching execution mode is ended. That is, the special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON during execution of the special electric switching execution mode. If it is determined in step Sm0303 that the special electric switching execution mode flag is not ON (step Sm0303: NO), that is, if the special electric switching execution mode is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sm0304.

In step Sm0304, it is determined whether the special figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is started, and is turned off when the change of the special symbol is ended. That is, the special figure fluctuating flag is a flag that is ON during the change of the special symbol. In step Sm0304, if it is determined that the special figure changing flag is not ON (step Sm0304: NO), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step Sm0305.

In step Sm0305, the respective values of the special figure validity determination counter Cs1 and the special figure type determination counter Cs2 are stored in the special figure determination area 64c of the main RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sm0306.

In step Sm0306, the special figure variation start flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned on. The special figure variation start flag is a flag for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a, and will be OFF when the variation of the special symbol is started, as described later. After executing step Sm0306, the ball entering process for the special figure starting port is ended.

<Valging process for V winning holes>
Next, the ball winning process for the V winning opening will be described. The winning process for the V winning opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 717: Sm0106) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 720 is a flowchart showing a ball winning process for the V winning opening. In step Sm0401, whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 57av. When it is determined in step Sm0401 that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av (Sm0401: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0402 and whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. To judge. The V winning flag is turned on when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started when the V winning flag is turned ON, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode is terminated. This flag is turned off at this time. That is, in step Sm0402, by determining whether or not the V winning flag is already ON, even when a plurality of game balls enter the V winning opening 57av, steps Sm0403 to Sm0405 described later. The configuration is adopted so that the process of is not executed repeatedly.

When it is determined in step Sm0402 that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm0402: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0403 and the V winning flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step Sm0404, and the V winning classification flag corresponding to the ON special figure classification flag is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when the special symbol A flag is turned on as the special symbol type flag, the V prize A flag is turned on as the V prize type flag, and the special symbol B flag is turned on as the special symbol type flag. If it is, the V winning B flag is turned ON as the V winning type flag. Then, it progresses to step Sm0405.

In step Sm0405, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av and that the player has won the V winning jackpot and the type of the V winning. The V winning command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: step Sm0503) of the normal process described later. When the voice emission control device 90 receives the V winning command, the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av and wins the V winning jackpot, the type of the V winning and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning. The V winning effect, which is an effect suggesting that is started, is executed.

After executing step Sm0405, the ball winning process for the V winning opening is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm0401 that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 57av (step Sm0401: NO) and when it is determined that the V winning flag is ON in step Sm0402 (step Sm0402: YES). Ends the ball entry process for the present V winning opening without executing the processes of steps Sm0403 to Sm0405 described above.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 721 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step Sm0501, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step Sm0502.

In step Sm0502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sm0503.

In step Sm0503, output data such as the start-up command set in step Sm0502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, the command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In addition, when a start-up command and commands related to various effects described later are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step Sm0503, the process proceeds to Step Sm0504.

In step Sm0504, the values of the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each value of the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step Sm0505.

In step Sm0505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read. Then, it progresses to step Sm0506.

In step Sm0506, a normal symbol control process, which is a control process relating to the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a, is executed. In the normal symbol control processing, general figure lottery, and control of variable display of ordinary symbols based on the lottery result of the general figure lottery are performed. Details of the normal symbol control processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0506, the process proceeds to step Sm0507.

In step Sm0507, an ordinary electric auditors product control process which is a control process for the ordinary electric auditors product 34b is executed. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, control in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode for opening/closing the ordinary electric accessory 34b is performed. Details of the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0507, the process proceeds to step Sm0508.

In step Sm0508, a special symbol control process, which is a control process relating to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a, is executed. In the special symbol control processing, the special symbol lottery and the variable display of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery are controlled. Details of the special symbol control processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0508, the process proceeds to step Sm0509.

In step Sm0509, a special electric auditors product control process which is a control process for the special electric auditors product is executed. In the special electric auditors product control process, control in the special electric switching execution mode for opening and closing the first special electric auditors product 57b and the second special electric auditors product 58b is performed. The details of the special electric auditors product control process will be described later. After executing step Sm0509, the process proceeds to step Sm0510.

In step Sm0510, a standby process for causing each sub-side control device to start a demo moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time is executed. After that, after executing step Sm0510, the process proceeds to step Sm0511.

In step Sm0511, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step Sm0503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step Sm0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of this normal processing (Sm0511: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in step Sm0512 and step Sm0513. Within the remaining time, the respective values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step Sm0512, 1 is added to the value of the random number initial value counter Cini, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter Cini is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step Sm0513, 1 is added to each value of the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update values of the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm0511 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (Sm0511: YES), the process returns to step Sm0503, and each processing from step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 is performed. Execute.

Since the execution time of each process of step Sm0503 to step Sm0510 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the respective values of the random number initial value counter Cini, the general figure variation type determination counter Cn4 and the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 using the remaining time, these counter values are randomly updated. can do.

<Normal symbol control processing>
Next, the normal symbol control process will be described. The normal symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 721: Sm0506).

FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process. In step Sm0601, a normal symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0601, the flow proceeds to step Sm0602.

In step Sm0602, a normal symbol variation stop process, which is a process for stopping the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a, is executed. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm0602, this normal symbol control process is ended.

<Normal symbol fluctuation start processing>
Next, the normal symbol variation start processing will be described. The normal symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 722: Sm0601) of the normal symbol control process.

FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation start process. In step Sm0701, it is determined whether or not the normal power switching execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The normal power switching execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the normal power switching execution mode is started and turned off when the normal power switching execution mode is ended. That is, the normal power switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON during execution of the normal power switching execution mode.

When it is determined in step Sm0701 that the normal power switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm0701: YES), the normal symbol variation start process is ended without executing any of the processes of step Sm0702 and subsequent steps described later. .. That is, during the execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0701 that the normal power switching execution mode flag is not ON (Sm0701: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sm0702.

In step Sm0702, it is determined whether or not the universal figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The normal symbol fluctuation flag is a flag that is turned on when the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a is started and turned off when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is ended. That is, the normal figure changing flag is a flag that is ON during the change of the normal symbol. In step Sm0702, when it is determined that the flag during fluctuation in universal figure is not ON (step Sm0702: NO), that is, when it is determined that there is no fluctuation in the normal symbol, the process proceeds to step Sm0703.

In step Sm0703, it is determined whether or not the universal figure lottery suspension number SN is "1" or more. In step Sm0703, when it is determined that the universal figure lottery pending number SN is not equal to or more than “1” (Sm0703: NO), this normal symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, in step Sm0703, when it is determined that the universal figure lottery suspension number SN is “1” or more (Sm0703: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0704. That is, when the universal symbol lottery hold number SN is 1 or more in a situation where the ordinary symbol open/close execution mode is not being executed and the ordinary symbol is not changing in the ordinary symbol display portion 38a, the process proceeds to step Sm0704.

In step Sm0704, 1 is subtracted from the universal figure lottery suspension number SN. Then, it progresses to step Sm0705.

In step Sm0705, a general figure reservation information shift process, which is a process of shifting the general figure reservation information stored in each area of the general figure reservation area 64d, is executed. Specifically, in the universal figure reservation information shift processing, after the universal figure reservation information stored in the first area of the universal figure reservation area 64d is moved to the universal figure determination area 64e, the second area→first area , The third area→the second area, the fourth area→the third area, and the general-university reservation information in each area is shifted in this order. After executing step Sm0705, the process proceeds to step Sm0706.

In step Sm0706, a universal figure winning/judging process, which is a process of determining whether or not to win each universal figure, is executed. Specifically, in the universal figure valid/invalid determination process, whether or not to win a universal figure based on the value of the universal figure valid/invalid determination counter Cn1 stored in the universal figure determination area 64e and the above-described universal figure valid/invalid determination table. Determine whether or not. After executing step Sm0706, the process proceeds to step Sm0707.

In step Sm0707, a universal figure type determination process that is a process of determining the type of a normal symbol is executed. Specifically, in the universal figure type determination processing, the above-described universal figure type determination table is selected according to the result of the universal figure appropriateness determination, and the value of the universal figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in the universal figure determination area 64e is selected. , The type of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the selected universal symbol type determination table. After executing step Sm0707, the process proceeds to step Sm0708.

In step Sm0708, the universal figure type flag corresponding to the type of the ordinary symbol determined in the universal figure type determination processing in step Sm0707 is turned on. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is the normal symbol A in the universal symbol type determination process of step Sm0707, when the ordinary symbol A flag is turned ON as the universal symbol type flag, and it is determined that it is the regular symbol B In, the normal symbol B flag is turned on as the general symbol type flag. After executing step Sm0708, the process proceeds to step Sm0709.

In step Sm0709, a universal figure variable time setting process is executed. The universal figure variation time setting process is a process of setting the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display portion 38a (general symbol variation time). Details of the universal figure variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm0709, the process proceeds to step Sm0710.

In step Sm0710, a universal figure changing command is set. The command for universal figure change includes information indicating that the variation of the symbol this time is based on the entry of a game ball into the universal figure starting gate 35, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and Information on the universal figure change time set in step Sm0709 is included. After executing step Sm0710, the process proceeds to step Sm0711.

In step Sm0711, a universal figure type command is set. The universal figure type command includes information on the result of general/universal figure validity determination (whether or not there is a regular figure) and the result of general pattern type determination (ordinary symbol type).

The universal figure changing command and universal figure type command set in step Sm0710 and step Sm0711 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect based on the received general-purpose figure change command and general-purpose type command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect contents are executed. After executing step Sm0711, the process proceeds to step Sm0712.

In step Sm0712, the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 38a is started. After that, the routine proceeds to step Sm0713, and the normal figure changing flag stored in the main side RAM 64 is turned on. After that, this normal symbol variation start process ends.

<Universal figure variable time setting process>
Next, the universal figure variable time setting process will be described. The ordinary figure variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 723: Sm0709) of the ordinary symbol variation start process.

FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing the universal figure variable time setting process. In step Sm0801, the value of the universal figure variation type determination counter Cn4 stored in the universal figure variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sm0802.

In step Sm0802, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination on whether or not the universal figure is related to the variation of the regular symbol this time is per universal symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the general figure classification flag corresponding to each general figure is ON among the general figure classification flags stored in the RAM 64, and the general figure classification flag corresponding to each general figure is determined. If it is ON, it is determined that the result of the general/universal figure validity judgment is per universal figure. When it is determined in step Sm0802 that the result of the general/universal figure validity determination is per-universal figure (Sm0802: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0803.

In step Sm0803, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current figure variation type determination counter Cn4 is acquired by referring to the universal figure variation time table for universal figure stored in each table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. .. After that, the process advances to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the universal figure fluctuation time timer counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of the universal figure variable time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. After executing step Sm0804, the general-university-picture variable time setting process ends.

In step Sm0802, when it is determined that the result of the universal figure hit determination relating to the variation of the regular symbol this time is not the universal symbol (Sm0802: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0805, and the reach is reached in the variation of the regular symbol this time. Determine if it occurs. In the above step Sm0802, if the result of the general/unique figure judgment relating to the variation of the normal symbol this time is not the common figure, this process (Sm0805) is executed. Therefore, in step Sm0805, the result of the general/universal pattern judgment is common. It is determined whether or not it is a variation in which reach is generated out of the variation of the ordinary symbol which is not per drawing. Specifically, referring to the universal figure reach determination table stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63, the value of the universal figure reach determination counter Cn3 stored in the universal figure determination area 64e indicates that the universal figure reach determination is performed. If it matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the table, it is determined that the reach occurs. When it is determined in step Sm0805 that reach is generated (Sm0805: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm0806.

In step Sm0806, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation pattern determination counter Cn4 is referred to by referring to the deviation pattern (for reach occurrence) general pattern fluctuation time table stored in various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63. Get information. After that, the process advances to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the universal figure fluctuation time counter provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the general-use figure variable time setting process ends.

In step Sm0805, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the variation of the ordinary symbol this time (Sm0805: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm0807, and the out-of-general patterns stored in the various table storage areas 63a of the ROM 63 (reach non-reach). By referring to the universal figure fluctuation time table for occurrence), the variable time information corresponding to the current value of the general figure fluctuation type determination counter Cn4 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step Sm0804, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the universal figure fluctuation time counter provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the universal figure variation time table for out-of-publicity (reach non-occurrence) table becomes shorter as the number of the universal figure lottery suspension number SN increases. Is set to be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of public figure lottery suspension numbers SN, and the smaller the number of general figure lottery suspension numbers SN, the shorter the variation time is set. May be. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the variation time information stored in the per-universal-drawing universal figure variation time table and the out-of-general figure variation (reach occurrence) universal figure variation time table.

<Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described. Normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 722: Sm0602) of normal symbol control processing.

FIG. 725 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing. In step Sm0901, it is determined whether the universal figure changing flag is ON. In step Sm0901, when it is determined that the flag during universal figure fluctuation is not ON (step Sm0901: NO), this normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0901 that the universal figure changing flag is ON (step Sm0901: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm0902.

In step Sm0902, it is determined whether or not the universal figure fluctuation time set in the universal figure fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 724) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the universal figure fluctuation time timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", and when it is "0", it is determined that the universal figure fluctuation time has elapsed. To do. In step Sm0902, when it is determined that the universal figure variation time has not elapsed (step Sm0902: NO), this normal symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm0902 that the universal figure fluctuation time has elapsed (step Sm0902: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm0903.

In step Sm0903, the normal symbol which is changing in the normal symbol display portion 38a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the general symbol type flag which is ON. As a result, the ordinary symbol display section 38a stops and displays the ordinary symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. After executing Step Sm0903, the process proceeds to Step Sm0904.

In step Sm0904, it is determined whether or not the universal figure type flag corresponding to the universal figure is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination on whether or not the universal figure is related to the variation of the regular symbol this time is per universal symbol. In step Sm0904, when it is determined that the universal figure classification flag corresponding to the universal figure is not ON (step Sm0904: NO), that is, the result of the universal figure appropriateness determination relating to the change of the regular symbol is out of point. If there is, the process proceeds to step Sm0905 to turn off the general figure type flag that is ON (normal symbol Z flag in this case). Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the universal figure changing flag is turned off. After that, this normal symbol fluctuation stop process ends.

On the other hand, in step Sm0904, when it is determined that the universal figure classification flag corresponding to the universal figure is ON (step Sm0904: YES), that is, the result of the universal figure acceptance/rejection determination related to the change of the regular symbol is the universal figure. If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Sm0906, and the normal electric switching execution mode flag is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm0907, and the universal figure changing flag is turned off. After that, this normal symbol fluctuation stop process ends. As a result, when the result of the universal figure hit/miss determination relating to the variation of the ordinary symbol this time is a universal symbol, the universal electrical switch execution mode is started.

<Normal electric accessory control processing>
Next, the normal electric accessory control process will be described. The ordinary electric auditors product control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 721: Sm0507).

FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric auditors product control processing. In step Sm1001, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric ending period flag is ON. The ordinary electric ending period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the ordinary electric ending period and turned off at the end of the ordinary electric ending period. That is, the ordinary electric ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the ordinary electric ending period is in progress.

When it is determined in step Sm1001 that the normal electric ending period flag is not ON (Sm1001: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1002, and it is determined whether the normal electric switching process period flag is ON. The normal power switching process period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the normal power switching process period and turned off at the end of the normal power switching process period. That is, the normal power switching process period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the normal power switching process period is in progress.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal power switching period flag is not ON (Sm1002: NO), the flow proceeds to step Sm1003 to determine whether the normal power opening period flag is ON. The ordinary electric opening period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the ordinary electric opening period and turned off at the end of the ordinary electric opening period. That is, the ordinary electric current opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not the ordinary electric current opening period is in progress.

When it is determined in step Sm1003 that the normal electricity opening period flag is not ON (Sm1003: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1004, and it is determined whether the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sm1004 that the normal power switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1004: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the normal power switching execution mode after step Sm1005 described below. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1004 that the normal electric switching execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1004: NO), the normal electric auditors product control process ends.

In step Sm1005, normal electricity switching scenario selection processing is executed. The normal electric switching scenario selection process is a process for selecting the type of the general electric switching scenario to be referred to in the general electric switching execution mode based on the general map type flag and the general electric switching scenario selection table described above. Specifically, for example, when the ordinary symbol A flag is ON as the universal figure type flag, the universal electric open/close scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1005, the process proceeds to step Sm1006.

In step Sm1006, ordinary electric opening time setting processing is executed. The ordinary electric opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ordinary electric opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as ordinary electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the normal electric opening time information is acquired from the normal electric switching scenario selected by the normal electric switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired normal electric opening time information is stored in the RAM 64. Set to the electric opening time timer counter. The value of the ordinary electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is executed. After executing step Sm1006, the process proceeds to step Sm1007.

In step Sm1007, a general electric train opening command is set. The set Hoden opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the normal electric opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the normal electric opening command. After executing step Sm1007, the process proceeds to step Sm1008, and the normal electric power opening period flag is turned on. Then, the normal electric auditors product control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sm1003 that the ordinary electric current opening period flag is ON (Sm1003: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1009.

In step Sm1009, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric train opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the general electric opening time timer counter set as the general electric opening time in the above general electric opening time setting process is "0". When it is determined in step Sm1009 that the ordinary electricity opening period has ended (Sm1009: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1010, and the ordinary electricity opening period flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sm1011.

In step Sm1011 the normal electricity switching process period flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sm1012 and sets a normal power switching process period command. The set normal power switching process period command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The normal electric opening/closing processing period command includes information on the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the current general electric opening/closing processing period. The sound emission control device 90 is set to execute the effect corresponding to the number of times the normal electric auditors product 34b is opened, based on the received normal electric opening/closing process period command. After executing step Sm1012, the present ordinary electric auditors product control processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sm1002 that the normal power switching process period flag is ON (Sm1002: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm1013 to execute the normal power switching process. In the normal electric opening/closing process, the opening/closing operation of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b is controlled based on the normal electric opening/closing scenario selected by the normal electric opening/closing scenario selection process described above. The details of the universal electric switch processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1013, the process proceeds to step Sm1014.

In step Sm1014, it is determined whether or not the normal electrical switching processing period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the final opening of the normal electric auditors product 34b is completed and the closed state is completed based on the normal electric opening and closing scenario, and the final opening of the normal electric auditors product 34b is completed and closed. When it is determined that the state has been reached, it is determined that the normal electrical switching processing period has ended. When it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal power switching processing period has not ended (Sm1014: NO), the normal electric auditors product control processing is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1014 that the normal power switching process period has ended (Sm1014: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm1015 to turn off the normal power switching process period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sm1016.

In step Sm1016, the ordinary electric ending time setting process is executed. The ordinary electric ending time setting process is a process of setting a temporal length of the ordinary electric ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as ordinary electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the ordinary electric power closing time information is acquired from the ordinary electric power switching scenario selected by the ordinary electric power switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired ordinary electric power ending time information is stored in the RAM 64. Set to the electric ending time timer counter. The value of the ordinary electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. After executing step Sm1016, the process proceeds to step Sm1017.

In step Sm1017, the ordinary electric ending command is set. The set Hoden ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). After executing step Sm1017, the process advances to step Sm1018 to turn on the ordinary electric ending period flag. Then, the normal electric auditors product control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sm1001 that the ordinary electric ending period flag is ON (Sm1001: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1019.

In step Sm1019, it is determined whether the ordinary electric ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric ending time timer counter set as the ordinary electric ending time in the ordinary electric ending time setting process is "0". When it is determined in step Sm1019 that the ordinary electric ending period has not ended (Sm1019: NO), the ordinary electric auditors product control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1019 that the ordinary electric ending period has ended (Sm1019: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1020.

In step Sm1020, the ordinary electric ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step Sm1021 to turn off the universal figure type flag. Then, it progresses to step Sm1022.

In step Sm1022, the normal power switching execution mode end command is set. The set normal power switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). Then, it progresses to step Sm1023, and turns off the power switching execution mode flag. Then, the normal electric auditors product control process is terminated.

<Uden opening/closing processing>
Next, the normal power switching process will be described. The normal electric opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 726: Sm1013) of the normal electric accessory control process.

FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing the normal power switching process. In step Sm1101, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 34b is open. When it is determined in step Sm1101 that the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is not open (Sm1101: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1102.

In step Sm1102, it is determined whether or not the opening condition for the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the normal electric opening/closing scenario selected by the normal electric opening/closing scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition for the ordinary electric auditors object 34b set in the normal electric opening/closing scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sm1102 that the opening condition of the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is satisfied (Sm1102: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1103.

In step Sm1103, the normal electric accessory 34b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sm1104.

In step Sm1104, a normal power open command is set. The normal electric opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the normal electric accessory 34b has been opened. The universal power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1104, the normal power switching operation ends.

When it is determined in step Sm1102 that the opening condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1102: NO), the normal electric power opening/closing process is ended as it is.

If it is determined in step Sm1101 that the normal electric accessory 34b is open (Sm1101: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1105.

In step Sm1105, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is satisfied. Specifically, the normal electric opening/closing scenario selected by the normal electric opening/closing scenario selection processing is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b set in the normal electric opening/closing scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sm1105 that the closing condition of the ordinary electric auditors' prize 34b is satisfied (Sm1105: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1106.

In step Sm1106, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sm1107.

In step Sm1107, the normal power close command is set. The ordinary electric closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the ordinary electric accessory 34b is closed. The normal power closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1107, the normal power switching operation ends.

When it is determined in step Sm1105 that the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is not satisfied (Sm1105: NO), the normal electric power opening/closing process is ended as it is.

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process will be described. The special symbol control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 721: Sm0508).

FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process. In step Sm1201, a special symbol variation start process, which is a process for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a, is executed. Details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1201, the process proceeds to step Sm1202.

In step Sm1202, a special symbol variation stop process that is a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is executed. Details of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step Sm1202, this special symbol control process is ended.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
Next, the special symbol variation start process will be described. The special symbol variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 728: Sm1201) of the special symbol control process.

FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process. In step Sm1301, it is determined whether the special electric switching execution mode flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the special electric switching execution mode is started and turned off when the special electric switching execution mode is ended. That is, the special electric switching execution mode flag is a flag that is ON during execution of the special electric switching execution mode.

In step Sm1301, when it is determined that the special electric open/close execution mode flag is ON (Sm1301: YES), this special symbol variation start process is ended without executing any of the processes of step Sm1302 and subsequent steps described later. That is, during execution of the special electric open/close execution mode, the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is not started. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1301 that the special electric switching execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1301: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1302.

In step Sm1302, it is determined whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1302: YES), this special symbol variation start process is ended without executing any of the processes of step Sm1303 and subsequent steps, which will be described later. That is, when the V winning flag is ON, the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is not started. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1302 that the V winning flag is not ON (Sm1302: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1303.

In step Sm1303, it is determined whether or not the special figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The special symbol changing flag is a flag that is turned on when the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is started, and is turned off when the change of the special symbol is ended. That is, the special figure fluctuating flag is a flag that is ON during the change of the special symbol. In step Sm1303, when it is determined that the special figure variation flag is ON (step Sm1303: YES), this special symbol variation start processing is ended without executing any of the processing of step Sm1304 and later described later. .. That is, when the special figure changing flag is ON, the change of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is not started. On the other hand, in step Sm1303, when it is determined that the special figure changing flag is not ON (step Sm1303: NO), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step Sm1304.

In step Sm1304, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation start flag is ON. As described above, the special figure variation start flag is not in execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode, and the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in a situation where the special symbol is not changing in the special symbol display portion 37a. In this case, the flag is ON. In step Sm1304, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag is not ON (Sm1304: NO), this special symbol fluctuation start processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1304 that the special figure variation start flag is ON (Sm1304: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm1305. That is, when the special ball opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the V winning flag is not ON, and the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in a situation where the special symbol is not changing in the special symbol display portion 37a. , And proceeds to step Sm1305.

In step Sm1305, the special figure variation start flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sm1306.

In step Sm1306, a special figure hit/miss determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not to win per special figure (large hit of special figure or small hit of special figure). Specifically, in the special figure hit/miss determination process, whether or not a special figure is won based on the value of the special figure hit/miss judgment counter Cn1 stored in the special figure judgment area 64e and the above-described special drawing hit/miss judgment table. Determine whether or not. After executing step Sm1306, the process proceeds to step Sm1307.

In step Sm1307, special symbol type determination processing, which is processing for determining the type of the special symbol, is executed. Specifically, in the special figure type determination processing, the special figure type determination table described above is selected according to the result of the special figure validity determination, and the value of the special figure type determination counter Cn2 stored in the special figure determination area 64e is selected. The special symbol type is determined based on the selected special symbol type determination table. After executing step Sm1307, the process proceeds to step Sm1308.

In step Sm1308, the special figure type flag corresponding to the type of the special symbol determined in the special figure type determination processing of step Sm1307 is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that it is a special symbol A in the special symbol type determination process of step Sm1307, when the special symbol A flag is turned on as a special symbol type flag and it is determined that it is a special symbol B In, the special symbol B flag is turned ON as the special symbol classification flag. After executing step Sm1308, the process proceeds to step Sm1309.

In step Sm1309, special figure variation time setting processing is executed. The special symbol variation time setting process is a process of setting the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a. Details of the special figure variation time setting process will be described later. After executing step Sm1309, the process proceeds to step Sm1310.

In step Sm1310, a special figure variation command is set. The special figure variation command includes information indicating that the variation of the symbol this time is based on the entry of the game ball into the special figure starting opening 34a and the information of the special figure variation time set in step Sm1309. Has been. After executing step Sm1310, the process proceeds to step Sm1311.

In step Sm1311, a special figure classification command is set. The special figure type command includes information on the result of the special figure validity determination (whether there is a special figure) and the result of the special figure type determination (type of special symbol).

The special figure variation command and special figure type command set in step Sm1310 and step Sm1311 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step Sm0503) of the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect based on the received special figure variation command and special figure type command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect content is executed. After executing step Sm1311, the process proceeds to step Sm1312.

In step Sm1312, the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is started. After that, the process advances to step Sm1313, and the special figure changing flag stored in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. After that, this special symbol fluctuation start processing ends.

<Special map change time setting process>
Next, the special figure variation time setting process will be described. The special symbol fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 729: Sm1309) of the special symbol fluctuation start process.

FIG. 730 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation time setting process. In step Sm1401, the value of the special figure variation type determination counter Cs4 stored in the general figure variation type determination counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step Sm1402.

In step Sm1402, by referring to the special figure fluctuation time table stored in the various table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the special figure fluctuation type determination counter Cs4 is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1403, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the special figure fluctuation time timer counter provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value of the special figure variation time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. After executing step Sm1403, the special figure variation time setting process ends.

<Special symbol fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop process will be described. The special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 728: Sm1202) of the special symbol control process.

FIG. 731 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation stop process. In step Sm1501, it is determined whether the special figure changing flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sm1501 that the special figure variation flag is not ON (step Sm1501: NO), this special symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1501 that the special figure changing flag is ON (step Sm1501: YES), the flow proceeds to step Sm1502.

In step Sm1502, it is determined whether the special figure change time set in the special figure change time setting process (FIG. 730) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure variation time timer counter in the main RAM 64 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the special figure variation time has elapsed. To do. In step Sm1502, when it is determined that the special figure variation time has not elapsed (step Sm1502: NO), the special symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1502 that the special figure variation time has elapsed (step Sm1502: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1503.

In step Sm1503, the changing special symbol in the special symbol display portion 37a is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the ON special symbol type flag. As a result, the special symbol display section 37a stops and displays the special symbol in the display mode corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery. After executing step Sm1503, the process proceeds to step Sm1504.

In step Sm1504, it is determined whether or not the special figure classification flag corresponding to the special figure (special figure big hit or special figure small hit) is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment relating to the change of the special symbol this time is per special symbol. In step Sm1504, when it is determined that the special figure classification flag corresponding to each special figure is not ON (step Sm1504: NO), that is, the result of the special figure appropriateness determination relating to the change of the special symbol is out of special figure. If there is, the process advances to step Sm1505 to turn off the special figure classification flag that is ON. After that, the process advances to step Sm1507 to turn off the special figure changing flag. After that, this special symbol fluctuation stop processing ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the results of the special drawing hit determination are all the special drawing small hits, it is determined in step Sm1504 that the special drawing classification flag corresponding to each special drawing is not ON and the process proceeds to step Sm1505. Absent.

On the other hand, in step Sm1504, when it is determined that the special figure classification flag corresponding to each special figure is ON (step Sm1504: YES), that is, the result of the special figure appropriateness determination relating to the change of the special symbol is the special figure. If it is a hit, the process proceeds to step Sm1506, and the special electric switching execution mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step Sm1507 to turn off the special figure changing flag. After that, this special symbol fluctuation stop processing ends. As a result, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment relating to the change of the special symbol this time is per special symbol, the special electric switching execution mode is started.

<Special electric accessory control processing>
Next, the special electric auditors product control process will be described. The special electric auditors product control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 721: Sm0509).

FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the special electric auditors product control processing. In step Sm1601, it is determined whether the special electric ending period flag is ON. The special electric ending period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the special electric ending period and turned off at the end of the special electric ending period. That is, the special electric ending period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the special electric ending period.

When it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special electric ending period flag is not ON (Sm1601: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1602, and it is determined whether the special electric opening/closing processing period flag is ON. The special electric switching process period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the special electric switching process period and turned off at the end of the special electric switching process period. That is, the special electric switching process period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is in the special electric switching process period.

When it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special electric switching process period flag is not ON (Sm1602: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1603, and it is determined whether the special electric opening period flag is ON. The special electric opening period flag is a flag that is turned on at the start of the special electric opening period and turned off at the end of the special electric opening period. That is, the special power opening period flag is a flag for determining whether or not it is during the special power opening period.

When it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special electric opening period flag is not ON (Sm1603: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1604, and it is determined whether the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sm1604 that the special electric switching execution mode flag is ON (Sm1604: YES), the process proceeds to the processing group for starting the special electric switching execution mode after step Sm1607 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1604 that the special electric switching execution mode flag is not ON (Sm1604: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1605, and it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is ON. When it is determined in step Sm1605 that the V winning flag is ON (step Sm1605: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1606, the special electric switching execution mode flag and the V trigger flag are turned ON, and then step Sm1607 described later. Then, the process proceeds to a process group for starting the special electric switching execution mode. The V trigger flag is a flag for determining whether or not the trigger for executing the special electric switching execution mode this time is due to a V winning. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1605 that the V winning flag is not ON (step Sm1605: NO), the special electric auditors product control process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the special drawing is won per special drawing in the special drawing lottery (when the special electric opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on), but also when the game ball enters the V winning opening 57av, the V winning jackpot Even if the player wins the prize (when the V winning flag is turned ON), the special electric opening/closing execution mode is started.

In step Sm1607, special electric switching scenario selection processing is executed. The special electric open/close scenario selection process selects the type of special electric open/close scenario to be referred to in the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V trigger flag, the V winning type flag, the special figure open type flag, and the special electric open/close scenario selection table described above. It is a process to do. Specifically, for example, when the V trigger flag is OFF and the special symbol A flag is ON as the special symbol type flag, the special symbol small hit special electric switching scenario A is selected. In addition, for example, when the V trigger flag is ON and the V winning A flag is ON as the V winning type flag, the V winning jackpot special electric switching scenario A is selected. After executing step Sm1607, the process proceeds to step Sm1608.

In step Sm1608, special electric power opening time setting processing is executed. The special electric opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the special electric opening period (hereinafter, also referred to as special electric opening time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special electric power opening time information is acquired from the special electric power switching scenario selected by the special electric power switching scenario selection processing described above, and the acquired special electric power opening time information is provided in the special electric power opening time timer counter provided in the RAM 64. Set to. The value of the special electric opening time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. After executing step Sm1608, the process proceeds to step Sm1609.

In step Sm1609, a special electric train opening command is set. The set special electric power opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the special electricity opening effect and the right-handed notification effect based on the reception of the special electricity opening command. After executing step Sm1609, the process advances to step Sm1610 to turn on the special electric power opening period flag. Then, this special electric auditors product control processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sm1603 that the special electric power opening period flag is ON (Sm1603: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1611.

In step Sm1611, it is determined whether the special electric opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric opening time timer counter set as the special electric opening time in the special electric opening time setting process described above is “0”. If it is determined in step Sm1611 that the special power opening period has ended (Sm1611: YES), the flow advances to step Sm1612 to turn off the special power opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sm1613.

In step Sm1613, a round display start process, which is a process of displaying the number of rounds in the current special electric switch open/close execution mode on the round display unit 39, is executed. Specifically, the number of rounds set in the selected special electric switching scenario is read out, and the read round number is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step Sm1613, the process proceeds to step Sm1614.

In step Sm1614, the special electric switching process period flag is turned on. Then, it progresses to step Sm1615 and sets a special electric switching process period command. The special electric switching process period command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The special electric open/close processing period command includes information on the number of times the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is opened during the current special electric open/close processing period. The sound emission control device 90 sets, based on the received special electric opening/closing processing period command, to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times the first special electric auditors product 57b or the second special electric auditors product 58b is opened. After executing step Sm1615, the special electric auditors product control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step Sm1602 that the special electric switching process period flag is ON (Sm1602: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1616 to execute the special electric switching process. In the special electric opening/closing process, the opening/closing operation of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b is controlled based on the special electric opening/closing scenario selected by the special electric opening/closing scenario selection process described above. Details of the special electric switching process will be described later. After executing step Sm1616, the process proceeds to step Sm1617.

In step Sm1617, it is determined whether the special electric switching process period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the last opening of the first special electric accessory 57b or the second special electric accessory 58b based on the special electric open/close scenario is completed and the closed state is reached, and the first special electric accessory If it is determined that the last opening of the object 57b or the second special electric auditors product 58b is completed and the closed state is achieved, it is determined that the special electric switching process period is completed. When it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric switching process period has not ended (Sm1617: NO), the special electric auditors product control process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1617 that the special electric switching process period has ended (Sm1617: YES), the flow advances to step Sm1618 to turn off the special electric switching process period flag. Then, it progresses to step Sm1619.

In step Sm1619, a round display end process, which is a process of ending the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit 39, is executed. Then, it progresses to step Sm1620.

In step Sm1620, special electric ending time setting processing is executed. The special electric ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the special electric ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as special electric ending time). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special power ending time information is acquired from the special power switching scenario selected by the special power switching scenario selection process described above, and the acquired special power ending time information is provided in the RAM 64. Set to. The value of the special electric ending time timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. After executing step Sm1620, the process proceeds to step Sm1621.

In step Sm1621, a special telephone ending command is set. The special power transmission ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 sets to execute the special electric ending effect based on the reception of the special electric ending command. After executing step Sm1621, the process proceeds to step Sm1622, and the special electric ending period flag is turned ON. Then, this special electric auditors product control processing is ended.

When it is determined in step Sm1601 that the special electric ending period flag is ON (Sm1601: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1623.

In step Sm1623, it is determined whether the special electric ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric ending time timer counter set as the special electric ending time in the special electric ending time setting process is “0”. When it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special electric ending period has not ended (Sm1623: NO), the special electric auditors product control processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sm1623 that the special electric ending period has ended (Sm1623: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1624.

In step Sm1624, the special electric power ending period flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sm1625.

In step Sm1625, it is determined whether the V trigger flag is ON. If it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is not ON (step Sm1625: NO), that is, if the trigger for executing the special electric switching operation mode this time is not due to the V winning, the process proceeds to step Sm1626. , The special figure classification flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sm1628 mentioned later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sm1625 that the V trigger flag is ON (step Sm1625: YES), that is, if the trigger for executing the special electric switching execution mode this time is due to the V winning, step Sm1627. Then, the V trigger flag, the V winning flag, and the V winning type flag are turned off. Then, it progresses to step Sm1628.

In step Sm1628, a special electric switching execution mode end command is set. The set special power switching execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (step Sm0503) in the normal process (FIG. 721). The sound emission control device 90 sets to end the special electric ending effect based on the reception of the special electric open/close execution mode end command. After that, the process proceeds to step Sm1629, and the special electric switching execution mode flag is turned off. Then, this special electric auditors product control processing is ended.

<Special electric switching processing>
Next, the special electric switching process will be described. The special electric opening/closing processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 732: Sm1616) of the special electric auditors product control processing.

FIG. 733 is a flowchart showing the special electric power switching process. In step Sm1701, it is determined whether or not the first special electric accessory 57b is open. When it is determined in step Sm1701 that the first special electric accessory 57b is not being opened (Sm1701: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1702.

In step Sm1702, it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection processing is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sm1702 that the opening condition of the first special electric auditors's table 57b is satisfied (Sm1702: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1703.

In step Sm1703, the first special electric accessory 57b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sm1704.

In step Sm1704, the first special electric train release command is set. The first special electric power release command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b has been opened. The first special power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1704, the special electric switching process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sm1702 that the opening condition of the first special electric auditors's table 57b is not satisfied (Sm1702: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708 described later.

When it is determined in step Sm1701 that the first special electric accessory 57b is open (Sm1701: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1705.

In step Sm1705, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the first special electric auditors product 57b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric open/close scenario selected by the special electric open/close scenario selection process is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the first special electric accessory 57b set in the special electric open/close scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sm1705 that the closing condition for the first special electric auditors's table 57b is satisfied (Sm1705: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1706.

In step Sm1706, the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sm1707.

In step Sm1707, the first special electric power closing command is set. The first special electric power closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the first special electric accessory 57b is closed. The first special electric power closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1707, the special electric switching process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sm1705 that the closing condition of the first special electric auditors's table 57b is not satisfied (Sm1705: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1708 described later.

In step Sm1708, it is determined whether the second special electric accessory 58b is open. When it is determined in step Sm1708 that the second special electric accessory 58b is not open (Sm1708: NO), the process proceeds to step Sm1709.

In step Sm1709, it is determined whether or not the opening condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection processing is read, and it is determined whether or not the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sm1709 that the opening condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1709: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1710.

In step Sm1710, the second special electric accessory 58b is opened. Then, it progresses to step Sm1711.

In step Sm1711, the second special electric train release command is set. The second special electric open command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b has been opened. The second special power release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1711, this special electric switching process is ended.

When it is determined in step Sm1709 that the opening condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1709: NO), the special electric opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step Sm1708 that the second special electric accessory 58b is open (Sm1708: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1712.

In step Sm1712, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied. Specifically, the special electric switching scenario selected by the special electric switching scenario selection processing is read, and it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b set in the special electric switching scenario is satisfied. When it is determined in step Sm1712 that the closing condition of the second special electric accessory 58b is satisfied (Sm1712: YES), the process proceeds to step Sm1713.

In step Sm1713, the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. Then, it progresses to step Sm1714.

In step Sm1714, a second special power closing command is set. The second special electric power closing command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the second special electric accessory 58b is closed. The second special power closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 721: Sm0503) of the normal process. After executing step Sm1714, the special electric switching process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sm1712 that the closing condition for the second special electric accessory 58b is not satisfied (Sm1712: NO), the special electric opening/closing process is ended as it is.

<<M6>> Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 734 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sm3101, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step Sm3101, the process proceeds to step Sm3102.

In step Sm3102, the processing for general-purpose game time effect is executed. In the general figure game time effect processing, processing relating to effect during execution of the general figure game time is executed. Specifically, for example, when the general figure fluctuation command and the general figure classification command are received, the general figure fluctuation time included in the general figure fluctuation command and the type of the ordinary symbol included in the general figure classification command Based on this, processing relating to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3102, the process proceeds to step Sm3103.

In step Sm3103, normal power switching execution mode effect processing is executed. In the normal electric opening/closing execution mode effect processing, processing related to effects during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when the ordinary electric opening command is received, the ordinary electric opening effect and right-handed notification processing corresponding to the type of the ordinary electric opening/closing scenario are set to be executed. In addition, when the normal electric opening/closing processing period command is received, the normal electric opening/closing processing period effect corresponding to the type of the general electric opening/closing scenario is set to be executed. Further, when the normal electric opening command is received, the normal electric opening effect corresponding to the type of the normal electric opening/closing scenario and the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened is executed. In addition, when the ordinary electric closing command or the ordinary electric ending command is received, the ordinary electric closing effect corresponding to the type of the ordinary electric opening/closing scenario and the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is closed is executed. Further, when it is 5 seconds before the end of the ordinary electric ending period, the ordinary electric ending effect is executed. After executing step Sm3103, the process proceeds to step Sm3104.

In step Sm3104, special figure game time effect processing is executed. In the special figure game time effect processing, processing relating to effects during execution of the special figure game times is executed. Specifically, for example, when the special figure change command and the special figure type command are received, the special figure change time included in the special figure change command or the special symbol type included in the special figure type command is included. Based on this, processing relating to variable display and stop display of decorative symbols in the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing step Sm3104, the process proceeds to step Sm3105.

In step Sm3105, special electric switching execution mode effect processing is executed. In the special electric open/close execution mode effect process, a process related to the effect during execution of the special electric open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, for example, when the special electric opening command is received, the special electric opening effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario and the right-handed notification processing are set to be executed. Further, when the special electric switching process period command is received, the special electric switching process period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric switching process scenario is set to be executed. When the special electric open command is received, the special electric open production corresponding to the type of the special electric open/close scenario and the number of times the special electric auditor is opened is executed. When the special electric closing command is received, the special electric interval period effect corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario and the number of times the special electric auditors are closed is executed. When the special electric ending command is received, the special electric ending production corresponding to the type of the special electric opening/closing scenario is executed. After executing step Sm3105, the process proceeds to step Sm3106.

In step Sm3106, V winning effect processing is executed. In the V winning effect processing, when a V winning command is received, the effect suggesting that the V winning is won is set to be executed. After executing step Sm3106, the process proceeds to step Sm3107.

In step Sm3107, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step Sm3107, the process proceeds to step Sm3108.

In step Sm3108, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio data read in each of the above-described production processes. After executing step Sm3108, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 735 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step Sm6101, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step Sm6102.

In step Sm6102, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 736 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step Sm6201, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 737 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image or draws a new image while the image is being drawn. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step Sm6301, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 736), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the moving image display start command corresponding to the notice effect is stored, the drawing and display control of the image is started so that the moving image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, when the moving image display start command corresponding to the reach effect is stored, the drawing and display control of the image is started so that the moving image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In the command handling process (Sm6301), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41. Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step Sm6302, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (Sm6301) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step Sm6303.

In step Sm6303, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (Sm6302), the type of the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). After that, it advances to step Sm6304.

In step Sm6304, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (Sm6303), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the drawing process of the image based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the flow advances to step Sm6305, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of consecutive wins for the V winning jackpot is determined based on the type of the normal symbol. More specifically, based on the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of executions of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot during the execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is set. Since it is determined, the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the general figure lottery is won per universal figure and the general electric open/close execution mode is executed, the player is interested in the number of times the ordinary electric auditors 34b is opened in the general electric open/close execution mode. Can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure jackpot is not set as a result of the special figure lottery, various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machine to which the special figure jackpot is set are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture a pachinko machine having various game characteristics (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the special probability lottery does not include a high-probability mode (so-called probability variation state) in which the probability of winning a special prize jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control and provide these modes. The various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machines that are in use are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing a pachinko machine increases, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture a pachinko machine having various game characteristics (specs).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning per universal figure in the universal figure lottery is high, and the high frequency support mode (so-called electric support) in which the number of times the normal electric accessory 34b is opened when the general figure is won is increased. Since the state is not provided, the control can be simplified and various restrictions imposed on the pachinko machine provided with these modes are not imposed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine is increased, and it becomes possible to design and manufacture the pachinko machine having various game characteristics.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure lottery is not provided with a function for holding the special figure lottery, the special figure holding area for holding the special figure lottery can be omitted from the main RAM 64, and the storage area of the main RAM 64 can be saved. It can be effectively used for other purposes.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed a plurality of times without a substantial lottery (so-called jackpots are connected). Therefore, when a big jackpot is played on a general pachinko machine, for example, even though it is a high-probability mode (so-called probability change state), the next special electric switching execution mode does not start easily without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. It is possible to avoid such a situation (so-called “hamari”).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, and the universal ball opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the universal figure in the universal figure lottery, the game ball is in the flow passage. In the firing mode that reaches 301 (so-called "right-handed" firing mode), if the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game ball is the special figure starting port during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. The special ball opening and closing execution mode based on the special map small hit is executed in 34a, and the game ball enters the first special winning opening 57a during execution of the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit, The game ball that has entered the 1 special winning opening 57a enters the V winning opening 57av, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed.

Then, according to the present embodiment, the time required from the start to the end of the normal electric switching execution mode, the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special map small hit, and the special electric power based on the V winning jackpot. The time period from the start to the end of the open/close execution mode can be set to a time longer than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds). More specifically, in the situation where the game balls reach the flow passage 301 in a firing mode (so-called "right-handed" firing mode) and are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the normal electric switching execution mode is started If the time required from completion of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 714) is defined as the specific required time, the normal electric switching execution mode starts from the start. The time required for completion is set to be longer than the specific time required. Therefore, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot are ended, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode continues, and the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed. During the continuation of the mode, the normal electric accessory 34b may transit to the open state and the game ball may enter the special figure starting port 34a.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is won in the universal figure lottery at least twice in the universal figure lottery, the special electricity based on the V winning jackpot is executed while the ordinary electric open/close execution mode is being executed. After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the normal electric accessory 34b transits from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball enters the special map starting opening 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is finished. Is possible. Then, if the game ball enters the special map start port 34a after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is finished, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is executed again, and then the V winning jackpot is hit again. The special electric switching execution mode based on is executed. That is, when the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b is won per universal figure which is opened twice or more in the universal figure lottery to execute the universal electric open/close execution mode, the special electrical open/close execution mode based on the special area small hit and the V winning jackpot are won. The special electric switch open/close execution mode based on this is executed multiple times. When the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to obtain a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation that the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while the special symbol is changing, the special ball opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is being executed or the special ball opening/closing opening 34a is being executed while the special electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed based on the V prize jackpot. If you enter the ball, because it avoids the acquisition of various counter values for special figure lottery (in other words, because it does not have a special figure lottery hold function), during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the special figure small Even if the game ball enters the special map starting port 34a during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the win or during execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, then the special electric opening/closing based on the special drawing small hit is executed. The mode is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is also not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is desired that the player finishes the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot before the timing at which the game ball can enter the special drawing starting opening 34a comes. It can make you feel nervous.

Further, unlike the present embodiment, the special ball is started during the special symbols are changing, while the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit or the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is being executed. In the case of adopting a configuration in which acquisition of various counter values for special figure lottery is not avoided even when the ball enters the mouth 34a (that is, a configuration having a special figure lottery holding function), the ordinary electric accessory 34b When a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of, the special figure lottery is suspended, regardless of the number of times the normal electric auditors object 34b is opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. Instead, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit may be executed a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, even when a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 34a in one opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, one of the ordinary electric accessory 34b It is possible to realize the game performance in which the number of executions of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit is once for each opening.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is determined in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Since it is configured to have the predetermined length, the length of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot does not become longer than the predetermined length. Therefore, for example, even when the normal electric accessory 34b is changed to the open state due to the length of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot being longer than the predetermined length, the special electric power based on the V prize jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the open/close execution mode has not yet ended. As a result, even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is not finished, and the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player such that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is not executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is determined in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. The special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is ended early during the normal electric open/close execution mode in the normal electric open/close execution mode, and the special electric open/close execution mode is ended. It is possible to prevent the game from being delayed because the period until the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b becomes long.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, in the normal electricity opening/closing execution mode, in the normal electricity interval period, which is the period from the transition of the ordinary electric accessory 34b from the open state to the closed state to the transition from the closed state to the open state. The length can be set to a time (135.0 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric switching operation mode based on the V winning jackpot. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, the length of the normal electric power switching period in the normal electric power switching execution mode is the time required from the start to the end of the special electric power switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot (for example, 126.0). A case where the configuration of the comparative example in which the time is set to be shorter than the second (for example, 80.0 seconds) is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case where the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode will be described. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is started. After that, the first ordinary electricity interval period in the ordinary electricity opening/closing execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing. .. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power open/close execution mode ends, and the special power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended in the third open state of the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b. When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit are in the first and third opened states of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the second open state. ..

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not started, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is not started. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power open/close execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b, the special electric power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed, so the game ball When the player enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is started. After that, the second normal power interval period in the normal power switching execution mode ends, and the special power switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is still continuing in the third open state of the normal electric auditors' product 34b. .. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot are not newly started. After that, the third normal power interval period in the normal power open/close execution mode ends, and in the fourth open state of the normal electric auditors' product 34b, the special power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started. That is, in this case, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit are in the second and fourth opened states of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode. It will be started when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the third open state. ..

As described above, unlike the present embodiment, the configuration of the comparative example is adopted in which the length of the normal power switching period in the normal power switching execution mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the special power switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. In this case, the start timings of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special map small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot during the execution of the normal electric open/close execution mode are not fixed, and the flow of the game becomes complicated. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to control the game.

Next, the length of the normal power switching period in the normal power switching execution mode is longer than the time (126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special power switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (135. The case of adopting the configuration of the present embodiment, which is set to 0.0 seconds) will be described.

First, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is executed. After that, the first ordinary electricity interval period in the ordinary electricity open/close execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric auditors' product 34b, the special electricity open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot has already ended, so the game When the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is newly started, and then the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is started.

Next, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a in the first open state of the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit is also not executed. After that, the first electric power interval period in the electric power open/close execution mode ends, and in the second opened state of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b, the special electric power open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed, so the game ball When the player enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is started, and then the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big prize is started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the length of the normal power switching period in the normal power switching execution mode, which is required from the start to the end of the special power switching performance mode based on the V winning jackpot (126.0 seconds). ) Is set for a longer time (135.0 seconds), the normal electric accessory 34b is opened at the timing when the normal electric accessory 34b is opened in the normal electric switching execution mode. Regardless of the number of times, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not executed or has already been completed. Therefore, in the normal electric open/close execution mode, the special electric open/close execution mode and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special drawing small hit even if the game ball enters the special drawing starting opening 34a when the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened. It does not mean that the special electric switching execution mode based on the winning jackpot is not started. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to fix the start timing of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot during execution of the normal electric open/close execution mode, It is possible to prevent the game flow from becoming complicated, and to set the number of times that the normal electric accessory 34b is in the open state during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, thereby executing the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times that the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special drawing small hit and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit can be executed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode, the ordinary electric auditors product 34b last transitions from the open state to the closed state, and is the period from when the ordinary figure lottery can be executed until the ordinary electric ending. The length of the period can be set to a time (140.0 seconds) longer than the time (for example, 126.0 seconds) required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike the present embodiment, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the length of the ordinary electric ending period is set to be shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Will be described. In this configuration, for example, the universal drawing lottery is executed after the end of the universal electric ending period, and if the universal character is won, the ordinary electric open/close execution mode is executed, and the game is executed while the ordinary electric open/close execution mode is being executed. There is a possibility that the ball enters the special figure starting port 34a and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is executed. However, in this configuration, when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is executed immediately after the start of the ordinary electric ending period, the special electric opening/closing based on the V prize jackpot is performed even after the end of the ordinary electric ending period. There is a case where the execution mode is continued and the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is continued even when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and there is a problem that the player is disadvantageous.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the length of the ordinary electric ending period can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is continued even after the end of the normal electric ending period, and to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player. You can

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the length of the normal call ending period is set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the normal call interval period, a series of realizations performed during the normal call interval period in the normal call opening/closing execution mode is performed. It is possible to realize the flow of the game in the same manner even in the normal electric ending period of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. As a result, a new special opening/closing execution mode based on the special map small hit and a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed in both the normal electric interval period and the normal electric ending period in the normal electric switching execution mode. It becomes possible to realize the game.

According to the present embodiment, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot can be executed during the normal electric open/close execution mode in the normal electric open/close execution mode. Therefore, the number of times of the normal electric open/close interval included in the normal electric open/close execution mode is a game. It becomes a very important factor for the person. Therefore, when the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the general-purpose drawing in the general-purpose drawing lottery, how many times the normal-electricity interval period is included in the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode for the player. It is possible to raise interest and interest in the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be executed a plurality of times between the start and the end of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is started. Whether or not it is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have an interest or interest in whether or not the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode is started by winning the general-purpose drawing in the general-purpose drawing lottery, and the general-purpose opening/closing execution mode is started. In this case, the player can be made interested in how many times the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the production (FIG. 715, FIG. 716(A), etc.) that suggests the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened in the universal electric opening/closing execution mode is executed, the universal drawing lottery is performed. When the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode is executed by winning the game, the player can be made interested in the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 34b in the ordinary electric opening/closing execution mode. The interest can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed and stopped in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 are the number of times the normal electric auditors product 34b is opened when the general figure lottery is won ( In other words, since the number of consecutive wins per V winning jackpot) is suggested, it is possible to make the player feel that the decorative pattern with the largest possible number should be stopped on the effective line L1. Can be planned. In addition, when a reach is generated due to a large number of decorative patterns, it is possible to make the player have a great sense of expectation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, based on the result of the universal figure lottery, at least the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b is performed a plurality of times per one universal figure. When one cycle is defined as one special game time, from the opening of the normal electric auditors object 34b (time t3 in FIG. 714) to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot (time t10), when one special game time is defined. One special game time is executed based on the object 34b opening at the first timing (time t3 in FIG. 714), and the electric motor is normally driven at the second timing (time t11 in FIG. 714) after the end of the one special game time. The accessory 34b is controlled to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of one special game times per one drawing in the drawing drawing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a restriction period for restricting the variable display of the normal symbols not to start is generated. More specifically, a predetermined limit period is generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game time that occurs after the second timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the normal symbol from starting before the end of the 1 special game time, so the general drawing lottery is executed even though the 1 special game time has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user is confused. As a result, for example, the result of the universal drawing lottery is that the universal drawing is advantageous to the player, but since the one special game time that has already been executed has not ended, the game ball has a special figure. It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed even if the player enters the start opening 34a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types (V prize jackpot A and B) are set for the V prize jackpot, so not only the number of V prize jackpots to be won in one normal electric opening/closing execution mode, but which It is also possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not to win the type V winning jackpot.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the total required time (2.0 seconds) of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric small opening special electric opening/closing scenario A and the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning big hit special electric opening/closing scenario A The total time A (128.0 seconds), which is the sum of the total required time (126.0 seconds), is the total required time (2.1 seconds) in the special electric switching execution mode based on the special electric small switch special electric switching scenario B. It is the same as the total time B that is the sum of the total required time (125.9 seconds) of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special prize opening/closing scenario B for V prize jackpot, so the special electric power based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for special map small hits. The opening and closing execution mode is executed, and then the special electricity opening and closing execution mode based on the special winning opening special electricity switching scenario A for V prize and the special electricity opening and closing execution mode based on the special electricity small opening special electricity opening and closing scenario B are executed. The timing at which the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot jackpot ends is the same as when the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V special winning jackpot special electric opening/closing scenario B is executed. As a result, the waiting time from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric auditors' product 34b becomes the same, so that, for example, the contents of the effect executed in the waiting time are made common. can do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the universal figure starting gate 35 is provided at a lower center position of the game board 30, and the general winning opening 32 is provided at a position where the game ball entered in the universal figure starting gate 35 can enter. Is provided, as in a general pachinko machine in which the special figure starting port 34a is provided at the lower center position of the game board 30, the player is awarded with a prize ball, and a normal figure is drawn in the general figure lottery. It is possible to realize a game in which the player is expected to win the prize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the game ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35, many game balls enter the universal figure starting gate 35. It will be a ball. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the universal start gate 35 enter the general winning openings 32, so that the ratio of the number of prize balls by the general winning openings 32 to all the prize balls can be increased. it can. In other words, it is possible to reduce the character ratio, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the operation of the character to the total number of prize balls.

<<M7>> Modification of thirteenth embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configurations, processes, and effects as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

<<M7-1>> Modification 1:
In the above-described embodiment, when the normal electric power switching execution mode is about to end, the pseudo normal electric power ending effect that suggests that the normal electric power opening/closing execution mode will end is executed, so that After making the opening/closing execution mode seem to end, it is also possible to execute a continuous effect that is an effect that suggests that the normal power switching execution mode continues without ending. The details will be described below.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, in addition to the seven types of ordinary symbols A to G in the above embodiment, an ordinary symbol H (H per ordinary symbol) is set as the result of the universal symbol type determination in the universal symbol lottery. In addition to the seven types of POD switching scenarios A to G in the above embodiment, a POD switching scenario H is prepared. Then, when it is determined in the universal figure type determination that it is a normal symbol H, the universal electric switching scenario H is selected.

The normal electric opening/closing scenario H is compared with the normal electric opening/closing scenario G (ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened 7 times) from the first closing to the second opening of the normal electric accessory 34b during the normal electric opening/closing process period. The only difference is the length of the closing period (first normal power interval period), and other control is the same as in the normal power switching scenario G. Specifically, in the normal power switching scenario G described above, the length of all normal power switching intervals including the first normal power switching interval period is set to 135.0 seconds. Then, the length of the first ordinary communication interval period is set to 145.0 seconds, which is 10.0 seconds longer than the other ordinary communication interval periods.

In this modified example, when H is won per universal figure in the universal figure lottery, the decorative symbol is “in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, as in the case where A is won per universal figure. The display is stopped in the display mode such as "111".

The player recognizing the stop mode of the decorative pattern opens the normal electric accessory 34b once in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode executed based on the normal drawing hit this time, and executes the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. It is recognized that the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed once.

Then, it suggests that the normal power switching execution mode ends within 5 seconds from 10 seconds before the end of the first normal power interval period of the normal power switching execution mode based on the normal power switching scenario H to 5 seconds before. Execute the pseudo-fuden ending production that is the production. The contents of this pseudo-Hoden ending effect are the contents of the normal Hoden ending effect executed in 5 seconds from 5 seconds before the end of the ordinary electric ending period described in the above embodiment to the end (FIG. 716(B). )) is the same.

FIG. 738 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example. In this modified example, as a pseudo-universal ending effect, as shown in FIG. 738(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as "It was fun? See you again!" Is displayed. It should be noted that during execution of this pseudo-normal electric ending effect, a right-handing instruction image GD2, which is an image in which a character string such as "right-handed" and an arrow pointing right are combined in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed. This right-handing instruction image GD2 is smaller than the right-handing instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 716(A), and is a display that is difficult for the player to recognize.

The player who recognizes this pseudo-normal electric ending effect has executed the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot once in the normal electric open/close execution mode this time, and ends the normal electric open/close execution mode. Recognize that.

After that, during the 5 seconds from the end of the first normal electric power interval period to 5 seconds before the end, the continuous electric power is executed that is an effect that suggests that the normal electric power switching execution mode continues without being ended. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 738(B), as a continuous effect, a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as “I was surprised! The jackpot still continues!” Is displayed. Then, during the execution of this continuous effect, a right-handing instruction image GD1 larger than the right-handing instruction image GD2 shown in FIG. 738(A) is displayed in the upper right area of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, The voice such as "Right-handed!" is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the normal-power opening/closing execution mode continues without ending and that the player is in a state where "right-handed" should be performed.

As described above, in the present modified example, after executing the pseudo-universal ending effect, which is an effect that suggests that the normal electric opening and closing execution mode ends, the normal electric opening and closing execution mode continues without ending. Since the continuous production, which is the suggested production, is executed, after giving the player a sense of disappointment that the normal electrical switching execution mode will end, the actual electrical switching execution mode will continue without ending. It is possible to bring great joy and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the present modification, the decorative symbol is stopped in the display mode such as "111" in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and then the pseudo-general ending effect is produced in the first regular electric interval period. However, the normal electric interval period for which the pseudo ordinary electric ending effect is executed is not limited to the first time. For example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the decoration symbol is stopped in a display mode such as "333", and then the pseudo normal electric ending effect is executed in the third normal electric interval period. Good. That is, the pseudo normal power ending effect may be executed during any of the normal power interval intervals after the second time. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the pseudo ordinary electricity ending effect is executed every time during the ordinary electricity interval period. Even with such a configuration, after giving the player a sense of disappointment that the normal electrical switching execution mode ends, the actual electrical opening and closing execution mode continues to have a greater joy than continuing. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

<<M7-2>> Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the control mode of the final round of the special electric switching process period in the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning is set as a mode different from the control modes of the other rounds. The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V prize jackpot will not be executed unless the maximum number of game balls is entered into the second special winning opening 58a and the final round is ended early within a predetermined time. It may be configured to end up. The details will be described below.

In this modified example, the second special electric auditors object 58b is configured to be opened a plurality of times only in the round game of the final round (16th round) of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot jackpot, and 1 in the final round. The opening time of one time is 0.5 seconds, the closing time until the next opening is 1.0 seconds, the maximum opening time is 30.0 seconds, the maximum number of entered balls is 10, and the special electric ending period is 0.0 seconds. It is set. Therefore, until the ten game balls enter the second special winning opening 58a in the final round, the final round ends unless the total opening time of the second special electric accessory 58b reaches the maximum opening time. do not do. Specifically, the final round continues until the opening for 0.5 seconds reaches 60 times and the closing for 1.0 seconds reaches 59 times, and the time required for the final round is 89.0 seconds at maximum. On the other hand, since the maximum number of balls to be entered in the final round is set to 10, the final round ends when 10 game balls enter the second special winning opening 58a, and the special electric open/close execution mode is also set. finish. In other words, in the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot of this modified example, the time required per round is 5 from the first round to the fifteenth round, regardless of the manner of launching the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. It is fixed at 0.0 seconds, but only in the 16th round, the time required for one round will change significantly depending on the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Then, the time required for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot of the present modification changes from about 130 seconds to a maximum of 209.5 seconds.

Also in this modification, as in the above embodiment, the normal power interval period is 135.0 seconds, and the special power switching execution mode based on the V winning must be completed before the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b. In that case, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the next V winning is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, in the final round of the special prize opening and closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, a predetermined number (maximum number of entered balls) of game balls are inserted into the second special winning opening 58a within a predetermined time. Execute a ball entry promotion effect that is an effect that encourages that.

FIG. 739 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. In this modified example, as a ball entry promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 739(A), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and "Please insert the ball in time!" Good luck !!" is displayed, and the production is performed to display the remaining time of the normal electric train interval period.

Then, if the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning can be ended by the end of the normal electric interval period, that is, by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V winning is performed. The effect suggesting that the special electric switch opening/closing execution mode is executed is executed. Specifically, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 739(B), a female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and a character string such as “Congratulations! Is displayed.

On the other hand, if the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning cannot be ended by the end of the normal electric interval period, that is, before the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the next V winning is performed. The extinguishing effect is suggested, which suggests that the special electric switching execution mode based on is no longer executed. Specifically, in this modified example, as the extinction effect, as shown in FIG. 739(C), a sad female character is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and "Sorry. Next jackpot." Has disappeared..." is displayed. Then, the displayed right-handing instruction image GD1 is changed to a smaller right-handing instruction image GD2.

As described above, in the present modified example, in the final round of the special electric opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, the maximum number of game balls to the second big winning opening 58a by the next opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Since it is possible to provide the player with a game of entering a ball, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Then, since the time required for the final round becomes long, there is a possibility that the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed. It is possible to make people feel the impatience that they want the final round to be completed before the game is released, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the present modification, in the final round of the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot, a ball entry promotion effect that is an effect that encourages a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second special winning opening 58a within a predetermined time. Therefore, a new game in which the special electric opening/closing execution mode is ended by the next opening of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b by inserting a predetermined number of game balls into the second special winning opening 58a within a predetermined time. It is possible to make the player understand the sex and to increase the player's motivation to make a predetermined number of game balls enter the second special winning opening 58a within a predetermined time.

In addition, in the present modification, the extinction effect is executed when the special electric opening/closing execution mode is not ended by the next opening of the ordinary electric auditors role object 34b. It is possible to recognize that the special electric open/close execution mode has not ended, and to recognize that the subsequent game flow changes due to the fact that the special electric open/close execution mode has not ended.

Further, in this modified example, the special winning opening/closing scenario A for V prize jackpot (16 rounds, length change) has a larger number of rounds than the special charging opening/closing scenario B for V prize jackpot (12 rounds, fixed length). On the other hand, there is also a risk that the special electric open/close execution mode based on the next V winning jackpot will not be executed due to the increase in the time required for the final round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have both a feeling of happiness and a feeling of tension that he/she bears a risk in exchange for a large number of benefits (a large number of rounds), and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

In this modification, the required time is not fixed only in the final round, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the required time is not fixed only in a specific round (for example, an odd number of rounds) or required for all rounds. The time may not be fixed. In other words, the entire required time of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is not fixed. Even with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the next special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot will not be executed because the total time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is long. As a result, the player can be given a sense of tension, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<<M7-3>> Modification 3:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each modified example, the time required for each round game which constitutes the special electric open/close processing period of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is fixed by adopting the configuration of this modified example described below. It may be configured to be changed. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modified example, in the special electric power opening/closing execution scenario for V winning jackpot, the special electric power opening period is 12.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 10, the number of times of opening the second special electric auditors product 58b in one round is 1, and the maximum opening time is Is set to 0.1 seconds, the maximum number of balls to enter is 5, the special electricity interval period is set to 12.0 seconds, and the special electricity ending period is set to 5.0 seconds. In this modification, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b as speed reducing means for reducing the passing speed of the game ball, and the game reaches the second special electric accessory 58b. The ball temporarily stays on the upper surface of the ball until it passes through the second special electric accessory 58b.

Then, the game balls are fired toward the flow passage 301 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and in the situation where the fired game balls have reached the second special electric accessory 58b, the second special electric accessory 58b is 5 When the closed state is maintained for 0.0 seconds or more, a maximum of about eight game balls are retained on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b during the closed state. Then, when the second special electric accessory 58b is opened, about eight game balls retained on the upper surface of the second special electric accessory 58b enter the second special winning opening 58a. Although the maximum number of game balls to enter the second special winning opening 58a is set to 5, the maximum opening has already been made before it is detected that the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 58a. Since the time of 0.1 seconds elapses, the second special electric accessory 58b is irrespective of whether or not the number of game balls entering the second special winning opening 58a has reached the maximum number of game balls. , Closed. Therefore, the time required for one round will be fixed to 0.1 seconds regardless of the manner in which the game balls are fired and the behavior of the game balls fired.

As a result, the time required for the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special electric opening/closing execution scenario for the V winning jackpot in this modification is 12.0 seconds (special electric opening period)+0.1 seconds (1 round)×10 (the number of rounds)+12. 0.0 seconds (special electricity interval period)×9 (interval number)+5.0 seconds (special electricity ending period), which is fixed to 126.0 seconds.

With such a configuration, as in the above-described embodiment, the time required for the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot can be fixed.

<<M7-4>> Modification 4:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the above-mentioned modified examples, even if the required time of all round games constituting the special electric opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot reaches the maximum opening time, the normal electric operation in the ordinary electric opening and closing execution mode The special electric switching execution mode may be surely ended by the next opening of the accessory 34b. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modified example, only one type of special electric switching scenario for V winning jackpot is set, and in the special electric switching scenario, the special electric opening period is 5.0 seconds, the number of rounds is 16, and the second special electric role in one round. The number of times of opening the object 58b is 1, the maximum opening time is set to 20.0 seconds, the maximum number of balls entered is 10, the special electric interval period is 5.0 seconds, and the special electric ending period is set to 5.0 seconds.

Therefore, the longest required time of each round game in this modified example is 20.0 seconds, and the longest required time of the entire special electric switching operation mode based on the special electric switching scenario is 5.0 seconds (special electric opening period)+20. 0.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0 seconds (special electricity interval period) x 15 (interval number) + 5.0 seconds (special electricity ending period), which is 405.0 seconds.

Next, the shortest required time for each round game in this modification will be described. In this modified example as well, the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, so the minimum time required for 10 game balls to enter the second special winning opening 58a is 6.0 seconds. The minimum required time for each round game is about 6.0 seconds. As a result, the shortest required time for the entire special electric switching operation mode based on the special electric switching scenario is 5.0 seconds (special electric opening period) + about 6.0 seconds (1 round) x 16 (number of rounds) + 5.0. Seconds (special electricity interval period)×15 (interval number)+5.0 seconds (special electricity ending period), which is about 181.0 seconds.

In addition, in this modification, in each normal electric switching scenario, the normal electric interval period is set to 415.0 seconds and the normal electric ending period is set to 420.0 seconds, and the special electric switching based on the special map small hit is set. The execution mode ends in about 2.0 seconds. Therefore, in the present modification, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, and included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Even if the required time of all round games to be played becomes the maximum of 20.0 seconds, the special electric open/close execution mode is set by the second opening of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b in the normal electric open/close execution mode. It will surely end.

In other words, according to this modification, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed after the first opening of the ordinary electric accessory 34b, and all round games included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode are required. Even when the time reaches the maximum of 20.0 seconds, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 10 that can open the normal electric accessory 34b after the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. As a result, regardless of the length of time required for a plurality of round games included in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot is surely executed a plurality of times. It becomes possible.

<<M7-5>> Modification 5:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each modified example, during execution of the round game in the special electric opening/closing processing period of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the symbol display device 41 displays information corresponding to the number of rounds of the running round game. The display surface 41a may be configured to display. Specifically, for example, during the period in which the round game of the first round is being executed, a character string such as "It is during the first round!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. ..

Further, in the special electric open/close processing period of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the information corresponding to the number of remaining round games may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, in the special electric open/close execution mode configured by a round game of 16 rounds, during the period in which the round game of the first round is being executed, "remaining 15" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The character string such as "Times" is displayed, and during the period when the round game of the fifteenth round is being executed, the character string such as "remaining one time" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the 16th round (final In the period in which the round game of (round) is being executed, a character string such as "Last!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the number of round games executed in the special electric switching execution mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode, as a specific image, an image in which a specific character (for example, a character of a whale) speaks a line such as “Has it been fun? See you again!” is displayed. It may be configured to display on the display surface 41a of the device 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the special electric open/close execution mode has ended, and to give a sense of fulfillment to the execution of the special electric open/close execution mode and a motivation for subsequent games. can do.

Further, at the time of ending the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, it is possible to display on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 information regarding the profit obtained by the player during the execution of the special electric open/close execution mode. Specifically, for example, in the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode, information on the number of game balls paid out as prize balls during execution of the special electric open/close execution mode (related to the number of game balls acquired by the player Information) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the profit that he/she has gained by executing the special electric switching execution mode, and at the same time, have a sense of fulfillment with respect to the execution of the special electric opening/closing execution mode. Motivation for the game can be given.

Further, during execution of the round game in the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot, the decorative design is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the design display device 41, and thereafter, the decorative design being variably displayed is stopped in a predetermined display mode. It may be configured to be displayed. Specifically, for example, immediately after winning the per-university figure in the general-drawing lottery, after notifying the player of the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 34b has been opened due to winning the per-universal figure, During the final round of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V prize jackpot, the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and after the special electric open/close execution mode is finished, the normal electric accessory 34b. When it is to be opened (in the case of condominium), for example, the decoration pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decoration pattern such as “777” is arranged, while the special electric opening/closing execution mode ends. When the normal electric accessory 34b does not open later (when it is not in a condominium), for example, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative pattern such as "326" is not provided. According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during the execution of the round game, it is possible to make the player have an emotion of surprise and the display mode when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. It is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation as to how the (stop mode) will be.

<<M7-6>> Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment and each modification, after the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is finished (time t10 in FIG. 714), the normal electric auditors article 34b is next opened in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode (time t11). In the period up to ), if the player has not performed "right hit", a special (strong) notification that the player should right hit is stronger than the normal right hit notification processing that is executed in other periods. The configuration may be such that the right-handed notification processing is executed. The configuration of this modification will be described below.

In this modified example as well, as in the above-described embodiment, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is short, and therefore the player confirms that the normal electric accessory 34b is opened and then the game ball. When the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 34b, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is already in the closed state, and the special figure starting port 34a provided below the ordinary electric accessory 34b. Can not enter the game ball. And the special ball opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is not executed because the game ball has not entered the special drawing starting port 34a, and as a result, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is also not executed. Will be a disadvantageous situation for the person.

Therefore, in the present modification, "right hitting" is performed in the period from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the normal electric accessory 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode. If it is determined that the "right hit" is not performed, the special right hit notification process is executed. Specifically, in the special right-handing notification process, a character larger than the right-handing instruction image GD1 shown in FIG. 716(A) and a right-handing instruction image of an arrow are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and A voice such as "please right hit" is output from the speaker 46 at the maximum volume.

Note that various configurations can be adopted as the configuration for determining whether or not "right-handed" is performed. For example, in this modification, a sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided near the entrance of the flow passage 301, and the interval at which the passage of the game ball is detected by the sensor is a predetermined interval (for example, 2.0 seconds). ) By determining whether or not the above is true, it is determined whether or not "right-handed" is performed. Then, when it is determined that the interval at which the passage of the game ball is detected by the sensor is equal to or larger than the predetermined interval, it is determined that the "right hit" is not performed, while the interval is less than the predetermined interval. When the determination is made, it is determined that “right hit” is being performed.

As described above, in the present modified example, in the period from the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot to the next opening of the ordinary electric auditors object 34b in the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, “right hit” is performed. If it is determined that "right hitting" is not performed, the special right hitting notification process is executed, so that the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 34a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit is not executed, and as a result, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning big hit is not executed, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. it can.

In addition, the notification mode of the special right-handing notification process is a mode in which the notification is stronger (more intense) than the notification mode of the normal right-handing notification process, that is, if the notification mode is more easily recognized by the player to be right-handed The notification mode is not limited to the above. For example, the right-handing instruction image displayed in the special right-handing notification process may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced, and, for example, the right-handed instruction image may be rainbow-colored and blink. Good.

<<M7-7>> Modification 7:
In the above-described embodiment and each of the modified examples, the special figure lottery result executed when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a may include a special figure missing. According to such a configuration, even if the player wins the universal figure in the universal figure lottery and the universal electric open/close execution mode is executed and the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a, then the special figure wins. Since there is a possibility that the special electric open/close execution mode based on it will not be executed, the player can be interested in the result of the special drawing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<M7-8>> Modification 8:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each of the modified examples, the special electric prize winning device 34 may be provided with a special electric starting port instead of the special drawing starting port 34a. When a game ball enters the special electric power starting opening provided in place of the special electric power starting opening 34a, the special electric open/close execution mode in which the first special electric accessory 57b is opened and closed without performing the special electric power drawing lottery described above. Is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to omit the counter and table for special figure lottery and simplify the control, and it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications.

<<M7-9>> Modification 9:
In the ordinary electric prize winning device 34 of the above-mentioned embodiment and each modification, the V special winning opening is provided instead of the special figure starting opening 34a, and the first special electric winning device 57 (first big winning opening 57a, first special electric winning combination). The object 57b and the V winning opening 57av) may be omitted. According to such a configuration, if the gaming ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35 and wins the universal figure in the universal figure lottery, the universal electric open/close execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the V winning opening while the ordinary electric accessory 34b is open while the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is executed. After that, even after the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is finished, the normal electric opening/closing execution mode is continued, and the ordinary electric auditors object 34b is opened again and the game ball enters the V winning opening, The special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot is again executed. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V-prize big hit is executed a plurality of times per one universal figure without going through the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. It is possible to realize the configuration.

Note that, as in this modified example, in the configuration in which the special electric switching execution mode based on the special map small hit is not executed, or the configuration in which the execution period of the special electric switching execution mode based on the special drawing small hit is very short, the normal electric switching execution mode is set. If it is possible to set the time required from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot to a longer time than the time from the start to the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot. It is possible to realize a configuration that can be executed multiple times during execution of the electrical switching execution mode.

<<M7-10>> Modification 10:
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each modification, all the special figure lottery results executed when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 34a are set to the special figure jackpot, and the first special electric prize winning device. 57 (the 1st special winning opening 57a, the 1st special electric auditors product 57b, the V winning opening 57av) it is possible to do the constitution which is abbreviated. According to such a configuration, if the gaming ball enters the universal figure starting gate 35 and wins the universal figure in the universal figure lottery, the universal electric open/close execution mode is executed. Then, if the game ball enters the special map starting port 34a while the normal electric accessory 34b is open during execution of the normal electric opening/closing execution mode, the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special drawing jackpot is executed. In the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the special figure jackpot, the opening/closing processing of the second special electric accessory 58b is executed. After that, even after the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special map jackpot is finished, the normal electric open/close execution mode is continuing, the ordinary electric accessory 34b is opened again, and the game ball enters the special map starting opening 34a. In this case, the special electric switching execution mode based on the special map jackpot is executed again. That is, according to such a configuration, the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure big hit is executed a plurality of times in one ordinary drawing without going through the special electric open/close execution mode based on the special figure small hit in the above embodiment. The configuration can be realized.

Note that not all of the special figure lottery results may be set as the special figure jackpot, and the special figure jackpot may be set as a part of the result of the special figure lottery. For example, 50% of the result of the special drawing lottery may be set to the special drawing jackpot, and the remaining 50% may be set to be out of the special drawing. With such a configuration, the player can be interested in the result of the special drawing lottery, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<<M7-11>> Modification 11:
The above-described embodiment and each modified example may be configured to include a high-probability mode (so-called probability change state) in which the probability of winning the special figure jackpot in the special figure lottery increases. Specifically, for example, the start of the high-probability mode as a specific profit is determined based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 57av, and is advantageous for the player after the start of the high-probability mode. As a configuration (multi-cut probability variation machine, ST (special time) machine) that terminates the high probability mode when a predetermined termination condition that the special drawing lottery in the high probability mode is performed multiple times (for example, 100 times) is satisfied Good.

Further, in this configuration, information corresponding to the remaining number of special drawing lottery executed in the high probability mode may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, when the number of remaining special figure lottery executed in the high-probability mode is 15 times, a character string such as "15 remaining times" is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, In the period during which the special symbol is changing in the last special symbol lottery executed in the high-probability mode, a character string such as "Last!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the number of special drawing lottery executed in the high-probability mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a specific image may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 at the end of the special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode, as a specific image, an image in which a specific character (for example, a character of a whale) speaks a line such as “Has it been fun? See you again!” is displayed. It may be configured to display on the display surface 41a of the device 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the special electric open/close execution mode has ended, and to give a sense of fulfillment to the execution of the special electric open/close execution mode and a motivation for subsequent games. can do.

Further, at the end of the high-probability mode, it may be configured to display the information on the profit obtained by the player during the execution of the high-probability mode on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, for example, the number of times the special map jackpot is won without transitioning from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode (the number of so-called condominiums), and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the condominiums. Information (information about the number of game balls acquired by the player) may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the player can grasp the profit gained by the execution of the high-probability mode, and a sense of fulfillment of the execution of the high-probability mode and the subsequent game. Can be motivated.

Further, one specific profit may be determined from a plurality of types of specific profits (for example, specific profits A and B). Specifically, for example, in addition to the high-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode (so-called power support state) described above is provided, and the specific profit A starts the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. Both the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are configured to end when the special drawing lottery is executed 100 times without winning the special drawing jackpot, while the specific profit B is the high probability mode. And the high frequency support mode is started, and the high probability mode ends when the special map lottery is executed 100 times without winning the special map jackpot, and the high frequency support mode does not win the special map jackpot. It may be configured to end when the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times. Further, for example, the specific profit A starts the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and both the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are 100 special drawing lottery without winning the special drawing jackpot. It is configured to end when executed, on the other hand, for the specific profit B, in both the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, if the special figure lottery is executed 30 times without winning the special figure jackpot. It may be configured to end. According to such a configuration, the player is given not only an interest in whether or not a particular profit is given, but also a kind of a particular profit if the particular profit is given. It is possible to make people interested in things such as whether or not.

Further, during execution of special drawing lottery in the high probability mode (during change of the special symbol), the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and then the decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display mode. Alternatively, the display may be stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, during execution of the special drawing lottery in the high-probability mode, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the special drawing jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery. When it is to be done, for example, the decoration pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed in the display mode in which the same decoration pattern such as "777" is arranged. On the other hand, when the special drawing jackpot is not won in the special drawing lottery, For example, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the same decorative pattern such as "326" is not provided. According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the special symbol lottery in the high probability mode, what is the display mode (stop mode) when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation.

Further, based on the result of the universal drawing lottery, at least the opening operation of the ordinary electric accessory 34b may be executed at least once for each universal drawing.

Further, when one cycle from the opening of the ordinary electric auditors product 34b to the end of the high probability mode is defined as one special game time, one special gaming time based on the ordinary electric auditors product 34b opening at the first timing The configuration may be such that the normal electric auditors product 34b is controlled to open at the second timing after the execution of the one special game time.

Further, it may be configured so that the variable display of the normal symbols is not started. More specifically, a predetermined limit period may be generated in the period from the first timing to the end of one special game time that occurs after the second timing.

Further, the special figure lottery in the high probability mode can be changed from the first special figure change time (eg, 2 seconds) having the shortest execution time to the second special figure change time (eg, 180 seconds) having the longest execution time depending on the game state. Yes, even if all the special figure lottery in the high-probability mode of one special game time executed after the first timing are all executed in the second special figure change time, The normal electric accessory 34b may be opened after the end.

As described above, according to this modification, since the high probability mode is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the game more than the above-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

<<Y>> Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that receives a right and becomes a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-ball type, for example, is provided with a plurality of reels to which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction, starts reel rotation by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. After the reels stop after a predetermined time elapses, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the reel starts to rotate.

Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

<<Z>> Regarding the feature groups extracted from the above embodiments and the like:
The feature groups (features of the invention group) extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described respective embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature aA group>
The feature aA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Characteristic aA1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
In the first case (when it is a big hit based on a ball entering the starting opening) that the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the game ball is played in a predetermined manner. Means for executing an effect of prompting the player to launch the game (right-handed suggestion effect) in a period after the game time executing means has finished the game time,
In the second case where the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small hit) , Means for executing an effect (right-handed suggestion effect) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined mode, in a period after the game time executing means has finished the game time,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic aA1, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes the effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a predetermined mode, so that the effect is temporarily based on the second case. Even if is executed, based on the first case, for the player who determines whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition based on the effect, It is possible to add an expectation that the effect has been executed.

[Feature aA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aA1,
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing unit satisfies the predetermined condition;
Of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits, a type determination means for determining one type of benefits to be given to the player,
A privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information on the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means,
Equipped with
The type determining unit includes a unit (a function of executing a type determining process) for determining a privilege of the one type to be given to the player after the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature aA2, the type determining means determines a type of privilege to be given to the player after the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays the information related to the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of You can Therefore, based on the effect, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition when the effect that prompts the game ball to be fired in the predetermined mode is executed after the game time is over. It is possible to give the player who is judging the expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, and further display the information regarding the privilege on the privilege type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not A period in which it is possible to give an expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end Can be lengthened.

[Characteristic aA3]
A gaming machine according to feature aA2,
Provided with a type determining entrance (type determining gate 202), which is a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter.
The type determination means gives the player a privilege of the one type given to the player when the game ball enters the type determining ball after the game times where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is finished. A gaming machine comprising means for determining.

According to the characteristic aA3, after the game times that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed, and further, after the player has entered the game ball into the classification determining ball input section, the privilege classification display means Since the information regarding the privilege of one type determined by the determining unit is displayed, the timing at which the privilege type display unit displays the information regarding the privilege of one type determined by the type determining unit can be further delayed. Therefore, based on the effect, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition when the effect that prompts the game ball to be fired in the predetermined mode is executed after the game time is over. It is possible to give the player who is judging the expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, and further display the information regarding the privilege on the privilege type display means. Based on whether or not it is possible to determine whether or not the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition, at the time when the player ends the game time, the player moves to the type determining ball input section Compared to a gaming machine that can be delayed until after the game is entered, and that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of the game time where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to further lengthen the period in which it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the case.

[Feature aA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA3,
Specific process executing means for executing a specific process including causing the effect executing means to execute an effect of causing the game ball to be fired in a predetermined mode after the end of the game times corresponding to the first case,
A specific process execution determining means for determining whether to execute the specific process,
Equipped with
The type determining means,
Based on the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the specific process (the process of case 1 in FIG. 10) by the specific process execution determination means, the player is given the privilege of a plurality of types determined in advance. A gaming machine comprising means for determining one type of privilege.

According to the feature aA4, the type determining means can determine the type of privilege according to whether or not a specific process is executed, out of a plurality of types of privileges determined in advance. In other words, the mode of granting the privilege of the type determined by the type determining unit and the mode of executing the specific process by the specific process executing unit can be related modes.

<Feature aB group>
The feature aB group is extracted from the above-described respective embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aB1]
A gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means,
In the first case, means for granting a privilege when the game ball has passed a specific area,
In the second case, means for not granting a privilege even though the game ball has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature aB1, there are cases where the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the specific region, and cases where the privilege is not given even though the game ball passes through the specific region. When the game ball passes through a specific area, the player can be made to guess whether or not the privilege is given, and an expectation that the privilege will be given can be given.

[Feature aB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aB1,
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
Equipped with
The first case corresponds to the determination when the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game number does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. It is a case where a process corresponding to the result of the determination (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small hit) is being executed after the end of the game game,
In the second case, when the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game number satisfies the predetermined condition, the process corresponding to the result of the determination after the game number corresponding to the determination ends ( A gaming machine characterized in that the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot is being executed.

According to the feature aB2, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a game, in addition to giving an expectation by inferring whether or not a privilege is granted, special information corresponding to a game time is given. If the special condition corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, or if the special condition corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined specific condition, it is possible to infer a larger value to the player. Expectation can be added.

[Feature aB3]
A gaming machine according to feature aB1 or feature aB2,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
In the first case, means for executing an effect that suggests that the game ball has passed a specific area, triggered by the game ball having passed the specific area,
In the second case, means for executing an effect that suggests that the game ball has passed a specific area, triggered by the game ball having passed the specific area,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature aB3, when the game ball passes through the specific region during the game, the game ball passes through the specific region regardless of whether the privilege is granted or not. As a result, the effect that suggests that the game ball has passed the specific area is executed, so for the player who recognizes that the effect that indicates that the game ball has passed the specific area has been executed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a privilege may be given.

[Feature aB4]
A gaming machine according to feature aB2 or feature aB3,
The privilege granting means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed by the game time executing means satisfies the predetermined condition, means for giving a privilege to the player after the end of the game times,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed by the game time executing means does not satisfy the predetermined condition and satisfies a predetermined specific condition, the player is notified after the game time is over. Means for granting benefits,
Equipped with
Further, the gaming machine is
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed by the game time execution means satisfies the predetermined condition, one type of privilege to be given to the player is selected from among a plurality of types of privilege defined in advance. A type determining means for determining,
A privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information on the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means,
Equipped with
The type determining unit includes a unit (a function of executing a type determining process) for determining a privilege of the one type to be given to the player after the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature aB4, the type determining means determines the privilege of one type to be given to the player after the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, the special information determines the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays the information related to the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of You can When the privilege type display means displays information related to one type of privilege determined by the type determination means, the player can judge that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, but Since it is possible to delay the display timing, it is possible that the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition or the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition for the player. Thus, it is possible to lengthen the period for inferring whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to lengthen the period for giving the player a sense of expectation.

<Characteristic aC group>
The characteristic aC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aC1]
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting means,
In the first case, means for granting a privilege when the game ball has passed a specific area,
In the second case, means for not granting a privilege even though the game ball has passed through the specific area,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
Despite the second case, the game machine is provided with a means for executing an effect of urging the game ball to be shot in a mode of passing the game ball to the specific area.

According to the feature aC1, since the production is executed that prompts the game ball to be launched in a mode of passing the game ball to a specific area in the second case, it is recognized that the production has been executed. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the case may be the first case to the player who has played, and to prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a mode of passing the game ball to a specific area.

[Feature aC2]
A gaming machine according to feature aC1,
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
Equipped with
In the first case, the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (in the case of a small hit). And
In the second case, the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game number satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of a big hit),
further,
In the second case, a type determining unit that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player from among a plurality of types of predetermined privileges.
A privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information on the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means,
A type determining ball (type determining gate 202) which is a ball entering part into which a game ball can enter
Equipped with
The type deciding means gives the player the privilege of the one type given to the player upon the entry of the game ball into the type determining entry ball after the end of the game game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A means for determining
The game ball characterized in that the type determining ball (type determining gate 202) is arranged at a position where a game ball shot in such a manner as to allow the game ball to pass through the specific area can enter the game ball. ..

According to the feature aC2, the type determining means determines one type of privilege to be given to the player, from among the plurality of types of privileges predetermined in the second case. Further, the privilege type display means displays information related to the privilege of one type determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the player can determine whether it is the first case or the second case by recognizing whether or not the information regarding the privilege of one type is displayed on the privilege type display means. , Even if the effect executing means is the second case, even if the effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a mode of passing the game ball to the specific area is executed, the player displays the privilege type display means. It is possible to determine whether it is the first case or the second case by recognizing whether or not the information regarding the privilege of one type is displayed, and in this case, the player's expectation is reduced. Will end up.

However, in this feature group, the type determining means gives the player the opportunity to enter the game ball into the type determining ball unit after the end of the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Since the type determining ball is determined and the type determining ball entry unit is arranged at a position where the game ball fired in a mode of allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area can enter, the effect executing means is the second. Despite that, at the time of executing the effect of prompting the game ball to be launched in a mode of passing the game ball to a specific area, the privilege type display means is determined by the type determination means. It does not display information about the benefits of the type. The bonus type display means is related to one type of bonus determined by the type determining means only after the player shoots the game ball in a specific area in a manner to enter the type determining ball. Display information. Therefore, although the effect executing means is the second case, at the time of executing the effect that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a mode of passing the game ball to a specific area, It is difficult to determine whether it is the case or the second case, and the game ball is shot in a mode of passing the game ball to a specific area while giving an expectation that the case may be the first case. Can be encouraged.

<Feature aD group>
The feature aD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aD1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
Production execution means for executing production,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting means,
First granting means for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing means satisfies the predetermined condition.
Second granting means for granting a privilege when the game ball has passed a specific area,
Equipped with
The privilege granting means,
If the game ball has passed through the specific area but the game ball has passed through the specific area during the period in which the first grant means grants the privilege, A means for continuing granting the privilege by the first granting means without granting the privilege triggered by passing through the area
The effect execution means,
Despite the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the period in which the first granting means is granting the privilege, the game ball has passed through the specific area and is used as a trigger. A gaming machine characterized by executing an effect that suggests that a ball has passed through the specific area.

According to the feature aD1, when the game ball has passed the specific area during the period in which the first granting means is granting the privilege, the privilege triggered by passing the specific area is not granted. Despite continuing the grant of the privilege by the first granting means, the game ball passes through the specific area during the period when the first granting means grants the privilege, and the game ball moves over the specific area. Since the effect suggesting that the effect has been executed is executed, the player who has recognized that the effect has been executed is triggered by the interruption of the grant by the first granting means and the passage of the game ball through a specific area. It is possible to add a sense of expectation that the granting of the privilege will start.

[Feature aD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aD1,
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized in that, when the first granting means grants the privilege, it performs an effect suggesting that a game ball is shot in a mode of passing through the specific area.

According to the feature aD2, when the first granting means grants the privilege, since the effect suggesting that the game ball is shot in a mode of passing the specific area is executed, the game ball passes the specific area. In the case where the first granting means is granting the privilege, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, even though the privilege triggered by passing through the specific area is not granted. It is possible, and further, by causing the player to shoot a game ball in a mode of passing through a specific area, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation.

<Feature aE group>
The feature aE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aE1]
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (a function for executing the opening/closing execution mode),
A plurality of privilege grant trigger entrance ball areas that are trigger areas for granting the privilege, which are entrance areas (first starting opening 33, second starting opening 34, V winning opening 222) in which game balls can enter.
Of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits, a type determination means for determining one type of benefits to be given to the player,
A gaming machine comprising:
The type determining means,
When the game ball enters the first privilege granting opportunity entering ball area (first starting opening 33, second starting opening 34), the game ball enters the first benefit granting opportunity entering ball area. A first benefit that determines the type of the privilege to be granted on the basis of the fact that the game ball has entered a ball entry area (class determination gate 202) different from the first benefit grant opportunity entrance area Type determination means,
When the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity entrance area (V winning opening 222), the game ball is awarded based on the second benefit grant opportunity entrance area. A second privilege type determining means for determining the type of privilege when the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity entry ball area (V winning opening 222);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic aE1, the method of determining the type by the type determining means is such that the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity entrance ball area and the game ball enters the second benefit grant opportunity entrance ball area. Since it is different from the case where it is done, various game characteristics can be created when the type of privilege is determined, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature aE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aE1,
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
Equipped with
By the game ball entering the first privilege grant opportunity entrance ball region, the acquisition condition is satisfied,
The first privilege type determining means,
In the period after the end of the game game executed by the game game execution means triggered by the game ball entering the first privilege grant opportunity entrance ball area, the first privilege grant opportunity entrance ball area A game machine characterized by comprising means for determining the type of privilege to be given when a game ball enters a different ball entry area.

According to the feature aE2, regarding the determination of the type of privilege in the period after the end of the game round executed by the game round execution means triggered by the game ball entering the first bonus grant opportunity entering ball area, the player Since it is actively involved in the game, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even in the period after the end of the game time.

[Feature aE3]
A gaming machine according to feature aE1 or feature aE2,
When a game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity entrance ball area,
The gaming machine, wherein the privilege granting means comprises means for confirming that the privilege is granted.

According to the characteristic aE3, when the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity ball area, the privilege granting means determines to grant the privilege. Further, according to the feature aE1, the second privilege type determination means, when the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity entry ball region, the game ball enters the second privilege grant opportunity entry ball region. The type of privilege granted based on the ball is determined with the game ball entering the second privilege grant opportunity ball area as a trigger. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second benefit grant opportunity ball area, it is determined that the benefit is granted, and the type of benefit to be granted is also determined. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed with respect to the progress of the game when the game ball enters the second privilege giving opportunity ball area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the above feature aE2, when the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity entrance area, the game ball enters the first benefit grant opportunity area as an opportunity. The type of privilege to be granted is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered a ball entry area different from the first bonus entry opportunity area in the period after the game time has been executed. After the decision, the privilege is given. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity entrance area, compared to when a game ball enters the second benefit grant opportunity area, until the benefit is granted. There is no sense of speed. As a result, the progress of the game should be slowed down depending on whether the game ball enters the first privilege grant opportunity entrance ball area or the second benefit grant opportunity entrance ball area. Therefore, it is possible to add intonation to the player's expectation of the game and to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature aF group>
The characteristic aF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aF1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing unit satisfies the predetermined condition;
A first winning opening which is a ball entering portion which gives a player a prize ball which is a game ball as a privilege;
A second winning opening, which is a ball entering portion that gives a player a prize ball, which is a game ball as a privilege, and which is different from the first winning opening.
The first winning port is in a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter or a state in which it is difficult to enter a ball. A first winning opening state transition means (first opening/closing door 36b) for transitioning to a non-ball entering state;
The second winning opening is in a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which the game ball cannot enter or a state in which it is difficult to enter a ball. Second winning opening state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) for transitioning to a certain non-ball entering state,
A state transition means operation control means for controlling operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The state transition means operation control means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time execution means satisfies the predetermined condition, the second winning opening state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) is operated after the end of the game time. Second winning hole state transition determining means for determining whether or not to operate during the period of granting the privilege,
An operation number determination means for determining the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means;
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to the feature aF1, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time execution means satisfies the predetermined condition, the second winning a prize mouth state transition means gives the privilege after the end of the game time. Since the process of determining whether or not to operate during the period and the process of determining the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means are separately executed, when award is given, The first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition depending on the combination of the presence or absence of the operation of the second winning opening state transition means and the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means. Various modes of operation of the means can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature aF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aF1,
The operation number determination means,
The first prize hole state transition after the second prize hole state transition determination means determines whether or not to operate the second prize hole state transition means during the period for granting the privilege after the end of the game time. A game machine comprising means and means for determining the number of times of operation of the second winning opening state transition means.

According to the feature aF2, the number of operations of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means is determined after first determining whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means. During the period from the determination of whether or not to operate the winning a prize mouth state transition means to the determination of the number of operations of the first winning a prize mouth state transition means and the second award winning mouth state transition means, the second winning a prize state transition means It is possible to execute processing based on the determination result of whether to operate. For example, in the case of the result of the determination that the second winning opening state transition means is operated, it is determined whether or not the second winning opening state transition means is operated, and then the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening. During the period until the number of times of operation of the state transition means is determined, execution of the effect suggesting to operate the second winning opening state transition means can be started, and after the start of the effect, the first winning opening state transition The number of operations of the means and the second winning opening state transition means can be determined.

[Feature aF3]
A gaming machine according to feature aF1 or feature aF2,
In the first case in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition (big hit), the second time in the period after the game time execution means finishes the game time. When the means for executing the effect of prompting the game ball to enter the winning opening and the special information corresponding to the game times do not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (small hit ) And a second case determined by the determination means, means for executing an effect of urging a game ball to enter the second winning opening in a period after the game time execution means finishes the game time. And a performance executing means including
Specific processing execution means for executing a specific processing including causing the effect executing means to execute an effect of prompting the game ball to enter the second winning opening after the game times corresponding to the first case are completed. When,
A specific process execution determining means for determining whether to execute the specific process,
Equipped with
The second winning opening state transition determining means includes means for determining whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on a result of the determination by the specific processing determining means. Amusement machine.

According to the feature aF3, the second winning opening state transition determining means determines whether or not to operate the second winning opening state transition means based on the result of the determination by the specific processing determining means. The mode of executing the process and the mode of operation of the first winning opening state transition means and the second winning opening state transition means can be related to each other.

<Characteristic aG group>
The feature aG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aG1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player,
A winning portion which is a ball-entering portion into which a game ball can enter, and which gives a player a prize ball, which is a game ball as a privilege, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion. ,
The winning opening is in a state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the entered state. A winning opening state transition means for performing a state transition between the winning state and a state (a function for executing a large winning opening opening/closing process),
A state transition mode determination means (type determination process) for determining a state transition mode in which the winning hole state transition means is a mode for transitioning the prize hole.
Production execution means for executing production,
Equipped with
The winning prize state transition means,
In the first case (in the case of a big hit) when the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the state of the winning hole is changed to the non-ball-entering state after the game time is over. From the above into the ball entering state,
When the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and in the second case (small hit) where the determination means determines that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the game After the end of the number of times, a means for transitioning the state of the winning opening from the non-ball entering state to the ball entering state,
The production execution means is
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means determines the state transition mode from the time when the game time in the first case ends, with an effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined mode. Means to execute during the period (waiting period) until
In the second case, the state transition mode determining means determines the state transition mode at the time when the game time in the second case ends, with the effect of prompting the game ball to be launched in a predetermined mode. From the time point after the determination, means for executing the winning opening state transition means during the period until the state of the winning opening is first transitioned from the non-ball entering state to the ball entering state (opening period),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature aG1, regardless of the processing time being different between the first case and the second case, in any case, the effect of prompting to launch the game ball in a predetermined mode is executed. To do. Therefore, in the first case and the second case, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the effect of urging the game ball to be fired in the predetermined mode is executed in different periods. As a result, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, it is determined based on the effect whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation that the effect has been executed based on the first case.

[Feature aG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aG1,
The effect of urging the game ball to be fired in the predetermined mode is an effect of urging the game ball to be fired in a mode in which the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning opening 222),
The specific area is an area through which only the game balls that enter the winning opening can pass.

According to the feature aG2, the specific area is an area through which only the game ball that entered the winning opening can pass. Then, according to the feature aG1 described above, in both the first case and the second case, after performing an effect that prompts the game ball to be launched in a mode in which the game ball passes through a specific area, the winning opening state The transition means first changes the state of the winning opening from the non-ball entering state to the ball entering state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who has progressed the game according to the effect to put the game ball into the winning opening, and further to allow the game ball to pass through a specific area. ..

[Feature aG3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic aG1 or the characteristic aG2,
A game ball is provided with a ball entry section (type determination gate 202) for determining a state transition mode, which is a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter.
In the first case, the state transition mode determination means is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the state transition mode determination ball entry unit after the end of the game times corresponding to the first case, A game machine comprising means for determining the state transition mode.

Generally, in the first case, the gaming machine displays information regarding the determined state transition mode.
According to the feature aG3, in the first case, the state transition mode determination means triggers the entry of the game ball into the state transition mode determination entry section after the end of the game time corresponding to the first case. As, as the state transition mode is determined, information regarding the state transition mode is not displayed until at least the game ball enters the state transition mode determination entrance ball, and depending on how the player shoots the game ball, It is possible to extend the period until the player recognizes whether it is the first case or the second case. Therefore, even if the effect is executed based on the second case, the player is given an expectation that the effect is executed based on the first case. You can extend the period that you can.

Further, in the first case, the state transition mode is determined after the game ball corresponding to the first case is finished and the game ball enters the state transition mode determination ball entry unit. As a result, the player is positively involved in the determination of the state transition mode, and the player can be made to pay attention to the game even after the end of the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the determination is made. It is possible to increase the expectation of the state transition mode.

[Feature aG4]
The gaming machine described in the feature aG3,
The specific region is arranged downstream of the state transition mode determining entry ball portion in a direction in which a game ball flows.

According to the feature aG4, the specific region is arranged downstream of the state transition mode determining entrance ball in the direction in which the game ball flows. Therefore, in the first case, when the player executes the effect that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in such a manner that the game ball passes through the specific area, and the player advances the game according to the effect, the player It is possible to enter the game ball into the state transition mode determination ball input without being aware of it, the state transition mode can be determined smoothly, and the game can proceed smoothly.

<Characteristic aH group>
The feature aH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aH1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time executing means for executing the game time when one time of the game time is from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation Control means provided, which controls the progress of the game,
A specific area that can be an opportunity to change the progress of the game by passing the game ball,
Between the passing state in which the game ball can pass or is easy to pass through the specific area, and the non-passing state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass as compared with the passing state. A specific area state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) for transitioning with
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific area state transition means,
In the first case in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition (in the modification 10 of the first embodiment α, a jackpot based on a ball entering the starting opening) And) means for transitioning the specific region from the non-passing state to the passing state,
In the second case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (a modification of the first embodiment α). 10) in the case of a small hit), means for transitioning the specific region from the non-passing state to the passing state,
Equipped with
The control means is
In the first case, when a game ball passes through the specific area, which is in the passing state, means for not changing the progress state of the game,
Means for changing the progress state of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area in the passing state in the second case,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature aH1, the specific region state transition means transitions the specific region from the non-passing state to the passing state in both the first case and the second case. Therefore, the first region is changed based on the state transition of the specific region. The player is not allowed to identify whether the case is the second case or the second case. Therefore, when the specific area is transited from the non-passing state to the passing state, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is the first case or the second case, and the expectation of the player. The feeling can be improved. Further, in the first case, the control means does not change the progress state of the game even when the game ball has passed the specific area in the passing state, so the progress state of the game based on the first case Can be maintained.

[Feature aH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aH1,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
In the first case, a means for executing an effect (right-handed suggestion effect) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined mode, in a period after the game time execution means finishes the game time,
In the second case, means for executing an effect (right-handed suggestion effect) urging the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner in a period after the game time execution means finishes the game time,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature aH2, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes the effect that prompts the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined mode, so that the effect is temporarily based on the second case. Even if is executed, based on the first case, for the player who determines whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition based on the effect, It is possible to add an expectation that the effect has been executed.

[Feature aH3]
A gaming machine according to feature aH1 or feature aH2,
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing unit satisfies the predetermined condition;
Of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits, a type determination means for determining one type of benefits to be given to the player,
A privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information on the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means,
Equipped with
The type determining unit includes a unit (a function of executing a type determining process) for determining a privilege of the one type to be given to the player after the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature aH3, the type determining means determines the privilege of one type to be given to the player after the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays the information related to the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of You can Therefore, based on the effect, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition when the effect that prompts the game ball to be fired in the predetermined mode is executed after the game time is over. It is possible to give the player who is judging the expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, and further display the information regarding the privilege on the privilege type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not A period in which it is possible to give an expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end Can be lengthened.

<Feature aI group>
The feature aI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aI1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time executing means for executing the game time when one time of the game time is from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation First control means (main controller 60) which is a control means provided and controls the progress of the game,
A specific area (V winning opening 222) which is an area that can serve as an opportunity to change the progress state of the game by passing the game ball,
Second control means (voice emission control device 90, display control device 100), which is control means different from the first control means and controls processing that does not affect the progress of the game.
An operation mechanism (V winning assistance mechanism) that executes an operation that may affect the behavior of the circulating game balls,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first control means is
In the first case in which the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition (in the modification 10 of the first embodiment α, a jackpot based on a ball entering the starting opening) And) means for not changing the progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area,
In the second case where the determination means determines that the special information corresponding to the game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied (a modification of the first embodiment α). In the case of a small hit in 10), when a game ball passes through the specific area, means for changing the progress state of the game,
Specific information transmitting means for transmitting specific information to the second control means in the first case and not transmitting the specific information to the second control means in the second case,
Equipped with
The second control means is
In the operating mechanism, a first state in which a circulating game ball can pass through the specific area, and a second state in which the circulating game ball easily passes through the specific area from the first state Means for transitioning between states,
Means for transitioning the operating mechanism from the first state to the second state when the specific information is received from the specific information transmitting means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature aI1, since the second control means controls the transition of the state of the operating mechanism, it is possible to reduce the processing by the first control means. Further, the second control means causes the operating mechanism to transit from the first state to the second state when the specific information is received in the first case, and does not receive the specific information in the second case. The operating mechanism is not transitioned from the first state to the second state. Further, in the first case, the first control means does not change the progress state of the game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, by controlling the transition of the state of the operating mechanism by the second control means, it is possible to prevent the progress state of the game from being affected.

[Feature aI2]
The gaming machine described in γA1,
It is arranged upstream of the operating mechanism in the direction in which the game balls flow, and in the specific region, a passing state in which the game balls can pass or is easy to pass to the specific region, and in the specific region. A specific area state transition means (second opening/closing door 213) for transitioning between a non-passing state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass in comparison with the passing state,
The specific area state transition means,
In the first case (when a big hit based on a ball entering the starting opening), means for transitioning the specific region from the non-passing state to the passing state,
Means for transitioning the specific region from the non-passing state to the passing state in the second case (when a small hit occurs);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic aI2, the specific region state transition means transitions the specific region from the non-passing state to the passing state in both the first case and the second case. Therefore, the first region is changed based on the state transition of the specific region. The player is not allowed to identify whether the case is the second case or the second case. Therefore, when the specific area is transited from the non-passing state to the passing state, it is possible to make the player guess whether it is the first case or the second case, and the expectation of the player. The feeling can be improved. Further, in the first case, the first control means does not change the progress state of the game even when the game ball has passed the specific area in the passing state, so the game based on the first case Can be maintained.

[Feature aI3]
A gaming machine according to feature aI1 or feature aI2,
The second control means includes a performance executing means for executing a performance,
The effect execution means,
In the first case, a means for executing an effect (right-handed suggestion effect) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined mode, in a period after the game time execution means finishes the game time,
In the second case, means for executing an effect (right-handed suggestion effect) urging the game ball to be fired in a predetermined manner in a period after the game time execution means finishes the game time,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic aI3, in both the first case and the second case, the effect execution means executes the effect that prompts the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined mode, so that the effect is temporarily based on the second case. Even if is executed, based on the first case, for the player who determines whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition based on the effect, It is possible to add an expectation that the effect has been executed.

[Feature aI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features aI1 to aI3,
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing unit satisfies the predetermined condition;
Of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits, a type determination means for determining one type of benefits to be given to the player,
A privilege type display means (round lamp) for displaying information on the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means,
Equipped with
The type determining unit includes a unit (a function of executing a type determining process) for determining a privilege of the one type to be given to the player after the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is completed. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the characteristic aI4, the type determining means determines the privilege of one type to be given to the player after the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that the special time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Delaying the timing at which the privilege type display means displays the information related to the one type of privilege determined by the type determining means, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end of You can Therefore, based on the effect, whether or not the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition when the effect that prompts the game ball to be fired in the predetermined mode is executed after the game time is over. It is possible to give the player who is judging the expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, and further display the information regarding the privilege on the privilege type display means. It is possible to delay the time until it becomes possible to determine whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition based on whether or not A period in which it is possible to give an expectation that the effect may have been executed based on the first case, as compared with a gaming machine that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player before the end Can be lengthened.

<Characteristic aJ group>
The feature aJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aJ1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing unit satisfies the predetermined condition;
Of a plurality of predetermined types of benefits, a type determination means for determining one type of benefits to be given to the player,
A gaming machine comprising:
When the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning opening 222) during the period of granting the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining unit, the privilege granting unit determines the one A gaming machine comprising means for ending the grant of the privilege of the one type even though the grant of the privilege of the type is not completed.

According to the feature aJ1, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the period of granting the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means, the grant of the privilege of the one type is finished. Despite the absence, the grant of the one type of benefit is terminated, so when performing a new process triggered by the game ball passing through a specific area, the grant of the one type of benefit is given. It is possible to avoid a conflict between the process executed in association with the process and the process. In other words, as a process to be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area during the period of granting the privilege of one type determined by the type determining means, the process of executing the privilege of the one type is performed. It is possible to enable execution of the same processing as the processing executed by the above.

[Feature aJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature aJ1,
When the game ball passes through a specific area during the period of granting the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining unit, the privilege granting unit grants the privilege of the one type. A means for ending the granting of the one type of privilege and starting the granting of a new privilege based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area, although it has not ended (game in the first embodiment α A game machine having a function of executing a state transition process/Sa 2106 in V winning process.

According to the feature aJ2, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the period of granting the privilege of the one type determined by the type determining means, the grant of the privilege of the one type is finished. Despite the absence, the grant of the one type of benefit is finished, but since the new privilege is granted when the game ball passes through the specific area, the expectation for the new privilege is granted. Can be given to the player.

[Feature aJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature aJ1 or feature aJ2,
Provided with a type determining entrance (type determining gate 202), which is a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter.
The type deciding means gives the player the privilege of the one type given to the player upon the entry of the game ball into the type determining entry ball after the end of the game game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising means for determining (a function for executing a type determination process).

According to the feature aJ3, a special type of privilege to be given to the player is determined by the entrance of the game ball into the type determining entrance ball after the end of the game times where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. , The player will be actively involved in determining the type of privilege to be granted, and it is possible to keep the player focused on the game even after the end of the game times where the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the type of privilege to be determined.

[Feature aJ4]
A gaming machine according to feature aJ2 or feature aJ3,
The type determining unit determines a type of privilege to be given when the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning opening 222), when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature aJ4, the type determining means determines the type of the privilege to be given when the game ball passes through the specific area, on the occasion that the game ball passes through the specific area. Does not require the type determining means to determine the privilege of one type by inserting the game ball into the type determining ball input unit, and the specific region is set in a series of flow from the passage of the game ball in the specific region. It is possible to start granting a new privilege based on the passing of the game ball, and to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area.

<Characteristic aK group>
The feature aK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment α and the first embodiment β.

[Feature aK1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
When the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time execution means is the first condition (a big hit due to entering the starting opening) in the first condition, the player is after the game time is over. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player in the second case (V prize jackpot), which is a case where the game ball passes through a specific area (V winning hole).
In the first case and the second case, a type determination unit that determines one type of privilege to be given to the player from among a plurality of types of predetermined privileges.
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific area (V winning opening) is
While the privilege granting means grants the privilege, it is possible to pass a game ball,
The privilege granting means,
When the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes the second case during the period of granting the privilege corresponding to the first case, the privilege corresponding to the first case is granted. A means for stopping and starting the grant of the privilege corresponding to the second case,
The type determining means,
In the second case, in the second case, the one type of privilege to be given to the player is set as the most advantageous type of privilege among the plurality of predetermined types of privileges. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of making a decision.

According to the feature aK1, the game ball can pass through the specific area during the period when the privilege granting means grants the privilege, and the privilege granting means grants the privilege corresponding to the first case. During a certain period, when the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes the second case, the grant of the privilege corresponding to the first case is stopped and the grant of the privilege corresponding to the second case is started. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the competition regarding the process of granting the privilege. In addition, during the period in which the privilege corresponding to the first case is granted, the game ball passes through the specific area and becomes the second case, and the grant of the privilege corresponding to the first case is stopped, and In the case where the grant of the privilege corresponding to the case 2 is started, there is concern that the player may be at a disadvantage over the type of the privilege corresponding to the first case previously granted. Is assumed. However, in the gaming machine, the type determining means determines the type of privilege most advantageous to the player among the plurality of types of predetermined privileges in the second case, rather than in the first case. Since the probability is high, such player's anxiety can be reduced, and a greater sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature aK2]
The gaming machine described in the feature aK1,
Provided with a type determining entrance (type determining gate 202), which is a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter.
In the first case, the type determining means is triggered by the game ball entering the type determining ball unit after the end of the game time corresponding to the first case. A means for deciding the privilege of the one type given to the player corresponding to the case is provided,
A game machine characterized in that the specific area is arranged downstream of the type determining ball entry portion in a direction in which a game ball flows.

According to the characteristic aK2, the type determining means, in response to the first case, the game ball is entered into the type determining ball part after the end of the game time corresponding to the first case, in response to the first case. Since the one type of privilege to be given to the player is determined, the type of the privilege to be given is not determined at the time when the game times corresponding to the first case are finished, and the player is It is not possible to recognize the degree of advantage of the privilege corresponding to the case. Then, the player circulates the game balls toward the type determining ball input section in order to determine the type of the privilege to be given. At this time, the specific area is arranged downstream of the type determining ball entry portion in the direction in which the game balls flow, so that the gaming ball flowing toward the type determining ball portion passes through the specific area. Cheap. Therefore, after the privilege granted corresponding to the first case is determined and the privilege grant is started, it is easy to shift to the grant of the privilege corresponding to the second case in a natural flow, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be made In addition, since the privilege grant corresponding to the first case shifts to the privilege grant corresponding to the second case in a natural flow, the privilege grant corresponding to the first case corresponds to the second case. If the player shifts to the award of a privilege, the player may not feel uneasy that the type of privilege corresponding to the first case previously granted may be disadvantageous, or Such anxiety of the player can be reduced. Then, it is possible to give a greater expectation to the player.

[Feature aK3]
A gaming machine according to feature aK1 or feature aK2,
In the second case, the type determining means gives a benefit of the one type given to the player in response to the second case, when the game ball passes through the specific area. A game machine comprising means for determining.

According to the characteristic aK3, in the second case, the type determining means gives one type of privilege to the player in response to the second case when the game ball passes through the specific area. To decide. Therefore, in the second case, the player does not need to cause the type determining means to determine the privilege of one type by inserting the game ball into the type determining ball input unit, and the game ball in a specific area is passed. The type of privilege corresponding to the second case is determined in a series of steps from, and the grant of a new privilege is started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed regarding the progress of the game when the game ball passes through the specific area.

<Characteristic bA group>
The feature bA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bA1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
With a ball entry part that can enter the game ball that has been launched,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state (state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion, and to the ball entrance portion. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball,
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition means, the control modes being different in how the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means. (Low frequency support mode) and control means capable of executing,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low A game machine having means for switching to a frequency support mode).

According to the feature bA1, since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game time for notifying the result of the determination based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the game is played. It is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous or unfavorable state for the player by the processing executed after the start of the turn and the control mode of the state transition means. For example, if the control mode of the state transition means is a control mode that is advantageous to the player, and if it becomes a state that is advantageous to the player due to the processing executed after the start of the game times, an excessively advantageous state to the player There is a possibility of becoming. However, the gaming machine according to this feature is provided with means for switching the control mode based on the result of the determination by the determination means at the start of the game time, so that, for example, a state that is advantageous to the player by the process executed after the game time is started In such a case, the control mode is switched from the control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player. ..

[Characteristic bA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bA1,
In the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing strength by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), the control means performs the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). The game machine is characterized in that the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering portion than in the case of controlling.

According to the feature bA2, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry portion than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, when the processing executed after the start of the game times brings an advantageous state for the player, the control mode is adjusted to the advantageous mode for the player and the advantageous mode for the player. Since it is possible to switch to a control mode that does not become too much, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.

[Characteristic bA3]
A gaming machine according to feature bA1 or feature bA2,
Equipped with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means,
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a benefit is given after the game time, which gives a privilege after the game time, when the result of the judgment is notified (a function to execute a round game) )When,
When the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfy a specific condition, the game time executing privilege giving means (function for executing the special bonus process) for giving a privilege during execution of the game time. With and
The control means is
When the game time to be executed satisfies the specific condition (when the specific processing flag is ON), the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game time. A gaming machine having a switching means (a function for turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

According to the feature bA3, when the game times to be executed satisfy a specific condition, the privilege is given by the game time executing privilege giving means during the execution of the game times, which is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, the control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game time when the game time satisfies a specific condition. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous even during the period in which the privilege is granted by the privilege-in-execution means.

[Characteristic bA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA3,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
Equipped with
The auxiliary means is
Disposed in either one of the first ball entrance portion or the second ball entrance portion,
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A game machine comprising means for executing a second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel.

According to the feature bA4, since means for executing the first special information game times and the second special information game times in parallel is provided, for example, during the execution of the first special information game times, the second special information game times It is possible to perform a process of giving a privilege to the determination result. In such a case, the processing executed after the start of the first special information game time leads to an advantageous state for the player, but the gaming machine of this feature sets the control mode to the first control mode at the start of the first special information game time. Since the means for switching from the control mode to the second control mode is provided, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player during the execution of the first special information game time.

<Characteristic bB group>
The feature bB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bB1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
When the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting unit (a function of executing a round game) that grants a privilege after the end of the game time of notifying the result of the determination,
A game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (a game time that is a big hit) is defined as a condition-fulfilling game time, and the condition-fulfilling game time to be executed first of the two condition-establishing game times. Is a pre-condition-established game time, and the condition-established game time executed after the pre-condition-established game time is a post-condition-established game time, the process at the start of the post-condition-established game time is A process determining means for determining based on the special information corresponding to the pre-established game times (based on the jackpot type of the previous game times that won the big jackpot, special bonus processing at the start of the game times after winning the jackpot) Function that determines whether to execute the related process),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature bB1, since the process determination means for determining the process at the start of the post-condition fulfillment game times based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition fulfillment game times, the post-condition fulfillment game times are executed. Even in advance, it is possible to execute the corresponding process to the process executed at the start of the post-conditions-establishing game times. For example, in the pre-condition satisfaction game times, to perform a performance suggesting the process to be executed at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game times, or in the game times executed between the pre-condition satisfaction game times and the post-condition satisfaction game times. It is possible to execute various corresponding processes to the processes executed at the start of the post-condition satisfied game times, such as performing effects suggesting the process executed at the start of the post-condition satisfied game times, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.
Further, since the process at the start of the post-condition-satisfied game times is determined based on the special information corresponding to the pre-condition-satisfied game times, for example, the process determined as the process at the start of the post-condition-satisfied game times is the player. If the processing is advantageous to the processing, as the processing corresponding to the processing, processing that does not become excessively advantageous to the player by the processing based on the special information corresponding to the condition satisfied game times Can be run at start.

[Characteristic bB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bB1,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
With a ball entry part that can enter the game ball that has been launched,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state (state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion, and to the ball entrance portion. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball,
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition means, the control modes being different in how the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means. (Low frequency support mode) and control means capable of executing,
Equipped with
The processing determination means,
Determination of whether to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode (determination of whether to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag) at the start of the post-conditions-matching game times A gaming machine comprising: means for executing based on the special information corresponding to the pre-established game times.

According to the feature bB2, the processing determining means determines whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the post-conditions-establishing game times, in response to the pre-conditions-establishing game times. Since the process is executed based on the special information, for example, when a process advantageous to the player is executed at the start of the post-condition establishment game time based on the special information corresponding to the previous condition establishment game time, the process corresponding to the process is executed. As a process, whether or not to switch the control mode from the control mode that is advantageous to the player to the control mode that is not too advantageous to the player at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game number based on the special information corresponding to the previous condition satisfaction game number The determination can be executed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessively advantageous state.

[Characteristic bB3]
The gaming machine described in the feature bB2,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
Equipped with
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The gaming machine further comprises
A game time setting means for setting the game time when the time of the game time executed by the game time execution means is defined as a game time,
The game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is defined as a first condition satisfaction game time, and the first condition satisfaction game time executed first out of the two first condition satisfaction game times. In the case where the first precondition fulfillment game time is set and the first precondition fulfillment game time executed after the first precondition fulfillment game time is set as the first postcondition fulfillment game time,
The game time determination means,
A method of setting the game time of the second special information game time, which is executed during a period when the first post-condition satisfaction game time is executed, based on the special information corresponding to the first previous condition satisfaction game time. Means for determining (variation time setting process for the second starting opening in the second embodiment/first starting that was later won as a jackpot, based on the jackpot type of the first starting opening game times that was previously won as a jackpot) At the start of the mouth game times, the ON/OFF of the high-frequency support mode flag is determined, and based on the state of the high-frequency support mode flag, the period during which the first starting mouth game time that was later won as a jackpot is being executed. A function for determining a setting method of a variation time of the second starting game time for the starting opening).

According to the feature bB3, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfied game time is executed is changed to the special information corresponding to the first destination condition satisfied game time. Since it is determined based on, for example, the game time of the second special information game times executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfied game times are executed based on the special information corresponding to the first destination condition satisfied game times The setting method can be determined to be advantageous to the player. More specifically, as the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time, it is possible to determine the setting method in which the average value of the game time is relatively short. In this case, the period during which the first post-conditions-satisfied game time is being executed may be excessively advantageous to the player. For example, as shown in the feature bB2, as a corresponding process to the process, Since the control mode can be switched at the start of the first post-condition-satisfying game time based on the special information corresponding to the first-preceding condition-satisfying game time, for example, the control mode that is advantageous to the player is advantageous to the player. By switching to the control mode which is not too much, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an excessively advantageous state during the period in which the first post-conditions fulfilling game time is being executed.

<Characteristic bC group>
The characteristic bC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bC1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Game time setting means for setting the game time when the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is set as the game time,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
With a ball entry part that can enter the game ball that has been launched,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state (state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion, and to the ball entrance portion. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball,
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition means, the control modes being different in how the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means. (Low frequency support mode) and control means capable of executing,
A gaming machine comprising:
In the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode). However, as compared with the case where the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode), it is easier for a game ball to enter the ball entering portion,
The game time setting means,
It is possible to execute at least a first setting method as a method of setting the game time and a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is shorter than that of the first setting method,
The control means is
The game time setting means switches the game time setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific trigger (at the start of the specific bonus process, the second start opening game time is changed). Despite switching the setting method of the fluctuation time/switching from the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation-time information acquisition processing to the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing), the control mode is set to the above-mentioned control mode based on the specific trigger. A gaming machine comprising means for switching from a first control mode to the second control mode (function of turning off a high frequency support mode flag).

In a general gaming machine, when the game time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is shorter than that of the first setting method, the state is The control mode of the transition means is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode in which the game ball can enter the ball entering portion more easily than the second control mode. However, in this case, the player may be in an excessively advantageous state.
According to the gaming machine of the feature bC1, the control mode is set to the first based on the specific trigger, even though the method for setting the gaming time is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method based on the specific trigger. Since the first control mode is switched to the second control mode, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessively advantageous state.

[Characteristic bC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bC1,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
Equipped with
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The specific trigger is the start of the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
The control means is
The game time of the second special information game time, which is executed during a period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed by the game time setting means. Despite switching the setting method of from the first setting method to the second setting method,
A gaming machine characterized by switching the control mode from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low frequency support mode) based on the specific trigger.

According to the feature bC2, the setting method of the game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed, Start of the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying a predetermined condition even when the player is in an advantageous state by switching from the first setting method to the second setting method As a result, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode, so that it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous state for the player.
Furthermore, since the trigger for switching the control mode is the start of the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the privilege is awarded after the first special information game time is finished. It is also possible to execute the processing according to the above, and it is possible to give various changes in the state of the game to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic bD group>
The characteristic bD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bD1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The effect execution means,
The effect to be executed in the second special information game time, which is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game time, corresponds to the first special information game time once. A game machine characterized by comprising means for making a decision on the basis of the first special information (function of executing effect setting processing for a small bonus in the special bonus in the second embodiment).

According to the feature bD1, the effect to be executed in the second special information game time, which is executed in the period from the start to the end of the first special information game time, is performed once in the first time. Since the determination is made based on the first special information corresponding to the special information game time, the player can indirectly infer the first special information game time through the effect executed in the second special information game time. , Expectation for the first special information game time can be given by using the effect executed in the second special information game time.

[Characteristic bD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bD1,
When the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege after the end of the game time that notifies the result of the determination,
A privilege type determining unit that determines the type of the privilege provided by the privilege providing unit from a plurality of types of the privilege,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first special information based on the type of the privilege given after the end of the first special information game time, Means for determining an effect to be executed in the second special information game time, which is executed during a period from the start to the end of the special information game time (type of jackpot in the first start game time corresponding to the special bonus process Based on the above, a function of setting an effect pattern table for the small hit of the second start opening game times, which is executed during the special bonus process).

According to the feature bD2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type of privilege given after the end of the first special information game time, by using the effect executed in the second special information game time.

[Characteristic bD3]
The gaming machine described in the feature bD1 or the feature bD2,
The determination unit has at least two types of determination modes for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition: a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode). Judgment mode can be executed,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the determination unit is executing the second determination mode than when the determination unit is executing the first determination mode.
The effect execution means,
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the determination mode executed by the determination means in the game time executed after the end of the first special information game time. Means for determining an effect to be executed in the second special information game time, which is executed during a period from the start to the end of the first special information game time, based on the type of 1 function for setting the effect pattern table for the small hit of the second starting mouth game times, which is executed during the period of the special bonus processing, depending on whether the big hit type in the starting mouth game times is the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit) A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature bD3, by using the effect executed in the second special information game time, the determination mode of the game time executed after the end of the first special information game time in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition Expectation can be given to the player regarding the type.

<Characteristic bE group>
The feature bE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bE1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time (a first starting mouth game time in the second embodiment), which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judgment means for the first special information, and the second special information. A means for executing in parallel a second special information game time (second start mouth game time), which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment by the judging means for the information,
The privilege granting means,
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game times satisfies the predetermined condition, after the first special information game times, a game time which is a privilege after the game times is given. A privilege granting means after completion (function of executing the opening/closing execution mode in the second embodiment),
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game times satisfies the predetermined condition, during the period in which the first special information game times are being executed, a game time executing privilege that is a privilege is given. A game time executing privilege granting unit (a function for executing a special bonus process in the second embodiment),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature bE1, since the award-giving means and the award-performing-game award are provided after the game time, the player can be provided with an expectation about the award after the game-time and the award during the game-time. Further, for example, by setting the case where the privilege during game time execution is given and the case where it is not given, the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. Even if there is, it is possible to guess whether or not the privilege during game play is given, and give the player a sense of urgency.

[Feature bE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bE1,
The award granting means during the game times,
The game time execution is triggered by the second special information game time (second start mouth game time) executed during a period in which the first special information game time giving the privilege during execution of the game time is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for giving a medium privilege (a privilege of a round game triggered by a small hit in the second starting mouth game time).

According to the feature bE2, since the game special time executing privilege is given at the opportunity of the second special information game special time executed during the period in which the first special information game special time giving the special game time executing special is executed, Even when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies a predetermined condition, a further greater sense of expectation is given to the player by further executing the second special information game time. be able to.

[Feature bE3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic bE1 or the characteristic bE2,
A game time setting means for setting a game time which is a time of a game time executed by the game time execution means based on the special information;
The upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the game time executing privilege is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game time to which the game time executing privilege is given. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined based on the length (the length of the variation time of the first starting opening game times executed as a special bonus process).

According to the feature bE3, the upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the game time executing privilege is the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game time to which the game time executing privilege is given. Since it is determined based on the length, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the first special information game time should last longer. In addition, as the end of the first special information game time approaches, it is possible to give an expectation that the player wants to obtain as many bonuses as possible during the game time execution, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the first special information game time. You can add intonation to your emotions.

<Characteristic bF group>
The characteristic bF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bF1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The effect execution means,
The first special information game is obtained by obtaining elapsed time information that is information relating to the elapsed time from the start of the game time to a predetermined timing, and the first of which is the acquisition target of the elapsed time information based on the elapsed time information. Performance setting process executing means for executing a performance setting process for setting a performance corresponding to the second special information game time, which is executed during a period when the special information game time is being executed (in the second embodiment, at the time of a special bonus) A game machine characterized by having a function for executing setting processing of a small hit effect pattern.

According to the feature bF1, based on the elapsed time information which is the information about the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game time to the predetermined timing, it is executed during the period in which the first special information game time is executed. Since the effect corresponding to the second special information game time is set, after the first special information game time is executed to the player who recognizes the effect corresponding to the executed second special information game time To estimate the remaining time until the end of the first special information game time, and indirectly give an expectation to the first special information game time through the effect corresponding to the second special information game time. You can

[Characteristic bF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bF1,
The effect execution means,
It is provided with means for determining whether or not to execute the effect setting process, based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time from which the elapsed time information is acquired. Amusement machine.

According to the feature bF2, it is determined whether or not to execute the effect setting process, based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game game for which the elapsed time information is to be acquired. Therefore, for the player, based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time is executed, the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information game time. It is possible to infer whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to indirectly give a sense of expectation to the first special information game time through the effect corresponding to the second special information game time. ..

[Characteristic bF3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic bF1 or the characteristic bF2,
If the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition, it comprises a privilege granting means for granting a privilege after the game times are over,
The effect execution means,
When the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfy a specific condition, a predetermined condition is established after the first special information game time satisfying the specific condition is started. The elapsed time information that is information about the elapsed time up to the timing (remaining time RT of the variation time of the first starting mouth game time) is acquired, and the first special information game time that is the acquisition target of the elapsed time information is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing an effect setting process for setting an effect corresponding to the second special information game time to be executed during a given period.

According to the feature bF3, the first special information game time is specified to the player based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time is executed. It is possible to infer whether or not the condition of is satisfied, and it is possible to indirectly give an expectation to the first special information game time through the effect corresponding to the second special information game time.

[Characteristic bF4]
The gaming machine described in the feature bF3,
Equipped with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means,
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a benefit is given after the game time, which gives a privilege after the game time, when the result of the judgment is notified (a function to execute a round game) )When,
When the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions satisfy the specific conditions, the game time executing privilege granting means (a function for executing a special bonus process) for granting a privilege during execution of the game times. ) And a gaming machine.

According to the feature bF4, when the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, the privilege is given during the execution of the game time. Therefore, the first special information is given to the player. It is possible to infer whether or not the first special information game time satisfies a specific condition based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period when the game time is being executed. Further, it is possible to indirectly provide a greater sense of expectation for the privilege that may be given during the execution of the first special information game time, through the effect corresponding to the second special information game time.

<Characteristic bG group>
The characteristic bG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bG1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A determination result notifying unit for notifying the result of the determination by the determining unit using a pattern,
When the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means using a symbol is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times, the game times are executed. Means and
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The privilege granting means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), a privilege granting means at the time when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
When the special information corresponding to the game times to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of a small hit), a special condition grant privilege granting unit that grants a privilege is provided,
The determination result notification means,
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is the second special information. When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second special information is determined by using the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed despite notifying the result. When the determination means determines that the second special information satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to the determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition satisfaction notification process for notifying the result of the determination using the symbol.

According to the feature bG1, the process executed triggered by the display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the second special information are predetermined. It is possible to avoid a conflict with the process executed at the time when the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied is displayed.

[Characteristic bG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bG1,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state (state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion, and to the ball entrance portion. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball,
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition means, the control modes being different in how the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means. (Low frequency support mode) and control means capable of executing,
Equipped with
The control means is
At the start of the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode ( A game machine having means for switching to a low frequency support mode).

According to the feature bG2, since a means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode is provided at the start of the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, By the process executed after the start of the first special information game time and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

<Characteristic bH group>
The characteristic bH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bH1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A first ball entry portion (first starting opening 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
A second ball entry portion (second starting opening 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance section and the second ball entrance section,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, are acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. Acquisition information storage means for respectively storing the second special information which is the special information,
The special information stored by the acquired information storage means, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Display means (liquid crystal display device 41 in the second embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The display means is
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment), which is identification information for indicating a result of the determination based on the first special information, and a result of the determination based on the second special information. The second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment), which is identification information for indicating, and area-specific display means for displaying in different display areas of the display means, respectively,
The display means for each area is
The first special information is executed in the first state of the first special information game times satisfying the predetermined condition (a state in which the specific probability variation jackpot has not been won in the first starting mouth game times previously won) When it is performed, a process of replacing the display area displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information with the display area displaying the second identification information corresponding to the second special information is performed. Although not executed, the first special information game times the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is in the second state (the first certain start winning game times won in the specific probability variation jackpot) State), the display area displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the second identification information corresponding to the second special information are displayed. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a process of switching the display area at a predetermined timing.

According to the feature bH1, even if the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first identification information is determined by the state in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information is executed. Since there is a case where the processing for exchanging the display area for displaying and the display area for displaying the second identification information is executed and there is a case where the processing is not executed, the first special information game time in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is When it is executed, by letting the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display areas has been executed, the state in which the first special information game time is executed is the first state or the second state. You can infer whether it was in a state.

[Characteristic bH2]
In the gaming machine described in the feature bH1, the state in which the first special information game time is executed in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is the first state or the second state. A state determination process executing means for performing a state determination process for determining whether there is
The state determination means,
Based on special information corresponding to a pre-execution first special information game time, which is the first special information game time executed before the first special information game time in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine comprising means for executing the state determination process.

According to the feature bH2, it is determined whether the state in which the first special information game times where the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is the first state or the second state is the first execution first. Since it is performed based on the special information corresponding to one special information game time, for example, in the first special information game time satisfying a predetermined condition, the processing based on the special information corresponding to the first execution first special information game time is executed. It is possible to perform processing using whether or not the display areas can be replaced. For example, it is possible to suggest the information regarding the special information corresponding to the first execution first special information game time by executing the effect of changing the display area or not changing the display area.

<Characteristic bI group>
The feature bI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bI1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game time setting means for setting a game time which is a time of a game time executed by the game time executing means based on the special information;
A privilege granting unit (a function for executing a special bonus process in the second embodiment) that grants a privilege when the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition.
A gaming machine comprising:
The upper limit value of the amount of privilege given as the privilege is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition (special bonus process). The game machine is characterized by being determined based on a variation time length of the first starting opening game times).

According to the feature bI1, the upper limit value of the amount of the privilege given as the privilege is determined based on the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the player wants the game time of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition to continue longer. In addition, it is possible to give an expectation that the player wants to obtain as much privilege as possible as the end of the game time approaches, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the game time, and to give emotion to the player. ..

[Feature bI2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bI1,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
With a ball entry part that can enter the game ball that has been launched,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means, the first state is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion. State transition means for transitioning to and from the second state, which is the state
Control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. Means and
Equipped with
The control means is
When the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) at the start of the game game corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. A game machine comprising means for switching to the second control mode (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature bI2, when the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game game corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessively advantageous or unfavorable state for the player by the privilege given after the start of the game game and the control mode of the state transition means.

[Characteristic bI3]
A gaming machine described in the feature bI2,
In the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing strength by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), the control means performs the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). The game machine is characterized in that the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering portion than in the case of controlling.

According to the feature bI3, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry portion than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, the control mode can be switched from the control mode that is advantageous to the player to the control mode that is not too advantageous to the player at the start of the game time when the privilege is granted by the benefit granting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an excessively advantageous state.

<Characteristic bJ group>
The feature bJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bJ1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Game time setting means for setting the game time when the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is set as the game time,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The game time setting means,
When the first special information game times where the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is started (when the first start opening game time that is a big hit is started), From the first setting method (high-accuracy high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process/step Sb1305 in the second embodiment), the average value of the game time to be set is set as the method for setting the game time of the second special information game time. A game machine comprising a means for switching to a second setting method (high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing/step Sb1306 in the second embodiment) different from the first setting method.

According to the feature bJ1, the setting method of the game time of the second special information game time is set to the first setting when the first special information game time when the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is started. Since the method includes means for switching to a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method, before the start of the first special information game game in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition. After the start, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time can be changed, and the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed. In other words, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed when the first special information game time where the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is started.

[Characteristic bJ2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bJ1,
The second setting method is characterized in that an average value of game times set is shorter than that of the first setting method.

According to the feature bJ2, in the second setting method, the average value of the set game time is shorter than that in the first setting method, so that the first special information of the first special information game time satisfying a predetermined condition The number of executions of the second special information game time per unit time after the start can be increased as compared with before the start, and an advantageous game state can be achieved. That is, it is possible to make an advantageous game state when the first special information game time when the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is started.

[Characteristic bJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature bJ1 or feature bJ2,
The game time setting means,
As a method of setting the game time of the second special information game times, it is possible to select a plurality of types of game time setting methods having different average values of the game time to be set,
When the first special information game time is started when the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time is set to the first setting. From the method, switching to one of the plurality of types of game time setting method,
The one method of setting the game time is one of the plurality of types of game time setting methods in which the average values of the set game times are different, and the first special information game times corresponding to the first special information game time satisfying the predetermined condition are selected. A game machine characterized by being determined based on the special information of 1 (game machine in Modification 18 of the second embodiment).

According to the feature bJ3, the setting method of the game time of the second special information game time, which is switched when the first special information game time at which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is started, meets the predetermined condition. Since it is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the satisfying first special information game times, apart from the player's expectation that the first special information game times satisfy a predetermined condition, It is possible to add an expectation about the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time, which is switched when the first special information game time is started.

<Characteristic bK group>
The feature bK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bK1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
With a ball entry part that can enter the game ball that has been launched,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state (state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion, and to the ball entrance portion. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball,
Control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A specific control mode (high frequency support mode B) of the plurality of types of control modes (the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment) that can be executed by the control means is set. If the game is being executed, at the start of the game game for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means, based on the result of the determination, the specific control mode being executed is different from the specific control mode. The specific control of the plurality of types of control modes that can be executed by the control unit, even though the control mode switching determination process that is a process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode is executed. When a control mode that is not the mode is being executed, the game machine is provided with a unit that does not execute the control mode switching determination process at the start of the game time of notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit. (Game machine in the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment).

According to the feature bK1, when the specific control mode is being executed, at the start of the game game for notifying the result of the determination made by the determination means, the specific control mode being executed is changed based on the result of the determination. Since the control mode switching determination process, which is a process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, is executed, when the specific control mode is executed by the control means, At the start of the game game, the player can be provided with an expectation about whether or not the control mode is switched, in addition to the expectation about the result of the determination.

[Characteristic bK2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bK1,
The control means is
When executing the control mode switching determination process and determining to switch the control mode,
At the start of the game time to inform the result of the determination by the determination means, a means for switching the control mode from the specific control mode to a predetermined control mode,
In the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing strength by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the specific control mode (high frequency support mode B in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment), the control means controls the predetermined control mode (low frequency). A game machine is characterized in that a game ball can enter the ball entering portion more easily than when the state transition means is controlled in a support mode).

According to the feature bK2, when the control means controls the state transition means in the specific control mode, the game ball is easier to enter the ball entering portion than when the state transition means is controlled in the predetermined control mode. .. Therefore, when the control mode is switched by the control means, even if the game state shifts to a state advantageous to the player by executing some processing, the control mode is set to a predetermined control mode. Since the control mode is switched to, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive advantage.

[Characteristic bK3]
A gaming machine according to feature bK1 or feature bK2,
The control means is
In the control mode switching determination process, it is determined that the control mode is switched when the special information as the determination target satisfies a predetermined condition as a result of the determination by the determination means. Machine.

According to the feature bK3, it is determined that the control mode is switched when the special information as the determination target satisfies the predetermined condition as a result of the determination by the determination means, so the player who recognizes that the control mode has been switched It is possible to recognize that the special information to be judged satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by switching the control mode.

<Characteristic bL group>
The feature bL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bL1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Game time setting means for setting the game time when the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is set as the game time,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
Auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion or the second entry portion,
A first state in which the state of the auxiliary means is a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball-in part or the second ball-in ball (electrical accessory 44a is closed) State) and a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball-in part or the second ball-in part State transition means for transitioning between and,
Control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The game time setting means,
A specific control mode (high frequency support mode B) of the plurality of types of control modes (the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment) that can be executed by the control means is set. If it is being executed, based on the result of the determination for the first special information at the start of the first special information game time, which notifies the result of the determination for the first special information by the determination means. Whether the game time setting method of the second special information game times is switched from the first setting method to a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method In the case where a control mode different from the specific control mode among the plurality of types of control modes executable by the control means is being executed despite executing the setting method switching determination process for determining A means for not executing the setting method switching determination process at the start of the first special information game time for notifying the result of the determination with respect to the first special information by the determination means. (Game machine in the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment).

When the method of setting the game time of the second special information game times is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method, The number of times of execution of the second special information game can be changed, and the degree of advantage/disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed.

Therefore, according to the feature bL1, when the control unit is executing a specific control mode among a plurality of types of control modes that can be executed, the result of the determination on the first special information by the determination unit is notified. At the start of the first special information game time, based on the result of the determination for the first special information, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time, from the first setting method, of the game time to be set Since the setting method switching determination processing for determining whether to switch to the second setting method in which the average value is different from the first setting method is executed, the game in which the control means recognizes that the specific control mode is executed For the player, at the start of the first special information game time, whether the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time is switched, that is, whether the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game is changed Feeling and tenseness can be imparted.

[Characteristic bL2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bL1,
The second setting method is characterized in that an average value of game times set is shorter than that of the first setting method.

According to the feature bL2, the second setting method has a shorter average value of the game times set than the first setting method, and thus the first setting method is the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time. When switching from the second setting method to, it is possible to increase the number of times of execution of the second special information game times per unit time, and it is possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, with respect to the player who recognizes that the control means is executing the specific control mode, the first method of setting the game time of the second special information game time is the first when the first special information game time is started. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the setting method is switched to the second setting method to shift to an advantageous state.

[Feature bL3]
The gaming machine described in the feature bL1 or the feature bL2,
The control means is
If the control means is executing a specific control mode of the plurality of types of control modes that can be executed, the result of the determination is given at the start of the game game for informing the result of the determination by the determination means. Despite executing the control mode switching determination process which is a process of determining whether to switch from the specific control mode being executed to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode based on When a control mode different from the specific control mode of the plurality of types of control modes that can be executed by the control means is being executed, a game time of the game time of notifying the result of the determination by the determination means A game machine comprising means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the start.

According to the feature bL3, when the specific control mode is being executed, at the start of the game time for notifying the result of the determination made by the determining means, the specific control mode is being executed based on the result of the determination. Since the control mode switching determination process, which is the process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, is executed, the player is executing the specific control mode by the control means. In this case, it is possible to give the player an expectation about whether or not the control mode is switched, in addition to giving an expectation about the determination result at the start of the game time.

<Characteristic bM group>
The characteristic bM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature bM1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A launching means for launching a game ball,
With a ball entry part that can enter the game ball that has been launched,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
The state of the auxiliary means is a first state (state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entrance portion, and to the ball entrance portion. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state that allows or facilitates entry of a game ball,
At least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode as control modes for controlling the state transition means, the control modes being different in how the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means. (Low frequency support mode) and control means capable of executing,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
From the time when the first control mode is switched to the second control mode (when the high-frequency support mode flag is switched from ON to OFF), the auxiliary means starts the state transition in the second control mode. In the control mode transition period (the support mode transition period in the modification 19 of the second embodiment) which is the period up to the point in time, the auxiliary means can be controlled in a plurality of types of operation modes (game machine (first (Game machine in the modification 19 of 2 embodiment).

According to the feature bM1, by controlling the auxiliary means in a plurality of types of operation modes during the control mode transition period, the player is allowed to make various guesses when switching from the first control mode to the second control mode. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game. For example, during the control mode transition period, by controlling the auxiliary means in an operation mode different from the operation modes in the first control mode and the second control mode, a temporary confusion is given to the player, or unexpectedly. It is possible to impart sex.

[Feature bM2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bM1,
The control means is
Means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in a first operation mode which is an operation mode when the execution of the first control mode is continued;
A gaming machine comprising: means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in an operation mode different from the first operation mode.

According to the feature bM2, the means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period is provided in the first operation mode which is the operation mode when the execution of the first control mode is continued. It is possible to delay making the player recognize that the control mode has been switched to the second control mode, to reverse the guess of the player and to give the player unexpectedness. Further, since the control unit includes means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in an operation mode different from the first operation mode, the control unit changes the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. There are various ways to improve the fun such as making the player recognize that the control mode has been switched at the timing of switching and making it difficult for the player to temporarily recognize the state of the game. You can control. Further, by using these means in combination, various emotions can be given to the player during the control mode transition period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic bN group>
The characteristic bN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Characteristic bN1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A determination result notifying unit for notifying the result of the determination by the determining unit using a pattern,
When the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means using a symbol is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times, the game times are executed. Means and
A first ball entering section which is a ball entering section into which a game ball that has been launched can enter,
A second ball entering part, which is a ball entering part into which the game ball that has been fired can enter,
A game ball that can enter a game ball that has been launched, and a third ball unit that makes it easy to enter when a predetermined accessory operates.
An accessory control means for controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory (the variable winning device 36 and the opening/closing door 36b of the second embodiment),
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion, and means for obtaining special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion With and
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, which is acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And means for storing second special information, which is the special information,
The game time execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judging means for the first special information, and a result of the judgment made by the judging means for the second special information. A means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The accessory control means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is won), a predetermined condition operating means for operating the predetermined accessory (the variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, the opening/closing door 36b), and the predetermined condition. And a specific condition actuating means for actuating the predetermined winning character (the variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, the opening/closing door 36b) when a specific condition different from the above (when a small win is won). ,
The privilege granting means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when the jackpot is won), at the end of the game time, the predetermined condition operating means causes the predetermined accessory to operate. A privilege granting means when a predetermined condition for granting a privilege is established,
The game time execution means,
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game time is executed while the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. When the first specific condition is satisfied as the specific condition (when the first small hit in the modified example 12 of the second embodiment is won), the second condition satisfying the first specific condition is satisfied. Means for ending the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game time corresponding to special information,
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game time is executed while the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. When the second specific condition is satisfied as the specific condition (when the second small hit in the modification 12 of the second embodiment is won), the second specific condition is satisfied. When the second special information game time corresponding to the special information is ended, means for not ending the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is provided. Gaming machine (gaming machine in Modification 12 of the second embodiment).

According to the feature bN1, when the special information corresponding to the second special information game time satisfies the first specific condition, the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game time. Since the first special information game time corresponding to is ended, when the second special information game time is executed during the period in which the first special information game time is being executed, the second special information game time is executed. Even if the second special information corresponding to the specified condition satisfies the specified condition, the player is made to guess whether the specified first condition satisfies the specified first condition or the specified second condition. , It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tenseness.

[Characteristic bN2]
The gaming machine described in the feature bN1,
The determination result notification means,
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is the second special information. When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second special information is determined by using the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed despite notifying the result. When the determination means determines that the second special information satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to the determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition satisfaction notification process for notifying the result of the determination using the symbol.

According to the feature bN2, the process executed triggered by the display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the second special information are predetermined. It is possible to avoid a conflict with the process executed at the time when the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied is displayed.

<Characteristic cA group>
The characteristic cA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic cA1]
A ball entry part (special electric starting opening 52 in the third embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Auxiliary means (normal electric accessory 53 in the third embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
As a control mode for controlling the operation of the auxiliary means, a first control mode (low frequency support mode), and a game ball enters the ball entering portion more than when the auxiliary means is controlled in the first control mode. Auxiliary control means having a second control mode (high frequency support mode) that facilitates the ball,
A gaming machine comprising:
The determination means,
As a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode Has and
The gaming machine is
The control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode after the game number corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition (the game number selected as a jackpot) is completed. A game machine characterized by shifting to a specific state (probability of latent change in the third embodiment).

According to the characteristic cA1, since the state is shifted to the specific state after the game times satisfying the predetermined conditions are finished, it is possible to execute various processes by utilizing the shift to the specific state. For example, after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying a predetermined condition are finished, the process of giving the privilege to the player by the unique method can be executed only during the period of the specific state. Further, by controlling the determination mode and the control mode, it is possible to shift to a specific state or shift from a specific state to another state. Therefore, by controlling the timing of switching the determination mode and the timing of switching the control mode after the end of the game times satisfying a predetermined condition, the duration of the specific state can be controlled, and only in the case of the specific state. The execution time of the process to be performed can be controlled by the timing of switching the determination mode and the timing of switching the control mode. Therefore, it is possible to control the execution of various processes by a simple process after the game times that satisfy the predetermined conditions are completed.

[Characteristic cA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature cA1,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege after the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is completed,
The privilege granting means,
A first privilege granting means (a function of granting a special bonus) for granting the privilege in the specific state (probability of latent change in the third embodiment);
Second privilege granting means (function for executing a round game) for granting the privilege after the end of the specific state,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature cA2, the determination mode is switched because the first privilege granting means for granting the privilege in the specific state and the second privilege granting means for granting the privilege after the termination of the specific state are provided. By controlling the timing and the timing of switching the control mode, the time length of the period during which the privilege is granted by the first privilege granting device is controlled, and further, the second privilege granting device starts granting the privilege. You can control the timing. Moreover, since two types of privilege granting means are provided, it is possible to give a surprise to the player who recognizes that the privilege granting by the first privilege granting means has been switched to the privilege granting by the second privilege granting means. ..

[Characteristic cA3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic cA1 or the characteristic cA2,
A continuation time determining means for determining a continuation time of the specific state (function of executing the opening time setting process in the third embodiment);
The duration determination means,
Means for determining the continuation time based on the special information in the game game corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition (determines whether the high probability mode is set in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the characteristic cA3, since the duration is determined based on the special information in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition to give the player an expectation. In addition to this, it is possible to estimate the duration of the specific state that shifts after the end of the game, and to give the player a higher sense of expectation, which can improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic cB group>
The characteristic cB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic cB1]
A first ball entrance portion (special electric starting opening 52 in the third embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
Drive means for driving a predetermined drive mechanism (second opening/closing door 55b) when a game ball enters the first ball entering portion,
Drive start time determining means for determining a drive start time, which is a time from when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion to when the driving of the predetermined drive mechanism is started (second in the third embodiment). A function to execute the opening and closing scenario setting process for the winning hole),
Control means (main controller) for executing control relating to the progress of the game,
A gaming machine comprising:
The drive start time determining means,
A game machine characterized in that the drive start time is determined based on a state of control by the control means (state of a lottery mode and a support mode).

According to the feature cB1, the drive start time of the drive mechanism is determined based on the state of control by the control means, so that the player expecting the drive of the drive mechanism should pay attention to the state of progress of the game. You can On the contrary, since the state of progress of the game and the drive start time are related to each other, the player who wants to grasp the state of progress of the game is notified of the game ball to the first entrance portion. Attention can be paid to entering the ball and driving the drive mechanism. As a result, by controlling the control state relating to the progress of the game and the drive start time in association with each other, the player can always pay attention to the game.

[Characteristic cB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature cB1,
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Auxiliary means (normal electric accessory 53 in the third embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first entry part,
As a control mode for controlling the operation of the auxiliary means, a first control mode (low frequency support mode), and a game ball enters the ball entering portion more than when the auxiliary means is controlled in the first control mode. Auxiliary control means having a second control mode (high frequency support mode) that facilitates the ball,
Equipped with
The determination means,
As a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode Has and
The control means is
A specific state (latency probability changing state) in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are completed. ),
The drive start time determining means,
Based on whether or not the state in the special game period, which is the period from the end of the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition to the start of the next game round, is the specific state, A game machine comprising means for determining the drive start time in the special game period.

According to the characteristic cB2, the drive start time in the special game period is determined based on whether or not the state in the special game period is the specific state. Therefore, during the special gaming machine period, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player is in the specific state. More specifically, in the special game period, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the determination mode and the control mode. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to various elements such as the determination mode, the control mode, the first ball entering the ball, the driving start time, the driving of the driving mechanism, etc., and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Characteristic cB3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic cB1 or the characteristic cB2,
The drive mechanism includes a second ball entry portion (second big winning opening 55a) into which a game ball can enter.
The second ball entering portion is driven by the drive mechanism, so that it becomes easier to enter a game ball as compared to before driving.
The gaming machine further comprises
A game machine characterized by comprising prize ball payout means for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when a game ball enters the second ball entering section.

According to the feature cB3, the drive mechanism includes a second ball entering portion into which the game ball can enter, and the second ball entering portion is driven by the drive mechanism, so that the game ball is compared with that before driving. It becomes easier to enter, and the game ball as a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters the second ball part, so that the player should pay more attention to the drive start time of the drive mechanism. It is possible to pay more attention to the state of progress of the game as well.

<Characteristic cD group>
The characteristic cd group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic cD1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege after the end of the condition-satisfying game times, which are the game times corresponding to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition by the determining means,
Equipped with
The privilege granting means,
The privilege granting time (the opening time in the specific period in the third embodiment), which is the time length of the privilege granting period which is the period for granting the privilege, is set to the condition-satisfying game time that triggered the granting of the privilege. A gaming machine comprising: a privilege granting time determining means (a function of setting an opening time according to a jackpot type in an opening time setting process in the third embodiment) determined based on the corresponding special information.

According to the feature cD1, the privilege giving time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfied game times, so that the privilege giving time is determined in addition to the player's satisfaction that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Expectation and tension can be added to the length. In other words, with respect to the special information corresponding to the game times, not only the expectation as to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, but also the expectation about the length of the privilege giving time corresponding to the special information is given. You can

[Characteristic cD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature cD1,
The privilege granting means,
A first privilege granting means (function of granting a special bonus) and a second privilege granting means (function of executing a round game),
The first privilege granting means includes the privilege granting time determining means (function of executing the opening time setting process in the third embodiment),
The second privilege granting means starts means of granting a privilege as the second privilege granting means after the privilege granting by the first privilege granting means is completed (end of the opening period in the game state transition process). A game machine having a function of later executing a first special winning opening/closing process.

According to the feature cD2, since the first privilege granting means includes the privilege granting time determining means, not only the expectation as to whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied with respect to the special information corresponding to the game times, but also the first privilege granting means Expectation can also be given to the length of the privilege granting time when the privilege is granted by the one privilege granting means. Furthermore, according to the feature cD2, the privilege granting means includes the first privilege granting means and the second privilege granting means, so that the second privilege is added in addition to the privilege granted by the first privilege granting means. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the privilege is given by the giving means.

<Characteristic cE group>
The characteristic cE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic cE1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Privilege giving after the end of the condition-satisfied game times (game times selected as a jackpot in the third embodiment) which are the game times corresponding to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition by the determination means. Means and
A gaming machine comprising:
The determination means,
As a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode Has and
The privilege granting means,
The method of the process of granting the privilege is determined based on the determination mode in which the determination unit has performed the determination with respect to the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game times that has triggered the grant of the privilege. A gaming machine comprising means (a function of determining whether or not a high probability mode is set in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment).

According to the feature cE1, the method of the process of granting the privilege is determined based on the determination mode in which the determination unit makes a determination with respect to the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game time that triggered the grant of the privilege. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the determination mode at the time of executing the game is the first determination mode or the second determination mode. Further, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the current determination mode, it is possible to make the player guess and pay attention to the method of the process of giving the privilege that is executed thereafter. In addition, if the player does not know the determination mode and the condition-satisfying game times are completed and the award is started, by grasping the method of the process of awarding the award, the previously-executed condition-satisfying game is executed. It is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of guessing the determination mode at the time. In this way, the interest of the game can be improved by associating the determination mode in the condition-satisfied game times with the method of processing for granting a privilege after the condition-satisfied game times are completed.

[Characteristic cE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature cE1,
The privilege granting means,
A first privilege granting means (function of granting a special bonus) and a second privilege granting means (function of executing a round game),
If the determination means makes the determination in the first determination mode (low-probability mode) for the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game time that triggered the grant of the privilege, the condition is satisfied. After the game time is over, the first privilege granting means does not grant the privilege, and the second privilege granting means grants the privilege.
If the determination means makes the determination in the second determination mode (high probability mode) with respect to the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game times that has given the privilege, the condition is satisfied. The privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means after the end of the game, and the privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means after the benefit is granted by the first privilege granting means. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the feature cE2, when the condition is established in the first determination mode in the game game, the first privilege granting means does not grant the privilege after the condition game is completed, and the second privilege is awarded. When the condition is awarded in the second determination mode in the game game where the condition is satisfied, the first privilege is granted by the first privilege granting device after the condition-achieving game time is finished, and the first privilege is obtained. After the grant of the privilege by the granting means is completed, the privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means, so that the degree of advantage to the player with respect to the privilege to be subsequently granted depends on the determination mode in the condition-satisfying game times. different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination mode. When the determination mode is the second determination mode and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first benefit granting means and the second benefit granting means grant the benefit. In the case of the second determination mode, it is possible to give the player a greater expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

[Feature cE3]
The gaming machine described in the feature cE2,
The first privilege granting means,
The first privilege granting time (the opening time in the specific period in the third embodiment), which is the time length of the first privilege granting period which is the period of granting the privilege as the first privilege granting means, is defined as the privilege. First privilege granting time determining means (based on the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game times that has triggered the granting) (set to an opening time corresponding to the jackpot type in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

According to the feature cE3, the first privilege granting time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game times that has triggered the grant of the privilege, so that the privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means. Even when it is found, it is possible to make the player estimate the first privilege granting time determined based on the special information in the condition-satisfying game times, and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature cE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features cE2 to cE3,
A first ball entering portion (special electric starting port 52 in the third embodiment) capable of entering a game ball,
A drive mechanism (second variable winning device 55) which is driven on condition that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion,
A second ball entry portion (second big winning opening 55a) that facilitates entry of a game ball by driving the drive mechanism,
Equipped with
The first privilege granting means,
In a specific period (opening period in the third embodiment), which is a period from the end of the condition-satisfying game times to the start of the privilege by the second privilege granting means, compared to a period other than the specific period, In order to make it easy for the game ball to enter the second ball part, the drive mode from the game ball entering the first ball part to the end of the driving of the drive mechanism is controlled (special electric starting port 52). By shortening the time from the entry of the game ball to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b compared to the period other than the specific period), means for giving a privilege to the specific period is provided. A gaming machine.

According to the feature cE4, during the specific period, the driving ball is driven after the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion so that the game ball can enter the second ball entering portion more easily than during the period other than the specific period. By controlling the driving mode until the driving of the mechanism is finished, the privilege is given in the specific period, so that the driving of the driving mechanism is finished after the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion in the specific period. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the driving modes up to and to give the player a sense of expectation based on the driving modes.

<Characteristic cF group>
The characteristic cF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic cF1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
On condition that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (wins a big hit in the third embodiment), after the condition-satisfied game times, which are the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, are finished. , A first drive mechanism that is driven continuously (first variable winning device 54 in the third embodiment),
A first ball entry portion (first big winning opening 54a) that facilitates entry of a game ball by being driven by the first drive mechanism,
Special privilege granting means for granting a privilege (special bonus) during a specific period (opening period) which is a period from the end of the condition-satisfying game times to the start of continuous driving of the first drive mechanism,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic cF1, the privilege is given during the specific period, which is the period from the end of the condition-fulfilling game times to the start of continuous driving of the first drive mechanism. Usually, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first drive mechanism is continuously driven to give a bonus to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are completed. To do. According to feature cF1,
Prior to granting the privilege to the player by continuously driving the first drive mechanism, the privilege is granted in the specific period, so that it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and also to the player. Expectation can be added.

[Characteristic cF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature cF1,
The special privilege granting means is
A gaming machine comprising: means for determining a time length of the specific period (opening period) based on special information corresponding to the condition-satisfied game times.

According to the feature cF2, the time length of the specific period is determined based on the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game times, so various processes executed based on the special information corresponding to the condition-satisfying game times ( For example, the player can be made to guess the time length of the specific period based on (eg, effects), and the player can be given a sense of expectation.

[Characteristic cF3]
The gaming machine described in the feature M1 or the feature M2,
The special privilege granting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of advantage of the privilege to be given is controlled by the temporal length of the specific period (opening period).

According to the feature cF3, the advantage degree of the privilege to be given is controlled by the length of time of the specific period, so that the player is given more expectation about the length of time of the specific period. be able to.

[Characteristic cF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3,
A second ball entering portion (special electric starting port 52 in the third embodiment) different from the first ball entering portion (first big winning opening 54a);
A second drive mechanism (second variable winning device 55) which is driven on the condition that a game ball has entered the second ball entering portion,
A third ball entry portion (second big winning opening 55a) that facilitates entry of a game ball by driving the second drive mechanism,
Equipped with
The special privilege granting means is
In the specific period, the game ball enters the second ball entering section so that the game ball can enter the third ball entering section more easily than in the period other than the specific period. The drive mode until the drive of the drive mechanism is completed is controlled (the time from the entry of the game ball into the special electric starting port 52 to the opening of the second opening/closing door 55b is made shorter than the period other than the specific period). ), thereby providing a means for granting a privilege during the specific period.

According to the characteristic cF4, during the specific period, the game ball enters the second ball unit after the game ball enters the second ball unit so that the game ball can enter the third ball unit more easily than in the period other than the specific period. By controlling the driving mode until the driving of the second driving mechanism is finished, the privilege is given in the specific period, so the second driving is performed after the game ball enters the second ball entering portion in the specific period. The player can be made to pay attention to the driving mode until the driving of the mechanism is completed, and the player can be given an expectation based on the driving mode.

<Characteristic cG group>
The characteristic cG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Characteristic cG1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege after the end of the condition-satisfying game times, which are the game times corresponding to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition by the determining means,
A gaming machine comprising:
Of the two condition-satisfying game times, the condition-satisfying game time that was executed first is the first condition-satisfying game time (pre-winning game time in the third embodiment), and the condition-satisfying game time that is executed later is later. When the condition is satisfied game times (later winning game times in the third embodiment),
The privilege granting means,
Means for determining the process to be executed after the end of the post-conditions fulfilling game times based on the special information corresponding to the pre-conditions fulfilling game times (the determination mode from the next game times based on the jackpot type of the pre-winning game times) A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic cG1, since the process to be executed after the post-conditions fulfilling game times are determined based on the special information corresponding to the pre-conditions fulfilling game times, when the conditions fulfilling game times are executed, the conditions are fulfilled. In addition to giving the player an expectation about the process executed after the end of the game time, an expectation about the method of the process when the condition satisfaction game time (post-condition satisfaction game time) is executed next Can be given.

[Characteristic cG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature cG1,
The privilege granting means,
As a process to be executed after the end of the post-condition-satisfying game times, a method of a process of giving a privilege after the end of the post-condition-satisfying game times is described as follows: A gaming machine comprising means for making a decision based on a determination mode from the next game time based on the type of jackpot.

According to the feature cG2, the method of the process of granting the privilege after the end of the post-conditions fulfilling game times is determined based on the special information corresponding to the pre-conditions fulfilling game times, so that the condition fulfilling game times are executed. If, in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation about the method of giving a privilege after the end of the condition-satisfied game times, the condition-satisfied game times (post-condition-satisfied game times) are executed next Expectation can also be given to the method of the process of giving the privilege in. Further, when the condition-satisfied game times are executed, regarding the method of the process of granting the privilege after the condition-satisfied game times are completed, the condition fulfilled before the condition-satisfied game times is given to the player. It is possible to make a guess based on special information in the game times (previous condition satisfied game times). Therefore, when the condition-satisfied game times are executed, the estimation of the method of granting the privilege after the completion of the condition-satisfied game times based on the special information in the previous condition-satisfied game times when viewed from the condition-satisfied game times, and , It is possible to infer the method of granting the privilege in the post-condition-satisfying game times from the viewpoint of the condition-satisfying game times, and by executing the condition-satisfying game times once, prompting the player to make various guesses, Furthermore, a sense of expectation can be imparted.

[Characteristic cG3]
The gaming machine described in the feature cG2,
The privilege granting means,
A first privilege granting means (function of granting a special bonus) and a second privilege granting means (function of executing a round game),
When the special information corresponding to the preceding condition fulfillment game times satisfies a specific condition (when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot), by the first privilege granting means after the completion of the postconditions fulfilling game times After the privilege is granted and the privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means, the privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means, and the special information corresponding to the pre-condition-satisfied game times is specified. When the condition is not satisfied (when the jackpot type is usually a jackpot), the bonus is not granted by the first privilege granting means after the end of the post-conditions fulfilling game times, and the second privilege granting means is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with special benefits.

According to the characteristic cG3, when the special information corresponding to the previous condition-satisfied game times satisfies a specific condition, the player is given an expectation about the grant of the privilege after the previous condition-satisfied game times are completed. In addition, a great expectation can be given to the award of the bonus after the completion of the post-conditions game times.

[Characteristic cG4]
The gaming machine described in the feature cG3,
The first privilege granting means,
After the completion of the post-condition-satisfying game times, a first privilege-giving time, which is a time length of a first privilege-giving period that is a period for granting the privilege as the first privilege-giving means, is defined as the post-condition-satisfying game times. A game machine having a first privilege granting time determining means (a function of setting an opening time according to a jackpot type in an opening time setting process in the third embodiment) determined based on the special information corresponding to ..

According to the characteristic cG4, when the special information corresponding to the previous condition-satisfying game times satisfies a specific condition, the first privilege-giving time in the first privilege-giving period after the end of the post-condition-satisfying game times is set. , It is possible to make the player guess based on the post-conditions fulfilling game times, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Characteristic cG5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to cG4,
The privilege granting means,
As a process executed after the end of the post-condition-satisfied game times, the time length (opening time) from the end of the post-condition-satisfied game times to the start of granting a privilege (round game) A gaming machine comprising means (a function of determining whether or not a high probability mode is set in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment) that is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game time.

According to the feature cG5, since the time length from the end of the post-conditions fulfilling game times to the start of granting the privilege is determined based on the special information corresponding to the pre-conditions fulfilling game times, the post-conditions fulfilling games Based on the special information corresponding to the pre-established game times, the player can infer the time length until the number of times the game is executed and the award is started, so that a new game property can be provided.

[Characteristic cG6]
The gaming machine described in the feature cG5,
The privilege granting means,
A first privilege granting means (function of granting a special bonus) and a second privilege granting means (function of executing a round game),
The second privilege grant, which is the time length of the second privilege grant start period, which is the period from the end of the post-conditions-matching game times to the start of privilege grant (round game) as the second privilege grant means. A start time (opening time) is determined based on the special information corresponding to the preceding condition-satisfied game time (determined whether or not it is in the high probability mode in the opening time setting process in the third embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the second privilege granting start period (opening period), a privilege is granted (a special bonus is granted) as the first privilege granting means.

According to the feature cG6, the privilege granting means includes the first privilege granting means and the second privilege granting means, and therefore, when the condition-satisfying game times are executed, the player is given the first specific grant. In addition to the sense of expectation for granting the privilege by the means, the sense of expectation for granting the privilege by the second privilege granting unit can be imparted. Further, the second privilege grant start time, which is the time length of the second privilege grant start period during which the first privilege grant means grants the privilege, is based on the special information corresponding to the previous condition-satisfying game times. Since it is determined, the player is made to estimate the second privilege grant start time based on the special information corresponding to the previous condition-satisfying game times, and the privilege is granted by the first privilege grant means in the second privilege grant start period. It is possible to give a sense of expectation about the addition of.

<Characteristic dA group>
The characteristic dA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dA1]
Controlling the display means (start-up display section 39a and start-up display section 39) that can take the first display mode (light-out of start-up display section 39a) and the second display mode (light-up of start-up display section 39a) A main controller 60) that realizes the function of
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode And a determination unit having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition,
Once the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means (variable display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b) is started and then the game operation is ended. In that case, a game time executing means for executing the game time,
Means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether or not the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state. A storage unit (RAM 64) capable of continuously storing the determination mode information that is being maintained when the non-supply state is switched to the supply state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
When the determination mode is the second determination mode when the supply state is switched from the non-supply state, a means for displaying in the second display mode (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) 228 in steps Sd0502 and Sd0503) in the normal processing of FIG.
The display mode is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition while being displayed in the second display mode. Means (steps Sd1104 to Sd1106 in the hit determination process of FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side), and a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic dA1, when the determination mode is the second determination mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state, the display means displays in the second display mode. .. Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is possible to make the player guess that the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. it can. However, in the feature dA1, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, which overturns the guess of the player. be able to. Specifically, by switching to the first display mode, the player is discouraged by guessing that the player has shifted to the first determination mode, but in the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying a predetermined condition, In reality, since the first determination mode is not entered, the disappointing player's guess can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dA1,
Judgment mode determination means (main control board 61 side) that determines at which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means at the game time is to be executed at the start of the game time 233) which is executed by the MPU 62 of FIG.
The display means is
While displaying in the second display mode, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the second display mode at the start of the game time when the determination mode determination means determines to execute in the first determination mode. A game machine characterized by comprising means for switching to the display mode of 1 (steps Sd1002, Sd1004, and Sd1005 in the fall determination process of FIG. 233).

According to the characteristic dA2, in both cases of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the display means is provided at the start of the game times. Changes the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, so it is determined from the display mode of the display means that the game time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the first determination mode is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the played game times. Therefore, according to the characteristic dA2, it is possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dA3]
The gaming machine described in the feature dA2,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
Means for executing a specific effect in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
A game machine characterized by comprising: a means for executing the specific effect at a game time determined to be executed in the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determination means.

According to the feature dA3, the same specific effect is executed in any of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases is caused by a particular effect. In addition, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing in any of the above cases from the display mode of the display means at the start of the game game. Therefore, according to the characteristic dA3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tense over a relatively long period of time by giving a certain effect a time width.
[Characteristic dA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features dA1 to dA3,
The display means includes an LED,
In the first display mode, the LED is in the off state,
The second display mode is a lighting state of the LED. A gaming machine.

According to the feature dA4, it is possible to identify the determination mode with a simple display mode such as turning off/on the LED. Therefore, according to the characteristic dA4, the visibility of the player can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic dB group>
The characteristic dB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dB1]
Display means that can take a first display mode and a second display mode;
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode and the special information more than the first determination mode Determination means having a second determination mode with a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether or not the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state. The determination mode information, which is being stored, a storage unit capable of continuously storing when the supply state is switched from the non-supply state,
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
When the determination mode is the second determination mode when the supply state is switched from the non-supply state, a means for displaying in the second display mode (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) 228 in steps Sd0502 and Sd0503) in the normal processing of FIG.
Means for switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode when a predetermined game time is started during the display in the second display mode (on the main control board 61 side) Steps Sd1104 to Sd1106 in the hit determination process of FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62,
Equipped with
The determination means,
Despite the display means switching from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the predetermined game time, the second determination is made based on the determination corresponding to the predetermined game time. A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing in a mode (steps Sd1101 to Sd1103 in the hit determination process of FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side).

According to the feature dB1, when the determination mode is the second determination mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state, the display means displays in the second display mode. Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is possible to make the player guess that the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. it can. However, in the characteristic dB1, although the display means switches from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the predetermined game time, the second determination is made corresponding to the predetermined game time. Since it is executed in the mode, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player. Therefore, according to the feature dB1, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dB1,
The predetermined game time is the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition.

According to the feature dB2, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player who has shifted to the first determination mode in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, so that the player is given more unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic dC group>
The characteristic dC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dC1]
Display means that can take a first display mode and a second display mode;
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode and the special information more than the first determination mode Determination means having a second determination mode with a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether or not the determination mode is the second determination mode, which is stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state. The determination mode information, which is being stored, a storage unit capable of continuously storing when the supply state is switched from the non-supply state,
Judgment mode determination means (main control board) that determines which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game time is to be performed when the game time is started 233, which is executed by the MPU 62 on the 61st side).
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
When the determination mode is the second determination mode when the supply state is switched from the non-supply state, a means for displaying in the second display mode (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) 228 in the normal processing of FIG. 228),
Means for switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at a predetermined switching timing during the display in the second display mode;
Equipped with
The timing at which the determination unit switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode is the game time when the determination mode determination unit determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode. Whereas the first game time and the second game time as the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are different from each other (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) 233 in steps Sd1002 to Sd1003 in the fall determination process and step Sd1308 in the game state transition process in FIG. 236 executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side,
The predetermined switching timing for switching to the first display mode is the same in the first game time and the second game time (mainly in steps Sd1004 to Sd1005 in the fall determination process of FIG. 233, (Steps Sd1105 to Sd1106 in the hit determination process of FIG. 234 executed by the MPU 62 on the control board 61 side)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic dC1, the predetermined switching timing at which the display unit switches the display mode to the first display mode is the first game time when the determination mode determination unit determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode, It matches with the second game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. For this reason, the player is asked, from the display mode of the display means, whether the first game time is decided to be executed in the first determination mode or the second game time corresponding to the special information satisfying a predetermined condition. It can be suppressed from being guessed. Therefore, according to the feature dC1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dC1,
In the first game round, the predetermined switching timing is at the start of the first game round, and in the second game round, the predetermined switching timing is at the start of the second game round. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature dC2, since the display means switches the display mode to the first display mode at the same time when the game play is started, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dC3]
The gaming machine described in the feature dC2,
In the first game time, the determination means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the first game time, and in the second game time, A game machine characterized in that the timing at which the determination means switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode is at the end of the second game time.

According to the feature dC3, in the second game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the second game time is switched to the first determination mode at the end of the second game time. The determination corresponding to can be performed in the second determination mode. Therefore, according to the feature dC3, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic dD group>
The characteristic dD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dD1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A state storage unit (high-probability mode) that stores state information (information on a lottery mode) capable of specifying a first state (low-probability mode) and a second state (high-probability mode) that are two exclusive states. Flag)
A specific process execution means for starting execution of a specific process (lighting up of the startup display section 39a) based on the state information stored in the state storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The state storage means is
Means for continuously storing the state information stored immediately before switching from the supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to the non-supply state when the state is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state Prepare,
The specific processing execution means,
Means for starting execution of the specific process (lighting of the startup display section 39a) when the state information is information for identifying the second state when the non-supply state is switched to the supply state; ,
A means for terminating the specific process at the start of the game time satisfying the predetermined condition, and a gaming machine.

According to the feature dD1, the specific process executing means starts the execution of the specific process when the state information is the information for identifying the second state when the non-supply state is switched to the supply state. It is possible to make the player, who has recognized that the process of (1) is being executed, recognize that it is in the second state. Further, since the specific processing execution means ends the specific processing at the start of the game times that satisfy the predetermined condition, it is presumed to the player that the result of the determination by the determination means is related to the end of the specific processing. Can be made Therefore, when a specific process is being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific process is ended. When the specific process is ended, the game is started from the start of the game time. It is possible to give the person a great expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic dD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dD1,
The determination means,
As a determination mode for performing the determination, a means for executing a first determination mode and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode,
The first state is a state in which the determination unit executes the first determination mode, and the second state is a state in which the determination unit executes the second determination mode. Amusement machine.

According to the feature dD2, the first state is a state in which the determination unit executes the first determination mode, and the second state is a state in which the determination unit executes the second determination mode. The player who recognizes that the execution is performed is inferred that the determination means makes a determination in the second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying a predetermined condition than in the first determination mode, You can add a sense of expectation to.

[Characteristic dD3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic dD1 or the characteristic dD2,
Equipped with a display that can be viewed by the player,
The specific processing execution means,
As the specific processing, the display mode of the display unit is changed to a display mode indicating the second state.

The feature dD3 allows the player to pay attention to the display mode of the display unit. Further, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who recognizes that the display mode of the display unit is the display mode indicating the second state.

<Characteristic dE group>
The characteristic dE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dE1]
With a ball entering part where game balls can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode And a determination unit having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A means for assisting the ball entering the game ball into the ball entering section, and a support mode for performing the assist, a first support mode (low frequency support mode), and a game ball entering the ball entering section. An auxiliary means (electric power accessory 34a) having a second support mode (high frequency support mode) in which the possibility of entering the ball is higher than the first support mode.
The control means for controlling the auxiliary means, wherein the determination is made after the number of times of executing the game times reaches a predetermined number after the auxiliary means shifts from the first support mode to the second support mode. Control means for shifting the auxiliary means from the second support mode to the first support mode when the mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode;
Determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the second determination mode, and support mode information for specifying whether the support mode is the second support mode, respectively. Means for storing, the determination mode information and the support mode information stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state, from the non-supply state to the supply state Storage means that can be continuously stored when switched to
It is a display unit that can take a first display mode (lighting-off of the startup display unit 39a) and a second display mode (lighting-up of the startup display unit 39a), and has switched from the non-supply state to the supply state. At this time, when the determination mode is the second determination mode, a display unit that performs display in the second display mode (start-up display unit 39a and a function for controlling the start-up display unit 39 is realized. Controller 60),
A gaming machine comprising:
When the display unit is displaying in the second display mode and the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition after the execution count reaches the predetermined count. In addition, when the game time for which the determination is made is started, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side). 234 in steps Sd1104 to Sd1106 of FIG. 234, the control unit shifts the support mode from the second support mode to the first support mode (executed by the MPU 62 on the main control board W61 side). 234 in steps Sd1108 to Sd1110 in the hit determination process).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic dE1, when the determination mode is the second determination mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state, the display means displays in the second display mode. .. Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is possible to make the player guess that the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. it can. Further, according to the characteristic dE1, after the number of times of execution of the game times after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number, the determination mode shifts to the first determination mode, The auxiliary means is shifted to the first support mode. For this reason, when the auxiliary means shifts from the second support mode to the first support mode, it is possible to make the player guess that the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. That is, when the display mode of the display means is switched to the first display mode and the auxiliary means is switched to the first support mode, the determination mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, The player can make a guess. However, according to the feature dE1, at the start of the game time when it is determined that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition after the number of times of executing the game time after the transition to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number of times. At, the player's guess can be overridden. Specifically, due to switching to the first display mode and switching to the first support mode, the player is discouraged by guessing that the player has switched to the first determination mode, but the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The game times corresponding to the special information to be satisfied do not actually shift to the first determination mode, so that the guess of the discouraged player can be overturned. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature dE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dE1,
And a determination mode determination means for determining, in the first determination mode or the second determination mode, the determination by the determination means in the game time when the game time is started,
The determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be performed in the first determination mode after the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the number of times of execution reaches the predetermined number of times. In this case, when the game time for which the determination is made is started, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, and the control means controls the support mode. The game machine, wherein the game machine is switched from the second support mode to the first support mode.

According to the characteristic dE2, the determination is made after the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the auxiliary means has reached the predetermined number of times of execution of the game times after the transition to the second support mode. When it is determined by the determination mode determination means to execute in the first determination mode, the display means is the same as when the special information is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition at the start of the game time for which the determination is made. Behave. Therefore, from the display mode of the display means, the player is inferred which of the case where it is determined that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the determination is determined to be executed in the first determination mode. It is possible to suppress being done. Further, according to the characteristic dE2, the determination mode determining means may execute the determination in the first determination mode after the number of executions of the game times after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number. When determined by, the control means shifts the support mode to the same first support mode as when it is determined that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition at the start of the game time for which the determination is made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above two cases has occurred from the behavior of the auxiliary means during the game. Therefore, according to the characteristic dE2, after the number of executions of the game times after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number, from the display mode of the display means and the behavior of the auxiliary means, the two It is possible to prevent the player from guessing in which case. Therefore, according to the feature dE2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic dF group>
The characteristic dF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dF1]
With a ball entering part where game balls can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a ball entering the game machine into the ball entering section,
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode And a determination unit having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A means for assisting the ball entering the game ball into the ball entering section, and a support mode for performing the assist, a first support mode (low frequency support mode), and a game ball entering the ball entering section. An auxiliary means (electric power accessory 34a) having a second support mode (high frequency support mode) in which the possibility of entering the ball is higher than the first support mode.
Control means for controlling the auxiliary means, wherein the auxiliary means has reached a predetermined number of executions of the game time after the transition from the first support mode to the second support mode, Control means for shifting the auxiliary means from the second support mode to the first support mode when the determination mode is the first determination mode;
Determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the second determination mode, and support mode information for specifying whether the support mode is the second support mode, respectively. Means for storing, the determination mode information and the support mode information stored immediately before switching from a supply state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine to a non-supply state, from the non-supply state to the supply state Storage means that can be continuously stored when switched to
Determination mode determining means for determining, in the first determination mode or the second determination mode, the determination by the determination means in the game time when the game time is started,
It is a display unit that can take a first display mode (lighting-off of the startup display unit 39a) and a second display mode (lighting-up of the startup display unit 39a), and has switched from the non-supply state to the supply state. At this time, when the determination mode is the second determination mode, a display unit that performs display in the second display mode (start-up display unit 39a and a function for controlling the start-up display unit 39 is realized. Controller 60),
A gaming machine comprising:
When the display unit is displaying in the second display mode, and the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition before the execution count reaches the predetermined count. Or when it is determined by the determination mode determining means that the determination is to be executed in the first determination mode,
The display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game time for which the determination or the determination is made,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the control means maintains the second support mode as the support mode from the start of the determined or determined game time to at least the end of the game time.

According to the characteristic dF1, the special information is displayed before the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the number of times of executing the game times after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, or when it is determined to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the display means displays the determination or the game time at which the determination is started. , Behave the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above two cases has occurred from the display mode of the display means. Further, according to the characteristic dF1, in any of the above two cases, the control means supports 2 as a support mode from the start of the game time for which the determination or determination is made to at least the end of the game time. Maintain mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above two cases has occurred from the behavior of the auxiliary means during the game. Therefore, from the start of the game times before the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number of times to the end of the game times, from the display mode of the display means and the behavior of the auxiliary means, in the two cases described above. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing which one of the above. Therefore, according to the characteristic dF1, before the number of times of execution of the game times after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode reaches a predetermined number, the player feels a sense of expectation and tense for a relatively long period of time. It can be given, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the characteristic dF1, when the determination mode is the second determination mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is switched from the non-supply state to the supply state, the display means is in the second display mode. Display. Therefore, when the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, it is possible to make the player guess that the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. it can. However, in the feature dF1, the display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game play corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, which overturns the guess of the player. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dF1,
When the display unit is displaying in the second display mode, and the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition after the execution count reaches the predetermined count. Or when it is determined by the determination mode determining means that the determination is to be executed in the first determination mode,
The display means switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game time for which the determination or the determination is made,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means shifts the support mode from the second support mode to the first support mode at the start of the game time for which the determination or the determination has been made.

According to the feature dF2, after the display means is displaying in the second display mode and the auxiliary means has reached the predetermined number of times of execution of the game times after shifting to the second support mode, special information When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, or when it is determined to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the display means displays the determination or the game time at which the determination is started. , Behave the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above two cases has occurred from the display mode of the display means. Further, according to the characteristic dF2, in any of the above two cases, the control means shifts the support mode to the first support mode at the start of the game time for which the determination or the determination is made. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above two cases has occurred from the behavior of the auxiliary means during the game. Therefore, according to the feature dF2, both before and after the number of executions reaches the predetermined number of times before the number of executions of the game number reaches a predetermined number after the auxiliary means shifts to the second support mode, From the display mode of the display means and the behavior of the auxiliary means, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above two cases has occurred.

<Characteristic dG group>
The characteristic dG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Characteristic dG1]
Controlling the display means (start-up display section 39a and start-up display section 39) that can take the first display mode (light-out of start-up display section 39a) and the second display mode (light-up of start-up display section 39a) A main controller 60) that realizes the function of
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
A means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a first determination mode And a determination unit having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Means for storing determination mode information for specifying whether the determination mode is the first determination mode or the second determination mode, wherein the game machine is not supplied from a supply state in which power is supplied. A storage unit (RAM 64) capable of continuously storing the determination mode information stored immediately before the switching to the state, when the switching from the non-supply state to the supply state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
Means for performing display in the second display mode when the determination mode is the second determination mode when the non-supply state is switched to the supply state;
When the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode during the display in the second display mode, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the first display. Means for switching to the mode,
Equipped with
The gaming machine further comprises
Means for switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game game corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition while being displayed in the second display mode. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature dG1, the display unit changes the display mode from the second display mode when the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode during the display in the second display mode. Switch to the first display mode. Further, this gaming machine switches the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game play corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Therefore, the display means is displaying in the second display mode, and switches the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game game corresponding to the special condition satisfying the predetermined condition. .. At this time, when the player recognizes that the display mode has switched from the second display mode to the first display mode at the start of the game cycle, the determination in the game cycle is executed in the first determination mode. You can make a guess. However, the game times are started after it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game times, so The determination is performed in the second determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player that the judgment in the game times has been executed in the first judgment mode and give the player unexpectedness. Furthermore, since the game time is a game time corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to give a greater surprise and expectation to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature dG1, the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of the game time, but when the determination means determines in the second determination mode and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the determination mode is switched from the second determination mode to the first determination mode after the determination, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in the game time. Furthermore, since the control for switching the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode is linked to the control for switching the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode, the display mode of the display means is switched. It is possible to prevent the control from being peculiar control and to achieve the effect of overturning the estimation of the player as described above and imparting a surprisingness to the player while making the control simple.

[Characteristic dG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature dG1,
And a determination mode determination means for determining, in the first determination mode or the second determination mode, the determination by the determination means in the game time when the game time is started,
The display means is
While displaying in the second display mode, the display mode is changed from the second display mode to the second display mode at the start of the game time when the determination mode determination means determines to execute in the first determination mode. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to one display mode.

According to the feature dG2, in both cases of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the display means is provided at the start of the game times. Changes the display mode from the second display mode to the first display mode, so it is determined from the display mode of the display means that the game time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the first determination mode is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the played game times. Therefore, according to the feature dG2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic dG3]
The gaming machine described in the feature dG2,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
Means for executing a specific effect in the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
A game machine characterized by comprising: a means for executing the specific effect at a game time determined to be executed in the first judgment mode by the judgment mode determination means.

According to the feature dG3, the same specific effect is executed in any of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the above cases is caused by a particular effect. In addition, as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing in any of the above cases from the display mode of the display means at the start of the game game. Therefore, according to the feature dG3, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of tension for a relatively long period of time by giving a certain effect a time width.

<Feature eA group>
The characteristic eA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eA1]
A first ball entrance (first ball entrance) through which a game ball can enter and the game ball that has entered can reach a predetermined area (first starting hole 33). 201),
A second entrance (second entrance 221) adjacent to the first entrance, which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter
In the specific case where the time interval between the entry of the game ball into the first entrance and the entry of the game ball into the second entrance is within a specific time, the specific case Comparing with the case other than, auxiliary means for facilitating the game ball entering the first entrance into the predetermined area,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature eA1, since the auxiliary means is provided, even if the width (width) of the first entrance is different from the width (width) of the second entrance, a predetermined value for the difference is provided. It is possible to suppress a change in the easiness of arrival of the game ball (expected value of arrival) in the area. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

For example, consider a configuration in which the sum of the widths (widths) of the first entrance and the second entrances that are adjacent to each other is defined as a constant width (width). In the first configuration in which the width of the first entrance is wider than the width of the second entrance, the second entrance has more game balls than the first entrance. It is difficult to be in the above specific case because it is difficult, but since the width of the first entrance is wide, it is easy for game balls to enter the first entrance, and the first entrance per unit time By increasing the number of game balls to enter, it is possible to increase the probability that the game balls will reach a predetermined area.

On the other hand, in the second configuration in which the width of the first entrance is narrower than the width of the second entrance, the first entrance has more game balls than the second entrance. Since it is difficult to hit the ball, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first entrance compared to the first configuration, but the second entrance is easier for the game ball to enter than the first configuration. When the game ball enters the first ball entrance, the above specific case is likely to occur, and the probability that the game ball reaches the predetermined area can be increased.

As described above, according to the characteristic eA1, it is easy for the game ball to reach the predetermined area with respect to the difference between the width (width) of the first entrance and the width (width) of the second entrance. It is possible to suppress a change in size (expected value of arrival), and it is possible to easily maintain an expected value of a game ball reaching a predetermined area constant (or within a predetermined difference).

[Feature eA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature eA1,
The auxiliary means is
A route of a predetermined game ball, the first type route in which the probability that the game ball entered from the first entrance will reach the prize opening as the predetermined area is a first probability value (Normal route NR)
A second probability value, which is a predetermined route of the game ball, in which the probability that the game ball entered from the first entrance will reach the prize hole is higher than the first probability value. Type 2 route (special route SP),
In a case other than the specific case, the game ball entered from the first entrance is distributed to the first type route, and in the particular case, the game ball entered from the first entrance And a game ball distribution means (game ball distribution device 200) for distributing the game ball to the second type route.

According to the characteristic eA2, the game ball entered from the first entrance is distributed to the first type route in the case other than the specific case, and the game ball enters from the first entrance in the particular case. The game ball that is played is distributed to the second route. Therefore, in a specific case, the probability that the game ball reaches the winning opening can be increased. In this way, according to the feature eA2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature eB group>
The characteristic eB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eB1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) in which game balls are distributed,
A passage provided in the distribution area, having a first ball entrance (first ball entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter, and the game ball entering the first ball entrance. A first passage (first passage 210) for circulating
A passage provided in the distribution area, having a second entrance (second entrance 221) adjacent to the first entrance, and entering the second entrance. A gaming machine having a second passage (second passage 220) for circulating the game ball,
It is characterized by comprising behavior changing means (first game ball distribution mechanism 240) for changing the behavior of the game ball in the first passage by being acted on by the game ball flowing in the second passage. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic eB1, the behavior of the game ball in the first passage is changed by the behavior changing means being acted by the game ball flowing through the second passage. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch strength of the game ball to change the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage, and thus the game ball in the first passage. It is possible to change the probability that the behavior of will change. Therefore, according to the feature eB1, it is possible to provide the player with the result of the game according to the skill, and to improve the interest of the game.

Consider the case where the nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance of the first passage and the second entrance of the second passage in the feature eB1. The probability of the game ball entering the first entrance of the first passage changes depending on the position where the nail is driven. Specifically, by providing the nail on the first ball entrance side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage is high, the behavior changing means increases the probability that the behavior of the game ball will change in the first passage. In summary, when the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first entrance side of the first passage, it contradicts that the probability that a game ball enters the first entrance of the first passage decreases. Thus, the probability that the behavior of the game ball changes in the first passage increases.

On the other hand, if the above nail is provided on the second entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first entrance of the first passage will increase. On the contrary, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage is low, the probability that the behavior of the game ball will change in the first passage is low. Therefore, according to the feature eB1, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage and the probability of the behavior of the game ball changing in the first passage.

Here, assuming that the behavior of the game ball changes in the first passage to improve the probability that the game ball will advance to a path advantageous to the player in the first passage, the nail is changed to the first passage. Even if the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is reduced by providing it on the side of the first entrance of the game ball, the game ball advances to a route advantageous to the player in the first passage. Since the probability increases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased toward the hall side between the hall side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the side of the second entrance of the second passage to increase the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage, the game in the first passage Since the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player decreases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to the player between the hall side and the player side. Therefore, according to the feature eB1, there is also an effect that it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature eB1,
The game machine characterized in that the behavior changing means is configured to distribute the game ball in the first passage to one of a plurality of destinations.

According to the characteristic eB2, the destination of the game ball in the first passage is sorted by the behavior changing means. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch strength of the game ball to change the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage, thereby allowing the player to play the game in the first passage. You can change the probability that the destination of the ball will be distributed.

[Feature eB3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic eB2,
A first type route (normal route NR) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area,
A second type route (special route SP), which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area and which is a route more advantageous to the player than the first type route,
Equipped with
The behavior changing means,
When not being affected by the game balls flowing through the second passage, the game balls in the first passage are distributed toward the first type route,
A game machine comprising means for distributing the game balls in the first passage toward the second type route by being acted on by the game balls circulating in the second passage.

According to the characteristic eB3, when the game sphere flowing through the second passage is not acted on, the game sphere is sorted toward the first type route and is acted on by the game sphere flowing through the second passage. Thus, the game balls are distributed toward the second type route that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage. It is possible to increase the probability that the balls are distributed toward the second type route and obtain a game result that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature eB3, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic eC group>
The characteristic eC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eC1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) in which game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage 211) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls,
A branch passage (first branch passage 212) that is provided in the distribution area and is used for circulating the game balls, and that is branched from the first passage.
At a branch point of the first passage to the branch passage, a game ball distributing means (first game ball distributing mechanism 240) for distributing the game balls to the first passage and the branch passage,
A second passage (second passage 220) provided in the distribution area for circulating the game balls,
The game ball distribution means,
When the game ball does not flow through the second passage, the game ball reaching the branch point is distributed to the first passage,
A game machine comprising means for allocating a game ball reaching the branch point to the branch passage upon distribution of the game ball in the second passage.

According to the characteristic eC1, when the game ball does not flow in the second passage, the game ball is distributed to the first passage, and when the game ball is distributed in the second passage, the game ball is distributed to the branch passage. Be done. Therefore, the player changes the probability of the game ball flowing through the second passage by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, and thus the probability that the game ball is distributed to the branch passage in the first passage. Can be changed. Therefore, the player individually changes the probability that the game ball will flow through the first passage and the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage in the first passage, by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball. Can be made As a result, according to the characteristic eC1, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature eC2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic eC1,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage and has a first entrance (first entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter.
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second entrance (second entrance 221) into which a game ball can enter.
A game machine characterized in that the first entrance and the second entrance are adjacent to each other.

According to the feature eC2, the first entrance port included in the first passage and the second entrance port included in the second passage are adjacent to each other. Here, consider a case where the nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance and the second entrance that are adjacent to each other. The probability of the game ball entering the first entrance of the first passage changes depending on the position where the nail is driven. Specifically, by providing the nail on the first ball entrance side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage is high, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage in the first passage by the game ball distribution means is high. Become. In summary, when the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first entrance side of the first passage, it contradicts that the probability that a game ball enters the first entrance of the first passage decreases. Thus, in the first passage, the probability that the game ball is distributed to the branch passage is increased.

On the other hand, if the above nail is provided on the second entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first entrance of the first passage will increase. On the contrary, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage is low, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage will be low in the first passage. Therefore, according to the characteristic eC2, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage and the probability of the game ball being distributed to the branch passage in the first passage.

Here, in the first passage, by distributing the game balls to the branch passages, it is assumed that the probability that the game balls advance to a path advantageous to the player is improved. Even if the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is reduced by providing it on the entrance side of, the probability that the game ball will advance to a path advantageous to the player in the first passage will increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased toward the hall side between the hall side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the side of the second entrance of the second passage to increase the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage, the game in the first passage Since the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player decreases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to the player between the hall side and the player side. Therefore, according to the characteristic eC2, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eC3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic eC1 or the characteristic eC2,
A first type route (normal route NR) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area,
A second type route (special route SP) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area and which is a route more advantageous to the player than the first type route,
The downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type route,
A gaming machine, wherein a downstream end of the branch passage reaches the second type route.

According to the feature eC3, when the game ball does not flow through the second passage, the game ball is distributed to the first type route, and the distribution of the game ball in the second passage serves as an opportunity for the second advantageous game for the player. Sorted to the seed route. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball is distributed to the second type route and obtain a game result that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the characteristic eC3, it is possible to give the player a result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Feature eD group>
The characteristic eD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eD1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) in which game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage 211) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls,
A branch passage (first branch passage 212) that is provided in the distribution area and is used for circulating the game balls, and that is branched from the first passage.
At a branch point to the branch passage in the first passage, a game ball distributing means (first game ball distributing mechanism 240) for distributing a game ball to the first passage and the branch passage. And
The game ball distribution means,
A valve body (valve body 241) movable to a first position that closes an opening from the first passage to the branch passage and a second position that opens the opening so that a game ball can pass therethrough,
An action piece capable of moving the valve body from the first position to the second position by being acted on by a game ball that works in conjunction with the valve body and flows through a region different from the first passage. And a (action piece 242).

According to the feature eD1, the valve body moves from the first position to the second position in response to the action from the game ball flowing in a region different from the first passage, and the valve branches from the first passage. The opening to the passage opens, and the game balls are distributed to the branch passage. Therefore, the player changes the probability of the game ball circulating in the other area by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, and thus the probability that the game ball is distributed to the branch passage in the first passage. Can be changed. Therefore, the player individually changes the probability that the game ball will flow through the first passage and the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage in the first passage, by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball. Can be made As a result, according to the feature eD1, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature eD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature eD1,
The game machine is characterized in that the valve body is configured to be able to move from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

According to the feature eD2, the valve body can maintain the first position in the initial posture in which a force other than gravity does not work. Moreover, as described above, the valve body moves from the first position to the second position by being acted on by the game ball that flows through a region different from the first passage via the action piece. To do. Therefore, according to the feature eD2, it is not necessary to use a driving unit such as a motor to open and close the valve element, and thus the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

[Feature eD3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic eD1 or the characteristic eD2,
A second passage (second passage 220) provided in the distribution area for circulating the game balls
Equipped with
An area different from the first passage is a predetermined area in the second passage.

According to the characteristic eD3, the game balls are distributed to the branch passages upon the distribution of the game balls in the second passage. Therefore, the player changes the probability of the game ball flowing through the second passage by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, and thus the probability that the game ball is distributed to the branch passage in the first passage. Can be changed.

[Feature eD4]
The gaming machine described in the feature eD3,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage and has a first entrance (first entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter.
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second entrance (second entrance 221) into which a game ball can enter.
A game machine characterized in that the first entrance and the second entrance are adjacent to each other.

According to the feature eD4, the first entrance port of the first passage and the second entrance port of the second passage are adjacent to each other. Here, consider a case where the nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance and the second entrance that are adjacent to each other. The probability of the game ball entering the first entrance of the first passage changes depending on the position where the nail is driven. Specifically, by providing the nail on the first ball entrance side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage is high, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage in the first passage by the game ball distribution means is high. Become. In summary, when the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first entrance side of the first passage, it contradicts that the probability that a game ball enters the first entrance of the first passage decreases. Thus, in the first passage, the probability that the game ball is distributed to the branch passage is increased.

On the other hand, if the above nail is provided on the second entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first entrance of the first passage will increase. On the contrary, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage is low, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the branch passage will be low in the first passage. Therefore, according to the feature eD4, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage and the probability of the game ball being distributed to the branch passage in the first passage.

Here, in the first passage, by distributing the game balls to the branch passages, it is assumed that the probability that the game balls advance to a path advantageous to the player is improved. Even if the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is reduced by providing it on the entrance side of, the probability that the game ball will advance to a path advantageous to the player in the first passage will increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased toward the hall side between the hall side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the side of the second entrance of the second passage to increase the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage, the game in the first passage Since the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player decreases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to the player between the hall side and the player side. Therefore, according to the feature eD4, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eD5]
The gaming machine described in the feature eD4,
A first type route (normal route NR) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area,
A second type route (special route SP) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area and which is a route more advantageous to the player than the first type route,
The downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type route,
A gaming machine, wherein a downstream end of the branch passage reaches the second type route.

According to the characteristic eD5, when the game ball does not flow through the second passage, the game ball is distributed to the first type route, and the second advantageous game for the player is given by the distribution of the game ball in the second passage. Sorted to the seed route. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage, thereby increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball is distributed to the second type route and obtain a game result that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature eD5, the result of the game according to the skill can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Feature eE group>
The characteristic eE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eE1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) in which game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main line passage 211) provided in the distribution area for distributing game balls,
A first branch passage (first branch passage 212), which is provided in the distribution area and is used for circulating the game balls, and which is divided from the first passage.
A second branch passage (second branch passage 213) that is provided in the distribution area and is used to circulate the game balls, and that is divided from the first passage.
At a first branch point to the first branch passage in the first passage, a first game ball distribution means (first game ball) for distributing game balls to the first passage and the first branch passage. Distribution mechanism 240),
At a second branch point to the second branch passage in the first passage, a second game ball distribution means (second game ball) for distributing the game balls to the first passage and the second branch passage. And a distribution mechanism 250),
A second passage (second passage 220), which is provided in the circulation area and is for circulating the game balls,
And a third passage (third passage 230) provided in the distribution area for circulating the game balls,
The first game ball distribution means,
When the game ball does not flow through the second passage, the game ball reaching the first branch point is distributed to the first passage,
A means for allocating the game ball reaching the first branch point to the first branch passage upon the distribution of the game ball in the second passage is provided,
The second game ball distribution means,
When the game ball does not flow through the third passage, the game ball reaching the second branch point is distributed to the first passage,
A game machine comprising means for allocating a game ball reaching the second branch point to the second branch path when the game ball is distributed in the third path.

According to the characteristic eE1, when the game ball does not flow through the second passage, the game ball is distributed to the first passage, and when the game ball is distributed through the second passage, the game ball makes the first branch. It is distributed to the passage. Further, when the game ball does not flow through the third passage, the game ball is distributed to the first passage, and when the game ball is distributed in the third passage, the game ball is distributed to the second branch passage. .. Therefore, the player changes the probability of the game ball flowing through the second passage by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, so that the game ball becomes the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability of being distributed can be changed, and by changing the probability of the game balls flowing through the third passage, it is possible to change the probability of distributing the game balls to the second branch passage in the first passage. it can. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball, the probability that the game ball will flow through the first passage, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage, and the first The probability that the game balls are distributed to the second branch passage in the first passage can be individually changed. As a result, according to the feature eE1, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature eE2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic eE1,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage and has a first entrance (first entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter.
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second entrance (second entrance 221) into which a game ball can enter.
The third passage is an entrance to the third passage, and has a third entrance (third entrance 231) into which a game ball can enter.
The second entrance is adjacent to one side in the left-right direction with respect to the first entrance,
The game machine, wherein the third ball entrance is adjacent to the first ball entrance on the other side in the left-right direction.

According to the feature eE2, the second entrance of the second passage is close to the first entrance of the first passage, and the third entrance of the third passage is the first. Is close to the first entrance of the passage. Here, consider a case where the nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance and the second entrance that are adjacent to each other. The probability of the game ball entering the first entrance of the first passage changes depending on the position where the nail is driven. Specifically, by providing the nail on the first ball entrance side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second ball entrance of the second passage increases, the first game ball sorting means causes the game ball to move to the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability of being distributed increases. In summary, when the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first entrance side of the first passage, it contradicts that the probability that a game ball enters the first entrance of the first passage decreases. Thus, in the first passage, the probability that the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage is increased.

On the other hand, if the above nail is provided on the second entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first entrance of the first passage will increase. On the contrary, the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage is low, and thus the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage will be low. Therefore, according to the characteristic eE2, the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage and the probability of the game ball being distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage are in a trade-off relationship. is there.

Here, in the first passage, by distributing the game balls to the branch passages, it is assumed that the probability that the game balls advance to a path advantageous to the player is improved. Even if the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is reduced by providing it on the entrance side of, the probability that the game ball will advance to a path advantageous to the player in the first passage will increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased toward the hall side between the hall side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the side of the second entrance of the second passage to increase the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage, the game in the first passage Since the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player decreases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to the player between the hall side and the player side. Therefore, according to the feature eE2, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

Similarly, consider the case where a nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance and the third entrance that are adjacent to each other. In this case as well, similar to the relationship between the first entrance and the second entrance described above, the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is determined by the driving position of the nail. There is a trade-off relationship between changing and changing the probability that the game ball is distributed to the second branch passage in the first passage. From this, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eE3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic eE1 or the characteristic eE2,
A first type route (normal route NR) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area,
A second type route (special route SP) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area and which is a route more advantageous to the player than the first type route,
The downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type route,
The gaming machine, wherein the downstream end of the first branch passage and the downstream end of the second branch passage are combined to reach the second type path.

According to the characteristic eE3, the distribution of the game balls in the second passage or the distribution of the game balls in the third passage serves as a second type route that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player increases the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage by adjusting the emission intensity of the game ball, and the third of the third passage. By increasing the probability that the game ball will enter the entrance opening of, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the second type route in the first passage will be increased, and a game result that is advantageous for the player can be obtained. it can. Therefore, according to the characteristic eE3, it is possible to give the player a result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic eF group>
The characteristic eF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eF1]
Distribution area where game balls are distributed,
A first passage (main passage 311) provided in the circulation area for circulating the game balls,
A passage for circulating a game ball, which is provided in the circulation area, and is a first branch passage (child branch passage 312) divided from the first passage,
A second branch passage (grand branch line passage 313), which is provided in the distribution area and is used for circulating the game balls, and which is branched from the first branch passage.
At a first branch point to the first branch passage in the first passage, a first game ball distribution means (first game ball distribution means) for distributing a game ball to the first passage and the first branch passage. Mechanism 340),
At a second branch point of the first branch passage to the second branch passage, a second game ball distribution means (second game ball distribution means) for distributing the game balls to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. And a mechanism 350),
A second passage (second passage 320) provided in the circulation area for circulating the game balls,
And a third passage (third passage 330) provided in the circulation area for circulating the game balls,
The first game ball distribution means,
When the game ball does not flow through the second passage, the game ball reaching the first branch point is distributed to the first passage,
A means for allocating the game ball that has reached the first branch point to the first branch passage by the distribution of the game ball in the second passage is provided,
The second game ball distribution means,
When the game ball does not flow through the third passage, the game ball reaching the second branch point is distributed to the first branch passage,
A gaming machine, comprising means for allocating the game ball reaching the second branch point to the second branch passage when the game ball is distributed in the third passage.

According to the characteristic eF1, the game ball flowing through the second passage and the game ball flowing through the third passage trigger the game ball entering the first passage into the second branch passage. It is distributed. Therefore, the player changes the probability that the game ball circulates in the second passage by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, so that the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability of being played can be changed, and by changing the probability of the game ball flowing through the third passage, the probability of the game ball being distributed to the second branch passage in the first branch passage can be changed. Therefore, the player individually changes the probability that the game ball will enter the first passage and the probability that the game ball will be finally distributed to the second branch passage by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball. Can be made As a result, according to the characteristic eF1, it is possible to give the player the result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature eF2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic eF1,
The first passage is an entrance to the first passage, and has a first entrance (first entrance 301) into which a game ball can enter.
The second passage is an entrance to the second passage, and has a second entrance (second entrance 321) into which a game ball can enter.
The third passage is an entrance to the third passage, and has a third entrance (third entrance 331) into which a game ball can enter.
The second entrance is adjacent to one side in the left-right direction with respect to the first entrance,
The game machine, wherein the third ball entrance is adjacent to the first ball entrance on the other side in the left-right direction.

According to the characteristic eF2, the second entrance of the second passage is close to the first entrance of the first passage, and the third entrance of the third passage is the first. Is close to the first entrance of the passage. Here, consider a case where the nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance and the second entrance that are adjacent to each other. The probability of the game ball entering the first entrance of the first passage changes depending on the position where the nail is driven. Specifically, by providing the nail on the first ball entrance side in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the probability that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance. In this case, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage increases, the first game ball distribution means distributes the game ball to the first branch passage in the first passage. The probability of being hit increases. In summary, when the above-mentioned nail is provided on the first entrance side of the first passage, it contradicts that the probability that a game ball enters the first entrance of the first passage decreases. Thus, in the first passage, the probability that the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage is increased.

On the other hand, if the above nail is provided on the second entrance side of the second passage in the left-right direction, the probability that the game ball will enter the first entrance of the first passage will increase. On the contrary, since the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage is low, the probability that the game ball will be distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage will be low. Therefore, according to the characteristic eF2, there is a trade-off relationship between the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage and the probability of the game ball being distributed to the first branch passage in the first passage. ..

Here, in the first passage, by distributing the game balls to the branch passages, it is assumed that the probability that the game balls advance to a path advantageous to the player is improved. Even if the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is reduced by providing it on the entrance side of, the probability that the game ball will advance to a path advantageous to the player in the first passage will increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased toward the hall side between the hall side and the player side. On the other hand, even if the above-mentioned nail is provided on the side of the second entrance of the second passage to increase the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage, the game in the first passage Since the probability that the game ball advances to a path advantageous to the player decreases, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to the player between the hall side and the player side. Therefore, according to the characteristic eF2, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

Similarly, consider the case where a nail is provided above the boundary between the first entrance and the third entrance that are adjacent to each other. In this case as well, similar to the relationship between the first entrance and the second entrance described above, the probability of entering the first entrance of the first passage is determined by the driving position of the nail. There is a trade-off relationship between changing and changing the probability that the game ball is distributed to the second branch passage. From this, it is possible to prevent the profit from being biased to one of the hall side and the player side depending on the nail driving position.

[Feature eF3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic eF1 or the characteristic eF2,
A first type route (normal route NR) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area,
A second type route (special route SP) which is a route of a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area and which is a route more advantageous to the player than the first type route,
The downstream end of the first passage reaches the first type route,
The downstream end of the first-time branch passage reaches the second type route, and the gaming machine is characterized.

According to the characteristic eF3, the distribution of the game ball in the second passage and the distribution of the game ball in the third passage are both used as an opportunity to be distributed to the second type route that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player increases the probability that the game ball will enter the second entrance of the second passage by adjusting the emission intensity of the game ball, and the third of the third passage. By increasing the probability that the game ball enters the ball entrance of, the probability that the game ball is distributed to the second type route is increased, and a game result advantageous for the player can be obtained. Therefore, according to the feature eF3, it is possible to give the player a result of the game according to the skill, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic eG group>
The characteristic eG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

[Feature eG1]
A distribution area (gaming area PA) in which game balls are distributed,
A passage provided in the distribution area, having a first ball entrance (first ball entrance 201) into which a game ball can enter, and the game ball entering the first ball entrance. A first passage (first passage 210) for circulating
A passage provided in the distribution area, having a second entrance (second entrance 221) adjacent to the first entrance, and entering the second entrance. A gaming machine having a second passage (second passage 220) for circulating the game ball,
Based on the game ball entered from the first ball entrance and the game ball entered from the second ball entrance, a game ball guide means capable of guiding the game ball in a direction advantageous to the player. (Game ball distribution device 200),
A game ball storing means for storing a game ball, wherein when a plurality of game balls are stored, the stored game balls are discharged toward the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance. A game machine comprising: a game ball storage means (game ball storage device 500).

According to the feature eG1, the game ball is advantageous to the player based on the game ball entered from the first entrance and the game ball entered from the second entrance by the game ball guide means. Can be guided in any direction. In general, the probability of a game ball entering two adjacent ball entrances in succession is relatively low, but according to the feature eG1, a plurality of game balls can be simultaneously transferred to the first ball entrance by the game ball storing means. Since it is discharged toward the second entrance, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball will enter the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, according to the characteristic eG1, it is possible to increase the interest rate of the game by increasing the probability of being advantageous to the player.

[Feature eG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature eG1,
The game ball storage means (game ball storage device 500),
A game ball receiving container (game ball receiving container 510), which is arranged above the first entrance and the second entrance, and on which a game ball is placed, is the game depending on the weight of the plurality of game balls. A game machine characterized by dropping the game ball placed in the game ball receiving container by tilting the ball receiving container.

According to the feature eG2, the weight of the game ball can be received and the game ball can be discharged from the game ball receiving container without using a driving means such as a motor, so that the configuration of the game machine can be simplified.

[Feature eG3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic eG1 or the characteristic eG2,
Forced release means (forced release device 600) for forcibly releasing the game balls stored in the game ball storage means at predetermined time intervals.
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature eG3, the game ball can be forcibly released from the game ball storage means by repeating every predetermined time. Therefore, when the player tries to finish the game, the game balls are not left stored in the game ball storage means. Therefore, the next player does not start the game from an advantageous state, so that the fairness of the game can be maintained.

<Characteristic fA group>
The feature fA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and its modified examples 1 to 6, 8, and 10 to 12.

[Characteristic fA1]
A game board that constitutes a game area in which game balls are distributed,
A rod-shaped member (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board for changing the flow of the game balls,
When viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side, when viewed from the right side to the left side), the reference portion (first section) provided on the game board is parallel to the rod-shaped member. The third edge 333, the fourth edge 334, the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633, the first mark 951, the second mark 952, and the mark 1051) at the ball entrance 33a of the first starting opening 33,
A gaming machine comprising:

A rod-shaped member such as a nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may have a different inclination from the manufacturer's intended size due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. .. According to the feature fA1, the inclination degree of the reference portion is set in advance so as to match the inclination degree of the rod-shaped member intended by the maker, so that the reference portion is used as a reference when viewed from a predetermined direction. The inclination of the rod-shaped member can be confirmed and corrected so that the rod-shaped member is parallel to the reference portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily restore the deviation of the inclination of the rod-shaped member without requiring much experience in adjusting the rod-shaped member or a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Characteristic fA2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic fA1,
Ball entrance member (first starting opening 33) forming a ball entrance (ball entrance 33a) into which a game ball can enter
Equipped with
The rod-shaped member is a nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided above the entrance port member,
The above-mentioned reference part was provided in the above-mentioned ball entrance member. A game machine characterized by things.

According to the feature fA2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion provided on the entrance port member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Characteristic fA3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic fA2,
The reference part is a lip (third edge 333, fourth edge 334) of the ball entrance (ball entrance 33a).

According to the feature fA3, since the inclination of the nail can be repaired without separately providing a dedicated member as a reference portion on the ball entrance member, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated. You can

[Characteristic fA4]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic fA2,
The above-mentioned reference part is a mark (1st mark 951, 2nd mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the above-mentioned ball entrance member. A game machine characterized by things.

According to the feature fA4, the visibility of the reference portion can be easily increased, and the reliability of repair can be increased.

<Characteristic fB group>
The feature fB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment and its modified examples 1 to 6, 8, and 10 to 12.

[Characteristic fB1]
A gaming machine,
A game board that constitutes a game area in which game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the flow of the game ball,
Defining means for defining an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, which is different from the nail (third lip 333, fourth at the ball inlet 33a of the first starting opening 33). Edge 334, upper surface 633S of first starting opening 633, first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051),
A gaming machine comprising:

The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may have a tilt different from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the characteristic fB1, the defining means defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipping of the gaming machine, so that the angle defined by the defining means is relied upon by relying on the defining means. By checking and correcting the inclination of the nail, the nail can be corrected to the inclination at the time of shipping. Therefore, the misalignment of the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Characteristic fB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature fB1,
A ball inlet member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming a ball inlet (ball inlet 33a) into which a game ball can enter
Equipped with
The game machine characterized in that the defining means is provided in the ball inlet member.

According to the characteristic fB2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the regulation means provided on the ball entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Characteristic fB3]
The gaming machine described in the feature fB2,
The game machine characterized in that the defining means is a lip (third edge 333, fourth edge 334) of the ball entrance (ball entrance 33a).

According to the characteristic fB3, since the inclination of the nail can be repaired without separately providing a dedicated member as the defining means, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated.

[Characteristic fB4]
The gaming machine described in the feature fB2,
A game machine characterized in that the defining means is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) provided on the ball entrance member.

According to the characteristic fB4, it is possible to easily enhance the visibility of the defining means and enhance the certainty of the repair.

<Characteristic fC group>
The characteristic fC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 9 of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic fC1]
A game board that constitutes a game area in which game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the flow of the game ball,
Angle information indicating means (first numerical information Na, second numerical information Nb) indicating information about an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board,
A gaming machine comprising:

The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may have a tilt different from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature fC1, the angle information indicating means shows the information about the angle that matches the inclination degree of the nail intended by the maker, and the inclination of the nail is confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information indicating means. can do. Therefore, the misalignment of the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Characteristic fC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature fC1,
A ball inlet member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming a ball inlet (ball inlet 33a) into which a game ball can enter
Equipped with
The game machine characterized in that the angle information indicating means is provided on the ball entrance member.

According to the feature fC2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information indicating means provided on the entrance port member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Characteristic fC3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic fC2,
As the nail, a first nail provided on one side in a predetermined direction and a second nail provided on the other side in the predetermined direction,
Equipped with
The entrance member,
At least a first part and a second part,
The first part is provided with first angle information indicating means for indicating information on the angle of the first nail,
A game machine characterized in that the second part is provided with a second angle information indicating means for showing information on the angle of the second nail.

According to the feature fC3, since the ball inlet member is composed of at least the first part and the second part, the first part is provided with the first angle information indicating means at the time of manufacturing, and the second part is provided. It is possible to easily provide the second angle information specifying means. In particular, the first angle information specifying means and the second angle information specifying means are oriented in the same direction so that both the first angle information specifying means and the second angle information specifying means can be seen from one side. In this case, since one of the angle information specifying means is inside the ball entrance member, it is difficult to provide the angle information specifying means inside the ball entrance member at the time of manufacturing. Since the mouth member is composed of the first part and the second part, it is easy to manufacture.

<Characteristic fD group>
The feature fD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 5 of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic fD1]
A game board that constitutes a game area in which game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the flow of the game ball,
A mark that defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board (the third edge 333, the fourth edge 334, and the upper surface 633S of the first starting opening 633 in the ball entry opening 33a of the first starting opening 33). , The first mark 951, the second mark 952, the mark 1051),
A gaming machine comprising:

The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may have a tilt different from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature fD1, since the mark defines the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board, the tilt of the nail is confirmed and corrected so that the angle is defined by the mark, depending on the mark. By doing so, the nail can be corrected to the inclination degree intended by the manufacturer. Therefore, the misalignment of the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Characteristic fD2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic fD1,
The game machine, wherein the mark defines the angle of the nail when the game machine is shipped.

According to the characteristic fD2, it is possible to easily return the degree of inclination of the nail to the state when the gaming machine was shipped.

[Characteristic fD3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic fD1 or the characteristic fD2,
A ball inlet member (first starting port 33) provided below the nail and forming a ball inlet (ball inlet 33a) into which a game ball can enter
Equipped with
The game machine, wherein the mark is provided on the ball entrance member.

According to the feature fD3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by using the mark provided on the ball entrance member. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the nail provided above the ball entrance member.

[Characteristic fD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features fD1 to fD3,
The mark is parallel to the nail when viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side), and at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail. Amusement machine.

According to the feature fD4, by confirming whether the nail is parallel to the mark when viewed from the predetermined direction, it is possible to confirm whether or not the degree of inclination of the nail is the size intended by the manufacturer. Moreover, the visibility of the mark is high because at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail when viewed from the predetermined direction. Therefore, according to the feature fD4, the inclination of the nail can be easily identified, and the deviation of the inclination of the nail can be more easily repaired.

<Characteristic fE group>
The feature fE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified examples 10 to 12 of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic fE1]
A game board that constitutes a game area in which game balls are distributed,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the flow of the game ball,
A ball entrance (opening 1400) into which a game ball can enter,
A movable part (movable piece 1411a, 1411b, 1511a, 1511b, 1611a) which is provided at the entrance and can be switched between a closed state and an open state in order to change the ease of entering the entrance. Movable means (electric accessory 1410, 1510) including
A gaming machine comprising:
The movable part is
A gaming machine having a predetermined portion (Sa, Sb, Ha, Hb, Ta) that defines an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board.

The nail that changes the distribution of the game balls may have a tilt different from the size intended by the manufacturer due to an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature fE1, since the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail depends on the predetermined portion so that the angle is defined by the predetermined portion. By confirming and correcting, the nail can be corrected to the inclination degree intended by the manufacturer intended by the manufacturer. Therefore, the misalignment of the tilt of the nail can be easily repaired without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

[Characteristic fE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature fE1,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined portion defines the angle of the nail when the game machine is shipped.

According to the feature fE2, it is possible to easily restore the nail to a tilted state at the time of shipping of the game machine.

[Feature fE3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic fE1 or the characteristic fE2,
In the movable means, when the movable portion is in a closed state, the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle.

According to the feature fE3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired so that the angle is defined by the predetermined portion, by relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the closed state.

[Feature fE4]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic fE1 or the characteristic fE2,
In the movable means, when the movable portion is in an open state, the predetermined portion of the movable portion defines the angle.

According to the feature fE4, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired by relying on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the open state. In particular, a nail close to the position of the movable portion in the open state can be a target for repair, and the nail can be easily repaired.

<Characteristic fF group>
The characteristic fF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 7 of the sixth embodiment.

[Characteristic fF1]
A game board that constitutes a game area in which game balls are distributed,
A reference portion (first mark 1151, second mark 1152) provided on the game board, which is guaranteed to be installed at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board,
A gaming machine comprising:

In gaming machines, incidental objects such as nails are installed on the gaming board. According to the characteristic fF1, it is possible to confirm and correct the inclination of the incidental object by relying on the reference portion which is guaranteed to have a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board. Therefore, the misalignment of the inclination of the accessory can be easily and accurately restored without requiring much experience in adjusting the inclination of the accessory or a special adjusting tool.

[Characteristic fF2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic fF1,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the flow of the game ball.
Equipped with
The above-mentioned angle guaranteed by the reference portion is a right angle.

According to the feature fF2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion that is guaranteed to be installed vertically to the surface of the game board. Although the nail is provided with the inclination intended by the manufacturer, according to the characteristic fF2, the inclination of the nail can be easily adjusted by comparing the orientation of the nail with the reference portion that is guaranteed to be installed vertically. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the inclination of the nail can be easily adjusted.

<Characteristic gA group>
The characteristic gA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gA1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
A second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the entering of the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the second symbol,
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the number of game balls entering the first type ball entering means and the game ball to the second type ball entering means per unit time. Control means for controlling the incoming ball relative ratio, which is a relative ratio to the incoming ball number, in at least three stages,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic gA1, when the game balls are distributed in the distribution mode most advantageous to the player, the number of game balls entered into the first type ball entering device and the second type ball entering device per unit time. Since the relative ratio of the number of game balls into the game is controlled so that it can be changed in at least three stages, it is possible to create a new flow of various games by combining the relative ratio of game balls in the three stages. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Characteristic gA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gA1,
Detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entering means when the predetermined lottery is won,
Equipped with
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is at least two stages of a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. Can be changed,
An auxiliary time, which is a time for the auxiliary means to provide the assistance in response to winning one of the predetermined lottery, is divided into a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. Can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control modes, a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B) can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time,
A game machine characterized by changing the incoming ball relative ratio by switching the control mode.

According to the characteristic gA2, since the control means changes the incoming ball relative ratio by switching between three control modes in which a predetermined lottery winning probability, a lottery execution time, and an auxiliary time are different from each other, the control is relatively simple. It is possible to realize the switching of the incoming ball relative ratio.

<Characteristic gB group>
The feature gB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gB1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
A second kind of ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the entering of the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the second symbol,
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately allocating the reached game balls to the first path (left channel R1) and the second path (right channel R2),
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first detection position which is a predetermined position on the second path,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
When winning in the predetermined lottery, auxiliary means (normal electric accessory 53) for guiding the reached game balls in a predetermined circulation direction,
Equipped with
The first type ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the first path can enter.
The auxiliary means is arranged at a position where the game balls assigned to the second path can reach,
A game machine characterized in that the second type ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball guided in the flow direction by the auxiliary means can enter.

According to the feature gB1, among the game balls that have reached the distribution means, the game balls that have been distributed to the first path enter the first type ball insertion means and the game balls that have been distributed to the second path Of these, the game balls assisted by the assisting means enter the second type ball entering means. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed in such a distribution manner that they reach the distribution means, the probability of entering the game balls into the first-class entry means is changed to a predetermined value by changing the winning probability of a predetermined lottery. It is possible to change the frequency of entering the game balls into the second type ball entering means while keeping it constant within the range.

[Characteristic gB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gB1,
A second detection unit (through gate 35b) for detecting that a second detection position, which is a position different from the position where the distribution unit is provided and the first detection position, is passed,
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the passage of the game ball by the second detection means.
The auxiliary means is
A gaming machine is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed the second detection position can be reached.

According to the characteristic gB2, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position, the game is performed only by the second type ball entering means. You can enter a ball. Therefore, by changing the distribution mode, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means.

<Characteristic gC group>
The characteristic gC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gC1]
First ball entry means (first start port 33a in the seventh embodiment), in which entry of a game ball triggers a change in the symbol,
Second ball entry means (first start port 33b in the seventh embodiment), in which entry of a game ball triggers a change in the symbol,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
A first guide path (left channel R1) for guiding the distributed game balls to the first ball entrance means,
A second guide path (right side flow path R2) for guiding the distributed game balls to the second ball entering means,
Equipped with
That the symbol that fluctuates upon entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means and the symbol that fluctuates upon entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means are the same. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic gC1, even when the game balls are sorted by the sorting means, even if the sorted gaming balls enter the first ball entering means, they enter the second ball entering means. Even when a ball is thrown, the same symbol is changed, so that it is possible to give a surprise to the player who was supposed to have a different symbol for each ball entry means, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

[Characteristic gC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gC1,
A first symbol variation means for varying the first symbol upon the entry of a game ball into the first and second ball entry means and the second ball entry means,
Third ball entering means (second starting port 34), in which the ball entering the game ball triggers the fluctuation of the symbol,
A second symbol variation means for varying the second symbol, which is a symbol different from the first symbol, when the game ball has entered the third symbol means,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature gC2, the game ball has a third ball entering means that triggers the second symbol to fluctuate, so that in addition to the player's expectation regarding the fluctuation of the first symbol, , It is possible to give an expectation about the variation of the second symbol. Further, regarding the role of the distribution means, it is possible for the player to make various guesses, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature gC3]
A gaming machine described in feature gC2,
Auxiliary means arranged on the path through which the game balls flow from the distribution means to the second ball entering means and assisting the game balls flowing on the path to enter the third ball entering means. A game machine characterized by comprising (ordinary electric accessory 53).

According to the characteristic gC3, since the auxiliary means for assisting in entering the third ball entering means is provided on the path along which the game ball flows to the second ball entering means, the game balls distributed by the distributing means. However, even if it is distributed to either the first guide route or the second guide route, it becomes a trigger to change the same symbol (first symbol), and the game balls assigned to the second guide route are assisted by the auxiliary means. There may be a case that the second symbol is changed, and the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed depending on the operation pattern of the auxiliary means.

[Characteristic gC4]
The gaming machine described in the feature gC3,
A detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second guide path,
The auxiliary means is
When the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball flowing on the route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means enters the third ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by helping things.

According to the characteristic gC4, the auxiliary means is triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, and the game ball flowing on the route through which the game ball flows from the sorting means to the second ball entering means is the third game ball. Since it assists the player to enter the ball entering means, it urges the player to circulate the game ball in the second guide path, and when the game ball has passed a predetermined position, the player has an expectation. Can be given. In addition, by encouraging the player to distribute the game ball to the second guide route, the player can be concentrated on the game.

[Characteristic gC5]
A gaming machine described in feature gC4,
The lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, it assists the game ball circulating on the route from the distribution means to the second ball entering means to enter the third ball entering means. And the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic gC5, when the auxiliary means wins the predetermined lottery executed when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, the auxiliary means moves on the route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means. Since the circulating game ball assists in entering the third ball entering means, by controlling the winning probability in a predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol. You can

[Characteristic gC6]
A gaming machine described in feature gC4 or feature gC5,
When the detection means for detecting the passage of a predetermined position on the second guide route is the first detection means (through gate 35a),
A second detection means (through gate 35b) different from the first detection means for detecting passage of a specific position different from the position on the route distributed by the distribution means,
The auxiliary means is
Upon the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means, the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means is assisted in entering the third ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature gC6, the assisting means is triggered by the second detecting means detecting the passage of the game ball, and the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detecting means enters the third ball entering means. Since assisting the ball, it is possible to enter the game ball into the third ball entering means via the second detecting means without passing through the sorting means. As a result, it is possible to create a game state in which the game ball can be entered only in the third ball entering means with a high probability.

[Feature gC7]
The gaming machine described in the feature gC6,
The lottery execution means,
The second lottery means executes the predetermined lottery when the passage of the game ball is detected,
The auxiliary means is
A gaming machine, which assists a game ball, the passage of which is detected by the second detecting means, to enter the third ball entering means when the predetermined lottery is won.

According to the feature gC7, when the auxiliary means wins the predetermined lottery executed when the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the second detecting means detects the passage. Since the game ball assists the player to enter the third ball entering means, the game ball is allowed to enter the third ball entering means not through the sorting means but through the second detecting means. Is possible. Therefore, when the winning probability of the predetermined lottery is lowered and then the game balls are distributed so that the player reaches the sorting means, the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are provided with a game. Since the ball enters, and the game ball is unlikely to enter the third ball entering means, it is possible to change only the first symbol with a high probability. Further, when the winning probability of the predetermined lottery is increased and the game balls are distributed so that the player reaches the sorting means, the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means, and A game ball enters the third ball entering means, and the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed. Furthermore, when the winning probability of the predetermined lottery is increased and the player distributes the game ball so that the second detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball reaches the allocating means. The probability is low, and since the game ball has a high probability of entering the third entering means via the second detecting means and the auxiliary means, it is possible to change only the second symbol with a high probability. Therefore, at least three states: a gaming state in which only the first symbol changes with a high probability, a gaming state in which the first symbol and the second symbol change, and a gaming state in which only the second symbol changes with a high probability. Can be created. As a result, it is possible to create a new game nature by variously combining the three game states in which the changing ratios of the two symbols are different.

[Characteristic gC8]
The gaming machine described in the feature gC6,
A control means for controlling the gaming machine,
The control means is capable of executing a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B). ,
In the first control mode,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball, the passage of which is detected by the first detecting means, to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the assisting means,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball, the passage of which is detected by the second detecting means, to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the assisting means,
In the second control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passage is detected by the first detecting means to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the assisting means.
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball, the passage of which is detected by the second detecting means, to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the assisting means,
In the third control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passage is detected by the first detecting means to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the assisting means.
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detecting means can enter or is easy to enter the third entering means by the assistance of the assisting means.

According to the feature gC8, the control means can execute three control modes having different difficulty levels (difficulty/ease) of entering the game ball into the third ball entering means. Switching can be used to create a new variety of game flows.

[Characteristic gC9]
A gaming machine described in gC8,
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (the variation time of the electric role open lottery) is the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time. It can be changed in at least two stages with time,
An auxiliary time, which is a time for the auxiliary means to provide the assistance in response to winning one of the predetermined lottery, is divided into a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. Can be changed in at least two stages,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The gaming machine, wherein the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to the feature gC9, by controlling the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time, the difficulty level (difficulty/easiness of entering the game ball into the third ball entering means) is controlled. 3) different from each other can be executed, it is possible to realize the creation of various new game flows using the switching of the control modes by relatively easy control.

<Characteristic gD group>
The characteristic gD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gD1]
Predetermined ball entry means (second start port 34 in the seventh embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a specific position,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the entry means when the predetermined lottery is won,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game machine is characterized in that the detection means is arranged on one of the plurality of paths (right side flow path R2).

According to the characteristic gD1, the detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball, which is a trigger for executing the predetermined lottery as to whether or not the assisting means assists the game ball to enter the ball entering means, by the sorting means. Since it is arranged on one of the plurality of routes to be distributed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of distribution of the game balls by the distribution means.

[Characteristic gD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gD1,
If the game ball distributed to the one path by the distribution means is not assisted by the auxiliary means, the first ball entrance means (first starting opening 33b) arranged at a position where the game ball can be entered. Prepare,
The game ball entering the game ball when assisted by the assisting device is a second ball entering device (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entering device. A gaming machine.

According to the characteristic gD2, since the game ball distributed to one path by the distribution means, the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball can be entered when it is not assisted by the assisting means, In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the mode of distribution of the game balls by the distribution means, when the game balls are distributed to one route, the game balls enter the first entrance means, or It is possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not he or she will enter the second admission means by the assistance of the assisting means, and to give at least two levels of expectation about the return of the gaming ball that has reached the sorting means. be able to.

[Characteristic gD3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gD1 or the characteristic gD2,
Third ball entering means (first starting opening 33a) arranged at a position where a game ball distributed to a path (left side flow path R1) different from the one path by the distribution means can enter.
A first symbol variation means for varying the first symbol upon the entry of a game ball into the first and third ball entry means and the third ball entry means,
Second symbol changing means for changing the second symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic gD3, even if the game balls are sorted by the sorting means, even if the sorted gaming balls enter the first entering means, they enter the third entering means. Even when it is done, since the first symbol which is the same symbol is changed, different symbols are generally fluctuated by the entry of the game ball for each of the previous ball entry means sorted by the sorting means. It is possible to give a surprise to a player who has assumed that the game machine has a different structure, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gE group>
[Feature gE1]
First distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately allocating the reached game balls to the first path (left channel R1 in the seventh embodiment) and the second path (right channel R2),
Second distribution means (normal electric accessory 53) for distributing the game balls circulating through the second path into a third path and a fourth path,
First-class ball entry means (first starting opening), where entry of a game ball is a trigger for fluctuation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting port), in which the ball entering the game ball triggers the fluctuation of the second symbol,
Equipped with
The first type ball entering means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed through the first path and the third path can enter.
The second type ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed through the fourth path can enter.
The game machine characterized in that the second distribution means controls the probability of distributing the game balls to the fourth path so as to be changeable.

According to the feature gE1, since the probability of distributing the game ball to the fourth route by the second distributing means is two, and the second distributing means is changeable, the game reached by the first distributing means. Even when the balls are alternately distributed to the first path and the second path, the second distribution means changes the probability of distributing the game balls to the fourth path, and the first symbol The changing ratio with the second symbol can be changed. For example, when the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game balls to the fourth path is set to be low, the game balls distributed to the first path by the first distribution means are the first-class ball entering means. Enter the ball and change the first symbol. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second path are distributed to the third path with a high probability by the second distribution means to be distributed to the first type ball distribution means, and the first symbol can be changed. .. That is, it is possible to change the first symbol by causing the game ball that has reached the first sorting means to enter the first type entering means with a high probability. Further, when the second distribution means sets a high probability of distributing the game balls to the fourth path, the game balls distributed to the first path by the first distribution means are the first type ball entering means. Enter the ball and change the first symbol. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second route are distributed to the fourth route with a high probability by the second distribution means and are entered into the second type ball entering means, so that the second symbol can be changed. .. In this way, the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed by changing the probability that the second distributing means distributes the game balls to the fourth route.

[Feature gE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gE1,
The second distribution means (ordinary electric auditors object 53) passes through the first distribution means in a mode (open state) in which the game balls circulating in the second path are distributed to the fourth path. A game machine characterized by comprising guide means for guiding a game ball that circulates to the second type ball entering means without doing so.

According to the feature gE2, in a mode in which the game balls circulating in the second route are distributed to the fourth route, the guide for guiding the game balls circulating without passing through the first distributing device to the second type ball entering device. Means are provided. Therefore, by distributing the game ball in a distribution mode that allows it to reach the second distribution means, which is a distribution mode to the fourth path, without passing through the first distribution means, the game ball enters the second type ball. The probability of entering the means can be increased, and the changing ratio of the second symbol can be increased as the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature gE3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic gE1 or the characteristic gE2,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position on the second path,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
Equipped with
The second distribution means determines, based on the result of the predetermined lottery, to which of the third path and the fourth path the game balls flowing through the second path are allocated. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the characteristic gE3, the second distribution means determines whether to distribute the game ball circulating through the second route to the third route or the fourth route, based on the result of the predetermined lottery. Since the decision is made, the player cannot recognize in advance which of the third route and the fourth route the gaming balls flowing through the second route are distributed to. Therefore, the player is inferred as to the result of the predetermined lottery and whether the game ball flowing through the second route is to be distributed to the third route or the fourth route, and the expectation. Can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic gF group>
[Characteristic gF1]
First ball entering means (second starting port 34 in the seventh embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
Detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first entry means when the predetermined lottery is won,
Control means for controlling the gaming machine,
Equipped with
The control means is
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (the variation time of the electric role open lottery) is the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time. It can be changed in at least two stages with time,
An auxiliary time, which is a time for the auxiliary means to provide the assistance in response to winning one of the predetermined lottery, is divided into a first assistance time and a second assistance time longer than the first assistance time. Can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control modes, a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B) can be executed,
The first control mode is
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The second control mode is
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time,
The third control mode is
The gaming machine, wherein the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

According to the feature gF1, the control means can switch among three control modes having different winning probabilities of a predetermined lottery, lottery execution time, and auxiliary time, so that a new switching mode can be used. Various game flows can be created.

[Characteristic gF2]
A gaming machine described in the feature gF1,
A second ball entering means (first starting opening) different from the first ball entering means, which is a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter.
First distribution means for alternately allocating the arrived game balls to the first path (left channel R1) and the second path (right channel R2),
Equipped with
The second ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing through the first path and the second path can enter.
The detection means detects that a game ball has passed the predetermined position on the second path,
The game machine characterized in that the auxiliary means is arranged on a path through which a game ball flows from the second path to the second ball entering means.

According to the feature gF2, although the distribution means alternately distributes the game balls to the first path and the second path, the second ball entering means selects the first path and the second path. Since the circulated game balls are arranged at positions where they can enter the ball, it is possible to make the player make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the sorting means and to give a surprise. Further, since the assisting means assists the game balls distributed to the second route to enter the first ball entering means, the game balls distributed to the second route by the distributing means are assisted by the assisting means. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not it is assisted, and to give a sense of expectation.

<Characteristic gG group>
The feature gG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gG1]
Ball entry means (second starting port 34 in the seventh embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting passage through a first detection position which is a position on one of the plurality of paths;
Second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passage through a second detection position that is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position;
A lottery executing means for executing a predetermined lottery (electricity open lottery),
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the entering of the game ball into the ball entering means,
Equipped with
The lottery execution means,
The predetermined lottery is executed when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means,
The second lottery means executes the predetermined lottery when the passage of the game ball is detected,
A lottery mode in which the lottery execution time is Tp from the time when the first detection means or the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball to the time when the predetermined lottery is started and the lottery result is output. Prepare,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, assisting the game ball that has passed the first detection position to enter the ball entering means,
When the player wins the predetermined lottery, the game ball that has passed the second detection position is assisted in entering the ball entering means.
In the case of winning the predetermined lottery, the time from the time when the lottery result is output to the time when the assisting means becomes the assistable state is Tm,
In the case of performing the assistance in response to winning the one predetermined lottery, the assistance mode in which the assistance time is the first assistance time Ts1 and the assistance time is the first assistance time An auxiliary mode in which the second auxiliary time Ts2 is longer than Ts1,
Tr1 is the time from the time when the game ball passes the first detection position to the time when it reaches the auxiliary means, and the time from the time when the game ball passes the second detection position to the time when it reaches the auxiliary means. Tr2,
The time from when the game ball that has passed the first detection position reaches the auxiliary means to when it enters the ball entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means is Tf1, and the game ball that has passed the second detection position is When the time from when the ball reaches the assisting means to when the ball enters the ball entering means with the assistance of the assisting means is Tf2,
Tp+Tm≦Tr1
Tp+Tm≦Tr2
Tr1+Tf1≦Tp+Tm+Ts1<Tr2+Tf2≦Tp+Tm+Ts2
A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature gG1, the assisting means includes an assisting mode in which the assisting time is the first assisting time Ts1, and an assisting mode in which the assisting time is the second assisting time Ts2. In the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, when the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, that is, the game ball is distributed so as to reach the sorting means. In such a case, the game ball can be inserted into the ball entering means with the assistance of the assisting means, but if the game ball is circulated so that the game ball passes through the second detection position, the game ball enters the ball entering means. Since the assistance by the assisting means ends before entering the ball, the game ball cannot enter the ball entering means. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of the game balls that is advantageous to the player, in the case of the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, the first detection position is passed (the distribution means is reached. As described above, the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed is a distribution mode of the game balls that is more advantageous to the player than the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position.

On the other hand, in the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, when the game ball is circulated so that the first detection position passes, and when the game ball passes the second detection position. In any of the cases where the game balls are distributed to the game ball, the game ball can be inserted into the ball entering means with the assistance of the assisting means. However, when circulating the first detection position so that the game sphere passes, the game sphere passes through the allocating means, so only the game sphere that has been distributed to one path among the game spheres that have reached the allocating means. It cannot pass the first detection position. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls that pass through the first detection position and enter the ball entering means with respect to the number of game balls that reach the distributing means when the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distributing means. Is a game ball that enters the ball-entering means after passing through the second detection position with respect to the number of game balls that have reached the second detection position when the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the second detection position. It becomes lower than the ratio of the number. Therefore, in consideration of the distribution mode of the game balls that is advantageous to the player, in the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position. This is a distribution mode of the game balls that is more advantageous to the player than a distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position (to reach the sorting means).

Therefore, by switching the auxiliary mode by the auxiliary means, it is possible to change the distribution mode of the game ball, which is advantageous to the player, in the distribution mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means. It is possible to create a new game property and further allow the player to actively participate in the operation of changing the distribution mode of the game balls, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic gH group>
The characteristic gH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gH1]
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 120) which sorts the reached game balls alternately into the first guide route (the left channel R1 in the modified example 5 of the seventh embodiment) and the second guide route (the right channel R2). )When,
A ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter (first starting opening 33a in Modification 5 of the seventh embodiment),
Equipped with
The first guide route and the second guide route both guide a game ball to the same ball-in portion.

According to the feature gH1, even though the game balls are distributed by the distribution means, the game balls distributed to the first guide route and the game balls distributed to the second guide route are the same. Since the player is guided to the ball entrance portion, it is possible to make the player make various guesses as to the purpose of installing the sorting means, and to give a surprise.

[Characteristic gH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gH1,
In the case where the ball entering portion guided by both the first guide route and the second guide route is the first ball entering portion, the game ball is a ball entering portion into which the game ball can enter. A second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) different from the first ball entry portion;
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a first detection position which is a predetermined position on the second guide route,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) arranged on the path through which the game ball flows from the second guide path to the first ball entrance portion, and when the predetermined lottery is won, Auxiliary means for assisting the game ball reaching the auxiliary means to enter the second ball entering portion,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature gH2, a part of the game ball distributed to the second guide route can be inserted into the second ball entering portion. Therefore, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first ball entering part and the number of game balls entering the second ball entering part is controlled. be able to.

[Characteristic gH3]
A gaming machine described in the feature gH2,
A second detection unit (through gate 35b) for detecting that a second detection position, which is a position different from the position where the distribution unit is provided and the first detection position, is passed,
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery triggered by the second detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means is
A gaming machine is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed the second detection position can be reached.

According to the feature gH3, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the sorting means is provided and the first detection position, the game is only performed in the second ball entry portion. You can enter a ball.

<Characteristic gI group>
The characteristic gI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gI1]
Distribution area where game balls are distributed,
Distribution path changing means (normal electric accessory 53 in modification 3 of the seventh embodiment) arranged in the distribution area and changing a distribution path through which the game balls can flow;
Equipped with
The distribution route changing means,
In the first state (closed state), the first distribution path (path from the right flow path R2 to the second starting port 34) through which the game ball can flow is blocked, and the game ball can flow. 2, the distribution route (the route from the wall portion W to the second starting port 34) is divided,
In the second state (open state), the shielding of the first distribution path is released, and the second distribution path is formed.

According to the feature gI1, the distribution route changing means can change the two distribution routes by shifting from the first state to the second state. That is, the distribution route changing means can change the states of the two types of distribution routes at the same time with one state change. As a result, in both cases of distributing the game sphere in the first distribution path and distributing the game sphere in the second distribution path, the game using the distribution path changing means can be executed. ..

[Feature gI2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gI1,
Equipped with a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery),
The distribution route changing means,
A gaming machine, characterized in that, when the predetermined lottery is won, the first state is shifted to the second state.

According to the characteristic gI2, when the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state when the predetermined lottery is won, the player is given an expectation about the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. can do. Further, by controlling the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the probability and frequency of changing the first distribution route and the second distribution route.

[Characteristic gI3]
A gaming machine described in the feature gI2,
A first detection unit (through gate) that detects that the game ball has passed a first position on the first distribution route that is upstream of the distribution route changing unit with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball. 35a),
Second detecting means (through gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed a second position on the second distribution path and upstream of the distribution path changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball. 35b) and
The lottery execution means,
The predetermined lottery is executed when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means,
A gaming machine, wherein the second lottery means executes the predetermined lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball.

According to the characteristic gI3, a predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the first position or the second position, so that it is possible to create various game characteristics by utilizing the property. For example, depending on the state of the game, it is controlled so that it is advantageous for the player to pass the game ball to the first position, or the player who passes the game ball to the second position is the player. By controlling so as to be advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a game property that encourages the player to change the distribution mode of the game balls, and to actively participate in the game.

[Feature gI4]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gI3,
The distribution route changing means,
When the player wins the predetermined lottery, the game ball that has passed through the first position and is the trigger of the winning is the first distribution in which the shielding is released by the distribution route changing unit. A gaming machine characterized by shifting from the first state to the second state at a timing when the route can be distributed.

According to the feature gI4, the game ball is passed to the first position, the predetermined lottery is won, the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, and the shielding of the first distribution route is released. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress an event in which the game ball cannot be distributed to the first distribution path during the period when the hiding is released and the player's expectation is lowered.

[Characteristic gI5]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gI3 or the characteristic gI4,
The distribution route changing means,
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the second position and is the trigger for the winning is the second distribution route formed by the distribution route changing means. A gaming machine characterized by shifting from the first state to the second state at a timing when distribution is possible.

According to the characteristic gI5, the game ball is passed to the second position and the predetermined lottery is won, and the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state to form the second distribution route. Despite this, it is possible to suppress an event in which the game ball cannot be distributed to the second distribution path during the period when the second distribution path is formed and the player's expectation is lowered.

[Feature gI6]
The gaming machine described in the features gI1 to gI5,
Arranged at a specific position in the distribution area, and provided with a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter,
The specific position is
On the first distribution route, on the downstream side of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls, and on the second distribution route, from the distribution route changing means. Is a position on the downstream side with respect to the circulation direction of the game balls.

According to the feature gI6, it is on the first distribution route and is on the downstream side of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball, and on the second distribution route, the distribution route is changed. Since the ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the means in the flow direction of the game ball, when the distribution path changing means changes from the first state to the second state, the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is a high possibility that a player will enter the ball, which can increase the player's expectation.

<Characteristics gJ group>
The feature gJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gJ1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting port 33b in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball becomes a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
A second kind of ball entering means (second starting port 34), which serves as a trigger for the variation of the second symbol in which the game ball entering is different from the first symbol,
A distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for distributing the arrived game balls, and when the game balls circulating at a predetermined position enter the first type ball entering means when the game balls do not operate, and when the game balls operate, , Distribution means for causing game balls circulating in the predetermined position to enter the second type ball entering means,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature gJ1, since the game balls that have arrived at the sorting means are sorted according to whether or not the sorting means operates, the entering means to enter the ball are different, and the varying symbols are different, so to the player , It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the distribution means operates.

[Characteristic gJ2]
A gaming machine described in the feature gJ1,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that the game ball has passed a specific position,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role open lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that it operates when the predetermined lottery is won.

According to the feature gJ2, the sorting means operates when a predetermined lottery is won. Therefore, by controlling the winning probability in the predetermined lottery, it is possible to control the frequency at which the sorting means operates. Yes, as a result, it is possible to control the rate of changing the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Characteristic gJ3]
The gaming machine described in the feature gJ2,
The specific position is a position at which a game ball that has passed through the specific position can reach the sorting means.

According to the feature gJ3, the specific position is a position at which the game ball that has passed through the specific position can reach the distribution unit, so that the specific position is specified for the player who has a sense of expectation in the operation of the distribution unit. It can also be noted whether or not the game ball passes through the position. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes through a specific position, and then pay attention to how the game ball that has passed through the specific position is distributed by the distribution means. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner.

<Characteristics gK group>
The characteristic gK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gK1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment), which is a trigger for the variation of the second symbol, which is different from the first symbol, in entering the game ball,
Control means for controlling the gaming state,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls continuously enter the first-class entrance means is defined as the first-class entrance means continuous entrance probability, and the game balls Is defined as the alternating ball-entering probability, the probability of alternately entering the first-class ball entering means and the second-class ball entering means, and the probability that the game ball will enter the second-class ball entering means in succession. Seed entry means If the probability of continuous entry is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability is higher than the alternate entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability,
A second game state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability.
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability is higher than the first type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability and the alternating ball entering probability,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for controlling the switchable state.

According to the characteristic gK1, the control means controls the three game states of the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state so as to be switchable, so that by combining the three game states, It is possible to create a new flow of various games and improve the interest of the games.

[Characteristic gK2]
A gaming machine described in the feature gK1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Production execution means for executing production,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the second game state (high frequency support mode A) satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition Specific when the game times executed after the game times are executed in the second game state (when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first starting mouth game times of the high frequency support mode A is the jackpot A) A gaming machine comprising means for executing the effect of.

According to the characteristic gK2, when the game time executed after the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition in the second game state is executed in the second game state, a specific effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the second gaming state continues through a specific effect. Further, in the second gaming state, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are executed, and the player recognizes that the special information corresponding to the executed game time satisfies the predetermined condition. In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the particular effect is executed, and it is possible to maintain the player's concentration on the game.

[Characteristic gK3]
The gaming machine described in the feature gK2,
A game machine characterized in that the specific effect is an effect that suggests that the current game state is maintained.

According to the characteristic gK3, when the game time executed after the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition in the second game state is executed in the second game state, the current game state is Since the production that suggests to be maintained is executed, it is possible to provoke the player with a sense of relief and motivation to shift to a more advantageous gaming state, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

[Characteristic gK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features gK1 to gK3,
The second game state (high frequency support mode A) is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (low frequency support mode),
The third game state (high-frequency support mode B) is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state (high-frequency support mode A),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature gK4, the three game states having different degrees of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, so that the player's expectation can be changed by switching the game state. The interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic gL group>
The characteristic gL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gL1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment), which is a trigger for the variation of the second symbol, which is different from the first symbol, in entering the game ball,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Variation time determining means for determining a variation time which is the time from the start to the end of one variation of each symbol of the first symbol and the second symbol in the game time,
Control means for controlling the gaming state,
A gaming machine comprising:
The fluctuation time determining means,
A game state in which the probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball will continuously enter the same ball entering means. In (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means satisfies the predetermined condition, the value of the variation time of the game time corresponding to the special information ( The value of the variation time of the first starting opening game times in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit), and the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means is the predetermined value. When the condition of is not satisfied, the value of the fluctuation time of the game times corresponding to the special information (the value of the fluctuation time of the first starting mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out) is the same or A gaming machine comprising means for determining approximately the same value.

According to the feature gL1, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately will be greater than the probability that the game ball will enter the same ball entering means in succession. In a high gaming state, the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means corresponds to the special information between the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied and the case where the special information is not satisfied. Since the variation times of the game times are the same or substantially the same, it is possible to avoid paying attention to the result of the determination as to whether the special information satisfies or does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, for example, the probability that the game balls will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game balls will enter the same ball entering means in succession. In the gaming state, when the game time executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means is a game time that is disadvantageous to the player, the determination of the game time is made. Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's sense of expectation during the period in which the game cycle is executed.

[Feature gL2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gL1,
Fluctuating time random number acquisition means for acquiring a fluctuating time random number used in determining the fluctuating time,
A value of each fluctuation time random number and fluctuation time information, which is information capable of specifying the temporal length of fluctuation time, and a fluctuation time table recorded correspondingly,
Equipped with
The fluctuation time determining means,
A game state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is lower than the probability that a game ball will continuously enter the same ball entering means. In the alternate entry low probability game state (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode B),
In the case of determining the variation time in the game time executed due to the entry of the game ball into the type 1 ball entering means, when the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, When not satisfying, use different fluctuation time table,
A game state in which the probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball will continuously enter the same ball entering means. In the high-probability game state (high-frequency support mode A), which is alternate entry ball,
If the special information corresponding to the game time fulfills the predetermined condition when determining the variation time in the game time executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized in that the same variable time table is used in the case of not satisfying and.

According to the characteristic gL2, in the alternating-progress ball low-probability game state, in the case of determining the variation time in the game times executed due to the entry of the game balls into the type 1 ball entering means, in the game times concerned. When the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition and does not satisfy it, different variable time tables are used, and in the alternate entry high probability game state, due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means. When determining the variation time in the game time to be executed, the same variation time table is used depending on whether the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition or not. That is, in the alternate-entering-ball low-probability game state, the change time is changed between the case where the special information corresponding to the first-class entering means satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined information In the high-probability-of-entering game state, there is no change in the variation time between the case where the special information corresponding to the first-class entry means meets or does not meet the predetermined condition. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the special information corresponding to the first-class ball entering means satisfies or does not satisfy the predetermined condition between the alternating-progress ball low-probability game state and the alternating-progress ball high-probability game state. It is possible to make a difference in the degree to which the player pays attention to the result of. In the alternating entry low probability game state, the variation time is set between the case where the special information corresponding to the first-class entry means satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined information. Can be noticed about. In the alternate-incidence high-probability game state, there is no change in the variable time between the case where the special information corresponding to the first-class ball entering means satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined information. You can keep the results from paying attention. Therefore, it is possible to change the degree of attention of the player regarding the game times resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means, between the alternate entry low probability game state and the alternate entry high probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the game and a decrease in expectation.

Further, in the alternating-progress ball high-probability game state, when determining the variable time in the game times executed due to the entry of the game balls into the first-class ball entering means, the special time corresponding to the game times is determined. Since the same variable time table is used when the information satisfies the predetermined condition and when it does not satisfy the predetermined condition, different variable time tables are used depending on whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition or not. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the fluctuation time table and simplify the processing when determining the fluctuation time, as compared with the case where the fluctuation time is determined.

[Feature gL3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gL1 or the characteristic gL2,
The game ball enters the second type ball entering means rather than the game time (first starting mouth game time) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that it is more advantageous for a player to execute a game time (second starting mouth game time) due to the fact.

According to the feature gL3, the game ball enters the second type ball entering means rather than the game times are executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. It is configured that it is advantageous for the player that the game times are executed. Therefore, the player expects the game times due to the game balls entering the second type ball entering means, and the game times due to the game balls entering the first type ball entering means. do not do. However, in the alternating probability low probability game state, since the variation time of the game times due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means is changed according to the result of the determination, the first type It is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the determination result of the game times caused by the game ball entering the ball entering means. On the other hand, in the alternate entry high probability game state, the variation time of the game times due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means does not change according to the result of the determination. It is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the determination result of the game times due to the game ball entering the seed ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to lower the degree of attention of the determination result of the game times which is not advantageous to the player and raise the degree of attention of the determination result of the game times which is advantageous to the player, in the high alternating probability high probability game state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's expectation.

[Features gL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features gL1 to gL3,
The control means is
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls continuously enter the first-class entrance means is defined as the first-class entrance means continuous entrance probability, and the game balls Is defined as the alternating ball-entering probability, the probability of alternately entering the first-class ball entering means and the second-class ball entering means, and the probability that the game ball will enter the second-class ball entering means in succession. Seed entry means If the probability of continuous entry is
The control means is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability is higher than the alternate entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability,
A second game state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability.
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability is higher than the first type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability and the alternating ball entering probability,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for controlling the switchable state.

According to the feature gL4, the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable, so that by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create a new flow of various games and improve the interest of the games.

<Characteristics gM group>
The characteristic gM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gM1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment), which is a trigger for the variation of the second symbol, which is different from the first symbol, in entering the game ball,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time which is a time from the start to the end of one variation of each symbol of the first symbol and the second symbol,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game ball enters the second type ball entering means rather than the game time (first starting mouth game time) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. It is advantageous for the player to execute the game time (second starting mouth game time) due to that,
The fluctuation time determining means,
A game state in which the probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball will continuously enter the same ball entering means. In (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the average of the fluctuation times of the game times corresponding to the special information. The value (the average value of the fluctuation time of the first starting mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out) is obtained due to the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entering means. When the value does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the average value of the variation time of the game times corresponding to the special information (the average value of the variation time of the second starting mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out) A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time is determined so as to be shorter.

In the gaming state, the probability that the game balls enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game balls will enter the same ball entering means in succession. , The game ball executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means (hereinafter, also referred to as the first type game time), the game ball entering the second type ball entering means It is more likely that the player will remember that it is more disadvantageous than the game times (also referred to as the second type game times) executed due to that, and the player's expectation during the execution of the first type game times. May be reduced.

According to the feature gM1, the probability that the game balls will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately will be greater than the probability that the game balls will enter the same ball entering means in succession. In the high gaming state, the average value of the variation time of the game type when the special information corresponding to the first type game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition is the special information corresponding to the second type game time. Since the variation time is determined so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation time of the game times when the conditions are not satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered during the period in which the first type game times are executed. can do. Then, the degree of attention of the determination result of the first type game times, which is not advantageous to the player, is lowered relative to the degree of attention of the determination result of the second type game times, which is advantageous to the player, and conversely, to the player. The attention level of the determination result of the advantageous second type game time can be increased relatively to the attention level of the determination result of the first type game time, which is not advantageous to the player.

[Feature gM2]
A gaming machine described in the feature gM1,
The fluctuation time determining means,
The probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball will enter the same ball entering station continuously. In the state (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class entry means satisfies the predetermined condition, the average value of the fluctuation times of the game times corresponding to the special information. (The average value of the variation time of the first start mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit) is the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entering means. Shorter than the average value of the variation time of the game times corresponding to the special information (the average value of the variation time of the second starting mouth game times when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the variation time is determined so that.

According to the feature gM2, the probability that the game balls will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately will be greater than the probability that the game balls will successively enter the same ball entering means. In a high gaming state, when the special information corresponding to the first type game times satisfies a predetermined condition, the average value of the variation time of the game times is the special information corresponding to the second type game times is the predetermined condition. Since the variation time is determined so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation time of the game times when the above conditions are satisfied, it is further suppressed that the player's expectation is lowered during the period in which the first type game times are executed. can do. Then, the attention level of the determination result of the first type game time, which is not advantageous to the player, is lowered further relative to the attention level of the determination result of the second type game time, which is advantageous to the player, and conversely, The degree of attention of the determination result of the second type game times, which is advantageous to the player, can be further increased relative to the degree of attention of the determination result of the first type game times, which is not advantageous to the player.

[Feature gM3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gM1 or the characteristic gM2,
Equipped with control means for controlling the gaming state,
The control means is
The game state,
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is lower than the probability that the game ball will continuously enter the same ball entering means. (Low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode B),
A game state in which the probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game ball will enter the same ball entering means in succession (High frequency support mode A)
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a state transfer means for controlling transfer to.

In the gaming state, the probability that the game balls enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is higher than the probability that the game balls will enter the same ball entering means successively, It is a state that often recalls that the first type game times are relatively disadvantageous to the second type game times, and the game balls alternate between the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means. In the gaming state in which the probability of entering the ball is lower than the probability of the game ball successively entering the same entering means, the first type game times are relatively disadvantageous to the second type game times. It's hard to remember that.

According to the feature gM3, the probability that the game balls will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately will be greater than the probability that the game balls will enter the same ball entering means in succession. It is possible to shift to a lower gaming state, which means that it is possible to shift to a state in which it is difficult to recall that the first type game times are relatively disadvantageous to the second type game times. It is possible to further suppress the decrease in the feeling of expectation.

<Characteristic gN group>
The characteristic gN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Feature gN1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment), which is a trigger for the variation of the second symbol, which is different from the first symbol, in entering the game ball,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Control means for controlling the gaming state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is greater than the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means in succession. In the high game state (high frequency support mode A),
The effect execution means,
A means for executing a first effect (an effect that an enemy character attacks) in a game time (first starting mouth game time) executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. When,
In the game time (second start mouth game time) executed due to the entry of the game ball into the second type ball entering means, the second effect different from the first effect (on the player side) A game machine characterized by having a means for executing a character's aggressive production).

According to the feature gN1, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means in succession. In a game state higher than the probability, the first effect is executed in the game time executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first-class ball entering means, and the game ball to the second-class ball entering means is played. Since the second effect is executed in the game time executed due to the ball entry, it is easy for the player to recognize which game means the game time is due to the game ball entering the ball. It is possible to assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

[Characteristic gN2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gN1,
The game ball entered the second type ball entering means rather than the game time (first starting mouth game time) being executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. It is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game time (the second start mouth game time) due to that,
The first effect is an effect that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation,
The second effect is an effect that suggests that the player is in an advantageous situation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature gN2, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means in succession. In a game state higher than the probability, it is possible to make the player easily recognize whether the game time being executed is a game time that is advantageous to the player or a game time that is disadvantageous to the player. Can be further assisted in understanding the flow of the game.

[Characteristic gN3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gN1 or the characteristic gN2,
The control means is
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls continuously enter the first-class entrance means is defined as the first-class entrance means continuous entrance probability, and the game balls Is defined as the alternating ball-entering probability, the probability of alternately entering the first-class ball entering means and the second-class ball entering means, and the probability that the game ball will enter the second-class ball entering means in succession. Seed entry means If the probability of continuous entry is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability is higher than the alternate entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability,
A second game state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability.
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability is higher than the first type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability and the alternating ball entering probability,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for controlling the switchable state.

According to the feature gN3, the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable, so by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create a new flow of various games and improve the interest of the games.

[Characteristic gN4]
A gaming machine described in feature gN3,
The second game state (high frequency support mode A) is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (low frequency support mode),
The third game state (high-frequency support mode B) is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state (high-frequency support mode A),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature gN4, the three game states having different degrees of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, so that by switching the game state, it is possible to impart intonation to the expectation of the player, The interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic gO group>
The characteristic gO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gO1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment), which is a trigger for the variation of the second symbol, which is different from the first symbol, in entering the game ball,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Control means for controlling the gaming state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
In the case of distributing game balls in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player,
The probability that a game ball will enter the second type ball entering means consecutively, the probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means continuously, and the game ball will be the first type ball entering means. In the gaming state (high frequency support mode B) which is higher than the probability of alternately entering the second type entering means,
The effect execution means,
When the game time (first start mouth game time) is executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entering means, it is possible to shift to a game state that is more disadvantageous than the current game state. A gaming machine characterized by performing a production that suggests that there is a certain nature.

According to the feature gO1, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the second type ball entering means, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the game ball will enter the first type ball In a game state higher than the probability of alternately entering the ball means and the second type ball entering means, when the game times are executed due to the entering of the game ball into the first type ball entering means , In the complicated game state, the game times executed in the complicated game state are advantageous or disadvantageous because the effect suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to a game state less favorable than the current game state is executed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize, and can further assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

[Characteristic gO2]
A gaming machine described in the feature gO1,
The game ball enters the second type ball entering means rather than the game time (first starting mouth game time) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means. A gaming machine characterized by being configured so that it is more advantageous for a player to execute a game time (second starting mouth game time) due to the fact.

According to the characteristic gO2, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the second type ball entering means, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the game ball will enter the first type ball In a game state higher than the probability of alternately entering the ball means and the second type ball entering means, the probability that the game times due to the entering of the game ball into the first type ball entering means will be executed is low. In other words, the probability of being in a disadvantageous state for the player is low. In such a game state, when the game times are executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entering means, there is a possibility that the game state is shifted to a disadvantageous state than the current game state. Since the effect suggesting that there is is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game times to be executed are advantageous or disadvantageous in a complicated game state, and the flow of the player's game It can help further understanding.

[Characteristic gO3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic gO1 or the characteristic gO2,
The control means is
In the case of distributing game balls in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player,
The probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means in succession is the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately and the game ball will be A first game state (low frequency support mode) higher than the probability of continuously entering the second type entering means,
The probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means in succession and the game ball is A second game state (high-frequency support mode A) higher than the probability of continuously entering the second type ball entering means,
The probability that a game ball will enter the second type ball entering means consecutively, the probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means continuously, and the game ball will be the first type ball entering means. With a third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) higher than the probability of alternately entering the second type ball entering means,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for controlling the switchable state.

According to the characteristic gO3, the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable, so by combining the three gaming states, It is possible to create a new flow of various games and improve the interest of the games. In this way, when the game times are executed due to the entry of the game balls into the first type ball entering means while the three game states are switched, whether the game times to be executed is advantageous or disadvantageous. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize, and it is possible to further assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

[Characteristic gO4]
A gaming machine described in feature gO3,
The second game state (high frequency support mode A) is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (low frequency support mode),
The third game state (high-frequency support mode B) is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state (high-frequency support mode A),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature gO4, three game states having different degrees of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, so that the player's expectation can be changed by switching the game state. The interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic gP group>
The characteristic gP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic gP1]
A first type ball entering means (first starting opening in the seventh embodiment) in which the ball entering the game ball serves as a trigger for the variation of the first symbol,
The second kind of ball entering means (second starting opening in the seventh embodiment), which is a trigger for the variation of the second symbol, which is different from the first symbol, in entering the game ball,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Control means for controlling the gaming state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The probability that a game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is greater than the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means in succession. In the high game state (high frequency support mode A),
The effect execution means,
When the game ball enters the first type ball entering means twice in succession, it is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means twice in succession. A game characterized by comprising means for executing a specific effect (continuous effect in the seventh embodiment) in at least one game time of two consecutive game times (first starting mouth game time). Machine.

According to the characteristic gP1, the probability that the game ball will enter the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is that the game ball continuously enters the first type ball entering means. In the game state higher than the probability, when the player continuously enters the first type ball entering means twice, a specific effect is executed, so that the player who recognizes the execution of the specific effect receives the first effect. It is possible to make it possible to recognize that an event with a low probability of entering the seed-entering means twice in succession has occurred, and to provoke the player's curiosity about the occurrence of an event with a low probability of occurring. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Characteristic gP2]
The gaming machine described in the feature gP1,
In the specific effect (continuous effect of the seventh embodiment), the probability that a game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately is that the game ball is the first ball. In the gaming state (high-frequency support mode A), which is higher than the probability of continuously entering the first-class entry means, gaming balls alternate between the first-class entry means and the second-class entry means. A game machine characterized in that it is an effect different from the effect executed in a game time executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entering means when entering the ball.

According to the characteristic gP2, the specific effect is to enter the game ball into the first type ball entering means when the game ball enters the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means alternately. Because the effect is different from the effect that is executed in the game times that is executed, it is possible to make the player further recognize that an event with a low probability has occurred, and an event with a low probability occurs. It is possible to further arouse the player's curiosity about the fact, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature gP3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic gP1 or the characteristic gP2,
The specific effect is a series of effects (continuous effect) that are executed over two consecutive game times executed due to the game balls entering the first type ball entering means twice in succession. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the characteristic gP3, the specific effect is a series of effects that are executed over two consecutive game times executed due to the game balls entering the first type ball entering means twice in succession. Therefore, as the content of the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that has a flow across two game times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player further recognize that it is a special situation with respect to the occurrence of an event having a low probability.

[Characteristic gP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features gP1 to gP3,
The control means is
When the game balls are distributed in the most advantageous distribution mode for the player, the probability that the game balls continuously enter the first-class entrance means is defined as the first-class entrance means continuous entrance probability, and the game balls Is defined as the alternating ball-entering probability, the probability of alternately entering the first-class ball entering means and the second-class ball entering means, and the probability that the game ball will enter the second-class ball entering means in succession. Seed entry means If the probability of continuous entry is
The control means is
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability is higher than the alternate entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability,
A second game state (high-frequency support mode A) in which the alternate ball entry probability is higher than the first type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability and the second type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability.
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability is higher than the first type ball entering means continuous ball entering probability and the alternating ball entering probability,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game state switching means for controlling the switchable state.

According to the feature gP4, the control means controls the three game states of the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state so as to be switchable, so that by combining the three game states, It is possible to create a new flow of various games and improve the interest of the games.

[Characteristic gP5]
A gaming machine described in feature gP4,
The second game state (high frequency support mode A) is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (low frequency support mode),
The third game state (high-frequency support mode B) is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state (high-frequency support mode A),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature gP5, three game states having different degrees of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, so that the player's expectation can be imparted by switching the game state, The interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic hA group>
The characteristic hA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Characteristic hA1]
A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area in which the launched game ball flows down,
A staying means having a staying area (the clune 220 in the eighth embodiment) for staying the game balls flowing down the game area,
Distributing means (non-V winning opening shutter 350), which is arranged on the distribution route of the game balls flowing out from the stay area, and distributes the reached game balls to at least the first direction and the second direction,
A gaming machine comprising:
The distribution means is triggered by a game ball passing through a first position (a position where the first passage detection sensor SP1 and the second passage detection sensor SP2 are provided) which is a predetermined position in the game area, A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching the distribution direction (open state and closed state) of a game ball.

According to the characteristic hA1, the distribution means for distributing the game balls flowing out from the staying means switches the distribution direction by the switching means when the game ball passes through the first position, so that the game balls flow out from the staying means. By allowing the player to pass the game ball to the first position in consideration of the timing, the game ball flowing out from the staying means can be distributed in the distribution direction after being switched by the switching means. That is, the player can control the distribution direction of the game balls by passing the game balls to the first position in consideration of the timing at which the game balls flow out from the staying means. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to intervene in the direction in which the game balls are distributed and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic hA2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hA1,
The dwell time, which is the length of time from when the game ball flows into the stay area (clune 220) to when it flows out, is the first position (second passage) after the game ball is launched from the launching means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is longer than a first position passing time which is a length of time until passing through a position where the detection sensor SP2 is provided).

According to the characteristic hA2, since the staying time is longer than the first position passing time, after the player visually recognizes that the game ball has flown into the staying means and starts to stay, the player flows out the game ball from the staying means. In order to pass the game ball to the first position in consideration of the timing, even if the game ball is fired toward the first position, it flows out from the staying means in the sorting direction after being switched by the switching means. You can sort the game balls. That is, after visually confirming that the game ball has flowed into the staying means and started staying, once the game ball is stopped from being fired and the movement of the game ball staying in the staying means is confirmed, and the game ball is moved to the first position. The timing at which the game ball is fired can be measured, and the player can be given a sense of expectation and tension for a relatively long time regarding the timing at which the game ball is fired. As a comparative example, when the residence time is shorter than the first position passing time, the timing of firing the game ball toward the first position can be estimated once the firing of the game ball is stopped. Instead, it is necessary to fire game balls continuously. On the other hand, the characteristic hA2 can measure the timing of launching the game ball toward the first position while confirming the movement of the game ball staying in the staying means, as described above. Also, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic hA3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hA1 or the characteristic hA2,
The switching means, triggered by the game ball passing through the first position, the distribution direction of the game ball from the second direction (open state) to the first direction (closed state), A specific period (0.2 seconds in the case of the eighth embodiment), means for switching,
A gaming machine characterized in that the case where the game ball circulates in the first direction is more advantageous to the player than the case where the game ball circulates in the second direction.

According to the characteristic hA3, in order to circulate the game ball in the advantageous first direction, the game ball is moved to the first position in consideration of the timing when the game ball flows out from the staying means and the specific period. Since it is necessary to pass through, the player can be actively participated in the game.

[Characteristic hA4]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hA3,
The specific period is shorter than a retention area outflow time (Krune outflow time), which is a length of time from when the game ball is launched from the launching means until it flows out from the retention area. Machine.

According to the characteristic hA4, since the specific period is shorter than the stay area outflow time, the game ball that has passed through the first position is passed through the stay means, and further the game ball is moved in the first direction by the switching means. It can be difficult or impossible to distribute. That is, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible to pass the game ball in the first direction using only one game ball. In other words, it is possible to promote that the game ball that flows in the first direction via the switching means after staying in the stay area and the game ball that passes through the first position are separate game balls. .. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the technical intervention of the player with regard to the launch of a plurality of game balls, and further to let the player pay attention to the return of the plurality of game balls, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. You can

[Characteristic hA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features hA1 to hA4,
It is possible or easy for the game balls distributed in the first direction to be distributed by the distribution means, and inflow or difficult for the game balls distributed in the second direction to be distributed by the distribution means. A first region, which is a region
The first area is an area that is set as one of the conditions for changing the game state into a specific state by the inflow of game balls into the first area.

According to the characteristic hA5, the first area is an area set as one of the conditions for the inflow of the game ball into the first area to change the game state to a particular state, so that the particular state is When it is in an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to make the player desire to distribute the game balls in the first direction by the distribution means, and regarding the technical intervention for the distribution of the game balls in the distribution means. Further, it is possible to further concentrate the game on the player and give a sense of expectation and tension.

[Characteristic hA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features hA1 to hA4,
It is possible or easy for the game balls distributed in the first direction to be distributed by the distribution means, and inflow or difficult for the game balls distributed in the second direction to be distributed by the distribution means. A first area which is an area
It is impossible or difficult for the game balls distributed in the first direction to be distributed by the distribution unit, and it is possible or easy for the game balls distributed to the second direction to be distributed by the distribution unit. A second area, which is an area,
And a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player,
The privilege granting means,
A means for determining a privilege to be given based on the inflow of game balls into the first area or the second area,
A gaming machine, wherein the privilege given when the game ball flows into the first area is more advantageous than the privilege given when the game ball flows into the second area.

According to the characteristic hA6, the privilege granted when the game ball flows into the first area is more advantageous than the privilege granted when the game ball flows into the second area. It is possible to make the player desire to distribute the balls in the first direction, and to further concentrate on the player regarding the technical intervention for the distribution of the game balls in the distribution means, and also to provide a sense of expectation and tenseness. Can be granted.

<Characteristic hB group>
The characteristic hB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Characteristic hB1]
A first passage through which game balls can be distributed,
A first entry area in which a game ball can enter,
Distribution mode changing means for changing the distribution mode of the reached game balls (non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the eighth embodiment),
The state of the distribution mode changing means, a first state (open state) in which it is impossible or difficult to send the game ball reaching the distribution mode changing means to the first entry area, and the distribution mode change Switching means for switching between the game ball that has reached the means and the second state (closed state) in which it is possible or easy to send the game ball to the first entry area,
A gaming machine comprising:
The switching means is
As an operation mode for switching the state of the distribution mode changing means between the first state and the second state,
A first mode in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the first entry area unless the game ball is circulated in the first passage (first passage detection sensor SP1) The first opening/closing scenario in the embodiment),
A second mode (second mode) in which it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the first entry area without circulating the game ball in the first passage (first passage detection sensor SP1) Third opening/closing scenario in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic hB1, the switching means is the first mode in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the first entry area unless the game ball is circulated in the first passage, and the first mode. The second mode is provided in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry area without circulating the game ball in the passage. When the first mode is executed, the game ball must be circulated in the first passage in order to enter the game ball into the first entry area, and the player shoots the game ball. Technical intervention is required for the game ball launch operation, such as adjusting the strength. On the other hand, when the second mode is being executed, the game ball does not have to be circulated in the first passage in order to enter the game ball into the first entry area, so the player No technical intervention is required for the game ball launching operation than when the first mode is executed. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, by switching the operation mode of the switching means between the first mode and the second mode, a game for allowing the game ball to enter the first entry area. It is possible to change the difficulty level of the technical intervention of the player (degree of the technical intervention), and to add intonation to the player's sense of tension and expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic hB2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hB1,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined position,
The switching means is
A gaming machine characterized by switching the state of the distribution mode changing means from the first state to the second state when the detection means detects passage of a game ball.

According to the characteristic hB2, the switching means switches the state of the distribution mode changing means from the first state to the second state when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detecting means, so the operation mode of the switching means Regardless of whether the game mode is the first mode or the second mode, it is necessary to operate so that the game ball passes a predetermined position, and the game ball is allowed to enter the first entry area. About, the technical intervention of the player can be prompted, and as a result, the player can be actively participated in the game.

[Characteristic hB3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic hB1 or the characteristic hB2,
A second passage different from the first passage, which is a passage through which game balls can flow,
A first detection means (first passage detection sensor SP1) for detecting that the game ball has passed the first position on the first passage;
Second detection means (second passage detection sensor SP2) for detecting that the game ball has passed the second position on the second passage,
Equipped with
The switching means is
The state of the distribution mode changing means is changed from the first state (open state) to the second state (closed state) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means or the second detecting means. ),
When the period during which the distribution mode changing unit continues the second state by the switching by the switching unit is the second state continuation period,
The first mode is
It becomes possible or easy for the game ball that has circulated through the first passage to reach the distribution mode changing means during the second state continuation period, and the game ball that has circulated through the second passage has the second state. An operation mode in which the state of the distribution mode changing means is switched between the first state and the second state so that it becomes impossible or difficult to reach the distribution mode changing means in a continuous period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic hB3, in the case of the first mode, the switching means switches the state of the circulation mode changing means from the first state to the second state even when the game balls are circulated in the second passage. Despite this, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball that has circulated through the second passage to reach the distribution mode changing means during the second state continuation period, so it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, In the case of the first mode, it is possible to promote circulation of the game ball in the first passage. Further, when the game ball passes through the first passage or the second passage, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the distribution mode changing means, and the player can be concentrated on the game. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic hB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features hB1 to hB3,
A second passage different from the first passage, which is a passage through which game balls can flow,
A first detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed the first position on the first passage;
Second detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed the second position on the second passage;
Equipped with
The switching means is
Switching the state of the distribution mode changing means from the first state to the second state when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means or the second detecting means,
When the period during which the distribution mode changing unit continues the second state by the switching by the switching unit is the second state continuation period,
The second mode is
It becomes possible or easy for the game ball that has circulated through the first passage to reach the distribution mode changing means during the second state continuation period, and the game ball that has circulated through the second passage has the second state. An operation mode in which the state of the distribution mode changing means is switched between the first state and the second state so that the distribution mode changing means can be or easily reached during the continuation period. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic hB4, in the case of the second mode, whichever of the first passage and the second passage the game ball circulates, the game sphere reaches the circulation mode changing means during the second state duration. Therefore, in the case of the second mode, the player can easily enter the game ball into the first ball entry area.

<Characteristic hC group>
The characteristic hC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Characteristic hC1]
A means for entering a game ball (big winning opening 36a),
Control means for controlling the state of the game,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means has a specific control mode (first opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350),
From the time point of starting point (start time point of the round game), the case where the timing pattern of a plurality of game balls entering the ball entering means is the first ball entering pattern is the first case,
When the pattern of the timing of entering a plurality of game balls into the entering means from the starting point is the second entering pattern, when the second case is adopted,
The specific control mode (first opening/closing scenario) is
Despite the fact that the first ball entry pattern in the first case and the second ball entry pattern in the second case are the same, the degree of advantage of the player in the first case And a control mode in which the degree of advantage of the player in the second case is different (opening/closing scenario that may or may not be a high-probability mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic hC1, the specific control mode is the first case even though the first incoming pattern in the first case and the second incoming pattern in the second case are the same. Since the degree of advantage of the player in and the degree of advantage of the player in the second case are different, the player who recognizes that the control mode of the game being executed is a specific control mode On the other hand, it is possible to give an expectation and a sense of urgency to the degree of advantage.

[Characteristic hC2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hC1,
When the specific control mode is the first control mode,
The control means includes a second control mode (second opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350) different from the first control mode,
From the time point of the starting point, the case where the timing pattern of a plurality of game balls entering the ball entering means is the third ball entering pattern is referred to as a third case,
From the time point of the starting point, when the pattern of the timing of entering a plurality of game balls into the entering means is the fourth entering pattern, when the case is the fourth case,
The second control mode is
If the third ball entry pattern in the third case is the same as the fourth ball entry pattern in the fourth case, the degree of advantage of the player in the third case, and A game machine characterized by being in a control mode in which the degree of advantage of the player in the fourth case is the same.

According to the characteristic hC2, since the first control mode and the second control mode are provided, the player needs to determine whether the control mode is the first control mode or the second control mode. , The player can be concentrated on the game. The second control mode is advantageous for the player in the third case as long as the third ball entering pattern in the third case is the same as the fourth ball entering pattern in the fourth case. In the control mode in which the degree and the degree of the player's advantage in the fourth case are the same, the first control mode is the first ball entry pattern in the first case and the second mode. Even though the second entry pattern is the same, the degree of advantage of the player in the first case and the degree of advantage of the player in the second case are different, so that the control mode is the first. Whether the control mode is the control mode or the second control mode, and whether the control mode is the first control mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic hC3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic hC1 or the characteristic hC2,
It is provided with a plurality of passages (first passage 210 and second passage 300) through which the game balls entered in the entering means can pass,
The game ball entering the ball entering means can pass through only one of the plurality of passages,
The specific control mode (first opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350) is
A game machine characterized in that a degree of advantage of a player is different depending on a passage mode of the plurality of passages for the plurality of game balls entering the ball entering means.

According to the characteristic hC3, in the specific control mode, the degree of advantage of the player is different depending on the passage manner of the plurality of passages with respect to the plurality of game balls entered in the entering means, so that the passage manner of the plurality of passages is changed. The player may be given technical intervention to control, and the player may be encouraged to actively participate in the game.

[Characteristic hC4]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hC2,
It is provided with a plurality of passages (first passage 210 and second passage 300) through which the game balls entered in the entering means can pass,
The game ball entering the ball entering means can pass through only one of the plurality of passages,
The second control mode (second opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350) is
A game machine characterized in that the degree of advantage of the player is the same regardless of how the plurality of game balls entering the ball entering means pass through the plurality of passages.

According to the characteristic hC4, in the second control mode, the degree of advantage of the player is the same regardless of the passage mode of the plurality of passages with respect to the plurality of game balls entering the ball entering means. When the control mode of (1) is executed, it is not necessary to detect the passage mode of the plurality of passages for the plurality of game balls, and the processing can be simplified.

[Characteristic hC5]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hC2,
When the specific control mode is the first control mode,
The control means is
A third control mode (third opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350) different from the first control mode and the second control mode is provided,
From the time of the starting point, the case where the timing pattern of the plurality of game balls entering the ball entering means is the fifth ball entering pattern is referred to as the fifth case,
From the time point of the starting point, when the pattern of the timing of entering a plurality of game balls into the entering means is the sixth entering pattern, and the case is the sixth case,
The third control mode is
If the fifth entry pattern in the fifth case is the same as the sixth entry pattern in the sixth case, the degree of advantage of the player in the fifth case, and A game machine characterized in that the degree of advantage of the player in the sixth case is the same, and the control mode is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode.

According to the characteristic hC5, the third control mode, if the fifth incoming pattern in the fifth case and the sixth incoming pattern in the sixth case are the same, the game in the fifth case Since the degree of advantage of the player and the degree of advantage of the player in the sixth case are the same, the sense of urgency given to the player can be lessened than in the first control mode. Furthermore, since the third control mode is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode, it is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation than the second control mode. That is, the first control mode, the second control mode, and the third control mode have different expectations and tense feelings to be given to the player, so that three control modes having different characteristics are switched. As a result, the player can be given a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic hD group>
The characteristic hD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Characteristic hD1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means for executing the game time when the game time is defined as one from the start of the game time operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means to the end of the game time operation When,
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege to the player after the game time is ended, when the special information corresponding to the game time executed by the game time executing unit satisfies the predetermined condition;
Of a plurality of predetermined types of bonuses (first-class jackpot and second-class jackpot in the eighth embodiment), a type determination means for determining one type of bonus to be given to the player,
Control means for controlling the game state (support mode in the eighth embodiment),
Equipped with
The privilege granting means,
When the type of privilege determined by the type determining unit is a privilege of the first type (first-class jackpot), a first case satisfying a specific condition and a second case not satisfying the specific condition And a means for determining a different manner of awarding the privilege (opening/closing scenario of the non-V winning opening shutter 350),
When the type of privilege determined by the type determining unit is a second type privilege (second type jackpot), the privilege is not granted in the first case and the second case. Means for determining the same aspect,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature hD1, when the game time is executed, the player is expected to have a sense of what kind of privilege is (a privilege of the first type or a privilege of the second type). Can be granted. Further, when the type of privilege to be granted is the privilege of the first type, the mode of granting the privilege in the first case satisfying the specific condition and in the second case not satisfying the specific condition. Further, since it is different, it is possible to further give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding the mode of awarding. Therefore, according to this feature, when the game times are executed, what kind of privilege is given, what is the mode of granting the privilege, and the like, the player can make a stepwise guess or Expectation can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic hD2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic hD1,
In the first case, the game state at the time of executing the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is the first game state (low frequency support mode),
In the second case, the state of the game at the time of executing the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is a state of the second game (high frequency support mode). And the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic hD2, when the type of the privilege to be granted is the privilege of the first type, the gaming state is the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Since the manner of granting the privilege is different, when the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed, the state of the game is given, and the guess and the expectation are given to the player. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature hD3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic hD1 or the characteristic hD2,
The privilege granting means,
A game state determination that executes a process for determining a game state (lottery mode: low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of the game times executed after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition The game state determination processing execution means for executing processing is provided,
The game state determination processing execution means,
When the type of the benefit determined by the type determining means is a benefit of the first type (first-class jackpot), the time of executing the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition Depending on whether the game state is the first game state (low frequency support mode) or the second game state (high frequency support mode), the processing mode of the game state determination processing (lottery mode Means for executing the (determination mode) in a different mode (a different non-V winning opening shutter 350 opening/closing scenario),
When the type of the benefit determined by the type determining means is a benefit of the second type (second type jackpot), the time of execution of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. The processing state of the game state determination processing is the same when the game state is the first game state (low frequency support mode) and the second game state (high frequency support mode). Means for executing in a mode (the same non-V winning opening shutter 350 opening/closing scenario),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic hD3, when the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are executed, what is the type of privilege for the player (whether the privilege is the first type or the second type). It is possible to give a sense of expectation about whether or not it is a privilege. Furthermore, in the case where the type of privilege to be granted is the first type of privilege, when the game state at the time of executing the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is the first game state Since the processing mode of the game state determination processing is different between and the second game state, it is possible to further give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding the processing mode of the game state determination processing. .. Therefore, according to this feature, when the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed, what is the type of privilege, what is the game state, and the game time corresponding to the special information. It is possible to give the player a stepwise guess or a sense of expectation, such as what is the mode of the process for determining the game state of the game times to be executed later. It is possible to improve.

<Characteristic hE group>
The characteristic hE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth embodiment.

[Characteristic hE1]
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
A first state in which it is possible or easy to distribute a game ball entered in the ball entering means to a first ball entering area, and a game ball entered in the ball entering means is distributed to a first ball entering area Distribution means (non-V winning opening shutter 350 in the eighth embodiment) for switching between a second state in which it is impossible or difficult to perform,
A gaming machine comprising:
The distribution means,
The second state is triggered by the number of game balls entering the ball entering means becoming N (N is an integer of 2 or more) from the starting point (when the round game is started). The game machine is characterized by performing switching from the first state to the first state.

According to the characteristic hE1, the distribution means is in the second state when the number of game balls entering the ball entering means from the start point becomes N (N is an integer of 2 or more). From the first state to the first state. In this case, a player who desires to distribute the game balls to the first area is prompted to shoot the game balls while counting the number of game balls to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively intervene, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature hE2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic hE1,
The distribution means,
Within a specific period from the time when the Nth game ball enters the ball entering means from the time when the starting point is set, the N-1th game ball reaches the distribution means from the time when the starting point is set In such a case, switching between the first state and the second state is performed so that the N-1th game ball can be or easily distributed to the first area. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic hE2, in addition to urging the player to shoot a game ball while counting the number of game balls to enter the ball entering means, at least the (N-1)th time from the starting point With regard to the game ball and the Nth game ball from the starting point, further technical intervention of the player can be prompted. Specifically, within a specific period from the time when the Nth game ball enters the ball entering means from the time of starting point, the N-1th game ball from the time of starting point becomes the sorting means. The player can be prompted to adjust the timing and intensity of the game ball firing so that it reaches. Further, it is possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency regarding whether or not the (N-1)th game ball can be distributed to the first region.

<Characteristic hF group>
The characteristic hF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 5 of the eighth embodiment.

[Characteristic hF1]
A first passage through which game balls can be distributed,
A second passage through which game balls can be distributed,
A distribution mode changing means for changing the distribution mode of the game balls sent from the first passage and the second passage, wherein it is possible or easy to send the reached game balls to the first area. Distribution mode changing means for switching between a state 1 and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult to send the reached game ball to the first area (non-V winning opening shutter in the eighth embodiment) 350),
Equipped with
The distribution mode changing means,
Since J (J is an integer) game balls have entered the first passage from the starting point, K (K is an integer) game balls have entered the second passage. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is switched to the first state.

According to the characteristic hF1, the distribution mode changing means has K (J is an integer) K balls (K is an integer) in the second passage after J (J is an integer) game balls have entered the first passage since the starting point. When the game ball is entered, the second state is switched to the first state. In this case, for a player who desires to send the game balls to the first area, a positive technique is used to pass J game balls to the first passage and K game balls to the second passage. Intervention can be promoted, and interest in games can be improved.

[Characteristic hF2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic hF1,
The distribution mode changing means,
When the J-th game ball that has entered the first passage from the start point reaches the distribution mode changing means, the game ball that has entered the second passage from the start point When the number of K has reached the K number within a predetermined period, the J-th game ball that has entered the first passage from the time of the starting point is sent to the first region. And the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic hF2, for the player who desires to send the game ball to the first area, the J-th game ball that has entered the first passage from the start point becomes the distribution mode changing means. The timing and intensity of the game balls are adjusted so that the time of arrival is within a predetermined period from the time when the number of game balls that entered the second passage reaches K from the time when it becomes the starting point. Can be promoted, and further technical intervention of the player can be promoted.

<Feature iA group>
The feature iA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iA1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state at the start of the game game. Status information transfer means to be transferred (support mode simulation processing: steps Si1004, Si1005, Si1007 in the hit determination processing of FIG. 469),
When the transition is made by the state information transition means, game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the state specified by the state information before the transition by the transition,
Game operation starting means for starting the game operation based on the set mode of the game operation,
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine designed so that the mode of the game operation is set based on the state other than the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first state is transferred by the state information transfer means. When the transition to the information for specifying the state is made, it becomes impossible to set the mode of the game operation, and there is a problem that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iA1, the mode of the game operation is set based on the state specified by the state information before being transferred by the state information transfer means, and thus the mode of the game operation is the first. Since the setting is performed based on a state other than the state, the setting is normally performed, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to the feature iA1, it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iA2]
The gaming machine described in the feature iA1,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature iA2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Then, the mode of the game operation is also set based on the state information. Therefore, the change in the control mode and the change in the mode of the game operation are linked. Therefore, according to the feature iA2, since it is possible to indicate to the player the change of the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means by the mode of the game operation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature iA3]
The gaming machine according to the feature iA2,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determining means for determining which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game time is to be executed (FIG. 468). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game game when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the game in the first determination mode, the state information is used to identify the state other than the first state from the first state ( Means for shifting to low frequency support mode) specifying information (steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907 in the fall determination process of FIG. 468),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature iA3, in both cases of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the state is set at the start of the game times. The information is transferred to the information identifying the first state. Therefore, whether the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the game time decided to be executed in the first determination mode is changed from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked with the change in the state information, It is possible to prevent the player from guessing. Therefore, according to the feature iA3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature iA4]
A gaming machine according to feature iA3,
The game operation setting means,
In a case where the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is to be executed in the second determination mode, the state information transition means transitions to the information for identifying the first state. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of the game operation based on a state specified by the state information before the shift by the shift.

According to the feature iA4, the second determination mode has a high probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the status information is transferred to the information specifying the first status by the status information transfer means. Nevertheless, the game state may be the first state, that is, the so-called latent probability change state. Here, considering a case where the gaming machine is designed such that the mode of the game operation cannot be set based on the latent probability variation state, the state information transition means identifies the first state by the state information transfer means. When the latent probability change state is caused by the shift to the information to be performed, there is a problem that the mode of the game operation cannot be set and the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iA4, the mode of the game operation is set based on the state specified by the state information before being transferred by the state information transfer means. Therefore, the mode of the game operation is the first. It will be set based on a state other than the state, and the mode of the game operation will not be set based on the latent probability variation state. Therefore, according to the feature iA4, the game state is set normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, so that it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features iA1 to iA4,
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game times, state determination value calculation means (game state determination means of FIG. 470) for calculating a state determination value (game state determination value) from a plurality of types of information including at least the state information stored in the state storage means. Step Si1101) in the determination process,
When the calculated state determination value is a first value (“02H” in FIG. 459) as the state determination value that can be taken when the state information is information that identifies the first state. In addition, a second value (“03H” in FIG. 459) as the state determination value that can be taken when the state information is information that identifies a state other than the first state is added to the state determination value. State determination value rewriting means (step Si1102, Si1103 in the game state determination process of FIG. 470) for rewriting,
Equipped with
The game operation setting means,
A gaming machine comprising: means (variable time setting processing of FIG. 471) for setting a mode of the game operation based on the state determination value rewritten by the state determination value rewriting means.

According to the feature iA5, when setting the mode of the game operation, the setting can be performed by referring to the state determination value without referring to a plurality of types of information. Therefore, the control for setting the mode of the game operation can be simplified. Moreover, since the mode of the game operation is set after switching the state determination value, when the mode of the game operation is designed to be set based on a state other than the first state, It is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine without the processing being interrupted or stopped.

[Feature iA6]
A gaming machine according to feature iA5,
The game operation setting means,
Based on the state determination value rewritten by the state determination value rewriting means, the operation pattern that the game operation can take is limited (selection of the fluctuation time table group), and the determination is made within the limited operation pattern range. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of the game operation based on a result of the determination by the means.

According to the feature iA6, it is possible to set the mode of the game operation based on the state determination value and the result of the determination made by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iB group>
The feature iB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iB1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
A game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the state specified by the state information at the start of the game time;
After the setting by the game operation setting means at the start of the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is performed, the state information is changed from information specifying a state other than the first state. State information transfer means (support mode simulation process: steps Si3709, Si3710, Si3712 in the variation start process of FIG. 497) for transferring to the information specifying the first state;
Game operation starting means for starting the game operation based on the mode of the game operation set by the game operation setting means at the start of the game operation,
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine designed so that the mode of the game operation is set based on the state other than the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first state is transferred by the state information transfer means. When the transition to the information for specifying the state is made, it becomes impossible to set the mode of the game operation, and there is a problem that the process is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iB1, since the mode of the game operation is set based on the state specified by the state information at the timing before the state information is transferred by the state information transfer means, the game is played. The mode of operation will be set based on a state other than the first state, so that the setting will be performed normally and the processing will not be interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to the feature iB1, it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature iB1,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature iB2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Then, the mode of the game operation is also set based on the state information. Therefore, the change in the control mode and the change in the mode of the game operation are linked. Therefore, according to the feature iB2, since the change of the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means can be shown to the player by the mode of the game operation, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature iB3]
The gaming machine described in the feature iB2,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determining means for determining which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game time is to be executed (FIG. 468). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game game when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the game in the first determination mode, the state information is used to identify the state other than the first state from the first state ( Means for shifting to low frequency support mode) specifying information (steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907 in the fall determination process of FIG. 468),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature iB3, in both cases of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the state is set at the start of the game times. The information is transferred to the information identifying the first state. Therefore, whether the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the game time decided to be executed in the first determination mode is changed from the change in the state of the auxiliary means linked with the change in the state information, It is possible to prevent the player from guessing. Therefore, according to the feature iB3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature iB3, when the state information shifting unit shifts the state information to the information for specifying the first state, the special information is in the second determination mode in which the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is high. However, there is a case where the gaming state becomes the first state, that is, the so-called latent probability change state. Here, considering a case where the gaming machine is designed such that the mode of the game operation cannot be set based on the latent probability variation state, the state information transition means identifies the first state by the state information transfer means. When the latent probability change state is caused by the shift to the information to be performed, there is a problem that the mode of the game operation cannot be set and the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iB3, the game operation based on the state specified by the state information is performed at a timing before the state information is transferred to the information specifying the first state by the state information transfer means. Since the mode is set, the mode of the game operation is set based on a state other than the first state, and the mode of the game operation is not set based on the latent probability variation state. .. Therefore, according to the feature iB3, the game state is set normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, so that it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features iB1 to iB3,
State determination value calculation means (FIG. 499) for calculating a state determination value (game state determination value in FIG. 458) from a plurality of types of information including at least the state information stored in the state storage means at the start of the game game. Step Si3901 in the game state determination process of
Equipped with
The game operation setting means,
A gaming machine comprising means (variable time setting processing of FIG. 471) for setting the mode of the game operation based on the state determination value obtained by the state determination value calculation means.

According to the feature iB4, when setting the mode of the game operation, the setting can be set by referring to the state determination value without referring to a plurality of types of information. Therefore, the control for setting the mode of the game operation can be simplified.

[Feature iB5]
The gaming machine described in the feature iB4,
The game operation setting means,
Based on the state determination value obtained by the state determination value calculation means, the operation pattern that the game operation can take is limited (selection of a variation time table group), and the determination is made within the limited operation pattern range. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of the game operation based on a result of the determination by the means.

According to the feature iB5, it is possible to set the mode of the game operation based on the state determination value and the result of the determination made by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iC group>
The feature iC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iC1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means, the first state is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to and from the second state, which is the state
A control unit for controlling the state transition unit, wherein a control mode in which the state transition unit changes the state of the auxiliary unit is different is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball can enter the ball entrance means more easily than a control mode,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
A game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the control mode at the start of the game time;
In a specific case, and when the setting by the game operation setting means is executed at the start of the game time, the control mode is changed from the second control mode to the control means. Control mode switching means for switching to the first control mode,
Game operation starting means for starting the game operation based on the mode of the game operation set by the game operation setting means at the start of the game operation,
A gaming machine comprising:

In a gaming machine designed to set the mode of the game operation based on the second control mode in a specific case, the control mode switching means switches the second control mode to the first control mode. If it is done, there is a problem that the mode of the game operation cannot be set and the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iC1, the mode of the game operation is set based on the control mode before the control mode is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode by the control mode switching unit. Therefore, the mode of the game operation is set based on the second control mode. Therefore, the setting is normally performed, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to the feature iC1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iC2]
The gaming machine according to the feature iC1,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determining means for determining which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game time is to be executed (FIG. 468). Fall determination processing)
The control mode switching means,
The case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is considered to correspond to the specific case, and the first switching unit (support mode simulation process: FIG. 497) for executing switching to the first control mode is executed. Si3709, Si3710, Si3712) in the fluctuation start process of
The case where the determination mode determining unit determines to execute in the first determination mode corresponds to the specific case, and the second switching unit that executes switching to the first control mode (FIG. Step Si0904, Si0905, Si0907) in the fall determination processing of 468),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature iC2, in any of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, the control is performed at the start of the game times. The mode is switched to the first control mode. Therefore, whether the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the game time decided to be executed in the first determination mode is changed from the change of the state of the auxiliary means which is linked with the change of the control mode, It is possible to prevent the player from guessing. Therefore, according to the feature iC2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the feature iC2, when the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the first switching unit when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. There is a case where the control mode becomes the first control mode, that is, the so-called latent probability change state, even though the second determination mode having a high probability is set. Here, considering a case where the gaming machine is designed so that the mode of the game operation cannot be set based on the latent probability variation state, the control mode is changed to the first control mode by the first switching means. When the latent probability change state is caused by the switching, there is a problem that the mode of the game operation cannot be set and the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iC2, since the mode of the game operation is set based on the control mode before the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the first switching unit, the game operation is performed. The mode will be set based on the second control mode, and the mode of the game operation will not be set based on the latent probability variation state. Therefore, according to the feature iC2, the setting of the game state is normally performed, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, so that it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iC3]
A gaming machine according to feature iC1 or feature iC2,
The game operation setting means,
Based on the control mode, the operation pattern that the game operation can take is limited (variation time table group selection), and within the range of the limited operation pattern, the game is performed based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of operation.

According to the feature iC3, it is possible to set the mode of the game operation based on the control mode and the result of the determination made by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iD group>
The feature iD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modification example 1.

[Feature iD1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires the first special information and the second special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
First determining means for determining whether or not the acquired first special information satisfies a first condition (steps Si1002 to Si1004 of the hit determination processing of FIG. 469);
Second determining means for determining whether or not the acquired second special information satisfies a second condition (steps Si0902 and Si0903 of the fall determination process of FIG. 468);
Once the game operation for notifying at least one of the result of the determination by the first determining means and the result of the determination by the second determining means is started and then the game operation is ended once in the game. In that case, a game time executing means for executing the game time (the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed thereby),
State storage means (high-level support mode) for storing state information (support mode information) capable of specifying a first state (low-frequency support mode) and a second state (high-frequency support mode) that are two exclusive states. Frequency support mode flag),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
When the first special information satisfies the first condition and the second special information satisfies the second condition, the state information is displayed at the start of the game game. State information transfer means (support mode simulation process: steps Si1004, Si1005, Si1007 in the hit determination process of FIG. 469) for transferring the information specifying the second state to the information specifying the first state;
A first game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the second state at the start of the game time when the first special information satisfies the first condition; ,
Second game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the first state at the start of the game time when the second special information satisfies the second condition. ,
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine designed such that the mode of the game operation is set based on a state other than the first state when the first special information satisfies the first condition, the state information transfer means. When the transition to the information for specifying the first state is made by the above, there is a problem that the mode of the game operation cannot be set and the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iD1, the mode of the game operation is set based on the second state at the start of the game game when the first special information satisfies the first condition. Therefore, the setting is performed normally, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to the feature iD1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature iD1,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying the second state (high frequency support mode), the second control mode is made executable and stored in the state storage means. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information that is being provided is information that identifies the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature iD2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Then, the mode of the game operation is also set based on the state information. Therefore, the change in the control mode and the change in the mode of the game operation are linked. Therefore, according to the feature iD2, since the change of the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means can be shown to the player by the mode of the game operation, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature iD2, in any of the case where the first special information is the game time satisfying the first condition and the second special information is the game time satisfying the second condition, the game time is started. At times, the state information is transferred to information identifying the first state. Therefore, whether the first special information is a game time that satisfies the first condition or the result of the determination made by the second determination means is a game time that satisfies the second condition is determined by the auxiliary means that is linked with the change in the state information. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the change in the state. Therefore, according to the feature iD2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature iD3]
A gaming machine according to feature iD1 or feature iD2,
The first determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a probability that the first special information satisfies the first condition more than the first determination mode And a high second determination mode (high probability mode),
The gaming machine is
At the start of the game time, the second judgment is made as to which of the first judgment mode and the second judgment mode the judgment by the first judgment means in the game time is to be executed. Determination mode determining means for determining based on the result of the determination by the means (fall determination processing of FIG. 468)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature iD3, although the first special information is in the second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the probability of satisfying the first condition is high, the state specified by the state information is the first. There is a case where the so-called latent probability change state, which is the state (low frequency support mode). Here, consider a case where the gaming machine is designed so that it is impossible to set the mode of the game operation based on the latent probability variation state. There was a problem that the setting became impossible and the process was interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iD3, at the start of the game game when the first special information satisfies the first condition, the mode of the game operation is changed to the second state (high frequency support mode). Since it is set on the basis of the latency change state, setting of the mode of the game operation is not performed. Therefore, according to the feature iD3, the mode of the game operation is normally set, and the processing is not interrupted or stopped, so that it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features iD1 to iD3,
The game operation setting means,
Based on the state information stored in the state storage means, the action patterns that the game action can take are limited (variation time table group selection), and the first action is performed within the limited action pattern range. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of the game operation based on a result of the determination by the determination means.

According to the feature iD4, it is possible to set the mode of the game operation based on the state information and the result of the determination made by the first and second determining means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iE group>
The feature iE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iE1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means, the first state is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to and from the second state, which is the state
As a control mode in which the mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different, a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a game ball to the ball entering means more than the first control mode. A second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easy to enter the ball, and the control of the state transition means is executed in either of the first control mode and the second control mode. First state information storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing first state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying whether to perform
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high-probability mode) and capable of specifying in which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means is to be performed. Second state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing information (high probability mode flag);
In a gaming machine equipped with
Comprehensive state information for combining a plurality of state information including at least the first state information and the second state information to generate comprehensive state information (game state determination value in FIG. 458) indicating the state of the gaming machine. Equipped with a generation means,
The game time execution means,
State information transfer means for transferring the first state information from the information specifying the second control mode to the information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game time in a specific case,
At the start of the game game, the comprehensive state information generated by the comprehensive state information generating means specifies the first control mode (low frequency support mode) by the first state information, If the state information is the first information (latency probability change state: “02H” in FIG. 458) that can be obtained when the second determination mode (high probability mode) is specified, the total state information is set to A second possible when the first state information specifies the second control mode (high frequency support mode) and the second state information specifies the second determination mode (high probability mode). Information (high-probability high-frequency state: “03H” in FIG. 458) to rewrite total state information (steps Si1102 and Si1103 in the game state determination process of FIG. 470),
A gaming machine comprising:

Based on the comprehensive state information, for example, a mode such as a specific operation or display in the gaming machine is set, and the setting of the mode is such that the comprehensive state information specifies information other than the first information (states other than the latent probability change state). Consider a gaming machine that is designed to be played. In this gaming machine, when the second state information specifies the second determination mode and the specific state information transfer means makes a transition to the information specifying the first control mode, the total state information indicates the first state. Therefore, there is a problem that the above-described setting becomes impossible and the processing is interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iE1, the comprehensive state information rewriting means rewrites the comprehensive state information from the first information (information for identifying the latent probability variation state) to the second information. It is performed normally and the process is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to the feature iE1, it is possible to secure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature iE1,
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determining means for determining which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game time is to be executed (FIG. 468). Fall determination processing)
The state information transfer means,
Means for executing a shift to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (support mode simulation process: hit in FIG. 469) Step Si1004, Si1005, Si1007) in the determination process,
Means for executing a shift to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game game when the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the first judgment mode (FIG. 468) Steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907) in the fall determination process,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature iE2, in any of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, at the start of the game times, The 1 state information is transferred to the information that identifies the 1st state. Therefore, whether the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the game time determined to be executed in the first determination mode is the state of the auxiliary means that is linked with the change in the first state information. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the change. Therefore, according to the feature iE2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature iE3]
A gaming machine according to feature iE1 or feature iE2,
A game machine comprising: game operation setting means (variable time setting processing of FIG. 471) for setting the mode of the game operation based on the comprehensive state information rewritten by the comprehensive state information rewriting means.

According to the feature iE3, the process of setting the mode of the game operation based on the total state information is not interrupted or stopped. Therefore, according to the feature iE3, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features iE1 to iE3,
The game operation setting means,
Based on the comprehensive state information rewritten by the comprehensive state information rewriting means, the action patterns that the game action can take are limited (selection of a variation time table group), and the determination is made within the limited action pattern range. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of the game operation based on a result of the determination by the means.

According to the feature iE4, it is possible to set the mode of the game operation based on the comprehensive state information and the result of the determination made by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iF group>
The feature iF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment and its modified example 1.

[Feature iF1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means, the first state is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to and from the second state, which is the state
As a control mode in which the mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different, a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and a game ball to the ball entering means more than the first control mode. A second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which it is easy to enter the ball, and the control of the state transition means is executed in either of the first control mode and the second control mode. First state information storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing first state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying whether to perform
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high-probability mode) and capable of specifying in which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means is to be performed. Second state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing information (high probability mode flag);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
State information transfer means for transferring the first state information from the information specifying the second control mode to the information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game time in a specific case,
Means for setting a mode of the game operation on the basis of the first state information and the second state information at the start of the game time, wherein the first state information is the first control mode. When the (low frequency support mode) is specified and the second state information specifies the second determination mode (high probability mode) (latency probability change state: “02H” in FIG. 458), the first state When the state information specifies the second control mode (high frequency support mode) and the second state information specifies the second determination mode (high probability mode) (high probability high frequency state: FIG. 458). "03H") in the game operation setting means (variable time setting processing of FIG. 471) for setting the same mode as above,
A gaming machine comprising:

The first state information specifies the first control mode and the second state information specifies the second determination mode (so-called latent probability change state), and it is impossible to set the mode of the game operation. In the gaming machine designed as described above, when the state information transition means makes a transition to the information for specifying the first control mode, it becomes a latent probability variation state and it becomes impossible to set the mode of the game operation, There was a problem that processing was interrupted and stopped. On the other hand, according to the feature iF1, when the latent probability change state is set, the same game operation mode as that of the high-probability high-frequency state is set, so that the setting is normally performed and the process is interrupted or It never stops. Therefore, according to the feature iF1, it is possible to ensure high reliability in the operation of the gaming machine.

[Feature iF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature iF1,
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determining means for determining which of the first determination mode and the second determination mode the determination by the determination means in the game time is to be executed (FIG. 468). Fall determination processing)
The state information transfer means,
Means for executing a shift to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (support mode simulation process: hit in FIG. 469) Step Si1004, Si1005, Si1007) in the determination process,
Means for executing a shift to information specifying the first control mode at the start of the game game when the judgment mode determination means determines to execute the first judgment mode (FIG. 468) Steps Si0904, Si0905, Si0907) in the fall determination process,
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature iF2, in both cases of the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and the game times determined to be executed in the first determination mode, at the start of the game times, The 1 state information is transferred to the information that identifies the 1st state. Therefore, whether the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition or the game time determined to be executed in the first determination mode is the state of the auxiliary means that is linked with the change in the first state information. It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the change. Therefore, according to the feature iF2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature iF3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic iF1 or the characteristic iF2,
The game operation setting means,
Based on the first state information and the second state information, the action patterns that the game action can take are limited (selection of a variation time table group), and the determination is made within the limited action pattern range. A gaming machine comprising: means for setting a mode of the game operation based on a result of the determination by the means.

According to the feature iF3, it is possible to set the mode of the game operation based on the first and second state information and the result of the determination by the determination means with a simple configuration.

<Feature iG group>
The feature iG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification examples 16 and 17 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iG1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. As a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination Determination means having a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the mode,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means, the first state is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to and from the second state, which is the state
A control unit for controlling the state transition unit, wherein a control mode in which the state transition unit changes the state of the auxiliary unit is different is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball can enter the ball entrance means more easily than a control mode,
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific case, the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode (a specific state in which the latent probability variation state in Modifications 16 and 17 of the ninth embodiment is ) Has a state transition means,
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, control mode switching means for causing the control means to switch the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode ( Support mode simulation process: Step Si4007) in the hit determination process of FIG. 500,
A game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the determination mode and the control mode at the start of the game time;
Game operation starting means for starting the game operation based on the set mode of the game operation,
Equipped with
The game operation setting means,
A first game operation setting means for setting a first mode as the mode of the game operation when the state is changed to the specific state by the state changing means;
A second mode different from the first mode as the mode of the game operation when the control mode is switched to the specific state by switching the control mode to the first control mode by the control mode switching unit. Second game operation setting means for setting,
A gaming machine comprising:

In a specific case, in a gaming machine provided with a state transition means for transitioning to a specific state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the control mode is the second control mode. Yes, and from the game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the control mode switching means switches from the second control mode to the first control mode, the game state becomes the same specific state. However, in this case, in the prior art, no particular consideration was given to how the mode of the game operation is performed. On the other hand, according to the feature iG1, the first mode is set as the mode of the game operation when the state shift unit shifts to the specific state, and the control mode is changed to the first control mode by the control mode switching unit. When the state is shifted to the specific state by switching, the game operation mode is set to the second mode different from the first mode. Therefore, according to the feature iG1, an effect suitable for the case where the state transition unit shifts to the specific state, and a case where the control mode switching unit switches the control mode to the first control mode to shift to the specific state A suitable effect can be executed, and the player can be appropriately notified of the game state.

[Feature iG2]
The gaming machine according to the feature iG1,
The second game operation setting means,
Means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the second control mode, which is the control mode before being shifted by the control mode switching means, and the determination mode (Modification 16 of the ninth embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by including steps Si4205 and Si4206) in the variable time setting process of FIG. 502.

According to the feature iG2, the mode of the game operation is configured by a simple configuration in which the mode of the game operation is set based on the second control mode which is the control mode before being shifted by the control mode switching unit and the determination mode. Can be set to the second mode. Therefore, according to the feature iG2, the configuration for setting the mode of the game operation can be simplified.

[Feature iG3]
The gaming machine according to the feature iG1,
The second game operation setting means,
Means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the determination mode and the control mode at a timing before switching the control mode to the first control mode by the control mode switching means (of the ninth embodiment) A gaming machine having a configuration extracted from the modification 17 and including a variable time setting executed in the procedure shown in FIG. 496 of the modification 1 cited in the modification 17.

According to the feature iG3, with a simple configuration in which the mode of the game operation is set based on the determination mode and the control mode at a timing before the control mode switching unit switches the control mode to the first control mode, the game is played. The mode of operation can be set to the second mode. Therefore, according to the feature iG3, the configuration for setting the mode of the game operation can be simplified.

<Feature iH group>
The feature iH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 18 of the ninth embodiment.

[Feature iH1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition. As a determination mode for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and the first determination Determination means having a second determination mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that of the mode,
When the end of the game operation after starting the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is one of the game times, the game time execution means (main control) The MPU 62 on the board 61 side, and the game time control process of FIG. 465 executed by the MPU 62),
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means, the first state is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering means, and it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to and from the second state, which is the state
A control unit for controlling the state transition unit, wherein a control mode in which the state transition unit changes the state of the auxiliary unit is different is a first control mode (low frequency support mode) and the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball can enter the ball entrance means more easily than a control mode,
In a gaming machine equipped with
In a specific case, the control mode is the first control mode, and the determination mode is the second determination mode (transition to a specific latency state in the modified example 16 of the ninth embodiment). Has state transition means,
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, control mode switching means for causing the control means to switch the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode ( Support mode simulation process: Step Si4007) in the hit determination process of FIG. 500,
A game operation setting means for setting the mode of the game operation based on the determination mode and the control mode at the start of the game time;
Game operation starting means for starting the game operation based on the set mode of the game operation,
Equipped with
The game operation setting means,
The first case is the case of shifting to the specific state by the state shifting means, and the first case is the case of shifting to the specific state by switching the control mode to the first control mode by the control mode switching means. In the case of 2, in the first case and the second case, at least the first element (variation time in the modified example 18) of the plurality of elements configuring the aspect of the game operation is set. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is provided with the same first setting means for performing the setting.

In a specific case, in a gaming machine provided with a state transition means for transitioning to a specific state in which the control mode is the first control mode and the determination mode is the second determination mode, the control mode is the second control mode. Yes, and from the game state in which the determination mode is the second determination mode, when the control mode switching means switches from the second control mode to the first control mode, the game state becomes the same specific state. However, in this case, in the prior art, no particular consideration was given to how the mode of the game operation is performed. On the other hand, according to the feature iH1, the first state in which the state shifting unit shifts to the specific state and the state in which the control mode is switched to the first control mode by the control mode switching unit shifts to the specific state. In the second case, at least the first element of the plurality of elements forming the game operation mode becomes the same, and the game operation is set. Therefore, according to the feature iH1, the control routine for setting the first element can be shared between the first case and the second case, so that the control can be simplified.

[Feature iH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature iH1,
A first controller (main controller 60),
A second control device (sound emission control device 90);
Equipped with
The game operation setting means,
A second setting unit that performs the setting by differentiating at least the second element (the effect pattern in the modified example 18) of the plurality of elements between the first case and the second case is provided. ,
The first control device includes the first setting unit,
The second control device includes the second setting means. A gaming machine.

According to the feature iH2, the first control device side can set the first element that is common to the first case and the second case, and the second control device side can set the first element. It is possible to set the second element which is different between the case and the second case. For this reason, on the first control device side, the control routine for setting the first element is shared between the first case and the second case, while on the second control device side, It is possible to set the mode of the game operation by making the second element different from the second case. Therefore, according to the feature iH2, an effect suitable for the first case and an effect suitable for the second case can be executed, and the player can be appropriately notified of the game state.

<Feature jA group>
The feature jA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jA1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A means for controlling the game state of the game times into at least two types of game states, that is, a first game state (low probability mode) and a second game state (high probability mode), wherein the first game state is the The game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state,
The effect execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the second game state is A game machine comprising means for executing a specific effect (a specific effect in the tenth embodiment) which is not executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the feature jA1, letting the player recognize that the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, satisfies a predetermined condition through a specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and satisfaction that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition despite the disadvantageous game state.

[Characteristic jA2]
A gaming machine according to feature jA1,
The effect execution means,
As the specific effect, there is provided a means for executing an effect indicating that the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies the predetermined condition. ..

According to the characteristic jA2, as the content of the specific effect, the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state suggests that the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the game state is disadvantageous. Nevertheless, the player can further recognize that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the player can be given a greater sense of superiority and satisfaction.

[Characteristic jA3]
A gaming machine according to feature jA1 or feature jA2,
The effect execution means,
While the game time executing means is executing the game time, the game time executing means is provided with means for executing an effect that is difficult or impossible for the player to identify the game state in the game time being executed (state-implicit effect). And the gaming machine.

According to the feature jA3, since the player executes a production in which the game state in the game cycle being executed cannot be identified or is difficult, it is impossible for the player to identify in which game state the game cycle is executed. Can be As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. .. Furthermore, in the case where such processing is executed, if the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies a predetermined condition and a specific effect is executed, For the first time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state in the game times executed so far is a disadvantageous game state for the first time, and afterwards, the game state in the game times executed so far or Amusement of the game can be improved by creating a playability such as reminiscent of the contents of the game. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Characteristic jA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jA1 to jA3,
If the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is provided,
When the special information corresponding to the game times in the first gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, the privilege granting means selects one of a plurality of types of privilege granting modes (big hit type). A means for granting the privilege in the grant mode of
The effect execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies the predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means determines a specific one of the plurality of types of privilege granting modes. A gaming machine comprising means for executing the specific effect when a privilege is awarded in a grant mode (a jackpot type most advantageous to a player).

According to the feature jA4, when the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies a predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means makes a specific grant of a plurality of types of privilege granting modes. Since a specific effect is executed when a privilege is given in a form, when the specific effect is executed, special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state is given to the player. In addition to satisfying the condition (1), it is possible to recognize that the privilege is granted in a specific grant mode, and it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

[Characteristic jA5]
A gaming machine according to feature jA4,
The effect execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies the predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means is one of the plurality of types of privilege granting modes, the player A gaming machine comprising means for executing the specific effect when a privilege is granted in the most advantageous granting mode.

According to the feature jA5, when the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the first game state satisfies a predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means is provided to the player among a plurality of types of privilege granting modes. Since the specific effect is executed when the privilege is granted in the most advantageous granting mode, a greater sense of superiority and happiness can be given to the player when the specific effect is executed.

[Characteristic jA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jA1 to jA5,
The effect execution means,
A means for executing the specific effect after the time when the game time, which is the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition and which triggered the execution of the specific effect, ends. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the feature jA6, since the specific effect is executed after the end of the game time that triggered the execution of the specific effect, the player is provided with an expectation feeling even after the game time is ended. In addition to being able to be played, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even after the game time is over.

<Characteristic jB group>
The feature jB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic jB1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A means for controlling the game state in the game times to one of a plurality of types of game states,
The effect execution means,
When the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a game state suggesting effect that suggests information about the game state in which the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed ( A game machine comprising means for executing a specific effect in the tenth embodiment.

According to the feature jB1, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a game state suggesting effect is suggested which suggests information about the game state in which the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. Therefore, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the game state suggesting effect. In addition, by the game state suggesting effect, it is possible to exaggerate the game by creating a game property such as reminding the player of the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far.

[Characteristic jB2]
A gaming machine according to feature jB1,
The effect execution means,
During the period in which the game time corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is being executed, the player cannot identify the game state in the executed game time or a difficult production (state) A gaming machine comprising means for executing (implicit effect).

According to the feature jB2, during the period in which the game time corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is being executed, the player cannot distinguish the game state in the executed game time or make a difficult presentation. Since it is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game time is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. ..

[Characteristic jB3]
A gaming machine according to feature jB1 or feature jB2,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game state in which the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is one of the plurality of types of game states. A gaming machine comprising means for executing the gaming state suggesting effect when the gaming state is in a specific gaming state.

According to the feature jB3, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are in the specific game state, the game state suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the specific game state, and prompt the player to recollect how the game in the specific game state was executed, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic jB4]
A gaming machine according to feature jB3,
If the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is provided,
When the special information corresponding to the game times in the specific game state satisfies the predetermined condition, the privilege granting means selects one of a plurality of types of privilege grant modes (big hit type). A means for granting the privilege in the grant mode,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition and the privilege granting unit grants a privilege in a specific grant mode among the plurality of kinds of privilege grant modes, the game state suggestion A gaming machine comprising means for executing a performance.

According to the feature jB4, when the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition and the privilege granting means grants the privilege in a specific granting mode among a plurality of kinds of privilege granting modes, a game state suggesting effect is produced. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the privilege will be given in a specific giving manner.

[Characteristic jB5]
A gaming machine described in feature jB4,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the acquired special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and when the privilege granting unit grants the privilege in the most advantageous grant mode to the player among the plurality of types of the privilege grant modes, A gaming machine comprising means for executing the game state suggesting effect.

According to the feature jB5, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means grants the privilege in the most advantageous granting mode to the player among the plurality of types of privilege granting modes, the gaming state Since the suggestion effect is executed, when the game state suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a great sense of superiority and happiness.

<Characteristic jC group>
The feature jC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jC1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A means for controlling the game state of the game times to one of a plurality of types of game states,
The effect execution means,
When the game state of the game time changes, the special information corresponding to the game time to be executed after the time when the game state has changed (winning the falling lottery) meets the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising a means for executing a game state suggesting effect (specific effect in the tenth embodiment) for suggesting information on the game state at the game time, when satisfied.

According to the feature jC1, when the game state of the game time is changed, it is after the time when the game state is changed and the special information corresponding to the game time to be executed satisfies a predetermined condition. , The game state suggesting effect that suggests information about the game state at the game time is executed, so that the game state suggesting effect causes the player to recognize afterwards that the game state at the game time has changed, and has executed so far. Amusement of the game can be improved by creating a game feature such as reminding the player of the game state and the content of the game in the given game time.

[Characteristic jC2]
A gaming machine described in the feature jC1,
The effect execution means,
A game machine comprising means for not executing the game state suggesting effect during a period in which the game times corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition are being executed.

According to the feature jC2, the game state suggestion effect is not executed during the period in which the game times corresponding to the special information that does not satisfy the predetermined condition are being executed. Therefore, the game state for the player during the execution of the game times. Can be guessed, a sense of expectation and a sense of tension can be given to the player, and the player can be focused on the game. In addition, the player cannot identify that the game state of the game cycle has changed during execution of the game cycle, and whether the game state has changed for the player during execution of the game cycle. It is possible to make a guess and always pay attention to the game, which can further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Characteristic jC3]
A gaming machine according to feature jC1 or feature jC2,
The effect execution means,
When the game state of the game time is changed to a game state that is less favorable than the current state, the special information corresponding to the game time executed after the time when the game state is changed satisfies the predetermined condition. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized by executing the game state suggesting effect.

According to the feature jC3, it is possible to make the player recognize and recall retrospectively that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in spite of the disadvantageous game state, by the game state suggesting effect, and the player is recollected. On the other hand, superiority and satisfaction can be imparted.

[Characteristic jC4]
A gaming machine described in feature jC3,
The effect execution means,
A means for executing the game state suggesting effect when the game state of the game time changes to a game state that is less favorable than the current state and the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by being provided.

According to the feature jC4, the game state suggestion effect is executed in a special case where the game state of the game time changes to a game state that is less favorable than the current state, and the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, a great sense of superiority can be given to the player who has recognized that the game state suggesting effect has been executed.

<Characteristic jD group>
The feature jD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jD1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
The game state in the game times is controlled to one of a plurality of types of game states, and as the plurality of types of the game states, the most advantageous state is the most advantageous state (high probability in the tenth embodiment. Frequency state), the most unfavorable gaming state, the most unfavorable state (low probability low frequency state), and the medium advantageous state (low) which is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous state and more advantageous than the most disadvantageous state. Probability high frequency state) and means for controlling at least three gaming states,
The effect execution means,
The special information corresponding to the game times executed in the most advantageous state and the most unfavorable state, when the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition A game machine comprising means for executing a specific effect which is not executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the feature jD1, when the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the most advantageous state and the most disadvantageous state is predetermined. Since the specific effect that is not executed when the condition of is satisfied is executed, it is possible to inform the player that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition before the most disadvantageous state, which is the most disadvantageous state, that is, in the medium advantageous state. It is possible to strongly recognize the player, and to give the player a sense of crisis after the fact (a sense of crisis after knowing that the situation was actually dangerous), and a sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Characteristic jD2]
A gaming machine described in the feature jD1,
The effect execution means,
When the game state changes from the most advantageous state to the medium advantageous state, and when the special information corresponding to the game times in the medium advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, as the specific effect A gaming machine characterized by executing a game state suggesting effect that suggests information about the game state at the game time.

According to the feature jD2, when the most advantageous state is changed to the medium advantageous state, and the special information corresponding to the game times in the medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition, the game is specified as a specific effect. Since the game suggestion effect that suggests information about the game state at the time of execution is executed, by executing a specific effect, the game state has changed from the most advantageous state to the medium advantageous state, that is, the game state is in an unfavorable state. It is possible to give the player a feeling of accomplishment and superiority that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition even though the player is in an unfavorable game state, while reminding the player of the change in it can.

[Characteristic jD3]
A gaming machine described in the feature jD2,
The effect execution means,
At least during the period when the special information corresponding to the game times in the most advantageous state, the medium advantageous state, and the most disadvantaged state does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a suggestion about the game state in the game number to be executed is made. A game machine characterized by comprising means for not performing an effect.

According to the feature jD3, at least during the period when the special information corresponding to the game times in the most advantageous state, the medium advantageous state, and the most disadvantageous state does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the suggestion about the game state in the executed game number is made. Since the effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying in which game state the game time is being executed during the execution of these game times. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess the game state during the execution of the game times, to give the player a sense of expectation and tense, and to make the player pay attention to the game. .. Furthermore, in the case where such processing is being executed, if special information corresponding to the game times executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition and a specific performance is executed, or from the most advantageous state to medium When the special information corresponding to the game times in the intermediate advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition in the case of changing to the advantageous state, the game state in the game times that has been executed so far is not started until the specific effect. It is possible for the player to recognize it, and afterwards, it is possible to create a gaming property that reminds the player of the game state and the contents of the game in the game times that have been executed so far, and to improve the interest of the game. .. Furthermore, since the player is also made aware that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to give the player a great sense of accomplishment and superiority.

[Characteristic jD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jD1 to jD3,
When the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is provided,
When the special information corresponding to the game times in which the game state is the medium advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, the privilege granting unit grants one of a plurality of types of privilege granting modes. A means for giving the privilege in an aspect,
The effect execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies the predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means is a specific granting mode of the plurality of kinds of privilege granting modes. A gaming machine comprising means for executing the specific effect when the privilege is given in.

According to the feature jD4, when the special information corresponding to the game times executed in the medium advantageous state satisfies a predetermined condition, and the privilege granting means is a specific granting mode out of a plurality of kinds of privilege granting modes. Since a specific effect is executed when a privilege is given, when the specific effect is executed, special information corresponding to the game times executed in the medium-advantageous state meets the predetermined condition for the player. In addition to this, it is possible to recognize that the privilege is granted in a specific grant mode, and it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Feature jE group>
The feature jE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic jE1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Based on the acquired special information, the determination means for determining whether the hit or not,
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a win, a win type determination means for determining a win type which is a win type that has been won,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
In the case where the result of the determination in the executed game times is a win, in the preceding winning game times, which is the game times determined to be the winning one before the game times determined to be the winning. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a suggested effect (specific effect in the tenth embodiment) that suggests information based on the hit type.

According to the feature jE1, when the result of the determination in the executed game times is a winning prize, the preceding winning game which is a winning game game determined to be a winning game one game before the winning game game game is determined to be a winning game. Since the suggestion effect suggesting the information based on the hit type in the game time is executed, the player who recognizes the suggestion effect can be made to recognize the hit type corresponding to the previous winning hit. For example, in the case of a gaming machine that does not suggest to the player the hit type corresponding to the winning in the preceding winning game times as an effect, the suggesting effect that suggests information based on the hit type in the preceding winning game times is executed when the next winning is won. By doing so, the player can be ex post facto to recognize the winning type in the preceding winning game times, and it is possible to create a game property such as reminiscing the game from the preceding winning game times to the present, The interest in can be improved.

[Characteristic jE2]
The game time described in the feature jE1,
The hit type determining means determines, as the hit type to be determined, one hit type from among hit types including at least a first hit type and a second hit type,
The first hit type is a hit type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second hit type,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the result of the determination in the executed game times is a win, and the hit type in the preceding win game times is the first hit type, a means for executing the suggestion effect is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature jE2, when the result of the determination in the executed game times is a win, and the hit type in the preceding win game time is the first hit type, the suggestion effect is executed, Although it was won with a disadvantageous win type (for example, a normal jackpot on a gaming machine that can set a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot) in the preceding winning game times, it is suggested to the player that the winning is won after that. On the other hand, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and a sense of superiority by causing the player to recognize it ex post facto.

[Characteristic jE3]
A gaming machine according to feature jE1 or feature jE2,
The game state control means for controlling the game state is provided,
The game state control means,
Based on the winning type related to the winning, controls the game state in the game times to be executed after the game times determined as the winning
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized in that, in the game time, the game state in the game time being executed executes an effect that is unidentifiable or difficult for a player.

According to the feature jE3, the game state in the game times executed after the game times determined to be the relevant winning is controlled based on the hit type related to the winning, so the hit type in the preceding winning game times is the subsequent game. Affect the state. However, since the player performs a production in which the player cannot identify the game state in the game time being executed, or the difficult type, the winning type of the preceding winning game time is, and in which game state the game time is It can be made impossible for the player to identify whether it is being executed. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to guess the winning type of the preceding winning game time and the game state in the game time being executed while the game time is being executed, and give the player a sense of expectation and tenseness. be able to. In addition, when the winning is won in such a state and the suggestive effect is executed, the winning type of the preceding winning game times, the game state of the game times that have been executed so far, and the contents of the game are ex post facto. It is possible to remind the person to play, to create a playability such as making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic jF group>
The feature jF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic jF1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Based on the acquired special information, the determination means for determining whether the hit or not,
When the result of the determination by the determination means is a win, a win type determination means for determining a win type which is a win type that has been won,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
When the result of the determination in the executed game times is a winning, the hit type in the game times determined to be the winning, and one before the game times determined to be the winning Based on the hit type in the preceding winning game times, which is the game times determined to be a win, a performance (specific performance in the tenth embodiment) to be executed after the game times determined to be a win is determined. A gaming machine comprising means for performing.

According to the feature jF1, when the result of the determination in the executed game times is a win, based on the win type in the game times determined to be the win and the win type in the preceding winning game times, Since the effect to be executed after the game times determined to be the relevant winning is determined, the player who recognizes the effect executed after the game times determined to be the relevant winning is awarded to the player based on the relevant effect. It is possible to infer the hit type in the game times determined to be the hit type and the hit type in the preceding winning game times, and in addition to the expectation for the game times being executed, the player also has the amusement of reminiscing about the game times executed in the past. Can be given to.

[Characteristic jF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature jF1,
The hit type determining means determines, as the hit type to be determined, one hit type from among hit types including at least a first hit type (normal big hit) and a second hit type (probability variation big hit),
The first hit type is a hit type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second hit type,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the result of the determination in the executed game times is the winning of the second winning type, and the winning type in the preceding winning game times is the first winning type, A game machine comprising means for executing a specific effect after the game time, which is a winning of the second winning type.

According to the feature jF2, when the result of the determination in the executed game times is the winning hit of the second winning type, and when the winning type in the preceding winning game time is the first winning type, 2 Because a specific effect is executed after the game number which is the winning of the winning type, the winning type is disadvantageous in the preceding winning game number (for example, a regular jackpot in a gaming machine in which a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot can be set) Although it was doing, afterwards, it was decided to win the player with an advantageous win type (for example, a regular variation jackpot in a gaming machine that can set a regular jackpot and a probability variation jackpot) to the player with a specific effect. It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic jG group>
The feature jG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jG1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A means for controlling the game state in the game times to at least a first game state and a second game state,
The effect execution means,
The game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is defined as a condition satisfying game time, and the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is performed one before the condition satisfying game time. When the preceding condition-satisfying game time is set, a predetermined effect (a specific effect in the tenth embodiment) to be executed when the condition-satisfying game time is executed is given after the completion of the preceding condition-satisfying game time. A game machine comprising means for making a determination based on a mode of a change in a game state in a game time executed until after the condition-established game time is over.

According to the feature jG1, a predetermined effect to be executed when the condition-satisfied game times are executed is executed as a game time between the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game times and the end of the condition-satisfied game times. Since it is determined based on the mode of change of the game state in, the player who recognizes the predetermined effect executed when the condition-satisfied game times are executed, the player of the game state based on the predetermined effect It is possible to recognize (confirm) the mode of change. For example, even when the player cannot recognize the mode of the change of the game state in the game time executed after the completion of the preceding condition satisfaction game time until after the completion of the condition satisfaction game time, the predetermined condition By making the player recognize the effect of, it is possible to make the player recognize the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed so far, and the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability such as recollecting the state and the content of the game.

[Characteristic jG2]
A gaming machine according to feature jG1,
The effect execution means,
Based on the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times, which is executed after the completion of the preceding condition satisfaction game times to after the completion of the condition satisfaction game times A gaming machine comprising means for determining.

According to the feature jG2, the effect executed after the end of the condition-satisfied game times is changed in the game state in the game times executed between the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game times and the end of the condition-satisfied game times. Since it is determined based on, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game and the effect even after the condition-satisfied game times are completed.

[Characteristic jG3]
A gaming machine according to feature jG1 or feature jG2,
The second gaming state (high probability mode) is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low probability mode),
The effect execution means,
During the period from the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game times to the end of the condition-satisfied game times, the condition-satisfied game times are executed when the second game state transitions to the first game state. A means to execute a specific effect triggered by being done,
If the second game state is maintained between the end of the preceding condition-satisfying game times and the end of the condition-satisfying game times, even if the condition-satisfying game times are executed, the specific effect Means not to
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature jG3, a specific effect is executed when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition after the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, is transferred to the first gaming state, which is an unfavorable gaming state. To do. Specifically, after the player's feeling of expectation temporarily decreases due to the transition from the second game state to the first game state, a specific effect is executed when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. , It is possible to further promote the player's joy that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the state where the expectation is lowered, by further executing the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can.

[Characteristic jG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jG1 to jG3,
The effect execution means includes a game time effect execution means for executing a game time effect in a game time executed from after the end of the preceding condition satisfied game times until after the condition satisfied game times are completed,
The game time performance executing means,
As the game times effect, it is impossible or difficult for the player to identify the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times that is executed between the end of the preceding condition satisfied game times and the end of the condition satisfied game times. An amusement machine characterized by comprising means for executing a different effect (state-implicit effect).

According to the feature jG4, as a game time effect, it is impossible for the player to identify the aspect of the change in the game state in the game time that is executed from after the end of the preceding condition satisfied game time to after the condition satisfied game time is completed. Or, because a difficult effect is executed, the player cannot recognize the mode of change of the game state from after the end of the preceding condition satisfied game times to after the end of the condition satisfied game times. It is possible to cause the player to have a desire to know the mode of change. In such a state, by executing the predetermined effect executed when the condition-satisfied game times are executed, the player can be made to pay more attention to the predetermined effect.

<Characteristic jH group>
The feature jH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic jH1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are completed, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A game state switching means capable of controlling the game state in the game times to at least a first game state and a second game state,
The privilege granting means,
During a privilege grant period, which is a period that starts after the end of the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, a game ball is inserted into a specific entrance for allowing a game ball to enter. Specific entrance state transition means for executing a specific entrance state transition process for transitioning between a possible entry state and a non-enterable state where it is difficult or difficult to enter a game ball When,
A specific period (an opening period in the tenth embodiment and an opening period in the tenth embodiment, which is a period excluding a state transition process period (opening/closing process period), which is a period during which the specific entrance state transition process is being executed, in the privilege giving period. And a specific time determining means for determining a specific time which is the time length of the ending period),
The specific time determination means,
The game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is defined as a condition satisfying game time, and the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is performed one before the condition satisfying game time. When the preceding condition is satisfied game times, the identification is performed based on the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed between the end of the preceding condition satisfied game times and the end of the condition satisfied game times. A gaming machine comprising means for determining time.

According to the feature jH1, the specific time is determined based on the aspect of the change of the game state in the game time executed after the end of the preceding condition satisfaction game time to after the condition satisfaction game time. Therefore, for example, when performing an effect in a period corresponding to a specific time, the content of the effect is determined according to the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed until after the end of the condition-satisfied game times. can do. As a result, the player who recognizes the effect, based on the effect, a mode of change in the game state in the game times executed from after the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game times to after the end of the condition-satisfied game times. Can be recognized (confirmed). Temporarily, the player recognizes the mode of the change of the game state in the game time executed after the completion of the preceding condition satisfaction game time until after the completion of the condition satisfaction game time, when the game time is executed. Even if it is not possible, by causing the player to recognize the effect, it is possible to cause the player to recognize the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times that has been executed so far. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property such as recollecting the game state and the content of the game in the game times executed up to now.

[Characteristic jH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature jH1,
The specific time determination means,
Before the grant, which is the time length of the pre-grant period (opening period), which is the period from the start of the privilege grant period to the start of the state transition processing period, of the specific period Equipped with time determination means,
The pre-application time determining means is
A means for determining the pre-grant time based on a mode of change of the game state in the game time executed after the completion of the preceding condition satisfaction game time to after the completion of the condition satisfaction game time, Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature jH2, the pre-grant time is determined based on the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed after the end of the preceding condition satisfied game times until after the end of the condition satisfied game times. Therefore, for example, when performing the effect during the period corresponding to the pre-grant time, the content of the effect is changed according to the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed until after the condition-satisfied game times are completed. You can decide. As a result, the player who recognizes the effect, based on the effect, a mode of change in the game state in the game times executed from after the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game times to after the end of the condition-satisfied game times. Can be recognized (confirmed). Even if the player cannot recognize the mode of the change in the game state in the game times executed after the end of the preceding condition-satisfying game times and after the end of the condition-satisfying game times, the effect By letting the player recognize, the state of change of the game state in the game times executed so far can be made known to the player, and the game state in the game times executed so far or It is possible to create a playability such as reminiscent of the content of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic jH3]
The gaming machine described in the feature jH1,
The specific time determination means,
Post-grant time that determines the post-grant time, which is the time length of the post-grant period (ending period), which is the period from the end of the state transition processing period to the end of the privilege grant period, of the specific period. Equipped with a decision means,
The post-application time determination means is
A means for determining the post-granting time based on a mode of change of the game state in the game time executed between after the completion of the preceding condition satisfaction game time and after the completion of the condition satisfaction game time, Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature jH3, the post-grant time is determined based on the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed from after the end of the preceding condition satisfied game times to after the end of the condition satisfied game times. Therefore, for example, when the effect is executed in a period corresponding to the post-grant time, the content of the effect is changed in accordance with the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times executed until after the end of the condition-satisfied game times. You can decide. As a result, the player who recognizes the effect, based on the effect, a mode of change in the game state in the game times executed from after the end of the preceding condition-satisfied game times to after the end of the condition-satisfied game times. Can be recognized (confirmed). Furthermore, by executing the effect during the period corresponding to the post-grant time, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game until the end of the privilege granting period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Feature jI group>
The feature jI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic jI1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition are completed, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A gaming state in which the gaming state in the gaming times can be controlled to at least a first gaming state (low probability mode) and a second gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Equipped with switching means,
The game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is a first specific game time, and the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is next to the first specific game time. If the second specific game times,
The effect execution means,
When the gaming state of the gaming times executed after the first specific gaming times is the second gaming state and the gaming state of the second specific gaming times is the first gaming state, a specific A gaming machine comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing an effect (specific effect in the tenth embodiment).

According to the feature jI1, when the gaming state of the gaming times executed after the first specific gaming times is the second gaming state and the gaming state of the second specific gaming times is the first gaming state, the specific Perform the performance. That is, after the game times in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the game times in which the game state is advantageous for the player are started, and thereafter, the game state is shifted to the disadvantageous state for the player, after which the special information is determined in advance. A specific effect is executed when the condition of is satisfied. Therefore, after the player's feeling of expectation temporarily declines due to a transition to a gaming state that is unfavorable to the player, a specific effect is executed when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, so the state of expectation has decreased. By further executing the specific effect, the player's joy that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition can be further promoted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic jI2]
A gaming machine described in the feature jI1,
The specific effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing, as the specific effect, an effect that suggests that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game game in the first game state.

According to the feature jI2, as a specific effect, an effect that suggests that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in the game time that is the first game state is executed, so that the special information is determined from the unfavorable game state. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the conditions are satisfied, and it is possible to further give a sense of superiority and a sense of expectation.

[Characteristic jI3]
A gaming machine according to feature jI1 or feature jI2,
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the specific effect is executed after the end of the second specific game time.

According to the feature jI3, since the specific effect is executed after the end of the second specific game time, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and expectation even after the end of the second specific game time. While being able to do so, it is possible to focus on the game.

<Characteristic jJ group>
The feature jJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jJ1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Game state control means for controlling the game state of the game times,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
A game that executes a game state suggesting effect (specific effect in the tenth embodiment) that suggests the game state of the executed game number that is the already executed game number after the time point when the executed game number is completed. A game machine comprising a state suggestion production execution means.

According to the feature jJ1, since the game state suggesting effect that suggests the game state of the executed game times is executed after the time when the executed game times are completed, the game state and the game state in the game times executed so far are It is possible to create a playability such as recollecting the content after the fact and improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic jJ2]
A gaming machine according to feature jJ1,
The game state suggestion production execution means,
A game machine comprising means for executing the game state suggesting effect when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature jJ2, since means for executing the game state suggesting effect is provided when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the player is given a sense of superiority that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. In addition to being able to play, it is possible to let the player recognize under what kind of game state the special information has reached the predetermined condition, so that the special information further satisfies the predetermined condition. It is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction.

[Characteristic jJ3]
A gaming machine according to feature jJ1 or feature jJ2,
The game state suggestion production execution means,
When the game state of the executed game times satisfies a specific condition (for example, when the high probability mode is changed to the low probability mode), a means for executing the game state suggesting effect is provided. Amusement machine.

According to the feature jJ3, when the game state of the executed game times satisfies a specific condition, the game state suggesting effect is executed, so that the player can execute the game of the executed game times according to the setting mode of the specific condition. It is possible to control the timing at which the state is recalled after the fact. For example, if a specific condition is set such that the game state of the executed game times is a disadvantageous state for the player and the special state satisfies a predetermined condition, the game state is a disadvantageous state for the player. It is possible to retroactively recollect that there was, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

[Characteristic jJ4]
A gaming machine according to feature jJ3,
The game state control means,
It is possible to control the game state in the game times to at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The game state suggestion production execution means,
In the case where the gaming state of the executed gaming times satisfies the specific condition, at least the gaming state of the executed gaming times immediately before executing the gaming state suggesting effect is the first gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with means for executing the game state suggesting effect.

According to the feature jJ4, when the game state of the executed game times satisfies the specific condition, at least when the game state of the executed game times immediately before executing the game state suggesting effect is the first game state. Since the game state suggesting effect is executed, if the special information corresponding to the executed game times immediately before executing the game state suggesting effect satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information is further specified. It is possible to give the player a feeling of accomplishment and satisfaction of satisfying the above condition.

<Characteristic jK group>
The feature jK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jK1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The determination means,
The determination can be executed in the first determination mode (low probability mode) or the second determination mode (high probability mode),
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the determination is performed in the second determination mode than when the determination is performed in the first determination mode,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is
Prior to the determination by the determination means at the game time to be executed, a determination mode determination means for determining the determination mode at the game time is provided,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the determination mode in the game number executed immediately before the determination target game number which is the determination target game number is the second determination mode, the determination target game number The determination mode in is the first determination mode (in the tenth embodiment, winning the falling lottery in the determination target game times), and the special information corresponding to the determination target game times is the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by comprising specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (a specific effect in the tenth embodiment) when it is determined that the condition is satisfied.

According to the feature jK1, when the determination mode in the game time executed immediately before the determination target game time is the second determination mode, the determination mode in the determination target game time is the first determination mode, and When the special information corresponding to the determination target game times is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, the specific effect is executed, so the player who recognizes that the specific effect is executed is the second determination. It is recognized that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition in the game time when the mode shifts to the first determination mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a surprise at the occurrence of a very rare event that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the game time when the game mode is changed from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. It is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and a sense of achievement for the special information satisfying a predetermined condition even though it is in the first determination mode.

[Characteristic jK2]
A gaming machine described in the feature jK1,
The specific effect execution means,
As the specific effect, the game machine is provided with means for executing a suggestion effect indicating that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the state where the determination mode is the first determination mode.

According to the feature jK2, as the specific effect, since the suggestion effect that suggests that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition in the state where the determination mode is the first determination mode is executed, it is the first determination mode. Nevertheless, the player can be made more aware that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the player's sense of superiority and sense of accomplishment can be promoted.

[Characteristic jK3]
A gaming machine according to feature jK1 or feature jK2,
The specific effect execution means,
A game machine comprising means for executing the specific effect after the end of the determination target game times.

According to the feature jK3, since the specific effect is executed after the end of the determination target game times, the determination result of the determination target game times is notified in the determination target game times, that is, the determination target game times. Even after the turn has ended, the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

<Characteristic jL>
The feature jL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Feature jL1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
A second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the determination mode of the determination unit is the first determination mode or the first determination mode (low probability mode). Determination mode switching means for switching to (high probability mode),
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Specific processing executing means for executing specific processing after a condition-satisfying game time, which is a game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, is completed,
Specific processing time determining means for determining a specific processing time (opening time or ending time in the tenth embodiment) that is a time for executing the specific processing;
A gaming machine comprising:
The specific processing time determination means,
The specific processing time is determined based on whether or not the determination mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at a timing after the end of the game number immediately before the condition-satisfied game number. A gaming machine comprising means for performing.

According to the feature jL1, the specific processing time is determined based on whether or not the determination mode has shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the timing after the end of the game number immediately before the condition-satisfied game number. Since it is determined, for example, by changing the length of the specific processing time depending on whether or not the first determination mode has transitioned to the second determination mode after the end of the game number immediately before the condition-satisfied game number, The player can be made to recognize whether or not the first determination mode has been changed to the second determination mode.

[Feature jL2]
The gaming machine described in the feature jL1,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition is completed,
The privilege granting means,
During a privilege grant period, which is a period that starts after the end of the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, a game ball is inserted into a specific entrance for allowing a game ball to enter. Specific entrance state transition means for executing a specific entrance state transition process that transitions between a possible entry state and a non-enterable state where it is difficult or difficult to enter a game ball Equipped with
The specific processing time is
In the privilege giving period, it is a time length of a period excluding a state transition process period (opening/closing process period), which is a period in which the specific entrance state transition process is being executed. Machine.

According to the feature jL2, the specific processing time is the temporal length of the privilege-giving period excluding the state transition processing period, which is the period during which the specific entrance state transition process is executed, For example, using the period excluding the state transition processing period of the privilege granting period, the determination mode is the first determination from the second determination mode at the timing after the end of the game number immediately before the condition-satisfied game number. It is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the mode has been entered. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even during the privilege grant period after the condition-satisfying game times have ended.

[Feature jL3]
A gaming machine according to feature jL2,
The specific processing time is
A gaming machine, which is a time length of a pre-grant period (opening period) that is a period from the start of the privilege granting period to the start of the state transition processing period.

According to the feature jL3, the specific processing time is the time length of the pre-grant period, which is the period from the start of the privilege granting period to the start of the state transition process period. As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the determination mode has transitioned from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at a timing after the end of the game number immediately before the condition-established game number. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even in the pre-grant period after the condition-satisfying game times have ended.

[Feature jL4]
A gaming machine according to feature jL2,
The specific processing time is
A gaming machine, which is a time length of a post-grant period (ending period) which is a period from the end of the state transition processing period to the end of the privilege granting period.

According to the feature jL4, the specific processing time is the time length of the post-grant period, which is the period from the end of the state transition process period to the end of the privilege granting period, so, for example, using the post-grant period. It is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the determination mode has transitioned from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at a timing after the end of the game number immediately before the condition satisfied game number. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even in the pre-grant period after the condition-satisfying game times have ended.

<Characteristic jM>
The feature jM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jM1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Game state control means capable of controlling the game state in the game times to at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A specific area in which game balls can be distributed (V zone in the tenth embodiment),
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
When a game ball circulates in the specific area for a specific period, a means for controlling the game state of the game times started after the specific period to the second game state (high probability mode) is provided. ,
The effect execution means,
Means for executing a game state suggesting effect (specific effect in the tenth embodiment) that suggests the game state in the already-executed game cycle when the game ball has flowed through the specific area in the specific period. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature jM1, since the game ball is distributed in the specific region for a specific period, the game state suggesting effect that suggests the game state in the already executed game time is executed, so that the game ball is in the specific region. The game state of the game times started after a certain period of time is circulated to promote the joy of the player to be controlled to the second game state, and the game in the game times executed so far. It is possible to create a game property such as reminding the player of the state and the contents of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic jM2]
The gaming machine described in the feature jM1,
The effect execution means,
When the game state of the game times executed immediately before the specific period is the first game state, the game state is triggered by the fact that a game ball has flowed through the specific region during the specific period. A gaming machine, characterized by comprising means for executing a suggestive performance.

According to the feature jM2, when the game state of the game time executed immediately before the specific period is the first game state, the game ball is circulated in the specific region during the specific period as a trigger. Execute state suggestion production. That is, in a state where the player's expectation is lowered because the game state of the game times executed immediately before the specific period is the first game state, the game ball is distributed in the specific region and the player When it is determined that the game is in an advantageous state, the game state suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, in a state where the player's expectation is lowered, the player's joy that the game ball has passed through the specific region and the game state suggestion production is executed to distribute the game ball in the specific region. , Which can be further promoted and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature jM3]
A gaming machine according to feature jM1 or feature jM2,
The specific period is started after the end of the game game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
The effect execution means,
The special information corresponding to the game time, which is a game time executed after the first game time after the end of the first game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, is the predetermined time. The game state of the game times executed until the end of the second game times satisfying the condition of (1) is changed from the second game state to the first game state, and the second game times of the second game times are changed. In the case where the game state is the first game state, the game state suggestion is triggered by the fact that the game balls have flowed through the specific region during the specific period started after the end of the second game time. A gaming machine comprising means for executing a performance.

According to the feature jM3, the gaming state of the game times executed after the end of the first game times until the end of the second game times is changed from the second game state to the first game state. When the game state of the second game times is changed to the first game state, the game state suggesting effect is executed when the game ball flows through the specific region in the specific period. Therefore, during the period from the first game time to the second game time, the second game state is temporarily reduced greatly by shifting from the second game state to the first game state, and then the second game is performed. The player's expectation is increased by the special information satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and the player's expectation is further increased by the game ball passing through the specified area in a specified period after the end of the second game. In this state, the game state suggesting effect is executed, which promotes an increase in the player's expectation, and by the game state suggesting effect, the aspect of the change in the game state in the game times that has been executed so far afterwards. It is possible to make the player recognize, and to create a gaming property such as recollecting the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic jN>
The feature jN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Characteristic jN1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
Game state control means capable of controlling the game state in the game times to at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player after the condition-satisfied game time, which is the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, is finished. ,
A specific area where game balls can be distributed,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting means,
During the privilege granting period, which is a period that starts after the end of the condition-satisfying game times, a state in which a game ball can be entered into a specific entry port into which a game ball can be entered Specific entrance state transition means for executing a specific entrance state transition process for transitioning between a non-enterable state in which entry of a game ball is impossible or difficult,
Of the award grant period, the period from the end of the state transition process period (opening/closing process period), which is the period during which the specific entrance state transition process is being executed, to the end of the privilege award period A post-giving time determining means for determining a post-giving time, which is a time length of a post-period (ending period in the tenth embodiment),
The game state control means,
When a game ball circulates in the specific area in a specific period that is a period included in the privilege grant period and is earlier than the post-grant period, it is started after the specific period. A means for controlling the game state of the game times to the second game state,
The post-application time determination means is
Executed from after the end of the preceding condition-satisfying game time, which is the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition before the condition-satisfying game time, to after the condition-satisfying game time. A gaming machine comprising means for determining the post-granting time based on the gaming state in the played game time.

According to the feature jN1, the post-grant time is determined based on the aspect of the change of the game state in the game times executed after the end of the preceding condition-satisfying game times until after the end of the condition-satisfying game times. Therefore, for example, when the effect is executed in the period corresponding to the post-grant time, the content of the effect can be determined according to the game state in the game times executed until after the end of the condition-satisfied game times. it can. As a result, the player who recognizes the effect can recognize the game state in the game time executed after the end of the preceding condition satisfaction game time to after the condition satisfaction game time based on the effect. it can. Furthermore, by executing the effect during the period corresponding to the post-grant time, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game until the end of the privilege granting period, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, when the game ball circulates in the specific region in the specific period, the effect is executed in the subsequent post-granting period, and the player's joy for distributing the game ball in the specific region is concerned. It can be promoted by directing.

[Characteristic jN2]
A gaming machine according to feature jN1,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
In the post-granting period, a game state suggesting effect, which is an effect that suggests the game state in the game time, is executed between the end of the preceding condition satisfying game time and the end of the condition satisfying game time. A gaming machine comprising means.

According to the feature jN2, the game state suggesting effect is executed in the post-granting period, so that afterwards, a game property is created in which the player recollects the game state and the contents of the game in the game times executed so far. However, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, until the end of the privilege giving period, the player can be made to pay attention to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic jO group>
The feature jO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic jO1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
When it is assumed that the game operation is ended after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means is started once, the game time executing means for executing the game time,
A game state control means for controlling the game state,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game state control means,
A means for controlling the game state of the game times to one of a plurality of types of game states,
The effect execution means,
When the game state of the game times has changed, the first specific effect (battle effect in modification 10 of the tenth embodiment) is executed in the game times in which the game state has changed (winning the falling lottery). A gaming machine comprising means for performing.

According to the feature jO1, when the game state of the game times has changed, the first specific effect is executed in the game times in which the game state has changed, so the game in which the first specific effect is recognized has been executed It is possible to make the player guess what the game state of the game times is, and give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension.

[Characteristic jO2]
The gaming machine described in the feature jO1,
The effect execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game times after the game times at which the first specific effect is executed satisfies the predetermined condition, the second specific effect (specific effect in modification 10 of the tenth embodiment) ) The second specific effect execution means for executing a game machine.

According to the feature jO2, since the second specific effect is executed when the special information corresponding to the game times after the game time when the first specific effect is executed satisfies the predetermined condition, the second specific effect is executed. In addition to the joy that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the player who recognizes that the game information has been played is inferred that the game state of the game time has changed, and the game executed so far. It is possible to create a game feature in which the player recollects the game state and the content of the game in the game.

[Characteristic jO3]
The gaming machine described in the feature jO2,
The second specific effect execution means,
A game machine, characterized in that, as the second specific effect, a means for executing an effect that suggests that the game state has changed at the game time when the first specific effect is executed is provided.

According to the feature jO3, as the second specific effect, the effect indicating that the game state has changed in the game time when the first specific effect is executed is executed, so that the second specific effect is executed. The recognized player is caused to recognize that the game state has changed in the game time when the first specific effect is executed, and the game state and the content of the game in the game time after the first specific effect is executed. It is possible to create a game property in which the player recollects.

[Characteristic jO4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features jO1 to jO3,
The effect execution means,
When the game state of the game time changes from the second game state to the first game state, the first specific effect is executed in the game time when the game state changes (wins the falling lottery). Equipped with means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

According to the feature jO4, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition even though the game state is changed to the disadvantageous game state by executing the first specific effect. It is possible to give superiority and satisfaction to the person.

<Characteristic kA group>
The characteristic kA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification Example 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kA1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period,
When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a game information storage unit that stores predetermined game information (first variation out-of-flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of RAM 64, and First variation special reach flag, MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU92, and executed by the MPU92. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 609 executed by the MPU 92. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the production pattern setting process for disengagement of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Means for displaying a performance information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical value information at a predetermined probability based on the predetermined game information stored in at least the game information storage means (voice emission control board) 91 side MPU 92 and ending effect setting process of FIG. 643 executed by MPU 92)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kA1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. Then, the game information storage means stores predetermined game information when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Further, the specific effect executing means displays the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information at a predetermined probability based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined game condition is satisfied, and from the observation result, estimates the probability that the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information will appear in the predetermined period, and effects It is possible to wait for the information image to appear, and to know which stored numerical value information is from the effect information image that has appeared.

As a gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability is displayed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability. Depends on only the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kA1, the effect information image is displayed with a predetermined probability based on the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means in the predetermined period, so that the player is: It is possible to strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect information image. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the effect information image as the specific effect appears, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kA1, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is established in order to grasp the appearance probability of the effect information image as the specific effect, , It is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which a predetermined game condition is established.

When a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic kA1 are installed, the player creates a stand in which a specific effect is likely to appear by his/her own hand by creating a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each stand. be able to.

[Characteristic kA2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kA1,
The game information storage means,
The first game information is stored when the first game condition (first change normal reach) is satisfied, and the second game condition (first change super reach) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game condition is satisfied. Provided with a means for storing the second game information,
The specific effect execution means,
When the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information, the predetermined display information image is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability.

According to the characteristic kA2, the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the predetermined game information is the first game information stored when the first game condition is satisfied. Since the probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when the second game information is stored when the second game condition is satisfied, the appearance probability of the effect information image is increased for the player. From the aspect, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a second game condition advantageous to the player is satisfied as a predetermined game condition.

[Characteristic kA3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kA1 or the characteristic kA2,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kA3, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means During one period after the end of the game game in which it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied, the effect information image as a specific effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kA4]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kA1 or the characteristic kA2,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period is one period in the game time (period during which reach production is performed).

According to the characteristic kA4, an effect information image as a specific effect is displayed during one period of the game. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that one period in the game play should appear, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kA1 to kA4,
The game information storage means,
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, a game machine characterized by including means for storing the type of the effect executed in the game times as the predetermined game information ..

According to the characteristic kA5, the game information storage means stores the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times of execution of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and is stored by the specific effect execution means. An effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information is displayed with a predetermined probability based on the effect type. Therefore, in order to grasp the stored numerical information, the player needs to play the game when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, , It is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game for the predetermined number of times.

<Characteristic kB group>
The characteristic kB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 7 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kB1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for displaying an effect information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical value information in a predetermined period;
When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a game information storage unit that stores predetermined game information (first variation out-of-flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of RAM 64, and First variation special reach flag, MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU92, and executed by the MPU92. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 609 executed by the MPU 92. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the production pattern setting process for disengagement of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Execution of determining the predetermined period for executing the specific production from among a plurality of production periods for executing production based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means Period determining means (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, step Sk3302 to step Sk3306 of the production pattern table reference process for normal reach of FIG. 619 executed by the MPU 92, and super reach time of FIG. 620 executed by the MPU 92) Step Sk3402 to step Sk3406 of the effect pattern table reference processing, step Sk4202 to step Sk4206 of the effect pattern table reference for disengagement of FIG. 628 executed by the MPU 92, and step of the ending effect processing of FIG. 629 executed by the MPU 92. Sk4302 to step Sk4306)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature kB1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. The game information storage means stores predetermined game information when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Then, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect for displaying the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information in a predetermined period. Furthermore, at least the game information storage means stores the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is determined based on the given game information. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined game condition is satisfied, estimates the predetermined period in which a specific effect appears from the observation result, and the effect information image is displayed in the predetermined period. It is possible to wait for the appearance of the appearance information and to know which stored numerical value information is from the appearance information image that appears. When considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing the specific effect is fixed, the gaming machine of the comparative example determines the period for executing the specific effect depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the feature kB1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so that the player can specify the necessary numerical information for grasping the stored numerical information. Depending on the skill of the player, such as strongly feeling the randomness of the appearance period of the effect, and taking into consideration whether or not a predetermined game condition is established, the period during which the specific effect is executed is accurately estimated and stored. It is possible to grasp which numerical information is obtained. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kB1, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in order to estimate a period for executing a specific effect, so that a predetermined game is given to the player. It is possible to actively encourage the creation of a condition where the conditions are met.

When a plurality of gaming machines of the characteristic kB1 are installed, the player creates a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each of the gaming machines, so that the player himself/herself is likely to have a period for executing a specific effect. Can be produced by

[Characteristic kB2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kB1,
The game information storage means,
The first game information is stored when the first game condition (first change normal reach) is satisfied, and the second game condition (first change super reach) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game condition is satisfied. Provided with a means for storing the second game information,
The execution period determining means,
Performance in which the probability that the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information is higher than that when the predetermined game information is the second game information, in the game times. The gaming machine is provided with means for determining the predetermined period so as to be the effect period.

According to the characteristic kB2, the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the predetermined game information is the first game information stored when the first game condition is satisfied. The predetermined period is determined such that the second game information stored when the second game condition is satisfied is the production period for the production that is more likely to be executed in the game time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the second game condition, which is advantageous to the player, is satisfied as the predetermined game condition in terms of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined period. ..

[Characteristic kB3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kB1 or the characteristic kB2,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kB3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing the effect in the game time and a second period after the end of the game time determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, the specific effect of displaying the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the frequency with which the specific effect is executed is increased.

[Characteristic kB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kB1 to kB3,
The game information storage means,
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, a game machine characterized by including means for storing the type of the effect executed in the game times as the predetermined game information ..

According to the characteristic kB4, the game information storage unit stores the type of the effect executed in the game time when the number of times of execution of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and is stored by the specific effect execution unit. A predetermined period for executing a specific effect for displaying the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information is determined based on the type of effect that has been performed. Therefore, in order to grasp the stored numerical information, the player needs to play the game when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, , It is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game for the predetermined number of times.

<Characteristic kC group>
The characteristic kC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment or Modification 10 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kC1]
First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (in the modified example 6, the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and step Sk2401 of the first reach time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92). In the modified example 10, an appearance probability lottery executed when the pachinko machine is activated),
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process after executing the first lottery process (the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, and the ending effect setting process Sk5106 and Sk5107 of FIG. 641 executed by the MPU 92),
Numerical information storage means for storing predetermined numerical information (RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process executed by the MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the first lottery process, when the first lottery result (eg, normal reach in the modified example 6 and high appearance probability in the modified example 10) is obtained, the result is the second lottery result in the second lottery process. With a lottery probability setting means for setting the probability of becoming a predetermined probability,
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying an effect information image (design suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the numerical value information when the second lottery result is obtained in the second lottery process.

According to the characteristic kC1, when the first lottery process results in the first lottery result, the probability of becoming the second lottery result in the second lottery process is determined to be a predetermined probability, and is executed after executing the first lottery process. When the second lottery result is obtained in the second lottery process, the effect information image corresponding to the numerical information is displayed. Therefore, the player first observes whether or not the first lottery result has been reached in the first lottery process, estimates the probability of the second lottery result in the second lottery process from the observation result, and then the second lottery In the process, it is possible to wait for the effect information image to appear as the second lottery result, and to know which stored numerical value information is from the appeared effect information image. As a gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration for displaying the effect information image with a predetermined probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, since the appearance probability of the effect information image depends only on the model of the gaming machine, The player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kC1, the probability of being the second lottery result in the second lottery process for determining whether to display the effect information image is determined based on the lottery result in the first lottery process. Therefore, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect information image. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the effect information image will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic kC2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic kC1,
The lottery probability setting means,
And a means for setting the probability of becoming the second lottery result in the second lottery process to a probability lower than the predetermined probability when the lottery result other than the first lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic kC2, the probability that the effect information image will appear is higher when the lottery result of the first lottery process is other than the first lottery result, when the result information image appears. It is possible to give the player an expectation that the player will want the first lottery result in the one lottery process.

[Characteristic kC3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kC1 or the characteristic kC2,
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for deciding whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies the winning condition in the third lottery process (winning lottery referring to the win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the third lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Equipped with
The numerical information storage means,
A gaming machine comprising: means for storing numerical information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means as the predetermined numerical information.

According to the characteristic kC3, the player can grasp which of the winning probabilities is set in the third lottery process from the appearance of the effect information image as the specific effect.

[Characteristic kC4]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kC3,
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the effect information image is displayed during a period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition in the third lottery process.

According to the characteristic kC4, when the special information is determined to satisfy the condition for winning in the third lottery process, after the end of the game time, which is determined by the specific effect executing means to satisfy the condition for winning In one period in, the effect information image as the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the third lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

<Characteristic kD group>
The characteristic kD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification example 8 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kD1]
First ball entering means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter,
Second ball entering means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first ball entering means or a game ball entering the second ball entering means.
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Means for executing a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege on the basis that it is judged by the judging means that the winning condition is satisfied, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means. The privilege given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special game state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first entering means. A special game state executing means set to be advantageous to the player over the privilege,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 250) for sorting the arrived game balls into a first path leading to the first ball entering means and a second path leading to the second ball entering means,
Sorting destination storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores, as a sorting destination, which route of the first route and the second route the game ball that has reached is sorted by the sorting device. The first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag, MPU92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, update processing at the time of entering the ball of FIG. 632 executed by the MPU92),
A specific effect executing means for displaying an effect information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical value information in a predetermined period with a predetermined appearance probability;
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
The predetermined appearance probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic kD1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. The distribution destination storage means stores, as a distribution destination, which path of the first path and the second path the arrived game sphere has been distributed to. Then, by the specific effect executing means, the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is given more than the first ball entering means than in the case where the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route to the first ball entering means. The effect information image is displayed so that the probability of appearance of the effect information image is higher when the privilege is the second route to the advantageous second ball entrance means. Therefore, the player observes which route of the first route and the second route the game ball that has arrived is sorted by the sorting means, and from the observation result, the stored numerical value in a predetermined period. It is possible to estimate the probability that the effect information image corresponding to the information will appear, wait for the effect information image to appear, and grasp which stored numerical value information is from the appeared effect information image.

As a gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability is displayed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability. Depends on only the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kD1, since the effect information image is displayed with the appearance probability based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage unit, the player can determine the appearance probability of the effect information image. You can strongly feel the randomness. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the effect information image as the specific effect appears, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kD1, the privilege given to the first ball entering means is more advantageous than the case where the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storing means is the first route to the first ball entering means. In the case of the second route leading to the second ball entering means, the probability of appearance of the particular effect is higher, so that the player who has reached the game in terms of the probability of appearance of the particular effect is also reached. It is possible to add an expectation that the distribution means for the sphere wants the distribution destination to be the second route.

[Characteristic kD2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kD1,
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kD2, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed in one period after the end of the game time determined to satisfy the winning condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kD3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kD1 or the characteristic kD2,
The sorting destination storage means,
A game machine comprising a means for storing as a distribution destination which one of the plurality of paths the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means after the game machine is activated. ..

According to the characteristic kD3, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing as a distribution destination the route to which the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was activated. , When the game machine is started in the morning, the player plays the game in the morning to determine which route the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was started. By observing, the winning probability setting can be inferred. Therefore, according to the characteristic kD3, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

<Characteristic kE group>
The characteristic kE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 8 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kE1]
First ball entering means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter,
Second ball entering means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by a game ball entering the first ball entering means or a game ball entering the second ball entering means.
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Means for executing a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege on the basis that it is judged by the judging means that the winning condition is satisfied, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means. The privilege given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special game state executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first entering means. A special game state executing means set to be advantageous to the player over the privilege,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
A specific effect executing means for displaying an effect information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical value information in a predetermined period with a predetermined appearance probability;
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Compared with the case where the special information when it is determined by the determination means that the winning condition is satisfied is obtained by the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined appearance probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when it is obtained by entering a game ball into.

According to the feature kE1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. Then, the special effect execution means obtains the special information when the determination means determines that the condition for winning is satisfied in a predetermined period by the game ball entering the first ball entering means. In some cases, the effect information image is displayed so that the appearance probability of the effect information image is higher when the game ball is obtained by entering the game ball into the second ball entering means. For this reason, the player determines whether the special information when the determination means determines that the condition for winning is satisfied is whether or not the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the game ball to the second ball entering means. Observe whether it is due to the entry of the ball, and from the observation result, infer the probability that the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical information appears in the predetermined period, wait for the effect information image to appear, and then appear. It is possible to grasp which stored numerical value information is from the rendered effect information image.

As a gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability is displayed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability. Depends on only the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kE1, whether the special information when the determination means determines that the condition for winning is satisfied is the result of the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Since the effect information image is displayed with an appearance probability depending on whether the game ball is entered into the player, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect information image. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the effect information image as the specific effect appears, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kE1, the special information when the determination means determines that the condition for winning is satisfied is more than the case where the special information is obtained by the game ball entering the first ball entering means. Since the appearance probability of the effect information image as the specific effect is higher when it is acquired by entering the game ball into the ball input means, the appearance of the specific effect to the player In terms of probability, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball should enter the second ball entering means rather than the first ball entering means.

[Characteristic kE2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kE1,
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kE2, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed in one period after the end of the game game in which it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

<Characteristic kF group>
The characteristic kF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kF1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period (the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92),
When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a game information storage unit that stores predetermined game information (first variation out-of-flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of RAM 64, and First variation special reach flag, MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU92, and executed by the MPU92. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 609 executed by the MPU 92. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the production pattern setting process for disengagement of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Means (voice emission control board 91) for displaying an effect information image (design suggestion pattern PX) with an appearance probability specified by the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means and the stored numerical information. Side MPU 92 and ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by MPU 92)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kF1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. Then, the game information storage means stores predetermined game information when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the effect information image is displayed by the specific effect executing means with the appearance probability specified by the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means and the stored numerical value information. Therefore, the player first observes whether or not a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the player observes whether or not the effect information image appears in a predetermined period, estimates the appearance probability of the effect information image, and the obtained appearance probability and the result of the above observation, It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process. When considering a comparative example gaming machine in which the appearance probability of a specific effect is determined only based on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, depending on only the model of the gaming machine Appearance probability is determined. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kF1, the appearance probability of the effect information image as the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so the player needs to estimate the setting of the winning probability. Depending on the skill of the player, who strongly feels randomness in the appearance probability of the effect information image and takes into consideration whether or not a predetermined game condition is established, the winning probability setting can be accurately estimated. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kF1, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is established in order to estimate the appearance probability of the effect information image as a specific effect. , It is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which a predetermined game condition is established.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kF1 are installed, the player creates a stand in which the effect information image is likely to appear by himself by creating a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each stand. be able to.

[Characteristic kF2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kF1,
The game information storage means,
The first game information is stored when the first game condition (first change normal reach) is satisfied, and the second game condition (first change super reach) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game condition is satisfied. Provided with a means for storing the second game information,
The specific effect execution means,
When the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information, the predetermined display information image is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability.

According to the characteristic kF2, the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is more advantageous to the player than the case where the predetermined game information is the first game information stored when the first game condition is satisfied. Since the probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when it is the second game information stored when the second game condition is satisfied, the aspect of the appearance probability of the effect information image is presented to the player. From the above, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a second game condition advantageous to the player be satisfied as the predetermined game condition.

[Characteristic kF3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kF1 or the characteristic kF2,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kF3, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the winning condition in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means During one period after the end of the game game in which it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied, the effect information image as the specific effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kF1 to kF3,
The game information storage means,
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, a game machine characterized by including means for storing the type of the effect executed in the game times as the predetermined game information ..

According to the characteristic kF4, the game information storage means stores the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of execution times of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and is stored by the specific effect execution means. An effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information is displayed with a predetermined probability based on the effect type described above. Therefore, in order to grasp the stored numerical information, the player needs to play the game when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, , It is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game for the predetermined number of times.

<Characteristic kG group>
The characteristic kG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kG1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period,
When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a game information storage unit that stores predetermined game information (first variation out-of-flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of RAM 64, and First variation special reach flag, MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU92, and executed by the MPU92. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 609 executed by the MPU 92. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the production pattern setting process for disengagement of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Means for displaying a performance information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical value information at a predetermined probability based on the predetermined game information stored in at least the game information storage means (voice emission control board) The MPU 92 on the 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 643 executed by the MPU 92) are provided.
The game information storage means,
The first game information is stored when the first game condition (first change normal reach) is satisfied, and the second game condition (first change super reach) which is more advantageous to the player than the first game condition is satisfied. Provided with a means for storing the second game information,
The specific effect execution means,
When the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is the second game information than when the predetermined game information is the first game information, the predetermined display information image is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability.

According to the characteristic kG1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. Then, the game information storage means stores predetermined game information when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Further, the specific effect executing means displays the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information at a predetermined probability based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined game condition is satisfied, and from the observation result, estimates the probability that the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information will appear in the predetermined period, and effects It is possible to wait for the information image to appear, and to know which stored numerical value information is from the effect information image that has appeared.

As a gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability is displayed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability. Depends on only the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kG1, since the effect information image is displayed with a predetermined probability based on the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means in the predetermined period, the player It is possible to strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect information image. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the effect information image as the specific effect appears, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kG1, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in order to grasp the appearance probability of the effect information image as a specific effect, and therefore , It is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which a predetermined game condition is established.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kG1 are installed, the player creates a stand in which a specific effect is likely to appear by his/her own hand by creating a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each stand. be able to.

According to the characteristic kG1, the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the predetermined game information is the first game information stored when the first game condition is satisfied. Since the probability of displaying the effect information image is higher when it is the second game information stored when the second game condition is satisfied, the appearance probability of the effect information image to the player is increased. From the aspect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second game condition, which is advantageous to the player, be satisfied as the predetermined game condition.

<Characteristic kH group>
The characteristic kH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kH1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning probability setting means (main control board 61) sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of different winning probabilities by receiving an operation from the outside. Side MPU 62, the setting change process of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62),
Numerical value information storage means for storing predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the setting of the winning probability determined by the winning probability setting means (executed by the RAM 64 on the main control board 61 side, the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side, and the MPU 62) Step Sk0609 of the setting change processing of FIG. 588 that is performed,
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period,
When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a game information storage unit that stores predetermined game information (first variation out-of-flag, initial variation normal reach flag, initial variation super reach flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of RAM 64, and First variation special reach flag, MPU92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416 of the reach time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU92, and executed by the MPU92. Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal big hit production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608, and steps Sk2603 to Sk2606 of the probability variation big hit time effect pattern setting process of FIG. 609 executed by the MPU 92. Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616, and steps Sk2701 to Sk2703 of the production pattern setting process for disengagement of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And the special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Means for displaying a performance information image (setting suggestion pattern PY) corresponding to the stored numerical value information at a predetermined probability based on the predetermined game information stored in at least the game information storage means (voice emission control board) The MPU 92 on the 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 643 executed by the MPU 92) are provided.
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kH1, the winning probability setting means sets the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process to one setting selected from a plurality of stages of settings by receiving an operation from the outside, and the numerical information is set. The storage means stores predetermined numerical information corresponding to the setting of the determined winning probability. Then, the game information storage means stores predetermined game information when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. Further, the specific effect executing means displays the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information at a predetermined probability based on at least the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means. Therefore, the player observes whether or not a predetermined game condition is satisfied, and from the observation result, estimates the probability that the effect information image corresponding to the stored numerical value information will appear in the predetermined period, and effects It is possible to wait for the information image to appear, and to know which stored numerical value information is from the effect information image that has appeared.

As a gaming machine of the comparative example, when considering a configuration in which an image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability is displayed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the appearance probability of the image corresponding to the setting of the winning probability. Depends on only the model of the gaming machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kH1, the effect information image is displayed at a predetermined probability based on the predetermined game information stored in the game information storage means in the predetermined period, so that the player is: It is possible to strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the effect information image. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that the effect information image as the specific effect appears, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kH1, the player needs to create a state in which a predetermined game condition is established in order to grasp the appearance probability of the effect information image as a specific effect. , It is possible to actively encourage the creation of a state in which a predetermined game condition is established.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kH1 are installed, the player creates a table in which a specific effect is likely to appear by himself by creating a state in which a predetermined game condition is satisfied in each table. be able to.

According to the characteristic kH1, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the winning condition in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means During one period after the end of the game game in which it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied, the effect information image as a specific effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

<Characteristic kI group>
The characteristic kI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kI1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect executing means (a MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91 and an ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92) that executes a specific effect so as to have a predetermined appearance probability in a predetermined period;
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect executed in the game times The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by MPU92, and MPU92. Steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process of FIG. 609, and step S2701 to Sk2703 of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A means for executing the specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the effect type stored in the effect type storage means and the winning probability setting determined by the setting changing means (voice. (The MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature kI1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the effect type storage means determines a predetermined number of game times to be executed from the starting point. When the number of times is reached, the type of effect executed in the game time is stored, and by the specific effect executing means, it is determined by the type of effect stored in the effect type storing means and the setting changing means in a predetermined period. The specific effect is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player observes the effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and first stores the type of the effect. After that, the player observes whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period, estimates the appearance probability of the specific effect, and obtains the obtained appearance probability and the previously stored game times. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process depending on the type of effect. When considering a comparative example gaming machine in which the appearance probability of a specific effect is determined only based on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, depending on only the model of the gaming machine Appearance probability is determined. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kI1, since the appearance probability of a specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the game machine, the player has a specific effect necessary for estimating the winning probability setting. A strong sense of randomness in the appearance probability of, and depending on the skill of the player such as taking into consideration the type of production performed in the game times when the number of times the game times are executed reaches a predetermined number from the start The probability setting can be estimated accurately. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kI1, since the player needs to play the game when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the player has the predetermined number of games. It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game.

According to the characteristic kI1, the player needs to observe whether or not a particular effect appears in a predetermined period and estimate the appearance probability of the particular effect, so that the predetermined period is repeatedly generated. Therefore, it is possible to positively encourage the player to repeatedly play the game.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kI1 are installed, the player plays a game when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point in each of the machines, so that a specific effect is produced. You can create a stand that easily appears with your own hands.

[Characteristic kI2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kI1,
As the type of the effect executed in the game times, the first game time effect (normal reach) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game time effect. At least with a second game time performance (super reach) that is also high,
The specific effect execution means,
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic kI2, the special information has a higher expectation that the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process is higher than that in the case where the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect. In the case of 2 game times production, since the appearance probability of the specific production is higher, the number of times of execution is a predetermined number of times from the time of the starting point for the player in terms of the appearance probability of the specific production. It is possible to add an expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process in the game time, and that the second game time effect with high expectation is generated.

[Characteristic kI3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kI1,
As types of the effects executed in the game times, a first game times effect (normal reach) and a second game times effect (super reach) in which the probability of being executed in the game times is lower than that in the first game times effect And at least,
The specific performance execution is
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic kI3, the case of the second game effect having a lower probability of being executed in the game time is more than the case of the effect type stored in the effect type storage means being the first game time effect. Since the appearance probability of the specific effect is high, the player is executed in the game times in which the number of times of execution is a predetermined number from the time of starting from the viewpoint of the appearance probability of the specific effect for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a second game time effect with a low probability and a high rarity is desired to occur.

[Characteristic kI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kI1 to kI3,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kI4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the winning condition in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means A specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed in one period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kI5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kI1 to kI4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic kI5, the effect type storage means includes means for storing the type of effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. By playing a game in the morning, the player can infer the setting of the winning probability by observing which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated. it can. Therefore, according to the characteristic kI5, it is possible to positively urge the player to start playing the game in the morning.

<Characteristic kJ group>
The characteristic kJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kJ1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
In a predetermined period, so as to have an appearance probability based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect,
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect executed in the game times The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by MPU92, and MPU92. Steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process of FIG. 609, and step S2701 to Sk2703 of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Execution period for determining, based on the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from a plurality of effect periods for executing the effect Determining means (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, steps Sk3302 to Sk3306 of the normal reach time effect pattern table reference processing of FIG. 619 executed by the MPU 92, and super reach time effect of FIG. 620 executed by the MPU 92). Step Sk3402 to Step Sk3406 of the pattern table reference processing, Step Sk4202 to Step Sk4206 of the effect pattern table reference for disengagement shown in FIG. 6181 executed by the MPU 92, and Step Sk4302 of the ending effect processing of FIG. 629 executed by the MPU 92. ~ Step Sk4306 etc.)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kJ1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the effect type storage means sets a predetermined number of times of game play from the start point. When the number of times is reached, the type of effect executed in the game time is stored, and by the specific effect executing means, the appearance probability based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means is set in a predetermined period. , A specific effect is executed. Further, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is stored in the effect type storage means from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is determined based on the type of production that is being performed. Therefore, the player observes the effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and first stores the type of the effect. After that, the player estimates the predetermined period in which the specific effect appears from the type of the effect stored in the game time previously stored, and estimates the appearance probability of the specific effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process. When considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing the specific effect is fixed, the gaming machine of the comparative example determines the period for executing the specific effect depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kJ1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so that the player is required to estimate the setting of the winning probability. Depending on the skill of the player, which strongly feels randomness about the appearance period of the effect, and takes into account the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times of execution of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the starting point, It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which a specific effect is executed, and to accurately estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kJ1, since the player needs to play the game when the number of times of executing the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the player becomes the predetermined number of games. It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game.

According to the characteristic kJ1, the player needs to observe whether or not a particular effect appears in a predetermined period and estimate the appearance probability of the particular effect, so that the predetermined period is repeatedly generated. Therefore, it is possible to positively encourage the player to repeatedly play the game.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kJ1 are installed, the player gives a specific effect by playing a game when the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point in each machine. You can create a stand that is easy to run for a while.

[Characteristic kJ2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kJ1,
As the type of the effect executed in the game times, the first game time effect (normal reach) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game time effect. At least with a second game time performance (super reach) that is also high,
The execution period determining means,
About the effect in which the probability of being executed in the game times is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect A gaming machine comprising means for deciding the predetermined period so as to be the effect period.

According to the characteristic kJ2, the second game time, which has a higher expectation that the winning condition is satisfied in the predetermined lottery process, is higher than the case where the effect type stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect. Since the predetermined period is determined so that the production period is the production period for the production that is more likely to be executed in the game time, the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period for the player is increased. From the perspective of, in the game times in which the number of executions has become the predetermined number from the time when the starting point is set, the second information is produced with high expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process. You can add a sense of expectation that you want it.

[Characteristic kJ3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kJ1,
As types of the effects executed in the game times, a first game times effect (normal reach) and a second game times effect (super reach) in which the probability of being executed in the game times is lower than that in the first game times effect And at least,
The execution period determining means,
An effect that is more likely to be executed in the game times when the effect type stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect The gaming machine is provided with means for determining the predetermined period so as to be the effect period.

According to the characteristic kJ3, the case of the second game time effect having a lower probability of being executed in the game time than the case of the effect type stored in the effect type storage means being the first game time effect Since the predetermined period is determined so as to be the production period for the production that has a high probability of being executed in the game time, the starting point is also set for the player in terms of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined period. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a second game time effect having a low probability of being executed and a high rarity is generated in a game time when the number of times of execution has reached a predetermined number since then.

[Characteristic kJ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kJ1 to kJ3,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kJ4, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing an effect in the game time and a second period after the game time is determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the frequency with which the specific effect is executed is increased.

[Characteristic kJ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kJ1 to kJ4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the feature kJ5, the effect type storage means includes means for storing the type of effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. By playing the game in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, and a predetermined period during which a specific effect appears. It is possible to estimate and set the winning probability. Therefore, according to the feature kJ5, it is possible to positively urge the player to start playing the game from the morning.

<Characteristic kK group>
The characteristic kK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 2 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kK1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
A launching means for launching a game ball,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 250) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
When the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point becomes N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is the plurality of routes by the distribution means. A distribution destination storage unit that stores as a distribution destination which one of the routes is distributed (the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64, and a voice) MPU92 on the side of the light emission control board 91, the update process at the time of entering the ball of FIG. 632 executed by the MPU92),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A means for executing the specific effect so that the appearance probability is based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means and the winning probability setting set by the setting changing means (voice (The MPU 92 on the light emission control board 91 side and the ending effect setting process of FIG. 637 executed by the MPU 92)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kK1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside, and the distribution destination storage means causes the N-th game ball from the start point. Which route of the plurality of routes is distributed by the distribution unit is stored as a distribution destination, and the specific effect execution unit sets the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage unit for a predetermined period. The specific effect is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the winning probability setting determined by the changing unit. Therefore, the player observes to which route the N-th game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the starting point, and first stores the distribution destination. After that, the player observes whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period, estimates the appearance probability of the specific effect, and uses the obtained appearance probability and the previously stored distribution destination. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process. When considering a comparative example gaming machine in which the appearance probability of a specific effect is determined only based on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, depending on only the model of the gaming machine Appearance probability is determined. On the other hand, according to the feature kK1, the appearance probability of a particular effect does not depend on only the model of the gaming machine, so that the player has a specific effect necessary for estimating the winning probability setting. The randomness of the probability of appearance is strongly felt, and the winning probability is set depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration which route the N-th game ball has been sorted by the sorting means from the start. You can guess exactly. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kK1, the player needs to play the game when the number of game balls that have reached the sorting means from the start point becomes N, so It is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game at N game times.

According to the characteristic kK1, the player needs to observe whether or not a specific effect appears in a predetermined period and estimate the appearance probability of the specific effect, so that the predetermined period is repeatedly generated. Therefore, it is possible to positively encourage the player to repeatedly play the game.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kK1 are installed, the player can play a game when the number of gaming balls reaching the sorting means from the starting point is N on each table. , You can create a stand on which a particular effect is likely to appear, with your own hands.

[Characteristic kK2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kK1,
First ball entering means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter,
Second ball entering means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter,
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquiring means is a game ball entering the first ball entering means or a game ball entering the second ball entering means,
further,
Means for executing a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege on the basis that it is judged by the judging means that the winning condition is satisfied, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means. The privilege given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion. A special game state executing means set so as to be advantageous to the player over the award provided;
The distribution means,
As the plurality of paths, a first path to the first ball entering means and a second path to the second ball entering means are provided,
The specific effect execution means,
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic kK2, the advantage given to the first entrance means is more advantageous than the case where the distribution destination stored in the allocation destination storage means is the first route to the first entrance means. Since the appearance probability of the specific effect is higher in the case of the second route to the 2 ball entry means, from the point of view of the appearance probability of the specific effect with respect to the player, from the time of the starting point. It is possible to provide an expectation that the distribution means for the N-th game ball should be the second route.

[Characteristic kK3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic kK1 or the characteristic kK2,
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kK3, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed during one period after the end of the game game determined to satisfy the winning condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kK1 to kK3,
The sorting destination storage means,
A game machine comprising a means for storing as a distribution destination which one of the plurality of paths the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means after the game machine is activated. ..

According to the characteristic kK4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing as a distribution destination the route to which the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was activated. , When the game machine is started in the morning, the player plays the game in the morning to determine which route the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was started. By observing, the winning probability setting can be inferred. Therefore, according to the characteristic kK4, it is possible to positively urge the player to start playing the game from the first morning.

<Characteristic kL group>
The characteristic kL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification Example 3 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kL1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
A launching means for launching a game ball,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 250) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
In a predetermined period, so as to have an appearance probability based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect,
When the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point becomes N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is the plurality of routes by the distribution means. A distribution destination storage unit that stores as a distribution destination which one of the routes is distributed (the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64, and a voice) MPU92 on the side of the light emission control board 91, the update process at the time of entering the ball of FIG. 632 executed by the MPU92),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
An execution period in which the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means from among a plurality of effect periods for executing the effect. A gaming machine comprising a determining means.

According to the characteristic kL1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside, and the allocation destination storage means causes the Nth game ball from the start point. Which route of the plurality of routes has been sorted by the sorting unit is stored as a sorting destination, and the specific effect executing unit appears in a predetermined period based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing unit. A specific effect is executed so as to have a probability. Further, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is stored in the distribution destination storage means from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is decided based on the assigned destination. Therefore, the player observes to which route the N-th game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the starting point, and first stores the distribution destination. After that, the player estimates the predetermined period in which the specific effect appears from the previously stored distribution destination and estimates the appearance probability of the specific effect in the predetermined period, thereby performing the predetermined lottery process. It is possible to infer which setting the winning probability in. When considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing the specific effect is fixed, the gaming machine of the comparative example determines the period for executing the specific effect depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the feature kL1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so that the player is required to estimate the setting of the winning probability. Depending on the skill of the player, such as strong sense of randomness regarding the appearance period of the effect, and taking into consideration which route the Nth game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the start It is possible to accurately grasp the period to be executed, and to accurately estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kL1, the player needs to play the game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point becomes N, so It is possible to positively encourage the player to play a game at N game times.

According to the characteristic kL1, the player needs to observe whether or not a particular effect appears in a predetermined period and estimate the appearance probability of the particular effect, so that the predetermined period is repeatedly generated. Therefore, it is possible to positively encourage the player to repeatedly play the game.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kL1 are installed, the player plays a game when the number of gaming balls reaching the distribution means from the starting point is N in each table. , You can create a stand on which a particular effect is likely to appear with your own hands.

[Characteristic kL2]
A gaming machine described in the feature kL1,
First ball entering means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter,
Second ball entering means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter,
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquiring means is a game ball entering the first ball entering means or a game ball entering the second ball entering means,
further,
Means for executing a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege on the basis that it is judged by the judging means that the winning condition is satisfied, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means. The privilege given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion. A special game state executing means set so as to be advantageous to the player over the award provided;
The distribution means,
As the plurality of paths, a first path to the first ball entering means and a second path to the second ball entering means are provided,
The execution period determining means,
When the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route, the performance period for the production having a higher execution probability is higher than that when the second route is the first route. A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period.

According to the characteristic kL2, the advantage that is given to the first entrance means is more advantageous than the case where the allocation destination stored in the allocation destination storage means is the first route to the first entrance means. Since the predetermined period is determined such that the second route to the two-ball entry means is the production period for the production that is more likely to be executed, the predetermined period is determined for the player. From the viewpoint of the frequency of occurrence of the period, it is possible to give an expectation that the N-th gaming ball from the starting point should be assigned to the second route by the sorting means.

[Characteristic kL3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kL1 or the characteristic kL2,
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kL3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing an effect in the game times and a second period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the number of opportunities for executing the specific effect is increased.

[Characteristic kL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features kL1 to kL3,
The sorting destination storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing as a distribution destination which path of the plurality of paths the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the starting point.

According to the feature kL4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing as a distribution destination the route to which the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was activated. , When the game machine is started in the morning, the player plays the game in the morning to determine which route the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was started. By observing, you can infer the winning probability setting. Therefore, according to the characteristic kL4, it is possible to positively urge the player to start playing the game in the morning.

<Characteristic kM group>
The characteristic kM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 4 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Features kM1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
Degree parameter deriving means (appearance probability lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability,
Degree parameter effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the derived degree parameter,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A means for executing the specific effect so that the appearance probability is based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means and the winning probability setting determined by the setting changing means. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature kM1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means determines the degree of the appearance probability of the specific effect. The degree parameter is derived, the degree parameter effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the derived degree parameter, and the specific effect executing means, in a predetermined period, the derived degree parameter and the determined winning probability. The specific effect is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the setting of. Therefore, the player observes the effect corresponding to the derived degree parameter and stores the effect. After that, the player observes whether or not a particular effect appears in a predetermined period, estimates the appearance probability of the particular effect, and by the obtained appearance probability and the previously stored effect, It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process. When considering a comparative example gaming machine in which the appearance probability of a specific effect is determined only based on the setting of the winning probability, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, depending on only the model of the gaming machine Appearance probability is determined. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kM1, the appearance probability of a particular effect does not depend on only the model of the game machine, so that the player has a specific effect that is necessary for estimating the winning probability setting. It is possible to accurately infer the setting of the winning probability depending on the skill of the player who strongly feels randomness in the appearance probability and takes into consideration the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned degree parameter. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the feature kM1, the player needs to observe whether or not a particular effect appears in a predetermined period and estimate the appearance probability of the particular effect. It is necessary to generate the game repeatedly, and it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game repeatedly.

[Features kM2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kM1,
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
The degree parameter deriving means,
By means of lottery, means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates,
The degree parameter effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from the time of starting point to a predetermined number of times of executing the game time.

According to the characteristic kM2, the player has to play the game during the period from the starting point until the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number, so the player plays the game during this period. Can be actively encouraged. For example, if the starting point is at the time of starting the gaming machine, the feature kM2 can actively encourage the player to start playing the game from the morning.

[Features kM3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kM2,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kM3, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the winning condition in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means A specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed in one period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

<Characteristic kN group>
The characteristic kN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from modification example 5 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kN1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
In a predetermined period, so as to have an appearance probability based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect,
Degree parameter deriving means (appearance period lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability,
Degree parameter effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the derived degree parameter,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from a plurality of effect periods for executing effects, based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kN1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means determines the degree of the appearance probability of the specific effect. The degree parameter is derived, the degree parameter effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to the derived degree parameter, and the specific effect executing means sets the winning probability set by the setting changing means in a predetermined period. A specific effect is executed so that the appearance probability is high. Furthermore, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is derived by the degree parameter deriving means from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect, by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is decided based on the degree parameter. Therefore, the player observes the effect corresponding to the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means and stores the effect. After that, the player estimates the predetermined period in which the specific effect appears from the previously stored effect, and estimates the appearance probability of the specific effect in the predetermined period, thereby performing the predetermined lottery process. It is possible to infer which setting the winning probability is. When considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing the specific effect is fixed, the gaming machine of the comparative example determines the period for executing the specific effect depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the feature kN1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so that the player is required to estimate the setting of the winning probability. The setting of the winning probability can be accurately estimated depending on the skill of the player who strongly feels randomness in the appearance period of the effect and takes the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned parameter into consideration. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kN1, the player needs to observe whether or not a particular effect appears in a predetermined period and estimate the appearance probability of the particular effect. It is necessary to generate the game repeatedly, and it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game repeatedly.

[Characteristic kN2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kN1,
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
The degree parameter deriving means,
By means of lottery, means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates,
The degree parameter effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from the time of starting point to a predetermined number of times of executing the game time.

According to the characteristic kN2, since the player has to play the game from the starting point until the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number, the player plays the game in this period. Can be actively encouraged. For example, if the starting point is at the time of starting the gaming machine, the feature kM2 can actively encourage the player to start playing the game from the morning.

[Characteristic kN3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kN2,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kN3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing an effect in the game times and a second period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the number of opportunities for executing the specific effect is increased.

<Characteristic kO group>
The characteristic kO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and mainly, modification example 1 of the eleventh embodiment, modification example 3 of the eleventh embodiment, and modification example 5 of the eleventh embodiment. And extracted from.

[Characteristic kO1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And the special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
In a predetermined period, so as to have an appearance probability based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A plurality including at least a first period for executing the effect in the game time and a second period (ending period) after the game time is determined to satisfy the winning condition The game machine characterized by comprising an execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from the effect period.

According to the characteristic kO1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery processing by receiving an operation from the outside, and the game time execution means notifies the result of the determination of the predetermined lottery processing. The game time is executed, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined period. Furthermore, the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means causes the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the second period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. The predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined from the period. Therefore, the player predicts which of the plurality of effect periods including the first period and the second period the predetermined period in which the particular effect appears, and determines the predetermined period. In, by estimating the appearance probability of the specific effect, it is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process. When considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing the specific effect is fixed, the gaming machine of the comparative example determines the period for executing the specific effect depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kO1, for example, a period for executing the specific effect due to a factor different from the winning probability setting, such as an event occurring before the time when the specific effect appears, is generated. If the configuration is determined, the player strongly feels randomness in the appearance period of the specific effect required to infer the setting of the winning probability, and determines another factor for determining the period for executing the specific effect. Depending on the skill of the player such as taking into consideration, it is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the specific effect is executed, and thus to accurately estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kO1, since the second period occurs only when the condition for winning is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the number of opportunities for executing the specific effect is increased.

[Characteristic kO2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic kO1,
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, an effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64, which stores the type of the effect executed in the game times) The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by the MPU 92 are executed by the MPU 92. 609 comprises steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process, and steps S2701 to Sk2703) of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
The execution period determining means,
A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period based on the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means.

According to the characteristic kO2, the effect type storage unit stores the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and the specific effect execution unit causes the effect. The predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined based on the type of effect stored in the type storage means. Therefore, the player observes the effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, stores the type of the effect, and stores it first. It is possible to estimate the predetermined period in which a specific effect appears from the type of effect in the game time. Therefore, depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times the game time is executed reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the period for executing the specific effect is accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to accurately guess the winning probability setting.

[Characteristic kO3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic kO2,
As the type of the effect to be executed in the game time, the first game time effect (miss) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process is higher than the first game time effect. And at least a second game time performance (normal reach),
The execution period determining means,
When the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect, it is determined that the second period is the predetermined period and is stored in the effect type storage means. A game machine comprising: means for determining the first period to be the predetermined period when the type of the effect is the second game time effect.

The first period is a period that occurs in the game time, while the second period is a period after the game time is determined to satisfy the winning condition, and the first period is Occurs more frequently than in the second period. According to the characteristic kO3, when the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect having a low expectation that satisfies the condition for winning in the lottery process, the second occurrence frequency is low. When the period is a predetermined period and the type of production is the second game time production with high expectation that satisfies the condition to win in the lottery process, the second period with high occurrence frequency becomes the predetermined period. Therefore, in terms of the frequency of occurrence of a specific period of time for which a particular effect is executed, the player is required to win a lottery condition in the game times in which the number of executions has become a predetermined number from the start point. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the second game time effect having a high expectation level that meets the requirement is generated.

[Characteristic kO4]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kO1 or the characteristic kO2,
As types of the effects executed in the game times, a first game times effect (missing) and a second game times effect (normal reach) having a lower probability of being executed in the game times than in the first game times effect. Has at least,
The execution period determining means,
When the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect, it is determined that the second period is the predetermined effect period and stored in the effect type storage means. A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the first period to be the predetermined production period when the type of the production is the second game time production.

The first period is a period that occurs in the game time, while the second period is a period after the game time is determined to satisfy the winning condition, and the first period is Occurs more frequently than in the second period. According to the characteristic kO4, when the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect which has a high probability of being executed in the game time, the second period having a low occurrence frequency is the predetermined time period. Therefore, when the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect in which the probability of being executed in the game time is low, the second period with high occurrence frequency becomes the predetermined period. In terms of the frequency of occurrence of a specific effect for a player for a predetermined period of time, the probability of being executed in the game times in the game times in which the number of times of execution has become the predetermined number of times from the start point is It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a second game time effect that is low and rare is generated.

[Characteristic kO5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics kO2 to characteristics kO4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic kO5, the effect type storage means includes means for storing the effect type executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. By playing the game in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, and a predetermined period during which a specific effect appears. It is possible to estimate and set the winning probability. Therefore, according to the characteristic kO5, it is possible to positively urge the player to play the game from the first morning.

<Characteristic kP group>
The characteristic kP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modification examples of the eleventh embodiment and modification example 3 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kP1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
In a predetermined period, so as to have an appearance probability based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine, comprising: an execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from a plurality of periods for each type of the effect in the game time.

According to the characteristic kP1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery processing by accepting an operation from the outside, and the game time execution means notifies the result of the determination of the predetermined lottery processing. The game time is executed, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect such that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined period. Furthermore, the execution period determining means provided in the specific effect executing means determines a predetermined period for executing the specific effect from a plurality of periods for each type of effect in the game game. For this reason, the player predicts which of the plurality of periods for each type of effect in the game time the predetermined period in which the particular effect appears, and the specific effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process by estimating the appearance probability of. When considering the gaming machine of the comparative example in which the period for executing the specific effect is fixed, the gaming machine of the comparative example determines the period for executing the specific effect depending only on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kP1, for example, a period for executing the specific effect due to a factor different from the winning probability setting, such as an event occurring before the time when the specific effect appears, is generated. If the configuration is determined, the player strongly feels randomness in the appearance period of the specific effect required to infer the setting of the winning probability, and determines another factor for determining the period for executing the specific effect. Depending on the skill of the player such as taking into consideration, it is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the specific effect is executed, and thus to accurately estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Characteristic kP2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kP1,
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect executed in the game times The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by MPU92, and MPU92. Steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process of FIG. 609, and step S2701 to Sk2703 of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The execution period determining means,
A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period based on the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means.

According to the feature kP2, the effect type storage means stores the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times the game time is executed reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and the effect is stored by the specific effect execution means. The predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined based on the type of effect stored in the type storage means. Therefore, the player observes the effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, stores the type of the effect, and stores it first. It is possible to estimate the predetermined period in which a specific effect appears from the type of effect in the game time. Therefore, depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times the game time is executed reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the period for executing the specific effect is accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to accurately guess the winning probability setting.

[Characteristic kP3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kP2,
As the type of the effect executed in the game times, the first game time effect (normal reach) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game time effect. At least with a second game time performance (super reach) that is also high,
The execution period determining means,
An effect that is more likely to be executed in the game times when the effect type stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a production period of a type.

According to the characteristic kP3, the second game number having a higher expectation that satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process than the case where the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect. Since the predetermined period is determined so that the production period is the production period of the production type having a higher probability of being executed in the game times, the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period for the player is increased. From the perspective of, in the game times in which the number of executions has become the predetermined number from the time when the starting point is set, the second information is produced with high expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process. You can add a sense of expectation that you want it.

[Characteristic kP4]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kP2,
As types of the effects executed in the game times, a first game times effect (normal reach) and a second game times effect (super reach) in which the probability of being executed in the game times is lower than that in the first game times effect And at least,
The execution period determining means,
An effect that is more likely to be executed in the game times when the effect type stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period so as to be a production period of a type.

According to the characteristic kP4, the case of the second game time effect having a lower probability of being executed in the game time is more than the case of the effect type stored in the effect type storage means being the first game time effect. Since the predetermined period is determined so as to be the production period for the production that has a high probability of being executed in the game time, the starting point is also set for the player in terms of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined period. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a second game time effect having a low probability of being executed and a high rarity is generated in a game time when the number of times of execution has reached a predetermined number since then.

[Characteristic kP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features kP2 to kP4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic kP5, the effect type storage means is provided with means for storing the type of effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. By playing the game in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, and a predetermined period during which a specific effect appears. It is possible to estimate and set the winning probability. Therefore, according to the characteristic kP5, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

<Characteristic kQ group>
The characteristic kQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kQ1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a predetermined period (the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
The first effect executing means for executing the specific effect (the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91 and the MPU 92 for executing the specific effect, so that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means. Step Sk2806 to Step Sk2810) of the ending effect setting process of FIG.
Second effect execution means (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and a figure executed by the MPU 92) that executes an effect including an image (a design suggestion pattern PY) that suggests the setting of the winning probability as the specific effect. Step Sk2813 of the ending effect setting process of 611),
Selection execution means for selectively executing any one of the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means in the predetermined period;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kQ1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery processing by receiving an operation from the outside, and the game time execution means notifies the result of the determination of the predetermined lottery processing. The game times are executed, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a predetermined period. Further, the selection effecting means included in the specific effect effecting means causes the specific effect to be executed so that the appearance probability is based on the setting of the winning probability determined by the setting changing means, and the winning effect. Any one of the second effect executing means in which the effect including the image suggesting the setting of the probability is executed as the specific effect is selectively executed. Therefore, the player can guess the winning probability setting by using an image that suggests the winning probability setting (with high accuracy and can be guessed), or by estimating the appearance probability of a specific effect in a predetermined period. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set in the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, the player has a strong sense of randomness in inferring the setting of the winning probability, and the expectation that an effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability should appear, and in a predetermined period, It is possible to enjoy it together with the game property such as estimating the appearance probability of a specific effect. As a result, according to the characteristic kQ1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic kQ2]
The gaming machine described in the feature kQ1,
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect executed in the game times The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by MPU92, and MPU92. Steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process of FIG. 609, and step S2701 to Sk2703 of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The selection executing means is
A means for selectively executing any one of the first effect means and the second effect means based on the effect type stored in the effect type storage means. A gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kQ2, the effect type storage means stores the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times of executing the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and the specific effect executing means effects the effect. One of the first effect means and the second effect means is selectively executed based on the effect type stored in the type storage means. Therefore, when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the player observes the effect executed in the game times so that the specific effect becomes the first effect execution means. It is possible to predict which of the second effect executing means will be executed. Therefore, depending on the skill of the player, such as taking into consideration the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times the game time is executed reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the period for executing the specific effect is accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to accurately guess the winning probability setting.

[Characteristic kQ3]
The gaming machine described in the feature kQ2,
As a type of the effect executed in the game time, the first game time effect (super reach) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process is the first game time effect. And a second game time performance (special reach) higher than
The selection executing means is
When the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect, the first effect executing means is executed, and the effect type stored in the effect type storage means is A game machine comprising: means for executing the second effect execution means in the case of the second game time effect.

According to the characteristic kQ3, when the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect having a low expectation that satisfies the condition for winning in the lottery process, the first effect executing means specifies When the effect is executed and the type of effect is the second game time effect having a high expectation that satisfies the condition for winning in the lottery process, the second effect executing means executes the specific effect. On the other hand, since the specific effect executed by the second effect executing means is an effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability, the setting of the winning probability can be easily estimated with high accuracy. Therefore, also from the aspect of easily estimating the setting of the winning probability, in the game times in which the number of executions has become the predetermined number from the time when the starting point is set, the second game time with a high expectation that satisfies the condition to win in the lottery process. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the production is desired to occur.

[Characteristic kQ4]
The gaming machine described in the feature kQ3,
As a type of the effect executed in the game time, further, the third game time effect (the expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process is lower than the first game time effect ( Normal reach),
Equipped with
The selection executing means is
When the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the third game time effect, there is provided means for executing the first effect executing means,
The first effect execution means,
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect than when the effect type is the third game time effect. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the feature kQ4, the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means satisfies the condition to win in the lottery process, and the degree of expectation is lower than that of the second game time effect, that is, the first game time effect and the third game time effect. When it is a turn effect, the specific effect is executed by the first effect executing means, and when it is the second game time effect, the specific effect is executed by the second effect executing means. In addition, the appearance probability is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect than when the effect type is the third game time effect. The performance is executed. Therefore, in the first to third game time effects, the first game time effect is an intermediate expectation level in the first to third game time effects than in the case of the third game time effect having the lowest expectation. In the case where the specific effect is executed so that the appearance probability is higher and the second game time effect has the highest expectation among the first to third game time effects, the winning probability is set. The suggested image shows the winning probability setting. Therefore, with respect to the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means, the higher the degree of expectation that the condition for winning in the lottery process is satisfied, the easier and more accurately the player can estimate the setting of the winning probability. Is possible.

[Characteristic kQ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kQ2 to kQ4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic kQ5, the effect type storage means is provided with means for storing the type of effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. By playing the game in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, and a predetermined period during which a specific effect appears. It is possible to estimate and set the winning probability. Therefore, according to the feature kQ5, the player can be actively encouraged to play the game from the first morning.

<Characteristic kR group>
The characteristic kR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 6 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kR1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started once, the game round is executed. Means (main control MPU62, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
In a predetermined period, a specific effect execution unit (the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91) that executes a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability (the setting suggestion pattern PY) so as to have a predetermined appearance probability. And the ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by the MPU 92),
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect executed in the game times The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by MPU92, and MPU92. Steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process of FIG. 609, and step S2701 to Sk2703 of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A means for executing the specific effect (the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, so that the predetermined appearance probability is an appearance probability based on the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means, (Ending effect setting process of FIG. 611 executed by MPU 92)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature kR1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the effect type storage means determines a predetermined number of game times from the start point. When the number of times is reached, the type of effect to be executed in the game time is stored, and the specific effect executing means causes the specific effect including the image indicating the setting of the winning probability in the effect type storing means in the predetermined period. It is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the stored effect type. Therefore, the player observes the effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and first stores the type of the effect. After that, the player estimates the probability that a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability will appear in a predetermined period from the type of the effect stored in the game times that is stored in advance, and the specific effect is By waiting for the appearance, it is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set from the particular effect that appears.

As a gaming machine of a comparative example, when considering a configuration in which a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of a winning probability is executed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the above specific effect. Since the appearance probability of depends only on the model of the game machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kR1, in the predetermined period, the specific production is performed so that the appearance probability is based on the type of the production executed in the game times when the number of times becomes the predetermined number of times from the starting point. As a result, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the particular effect. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that a specific effect will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kR1, in order to estimate the appearance probability of a specific effect, the player needs to play the game when the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number from the start point. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game a predetermined number of times.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kR1 are installed, the player plays a game when the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number of times from the start point in each of the machines, so that a specific effect can be obtained. You can create a stand that easily appears with your own hands.

[Characteristic kR2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kR1,
As the type of the effect executed in the game times, the first game time effect (normal reach) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game time effect. At least with a second game time performance (super reach) that is also high,
The specific effect execution means,
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic kR2, the expectation that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process is higher than that in the case where the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect. Since the probability of appearance of a particular effect is higher in the case of two game times, the number of executions is a predetermined number of times from the time of starting from the viewpoint of the appearance probability of the particular effect for the player. It is possible to give an expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process in the game times thus, and that the second game times effect having a high expectation is generated.

[Characteristic kR3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kR1,
As types of the effects executed in the game times, a first game times effect (normal reach) and a second game times effect (super reach) in which the probability of being executed in the game times is lower than that in the first game times effect And at least,
The specific performance execution is
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic kR3, the case of the second game time effect having a lower probability of being executed in the game time is more than the case of the effect type stored in the effect type storage means being the first game time effect. Since the appearance probability of the specific effect is high, the player is executed in the game times in which the number of times of execution is a predetermined number from the time of starting from the viewpoint of the appearance probability of the specific effect for the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a second game time effect with a low probability and a high rarity is desired to occur.

[Characteristic kR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kR1 to kR3,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kR4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the winning condition in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means A specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed in one period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kR5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kR1 to kR4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic kR5, the effect type storage means includes means for storing the type of effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. By playing a game in the morning, the player observes which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, and estimates the probability of appearance of a particular effect. be able to. Therefore, according to the characteristic kR5, it is possible to positively urge the player to play the game from the morning.

<Characteristic kS group>
The characteristic kS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 7 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kS1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image (setting suggestion picture PY) suggesting the setting of the winning probability within a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
When the number of executions of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point, the effect type storage means (stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64) that stores the type of the effect executed in the game times The initial variation out flag, the initial variation normal reach flag, the initial variation super reach flag and the initial variation special reach flag, the MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, and the reach effect pattern setting process of FIG. 606 executed by the MPU 92. Steps Sk2403 to Sk2406, Sk2409 to Sk2412 and Sk2414 to Sk2416, and Steps Sk2503 to Sk2506, Sk2509 to Sk2512 and Sk2514 to Sk2516 of the normal jackpot production effect pattern setting process of FIG. 608 executed by MPU92, and MPU92. Steps Sk2603 to Sk2606, Sk2609 to Sk2612 and Sk2614 to Sk2616 of the probability variation big hit time production pattern setting process of FIG. 609, and step S2701 to Sk2703 of the off time production pattern setting process of FIG. 610 executed by the MPU 92,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Execution period for determining, based on the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from a plurality of effect periods for executing the effect Determining means (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, steps Sk3302 to Sk3306 of the normal reach time effect pattern table reference processing of FIG. 619 executed by the MPU 92, and super reach time effect of FIG. 620 executed by the MPU 92). Step Sk3402 to Step Sk3406 of the pattern table reference processing, Step Sk4202 to Step Sk4206 of the effect pattern table reference for disengagement shown in FIG. 6181 executed by the MPU 92, and Step Sk4302 of the ending effect processing of FIG. 629 executed by the MPU 92. ~ Step Sk4306 etc.)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kS1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery processing by receiving an operation from the outside, and the effect type storage means determines the number of times of game times to be executed from the start point. When the number of times is reached, the type of effect to be executed in the game time is stored, and the specific effect executing means has the predetermined appearance probability of the specific effect including the image suggesting the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined period. To be executed. Further, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is stored in the effect type storage means from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is determined based on the type of production that is being performed. Therefore, the player observes the effect executed in the game time when the number of executions of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, and first stores the type of the effect. Then, the player estimates the predetermined period in which the specific effect appears from the previously stored type of effect in the game times, and waits for the specific effect to appear in the predetermined period. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set based on the specific effect that has appeared. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which a predetermined period for executing a specific effect is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, a period for executing the specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. Decided. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kS1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so that the player is required to estimate the winning probability setting. Depending on the skill of the player, which strongly feels randomness about the appearance period of the effect, and takes into account the type of effect executed in the game time when the number of times of execution of the game time reaches a predetermined number from the start point, It is possible to accurately grasp the period during which the specific effect is executed, and thus to accurately estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kS1, in order to estimate the appearance period of the specific effect, the player needs to play the game when the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number from the start point. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game a predetermined number of times.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kS1 are installed, the player gives a specific effect by playing a game when the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number from the start point in each of the machines. You can create a platform that you can easily run for a long time.

[Characteristic kS2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kS1,
As the type of the effect executed in the game times, the first game time effect (normal reach) and the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process are higher than the first game time effect. At least with a second game time performance (super reach) that is also high,
The execution period determining means,
About the effect in which the probability of being executed in the game times is higher when the type of the effect stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect A gaming machine comprising means for deciding the predetermined period so as to be the effect period.

According to the characteristic kS2, the second game time, which has a higher expectation that the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process is satisfied, is higher than that in the case where the type of effect stored in the effect type storage means is the first game time effect. Since the predetermined period is determined so that the production period is the production period for the production that is more likely to be executed in the game time, the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined period for the player is increased. From the perspective of, in the game times in which the number of executions has become the predetermined number from the time when the starting point is set, the second information is produced with a high expectation that the special information satisfies the condition to win in the predetermined lottery process. You can add a sense of expectation that you want it.

[Characteristic kS3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kS1,
As types of the effects executed in the game times, a first game times effect (normal reach) and a second game times effect (super reach) in which the probability of being executed in the game times is lower than that in the first game times effect And at least,
The execution period determining means,
An effect that is more likely to be executed in the game times when the effect type stored in the effect type storage means is the second game time effect than when the effect type is the first game time effect The gaming machine is provided with means for determining the predetermined period so as to be the effect period.

According to the characteristic kS3, the case of the second game time effect having a lower probability of being executed in the game time is more than the case of the effect type stored in the effect type storage means being the first game time effect. Since the predetermined period is determined so as to be the production period for the production that has a high probability of being executed in the game time, the starting point is also set for the player in terms of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined period. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that a second game time effect having a low probability of being executed and a high rarity is generated in a game time when the number of times of execution has reached a predetermined number since then.

[Characteristic kS4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kS1 to kS3,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kS4, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing the effect in the game times and a second period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the number of opportunities for executing the specific effect is increased.

[Characteristic kS5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kS1 to kS4,
The effect type storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing the type of the effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated.

According to the characteristic kS5, the effect type storage means includes means for storing the type of effect executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, so that, for example, when the game machine is activated in the morning. The player, by playing the game in the morning, observes which type of effect is executed in the first game time after the game machine is activated, and estimates the appearance period of the specific effect. be able to. Therefore, according to the characteristic kS5, it is possible to actively encourage the player to start playing the game from the morning.

<Characteristic kT group>
The characteristic kT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 8 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kT1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
A launching means for launching a game ball,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 250) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image (setting suggestion picture PY) suggesting the setting of the winning probability within a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
When the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point becomes N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is the plurality of routes by the distribution means. A distribution destination storage unit that stores as a distribution destination which one of the routes is distributed (the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64, and a voice) MPU92 on the side of the light emission control board 91, the update process at the time of entering the ball of FIG. 632 executed by the MPU92),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A means for executing the specific effect (the MPU 92 on the sound emission control board 91 side, so that the predetermined appearance probability is an appearance probability based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means, (Ending effect setting process of FIG. 637 executed by MPU 92)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kT1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery processing by receiving an operation from the outside, and the distribution destination storage means causes the N-th game ball from the start point. Is stored as a distribution destination to which of the plurality of routes is distributed by the distribution means, the specific effect execution means, in a predetermined period, a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability, It is executed so that the appearance probability is based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means. Therefore, the player observes to which route the N-th game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the starting point, and first stores the distribution destination. After that, the player estimates the probability that a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability appears in a predetermined period from the previously stored distribution destination, and waits for the specific effect to appear. It is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set based on the specific effect that has appeared.

As a gaming machine of a comparative example, when considering a configuration in which a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of a winning probability is executed with a predetermined appearance probability, in the gaming machine of the comparative example, the above specific effect. Since the appearance probability of depends only on the model of the game machine, the player cannot feel the randomness. On the other hand, according to the feature kT1, the appearance probability is based on the distribution destination indicating which route the N-th game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the start point in the predetermined period. As described above, since the specific effect is executed, the player can strongly feel the randomness in the appearance probability of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player an expectation that a specific effect will appear, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the characteristic kT1, the player plays the game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point is N in order to estimate the appearance probability of the specific effect. Since it is necessary, it is possible to positively urge the player to play the N game times.

When a plurality of gaming machines with the characteristic kT1 are installed, the player can play a game when the number of gaming balls reaching the sorting means from the starting point of each is N. , You can create a stand on which a particular effect is likely to appear with your own hands.

[Characteristic kT2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kT1,
First ball entering means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter,
Second ball entering means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter,
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquiring means is a game ball entering the first ball entering means or a game ball entering the second ball entering means,
further,
Means for executing a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege on the basis that it is judged by the judging means that the winning condition is satisfied, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means. The privilege given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion. A special game state executing means set so as to be advantageous to the player over the award provided;
The distribution means,
As the plurality of paths, a first path to the first ball entering means and a second path to the second ball entering means are provided,
The specific effect execution means,
The appearance probability of the specific effect is higher when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route than when the distribution destination is the first route. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic kT2, the advantage given to the first entrance means is more advantageous than the case where the distribution destination stored in the allocation destination storage means is the first route to the first entrance means. Since the appearance probability of the specific effect is higher in the case of the second route to the 2 ball entry means, from the point of view of the appearance probability of the specific effect with respect to the player, from the time of the starting point. It is possible to provide an expectation that the distribution means for the N-th game ball should be the second route.

[Characteristic kT3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kT1 or the characteristic kT2,
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kT3, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed in one period after the end of the game game in which it is determined that the winning condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

[Characteristic kT4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kT1 to kT3,
The sorting destination storage means,
A game machine comprising a means for storing as a distribution destination which one of the plurality of paths the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means after the game machine is activated. ..

According to the characteristic kT4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing as a distribution destination the route to which the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was activated. , When the game machine is started in the morning, the player plays the game in the morning to determine which route the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was started. By observing, the appearance probability of a particular effect can be estimated. Therefore, according to the characteristic kT4, it is possible to actively encourage the player to play the game from the morning.

<Characteristic kU group>
The characteristic kU group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 9 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kU1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
Game time effect execution means for executing effects in the game times (MPU 92 on the side of the sound emission control board 91, game time effect setting process of FIG. 604 executed by MPU 92),
A launching means for launching a game ball,
Sorting means (sorting mechanism 250) for sorting the arrived game balls into a plurality of routes,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image (setting suggestion picture PY) suggesting the setting of the winning probability within a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
When the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point becomes N (N is an integer of 1 or more), the Nth game ball is the plurality of routes by the distribution means. A distribution destination storage unit that stores as a distribution destination which one of the routes is distributed (the first variation first symbol flag and the first variation second symbol flag stored in various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64, and a voice) MPU92 on the side of the light emission control board 91, the update process at the time of entering the ball of FIG. 632 executed by the MPU92),
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
An execution period in which the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined based on the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means from among a plurality of effect periods for executing the effect. A gaming machine comprising a determining means.

According to the characteristic kU1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside, and the distribution destination storage means causes the N-th game ball from the start point. Which route of the plurality of routes has been sorted by the sorting unit is stored as a sorting destination, and the specific rendering execution unit presets a specific rendering including an image indicating the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined period. It is executed so as to have the appearance probability of. Further, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is stored in the effect type storage means from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is determined based on the type of production that is being performed. Therefore, the player observes to which route the N-th game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the starting point, and first stores the distribution destination. After that, the player estimates the predetermined period in which the specific effect appears from the previously stored distribution destination, waits for the specific effect to appear in the predetermined period, and waits for the specific effect that appears. From the effect, it is possible to infer which of the winning probabilities is set. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which a predetermined period for executing a specific effect is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, a period for executing the specific effect depends only on the model of the gaming machine. Decided. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kU1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, so that the player is required to estimate the setting of the winning probability. Depending on the skill of the player, such as strong sense of randomness regarding the appearance period of the effect, and taking into consideration which route the Nth game ball has been distributed to by the distribution means from the start It is possible to accurately grasp the period to be executed, and to accurately estimate the winning probability setting. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the technology, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic kU1, in order to estimate the appearance period of a particular effect, the player plays a game when the number of game balls that have reached the distribution means from the start point is N. Since it is necessary, the player can be actively urged to play the N game times.

In the case where a plurality of gaming machines of the characteristic kU1 are installed, the player plays a game when the number of gaming balls reaching the sorting means from the starting point of each is N. , You can create a stand on which a particular effect is likely to appear, with your own hands.

[Characteristic kU2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kU1,
First ball entering means (first starting port 233) into which a game ball can enter,
Second ball entering means (second starting port 234) into which a game ball can enter,
Equipped with
The acquisition condition in the information acquiring means is a game ball entering the first ball entering means or a game ball entering the second ball entering means,
further,
Means for executing a special game state in which the player is provided with a privilege on the basis that it is judged by the judging means that the winning condition is satisfied, and the game ball is inserted into the second ball entering means. The privilege given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball is given to the player in the special game state executed based on the ball entering the game ball into the first ball entering portion. A special game state executing means set so as to be advantageous to the player over the award provided;
The distribution means,
As the plurality of paths, a first path to the first ball entering means and a second path to the second ball entering means are provided,
The execution period determining means,
When the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the second route, the performance period for the production having a higher execution probability is higher than that when the second route is the first route. A gaming machine comprising: means for determining the predetermined period.

According to the characteristic kU2, the privilege that is given to the first entrance means is more advantageous than when the distribution destination stored in the distribution destination storage means is the first route to the first entrance means. Since the predetermined period is determined such that the second route to the two-ball entry means is the production period for the production that is more likely to be executed, the predetermined period is determined for the player. From the viewpoint of the frequency of occurrence of the period, it is possible to give an expectation that the N-th gaming ball from the starting point should be assigned to the second route by the sorting means.

[Characteristic kU3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kU1 or the characteristic kU2,
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kU3, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing the effect in the game times and a second period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the number of opportunities for executing the specific effect is increased.

[Characteristic kU4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features kU1 to kU3,
The sorting destination storage means,
A game machine comprising: means for storing as a distribution destination which path of the plurality of paths the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the starting point.

According to the characteristic kU4, the distribution destination storage means includes means for storing as a distribution destination the route to which the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was activated. , When the game machine is started in the morning, the player plays the game in the morning to determine which route the first game ball has been distributed by the distribution means since the game machine was started. It is possible to observe and estimate the appearance period of a specific effect. Therefore, according to the characteristic kU4, it is possible to positively urge the player to start playing the game in the morning.

<Characteristic kV group>
The characteristic kV group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 10 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kV1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image (setting suggestion picture PY) suggesting the setting of the winning probability within a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
Degree parameter deriving means (appearance probability lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the specific effect such that the predetermined appearance probability becomes an appearance probability based on the degree parameter.

According to the characteristic kV1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means determines the degree of the appearance probability of the specific effect. The degree parameter is derived, and the specific effect execution means causes the specific effect including the image suggesting the setting of the winning probability to be the appearance probability based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter derivation means in the predetermined period. To be executed. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example that executes a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability with a predetermined appearance probability in a predetermined period, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, the gaming machine The appearance probability of a particular performance is determined depending on the model. On the other hand, according to the feature kV1, since the specific effect is executed so as to have the appearance probability based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means, the specific effect depends on only the model of the gaming machine. Since the appearance probability of the effect is not determined, the player feels randomness in the appearance probability of the specific effect. Therefore, according to the gaming machine with the characteristic kV1, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a specific effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability is likely to appear.

[Characteristic kV2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic kV1,
A game machine comprising: a degree parameter effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means.

According to the characteristic kV2, the player observes and stores the effect corresponding to the degree parameter in advance, and then estimates the degree of the appearance probability of the specific effect in a predetermined period from the stored effect. You can Therefore, the player can estimate the appearance probability of a particular effect including an image that suggests the setting of the winning probability.

[Characteristic kV3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kV2,
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (provided with the MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, the game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by the MPU62,
The degree parameter deriving means,
By means of lottery, means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates,
The degree parameter effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from the time of starting point to a predetermined number of times of executing the game time.

According to the characteristic kV3, in order to estimate the appearance probability of a particular effect, the player has to play the game from the time of the starting point until the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number of times. The player can be actively encouraged to play a game during this period. For example, if the starting point is at the time of starting the gaming machine, the feature kV3 can actively encourage the player to start playing the game from the morning.

[Characteristic kV4]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kV3,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The predetermined period is one period (ending period) after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition.

According to the characteristic kV4, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the winning condition in the predetermined lottery process, the privilege granting means grants the privilege after the end of the game, and the special effect executing means In a period after the end of the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the special information should satisfy the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, also in terms of causing a specific effect to appear.

<Characteristic kW group>
The characteristic kW group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modification example 11 of the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic kW1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Judgment means (main control board 61 side) for judging whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a winning condition in a predetermined lottery process (a lottery for referring to a win/loss table for low probability mode) 592, and the hit determination process of FIG. 592 executed by the MPU 62),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Setting change means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side and the setting of FIG. 588 executed by the MPU 62) that executes a setting change process that can change the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by receiving an operation from the outside. Change process),
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including an image (setting suggestion picture PY) suggesting the setting of the winning probability within a predetermined period so as to have a predetermined appearance probability;
Degree parameter deriving means (appearance period lottery) for deriving a degree parameter for determining the degree of the predetermined appearance probability,
Equipped with
The specific effect execution means,
Execution period determining means for determining the predetermined period for executing the specific effect from a plurality of effect periods for executing effects, based on the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic kW1, the setting change means changes the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process by accepting an operation from the outside, and the degree parameter deriving means determines the degree of the appearance probability of the specific effect. The degree parameter is derived, and the specific effect execution unit executes a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability in a predetermined period. Furthermore, the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is derived by the degree parameter deriving means from the plurality of effect periods for executing the effect, by the execution period determining means included in the specific effect executing means. It is decided based on the degree parameter. When considering a gaming machine of a comparative example in which a period for executing a specific effect including an image suggesting the setting of the winning probability is fixed, according to the gaming machine of the comparative example, it depends on only the model of the gaming machine. The period for executing a specific performance is determined. On the other hand, according to the characteristic kW1, the period for executing the specific effect is not determined depending only on the model of the gaming machine, and thus the player is required to estimate the setting of the winning probability. I feel a randomness about the appearance period of the production. If the appearance period changes, the appearance frequency usually changes, so that the player feels randomness in the appearance of a particular effect. Therefore, according to the gaming machine with the characteristic kW1, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the specific effect including the image suggesting the setting of the winning probability is likely to appear.

[Characteristic kW2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic kW1,
A gaming machine, comprising: a degree parameter effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter derived by the degree parameter deriving means, within a predetermined period from the time of starting point.

According to the characteristic kW2, the player observes and stores the effect corresponding to the degree parameter in advance, and thereafter, from the stored effect, the specific effect including the image suggesting the setting of the winning probability appears. Can be predicted.

[Characteristic kW3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic kW2,
When it is set that one of the game times ends the game time operation after the game time operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started, the game time execution is executed. Means (MPU62 on the main control board 61 side, game time control processing of FIG. 589 executed by MPU62),
The degree parameter deriving means,
By means of lottery, means for determining the degree parameter from a plurality of predetermined candidates,
The degree parameter effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means for executing an effect corresponding to the degree parameter within a period from the time of starting point to a predetermined number of times of executing the game time.

According to the characteristic kW3, in order to estimate the appearance period of the specific effect, the player needs to play the game from the time of the starting point until the number of times of execution of the game reaches a predetermined number of times. , It is possible to actively encourage the player to play a game during this period. For example, if the starting point is at the time of starting the gaming machine, the characteristic kW3 can actively encourage the player to start playing the game from the morning.

[Characteristic kW4]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic kW3,
In the game time, when it is determined that the special information satisfies the condition for winning in the predetermined lottery process, a privilege granting means (MPU 62 on the main control board 61 side) for granting a privilege after the game time is over. And a special winning opening/closing process of FIG. 596 executed by the MPU 62),
The plurality of effect periods to be determined by the execution period determining means are the first period for executing the effect in the game times and the game times determined to satisfy the winning condition. A second period (ending period) after the end, and at least a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic kW4, a plurality of periods including at least a first period for executing the effect in the game time and a second period after the game time is determined to satisfy the winning condition. In any of the above, a specific effect for suggesting the setting of the winning probability by the appearance probability is executed. Since the second period occurs only when the winning condition is met, the first period has a higher occurrence frequency than the second period. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the predetermined period for executing the specific effect is determined to be the first period and the number of opportunities for executing the specific effect is increased.

<Feature IA group>
The feature IA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic lA1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
A means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, as a transition mode in which the timing of transitioning the state information is different, the first transition mode (previous drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game time, and the timing in the end of the game time A second transition mode (post-fall mode) is provided, and the first transition mode can be executed when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-fall mode). , The state information transfer means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680) that enables execution of the second transfer mode when the second condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the post-fall mode). Sx1110 to Sx1116)
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature 1A1, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means identifies the first state from the information identifying the states other than the first state. The transition timing is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game time and a second transition mode at the end of the game time. Therefore, according to the feature 1A1, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game based on the information specifying the first state after the state information has been transferred and the state information are transferred. A game is played in two ways: a game based on information that identifies a state other than the first state before. Therefore, according to the feature 1A1, there is an effect that it is possible to widen the range of the modes of the game in the game times and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lA2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1A1,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature 1A2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Therefore, according to the feature 1A2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Characteristic lA3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1A2,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game time when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is set to the first information from the information that identifies a state other than the first state. Means (step S1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679) for shifting the state (low frequency support mode) to the information for specifying;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature 1A3, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions, which are executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the first time by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game times in which it is decided to execute the judgment in the judgment mode, at the start of the game times, the state information indicates the first state from the information specifying the state other than the first state. The information is specified, and the state of the auxiliary means is changed to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. For this reason, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means is in the first control mode at the start of the game time, the current game time is the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Of the game times that the first condition is satisfied and is executed in the first transition mode, and the game times that the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode It is unclear which one, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the both game times the change in the state of the auxiliary means is associated with the change in the state information. Therefore, according to the feature 1A3, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lA4]
A gaming machine according to feature 1A2 or feature 1A3,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
In the game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is set to the first state information. Means for maintaining a state other than the above state (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature 1A4, the game number corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the game number executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information satisfy the predetermined condition. In both cases, the state information is not the one and the game time in which the judgment is decided to be executed in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode deciding means (the game time at the time of disconnection). Is maintained in information that identifies a state other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means is continuing the second control mode in the game time, the current game time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. It is a game time that the second condition is satisfied and is executed in the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determining unit determines the second determination mode. It is unclear which one of the game times it was decided to execute, but it can be inferred that the game has been narrowed down to one of the both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the state of the auxiliary means which of the two game times it is. Therefore, according to the feature 1A4, it is possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic lA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features 1A1 to 1A4,
The state information transfer means,
The game number after the number of executions of the game number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state reaches the predetermined number. And, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game machine is provided with a unit that shifts the state information.

According to the feature IA5, the game after the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state When it is the number of times and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of the game mode.

<Feature IB group>
The feature 1B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature IB1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
Production execution means for executing production in the game times,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The effect execution means,
A condition that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is a first condition (a big win in a winning lottery), a first result that the first condition is satisfied, and a game that is higher than the first condition. The second result that the second condition having a low degree of advantage for the player (determined to cause the outreach) is satisfied, and the third condition having a low degree of advantage for the player (falling down) than the second condition. A third result of winning the lottery), and a result notification effecting means for executing a result notification effect of notifying which of the third result is satisfied,
A means for executing a predetermined effect before the result notification effect, and a first suggestion effect (life or death) that suggests that the predetermined effect corresponds to one of the first result and the third result. Battle effect) and a second suggestion effect (superior battle effect) that suggests that either the first result or the second result is applicable, a predetermined effect execution. Means and
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to the feature 1B1, the first result that the first condition that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is satisfied in the game time, and the second condition that is less advantageous to the player than the first condition Execution of a result notification effect that notifies which of the second result that is satisfied and the third result that the third condition, which is less advantageous to the player than the second condition, is satisfied. However, as a result, a predetermined effect is executed before the notification effect. As the predetermined effect, the first suggestive effect that suggests that the first result or the third result is applicable, and the suggestion that the first effect or the second result is applicable One of the second suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. Conventionally, in the case of suggesting three results, it is common to suggest that one of the first result, the second result, and the third result is applicable. Is limited to one type of suggestive performance. On the other hand, according to the feature IB1, the first suggestive effect that suggests that one of the first result and the third result falls under any of the first result and the second result. It is possible to execute two types of suggestive effects such as a second suggestive effect that suggests that the above condition applies. Therefore, according to the feature 1B1, it is possible to widen the range of aspects of the predetermined effect performed before the result notification effect in the game time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature IB2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1B1,
A state storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
The game time execution means,
A means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, as a transition mode in which the timing of transitioning the state information is different, the first transition mode (previous drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game time, and the timing in the end of the game time A second transition mode (post-fall mode) is provided, and the first transition mode can be executed when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-fall mode). , The state information transfer means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680, which enables execution of the second transfer mode when the second condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the post-fall mode). Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The predetermined effect execution means,
It is provided with means for executing the first suggestion effect in a game time in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, and for executing the second suggestion effect in a game time in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature IB2, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means identifies the first state from the information identifying the states other than the first state. The transition timing is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round, and the first transition The first suggestion effect is executed in the game time when the transition is performed in the mode, and the second suggestion effect is executed in the game time when the transition is performed in the second transition mode. Therefore, according to the feature IB2, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first suggestive effect based on the information specifying the first state after the state information is transferred, and the state information are The suggestive effect is provided in two ways, that is, a second suggestive effect based on information specifying a state other than the first state before the transition. Therefore, according to the feature IB2, it is possible to widen the range of the aspect of the effect in the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. .

[Feature LB3]
A gaming machine according to feature IB2,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature 1B3, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Therefore, according to the feature 1B3, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, the interest in the game can be further improved.

[Feature IB4]
A gaming machine according to feature LB3,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game time when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is set to the first information from the information that identifies a state other than the first state. Means (step S1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679) for shifting the state (low frequency support mode) to the information for specifying;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature IB4, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the game times being executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the first by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game times in which it is decided to execute the judgment in the judgment mode, at the start of the game times, the state information indicates the first state from the information specifying the state other than the first state. The information is specified, and the state of the auxiliary means is changed to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. For this reason, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means is in the first control mode at the start of the game time, the current game time is the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Of the game times that the first condition is satisfied and is executed in the first transition mode, and the game times that the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode It is unclear which one, but it can be inferred that it has been narrowed down to one of both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the both game times the change in the state of the auxiliary means is associated with the change in the state information. Therefore, according to the feature IB4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature IB5]
A gaming machine according to feature LB3 or feature LB4,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
In the game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is set to the first state information. Means for maintaining a state other than the above state (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature IB5, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the game times being executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. In both cases, the state information is not the one and the game time in which the judgment is decided to be executed in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode deciding means (the game time at the time of disconnection). Is maintained in the information that identifies a state other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means is continuing the second control mode in the game time, the current game time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. It is a game time that the second condition is satisfied and is executed in the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determining unit determines the second determination mode. It is unclear which one of the game times it was decided to execute, but it can be inferred that the game has been narrowed down to one of the both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the state of the auxiliary means which of the two game times it is. Therefore, according to the feature IB5, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature IB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features 1B1 to 1B5,
The state information transfer means,
The game number after the number of executions of the game number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state reaches the predetermined number. And, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game machine is provided with a unit that shifts the state information.

According to the feature IB6, the game after the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state When the number of times is one and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of the mode of the effect.

<Characteristic IC group>
The feature IC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Characteristic lC1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
A predetermined operation executing means (an electric accessory 34a, an electric accessory drive unit 34b) capable of executing a predetermined operation capable of changing the degree of advantage for the player;
Production execution means for executing production in the game times,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is advantageous to the player from the second operation mode to the second operation mode. A means for shifting to a first operation mode having a low degree, and a first transition mode (preliminary drop mode) in which the timing is the start time of the game time, as a transition mode in which the timing of shifting the operation mode is different. And a second transition mode (post-fall mode) in which the timing is the end of the game time, an operation mode transition means (steps S11104 and Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680) is provided,
The effect execution means,
In the game times in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, the first effect (life/dead battle effect) is executed, and in the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, from the first effect Also, the gaming machine is provided with means for executing a second effect (superior battle effect) that suggests that the degree of advantage for the player is high.

According to the feature lC1, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the operation mode for the predetermined operation performed by the predetermined operation execution means changes from the second operation mode to the second operation mode for the player. Although it is shifted to the first operation mode having a low degree of advantage, the timing of this transition is the first transition mode at the start of the game round and the second transition mode at the end of the game round. Can be switched between. Then, in the game times in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, that is, in the game times in which the advantage is quickly moved to the first action having the low advantage degree, the first effect on the side having the low advantage degree for the player is executed. , In the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, that is, in the game times in which the first operation having a low advantage degree is late, the second effect on the side having a high advantage degree for the player is executed. . Therefore, according to the feature lC1, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, it is advantageous for the player in conformity with the degree of advantage that the player can be obtained by the predetermined action by the predetermined action executing means. It is possible to switch between the first effect and the second effect having different degrees. Therefore, according to the feature lC1, there is an effect that it is possible to widen the range of the aspect of the effect in the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lC2]
A gaming machine according to feature lC1,
The predetermined operation executing means,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means into which the game ball can enter
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
Equipped with
The game time execution means,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means as different control modes. It has at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means, and realizes the first operation mode by executing the first control mode, and the second control. A gaming machine comprising: a control unit that realizes the second operation mode according to a mode.

According to the feature lC2, by switching the control mode for transitioning the state of the auxiliary means from the second control mode to the first control mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation executing means is changed to the second operation. From the mode, it is possible to shift to the first mode of operation, which is less advantageous to the player than the second mode of operation. Therefore, according to the feature lC2, the controllability is excellent.

[Feature lC3]
A gaming machine according to feature lC2,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game time when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means is set to the second operation mode. Means for shifting from the operation mode to the first operation mode (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature lC3, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the game times being executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the first by the determination mode determining means. In either case of the game times in which it is determined to execute the determination in the determination mode, the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means at the start of the game time is from the second operation mode. , The first operation mode, which is less advantageous to the player than the second operation mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation execution means becomes the first operation mode at the start of the game time, the current game time satisfies the predetermined condition. It is determined that the game times corresponding to the special information to be satisfied, the game times being executed in the first transition mode when the first condition is satisfied, and the judgment mode determining means executing the judgment in the first judgment mode. It is unclear which one of the two game times it was played, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the two game times the change is in the operation mode of the predetermined operation executing means. Therefore, according to the feature lC3, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lC4]
A gaming machine according to feature lC2 or feature lC3,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
In the game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining unit determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the predetermined operation executing unit determines Means for maintaining the operation mode for a predetermined operation in the second operation mode (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature lC4, the game number corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, which is executed in the second transition mode when the second condition is satisfied, and the special information satisfy the predetermined condition. In any case, a predetermined operation in the game time, which is not the one and the game time in which the judgment is decided to be executed in the second judgment mode by the judgment mode deciding means (the game time at the time of deviation) The operation mode for the predetermined operation by the executing means is maintained in the second operation mode. Therefore, when the player observes that the operation mode for the predetermined operation by the predetermined operation executing means continues the second operation mode in the game time, the current game time is the predetermined condition. The game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the second condition and executed in the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determining means. Although it is unknown which one of the game times it is determined to execute the determination in the second determination mode by, it can be inferred that the game number has been narrowed down to either of the both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the both game times the operation is based on the operation mode of the predetermined operation executing means. Therefore, according to the feature lC4, it is possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Features 1D group>
The feature ID group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature 1D1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
Production execution means for executing production in the game times,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
The determination mode determination means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode (does not win the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (big hit in the winning lottery) When the game time related to the specific case is started, the stored first state information is used to identify the first state from information that identifies a state other than the first state. And game time start state information transfer means (steps S11104 and Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680) for performing processing to transfer information to
At the end of the game time according to the specific case, the game time end is performed in which the stored state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. Time state information transfer means (step Sl1606 in the game state transfer process of FIG. 685),
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-run mode), the processing by the game time start state information transfer means can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (mode selection) When the result of the lottery is in the post-fall mode), a transfer switching means that enables the processing by the game time end state information transfer means to be executed,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
In the game game according to the specific case, the determination mode determination means determines that the determination is performed in the first determination mode (winning the falling lottery), and the special information is the predetermined condition. And a first suggestion production means for executing a suggestion production (live/dead battle production) that suggests that either of the following is satisfied (a big hit in the winning lottery)
In the game game according to the specific case, the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. And second suggestion producing means for executing a suggestion producing (predominant battle production) suggesting that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.
When the first condition is established, the suggestive effect can be executed by the first suggestion producing means, and when the second condition is established, the suggestive effect can be executed by the second suggestive producing means. Suggestion effect switching means (steps S12603 to Sx2608 in the effect pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games in FIG. 695),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature 1D1, when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (=specific case), at the start of the game game. , The state information is changed from the information for identifying the state other than the first state to the information for identifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the first determination mode. And that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a suggestion effect is suggested. The determination that the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, and thus the advantage degree for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, the fact that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition means that the player has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, when the timing at which the state information is transferred to the information that specifies the first state is at the start of the player, the degree of advantage for the player is low and the advantage for the player is low. A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree is high or that the situation falls under any of the above is executed. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from the information identifying the state other than the first state to the information identifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature 1D1. , At the start of the game times, the player will be disadvantaged, and before notifying that, there is a low degree of advantage for the player and a high degree of advantage for the player. It is possible to perform suggestive production that suggests that any of the above is applicable. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the feature 1D1, the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is performed in the second determination mode, and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case) At the end, the state information is changed from the information identifying the state other than the first state to the information identifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode. And that the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition or the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a suggestion production is executed to indicate that the special information is applicable. . The fact that the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition can be said to be a state in which neither advantage nor disadvantage is provided to the player. On the other hand, the fact that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition means that the player has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous for the player when the timing of shifting the state information to the information for identifying the first state is at the time of the player's end, and for the player. A suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the degree of advantage is high or that either of the cases is applicable. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature 1D1. Since the player is not disadvantaged until the game time is over, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player in the game time, and is highly advantageous to the player. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect that suggests that Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, the player can be provided with an expectation, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, according to the feature 1D1, in the game game according to the case where the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition (=specific case). , The suggestive effect by the first suggestive effecting means and the suggestive effect by the second suggestive effecting means. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, there is an effect that it is possible to widen the range of the aspect of the effect in the game time according to the specific case, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1D2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1D1,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature 1D2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Therefore, according to the feature 1D2, the player can infer the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Feature 1D3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1D1 or feature 1D2,
Each of the game time start state information transfer means and the game time end state information transfer means,
The game number after the number of executions of the game number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state reaches the predetermined number. And, in the specific case, the game machine is provided with a unit that transfers the state information.

According to the feature 1D3, the game after the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state When the number of times is one and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of the game mode.

<Feature lE group>
The feature 1E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modified examples.

[Feature lE1]
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information triggered by the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means,
Means for determining whether or not the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and as a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode), Determination means having a second determination mode (high probability mode) in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Production execution means for executing production in the game times,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determination mode is shifted from the first determination mode to the second determination mode upon the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, and the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control. Determination mode/control mode shifting means for shifting to the mode,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game time when it is determined by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the determination mode is shifted from the second determination mode to the first determination mode. Determination mode transition means (step Sl1004 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679),
Starting from the time when the determination mode/control mode transition means shifts the determination mode from the first determination mode to the second determination mode, the number of executions of the game times from the starting point becomes a predetermined number. A predetermined number of times of pre-processing means for continuing the second control mode as the control mode until reaching
After the number of executions of the game times from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, when the determination mode is the second determination mode, the second control mode is continued as the control mode, A predetermined number of times of post-processing means for shifting the control mode from the second control mode to the first control mode when the determination mode shifts from the second control mode to the first determination mode;
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
When the second control mode continues as the control mode after the number of times the game times have been executed from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times, the first determination is made by the determination mode determination means. In the game times determined to execute the determination in the mode (game times won in the falling lottery), or game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (game times won in the jackpot), A first effecting means for effecting a predetermined content effect (life or death battle effect);
A game time (outgoing game time) in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or Second effect means for performing an effect (superior battle effect) having content different from the predetermined content in the game time (the game time when the jackpot is won) in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature lE1, the control mode is set to the second control mode after the number of executions of the game times from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, with the starting point being the time when the determination mode is shifted to the second determination mode. In the case of continuing, the game contents for which the judgment mode determining means has decided to execute the judgment in the first judgment mode, or the game times for which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, have the predetermined contents. The performance is executed. On the other hand, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the game time for which the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or the special information satisfies the predetermined condition In the game time, which is, an effect having contents different from the predetermined contents is executed. Therefore, in the game number after the number of times of execution of the game number from the starting point reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform in two ways, an effect of a predetermined content and an effect of a content different from the predetermined content, There is an effect that it is possible to widen the range of the mode of production and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lE2]
A gaming machine described in Feature 1E1,
The special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of times of executing the game time from the starting point reaches the predetermined number of times. Is provided (when the jackpot is won), at the start of the game time, means for shifting the determination mode from the second determination mode to the first determination mode,
The first effect means,
As the presentation of the predetermined content, that the determination mode determination means has determined to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition A game machine characterized by executing a suggestion effect (life or death battle effect) that suggests that it has become (a big hit in the winning lottery) or one of.

According to the feature 1E2, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the control mode is maintained in the second control mode after the number of executions of the game time from the starting point reaches the predetermined number. The determination mode shifts from the second determination mode to the first determination mode at the start of a certain game number and at the start of the game number at which the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the first determination mode. At the same time, in the game times, it is determined that the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode, and that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. The suggestive effect suggesting that the above condition is applicable is executed. The determination that the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, and thus the advantage degree for the player is low. turn into. On the other hand, the fact that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition means that the player has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the feature lE2, the suggestion effect is suggested, which indicates that the advantage degree is low for the player or the advantage degree is high for the player. The player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Feature lE3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1E1 or feature 1E2,
The second effect means,
As an effect of content different from the predetermined content, the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A game characterized by executing a suggestive effect (superior battle effect) that indicates that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition or that Machine.

According to the feature lE3, the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the game number for which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, or the special information has the predetermined condition. In the game times that satisfy the condition, it is possible to perform suggestive production that suggests that the game is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player, and that the degree of advantage to the player is high. Therefore, according to the feature lE3, the player can be provided with an expectation, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Features 1F group>
The feature IF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature 1F1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
Production execution means for executing production in the game times,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
The determination mode determination means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode (does not win the falling lottery), and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (a big hit in the winning lottery). When the game times related to the specific case are ended, the stored state information specifies the first state from the information that specifies a state other than the first state. And game state end state information transfer means (step Sl1606 in the game state transfer process of FIG. 685) for performing the process of transferring to the information to be
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
In the game game according to the specific case, the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. And a first suggestion production means for executing a suggestion production (superior battle production) suggesting that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. And a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic 1F1, when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (=specific case), at the end of the game game, The state information is transferred from the information identifying the state other than the first state to the information identifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode, and A suggestion effect is suggested, which indicates that one of the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The fact that the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the second determination mode and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition can be said to be a state in which neither advantage nor disadvantage is provided to the player. On the other hand, the fact that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition means that the player has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the feature 1F1, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player when the timing of shifting the state information to the information for identifying the first state is at the time of the player's end, and to the player. A suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the degree of advantage is high or that either of the cases is applicable. If it is assumed that shifting the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature 1F1. Since the player is not disadvantaged until the game time is over, it is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous to the player in the game time, and is highly advantageous to the player. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect that suggests that Therefore, according to the feature 1F1, the player can be given an expectation, and as a result, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Feature 1F2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1F1,
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time according to the specific case, the game time start is performed in which the stored state information is transferred from the information specifying the state other than the first state to the information specifying the first state. Time state information transfer means (steps S1104, Sx1110 to Sx1116 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680),
When the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-run mode), the processing by the game time start state information transfer means can be executed, and when the second condition is satisfied (mode selection) When the result of the lottery is in the post-fall mode), a transfer switching means that enables the processing by the game time end state information transfer means to be executed,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
In the game game according to the specific case, it is determined by the determination mode determination means to execute the determination in the first determination mode (winning in the falling lottery), and the special information is the predetermined condition. And a second suggestion production means for executing a suggestion production (life or death battle production) that suggests that either of the following is satisfied (a big hit in the winning lottery) or
When the first condition is established, the suggestive effect can be executed by the second suggestive producing means, and when the second condition is established, the suggestive producing operation by the first suggestive producing means can be executed. Suggestion effect switching means (steps S12603 to Sx2608 in the effect pattern setting process after the number of guaranteed games in FIG. 695),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature 1F2, when the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode and the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (=specific case), at the start of the game game, The state information is changed from the information for identifying the state other than the first state to the information for identifying the first state, and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode. And that the special information satisfies one of the predetermined conditions and a suggestion effect is suggested. The determination that the determination mode determining means determines to perform the determination in the first determination mode means that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is low, and thus the degree of advantage for the player is low. Will end up. On the other hand, the fact that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition means that the player has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, according to the feature 1D1, when the timing at which the state information is transferred to the information that specifies the first state is at the start of the player, the degree of advantage for the player is low and the advantage for the player is low. A suggestive effect that suggests that the degree is high or that the situation falls under any of the above is executed. If it is assumed that the transition of the state information from the information identifying the state other than the first state to the information identifying the first state is disadvantageous to the player, according to the feature IF2. , At the start of the game times, the player will be disadvantaged, and before notifying that, there is a low degree of advantage for the player and a high degree of advantage for the player. It is possible to perform suggestive production that suggests that any of the above is applicable. Therefore, according to the feature 1F2, it is possible to give the player an expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature 1F3]
A gaming machine according to feature IF1 or feature IF2,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature 1F3, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary means is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage means. Therefore, according to the feature 1F3, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Feature 1F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features IF1 to IF3,
Each of the game time start state information transfer means and the game time end state information transfer means,
The game number after the number of executions of the game number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state reaches the predetermined number. And, in the specific case, the game machine is provided with a unit that transfers the state information.

According to the feature 1F4, the game after the number of times of execution of the game times reaches a predetermined number after the state information is transferred from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying the state other than the first state When the number of times is one and the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of game modes.

<Feature lg group>
The feature group 1G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 2 of the twelfth embodiment.

[Characteristic lG1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
When the first condition (winning the probability variation big hit by the winning lottery and after the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is established, the stored state information is changed from the information identifying the first state. First state information transfer means for transferring to information specifying a state other than the first state,
After the transfer by the first state information transfer means, the game time when the second condition (winning the big hit in the winning lottery) is established is defined as the specific game time, and is stored as the specific game time. Second state information transfer means for transferring the state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state,
Equipped with
The second state information transfer means,
As a transition mode in which the timing of transitioning the state information is different, a first transition mode (preliminary drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the specific game time, and a timing in which the timing is at the end of the specific game time 2 transition mode (post-falling mode), and whether the first transition mode or the second transition mode is adopted to transition the state information 1. A game machine comprising a transition mode determining means for determining based on the number of times of executing the game times that has been executed up to the specific game time after the transition by the state information transferring means.

According to the feature lG1, when the first condition is satisfied, the state information stored in the state storage means shifts from the information identifying the first state to the information identifying a state other than the first state. Then, after the transition, in the specific game time when the second condition is satisfied, the state information is shifted from the information identifying the state other than the first state to the information identifying the first state, The timing of this transition is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round. Therefore, according to the feature lG1, in the specific game time, a game based on the information that identifies the first state after the state information has been transferred, and a state other than the first state before the state information has been transferred. A game is played in two ways: a game based on information specifying Therefore, according to the feature lG1, it is possible to widen the range of game modes in the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, according to the feature lG1, in the specific game time, based on the number of executions of the game time after the state information is transferred from the information specifying the first state to the information specifying the state other than the first state. Since the transition mode adopted is either the first transition mode or the second transition mode, it is possible to perform a game with a rich storyline, for example, a production with a rich storyline, It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Features lG2]
A gaming machine according to feature 1G1,
A means of entering a game ball that can enter,
Auxiliary means (electrical accessory 34a) for assisting the entry of game balls into the ball entry means,
The state of the auxiliary means is between a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entering means and a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning,
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein a control mode in which the state transition means transits the state of the auxiliary means is different is a first control mode, and the input mode is higher than the first control mode. A control means having at least a second control mode in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the state information stored in the state storage means is information specifying a state (high frequency support mode) other than the first state, the second control mode is executable and the state storage is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the first control mode can be executed when the state information stored in the means is information specifying the first state (low frequency support mode).

According to the feature lG2, the control mode for changing the state of the auxiliary unit is switched according to the state information stored in the state storage unit. Therefore, according to the feature lG2, the player can estimate the current state of the state information by visually observing the state of the auxiliary means. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Feature lG3]
A gaming machine according to feature 1G2,
A game machine characterized in that the second condition is that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature lG3, the game information when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is transferred as the specific game time as the specific game time. Therefore, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to widen the range of the modes of the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG4]
A gaming machine according to feature 1G3,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
At the start of the game time when the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode, the state information is set to the first information from the information that identifies a state other than the first state. Means for shifting to the information for specifying the state (steps Sl1004, Sx1005, Sx1007 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature lG4, the game number corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition, in which the state information is changed in the first transition mode (=specific game number), and the determination mode determining means determines the first. In any case of the game times in which it is decided to execute the determination in the determination mode of 1, at the start of the game times, the state information is the first from the information specifying the state other than the first state. The state of the auxiliary means is shifted to the first control mode in conjunction with the change in the state information. For this reason, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means is in the first control mode at the start of the game time, the current game time is the game time corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Which is the specific game time in which the state information is transitioned by the first transition mode or the game time in which the determination mode determination means determines to execute the determination in the first determination mode? It is unknown, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of both game times. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing which of the both game times the change in the state of the auxiliary means is associated with the change in the state information. Therefore, according to the feature lG4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Feature lG5]
A gaming machine according to feature LG3 or feature LG4,
The determination means,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) for performing the determination, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode in which the special information has a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined condition than the first determination mode And a determination mode (high probability mode),
The game time execution means,
At the start of the game time, a determination mode determination means (FIG. 679) for determining whether to perform the determination by the determination means in the game time in the first determination mode or the second determination mode (FIG. 679). Fall determination processing of),
In the game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the determination mode determining means determines to execute the determination in the second determination mode, the state information is set to the first state information. Means for maintaining a state other than the above state (NO determination by step Sl1003 in the fall determination process of FIG. 679, NO determination by step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature lG5, a game time (=specific game time) corresponding to special information satisfying a predetermined condition, and a game time (=specific game time) in which the state information is transferred in the second transition mode, In any of the cases where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination mode determining means determines that the determination is to be performed in the second determination mode (the game number at the time of disengagement) , In the game time, the state information is maintained as information specifying a state other than the first state. Therefore, when the player observes that the state of the auxiliary means is continuing the second control mode in the game time, the current game time corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. A game game in which the state information is transitioned by the second transition mode, and the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the determination is performed in the second determination mode by the determination mode determination means. It is unclear which is the determined game number, but it can be inferred that it was narrowed down to one of both game numbers. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing from the state of the auxiliary means which of the two game times it is. Therefore, according to the feature lG5, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and a sense of urgency, and as a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic lH group>
The characteristic lH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment and its modifications.

[Feature lH1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring the special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Game time execution means (main control) for executing the game time when the game operation that notifies the result of the determination by the determination means is started and then the game operation is ended is one of the game times. The MPU 62 on the side of the board 61, and the game time control processing of FIG. 675 executed by the MPU 62),
State storage means (various flag storage areas) for storing state information (high frequency support mode flag) capable of specifying a plurality of states including at least the first state (low frequency support mode);
Production execution means for executing production in the game times,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time execution means,
A means for shifting the stored state information from information specifying a state other than the first state to information specifying the first state when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, as a transition mode in which the timing of transitioning the state information is different, the first transition mode (previous drop mode) in which the timing is the start of the game time, and the timing in the end of the game time A second transition mode (post-fall mode) is provided, and the first transition mode can be executed when the first condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the first-fall mode). , The state information transfer means (step Sl1104 in the hit determination process of FIG. 680, which enables execution of the second transfer mode when the second condition is satisfied (when the result of the mode selection lottery is the post-fall mode). Sx1110 to Sx1116),
The effect execution means,
In the game times in which the transition is performed in the first transition mode, an effect (life or death battle effect) having a predetermined content is executed, and in the game time in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the predetermined content is A game machine characterized by comprising means for executing effects (dominant battle effects) of different contents.

According to the characteristic lH1, when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the state information stored in the state storage means identifies the first state from the information identifying the states other than the first state. The transition timing is switched between a first transition mode at the start of the game round and a second transition mode at the end of the game round, and the first transition In the game times in which the transition is performed in the mode, the effect of the predetermined content is executed, and in the game times in which the transition is performed in the second transition mode, the effect of the content different from the predetermined content is executed. Therefore, according to the feature lH1, in the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game is played in two ways, that is, the effect of the predetermined content and the effect of the content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, according to the feature 1H1, there is an effect that it is possible to widen the range of game modes in the game times, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic mA group>
The characteristic mA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification example thereof.

[Characteristic mA1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determination means (a function of performing a universal figure lottery) for performing a first determination which is a determination as to whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When a game ball enters the fourth entering means, a third transition mode in which the third state transition means transits between the entry-disabled state and the entry-enabled state (for a V winning jackpot) A third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching operation mode based on
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
Time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special electric switching execution mode based on the special map small hit) and time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric switching execution mode based on the V prize) And a means for setting a time that is longer than the total time (total time: 128.0 seconds).

According to the feature mA1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means and the third transition mode is executed. It

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means sets the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode, and the start of the third transition mode. Since a means that can be set to a time longer than the sum of the time from the completion to the end of the second transition mode is set, the first transition mode is set even after the second transition mode ends and the third transition mode ends thereafter. May continue and the first state transition means may transition to the entry possible state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball may enter the second entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mA2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mA1,
The first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the third transition mode is completed during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine comprising means.

According to the characteristic mA2, the first transition mode execution means causes the first state transition means to transition from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state after the third transition mode is ended during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mA3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mA1 or the characteristic mA2,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, of the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the characteristic mA3, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the second transition mode or the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided, or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the tension that the player wants the second transition mode and the third transition mode to end by the time the game ball reaches the second ball entrance means.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information In the case of adopting a configuration in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second entrance means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means. In such a case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, With respect to one transition to the ball entry possible state of the one state transition means, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is once.

[Characteristic mA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mA1 to mA3,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is set in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) which becomes a predetermined length.

According to the characteristic mA4, the third transition mode execution means determines the time required from the start to the end as the third transition mode, regardless of the launch mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Since a unit capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is set to a predetermined length. No longer than. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode has not ended even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entry possible state because the length of the third transition mode becomes longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such situation. As a result, the third transition mode is not ended even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

[Characteristic mA5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mA1 to mA4,
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode (normal power open/close execution mode), the first state transition means transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then transitions from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state. The length of the interval period (universal power interval period), which is the period up to, is longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). A game machine characterized by comprising means that can be set to.

According to the characteristic mA5, the first transition mode execution unit changes from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the first state transition unit makes a transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. A unit is provided that can set the length of the interval period, which is the period until the transition, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is shorter than the time (eg, T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (eg, 0.7T). A case where the configuration of the comparative example set to 1 is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is started and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode is still continuing in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are not newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode has already ended in the third entry possible state of the first state transition means, so the game ball is in the second entry state. Upon entering the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, in the second transition mode and the third transition mode, the game ball becomes the second entry means in the first and third entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It will be started when the player has entered the ball, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the second entering means in the second enterable state.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball has not entered the second entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the second transition mode is not started and the third transition mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so the game ball is the second entry ball. When the player enters the means, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the third transition mode still continues in the third ball entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are not newly started. After that, the third interval mode in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so the game ball enters the second entry mode. Upon entering the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started. That is, in this case, in the second transition mode and the third transition mode, the game ball becomes the second entry means in the second and fourth entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. It will be started when the player enters the ball, but it does not start even if the game ball enters the second entering means in the third enterable state.

As described above, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the third transition mode is adopted, There is a problem that the timing of starting the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution is not fixed, the flow of the game becomes complicated, and the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (eg 1.3T) longer than the time (eg T) required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The case where the configuration is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of this feature, the case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is started and then the third transition mode is started. Then, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode has already ended, so the game ball enters the second entry mode. Upon entering the ball means, the second transition mode is newly started, and then the third transition mode is started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, the case where the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the second transition mode is not started and the third transition mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means, the third transition mode is not executed, so the game ball is the second entry ball. When the player enters the means, the second transition mode is started, and then the third transition mode is started.

In this way, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. At the timing when the first state transition means is in the entry possible state, the third transition mode is executed regardless of the number of times the first state transition means is in the entry possible state. There is no or already finished. Therefore, in the first transition mode, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are set in spite of the game ball entering the second entry means when the first state transition means enters the entry possible state. It doesn't have to start. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to fix the start timing of the second transition mode and the third transition mode during execution of the first transition mode, and to prevent the game flow from becoming complicated. And the number of times the first state transition means is in the ball entry possible state during the execution of the first transition mode, thereby executing the second transition mode and the third transition mode during the execution of the first transition mode. It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of possible times.

[Characteristic mA6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mA1 to mA5,
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode (universal switching execution mode), the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then the first determination by the first determination means. The length of the waiting period (normal electric ending period), which is the period until the execution becomes possible, is the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). A game machine characterized by comprising means that can be set for a longer time.

According to the characteristic mA6, the first transition mode execution means is configured to perform the first transition by the first determination means after the first state transition means transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. A unit is provided that can set the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which the length of the waiting period is set to a time shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the waiting period ends and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first transition mode is performed. The game ball may enter the second ball entering means during execution of the transition mode, and the second transition mode may be executed. However, in this configuration, when the third transition mode is executed immediately after the start of the standby period, the third transition mode continues even after the standby period ends, and the game ball is the second one. The third transition mode may continue even at the timing of entering the ball entering means. In this case, there is a problem that the second transition mode is not executed even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means makes the first determination after the first state transition means makes the last transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. Since there is provided means for setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The occurrence of a situation in which the third transition mode continues even after the waiting period ends can be suppressed, and a situation that is disadvantageous to the player can be suppressed.

[Characteristic mA7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mA1 to mA6,
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode (normal electric open/close execution mode), the first state transition means finally transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then the first determination means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (universal ending period), which is the period until it becomes possible,
An interval period (normal power interval period) that is a period from the transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state to the transition from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state by the first state transition means. ) The length (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds) can be set to a means that can be set to a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic mA7, the first transition mode execution means determines the next determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until the execution is possible, transitions from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the first state transition means transitions from the enterable state to the enterable state. Since a means that can be set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the interval period, which is a period up to It can be realized similarly. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game capable of executing the second transition mode and the third transition mode in both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

<Characteristic mB group>
The characteristic mB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification example thereof.

[Characteristic mB1]
The first ball entry area (universal figure start gate 35) where game balls can enter,
First lottery execution means for executing a first lottery (general drawing lottery) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry area.
First variation means for performing variation display and stop display of the first identification information (ordinary symbol) based on the execution of the first lottery,
A second ball entry area (special figure starting port 34a) in which a game ball can enter,
It is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second entry area from a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry area (closed state). First transition means (normal electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning to a ball-enabled state (open state),
When the result of the first lottery is a first predetermined lottery result (per universal figure), the first transition mode for transitioning the first transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state (Phoden First transition mode executing means for executing the open/close execution mode),
Second lottery executing means for executing a second lottery (special map lottery) based on that the game ball has entered the second ball entering area (special map starting port 34a),
Second variation means for performing variation display and stop display of the second identification information (special symbol) based on the execution of the second lottery,
A third ball entry area (V winning opening 57av) in which a game ball can enter,
It is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the third entry area from a non-enterable state (closed state) where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third entry area. Second transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning to a ball possible state (open state),
When the result of the second lottery is the second predetermined lottery result (special figure small hit), the second transition mode for transitioning the second transition means from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state (feature A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on FIG.
Determining means for deciding to give a specific profit (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) based on the fact that the game ball enters the third entering area;
Means for terminating the grant of the specific profit when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the start of the grant of the specific profit,
A gaming machine comprising:
When one cycle from the transition (time t3 in FIG. 714) to the end of the grant of the specific profit (time t10 in FIG. 714) of the first transition means to the entry possible state is defined as one special game time ,
The first transition mode execution means,
Means for performing at least the transition operation of the first transition means a plurality of times for one result of the first predetermined lottery based on the result of the first lottery;
The first special game time is executed based on the first transition means making a transition to the ball enterable state at the first timing, and the first transition means is changed at the second timing after the end of the one special game time. Means for controlling to transition to the ball enterable state,
Limiting means for limiting the variable display of the first identification information so as not to start;
Equipped with
The limiting means includes means for generating a predetermined limiting period in the period from the first timing to the end of the one special game time that occurs after the second timing,
The predetermined ending condition of the specific profit is established by executing the first state (round game) advantageous to the player a plurality of times,
The first state is changeable between the first time with the shortest execution time and the second time with the longest execution time depending on the game state,
The first transition mode execution means is a case where the first special game times executed after the first timing, the first state of a plurality of times of the specific profit, are all executed in the second time. Also, the gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to transition the first transition means to the entry possible state after the end of the one special game time.

According to the feature mB1, when the game ball enters the first entry area and the first lottery is executed, and the result of the first lottery becomes the first predetermined lottery result and the first transition mode is executed. If the game ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second entry area during the execution of the first transition mode and the second lottery is executed, and the second lottery is executed. The result of the lottery becomes the second predetermined lottery result, and the second transition mode is executed. Then, during execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third entry area, and it is decided to give the specific profit.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means causes at least the transition operation of the first transition means to be performed a plurality of times for one first predetermined lottery result based on the result of the first lottery. The first transition means is executed at the second timing after the first special game time is executed based on the means and the first transition means transiting to the ball entry possible state at the first timing. A means for controlling the ball to be in the ball-enabled state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of one special game times for one first predetermined lottery result in the first lottery.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode executing means includes a limiting means for limiting the variable display of the first identification information so as not to start, and the limiting means is generated after the second timing from the first timing. Means for generating a predetermined limited period in a period until after the end of one special game time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the first identification information from starting before the end of the one special game time, so that the first lottery can be performed even though the one special game time has not ended. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which is executed. As a result, for example, even though the result of the first lottery is the first predetermined lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the already-executed one special game time has not ended, so the game ball is It is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the second transition mode is not executed even if the player enters the second entry area.

Further, according to this feature, the predetermined termination condition of the specific profit is satisfied by executing the first state advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the first state is the first state in which the execution time is the shortest depending on the game state. It is possible to change from the time to the second time that is the longest, and the first transition mode executing means is the second state in which the plurality of first states of the specific profit of one special game time executed after the first timing are all second. Even if it is executed in time, the first transition means can be transitioned to the entry possible state after the end of the one special game time. Therefore, even if all the first states of the specific profit of one special game time are executed in the second time, the game balls are put into the second entry area after the end of the one special game time. It becomes possible to make a ball, and it becomes possible to execute one special game time again. As a result, it is possible to surely execute the special game times a plurality of times, regardless of the length of the first state of the specific profits a plurality of times.

[Characteristic mB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mB1,
A game machine comprising a number display means for displaying information on the number of times of the first state (remaining number of round games).

According to the feature mB2, since the number display means for displaying the information on the number of times of the first state is provided, the player can be interested in the number of times of the first state, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

[Characteristic mB3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mB1 or the characteristic mB2,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific image display means for displaying a specific image (ending image) at the end of the grant of the specific profit (in the special electric ending period of the special electric open/close execution mode based on the V winning jackpot).

According to the feature mB3, since the specific image display means for displaying the specific image is provided at the end of the provision of the specific profit, it is possible to make the player recognize that the provision of the specific profit is completed and the specific It is possible to give a sense of fulfillment to the profit being given and a motivation for the subsequent game.

[Characteristic mB4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mB1 to mB3,
Providing profit information display means for displaying information on a profit obtained by the player by the provision of the specific profit at the end of the provision of the specific profit (in the special electric power ending period of the special electric switching execution mode based on the V winning jackpot). Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature mB4, since the profit information display means for displaying the information regarding the profit obtained by the player by the grant of the specific profit is provided at the end of the grant of the specific profit, the player himself or herself by granting the specific profit. The obtained profit can be grasped, and a sense of fulfillment for giving the specific profit and motivation for the subsequent game can be given.

[Characteristic mB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mB1 to mB4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it comprises means for deciding to grant one of the specific profits out of a plurality of types of the specific profits (special electric switching execution mode A or B based on the V winning jackpot).

According to the feature mB5, the determining means includes means for determining the grant of one specific profit from a plurality of types of specific profits, so that the player is only interested in whether or not the specific profit is granted. However, if a specific profit is given, it can be made to have an interest in what kind of specific profit is given.

[Characteristic mB6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mB1 to mB5,
A game machine characterized by comprising predetermined information changing means for performing a variable display and a stop display of predetermined identification information (decorative pattern) in the first state (round game).

According to the feature mB6, since the predetermined information changing means for performing the variable display and the stop display of the predetermined identification information in the first state is provided, it is surprising to the player that the variable display of the predetermined identification information is started in the first state. It is possible to give a feeling of "," and to give a great expectation as to what the display mode (stop mode) will be when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed.

<Characteristic mC group>
The characteristic mC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification example thereof.

[Characteristic mC1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determination means (a function of performing a universal figure lottery) for performing a first determination which is a determination as to whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When a game ball enters the fourth entering means, a third transition mode in which the third state transition means transits between the entry-disabled state and the entry-enabled state (for a V winning jackpot) A third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching operation mode based on
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The game ball enters the first ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35), and the first predetermined information acquired satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode (execution of normal electricity opening/closing) Mode) is executed, if the game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode,
During execution of the first transition mode, a game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on special figure small hit) is executed. Was
During execution of the second transition mode, a game ball enters the third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a), and the game ball entering the third ball entering means is the fourth game ball. The player enters the ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) to execute the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot),
Even after the third transition mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and the first state transition means transits to the ball enterable state during the continuation of the first transition mode and is a game ball. There is a case where the player can enter the second ball entering means.

According to the feature mC1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means and the third transition mode is executed. , The first transition mode continues even after the third transition mode ends, and the first state transition means transitions to the entry possible state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball is the second. In some cases, it may be possible to enter the entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed once, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mC1,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, of the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mC2, when the game ball enters the second entering means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided, or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the tension that the player wants the second transition mode and the third transition mode to end by the time the game ball reaches the second ball entrance means.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information In the case of adopting a configuration in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second entrance means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means. In such a case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, With respect to one transition to the ball entry possible state of the one state transition means, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is once.

[Features mC3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mC1 or the characteristic mC2,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is set in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) which becomes a predetermined length.

According to the characteristic mC3, the third transition mode execution means determines the time required from the start to the end as the third transition mode regardless of the launching mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launching. Since a unit capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is set to a predetermined length. No longer than. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode has not ended even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entry possible state because the length of the third transition mode becomes longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such situation. As a result, the third transition mode is not ended even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic mD group>
The characteristic mD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Characteristic mD1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determination means (a function of performing a universal figure lottery) for performing a first determination which is a determination as to whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When a game ball enters the fourth entering means, a third transition mode in which the third state transition means transits between the entry-disabled state and the entry-enabled state (for a V winning jackpot) A third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching operation mode based on
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
A gaming machine comprising:
In the situation where the game ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode,
After the first transition mode is started,
When the first transition mode is started, the first state transition means transits from the non-enterable state to the enterable state,
The game ball enters the first ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) by the first state transition means having transitioned from the ball entry impossible state to the ball entry possible state,
The first predetermined information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode (universal opening/closing) Run mode) is executed,
During execution of the first transition mode, a game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) and the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on special figure small hit) is executed. Was
During execution of the second transition mode, the game ball enters the third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a),
The game ball that has entered the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) and the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning jackpot) is executed. Was
When the time required until the third transition mode ends is defined as a specific required time (time from time t2 to time t10 in FIG. 714),
The first transition mode execution means,
A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting a time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) to a time longer than the specific required time.

According to the characteristic mD1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means and the third transition mode is executed. It

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution unit includes a unit that can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the specific required time. Even after the end, the first transition mode continues, while the first transition mode continues, the first state transition means transitions to the ball entry possible state, and the game ball becomes the second ball entry means. It may be possible to enter the ball.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mD2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mD1,
The first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the third transition mode is completed during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine comprising means.

According to the feature mD2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the third transition mode is completed during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mD3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mD1 or the characteristic mD2,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, of the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the feature mD3, when the game ball enters the second entering means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided, or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the tension that the player wants the second transition mode and the third transition mode to end by the time the game ball reaches the second ball entrance means.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information In the case of adopting a configuration in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second entrance means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means. In such a case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, With respect to one transition to the ball entry possible state of the one state transition means, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is once.

[Characteristic mD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mD1 to mD3,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is set in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) which becomes a predetermined length.

According to the feature mD4, the third transition mode execution means determines the time required from the start to the end as the third transition mode regardless of the firing mode of the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after firing. Since a unit capable of executing the predetermined length third transition mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is set to a predetermined length. No longer than. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode has not ended even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entry possible state because the length of the third transition mode becomes longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such situation. As a result, the third transition mode is not ended even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

<Characteristic mE group>
The characteristic mE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Features mE1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mE1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution unit can set the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. As a result, the first transition mode continues even after the privilege granting mode ends, and the first state transition means transitions to the entry possible state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball is It may be possible to enter the second entering means.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mE2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mE1,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mE1, the first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mE3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mE1 or the characteristic mE2,
The privilege granting mode executing means,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. And a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mE3, the privilege granting mode executing means, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, enters the game ball into the second ball entering means. Since the means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It becomes a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of wanting to end the privilege granting mode before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

[Features mE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mE1 to mE3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mE4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mF group>
The characteristic mF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Characteristic mF1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic mF1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means for causing is provided, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the feature mF1, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mF2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mF1,
The privilege granting mode executing means,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. And a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mF2, the privilege granting mode executing means, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, enters the game ball into the second ball entering means. Since the means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It becomes a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of wanting to end the privilege granting mode before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

[Features mF3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mF1 or the characteristic mF2,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mF3, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mG group>
The characteristic mG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification example thereof.

[Features mG1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
A privilege granting mode that is a mode of granting a privilege to a player when a predetermined privilege granting condition including that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) ) Executing a privilege giving mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode executing means,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. And a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mG1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode executing means moves to the second ball entering means of the game ball. Since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is executed thereafter. This is not done, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of wanting to end the privilege granting mode before the timing when the game ball can enter the second ball entering means comes.

[Features mG2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mG1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mG2, the first transition mode execution unit includes a unit capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. In some cases, it may be possible to enter the entry means.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mG3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mG1 or the characteristic mG2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mG3, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mG4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mG1 to mG3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mG4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mH group>
The characteristic mH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Characteristic mH1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode executing means,
As the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning jackpot), the length from the start to the end is determined in advance regardless of the manner of launching the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of executing a predetermined length privilege granting mode (fixed length special electric open/close execution mode based on V winning jackpot) that is the length of the above.

According to the characteristic mH1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode executing means determines the length from the start to the end as the privilege granting mode in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after being launched. Since the means for executing the predetermined length privilege granting mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is less than the predetermined length. Does not grow long. Therefore, for example, in a gaming machine that is disadvantageous to the player due to the length of the privilege granting mode being longer than a predetermined length, it is possible to prevent the situation from being disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

Specifically, for example, in a gaming machine that is in a disadvantageous situation for a player, such as a game ball entering the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter, The privilege granting mode becomes longer than the predetermined length, and the privilege granting mode is not yet finished at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It is possible to prevent such a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Characteristic mH2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mH1,
The privilege granting mode executing means,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during the execution of the privilege granting mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. And a means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode.

According to the feature mH2, the privilege granting mode executing means, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, enters the game ball into the second ball entering means. Since the means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball is provided, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter. It becomes a disadvantageous situation for the player.

However, according to this feature, as the privilege granting mode, the privilege granting mode execution means determines the length from the start to the end regardless of the manner of launching the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launching. Since the means for executing the predetermined length privilege granting mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length privilege granting mode is executed, the length of the privilege granting mode is less than the predetermined length. Does not grow long. Therefore, in a situation where the privilege granting mode has not ended even at the timing when the first state transition means makes a transition to the entry possible state due to the length of the privilege granting mode becoming longer than the predetermined length. Occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, it is disadvantageous for the player that the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means is not executed even though the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming different.

[Characteristic mH3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mH1 or the characteristic mH2,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mH3, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. In some cases, it may be possible to enter the entry means.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mH4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mH1 to mH3,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mH4, the first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mH5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mH1 to mH4,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mH5, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic ml group>
The characteristic mI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Features mI1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode (normal power open/close execution mode), the first state transition means transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then transitions from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state. The length of the interval period (normal electric interval period), which is the period until it is set, is longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a settable means.

According to the feature mI1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means can enter the entry-disabled state after the first state transition means transitions from the entry-enabled state to the entry-disabled state in the first transition mode. A unit is provided that can set the length of the interval period, which is the period until the state transitions, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. The reason for adopting such a configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (eg, 0.7T) shorter than the time (eg, T) required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. A case where the configuration of the comparative example to be set is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball enters the second ball entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the privilege granting mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the privilege granting mode still continues in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is not newly started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the third entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege grant mode has already ended, so the game ball enters the second entry ball. When the player enters the means, the privilege granting mode is newly started. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the first and third ball entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, it does not start even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the second ball enterable state.

Next, in the configuration of the comparative example, a case will be described in which the game ball has not entered the second entry means in the first entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. In this case, the privilege granting mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is not executed, so the game ball is the second entry means. If you enter, the privilege granting mode will be started. After that, the second interval period in the first transition mode ends, and the privilege granting mode is still continuing in the third entry possible state of the first state transition means. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is not newly started. After that, the third interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the fourth entry possible state of the first state transition means, since the privilege granting mode has already ended, the game ball enters the second entry ball. When the player enters the means, the privilege granting mode is newly started. That is, in this case, the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the second and fourth entry possible states of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. However, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the third ball enterable state, it does not start.

As described above, unlike this feature, when the configuration of the comparative example in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time shorter than the length of the privilege granting mode is adopted, execution of the first transition mode is performed. There is a problem that the start timing of the privilege granting mode in the inside is not fixed, the flow of the game becomes complicated, and the control of the game becomes difficult.

Next, the configuration of the present feature in which the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time (eg, 1.3T) longer than the time (eg, T) required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode The case where is adopted will be described.

First, in the configuration of this feature, the case where the game ball enters the second ball entering means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege granting mode is started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode has already ended, so the game ball is the second entry ball. When the player enters the means, the privilege granting mode is newly started.

Next, in the configuration of this feature, the case where the game ball does not enter the second ball entering means in the first ball entry possible state of the first state transition means in the first transition mode will be described. In this case, the privilege granting mode is not started. After that, the first interval period in the first transition mode ends, and in the second entry possible state of the first state transition means, the privilege granting mode is not executed, so the game ball is the second entry means. If you enter, the privilege granting mode will be started.

Thus, according to this feature, the length of the interval period of the first transition mode is set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. At the timing when the first state transition means is in the entry possible state, the privilege granting mode is not executed, regardless of how many times the first state transition means is in the entry possible state, or The state has already been completed. Therefore, even if the game ball has entered the second ball entry means when the first state transition means has entered the ball entry enabled state in the first transition mode, the privilege awarding mode does not start. .. That is, according to this feature, the timing of starting the privilege granting mode during execution of the first transition mode can be fixed, and it is possible to prevent the game flow from becoming complicated, and It is possible to set the upper limit of the number of times the privilege granting mode can be executed during execution of the first transition mode by setting the number of times that the first state transition means is allowed to enter the ball during execution of the transition mode. Become.

[Feature mI2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mI1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mI2, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the ball entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. In some cases, it may be possible to enter the entry means.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mI3]
The gaming machine described in the feature mI1 or the feature mI2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic mI3, the first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature mI4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mI1 to mI3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mI4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mJ group>
The characteristic mJ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modified example thereof.

[Characteristic mJ1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode (normal power open/close execution mode), the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then the first determination by the first determination means. The length of the waiting period (the ordinary electric ending period), which is the period until the execution of the A gaming machine characterized by having means that can be set for a long time.

According to the characteristic mJ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means is configured to perform the first determination mode by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. There is provided means for setting the length of the waiting period, which is a period until the determination of 1 can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. The reason for adopting this configuration will be described.

First, unlike this feature, a case will be described in which a configuration is adopted in which the length of the waiting period is set to a time shorter than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. In this configuration, for example, when the first determination is performed after the waiting period ends and it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, the first transition mode is performed and the first transition mode is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the transition mode, and the privilege granting mode is executed. However, in this configuration, when the privilege granting mode is executed immediately after the start of the waiting period, the privilege granting mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and the game ball is the second ball entered. The privilege granting mode may continue even at the timing of entering the means. In this case, there is a problem that the privilege granting mode is not executed even when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means makes the first determination after the first state transition means makes the last transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. Since the means for setting the length of the waiting period, which is the period until the first determination by the means can be executed, to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the privilege granting mode continues even after the waiting period ends, and it is possible to prevent a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

[Features mJ2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mJ1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mJ2, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mJ3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mJ1 or the characteristic mJ2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mJ3, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mJ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mJ1 to mJ3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the feature mJ4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mK group>
The characteristic mK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modified example thereof.

[Features mK1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode (normal electric open/close execution mode), the first state transition means finally transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then the first determination means executes the next determination. The length of the waiting period (universal ending period), which is the period until it becomes possible,
An interval period (normal power interval period) that is a period from the transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state to the transition from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state by the first state transition means. ) The length (135.0 seconds) or more (140.0 seconds) can be set to a means that can be set to a gaming machine.

According to the feature mK1, in the case where the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means is configured to perform the next determination by the first determination means after the first state transition means finally transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state in the first transition mode. The length of the waiting period, which is the period until the determination can be executed, is changed from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the first state transition means transits from the enterable state to the enterable state. Since a means that can be set to a length equal to or longer than the length of the interval period which is a period until the transition is provided, a series of game flows realized in the interval period of the first transition mode is changed to a waiting period of the first transition mode. In the same way, it is possible to realize. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize a new game in which the privilege granting mode can be executed in both the interval period and the standby period in the first transition mode.

[Features mK2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mK1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mK2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. In some cases, it may be possible to enter the entry means.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mK3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mK1 or the characteristic mK2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mK3, the first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mK4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mK1 to mK3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mK4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mL group>
The feature mL group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modified example thereof.

[Characteristic mL1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
Based on the transition mode (the number of times of opening) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode in which the ball cannot enter the ball, the first transition mode (universal switching execution mode) A game machine characterized in that an upper limit number of executions (upper limit number of consecutive holidays) of the privilege granting mode (a special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on a special electricity opening/closing scenario for V winning jackpot) is determined during execution.

According to the characteristic mL1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode during execution of the first transition mode is based on the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode transitioning from the non-enterable state to the enterable state. Since the upper limit number of times of execution is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. Can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Characteristic mL2]
A gaming machine described in feature mL1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mL2, the first transition mode execution unit includes a unit capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mL3]
The gaming machine according to feature mL1 or feature mL2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mL3, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mL4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mL1 to mL3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the feature mL4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously fired in a predetermined firing mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mM group>
The characteristic mM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modified example thereof.

[Features mM1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode executing means,
During the period in which the first transition mode is being executed, the first state transition means transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, and then transitions from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing the privilege granting mode during an interval period (universal power interval period) which is a period until.

According to the feature mM1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode execution means is configured to enter the ball after the first state transition means transitions from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state during the period during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means for executing the privilege granting mode is provided in the interval period which is the period from the impossibility state to the entry possible state, the number of interval periods included in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Becomes Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is asked how many times the interval period is included in the first transition mode. It is possible to raise interest and interest in the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Features mM2]
A game machine according to the feature mM1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mM2, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the ball entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mM3]
A gaming machine according to feature mM1 or feature mM2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mM3, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mM4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mM1 to mM3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the feature mM4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mN group>
The characteristic mN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Features mN1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode executing means executes the privilege granting mode (special-power switch opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) a plurality of times from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode). A game machine characterized by having possible means.

According to the feature mN1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode executing means is provided with means for executing the privilege granting mode a plurality of times from the start to the end of the first transition mode. Whether or not it is started is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, the player can be interested in whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is started, and the first transition mode is started. In this case, the player can be made interested in how many times the privilege granting mode is executed and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Features mN2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mN1,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the feature mN2, the first transition mode executing means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the ball entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mN3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic mN1 or the characteristic 2,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mN3, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mN4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mN1 to mN3,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the feature mN4, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mO group>
The characteristic mO group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Characteristic mO1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means is means for executing an effect (figure) that suggests a transition mode (number of times of opening) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, which transitions from the non-enterable state to the enterable state. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the characteristic mO1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the first state transition means in the first transition mode is provided with means for executing an effect that suggests a transition mode in which the state is changed from the non-enterable state to the enterable state. When the first transition mode is executed by satisfying the first condition, the player can be interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic mO2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mO1,
Based on the transition mode (the number of times of opening) of the first state transition means in the first transition mode in which the ball cannot enter the ball, the first transition mode (universal switching execution mode) A game machine characterized in that an upper limit number of executions (upper limit number of consecutive holidays) of the privilege granting mode (a special electricity opening/closing execution mode based on a special electricity opening/closing scenario for V winning jackpot) is determined during execution.

According to the feature mO2, the privilege granting mode is executed during execution of the first transition mode based on the transition mode in which the first state transition means makes a transition from the non-enterable state to the enterable state in the first transition mode. Since the possible upper limit number of times is determined, the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode is a very important factor for the player. Therefore, when the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the player is interested in the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. Can be held, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Characteristic mO3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mO1 or the characteristic mO2,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mO3, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the ball entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mO1 to mO3,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mO4, the first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state after the privilege granting mode is finished during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mO5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mO1 to mO4,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the feature mO5, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mP group>
The characteristic mP group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification thereof.

[Characteristic mP1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The privilege granting mode executing means,
As the privilege granting mode, an undefined privilege granting mode (the special prize opening/closing scenario A for V winning jackpot jackpot in the modified example) may not be completed by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode (timing at which the normal electric auditors object 34b is opened). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing a special electric switch opening/closing execution mode based on the game machine.

According to the characteristic mP1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Further, according to this feature, the privilege granting mode executing means includes means for executing, as the privilege granting mode, an indefinite privilege granting mode that may not end by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode.

When the configuration of this feature is applied to, for example, a gaming machine that is in a disadvantageous situation for the player when the privilege granting mode is not completed by a predetermined timing in the first transition mode, , It is possible to have a feeling of impatience such as wanting the indefinite privilege giving mode to end by a predetermined timing.

Particularly, in the case of a configuration in which whether or not the indefinite privilege granting mode ends by a predetermined timing depends on the game ball's firing mode and the behavior of the game ball that has been fired, the player's game ball firing mode and fire mode are fired. It is possible to give interest to the behavior of the game ball.

[Characteristic mP2]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mP1,
The privilege granting mode executing means,
In the case where the privilege granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the game ball has entered the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a). Also provided is means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second entry means.

According to the feature mP2, the privilege granting mode executing means determines that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means when the indefinite privilege granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode. However, since the means for avoiding the execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering means is provided, the game ball is in the second entrance while the privilege granting mode is being executed. Even if the player enters the means, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of urgency that the player wants the indefinite privilege granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Characteristic mP3]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic mP1 or the characteristic mP2,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mP3, the first transition mode execution unit includes a unit capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the ball entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mP4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mP1 to mP3,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mP4, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic mP5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mP1 to mP4,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the characteristic mP5, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Feature mQ group>
The characteristic mQ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification example thereof.

[Features mQ1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determining means (a function of executing a universal figure lottery) for determining whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
Second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
When a predetermined privilege granting condition including that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means is fulfilled, a privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) is granted to the player. A privilege granting mode executing means,
A privilege giving ball entering means (a second special electric accessory 58b) that allows a game ball to enter the ball while the privilege giving mode is being executed;
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
During the execution of the privilege granting mode, the effect executing means allows a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting ball means by a predetermined timing (the timing when the normal electric auditors object 34b is next opened). A game machine characterized by comprising means capable of executing an effect that prompts the player (the entry promotion effect shown in FIG. 739(A)).

According to the feature mQ1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the game is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the first transition mode, and a predetermined privilege granting condition is established to enable the privilege granting mode. Is executed.

Then, according to this feature, the effect execution means is capable of executing an effect that prompts the player to enter a predetermined number of game balls into the privilege granting entrance means by a predetermined timing during execution of the privilege granting mode. Equipped with.

When the configuration of this feature is applied to, for example, a gaming machine that is in a disadvantageous state for the player when the privilege granting mode is not completed by the predetermined timing in the first transition mode, the predetermined timing By allowing a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting and entering means, the player can be made to understand a new game property such as ending the privilege granting mode by the predetermined timing. It is possible to increase the player's motivation to allow a predetermined number of game balls to enter the privilege granting ball means by the timing.

[Features mQ2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mQ1,
The effect execution means includes means capable of executing a specific effect (disappearance effect shown in FIG. 739(C)) when the privilege granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing. Machine.

According to the feature mQ2, the effect executing means includes means capable of executing a specific effect when the privilege giving mode is not finished by the predetermined timing, so that the player is given the privilege by the predetermined timing. It is possible to recognize that the mode has not ended and to recognize that the flow of the game thereafter changes due to the fact that the privilege granting mode has not ended.

[Features mQ3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mQ1 or the characteristic mQ2,
The privilege granting mode executing means,
If the privilege granting mode has not ended by the predetermined timing, even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a), the game ball A game machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by a ball entering the second ball entering means.

According to the feature mQ3, if the privilege granting mode execution means does not end the privilege granting mode by the predetermined timing, the game ball even if the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. Since the means for avoiding execution of the privilege granting mode triggered by the ball entering the second ball entering means is provided, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege granting mode. However, the privilege granting mode is not executed thereafter, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a feeling of impatience that the user wants the privilege granting mode to end by a predetermined timing.

[Features mQ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mQ1 to mQ3,
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
A gaming machine comprising a unit that can be set to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning).

According to the characteristic mQ4, the first transition mode execution means includes means capable of setting the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the privilege granting mode. Therefore, even after the privilege granting mode ends, the first transition mode continues, and during the continuation of the first transition mode, the first state transition means transits to the ball entry possible state and the game ball becomes the second. It may be possible to enter into the entry means of.

In this case, when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the privilege granting mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode may be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mQ5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mQ1 to mQ4,
The first transition mode executing means, during execution of the first transition mode, means for transitioning the first state transition means from the non-enterable state to the enterable state after the privilege granting mode ends. A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature mQ5, the first transition mode execution means is means for transitioning the first state transition means from the entry-disabled state to the entry-enabled state after the privilege granting mode ends during execution of the first transition mode. Therefore, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the privilege granting mode ends, the privilege granting mode will be executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the privilege granting mode is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mQ6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mQ1 to mQ5,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means (special figure starting port 34a),
Second determination means (a function for executing special figure lottery) for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition, the second transition mode in which the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A second transition mode executing means for executing a special electric switching execution mode based on a special map small hit;
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the privilege granting ball means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the privilege granting ball means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between the ball-possible state (open state),
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the privilege granting ball means.
Equipped with
The privilege granting mode executing means, when a game ball enters the fourth ball entering means, sets the third status transition means to the non-enterable status and the enterable status as the privilege granting mode. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a third transition mode executing means for executing a third transition mode (a special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V-prize jackpot) which causes a transition between the two.

According to the feature mQ6, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means, and the game ball as the privilege granting mode Three transition modes are executed. That is, according to this feature, the third transition mode as the privilege granting mode is triggered by the game ball entering the second entry means that is in the entry enabled state during execution of the first transition mode. Can be executed.

<Characteristic mR group>
The characteristic mR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modification examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment and each modification example thereof.

[Features mR1]
First ball entering means (universal figure starting gate 35) into which a game ball can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
A first determination means (a function of performing a universal figure lottery) for performing a first determination which is a determination as to whether the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition;
A second ball entering means (special electric starting port) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means (ordinary electric accessory 34b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state ( A first transition mode execution means for executing a normal switching operation mode),
Third ball entering means (first big winning opening 57a) into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means (first special electric auditors object 57b) capable of transitioning between the possible entry state (open state)
A second transition mode in which, when a game ball enters the second entry means (special electric starting port), the second state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state. Second transition mode executing means for executing (special electric open/close execution mode based on entry of game ball into special electric starting opening),
A fourth ball entering means (V winning opening 57av) in which the game ball entered in the third ball entering means can enter.
Fifth entry means (second big winning opening 58a) into which game balls can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means (closed state), and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means (second special electric accessory 58b) capable of transitioning between a possible entry state (open state)
When a game ball enters the fourth entering means, a third transition mode in which the third state transition means transits between the entry-disabled state and the entry-enabled state (for a V winning jackpot) A third transition mode execution means for executing a special electric switching operation mode based on
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode (normal power switching execution mode) is
The time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on entry of a game ball into the special electric starting port) and the start of the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning) A game machine characterized by comprising means capable of being set to a time longer than the sum of the time required from the end to the end.

According to the characteristic mR1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, the acquired first predetermined information satisfies the first condition and the first transition mode is executed, the game ball is When the ball is continuously launched in a predetermined launch mode, the game ball enters the second ball entering means during the execution of the first transition mode, the second transition mode is executed, and the second transition mode. During execution of the game ball enters the third ball entering means, the game ball entering the third ball entering means enters the fourth ball entering means and the third transition mode is executed. It

Further, according to this feature, the first transition mode execution means sets the time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode, the time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode, and the start of the third transition mode. Since a means that can be set to a time longer than the sum of the time from the completion to the end of the second transition mode is set, the first transition mode is set even after the second transition mode ends and the third transition mode ends thereafter. May continue and the first state transition means may transition to the entry possible state during the continuation of the first transition mode, and the game ball may enter the second entry means.

In this case, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode may be executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mR2]
The gaming machine described in the feature mR1,
The first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the third transition mode is completed during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine comprising means.

According to the characteristic mR2, the first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the third transition mode is completed during execution of the first transition mode. Since the means is provided, the game ball can enter the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends. Then, if the game ball enters the second ball entering means after the third transition mode ends, the second transition mode is executed again, and then the third transition mode is executed again. That is, when the first transition mode is executed, the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times. When the third transition mode is executed a plurality of times, the player can get an opportunity to win a large number of game balls as prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the start of the first transition mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Features mR3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic mR1 or the characteristic mR2,
When the game ball enters the second ball entering means (special figure starting port 34a) during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, of the second predetermined information A gaming machine comprising means for avoiding acquisition or avoiding execution of the second determination.

According to the characteristic mR3, when the game ball enters the second entering means during the execution of the second transition mode or the execution of the third transition mode, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided, or Since means for avoiding execution of the second determination is provided, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or execution of the third transition mode, the second The transition mode is not executed, and the third transition mode is not executed either, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel the tension that the player wants the second transition mode and the third transition mode to end by the time the game ball reaches the second ball entrance means.

Further, unlike this feature, even if the game ball enters the second entering means during execution of the second transition mode or during execution of the third transition mode, the second predetermined information In the case of adopting a configuration in which acquisition and execution of the second determination are not avoided, a plurality of game balls enter the second entrance means in one transition to the entry possible state of the first state transition means. In such a case, a plurality of second predetermined information is reserved, and the second transition mode and the third transition mode are executed multiple times regardless of the transition mode of the first state transition means in the first transition mode. There is.

On the other hand, according to this feature, even when a plurality of game balls enter the second ball entering means in one transition to the ball entry possible state of the first state transition means, With respect to one transition to the ball entry possible state of the one state transition means, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of executions of the second transition mode and the third transition mode is once.

[Features mR4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features mR1 to mR3,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode (special electric opening/closing execution mode based on V winning jackpot), the time required from the start to the end is set in advance regardless of the manner in which the game ball is launched and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing a predetermined length third transition mode (fixed length special electric opening/closing execution mode based on a V winning jackpot) which becomes a predetermined length.

According to the characteristic mR4, the third transition mode executing means determines the time required from the start to the end as the third transition mode regardless of the manner of launching the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. Since a unit for executing the predetermined length third transition mode having the predetermined length is provided, when the predetermined length third transition mode is executed, the length of the third transition mode is set to the predetermined length. No longer than. Therefore, for example, the third transition mode has not ended even at the timing when the first state transition means transitions to the entry possible state because the length of the third transition mode becomes longer than the predetermined length. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where there is no such situation. As a result, the third transition mode is not ended even at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second transition occurs even if the game ball enters the second ball entering means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that is disadvantageous to the player such that the mode is not executed and the third transition mode is not executed.

The invention of each of the above feature groups solves the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various structures, controls, performances, etc. are aimed at improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from a perspective.

In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as the detection and suppression of illegal acts by the player and illegal modifications to the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, providing more sound games, etc. It is rare.

In addition, you may employ|adopt the structure which combined suitably the 1 or several structure contained in each said characteristic group. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above feature groups can be applied or applied to each feature group.

Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launching operation by a player, and a start ball which is provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter Part, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information on the basis of a game ball entering the starting entrance part, and an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means Machine.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: picture display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, starting means for starting the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of stop operation means A gaming machine comprising stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the above or a lapse of a predetermined time, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player according to the stopped symbols.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the invention. The above embodiments, modifications, and technical features included in the feature group are appropriately applied to solve some or all of the above problems, or to achieve some or all of the above effects. , Can be replaced or combined. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

Claims (7)

First ball entering means into which game balls can enter,
First predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring first predetermined information based on that a game ball has entered the first entrance means,
First determination means for performing a first determination, which is a determination as to whether or not the first predetermined information satisfies a first condition,
A second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. First state transition means capable of transitioning to and from a state,
When it is determined that the first predetermined information satisfies the first condition, a first transition mode in which the first state transition means transits between the entry impossible state and the entry possible state First transition mode executing means for executing,
Second predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring second predetermined information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance means,
Second determination means for performing a second determination which is a determination as to whether or not the second predetermined information satisfies a second condition;
A third ball entering means into which a game ball can enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. Second state transition means capable of transitioning to and from a state,
A second transition mode for transitioning the second state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state when it is determined that the second predetermined information satisfies the second condition. Second transition mode executing means for executing;
A fourth ball entering means capable of entering the game ball entered in the third ball entering means,
Fifth entering means for allowing game balls to enter,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means, and it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the fifth ball entering means. Third state transition means capable of transitioning to and from the state,
A third transition mode for executing a third transition mode for transitioning the third state transition means between the non-enterable state and the enterable state when a game ball enters the fourth entering means. Transition mode execution means,
A payout means for paying out the game ball as a prize ball when the game ball enters the fifth ball entering means.
A gaming machine comprising:
The first transition mode execution means,
The time required from the start to the end of the first transition mode is
It is provided with a unit that can be set to a time longer than a total time of a time required from the start to the end of the second transition mode and a time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. Amusement machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The first transition mode execution means transitions the first state transition means from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state after the third transition mode is completed during execution of the first transition mode. A gaming machine comprising means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means while the second transition mode is being executed or the third transition mode is being executed, the acquisition of the second predetermined information is avoided or the second predetermined information is avoided. A game machine comprising means for avoiding execution of the determination of 2. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The third transition mode executing means,
As the third transition mode, a predetermined length third transition mode in which the time required from the start to the end is a predetermined length irrespective of the manner of launching the game ball and the behavior of the game ball after launch. A gaming machine comprising means capable of executing. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode, an interval which is a period from the transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state to the transition from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state in the first transition mode. A gaming machine comprising means capable of setting the length of the period to a time longer than the time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode, after the first state transition means finally transits from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state, until the first determination can be executed by the first determination means. A gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises means for setting a length of a waiting period, which is a period, to a time longer than a time required from the start to the end of the third transition mode. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The first transition mode execution means,
In the first transition mode, the period from the last transition of the first state transition means from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state to the execution of the next determination by the first determination means. A certain waiting period,
The first state transition means is equal to or more than the length of an interval period which is a period from the transition from the entry possible state to the entry impossible state to the transition from the entry impossible state to the entry possible state. A gaming machine comprising means for setting a length.

Images